diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 9613-8.txt | 11270 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 9613-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 220842 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 9613-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 229193 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 9613-h/9613-h.htm | 12651 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 9613.txt | 11270 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 9613.zip | bin | 0 -> 220781 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/7ybug10.txt | 11237 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/7ybug10.zip | bin | 0 -> 224486 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/8ybug10.txt | 11237 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/8ybug10.zip | bin | 0 -> 224545 bytes |
13 files changed, 57681 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/9613-8.txt b/9613-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..489afc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/9613-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11270 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Young Buglers + +Author: G.A. Henty + +Posting Date: November 12, 2011 [EBook #9613] +Release Date: January, 2006 +First Posted: October 10, 2003 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS *** + + + + +Produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis, and +PG Distributed Proofreaders + + + + + + + + + + +THE YOUNG BUGLERS + +by G.A. Henty + + + + +PREFACE + + +To my Young Readers. + +I remember that, as a boy, I regarded any attempt to mix instruction +with amusement as being as objectionable a practice as the +administration of powder in jam; but I think that this feeling arose +from the fact that in those days books contained a very small share +of amusement and a very large share of instruction. I have endeavored +to avoid this, and I hope that the accounts of battles and sieges, +illustrated as they are by maps, will be found as interesting +as the lighter parts of the story. As in my tale, "_The Young +Franc-Tireurs_," I gave the outline of the Franco-German war, so +I have now endeavored to give the salient features of the great +Peninsular struggle. The military facts, with the names of generals +and regiments, the dates and places, are all strictly accurate, and +any one who has read with care the story of "The Young Buglers" could +pass an examination as to the leading events of the Peninsular war. + +Yours truly, + +THE AUTHOR. + + + + +CONTENTS + + + CHAPTER I. A Coaching Adventure + + CHAPTER II. The Young Pickles + + CHAPTER III. Enlisted + + CHAPTER IV. A Tough Customer + + CHAPTER V. Overboard + + CHAPTER VI. Portugal + + CHAPTER VII. The Passage of the Douro--Talavera + + CHAPTER VIII. A Pause in Operations + + CHAPTER IX. "With the Guerillas" + + CHAPTER X. Madrid + + CHAPTER XI. The Fight on the Coa + + CHAPTER XII. Busaco and Torres Vedras + + CHAPTER XIII. Albuera + + CHAPTER XIV. Invalided Home + + CHAPTER XV. Ciudad Rodrigo and Badajos + + CHAPTER XVI. Salamanca + + CHAPTER XVII. Caught in a Trap + + CHAPTER XVIII. Just in Time + + CHAPTER XIX. Vittoria + + CHAPTER XX. Toulouse + + + + +THE YOUNG BUGLERS. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +A COACHING ADVENTURE. + + +Had any of the boys in the lower forms of Eton in the year 1808, been +asked who were the most popular boys of their own age, they would have +been almost sure to have answered, without the slightest hesitation, +Tom and Peter Scudamore, and yet it is probable that no two boys +were more often in disgrace. It was not that they were idle, upon the +contrary, both were fairly up in their respective forms, but they were +constantly getting into mischief of one sort or another; yet even +with the masters they were favorites, there was never anything low, +disgraceful, or ungentlemanly in their escapades, and they could be +trusted never to attempt to screen themselves from the consequences +by prevarication, much less by lying. If the masters heard that a +party of youngsters had been seen far out of bounds, they were pretty +sure that the Scudamores were among them; a farmer came in from a +distance to complain that his favorite tree had been stripped of +its apples--for in those days apples were looked upon by boys as +fair objects of sport,--if the head-master's favorite white poodle +appeared dyed a deep blue, if Mr. Jones, the most unpopular master +in the school, upon coming out of his door trod upon a quantity of +tallow smeared all over the doorstep, and was laid up for a week in +consequence, there was generally a strong suspicion that Tom and Peter +Scudamore were concerned in the matter. One of their tricks actually +came to the ears of the Provost himself, and caused quite a sensation +in the place, but in this case, fortunately for them, they escaped +undetected. + +One fine summer afternoon they were out on the water with two or three +other boys of their own age, when a barge was seen ahead at some short +distance from the shore. She was apparently floating down with the +stream, and the fact that a horse was proceeding along the towing-path +a little way ahead was not noticed, as the rope was slack and was +trailing under water. The boys, therefore, as they were rowing against +stream, steered their boat to pass inside of her. Just as they came +abreast of the horse a man on the barge suddenly shouted to the rider +of the horse to go on. He did so, the rope tightened, rose from the +water just under the bow of the boat, and in another minute the boys +were struggling in the water. All were good swimmers, and would +have cared little for the ducking had it occurred accidentally, but +the roars of laughter of the bargeman, and the chaff with which he +assailed them as they scrambled up the bank, showed clearly enough +that they had been upset maliciously. The boys were furious, and one +or two proposed that they should report the case, but Tom Scudamore +pointed out that the bargeman would of course declare that it was +a pure accident, and that the boys were themselves in fault in not +looking out whether the barge was being towed, before going inside +her, and so nothing would come of reporting. + +The boat was dragged ashore and emptied, and in a few minutes they +were rowing back towards the town. The distance was but short, and +they did not repass the barge before they reached their boat-house. +The brothers had exchanged a few words in a low voice on the way, and +instead of following the example of the others, and starting at a run +for the house where they boarded to change their clothes, they walked +down by the river and saw that the barge had moored up against the +bank, at a short distance below the bridge. They watched for a time, +and saw the bargeman fasten up the hatch of the little cabin and go +ashore. + +That night two boys lowered themselves with a rope from the window +of one of the dames-houses, and walked rapidly down to the river. +There were a few flickering oil lamps burning, and the one or two +old watchmen were soundly asleep in their boxes. They did not meet a +soul moving upon their way to the object of the expedition, the barge +that had run them down. Very quietly they slipped on board, satisfied +themselves by listening at the half-open hatch to the snoring within +that their enemy was there, then loosened the moorings so that they +could be thrown off at a moment's notice. + +"Now, Peter," the elder brother said, "open our lantern. The night is +quite still. You hold your hand behind it, so that the light will not +fall on our faces, and I will look whether he is only wrapped up in a +blanket or has a regular bed; we must not risk setting the place on +fire. Get the crackers ready." + +A dark lantern was now taken out from under Tom's jacket, and was +found to be still alight, an important matter, for striking a light +with flint and steel was in those days a long and tedious business, +and then opening it Tom threw the light into the cabin. It was a +tiny place, and upon a bench, wrapped up in a blanket, the bargeman +was lying. As the light fell on his eyes, he moved, and a moment +afterwards started up with an oath, and demanded who was there. + +No answer came in words, but half a dozen lighted crackers were thrown +into the cabin, when they began to explode with a tremendous uproar. +In an instant the hatch was shut down and fastened outside. The rope +was cast off, and in another minute she was floating down stream with +the crackers still exploding inside her, but with their noise almost +deadened by the tremendous outcry of shouts and howls, and by a +continued and furious banging at the hatch. + +"There is no fear of his being choked, Tom, I hope?" + +"No, I expect he's all right," Tom said, "it will be pretty stifling +for a bit no doubt, but there's a chimney hole and the smoke will find +its way out presently. The barge will drift down to the weir before it +brings up, there is not enough stream out for there to be any risk of +her upsetting, else we daren't have turned her adrift." + +The next day the whole town was talking of the affair, and in the +afternoon the bargeman went up to the head-master and accused one of +the boys of an attempt to murder him. + +Greatly surprised, the Provost demanded what reason the man had for +suspecting the boys, and the bargeman acknowledged that he had that +afternoon upset a boat with four or five boys in her. "They would not +bear you malice on that account," the Provost said; "they don't think +much of a swim such weather as this, unless indeed you did it on +purpose." + +The man hesitated in his answer, and the Provost continued, "You +evidently did do it on purpose, and in that case, although it was +carried too far, for I hear you had a very narrow escape of being +stifled, still you brought it upon yourself, and I hope it will be a +lesson to you not to risk the lives of Eton boys for your amusement. I +know nothing about this affair, but if you can point out the boys you +suspect I will of course inquire into it." + +The bargeman departed, grumbling that he did not know one of the young +imps from another, but if he did find them, he'd wring their necks for +them to a certainty. The Provost had some inquiries made as to the +boys who had been upset, and whether they had all been in at lock-up +time; finding that they had all answered to their names, he made no +further investigation. + +This affair had taken place in the summer before this story begins, +on the 15th of October, 1808. On that day a holiday was granted in +consequence of the head-master's birthday, and the boys set off, some +to football, some for long walks in the country. + +The Scudamores, with several of their friends, strolled down the +towing-path for some miles, and walked back by the road. As they +entered their dames-house on their return, Tom Scudamore said for the +twentieth time, "Well, I would give anything to be a soldier, instead +of having to go in and settle down as a banker--it's disgusting!" + +As they entered a boy came up. "Oh, Scudamore, Jackson's been asking +for you both. It's something particular, for he has been out three or +four times, and he wanted to send after you, but no one knew where you +had gone." + +The boys at once went into the master's study, where they remained all +the afternoon. A short time after they went in, Mr. Jackson came out +and said a word or two to one of the senior boys, and the word was +quickly passed round, that there was to be no row, for the Scudamores +had just heard of the sudden death of their father. That evening, Mr. +Jackson had beds made up for them in his study, so that they might not +have the pain of having to talk with the other boys. The housekeeper +packed up their things, and next morning early they started by the +coach for London. + +Mr. Scudamore, the father of the young Etonians, was a banker. He was +the elder of two brothers, and had inherited his father's business, +while his brother had gone into the army. The banker had married the +daughter of a landowner in the neighborhood, and had lived happily and +prosperously until her death, seven years before this story begins. +She had borne him three children, the two boys, now fifteen and +fourteen years old respectively, and a girl, Rhoda, two years younger +than Peter. The loss of his wife afflicted him greatly, and he +received another shock five years later by the death of his brother, +Colonel Scudamore, to whom he was much attached. From the time of his +wife's death he had greatly relaxed in his attention to his business, +and after his brother's death he left the management almost entirely +in the hands of his cashier, in whom he had unlimited confidence. +This confidence was wholly misplaced. For years the cashier had +been carrying on speculation upon his own account with the monies +of the bank. Gradually and without exciting the least suspicion he +had realized the various securities held by the bank, and at last +gathering all the available cash he, one Saturday afternoon, locked up +the bank and fled. + +On Monday it was found that he was missing; Mr. Scudamore went down +to the bank, and had the books taken into his parlor for examination. +Some hours afterwards a clerk went in and found his master lying back +in his chair insensible. A doctor on arriving pronounced it to be +apoplexy. He never rallied, and a few hours afterwards the news spread +through the country that Scudamore, the banker, was dead, and that the +bank had stopped payment. + +People could believe the former item of news, but were incredulous as +to the latter. Scudamore's bank was looked upon in Lincolnshire as at +least as safe as the Bank of England itself. But the sad truth was +soon clear to all, and for awhile there was great distress of mind +among the people, for many miles round, for most of them had entrusted +all their savings of years to the Scudamores' bank. When affairs were +wound up, however, it was found that things were not quite so bad as +had been feared. Mr. Scudamore had a considerable capital employed +in the bank, and the sale of his handsome house and estate realized +a large sum, so that eventually every one received back the money +they had entrusted to the bank; but the whole of the capital and the +profits of years of successful enterprise had vanished, and it was +calculated by the executors that the swindler must have appropriated +at least 80,000_l._ + +For the first month after their father's death the boys stayed with +the doctor who had long attended the family and had treated all their +ailments since they were born. In the great loss of their father the +loss of their fortune affected them but little, except that they were +sorry to be obliged to leave Eton; for the interest of the little +fortune which their mother had brought at her marriage, and which was +all that now remained to them, would not have been sufficient to pay +for their expenses there, and indeed such an education would have been +out of place for two boys who had to make their own way in life. At +the end of this month it was arranged that they were to go to their +only existing relative, an elder sister of Mr. Scudamore. The boys had +never seen her, for she had not for many years been friends with her +brother. + +The letter which she had written to the doctor, announcing her +willingness to receive them, made the boys laugh, although it did not +hold out prospects of a very pleasant future. "I am, of course," she +said, "prepared to do my duty. No one can say that I have ever failed +in my duty. My poor brother quarreled with me. It was his duty to +apologize. He did not do so. Had it been my duty to apologize I should +have done so. As I was right, and he was wrong, it was clearly not my +duty. I shall now do my duty to my niece and nephews. Yet I may be +allowed to say that I regret much that they are not all nieces. I do +not like boys. They are always noisy, and not always clean. They do +not wipe their shoes, they are always breaking things, they go about +with all sorts of rubbish and dirt in their pockets, their hair is +always rough, they are fond of worrying cats, and other cruel games. +Altogether they are objectionable. Had my brother made up his mind to +leave his children in my charge, it was clearly his duty to have had +girls instead of boys. However, it is not because other people fail +in their duty that I should fail in mine. Therefore, let them come to +me this day fortnight. By that time I shall have got some strong and +suitable furniture in the room that my nephews will occupy, and shall +have time to make other arrangements. This letter will, if all goes +well, reach you, I believe, in three days after the date of posting, +and they will take the same time coming here. Assure them that I am +prepared to do my duty, and that I hope that they will make a serious +effort at doing theirs. Ask my nephews, upon the occasion of their +first arrival, to make as little noise as they can, because my cat, +Minnie, is very shy, and if she is scared at the first meeting, +she will take a very long time to get accustomed to them. I also +particularly beg that they do not, as they come up to the house, throw +stones at any of the pigeons who may be resting upon the roof, for the +slates were all set right a few weeks ago, and I am sure I do not wish +to have the slater here again; they were hanging about for ten days +the last time they came. I do not know that I have anything else to +say." + +The boys received the reading of this singular epistle with shouts of +laughter. + +"Poor aunt," Tom said. "What does she think of us that she can suppose +that, upon our very first arrival, we should come in like wild +Indians, throwing stones at her pigeons, and frightening her Minnie +into fits. Did you ever hear such an extraordinary idea, Doctor +Jarvis?" + +"At any rate, boys," the doctor said, when the laughter had ceased, +"you may find your aunt a little peculiar, but she is evidently +determined to do her duty to you, and you must do yours to her, and +not play more pranks than you can help. As to you, Rhoda, you will +evidently be in high favor, and as you are fortunately a quiet little +lady, you will, I have no doubt, get on with her very well." + +"I hope so," Rhoda said, smiling, "you see she means to be kind, +though she does write funny letters, and, at any rate, there are +Minnie and the pigeons; it sounds nice, you know. Do you know what +aunt's place is like, Dr. Jarvis, and how to get there from here." + +"No, my dear, I never was in that part of England. It is close to +Marlborough that she lives, a very pretty country, I believe. There +is, of course, no way to go across from here. You must go up to London +by coach from here, and then to Marlborough by the western coach. I +will write to my brother James in town, where you stopped at night as +you came through, boys, and I know that he will take you all in for +the night, and see that you go off right in the morning." + +"You're very kind, indeed, Doctor Jarvis. I do not know how to thank +you for all you have done for us," Tom said earnestly, and the others +cordially echoed the sentiment. + +The day before starting the doctor had a long talk with the boys. He +pointed out to them that their future now depended upon themselves +alone. They must expect to find many unpleasantnesses in their way, +but they must take their little trials pleasantly, and make the best +of everything. "I have no fear as to Rhoda," their kind friend said. +"She has that happy, amiable, and quiet disposition that is sure to +adapt itself to all circumstances. I have no doubt she will become a +favorite with your aunt. Try to keep out of scrapes, boys. You know +you are rather fond of mischief, and your aunt will not be able to +understand it. If you get into any serious difficulty write to me, you +can rely upon always finding a friend in me." + +The journey to London was no novelty to the boys, but Rhoda enjoyed it +immensely. Her place had been taken inside, but most of the journey +she rode outside with her brothers. She was greatly amazed at the +bustle and noise of London, and was quite confused at the shouting and +crowd at the place where the coach drew up, for two or three other +coaches had just arrived from other directions. Mr. Jarvis had sent +his man-servant to meet them, their luggage was sent direct to the +booking-office from which the coach started for Marlborough, and the +servant carried a small bag containing their night things. It was +evening when they got in, and Rhoda could scarcely keep her eyes open +long enough to have tea, for the coach had been two days and nights +upon the road. The next day they stayed in town, and Mrs. Jarvis took +them out to see the sights of London--the Tower and St. Paul's, and +Westminster Abbey, and the beasts at Exeter Change. The boys had twice +before spent a whole day in London, their father having, upon two +occasions, made his visits to town to fit in with their going up to +school, but to Rhoda it was all new, and very, very wonderful. + +The next day the coach started early for Marlborough. It was to +take rather over twenty-four hours on the way. As before, Rhoda rode +outside with her brothers until the evening, but then, instead of +going inside, where there were five passengers already, she said, as +the night was so fine and warm, she would rather remain with them. +They were sitting behind the coachman, there were two male passengers +upon the same seat with them, and another in the box seat by the +coachman. The conversation turned, as in those days it was pretty sure +to turn, upon highwaymen. Several coaches had been lately stopped by +three highwaymen, who worked together, and were reported to be more +reckless than the generality of their sort. They had shot a coachman +who refused to stop, the week before on Hounslow Heath, they had +killed a guard on the great north road, and they had shot two +passengers who resisted, near Exeter. + +Tom and Peter were greatly amused by observing that the passenger who +sat next to them, and who, at the commencement of the conversation, +showed a brace of heavy pistols with which he was provided, with much +boasting as to what he should do if the coach were attacked, when he +heard of the fate of the passengers who had resisted, became very +quiet indeed, and presently took an opportunity, when he thought that +he was not observed, of slipping his pistols under the tarpaulin +behind him. + +"I hope those dreadful men won't stop our coach," Rhoda said. + +"They won't hurt you if they do, Rhoda," Tom said assuringly. "I think +it would be rather a lark. I say, Peter," he went on in a whisper, "I +think we might astonish them with those pistols that coward next to +you has hid behind him." + +"I should just think so," Peter said; "the bargee at Eton would be +nothing to it." + +The hours went slowly on. Rhoda and the boys dozed uncomfortably +against each other and the baggage behind them, until they were +suddenly roused by a shout in the road beside them: "Stand for your +lives!" + +The moon was up, and they could see that there were three horsemen. +One galloped to the horses' heads, and seized the rein of one of the +leaders, the others rode by the coach. + +The first answer to the challenge was a discharge from the blunderbuss +of the guard, which brought one of the highwaymen from his horse. + +The other, riding up to the side of the coach, fired at the guard, and +a loud cry told that the shot had taken effect. In another moment the +fellow was by the side of the coachman. + +"Hold up!" he said, "or I will blow your brains out!" + +The coachman did as he was ordered, and indeed the man at the leader's +head had almost succeeded in stopping them. The passenger next to the +boys had, at the first challenge, again seized his pistols, and the +boys thought that he was going to fire after all. + +"Lie down at our feet, Rhoda, quick!" Tom said, "and don't move +till I tell you." The fate of the guard evidently frightened away +the short-lived courage of the passenger, for, as the coachman again +pulled up, he hastily thrust the pistols in behind him. + +"Get down, every one of you," the highwayman shouted. + +"Lie still, Rhoda," Tom whispered. "Now, Peter, get in underneath the +tarpaulin." + +This was done as the passengers descended. The luggage was not so +heavily piled as usual, and the boys found plenty of room beneath the +tarpaulin. + +"Now, Peter, you take one of these pistols and give me the other. Now +peep out. The moon is hidden, which is a good thing; now, look here, +you shall shoot that fellow standing down below, who is swearing at +the ladies inside for not getting out quicker. I'll take a shot at +that fellow standing in front of the horse's heads." + +"Do you think you can hit him, Tom?" + +"I have not the least idea, but I can try; and if you hit the other +one, the chances are he'll bolt, whether I hit him or not. Open the +tarpaulin at the side so as to see well, and rest the pistol upon +something. You must take a good shot, Peter, for if you miss him we +shall be in a mess." + +"All right," Peter said, in a whisper, "I can almost touch him with +the pistol." + +In loud and brutal tones the highwayman now began to order the +frightened ladies to give up their watches and rings, enforcing his +commands with terrible curses. When suddenly a pistol flashed out +just behind him, and he fell off his horse with a ball through his +shoulder. + +Tom's shot, though equally well intended, was not so truly aimed. +The highwayman had dismounted, and was standing just in front of the +leaders, so that Tom had a fair view of him between them. The boys had +both occasionally fired their father's pistols, for, in those days, +each householder in the country always kept loaded pistols in his +room, but his skill was not sufficient to make sure of a man at that +distance. The bullet flew past at two feet to the left of his head. +But its effect was scarcely less startling than if it had actually hit +him, for, in its passage, it passed through the ear of the off leader. +The horse made a start at the sudden pain, and then dashed forward. +The rest of the team, already alarmed by the shot, followed her lead; +before the startled highwayman could get out of the way they were upon +him, in another instant he was under their heels, and the coach gave a +sudden lurch as it passed over his body. + +"Lie still, Rhoda, a little longer; it's all right, but the horses +have run away," Tom exclaimed, as he scrambled forward, and caught +hold of the reins, which the coachman had tied to the rail of the seat +as he got down. "Catch hold of the reins, Peter, and help me pull." + +Peter did so; but the united strength of the boys was wholly unequal +to arresting the headlong flight of the horses. + +Fortunately the highwaymen had chosen a low bottom between two hills, +to arrest the coach, consequently the road was up a hill of moderate +steepness. The boys hoped that the horses would stop when they got to +the top; but they went on with redoubled speed. + +"This is something like going it," Peter said. + +"Isn't it, Peter? They know their way, and we ain't lively to meet +anything in the road. They will stop at their stable. At any rate, +it's no use trying to steer them. Here, Rhoda dear, get up; are you +very much frightened?" + +Rhoda still lay quite still, and Peter, holding on with difficulty, +for the coach quite rocked with the speed at which they were going, +climbed over to her, and stooped, down. "Shall I help you up, Rhoda?" + +"No, please, I would rather stop here till it's all over." + +Fortunately the hill, up to the Tillage where they made the change, +was a steep one, and the horses broke into a trot before they reached +the top, and, in another minute drew up at the door of the inn. +The astonishment of the ostlers at seeing the horses covered with +lather, and coachbox tenanted only by two boys, behind whom a little +white face now peered out, was extreme, and they were unable to get +beyond an ejaculation of hallo! expressive of a depth of incredulous +astonishment impossible to be rendered by words. + +"Look here," Tom said, with all the composure, and much of the +impudence, which then, as now, characterized the young Etonian, "don't +be staring like a pack of stuck pigs. You had better get the fresh +horses in, and drive back to the bottom, about four miles from here. +There has been regular row with some fellows, and I expect two or +three are killed. Now, just put up the ladder; I want to get my sister +down." + +Almost mechanically the men put the ladder up to the coach, and the +boys and Rhoda got down. + +"Do you say the coach has been attacked by highwaymen in Burnet +bottom?" + +"I don't know anything about Burnet bottom," Tom said. "It was a +bottom about four miles off. There were three of them. The guard shot +one of them, and the others shot the guard. Then we were stopped by +them, and every one had to get down. Then the horses ran away, and +here we are." + +"Then there are two of those highwayman chaps with the passengers," +one of the men said. + +"You need not be afraid of them," Tom said carelessly; "one got shot, +and I don't know about the other, but the wheel of the coach went over +him, so I do not suppose he will be much trouble. Now, if I were you, +I should not stand staring any more, but should make haste and take +the coach back." + +"Hullo, look at this grey," one of the men exclaimed, as, at last +understanding what had taken place, they began to bustle about to +change horses. "He's got blood all over the side of his head. One of +those scoundrels has shot him through the ear." + +Tom burst out laughing. "I am the scoundrel!" he said. "Peter, that +explains why we went off so suddenly. I missed the fellow, and hit the +leader in the ear. However, it comes to the same thing. By the way, we +may as well take the pistols." + +So saying, he ran up the ladder and brought down the pistols. By this +time the fresh horses were in. + +"I can't make nought of it," one of the ostlers said, climbing up into +the coachman's seat. "Jump up, Bill and Harry. It's the rummiest go I +ever heard of in coaching." + +"Landlady, can you get us some tea at once, please," Tom said, going +up to the landlady, who was looking on from the door of the house +with an astonishment equal to that of the men at the whole affair; +"as quickly as you can, for my sister looks regularly done up with +fatigue, and then, please let her lie down till the coach is ready to +start again. It will be three quarters of an hour before it is back, +and then, I daresay, there will be a lot of talking before they go on. +I should think they will be wanting breakfast. At any rate, an hour's +rest will do you good, Rhoda." + +Rhoda was too worn out with the over-excitement even to answer. +Fortunately there was hot water in order to make hot grog for the +outriders of the coach, some tea was quickly made, and in ten minutes +Rhoda was fast asleep on the landlady's bed. + +Tom and Peter expressed their desire for something substantial in the +way of eating, for the morning had now fairly broken. The landlady +brought in some cold meat, upon which the boys made a vigorous attack, +and then, taking possession of two benches, they dozed off until the +coach arrived. + +It had but three horses, for one had been sent off to carry Bill, +the ostler, at full speed to the town at which they had last changed +horses, to fetch a doctor and the constable. The other two men had +remained with the guard, who was shot in the hip, and the highwayman, +whose collar-bone was broken by Peter's shot. The fellow shot by the +guard, and the other one, whom the coach wheels had passed over, were +both dead. + +"There's the coach, Tom." + +"What a nuisance, Peter, they'll all be wanting to talk now, and I am +just so comfortably off. Well, I suppose it's no use trying to get any +more sleep." + +So saying, they roused themselves, and went out to the door just as +the coach drew up. + +There was a general shout of greeting from the passengers, which was +stopped, however, by a peremptory order from the coachman. + +He was a large, stout man, with a face red from the effects of wind +and exposure. "Jack," he said, to a man who was standing near, for +the news of the attack upon the coach had quickly spread, and all +the villagers were astir to see it come in. "Jack, hold the leader's +head. Thomas, open the door, and let the insides out. Gents," he said +solemnly, when this was done, "I'm going to do what isn't a usual +thing by no means, in fact, I ain't no precedence for doing it; but +then, I do not know any precedence for this here business altogether. +I never did hear of a coachman standing up on his box to give a cheer, +no, not to King George himself; but, then, King George never polished +off two highwaymen all to himself, leastway, not as I've heard tell +of. Now, these two young gents have done this. They have saved my +coach and my passengers from getting robbed, and so I'm going to give +'em three cheers. I'll trouble you to help me up into the box seat, +gentlemen." + +Assisted by the other passengers, the driver now gravely climbed up +into the box seat, steadied himself there by placing one hand upon +the shoulder of the passenger next him, took off his low-crowned hat, +and said. "Follow me, gents, with three cheers for those young gents +standing there; better plucked ones I never came across, and I've +traveled a good many miles in my day." + +So saying, he gave three stentorian cheers, which were echoed by all +the passengers and villagers. + +Then there was a momentary silence, and Tom, who, with his brother, +had been feeling very uncomfortable, although rather inclined to +laugh, seeing that he was expected to say something, said, "Thank you +all very much; but we'd much rather you hadn't done it." + +Then there was a general laugh and movement, and a general pressing +forward of the passengers to shake the boys by the hand. The driver +was assisted down from his elevated position, and got off the coach +and came up to them. "That's the first speech I ever made, young +gentlemen, and, if I know myself, it will be the last; but, you see, +I was druv to it. You're a good sort, that's certain. What will you +drink?" + +The boys declared for beer, and drank solemnly with the driver, +imitating him in finishing their mugs at a draught, and turning them +topsy-turvy. There was now a great deal of talking, and many questions +were asked. Tom and Peter modestly said that there was really nothing +to tell. They saw that the gentleman next to them intended to use his +pistols; but, not seeing a good opportunity, put them down behind the +tarpaulin, and the thought occurred to them that, by slipping behind +it, they would get a good chance of a certain shot. Accordingly, they +had fired, and then the horse had run away; and there was an end of +it. There was nothing extraordinary in the whole matter. + +"At any rate, my boys, you have saved me from a loss of a couple +of hundred pounds which I had got hid in my boots, but which those +fellows would have been sure to have have discovered," one of the +passengers said. + +There was a general chorus of satisfaction at many watches and +trinkets saved, and then the first passenger went on,-- + +"I propose, gentlemen and ladies, that when we get to the end of our +journey we make a subscription, according to the amount we have saved, +and that we get each of these young gentlemen a brace of the very best +pistols that can be bought. If they go on as they have begun, they +will find them useful." + +There was a general exclamation of approval, and one of the ladies, +who had been an inside passenger, said, "And I think we ought to give +a handsome ring to their sister as a memorial through life. Of course, +she had not so much to do as her brothers, but she had the courage to +keep still, and she had to run the risk, both of being shot, and of +being upset by the coach just as they did." + +This also was unanimously approved, and, after doing full justice to +the breakfast set before them, the party again took their places. +Rhoda being carried down asleep, by the landlady, and placed in the +coach, one of the inside passengers getting out to make room for her, +and she was laid, curled up, on the seat, with her head in a lady's +lap, and slept quietly, until, to her astonishment, she was woke up, +and told that she was in Marlborough. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +TWO YOUNG PICKLES. + + +An old-fashioned open carriage, drawn by a stiff, old-fashioned horse, +and driven by a stiff, old-fashioned man, was in waiting at the inn at +which the coach drew up at Marlborough. Into this the young Scudamores +were soon transferred, and, after a hearty good-bye from their +fellow-passengers, and an impressive one from the coachman, they +started upon the concluding part of their journey. + +"How far is it to aunt's?" Tom asked. + +"About six miles, young sir," the driver said gravely. + +The young Scudamores had great difficulty to restrain their laughter +at Tom's new title; in fact, Peter nearly choked himself in his +desperate efforts to do so, and no further questions were asked for +some time. + +The ride was a pleasant one, and Rhoda, who had never been out of +Lincolnshire before, was delighted with the beautiful country through +which they were passing. The journey, long as it was--for the road +was a very bad one, and the horse had no idea of going beyond a slow +trot--passed quickly to them all; but they were glad when the driver +pointed to a quaint old-fashioned house standing back from the road, +and said that they were home. + +"There are the pigeons, Rhoda, and there is Minnie asleep on that open +window-sill." + +Very many times had the young Scudamores talked about their aunt, and +had pictured to themselves what she would be like; and their ideas of +her so nearly approached the truth, that she almost seemed to be an +old acquaintance as she came to the door as the carriage stopped. She +was a tall, upright, elderly lady, with a kind, but very decided face, +and a certain prim look about her manner and dress. + +"Well, niece Rhoda and nephews, I am glad to see that you have arrived +safely," she said in a clear, distinct voice. "Welcome to the Yews. I +hope that we shall get on very well together. Joseph, I hope that you +have not driven Daisy too fast, and that you did not allow my nephews +to use the whip. You know I gave you very distinct instructions not to +let them do so." + +"No, my lady, they never so much as asked." + +"That is right," Miss Scudamore said, turning round and shaking hands +with the boys, who had now got out of the carriage and had helped +Rhoda down. "I am glad to hear what Joseph tells me, for I know that +boys are generally fond of furious driving and like lashing horses +until they put them into a gallop. And now, how are you, niece Rhoda! +Give me a kiss. That is right. You look pale and tired, child; you +must have something to eat, and then go to bed. Girls can't stand +racketing about as boys can. You look quiet and nice, child, and I +have no doubt we shall suit very well. It is very creditable to you +that you have not been spoilt by your brothers. Boys generally make +their sisters almost as noisy and rude as they are themselves." + +"I don't think we are noisy and rude, aunt," Tom said, with a smile. + +"Oh, you don't, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said, looking at him sharply, +and then shaking her head decidedly two or three times. "If your looks +do not belie you both sadly, you are about as hair-brained a couple of +lads as my worst enemies could wish to see sent to plague me; but," +she added to herself, as she turned to lead the way indoors, "I must +do my duty, and must make allowances; boys will be boys, boys will be +boys, so they say at least, though why they should be is more than I +can make out. Now, Rhoda, I will take you up with me. Your bedroom +leads out of mine, dear. Hester," she said to a prim-looking servant +who had come out after her to the door; "will you show my nephews to +their room? Dinner will be ready at two; it is just a quarter to the +hour now. I see that you have got watches, so that you will be able +to be punctual; and I must request you, when you have done washing, +not to throw the water out of the window, because my flower-beds are +underneath." + +Tom had great difficulty in keeping his countenance, while he assured +his aunt that his brother and himself never did empty their basins out +of the window. + +"That is right," Miss Scudamore said doubtfully; "but I have heard +that boys do such things." + +Once fairly in their room and the door shut, the boys had a great +laugh over their aunt's ideas as to boys. + +"There is one comfort," Tom said at last; "whatever we do we shall +never surprise her." + +"I think we shall get on very well with her," Peter said. "She means +to be kind, I am sure. This is a jolly room, Tom." + +It was a low wainscoted room, with a very wide window divided into +three by mullions, and fitted with latticed panes. They were open, and +a delicious scent of flowers came in from the garden. The furniture +was all new and very strong, of dark stained wood, which harmonized +well with the paneling. There were no window curtains, but a valance +of white dimity hung above the window. There was a piece of carpet +between the beds; the rest of the floor was bare, but the boards were +of old oak, and looked as well without it. Several rows of pegs had +been put upon the walls, and there was a small chest of drawers by +each bed. + +"This is very jolly, Peter; but it is a pity that there are bars to +the window." + +When they came down to dinner they found that Rhoda, quite done up +with her journey, had gone to bed. + +"You like your room, I hope, nephews," Miss Scudamore said, after they +had taken their seats. + +"Yes, aunt, very much. There is only one drawback to it." + +"What is that, Thomas?" + +"Oh, please, aunt, don't call me Thomas; it is a dreadful name; it is +almost as bad as Tommy. Please call me Tom. I am always called Tom by +every one." + +"I am not fond of these nicknames," Miss Scudamore said. "There is a +flippancy about them of which I do not approve." + +"Yes, aunt, in nicknames; but Tom is not a nickname; it is only a +short way of speaking. We never hear of a man being called Thomas, +unless he is a footman or an archbishop, or something of that sort." + +"What do you mean by archbishop?" Miss Scudamore asked severely. + +"Well, aunt, I was going to say footman, and then I thought of Thomas +à Becket; and there was Thomas the Rhymer. I have heard of him, but +I never read any of his rhymes. I wonder why they did not call them +poems. But I expect even Thomas à Becket was called Tom in his own +family." + +Miss Scudamore looked sharply at Tom, but he had a perfect command of +his face, and could talk the greatest nonsense with the most serious +face. He went on unmoved with her scrutiny. + +"I have often wondered why I was not christened Tom, It would have +been much more sensible. For instance, Rhoda is christened Rhoda and +not Rhododendron." + +"Rhododendron?" Miss Scudamore said, mystified. + +"Yes, aunt, it is an American plant, I believe. We had one in the +green-house at home; it was sent poor papa by some friend who went out +there, I don't see anything else Rhoda could come from." + +"You are speaking very ignorantly, nephew," Miss Scudamore said +severely. "I don't know anything about the plant you speak of, but the +name of Rhoda existed before America was ever heard of. It is a very +old name." + +"I expect," Peter said, "it must have meant originally a woman of +Rhodes. You see Crusaders and Templars were always having to do with +Rhodes, and they no doubt brought the name home, and so it got settled +here." + +"The name is mentioned in Scripture," Miss Scudamore said severely. + +"Yes, aunt, and that makes it still more likely that it meant a woman +of Rhodes; you see Rhodes was a great place then." + +Miss Scudamore was silent for some time. Then she went back to the +subject with which the conversation had commenced. "What is the +objection you spoke of to the room?" + +"Oh! it is the bars to the window, aunt." + +"I have just had them put up," Miss Scudamore said calmly. + +"Just put up, aunt!" Tom repeated in surprise, "what for?" + +"To prevent you getting out at night." + +The boys could not help laughing this time, and then Peter said, "But +why should we want to get out at night, aunt?" + +"Why should boys always want to do the things they ought not?" Miss +Scudamore said. "I've heard of boys being let down by ropes to go and +buy things. I dare say you have both done it yourselves." + +"Well, aunt," Tom said, "perhaps we have; but then, you see, that was +at school." + +"I do not see any difference, nephew. If you will get out at one +window, you will get out at another. There is mischief to be done in +the country as well as in towns; and so long as there is mischief to +do, so long will boys go out of their way to do it. And now I will +tell you the rules of this house, to which you will be expected to +adhere. It is well to understand things at once, as it prevents +mistakes. We breakfast at eight, dine at two, have tea at half-past +six, and you will go to bed at half-past eight. These hours will be +strictly observed. I shall expect your hands and faces to be washed, +and your hairs brushed previous to each meal. When you come indoors +you will always take off your boots and put on your shoes in the +little room behind this. And now, if you have done dinner I think +that you had better go and lie down on your bed, and get two or three +hours' sleep. Take your boots off before you get into the bed." + +"She means well, Peter," the elder brother said, as they went +upstairs, "but I am afraid she will fidget our lives out." + +For two or three days the boys wandered about enjoying the beautiful +walks, and surprising and pleasing their aunt by the punctuality +with which they were in to their meals. Then she told them that she +had arranged for them to go to a tutor, who lived at Warley, a large +village a mile distant, and who had some eight or ten pupils. The very +first day's experience at the school disgusted them. The boys were +of an entirely different class to those with whom they had hitherto +associated, and the master was violent and passionate. + +"How do you like Mr. Jones, nephews?" Miss Scudamore asked upon their +return after their first day at school. + +"We do not like him at all, aunt. In the first place, he is a good +deal too handy with that cane of his." + +"'He who spares the rod--'" + +"Yes, we know that, aunt, 'spoils the child,'" broke in Tom, "but we +would not mind so much if the fellow were a gentleman." + +"I don't know what you may call a gentleman," Miss Scudamore said +severely. "He stands very high here a schoolmaster, while he visits +the vicar, and is well looked up to everywhere." + +"He's not a gentleman for all that," Tom muttered; "he wouldn't be if +he visited the Queen. One does not mind being trashed by a gentleman; +one is used to that at Eton; but to be knocked about by a fellow like +that! Well, we shall see." + +For a week the boys put up with the cruelty of their tutor, who at +once took an immense dislike to them on finding that they did not, +like the other boys, cringe before him, and that no trashing could +extract a cry from them. + +It must not be supposed that they did not meditate vengeance, but they +could hit upon no plan which could be carried out without causing +suspicion that it was the act of one of the boys; and in that case +they knew that he would question them all round, and they would not +tell a lie to screen themselves. + +Twice they appealed to their aunt, but she would not listen to them, +saying that the other boys did not complain, and that if their master +was more severe with them than with others, it could only be because +they behaved worse. It was too evident that they were boys of very +violent dispositions, and although she was sorry that their master +found it necessary to punish them, it was clearly her duty not to +interfere. + +The remark about violence arose from Miss Scudamore having read in the +little paper which was published once a week at Marlborough an account +of the incident of the stopping of the coach, about which the boys +had agreed to say nothing to her. The paper had described the conduct +of her nephews in the highest terms, but Miss Scudamore was terribly +shocked. "The idea", she said, "that she should have to associate with +boys who had take a fellow-creature's life was terrible to her, and +their conduct in resisting, when grown-up men had given up the idea +as hopeless, showed a violent spirit, which, in boys so young, was +shocking." + +A few days after this, as the boys were coming from school, they +passed the carrier's cart, coming in from Marlborough. + +"Be you the young gentlemen at Miss Scudamore's?" the man asked. +"Because, if you be, I have got a parcel for you." + +Tom answered him that they were, and he then handed them over a heavy +square parcel. Opening it after the cart had gone on, the boys, to +their great delight, found that it consisted of two cases, each +containing a brace of very handsome pistols. + +"This is luck, Peter," Tom said. "If the parcel had been sent to the +house, aunt would never have let us have them; now we can take them in +quietly, get some powder and balls, and practice shooting every day in +some quiet place. That will be capital. Do you know I have thought of +a plan which will enrage old Jones horribly, and he will never suspect +us?" + +"No; have you, Tom? What is that?" + +"Look here, Peter. I can carry you easily standing on my shoulders. If +you get a very long cloak, so as to fall well down on me, no one would +suspect in the dark that there were two of us; we should look like +one tremendously tall man. Well, you know, he goes every evening to +Dunstable's to sing with Miss Dunstable. They say he's making love to +her. We can waylay him in the narrow lane, and make him give up that +new watch he has just bought, that he's so proud of. I heard him say +he had given thirty guineas for it. Of course, we don't want to keep +it, but we would smash it up between a couple of big stones, and send +him all the pieces." + +"Capital, Tom; but where should we get the cloak?" + +"There is that long wadded silk cloak of aunt's that she uses when she +goes out driving. It always hangs up in the closet in the hall." + +"But how are we to get in again, Tom? I expect that he does not come +back till half-past nine or ten. We can slip out easily enough after +we are supposed to have gone to bed; but how are we to get back?" + +"The only plan, Peter, is to get in through Rhoda's window. She is +very angry at that brute Jones treating us so badly, and if I take her +into the secret I feel sure she will agree." + +Rhoda was appealed to, and although at first she said it was quite, +quite impossible, she finally agreed, although with much fear and +trembling, to assist them. First, the boys were to buy some rope and +make a rope ladder, which Rhoda was to take up to her room; she was to +open the window wide when she went to bed, but to pull the blind down +as usual, so that if her aunt came in she would not notice it. Then, +when she heard her aunt come tip to bed at half-past nine, she was to +get up very quietly, drop the rope ladder out, fastening it as they +instructed her, and then get into bed again, and go to sleep if she +could, as the boys would not try to come in until after Miss Scudamore +was asleep. + +Two nights after this the schoolmaster was returning from his usual +visit to Mr. Dunstable, when, to his horror, he saw a gigantic figure +advance from under a tree which overshadowed the lawn, and heard a +deep voice say, "Your money or your life!" + +Like all bullies, the schoolmaster was a coward, and no sooner did he +see this terrible figure, and his ears caught the ominous click of +a pistol which accompanied the words, than his teeth chattered, his +whole figure trembled with fear, and he fell on his knees, crying, +"Spare my life!--take all that I have, but spare my life!" + +"You miserable coward!" the giant said, "I do not want to take your +wretched life. What money have you?" + +"I have only two shillings," he exclaimed; "I swear to you that I have +only two shillings." + +"What is the use of two shillings to me?--give them to the first +beggar you see." + +"Yes, sir," the schoolmaster said; "I swear to you that I will." + +"Give me your watch." + +The schoolmaster took out his watch, and, getting upon his feet, +handed it to the giant. + +"There now, you can go; but see," he added, as the schoolmaster turned +with great alacrity to leave--"look here." + +"Yes, sir." + +"Look here, and mark my words well. Don't you go to that house where +you have been to-night, or it will be the worse for you. You are a +wretch, and I won't see that poor little girl marry you and be made +miserable. Swear to me you will give her up." + +The schoolmaster hesitated, but there was again the ominous click of +the pistol. + +"Yes, yes, I swear it," he said hastily. "I will give her up +altogether." + +"You had better keep your oath," the giant said, "for if you break it, +if I hear you go there any more--I shall be sure to hear of it--I will +put an ounce of lead in you, if I have to do it in the middle of your +school. Do you hear me? Now you may go." + +Only too glad to escape, the schoolmaster walked quickly off, and in a +moment his steps could be heard as he ran at the top of his speed down +the lane. + +In a moment the giant appeared to break in two, and two small figures +stood where the large one had been. + +"Capital, Peter. Now, I'll take the cloak, and you keep the pistol, +and now for a run home--not that I'm afraid of that coward getting +up a pursuit. He'll be only too glad to get his head under the +bedclothes." + +Rhoda had carried out her brother's instructions with great exactness, +and was in a great fright when her aunt came in to see her in bed, +lest she should notice that the window was open. However, the night +was a quiet one, and the curtains fell partly across the blind, so +that Miss Scudamore suspected nothing, but Rhoda felt great relief +when she said good-night, took the candle, and left the room. She had +had hard work to keep herself awake until she heard her aunt come up +to bed; and then, finding that she did not again come into the room, +she got up, fastened one end of the rope ladder to a thick stick long +enough to cross two of the mullions, let the other end down very +quietly, and then slipped into bed again. She did not awake until +Hester knocked at her door and told her it was time to get up. She +awoke with a great start, and in a, fright at once ran to the window. +Everything looked as usual. The rope ladder was gone, the window was +closed, and Rhoda knew that her brothers must have come in safely. + +Great was the excitement in Warley next day, when it became known that +the schoolmaster had been robbed of his watch by a giant fully eight +feet high. This height of the robber was, indeed, received with much +doubt, as people thought that he might have been a tall man, but +that the eight feet must have been exaggerated by the fear of the +schoolmaster. + +Two or three days afterwards the surprise rose even higher, when a +party of friends who had assembled at Mr. Jones' to condole with him +upon his misfortune, were startled by the smashing of one of the +windows by a small packet, which fell upon the floor in their midst. + +There was a rush to the door, but the night was a dark one, and no one +was to be seen; then they returned to the sitting-room, and the little +packet was opened, and found to contain some watchworks bent and +broken, some pulverized glass, and a battered piece of metal, which, +after some trouble, the schoolmaster recognized as the case of his +watch. The head-constable was sent for, and after examining the relics +of the case, he came to the same conclusion at which the rest had +already arrived, namely, that the watch could not have been stolen by +an ordinary footpad, but by some personal enemy of the schoolmaster's, +whose object was not plunder, but annoyance and injury. + +To the population of Warley this solution was a very agreeable one. +The fact of a gigantic footpad being in the neighborhood was alarming +for all, and nervous people were already having great bolts and bars +placed upon their shutters and doors. The discovery, therefore, that +the object of this giant was not plunder, but only to gratify a spite +against the master, was a relief to the whole place. Every one was, of +course, anxious to know who this secret foe could be, and what crime +Mr. Jones could have committed to bring such a tremendous enemy upon +him. The boys at the school assumed a fresh importance in the eyes of +the whole place, and being encouraged now to tell all they knew of +him, they gave such a picture of the life that they had led at school, +that a general feeling of disgust was aroused against him. + +The parents of one or two of the boys gave notice to take their sons +away, but the rest of the boys were boarders, and were no better off +than before. + +Miss Scudamore was unshaken in her faith in Mr. Jones and considered +the rumor current about him to be due simply to the vindictive nature +of boys. + +"Well, aunt," Tom said one day, after a lecture of this sort from her, +"I know you mean to be kind to us, but Peter and I have stood it on +that account, but we can't stand it much longer, and we shall run away +before long." + +"And where would you run to, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said calmly. + +"That is our affair," Tom said quite as coolly, "only I don't like to +do it without giving you warning. You mean kindly, I know, aunt, but +the way you are always going on at us from morning to night whenever +we are at home, and the way in which you allow us to be treated by +that tyrannical brute, is too much altogether." + +Miss Scudamore looked steadily at them. + +"I am doing, nephew, what I consider to be for your good. You are +willful, and violent, and headstrong. It is my duty to cure you, and +although it is all very painful to me, at my time of life, to have +such a charge thrust upon me, still, whatever it costs, it must be +done." + +For the next month Mr. Jones' life was rendered a burden to him. The +chimney-pots were shut up with sods placed on them, and the fireplaces +poured volumes of smoke into the rooms and nearly choked him. Night +after night the windows of his bedroom were smashed; cats were let +down the chimney; his water-butts were found filled with mud, and the +cord of the bucket of his well was cut time after time; the flowers +in his garden were dug up and put in topsy-turvy. He himself could not +stir out after dark without being tripped up by strings fastened a +few inches above the path; and once, coming out of his door, a string +fastened from scraper to scraper brought him down the steps with such +violence that the bridge of his nose, which came on the edge of a +step, was broken, and he was confined to his bed for three or four +days. In vain he tried every means to discover and punish the authors +of these provocations. A savage dog, the terror of the neighborhood, +was borrowed and chained up in the garden, but was found poisoned next +morning. + +Watchmen were hired, but refused to stay for more than one night, for +they were so harassed and wearied out that they came to the conclusion +that they were haunted. If they were on one side of the house a voice +would be heard on the other. After the first few attempts, they no +longer dared venture to run, for between each round strings were tied +in every direction, and they had several heavy falls, while as they +were carefully picking their way with their lanterns, stones struck +them from all quarters. If one ventured for a moment from the other's +side his lantern was knocked out, and his feet were struck from under +him with a sharp and unexpected blow from a heavy cudgel; and they +were once appalled by seeing a gigantic figure stalk across the grass, +and vanish in a little bush. + +At the commencement of these trials the schoolmaster had questioned +the boys, one by one, if they had any hand in the proceeding. + +All denied it. When it came to Tom Scudamore's turn, he said. "You +never do believe me, Mr. Jones, so it is of no use my saying that I +didn't do it; but if you ask Miss Scudamore, she will bear witness +that we were in bed hours before, and that there are bars on our +windows through which a cat could hardly get." + +The boys had never used Rhoda's room after the first night's +expedition, making their escape now by waiting until the house was +quiet, and then slipping along the passage to the spare room, and +thence by the window, returning in the same way. + +Under this continued worry, annoyance, and alarm, the schoolmaster +grew thin and worn, his school fell off more and more; for many of +the boys, whose rest was disturbed by all this racket, encouraged by +the example of the boys of the place who had already been taken away, +wrote privately to their friends. + +The result was that the parents of two or three more wrote to say +that their boys would not return after the holidays, and no one was +surprised when it became known that Mr. Jones was about to close his +school and leave the neighborhood. + +The excitement of the pranks that they had been playing had enabled +the boys to support the almost perpetual scoldings and complaints of +their aunt; but school once over, and their enemy driven from the +place, they made up their minds that they could no longer stand it. + +One day, therefore, when Rhoda had, as an extraordinary concession, +been allowed to go for a walk with them, they told her that they +intended to run away. + +Poor Rhoda was greatly distressed. + +"You see, Rhoda dear," Tom said, "although we don't like leaving you, +you will really be happier when we are gone. It is a perpetual worry +to you to hear aunt going on, on, on--nagging, nagging, nagging for +ever and ever at us. She is fond of you and kind to you, and you +would get on quietly enough without us, while now she is in a fidget +whenever you are with us, and is constantly at you not to learn +mischief and bad ways from us. Besides you are always in a fright now, +lest we should get into some awful scrape, as I expect we should if +we stopped here. If it weren't for you, we should not let her off as +easily as we do. No, no, Rhoda, it is better for us all that we should +go." + +Poor Rhoda, though she cried bitterly at the thought of losing her +brothers, yet could not but allow to herself that in many respects she +should be more happy when she was freed from anxiety, lest they should +get into some scrape, and when her aunt would not be kept in a state +of continued irritation and scolding. She felt too that, although she +herself could get on well enough in her changed life, that it was very +hard indeed for the boys, accustomed as they had been to the jolly and +independent life of a public school, and to be their own master during +the holidays, with their ponies, amusements, and their freedom to come +and go when they chose. Rhoda was a thoughtful child, and felt that +nothing that they could go through could do them more harm or make +them more unhappy than they now were. She had thought it all over day +after day, for she was sure that the boys would, sooner or later come +to it, and she had convinced herself that it was better for them. +Still it was with a very sad heart that she found that the time had +come. + +For some time she cried in silence, and then, drying her eyes, she +said, trying to speak bravely, though her lips quivered. + +"I shall miss you dreadfully, boys; but I will not say a word to keep +you here, for I am sure it is very, very bad for you. What do you mean +to do? Do you mean to go to sea?" + +"No, Rhoda; you see uncle was in the army, and used to talk to us +about that; and, as we have never seen the sea, we don't care for it +as some boys do. No, we shall try and go as soldiers." + +"But my dear Tom, they will never take you as soldiers; you are too +little." + +"Yes, we are not old enough to enlist at present," Tom said; "but we +might go in as buglers. We have thought it all over, and have been +paying old Wetherley, who was once in the band of a regiment, to teach +us the bugle, and he says we can sound all the calls now as well as +any bugler going. We did not like to tell you till we had made up our +minds to go; but we have gone regularly to him every day since the +first week we came here." + +"Then you won't have to fight, Tom," Rhoda said joyfully. + +"No," Tom said, in a rather dejected tone; "I am afraid they won't let +us fight; still we shall see fighting, which is the next best thing." + +"I heard in Warley yesterday that there will be a movement of the +army in Spain soon, and that some more troops will be sent out, and +we shall try and get into a regiment that is going." + +They talked very long and earnestly on their plans, and were so +engrossed that they quite forgot how time went, and got in late for +tea, and were terribly scolded in consequence. For once none of +them cared for the storm; the boys exulted over the thought that it +would be the last scolding they would have to suffer; and Rhoda had +difficulty in gasping down her tears at the thought that it was the +last meal that she would take with them, for they had settled that +they would start that very night. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +ENLISTED. + + +It was a bright moonlight night when the boys, after a sad farewell +from Rhoda, let themselves down from the window, and started upon +their journey. Each carried a bundle on a stick; each bundle contained +a suit of clothes, a few shirts and stockings, a pair of shoes, and a +pistol. The other pistols were carried loaded inside their jackets, +for there was no saying whom they might meet upon the road. They had +put on the oldest suit of clothes they possessed, so as to attract as +little attention as possible by the way. After they had once recovered +from their parting with Rhoda their spirits rose, and they tramped +along lightly and cheerfully. It was eleven o'clock when they started, +and through the night they did not meet a single person. Towards +morning they got under a haystack near the road, and slept for some +hours; then they walked steadily on until they had done twenty miles +since their start. They went into a small inn, and had some breakfast, +and then purchasing some bread and cold ham, went on through the town, +and leaving the London road, followed that leading to Portsmouth, and +after a mile or two again took up their quarters until evening, in a +haystack. + +It is not necessary to give the details of the journey to Portsmouth. +After the first two days' tramp, having no longer any fear of the +pursuit, which, no doubt, had been made for them when first missed, +they walked by day, and slept at night in sheds, or under haystacks, +as they were afraid of being questioned and perhaps stopped at inns. +They walked only short distances now, for the first night's long +journey had galled their feet, and, as Tom said, they were not pressed +for time, and did not want to arrive at Portsmouth like two limping +tramps. Walking, therefore, only twelve miles a day after the first +two days, they arrived at Portsmouth fresh and in high spirits. +They had met with no adventures upon the road, except that upon one +occasion two tramps had attempted to seize their bundles, but the +production of the pistols, and the evident determination of the boys +to use them if necessary, made the men abandon their intention and +make off, with much bad language and many threats, at which the boys +laughed disdainfully. + +Arrived at Portsmouth, their first care was to find a quiet little +inn, where they could put up. This they had little difficulty in +doing, for Portsmouth abounded with public-houses, and people were so +much accustomed to young fellows tramping in with their bundles, to +join their ships, that their appearance excited no curiosity whatever. +Tom looked older than he really was, although not tall for his age, +while Peter, if anything, overtopped his brother, but was slighter, +and looked fully two years younger. Refreshed by a long night's sleep +between sheets, they started out after breakfast to see the town, and +were greatly impressed and delighted by the bustle of the streets, +full of soldiers and sailors, and still more by the fortifications and +the numerous ships of war lying in the harbor, or out at Spithead. +A large fleet of merchantmen was lying off at anchor, waiting for a +convoy, and a perfect fleet of little wherries was plying backwards +and forwards between the vessels and the shore. + +"It makes one almost wish to be a sailor," Peter said, as they sat +upon the Southsea beach, and looked out at the animated ocean. + +"It does, Peter; and if it had been ten years back, instead of at +present, I should have been ready enough to change our plans. But what +is the use of going to sea now? The French and Spanish navies skulk in +harbor, and the first time our fellows get them out they will he sure +to smash them altogether, and then there is an end to all fighting. +No, Peter, it looks tempting, I grant, but we shall see ten times as +much with the army. We must go and settle the thing to-morrow. There +is no time to be lost if the expedition starts in a fortnight or three +weeks." + +Returning into the town, the boys were greatly amused at seeing a +sailor's wedding. Four carriages and pair drove along; inside were +women, while four sailors sat on each roof, waving their hats to the +passers-by, and refreshing themselves by repeated pulls at some black +bottles, with which they were well supplied. Making inquiries, the +boys found that the men belonged to a fine frigate which had come in a +day or two before, with several prizes. + +The next morning they went down to the barracks. Several +non-commissioned officers, with bunches of gay ribbons in their caps, +were standing about. Outside the gates were some boards, with notices, +"Active young fellows required. Good pay, plenty of prize-money, and +chances, of promotion!" + +The boys read several of these notices, which differed only from each +other in the name of the regiment; and then Tom gave an exclamation of +satisfaction as he glanced at a note at the foot of one of them, "Two +or three active lads wanted as buglers." + +"There we are, Peter; and, oh, what luck! it is Uncle Peter's +regiment! Look here, Peter," he said, after a pause, "we won't say +anything about being his nephews, unless there is no other way of +getting taken; for if we do it won't be nice. We shall be taken notice +of, and not treated like other fellows, and that will cause all sorts +of ill-feeling and jealousy, and rows. It will be quite time to say +who we are when we have done something to show that we shan't do +discredit to him. You see it isn't much in our favor that we are here +as two runaway boys. If we were older we could go as volunteers, but +of course we are too young for that." + +It should be mentioned that in those days it was by no means unusual +for young men who had not sufficient interest to get commissions to +obtain permission to accompany a regiment as volunteers. They paid +their own expenses, and lived with the officers, but did duty as +private soldiers. If they distinguished themselves, they obtained +commissions to fill up vacancies caused in action. + +"There is our sergeant, Tom; let's get it over at once." + +"If you please," Tom said, as they went up to the sergeant, "are you +the recruiting sergeant of the Norfolk Rangers?" + +"By Jove, Summers, you are in luck to-day," laughed one of the other +sergeants; "here are two valuable recruits for the Rangers. The +Mounseers will have no chance with the regiment with such giants as +those in it. Come, my fine fellows, let me persuade you to join the +15th. Such little bantams as you are would be thrown away upon the +Rangers." + +There was a shout of laughter from the other non-commissioned +officers. + +Tom was too much accustomed to chaffing bargees at Eton to be put out +of countenance. + +"We may be bantams," he said, "but I have seen a bantam lick a big +dunghill cock many a time. Fine feathers don't always make fine birds, +my man." + +"Well answered, young one," the sergeant of the Rangers said, while +there was a general laugh among the others, for the sergeant of the +15th was not a favorite. + +"You think yourself sharp, youngster," he said angrily. "You want a +licking, you do; and if you were in the 15th, you'd get it pretty +quickly." + +"Oh! I beg your pardon," Tom said gravely; "I did not know that the +15th were famous for thrashing boys. Thank you; when I enlist it shall +be in a regiment where men hit fellows their own size." + +There was a shout of laughter, and the sergeant, enraged, stepped +forward, and gave Tom a swinging box on the ear. + +There was a cry of "shame" from the others; but before any of them +could interfere, Tom suddenly stooped, caught the sergeant by the +bottom of the trousers, and in an instant he fell on his back with a +crash. + +For a moment he was slightly stunned, and then, regaining his feet, he +was about to rush at Tom, when the others threw themselves in between +them, and said he should not touch the boy. He struck him first, and +the boy had only given him what served him right. + +The sergeant was furious, and an angry quarrel was going on, when an +officer of the Rangers came suddenly out of barrack. + +"Hullo, Summers, what is all this about? I am surprised at you. A lot +of non-commissioned officers, just in front of the barrack gates, +quarreling like drunken sailors in a pothouse. What does it all mean?" + +"The fact is this, Captain Manley," the sergeant said, saluting, +"these two lads came up to speak to me, when Sergeant Billow chaffed +them. The lad gave the sergeant as good as he got, and the sergeant +lost his temper, and hit him a box on the ear, and in a moment the +young one tripped him up, and pretty nigh stunned him; when he got up +he was going at the boy, and, of course, we wouldn't have it." + +"Quite right," Captain Manley said. "Sergeant Billow, I shall forward +a report to your regiment. Chaffing people in the street, and then +losing your temper, striking a boy, and causing a disturbance. Now, +sergeant," he went on, as the others moved away, "do you know those +boys?" + +"No, sir; they are strangers to me." + +"Do you want to see the sergeant privately, lads, or on something +connected with the regiment?" + +"I see that you have vacancies for buglers, sir," Tom said, "and my +brother and myself want to enlist if you will take us." + +Captain Manley smiled. "You young scamps, you have got 'runaway from +home' as plainly on your faces as if it was printed there. If we +were to enlist you, we should be having your friends here after you +to-morrow, and get into a scrape for taking you." + +"We have no friends who will interfere with us, sir, I can give you my +word of honor as a gentleman." Captain Manley laughed. "I mean," Tom +said confused, "my word of honor, as--as an intending bugler." + +"Indeed we have no one to interfere with us in any way, sir," Peter +put in earnestly. "We wouldn't tell a lie even to enlist in the +Rangers." + +Captain Manley was struck by the earnestness of the boys' faces, and +after a pause he said to the sergeant,-- + +"That will do, Summers; I will take these lads up to my quarters and +speak to them." + +Then, motioning to the boys to follow him, he re-entered the barracks, +and led the way up to his quarters. + +"Sit down," he said, when they had entered his room. "Now, boys, this +is a foolish freak upon your part, which you will regret some day. Of +course you have run away from school." + +"No, sir, we have run away from home," Tom said. + +"So much the worse," Captain Manley said gravely. "Tell me frankly, +why did you do so? No unkindness at home can excuse boys from running +away from their parents." + +"We have none, sir," Tom said. "We have lost them both--our mother +many years ago, our father six months. Our only living relation, +except a younger sister, is an aunt, who considers us as nuisances, +and who, although meaning to do her duty, simply drives us out of our +minds." + +Captain Manley could not resist a smile. "Do you not go to school?" + +"We did go to a school near, but unfortunately it is broken up." + +Captain Manley caught a little look of amusement between the boys. "I +should not be surprised if you had something to do with its breaking +up," he said with a laugh. "But to return to your coming here. There +is certainly less reason against your joining than I thought at first, +but you are too young." + +"We are both strong, and are good walkers," Tom said. + +"But you cannot be much over fifteen," Captain Manley said, "and your +brother is younger." + +"We are accustomed to strong exercise, sir, and can thrash most +fellows of our own size." + +"Very likely," Captain Manley said, "but we can't take that into +consideration. You are certainly young for buglers for service work; +however, I will go across with you to the orderly-room, and hear what +the colonel says." + +Crossing the barrack-yard, they found the colonel was in and +disengaged. + +"Colonel Tritton," Captain Manley said, "these lads want to enlist as +buglers." + +The colonel looked up and smiled. "They look regular young pickles," +he said. "I suppose they have run away from school." + +"Not from school, colonel. They have lost both parents, and live with +an aunt, with whom they don't get on well. There does not seem to be +much chance of their being claimed." + +"You are full young," the colonel said, "and I think you will be +sorry, boys, for the step you want to take." + +"I don't think so, sir," Tom said. + +"Of course, you don't at present," the colonel said. "However, that is +your business. Mind, you will have a rough time of it; you will have +to fight your way, you know." + +"I'll back them to hold their own," Captain Manley said, laughing. +"When I went out at the barrack-gate just now there was a row among a +lot of recruiting sergeants, and when I went up to put a stop to it, I +found that a fellow of the 15th had chaffed these boys when they went +up to speak to Summers, and that they had got the best of it in that +line; and the fellow having lost his temper and struck one of them, he +found himself on his back on the pavement. The boy had tripped him up +in an instant." + +The colonel laughed, and then said suddenly and sharply to Peter, +"Where did you learn that trick, youngster?" + +"At Eton," Peter answered promptly, and then colored up hotly at his +brother's reproachful glance. + +"Oh, ho! At Eton, young gentlemen, eh!" the colonel said. "That +alters the matter. If you were at Eton your family must be people of +property, and I can't let you do such a foolish thing as enlist as +buglers." + +"Our father lost all his money suddenly, owing to a blackguard he +trusted cheating him. He found it out, and it killed him," Tom said +quietly. + +The colonel saw he was speaking the truth. "Well, well," he said +kindly, "we must see what we can do for you, boys. They are young, +Manley, but that will improve, and by the time that they have been a +year at the depôt--" + +"Oh, if you please, colonel," Tom said, "we want to go on foreign +service, and it's knowing that your regiment was under orders for +foreign service we came to it." + +"Impossible!" the colonel said shortly. + +"I am very sorry for that, sir," Tom said respectfully, "for we would +rather belong to this regiment than any in the service; but if you +will not let us go with it we must try another." + +"Why would you rather belong to us than to any other?" the colonel +asked, as the boys turned to leave the room. + +"I had rather not say, sir," Tom said. "We have a reason, and a very +good one, but it is not one we should like to tell." + +The colonel was silent for a minute. He was struck with the boys' +appearance and manner, and was sorry at the thought of losing them, +partly from interest in themselves, partly because the sea service was +generally so much more attractive to boys, that it was not easy to get +them to enlist as buglers and drummers. + +"You see, lads, I should really like to take you, but we shall be +starting in a fortnight, and it would be altogether impossible for you +to learn to sound the bugle, to say nothing of learning the calls, by +that time." + +"We can't play well, sir," Tom answered, his spirits rising again, +"but we have practiced for some time, and know a good many of the +calls." + +"Oh, indeed!" the colonel said, pleased; "that alters the case. Well, +lads, I should like to take you with the regiment, for you look +straightforward, sharp young fellows. So I will enlist you. Work hard +for the next fortnight, and if I hear a favorable report of you by +that time, you shall go." + +"Thank you very much," the boys said warmly, delighted to find their +hopes realized. + +"What are your names?" the colonel asked. + +"Tom and Peter," Tom answered. + +"Tom and Peter what?" the colonel said. + +The boys looked at each other. The fact that they would of course +be asked their names had never occurred to them, and they not had +therefore consulted whether to give their own or another name. + +"Come, boys," Colonel Tritton said good-temperedly, "never be ashamed +of your names; don't sail under false colors, lads. I am sure you will +do nothing to disgrace your names." + +Tom looked at Peter, and saw that he agreed to give their real names, +so he said, "Tom and Peter Scudamore." + +"Peter Scudamore! Why, Manley, these boys must be relations of the +dear old colonel. That explains why they chose the regiment. Now, +boys, what relation was he of yours?" + +"I do not admit that he was a relation at all, colonel," Tom said +gravely, "and I hope that you will not ask the question. Supposing +that he had been a relation of ours, we should not wish it to be +known. In the first place, it would not be altogether creditable to +his memory that relations of his should be serving as buglers in +his old regiment; and in the second place, it might be that, from +a kindness towards him, some of the officers might, perhaps, treat +us differently to other boys, which would make our position more +difficult by exciting jealousy among others. Should there be any +relation between him and us, it will be time enough for us to claim +it when we have shown ourselves worthy of it." + +"Well said, boys," the officers both exclaimed. "You are quite right," +the colonel went on, "and I respect your motive for keeping silence. +What you say about jealousy which might arise is very sensible and +true. At the same time, I will promise you that I will keep my eye +upon you, and that if an opportunity should occur in which I can give +you a chance of showing that there is more in you than in other boys, +be sure you shall have the chance." + +"Thank you very much indeed, colonel," both boys exclaimed. + +"Now, Manley, I shall be obliged if you will take them to the +adjutant, and tell him to swear them in and attest them in regular +form; the surgeon will, of course, examine them. Please tell the +quartermaster to get their uniforms made without loss of time; and +give a hint to the bugle-major that I should be pleased if he will pay +extra attention to them, and push them on as fast as possible." + +Captain Manley carried out these instructions, the boys were duly +examined by the surgeon and passed, and in half an hour became His +Majesty's servants. + +"Now, boys," Captain Manley said as he crossed with them to the +quarters of the bandmaster, "you will have rather a difficult course +to steer, but I have no doubt you will get through it with credit. +This is something like a school, and you will have to fight before you +find your place. Don't be in a hurry to begin; take all good-natured +chaff good-naturedly; resent any attempt at bullying. I have no doubt +you will be popular, and it is well that you should be so, for then +there will be no jealousy if your luck seems better than that of +others. They will, of course, know that you are differently born and +educated to themselves, but they will not like you any the worse for +that, if they find that you do not try to keep aloof from them or give +yourselves airs. And look here, boys, play any tricks you like with +the men, but don't do it with the non-commissioned officers. There is +nothing they hate so much as impudence from the boys, and they have +it in their power to do you a great deal of good or of harm. You will +not have much to do with the bandmaster. Only a portion of the band +accompanies us, and even that will be broken up when we once enter +upon active campaigning. Several of the company buglers have either +left lately, or have got their stripes and given up their bugles, and +I do not fancy that their places will be filled up before we get out +there. Now, your great object will be to get two of these vacancies. I +am afraid you are too young, still there will be plenty more vacancies +after we are once in the field, for a bullet has no respect for +buglers; and you see the better you behave the better your chance of +being chosen." + +"What is the difference exactly, sir?" Tom asked. + +"The company bugler ranks on the strength of the company, messes, +marches, and goes into action with them; the other buglers merely form +part of the band, are under the bandmaster, play at the head of the +regiment on its march, and help in the hospitals during a battle." + +"Macpherson," he said as he entered the bandmaster's quarters, where a +number of men and a few lads were practicing, "I have brought you two +lads who have entered as buglers." + +The bandmaster was a Scotchman--a stiff-looking, elderly man. + +"Weel, Captain Manley, I'm wanting boys, but they look vera young, and +I misdoubt they had better have been at school than here. However, +I'll do my best with them; they look smart lads, and we shall have +plenty of time at the depôt to get them into shape." + +"Lots of time, Macpherson, lots of time. They say they know a few +calls on the bugle, so perhaps they had better stick to the calls at +present; you will have plenty of time to begin with them regularly +with the notes when all the bustle is over." + +"Eh, ye know the calls, boys? Hardy and Graves, give them your bugles, +and let us hear them. Now for the advance." + +Tom and Peter felt very nervous, but they had really practiced hard +for an hour a day for the last four months, and could play all the +calls they knew steadily and well. The bandmaster made no remark until +they had sounded some half a dozen calls as he named them, and then +he said, "The lads have a vera gude idea of it, Captain Manley. They +are steadier and clearer than mony a one of the boys already. Will ye +begin at once, lads, or will ye wait till ye get your uniform?" + +"We had rather begin at once," the boys answered together. + +"Vera gude. Hardy, take two bugles out of the chest, and then take +these lads--What's your name, boys? Eh? Scudamore? A vera gude +name--take them over to Corporal Skinner, he will be practicing with +the others on the ramp." + +With a word of grateful thanks to Captain Manley as he went out before +them, the boys followed their new guide out to the ramparts. A guide +was hardly necessary, for an incessant bugling betokened the place, +where, in one of the bastions behind the barracks, seven or eight +buglers were sounding the various calls under the direction of +Corporal Skinner. + +The corporal was a man of few words, for he merely nodded when the +boy--who had not opened his lips on the way, indeed, he was too busy +wondering who these young swells were, and what they had run away for, +to say a word--gave the bandmaster's message to the effect that the +new-comers knew some of the calls and were to be under his tuition for +the present, pointed to them where to stand, and in another minute Tom +and Peter were hard at work adding to the deafening din. After half +an hour's practice they were pleased at seeing Captain Manley stroll +up and call their instructor aside, and they felt sure that he was +speaking to him of them. This was so, for the officer was carrying out +the instructions he had received from Colonel Tritton. + +"Corporal," he said, "I want to say a word to you about those boys who +have just joined. They seem to have a fair idea of the calls." + +"Yes, sir, they only know a few, but those they do know they can sound +as well as any of them." + +"That is right, corporal. Now look here, what I am going to say is not +to go farther, you understand." + +"Yes, sir, I will keep my mouth shut." + +"Very well. You can see the lads are not like most of our band boys. +They are a gentleman's sons who have got into some scrape or other and +run away from school." + +"I was thinking as much, sir." + +"The colonel believes that he knows their family, Skinner; but of +course, that will not make any difference in regard to them. Still he +would be pleased, I know, if they could sound the calls well enough to +go with the regiment. They are most anxious to learn. Now I shall be +glad if you can get them up to the mark. It will, of course, entail a +lot of extra trouble upon you, but if you can get them fit in time, I +will pay you a couple of guineas for your extra time." + +"Thank you, sir," the corporal saluted. "I think I can manage it--at +any rate if I don't it won't be for want of trying." + +"Who are those nice-looking lads I saw with you, Manley?" Major James +asked as the captain came into the messroom to lunch. + +"Those are two buglers in his Majesty's Norfolk Rangers." + +There was a general laugh. + +"No, but really, Manley, who are they? I was quite struck with them; +good style of boys." + +"It is a fact, major. Harding will tell you so," and he nodded to the +adjutant. + +"Yes, Manley is saying the thing that's right," the adjutant answered. +"The doctor passed them, and I swore them in." + +"I am sorry for it," the major said. "There were three or four of us +standing on the mess-room steps and we all noticed them. They were +gentlemen, if I ever saw one, and a hard life they will have of it +with the band boys. However, they are not likely to stay there. They +have run away from school, of course, and will be claimed. I wonder +you enlisted them." + +"The colonel's orders, major," the adjutant said. "Manley took them to +him, I believe, and then brought them to me." + +"I don't think you need feel anxious about them among the boys, +major," Captain Manley said. "I fancy they can hold their own. I +found them outside the gate where a row was going on among some of +the recruiting sergeants, and one of those boys had just tripped up +a sergeant of the 15th and nearly broken his head." + +There was a general laugh. + +"They are quite interesting, these prodigies of yours, Manley. How did +the boy do it? I should not have thought him strong enough to have +thrown a man off his balance." + +"I asked Summers about it afterwards," Captain Manley said, "the +fellow gave one of the boys a box on the ear, and in an instant the +boy stooped, caught his foot and pulled it forward and up. The thing +was done in a moment, and the sergeant was on his back before he knew +what's what." + +"By Jove," a young ensign said, "I have seen that trick done at Eton." + +"That is just where the boy said he learnt it," Captain Manley said. +"The colonel asked him suddenly, and it slipped out." + +"If they're Etonians, I ought to know them," the ensign said. "I only +left six months ago. What are their names?" + +"Their name is Scudamore." + +"By Jove, they were in the same house with me. Uncommonly sharp little +fellows, and up to no end of mischief. It was always believed, though +no one could prove it, that they were the boys who nearly suffocated +the bargee." + +There was a roar of laughter. + +"Tell us all about, Carruthers." + +"Well, there was not very much known about it. It seems the fellow +purposely upset a boat with four or five of our fellows in it, and +that night a dozen lighted crackers were thrown down into the little +cabin where the fellow was asleep; the hatch was fastened and he +was sent drifting down stream with the crackers exploding all about +him. The smoke nearly suffocated the fellow, I believe There was a +tremendous row about it, but they could not bring it home to any one. +We always put it down to the Scudamores, though they never would own +to it; but they were the only fellows in the boat who would have done +it, and they were always up to mischief." + +"But what makes them come here as buglers?" the major asked. + +"Their father was a banker, I believe, down in the Eastern Counties +somewhere. He died suddenly in the middle of the half before I left, +and they went away to the funeral and never came back again." + +"The fact is," Captain Manley said, "I fancy by what they say, though +they did not mention their father was a banker, that he lost all his +money suddenly and died of the shock. At any rate they are alone +in the world, and the colonel has no doubt that they are some +relation--nephews, I should imagine--of Peter Scudamore, who was our +colonel when I joined. One of them is called Peter. They acknowledged +that they had a particular reason for choosing this regiment; but +they would neither acknowledge or deny that he was a relation. Now +that we know their father was a banker, we shall find out without +difficulty--indeed I have no doubt the colonel will know whether Peter +Scudamore had a brother a banker." + +"What's to be done, Manley?" Major James said. "I don't like the +thought of poor old Peter's nephews turning buglers. All of us field +officers, and the best part of you captains, served under him, and +a better fellow never stepped. I think between us we might do +something." + +"I would do anything I could," Carruthers said, "and there are Watson +and Talbot who were at Eton too. Dash it, I don't like to think of two +Etonians in a band," "You are all very good," Captain Manley said, +"but from what I see of the boys they will go their own way. They have +plenty of pride, and they acknowledge that their reason for refusing +to say whether they are any relation of the colonel was that they +did not want to be taken notice of or treated differently from other +boys, because it would cause jealousy, and make their position more +difficult. All they asked was that they might accompany the regiment, +and not remain behind at the depôt; and as, fortunately, they have +both been practising with the bugle, and can sound most of the calls +as well as the others, the colonel was able to grant their request. +Had they been older, of course, we could have arranged for them to go +with us as volunteers, we who knew the colonel, paying their expenses +between us: as it is, the only thing we can do for them--and that is +what they would like best is to treat them just like the other boys, +but to give them every chance of distinguishing themselves. If they +don't get knocked over, they ought to win a commission before the +campaign is over." + +In the meantime Tom and Peter had been introducing themselves to the +regiment. The exercise over, they had returned to dinner. It was a +rough meal, but the boys enjoyed it, and after it was over a number +of the men of the band, with whom they messed, crowded round to ask +the usual questions of new-comers--their curiosity heightened in the +present instance by the fact that the boys differed so widely from +ordinary recruits. + +"Look here," Tom said, laughing, "I can't answer you all at once, but +if you put me on the table I will tell you all about us." + +There was a general laugh, and many of the soldiers other than the +band sauntered up to see what was going on. + +"The first thing to tell you," Tom said, "is our names. We go by the +names of Tom and Peter Scudamore, but I need scarcely tell you that +these are not our real names. The fact is--but this is quite a +secret--we are the eldest sons of Sir Arthur Wellesley--" + +Here Tom was interrupted by a shout of laughter. + +"Sir Arthur," Tom went on calmly, "wished to make us colonels of two +of the Life Guard regiments, but as they were not going on foreign +service we did not see it, and have accordingly entered the regiment +which Sir Arthur, our father, in speaking to a friend, said was the +finest in the service--namely, the Norfolk Rangers. We believe that +it is the custom, upon entering a regiment, to pay our footing, and I +have given a guinea to Corporal Skinner, and asked him to make it go +as far as he could." + +There was great laughter over Tom's speech, which was just suited to +soldiers, and the boys from that moment were considered part of the +regiment. + +"There's good stuff in those boys," an old sergeant said to another, +"plucky and cool. I shouldn't be surprised if what Tom Dillon said +was about right; he was waiting at mess just now, and though he didn't +hear all that was said, he picked up that there was an idea that +these boys are related to the old colonel. He was a good fellow, he +was, and, though I say nothing against Colonel Tritton, yet we missed +Colonel Scudamore terribly. Strict, and yet kind, just the sort of +fellow to serve under. If the boys take after him they will be a +credit to the regiment, and mark my words, we shan't see them in the +band many years." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +A TOUGH CUSTOMER. + + +Like most boys who are fond of play, Tom and Peter Scudamore were +capable of hard work at a pinch, and during the three weeks that +they spent at Portsmouth they certainly worked with a will. They had +nothing to do in the way of duty, except to practice the bugle, and +this they did with a zeal and perseverance that quite won the heart +of Corporal Skinner, and enabled him to look upon Captain Manley's +two guineas as good as earned. But even with the best will and the +strongest lungs possible, boys can only blow a bugle a certain number +of hours a day. For an hour before breakfast, for two hours before +dinner, and for an hour and a half in the evening they practiced, the +evening work being extra, alone with their instructor. There remained +the whole afternoon to themselves. Their employment of those hours had +been undertaken at Peter's suggestion. + +"Look here, Tom," he said, at the end of the first day's work, "from +what the corporal says, we shall have from one till about five to +ourselves. Now, we are going to Spain, and it seems to me that it +would be of great use to us, and might do us a great deal of good, to +know something of Spanish. We have got four pounds each left, and I +don't think that we could lay it out better than in getting a Spanish +master and some books, and in setting to in earnest at it. If we work +with all our might for four hours a day with a master, we shall have +made some progress, and shall pick up the pronunciation a little. I +dare say we shall be another ten days or a fortnight on the voyage, +and shall have lots of time on our hands. It will make it so much +easier to pick it up when we get there if we know a little to start +with." + +"I think it is a capital idea, Peter; I should think we are pretty +sure to find a master here." + +There was no difficulty upon that score, for there were a large number +of Spanish in England at the time; men who had left the country rather +than remain under the French yoke, and among them were many who were +glad to get their living by teaching their native language. There were +two or three in this condition in Portsmouth, and to one of these the +boys applied. He was rather surprised at the application from the two +young buglers--for the uniforms were finished twenty-four hours after +their arrival--but at once agreed to devote his whole afternoons to +them. Having a strong motive for their work, and a determination +to succeed in it, the boys made a progress that astonished both +themselves and their teacher, and they now found the advantage of +their grounding in Latin at Eton. Absorbed in their work, they saw +little of the other boys, except at meals and when at practice. + +One evening when at supper, one of the buglers, named Mitcham, a lad +of nearly eighteen, made some sneering remark about boys who thought +themselves above others, and gave themselves airs. Tom saw at once +that this allusion was meant for them, and took the matter up. + +"I suppose you mean us, Mitcham. You are quite mistaken; neither my +brother nor myself think ourselves better than any one, nor have we +any idea of giving ourselves airs. The fact is--and I am not surprised +that you should think us unsociable--we are taking lessons in Spanish. +If we go with the regiment it will be very useful, and I have heard +it said that any one who lands in a foreign country, and who knows a +little of the grammar and pronunciation, will learn it in half the +time that he would were he altogether ignorant of both. I am sorry +that I did not mention it before, because I can understand that it +must seem as if we did not want to be sociable. I can assure you that +we do; and that after this fortnight is over we shall be ready to be +as jolly as any one. You see we are altogether behindhand with our +work now, and have got to work hard to put ourselves on your level." + +Tom spoke so good-temperedly that there was a general feeling in his +favor, and several of them who had before thought with Mitcham, that +the new-comers were not inclined to be sociable, felt that they had +been mistaken. There was, however, a general feeling of surprise +and amusement at the idea of two boys voluntarily taking lessons in +Spanish. Mitcham, however, who was a surly-tempered young fellow, and +who was jealous of the progress which the boys were making, and of the +general liking with which they seemed to be regarded, said,-- + +"I believe that's only an excuse for getting away from us." + +"Do you mean to say that you think that I am telling a lie?" Tom asked +quietly. + +"Yes, if you put it in that way, young 'un," Mitcham said. + +"Hold your tongue, Mitcham, or I'll pull your ears for you," Corporal +Skinner said: but his speech was cut short by Tom's putting one hand +on the barrack table, vaulting across it, and striking Mitcham a heavy +blow between the eyes. + +There was a cry of "a fight!" among the boys, but the men interfered +at once. + +"You don't know what you are doing, young 'un," one said to Tom; +"when you hit a fellow here, you must fight him. That's the rule, and +you can't fight Mitcham; he's two years older, at least, and a head +taller." + +"Of course I will fight him," Tom said. "I would fight him if he were +twice as big, if he called me a liar." + +"Nonsense, young 'un!" another said, "it's not possible. He was wrong, +and if you had not struck him I would have licked him myself; but as +you have done so, you had better put up with a thrashing, and have +done with it." + +"I should think so, indeed!" Tom said disdainfully. "I may get a +licking; I dare say I shall; but it won't be all on one side. Look +here, Mitcham, we will have it out to-morrow, on the ramparts behind +the barracks. But, if you will apologize to me for calling me a liar, +I'll say I am sorry I hit you." + +"Oh, blow your sorrow!" the lad said. "I'll give you the heartiest +licking you ever had in your life, my young cock." + +"Oh, all right," Tom said cheerfully. "We will see all about it when +the time comes." + +As it was evident now that there was no way out of it, no one +interfered further in the matter. Quarrels in the army are always +settled by a fair fight, as at school; but several of the older men +questioned among themselves whether they ought to let this go on, +considering that Tom Scudamore was only between fifteen and sixteen, +while his opponent was two years older, and was so much heavier and +stronger. However, as it was plain that Tom would not take a thrashing +for the blow he had struck, and there did not seem any satisfactory +way out of it, nothing was done, except that two or three of them went +up to Mitcham, and strongly urged him to shake hands with Tom, and +confess that he had done wrong in giving him the lie. This Mitcham +would not hear of, and there was nothing further to be done. + +"I am afraid, Tom, you have no chance with that fellow." Peter said, +as they were undressing. + +"No chance in the world, Peter; but I can box fairly, you know, and am +pretty hard. I shall be able to punish him a bit, and you may be sure +I shall never give in. It's no great odds getting a licking, and I +suppose that they will stop it before I am killed. Don't bother about +it. I had rather get knocked about in a fight than get flogged at Eton +any day. I would rather you did not come to see it, Peter, if you +don't mind. When you fought Evans it hurt me ten times as much as if I +had been fighting, and, although you licked him, it made me feel like +a girl. I can stand twice the punishment if I don't feel that any blow +is hitting you as well as myself." + +Tom's prediction about the fight turned out to be nearly correct. He +was more active, and a vastly better boxer than his antagonist, and +although he was constantly knocked down, he punished him very heavily +about the face. In fact, the fight was exactly similar to that great +battle, fifty years afterwards, between Sayers and Heenan. Time after +time Tom was knocked down, and even his second begged him to give in, +but he would not hear of it. Breathless and exhausted, but always +cool and smiling, he faced his heavy antagonist, eluding his furious +rushes, and managing to strike a few straight blows at his eyes before +being knocked down. By the time that they had fought a quarter of +an hour half the regiment was assembled, and loud were the cheers +which greeted Tom each time he came up, very pale and bleeding, but +confident, against his antagonist. + +At last an old sergeant came forward. "Come," he said, "there has been +enough of this. You had better stop." + +"Will he say he was sorry he called me a liar?" Tom asked. + +"No, I won't," Mitcham answered. + +The sergeant was about to use his authority to stop it, when Tom said +to him, in a low voice: + +"Look, sergeant! please let us go on another five minutes. I think I +can stand that, and he can hardly see out of his eyes now. He won't +see a bit by that time." + +The sergeant hesitated, but a glance at Tom's antagonist convinced him +that what he said was correct. Mitcham had at all times a round and +rather puffy face, and his cheeks were now so swollen with the effect +of Tom's straight, steady hitting, that he could with difficulty see. + +It was a hard five minutes for Tom, for his antagonist, finding that +he was rapidly getting blind, rushed with fury upon him, trying to end +the fight. Tom had less difficulty in guarding the blows, given wildly +and almost at random, but he was knocked down time after time by the +mere force and weight of the rush. He felt himself getting weak, and +could hardly get up from his second's knee upon the call of time. +He was not afraid of being made to give in, but he was afraid of +fainting, and of so being unable to come up to time. + +"Stick a knife into me; do anything!" he said to his second, "if I go +off, only bring me up to time. He can't hold out much longer." + +Nor could he. His hitting became more and more at random, until at +last, on getting up from his second's knee, Mitcham cried in a hoarse +voice, "Where is he? I can't see him!" + +Then Tom went forward with his hands down. "Look here, Mitcham, you +can't see, and I can hardly stand. I think we have both done enough. +We neither of us can give in, well because--because I am a gentleman, +you because you are bigger than I am; so let's shake hands, and say no +more about it." + +Mitcham hesitated an instant, and then held out his hand. "You are a +good fellow, Scudamore, and there's my hand; but you have licked me +fairly. I can't come up to time, and you can. There, I am sorry I +called you a liar." + +Tom took the hand, and shook it, and then a mist came over his eyes, +and his knees tottered, as, with the ringing cheers of the men in his +ears, he fainted into his second's arms. + +"What a row the men are making!" the major said, as the sound of +cheering came through the open window of the mess-room, at which the +officers were sitting at lunch. "It's a fight of course, and a good +one, judging by the cheering. Does any one know who it is between?" + +No one had heard. + +"It's over now," the adjutant said, looking out of the window, "Here +are the men coming down in a stream. They look very excited over it. I +wonder who it has been. Stokes," he said, turning to one of the mess +servants, "go out, and find out who has been fighting, and all about +it." + +In a minute or two the man returned. "It's two of the band boys, sir." + +"Oh, only two boys! I wonder they made such a fuss over that. Who are +they?" + +"One was one of the boys who have just joined, sir. Tom Scudamore, +they call him." + +"I guessed as much," Captain Manley laughed; "I knew they would not be +long here without a fight. Who was the other?" + +"Well, sir, I almost thought it must be a mistake when they told me, +seeing they are so unequally matched, but they all say so, so in +course it's true--the other was Mitcham, the bugler of No. 3 Company." + +"What a shame!" was the general exclamation, while Captain Manley got +up and called for his cap. + +"A brutal shame, I call it," he said hotly. "Mitcham's nearly a man. +It ought not to have been allowed. I will go and inquire after the +boy. I will bet five pounds he was pretty nearly killed before he gave +in." + +"He didn't give in, Captain Manley," the servant said. "He won the +fight. They fought till Mitcham couldn't see, and then young Scudamore +went up and offered to draw it, but Mitcham acknowledged he was fairly +licked. It was a close thing, for the boy fainted right off; but he's +come round now, and says he's all right." + +"Hurrah for Eton!" Carruthers shouted enthusiastically. "Hurrah! By +Jove, he is game, and no mistake. He won a hard fight or two at Eton, +but nothing like this. I call it splendid." + +"The boy might have been killed," the major said gravely; while the +younger officers joined in Carruthers's exclamation at Tom's pluck. +"It is shameful that it was allowed. I suppose the quarrel began in +their quarters. Sergeant Howden is in charge of the room, and ought to +have stopped it at once. Every non-commissioned officer ought to have +stopped it. I will have Howden up before the colonel to-morrow." + +"I think, major," Captain Manley said, "if you will excuse me, the +best plan, as far as the boy is concerned, is to take no notice of +it. As it is, he must have won the hearts of all the regiment by his +pluck, and if he is not seriously hurt, it is the very best thing, as +it has turned out, that could have happened. If any one gets into a +scrape about it, it might lessen the effect of the victory. I think if +you call Howden up, and give him a quiet wigging, it will do as well, +and won't injure the boys. What do you think?" + +"Yes, you are right, Manley, as it has turned out; but the boy might +have been killed. However, I won't do more than give Howden a hearty +wigging, and will then learn how the affair begun. I think, Dr. +Stathers, that it would be as well if you went round and saw both of +them. You had better, I think, order them into hospital for the night, +and then the boy can go to bed at once, and come out again to-morrow, +if he has, as I hope, nothing worse than a few bruises. Please come +back, and tell us how you find them." + +The report was favorable, and the next morning Tom came out of +hospital, and took his place as usual, with the party upon the +ramparts--pale, and a good deal marked, but not much the worse for his +battle; but it was some days before the swelling of his adversary's +face subsided sufficiently for him to return to duty. + +Tom's victory--as Captain Manley had predicted--quite won the hearts +of the whole regiment, and the nicknames of "Sir Tom," and "Sir +Peter"--which had been given to them in jest after Tom's speech +about Sir Arthur Wellesley--were now generally applied to them. The +conversation in the mess-room had got about, and the old soldiers who +had served under Colonel Scudamore would have done anything for the +lads, although, as yet, they were hardly known personally except to +the band, as their devotion to work kept them quite apart from the +men. + +It was just three weeks after they had joined before the order came +for embarkation, and a thrill of pleasure and excitement ran through +the regiment when it was known that they were to go on board in four +days. Not the least delighted were Tom and Peter. It had already been +formally settled that they were to accompany the regiment, and it +was a proof of the popularity that they had gained, that every one +looked upon their going as a matter of course, and that no comment +was excited even among those who were left behind. Three days before +starting they had met Captain Manley in the barrack-yard, and after +saluting, Tom said, "If you please, sir, we wanted to ask you a +question." + +"What is that, lads?" + +"If you please, sir, we understand that the boys of the band have +their bags carried for them, but the company buglers carry knapsacks, +like the men?" + +"Yes, boys; the company buglers carry knapsacks and muskets." + +"I am afraid we could not carry muskets and do much marching, sir, but +we have each a brace of pistols." + +Captain Manley smiled. "Pistols would not look the thing on a +parade-ground, boys; but in a campaign people are not very particular, +and I have no doubt the colonel will overlook any little breach of +strict uniformity in your cases, as it is evident you can't carry +muskets. You can use your pistols, I hope," he said with a smile. "Hit +a penny every time at twenty paces!" + +"No, sir, we can't do that," Tom said seriously. "We can hit a +good-sized apple nineteen times out of twenty." + +"The deuce you can!" Captain Manley said. "How did you learn to do +that?" + +"We have practiced twelve shots a day for the last six months, sir. We +were thinking of asking you, sir, if you would like to carry a brace +of them through the campaign. They are splendid weapons; and we shall +only carry one each. They would get rusty and spoil, if we left them +behind, and we should be very pleased to think they might be useful to +you, after your great kindness to us." + +"It is not a very regular thing, boys," Captain Manley said, "for a +captain to be borrowing a brace of pistols from two of his buglers; +but you are exceptional buglers, and there is something in what you +say about rusting. Besides, it is possible you may lose yours, so I +will accept your offer with thanks, with the understanding that I will +carry the pistols, and you shall have them again if anything happens +to yours. But how about the knapsacks?" + +"We were thinking of having two made of the regimental pattern, sir, +but smaller and lighter, if you think that it would be allowed." + +"Well, I think, boys, if you are allowed to carry pistols instead of +muskets, no great objection will be made as to the exact size of the +knapsacks. Yes, you can get them made, and I will speak to the colonel +about it." + +"Perhaps," he hesitated, "you may be in want of a little money; do +not hesitate if you do. I can let you have five pounds, and you +can pay me," he said with a laugh, "out of your share of our first +prize-money." + +The boys colored hotly. + +"No, thank you, Captain Manley; we have plenty of money. Shall we +bring the pistols to your quarters?" + +"Do, lads, I am going in to lunch now, and will be in in half an +hour." + +The boys at once went out and ordered their knapsacks. They had just +sold their watches, which were large, handsome, and of gold, and had +been given to them by their father when they went to Eton. They were +very sorry to part with them, but they agreed that it would be folly +to keep gold watches when the twenty pounds which they obtained for +them would buy two stout and useful silver watches and would leave +them twelve pounds in money. They then returned to barracks, took out +a brace of their pistols, carefully cleaned them, and removed the +silver plates upon the handles, and then walked across to Captain +Manley's quarters. + +Rather to their surprise and confusion they found five or six other +officers there, for Captain Manley had mentioned at lunch to the +amusement of his friends that he was going to be unexpectedly provided +with a brace of pistols, and several of them at once said that they +would go up with him to his quarters, as they wanted to see the boys +of whom they had spoken so much during the last fortnight. Tom and +Peter drew themselves up and saluted stiffly. + +"You need not be buglers here, boys," Captain Manley said. "This is +my room, we are all gentlemen, and though I could not, according +to the regulations, walk down the street with you, the strictest +disciplinarian would excuse my doing as I like here." + +The boys flushed with pleasure at Captain Manley's kind address, and +as he finished Carruthers stepped forward and shook them warmly by the +hand. + +"How are you both?" he said. "You have not forgotten me, I hope." + +"I had not seen you before. I did not know you were in the regiment, +Carruthers," the boys said warmly, pleased to find a face they +had known before; and then breaking off:--"I beg your pardon--Mr. +Carruthers." + +"There are no misters here as far as I am concerned, Scudamore. There +were no misters at Eton. This is a change, isn't it? Better than +grinding away at Greek by a long way. Well, I congratulate you on your +fight. You showed there was some good in dear old Eton still. I wish +you had let me know it was coming off. I would have given anything +to have seen it--from a distance, you know. If it had been the right +thing, I would have come and been your backer." + +There was a general laugh, and then the officers all began to talk to +the boys. They were quiet and respectful in their manners, and fully +confirmed the favorable report which Captain Manley had given of them. + +"Where are the pistols, boys?" their friend asked presently. + +"Here, sir," and the boys produced them from under their jackets. "We +have no case, sir; we were obliged to leave it behind us when we--" + +"Ran away," one of the officers said, laughing. + +"They are a splendid pair of pistols," Captain Manley said, examining +them; "beautifully finished, and rifled. They look quite new, too, +though, of course, they are not." + +"They are new, sir," Tom said; "we have only had them six months, and +they were new then." + +"Indeed," Captain Manley said surprised; "I thought, of course, they +were family pistols. Why, how on earth, if it is not an impertinent +question, did you boys get hold of two brace of such pistols as these? +I have no right to ask the question, boys. I see there has been a +plate on the handles. But you said you had no relations, and I was +surprised into asking." + +The boys colored. + +"The question was quite natural, sir; the pistols were presented to us +by some people we traveled with once; we took the plates off because +they made a great fuss about nothing, and we thought that it would +look cockey." + +There was a laugh among the officers at the boys' confusion. + +"No one would suspect you of being cockey, Scudamore," Captain Manley +said kindly; "come, let me see the plates." + +The boys took the little silver plates from their pockets and handed +them silently to Captain Manley, who read aloud, to the surprise of +those around him,--"'To Tom' and 'Peter,' they are alike except the +names. 'To Tom Scudamore, presented by the passengers in the Highflyer +coach on the 4th of August, 1808, as a testimony of their appreciation +of his gallant conduct, by which their property was saved from +plunder.' Why, what is this, you young pickles, what were you up to on +the 4th of August last year?" + +"There was nothing in it at all, sir," Tom said; "we were on the coach +and were stopped by highwaymen. One of the passengers had pistols, +but was afraid to use them, and hid them among the boxes. So when the +passengers were ordered to get down to be searched, we hid ourselves, +and when the highwaymen were collecting their watches, Peter shot one, +and I drove the coach over another. The matter was very simple indeed; +but the passengers saved their money, so made a great fuss about it." + +There was much laughter over Tom's statement, and then he had to +give a detailed account of the whole affair, which elicited many +expressions of approval. + +"It does you credit, boys," Captain Manley said, "and shows that you +are cool as well as plucky. One quality is as valuable as the other. +There is every hope that you will do the regiment credit, boys, and +you may be sure that we shall give you every chance. And now good-bye +for the present." + +"Good-bye, sir," Tom and Peter again drew themselves up, gave the +military salute, and went off to their comrades. + +For when the order came to prepare for the embarkation, both Spanish +and bugling were given up, and the boys entered into the pleasure +of the holiday with immense zest. They had no regimental duties to +perform beyond being present at parade. They had no packing to do, and +fewer purchases to make. A ball or two of stout string, for, as Peter +said, string is always handy, and a large pocket-knife, each with +a variety of blades, were the principal items. They had a ring put +to the knives, so that they could sling them round the waist. They +had, therefore, nothing to do but to amuse themselves, and this they +did with a heartiness which astonished the other boys, and proved +conclusively that they did not want to be unsociable. They hired a +boat for a sail and took five or six other boys across to Ryde, only +just returning in time for tattoo, and they played such a number of +small practical jokes, such as putting a handful of peas into the +bugles and other wind instruments, that the band-master declared that +he thought that they were all bewitched, and he threatened to thrash +the boys all round, because he could not find out who had done it. + +Especially angry was the man who played the big drum. This was a +gigantic negro, named Sam, a kind-hearted fellow, constantly smiling, +except when the thought of his own importance made him assume a +particularly grave appearance. He was a general favorite, although the +boys were rather afraid of him, for he was apt to get into a passion +if any jokes were attempted upon him, and of all offences the greatest +was to call him Sambo. Now none of the men ventured upon this, for +when he first joined, Sam had fought two or three desperate battles on +this ground, and his great strength and the insensibility of his head +to blows had invariably given him the victory. But, treated with what +he conceived proper respect, Sam was one of the best-tempered and +best-natured fellows in the regiment; and he himself, when he once +cooled down, was perfectly ready to join in the laugh against himself, +even after he had been most put out by a joke. + +The day before the regiment was to embark, the officers gave a lawn +party; a large number of ladies were present, and the band was, of +course, to play. The piece which the bandmaster had selected for the +commencement began with four distinct beats of the big drum. Just +before it began, Captain Manley saw Tom and Peter, who with some of +the other boys had brought the music-stands into the ground, with +their faces bright with anticipated fun. + +"What is the joke, boys?" he asked good-humoredly, as he passed them. + +"I can't tell you, sir," Tom said; "but if you walk up close to the +band, and watch Sam's face when he begins, you will be amused, I +think." + +"Those are regular young pickles," Captain Manley said to the lady +he was walking with; "they are Etonians who have run away from home, +and are up to all kinds of mischief, but are the pluckiest and most +straightforward youngsters imaginable. I have no doubt that they are +up to some trick with our black drummer." + +On their way to where the band was preparing to play, Captain Manley +said a word or two to several of the other officers, consequently +there was quite a little party standing watching the band when their +leader lifted his baton for the overture to begin. + +There was nothing that Sam liked better than for the big drum to +commence, and with his head thrown well back and an air of extreme +importance, he lifted his arm and brought it down with what should +have been a sounding blow upon the drum. To his astonishment and to +the surprise of all the band, no deep boom was heard, only a low +muffled sound. Mechanically Sam raised his other arm and let it fall +with a similar result. Sam looked a picture of utter astonishment and +dismay, with his eyes opened to their fullest, and he gave vent to a +loud cry, which completed the effect produced by his face, and set +most of those looking on, and even the band themselves, into a roar of +laughter. Sam now examined his sticks, they appeared all right to the +eye, but directly he felt them his astonishment was turned into rage. +They were perfectly soft. Taking out his knife he cut them open, and +found that the balls were merely filled with a wad of soft cotton, the +necessary weight being given by pieces of lead fastened round the end +of the stick inside the ball with waxed thread. + +Sam was too enraged to say more than his usual exclamation of +astonishment, "Golly!" and he held out his drumsticks to be examined +with the face of a black statue of surprise. + +Even the band-master was obliged to laugh as he took the sticks from +Sam's hand to examine them. + +"These are not your sticks at all, Sam," he said, looking closely at +them. "Here, boy," he called to Tom, who might have been detected from +the fact of his being the only person present with a serious face, +"run to the band-room and see if you can find the sticks." + +In a few minutes Tom returned with the real drumsticks, which, he +said truly, he had found on the shelf where they were usually kept. +After that things went on as usual; Sam played with a sulky fury. His +dignity was injured, and he declared over and over again that if he +could "find de rascal who did it, by jingo, I pound him to squash!" +and there was no doubt from his look that he thoroughly meant what he +said. However, no inquiries could bring to light the author of the +trick. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +OVERBOARD. + + +There were no lighter hearts than those of Tom and Peter Scudamore +on board the transport "Nancy," as, among the hearty cheers of the +troops on board, and the waving of hats and handkerchiefs from friends +who had come out in small boats to say good-bye for the last time, +she weighed anchor, and set sail in company with some ten or twelve +other transports, and under convoy of two ships of war. It would be +difficult to imagine a prettier scene. The guns fired, the bands of +the various regiments played, and the white sails opened out bright +in the sun as the sailors swarmed into the rigging, anxious to outvie +each other. Even the soldiers pulled and hauled at the ropes, and ran +round with the capstan bars to get the anchors apeak. Tom and Peter, +of course, had, like the other boys, got very much in the way in their +desire to assist, and, having been once or twice knocked over by the +rush of men coming along with ropes, they wisely gave it up, and +leaned over the side to enjoy the scene. + +"This is splendid, Tom, isn't it?" + +"Glorious, Peter; but it's blowing pretty strong. I am afraid that we +sha'n't find it quite so glorious when we get out of the shelter of +the island." + +Peter laughed. "No; I suppose we sha'n't all look as jolly as we do +now by night-time. However, the wind is nor'-westerly, which will help +us along nicely, if, as I heard one of the sailors say just now, it +does not go round to the south." + +"Bugler, sound companies one, two, and three to breakfast." + +The order interrupted the conversation, and, for the next hour, +the boys had little time for talk. Half the regiment was on board +the "Nancy," and, after breakfast, the men were divided into three +watches, of which one was always to be on deck, for the ship was very +crowded, and there was scarcely room for all the men to be below +together. The boys were in the same watch, for the day previous to +starting Tom had been appointed bugler to the 2d Company, Peter to the +3d. The 1st Company, or Grenadiers, were in the watch with the band, +the 2d and 3d Companies were together, and the 4th and 5th. + +Tom was very ill for the first two days of the voyage, while Peter did +not feel the slightest effects from the motion. Upon the third day the +wind dropped suddenly, and the vessels rolled heavily in the swell, +with their sails flapping against the masts. Tom came up that morning +upon deck feeling quite well again, and the boys were immensely amused +at seeing the attempts of the soldiers to move about, the sudden +rushes, and the heavy falls. A parade had been ordered to take place; +but as no one could have stood steady without holding on, it was +abandoned as impossible. The men sat about under the bulwarks, and a +few amused themselves and the rest by trying to play various games, +such as laying a penny on the deck, and seeing which would pitch +another to lay nearest to it, from a distance of five yards. The +difficulty of balancing oneself in a heavily rolling vessel, and of +pitching a penny with any degree of accuracy, is great, and the manner +in which the coins, instead of coming down flat and remaining there, +rolled away into the scuppers, the throwers not unfrequently following +them, produced fits of laughter. + +Tom was still feeling weak from his two days' illness, and was not +disposed actively to enter into the fun; but Peter enjoyed the heavy +rolling, and was all over the ship. Presently he saw Sam, the black +drummer, sitting in a dark corner below quietly asleep; his cap was +beside him, and the idea at once occurred to Peter that here was a +great opportunity for a joke. He made his way to the caboose, and +begged the cook to give him a handful of flour. The cook at first +refused, but was presently coaxed into doing so, and Peter stole to +where Sam was asleep, and put the flour into his cap, relying that, in +the darkness, Sam would put it on without noticing it. Then, going up +to the deck above, Peter put his head down the hatchway, and shouted +loudly, "Sam!" + +The negro woke at the sound of his name. "What is it?" he asked. +Receiving no reply, he got on to his feet, muttering, "Some one call +Sam, that for certain, can't do without Sam, always want here, want +there. I go up and see." + +So saying, he put on his cap, and made his way up to the upper deck. +As he stood at the hatchway and looked round, there was, first a +titter, and then a roar of laughter from the men sitting or standing +along by the bulwarks. In putting on his cap some of the flour had +fallen out, and had streaked his face with white. Sam was utterly +unconscious that he was the object of the laughter, and said to one of +the men nearest to him, "Who call Sam?" + +The man could not reply, but Tom, who was sitting close by, said, "It +was no one here, Sam, it must have been the bandmaster; there he is, +close to the quarter-deck." + +Sam made his way along towards the point indicated, and as he did so +some of the officers upon the quarter-deck caught sight of him. "Just +look at Sambo," Carruthers exclaimed, "somebody has been larking with +him again. Look how all the men are laughing, and he evidently has no +suspicion of the figure he is." + +The sergeant, who, the bandmaster having remained at the depôt, was +now acting as chief of the band, did not see Sam until the latter was +close to him. "You want me, sergeant?" + +Sergeant Wilson looked up, and was astonished. + +"What on earth have you been doing to yourself, Sam?" he asked. + +"Me been having little nap down below," Sam said. + +"Yes; but your face, man. What have you been doing to your face?" + +Sam, in his turn, looked astonished. "Nothing whatsomeber, sargeant." + +"Take off your cap, man, and look inside it." Sam did as ordered; and +as he removed the cap, and the powder fell from it all over his face +and shoulders, there was a perfect shout of laughter from the soldiers +and crew, who had been looking on, and the officers, looking down from +the rail of the quarter-deck, retired to laugh unnoticed. + +The astonishment and rage of Sam were unbounded, and he gave a perfect +yell of surprise and fury. He stamped wildly for a minute or two, and +then, with a sudden movement rushed up on to the quarter-deck with +his cap in his hand. The colonel, who was holding on by the shrouds, +and talking with the major, in ignorance of what was going on, was +perfectly astounded at this sudden vision of the irate negro, and +neither he nor the major could restrain their laughter. + +"Scuse me, colonel, sah, for de liberty," Sam burst out; "but look at +me, sah; is dis right, sah, is it right to make joke like dis on de +man dat play de big drum of de regiment?" + +"No, no, Sam; not at all right," the colonel said, with difficulty. +"If you report who has played the trick upon you, I shall speak to him +very seriously; but, Sam, I should have thought that you were quite +big enough to take the matter in your own hands." + +"Me big enough, Massah Colonel, me plenty big; but me not able to find +him." + +"Well, Sam, it is carrying a joke too far; still, it is only a trick +off duty, and I am afraid that it is beyond my power to interfere." + +Sam thought for a moment, and, having by this time cooled down from +his first paroxysm of rage, he said, "Beg pardon, massa, you quite +right, no business of any one but Sam; but Sam too angry to 'top to +think. Scuse liberty, colonel," and Sam retired from the quarter-deck, +and made a bolt below down the nearest hatchway, when he plunged his +head into a bucket of water, and soon restored it to its usual ebony +hue. + +Then he went to the cook and tried to find out to whom he had given +flour, but the cook replied at once, "Lor, I've given flour to the men +of each mess to make puddings of, about thirty of them," and Sam felt +as far off as ever. + +Presently, however, a big sailor began to make fun of him, and Sam +retorted by knocking him down, after which there was a regular fight, +which was carried on under the greatest difficulty, owing to the +rolling of the ship. At last Sambo got the best of it, and this +restored him so thoroughly to a good temper that he was able to join +in the laugh at himself, reserving, however, his right to "knock de +rascal who did it into a squash." + +The following day the weather changed, a wind sprang up nearly from +the north, which increased rapidly, until toward afternoon it was +blowing half a gale, before which the whole fleet, with their main +and topsails set, ran southward at great speed. A heavy cross sea was +running, the wares raised by the gale clashing with the heavy swell +previously rolling in from the westward, and so violent and sudden +were the lurches and rolls of the "Nancy" that the master feared that +her masts would go. + +"How tremendously she rolls, Tom." + +"Tremendously; the deck seems almost upright, and the water right +under our feet each time she goes over. She feels as if she were going +to turn topsy-turvy each roll. It's bad enough on deck; but it will be +worse down below." + +"A great deal worse, Peter, it's nearly dark already; it will strike +eight bells in a minute or two, and then we shall have to go down. +There's no danger, of course, of the ship turning over, but it won't +be pleasant down below. Look out, Peter!" + +The exclamation was caused by an awful crash. The ship had given a +tremendous lurch, when the long-boat, which was stowed amidships, +suddenly tore away from its fastenings and came crashing down. +It passed within three feet of where the boys were sitting, and +completely tore away the bulwark, leaving a great gap in the side, +where it had passed through. "Look, Tom, Sam's overboard!" Peter +exclaimed. + +Sam had been sitting on the bulwark, a few feet from them, holding on +by a shroud, when the boat came down upon him; with a cry he had let +go of the shroud and started back, falling into the water just as the +boat struck the bulwark. "There he is, Tom," Peter said, as he saw the +black only a few yards from the side. "He is hurt, come on," catching +up the end of a long rope coiled up on the deck close to their feet, +the boys jumped overboard together. A dozen strokes took them up to +Sam; but the black hull of the ship had already glanced past them. +They could hear loud shouts, but could not distinguish a word. + +"Quick, round him, Peter!" and, in a moment, the boys twisted the rope +round the body of the black, and knotted it just as the drag of the +ship tightened it. Thus Sam's safety was secured, but the strain was +so tremendous as they tore through the water, that it was impossible +for the boys to hold on, and, in a moment, they were torn from their +hold. + +"All right, Peter," Tom said cheerily, as they dashed the water from +their eyes, "there is the boat." + +The remains of the boat were not ten yards distant, and in a few +strokes they had gained it. It was stove in and broken, but still held +together, floating on a level with the water's edge. With some trouble +the boys got inside her, and sat down on the bottom, so that their +heads were just out of water. + +Then they had time to look round. The ship was already disappearing in +the gathering darkness. + +"This boat will soon go to pieces, Tom," was Peter's first remark. + +"I expect it will, Peter; but we must stick to its pieces. We had +better get off our boots. The water is pretty warm, that's one +comfort." + +"Do you think the ship will come back for us, Tom?" + +"I don't think she can, Peter; at any rate, it is certain she can't +find us, it would take a long time to bring her round, and then, you +see, she could not sail straight back against the wind." + +"Look here, Tom, I remember when I climbed up to look into the boats +yesterday that there were some little casks lashed under the seats, +and a sailor told me they were always kept full of water in case the +boats were wanted suddenly. If they are still there we might empty +them out, and they could keep us afloat any time." + +"Hurrah! Peter, capital, let's see." + +To their great delight the boys found four small water-kegs fastened +under the seats. Three of these they emptied, and fastening one of +them to that which they had left full, and then each taking hold of +one of the slings which were fastened to the kegs for convenience of +carriage, they waited quietly. In less than ten minutes from the time +when they first gained their frail refuge, a great wave broke just +upon them, and completely smashed up the remains of the boat. They had +cut off some rope from the mast, which they found with its sail furled +ready for use in the boat, and now roughly lashed themselves together, +face to face, so that they had a keg on each side. They had also +fastened a long piece of rope to the other kegs, so that they would +float near them. + +It was a long and terrible night for them, generally their heads and +chests were well above the water, but at times a wave would break with +its white crest, and, for a time, the foam would be over their heads. +Fortunately the water was warm, and the wind fell a good deal. The +boys talked occasionally to each other, and kept up each other's +courage. Once or twice, in spite of the heavy sea, they were so much +overcome with exhaustion that they dozed uneasily for a while, with +their heads upon each other's shoulders, and great was their feeling +of relief and pleasure when morning began to break. + +"It is going to be a splendid day, Peter, and the wind is dropping +fast." + +"Look, Tom," Peter said, "there are some of the planks of the boat +jammed in with the kegs." + +It was as Peter said; the two kegs, one empty and the other full, were +floating about ten yards off, at the length of the rope by which they +were attached to the boys, while with them was a confused mass of +wreckage of the boat. + +"That is capital, Peter, we will see if we can't make a raft +presently." + +As the sun rose and warmed the air, the boys strength and spirits +revived, and in a few hours they were so refreshed that they +determined to set about their raft. The wind had now entirely dropped, +the waves were still very high, but they came in long, smooth, regular +swells, over which they rose and fell almost imperceptibly. + +"They must be rolling a good deal more in the 'Nancy' than we are +here, Peter. Now, the first thing is to have a drink. What a blessing +it is we have water." With their knives they soon got the bung out of +the water-keg, and each took a long drink, and then carefully closed +it up again. + +"There, Peter, we have drunk as much as we wanted this time; but we +must be careful, there is no saying how long we may be before we are +picked up. Hurrah, Peter, here are the masts and sails, so we shall +have plenty of cord." + +It took the boys nearly three hours to complete their task to their +satisfaction. When it was concluded they had the three empty kegs +lashed in a triangle about five feet apart, while two planks crossing +the triangle, assisted to keep all firm and tight; floating in the +center of the triangle was the keg of water. "There, I don't think +we can improve that, Peter," Tom said at last, "now, let us get on +and try it." They did so, and, to their great delight, found that +it floated a few inches above water. "We may as well get the masts +on board, Peter, and let the sails tow alongside. They may come in +useful; and now the first thing is to dry ourselves and our clothes." + +The clothes were soon spread out to dry, and the boys luxuriated in +the warmth of the sun. + +"What great, smooth waves these are, Tom, sometimes we are down in a +valley which runs miles long, and then we are up on a hill." + +"Here we lay, all the day, in the bay of Biscay, oh!" Tom laughed. +"I only hope that the wished-for morrow may bring the sail in sight, +Peter. However, we can hold on for a few days, I suppose. That is a +four-gallon keg, so that we have got a quart of water each for eight +days, and hunger isn't so bad to bear as thirst. We have pretty well +done for our uniforms, our bugles are the only things that have not +suffered." + +For the boys' companies being on deck at the time of the accident, +they both had their bugles on when they jumped overboard. + +"Our last upset was when that bargee canted us over at Eton, rather a +different business that, Peter." + +"My shirt is not dry yet, Tom; but I shall put it on again, for the +sun is too hot to be pleasant." + +Tom followed Peter's example. + +"Do you think, Tom, that we had better try to get up a sort of sail +and make for land, or remain where we are?" + +"Remain where we are, Peter, I should say. I suppose we must be a +hundred miles from the French coast, and even if the wind blew fair +we should be a long time getting there, and with the certainty of a +prison when we arrived. Still, if there were a strong west wind, I +suppose it would be our best way; as it is we have nothing to do but +to wait quietly, and hope for a ship. We are in the right line, and +there must be lots of vessels on their way, besides those which sailed +with us, for Portsmouth. So we must keep watch and watch. Now, Peter, +you lie down on that plank, it is just about long enough, you shall +have two hours' sleep, and then I'll have two, after that we will have +four hours each." + +"How are we to count time?" Peter said laughing. + +"I never thought of that," Tom said, looking at his watch. "Of course +it has stopped. We must guess as near as we can; at any rate, you go +to sleep first, and, when I am too sleepy to keep watch any longer, I +will wake you up." + +So passed that day and the next night. A light breeze sprung up from +the southwest, and the sun again shone out brightly. + +"I feel as if I wanted breakfast horribly," Peter said, with an +attempt at a smile. "Do you think that there is any possibility of +catching anything?" + +"We have nothing to make hooks with, Peter, and nothing to bait them +with if we had." + +"There are lots of tiny fish swimming all about, Tom, if we could but +catch them." + +Tom was silent for awhile; then he said, "Look here, Peter. Let us cut +a piece off the sail about five feet long, and say three feet wide, +double it longways, and sew up the ends so as to make a bag; we can +unravel some string, and make holes with our knives. Then we can sink +it down two or three feet, and watch it; and when we see that some +little fish have got in it, we can draw it up very gently, and, by +raising it gradually from the sea, the water will run out, and we +shall catch the fish." + +Peter agreed that at any rate it was worth trying; for, even if it did +not succeed, it was better for them to be doing something than sitting +idle. The sail and the floating wreckage were pulled alongside, and +the boys set to work. In three hours a large and shallow bag was made, +with some improvements upon Tom's original plan. The mouth was kept +open by two crossed pieces of wood, and four cords from the corners +were attached to the end of the oar which formed their fishing-rod. At +last it was finished, and the bag lowered. + +To the horror of the boys, it was discovered that it would not sink. +They were ready to cry with vexation, for the want of food had made +them feel faint and weak. + +"What have we got that is heavy?" Tom asked in despair. + +"I have got fourpence in halfpence, Tom, and there are our knives and +watches." + +Their pockets were ransacked, and the halfpence, knives, and watches +were placed in the bottom of the bag and lowered. Still the wood-work +kept afloat. + +"There are the bugles, Tom," Peter cried in delight. These had been +fastened to the raft, and were now hastily untied and placed in the +canvas bag. + +It sank now, and the boys lowered it five or six feet, so that they +could partly see into it. "There are lots of little fish swimming +about, Tom," Peter said in a whisper. "Some are almost as long as +one's hand. Do you think that they will go in, Tom?" + +"I hope the glitter of the bugles and watches will attract them, +Peter." + +"There, Tom, there--I saw a whole swarm of little ones go in." + +"Wait a minute or two, Peter, to let them get well down, and then draw +up as quietly as possible." + +Very cautiously the boys raised the point of their rod until the +top of the square-mouthed bag was level with the surface; then they +brought it close to them and looked in, and as they did so gave a +simultaneous cheer. There, in the bottom of the canvas, two feet below +them, were a number of little fish moving about. Raising the rod +still higher, they gradually lifted the net out of the sea, the water +running quickly off as they did so, and then they proceeded to examine +their prize. + +"We will take out one and one, Peter; give them a nip as you take them +up, that will kill them." There were two fish of about three inches +long, another three or four of two inches, and some thirty or forty +the size of minnows. It was scarcely more than a mouthful each, but +it was a stay for a moment to their stomachs, and no one ever said a +thanksgiving with deeper feeling and heartiness than did the boys when +they had emptied their canvas net. + +"We need not be anxious about food now, Peter; if we can catch these +in five minutes, we can get enough each day to satisfy us. They quench +the thirst too. We must limit ourselves to half a pint of water a day, +and we can hold on for a fortnight. We are safe to be picked up before +that." + +All the afternoon and evening the boys continued to let down and draw +up their net, sometimes bringing in only a few tiny fish, sometimes +getting half a dozen of the larger kind. By nightfall they had +satisfied the cravings of hunger, and felt stronger and better. One or +two sails had been seen during the day, but always at such distances +that it was evident at once that they could not pass within hail. That +night, fatigued with their exertions, both laid down and went to sleep +until morning, and slept more comfortably than before; for they had +fastened a piece of the sail tightly on the top of the raft, and lay +softly suspended in that, instead of being balanced upon a narrow and +uncomfortable plank. They felt new creatures when they woke, pulled +up their net, had a mouthful of raw fish, took off their clothes, and +had a swim, and then set to earnestly to fish. The sun was brighter, +and the fish in consequence kept deeper than upon the preceding day; +still by evening they had caught enough to take the edge off, if not +to satisfy, their hunger. The fishing, however, during the last hours +of daylight was altogether neglected, for behind them they could see +a sail, which appeared as if it might possibly come close enough to +observe them. There was still the long, steady swell coming in from +the Atlantic, and a light breeze was blowing from the north. The boys +had been so intent upon their fishing, that they had not noticed her +until she was within nine or ten miles of them. "She will not be up +for an hour and a half, Peter," Tom said, "and the sun will be down +long before that. I fear that the chance of their seeing us is very +small indeed. However, we will try. Let us get the net out of the +water, and hold it and the oar up. It is possible that some one may +see the canvas with a telescope before the sun goes down. Take the +things out of the net." + +The oar with the canvas bag was elevated, and the boys anxiously +watched the course of the vessel. She was a large ship, but they could +only see her when they rose upon the top of the long smooth waves. "I +should think that she will pass within a mile of us, Peter," Tom said, +after half an hour's watching, "but I fear that she will not be much +closer. How unfortunate she had not come along an hour earlier. She +would have been sure to see us if it had been daylight. I don't think +that there is much chance now, for there is no moon. However, thank +God, we can hold on very well now, and next time we may have better +luck." + +The sun had set more than half an hour before the ship came abreast of +them. They had evidently not been seen. + +"Now, Peter," Tom said, "let us both hallo together; the wind is very +light, and it is just possible they may hear us." + +Again and again the boys shouted, but the ship sailed steadily on. +Peter dashed the tears aside, and Tom said, with a quiver in his +voice, "Never mind, Peter; better luck next time, old boy. God has +been so good to us, that I feel quite confident we shall be saved." + +"So do I, Tom," Peter said. "It was only a disappointment for a +minute. We may as well put the oar down, for my arm and back ache +holding it." + +"Mind how you do it, Peter. If we let the end go through the canvas, +we shall lose our watches and bugles, and then we shall not be able to +fish." + +"Oh, Tom, the bugles!" + +"What, Peter?" Tom said, astonished. + +"We can make them hear, Tom, don't you see?" + +"Hurrah, Peter! so we can. What a fool I was to forget it!" + +In a moment the bugles rang out the assembly across the water. Again +and again the sharp, clear sound rose on the quiet evening air. + +"Look, Peter, there are men going up the rigging to look round. Sound +again!" + +Again and again they sounded the call, and then they saw the ship's +head come round, and her bow put towards them, and then they fell on +their knees and thanked God that they were saved. + +In ten minutes the ship was close to them, thrown up into the wind, a +boat was lowered, and in another minute or two was alongside. + +"Hallo!" the officer in charge exclaimed, "two boys, all alone. Here, +help them in, lads--that's it; now pull for the ship. Here, boys, take +a little brandy from this flask. How long have you been on that raft?" + +"It is three days since we went overboard, sir; but we were in the +water for about eighteen hours before we made the raft." + +Tom and Peter drank a little brandy, and felt better for it; but they +were weaker than they thought, for they had to be helped up the side +of the ship. A number of officers were grouped round the gangway, and +the boys saw that they were on board a vessel of war. + +"Only these boys?" asked the captain in surprise of the officer who +had brought them on board. + +"That is all, sir." + +"Doctor, you had better see to them," the captain said. "If they are +strong enough to talk, after they have had some soup, let them come +to my cabin; if not, let them turn in in the sick bay, and I will see +them in the morning. One question though, boys. Are there any others +about--any one for me to look for or pick up?" + +"No one else, sir," Tom said, and then followed the doctor aft. A +basin of soup and a glass of sherry did wonders for the boys, and in +an hour they proceeded to the captain's cabin, dressed in clothes +which the doctor had borrowed from two of the midshipmen for them, +for their own could never be worn again; indeed, they had not brought +their jackets from the raft, those garments having shrunk so from the +water, that the boys had not been able to put them on again, after +first taking them off to dry. + +The doctor accompanied them, and in the captain's cabin they found the +first lieutenant, who had been in charge of the boat which picked them +up. + +"I am glad to see you looking so much better," the captain said as +they entered. "Sit down. Do you know," he went on with a smile, "I +do not think that any of us would have slept had you not recovered +sufficiently to tell your story to-night. We have been puzzling over +it in vain. How you two boys came to be adrift alone on a raft, made +up of three water-kegs, as Mr. Armstrong tells me, and how you came to +have two bugles with you on the raft, is altogether beyond us." + +"The last matter is easily explained, sir," Tom said. "My brother and +myself are buglers in H.M.'s Regiment of Norfolk Rangers, and as we +were on duty when we went overboard, we had our bugles slung over our +shoulders." + +"Buglers!" the captain said in surprise. "Why from your appearance and +mode of expressing yourselves, I take you to be gentlemen's sons." + +"So we are, sir," Tom said quietly, "and I hope gentlemen--at any +rate we have been Etonians. But we have lost our father, and are now +buglers in the Rangers." + +"Well, lads," the captain said after a pause, "and now tell us how you +came upon this little raft?" + +Tom related modestly the story of their going overboard from the +"Nancy," of the formation of the raft, and of their after proceedings. +Their hearers were greatly astonished at the story; and the captain +said, "Young gentlemen, you have done a very gallant action, and have +behaved with a coolness and bravery which would have done credit to +old sailors. Had your father been alive he might have been proud +indeed of you. I should be proud had you been my sons. If you are +disposed to change services I will write directly we reach the Tagus +to obtain your discharge, and will give you midshipmen's berths on +board this ship. Don't answer now; you can think it over by the time +we reach Portugal. I will not detain you now; a night's rest will set +you up. Mr. Armstrong will introduce you to the midshipmen to-morrow; +you are passengers here now, and will mess with them. Good-night." + +It was not many minutes before the boys were asleep in their hammocks. +If people's ears really tingle when they are being spoken about, +Tom and Peter would have had but little sleep that night. The first +lieutenant related the circumstances to the other lieutenants; the +second lieutenant, whose watch it was, told the gunner, who related +it to the petty officers; the doctor told his mates, who retailed the +story to the midshipmen; and so gradually it went over the whole ship, +and officers and men agreed that it was one of the pluckiest and +coolest things ever done. + +The boys slept until nearly breakfast time, and were just dressed when +Mr. Armstrong came for them and took them to the midshipmen's berth, +where they were received with a warmth and heartiness which quite +surprised them. The midshipmen and mates pressed forward to shake +hands with them, and the stiflingly close little cock-pit was the +scene of an ovation. The boys were quite glad when the handshaking was +over, and they sat down to the rough meal which was then usual among +midshipmen. As the vessel had only left England four days before, +the fare was better than it would have been a week later, for there +was butter, cold ham and tongue upon the table. After breakfast they +were asked to tell the story over again, and this they did with great +modesty. Many questions were asked, and it was generally regretted +that they were not sailors. Upon going up on deck there was quite an +excitement among the sailors to get a look at them, and the gunner and +other petty officers came up and shook hands with them heartily, and +the boys wished from the depths of their hearts that people would not +make such a fuss about nothing; for, as Tom said to Peter, "Of course +we should not have jumped overboard if we had thought that we could +not have kept hold of the rope." + +That day they dined in the cabin with the captain, who, after the +officers present had withdrawn, asked them if they would tell him +about their past lives. This the boys did frankly, and took the +opportunity of explaining that they had chosen the army because the +enemies' fleet having been destroyed, there was less chance of active +service in the navy than with the army just starting for Lisbon, and +that their uncle having commanded the regiment that they were in, they +had entered it, and had received so much kindness that they had fair +reason to hope that they would eventually obtain commissions. Hence, +while thanking him most warmly for his offer, they had decided to go +on in the path that they had chosen. + +The captain remarked that, after what they had said, although he +should have been glad to have them with him, he thought that they had +decided rightly. + +The next morning, when the boys woke, they were surprised at the +absence of any motion of the vessel, and upon going on deck they found +that they were running up the Tagus, and that Lisbon was in sight. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +PORTUGAL. + + +The boys were delighted with the appearance of the Tagus, covered as +it now was with a fleet of transports and merchantmen. As they were +looking at it, the officer commanding the marines on board, who had +talked a good deal to them upon the preceding day, came up to them. "I +thought that you would be in a fix about clothes, my lads," he said. +"You could not very well join in these midshipman's uniforms, so I set +the tailor yesterday to cut down a couple of spare suits of my corps. +The buttons will not be right, but you can easily alter that when you +join. You had better go below at once and see if the things fit pretty +well. I have told the tailor to take them to the cock-pit and if they +do not fit they can alter them at once." + +Thanking the officer very much for his thoughtful kindness, and much +relieved in mind--for they had already been wondering what they should +do--the boys ran below, and found that the tailor had guessed their +sizes pretty correctly, aided as he had been by the trousers they +had worn when they came on board. A few alterations were necessary, +and these he promised to get finished in a couple of hours. They had +scarcely gone on deck again when the anchor was let fall, and a boat +was lowered, in order that the captain might proceed to shore with the +despatches of which he was the bearer. + +Just as he was upon the point of leaving the deck, his eye fell upon +the boys. "I shall be back again in an hour or two," he said; "do not +leave until I return. I will find out where your regiment is, and if +it has marched I will give you a certificate of how I picked you up, +otherwise you may be stopped on the way, and get into a scrape as two +boys who have strayed away from their regiment." + +So saying, the captain got into his boat and rowed to shore. It was +one o'clock before he returned. The boys had dinner with the gunroom +officers, then changed their dress, and had now the appearance of +buglers in the marines. + +The captain at once sent for them. "Your regiment went on yesterday +with the rest of the division. It halts to-day ten miles out of the +town. There is the certificate I spoke of. Mr. Armstrong is just going +off with two boats' crew to assist in unloading stores; I have asked +him to hand you over to the charge of some officer going up with a +convoy. And now good-bye, lads. I wish you every luck, and hope that +some day or other you may win your epaulets." + +With renewed thanks for his kindness, the boys went up on deck. There +they shook hands and said good-bye to all the officers and midshipmen. +As they were waiting while the boats were being lowered, two of the +sailors went aft to the captain, who had come up from below and was +walking alone on the quarter-deck, and, with a touch of the hat, the +spokesman said, "Your honor, we're come to ax as how, if your honor +has no objection, we might just give a parting cheer to those 'ere +youngsters." + +"Well, Jones," the captain said, smiling, "it's rather an unusual +thing for the crew of one of His Majesty's ships to cheer two young +soldiers." + +"It is unusual, your honor, mighty unusual, because soldiers ain't in +general of much account at sea; but you see, your honor, this ain't a +usual circumstance, nohow. These here boys, which ain't much more than +babbies, have done what there ain't many men, not even of those who +are born and bred to the sea, would have done; and we should just like +to give them a bit of a cheer for good luck." + +"Very well, Jones, tell the men they can do as they like." + +Accordingly, as the boys took their seats in the boat they were +surprised at seeing the crew clustering to the side of the ship, while +some of the men ran up the rigging. + +"What can the men be up to?" Tom asked Mr. Armstrong in surprise. + +The lieutenant smiled, for he knew what was coming. + +"Sheer off, men," he said, and as he did so the boatswain of the ship +gave the word, "Now, lads, three cheers for them boys; may they have +the luck they deserve." + +Three thundering cheers burst from the whole crew, the men in the +boats tossing their oars in the naval fashion of acknowledgment of +the salute. Tom and Peter, astonished and affected, stood up, took +off their caps, and waved their hands in thanks to the crowd of faces +looking down upon them, and then sat down again and wiped their eyes. + +"Row on," the lieutenant said, and the oars fell in the water with +a splash; one more cheer arose, and then the boats rowed for the +landing-place. The boys were too much affected to look up or speak, +until they reached the shore, nor did they notice a boat which rowed +past them upon its way to the vessel they had left, just after they +had started. It contained an officer in a general's uniform. The boat +steered to the ship's side, and the officer ascended the ladder. The +captain was on deck. "Ah, Craufurd," he said, "this is an unexpected +pleasure." + +"I have just come back from my division for a few hours, Merivale; +there are a lot of stores which are essential, and some of my +artillery is not landed, so I thought I could hurry things up a bit. +My spare charger, and most of the chargers of my staff, are being +landed, too; the ship they came in was a day or two late; and as I had +to confer with the Portuguese Minister of War, I am killing a good +many birds with one stone. I heard you had just come in, and as I was +on board the "Clio" about my charger, I thought it would not be much +out of my way to run round and shake hands with you." + +"I am very glad you did. Come into my cabin; you can spare time to +take some lunch, I hope." + +While they were at lunch General Craufurd remarked, "So you have just +lost one of your officers, I see; promoted to another ship, eh?" + +"Lost an officer!" Captain Merivale said in surprise. "No, not that I +have heard of. What makes you think so?" + +"I thought so by the cheering the ship's crew gave that boat that left +the ship just before I came up. There was only a naval lieutenant in +her, and I supposed that he had just got his ship, and I thought by +the heartiness of the cheering what a good fellow he must be." + +"But it was not the lieutenant the men were cheering," Captain +Merivale said with a smile. + +"No!" General Craufurd said, surprised. "Why, there was no one else +in the boat. I looked attentively as I passed. There was only a +lieutenant, a midshipman who was steering, the men rowing, and two +little marine buglers, who had their handkerchiefs up to their faces. +So you see I took a very minute survey." + +"You did indeed," Captain Merivale said, laughing. "Well, it was just +these little buglers that the crew of the ship were cheering." + +General Craufurd looked up incredulously. "You're joking, Merivale. +The crew of His Majesty's frigate 'Latona' cheer two buglers of +marines! No, no, that won't do." + +"It is a fact, though, Craufurd, unlikely as it seems, except that the +buglers belong to the Norfolk Rangers, and not to the Marines." + +"The Rangers! They are in Hill's division. What is it all about? There +must be something very strange about it." + +"There is indeed," Captain Merivale said, "very strange." And he then +related the whole story to his visitor. + +"They are trumps indeed," the general said when the narrative was +ended, "and I am very glad that I happened to hear it. I will speak to +Hill about it, and will keep my eye upon them. Be assured they shall +have their epaulets as soon as possible--that is, if their conduct is +at all equal to their pluck. It is the least we can do when, as you +say, they have refused midshipmen's berths to stick to us. And now I +must be off." + +The boat landed General Craufurd at the same landing-place at which +Tom and Peter had disembarked half an hour before. Lieutenant +Armstrong had spoken a few words to the officer who was superintending +the landing of stores and horses, and he, being far too busy to stop +to talk, briefly said that the boys could go up to join their regiment +with a convoy of stores which would start that night. + +After saying good-bye to their friend the lieutenant, the boys sat +down upon some bales, and were watching with much amusement and +interest the busy scene before them. As General Craufurd passed they +rose and saluted. + +"You are the boys from the 'Latona,' are you not?" + +"Yes, sir," the boys answered in surprise. + +"Can you ride?" + +"Yes, sir." + +"Follow me, then." + +Much surprised, the boys followed the general until he made his way +through the confusion to a group of newly landed horses. Near them +were a couple of mounted Hussars, who, at the sight of the general, +rode forward with his charger. He made a sign to them to wait a +moment, and walked up to the men who were holding the newly landed +horses. + +"Which of you have got charge of two horses?" + +Several of the men answered at once. + +"Which of you are servants of officers on my staff?" + +Three of those who had answered before replied now. + +"Very well; just put saddles on to two of them. These lads will ride +them; they are going out with me at once; they will hand them over to +your masters." + +In another five minutes Tom and Peter, to their surprise and +delight, were clattering along through the streets of Lisbon upon +two first-rate horses in company with the two Hussars, while, twenty +lengths ahead, trotted General Craufurd with two officers who had been +down to Lisbon upon duty similar to his own. Once outside the town, +the general put his horse into a gallop, and his followers of course +did the same. Once or twice General Craufurd glanced back to see how +the boys rode, for a doubt had crossed his mind as to whether he had +been wise in putting them upon such valuable horses, but when he saw +that they were evidently accustomed to the work, he paid no further +attention to them. + +The officers riding beside him, however, looked back several times. + +"What luck we have, to be sure, Tom," Peter said, "and I can't +understand this a bit. How could the general know that we came from +the 'Latona'; as he evidently did, and by the way these officers have +looked back twice, I can't help thinking that he is talking about us." + +Tom was as puzzled as Peter, but they soon forgot the subject, and +engaged in an animated conversation with the Hussars as to the +situation and position of the army, and the supposed strength and +locality of the French, concerning which they were, of course, in +complete ignorance. An hour and a half's sharp riding took them to +Torres Vedras, a small town which afterwards became celebrated for +the tremendous lines which Wellington erected there. The troops were +encamped in its vicinity, the general having his quarters at the house +of the Alcalde, or Mayor. + +"Your regiment is a mile and a half distant, lads," General Craufurd +said as they drew up at his quarters; "you will have difficulty in +finding it this evening. Sergeant, take these lads round to the house +where my orderlies are quartered, and give them some supper. They can +join their regiment in the morning. I have heard of you, lads, from +Captain Merivale, and shall mention your conduct to General Hill, and +be assured I will keep my eye upon you." + +The boys were soon asleep upon a heap of straw, and at six next +morning were upon the road, having already had some coffee and bread +for breakfast. They had no difficulty in finding their way, for +orderlies were already galloping about, and the bugle calls came sharp +upon their ears. The division was to march at seven. The Rangers +happened to be the first in advance, so that they passed through the +other regiments to arrive at theirs. + +The tents were down when they arrived, and packed in readiness for the +bullock carts which stood by. The boys paused a little distance off, +and looked on with delight at the busy scene. At a note on the bugle +the tents and other baggage were stowed in the carts, and then the men +hitched on their knapsacks, unpiled arms, and began to fall into rank. + +No one noticed the boys as they passed between the groups and +approached the band, who were mustering by the colors, which were as +usual placed in front of the guard tent. + +"There's Sambo," Tom said; "I am glad they got him safe on board." + +The negro was the first to perceive the boys as they came close up +to him. As he saw them he gave a sudden start, his eyes opened wider +and wider until the whites showed all round, his teeth chattered, the +shiny black of his face turned to a sort of dirty gray, and he threw +up his hands with a loud cry, "oh, golly, here's dose boys' spirits!" + +He stepped back, heedless that the big drum was behind him, and the +next moment went back with a crash into it, and remained there with +his knees doubled up and his face looking out between them, too +frightened and horror-struck to make the least movement to extricate +himself. + +For a moment no one noticed him, for at his cry they had all turned to +the boys, and stood as if petrified at seeing those whom they believed +had been drowned before their eyes a week before. The silence did +not last long, the boys bursting into a shout of laughter at Sam's +appearance. + +"Spirits! Sam," Tom said; "not by a long way yet, man. How are you +all? Come, get out of that, Sam and shake hands." And as the band with +a shout crowded round them, the boys helped Sam, who was trembling all +over from the shock and fright, from the drum. + +For a moment the boys were quite confused and bewildered, for as they +hauled Sam to his feet their comrades of the band pressed round them +cheering, every one trying to shake them by the hand. + +The news spread like wildfire among the troops, and there was at once +a general rush to the spot. The boys were seized in an instant, and +each raised on the shoulders of two of the grenadiers, and as they +made their appearance above the heads of the crowd a tremendous cheer +broke from the whole regiment. + +"What can be the matter?" was the general exclamation of the colonel +and officers, who were just finishing their breakfasts in a cottage +which stood close behind the spot where their tents had been pitched +in the rear of the regiment. "What can be the matter?"--and as the +cheering continued there was a general rush to the door. There they +stood astonished at seeing the whole of the men clustered in one spot, +shouting and waving their caps. + +"What can be the matter?" the colonel said again; "the whole regiment +seems to have gone mad." + +"We shall know in a minute," Captain Manley said; "they are coming in +this direction." + +"Look at that fellow Sambo," exclaimed Carruthers; "he looks madder +than all the rest." + +In spite of the intense surprise which all were feeling, there was a +general laugh, for the black was performing antics like one possessed; +his cap was gone, he jumped, he yelled, he waved his arms, with a +drumstick in each hand, wildly over his head, he twisted round and +round; he seemed really out of his mind. Suddenly he left the crowd, +and rushed on ahead at full speed towards the group of officers, still +leaping and yelling and waving his drumsticks. + +The officers instinctively drew together as he approached, for they +thought that the gigantic negro was really out of his mind. He stopped +suddenly as he came up to them, and tried to fall into his usual +attitude of attention. + +"Oh, Massa Colonel," he said in hoarse, sobbing tones, "only to +think, only to think. Scuse Sam, sar, but Sam feel he's going to bust +right up wid joy, massa. Dat no matter, but only to think. Bress de +Almighty, sar! only to think!" + +None of the officers spoke for a minute in answer to these disjointed +exclamations. They were affected at the man's great emotion. His black +skin was still strangely pale, his eyes were distended, his lips +quivered, tears were rolling down his cheeks, and his huge frame was +shaken with sobs. + +"Calm yourself, Sam--be calm, my man," the colonel said kindly. "Try +and tell us what has happened. What are the men so excited about? What +is the matter with them?" + +"Oh, Massa Colonel," Sam said, "me try tell you all 'boat it. Only to +think, sar, dose boys cum back again; dose boys, sar, bress dem, dat +jumped into de water and got drowned just to save dis poor niggar, +sar. Dey cum back again; only tink ob dat!" + +The officers looked at one another in surprise. + +"I do believe he means the Scudamores! colonel," Captain Manley +exclaimed; "but no, it is impossible, no one could have lived five +minutes in that sea, and we know that they could not have been picked +up, for we were the last ship in the fleet." + +"Yes, yes, sar, dat's dem, dey cum back sure enuff," Sam said. + +Then Carruthers exclaimed, "I do believe it is so; there are a couple +of boys on the shoulders of the men in the middle of the crowd. Yes, +and, by Jove, it is the Scudamores. Hurrah! I am glad." + +There was a general exclamation of pleasure from the whole group, for +the regret for the boys, who had, as was believed, perished in the +performance of such a gallant action, had been general and sincere, +and Captain Manley lifted his cap and said reverently, "Thank God, +these gallant lads are saved;" and those around, although some of them +were but little addicted to prayer, repeated the words and imitated +the action. + +Carruthers would have stepped forward in his eagerness to greet his +former school-fellows, but Captain Manley laid his hand quietly on his +shoulder and said in a low tone, "Wait, Carruthers, let the colonel +welcome them." + +And now the crowd came up to the cottage, those in front falling back +as they approached, so as to let the grenadiers come forward with +their burden. The boys were lowered to the ground, and stood at once +at attention; their faces were both flushed with excitement, and their +eyes swollen with tears, so much were they both moved by the welcome +which had greeted them. + +There was a dead silence for a moment, and then Colonel Tritton said +in a loud, clear voice, which was heard all over the throng of men, "I +am glad, lads, to see you back again. I never expected to have seen +you again after we caught a glimpse of you as the sea washed you away. +You have seen how the men have welcomed you, and I can assure you +that the pleasure of the officers that two such gallant young fellows +should have been saved is no less than that of your comrades. A braver +act than that which you performed was never done. I shake hands with +you, and congratulate you in the name of the whole regiment." And, +suiting the action to the words, Colonel Tritton stepped forward and +shook the boys warmly by the hand, amidst a great cheer upon the part +of the whole regiment. Then he held up his hand for silence again. +"Bugler, sound the assembly; fall in, my lads, or we shall be late. +Come in here, boys; you can get something to eat, and tell us in a few +words how you were saved, for, even now that I see you it seems almost +impossible." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +THE PASSAGE OF THE DUORO--TALAVERA. + + +Very severe was the drill and discipline, and not very abundant was +the food, and there was a general feeling of pleasure when, by the +general concentration of the army at Coimbra, it was evident that +active operations were about to commence. On the 5th of May 9000 +Portuguese, 3000 Germans, and 13,000 British troops were assembled. +Sir Arthur was already there, and upon the 6th General Beresford +marched with 10,000 men, and orders were issued for the rest of the +army to march out early the next day. + +The Norfolk Rangers were in high glee that night, and many were the +tales told by the old soldiers of former engagements in which they +had taken part. Next morning, at daybreak, the tents were struck, the +baggage packed, and the wagons loaded. The people of Coimbra came out +in crowds to see the troops march, and many were the blessings and +good wishes poured out as the long line wound through the streets of +the city. + +Hill's division was the last, and the rain was pouring down with great +force by the time they started. The march, however, was not a very +long one, for Beresford's division, which was to operate upon the +Upper Duoro, had a long distance to make, and it was necessary that +all should be ready for simultaneous action. For this purpose the army +halted the next day, and upon the 9th marched to Aveiro on the River +Vonga. Here a large flotilla of boats was found, and the Norfolk +Rangers with two other regiments were ordered to embark at once. The +Portuguese fishermen entered heart and soul into the business, and in +perfect silence the little flats were rowed up the lake of Ovar. + +The soldiers were greatly crowded in the boats, and were glad, indeed, +when just as morning dawned they landed at the town of Ovar. + +By this movement they were placed upon the right flank of Francheschi, +the general who commanded the advanced division of the French army. +Soon after they had landed the French were attacked in front, and +finding their flank turned, and the whole British force, which they +had believed to be seven days' march away, in their front, they fell +back hastily. + +To their great disappointment, the Rangers took no share in this the +first skirmish of the war. But Hill's orders were not to press on the +enemy's rear. Three days more of marching and skirmishing brought them +close to the Duoro on the evening of the 11th. The enemy crossed that +evening and destroyed the bridge, and during the night the British +troops were all brought up, and massed behind the hill called the +Serra. This hill stood upon a sharp elbow which the river makes just +above the town of Oporto, and the British were here completely hidden +from Marshal Soult, who had no idea that they were so close at hand. +Indeed, knowing that the bridge was broken and that all the boats +had been carefully taken over to that side of the river, the Marshal +dreamt not that Sir Arthur would attempt to cross, but imagined that +he would take boats lower down near the mouth of the river and there +endeavor to cross. To prevent such an attempt Soult had massed his +army below Oporto. + +The troops were ordered to pile arms, and eat their breakfast, but to +keep in position. "I wonder how we are to cross the river, Tom?" Peter +said. "It is three hundred yards across, with a rapid current, no man +in the world could swim that, and carry his musket and ammunition +across." + +"I expect Sir Arthur is reconnoitering, Peter; I saw him go up the +hill to that convent there; he must be able to see from there right +over Oporto." + +An hour passed, and then two or three officers were seen coming down +from the hill; one went up to General Hill, who happened at that +moment to be talking to Colonel Tritton. "You are to prepare to cross, +sir, Colonel Waters has discovered a small boat brought across by a +Portuguese in the night. They are going to cross to that great convent +you see upon the other side. They will bring back boats with them, and +you will cross at once, take possession of the convent, and hold it +against any force that may be brought against you until reinforcements +arrive." + +Very quickly were the orders passed, and with a smile of satisfaction +the men took their arms and fell in. They were moved near the river, +and kept under shelter of some houses. + +"Keep near me," Colonel Tritton said to Tom and Peter, "I may want you +to carry messages, there will be no sounding of bugles to-day." + +Keeping under the shade of some trees so that they could command a +view of the river without being seen from the opposite side, Colonel +Tritton with two of his officers and his two buglers, watched what +was going on. A few paces ahead of them were Generals Paget and Hill, +like themselves, watching the daring experiment. Behind, under shelter +of the houses, were the troops in dense masses. The Rangers, as the +first regiment in General Hill's division, were in front, and would +naturally be the first to cross. It was a most anxious moment, as +Colonel Waters and two Portuguese pushed the tiny boat from shore and +pulled across stream. The bulk of the Serra Hill hid the river at this +point, and even the convent opposite, from the sight of the French +army formed up below the town, but there were no doubt stragglers all +over the city, and the whole baggage of the French army was in retreat +by the road to Valarga which ran at a short distance behind the +convent. + +Most anxiously their eyes were strained upon the opposite bank, from +which they expected to see the flash of musketry, as the little boat +neared the convent. All, however, was as still as death. Behind them +they heard a rumble, and looking round saw eighteen guns on their way +up the hill. From this eminence they could command the ground around +the Seminary, as the convent across the water was called, and thus +afford some aid to the troops as they crossed. + +There was a murmur of satisfaction as the boat neared the opposite +shore, and after lying still for a moment to reconnoiter the convent, +pulled boldly up to the landing-place, where its occupants disembarked +and entered the Seminary. Their absence was not long. In a few minutes +they reappeared with eight or ten men, and then at once entered and +cast off three large boats moored along side. + +The boys could hardly repress a cheer as they saw them fairly under +weigh. An officer now left the side of the General, and came to +Colonel Tritton, "You will get your first company in readiness to +embark, sir; do not let them show themselves until the last moment." + +Colonel Tritton joined his men. "Captain Manley, take your company +forward, when the first boat touches the shore embark. Let there be no +noise or confusion." + +"God bless you, Peter," Tom said, as they separated; "your company +won't be many minutes after us;" for the bugler of the first company +was ill, and Tom was ordered to take his place. + +As the boat touched the shore Captain Manley ordered the leading files +of his company to come from under cover and take their place in the +boat. Twenty-four men entered, and when the other boats were also full +Captain Manley took his place, followed by his bugler, and the boats +pushed off again. + +There was a dead silence in the boat, broken only by the sound of +the oars as the Portuguese tugged manfully at them, each oar being +double-banked by a soldier. The rest sat with their muskets in their +hands, their pouches open ready for use, and their eyes fixed upon the +shore. All was quiet, and with a sigh of relief, and a hearty hurrah +muttered under their breath, the men leapt from the boat and ran up to +the Seminary. + +It was a large building with a flat roof, and the enclosure around it +was surrounded by a high wall which swept round to the water's edge +on either side. The only entrance was through a stout gate studded +with iron. This was already closed and barred; the captain at once +distributed his men at the upper windows of the Seminary, with orders +not to show themselves until the alarm was given. + +They had scarcely taken their places when they were joined by the +occupants of the second boat, while those of the third, in which +General Paget himself crossed, were but a minute or two later. Just as +they touched the shore, however, there was a sudden shout heard, this +was followed by others, and in five minutes a wild hubbub was heard in +the town. Drums beat to arms, and it was evident that the enemy were +at last awake to the fact that the British had effected a lodgment +upon their side of the stream. + +"We shall have it hot presently," Captain Manley said to Tom. "They +will be a quarter of an hour before they can get round here, and we +shall have the three boats back by that time. The one we came in is +half-way across already." + +Seven or eight minutes later a heavy column of men was seen pouring +out of the upper gate of the town. As they got into the open ground, +they threw out clouds of skirmishers, and pushed down towards the +convent. A heavy fire was at once opened upon them by the English guns +upon the Serra Hill. There was no longer any need for concealment. The +soldiers in the convent took their places at the windows, and as they +did so could hear the loud hurrahs of their comrades as they crowded +down to the bank upon the other side of the river to await their turn +to embark. Before the enemy were within musket-shot, three boat loads +more had been landed, and there were, therefore, 150 men now in the +convent. From the gates of the city the French artillery came pouring +out, and, taking up a position upon an eminence, opened fire upon the +convent just as the infantry had got within musket-range. + +So suddenly did the noise of the enemy's cannonade, the crashing of +the balls against the thick walls of the Seminary, the rattle of the +enemy's musketry, and the louder roar of the muskets of the defenders, +blended on both sides with shouts and cheers, break out, that for a +minute or two Tom felt almost bewildered. He had no time, however, to +think, for an officer came up to Captain Manley. "The general is up on +the roof; he wants a bugler sent up to him." + +Captain Manley nodded to Tom, who followed the aide-de-camp on to the +roof. Here he could see all that was passing, and an exciting sight +it was. Crowds of French soldiers were approaching the wall, keeping +up a tremendous musketry fire, whilst behind them three batteries of +field-guns were sending their messengers of death. From every upper +window of the convent the answering flashes came thick and fast, while +overhead hummed the shot from the British guns, on the Serra Hill. +Oporto itself was in a state of uproar. Drums were beating, trumpets +sounding, bells clanging, while from the house-tops the population, +men and women, were waving their handkerchiefs to the English, +gesticulating and making all sorts of pantomimic expression of joy. + +Looking at the river behind, Tom saw with pleasure that some more +boats had been obtained, and that strong reinforcements would soon be +across. The whistling of the bullets and the hum of the round shot +were incessant, and Tom acknowledged to himself that he felt horribly +uncomfortable--much more uncomfortable than he had any idea that he +should feel under fire. Had he been actively engaged, he would have +hardly experienced this feeling; but to stand impassive under a heavy +fire is trying to the nerves of the oldest soldier. He was angry with +himself that he was not more indifferent to the whizzing of the balls; +but the sensation of discomfort under fire is beyond the control of +the will, and it is no unusual thing to see a young soldier who, later +in the day, may display an almost reckless courage, yet at first +flinch whenever balls hiss close by him, in spite of all his efforts +to the contrary. Tom was able, however, to control any outward +manifestation of his feelings, and took his place a few paces behind +General Paget, who was standing with one of his officers by his side, +watching the force which, momentarily increasing, was, in spite of the +British fire, making its way onward towards the gate. + +It was evident that the general considered the danger to be pressing, +as he once or twice looked back to see how quickly the reinforcements +were crossing the river. The first time that he did so, his eye fell +on Tom. "Get behind those big chimneys, lad. There is no use in +exposing yourself unnecessarily." + +Tom obeyed the order with alacrity, and, once in shelter, was soon +able to bring his nerves under control, and to look round the corner +of his shelter without flinching when the bullets sang past. In five +minutes General Hill joined Paget on the roof, and just as he did so +the latter was severely wounded and fell. + +Tom ran forward to assist him, and, kneeling beside him, partially +supported him until four men came up and carried him below. The +position of the little garrison was now very precarious, the artillery +fire concentrated upon them was heavy, and the French swarmed up +to the wall, which they in vain endeavored to climb. The English +kept up a tremendous fire upon them, cheering constantly as fresh +reinforcements arrived, or as the enemy was momentarily repulsed. + +Tom had now lost all nervousness, and was standing eagerly watching +the fight, when a ball knocked his shako off. The general happened to +turn around at the moment. "That was a narrow escape," he said with a +smile. "What is your name, lad?" + +"Scudamore, sir," Tom answered. + +"Scudamore--Scudamore. Yes, I remember the name now. You are one of +the lads General Craufurd spoke to me about. I want to see you. Come +to me to-morrow with your brother. Go down now and join your company; +I do not want you here." + +Tom gladly went down, for he longed to be doing something. He soon +found his company, and, taking up a firelock of one of the men who had +fallen, was soon hard at work loading and firing into the assailants. +For an hour the strife continued. Fortunately General Murray had +found some boats three miles higher up the stream, and had crossed, +thus menacing the enemy's line of retreat. Suddenly a great pealing +of bells were heard in Oporto, with shouting and cheering, and the +house-tops were covered with people waving their handkerchiefs. The +French were evacuating the town. The inhabitants at once took across +some large barges to Villa Neva, a suburb lying across the river and +just below the Serra Hill. Here Sherbrooke began to cross. + +It was now the time for the English to take the offensive. There were +now three battalions in the seminary, and as the French drew sullenly +off to join the column now flowing steadily out from Oporto along the +Valonga road, the gates were thrown open, and the English passing out +formed outside the walls, and poured volley after volley into the +retreating foe. Had Murray fallen upon their flank, the disaster of +the French would have been complete; but this general feared that the +enemy would turn upon him, and destroy his division before assistance +could arrive, and he therefore remained inactive, and allowed the long +column of fugitives to pass unmolested. + +For the next eight days the English army followed hotly in pursuit, +and several skirmishes occurred; but Soult effected a most masterly +retreat, saving his army, when it seemed upon the brink of +destruction, by leaving his guns and baggage behind him, and leading +his men by paths over mountains supposed to be impassable for any +large body of men. He lost altogether 6000 men in this short campaign. +This included 3600 prisoners either captured in action or left behind +in the hospitals, and 1400 killed. The number of guns left behind was +fifty-eight. The English had only 300 killed and wounded. + +Sir Arthur's plans for the invasion of Spain were not yet +complete, and he accordingly halted his army to await supplies and +reinforcements. During this time the young buglers had no opportunity +of calling upon Major-General Hill. The transport supplied by the +Spanish Government had failed grossly, and the troops were badly fed +at a time when, taking long marches, they most required support. The +first day after they halted the boys determined that they would, as +soon as they were off duty, call upon General Hill. While parade was +going on, however, they saw the general ride up to Colonel Tritton, +and enter into conversation with him. The bugler, who was standing +near, was ordered to sound the call for the officers to assemble in +front; and when they did so, Colonel Tritton left the general's side +and spoke a few words with them. There was a short conversation, +and then the colonel rejoined the general's side, and the officers +returned to their places. The colonel now rode forward to the center +of the line, and said in loud tones, "Men, I have a piece of news to +tell you which I think that you will be glad to hear. Upon my arrival +at Lisbon I reported the gallant conduct of Tom and Peter Scudamore +in rescuing one of their comrades when washed overboard in the Bay +of Biscay. Captain Merivale, of the "Latona," also reported it, and +General Hill, when he heard the circumstances, was also good enough to +send home a report recommending them for promotion. He has received +an answer from the Commander-in-Chief announcing that they are both +granted commissions in this regiment as a reward for their act of +distinguished gallantry. The regiment is dismissed." + +As the men fell out they gave a loud and general cheer, and Tom and +Peter were surrounded by their comrades, who shook them by the hand, +and congratulated them upon their promotion. The boys were too much +surprised and affected to speak, and they had scarcely recovered from +their bewilderment, when Carruthers came up to them, and led them +to the colonel. Here General Hill first, and then all the officers, +warmly shook hands with them. The boys were much touched by the warmth +with which they were received, and were soon hurried off to the tents +of the officers. Several of the ensigns were slight young men, and +they insisted upon rigging the boys out in uniform, and the boys +had the less scruple in accepting the kind offer, inasmuch as they +expected every day to enter Spain, when the baggage would be cut down +to the smallest possible proportion, and the officers as well as +the men be obliged to leave almost everything behind them. Sam was +delighted at the promotion of his friends, and asked to be appointed +their servant, a request which was at once acceded to. The regiment +had now been three months in Spain, and the boys had continued to +work hard at Spanish, devoting several hours a day to its study, and +talking it whenever they could find an opportunity--no difficult +matter, as Portugal was full of Spanish who had crossed the frontier +to avoid the hated yoke of the French. + +The delay in invading Spain was caused partly from want of +transport, but more by the utter incapacity of the Spanish Junta or +government, and by the arrogance and folly of Cuesta, the Spanish +Commander-in-Chief, who was always proposing impracticable schemes to +Wellington, and, inflated with Spanish pride and obstinacy, believed +that his own worthless troops were fully a match for the French, and +was jealous in the highest degree of the British general. + +At last, on the 27th of June, the British army advanced. Scarcely had +they made a day's march, however, when the utter faithlessness of the +Spaniards became manifest. The provisions and transport promised were +not forthcoming, and from the very day of their advance the British +were badly fed, and indeed often not fed at all; and so great were +their sufferings during the campaign--sufferings caused by the +heartlessness of the people whom they had come to deliver from a +foreign yoke, that the British soldiers came to cherish a deep and +bitter hatred against the Spanish; and it was this intense feeling of +animosity which had no little to do with the cruel excesses of the +English soldiery upon the capture of Burgos and San Sebastian. + +After many delays from these causes, the British army reached Oropesa +upon the 20th July, and there formed a junction with Cuesta's army. +Upon the 22d the allied armies moved forward, and upon the same +day the Spaniards came in contact with the French, and should have +inflicted a severe blow upon them, but the ignorance and timidity of +the Spanish generals enabled the enemy to draw off and concentrate +without loss. + +The British troops had now been for many days upon half rations, and +Sir Arthur gave notice to the Junta, that unless his requisitions were +complied with, he should retire from Spain. Cuesta, however, believing +that the French were retreating in haste, pushed his army across the +river Alberche, with the vain idea of defeating them, and entering +Madrid in triumph. Sir Arthur, seeing the fatal consequences which +would ensue, were the Spaniards attacked alone, laid aside his +previously-formed resolution, and put his army in motion across +the Alberche. The position of the allied armies was now most +dangerous--far more so, indeed, than the English general supposed. +Badly informed by the Spanish, he greatly underrated the enemy's +forces. Taking advantage of the delay caused by the want of provisions +and carriage, Soult, Victor, and Ney were marching their forces from +various points, and concentrating to crush the invading army. Upon the +26th the French met the Spanish army. General Zayas, who commanded +the Spanish advance of 4000 infantry and 2000 cavalry, scarcely +offered any resistance, his men broke and fled in disorder, and the +panic would have spread to the whole Spanish army, had not General +Albuquerque brought up 3000 more cavalry and held the French at +bay, while Cuesta retreated in great disorder. The Spanish loss by +dispersion and flight was no less than 4000 men, and the whole army +would have been broken up had not General Sherbrooke advanced with his +division, and placed it between the French and the flying Spaniards. + +The allies now recrossed the Alberche and took up a position to cover +Talavera. Sir Arthur chose a strong defensive position, as it was +evident that the Spanish were worse than useless in the open field. +The Spaniards were placed with their right resting upon Talavera, +their left upon a mound whereon a large field-redoubt was constructed. +Their front was covered by a convent, by ditches, stone walls, +breastworks, and felled trees; and thus, worthless as were the troops, +they could scarcely be driven from a position almost impregnable. + +The line beyond the Spanish was continued by Campbell's division, next +to which came that of Sherbrooke, its left extending to a steep hill. +Mackenzie and Donkin had not yet fallen hack from the Alberche. Hill +was in rear. The British troops, including the German legion, were +19,000 strong, with thirty guns. The Spaniards had 33,000 men and +seventy guns. The Spanish contingent could, however, be in no way +relied upon, and were, indeed, never seriously engaged. The real +battle was between the 19,000 British troops and 50,000 French. +The French attacked the British outposts with great impetuosity, +and Mackenzie and Donkin were driven in with a loss of 4000 men. +The latter took up his position with his brigade on the hill on +Sherbrooke's left; the former took post with Campbell's division, to +which he belonged. The French cavalry now galloped up towards the +portion of the line held by the Spanish, and discharged their pistols +at them, whereupon 10,000 Spanish infantry and the whole of their +artillery broke and fled in wild confusion. For miles they continued +their flight, but in the evening the Spanish cavalry were sent round +in pursuit, and drove some 4000 of these cowards back to their lines. +Seeing the wild confusion which was raging on the allies' right, +Victor resolved, although evening was at hand, to make a sudden dash +upon the hill upon their left, which, held only by Donkin's brigade, +was the key of the position. The hill was very steep upon the front, +or French side, while towards the rear it sloped gradually. Ruffin's +division was ordered to the attack, followed by Villette in support, +while Lapisse was ordered to engage the German legion, which was on +the left of Sherbrooke's division. + +Hill's division was lying down behind the hill when Ruffin's troops +advanced to the attack. There was no expectation of an attack that +evening, and the woods and increasing darkness covered the movements +of the French troops. Weary and hungry, the English soldiers, +disgusted at the inhuman neglect of the Spaniards, and furious +at their cowardice, were chatting over the events of the day and +discussing the chances, by no means bright, of the expected battle +to-morrow. All that day they had had no food whatever save a small +portion of grain, served out raw and unground. Tom and Peter had been +chatting with the officers, who were grouped under a tree, when Sambo +came up to them and beckoned them aside. + +"Look here, Massa Tom, here six eggs; tree for you, tree for Massa +Peter." + +"Thank you, Sam, that is capital; but you know you will get into a row +if you get caught taking things." + +"Me no take 'em, massa. Old hen give them to me." + +Tom laughed. + +"How was that, Sam?" + +"Well, Massa, me saw her sitting on nest. Me went up and said to her, +'Give me some eggs, old girl.' She say 'Cluck.' I says, 'Cluck means +yes, I suppose?' She say 'Cluck' again. Clear 'nuff that, so me take +eggs, eat tree, bring six, young massa." + +"I am afraid, Sam," Tom said, laughing, "your story would hardly save +you from the triangles, if you had been caught. However, as it is rude +to return a present, of course you cannot take them back to the hen. I +suppose they are raw?" + +"Yes, massa; no good make fire; make hole bofe ends, suck 'em." + +"All right, Sam; it is not the nicest way, but, under the +circumstances, perhaps it is the best; at any rate, I am too hungry to +wait till we can get a fire lighted." + +So saying, the boys sucked the raw eggs, and then joined the men, +when, just as they did so, first a dropping rifle shot, and then a +perfect roar of musketry broke out upon the hill above them. It needed +no order to be given. The men fell into their places and prepared to +climb the hill and assist Donkin's brigade, which was evidently unable +alone to resist the attack. Knapsacks were thrown off, firelocks +tightly grasped, and the regiment impatiently awaited orders to +advance. None were more impatient than the colonel, who after a few +minutes, seeing by the fire that the English were falling back, and +that the French had gained the crest of the hill, waited no longer for +orders, but gave the word for the regiment to advance. They were but +half way up the hill when General Hill himself galloped down to meet +them, and then turning, led the way beside Colonel Tritton. + +General Hill had had a narrow escape. Donkin had repulsed the French +who attacked him in front, but his force was insufficient to guard the +whole crest of the hill. Consequently, the enemy had come up round +his flank, and were now in actual possession of the crest. General +Hill, ignorant of this, had ridden with his brigade-major right +into the midst of the French before he found out his mistake. His +brigade-major, Fordyce, was killed, his own horse wounded, and his +bridle seized by a French grenadier. He had, however, broken away, and +had ridden off under a storm of bullets. + +With a cheer the Norfolk Rangers followed their gallant leader. They +reached the crest, poured a tremendous volley into the enemy, and +charged with the bayonet. The French, of whom but a small portion +had as yet gained the crest, were unable to resist the impetuous +onslaught, and at once gave way. + +The Rangers were now joined by the 48th and the 29th, so that these, +with Donkin's brigade, formed a strong body of troops. The French, +who had fallen back, now united with their main body, and the attack +was renewed with all the force of Ruffin's division. The heavy mass +pressed upwards, in spite of the destructive fire of the British, and +were within twenty yards of the crest, when, with a hearty cheer, the +English troops burst upon them with the bayonet, and the French again +fell back, broken and disheartened. + +This ended the fighting on the 27th of July. Long lines of bivouac +fires soon blazed upon either side. The wounded were carried down the +hill to the field-hospital, which had been erected under its cover, +and the men, eating their scanty supper, wrapped themselves in their +great coats, and were soon asleep. The officers chatted for a short +time longer, but as all were tired, and the next day was sure to be a +severe one, they, too, soon lay down by their fire. + +When morning broke, it was seen that the enemy had massed a large +force of artillery upon a hill just opposite to the one held by the +English. Soon afterwards Ruffin's division, as before supported by +Villette, advanced to the attack, covered by the tremendous fire from +his artillery. The British had no adequate force of artillery to reply +to the iron storm, and the balls swept through their lines, mowing +down their ranks, and causing great loss. The regiments in reserve lay +down to avoid the iron shower, while the Rangers and 48th prepared to +resist the French when they came within fighting distance. + +As their men approached the summit of the hill, the French artillery +was obliged to cease playing in that direction, and turned its +attention to the British center, while a fierce musketry contest took +place between the French and Hill and Donkin's men. + +The ground was rough, and the troops on both sides, broken up into +small bodies, fought desperately. General Hill was wounded, and the +British troops fell fast. The French, however, suffered even more, +and, as Hill brought up his reserve, the English gained ground foot by +foot, until they drove them again down the steep side of the hill. As +the French retired, their artillery once more opened fire to cover +their retreat. + +A pause now ensued; the French in this brief contest had lost 1400 +men, and the British had suffered severely. The French then held a +council of war, and determined to attack along the whole line in +force. Hours passed away; the English munched their corn, smoked their +pipes, and watched the enemy scattered over the plain. The weather +was very hot, and the men of both sides went down to a little stream +which divided their positions, drank, and filled their water-bottles +in perfect amity. Some of the officers, who spoke French conversed +with the French officers, exchanged cigars for brandy, and joked and +laughed as if they had been the best of friends. + +At one o'clock the French drums were heard to beat, and the men were +soon formed in order. Tom and Peter stood with a group of officers on +the brow of the hill. Nothing could be finer than the sight. Far away +the view stretched over the country, thickly wooded, and with château +and farm-houses scatted here and there. Through the trees the dense +masses of the French could be seen, as they moved in columns towards +the positions from which they were to attack. Upon an eminence, +nearly opposite to their position, the boys could see a long line of +the French artillery. Far away, to the right, rose the churches of +Talavera, while behind the hill were the British and Spanish cavalry, +ready to charge should the French endeavor to turn the British left by +pushing round its foot. Fifty paces from the officers of the Norfolk +Rangers sat Sir Arthur Wellesley, on horseback, watching attentively +through a field-glass the movements of the enemy, and at a short +distance behind him were his staff. The British troops were standing +in easy order, a little behind the crest of the hill, so as to be +sheltered from the artillery fire with which the French were sure to +cover the advance of their column of attack. + +"This is a grand sight, Peter," Tom said, "but I wish they would +begin; it makes one fidgety waiting for it." + +Scarcely had Tom spoken when, as if in answer to his wish, a series +of jets of white smoke puffed out from the opposite hill, and two or +three seconds later came the thunder of eighty guns, and the whizzing +sound of as many balls. Instinctively the group drew back a pace, but +it was not upon them that this tremendous fire was opened. It was +directed against the right of the British line, and almost at the same +moment a cloud of skirmishers appeared among the trees, followed by +the dark columns of Sebastiani's division. + +Upon these the English guns at once opened fire; but rushing forward +with their usual impetuosity, they cleared away the obstacles which +had been raised across the British front, and charged with fury +against the British position. Campbell's division, however, assisted +by Mackenzie's brigade and two Spanish battalions, stood firm, and +driving back the skirmishers, advanced in line, cheering loudly. The +head of the French column withered away under their tremendous fire, +and, pushing forward, they overlapped it, and drove them back with +terrible loss, capturing ten guns. Then Campbell prudently recalled +his men to their first position, and the British artillery, which had +necessarily been silent while friend and foe were mingled together, +opened furiously upon the French as they tried to re-form upon their +supports. A Spanish cavalry regiment dashed down upon their flank, and +they retired again in great disorder. + +Every incident of the fight could be seen from the British position on +the hill, and the troops almost held their breath with excitement as +the British lines clashed against the head of the French column, and a +loud shout of triumph burst out spontaneously as the French broke and +fled. + +But it was now the turn of the left. Already Villette's division, +preceded by the Grenadiers and supported by Ruffin's division, was +advancing, and the British cavalry were ordered to charge them. The +ground was, however, quite unfit for cavalry. Colonel Arentschild, a +very experienced officer, who commanded the German Hussars, drew up +his regiment at the edge of a deep cleft which crossed their front, +and refused to take his men to certain destruction. The 23d Dragoons, +however, dashed into the ravine. Men and horses rolled over in all +directions; still, they got across, and, charging furiously between +the French infantry regiments, which poured in a terrible fire, +fell upon a brigade of Chasseurs in their rear. Victor sent up his +Polish lancers and Westphalian light horse to the assistance of the +Chasseurs, who already outnumbered the 23d, and this gallant regiment +was completely broken, the survivors escaping to the shelter of +Bassecourt's Spanish division, which lay beyond the hill, having lost +257 men and officers. + +Tom and Peter did not see this disastrous affair, for on the approach +of the enemy's column they fell into their places in the ranks. It +was, however, in vain that the French tried to gain the crest of the +hill, their efforts at this point being indeed far more feeble than +they had been either in the morning or upon the previous night. It was +in the center that their great effort was made. Here Lapisse threw his +division against that of Sherbrooke, and, covered by his own artillery +and by the guns upon the hill, charged right up to the position. The +British, however, repulsed them, and the guards, carried away by the +excitement of the moment, followed them with reckless ardor. The +French reserves of infantry and cavalry came up, the artillery plied +the British with shot and shell, the fugitives rallied and again came +to the attack, and the Guards fell back in confusion. The Germans next +to them, severely pressed, began to waver, and for a time it seemed +that the British, victorious upon both flanks, were yet to lose the +battle by being broken in the center. + +Now, however, the 48th, which Sir Arthur had ordered down from the +hill when he saw the rash advance of the Guards, was seen advancing +in line through the disordered masses. Wheeling back, it allowed the +retreating regiments to pass through it and then again formed and fell +upon the flank of the victorious French column. The French paused in +their advance, the Guards and Germans rallied and came back again to +the fight, the shots of the British guns plowed lines in the column, +the French wavered, and, as the British light cavalry trotted up with +the intention of charging them, fell back, and drew off to their +first position amidst shouts of victory along the whole length of the +British line. + +Thus the battle ceased, each party occupying the ground it had held in +the morning. The British loss in killed, wounded, and missing, in the +two days' fighting, was 6200; that of the French 7400. Had the British +been in a condition to have sallied from their position and pursued +the retiring enemy, the victory would have had far greater results; +but, exhausted and half-starved, the British were incapable of +following up their advantage. + +The next morning at daybreak, the French army quitted its position, +and, retiring across the Alberche, formed line of battle there, and +awaited the attack, should the English take the offensive. This they +were in no position to do, although in the course of the day Craufurd +had come up with the 43d, 52d, and 95th Regiments. These three +regiments had heard of the first day's fighting from the Spanish +fugitives, and had marched with all speed to the assistance of their +friends. They had, carrying their kit and ammunition, weighing from 50 +lb. to 60 lb., actually marched sixty-two miles in twenty-six hours in +the hottest season of the year, one of the greatest feats recorded in +military history. + +The Rangers had suffered heavily, and in the two days' fighting had +lost thirty-eight killed and 109 wounded. Among the former were two +officers, while several others were wounded. The Scudamores had, +fortunately, both escaped without a scratch. The inhumanity of the +Spaniards was now more markedly shown than ever. Although both in +Cuesta's army, and in the town of Talavera provisions were abundant, +yet the inhabitants carefully concealed them, while both the wounded +and fighting men of the British army were in want. So great was the +misery and indignation of the soldiers at this shameful treatment, +from those for whom they were doing so much, that they would willingly +have attacked the Spanish army and plundered the town; and from this +period to the end of the war the British hated the Spanish with a deep +and bitter hatred. + +Wellesley now received news that Soult had crossed the mountains +through the pass of Banos, which had been left undefended by the +Spanish, and was marching upon his rear. Believing that Soult had only +13,000 men with him--whereas in fact, he had 50,000--Sir Arthur left +the Spanish army at Talavera in charge of the hospitals, with 6000 +sick and wounded, and retraced his steps, with the intention of giving +battle to this new enemy. + +Upon the 3d, however, he learned the real strength of Soult's army, +and upon the same day heard that General Cuesta had basely retreated +from Talavera, without having provided any transport whatever, +according to his promise, for the British sick and wounded. All of +these who had strength to crawl rejoined the British army, but 1500, +who were unable to walk, were left behind, and fell into the hands +of the French, by whom they were treated with far greater kindness +and attention than they had been by the Spanish. Upon the 4th Cuesta +joined Sir Arthur, and at six o'clock next morning the only possible +course for safety was adopted. Victor was advancing from Talavera, +Soult was hurrying from Placentia to cut off the retreat of the +British, and accordingly Sir Arthur fell back upon Arzobispo, on the +Tagus. + +The artillery, the baggage and wounded, first crossed the bridge, and +at two o'clock the entire army was across. So great was the hunger of +the men that a herd of swine happening to be seen close to the line +of march, the soldiers ran upon them, shot and bayoneted them, and +devoured them raw. Taking up a strong position, guarding the bridges +of the Tagus, the British army remained quiet until the end of August. +During this time they became so weakened by starvation that they could +scarcely walk; a great portion of the cavalry horses, and nearly all +the baggage animals died of hunger, and at last, Sir Arthur, finding +that no remonstrances availed with the Junta, fell back again to the +Portuguese frontier by slow marches, for the army was so utterly +enfeebled that it resembled a vast body of invalids, rather than an +army of unbeaten soldiers. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +A PAUSE IN OPERATIONS. + + +Talavera was fought in July, 1809, and for four months longer Sir +Arthur Wellesley kept his troops on the Spanish frontier, where his +presence served as a check against any invasion, even by a very +formidable army, of Portugal. After the utter bad faith and cowardice +shown by the Spanish, the great commander was determined never again +to trust in their promises, or to undertake any movement dependent +for success upon their co-operation. The Junta then declared that +the Spaniards would alone and unaided sweep the French beyond the +Pyrenees, and a Spanish army of 45,000 infantry, 7000 cavalry, and 60 +guns advanced in November against Madrid. It was met by a French army +of 24,000 infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 50 guns. The battle began at +eleven in the morning, and by three the French, with a loss of only +1700 killed and wounded, had utterly routed the Spanish, with a loss +of 5000 killed and wounded, 45 guns, and 26,000 prisoners! After this +signal and disgraceful defeat, Lord Wellington--for he had now been +raised to the peerage--felt that nothing whatever could be done at +present in Spain, and so fell back into Portugal, where for many +months he occupied himself in preparing to meet the storm which would, +he knew, fall ere long upon that country. The Portuguese authorities +were as incapable, as untrustworthy, and as intractable as were those +of Spain; but here, happily, Lord Wellington had more power. England +was paying large subsidies towards keeping up the Portuguese army, +which was commanded by Lord Beresford, having under him many British +officers. The Portuguese troops were hardy, obedient, and far braver +than the Spaniards; but difficulties often arose in keeping the army +together, because the Portuguese Government, although England was +paying the principal expenses of the army, yet starved their soldiers, +and often kept them for months without pay. It was only by the +strongest remonstrances, and by the oft-repeated threat that he would +embark the British troops, and abandon Portugal altogether, unless +these and other abuses were done away with, that Lord Wellington +succeeded in reducing this incapable and insolent Government to +reason. + +Reinforcements arrived but slowly from England, for a considerable +portion of the available troops of England were frittered away in +holding Cadiz and in an expedition to Sicily. In these two places some +25,000 English troops were wasted--a force, which, had it been added +to Wellington's army, would have enabled him to take the field against +the French, instead of being forced to remain in Portugal for upwards +of a year without discharging a single shot against the enemy. Tom and +Peter Scudamore, however, were not destined to remain inactive all +these weary months. One day in November, just before the army fell +back from the Spanish frontier, General Hill was dining at mess with +the regiment; for, rough as was the accommodation, the officers had +succeeded in establishing a general mess. The conversation turned upon +the difficulty of discovering what force the various French generals +had at their disposal, the reports received by the Commander-in-Chief +being often ridiculously incorrect. There was also an immense +difficulty in communicating with the guerilla chiefs who, almost +always beaten when they came to blows with any considerable bodies +of the French, yet managed to harass them terribly by cutting off +convoys, falling upon small parties, and attacking outposts and bands +of foragers. Knowing every mountain pass and road, these men could, +if they would, keep Lord Wellington informed of every considerable +movement of the enemy, and might in return receive instruction for +acting, when required, in concert before the communication of an +advancing army, or might create a diversion by uniting their bands, +and threatening some important post. + +The next day the boys went to Colonel Tritton's quarters, and, +referring to the conversation of the day before, said that they were +willing to carry any messages that the general might require sent, and +to obtain any information wanted. + +"Nonsense, boys, you would be hung as spies before you had been gone a +week." + +"I don't think so, sir," Tom said; "we have had very little to do +during the six months we have been out here except to learn the +language of the country, and I think now we could pass very well as +Spanish boys. Besides, who would suspect boys? We are quite ready to +chance detection if we can be allowed to go." + +"I don't like it, boys; you are too young. Well, if not too young," he +said, in answer to a movement of Tom's to speak, "we all like you too +well to run the risk of hearing you have been hung like a couple of +young puppies." + +"You are very kind, colonel; but you know you promised to give us a +chance if you could, and having a chance of course means having extra +danger; but I really don't think that there would be any great danger +in it." + +"Well, boys," Colonel Tritton said, after a few moments' thought, "I +do not feel justified in refusing your application, and will mention +it to General Hill. There are very few officers in the army who +speak Spanish fluently, and you being boys would, as you say, avert +suspicion. But I tell you fairly that I hope General Hill will at once +refuse to entertain the idea." + +"Thank you, sir," the boys said. "Of course that is all we could ask +you to do." + +The next day, after parade was over, Colonel Tritton walked on +to General Hill's quarters at a sort of half farm-house, half +country-seat, a short distance from the village, round which the +Rangers were encamped. As he came up to the house, General Hill came +out from his door talking to a Spanish officer, who had the day before +brought some despatches from one of the Spanish generals to Lord +Wellington. + +Colonel Tritton joined them, and they stood talking together upon the +state of affairs in Spain, and of the advance of the Spanish army on +Madrid, which was then just taking place. As they did so two very +ragged, unkempt Spanish boys, shoeless and wretched-looking, limped +up, and began to beg. General Hill shook his head, and the Spaniard +impatiently motioned them away. + +"Por Dios," one whined; "give us something; we are starving. The +French have burnt down our houses, and killed our fathers and +mothers--we are starving. 'Por l'amor de Dios!'" + +"What's the poor little beggar say?" General Hill asked the Spaniard. + +"The usual story--house burnt, father and mother killed, starving. I +dare say it's all a lie." + +"Where did you live?" he asked in Spanish. + +"In the village of Oros, near Valencia." + +"And how did you come here?" + +"The French burnt the village because the guerillas had killed a party +of theirs in it, and they killed all the people, and then carried off +the mules and horses, and took us to drive some of them. That was four +months ago. We had to drive till the other day at Tamanes, when our +men beat the French; our mules were taken, and, as they did not want +us as drivers we had nothing to do but to come on in hopes that the +kind English would give us food." + +The Spanish officer translated what the boy said, and General Hill +remarked, "Yes, that was a brilliant affair of the Duke del Pasque's. +Here," he called to an orderly, "give these boys some bread. I will +see what can be done for them afterwards. I am afraid nothing. Poor +little wretches! their story is a very common one." + +The boys received the bread with a great show of thankfulness, and, +sitting down by the roadside, began to munch it with great appetite. +The Spanish officer now mounted his horse and rode off, while General +Hill and Colonel Tritton remained standing where he had left them. +Colonel Tritton then told General Hill of the Scudamores' request to +be allowed to penetrate into Spain as spies or with dispatches. + +"The young pickles!" General Hill laughed. "What will they be wanting +to do next? Pooh, pooh! it would be out of the question." + +"I believe they do really speak Spanish exceedingly well." Colonel +Tritton said. "They generally act as interpreters for us, and none of +the officers speak Spanish with anything like the same fluency." + +"As far as the language goes, they might get on, perhaps," General +Hill said; "but they look as thorough English boys as you could see. +They would be detected at once." + +"Yes," Colonel Tritton said, "they are both thorough English boys; I +should know them anywhere. What a contrast to the miserable, limping, +hang-dog lads there! Poor little chaps! Why, upon my word, I believe +the fellows are laughing." + +General Hill looked sharply at them, and, as he looked from one to the +other, he said sarcastically, "Poor little chaps indeed! You said that +very naturally, Tritton. It really does you credit as an actor." + +Colonel Tritton looked at the general with an expression of blank +astonishment. + +"What," said the general, "were you really taken in too" + +"Taken in?" repeated Colonel Tritton vaguely. + +"Don't you see, Tritton, those poor little chaps you are pitying so +are those two young scamps we were talking about." + +Colonel Tritton stared in astonishment at the boys, and then, as he +recognized them, he joined the general in a shout of laughter, while +the two boys stood up and saluted with an attempt at gravity which was +only partially successful, so amused were they at the astonishment of +their colonel, as well as pleased at the success of their disguise. + +Just at this moment there was a sound of tramping horses, and directly +afterwards an officer rode up, followed by four or five others, and +at a short distance in the rear by an escort of orderlies. The boys +needed not the exclamation of General Hill, "Here is Wellington." They +knew who the rider was, who checked his horse as he reached the gate, +for they had often seen him as he rode through the camp. A slight man, +very careful and neat in his dress, with an aquiline nose and piercing +eyes. Peter was rising as he drew up his horse, when Tom said, "Don't +get up, Peter; go on with your bread. It would look absurd for us +to salute now, and would draw attention to us," he went on, as Lord +Wellington dismounted, threw the bridle off his horse to an orderly, +and saying to General Hill, "I wanted to see you; come in." Colonel +Tritton went into the house, followed by the two officers. "We'll +stop here till they come out again, Peter. Perhaps General Hill may +speak to him about us. At any rate, we will keep up our disguise till +they've gone. Let us play at odd and even." It was a game of which +Spanish boys are very fond, and they may be seen in any of the Spanish +towns sitting by the houses on door-steps in the sun playing. It was +half an hour before the general came out again. He was about to mount +his horse, when he glanced at the boys, who were sitting against the +wall a few paces off, seemingly absorbed in their play, and paying no +attention whatever to him. Suddenly he changed his mind, dropped his +rein, and walked up to them. + +"What are you playing for?" he asked abruptly in Spanish. + +"Reals, señor," Tom said looking up, but not moving. + +"You are poor; how can you pay?" asked the general. + +"Oh! we don't pay," Tom laughed. "We keep count. I owe him twelve +thousand now. I will pay him when I get rich. He can wait." And he +held out his closed hand again for Peter to guess the number of stones +it contained. + +"Come inside," Lord Wellington said abruptly, and, turning led the way +into the house again, followed by General Hill, Colonel Tritton, and +the two boys. + +"It is not often I change my mind," he said to General Hill; "but for +once I do so now. When you told me about these lads, I refused to +employ them on such dangerous service, even when you told me of the +courage and coolness which they exhibited on the voyage. Now I have +tried them myself, I see that they will do. If they could keep up +their disguise when I spoke to them suddenly, and answer without +hesitation or any excitement which could have shown that they were +not what they pretended to be, they can do so with a French general. +I am no judge of the purity of their Spanish; but as you tell me they +deceived a Spanish officer just now, they will be able to pass with +Frenchmen. Now, lads," he went on turning to them, "you have thought +over, of course, the risks you are going to run, and are prepared, if +detected, to be hung like dogs." The boys bowed. + +"You will receive detailed instructions through Colonel Tritton, +together with such despatches as I may wish sent. They will be written +as small as possible. You will not go for a week; devote all your time +to studying the map. The largest size we have shall be sent to your +colonel this afternoon. Of course you will be supplied with money, and +for anything you can think of likely to assist you, speak to Colonel +Tritton. You are beginning well, young sirs. If you like, you ought to +made a noise in the world. Now, Hill, I must be off." + +And the general left the room with the officers, while the boys were +stammering out their thanks. + +"Where did you dress up, boys?" Colonel Tritton asked them after the +general had ridden off. "You did not come out from camp like this I +hope?" + +"No, colonel; we changed in that little wood there." + +"What have you colored your skins with?" + +"We got some iodine from the doctor, sir, and mixed it with water till +it was just thick enough to tinge our skin. It will wash pretty well +off with plenty of scrubbing, but we mean to use walnut juice when we +start; it lasts much longer, and is a better brown." + +"I am not sure, boys, that you had not better leave your faces alone, +they and your hands are so sunburnt that you would pass well enough, +though you must dye your arms and legs. Fortunately, your hair is +pretty dark, for you can't well carry dye. Think well over all these +things, for your lives may depend on some trifle of this kind. I shall +see you at mess." + +So saying, Colonel Tritton walked on, leaving the boys to follow at +their leisure. Just as they were about to turn off to make for the +woods they saw a soldier coming along the road. + +"That's Sam, if I am not mistaken, Peter, we will have some fun with +him. We can trust him to say nothing in the regiment about meeting us +like this." + +The two boys accordingly sat down by a low wall by the roadside, and +as Sam came up talked away to each other in Spanish. He passed without +paying any attention to them. After he had gone a few yards, Tom said +in a deep, loud voice, "Sambo." The black halted suddenly, and turned +round. First he looked angrily at the boys, then he went to the side +of the road and looked over the wall. Then with a very perplexed air +he looked up and down the road. + +"Who dat have impudence to call dis colored gentleman Sambo," he said +to himself. "Some fellow did, dat for sartin, not dose little Spanish +trash, dey not know Sam's name, some rascal in regiment; he's hid +somewhere. I pound him to squash when I find him." + +Muttering thus he turned to proceed on his way, but before he had gone +twenty yards, he again heard a deep shout. "Here, you, Sambo." + +The black jumped as if he was shot, "My golly," he exclaimed, and then +walked back to the boys, who were talking together, shook his head +and again looked over the wall. Then he stooped down to the boys, and +shook his fist in their faces, "You little debils, you call Sambo, I +pound you to squash." The boys both leapt to their feet with an air of +intense surprise and alarm, and began to cry out in Spanish. + +"No, can't be you," Sam said, "dis chile must be witched, no place for +men to hide, sartin not dem boys. Stone wall can't call Sambo all by +self, Sam's going out of mind. Oh! Lor, dis berry bad affair," and Sam +sat down by the roadside with a face of such perfect bewilderment and +dismay that the boys could stand it no longer, but went off together +into a scream of laughter, which caused Sam to jump to his feet again. +"What you larf for, what you larf for, you little rascals, you play +trick, eh? you call Sambo, who taught you dat name?" and he seized the +two boys and shook them furiously. + +"Oh! Sam, Sam, you will kill us with laughing," Tom got out at last. +"Do leave go, man, or we shall choke," and as Sam, astonished, loosed +his hold, the boys sat down and laughed till their sides ached. + +"Golly," exclaimed the negro, as he looked at them, "Dose boys again. +What on earth you do, Massa Tom, Massa Peter, in dose ragged close, +what you dress up like two beggars for? Lor! how you take in dis +chile, me tink you little Spanish trash, sure enuff." It was some time +before the boys could compose themselves, and then Tom made Sam sit +close by his side. + +"Look here, Sam, this isn't a joke, this is a serious business and +before I tell you anything about it, you must promise to keep the +secret strictly, as it would do us a great deal of harm if it was +known." Sam declared at once that if they tore him to pieces with wild +horses he would say nothing. Tom then explained the whole thing to him +and Sam at once declared that he would go too. + +"Quite impossible, Sam. You do not speak a word of Spanish and +although at any of the seaport towns you could pass as a runaway +sailor, there could be no possible reason for your wandering about the +country with two Spanish boys." + +Sam thought for some time. "Now dat berry unlucky Massa Tom, dat Sam +play big drum. Big drum fine music, but big drum not go well by self. +If Sam had played fiddle, Sam could go, but Sam couldn't go nohow with +big drum." + +"I should think not, Sam, with the name of the regiment painted on it. +No, no, you must stay behind. There won't be any fighting now till the +spring, and by that time we shall be back with the regiment." + +"But what you do without Sam? who black Massa's boots? who brush his +clothes?" + +Tom laughed. "These clothes would fall all to pieces, if they were +brushed much, Sam, and at present we have no boots to be blacked." + +"Where you get dose clothes, Massa Tom," Sam asked, examining with +great disgust the rags the boys had on. + +"We bought some peasant's clothes about our size, and the first beggar +boys we saw we offered to exchange. You should have seen their faces +of astonishment. When we got the clothes we made them into a bundle, +and took them to the bakehouse, and got the baker to put them into +the oven for a few hours to kill anything there might be in them. +Now, Sam, it is time for us to be going. It will take us an hour's +scrubbing to get the color off us. Be sure you keep our secret." + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +WITH THE GUERILLAS. + + +It was on a fine morning at the end of March that a cortége of +muleteers and mules left the little town of Alonqua. It was now four +months since the Scudamores left the army, and in the intervening time +they had tramped through a large portion of Spain. They had carried +with them only a dozen or so little despatches done up in tiny rolls +of the length and about the thickness of a bodkin, These were sewn +inside the lining of their coats, in the middle of the cloth where +it was doubled in at the seams, so that, even were the clothes to be +examined carefully and felt all over, the chances of detection were +slight indeed. They had each, on starting, half a dozen pieces of +Spanish gold coin sewn between the thicknesses of leather of the soles +of each of their shoes, for they did not start in the beggar clothes +in which they had first disguised themselves. Their clothes were, +indeed, worn and somewhat patched, but were of stout material, and +they wore shoes, but no stockings. They had, indeed, the appearance of +Spanish boys of the peasant class. The weather in the north of Spain +is often very cold in winter, and the boys felt that, with rags and +bare feet, they should suffer severely. All that they had to say and +do had been learned by heart. The names and addresses of the agents +of the British Government at every town had been laboriously learned +before starting, and, as Peter said ruefully, it was worse than a +dozen Greek impositions. + +At each place of any importance they would find the person to whom +they were instructed to apply, would accost him with some password, +and would be put up by him while they remained there. When they had +gained the intelligence they required--of the number of French troops +in the place and its neighborhood, a knowledge always obtained by +going round, counting the men on parade, or, in the case of small +villages, finding out easily enough from a peasant the number, +quartered there, they would write a report on the number the +intentions as far as they could learn them, the amount of food +in store, and the sentiments of the population, would enclose +the despatch in a goose-quill and give it to their host, who was +responsible for forwarding it. + +In a great number of cases, indeed, the man to whom they were +accredited was a muleteer. These men hated the French with a hatred +even more deep and deadly than that of other Spaniards, for, in +addition to the national causes of hatred, their mules were constantly +being requisitioned or seized by the troops and they themselves forced +to accompany the army for long distances at a nominal rate of pay for +themselves and their animals. Then, too, they were in close connection +with the guerillas, for whom they carried goods up into the mountains +from the towns, and when the chance came would leave their animals in +the mountains and join in cutting off an enemy's convoy. They acted as +messengers and spies too, and took their friends in the hills early +news of intended movements of the enemy. Many a day had the boys +traveled in the company of these muleteers, merry, careless fellows, +singing and talking to their mules, apparently the best-natured of +men, until something would be said which would recall the hated foe, +and then their black eyes would flash, their fingers clutch their +knife-handles, and they would pour out long strings of deep Spanish +oaths. Great was the surprise of these men on receiving the password +from two boys, but they never hesitated an instant in taking them in, +in giving them hospitality as long as they remained, and in either +accompanying them to the next town, or handing them over to the charge +of some comrade going in that direction. Not even to them did the +Scudamores ever betray that they were not what they were taken to be, +two Spanish boys employed by the English commander as messengers. +Often they were questioned how the English had come to entrust +important communications to two boys, and their reply always was that +their father and mother had fled to Portugal from the French, and were +living there near the English lines, and that they had offered their +lives in case of their sons' treachery. + +This system of hostages seemed probable enough to their questioners, +and if the boys' fare was rather harder, and their treatment more +unceremonious than it would have been had they said that they were +British officers in disguise, they ran far less risk of detection +from an accidental word or sign. Indeed it would have been next to +impossible for them, had they desired it, to convince any one of their +identity. There was no fear now of their accent betraying them. Since +they had left the army they had never, even when alone together, +spoken in English. They made the rule and kept to it for two reasons, +the one being that they found that if they did not get into this habit +of always speaking Spanish, they might inadvertently address each +other in English, and thus betray themselves; the second, that they +wanted to learn to speak absolutely like natives. This they had in the +four months thoroughly learned to do. At first their pronunciation +and occasional mistakes excited curiosity when asked questions as +to the part of Spain from which they had come, but their constant +communication with their muleteer friends had quite removed this, and +for the last two months not one person had doubted that they were not +only Spanish, but that they came from the northern provinces. + +Hitherto they had journeyed principally between large towns and over +country held by the French, but that part of their work was finished; +they had accurately computed the number of the army with which Massena +was to advance shortly to besiege Ciudad Rodrigo, and they had now to +carry the despatches to the guerilla leaders. Hitherto they had not in +a single instance excited suspicion. Not a Frenchman had asked them +a question, and no adventure of anything like an exciting nature had +taken place. They were now, however, entering into a country entirely +different from that which they had hitherto traversed. The northeast +of Spain is wild and mountainous, and offers immense natural +facilities for irregular warfare. Through the various passes of the +Pyrenees lead all the roads from France, whether to Vittoria on the +great road to Madrid, or through Navarre to Catalonia. Here and there +fortified towns still held out against the French, and the town of +Gerona, in Catalonia, had only fallen after a six months' regular +siege, and a desperate defense which fully rivals that of Saragossa. +Is it not a little singular that the Spaniards, who in the open field +were, with a few remarkable exceptions, absolutely contemptible, yet +frequently defended towns with wonderful fortitude, courage, and +desperation. It may, indeed, be said that in every siege where the +Spaniards were commanded by brave and resolute chiefs they behaved +admirably. This great range of hill country was the stronghold of the +guerillas, and every convoy from France had to be protected by a large +force, and even then often suffered greatly from the harassing attacks +of their active enemies. + +The bands of the guerilla chiefs differed greatly in strength, varying +from merely ten or a dozen men to three or four thousand, and indeed +each band varied continually. The men, when not required, would +scatter to their homes, cultivate their little patches of ground, and +throw down the spade and take up the rifle again when they heard of a +convoy to cut off, or an invading column to beat back. The bands, too, +would vary in proportion to the renown of their chiefs. An energetic +man, who, at the head of a handful, had performed some daring feats, +would find himself a week afterwards the leader of many hundreds, +while a chief who was slow and dilatory would find his band melt away +like snow in summer. + +The character of the warfare depended much upon the character of the +French generals. A few of these kept the troops under their command +sternly in hand, would permit no plundering, and insisted upon their +fair treatment of the Spaniards. These in turn wanted nothing better +than to remain quietly in their homes, and the guerilla bands would +melt away to nothing. Other generals, furious at the savage nature +of the warfare, and the incessant toil and loss entailed upon their +troops, allowed the latter to do as they pleased, and burning houses +and dead bodies marked their course. Then the peasantry, now turned +guerillas, retaliated as savagely, giving no quarter, sacrificing all +prisoners, and putting the wounded to death, sometimes with torture. +On both sides horrible atrocities were committed. + +The guerillas were armed partly with rifles and carbines, partly with +muskets landed on the coast by the British Government, who also, from +time to time, sent powder and money to assist them to continue their +resistance to the French. Although nowhere really formidable, yet, +being scattered over a great extent of country, these bands occupied +very large bodies of French troops, who would otherwise have +been disposable for general operations in the field. The English +commander-in-chief had, of course, no shadow of authority over the +guerillas, or, indeed, over any of the Spanish troops, and his +communication to them simply asked what arms and ammunition they +required, and begged them to send him a list of the number of men they +could each throw on the French communications and lines of retreat in +case he should find himself in a position to make a general advance +against them. He also recommended most strongly the bearers of the +despatch to their care. It was to the chief known as Nunez that they +were now bound. The mule train was nominally destined for Vittoria, to +which town the leader had got a pass, specifying the number of mules +and the nature of the goods they carried, from the French commandant +at Alonqua, for no one was allowed to take the goods about the country +without a pass, in order to prevent supplies being forwarded to the +mountains. This pass, however, only mentioned twelve mules with four +drivers, and this was the number which started from Alonqua. Another +score of mules, however, joined them at a short distance from the town +where a by-road turned off. Some of these had gone out from the town +unloaded, as if taken out to graze, others had not entered the town, +but had come direct from the sea-coast by by-paths with powder, and +had been awaiting the departure of Garcias, the name of the leader of +the party. They had eight men with them, all armed to the teeth. + +"Is it all right, Garcias?" + +"All right," the leader said; "they have sent out their squadrons on +the other road, so I think we are safe for to-day." + +"What boys have you got there with you?" + +"They have business with Nunez; letter from the coast." + +The cavalcade was now in motion again, and wound gradually up into the +hills. Presently they came to a point where four roads met. A clump of +trees grew hard by, and the boys gave a start of horror at seeing the +bodies of six French soldiers swinging from them. "Ay, that's Nunez's +work, I expect," Garcias said coolly. "There were three of his men +swinging there last week, so as a lesson he has hung up six of the +French. He is a rough boy to play with, is Nunez." + +At sunset the party slept in a small farm, and at daybreak continued +their journey. They were now in the heart of the mountains, and their +path lay sometimes up deep ravines, sometimes along rocky ledges. +At last, about midday, they entered a valley in which stood a small +village. "That's Nunez's head-quarters to-day," Garcias said; +"to-morrow he may be no one knows where." + +"But does he have to sally out by the wretched road by which we have +come?" Tom asked. + +"No, no," Garcias replied; "he would not catch much prey that way. +There are three other ways out of the valley. That winding path you +see there leads up to Santona. That road on the other side leads out +on to the plain, and thence to Vittoria; while the footpath over the +brow opposite leads right down into the wide valley through which the +main north road runs. So you see this is a handy spot. From that brow +we can see the convoys going to and from France, and can pour down +upon them if they are weak; while, if a column is sent in search of +us, we can vanish away long before they can catch us. Nunez does not +use the direct road over the brow for his attack, but follows the +Santona or Vittoria road for a while, and then makes a swoop round. He +does not want to bring the French up to this village, for his family +and the families of many of the men live here." + +As they approached the village, they found that there was a good deal +of bustle going on. Armed men were coming out of the cottages, and +gathering in a group round a rough stone cross, which stood in the +center of a sort of green. "We are just in time," Garcias said; "Nunez +is starting on some expedition or other." + +When they reached the spot there were nearly two hundred men +assembled. They greeted Garcias with shouts of welcome as he arrived. +"Ah, ah! Garcias, just in time. Our last skin of wine was emptied last +night; we will bring some more up to-morrow; but if you had not come +we should have had to start thirsty, and that's unlucky besides being +unpleasant." + +"Where is Nunez!" Garcias asked. + +"Here he comes," was the reply; and the boys turning saw a figure +approaching, which by no means answered to the expectation of the +celebrated guerilla chief. He was small and almost humpbodied, but +very broad. His head seemed too large for his body, and a pair of +fierce eyes gleamed out from beneath his shaggy eyebrows. His mustache +was thin and bristly and his month wide, but with thin lips. The boys +could understand the reputation for cruelty and mercilessness which +attached to this sinister-looking figure, but there was none of the +savage power which they had expected to see in so celebrated a leader. + +"Any news, Garcias?" he asked shortly, as he came up. + +"None, captain, except that these boys have brought some despatches +for you from the English Lord." + +Nunez looked sharply at them, and held out his hand without speaking. +Tom gave him the little quill. + +The guerilla opened it, read the contents, and, saying briefly, "An +answer to-morrow," strode on to his men, and in a few minutes they +were defiling out at the end of the valley. + +"That hardly seems a strong enough body to attack a French convoy, +Garcias," Tom remarked. + +"No, it would not be, but there is only a part of his band here; the +rest will join him at some place agreed on--perhaps ten miles from +here. I believe he has about thousand men under his orders. Now come +along; we shall be none the worse for dinner," and, leaving his men to +unload the mules, he led the way into the little posada, or inn. + +"Ah! Mother Morena," he said to an old woman who was crouching near a +blazing wood fire, "warming yourself as usual; it's well you've a good +fire, for you will be able to get us some dinner all the more quickly. +Twelve of us altogether, and all as hungry as wolves." + +"Ah!" exclaimed the old woman crossly; "it seems as if I were never to +have an hour's quiet, just as all that roaring, greedy lot, with their +Mother Morena here and Mother Morena there, and their grumbling at +the olla, and their curses and their quarrels, are off, and I think I +am going to have a quiet afternoon, then you come in with your twelve +hungry wolves." + +"Ah! mother, but wolves don't pay, and we do, you see." + +The frugal supper over, the boys laid down on the benches, and were +soon asleep. The next day passed slowly, for the band were not +expected to return until late at night--perhaps not until the next +morning, as the pass where the attack would be made was some fifteen +miles off, and the convoy might not pass there until late in the +afternoon. The boys soon made friends with some of the women and +children of the place, to whom they told stories of the great cities +of the plain, and of the great water which washed the shores of Spain. +The greater portion of the Spanish peasantry are incredibly ignorant, +and very few of the inhabitants of this village had ever gone beyond +the mountains. Walking about in the village, but apparently mixing but +very little in the games of the other children, were two little girls, +whose gay dress of rich silk seemed strangely out of place in such a +spot. + +Tom asked one of the women who they were, and she replied, with a toss +of the head, "They are the captain's children. The last time the band +went out they found among the baggage and brought up here, the dresses +of the children of some fine lady, and the captain kept them all as +part of his share, just as if there were no children in the village +whom it would become a great deal better than those stuck-up little +things. Not," she said, softening a little, "that they were not nice +enough before they got these things; but since they came their heads +have been quite turned by the finery and they are almost too grand to +speak to their old playfellows." + +"Is their mother alive?" + +"No, poor thing, she was killed by the French when the village she +lived in was burned by them, because some of them were found hung in +the neighborhood. The captain was away at the time and the children +were out in the woods. When he came back he found them crying by the +side of their mother's body, in the middle of the burning village. So +then he took to the mountains, and he never spares a Frenchman who +falls into his hands. He has suffered, of course, but he brought it +upon himself, for he had a hand in hanging the French soldiers, and +now he is a devil. It will be bad for us all; for some day, when the +French are not busy with other things, they will rout us out here, and +then who can blame them if they pay us for all the captain's deeds? +Ah! me, they are terrible times, and Father Predo says he thinks the +end of the world must be very near. I hope it will come before the +French have time to hunt us down." + +The boys had a hard struggle not to smile, but the woman spoke so +earnestly and seriously, that they could only shake their heads in +grave commiseration for her trouble; and then Tom asked, "Is the +captain very fond of the children?" + +"He worships them," the woman said; "he has no heart and no pity for +others. He thinks no more of blood than I do of water; but he is as +tender as a woman with them. One of them was ill the other day--a mere +nothing, a little fever--and he sat by her bedside for eight days +without ever lying down." + +"I suppose," Tom said, "they never bring prisoners up here?" + +"Yes, they do," the woman said; "not common soldiers; they kill them +at once; but sometimes officers, if they want to exchange them for +some of ours who may have been taken, or if they think they are likely +to get a high ransom for them. But there, it always comes to the same +thing; there, where you see that mound on the hillside, that's where +they are. They blindfold them on their way up here, lest they might +find their way back after all. Only one or two have ever gone down +again. I wish they would finish with them all down below; they are +devils and heretics these French; but I don't care about seeing them +killed. Many of us do, though, and we have not many diversions up +here, so I suppose it's all for the best." + +"I wish that fellow had given us our answer before he went away," +Tom said to Peter when they were alone. "I hope he won't bring any +prisoners up here; these massacres are frightful, and one side seems +as bad as the other. Well, in another month we shall have finished +with all this work, and be making for the frontier again. Shan't I be +glad when we catch sight of the first red-coats!" + +In the middle of the night the boys were roused by a general bustle, +and found that a messenger had just arrived, saying that the +expedition had been successful, that a portion of the enemy had been +cut off, their rear-guard destroyed, and that the whole band would be +up soon after daylight. The village was astir early, but it was not +until nine o'clock that the guerilla band arrived. The boys saw at a +glance that they were stronger in numbers than when they started, and +that with them were some twenty or thirty baggage animals. + +The women flocked out to meet them with shrill cries of welcome. The +booty taken was not of any great value in money, but was more valuable +than gold to the guerillas. + +Each one of the band carried, in addition to his own piece, a new +French musket, while in the barrels on the mules were powder and ball; +there were bales of cloth, and some cases of brandy and champagne, and +a few boxes and portmanteaus of officers' baggage. In the rear of all, +under a strong guard, were two French officers, both wounded, a lady +and a child of some seven or eight years old. + +After a boisterous greeting to their wives, the band broke up, and +scattered over the village, three or four men remaining to guard the +captives, who were told to sit down against a wall. + +The whole band were soon engaged in feasting, but no one paid the +least attention to the prisoners. The lady had sunk down exhausted, +with the little girl nestled close to her, the officers faint and pale +from loss of blood, leaned against the wall. One of them asked the +guards for some water, but the men paid no attention to the request, +answering only with a savage curse. Tom and Peter, who were standing +by, immediately went to the inn, filled a jug with water, and, taking +a drinking horn and some bread, went back. One of the guards angrily +ordered them back as they approached. + +"I am not going to free them," Tom said, soothingly; "there can be no +reason why they should die of thirst, if they are enemies." + +"I am thirsty myself," one of the guard said, "and it does us good to +see them thirst." + +"What, has no one brought you anything to drink?" Tom said, in a tone +of surprise. "Here, Peter, you give this bread and water to these +prisoners; I will run to Mother Morena's and bring some wine for the +guard." + +The guard would not allow Peter to approach the captives until Tom +arrived with a large jug of wine, and a cold fowl, which he had +obtained at the inn. These the Spaniards accepted, and allowed the +boys to give the water to the prisoners. All drank eagerly, with every +expression of thankfulness, the lady seizing Peter's hand and kissing +it as he handed the horn to the child. The lady was a very bright, +pretty woman, though now pale and worn with fatigue and emotion, and +the child was a lovely little creature. + +The boys, on leaving the prisoners, hurried to Garcias. + +"What are they going to do with the prisoners, Garcias?" + +"They have brought them up here to exchange for Nunez's lieutenant, +who was taken last week. One of the men went off last night to +Vittoria with a letter to offer to exchange. One of the officers is a +colonel, and the young one a captain. The lady is, they say, the wife +of General Reynier." + +"Then they are safe," Tom said joyfully, "for, of course the French +would exchange a guerilla against three such prisoners." + +"Yes," Garcias said, "they are safe if Vagas has not been shot before +the messenger gets to Vittoria. The messenger will hear directly he +gets there, and if they have finished Vagas, he will come straight +back, for his letter will be of no use then." + +"But the French would pay a ransom for them." + +"Yes; but the captain is never fond of ransoming, and if the news +comes that Vagas is shot it is all up with them." + +"But they will never murder a woman and child in cold blood!" Tom +said, in tones of indignant horror. + +"Women are killed on both sides," the muleteer said, placidly. "I +don't hold to it myself, but I don't know, after all, why a woman's +life is a bit more precious than a man's. Vagas's wife and children +are here, too, and if the news comes of his death, she would stir the +band up to kill the prisoners, even if the captain wanted to save +them, which he certainly will not do." + +"When is the messenger expected back?" + +"If he goes to Vittoria and finds Vagas is alive, and arranges for +the exchange, he won't be back till late to-night, perhaps not till +to-morrow; but, if he hears, either on the way or directly he gets +there, that he is dead, he may be back this afternoon." Soon after +this conversation Garcias was sent for to the chief, and returned +with a small note, which he handed to the boys as the answer to the +despatch, and urged them to go at once. The boys said that they could +not leave until they saw the end of this terrible drama which was +passing before their eyes. It was early in the afternoon when a man +was seen coming along the path from Vittoria. A hundred eager eyes +examined him, and ere long it was declared as certain that it was the +messenger. The boys' heart sank within them as they saw the fierce +look cast by the Spaniards in the direction of the prisoners, for +every one in the village was well aware of the meaning of this early +return. The boys had arranged upon the course they would pursue, and +they at once hurried to Garcias. + +"Please come with us at once to Nunez. We want to see him before the +messenger arrives." + +"I will come with you," Garcias said; "but if you think that any +talking of yours will persuade Nunez to move out of his way, you are +mistaken. It is more likely to cost you your own lives, I can tell +you; however, I gave you the promise I would do my best for you when +you started with me, and I will go with you now, though what you want +to interfere for here is more than I can make out. Pshaw! what matters +two or three of these accursed French, more or less?" + +As they neared the chief's house they saw him coming towards them. His +brow was as black as thunder; he was evidently prepared for the news +of his lieutenant's death. + +"These messengers want to speak to you for a moment," Garcias said. + +The chief stopped with an impatient gesture. + +"Señor," Tom said, with a dignity which surprised the chief; "we are +not what we seem. We are two English officers, and we have come to beg +of you, to implore you, not to tarnish the cause for which you fight +by shedding the blood of women and children." + +The boys had agreed that it would be altogether hopeless to try to +save the French officers. + +"British officers, indeed," exclaimed Nunez, "a likely story. Do you +know them as such, Garcias?" + +"No," Garcias said bluntly, "I never guessed at it; but now they say +so, I think it's likely enough, for they don't seem to see things in +the same way as other people." + +"I can give you proof of it," Tom said, calmly, pulling up the sleeve +of his coat, and showing a cicatrix in his forearm. Taking a knife +from his pocket, he cut into the skin, and drew forth a tiny silver +tube. This he opened, and handed to Nunez a paper signed by Lord +Wellington, declaring the bearers to be British officers, and +requesting all loyal Spaniards to give them every assistance. + +The captain read it through, and flung it down. "You may be officers," +he said contemptuously; "but if you were Lord Wellington himself, I +would not spare these accursed French. Listen!" and as he spoke a howl +of rage ran from the other end of the village, and told too plainly +the nature of the tidings the messenger had brought. + +"I again protest," Tom said firmly. "I protest, as a British officer, +and in the name of humanity, against this cold-blooded murder of a +woman and child. It is a disgrace to Spain, a disgrace to the cause, +it is a brutal and cowardly act." + +The guerilla furiously drew a pistol; but Garcias placed himself +between him and Tom. "I have promised him a safe conduct," he said, +"and have given my word for his safety. He is only a boy, and a young +fool; don't trouble with him." + +Fortunately at this moment, for the guerilla was still irresolutely +handling his pistol, a crowd was seen coming towards them, headed by +a woman who seemed frantic with rage and grief. All were shouting, +"Death to the assassins! death to the French!" The chief at once moved +forward to meet them. + +Tom and Peter gave a significant glance towards each other, and then +Tom turned to go back towards the house which Nunez inhabited, while +Peter hurried towards the spot where the prisoners were kept. Already +a crowd was assembling who were talking threateningly at the French +officers. Peter made his way through them until he stood by the lady, +who, with her child clinging to her neck, looked in terror at the +angry crowd, whose attention, however, was directed to the officers, +who stood looking calmly indifferent to their threats and insults. + +"Do you speak Spanish, madam?" Peter asked, leaning over her. + +She shook her head. + +"Do you speak English?" he asked, in that tongue. + +"Yes, yes, a little." the lady said, eagerly; "who are you? What is +this fierce crowd about?" + +"Hush!" Peter said. "I am a friend. Listen. In a few minutes they are +going to shoot you all." The lady gave a stifled cry, and pressed +her child close to her. "Remember, when they come to you, ask for a +priest; gain a few minutes, and I hope to save you and the child." + +So saying, he slipped away into the crowd again. He had scarcely done +so when Nunez arrived, accompanied by many of his men. The crowd fell +back, and he strode up to the French officers. "French dogs," he said, +"you are to die. I spared you to exchange, but your compatriots have +murdered my lieutenant, and so now it's your turn. You may think +yourselves lucky that I shoot you, instead of hanging you. Take them +to that wall," he said, pointing to one some twenty yards off. + +The Frenchmen understood enough Spanish to know that their fate was +sealed. Without a word they took each other's hands, and marched +proudly to the spot pointed out. Here, turning round, they looked with +calm courage at the Spaniards, who formed up with leveled muskets at +a few paces distance. "Vive la France! Tirez," said the elder, in a +firm, voice, and in a moment they fell back dead, pierced with a dozen +balls. + +Peter had turned away when Nunez appeared on the scene, to avoid +seeing the murder, and with his eyes fixed in the direction in which +Tom had gone, he listened almost breathlessly to what should come. +The French lady had sat immovable, cowering over her child, while her +countrymen were taken away and murdered. As Nunez passed where she +crouched, he said to two of his men, "Put your muskets to their heads, +and finish them!" As the men approached, she lifted up her face, pale +as death, and said,-- + +"Un prêtre, uno padre!" + +"She wants a priest," the men said, drawing back; "she has a right to +absolution." + +There was a murmur of assent from those around, and two or three +started to the priest's house, situated only a few yards away, being +one of the end houses of the village. The priest soon appeared, came +up to the spot, and received orders to shrive the Frenchwoman. He +attempted a remonstrance, but was silenced by a threat from Nunez, +and knowing from experience of such scenes that his influence went +for nothing with Nunez and his fierce band, he bent over her, and the +crowd drew back, to let them speak unheard. At this moment, to Peter's +intense relief, he saw Tom approaching with the captain's two children +walking beside him. Absorbed in what was passing before them, no one +else looked round, and Peter slipped away and joined his brother. They +came within twenty yards of the crowd, and then paused. + +"Wait a minute," Tom said to the children, "your father is busy." + +In another minute Nunez shouted roughly, "There that will do; finish +with it and have done! I want to be off to my dinner." + +Tom and Peter simultaneously drew out a large Spanish knife, and each +took one of the children firmly by the shoulder. + +"Stop! Señor Nunez!" Tom shouted in a loud, clear tone. "Stop! or by +heaven there will be four victims instead of two! Let one of you lift +a finger against these captives--let one of you come one step nearer +to us--and, by the Holy Virgin, we will drive our knives into these +children's hearts!" + +A cry of astonishment broke from the crowd, and one of agony and rage +from Nunez, who tottered against a wall in horror at the danger in +which his daughters were placed. + +"Listen! all of you," Tom said, "we are English officers, we have +shown our papers to Nunez, and he knows it is so. We will not suffer +this murder of a mother and her child. If they are to die, we will die +with them; but these two children shall die too! Now, what is it to +be?" + +A dozen of the guerillas leveled their guns at the two daring boys. + +"No! no!" Nunez shrieked; "lower your guns. Don't hurt the children, +señors. The captives shall not be hurt; I swear it! They shall go +free. Give me my children." + +"Not if I know it," Tom said; "Do you think I could trust the word of +a man who would murder women and children in cold blood? No; these +girls shall go with us as hostages, till we are safe under French +guard." + +"They will tell them the way up here," said one of the woman in the +group, "and then we shall be all killed." + +"No," Tom said; "the lady shall swear not to tell the way up here. She +shall swear on your priest's crucifix. We will give you our words as +British officers." + +"But how are the children to get back here again?" another asked, for +Nunez was so paralyzed that he could only gaze on the children, who +were crying bitterly, and implore them to stand quiet, and not try to +get away. After more parleying the arrangements were completed. The +crowd fell back on either side, so as to leave a large space round the +French lady. Tom and Peter then went up to them with the little girls. +The lady was sobbing with joy and excitement at this unexpected +relief. + +"Can you walk?" Tom asked her in English. + +"Yes," she said, getting up hastily, but almost falling again. + +"Garcias will go first, as guide. The priest will give you his arm," +Tom went on, "these two young women will go with you and carry your +child if necessary. You will walk on, twenty yards ahead of us. We +follow with these girls. No one is to follow us, or accompany us. We +are to go on like that till we come upon your outposts, and then the +priest and the two women will bring back Nunez's children." + +"You will send them safe back, you swear?" asked Nunez, in tremulous +tones. + +"Psha!" Tom said contemptuously, "you don't suppose we are +child-murderers, like yourself." + +"Remember!" the guerilla said, in a sudden burst of passion, "if you +ever cross my path again, I will--" + +"Do terrible things no doubt," Tom said scornfully; "and do you +beware, too. It is wild beasts like yourself who have brought disgrace +and ruin on Spain. No defeat could dishonor and disgrace her as much +as your fiendish cruelty. It is in revenge for the deeds that you and +those like you do, that the French carry the sword and fire to your +villages. We may drive the French out, but never will a country which +fights by murder and treachery become a great nation. Are you ready, +Garcias!" + +"I am ready," the muleteer said, stepping forward from the silent and +scowling throng. + +"We can trust you," Tom said heartily; "take us the short way straight +down into the valley; we may have the luck to come upon a passing +French troop in an hour. Think of that, madam," he said to the French +lady, "let that give you strength and courage." + +So saying, the procession set out in the order Tom had indicated, +amidst the curses of the guerillas, who were furious at seeing +themselves thus bearded. At the brow of the hill Tom looked back, and +saw that the guerillas were still standing in a group, in front of +which he could distinguish the figure of Nunez. Taking off his hat, +he waved an ironical farewell, and then followed the party down +the hillside into the broad valley below. They could see the road +stretching like a thread along it, but to their disappointment, not +a figure was visible upon it. Now that there was no longer danger of +treachery, the party closed up together. + +"How far is it to Vittoria, Garcias?" + +"Twenty good miles, señor." + +"But we shall never get there," Tom said in dismay. "I am sure the +lady could not walk another five miles; she is quite exhausted now." + +"You will not have to go five miles, señor. There is a body of four +or five hundred French in that large village you see there; it is not +more than three miles at most." + +It was a weary journey, for the French lady, exhausted by fatigue +and excitement, was often obliged to stop and sit down to rest, and, +indeed, could not have got on at all had not Garcias on one side and +the padre on the other helped her on. At last, just as the sun was +setting, they approached the village, and could see the French +sentries at its entrance. When within a hundred yards they paused. + +"We are safe now," Tom said; "it is not necessary for you to go +farther. Good-by, little ones; I am sorry we have given you such a +fright, but it was not our fault. Good-by, padre; I know that you will +not grudge your walk, for the sake of its saving the lives of these +unfortunates. Good-by, Garcias; thanks for your kindness and fidelity. +I will report them when I return, and will, if I get a chance, send +you a remembrance of our journey together." + +"Good-by, señors," Garcias said, shaking them by the hand; "you +English are different to us, and I am not surprised now at your +General holding Portugal against all the French armies." Then he +lowered his voice, so that the Spanish women standing by could not +hear him. "Be on your guard, señors; don't move on from the village +without a strong convoy is going on; change your disguise, if +possible; distrust every one you come across, and, in heaven's name, +get back to your lines as soon as possible, for you may be assured +that your steps will be dogged, and that you will be safe nowhere in +Spain from Nunez's vengeance. The guerillas communicate with each +other, and you are doomed if you fall into the hands of any, except, +perhaps, one or two of the greater chiefs. Be always on your guard; +sleep with your eyes open. Remember, except in the middle of a French +regiment, you will never be really safe." + +"Thanks, Garcias!" the boys said earnestly, "we will do our best to +keep our throats safe. At any rate, if we go down, it shall not be for +want of watchfulness!" + +Another shake of the hands, and the party separated. The Spanish woman +who was carrying the sleeping French child handed her over to Tom, who +took her without waking her while Peter lent his arm to the French +lady. + +"Madam," Tom said in English, "you will soon be among your friends. I +know that you will keep your promise not to divulge the situation of +the village you have left. I must ask you, also, to promise me not +to say that we speak English, or to say anything which may create a +suspicion that we are not what we seem. You will, of course, relate +your adventures, and speak of us merely as Spanish boys, who acted as +they did being moved by pity for you. We must accompany you for some +time, for Nunez will move heaven and earth to get us assassinated, and +all we want is that you shall obtain permission for us to sleep in the +guard-room, so as to be under shelter of French bayonets until we can +decide upon our course of action." + +The lady assented with a gesture, for she was too exhausted to speak, +and as they reached the French sentries she tottered and sank down on +the ground insensible. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +MADRID. + + +The French sentries, who had been watching with surprise the slow +approach of two peasant boys, the one carrying a child, the other +assisting a woman clad in handsome, but torn and disheveled clothes, +on seeing the latter fall, called to their comrades, and a sergeant +and some soldiers came out from a guard-room close by. + +"Hallo!" said the sergeant. "What's all this? Who is this woman? And +where do you come from?" + +The boys shook their heads. + +"Of course," the sergeant said, lifting the lady, "they don't +understand French; how should they? She looks a lady, poor thing. Who +can she be, I wonder?" + +"General Reynier," Tom said, touching her. + +"General Reynier!" exclaimed the sergeant to his comrades. "It must be +the general's wife. I heard she was among those killed or carried off +from that convoy that came through last night. Jacques, fetch out +Captain Thibault, and you, Noel, run for Dr. Pasques." + +The officer on guard came out, and, upon hearing the sergeant's +report, had Madame Reynier at once carried into a house hard by, and +sent a message to the colonel of the regiment. The little girl, still +asleep, was also carried in and laid down, and the regimental doctor +and the colonel soon arrived. The former went into the house, the +latter endeavored in vain to question the boys in French. Finding it +useless, he walked up and down impatiently until a message came down +from the doctor that the lady had recovered from her fainting fit, and +wished to see him at once. + +Tom and Peter, finding that no one paid any attention to them, sat, +quietly down by the guard-house. + +In a few minutes the French colonel came down. "Where are those boys?" +he exclaimed hastily. There was quite a crowd of soldiers round the +house, for the news of the return of General Reynier's wife and child +had circulated rapidly and created quite an excitement. "Where are +those boys?" he shouted again. + +The sergeant of the guard came forward. + +"I had no orders to keep them prisoners, sir," he said in an +apologetic tone, for he had not noticed the boys, and thought that +he was going to get into a scrape for not detaining them; but he +was interrupted by one of the soldiers who had heard the question, +bringing them forward. + +To the astonishment of the soldiers, the colonel rushed forward, and, +with a Frenchman's enthusiasm, actually kissed them. "Mes braves +garçons!" he exclaimed. "Mes braves garçons! Look you, all of you," +he exclaimed to the soldiers, "you see these boys, they are heroes, +they have saved, at the risk of their own lives, mark you, General +Reynier's wife and daughter; they have braved the fury of that +accursed Nunez and his band, and have brought them out from that den +of wolves." And then, in excited tones, he described the scene as he +had heard it from Madame Reynier. + +At this relation the enthusiasm of the French soldiers broke out in +a chorus of cheers and excited exclamations. The men crowded round +the boys, shook them by the hands, patted them on the back, and in a +hundred strange oaths vowed an eternal friendship for them. + +After a minute or two, the colonel raised his hand for silence. "Look +you," he said to the men. "You can imagine that, after what these boys +have done, their life is not safe for a moment. This accursed Nunez +will dog them and have them assassinated if he can. So I leave them to +you; you will take care of them, my children, will you not?" + +A chorus of assurances was the reply, and the boys found themselves as +it were adopted into the regiment. The soldiers could not do enough +for them, but, as neither party understood the other's language, +the intercourse did not make much progress. They had, however, real +difficulty in refusing the innumerable offers of a glass of wine or +brandy made to them by every group of soldiers as they moved about +through the village. + +The boys felt that their position was a false one; and although, in +point of fact, they had no report to make upon the regiment, still +the possibility that if discovered they might be thought to have been +acting as spies on men who treated them with so much friendliness was +repugnant to them. However, their stay was not to be prolonged, for +the regiment had already been stationed for a month at the village, +and was to be relieved by another expected hourly from France, and was +then to go on to Madrid. This they learned from one of the soldiers +who could speak a few words of Spanish. + +It was upon the third day after their arrival that the expected +regiment came in, and next morning the boys started soon after +daybreak with their friends. They had not seen Madame Reynier during +their stay in the village, for she was laid up with a sharp attack of +illness after the excitement she had gone through. She was still far +from fit to travel, but she insisted on going on, and a quantity of +straw was accordingly laid in a cart, pillows and cushions were heaped +on this, and an awning was arranged above to keep off the sun. The +regiment had taken on the transport animals which had come in with the +baggage of the troops the night before; hence the mule drivers and +other followers were all strangers. The boys were marching beside the +regiment, talking with one of the sergeants who had been previously +for two years in Spain, and spoke a little Spanish, when the colonel, +who had been riding alongside Madame Reynier, told them as he passed +on to the head of the regiment, that she wished to speak to them. + +The boys fell out, and allowed the troops and the line of baggage +animals and carts to pass them. As the latter came along, Tom observed +one of the Spanish drivers glance in their direction, and immediately +avert his head. + +"Peter, that fellow is one of Nunez's band; I will almost swear to his +face. No doubt he has joined the convoy for the purpose of stabbing us +on the first opportunity. I expected this. We must get rid of them at +once." + +The boys had both been furnished with heavy cavalry pistols by order +of the colonel, to defend themselves against any sudden attack, and, +placing his hand on the butt in readiness for instant use, Tom, +accompanied by his brother walked up to the Spaniard. + +"You and those with you are known," he said. "Unless you all fall out +at the next village we come to, I will denounce you, and you haven't +five minutes to live after I do so. Mind, if one goes on you all +suffer." + +The Spaniard uttered a deep execration, and put his hand on his knife, +but seeing that the boys were in readiness, and that the French +baggage guard marching alongside would certainly shoot him before he +could escape, he relinquished his design. + +"Mind," Tom said, "the first village; it is only a mile ahead, and +we shall probably halt there for five minutes; if one of you goes a +single foot beyond it, you will swing in a row." + +So saying, the boys dropped behind again until Madame Reynier's cart +came along. The sides were open, and the lady, who was sitting up, +supported by pillows, with her child beside her, saw them, and called +to them to climb up to her. They did so at once, and she then poured +forth her thanks in tones of the deepest gratitude. + +"My husband is not at Madrid," she said when she saw by the boys' +confusion that they would be really glad if she would say no more; +"but when he hears of it he will thank you for saving his wife and +child. Of course," she went on, "I can see that you are not what you +seem. Spanish boys would not have acted so. Spanish boys do not speak +English. That makes it impossible for me in any way to endeavor to +repay my obligation. Had you been even Spanish peasants, the matter +would have been comparatively easy; then my husband could have made +you rich and comfortable for life; as it is--" + +She paused, evidently hoping that they would indicate some way in +which she could serve them. + +"As it is, madam," Tom said, "you can, if you will, be of great +service to us by procuring for us fresh disguises in Madrid, for I +fear that after what happened with Nunez our lives will not be safe +from his vengeance anywhere in Spain. Already we have discovered that +some of his band are accompanying this convoy with the intention of +killing us at the first opportunity." + +"Why do you not denounce them instantly?" Madame Reynier said, rising +in her excitement and looking round. + +"We cannot well do that," Tom said, "at least not if it can be +avoided. They know already that we have recognized them, and will +leave at the next village; so we are safe at present, but in Madrid we +shall be no longer so. We cannot remain permanently under the guard of +the bayonets of the 63d Line; and indeed our position is as you may +guess, a false and unpleasant one, from which we would free ourselves +at the first opportunity. We shall therefore ask you, when you get to +Madrid, to provide us with fresh disguises and a pass to travel west +as far as the limits of the French lines." + +"You can consider that as done," Madame Reynier answered; "I only +regret that it is so slight a return. And now," she said lightly, to +change the conversation, "I must introduce you to this young lady. +Julie," she asked in French, "do you remember those boys?" + +"Yes," Julie said; "these are the boys who gave mamma and Julie water +when those wicked men would not give us anything to drink when we were +thirsty; and it was these boys that mamma said prevented the wicked +men from killing us. They are good boys, nice boys, but they are very +ragged and dirty." + +Madame Reynier smiled, and translated Julie's answer. + +"You know," she went on, hesitatingly, "that I know that--that you are +English officers. I heard you say so when you saved us. But how is it +that you can be officers so very young?" + +Tom explained that in England the officers entered for the most part +directly, and not, as in the French army, by promotion from the ranks, +and that, consequently, the junior officers were much younger than +those of equal rank in the French service. + +The convoy had now reached the village, and a halt was ordered, +and the boys alighting, walked forward to see that their unwelcome +attendants quitted them. As the soldiers fell out from their order of +march and sat down under the shade of the houses many of the Spaniards +with the baggage-train followed their example, and the boys saw the +man to whom they had spoken go up to four others, and in a short time +these separated themselves from the rest, went carelessly round a +corner, and when the order came to continue the march, failed to make +their appearance. Their absence passed unnoticed save by the boys, +for the natives frequently took advantage of the passage of troops +and convoys to travel from one part of the country to another, for +the guerillas were for the most part little better than brigands, +and would plunder their own countrymen without scruple whenever the +opportunity was favorable. + +The march to Madrid was accomplished without adventure, and the boys +improved the occasion by endeavoring to pick up as many French phrases +as they could, as they marched along by the side of the sergeant who +had specially taken them under his charge. He knew a little Spanish, +so they managed to keep up a conversation with him in a strange medley +of the two languages, which helped to pass the time away merrily. At +Madrid they took up their quarters in the barracks with the regiment; +they had already explained their plan of disguise to Madame Reynier, +and she had promised to provide all that was necessary and to obtain +the military pass for them. + +They had soon reason to congratulate themselves that their stay +in Madrid was under the protection of French bayonets. During the +day after their arrival they remained quietly in barracks, as the +appearance of two Spanish peasants walking about the street with +French soldiers would have excited comments. In the evening, however, +they agreed with their friend the sergeant, who was going into the +town with three or four of his comrades, that they should accompany +them, not, however, walking actually with them, but following a few +paces behind, so as to be within reach of their assistance should any +one molest them. + +They reached the Piazza del Sol, the great central square of Madrid, +without incident, and amused themselves with the sight of the constant +stream of people passing to and fro, the ladies in their graceful +black mantillas, the men in cloaks and Spanish sombreros, or round +felt hats. Presently the sergeant and his companions left the square, +and turning down one of the narrow streets which run into it, amused +themselves by looking into the shops, with their gay fans, bright +handkerchiefs, and other articles of Spanish manufacture. + +Tom and Peter followed their example, keeping some ten paces behind +them. It was now nearly dark, and the streets were but badly lighted +except by the lamps in the shop windows. + +"It may be all fancy, Tom," Peter said, "but I can't help thinking +that we are followed. There are three follows who have passed us +twice, and I am pretty sure they are particularly noticing us. Keep +your hand on your pistol." + +As the boys paused at another shop window, the three men again +approached, this time from ahead. + +"Look out, Tom," Peter said sharply. + +As the men came up to them, one of them exclaimed, + +"Now!" + +The boys faced round, pistol in hand, with a cry to their friends, +just as the three Spaniards, with drawn knives, were upon them. + +The sudden movement disconcerted them, and two sprang back from the +leveled tubes of the pistols, with fierce oaths of surprise, the +third, however, rushed in and struck at Tom; the latter instinctively +moved aside, and the knife inflicted a heavy gash on the shoulder, and +almost at the same moment Peter's bullet crashed through the fellow's +skull. + +His comrades, with a cry of rage, rushed in, but before they could +strike, the sergeant was up and ran one through the body with his +sword, whereon the other fled. The whole affair lasted only three +or four seconds. In less than a minute the street was absolutely +deserted, for rows and fights were so common between the soldiers and +the people, that all prudent people got out of the way the moment a +knife was drawn. + +"Well done, lad," the sergeant said to Peter, "I thought your brother +was done for. Luckily I had faced your way when the fellow attacked +you, and was on my way to help you before they began, but I feared I +should be too late. That was a wonderfully pretty snap shot of yours, +and you were as cool as old hands. Peste! I don't know what to make +of you boys. Now come along, we had better get away from this carrion +before any one comes up and asks questions. First, though, let me tie +up your shoulder." + +This was soon done, and while the sergeant was engaged upon it, his +comrades, old soldiers, turned over the dead Spaniards, searched their +pockets, and chuckled as they found several gold pieces. + +One or two French soldiers alone came near them before they left the +spot, attracted by the sound of the pistol. A word from the sergeant, +"These scoundrels attacked us, they have got their _coup_," satisfied +them, and the boys and their friend soon regained the crowded main +street, leaving the bodies for the watch to find and bury. + +Arrived at the barracks, Tom's arm was examined by the surgeon, and +the cut pronounced a deep flesh wound, but of no consequence; it was +soon strapped up, and with his arm in a sling Tom went down to the +sergeant's quarters, where they slept. Here they had to go through +much patting on the back, for their friend had described the readiness +and coolness with which they stood at bay, and popular as they were +before they were now more so than ever. For the rest of their stay in +Madrid the boys did not stir out of barracks. One at least of Nunez's +envoys they knew to be alive, and he could enlist any number of the +lower class against them, so they resolved not to go out until they +should finally start. + +After a fortnight's stay they were sent for to the colonel's quarters, +where they found Madame Reynier and her child. "I had a letter from my +husband this morning," she said, "from his camp near Cordova, thanking +you with all his heart for the inestimable service you rendered him, +and begging me to tell you that you can count on his gratitude to the +extent of his life at any and all times. You need no assurance of +mine. And now about your journey. All is prepared for you to leave +to-morrow morning. You are to come here to the colonel's quarters soon +after daybreak. Here are your two disguises, for the one as a young +bachelor of medicine, for the other as a young novice. Here is your +pass, signed by the minister, authorizing you both to pass on to your +relations at Ciudad Rodrigo, and to go unmolested thence where you +choose, also recommending you to the care of all French and Spanish +authorities. A regiment marches to-morrow morning for the frontier; +the colonel is a cousin of my husband. I have told him that some +friends of yours rendered me much kindness and service on my way down, +and that I particularly commend you to his care. He has promised to +allow you to follow the regiment, and to see that you get quarters at +each halting-place. He does not know you for anything but what you +appear to be. When you have put on these dresses to-morrow morning, +step out by the private door from these quarters, looking carefully +when you start to see that there is no one in the street. Then go +boldly to No. 15, Rue St. Geronimo; go into the courtyard, there you +will see two stout mules with all necessaries, under charge of a +soldier, who will have instructions to hand them over to you without +asking any questions; then go down to the Retiro and wait till the +16th come along. The Colonel will be on the look-out for you, and you +will ride up to him and hand him this note. And now farewell, dear +boys; never shall I forget you, or cease to pray for you, and may be +when this terrible war is over we may meet as friends again. Keep +these little tokens of remembrance of your grateful friends." So +saying, Madame Reynier pressed into the boys' hands two magnificent +gold watches and chains, held her child up for each of them to kiss, +threw her arms round their necks and kissed them herself, and then +drawing down her veil to conceal the tears which were standing in her +eyes, left them hastily. + +That night the boys said good-by to their friend the sergeant, and +to those soldiers with whom they had most companionship. "You have +guessed, no doubt, sergeant," Tom said, in his mixture of Spanish and +French, "that we are not exactly what we seem to be, but if we should +ever meet again, under different circumstances, I want you to remember +that our connection with the regiment has been in a way forced upon +us. I should not like you to think, that is that under the pretence +of friendship, we have been treacherously learning things. Do you +understand?" + +"I understand, mes braves," the sergeant said, "Jacques Pinteau is no +fool, and he saw from the first that you were not two ragged Spanish +peasant boys by birth. I daresay I can guess what you are, but there +need be no ill-will for that, and as you only came among us by +accident, as it were, there is no more to be said either way. There is +one thing certain, wherever or however we meet, we shall be friends." + +So well were Madame Reynier's plans arranged that the boys passed from +Madrid to the frontier without a single hitch or unpleasantness. Tom +was soberly attired as a student at the university, Peter was muffled +up to the eyes as a timid young novice, going from school to enter a +convent, of which his aunt was lady superior, at Ciudad Rodrigo. The +colonel, and, following his example, the officers of the regiment were +polite and civil. The marches were of easy length, the mules stout +and smooth-going, with well-filled traveling sacks. The weather was +delightful, and the boys enjoyed the fortnight's march exceedingly. +Upon the road they learned that Massena had laid siege to Ciudad +Rodrigo, and that the 16th was on its way to join the besieging army. + +It was the end of June, 1810, when the 16th joined Massena's force +before Ciudad Rodrigo. The siege had continued for some time, the +British light division, under General Craufurd, lay upon the other +side of the river Agueda, which separated them alike from the town and +the French army. The colonel of the 16th politely expressed to Tom his +regret that he could not, for the present, conduct them to their final +destination, but that he hoped that the gate would soon be open for +them. Tom thanked him for the civility which he had shown them upon +the road, and said that he would, with his sister, take up his abode +for the present a few miles from the beleaguered fortress. On leaving +the regiment the boys went higher up the Agueda to the little town of +Villar, where there was a bridge. This however, was watched by the +troops of both armies, and there was, at present, no chance of +affecting a passage. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +THE FIGHT ON THE COA. + + +All through the winter of 1809-1810, Wellington had remained quietly +on the frontier of Portugal, engaged in disciplining his troops, many +of whom were raw drafts from the militia, in urging upon the home +Government the necessity of fresh reinforcements, if the war was to be +carried on with the smallest hopes of success, and in controversies +and disputes with the Portuguese regency. This body of incapables +starved their own army, refused supplies and transport to the British, +and behaved with such arrogance and insolence that Wellington was +several times driven to use the threat that, unless measures were +taken to keep the Portuguese troops from starving, and to supply food +to the British, he would put his army on board the transports at +Lisbon, and give up the struggle altogether. + +Spring found the army still on the frontier, and when the French +advanced in force in May to lay siege to the Spanish frontier fortress +of Ciudad Rodrigo, Wellington to the intense disappointment of his own +troops, and the bitter anger of the Portuguese and Spaniards, refused +to fight a battle to save the fortress, which, under its gallant old +governor, Andrea Hernati, was defending itself nobly. + +Wellington's position was, however, a very difficult one, and his +responsibilities were immense. Allowing for the detachments which were +massing to check three other French columns advancing in different +directions, he had but 25,000 men with which to attempt to raise the +siege of Ciudad Rodrigo, or to draw off the besieged garrison. Massena +had under him 60,000 French veterans, and was desiring nothing more +than that Wellington should attack him. The chances of victory then +were by no means strong, and in any case victory could only have been +purchased by a loss of men which would have completely crippled the +British general, and would have rendered it absolutely necessary for +him to fall back again at once. A defeat or even a heavy loss of +men, would have so dispirited the faint-hearted Government at home +that they would undoubtedly have recalled the whole expedition, and +resigned Portugal to its fate. Thus Wellington decided not to risk the +whole fate of the British army and of Portugal for merely a temporary +advantage, and so stood firm against the murmurs of his own troops, +the furious reproaches of the Portuguese and Spaniards, and the moving +entreaties for aid of the gallant governor of the besieged town. + +At the same time that he refused to risk a general battle, he kept +Craufurd's division in advance of the Coa, and within two hours' march +of the enemy, thereby encouraging the garrison of Ciudad Rodrigo, and +preventing Massena from pushing forward a portion of his army while +the rest pursued the siege. + +Craufurd's front was guarded by the Agueda, a river only passable by +two or three bridges and fords in wet weather, but fordable in many +places in the dry season. At the commencement of June the Agueda +fell, and the French crossed in strength at various places. Craufurd, +however, still maintained his position in front of the Coa with great +skill and boldness. He had under his command only 4000 infantry, 1100 +cavalry, and six guns, and his maintenance of his position, almost +within gun-shot of an enemy's army, 60,000 strong, for three months, +is one of the finest feats of military audacity and ability ever +performed. + +Until the 11th of July the boys remained quietly at a cottage occupied +by peasants, who believed their story that they were only waiting +to proceed when the French army advanced. They were freed from +molestation or inquiry upon the part of the French by the pass with +which Madame Reynier had supplied them. + +Upon that day Ciudad Rodrigo surrendered, and Massena prepared at once +to enter Portugal. Upon the 21st the cavalry advanced in great force, +and upon the following day the boys resolved upon endeavoring to +rejoin the British army. The Agueda was now easily fordable in many +places, but the boys determined to swim across, at a distance from the +point at which the French army was now pouring forward. + +As evening came on they left the cottage, and walked two miles up +the stream, and, as soon as night fell, took off the costumes which +had proved of such service to them and left them on the bank; then +fastening their peasants' suits upon two bundles of rushes to keep +them dry, entered the little river, and were soon upon the opposite +shore. They knew, from what they had heard in the afternoon, that +Craufurd had fallen back upon Almeida, a fortified town, and that it +was probable he would at once cross the Coa, as resistance to the +force now approaching him seemed nothing short of madness. + +No good, indeed, could be gained by a fight in such a position, with a +deep river in the rear, crossed by only a narrow bridge, and commanded +by both banks, and Wellington's orders had been imperative "that, upon +no account whatever was Craufurd to fight beyond the Coa." + +Craufurd, however, a rash and obstinate, although a skilful general, +was determined upon having a brush with the enemy before he fell back. +He anticipated, no doubt, that only an advanced guard of the enemy +would come up at first, and his intention was to inflict a severe +check upon them with the magnificent little division under his +command, and then fall back triumphantly across the Coa. Massena, +however, was well aware of the fighting powers of the light division, +and was preparing to hurl suddenly upon him a force more than +sufficient to crush it. + +The Scudamores had but little fear of meeting with any large body of +the enemy, as the main French advance was direct from Ciudad Rodrigo; +their cavalry would, however, be scattered all over the country, and +were they to fall into the hands of any of these parties they would +have been shot instantly, upon suspicion of endeavoring to convey news +of the French movements to Craufurd. + +The point where they crossed the river was between Villar and Naves +Frias, and, after an hour's walking, they struck the little rivulet +called Duas Casas. This they crossed at once, as they knew that by +following its southern bank until they saw some high ground to their +left they would find themselves near Almeida, which they hoped to +reach before the English retreated. + +All night they tramped through the fields of stubble, where the corn +had been long since cut for the use of Craufurd's cavalry, but walking +at night through an unknown country is slow work, and when day began +to break they entered a small wood just beyond the point where the +Turones, as the southern arm of the Duas Casas is called, branches off +from the main stream. Several times in the course of the day bodies +of the enemy's cavalry came near their place of concealment, and the +Scudamores congratulated themselves that they had not given way to +their impatience, and tried to push on across the twenty miles that +alone separated them from their friends. + +At nightfall the wind rose, and a heavy rain began to fall. They had +no stars by which to steer their course, and were, therefore, forced +to follow the bank of the Turones, although they knew that it would +lead them some distance to the north of Almeida. It was slow work, +indeed, for they had to grope their way along in the storm, following +every turn and bend of the river, which formed their only guide. After +several hours' toil they came into a road running north and south. +This they knew was the road leading from Guarda to Almeida, and it +gave them a clue as to the distance they had come. Still following the +river, they continued their course until they approached San Pedro, +whence they knew that a road ran directly to the British position +in front of Almeida, that is if the British still maintained their +position there. + +As they approached the village, they heard a deep, hollow sound, +and stopping to listen, and laying their ears to the ground, could +distinguish the rumble of heavy carriages. + +"The French are advancing in force, Peter; we are just in time; +they are going to attack us in the morning at daybreak. We know the +direction now; let us turn to the left, and try to get on in advance +of them. They probably will not push on much farther until there +is light enough to permit them to form order of battle; they are +evidently, by the sound, going to the left, rather than straight on." + +The Scudamores now hurried on, and presently the rumbling of the +artillery died away, and they ventured to push to their left, and to +get on the road, which they found deserted. Half an hour's run, for +they knew that every minute was of importance, and they heard the +welcome challenge, "Who comes there?" "Two British officers," they +answered, and in a few minutes they were taken to the officer in +charge of the picket, and having once convinced him of their identity, +were heartily greeted and welcomed. + +"The French are advancing in great force to attack," Tom said; "please +forward us instantly to the general." + +The matter was too important for an instant's delay, and a sergeant +was at once told off to accompany them. + +The first faint blush of daylight was in the east when they arrived +at the cottage which served as General Craufurd's quarters, and, upon +their speaking to the sentinel at the door, a window was thrown open, +and a deep voice demanded "What is it?" + +"We have just arrived through the French lines," Tom said, "the enemy +are at hand in force." + +The casement closed, and an instant afterwards the general came out. +"Who are you?" + +"We belong to the Norfolk Rangers, general, and have been detached on +service in the interior; we have only just made our way back." + +"How am I to know your story is true?" the general asked sharply. + +"You may, perhaps, remember, sir, we landed from the 'Latona,' and you +kindly lent us horses to accompany you." + +"Aha! I remember," the general said. "Well, your news?" + +"The French have crossed the Turones in force, sir; at least they have +a good many guns with them." + +"Which way were they going?" + +"As far as we could judge by the sound, sir, they were taking up a +position between Villa Formosa and Fort Conception." + +"Good," the general said shortly; then turning to three or four of his +staff who had followed him from the cottage, "Get the troops under +arms at once. Come in here, gentlemen." + +The Scudamores entered, and as they came into the light of a candle +which stood on the table the general smiled grimly. + +"It is lucky you were able to recall yourselves to my memory, for +I should have needed some strong evidence to persuade me you were +British officers had I seen you before you spoke. You are wet to the +skin; there is a brandy bottle, and you will find some bread and cold +fowl in that cupboard." + +Five minutes later the boys followed General Craufurd from his hut. + +Short as was the time which had elapsed since their arrival, the +troops were already under arms, for three months of incessant alarm +and watchfulness had enabled this splendid division to act as one man, +and to fall in at any hour of the day or night in an incredibly short +time. Ten minutes later and the ramble of the baggage wagons was +heard along the road towards the bridge. The morning was clearing +fast, the clouds lifted, and the daylight seemed to break with unusual +suddenness. + +The dark masses of the French became visible forming up before the +Turones, and Craufurd hurried forward his cavalry and guns to check +their advance. + +"Hurry the infantry up, hurry them up," the general said urgently to +the officers by him. "Let them take post along the ridge, and then +fall back fighting towards the bridge. Major MacLeod," he said to an +officer of the 43d, "take these gentlemen with you; they are officers +of the Norfolk Rangers. They will join your regiment for the present. +When your regiment falls back, occupy that stone inclosure a little +way down the slope at the left of the road, and hold the enemy in +check while the troops file over the bridge." + +The officer addressed looked with surprise at the boys, and signing to +them to follow, hurried off to his regiment, which was on the left of +the British line. + +Next to them came a regiment of Portuguese riflemen, with a wing of +the 95th upon either flank, while the 52d formed the right of the +line. + +Upon reaching the regiment, Major MacLeod briefly introduced the boys +to the colonel, who said, "As you have no arms, gentlemen, I think you +had better make for the bridge at once." + +"Thank you, sir," Tom replied, "there will be some muskets disposable +before long, and directly they are so we will take our place in the +ranks." + +They had now leisure to look round and examine their position, and a +glance was sufficient to show how great was the peril in which General +Craufurd's obstinacy had placed his little force. In front of them +were 24,000 French infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 30 pieces of artillery. +An overwhelming force indeed, and one which could scarcely have been +withstood by the 4000 British infantry, even under the most favorable +conditions of position. The position, however, was here wholly against +the British. They stood at the edge of a plateau, and behind them the +ground fell away in a steep hillside to the Coa, a mile distant, and +across the Coa there was but a single bridge. + +The enemy was approaching fast. Ney's great brigade of cavalry swept +the British horse before them, and the infantry were following at a +run. + +Resistance on the edge of the plateau was hopeless, and Craufurd +ordered the infantry to fall back at once. The 43d filed into the +inclosure, rapidly cut loopholes in the wall, and as the enemy +appeared on the crest above opened a tremendous fire, under cover of +which the cavalry and artillery trotted briskly and in good order down +the road to the bridge. + +The Scudamores, having no duty, stood at the entrance to the inclosure +and watched the fight on their right. As the masses of French infantry +appeared on the edge of the plateau they made no pause, but opening +a heavy fire pressed forward on the retiring British troops, who +were falling back in open order, contesting every inch of ground. So +rapidly and hotly, however, did the French press after them that the +British were soon pushed back beyond the line of the inclosure, and as +the French followed closely, it was evident that the 43d would be cut +oft and surrounded. + +Their colonel saw their danger, and called upon them to fall in and +retreat, but the entrance was so narrow that it was clear at a glance +that ere one company could pass through it the French would be upon +them, and the regiment caught like rats in a trap. + +Officers and men alike saw the danger, and there was a pause of +consternation. + +Peter was standing next to the colonel, and said suddenly as the idea +flashed across him, "The wall is not very strong, sir, if the men mass +against it and push together I think it will go." + +The colonel caught at the idea. "Now, lads, steady, form against the +rear wall four deep, close together, shoulder to shoulder, as close +as you can pack; now get ready, one, two, three!" and at the word the +heavy mass of men swung themselves against the wall; it swayed with +the shock, and many stones were displaced; another effort and the +wall tottered and fell, and with a glad shout the 43d burst out, and +trotting on at the double soon joined the rifles and 95th. + +The ground was rough and broken with rocks, vineyards and inclosures, +and the troops, fighting with admirable coolness and judgment, took +advantage of every obstacle and fell back calmly and in good order +before the overwhelming force opposed to them. + +Fortunately the jealousies of the French generals, which throughout +the campaign contributed in no slight degree to the success of +the British, was now the cause of their safety, for Montbrun, who +commanded the French heavy cavalry, refused to obey Ney's order to +charge straight down to the bridge, in which case the whole English +infantry would have been cut off; the French hussars, however, being +on the British rear, charged among them whenever the ground permitted +them to do so. + +Upon the British right the ground was more open than upon the left, +and the 52d was therefore obliged to fall back more quickly than the +rest of the line, and were the first to arrive at the bridge head, +which was still choked with artillery and cavalry. This was the most +dangerous moment, the rest of the infantry could not retreat until the +bridge was clear, and the French with exulting shouts pressed hard +upon them to drive them back upon the river. + +Major MacLeod, seeing the urgent danger, rallied four companies of his +regiment upon the little hill on the right of the road, while Major +Rowan collected two companies on another to the left. Here they were +joined by many of the riflemen, and for a while the French advance was +checked. + +The Scudamores had remained throughout close to Major MacLeod, and had +long since armed themselves with the muskets and pouches of fallen +men, and with 43d shakoes on their heads, were fighting among the +ranks. + +The cloud of French skirmishers pressed hotly forward, and MacLeod, +seeing that the bridge was still blocked, resolved suddenly upon +a desperate measure. Taking off his cap, he pointed to the enemy, +and calling upon his men to follow him, rode boldly at them. Peter +Scudamore caught up a bugle which had fallen from a dead bugler by his +side, blew the charge, and the soldiers, cheering loudly, followed +MacLeod against the enemy. + +Astounded at this sudden and unexpected attack, the French skirmishers +paused, and then fell back before the furious charge of the 43d, who +pressed after them with loud and continuous cheering. Looking back, +MacLeod saw that the bridge was now clear, and recalled the troops, +who fell back rapidly again before the French infantry had recovered +sufficiently from their surprise to press them. + +The hussars were, however, again forward, and were galloping down the +road, which was here sunken between somewhat high banks. Tom and Peter +were with the last company, which turned and prepared to receive them, +when Tom, pointing to a coil of rope upon a cart which had broken +down, shouted, "Quick, tie it to these posts across the road." Two or +three men sprang to assist him, and in a minute the rope was stretched +across the road at a foot from the ground, and fastened round a stone +post on either side. They had scarcely seized their muskets and leapt +on the bank again, when the French cavalry came thundering down the +road. "Fire, a few of you," Tom said, "so as to call their attention +up here," and in accordance with his order a dropping fire was opened. +The French came along at a gallop; a few of the leading horses saw +the rope and leapt it, but those behind caught it and fell, the mass +behind pressed on, and in an instant the lane was choked with a +confused mass of men and horses. "Now a volley," Tom cried, "and then +to the bridge." + +Every musket was emptied in to the struggling mass, and then with a +cheer, the men ran briskly down to the bridge, and crossed--the last +of the British troops over the Coa. + +The rest of the infantry and artillery had already taken ground on the +heights behind the river, and these opened fire upon the French as +they approached the head of the bridge in pursuit. The British were +now, however, safe in the position which they ought to have taken up +before the advance of the French, and had General Craufurd obeyed his +orders not to fight beyond the Coa, the lives of 306 of his gallant +troops, including the officers, would have been saved. + +The battle, however, was not yet over. The artillery on both sides +played across the ravine, the French skirmishers swarmed down to the +river bank, and between them and the British infantry a rapid fire was +exchanged, while a heavy column marched down to the bridge. With a +deep-sounding cheer they advanced upon it, while with answering cheers +the British opened fire upon them. The depth of the ravine at first +deceived the British marksmen, and the column pressed on until its +head was three-quarters across the bridge. Then the shower smote it, +and beneath that terrible fire the head of the column melted away. +Still it pressed on until across the bridge the corpses lay piled in a +mass as high as the parapet, and beyond this heap, this terrible line, +there was no living. Then sullenly and slowly the French fell back, +while the British cheers rose exultingly along the hillside. + +Twice again did fresh columns pour on to the bridge, but only to melt +away under the British fire, neither of them reaching the dreadful +line which marked the point reached by the head of the first. The +artillery and musketry fire on both sides continued until four in the +afternoon, when a heavy rain set in, and the fire ceased altogether. + +As the Coa was fordable at several points lower down, and the French +could therefore have turned the position next day, the British troops +fell back during the night behind the Pinhel river, where Picton's +division was also encamped. + +Next morning the boys exchanged their Spanish suits for the uniform +of British officers, which they obtained from the effects of some of +those who had fallen upon the previous day, these being, as is usual +in a campaign, at once sold by auction, the amount realized being +received by the paymaster for the benefit of the dead men's relatives. +Major MacLeod had witnessed their ready presence of mind in throwing +the rope across the road, and so checking the French charge, and +giving time to the rear-guard to cross the bridge, and had made a very +favorable report upon the subject. + +Two days later and they joined the Rangers, who were stationed at +Guarda, and were received with the greatest heartiness by their +brother officers, with warm but respectful greetings by the men, and +with uproarious demonstrations of gladness on the part of Sambo. + +"The betting was two to one that you had gone down, boys," Captain +Manley said, after the first greetings; "but Carruthers and myself +have taken up all offers, and win I don't know how many dinners and +bottles of wine. I had the strongest faith you would get through +somehow. You will take up your quarters with me. I have two bedrooms +upstairs there, which Sam has taken possession of in your name. He +would have it that you were sure to be back in time for the first +fight. Dinner will be ready at six, and after that there will be a +general gathering round the fire in the open to hear your adventures. +No doubt you would be dining with the colonel, but I know he is +engaged to the general." + +"Yes, he told us so," Tom said, "and we are to dine with him +to-morrow." + +"All right, then; we'll make a night of it. Carruthers is coming to +dine, and Burke and Lethbridge; but the room won't hold more than six. +We are going to have a feast, for Sam has got hold of a sucking-pig; +where he got it from I dare not inquire, and Lethbridge said his +fellow had, somehow or other, found a turkey; as to wine, we shall +have it of the best, for Burke is quartered at the monastery, and the +monks are so delighted at finding him a good Catholic that they have +given him the run of their cellar." + +It was a jovial dinner, and no words can express the satisfaction and +delight which beamed on Sam's face as he stood behind his master, or +the grin of pride with which he placed the sucking-pig on the table. + +"Sam, Sam!" Captain Manley said reprovingly, "I fear that pig is not +honestly come by, and that one of these days we shall hear that you +have come to a bad end." + +"No, no, Massa Captain Manley, sar," Sam said, "dat pig come quite +honest, dat pig made present to Sam." + +"A likely story that, Sam. Come, out with it. I have no doubt it was +quite as honest as Lethbridge's turkey anyhow. Come, tell us how it +was." + +Thus invoked, Sam's face assumed the pompons air with which he always +related a story, and he began,-- + +"Well, sar, de affair happened in dis way. When de massas arribe, two +o'clock, and went in for long talk wid de colonel, dis chile said to +himself, 'Now what am I going to get them for dinner?' De rations +sarve out dis morning war all skin and bone, and war pretty nigh +finished at lunch. Sam say to himself, 'Captain Manley's sure to say, +'You dine wid me;' but as Captain Manley hadn't got no food himself, +de invitation was berry kind, berry kind indeed; but massa wasn't +likely to get fat on dat invitation." + +Sam's narrative was interrupted by a perfect shout of laughter upon +the part of all at table, Captain Manley joining heartily in the laugh +against himself. When they had a little recovered again, Sam went on +as gravely as ever. "Dis struck Sam berry serious, not to have nothing +for dinner after being away seben months; presently idea occur to dis +chile, and he stroll permiscuous up to big farm-house on hill. When +Sam got near house, kept out of sight of window; at last got quite +close, took off shako, and put head suddenly in at window. Sure +enough, just what Sam expected, dere sat missus of farm, fat ole +woman, wid fat ole servant opposite her. De door was open, and dis +little pig and several of his broders and sisters was a frisking in +and out. De old women look up bofe togeder, and dey give a awful +shriek when dey saw dis chile's head; dey fought it were de debil, +sure enough. Dey drop down on dere knees, and begin to pray as fast as +maybe. Den I give a loud 'Yah! yah!' and dey screams out fresh. 'Oh! +good massa debil!' says the ole woman, 'what you want? I been berry, +berry bad, but don't take me away.' You see, Massa Tom, I pick up +little Spanish, 'nuff to understand since you been gone. I not say +nuffin, and de ole woman den go on, 'If you want one soul Massa Debil, +take dis here,' pointing to her serbant;' she been much more wicked +nor me.' Den de serbant she set up awful shriek, and I says, 'Dis time +I hab pity on you, next time I come, if you not good I carry you bofe +away. But must take soul away to big debil 'else he neber forgibe me. +Dere, I will carry off soul of little pig. Gib it me.' De serbant she +gives cry ob joy, jump up, seize little pig, and berry much afraid, +bring him to window. Before I take him I say to old missus, 'Dis a +free gibt on your part?' and she say, 'Oh, yes, oh, yes, good Massa +Debil, you can take dem all if you like.' I say, 'No; only one--and +now me gib you bit advice. My Massa down below hear you very bad ole +women, never gib noting to de poor, berry hard, berry hard. Me advise +you change your conduct, or, as sure as eggs is eggs, he send me up +again for you no time.' Den I gave two great 'Yah! yah's!' again berry +loud, and showed de white ob my eyes, and dey went down on to knees +again, and I go quietly round corner ob house, and walk home wid de +pig which was giben to me. Noting like stealing about dat, Massa +Manley, sar!" + +Sam's story was received with roars of laughter, and when they had +recovered themselves a little, Captain Manley said, "It is lucky we +march to-morrow, Sam, for if the good woman were to catch a glimpse of +you in uniform, and were to find she had been tricked, she might lay +a complaint against you, and although, as you say, the pig was freely +given to you, I imagine the Provost Marshal might consider that it was +obtained under false pretences. But here are the other men outside, we +had better adjourn, for every one is longing to hear your adventures." + +It was a lovely evening, and as the officers of the Norfolk Rangers +sat or lay round the fire, which was lit for light and cheerfulness +rather than warmth, the boys, after their long wanderings among +strangers, felt how pleasant and bright life was among friends +and comrades. They had first to relate their adventures with the +guerillas, after which it was agreed that they had earned the right to +be silent for the rest of the evening, and song, and jest, and merry +story went round the ring. + +Sam was installed under the direction of the doctor, a jovial +Irishman, as concocter of punch, and his office was by no means a +sinecure. + +"Now, major, give us the song of the regiment," Captain Manley said, +and, as he spoke, there was a general cry round the circle of "The +Rangers, the Rangers." "I'm agreeable," the major said. "Give me +another tumbler of punch to get my pipes in order. Make it a little +sweeter than the last brew, Sam; yes, that's better. Well, here +goes--full chorus, and no shirking." + +THE RANGERS. + + "Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah! + Here's to the corps that we love so well; + Ever the first in the deadly fray, + Steady and firm amid shot and shell. + Scattered as skirmishers out in the front, + Contesting each foot of the ground we hold, + Nor yielding a step though we bear the brunt + Of the first attack of the foeman bold. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah! + Here's to the corps that we love so well; + Ever the first in the deadly fray, + Steady and firm amid shot and shell. + + "Steady boys, steady, the foe falls back, + Sullenly back to the beat of the drum, + Hark to the thunder that nears our flank + Rally in square, boys, their cavalry come. + Squadron on squadron, wave upon wave, + Dashing along with an ocean's force, + But they break into spray on our bayonets' points, + And we mock at the fury of rider and horse. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c. + + "The gunner may boast of the death he deals + As he shatters the foe with his iron hail, + And may laugh with pride as he checks the charge, + Or sees the dark column falter and quail. + But the gunner fights with the foe afar, + In the rear of the line is the battery's place, + The Ranger fights with a sterner joy + For he strives with his foemen face to face. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c. + + "The cavalry man is dashing and gay, + His steed is fast, and his blade is fine, + He blithely rides to the fiercest fray, + And cuts his way through the foeman's line, + But the wild, fierce joys of the deadly breach, + Or the patient pluck of the serried square + Are far away from the horseman's reach, + While the Norfolk Rangers are sure to be there. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c." + +Long, loud, and hearty was the cheering as the last chorus concluded. +"Very good song, very well sung, jolly companions every one," shouted +the doctor. "Now, Manley, keep the ball rolling, give us the 'The +Bivouac,'" Captain Manley emptied his glass, and, without hesitation, +began-- + +THE BIVOUAC. + + "The weary march is over, boys, the camp fire's burning bright, + So gather round the blazing logs, we'll keep high feast to-night, + For every heart is full of joy, and every cheek aglow, + That after months of waiting, at last we meet the foe. + To-morrow's sun will see the fight, and ere that sun goes down, + Our glorious flag another wreath of victory shall crown. + + Hurrah, hurrah for the bivouac, + With comrades tried and true, + With faces bright, and spirits light, + And the foemen's fires in view. + + "Then fill your cups with Spanish wine, and let the toast go round, + Here's a health to all who love us on dear old England's ground. + Be their tresses gold or auburn, or black as ebon's hue, + Be their eyes of witching hazel, loving gray, or heaven's blue, + Here's to them all, the girls we love, God bless them every one; + May we all be here to toast them when to-morrow's work is done. + + Hurrah, hurrah, &c. + + "But whate'er to-morrow bring us, it shall shed no gloom to-night, + For a British soldier does not flinch from thought of death in fight; + No better ending could we wish, no worthier do we know, + Than to fall for King and country, with our face towards the foe; + And if we go, our friends who stay will keep our memory bright, + And will drink to us in silence by many a camp-fire's light. + + Hurrah, hurrah, &c." + +When the last chorus had ceased, the boys, who had had a long march +that morning, and were thoroughly tired, stole quietly off to bed, +but it was not till long after they had gone to sleep that the jovial +party round the fire broke up, and that Sam was relieved from his +duties of concocter of punch. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +BUSACO AND TORRES VEDRAS. + + +Instead of pressing forward upon his invasion of Portugal, Massena +prepared to besiege Almeida, and for a month the British and +Portuguese army remained in their position within a few hours' march +of that town. Wellington expected that Almeida would be able to +resist for two months, and hoped to find some opportunity for falling +suddenly upon the besiegers; but even a resistance of two months would +have made it so late in the season that Massena must have postponed +his invasion until the next spring. + +Upon the morning of the 26th of August the French batteries opened +fire, and from Guarda the dull, heavy roar of artillery could be heard +all day. As darkness fell, the officers of the Rangers were, as usual, +assembling round their fire, when the earth seemed to shake beneath +their feet, and a flash like that of summer lightning lit the eastern +sky. "What can that be?" was the general exclamation. A minute later, +and a deep, heavy, prolonged roar sounded in their ears--then all was +quiet. + +"That is a big magazine," Captain Manley said, "and I'm afraid it's +the town, for it sounded too heavy for a mere field magazine. If it be +the town, you'll see it won't hold out much longer; even if the actual +damage is not very great, a great explosion always damages the morale +of a defense, and in that case we shall have Massena upon us, and +there will be wigs on the green ere many days are over." + +Captain Manley's conclusions were correct. The magazine of Almeida had +exploded with terrific effect. Only six houses were left standing in +the town, a considerable portion of the ramparts was thrown down, and +five hundred people killed on the spot. The stones were hurled in all +directions with such force that forty of the besiegers were hurt in +the trenches. + +Colonel Cox, who commanded, endeavored to rally the panic-stricken +garrison, and upon the following morning attempted to negotiate with +Massena, who sent an officer to demand instant surrender. + +Defense was, in fact, impossible, but Colonel Cox attempted to +negotiate, because he hoped that Wellington would at once advance to +his rescue. His intentions were frustrated, however, by the treachery +and mutiny of the principal Portuguese officers under him, and the +French at once took possession of the ruins. + +The British army fell back a short distance when the news of the +disaster arrived, and a fortnight of great anxiety and watchfulness +passed, as it was not certain by which road or roads Massena would +advance. + +It was not until the 18th of September that Massena fairly commenced +his march, having chosen the road from Visen through Martagoa, and the +next day the news reached the Rangers that the British army was to +concentrate on the heights of Busaco. + +"So we are going to have a fight for it," Carruthers said to the boys, +as the officers assembled in readiness to take their places when the +troops had fallen in. "What will be the end of it?" + +"We shall lick them," an old captain said, "though they are two to +one, and then they will march round us somehow, and then we shall have +to fall back in all haste on Lisbon, and embark there, and we shall +eat our Christmas dinner in England." + +There was a general murmur of assent, for at that time the belief was +almost universal in the British army that they would be forced to +abandon Portugal. + +"I do not know," Major Fanshawe said. "I heard last night, from a +man who has just returned from sick leave at Lisbon, that there are +thousands of peasants employed under our engineers in getting up some +tremendous works some fifteen miles this side of Lisbon. I should not +be surprised yet if Massena finds the chief a nut too hard to crack, +with all his force." + +"I have heard something about these works at Torres Vedras," Captain +Manley said, "a mere rumor; still I believe there must be something in +it. Wellington has only some twenty-five thousand British troops, and +as many Portuguese, while Massena has over a hundred thousand veterans +at his command. Our game would be hopeless unless we have something to +fall back on. No; I have every faith in our general. But there goes +the bugle." + +On the 24th the Rangers, with the rest of Picton's division, arrived +on the crest of Busaco, where Cole's and Craufurd's divisions arrived +on the same day. This position was one of immense strength, being a +long ridge, with a very deep valley in front. Upon the opposite side +of this ravine the slope was as steep and sharp as that of Busaco +itself, so that the opposite crest was within easy cannon shot. +The enemy, in order to attack the British position, would have to +descend into the bottom of this steep ravine, and then climb up the +precipitous ascent, to meet the British soldiers awaiting them, fresh +and unshaken, at the top. So strong, indeed, was the position that +the English generals were doubtful whether Massena would venture to +attack. + +Upon the 25th Craufurd moved his division forward, and would have +repeated his mistake of the Coa had not Wellington himself gone +forward and recalled the troops, bringing them off with difficulty +in the face of the advancing masses of the French. By three in the +afternoon, 40,000 French infantry were on the ridge opposite Busaco, +and it appeared probable that the battle would take place that +afternoon, in which case the British position would have been +precarious, for neither Spencer's, Hill's, nor Leith's divisions were +up. + +Massena, however, was miles behind, and Ney, who commanded the +advance, could not attack without orders; thus, the moment favorable +for the French passed by. When Massena arrived next day, the British +divisions were all up and in their places, and the long crest of +Busaco swarmed with troops. Hill occupied the right across the road to +Pena Cova, then came Leith's 5th division, then came Picton with the +3d division, with Spencer's division, the 1st, next to him. On a +plateau in front of a convent lay Craufurd and Pack, while Cole, with +the 4th division, was on the left. + +The 27th and 28th were passed in comparative tranquillity, the rival +armies surveying each other across the chasm. From the woods far below +came up the constant crack of the rifle, as the skirmishers on either +side pushed each other backwards; and on the evening of the 28th this +fighting increased so much in strength and intensity, that the British +troops were some time under arms in expectation of a night attack, for +the enemy's riflemen had pressed far up on the hill-side towards the +British lines. As the night went on, however, the fire ceased, and the +dark ravine between the two long lines of bright watch-fires became +hushed and still. + +The Rangers were with Picton's division, and were out as an advance +half way down the ravine, two companies being down in the bottom as +skirmishers. Morning was but just breaking when a heavy fire burst out +in front. The regiment sprang to its feet, and prepared for action. +It was not long in coming, for the fire rolled rapidly up the hill +towards them, and the skirmishing companies came running back, pressed +by a heavy column of the enemy. Reynier had formed in two divisions, +one of which was now pressing forward against Picton's right, while +the object of the other was to gain the crest still farther to the +right, and so place themselves between Picton and Leigh. The whole +regiment was at once engaged, but the French assault was too powerful +to be resisted, and the Rangers and the other regiments of the +advanced brigade gave way sullenly, while the French eagerly pressed +up the hill, although a battery opened upon them from the crest, while +they were unsupported by their own artillery. + +"Golly, Massa Peter, dese fellows fight berry hard; look as if dey +lick us dis time," the black, who was in Peter's company, said to him +as the regiment retreated. + +"The battle has only begun yet, Sam. We have plenty of fresh troops at +the top of the hill." + +"Good ting, dat, Massa Peter. Berry hard work, dis--climb hill, carry +kit, fire gun, dodge de bullets, all sam time." + +"You didn't dodge that bullet sharp enough, Sam," Peter said with a +laugh, as the negro's shako was carried off with a ball. + +"Him cum too fast. Dere, you frog-eating thief." he said angrily as he +fired his musket at an advancing foe. "Dat serve you right," he went +on to himself as the Frenchman fell. "You spoil Sam's hat. Dis colored +gentleman catch cold first time him come on to rain." + +The French continued their impetuous advance. Picton's right, as they +climbed the hill, fell back towards his center, and in half an hour +from the first shot being fired the head of the French column had won +the crest, and, being between Leigh and Picton's divisions, had cut +the British position. Then the column nearest to Picton's division +began to wheel to its right, so as to sweep the crest. + +"Lie down, the Rangers; every man down," shouted the colonel, and the +breathless men threw themselves panting on the ground. A wild Irish +shout was heard behind them as they did so, and a tremendous volley of +musketry rang over their heads, and then the 88th and a wing of the +45th dashed across them, and, with fierce cheers, charged that portion +of the column engaged in wheeling. Breathless and in disorder from +their prodigious efforts, the French were unable to resist this fresh +attack. In an instant the British were among them, and mixed up in +wild confusion, fighting hand to hand, the mass of combatants went +mingled together down the hill. Nor was the success of the French +column which had gained the crest of long duration, for Leith brought +up one of his brigades; Colonel Cameron, with the 9th Regiment, dashed +at the enemy with the bayonet, without firing a single shot, while +the 38th attacked their flank; and the French, unable to resist the +onslaught, relinquished their position and retreated down the hill. +Nor upon the French right had Ney's attack proved more successful. + +Napier thus describes the combat in this quarter of the field:--"When +the light broke, three heavy masses detached from the sixth corps were +seen to enter the woods below, and to throw forward a profusion of +skirmishers; one of them, under General Marchand, emerging from the +dark chasm and following the main road, seemed intent to turn the +right of the light division; a second, under Loison, made straight up +the mountain against the front; the third remained in reserve. Simon's +brigade, leading Loison's attack, ascended with a wonderful alacrity, +and though the light troops plied it incessantly with musketry, and +the artillery bullets swept through it from the first to the last +section, its order was never disturbed, nor its speed in the least +abated. Ross's guns were worked with incredible quickness, yet their +range was palpably contracted every round; the enemy's shots came +ringing up in a sharper key, the English skirmishers, breathless +and begrimed with powder, rushed over the edge of the ascent, the +artillery drew back, and the victorious cries of the French were heard +within a few yards of the summit. Craufurd, standing alone on one of +the rocks, had been intently watching the progress of their attack, +and now, with a shrill tone, ordered the two regiments in reserve to +charge. The next moment a horrid shout startled the French column, and +eighteen hundred British bayonets went sparkling over the hill. Yet so +brave, so hardy were the leading French, that each man of the first +section raised his musket, and two officers and ten men fell before +them. Not a Frenchman had missed his mark. They could do no more. The +head of their column was violently thrown back upon the rear, both +flanks were overlapped at the same time by the English wings, three +terrible discharges at five yards' distance shattered the wavering +mass, and a long line of broken arms and bleeding carcases marked the +line of flight." + +Ney did not renew the attack, and with some desultory skirmishing the +battle ended at two o'clock, and an hour's truce enabled both parties +to carry off their wounded. + +Small parties of the French came in contact with the English +skirmishers during the afternoon, but the battle of Busaco was over. + +"Don't call dat much of battle," Sam said discontentedly. "Just little +fierce fight, berry out of bref, and den, just as second wind came, +all ober." + +The battle of Busaco was indeed one of secondary importance. The +losses were not great on either side, although that of the French was +fully threefold greater than that of the British, as the former were +exposed during their attack to the grape and shell of the British +guns, while the French guns afforded no assistance to their infantry. +The French loss, in killed and wounded and prisoners, did not exceed +4000, of which only 800 were killed. Nor was any strategical advantage +gained by the battle, for the French, upon the following day, found +a road across the hills to the British left from Martagoa through +Bonzalva. + +Throughout the day they made feints of renewing the attack upon the +English position, and it was not until late in the afternoon that long +columns of men were seen crossing the hill to the left; and Wellington +discovered that Busaco had been won in vain, for that his flank was +turned, and there was nothing for it but to fall back upon Torres +Vedras. Before night the whole British army was in retreat. + +"What a horrible scene of confusion," Tom remarked, as they marched +into the town of Coimbra next day. + +"Confusion!" Captain Manley said; "it is enough to drive a +commander-in-chief out of his mind. Here Wellington has for weeks +been endeavoring to get the Portuguese Government to compel all the +population to retire upon Lisbon, carrying all they can, destroying +the mills, and burning all the corn they could not carry off. The +Government did issue the order, but it has taken no steps whatever to +carry it out, although they knew all along that we could never repel +the invasion in the open. As it is, the greater portion of these poor +wretches will lose all they possess, which they might have carried +off quietly enough during the last two months. Many of them will lose +their lives, and they will block the roads so that we shall have the +French down on us to a certainty." + +Nothing could be more sad than the scene. The streets of Coimbra were +crowded with fugitives from the country round, and these, as well as +the inhabitants, were all preparing to push onwards towards Lisbon. +Bullock carts and carriages, mules, donkeys, and horses were crowded +together, all laden with the aged, the children, the sick, and such +property as was most portable and valuable. Happily Massena had +a circuitous detour to make; the road in the mountain defile was +scarcely passable, and throughout the march he displayed but little +energy; consequently it was not until the morning of the first of +October that his cavalry engaged those of the light division which was +covering the retreat. The division fell back through the town, and the +inhabitants, who had lingered to the last in some vague hope that the +French would not come, now rushed out again. The bridge behind the +town was choked, and the troops had to halt for some time. In the rear +the pistol shots of the cavalry told of the approach of the French, +and the din made by the panic-stricken fugitives was increased by the +yells of the prisoners shut up and forgotten in the prison hard by. +Their cries and supplications were too painful to be resisted, and the +British forced the prison doors and let them free. Once across the +bridge, the troops found the defile of Condeixa so choked up that it +was impossible to effect a passage, and, had the French pressed them +the division must have been destroyed. + +The French infantry, however, had not arrived, and by night the road +was cleared, and the troops passed on. + +There was no pursuit, for Massena allowed his troops to halt and +plunder Coimbra, and the British by easy marches, fell back to +Torres Vedras; but though unpursued, the disorder and relaxation of +discipline which always marks a retreat, showed itself, and Wellington +was obliged to hang several plunderers, and to resort to other severe +measures to restore to discipline that army which, only a week before, +had repulsed the best troops of France. Towards the end of the march +the French pressed them again, and Craufurd, with his light division, +had a narrow escape of being cut off. + +Great was the satisfaction of the British troops when they took up the +position so carefully prepared for them; equally great the surprise of +Massena and the French army when they beheld the almost impregnable +line of redoubts and fortresses of whose very existence they had only +heard a confused rumor two or three days before. And yet formidable +as was the chain of forts occupied by the British, this was weak in +comparison to the second line, some five or six miles in the rear, +to which Wellington would have fallen back if driven from his first +position. This second position was indeed that which he had originally +intended to have taken up, the redoubts on the exterior range of hills +being intended as outposts; but, while Massena delayed his advance, +the outside line of fortifications had so grown and increased in +strength, that Wellington resolved to hold them in the first place. + +There were, therefore, as will be seen by the plan, three lines of +defense. The first from Alhandra on the Tagus to Zizandre on the +sea-coast. This, following the windings of the hills, was twenty-nine +miles long; the second and main line was from Quintella on the Tagus +to the mouth of the San Lorenza, twenty-four miles in length; the +third, intended to cover an embarkation, in case of necessity, +extended from Passo d'Arcos on the Tagus to the town of Junquera on +the coast. + +Massena spent some days in surveying the British position, and came to +the conclusion that it was too strong to be attacked. Had the order +of Wellington been carried out, and the whole country wasted of +provisions, the French army must have made a precipitate retreat to +avoid starvation, for they had no provisions or connection with Spain. +Wilson and Trant, with Portuguese levies, hung upon their rear, and +captured Coimbra, where Massena had left his sick and wounded, 5000 in +number, upon the very day after the main French army advanced from the +town. So vast were the supplies, however, left in the country that +Massena was able to take up his position, first immediately in front +of the British lines, and afterwards at Santarem, within a day's march +of them, and to maintain his army in food throughout the winter until +the beginning of March. + +"Have you seen the _Gazette_, Scudamore?" Carruthers asked, rushing +into the tent one morning about a week after the regiment had settled +down in its tents on the heights of Torres Vedras. + +"No; what's up?" Tom replied. + +"There you are; you have both got your steps. Thomas Scudamore, +ensign, Norfolk Rangers, to be lieutenant, for distinguished services +in the field. Peter Scudamore, ditto, ditto. I wondered the chief had +done nothing for you after your journey through Spain." + +"I am sure I did not expect anything," Tom answered, "and was quite +content when the colonel told us that Lord Wellington had said he was +pleased with the manner we had done our work. However, I am very glad; +but it is not pleasant going over five or six fellows' heads." + +"Fortune of war," Carruthers said laughing. "Besides, two of them are +at the depôt, Sankey is away on sick leave, and none of the three who +are senior to you here will ever set the Thames on fire. No, no, you +have fairly earned your step and no one can say a word against it." + +The news soon spread, and the boys were heartily congratulated by all +the officers of the regiment on their promotion, which placed them +next on the list to Carruthers, who had previously been the junior +lieutenant. Promotion in those days was rapid, and after a severe +engagement an ensign only joined upon the previous week might find +himself a lieutenant, from the number of death vacancies caused in +the ranks above him. The Norfolk Rangers had not suffered heavily at +Talavera, or the boys might have had their lieutenant's rank before +this, without performing any exceptional services. + +"I wish we could get two months' leave, Tom," Peter said that night. +"Of course it is impossible, but it would be jolly to drop in upon +Rhoda. By her letter she seems well and happy, and aunt is very kind +to her. It would be nice; and now we are lieutenants, aunt wouldn't +tell us to rub our shoes." + +"No," Tom laughed, "or be afraid of our pelting her pigeons and +Minnie." + +"No," Peter said. "Evidently she is coming round. Rhoda said that +since she has heard that we have got our commissions she has given +up prophesying once or twice a day that we shall come to a bad +end--probably hanging." + +"Yes, and Rhoda said in her letter yesterday that aunt was quite +touched with those lace mantillas we got at Madrid, and sent off the +day after we rejoined, and actually remarked that, although we could +no longer be looked upon as boys, and seemed really as hair-brained +and fond of getting into scrapes as ever, yet it was evident that we +were good, kindly lads, and meant well at heart." + +"I wish," Tom said, with a sudden burst of laughter, "that we could +dress in our old disguises, I as a student of theology you as a mild +young novice; what a lark we would have with her!" and the boys went +off into such shouts of laughter, that their aunt would have thought +them more scatter-brained than ever if she had heard them, while from +the tent of Captain Manley on one side, and of Carruthers and another +young officer on the other, came indignant expostulations, and +entreaties that they would keep quiet, and let other people go to +sleep. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +ALBUERA. + + +Very heavily did five months in the lines of Torres Vedras pass to the +Norfolk Rangers. When, in the beginning of November, Massena fell back +to Sautarem, the greater portion of the army followed him in readiness +for attack should any openings be found. Massena, however, entrenched +himself in a very strong position, and Wellington could no more attack +him than he could attack the lines of Torres Vedras; so that both +armies faced each other in inactivity until the beginning of March, +when Massena broke up his camp and began to retreat. + +The Norfolk Rangers had been one of the regiments which had remained +in their quarters on Torres Vedras throughout the winter, and great +was the joy with which they received orders to strike their tents +and push on in pursuit. The retreat of Massena was masterly. Ney's +division covered the rear, and several sharp fights took place which +are known in history as the combats of Pombal, Redinha, Cazal Nova, +Foz d'Aronce, and Sabugal. + +In most of these the enemy were driven from their position by the +British outflanking them and threatening their line of retreat; but in +the last, by a mistake of General Erskine, a portion of his division +attacked the enemy in rear, and, although vastly outnumbered, drove +him off from the crest he held with desperate valor. Wellington +himself said, "This was one of the most glorious actions British +troops were ever engaged in." + +The next day the French crossed the Coa and Turones, and took up their +position under the guns of Ciudad Rodrigo, which they had left six +months before with the full assurance that they were going to conquer +Portugal, and drive the British into the sea. The invasion cost +Massena thirty thousand men, killed in battle, taken prisoners, or +dead from hardships, fatigues and fevers. + +The Scudamores were not present at the battle of Sabugal, for on the +afternoon after the combat of Foz d'Aronce an orderly rode up to the +regiment and handed a note to the colonel. He read it, and at once +summoned the Scudamores at his side. + +"An order from the commander-in-chief," he said, "for you to go to him +at once." + +Following the orderly, the boys soon arrived at the cottage at which +Lord Wellington had established his headquarters. + +"His lordship is with Lord Beresford," the aide-de-camp to whom they +gave their names said, "but the orders are that you are to be shown in +at once." + +The lads were ushered into a small room, where, seated at a table, +were the commanders-in-chief of the British and the Portuguese troops. + +"Young gentlemen," the former said, looking up with his keen piercing +eyes, "I have not seen you since your return from Spain. I am content +with what you did, and with the detailed report you sent me in. I +shall keep my eye upon you. Lord Beresford has asked me for two +officers as aides-de-camp, and he specially requires them to have a +perfect knowledge of Spanish. I have mentioned your names to him. It +is not often that I confidently recommend young officers, but from +what I know of you I have felt able to do so in the present case. You +will, with him, have opportunities of distinguishing yourselves +such as you could not have with your regiment. You accept the +appointments?" + +Tom and Peter would far rather have remained with their regiment, +but they felt that, after what Lord Wellington had said, they could +not refuse; they consequently expressed at once their willingness +to serve, and their thanks to the general for his kindness in +recommending them. + +"You can ride, I hope?" Lord Beresford, a powerfully-built, +pleasant-looking man, said. + +"Yes, sir, we can both ride, but at present--" + +"You have no horses, of course?" Lord Beresford put in. "I will +provide you with horses, and will assign servants to you from one of +the cavalry regiments with me. Will you join me at daybreak to-morrow? +we shall march at once." + +There was a general expression of regret when the Scudamores informed +their comrades that they were again ordered on detached duty. As +to Sam, when Tom told him that he could not accompany them, he was +uproarious in his lamentations, and threatened to desert from his +regiment in order to follow them. At this the boys laughed, and told +Sam that he would be arrested and sent back before he had gone six +hours. + +"I tink, Massa Tom, dat you might hab told de general dat you hab got +an fust-class serbent, and dat you bring him wid you." + +"But we shall be mounted now, Sam, and must have mounted men with us. +You can't ride, you know." + +"Yes, massa, dis child ride first-rate, he can." + +"Why, Sam, I heard you say not long ago you had never ridden on a +horse all your life." + +"Never hab, massa, dat's true 'nuff; but Sam sure he can ride. Berry +easy ting dat. Sit on saddle, one leg each side--not berry difficult +dat. Sam see tousand soldiers do dat ebery day; dey sit quite easy on +saddle; much more easy dat dan beat big drum." + +The boys laughed heartily at Sam's notion of riding without practice, +and assured him that it was not so easy as he imagined. + +"Look here, Sam," Peter said at last, "you practice riding a little, +and then next time we get away we will ask for you to go with us." And +with this Sam was obliged to be content. + +Half an hour later, when the boys were chatting with Captain Manley, +Carruthers, and two or three other officers, in the tent of the +first-named officer, they heard a commotion outside, with shouts of +laughter, in which they joined as soon as they went out and saw what +was going on. + +Sam, upon leaving the Scudamores, determined at once upon trying the +experiment of riding, in order that he might--for he had no doubt all +would be easy enough--ride triumphantly up to his masters' tent and +prove his ability to accompany them at once. He was not long before +he saw a muleteer coming along sitting carelessly on his mule, with +both legs on one side of the animal, side-saddle fashion, as is the +frequent custom of muleteers. It was evident, by the slowness of his +pace, that he was not pressed for time. + +Sam thought that this was a fine opportunity. + +"Let me have a ride?" he said to the muleteer in broken Portuguese. + +The man shook his head. Sam held out a quarter of a dollar. "There," +he said, "I'll give you that for a hour's ride." + +The muleteer hesitated, and then said, "The mule is very bad tempered +with strangers." + +"Oh, dat all nonsense," Sam thought, "he only pretend dat as excuse; +any one can see de creature as quiet as lamb; don't he let his master +sit on him sideways?" + +"All right," he said aloud, "I try him." + +The muleteer dismounted, and Sam prepared to take his place on the +saddle. By this time several of the Rangers had gathered round, and +these foreseeing, from the appearance of the mule and the look of sly +amusement in the face of the muleteer, that there was likely to be +some fun, at once proposed to assist, which they did by giving advice +to Sam of the most opposite nature. Sam was first going to mount on +the off side, but this irregularity was repressed, and one wag, taking +the stirrup of the near side in his hand, said, "Now, Sam, up you go, +never mind what these fellows say, you put your right foot in the +stirrup, and lift your left over the saddle." + +Sam acted according to these instructions, and found himself, to his +intense amazement and the delight of the bystanders, sitting with his +face to the mule's tail. + +"Hullo," he exclaimed in astonishment, "dis all wrong; you know noting +about de business, you Bill Atkins." + +And Sam prepared to descend, when, at his first movement, the mule put +down his head and flung his heels high in the air. Sam instinctively +threw himself forward, but not recovering his upright position before +the mule again flung up her hind quarters, he received a violent +blow on the nose. "Golly!" exclaimed the black in a tone of extreme +anguish, as, with water streaming from his eyes, he instinctively +clutched the first thing which came to hand, the root of the mule's +tail, and held on like grim death. The astonished mule lashed out +wildly and furiously, but Sam, with his body laid close on her back, +his hands grasping her tail, and his legs and feet pressing tight to +her flanks, held on with the clutch of despair. + +"Seize de debil!--seize him!--he gone mad!"--he shouted frantically, +but the soldiers were in such fits of laughter that they could do +nothing. + +Then the mule, finding that he could not get rid of this singular +burden by kicking, started suddenly off at full gallop. + +"Stop him--stop him," yelled Sam. "Gracious me, dis am drefful." + +This was the sight which met the eyes of the Scudamores and their +brother officers as they issued from their tents. The soldiers were +all out of their tents now, and the air rang with laughter mingled +with shouts of "Go it, moke!" "Hold on, Sam!" + +"Stop that mule," Captain Manley shouted, "or the man will be killed." + +Several soldiers ran to catch at the bridle, but the mule swerved and +dashed away out of camp along the road. + +"Look, look," Tom said, "there are the staff, and Lord Wellington +among them. The mule's going to charge them." + +The road was somewhat narrow, with a wall of four feet high on either +side, and the general, who was riding at the head of the party, drew +his rein when he saw the mule coming along at a furious gallop. The +staff did the same, and a general shout was raised to check or divert +her wild career. The obstinate brute, however, maddened by the shouts +which had greeted her from all sides, and the strange manner in which +she was being ridden, never swerved from her course. When she was +within five yards of the party, the general turned his horse, touched +him with his spur, and leaped him lightly over the wall; one or two +others followed his example, but the others had not time to do so +before the mule was among them. Two horses and riders were thrown +down, one on either side, with the impetus of the shock, and then, +kicking, striking and charging, the animal made its way past the +others and dashed on in despite of the attempts to stop her, and +the cries of "Shoot the brute," "Ride him down," and the angry +ejaculations of those injured in its passage. Thirty yards behind the +group of officers were the escort, and these prepared to catch the +mule, when turning to the left she leaped the wall, eliciting a scream +of terror from Sam, who was nearly shaken from his hold by the sudden +jerk. + +The anger of the officers was changed into a burst of amusement at +seeing Sam's dark face and staring eyes over the mule's crupper, and +even Lord Wellington smiled grimly. An order was hastily given, and +four troopers detached themselves from the escort and started off in +pursuit. The mule was, however, a fast one, and maddened by fright, +and it was some time before the foremost of the troopers was up to +her. As he came alongside, the mule suddenly swerved round and lashed +out viciously, one of her heels coming against the horse's ribs, and +the other against the leg of the rider, who, in spite of his thick +jack-boot, for some time thought that his leg was broken. + +He fell behind, and the others, rendered cautious by the lesson, came +up but slowly, and prepared to close upon the animal's head, one +from each side. Just as they were going to do so, however, they were +startled by a scattered fire of musketry, and by the sound of balls +whizzing about their ears, and discovered that in the ardor of the +chase they had passed over the space which separated the French from +the English lines, and that they were close to the former. At the same +moment they saw a party of cavalry stealing round to cut off their +retreat. Turning their horses, the dragoons rode off at full speed, +but the French cavalry, on fresher horses, would have caught them +before they reached the English lines had not a troop of British horse +dashed forward to meet them upon seeing their danger. As to the mule, +she continued her wild gallop into the French lines, where she was +soon surrounded and captured. + +The boys were greatly vexed at the loss of their faithful black, but +they had little time for grieving, for an hour after they rode off +with General Beresford's division. Three days' march brought them +to Campo Mayor, a town which had, two days before, surrendered to +the French, who, surprised by the sudden appearance of the British, +evacuated the place hastily and retreated, after suffering much from +a brilliant charge of the 13th Hussars, who, although unsupported, +charged right through the French cavalry, and Beresford then prepared +to lay siege to Badajos. Had he pushed forward at once, he would have +found the place unprepared for a siege, but, delaying a few days at +Elvas to give his tired troops repose, the French repaired the walls, +and were in a position to offer a respectable defense, when he made +his appearance under its walls. The army was very badly provided with +heavy guns, but the approaches were opened and the siege commenced in +regular form, when the news arrived that Soult was marching with a +powerful army to its relief. The guns were therefore withdrawn, the +siege raised, and Beresford marched to meet Soult at Albuera. + +On the 15th of May he took up his position on rising ground looking +down on Albuera, having the river in his front. Acting with him, and +nominally under his orders, was a Spanish force under Blake. This +was intended to occupy the right of the position, but with the usual +Spanish dilatoriness, instead of being upon the ground, as he had +promised, by noon, Blake did not arrive until past midnight; the +French accordingly crossed the river unmolested, and the British +general found his right turned. + +Beresford's position was now a very faulty one, as the woods +completely hid the movements of the enemy, and a high hill, which they +had at once seized, flanked the whole allied position and threatened +its line of retreat. + +When the morning of the 16th dawned the armies were numerically very +unequal. The British had 30,000 infantry, 2,000 cavalry, and 38 guns; +the French, 19,000 infantry, 4,000 cavalry, and 40 guns; but of these +the French were all veteran troops, while Beresford had but 6,000 +British troops, the remainder being Spanish and Portuguese, upon +whom no reliance whatever was to be placed. The British officers +present were all of opinion that their chances of success, under +the circumstances, were slight indeed. + +The battle commenced at nine in the morning by an attack by the French +general Godinot upon the bridge of Albuera. Their columns were, +however, so completely plowed by the guns of the Portuguese upon +the eminence behind it, that they made no progress, and Beresford +perceived at once that the main attack would be made on his right. He +despatched Tom Scudamore with orders to Blake to throw back his troops +at right angles to the main front. The pig-headed Spaniard refused to +obey, asserting that the main attack was in front. Colonel Hardinge +was sent to insist upon the order being carried out, but Blake still +refused, and Beresford himself rode furiously across and took the +command just as the French column debouched from the wood on the +right. + +Before the Spanish movement was completed the French were among them. +Their cavalry swept round to the right rear, and menaced the line of +retreat, the infantry charged the wavering Spanish battalions, and the +latter at once fell into confusion and began to fall back. William +Stewart now arrived with a brigade of the second division to endeavor +to retrieve the day; but as they were advancing into position, four +regiments of French cavalry, whose movements were hidden in the +driving rain until they were close at hand, fell upon them and rode +down two-thirds of the brigade, the 31st regiment alone having time +to form square and repulse the horsemen. + +Beresford himself, with his staff, was in the middle of the mélée, and +the lads found themselves engaged in hand-to-hand combats with the +French troopers. All was confusion. Peter was unhorsed by the shock +of a French hussar, but Tom shot the trooper before he could cut Peter +down. Free for a moment, he looked round, and saw a French lancer +charging, lance at rest, at Lord Beresford. "Look out, sir!" he +shouted, and the general, turning round, swept aside the lance thrust +with his arm; and as the lancer, carried on by the impetus of his +charge, dashed against him, he seized him by the throat and waist, +lifted him bodily from his saddle, and hurled him insensible to +the ground. Just at this moment General Lumley arrived with some +Portuguese cavalry, and the French lancers galloped off. + +The Spanish cavalry, who had orders to charge the French cavalry in +flank, galloped up until within a few yards of them, and then turned +and fled shamefully. + +Beresford, now furious at the cowardice of the Spanish infantry, +seized one of their ensigns by the shoulder, and dragged him, with his +colors, to the front by main force, but the infantry would not even +then advance. + +The driving rain saved the allied army at this critical moment, for +Soult was unable to see the terrible confusion which reigned in their +ranks, and kept his heavy columns in hand when an attack would have +carried with it certain victory. + +In the pause which ensued, the British regiments began to make their +way to the front. Colbourn, with the 31st Regiment, was already there; +Stewart brought up Haughton's brigade; and the 29th burst its way +through the flying Spaniards and joined the 31st, these movements +being made under a storm of shot and shell from the French artillery. +Colonel Hartman brought up the British artillery, and the Spanish +generals Zayas and Ballesteros succeeded in checking and bringing +forward again some of the Spanish infantry. + +The French advanced in great force, the artillery on both sides poured +in grape at short distance, and the carnage was terrible. Still the +little band of British held their ground. Stewart was twice wounded, +Haughton and Colonels Duckworth and Inglis slain. Of the 57th Regiment +twenty-two officers and four hundred men fell out of the five hundred +that had mounted the hill, and the other regiments had suffered nearly +as severely. Not a third were standing unhurt, and fresh columns of +the French were advancing. + +The battle looked desperate, and Beresford made preparations for a +retreat. At this moment, however, Colonel Hardinge brought up General +Cole with the fourth division, and Colonel Abercrombie with the third +brigade of Colbourn's second division. Beresford recalled his order +for retreat, and the terrible fight continued. The fourth division was +composed of two brigades, the one, a Portuguese under General Harvey, +was pushed down to the right to keep off the French cavalry, while the +Fusilier brigade, composed of the 7th and 23rd fusilier regiments, +under Sir William Myers, climbed the desperately contested hill, which +Abercombie ascended also, more on the left. + +It was time, for the whole of the French reserves were now coming into +action; six guns were already in the enemy's possession, the remnant +of Haughton's brigade could no longer sustain its ground, and the +heavy French columns were advancing exultantly to assured victory. + +Suddenly, through the smoke, Cole's fusilier brigade appeared on +the right of Haughton's brigade, just as Abercrombie came up on its +left. Startled by the sight, and by the heavy fire, the French column +paused, and, to quote Napier's glowing words, "hesitated, and then, +vomiting forth a storm of fire, hastily endeavored to enlarge their +front, while a fearful discharge of grape from all their artillery +whistled through the British ranks. Myers was killed, Cole and the +three colonels, Ellis, Blakeney and Hawkshawe, fell wounded; and the +fusilier battalions, struck by the iron tempest, reeled and staggered +like sinking ships; but suddenly and sternly recovering, they closed +with their terrible enemies, and then was seen with what a strength +and majesty the British soldier fights. In vain did Soult with voice +and gesture animate his Frenchmen; in vain did the hardiest veterans +break from the crowded columns and sacrifice their lives to gain time +for the mass to open out on such a fair field; in vain did the mass +itself bear up, and, fiercely striving, fire indiscriminately upon +friends and foes, while the horsemen hovering on its flank threatened +to charge the advancing line. Nothing could stop that astonishing +infantry; no sudden burst of undisciplined valor, no nervous +enthusiasm weakened the stability of their order; their flashing eyes +were bent on the dark columns in their front, their measured tread +shook the ground, their dreadful volleys swept away the head of every +formation, their deafening shouts overpowered the dissonant cries that +broke from all parts of the tumultuous crowd, as, slowly and with +horrid carnage, it was pushed by the incessant vigor of the attack to +the farthest edge of the hill. In vain did the French reserves mix +with the struggling multitude to sustain the fight; their efforts only +increased the irremediable confusion, and the mighty mass breaking off +like a loosened cliff, went headlong down the steep; the rain flowed +after in streams discolored with blood, and eighteen hundred unwounded +men, the remnant of six thousand unconquerable British soldiers, stood +triumphant on the fatal hill." + +While this dreadful fight was going on, Hamilton's and Collier's +Portuguese divisions, ten thousand strong, marched to support the +British, but they did not reach the summit of the hill until the +battle was over; they suffered, however, a good deal of loss from the +French artillery, which, to cover the retreat, opened furiously upon +them. + +The French were in no position to renew the attack, the allies quite +incapable of pursuit, and when night fell the two armies were in the +same position they had occupied twenty-four hours before. + +Never was British valor more conspicuously displayed than at the +battle of Albuera. Out of 6,000 infantry they lost 4,200 killed and +wounded, while the Spanish and Portuguese had but 2,600 killed and +wounded out of a total of 34,000; the French loss was over 8,000. + +This desperate fight had lasted but four hours, but to all engaged +it seemed an age. The din, the whirl, the storm of shot, the fierce +charges of the cavalry, the swaying backwards and forwards of the +fight, the disastrous appearance of the battle from the first, all +combined to make up a perfectly bewildering confusion. + +The Scudamores, after its commencement, had seen but little of each +other. Whenever one or other of them found their way to the general, +who was ever in the thickest of the fray, it was but to remain there +for a moment or two before being despatched with fresh messages. + +Tom's horse was shot under him early in the day, but he obtained a +remount from an orderly and continued his duty until, just as the day +was won, he received a musket ball in the shoulder. He half fell, half +dismounted, and, giddy and faint, lay down and remained there until +the cessation of the fire told him that the battle was over. Then he +staggered to his feet and sought a surgeon. He presently found one +hard at work under a tree, but there was so large a number of wounded +men lying or sitting round, that Tom saw that it would be hours before +he could be attended to. As he turned to go he saw an officer of the +staff ride by. + +"Ah, Scudamore! Are you hit too?--not very badly, I hope? The chief +was asking after you just now." + +"My shoulder is smashed, I think," Tom said, "and the doctor has his +hands full at present; but if you will tie my arm tight across my +chest with my sash, I shall be able to get on." + +The officer at once leapt from his horse, and proceeded to bind Tom's +arm in the position he requested. + +"Have you seen my brother," Tom asked. + +"No, I have not; he was close to Beresford when the fusiliers dashed +up the hill; his horse fell dead, but he was not hit, for I saw him +jump up all right. I did not see him afterwards. As he could not have +got a fresh mount then, I expect he joined the fusiliers and went up +the hill." + +"Is the loss heavy?" Tom asked. + +"Awful--awful," the officer said. "If it had lasted another quarter of +an hour, there would have been nobody left alive; as it is, there are +not 2,000 men at the outside on their feet." + +"What, altogether?" Tom exclaimed. + +"Altogether," the officer answered sadly. "We have lose two men out of +every three who went into it." + +"Thank you," Tom said. "Now where shall I find the general?" + +"Up on the hill. I shall see you there in a few minutes. I hope you +will find your brother all right." + +Very slowly did Tom make his way up the steep slope, sitting down to +rest many times, for he was faint from loss of blood and sick with the +pain of his wound, and it was a long half hour before he joined the +group of officers clustered round the commander-in-chief. + +He was heartily greeted; but in answer to his question as to whether +any one had seen his brother, no one could give a satisfactory reply. +One, however, was able to confirm what had been before told to him, +for he had seen Peter on foot advancing with the fusilier brigade. +Tom's heart felt very heavy as he turned away towards the front, where +the fusiliers were standing on the ground they had so hardly won. +The distance he had to traverse was but short, but the journey was a +ghastly one. The ground was literally heaped with dead. Wounded men +were seen sitting up trying to stanch their wounds, others lay feebly +groaning, while soldiers were hurrying to and fro from the water +carts, with pannikins of water to relieve their agonizing thirst. + +"Do you know, sergeant, whether they have collected the wounded +officers, and, if so, where they are?" + +"Yes, sir, most of them are there at the right flank of the regiment." + +Tom made his way towards the spot indicated, where a small group of +officers were standing, while a surgeon was examining a long line of +wounded laid side by side upon the ground. Tom hardly breathed as +he ran his eye along their faces, and his heart seemed to stop as +he recognized in the very one the surgeon was then examining the +dead-white face of Peter. + +He staggered forward and said in a gasping voice, "He is my +brother--is he dead?" + +The surgeon looked up. "Sit down," he said sharply, and Tom, unable to +resist the order, sank rather than sat down, his eyes still riveted on +Peter's face. + +"No," the surgeon said, answering the question, "he has only fainted +from loss of blood, but he is hit hard, the bullet has gone in just +above the hip, and until I know its course I can't say whether he has +a chance or not." + +"Here, sergeant, give me the probe," and with this he proceeded +cautiously to examine the course of the ball. As he did so his anxious +face brightened a little. + +"He was struck slantingly," he said, "the ball has gone round by the +back; turn him over, sergeant. Ah, I thought so; it has gone out on +the other side. Well, I think it has missed any vital part, and in +that case I can give you hope. There," he said after he had finished +dressing the wound and fastening a bandage tightly round the body; +"now pour some brandy-and-water down his throat, sergeant, and +sprinkle his face with water. Now, sir, I will look at your shoulder." + +But he spoke to insensible ears, for Tom, upon hearing the more +favorable report as to Peter's state, had fainted dead off. + +The surgeon glanced at him. "He'll come round all right," he said. +"I will go on in the mean time," and set to work at the next in the +ghastly line. + +It was some time before Tom recovered his consciousness; when he did +so, it was with a feeling of intense agony in the shoulder. + +"Lie quiet," the surgeon said, "I shan't be long about it." + +It seemed to Tom, nevertheless, as if an interminable time passed +before the surgeon spoke again. + +"You'll do," he said. "It is an awkward shot, for it has broken the +shoulder bone and carried a portion away, but with quiet and care you +will get the use of your arm again. You are lucky, for if it had gone +two inches to the left it would have smashed the arm at the socket, +and two inches the other way and it would have been all up with you. +Now lie quiet for awhile; you can do nothing for your brother at +present. It may be hours before he recovers consciousness." + +Tom was too faint and weak to argue, and a minute later he dropped off +to sleep, from which he did not wake until it was dusk. Sitting up, he +saw that he had been aroused by the approach of an officer, whom he +recognized as one of General Beresford's staff. + +"How are you, Scudamore?" he asked. "The general has just sent me to +inquire." + +"He is very kind," Tom said. "I think that I am all right, only I am +horribly thirsty." + +The officer unslung a flask from his shoulder. "This is weak +brandy-and-water. I have brought it over for you. I am sorry to hear +your brother is so bad, but the doctor gives strong hopes of him in +his report." + +Tom bent down over Peter. "He is breathing quietly," he said. "I hope +it is a sort of sleep he has fallen into. What are we doing?" + +"Nothing," the officer answered; "there is nothing to do; every +unbounded man is under arms in case the French attack us in the night. +I expect, however, they will wait till morning, and if they come on +then, I fear our chance is a slight one indeed. We have only 1,800 of +our infantry; the German regiments and the Portuguese will do their +best; but the Spanish are utterly useless. Soult has lost more men +than we have, but we are like a body which has lost its back-bone; and +if the French, who are all good soldiers, renew the battle, I fear it +is all up with us." + +"Have you got all our wounded in?" Tom asked. + +"No," the officer said bitterly. "Our unwounded men must stand to +arms, and Lord Beresford sent over to Blake just now to ask for the +assistance of a battalion of Spaniards to collect our wounded, and the +brute sent back to say that it was the custom in allied armies for +each army to attend to its own wounded." + +"The brute!" Tom repeated with disgust. "How the poor fellows must be +suffering!" + +"The men who are but slightly wounded have been taking water to all +they can find, and the doctors are at work now, and will be all night +going about dressing wounds. The worst of it is, if the fight begins +again to-morrow, all the wounded who cannot crawl away must remain +under fire. However, the French wounded are all over the hill too, and +perhaps the French will avoid a cannonade as much as possible, for +their sake. It is a bad look-out altogether; and between ourselves, +Beresford has written to Lord Wellington to say that he anticipates a +crushing defeat." + +"Is there any chance of reinforcements?" Tom asked. + +"We hope that the third brigade of the fourth division will be up +to-morrow by midday; they are ordered to come on by forced marches. +If Soult does not attack till they arrive, it will make all the +difference, for 1,500 fresh men will nearly double our strength. But I +must be going now. Good-bye." + +The surgeon presently came round again to see how the wounded officers +were getting on. Tom asked him whether there was anything he could do +for Peter; but the surgeon, after feeling his pulse, said: "No, not as +long as he breathes quietly like this; but if he moves pour a little +brandy-and-water down his throat. Now gentlemen, all who can must look +after the others, for there is not an available man, and I must be at +work all night on the field." + +There were many of the officers who were not hit too severely to move +about, and these collected some wood and made a fire, so as to enable +them to see and attend to their more severely wounded comrades. +Tom took his place close to Peter, where he could watch his least +movement, and once or twice during the night poured a little +brandy-and-water between his lips. The other officers took it by turns +to attend to their comrades, to keep up the fire, and to sleep. Those +whose turn it was to be awake sat round the fire smoking, and talking +as to the chances of the morrow, getting up occasionally to give drink +to such of the badly wounded as were awake. + +Tom, faint with his wound, found it, towards morning, impossible to +keep awake, and dozed off, to wake with a start and find that it was +broad daylight. Soon afterwards, to his intense satisfaction, Peter +opened his eyes. Tom bent over him. "Don't try to move, Peter; lie +quiet, old boy." + +"What's the matter?" Peter asked with a puzzled look. + +"You have been hit in the body, Peter, but the doctor means to get you +round in no time. Yes," he continued, seeing Peter's eyes fixed on his +bandaged shoulder, "I have had a tap too, but there's no great harm +done. There, drink some brandy-and-water, and go off to sleep again, +if you can." + +The morning passed very slowly, the troops being all under arms, +expecting the renewed attack of Soult, but it came not; and when early +in the afternoon, the third brigade of the fourth division marched +into camp, they were received with general cheering. A heavy load +seemed taken off every one's heart, and they felt now that they could +fight, if fight they must, with a hope of success. + +The new-comers, wearied as they were with their long forced marches, +at once took the outpost duties, and those relieved set about the duty +of collecting and bringing in all the wounded. + +Next morning the joyful news came that Soult was retiring, and all +felt with a thrill of triumph that their sacrifices and efforts had +not been in vain, and that the hard-fought battle of Albuera was +forever to take its place among the great victories of the British +army. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +INVALIDED HOME. + + +Two days after the battle of Albuera, Lord Wellington himself arrived, +and from the officers of his staff Tom heard the details of the battle +of Fuentes d'Onoro, which had been fought a few days previously, and +which had been nearly as hardly contested as had Albuera itself, both +sides claiming the victory. + +The next day, the bulk of Beresford's army returned to the +neighborhood of Badajos, which they again invested, while a long +convoy of wounded started for Lisbon. The Scudamores accompanied it +as far as Campo Major, where a large hospital had been prepared for +those too ill to bear the journey. Peter was still unconscious. Fever +had set in upon the day after the battle, and for three weeks he lay +between life and death. Tom's arm was mending very slowly, and he +would have had hard work indeed in nursing Peter had it not been for +the arrival of unexpected assistance. A large villa had been taken +close to the main hospital for the use of officers, and one of the +rooms was allotted to the Scudamores. + +Upon the evening of the second day after their arrival, Tom was +sitting by Peter's bedside, when, after a preliminary tap, the door +opened, and to Tom's perfect amazement Sambo entered. The negro +hurried forward, threw himself on his knees, seized Tom's hand and +kissed it passionately, and then looking at the thin and fever-flushed +face of Peter, he hid his face in his hands and sobbed unrestrainedly. + +"Hush, Sam, hush," Tom said soothingly. "My poor fellow, why, where +have you come from? I thought you were a prisoner with the French." + +"I knew how it would be, Massa Tom," the black said, paying no +attention to the questions. "First thing Sam said to himself when he +got among French fellows, 'Dere, dose young gentlemen dey get into +all sorts of danger widout Sam, sartin sure dey get hurt widout Sam +to look after dem.' Dat idea troubled Sam berry much, took away Sam's +sleep altogether." + +"Well it turned out so, as you see, Sam," Tom said with a smile, "but +tell me how did you get away? But first give me some lemonade out of +that jug, then you can tell me all about it." + +"Why, Massa Tom," Sam said, when he had complied with the request, +"you didn't think dat dis chile was going to stop prisoner with dose +French chaps; Sam not such a fool as dat, nohow. When dat cussed +mule--I tell you fair, Massa Tom, dis chile conclude dat riding not +such a berry easy ting after all--when dat cussed mule ran into French +camp, de soldiers dey catch him, and dey take Sam off, and den dey +jabber and laugh for all de world like great lots of monkeys. Well, +for some time Sam he didn't say nothing, all de wind shook out of his +body. Besides which he couldn't understand what dey say. Den all of +a sudden, to Sam's surprise, up came a colored soldier, and he speak +to Sam in de English tongue. 'Holla, broder, how you come here?" I +ask. 'I been cook on board English merchant ship,' he say. 'Ship she +taken by French privateer. When dey come to port dey say to me, "You +not Englishman, you hab choice, you go to prison, or you be French +soldier." Natural, I not want go prison, so I conclude be French +soldier. I daresay dey gib you choice too.' Well, massa, a wink as +good as a nod to blind hoss. So dey take me to tent, put me under +guard, and next day a French officer come dat speak English. He ask +me all sorts ob questions, and at last he ask me why I list English +soldier. So you see I had got a little lie all ready, and me tell him, +me one poor Melican negro man, cook on board Melican ship. Ship taken +by English man-ob-war. Put Sam in prison and give him choice to go as +soldier. "Den you not care about English,' de officer say, and Sam +draw hisself up and pat his chest and say, 'Me Melican citizen, me no +Britisher's slave, some day me go back States, go on board Melican +man-ob-war, me pay out dese Britishers for make Sam slave.' Den de +officer laugh, and say dat if I like I could fight dem now; and if I +prefer French uniform to French prison, me could have him. Ob course +I accep' offer, and harp an hour after me in French uniform. French +officer try to make joke ob Sam, and ask whether I like cavalry or +foot soldier. Sam say he had enuff of quadruples at present. Me remain +French soldier three weeks, den cum great battle, dey call him Fuentes +donory. Sam's regiment fight. Sam not like fire at red coats, so break +bullet off catridge, neber put him in gun. We charge right into middle +of village full of English soldiers, de bullets fly all about. Sam not +see de point ob getting kill by mistake, so he tumble down, pretend to +be dead. Presently French beaten back; when English soldier wid doctor +cum look at wounded, dey turn Sam ober, and dey say, 'Hullo, here dead +nigger.' 'Nigger yourself, John Atkins,' I say for sure enuff it's de +ole regiment--'you say dat once again me knock your head off;' me jump +up, and all de world call out, 'Hullo, why it's Sam.' Den me splain +matter, and all berry glad, cept John Atkins, and next morning me gib +him licking he member all his life, me pound him most to a squash. +Four days ago colonel send for Sam, say, 'Sam, berry bad job, bofe +Massas wounded bad, send you to nurse dem;' so dis chile come. Dat +all, Massa Tom. Here letter for you from colonel, now you read dis +letter, den you get in bed, you sleep all night, Sam watch Massa +Peter." + +Greatly relieved to have his faithful servant again, and to know that +Peter would be well cared for, instead of being left in charge of the +Spanish hospital orderly, whenever weakness and pain obliged him to +lie down, Tom abandoned his place by the bedside, and prepared for a +tranquil night's rest, first reading the colonel's letter. + +"We are all grieved, my dear Scudamore, at hearing that you are both +wounded, and that your brother is at present in a serious state. We +trust, however, that he will pull through. I hear that Beresford has +praised you both most highly in despatches, and that your names are +sent home for companies. I heartily congratulate you. We have had some +tough work at Fuentes d'Onoro, although nothing to what yours must +have been at Albuera, still it was hot enough in all conscience, and +we had over a hundred casualties in the regiment. Carruthers and +Manley were both slightly wounded. Jones, Anstruther, Palmer, and +Chambers were killed, and several of the others hit more or less hard. +Sam has leave to remain with you until you rejoin, which will not, I +fear, be for some little time. Every one sends kind messages. Yours +truly, J. Tritton." + +Nothing could exceed the care and devotion with which Sam nursed his +two masters, and Tom had the greatest difficulty in persuading him to +lie down and get a short sleep each day while he sat by Peter's bed. +At the end of three weeks Peter took a favorable turn. His fever +abated, and he awoke to consciousness. Another fortnight and he was +sufficiently convalescent to be moved, and accordingly they started to +travel by very easy stages to Lisbon, there to take ship for England, +as the doctor ordered Tom as well as his brother to go home for a +while to recruit. Tom was the less reluctant to do so, as it was +evident that with the force at his command Wellington would not be +able to undertake any great operation, and that the siege and capture +of Badajoz was the utmost likely to be accomplished in that season's +campaign. The mails in due course had brought out the _Gazette_, +and in it Tom and Peter Scudamore were promoted to be captains, +unattached. + +Colonel Tritton, upon being applied to, readily gave leave for Sam +to accompany his masters. It was a long journey to Lisbon, but the +jolting of the country cart was made bearable by a layer of hay, +two feet deep, upon which the mattresses were laid, Sam seeing that +at each night's halt the hay was taken out, well shaken, and then +returned to the cart, so as to preserve it light and elastic. A thick +canopy of boughs kept off the heat of the sun, and under it, within +reach of the invalids hung a gourd of fresh water, and a basket of +fruit. Several other cart-loads of wounded officers accompanied them, +and at night they would draw up by a grove of trees where water was +handy, those who could walk would get out, the others would be lifted +out on their mattresses, a great fire made, and round it the beds laid +in a circle, and then the evening would be spent in pleasant chat, +with many an anecdote and an occasional song, until the fire burnt +low, the talk died away, and each, covered in his blankets to keep off +the night dew, fell asleep. Pleasant as was the journey, however, it +was with a thrill of delight that they caught their first sight of +Lisbon, with its broad river, and the blue line of the sea beyond. A +few days later, and they embarked on board a transport, which seven +days afterwards, after a calm passage, arrived at Spithead. + +Peter was by this time gaining strength fast, but his back was so +stiff and sore that he was unable to move it, and was obliged to swing +himself along on crutches. The next day the coach took them to London, +and they started the morning after for Marlborough. This time they had +to go inside the coach, two gentlemen, who had previously secured the +seats, kindly giving them up in favor of the wounded young officers, +while Sam took his place on the roof, and amused his fellow-passengers +with wonderful accounts of his adventures at the war. At the inn +at which they took dinner, they alighted, and Tom recognized in the +driver the same coachman who had driven them upon the memorable +occasion of their being stopped by highwaymen three years before. "You +don't remember us, coachman, do you?" + +"No, gentlemen, I can't say as how,--but eh! no, why you're the werry +boys as shot the highwaymen. Well, I am glad to see you again, though +you do look white and bad, both of you. I heard as how there were +two wounded officers inside, and that black soldier has been telling +all sorts of tales of the wonderful things as his masters had done, +but not knowing as how it was you, I didn't much believe all he was +telling. Now I quite see as how it was true; and how are you both?" + +"Getting on all right," Tom said, returning the warm shake of the +coachman's hand, "and do you know, those pistols have saved our lives +more than once." + +"Have they now," the coachman said, in high admiration, "but there, we +most be moving, we are three minutes after time as it is; I shall see +you again next time we stop, gentlemen." + +During the next stage the coachman and guard recounted to the outside +passengers the affair of the stopping the coach, and Sam's black face +shone with delight at the tale. Then he had his say, and related the +story of his falling overboard and being rescued, and in consequence +the lads were quite embarrassed when they next halted, by the +attention of their fellow-travelers, who could scarcely understand how +it was possible that two mere boys should have performed such feats of +bravery. + +Arrived at Marlborough they looked round in vain for the one-horsed +vehicle which had before met them. "I expect that aunt has not got +our letter, Peter," Tom said. "It would probably go up to town in the +coach with us, and is likely enough in the letter-bag in the boot. +Well, we must have a post-chaise. Won't aunt and Rhoda be surprised; +but they must be expecting us, because they will have had our letter +from Lisbon." + +The horses were soon in, Sam took his seat in the rumble, and in a few +minutes they were bounding over the road at a very different pace to +that at which they had before traversed it. "There's the house among +the trees," Peter said at last, "with aunt's pigeons on the roof as +usual, and there's Minnie asleep on the window-sill, and there! yes, +there's Rhoda." + +As he spoke a girl, who was sitting reading under a tree, leapt to her +feet, on hearing a carriage stop, and then, catching sight of Peter +waving his hat, while Tom made frantic efforts to open the door, gave +a scream of delight, and rushed towards them, threw her arms round +Tom's neck as he jumped out, and then leapt into the chaise and hugged +and cried over Peter. He was soon helped out, and as they turned to go +towards the house they saw their aunt coming out to meet them. + +Tom ran forward and throwing his arms round her neck kissed her +heartily, and before she could recover from her surprise, Peter was +alongside. "Please, aunt, you must kiss me," he said, "for I want my +arms for my crutches." His aunt leaned forward and kissed him, and +then wiped the tears from her eyes. + +"I am glad to see you back, my dear nephews," she said. "We did not +understand each other very well before, but we shan't make any more +mistakes. This is your black servant, I suppose," she said, as Sam +came along, with a trunk in each hand. "Dear! dear! what a dreadfully +ugly man." + +"How do you do, Sam?" Rhoda said, when he came up. "We have heard so +much of you, and how kindly you nursed my brothers." + +"Sam quite well, tank you, little missy," Sam said, grinning all over +his face and showing his white teeth. + +Miss Scudamore shrank towards Tom as Sam passed on, "Dear me, what +sharp-looking teeth he has, Tom. They don't eat curious things, these +black men, do they?" + +"What sort of curious things, aunt?" + +"Well, my dear, I know that these outlandish people do eat strange +things, and I have heard the Chinese eat dogs and cats. Now, if he has +a fancy for cats, I daresay I could buy him some in the village, only +he will have to cook them himself, I could never ask Hannah to cook +cats; but please ask him not to touch Minnie." + +Peter had to stop in his walk and grasp his crutches tightly, not +to burst into a scream of laughter, while Tom answered with great +gravity, "My dear aunt, do not alarm yourself, I will answer for the +safety of Minnie as far as Sam is concerned." + +When they reached the house, Miss Scudamore said-- + +"I think you young people will enjoy yourselves more if you go and sit +under the shade of the elm there, you will have a deal to say to each +other, and had better be alone." They were all glad at the suggestion, +as they were longing to be alone together. + +Sam, by Miss Scudamore's directions, carried out a great easy chair, +of which Peter took possession. Rhoda sat on the grass at his feet, +and Tom threw himself down at full length. They were all too happy +to speak much for a time, and could only look fondly at each other. +"You have grown a great deal, Rhoda, but I do not think that you are +altered a bit otherwise." + +"You are neither of you altered so much as I expected," Rhoda said. "I +had made up my mind that you would be changed a great deal. It sounds +so grand--Captains, indeed! I expected to have curtsey to you and +treat you with great respect; instead of that you look regular boys, +both of you. Of course you are big, and Peter looks very tall; how +tall are you, Peter?" + +"Just over six feet," Peter said. + +"Yes," Rhoda said, "you are tall enough, and Tom is broad enough for +men, but somehow you look regular boys still." + +"This is very disrespectful Rhoda, to two Captains in His Majesty's +service." + +"It seems ridiculous, doesn't it," Rhoda said. + +"It does," Tom said heartily, and the three went off into a shout of +laughter. + +"It isn't really ridiculous you know," Rhoda said, when they had +recovered their gravity. "To think of all the dangers you have gone +through. Aunt was as proud as could be when she saw your names over +and over again in despatches, and I have been like a little peacock. +Your doings have been the talk of every one round here, and I am sure +that if they had known you had been coming, the village would have put +up a triumphal arch, and presented you with an address." + +"Thank goodness, they did not know it then," Tom said, "for it would +have been a deal worse to stand than the fire of a French battery. +Well, Rhoda, and now as to yourself; so you have really been always +very happy with aunt?" + +"Very happy," Rhoda said; "she is most kind and indulgent, and so that +I attend to her little fancies, I can do just as I like. I have had +lessons regularly from the rector's eldest daughter, who has been +educated for a governess; and in every respect, aunt is all that is +kind. Fancy her being afraid of Sam eating Minnie." + +After chatting for upwards of an hour, they went into the house, and +the rest of the day was spent in talking over all that had happened +since they left. Sam was in the kitchen where he made himself very +much at home, and although Hannah and the cook were at first rather +awed by his size, his black face and rolling eyes, they were soon +pacified by his good humor and readiness to make himself useful, and +were wonderfully interested by his long stories about what "Massas" +had done in the war. + +Miss Scudamore, who was a little uneasy as to how things would go on +in the kitchen, made some excuse for going in once or twice in the +course of the evening. She found things going on much better that she +had expected, indeed so much better, that after Rhoda had gone up to +bed, where Peter had two hours before betaken himself, she said to Tom +as he was lighting his candle, "One minute, nephew; I could not speak +before Rhoda, but I wanted to say something to you about your negro. +I have heard that all soldiers are very much given to make love, and +we know from Shakespeare, that Othello, who was black too, you will +remember, nephew, made love to Desdemona, which shows that color does +not make so much difference as one would think. Now I do hope your +man will not make love to Hannah, I don't think she would like it, +my dear, and yet you know she might; one never knows what women will +do; they are always making fools of themselves," she added angrily, +thinking at the moment how a young girl she had trained up as a cook +had, after being with her three years, left a few weeks before to +marry the village blacksmith, "and I should be sorry to lose Hannah. +She has been with us more than twenty years. If he must fall in love +with one, my dear, let it be the cook." + +Tom had a great command of his countenance, but he had great +difficulty in steadying his muscles. After a moment or two he said, +"I will give Sam a hint, aunt, if it becomes necessary, but I do not +think you need fear. I do not fancy Sam is matrimonially inclined at +present, and he wouldn't leave us even to marry Desdemona herself. +Good night, aunt." + +So saying, Tom went upstairs, where he repeated to Peter, who was +still awake, his conversation with his aunt, and the two went into +shouts of laughter over the idea of Sam making love to the prim +Hannah. + +The next six months passed over quietly and happily. The boys +were made a great deal of by the whole county, and Miss Scudamore +was greatly gratified at the name and credit they had gained for +themselves. She no longer worried about them, but as Rhoda declared, +quite spoiled them, and as Sam made no attempt to win the love of +the faithful Hannah, there was no cloud to mar the pleasure of the +holiday. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +CIUDAD RODRIGO AND BADAJOS. + + +It was in the beginning of December, 1811, that the Scudamores again +sailed up the Tagus to Lisbon, after an absence of just six months. +When they had passed the medical board, they were transferred from the +unattached list to the 52d Regiment, which was, fortunately for them, +also in Spain. No events of great importance had taken place during +their absence. Wellington, after the battles of Fuentes d'Onoro and +Albuera, had been compelled to fall back again to the frontier in the +face of greatly superior forces, and had maintained his old position +on the Coa till the approach of winter compelled the French to retire +into the interior, where they had their magazines and depôts. + +The Scudamores found that the 52d were encamped on the Agueda, +and they at once prepared to go up country to join them. Their +chargers--presents from their aunt on leaving--were fresh and +vigorous, and they purchased a strong country horse for Sambo, who, +thanks to some practice which he had had in England, was now able to +cut a respectable figure on horseback. A few hours were sufficient to +make their preparations, and at noon on the day after landing, they +mounted, and, followed by Sam, accompanied by a muleteer and two mules +carrying their baggage, they started from the hotel at which they had +put up. + +As they rode down the main street they saw several mounted +officers approaching, and at once recognized in the leader the +commander-in-chief, who had just arrived from the front to pay one +of his flying visits, to endeavor to allay the jealousies in the +Portuguese Council, and to insist upon the food which the British +Government was actually paying for, being supplied to the starving +Portuguese soldiers. Drawing their horses aside, they saluted Lord +Wellington as he rode past. He glanced at them keenly, as was his +custom, and evidently recognized them as he returned the salute. + +When he had passed, they turned their horses and continued their way. +They had not gone fifty yards, however, when an officer came up at +a gallop. Lord Wellington wished them to call at his quarters in an +hour's time. + +There are few things more annoying than, after having got through all +the trouble of packing and getting fairly on the road, to be stopped; +but there was no help for it, and the boys rode back to their hotel +again, where, putting up their horses, they told Sam not to let the +muleteer leave, for they should probably be on the road again in an +hour. + +At the appointed time they called at the head-quarters, and giving +their cards to two officers on duty, took their seats in the anteroom. +It now became evident to them that their chance of an early interview +was not great, and that they would in all probability be obliged to +pass another night in Madrid. Portuguese grandees passed in and out, +staff officers of rank entered and left, important business was being +transacted, and the chance of two Line captains having an interview +with the commander-in-chief appeared but slight. Two hours passed +wearily, and then an orderly sergeant came into the room and read out +from a slip of paper the names "Captain Thomas Scudamore; Captain +Peter Scudamore. This way, if you please," he added, as the boys rose +in answer to their names, and he led the way into a room where a +colonel on the staff was seated before a table covered with papers. + +"Gentlemen," he said, "I have news which I think will be pleasant to +you both. Lord Wellington has not forgotten the services you rendered +in carrying his communications to the guerilla chiefs. Your reports +were clear and concise, and your knowledge of Spanish especially +valuable. Lord Beresford, too, has reported most favorably of your +conduct while with him. There happen to be two vacancies on his staff, +and he has desired me to fill them up with your names." + +Although the Scudamores would in some respects rather have remained +with their regiment, yet they could not refuse an honor which was +generally coveted as being a post in which an active officer had +plenty of opportunities of distinguishing himself, and which was +certain to lead to speedy promotion. They accordingly expressed their +warm thanks for the honor which Lord Wellington had done them. + +"Are you well mounted?" Colonel Somerset asked. + +"We have one capital charger each," Tom said. + +"You will want another," Colonel Somerset remarked. "There are a lot +of remounts landed to-day. Here is an order to Captain Halket, the +officer in charge. Choose any two you like. The amount can be stopped +from your pay. How about servants; you are entitled to two each?" + +"We have one man of the Norfolk Rangers--a very faithful fellow, who +has returned with us from leave; if he could be transferred, he would +do for us both if we had a cavalry man each for our horses." + +The colonel at once wrote an order for Sam's transfer from his +regiment on detached service, and also one to the officer commanding a +cavalry regiment stationed in Madrid, to supply them with two troopers +as orderlies. + +"May I ask, sir, if we are likely to stay in Madrid long--as, if so, +we will look out for quarters?" Tom asked. + +"No; the general returns to-morrow, or next day at latest, to Almeida, +and of course you will accompany him. Oh, by-the-by, Lord Wellington +will be glad if you will dine with him to-day--sharp six. By-the-way, +you will want to get staff uniform. There is the address of a Spanish +tailor, who has fitted out most of the men who have been appointed +here. He works fast, and will get most of the things you want ready +by to-morrow night. Don't get more things than are absolutely +necessary--merely undress suits. Excuse my asking how are you off for +money? I will give you an order on the paymaster if you like." + +Tom replied that they had plenty of money, which indeed they had, +for their aunt had given them so handsome a present upon starting, +that they had tried to persuade her to be less generous, urging that +they really had no occasion for any money beyond their pay. She had +insisted, however, upon their accepting two checks, saying that one +never knew what was wanted, and it was always useful to have a sum to +fall back on in case of need. + +Two days later the Scudamores, in their new staff uniforms, were, +with some six or eight other officers, riding in the suite of Lord +Wellington on the road to the Coa. The lads thought they had never +had a more pleasant time, the weather was fine and the temperature +delightful, their companions, all older somewhat than themselves, were +yet all young men in high health and spirits. The pace was good, for +Lord Wellington was a hard rider, and time was always precious with +him. At the halting-places the senior officers of the staff kept +together, while the aides-de-camp made up a mess of their own, always +choosing a place as far away as possible from that of the chief, so +that they could laugh, joke, and even sing, without fear of disturbing +his lordship. + +Sam soon became a high favorite with the light-hearted young fellows, +and his services as forager for the mess were in high esteem. + +Three days of hard riding took them to Almeida, where the breaches +caused by the great explosion had been repaired, and the place put +into a defensible position. Tom and Peter had been afraid that +there would be at least four months of enforced inactivity before +the spring; but they soon found that the post of aide-de-camp to +Wellington was no sinecure. For the next month they almost lived in +the saddle. The greater portion of the English army was indeed lying +on the Agueda, but there were detached bodies of British and large +numbers of Portuguese troops at various points along the whole line +of the Portuguese frontier, and with the commanders of these Lord +Wellington was in constant communication. + +Towards the end of December some large convoys of heavy artillery +arrived at Almeida, but every one supposed that they were intended to +fortify this place, and none, even of those most in the confidence of +the commander-in-chief, had any idea that a winter campaign was about +to commence. The French were equally unsuspicious of the truth. Twice +as strong as the British, they dreamt not that the latter would take +the offensive, and the French marshals had scattered their troops at +considerable distances from the frontier in winter quarters. + +Upon the last day of the year the Scudamores both happened to have +returned to the front--Tom from Lisbon, and Peter from a long ride to +a distant Portuguese division. There was a merry party gathered round +a blazing fire in the yard of the house where they, with several other +aides-de-camp, were quartered. Some fifty officers of all ranks were +present, for a general invitation had been issued to all unattached +officers in honor of the occasion. Each brought in what liquor he +could get hold of, and any provisions which he had been able to +procure, and the evening was one of boisterous fun and jollity. In +the great kitchen blazed a fire, before which chickens and ducks +were roasting, turkeys and geese cut up in pieces for greater +rapidity of cooking, were grilling over the fire, and as they came +off the gridiron they were taken round by the soldier-servants to +their masters as they sat about on logs of wood, boxes, and other +substitutes for chairs. Most of the officers present had already +supped, and the late-comers were finishing their frugal meal, after +which the soldiers would take their turn. There was a brewing of punch +and an uncorking of many a bottle of generous wine; then the song and +laugh went round, and all prepared to usher in the new year joyously, +when a colonel of the staff, who had been dining with Lord Wellington, +entered. "Here's a seat, colonel," was shouted in a dozen places, but +he shook his head and held up his hand. + +"Gentlemen, I am sorry to disturb you, but orders must be obeyed. +Villiers, Hogan, Scudamores both, Esdaile, Cooper, and Johnson, here +are despatches which have to be taken off at once. Gentlemen, I +should recommend you all to look to your horses. All attached to the +transport had better go to their head-quarters for orders." + +"What is up, colonel?" was the general question. + +"The army moves forward at daybreak. We are going to take Ciudad." + +A cheer of surprise and delight burst from all. There was an emptying +of glasses, a pouring out of one more bumper to success, and in +five minutes the court was deserted save by some orderlies hastily +devouring the interrupted supper, and ere long the tramp of horses +could be heard, as the Scudamores and their comrades dashed off in +different directions with their despatches. + +The next morning a bridge was thrown over the Agueda at Marialva, +six miles below Ciudad, but the investment was delayed, owing to the +slowness and insufficiency of the transport. Ciudad Rodrigo was but +a third-class fortress, and could have been captured by the process +of a regular siege with comparatively slight loss to the besiegers. +Wellington knew, however, that he could not afford the time for a +regular siege. Long before the approaches could have been made, and +the breaches effected according to rule, the French marshals would +have been up with overwhelming forces. + +Beginning the investment on the 7th, Wellington determined that it +must be taken at all costs in twenty-four days, the last day of +the month being the very earliest date at which, according to his +calculations, any considerable body of French could come up to its +relief. + +Ciudad lies on rising ground on the bank of the Agueda. The +fortifications were fairly strong, and being protected by a very high +glacis, it was difficult to effect a breach in them. The glacis is the +smooth ground outside the ditch. In well-constructed works the walls +of the fortification rise but very little above the ground beyond, +from which they are separated by a broad and deep ditch. Thus the +ground beyond the ditch, that is, the glacis, covers the walls from +the shot of a besieger, and renders it extremely difficult to reach +them. In the case of Ciudad, however, there were outside the place +two elevated plateaux, called the great and small Teson: Guns placed +on these could look down upon Ciudad, and could therefore easily +breach the walls. These, then, were the spots from which Wellington +determined to make the attack. The French, however, were aware of the +importance of the position, and had erected on the higher Teson an +inclosed and palisadoed redoubt, mounting two guns and a howitzer. A +great difficulty attending the operation was that there were neither +fuel nor shelter to be obtained on the right bank of the river, and +the weather set in very cold, with frost and snow, at the beginning +of the siege. Hence the troops had to be encamped on the left bank, +and each division, as its turn came, to occupy the trenches for +twenty-four hours, took cooked provisions with it, and waded across +the Agueda. + +On the 8th, Pack's division of Portuguese and the light division waded +the river three miles above the fortress, and, making a circuit took +up a place near the great Teson. There they remained quiet all day. +The French seeing that the place was not yet entirely invested paid +but little heed to them. At nightfall, however, Colonel Colborne, +with two companies from each of the regiments of the light division, +attacked the redoubt of San Francisco with such a sudden rush that it +was carried with the loss of only twenty-four men, the defenders, few +and unprepared, being all taken prisoners. Scarcely, however, was the +place captured than every gun of Ciudad which could be brought to bear +upon it opened with fury. All night, under a hail of shot and shell, +the troops labored steadily, and by daybreak the first parallel, that +is to say, a trench protected by a bank of earth six hundred yards +in length was sunk three feet deep. The next day the first division, +relieved the light division. + +Tom and Peter, now that the army was stationary, had an easier time of +it, and obtained leave to cross the river to see the operations. The +troops had again to wade through the bitter cold water, and at any +other time would have grumbled rarely at the discomfort. When they +really engage in the work of war, however, the British soldier cares +for nothing, and holding up their rifles, pouches and haversacks, to +keep dry, the men crossed the river laughing and joking. There was but +little done all day, for the fire of the enemy was too fast and deadly +for men to work under it in daylight. At night the Scudamores left +their horses with those of the divisional officers, and accompanied +the troops into the trenches, to learn the work which had there to +be done. Directly it was dusk twelve hundred men fell to work to +construct their batteries. The night was dark, and it was strange to +the Scudamores to hear the thud of so many picks and shovels going, +to hear now and then a low spoken order, but to see nothing save when +the flash of the enemy's guns momentarily lit up the scene. Every half +minute or so the shot, shell, and grape came tearing through the air, +followed occasionally by a low cry or a deep moan. Exciting as it was +for a time, the boys having no duty, found it difficult long to keep +awake, and presently dozed off--at first to wake with a start whenever +a shell fell close, but presently to sleep soundly until dawn. By that +time the batteries, eighteen feet thick, were completed. + +On the 10th the fourth division, and on the 11th the third, carried +on the works, but were nightly disturbed, not only by the heavy fire +from the bastions, but from some guns which the French had mounted on +the convent of San Francisco in the suburb on the left. Little was +effected in the next two days, for the frost hardened the ground and +impeded the work. On the night of the 13th the Santa Cruz convent was +carried and the trenches pushed forward, and on the next afternoon the +breaching batteries opened fire with twenty-five guns upon the points +of the wall at which it had been determined to make the breaches, +while two cannons kept down the fire of the French guns at the convent +of San Francisco. The French replied with more than fifty pieces, +and all night the tremendous fire was kept up on both sides without +intermission. Just at daybreak the sound of musketry mingled with the +roar of cannon, as the 40th Regiment attacked and carried the convent +of San Francisco. Through the 16th, 17th, and 18th the artillery +duel continued, some times one side, sometimes the other obtaining +the advantage; but during each night the trenches of the besiegers +were pushed forward, and each day saw the breaches in the ramparts +grow larger and larger. On the 19th the breaches were reported as +practicable--that is, that it would be possible for men to scramble up +the fallen rubbish to the top, and orders were therefore given for the +assault for that night. + +The attack was to be made at four points simultaneously; the 5th, +94th, and 77th were to attack from the convent of Santa Cruz, to make +for the ditch, enter it, and work their way along to the great breach; +Mackinnon's brigade of the third division was to attack the great +breach from the front; the light division posted behind the convent +of San Francisco were to attack from the left, and make their way to +the small breach; while a false attack, to be converted into a real +one if the resistance was slight, was to be made by Pack's Portuguese +at the St. Jago gate at the opposite side of the town. As night fell +the troops moved into their position, and Lord Wellington went to +the convent of San Francisco, from whose roof he could survey the +operations. The Scudamores, with the rest of the staff, took up +their places behind him. Suddenly there was a shout on the far right, +followed by a sound of confused cheering and firing, while flashes of +flame leapt out along the walls, and the guns of the place opened fire +with a crash. Now the 5th, 94th, and 77th rushed with great swiftness +along the ditch, when, at the foot of the great breach, they were +met by the third division. Together they poured up the breach, and +the roar of musketry was tremendous. Once at the top of the breach, +however, they made no progress. From a trench which had been cut +beyond it, a ring of fire broke out, while muskets flashed from every +window in the houses near. It was evident that some serious obstacle +had been encountered, and that the main attack was arrested. + +"This is terrible," Peter said, as almost breathless they watched the +storm of fire on and around the breach. "This is a thousand times +worse than a battle. It is awful to think how the shot must be telling +on that dense mass. Can nothing be done?" + +"Hurrah! There go the light division at the small breach," Tom +exclaimed, as the French fire broke out along the ramparts in that +quarter. A violent cheer came up even above the din from the great +breach, but no answering fire lights the scene, for Major Napier, +who commanded, had forbidden his men to load, telling them to trust +entirely to the bayonet. There was no delay here; the firing of the +French ceased almost immediately, as with a fierce rush the men of the +light division bounded up the ruins and won the top of the breach. For +a moment or two there was a pause, for the French opened so fierce a +fire from either side, that the troops wavered. The officers sprang +to the front, the soldiers followed with the bayonet, and the French, +unable to stand the fierce onslaught, broke and fled into the town. +Then the men of the light division, rushing along the walls, took +the French who were defending the great breach in rear, and as these +gave way, the attacking party swept across the obstacles which, had +hitherto kept them, and the town was won. Pack's Portuguese had +effected an entrance at the St. Jago gate, which they found almost +deserted, for the garrison was weak, and every available man had been +taken for the defence of the breaches. + +Thus was Ciudad Rodrigo taken after twelve days' siege, with a loss +of twelve hundred men and ninety officers, of which six hundred and +fifty men and sixty officers fell in that short, bloody fight at the +breaches. Among the killed was General Craufurd, who had commanded at +the fight on the Coa. + +Upon entering the town three days afterwards, at the termination of +the disgraceful scene of riot and pillage with which the British +soldier, there as at other places, tarnished the laurels won by his +bravery in battle, the boys went to the scene of the struggle, and +then understood the cause of the delay upon the part of the stormers. +From the top of the breach there was a perpendicular fall of sixteen +feet, and the bottom of this was planted with sharp spikes, and strewn +with the fragments of shells which the French had rolled down into +it. Had it not been for the light division coming up, and taking the +defenders--who occupied the loopholed and fortified houses which +commanded this breach--in rear, the attack here could never have +succeeded. + +The next few days were employed in repairing the breaches, and putting +the place again in a state of defence, as it was probable that Marmont +might come up and besiege it. The French marshal, however, when +hurrying to the relief of the town, heard the news of its fall, and +as the weather was very bad for campaigning, and provisions short, +he fall back again to his winter quarters, believing that Wellington +would, content with his success, make no fresh movement until the +spring. The English general, however, was far too able a strategist +not to profit by the supineness of his adversary, and, immediately +Ciudad Rodrigo was taken, he began to make preparations for the siege +of Badajos, a far stronger fortress than Ciudad, and defended by +strong detached forts. Three days after the fall of Rodrigo General +Hill came up with his division; to this the Norfolk Rangers now +belonged, and the Scudamores had therefore the delight of meeting all +their old friends again. They saw but little of them, however, for +they were constantly on the road to Lisbon with despatches, every +branch of the service being now strained to get the battering-train +destined for the attack on Badajos to the front, while orders were +sent to Silviera, Trant, Wilson, Lecca, and the other partisan +leaders, to hold all the fords and defiles along the frontier, so as +to prevent the French from making a counter-invasion of Portugal. + +On the 11th of March the army arrived at Elvas, and on the 15th a +pontoon bridge was thrown across the Guadiana. The following day the +British troops crossed the river, and invested Badajos, with fifteen +thousand men, while Hill and Graham, with thirty thousand more moved +forward, so as to act as a covering army, in case the French should +advance to raise the siege. Badajos was defended by five thousand men, +under General Phillipson, a most able and energetic commander, who had +in every way strengthened the defences, and put them in a position to +offer an obstinate resistance. + +Before attacking the fortress it was necessary to capture one of the +outlying forts, and that known as the Picurina was selected, because +the bastion of the Trinidad, which lay behind it, was the weakest +portion of the fortress. The trenches were commenced against this on +the night of the 17th, and, although the French made some vigorous +sorties, the works progressed so rapidly that all was ready for an +assault on the forts on the 25th, a delay of two days having been +occasioned by the French taking guns across the river, which swept +the trenches, and rendered work impossible, until a division was sent +round to drive in the French guns and invest the fortress on that +side. The Picurina was strong, and desperately defended, but it was +captured after a furious assault, which lasted one hour, and cost +nineteen officers and three hundred men. It was not, however, until +next evening that the fort could be occupied, for the guns of the town +poured such a hail of shot and shell into it, that a permanent footing +could not be obtained in it. Gradually, day by day, the trenches were +driven nearer to the doomed city, and the cannon of the batteries +worked day and night to establish a breach. Soult was known to be +approaching, but he wanted to gather up all his available forces, as +he believed the town capable of holding out for another month, at +least. Still he was approaching, and, although the three breaches +were scarcely yet practicable, and the fire of the town by no means +overpowered, Wellington determined upon an instant assault, and on the +night of the 6th of April the troops prepared for what turned out to +be the most terrible and bloody assault in the annals of the British +army. There were no less than six columns of attack, comprising in all +eighteen thousand men. Picton, on the right with the third division +was to cross the Rivillas and storm the castle. Wilson, with the +troops in the trenches, was to attack San Roque. In the center the +fourth and light division, under Colville and Barnard, were to assault +the breaches; and on the left Leith, with the fifth division, was to +make a false attack upon the fort of Pardaleras, and a real attack +upon the bastion of San Vincente by the river side. Across the river +the Portugese division, under Power, was to attack the works at the +head of the bridge. The night was dark and clouded, and all was as +still as death outside the town, when a lighted carcass, that is a +large iron canister filled with tar and combustibles, fell close to +the third division, and, exposing their ranks, forced them to commence +the attack before the hour appointed. Crossing the Rivillas by a +narrow bridge, under a tremendous fire, the third division assaulted +the castle, and, although their scaling-ladders were over and over +again hurled down, the stormers at last obtained a footing, and the +rest of the troops poured in and the castle was won. A similar and +more rapid success attended the assault on San Roque, which was +attacked so suddenly and violently, that it was taken with scarce +any resistance. In the mean time the assaults upon the breaches had +commenced, and it is best to give the account of this terrible scene +in the words of its eloquent and graphic historian, as the picture is +one of the most vivid that was ever drawn. + +"All this time the tumult at the breaches was such as if the very +earth had been rent asunder, and its central fires bursting upwards +uncontrolled. The two divisions had reached the glacis just as the +firing at the castle commenced, and the flash of a single musket, +discharged from the covered-way as a signal, showed them that the +French were ready; yet no stir was heard and darkness covered the +breaches. Some hay-packs were thrown, some ladders placed, and the +forlorn hopes and storming parties of the light division, five hundred +in all, descended into the ditch without opposition; but then a bright +flame shooting upwards displayed all the terrors of the scene. The +ramparts, crowded with dark figures and glittering arms were on one +side, on the other the red columns of the British, deep and broad, +were coming on like streams of burning lava. It was the touch of the +magician's wand, for a crash of thunder followed, and with incredible +violence the storming parties were dashed to pieces by the explosion +of hundreds of shells and powder-barrels. For an instant the light +division stood on the brink of the ditch, amazed at the terrific +sight; but then, with a shout that matched even the sound of the +explosion, the men flew down the ladders, or, disdaining their aid, +leaped, reckless of the depth, into the gulf below--and at the same +moment, amidst a blaze of musketry that dazzled the eyes, the fourth +division came running in, and descended with a like fury. There were +only five ladders for the two columns, which were close together; +and a deep cut, made in the bottom of the ditch as far as the +counter-guard of the Trinidad, was filled with water from the +inundation. Into that watery snare the head of the fourth division +fell, and it is said above a hundred of the fusiliers, the men of +Albuera, were there smothered. Those who followed checked not, but, +as if such a disaster had been expected, turned to the left, and thus +came upon the face of the unfinished ravelin, which, being rough and +broken, was mistaken for the breach, and instantly covered with men; +yet a wide and deep chasm was still between them and the ramparts, +from whence came a deadly fire, wasting their ranks. Thus baffled, +they also commenced a rapid discharge of musketry and disorder ensued; +for the men of the light division, whose conducting engineer had been +disabled early and whose flank was confined by an unfinished ditch +intended to cut off the bastion of Santa Maria, rushed towards the +breaches of the curtain and the Trinidad, which were, indeed, before +them, but which the fourth division had been destined to storm. Great +was the confusion, for the ravelin was quite crowded with men of both +divisions; and while some continued to fire, others jumped down and +ran towards the breach; many also passed between the ravelin and +the counterguard of the Trinidad, the two divisions got mixed, the +reserves, which should have remained at the quarries, also came +pouring in, until the ditch was quite filled, the rear still crowding +forward, and all cheering vehemently. The enemy's shouts also were +loud and terrible, and the bursting of shells, and of grenades, and +the roaring of guns from the flanks, answered by the iron howitzers +from the battery of the parallel, the heavy roll, and horrid explosion +of the powder-barrels, the whizzing flight of the blazing splinters, +the loud exhortations of the officers, and the continual clatter +of the muskets, made a maddening din. Now a multitude bounded up +the great breach, as if driven by a whirlwind, but across the top +glittered a range of sword-blades, sharp-pointed, keen-edged on both +sides, and firmly fixed in ponderous beams chained together, and set +deep in the ruins; and for ten feet in front the ascent was covered +with loose planks, studded with sharp iron points, on which, feet +being set, the planks moved, and the unhappy soldiers, falling forward +on the spikes, rolled down upon the ranks behind. Then the Frenchmen, +shouting at the success of their stratagem, and, leaping forward, +plied their shot with terrible rapidity, for every man had several +muskets, and each musket, in addition to its ordinary charge, +contained a small cylinder of wood, stuck full of wooden slugs, +which scattered like hail when they were discharged. Once and again +the assailants rushed up the breaches, but always the sword-blades, +immovable and impassable, stopped their charge, and the hissing shells +and thundering powder-barrels exploded unceasingly. Hundreds of men +had fallen, hundreds more were dropping, still, the heroic officers +called aloud for new trials, and sometimes followed by many, sometimes +by a few, ascended the ruins; and so furious were the men themselves, +that, in one of these charges, the rear strove to push the foremost on +to the sword-blades, willing even to make a bridge of their writhing +bodies, but the others frustrated the attempt by dropping down; and +men fell so fast from the shot, it was hard to know who went down +voluntarily, who were stricken and many stooped unhurt that never rose +again. Vain also would it have been to break through the sword-blades, +for the trench and parapet behind the breach were finished, and the +assailants, crowded into even a narrower space than the ditch was, +would still have been separated from their enemies, and the slaughter +would have continued. At the beginning of this dreadful conflict +Andrew Barnard had, with prodigious efforts, separated his division +from the other, and preserved some degree of military array; but now +the tumult was such, no command would be heard distinctly except by +those close at hand, and the mutilated carcasses heaped on each other, +and the wounded struggling to avoid being trampled upon, broke the +formations; order was impossible! Officers of all ranks, followed more +or less numerously by the men, were seen to start out as if struck +by sudden madness, and rash into the breach, which, yawning and +glittering with steel, seemed like the mouth of a huge dragon belching +forth smoke and flame. In one of these attempts, Colonel Macleod, of +the 43rd, a young man whose feeble body would have been quite unfit +for war if it had not been sustained by an unconquerable spirit, was +killed; wherever his voice was heard his soldiers had gathered, and +with such a strong resolution did he lead them up the fatal ruins +that, when one behind him, in falling, plunged a bayonet into his +back, he complained, not; but, continuing his course, was shot dead +within a yard of the sword-blades. Yet there was no want of gallant +leaders, or desperate followers, until two hours passed in these +vain efforts had convinced the troops the breach of the Trinidad was +impregnable; and, as the opening in the curtain, although less strong, +was retired, and the approach to it impeded by deep holes and cuts +made in the ditch, the soldiers did not much notice it after the +partial failure of one attack which had been made early. Gathering in +dark groups, and leaning on their muskets, they looked up with sullen +desperation at the Trinidad, while the enemy, stepping out on the +ramparts, and aiming their shots by the light of the fire-balls which +they threw over, asked, as their victims fell, 'Why they did not come +into Badajos?' In this dreadful situation, while the dead were lying +in heaps, and others continually falling, the wounded crawling about +to get some shelter from the merciless shower above, and withal a +sickening stench from the burnt flesh of the slain, Captain Nicholas, +of the engineers, was observed by Lieutenant Shaw, of the 43rd, making +incredible efforts to force his way with a few men into the Santa +Maria Bastion. Shaw immediately collected fifty soldiers, of all +regiments, and joined him, and although there was a deep cut along +the foot of that breach also, it was instantly passed, and these two +young officers led their gallant band, with a rush, up the ruins; but +when they had gained two-thirds of the ascent, a concentrated fire +of musketry and grape dashed nearly the whole dead to the earth. +Nicholas was mortally wounded, and the intrepid Shaw stood alone! With +inexpressible coolness he looked at his watch, and saying it was too +late to carry the reaches, rejoined the masses at the other attack. +After this no further effort was made at any point, and the troops +remained passive but unflinching beneath the enemy's shot, which +streamed without intermission; for, of the riflemen on the glacis many +leaped early into the ditch and joined in the assault, and the rest, +raked by a cross-fire of grape from the distant bastions, baffled in +their aim by the smoke and flames from the explosions, and too few in +number, entirely failed to quell the French musketry. About midnight, +when two thousand brave men had fallen, Wellington, who was on a +height close to the quarries, ordered the remainder to retire and +re-form for a second assault; he had heard the castle was taken, +but thinking the enemy would still resist in the town, was resolved +to assail the breaches again. This retreat from the ditch was not +effected without further carnage and confusion. The French fire never +slackened. A cry arose that the enemy was making a sally from the +distant flanks, and there was a rush towards the ladders. Then the +groans and lamentations of the wounded, who could not move and +expected to be slain, increased, and many officers who had not heard +of the order, endeavored to stop the soldiers from going back; some +would even have removed the ladders but were unable to break the +crowd." + +While this terrible scene was passing, the victory had been decided +elsewhere. The capture of the castle by Picton would, in itself, have +caused the fall of the town upon the following day, but Leith, with +the fifth division, after hard fighting, scaled the St. Vincente +bastion, and came up through the town and took the defenders of the +breaches in the rear. Then the French gave way, the British poured in, +and the dreadful scenes which had marked the fall of Ciudad Rodrigo +were repeated, and even surpassed. Up to the present day the name of +an Englishman is coupled with a curse in the town of Badajos. At this +siege, as at the last, the Scudamores acted the part of lookers on, +and although they bitterly regretted it, it was well for them that it +was so. The capture of Badajos cost the allied army five thousand men, +of whom three thousand five hundred fell on the night of the assault. +Each of the divisions which attacked the breaches lost over twelve +hundred men, and the 52nd Regiment, who formed part of the light +division, lost their full share. Among the ranks of the officers the +slaughter was particularly great, and scarce one escaped without +a wound. The Scudamores would fain have volunteered to join their +regiment in the assault, but it was well known that Lord Wellington +would not allow staff officers to go outside their own work. Therefore +they had looked on with beating hearts and pale faces, and with +tears in their eyes, at that terrible fight at the Triudad, and had +determined that when morning came they would resign their staff +appointments and ask leave to join their regiment. But when morning +came, and the list of the killed and wounded was sent in, and they +went down with a party to the breach to collect the wounded, they +could not but feel that they had in all probability escaped death, or +what a soldier fears more, mutilation. "After all, Tom," Peter said, +"we have done some active service, and our promotion shows that we +are not cowards; there can be no reason why we should not do our duty +as the chief has marked it out for us, especially when it is quite +as likely to lead to rapid promotion as is such a murderous business +as this." After this no more was said about resigning the staff +appointment, which gave them plenty of hard work, and constant change +of scene, whereas had they remained with the regiment they would often +have been stationed for months in one place without a move. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +SALAMANCA. + + +The great triumphs of Ciudad Rodrigo and Badajos did not lead to the +rapid successes which Wellington had hoped. The French generals, +on hearing of the loss of the latter fortress, again fell back, +and Wellington was so much hampered by shortness of money, by the +inefficiency, obstinacy, and intrigues of the Portuguese Government, +and by want of transport, that it was nearly three months before he +could get everything in readiness for an advance into Spain. At last +all was prepared, and on the 13th of June the army once more crossed +the Agueda and marched towards the Tamar in four columns. On the 17th +it was within six miles of Salamanca, and Marshal Marmont, unable for +the moment to stem the tide of invasion, evacuated the city, which +that evening blazed with illuminations, the people being half wild +with joy at their approaching deliverance. The French, however, had +not entirely departed, for eight hundred men still held some very +strong forts overlooking and guarding the city. + +These forts held out desperately; the British battering train +was weak, and upon the 23d Marmont, having received considerable +reinforcements, advanced to raise the siege. Wellington, however, +refused to be tempted to leave his trenches to deliver a general +battle, but faced the enemy with a portion of his army while he +continued the siege. + +Marmont, upon his part, believing that the forts could hold out for +fifteen days, put off the attack, as he knew that large reinforcements +were coming up. His calculations were frustrated by one of the forts +taking fire on the 27th, when an assault was delivered, and the whole +of the forts surrendered; Marmont at once fell back across the Douro, +there to await the arrival of his reinforcements. + +Wellington, on his part, followed slowly, and his army took up a +position between Canizal and Castrejon, thereby covering the roads +from Toro and Tordesillas, the only points at which the French could +cross the river. The reports of the spies all agreed that the former +was the place at which the crossing would be made. + +On the 16th of July an officer rode into Canizal, at headlong pace, +with the news that a reconnoitering party had crossed the Douro that +morning near Tordesillas, and had found that place deserted, except by +a garrison; and an hour later the news came in that three divisions of +the enemy were already across the river at Toro. Five minutes later +the Scudamores were on horseback, carrying orders that the whole of +the army, with the exception of the fourth and light divisions, which +were on the Trabancos, under General Cotton, were to concentrate at +Canizal that night. By the morning the movement was accomplished. + +The day wore on in somewhat anxious expectation, and towards afternoon +Wellington, accompanied by Lord Beresford, and escorted by Alten's, +Bock's and Le Marchant's brigades of cavalry, started to make a +reconnaissance of the enemy's movements. Caution was needed for the +advance, as it was quite uncertain whether the French were pushing +on through the open country towards Canizal, or whether they were +following the direct road from Toro to Salamanca. Evening closed in, +but no signs of the French army were seen, and the party halted about +six miles from Toro, and small parties of cavalry were despatched +right and left to scour the country, and find out where the enemy had +gone. + +"It's very strange where the French can have got to," was the remark +made, for the fiftieth time among the staff. + +The detached parties returned, bringing no news whatever, and Lord +Wellington again advanced slowly and cautiously towards Toro. Small +parties were pushed on ahead, and presently an officer rode back +with the news that he had been as far as the river, and that not a +Frenchman was to be seen. It was too late to do any more, and they +remained in uncertainty whether the enemy had recrossed the river +after making a demonstration, or whether they had marched to their +right, so as to make a circuit, and throw themselves between Ciudad +Rodrigo and Salamanca, upon the line of communication of the British +army. + +Lord Wellington, with his staff, took possession of a deserted +farm-house, the cavalry picketed their horses round it, and the +Scudamores, who had been more than twenty-four hours in the saddle, +wrapped themselves in their cloaks, and stretching themselves on the +floor, were soon asleep. Just at midnight the sound of a horse's +footfall approaching at a gallop was heard, and an officer, who had +ridden, without drawing rein, from Canizal, dashed up to the farm. + +Five minutes later the whole party were in the saddle again. The news +was important, indeed. Marmont had drawn his whole army back across +the Toro on the night of the 16th, had marched to Tordesillas, crossed +there, and in the afternoon, after a march of fifty miles, had fallen +upon Cotton's outposts, and driven them across the Trabancos. + +Not a moment's time was lost by Wellington after he received the news; +but, unfortunately, six precious hours had already been wasted, owing +to the despatches not having reached him at Canizal. With the three +brigades of cavalry he set off at once towards Alaejos, while an +officer was despatched to Canizal, to order the fifth division to +march with all speed to Torrecilla de la Orden, six miles in the rear +of Cotton's position at Castrejon. + +Four hours' riding brought them to Alaejos, where a halt for two or +three hours was ordered, to rest the weary horses and men. Soon after +daybreak, however, all thought of sleep was banished by the roar of +artillery, which told that Marmont was pressing hard upon Cotton's +troops. "To horse!" was the cry, and Lords Wellington and Beresford, +with their staff, rode off at full speed towards the scene of action, +with the cavalry following hard upon their heels. An hour's ride +brought them to the ground. Not much could be seen, for the country +was undulating and bare, like the Brighton Downs, and each depression +was full of the white morning mist, which wreathed and tossed +fantastically from the effects of the discharges of firearms, the +movements of masses of men, and the charges of cavalry hidden within +it. Upon a crest near at hand were a couple of British guns, with a +small escort of horse. + +Suddenly, from the mist below, a party of some fifty French horsemen +dashed out and made for the guns. The supporting squadron, surprised +by the suddenness of the attack, broke and fled; the French followed +hard upon them, and just as Lord Wellington, with his staff, gained +the crest, pursuers and pursued came upon them, and in pell-mell +confusion the whole were borne down to the bottom of the hill. For +a few minutes it was a wild mélée. Lords Wellington, Beresford, and +their staff, with their swords drawn, were in the midst of the fight, +and friends and foes were mingled together, when the leading squadrons +of the cavalry from Alaejos came thundering down, and very few of the +Frenchmen who had made that gallant charge escaped to tell the tale. + +The mists were now rapidly clearing up, and in a short time the whole +French army could be seen advancing. They moved towards the British +left, and Wellington ordered the troops at once to retire. The British +fell back in three columns, and marched for the Guarena, through +Torrecilla de la Orden. The French also marched straight for the +river, and now one of the most singular sights ever presented in +warfare was to be seen. + +The hostile armies were marching abreast, the columns being but a few +hundred yards apart, the officers on either side waving their hands to +each other. For ten miles the armies thus pressed forward the officers +urging the men, and these straining every nerve to get first to the +river. From time to time the artillery of either side, finding a +convenient elevation, would pour a few volleys of grape into the +opposing columns, but the position of the two armies, did not often +admit of this. Gradually Cotton's men, fresher than the French, who +had, in the two previous days, marched fifty miles, gained ground, +and, reaching the river, marched across by the ford, the winners of +the great race by so little that one division, which halted for a +moment to drink, was swept by forty pieces of French artillery, which +arrived on the spot almost simultaneously with it. + +On the Guarena the British found the remaining divisions of the army, +which had been brought up from Canizal. These checked Marmont in an +attempt to cross at Vallesa, while the 29th and 40th Regiments, with +a desperate bayonet charge, drove Carier's French division back as it +attempted to push forward beyond Castrillo. Thus the two armies faced +each other on the Guarena, and Marmont had gained absolutely nothing +by his false movement at Toro, and his long and skillful detour by +Tordesillas. + +Quickly the rest of the day passed, as did the one which followed, the +troops on both sides resting after their fatigues. Wellington expected +to be attacked on the next morning and his army was arranged in two +lines ready for the combat. At daybreak, however, Marmont moved his +army up the river, crossed at a ford there, and marched straight +for Salamanca, thus turning Wellington's right, and threatening his +communications. The British at once fell back, and the scene of the +previous day was repeated the armies marching along the crest of two +parallel hills within musket shot distance of each other. + +This time however, the French troops, although they had marched +considerably farther than the English proved themselves the best +marchers, and when night fell Wellington had the mortification of +seeing them in possession of the ford of Huerta on the Tormes, thus +securing for Marmont the junction with an army which was approaching +under King Joseph, and also the option of either fighting or refusing +battle. Wellington felt his position seriously threatened, and sent +off a despatch to the Spanish General Castanos, stating his inability +to hold his ground, and the probability that he should be obliged to +fall back upon Portugal. This letter proved the cause of the victory +of Salamanca for it was intercepted by the French, and Marmont, +fearing that Wellington would escape him, prepared at once to throw +himself upon the road to Ciudad Rodrigo, and thus cut the British line +of retreat, in spite of the positive order which he had received from +King Joseph not to fight until he himself arrived with his army. + +Upon the 21st both armies crossed the Tormes, the French at Alba and +Huerta, the British at Aldea Lengua, and San Marta. Upon that day the +news reached Wellington that General Chauvel, with 2000 cavalry, and +20 guns, would reach Marmont on the evening of the 22d, or the morning +of the 23d, and the English general therefore resolved to retreat, +unless Marmont should, by some mistake, give him a chance of fighting +to advantage. + +Close to the British right, and the French left, were two steep and +rugged hills, called the Hermanitos, or Brothers, and soon after +daybreak on the 22d, the French seized upon the one nearest to them, +while the British took possession of the other. Then, watching each +other, the two armies remained until noon, for Wellington could not +commence his retreat by daylight; but a long cloud of dust along the +road to Ciudad Rodrigo showed that the baggage of the army was already +_en route_ for Portugal. Marmont now determined to make a bold stroke +to cut off Wellington's retreat, and, although all his troops had not +yet arrived, he ordered Maucune, with two divisions, to march round by +the left and menace the Ciudad road. It was at three o'clock in the +afternoon, and Wellington, who had been up all night, thinking that +Marmont would make no move that day, had gone to lie down for an hour +or two, when Tom Scudamore who, from an elevated point, was watching +the movements of the enemy, hurried in with the news that the French +were pushing their left round towards the Ciudad Road. + +Wellington leaped to his feet, and hurried to the high ground, where +he beheld, with stern satisfaction, that Marmont, in his eagerness +to prevent the British escape, had committed the flagrant error of +detaching his wing from his main body. Instantly he issued orders +for an attack, and the great mass of men upon the British Hermanito +moved down upon the plain to attack Maucune in flank, while the third +division was ordered to throw itself across his line of march, and to +attack him in front. As the advance across the plain would be taken in +flank by the fire from the French Hermanito, General Pack was ordered +to assail that position directly the British line had passed it. + +Marmont, standing on the French Hermanito, was thunder-struck at +beholding the plain suddenly covered with enemies, and a tremendous +fire was at once opened upon the advancing British. Officer after +officer was despatched to hurry up the French troops still upon the +march, and when Marmont saw the third division dash across Maucune's +path, he was upon the point of hurrying himself to the spot, when a +shell burst close to him, and he was dashed to the earth with a broken +arm, and two deep wounds in his side. + +Thus, at the critical point of the battle, the French army was left +without a head. + +It was just five o'clock when Pakenham, with the third division, fell +like a thunderbolt upon the head of Maucune's troops. These, taken by +surprise by this attack, on the part of an enemy whom they had thought +to see in full flight, yet fought gallantly, and strove to gain time +to open out into order of battle. Bearing onwards, however, with +irresistible force, the third division broke the head of the column, +and drove it back upon its supports. Meanwhile, the battle raged all +along the line; in the plain the fourth division carried the village +of Arapiles, and drove back Bonnet's division with the bayonet, and +the fifth division attacked Maucune's command in flank, while Pakenham +was destroying its front. + +Marmont was succeeded in his command by Bonnet, who was also wounded, +and Clausel, an able general, took the command. He reinforced Maucune +with his own divisions, which had just arrived, and, for a while, +restored the battle. Then, past the right and left of Pakenham's +division, the British cavalry, under Le Marchant, Anson, and D'Urban, +burst through the smoke and dust, rode down twelve hundred of the +French infantry, and then dashed on at the line behind. Nobly the +charge was pressed, the third division following at a run, and the +charge ceased not until the French left was entirely broken and five +guns, and two thousand prisoners taken. + +But forty minutes had passed since the first gun was fired, and the +French defeat was already all but irretrievable, and the third, +fourth, and fifth divisions now in line, swept forward as to assured +victory. Clausel, however, proved equal to the emergency. He +reinforced Bonnet's division with that of Fereij, as yet fresh and +unbroken, and, at the same moment, Sarrut's and Brennier's divisions +issued from the forest, and formed in the line of battle. Behind them +the broken troops of Maucune's two divisions re-formed, and the battle +was renewed with terrible force. + +Pack, at the same moment, attempted unsuccessfully to carry the French +Hermanito by assault with his Portuguese division, and the fate of the +battle was again in the balance; the British divisions outnumbered, +and outflanked, began to fall back, Generals Cole, Leith, and Spry, +were all wounded, and the French cavalry threatened the flank of the +line. Wellington, however, had still plenty of reserves in hand, and +at this critical moment he launched them at the enemy. The sixth +division was brought up from the second line, and hurled at the center +of the enemy in a fierce and prolonged charge, while the light and +first divisions were directed against the French divisions which were +descending from the French Hermanito, and against that of Foy, while +the seventh division and the Spaniards were brought up behind the +first line. Against so tremendous an assault as this the French could +make no stand, and were pushed back in ever increasing disorder to the +edge of the forest, where Foy's and Maucune's divisions stood at bay, +and covered their retreat in the fast gathering darkness. + +Wellington believed that he should capture a great portion of the +beaten army, for he relied upon the Castle of Alba de Formes, +commanding the ford at that place, being held by the Spaniards, but +these had evacuated the place on the preceding day, and had not even +informed Wellington that they had done so. + +Thus, hidden by the night, the French retreated with but slight loss +from the pursuing columns. In the battle the French had forty-two +thousand men and seventy-four guns; the Allies forty-six thousand and +sixty guns, but of the infantry a division were composed of Spaniards, +and these could not be relied upon in any way. It was probably the +most rapidly fought action ever known, and a French officer described +it as the defeat of forty thousand men in forty minutes. The French +loss was over twelve thousand in killed, wounded, and prisoners, and +so completely were they dispersed that Clausel a week afterwards +could only collect twenty thousand to their standards. It was a great +victory, and celebrated as the first which Wellington had gained over +the French, for although at Talavera and Busaco he had repulsed the +French attack, he was not in either case in a position to do more than +hold his ground. + +Throughout this short and desperate fight the Scudamores had been +fully engaged in conveying orders from one part of the field to +another. Shot and shell flew around them in all directions, and yet +when they met at the end of the action they found that they had +escaped without a scratch. The day following the battle the pursuit +began. Had King Joseph's advancing army united with Clausel's broken +troops, he could have opposed Wellington's advance with a force far +superior in numbers to that defeated at Salamanca. But Joseph, after +hesitating, fell back in one direction, Clausel retreated in another, +the opportunity for concentration was lost, and Wellington found no +foe to bar his way on his triumphant march upon Madrid. + +Joseph fell back from the capital as the English approached, leaving +some thousands of men in the strong place known as the Retiro, +together with an immense amount of arms, ammunition, and military +stores of all kinds, all of which, including the troops, fell into the +hands of the English within a few days of their arrival at Madrid. + +It was a proud moment for the Scudamores, as riding behind Lord +Wellington they entered Madrid on the 14th August. + +The city was half mad with joy. Crowds lined the streets, while every +window and balcony along the route was filled with ladies, who waved +their scarves, clapped their hands, and showered flowers upon the +heads of their deliverers. Those below, haggard and half-starved, +for the distress in Madrid was intense, thronged round the general's +horse, a shouting, weeping throng, kissing his cloak, his horse, any +portion of his equipments which they could touch. Altogether it was +one of the most glorious, most moving, most enthusiastic welcomes ever +offered to a general. + +The next fortnight was spent in a round of fêtes, bull fights, and +balls, succeeding each other rapidly, but these rejoicings were but a +thin veil over the distress which was general throughout the town. The +people were starving, and many deaths occurred daily from hunger. The +British could do but little to relieve the suffering which they saw +around them, for they themselves were--owing to the utter breakdown of +all the arrangements undertaken by the Portuguese government, and to +the indecision and incapacity of the Home Government--badly fed, and +much in arrears of their pay. Nevertheless, the officers did what they +could, got up soup kitchens, and fed daily many hundreds of starving +wretches. + +The heat was excessive and a very great deal of illness took place +among the troops. The French were gathering strength in the South, +and Wellington determined upon marching north and seizing Burgos, an +important place, but poorly fortified. Leaving General Hill with two +divisions at Madrid, he marched with the rest of the army upon Burgos. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +CAUGHT IN A TRAP. + + +So much had passed between the first visit of the Scudamores to Madrid +as Spanish peasant boys, and their second entry as captains upon Lord +Wellington's staff, that they had scarcely given a thought to the +dangers they had at that time run, or to the deadly hatred with which +they had inspired the guerilla chief Nunez. When they first rode +into the town, indeed, they had spoken of it one to the other, and +had agreed that it would be pleasant to be able to walk through the +streets without fear of assassination; for even, as Tom said, if the +scoundrel had any of his band there, they would not be likely to +recognize them in their uniforms. + +One evening, however, when they had been in Madrid about a fortnight, +an incident happened which caused them to doubt whether their security +from the hatred of the guerilla was as complete as they had fancied. +They were sitting with a number of other officers in a large café in +the Puerta del Sol, the principal square in Madrid, when a girl came +round begging; instead of holding out her hand silently with a murmur +for charity in the name of the holy Virgin, she began a long story, +poured out in rapid language. + +Several of the officers present knew more or less Spanish, but they +were unable to follow her quick utterances, and one of them said +laughingly, "Scudamore, this is a case for you, she is beyond us +altogether." + +The girl followed the direction of the speaker's eye, and moved across +to the brothers, who happened to be sitting next to each other, and +began her story again. It was a complicated tale of French oppression, +and the boys, interrupting her here and there to ask for details, +talked with her for some minutes. + +"I believe she is lying," Tom said, in English, "she tells her story +as if she had learned it by heart, and gets confused whenever we +cross-question her; there, give her a few coppers, I am out of +change." + +As Peter put his hand into his pocket for the money, Tom glanced +up sharply at the girl. She was not, as might have been expected, +watching Peter's movements with interest, but was looking inquiringly +at some one in the crowd of promenaders. Tom followed her glance, and +saw a peasant, standing half-hidden behind a group of passers, nod to +her, and motion her to come to him. She waited until Peter put the +coins into her hand; then, with a brief word of thanks, she moved away +into the crowd. + +"Peter, I believe those scoundrels are up to their old game, and +that we are watched. Once or twice since we have been sitting here I +have noticed a heavy-looking fellow glance at us very closely as he +passed, and I just saw the same fellow, who was evidently hiding from +observation, nod to that girl, and beckon her away." + +"Her story was a lie from beginning to end," Peter said, "and it is +quite possible that it was a got-up thing, on purpose to see whether +we could talk Spanish well. I don't think any one could swear to us +who only saw us then; but the fact of our speaking Spanish so well +would go a long way towards settling the point in the mind of any one +who suspected us!" + +"We must be careful in future, Peter, and avoid quiet streets after +dark, and keep a sharp look-out at all times, or we shall get a knife +between our ribs, as sure as fate." + +Time, however, passed on without anything occurring to give any +support to their suspicion, they could not discover that they were +being watched, or their footsteps dogged. They, nevertheless, +continued to be, to a certain extent, upon their guard after dark; in +the daytime the number of English soldiers about the streets was so +large that there was very little danger of any attack. + +On the evening before the army marched for Burgos, Tom, whose turn it +was for duty at head-quarters, received a despatch, to carry to one of +the generals of division encamped a mile or two out of the town. He +did not need to go round to his quarters, as his horse was standing +saddled in readiness in the courtyard. He was but an hour away, and, +as he knew that he would not be farther required, he rode round to the +house where he was quartered. His orderly came forward at his shout, +and took his horse, and he mounted the broad stairs of the house, +which was a very handsome one, and rang at the door on the second +floor; for in Spain, as indeed almost all over the Continent, each +floor is a separate dwelling. + +Sam opened it. + +"Nothing new, Sam?" + +"No, sar, nothing new." + +Tom passed through the sitting-room, and entered Peter's bedroom. It +was in darkness. + +"Asleep, old man?" he asked. + +There was no answer. He came back into the sitting room, where two +lamps were burning, and looked at his watch. "Half-past eleven. He is +off to bed early. Sam, bring me some supper if you have got anything, +I am hungry." + +Sam came in, in a minute, with a small tray. + +"How long has my brother been gone to bed?" + +"Me did not know he gone to bed at all," Sam said, in surprise. "Me +thought Massa Peter been reading book." + +Tom took up a light, and went into the bedroom, it was empty. "Sam, +there's something wrong here!" Tom said sharply, for a sudden +sensation of alarm seized him. "Peter is not here." + +Sam came into the bedroom, and looked round in astonishment. "What +become of him?" he said. "Where de debil he got to?" + +"That's what I want to know, Sam. Now, then, just give all your +attention. What time did he come in?" + +"He came in at about nine o'clock, sar, with three other officers, +Captain Farquharson, Major Heriot, and Captain Brown. Dey have bottle +wine, and sit here and smoke. Well, Massa Tom, Sam sit in his room, +and smoke him pipe, and he doze off a little; after a bit, may be +ten o'clock, Sam hear dem move, and go to door; they were saying +good-night, when Massa Peter said, 'I will just go down to see that +the horses are all right.' Den dey all go down togeder." + +"Did they shut the door?" Tom asked. + +"No, Massa Tom, dey did not shut de door, because, a little while +after, Sam, he wake up wid little start; he hear de door bang, and +'spose Massa Peter come back. Sam go off to sleep again till you ring +bell." + +Tom looked very grave. "What can Peter have gone off with Farquharson +at this time of night for?" + +Then he looked round the room, and said, almost with a cry, "Sam, +look there, there are his cap and sword. He has not gone out with the +others at all. What can have happened?" + +Tom first glanced into his own room, and then ran downstairs in haste, +followed by Sam, who was now also thoroughly alarmed. The orderly had +just made the horse comfortable for the night, and was leaving the +stable. + +"Johnstone, when did you see my brother?" + +"Well, it may be an hour, or an hour and a half back, sir. He came +down with some other officers; I did not see them, but I heard them +talking for a minute or two before he came in to look at the horses, +and he asked if they were all right, and said they must be saddled by +half-past five, and then he went up again--at least, I suppose he went +up, for he had not got his cap on. Is anything wrong, sir?" + +"I don't know, I am afraid to think," Tom said, in a dazed way. "He is +not upstairs; he has not gone out; what can have become of him?" + +He stood quiet for a minute or two, and then, with a great effort, +brought his thoughts within control again. "The first thing is to +assure ourselves whether he returned upstairs. Sam, fetch a lamp, the +stairs are not lighted, and I want to examine them." + +Sam soon returned with the lamp, and Tom, beginning at the street +door, examined every step carefully all the way up, Sam and the +soldier following him. + +"There has been no scuffle on the stairs," he said; then he went +through the little hall into the sitting-room again. Nothing appeared +to have been disturbed. Then he looked at the floor, which was of +polished oak, and knelt down to examine it more closely. "There have +been men with dirty shoes standing here," he cried. "Do you see the +marks on each side of the door, and there, do you see that scratch and +that? There has been a scuffle. Good heavens! what has taken place +here?" + +Sam's face was pale with apprehension that something had happened to +Peter; but, he said, "How dat be, Massa Tom, with Sam in the next room +all the time?" + +Tom made no reply; but was closely examining the floor--back across +the hall. "There is a mark; there is another," he said, "not made by +boots, but by their native sandals." Then he went out from the door, +and up the next flight of stairs. + +"There," he said, "just as I thought." Just round the angle of the +stairs two steps were dirty and stained, as if dirty feet had been +trampling upon them for some time. "I suppose they knew I was out, and +watched here, for hours, perhaps. Then, when Peter went down, they +slipped in through the open door, and then"--without completing the +sentence, Tom went back into the room, and threw himself into a chair +in tearless despair. + +Sam sobbed loudly. For some time there was silence. "There is no +blood, sir, that I can see, not a speck," the orderly said. "They +can't have killed Captain Scudamore, and, if they had, why should they +have carried his body away?" + +This was the question Tom had been asking himself. Assassinations +were, in Madrid, every-day occurrences, and that Peter and he were +especially liable to be murdered, owing to the hatred of Nunez and his +gang, was clear; but, so far as he could see, not a drop of blood had +been shed here. Presently Sam began to sob more loudly. "Dis break +my heart, Massa Tom, to tink dat Sam be next door all de time, and, +instead of watching, he sleep so sound dat Massa Peter carried +straight away." + +"You are not to blame, Sam, there was, probably, no noise whatever. +But, what can it all mean? Johnstone, you had better go to bed, you +can do no good now. Sam, give me my pistols; take that big stick of +yours, and come round with me to head-quarters, we will call in at +Captain Farquharson's on the way." + +That officer, on being roused, and made to understand what was the +matter, confirmed the account given by the orderly; he and his +companions had parted at the street door, and Peter had gone down the +yard to the stable. + +"It is clear that Peter has been carried off," Tom said, "and I have +not the least doubt that it has been done by some of the band of +Nunez. As you have heard me say, they owe us a grudge, and have, no +doubt, been on the look-out ever since we came here. We have been +on guard, and never gave them a chance, and, I suppose, they got +desperate when they found the army was moving again, and so carried +out this audacious plan." + +"If your brother had been found murdered I should understand it," +Captain Farquharson said; "but, what on earth did they carry him off +for?" + +Tom was silent for a minute. + +"That fiend, Nunez, would have had us stabbed if he could do nothing +else; but he would, if I judge him rightly, be really contented with +nothing short of putting us to death himself in some horrible manner. +My own idea is, that Peter is hidden away somewhere near, will be kept +in concealment until the road is clear, and will then be taken to +Nunez. I must go off and try and save him at all hazards." + +Captain Farquharson was silent, while Tom walked up and down the room +thoughtfully. + +"I don't suppose the chief would refuse me leave," Tom said. "If he +does, I must throw up my commission." + +"No, no; you are sure to get leave for such a thing as this, but the +difficulty of the affair will be to know how to proceed. The country +will swarm with French, the guerillas are sure to keep a sharp +look-out, and if you find him, how are you going to rescue him?" + +"I don't know," Tom said, "but it's got to be done; that's clear. I +can't set out as a Spanish peasant," he went on after a pause. "They +know me as that now. At least, if I do I must get up as an old man +and change my appearance. I might go as a woman, but I am too tall in +the first place, and then women don't go wandering over the country +in such times as this. But there, I have time to think it over before +morning. I suppose the general will be moving about five o'clock; +I will see him the first thing, and tell him the whole story. +Good-night." + +And so Tom went back to his quarters, and sat thinking deeply until +morning, while Sam sat gloomily in his little room, sometimes with +tears rolling down his cheeks, sometimes muttering terrible threats +against the guerillas, at other times cursing himself for having been +asleep instead of watching over his young master's safety. Tom had +briefly told him that he intended to get leave in order to search +for Peter. At daybreak, when he heard Tom moving, he went into the +sitting-room. + +"Look here, Massa Tom, Sam only one word to say. He going to look for +Massa Peter. Sam know dat him color berry spicuous, dat people look +at him and tink he de debil. Sam don't spect he going wid you. Dat +wouldn't do. Dese fellows watch him, know dat black fellow here. Only +Sam go somehow. He trabel night, hide up at day time. He join you de +last ting when you go to mash up dem guerillas like squash. Anyhow, +Sam must go. If can get leave, berry well, if not he desert. Anyhow he +go, dat sartin. Sam kill himself if he stay behind." + +Tom had already thought over this. He was sure that the faithful negro +would not remain behind, but he had seen that his companionship would +be fatal. He had, therefore, formed some plan in his head similar to +that which Sam proposed, and he knew that when the moment for action +came his courage, strength, and devotion would be invaluable. + +"You shall go, Sam," he said, holding out his hand to his attached +follower. "As you say, you can't go with me, but you shall go +somehow." + +"Thank you, Massa Tom," the negro said gratefully, "You berry sure if +Massa Peter die Sam die too." + +Tom now went to head-quarters, and found that Lord Wellington was +just up. Sending in to say that he wished to speak with him for a few +minutes on a matter of urgent personal importance, he was admitted, +and related as concisely as he could Peter's disappearance, and told +the story of the affair with the guerillas, which accounted for the +intense desire for vengeance on the part of Nunez. He ended by asking +for leave of absence. + +The general heard him to the end, asking a brief question here and +there. + +"You can have the leave certainly, Captain Scudamore, I know that it +is needless for me to point out the risks that you will run, both from +the French and guerillas. I think that it might be an advantage if I +give you a note which you can, in case of absolute necessity, show to +any French officer." + +So saying, the general sat down and wrote as follows:-- + +"To the French officer commanding.--The Earl of Wellington, +commander-in-chief of His Britannic Majesty's forces in Spain, gives +his assurance that the bearer of this, Captain Scudamore, although not +in English uniform, is not engaged upon any mission connected with the +army, or to obtain information respecting the strength and position of +the French forces. His business is entirely private, and he is engaged +in an attempt to discover and rescue a brother who has been carried +off by the guerilla chief Nunez in order to gratify private vengeance. +The Earl of Wellington, confiding in the natural courtesy of the +French nation, trusts that officers of that service will, if applied +to, assist Captain Scudamore in any way in their power, and he will +feel personally obliged to them by their so doing." + +Tom expressed his deep gratitude for this, which might, he foresaw, be +of inestimable advantage to him. + +"I am taking my servant with me, sir--the negro; he will not travel +with me by day, but will join me wherever I tell him; he is very +strong and brave, and is deeply attached to us." + +"Yes, I remember," the general said; "that is the man whose life you +saved. Do you leave at once?" + +"No, sir; I am thinking of riding with you to-morrow at any rate. The +route lies on the way I have to go, and I am sure to be watched here." + +"Very well," the general said; "I wish you good fortune; but you have +a difficult, almost a desperate, service before you." + +Upon leaving head-quarters, Tom again called on Captain Farquharson. + +"Farquharson, I hear that it will be eleven before the chief leaves. I +wish you would go to that little shop opposite the opera-house; they +have got wigs and all that sort of thing there. Please get me two +old men's wigs and beards, and one set of those mutton-chop shaped +whiskers, and a woman's wig. I haven't made up my mind yet what I am +going to wear, but I want these things to choose from. I am sure to be +watched, and if I were to go there they would find out, five minutes +afterwards, what I had bought. In the meantime I am going to the head +of the police to give notice of Peter's disappearance, and to ask him +to have the carts leaving the town for the next few days searched. +I have no doubt the fellows will outwit the police, but it's no use +throwing away a chance." + +It was six days after this that an old man, with long white hair +and gray beard, and with a box containing cheap trinkets, beads, +necklaces, earrings, knives, scissors, and other like articles, was +sitting at the junction of two roads near the lower slopes of the +Pyrenees, some twenty miles north of Vittoria. He had one of his +sandals off, and appeared to have just risen from a bed of leaves in +the forest behind him. The dawn had broken, but it was still twilight. +Presently he heard a footstep coming along the road, and at once +applied himself to wrapping the bandages, which serve for stockings +to the Spanish peasant, round his leg, looking eagerly from under his +wide sombrero to see who was approaching. As the new-comer came in +sight, the pedlar at once ceased his employment and rose to meet him. +He had recognized the figure, but the face was hidden, the Spanish +cloak, worn as is usual by peasant and noble alike, with one end +thrown over the shoulder, hiding the chin and lower part of the face, +while the wide felt hat, pressed well down in front, allowed scarcely +a glimpse even of the nose. That, however, would have been sufficient +in the present case, for the man was a negro. + +Upon seeing the pedlar rise, he ran forward to meet him. + +"Ah, Massa Tom, tank de Lord me find you safe and sound. I always +keep on tinking you taken prisoner or killed eider by de French or de +robbers--one as bad as de oder." + +"I have thought the same of you, Sam, for your risk has been far +greater than mine. Well, thank God, it is all right thus far. But come +back into the wood, I have got some food there, and here any one might +come along." + +They were soon deep in the wood, where, by a pile of grass and leaves +which had evidently been used as a bed, was an open wallet, with some +bread, cheese, cold meat and a small skin of wine. + +"Are you hungry, Sam?" + +"Downright starving, sar; dis chile eat noting for two days." + +"Why, how is that, Sam; you had six days' provision with you when you +started?" + +"Dat true enough, sar, but Sam's appetite bigger than usual, noting to +do all day sitting in de woods, waiting for night to come so as to go +on again; so had to eat, and de food all went before Sam thought dat +dere was two more days before he meet you." + +"Well, sit down now, Sam, and eat away; we have plenty of time." + +They had much to tell each other. They had traveled by the same road, +one by night, the other by day--Sam passing the days sleeping in the +woods, his master traveling by day and at night sleeping in wretched +village posadas. He, too, would far rather have slept in the woods, +for the insects and filth made sleep almost impossible in these +places, besides which he ran a good deal of risk as to the discovery +of his disguise. He had, however, chosen the inns in hopes of hearing +something which might give him a clue as to the object of his search. +The only information, which he had gained was to the effect that Nunez +still had his quarters at the old place. He had been driven out of it, +and the village had been burned by the French, but the position was +a convenient one, and the houses had been cleared and roughly roofed +with boughs of trees and straw, and the band was still there. This +much was satisfactory, and he could hardly have expected to learn +more, unless he had happened to meet some of the members of the band +itself. They had not traveled by the main road, as upon that large +forces of the French were collected; and even if Tom could have +passed through, boldly, Sam could not have made his way. Even by the +road they had chosen Tom had met several bodies of French, while at +Vittoria a very large force was assembling, destined for the relief of +Burgos. + +Sam had but few incidents to relate. He had been carefully instructed +by Tom before starting as to the road he should take, and the position +and distances apart of the towns and villages upon it. He had traveled +only at night, and had but once or twice exchanged a word with passers +by. People did not travel much at night in so disturbed a country, +and when Sam heard a foot-passenger approaching, or, as was more +frequently the case, a party of French cavalry, he left the road and +lay down, until they had passed. The one or two foot-passengers he had +met suddenly he had passed with the usual Spanish muttered salutation, +and the darkness and the disguise prevented any recognition of his +color. + +"Now, sar," Sam said, when they had finished breakfast, "what am to be +done next?" + +"I do not think, Sam, that the party who have got Peter have arrived +yet. They could only have started on the day that we did; they have as +long a road to go, and most likely they have got a bullock-cart, which +won't travel more than fifteen miles a day at the outside. They have +got Peter in a cart covered up with something, we may be sure. I don't +think they will be here for another day or so at the earliest. If we +knew what sort of cart it was, we could attack them on the way if +there are not too many of them; but unfortunately we don't know that; +and as there are three or four roads up to the village, and they are +sure to make a detour, we don't know which they will come by. I hope +to learn at the village. We will stay where we are till dark, then we +will push on; it is only a couple of miles or so from here. I will +steal into the place after dark, and try and overhear what is going +on. You shall remain at a point where you can see down into the +village and can hear a shout. I will give you this letter of Lord +Wellington, and if you hear a pistol shot and hear me shout 'Sam!' you +will know I am caught, and must make off as hard as you can to that +small town in the plain, where there is a French garrison; ask for the +commanding-officer, show this letter, and offer to guide them so as +to surprise Nunez and his band. That is our sole chance. But I don't +think there is much risk of being caught. I shall be very careful, you +may rely upon it; and as I know the position of the house, I shall be +able to make my way about. Once night has fallen they go off to bed; +and even if I walked boldly about the place I should likely enough +meet no one all night." + +That evening Tom entered the village as soon as it was fairly dark. He +knew, from his former experience, that sentries were always placed at +points whence they could get a view of the roads, and he made his way +so as to avoid any risk of observation by them; but when he reached a +place whence he could in turn view the posts of the watchers, he found +that they were deserted, and concluded that the brigands had become +careless, from the belief that, now the French had once destroyed the +village, they would not be likely to come up to search for them there +a second time; besides which, they might reckon that the French had +their hands much too full with the advance of the Allied Army to spare +either men or time in raids upon the guerillas. In this particular, +indeed, they would have argued wrongly, for the French during the +whole war, however much they were pressed by Wellington, always kept +sufficient forces in hand to scatter the guerillas as fast as they +become formidable. + +Tom had now taken off his beard and wig, and had put on the small +whisker, which is the general fashion of wearing the hair throughout +Spain. Thus he trusted, if surprised in the dark, to pass as one of +the band. So quiet was the village when he entered, that he at first +thought it was deserted; at last, however, he saw a light in one of +the houses in the center of the village. Approaching carefully and +noiselessly he saw a group of five men sitting and drinking round a +fire made on the ground, in the center of one of the windowless rooms, +the smoke finding its way out through the roof. + +"I tell you," one said, "I am getting sick of this life; I am ready to +go and kill the French, but to be left up here, where there is nothing +to do, no one to talk to, not a roof to cover one; bah! I am sick of +it. But Nunez will be back in three days, and we shall be merry enough +then." + +"Not we," another said, "this was a pleasant village in the old days, +what is it now? There are no women, not even old mother Morena, who +used to cook well, if she was free of her tongue. There is not even a +priest now to shrive us if one is brought in to die." + +"Nunez will come back in a good temper if it is true what Lope said +yesterday when he came through, that the lads at Madrid had got one +of those English boys who made a fool of him two years ago. That was +a go. Demonio! but it was a fine thing. If it is true that they have +got him and are bringing him here I would not be in his skin for all +the treasures of King Joseph. Yes, Nunez was always a devil, but he is +worse now. Somehow we always have bad luck, and the band gets smaller +and smaller, I don't suppose there's above fifty with him now. I +expect we shall have them pretty well all here this week." + +"No fear of a visit from the French?" + +"None; Reynier at Vittoria is busy now in sending every man he can +spare forward to the army that's gathering near Burgos." + +This was enough for Tom, who stole silently away to the spot where Sam +was anxiously awaiting him. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +JUST IN TIME. + + +"I shall go straight back to Vittoria, Sam. By what they say, General +Reynier is in command there, and as it was through his wife that all +this terrible business has come about, we have a right to expect him +to do his best to get us out of it. I will start at once. Now look +here, Sam. You must put yourself where you can keep watch over the +village. If you see any party come in, either to-night or to-morrow, +you must try and discover if Peter is among them. If he is, light a +fire down in that hollow where it can't be seen from above, but where +we can see it on that road. It's twenty miles to Vittoria; if I can +get to see General Reynier to-morrow, I may be back here with cavalry +by night; if he is out or anything prevents it, I will be here next +night, as soon after dusk as it will be safe. I will dismount the men +and take them over the hill, so as to avoid the sentinel who is sure +to be posted on the road when Nunez arrives. If they come in the +afternoon, Sam, and you find that anything is going to be done at +once, do everything you can to delay matters." + +"All right, Massa Tom, if, when you come back you find Massa Peter +dead, you be berry sure you find dis chile gone down too." + +It was seven o'clock next morning when Tom entered Vittoria, and +a few cautious inquiries proved the fact that General Reynier was +really in command of the French division there. He at once sought his +head-quarters, and after some talk with a woman selling fruit near the +house, heard that the general and his staff had started at daybreak, +but whither of course she knew not. Tom hesitated for some time, and +then, seeing an officer standing at the door, went up to him and asked +if the general would be back soon. + +"He will be back in an hour or two," the officer replied in Spanish, +"but it is no use your waiting to see him. He has his hands full and +can't be bothered with petitions as to cattle stolen or orchards +robbed. Wait till we have driven the English back, and then we shall +have time to talk to you." + +"Your pardon," Tom said humbly. "It is not a complaint that I have to +make, it is something of real importance which I have to communicate +to him." + +"You can tell me, I am Colonel Decamps; it will be all the same thing +if your news is really important." + +"Thank you very kindly, señor, it must be the general himself; I will +wait here." Thereupon Tom sat down with his back to the wall a short +distance off, pulled out some bread and fruit he had bought in the +town, and began quietly to eat his breakfast. An hour later a pretty +carriage with two fine horses drew up to the door. It was empty, +and was evidently intended for some one in the house. Suddenly, the +thought flashed across his mind, perhaps Madame Reynier and her child +were there. It was curious that the thought had not occurred to him +before, but it had not, and he drew near, when a sentry at the door +roughly ordered him to stand further back. Presently a lady came to +the door, accompanied by a little girl. There she stood for a minute +talking with the officer with whom Tom had spoken. At the moment a +young officer passed Tom on his way to the house. + +"Monsieur," Tom said, in French, "do me the favor to place that ring +in the hands of Madame Reynier. It is a matter of life and death. +She will recognize the ring, it is her own," he added, as the young +officer in surprise hesitated. He was a bright handsome young fellow, +and after a moment's, pause, he went up to the lady. "My dear aunt," +he said, "here is a mystery. An old Spanish beggar speaks French, not +very good French, but enough to make out, and he begs me to give you +this ring, which he says is yours, and which, by the way, looks a +valuable one." Madame Reynier, in some surprise, held out her hand +for the ring. "It is not mine," she began, when a sudden thought +struck her, and turning it round she saw "a Louise Reynier, tumors +reconnaissance," which she had had engraved on it, before giving it to +Tom. "Who gave it to you, Jules?" she asked eagerly. + +"That old pedler," Jules said. + +"Bring him in," Madame Reynier said, "the carriage must wait; I must +speak to him and alone." + +"My dear aunt," began her nephew. + +"Don't be afraid, Jules, I am not going to run away with him, and if +you are a good boy you shall know all about it afterwards, wait here, +Louise, with your cousin;" and beckoning to Tom to follow her, she +went into the house, the two officers looking astounded at each other +as the supposed Spanish pedler followed her into her sitting-room. + +"What is your message?" she asked. + +Tom's answer was to remove his wide hat, wig, and beard. + +"Himself!" Madame Reynier exclaimed, "my preserver," and she held out +both her hands to him. "How glad I am, but oh! how foolish to come +here again, and--and"--she hesitated at the thought that he, an +English spy, ought not to come to her, the wife of a French general. + +Tom guessed her thought. "Even General Reynier might succor us without +betraying the interests of his country. Read that, madame; it is an +open letter," and he handed her Lord Wellington's letter. + +She glanced through it and turned pale. "Your brother! is he in the +hands of the guerillas? Where? How?" + +"He is in the hands of that scoundrel Nunez; he swore he would be +revenged for that day's work, and he has had Peter carried off. No +doubt to kill him with torture." + +"Oh! and it is through me," Madame Reynier exclaimed, greatly +distressed. "What can we do! Please let me consult with my friends, +every soldier shall be at your service," and she opened the door. +"Colonel Deschamps, Jules, come here directly, and bring Louise with +you." These officers, on entering, were struck dumb with astonishment +on finding a young peasant instead of an old pedler, and at seeing +tears standing in Madame Reynier's eyes. "Louise," she said to her +daughter, "look at this gentleman, who is he?" + +The child looked hard at Tom; he was dressed nearly as when she first +saw him--and as he smiled she recognized him. "Oh, it is the good +boy!" she cried, and leaped into Tom's arms, and kissed him heartily. + +"Do you think we have gone mad, Jules, Louise and I? This is one of +the young English officers who saved our lives, as you have often +heard me tell you." + +Jules stepped forward, and shook Tom's hand heartily, but Colonel +Deschamps looked very serious. "But, madame," he began, "you are wrong +to tell me this." + +"No, Colonel;" Madame Reynier said, "here is a letter, of which this +gentleman is the bearer, from Lord Wellington himself, vouching for +him, and asking for the help of every Frenchman." + +Colonel Deschamps read it, and his brow cleared, and he held out his +hand to Tom. "Pardon my hesitation, sir," he said in Spanish; "but I +feared that I was placed in a painful position, between what I owe +to my country, and what all French soldiers owe to you, for what you +did for Madame Reynier. I am, indeed, glad to find that this letter +absolves me from the former duty, and leaves me free to do all I can +to discharge the latter debt. Where is your brother, and why has he +been carried off? I have known hundreds of our officers assassinated +by these Spanish wolves, but never one carried away. An English +officer, too, it makes it the more strange!" + +Tom now related the story of Peter's abduction; the previous attempts +of members of Nunez's band to assassinate them, and the reasons he +had for believing that Peter was close to, if not already at, the +headquarters of that desperado. + +"Is he still there?" Jules asked. "We routed him out directly the +general came up here. My aunt declared herself bound by a promise, and +would give us no clue as to the position of the village, but he had +made himself such a scourge, that there were plenty of others ready to +tell; if we had known the roads, we would have killed the whole band, +but unfortunately they took the alarm and made off. So he has gone +back there again. Ah! there is the general." + +Madame Reynier went out to meet her husband, and drawing him aside +into another room, explained the whole circumstance to him, with +difficulty detaining him long enough to tell her story, as the moment +he found that his wife and child's deliverer was in the next room, he +desired to rush off to see him. The story over, he rushed impetuously +into the room, where Tom was explaining his plans to his French +friends, seized him in his arms, and kissed him on both cheeks, as if +he had been his son. + +"I have longed for this day!" he said, wiping his eyes. "I have prayed +that I might some day meet you, to thank you for my wife and child, +who would have been lost to me, but for you. And now I hear your +gallant brother is paying with his life for that good deed. Tell me +what to do, and if necessary I will put the whole division at your +orders." + +"I do not think that he will have above fifty men with him, general; +say eighty, at the outside. Two squadrons of cavalry will be +sufficient. They must dismount at the bottom of the hill, and I will +lead them up. We must not get within sight of the hill till it is too +dark for their look-out to see us, or the alarm would be given, and we +should catch no one. We shall know if they have arrived, by a fire my +man is to light. If they have not come, then I would put sentries on +guard upon every road leading there, and search every cart that comes +up; they are sure to have got him hid under some hay, or something of +that sort, and there are not likely to be more than two or three men +actually with it, so as not to attract attention. It will be all right +if they do not arrive there to-day." + +"It is about five hours' ride for cavalry," the general said, "that +is at an easy pace; it will not be dark enough to approach the hill +without being seen till eight o'clock. Two squadrons shall be paraded +here at three o'clock. I will go with you myself; yes, and you shall +go too, Jules," he said, in answer to an anxious look from his nephew. +"In the mean time you can lend our friend some clothes; you are about +the same size." + +"Come along," Jules said laughing; "I think we can improve your +appearance," and, indeed, he did so, for in half an hour Tom returned +looking all over a dashing young French hussar, and little Louise +clapped her hands and said-- + +"He does look nice, mamma, don't he? Why can't he stay with us always, +and dress like that? and we know he's brave, and he would help papa +and Jules to kill the wicked English." + +There was a hearty laugh, and Jules was about to tell her that Tom was +himself one of the wicked English, but Madame Reynier shook her head, +for, as she told him afterwards, it was as well not to tell her, for +little mouths would talk, and there was no occasion to set everyone +wondering and talking about the visit of an English officer to General +Reynier. "There is no treason in it, Jules, still one does not want to +be suspected of treason, even by fools." + +Sam watched all night, without hearing any sound of vehicles, but in +the morning he saw that several more guerillas had come in during the +night. In the morning parties of twos and threes began to come in +from the direction of Vittoria, and it was evident from the shouting +and noise in the village that these brought satisfactory news of +some kind. In the afternoon most of them went out again in a body +to the wood at the foot of the hill, and soon afterwards Sam saw a +cart coming along across the plain. Two men walked beside it, and +Sam could see one, if not two more perched upon the top of the load. +Three others walked along at a distance of some fifty yards ahead, and +as many more at about the same distance behind. He could see others +making their way through the fields. "Dis berry bad job," Sam said +to himself; "me berry much afraid dat Massa Tom he not get back in +time. Der's too many for Sam to fight all by himself, but he must +do someting." Whereupon Sam set to to think with all his might, and +presently burst into a broad grin. "Sure enough dat do," he said; "now +let me arrange all about what dey call de pamerphernalia." First, he +emptied out the contents of a couple of dozen pistol cartridges; he +wetted the powder and rolled it up in six cartridges, like squibs, +three short ones and three much longer. Then he opened Tom's kit, +and took out a small box of paints, which Tom had carried with him +for making dark lines on his face, and in other ways to assist his +disguise. Taking some white paint, Sam painted his eyelids up to his +eyebrows, and a circle on his cheeks, giving the eyes at a short +distance the appearance of ghastly saucers. + +"Dat will do for de present," he said; "now for business. If dey wait +till it get dark, all right; if not, Sam do for Nunez and two or three +more, and den go down with Massa Peter!" + +Then carefully examining the priming of the pair of pistols, which +he carried--the very pistols given to Peter by the passengers of the +Marlborough coach--he prepared to set out. + +It was now six o'clock, and he calculated that the waggon would by +this time have mounted the hill, and reached the village; he had +already collected a large heap of dry sticks and some logs, at the +point Tom had pointed out, these he now lit, and then started for the +top of the hill. Looking back, just as he reached the crest, he could +see, knowing where it was, a very light smoke curling up over a clump +of trees which intervened between him and the fire, but it was so +slight that he was convinced that it would not be noticed by an +ordinary observer. Sam saw at once, on reaching the top of the hill, +that the guerillas were crowded round the waggon, which stood at the +edge of a small clump of trees in the middle of the village. The +moment was favourable, and he at once started forward, sometimes +making a detour, so as to have the shelter of a tree, sometimes +stooping behind a low stone wall, until he reached the first house +in the village. It was now comparatively easy work, for there were +enclosures and walls, the patches of garden-ground were breast-high +with weeds, and, stooping and crawling, Sam soon reached a house close +to the waggon. It was a mere hut, and had not been repaired. The roof +was gone, but the charred shutters and doors still hung on their +hinges. It was the very place from which to see without being seen. +Sam entered by a door from behind, and found that, through a slight +opening in the window-shutter, he could see all that was going on. +Some fifty guerillas were standing or sitting in groups at a distance +of twenty yards. + +In the centre of the groups, lying on the ground, was a figure which +he at once recognized as Peter. It was wound round and round with +ropes; beside it stood, or rather danced, Nunez pouring forth strings +of abuse, of threats, and of curses, and enforcing them with repeated +kicks at the motionless figure. + +"De debil!" muttered Sam, "me neber able to stand dis. If you not stop +dat, Massa Nunez, me put a bullet through dat ugly head of yours, as +sure as you stand dere. But me mustn't do it till last ting; for, +whether I kill him or not, it's all up with Massa Peter and me if I +once fire." + +Fortunately Nunez was tired, and in a short time he desisted, and +threw himself down on the ground. "Take off his ropes, one of you," he +said: "there would be no fear of his running away had he three or four +days to live, instead of as many hours. Take the gag out of his mouth, +throw some water over him to bring him round, and pour some wine down +his throat. I want him to be fresh, so as to be able to enjoy the +pleasure we have in store for him. And now let's have dinner." + +Sam felt that for another hour at least Peter was safe, and +therefore, with the same precaution as before, he crept away from his +hiding-place, through the village, and over the hill-crest, to the +place where he had made his fire. The logs were burning well, but gave +out but little smoke. Sam looked at the sky. "Dusk cum on berry fast," +he said; "another hour Massa Tom come on with soldiers. If he see +fire, he hurry up sharp." So saying, Sam heaped on a pile of wood, +and then made his way back. He knew that Tom would not approach until +it was too dark for the movements of the troops to be seen by the +look-outs, and that he could not be expected to reach the village +until fully an hour after dark. "Just another hour and a half," he +said to himself; "ebery thing depend upon what happen before dat +time." It was quite dusk before he regained the shelter of the +cottage. He had gone round by the wagon, and had taken from it a large +stable-fork, muttering as he did so. "Golly! dis de berry ting." +Close by he saw the carcase of a bullock which the guerillas had just +slaughtered, and from this he cut off the horns and tail. + +When Sam peeped out through the shutter he saw that something was +going to be done. Nunez was sitting smoking a cigarette, with a look +of savage pleasure in his face, while the men heaped up a large fire +in front of the trees. + +"I don't like dat gentleman's look," Sam said to himself. "It's time +dis chile begin to dress for de pantomime, dat quite plain. Massa Tom +get here too late." Thus saying, Sam began to deliberately undress. + +Peter, his arms and feet still bound, was sitting with his back +against a tree, watching what were, he was convinced, the preparations +for his death. For the last ten days he had lived in a sort of +confused and painful dream. From the moment, when, upon entering his +room two hands suddenly gripped his throat, others thrust a gag in the +mouth, and then blindfolded him, while some one from behind lashed his +arms to his side, and then altogether, lifting him like a log, carried +him downstairs and threw him into a cart, he had not till now seen +anything. The bandage had never been removed from his eyes, or the +cords from his limbs. Sometimes he had been made to sit up, and soup +and wine had been poured down his throat, or a piece of bread thrust +into his mouth; then he had been again gagged and thrown into a cart. +Over him brushwood and fagots had been piled, and there he had lain, +until at night a stop was made, when he was taken out, fed, and then +thrust back again and covered over. + +From the first he had never doubted who were his captors, or what was +his destination, and he therefore experienced no surprise whatever, +when, on his arrival at the village, on the bandage being taken off +his eyes, he saw where he was. That it was useless to beg for mercy of +the savages into whose power he had fallen he knew well enough, and he +looked as calm and indifferent, as if he did not hear a word of the +threats and imprecations which Nunez was heaping on him. + +"You see that fire," the enraged guerilla said, "there you shall be +roasted! English pig that you are! But not yet. That were too quick +a death! Here," he said to his followers, "make a little fire by the +side of the big one--there under the arm of that tree; and put on +plenty of green leaves: we will smoke our pig a bit before we roast +him!" + +Peter still eyed him unflinchingly. He was determined that no pain +should wring a complaint or prayer for mercy. Even now he did not +quite despair, for he thought that he had just one chance of life. He +was sure that Tom would move heaven and earth to save him. He reckoned +that he would at once guess who had carried him off, and with what +object; and he felt that Tom would be certain to set off to his +rescue. All this he had reflected over in his long days of weary +suffering, and from the moment that he was unbandaged, and propped +against the tree, he had listened attentively for any unusual sound. +How Tom could rescue him he did not see. He was so utterly crippled, +from his long confinement, that he knew that it would be hours, +perhaps days, before he could walk a step; yet, still he thought it +possible that Tom might try; and he feared more than he hoped, for he +trembled lest, if Tom were really there, that he would do some rash +thing, which would involve him in his fate. "Whether Tom is here or +not," Peter thought as he looked unflinchingly at Nunez, "one thing +is certain, if I know my brother, you will not have many days to live +after me, for Tom will follow you all over Spain, but he will avenge +me at last!" Such were Peter's thoughts, and so likely did he think it +that Tom was present, that he was scarcely surprised when he heard, as +from the ground behind him, a well-known voice. + +"Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam here, Massa Tom he be here +in another half hour with French soldiers. If dey go to kill you +before dat, Sam play dem trick. Can you run, Massa Peter, if I cut de +cord?" + +"No, Sam." + +"Dat bad job. Neber mind, Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam +keep quiet as long as he can, but when de worst come Sam do de trick +all right." + +"Don't show yourself, Sam. It would only cost you your life, and +couldn't help me; besides, it would put them on their guard. They +won't kill me yet. They will smoke me, and so on, but they will make +it last as long as they can." + +Peter was able to say this, for at the moment Nunez was occupied in +rolling and lighting a second cigarette. Peter received no answer, for +Sam, seeing some guerillas bringing sticks and leaves to make a fire, +as Nunez, had ordered, crept back again into the deep shadow behind. +The fire was now giving out volumes of smoke, a guerilla climbed up +the tree and slung a rope over it, and three others approached Peter. +His heart beat rapidly; but it was with hope, not fear. He knew, from +the words of Nunez, that at present he was not going to be burned, +but, as he guessed, to be hung over the smoke until he was insensible, +and then brought to life again with buckets of water, only to have the +suffocation repeated, until it pleased Nunez to try some fresh mode of +torture. + +It was as he imagined. The rope was attached to his legs, and amid +the cheers of the guerillas, two men hauled upon the other end until +Peter swung, head downwards, over the fire. There was no flame, but +dense volumes of pungent smoke rose in his face. For a moment his eyes +smarted with agony, then a choking sensation seized him, his blood +seemed to rush into his head, and his veins to be bursting: and there +was a confused din in his ears and a last throb of pain, and then he +was insensible. + +"That's enough for the present," Nunez said; "cut him down." + +The men advanced to do so, but paused, with astonishment, for from +behind the great fire was a loud yell--"Yah, yah, yah!"--each louder +than the last, and then, leaping through the flames appeared, as they +supposed, the devil. Sam's appearance was indeed amply sufficient to +strike horror in the minds of a band of intensely superstitious men. +He had entirely stripped himself, with the exception of his sandals, +which he had retained in order to be able to run freely; on his head +were two great horns; in one hand he held a fork, and in the other +what appeared to be his tail, but which really belonged to the +slaughtered bullock. From his month, his horns, and the end of his +tail poured volumes of fire, arising, it needs not to say, from the +squibs he had prepared. The great white circles round the eyes added +to the ghastliness of his appearance, and seeing the terrible figure +leap apparently from the flames, it is no wonder that a scream of +terror rose from the guerillas. Whatever a Spanish peasant may believe +about saints and angels, he believes yet more implicitly in a devil. +Black, with horns, and a tail--and here he was--with these appendages +tipped with fire! Those who were able turned and fled in terror, those +who were too frightened to run fell on their knees and screamed for +mercy, while one or two fell insensible from fear. Taking the squibs +from his mouth, and giving one more startling yell, to quicken the +fugitives, Sam made two strides to where Peter was hanging, cut the +rope, and lowered him down. + +Nunez had at first joined in the flight, but looking over his shoulder +he saw what Sam was doing. His rage and frenzy, at the thought of +being cheated of his victim, even by the evil one himself, overcame +his fear, and he rushed back, shouting, "He is mine! He is mine! I +won't give him to you!" and fired a pistol almost in Sam's face. The +ball carried away a portion of one of Sam's ears, and with a yell, +even more thrilling than those he had given before, he plunged his +pitchfork into the body of the guerilla, then, exerting all his +immense strength, he lifted him upon it, as if he had been a truss of +straw, took three steps to the great bonfire and cast the brigand into +it. + +There was a volume of sparks, a tumbling together of big logs, and the +most cruel of the Spanish guerillas had ceased to exist. + +This awful sight completed the discomfiture of the guerillas--some +hearing their chief's shouts and the sound o his pistol had looked +round, but the sight of the gigantic fiend casting him into the fire +was too much for them. With cries of horror and fear they continued +their flight; a few of them, who had fallen on their knees, gained +strength enough, from fear, to rise and fly; the rest lay on their +faces. Sam saw that for the present all was clear, and lifting up +Peter's still insensible body, as if it had no weight whatever, he +turned and went at a brisk trot out of the village, then over the +crest and down towards the fire. + +Then he heard a ring of metal in front of him, and a voice said, "_Qui +vive_!" while another voice said, "Is that you, Sam?" + +"Bress de Lord! Massa Tom, dis is me sure enough: and what is much +better, here is Massa Peter." + +"Thank God!" Tom said fervently. "Is he hurt? Why don't you speak, +Peter?" + +"He all right, Massa Tom. He talk in a minute or two. Now smoke choke +him, he better presently. Here, massa, you take him down to fire, pour +a little brandy down his throat. Now, massa officer, I lead de way +back to village." + +As Tom took Peter in his arms a sudden fire of musketry was heard down +on the road. + +"Our fellows have got them," Jules said. "I don't know what has +alarmed them, but they are running away!" + +"Push forward," General Reynier said, "and give no quarter! Jules, +keep by the negro, and see that he comes to no harm. The men might +mistake him for a guerilla." + +The night was pitch dark, and the extraordinary appearance of Sam +could not be perceived until after scouring the village and shooting +the few wretches whom they found there, they gathered round the +fire. Before reaching it, however, Sam had slipped away for a moment +into the hut where he had stripped; here he quickly dressed himself, +removed the paint from his face, and rejoined the group, who were not +a little surprised at seeing his black face. + +In a short time the parties who had been posted on all the various +roads came in, and it was found that they had between them killed +some thirty or forty of the brigands, and had brought in two or three +prisoners. + +"Have you killed or taken Nunez?" General Reynier asked. "Our work is +only half done if that scoundrel has escaped." + +"I have asked the prisoners," one of the officers said, "and they tell +an extraordinary story, that the devil has just thrown him into the +fire!" + +"What do they mean by such folly as that," the general asked angrily. +"Were they making fun of you?" + +"No, sir, they were certainly serious enough over it, and they were +all running for their lives when they fell into our hands; they had +been horribly frightened at something." + +"Ask that fellow there," the general said, pointing to a prisoner who +had been brought in by another detachment, "he cannot have spoken to +the others." + +The man was brought forward, and then Jules asked him in Spanish: +"What were you all running away for?" + +The man gave a glance of horror at the fire. "The devil came with his +pitchfork, fire came out of his mouth, his tail and his horns were +tipped with sparks, the captain fired at him, of course the bullet did +no good, and the devil put his fork into him, carried him to the fire, +and threw him in." + +Jules and some of the other young officers burst out laughing, but the +general said:-- + +"Humph! We can easily prove a portion of the story. See if there are +any human remains in that fire." + +The wind was blowing the other way, but as a sergeant went up to the +fire in obedience to the general's order, he said:-- + +"There is a great smell of burnt flesh here, and, sapristi, yes," as +he tossed over the logs with his foot "there is a body here, sir, +pretty well burnt up." + +"It's a curious story," the general said. "Where is that negro, +perhaps he can enlighten us?" + +But Sam had already left to look after Peter. + +"Jules, put these fellows against that wall and give them a volley, +then march the men down to the wood where their horses are. We will +bivouac here for the night." + +A party now brought up Peter, who had quite come round, but was unable +to stand, or indeed to move his arms, so injured was he by the ropes, +which had completely cut their way into his flesh. However, he was +cheerful and bright, and able really to enjoy the supper which was +soon prepared. That done, General Reynier said:-- + +"Captain Scudamore, will you call your black man when he has finished +his supper, which, no doubt, he needs? I want him to tell me what took +place before we arrived. The prisoners were full of some cock-and-bull +story, that the devil had stuck his fork into their captain and +pitched him into the fire, and the story is corroborated, at least to +the extent of the fact that, on turning the fire over, we found a body +there." + +Sam, called and questioned, told the whole story, which Tom translated +as he went on to the French officers, and it was received with a +chorus of laughter at the thought of the oddity of Sam's appearance, +and of the brigands' terror, and with warm admiration for the able +stratagem and courage shown by the black. + +Tom was delighted, and Peter, who had until now been entirely ignorant +of the manner in which he had been saved, feebly pressed Sam's hand +and said a few words of gratitude and thanks, which so delighted Sam +that he retired to cry quietly. + +The next day they moved down to Vittoria, where Peter was tenderly +nursed by Madame Reynier. A week later he was fit to sit on horseback, +and the next day, after a hearty and affectionate parting, they +started to rejoin their own army. Both were now dressed as Spanish +gentlemen, and Jules, with four troopers accompanied them as an +escort. + +They made a long detour to avoid the French army in the field under +Clausel, and at last came within sight of the British outposts. Here +Jules and his escort halted, and after a warm embrace with the merry +young Frenchman, they rode forward, and, after the usual parleying +with the pickets, were passed forward to the officer commanding the +post. He happened to be well known to them, and after the first +surprise, and a few words of explanation, they rode on towards the +head-quarters of the army besieging Burgos. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +VITTORIA. + + +General Clausel fell back as Wellington advanced to Burgos, and the +British laid siege to the castle of that place. Like all Wellington's +sieges this was commenced with a wholly insufficient train of +artillery, and without the time necessary to carry out regular siege +operations. A considerable portion of the army were posted so as to +watch Clausel. The place was badly fortified, but the French under +Governor Dubreton defended themselves with immense skill and courage, +the English assaults were repulsed, successful sorties were made by +the garrison, and at last, after the failure of the fourth assault, +the siege was given up, and the allied armies turned their faces once +more towards Portugal. + +It was time; the operations in the south upon which Wellington had +relied to keep at least a portion of the French forces engaged, had +failed signally, and the French generals were bringing up their +troops from all parts of Spain, and General Souham, having under him +Generals Clausel, Maucune, and Foy, with a force far superior to +that of the British, advanced to give battle. Then Wellington, whose +Anglo-Portuguese troops were much weakened by sickness, fell back +rapidly, sending orders to General Hill, who commanded the troops left +behind in Madrid, to evacuate that city, and to fall back and unite +with him on the Tormes. + +It was only by some masterly maneuvering and some stiff fighting at +Venta de Pozo, on the Carrion, and on the Huebra, that Wellington drew +off his army to Ciudad Rodrigo. + +During the retreat the British suffered very severely, and the +discipline of the army became greatly impaired, so much so that Lord +Wellington issued a general order rebuking the army, saying that +"discipline had deteriorated during the campaign in a greater degree +than he had ever witnessed or read of in any army, and this without +any unusual privation or hardship, or any long marches." + +The number of stragglers may be imagined by the fact that the loss of +the allied army was upwards of nine thousand, of whom not more than +two thousand were killed and wounded at Burgos, and in the combats +during the retreat. This number includes the Spanish as well as the +Anglo-Portuguese loss. + +It was the beginning of December when the allied army reached their +winter quarters around Ciudad Rodrigo. It was fortunate that the +season of the year, and the necessity which the French had to refill +their magazines, and collect food, gave breathing time and rest to +the British. Although strengthened by his junction with Hill, and by +the arrival of reinforcements from the coast, Wellington was not in a +position to have made a stand against such a force as the French could +have brought against him. + +Tom and Peter Scudamore had rejoined the army at the hottest part +of the siege of Burgos, and had taken up their work at once. Lord +Wellington heard from Tom a brief account of what had taken place, +and said a few kind words expressive of his pleasure at their both +having escaped from so great a peril, and, grave and preoccupied as +he was with the position of his army, he yet laughed at the account +of the scare Sam had given the guerillas. Among their friends nothing +was talked of for a day or two but their adventure. The times were +stirring, however, and one event rapidly drove out another. Sam +became a greater favorite than ever among the officers of the staff, +while the orderlies were never tired of hearing how he pretty nearly +frightened a band of guerillas to death by pretending to be the evil +one in person. + +The next four months were passed in preparations for the grand attack +with which Wellington confidently hoped to drive the French out of +Spain. The news of the defeat of Napoleon in Russia had cheered the +hearts of the enemies of France, and excited them to make a great +effort to strike a decisive blow. The French army was weakened by the +withdrawal of several corps to strengthen the armies which Napoleon +was raising for his campaign in Germany, and British gold had been so +freely spent, that the Portuguese army was now in a really efficient +state; a portion of the Spanish army had been handed over to +Wellington, and were now in a far more trustworthy condition than +they had been heretofore, while the whole of the north of Spain was +in a state of insurrection, which the French, in spite of all their +efforts, were unable to repress. + +The invasion was delayed until the end of May, in order that the crops +might be in a fit state for the subsistence of the cavalry and baggage +animals; but in the last week in that month all was ready, and, in +several columns, the allied army poured into Spain nearly a hundred +thousand strong. The French, ignorant alike of Wellington's intentions +and preparations, were in no position to stem effectually this mighty +wave of war, and were driven headlong before it, with many fierce +skirmishes, until their scattered forces were, for the most part, +united on the Ebro. + +Here Joseph occupied a strong position, which he thought to hold until +the whole of his troops could come up; but Wellington made a detour, +swept round his right, and the French fell back in haste, and took +up their position in the basin of Vittoria, where all the stores and +baggage which had been carried off as the army retreated from Madrid, +Valladolid, Burgos, and other towns, were collected. At Vittoria were +gathered the Court, and an enormous mass of fugitives, as all the +Spaniards who had adhered to the cause of Joseph had, with their +wives and families, accompanied the French in their retreat. Hence +the accumulation of baggage animals, and carts, of stores of all +descriptions, of magazines, of food and artillery, of helpless, +frightened people, was enormous, and, for the retreat of the army in +case of defeat, there was but one good road, already encumbered with +baggage and fugitives! + +This terrible accumulation arose partly from the fault of Joseph, who +was wholly unequal to the supreme command in an emergency like the +present. Confused and bewildered by the urgency of the danger, he had +hesitated, wavered, and lost precious time. By resistance at any of +the rivers, which Wellington had passed unopposed, he might easily +have gained a few days, and thus have allowed time for the great mass +of fugitives to reach the French frontier, and for Foy and Clausel, +each of whom were within a day's march upon the day of the battle, to +have arrived with a reinforcement of 20,000 good fighting men. Instead +of this, he had suffered himself to be outflanked day after day, and +his army forced into retreat, without an effort at resistance--a +course of action irritating and disheartening to all troops, but +especially to the French, who, admirable in attack, are easily +dispirited, and are ill suited to defensive warfare. + +The position which he had now chosen for the battle, on which his +kingdom was to be staked, was badly selected for the action. The front +was, indeed, covered by the river Zadora, but this was crossed by +seven available bridges, none of which had been broken down, while +there was but the one good line of retreat, and this, besides being +already encumbered with baggage-wagons, could be easily turned by the +allies. The French army, weakened by 5000 men, who had marched upon +the preceding days, in charge of convoys for France, were still about +70,000 strong, the allies--British, Portuguese, and Spanish--about +80,000. The French were the strongest in artillery. + +Wellington, seeing that Joseph had determined to stand at bay, made +his arrangements for the battle. On the left, Graham, with 20,000 men, +was to attempt to cross the Zadora at Gamara Mayor, when he would +find himself on the main road, behind Vittoria, and so cut the French +line of retreat. Hill, with a like force, was to attack on the right, +through the defile of Puebla, and so, entering the basin of Vittoria, +to threaten the French right, and obtain possession of the bridge of +Nanclares. In the center, Wellington himself, with 30,000 troops, +would force the four bridges in front of the French center, and attack +their main position. + +At daybreak on the 21st of June, 1813, the weather being rainy with +some mist, the troops moved from their quarters on the Bayas, passed +in columns over the bridges in front, and slowly approached the +Zadora. About ten o'clock, Hill seized the village of Puebla, and +commenced the passage of the defile, while one of the Portuguese +battalions scaled the heights above. Here the French met them, and a +fierce fight ensued; the French were reinforced on their side, while +the 71st Regiment and a battalion of light infantry joined the +Portuguese. + +Villette's division was sent from the French center to join the fray, +while Hill sent up reinforcements. While the fight on the heights +still raged, the troops in the defile made their way through, and, +driving the French back, won the village of Subijano de Alava, in +front of the French main position. + +Meanwhile, far to the left, Graham came into action with Reille's +division at Gamara Mayor. The French here, knowing the vital +importance of the position, fought desperately, and the village of +Gamara was taken and retaken several times, but no effort upon the +part of the allies sufficed to carry either the bridge at this place +or that by which the main road crossed the river higher up. A force, +however, was pushed still farther to the left, and there took up a +position on the road at Durana, drove back a Franco-Spanish force +which occupied it, and thus effectively cut the main line of retreat +to France for Joseph's army. The main force under Wellington himself +was later in coming into action, the various columns being delayed by +the difficulties of making their way through the defiles. + +While waiting, however, for the third and seventh divisions, which +were the last to arrive, a peasant informed Wellington that the bridge +of Tres Puentes was unbroken and unguarded. Kempt's brigade of the +light division were immediately ordered to cross, and, being concealed +by the inequalities of the ground, they reached it and passed over +unobserved, taking their place under shelter of a crest within a few +hundred yards of the French main line of battle, and actually in rear +of his advanced posts. + +Some French cavalry now advanced, but no attack was made upon this +isolated body of British troops, for the French were virtually without +a commander. + +Joseph, finding his flank menaced by the movements of Graham and Hill, +now ordered the army to fall back to a crest two miles in the rear, +but at this moment the third and seventh divisions advanced at a run +towards the bridge of Mendoza, the French artillery opened upon them, +the British guns replied, a heavy musketry fire broke out on both +sides, and the battle commenced in earnest. Now the advantage gained +by the passage of Kempt's brigade became manifest, for the riflemen +of his division advanced and took the French advanced cavalry and +artillery in flank. These, thus unexpectedly attacked, fell back +hastily, and a brigade of the third division took advantage of the +moment and crossed the bridge of Mendoza. The other brigade forded the +river a little higher up, the seventh division and Vandeleur's brigade +of the light division followed, Hill pushed the enemy farther back, +and the fourth division crossed by the bridge of Nanclares; other +troops forded the river, and the battle became general all along the +line. + +Seeing that the hill in front of Arinez was nearly denuded of troops +by the withdrawal of Villette's division earlier in the day to oppose +Hill, Wellington launched Picton with the third division and Kempt's +brigade against it, and the French, thus attacked with great strength +and fury, and dispirited by the order to retreat, began to fall back. +Fifty pieces of artillery and a cloud of skirmishers covered the +movement, and the British guns answering, the whole basin became +filled with a heavy smoke, under cover of which the French retired +to the heights in front of Gomecha, upon which their reserves were +posted. Picton and Kempt carried the village of Arinez with the +bayonet, Vandeleur captured the village of Margarita, and the 87th +Regiment won that of Hermandad. + +This advance turned the flank of the French troops near Subijana de +Alava, and of those on the Puebla mountain, and both fell back in +disorder for two miles, until they made a junction with the main body +of their army. Still the British troops pressed forward, the French +again fell back, and for six miles a running fight of musketry and +artillery was kept up, the ground being very broken, and preventing +the concerted action of large bodies of troops. At six o'clock in the +afternoon the French stood at bay on the last heights before Vittoria, +upon which stood the villages of Ali and Armentia. Behind them was +the plain upon which the city stood, and beyond the city thousands +of carriages, animals, and non-combatants, women, and children, were +crowded together in the extremity of terror as the British shots rang +menacingly over their heads. + +The French here defended themselves desperately, and for a while the +allied advance was checked by the terrible fire of shot and shell. +Then the fourth division with a rush carried a hill on the left, and +the French again commenced their retreat. Joseph, finding the great +road absolutely blocked up, gave orders for a retreat by the road to +Salvatierra, and the army, leaving the town of Vittoria on its left, +moved off in a compact mass towards the indicated road. This, however, +like the other, was choked with carriages. It led through a swamp, +and had deep ditches on each side; the artillery, therefore, had to +cut their traces and leave their guns behind them, the infantry and +cavalry thrust aside the encumbrances and continued their march. +Reille, who had defended the upper bridges nobly until the last +moment, now came up, and his division acting as a rear guard, covered +the retreat, and the French retired with little further loss. + +They had lost the battle solely and entirely from the utter incapacity +of their general, for their loss had been but little greater than +that of the allies, and they fell back in perfect order and full of +fighting. The French loss, including prisoners, was not more than +6000, and that of the allies exceeded 5000. The French loss, however, +in material was enormous. They carried off two guns only, and 143 +fell into the hands of the British. They lost all their parks of +ammunition, all their baggage, all their stores, all their treasures, +all their booty. Last of all, they lost Spain. + +The British pursued the French army for some days, and then invested +the two fortresses of San Sebastian and Pampeluna. + +Ten days after the battle of Vittoria, Napoleon despatched Soult, one +of the best of his generals, to displace Joseph and assume the supreme +command of the French troops. Traveling with great speed, he reached +the frontier upon the 11th of July and took command. He soon collected +together the divisions which had retired beaten but not routed from +Vittoria, drew together the troops from Bayonne and the surrounding +towns, and in a few days found himself at the head of an army, +including the garrisons, of 114,000 men. Besides these there were the +armies of Aragon and Catalonia, numbering 60,000 men. + +After spending a few days in organizing the army, Soult moved forward +to relieve Pampeluna, and then in the heart of the Pyrenees were +fought those desperate combats at Maya, Roncevalles, Buenza, Sauroren, +and Dona Maria, which are known in history as the battles of the +Pyrenees. In these terrible nine days' fighting there were ten serious +combats, in which the allies lost 7300 men, the French, including +prisoners, over 15,000, and Soult fell back baffled and beaten across +the frontier. + +Throughout this account of the short and sanguinary campaign by which +in two short months Wellington shattered the power of the French and +drove them headlong from the Peninsula, but little has been said +respecting the doings of the Scudamores. Their duties had been heavy, +but devoid of any personal achievements or events. Wellington, the +incarnation of activity himself, spared no one around him, and from +early dawn until late at night they were on horseback, carrying orders +and bringing back reports. At night their quarters were sometimes +in a village hut, sometimes in a straggling château, which afforded +accommodation to the commander-in-chief and his whole staff. + +Sam, a good horseman now, was in the highest of spirits at being able +to accompany his masters, and, although the Spanish women crossed +themselves in horror when they first saw his black face, the boys +would hear shouts of laughter arising before they had been a quarter +of an hour in fresh quarters. He was a capital cook, and a wonderful +hand at hunting up provisions. + +There might not be a sign of a feathered creature in a village when +the staff came in, but in half an hour Sam would be sure to return +from foraging with a couple of fowls and his handkerchief full of +eggs. These were, of course, paid for, as the orders against pillaging +were of the strictest character, and the army paid, and paid +handsomely for everything it ate. + +It was, however, difficult to persuade the peasants that payment was +intended, and they would hide everything away with vigilant care at +the approach of the troops. When by the display of money they were +really persuaded that payment was intended, they would produce all +that they had willingly enough, but the number of officers wanting +to purchase was so great and the amount of live stock so small in +the war-ravaged country, that few indeed could obtain even for money +anything beside the tough rations of freshly-killed beef issued by the +commissariat. + +Let the supply be ever so short, however, Sam never returned +empty-handed, and the fowls were quickly plucked and on the fire +before any one else had succeeded in discovering that there was a bird +in the village. + +Sam's foraging powers passed into a joke with the staff, and the +Scudamores became so curious to discover the reason of his success, +that after repeated questioning they persuaded him to tell them. + +"Well, massa, de matter berry simple--just easy as fallin' off log. +Sam go along, look into yard ob de cottages, presently see feather +here, feather there. Dat sign ob fowl. Den knock at door. Woman open +always, gib little squeak when she see dis gentleman's colored face. +Den she say, 'What you want? Dis house full. Quarter-master take him +up for three, four officer.' Den Sam say, 'Illustrious madam, me want +to buy two fowls and eggs for master,' and Sam show money in hand. Den +she hesitate a little, and not believe Sam mean to pay. Den she say, +'No fowls here.' Den Sam point to de feathers. Den she get in rage and +tell lie and say, 'Dem birds all stole yesterday.' Den Sam see it time +to talk to de birds--he know dem shut up somewhere in de dark, and Sam +he begin to crow berry loud; Sam berry good at dat. He crow for all +de world like de cock. Dis wake dem up, and a minute one, two, three, +half a dozen cock begin to answer eider from a loft ober house, or +from shed, or from somewhere. Den de woman in terrible fright, she +say, 'Me sell you two quick, if you will go away and swear you tell no +one.' Den Sam swear. Den she run away, come back wid de fowls and some +eggs, and always berry much astonished when Sam pay for dem. After dat +she lose her fear, she see me pay, and she sells de chickens to oders +when they come till all gone. Dat how dis chile manage de affairs, +Massa Tom." + +The Scudamores had a hearty laugh, and were well pleased to find that +Sam's method was one to which not even the strictest disciplinarian +could object, a matter concerning which they had previously had grave +doubts. + +While the battles of the Pyrenees were being fought, the siege of +St. Sebastian had continued, and once again the British troops had +suffered a terrible loss, from the attempt to carry a fortress with +an insufficient siege-train, and without the time necessary to drive +the trenches forward in regular form. St. Sebastian stood upon a +peninsula. In front of the neck of this peninsula was the hill of San +Bartholomeo, on which stood the convent of that name. At the narrowest +part of the neck stood a redoubt, which was called the Cask Redoubt, +because it was constructed of casks filled with stand. Behind this +came the horn-work and other fortifications. Then came the town, while +at the end of the peninsula rose a steep rock, called Mount Orgullo, +on which stood the citadel. Upon its left side this neck of land was +separated from the mainland by the River Urumea; and upon the heights +of Mount Olia and the Chofres, across the Urumea, were placed the +British batteries, which breached the fortifications facing the river. + +General Graham commanded the allied forces, which were detached to +undertake the siege, and on the 10th of July batteries were commenced +against the convent of San Bartholomeo, which had been fortified by +the French. On the 17th the convent was in ruins, and an assault was +made upon the position. The 9th Regiment took the place in gallant +style, but an attempt being made to carry the cask redoubt, with a +rush, the assault was repulsed, the British remaining possessors of +San Bartholomeo. + +On the 24th the batteries on Mount Olia, having effected what was +believed to be a practicable breach, 2000 men of the fifth division, +consisting of the 3d battalion of the Royals, the 38th, and the 9th, +made an assault at night. To arrive at the breach they had to make +their way along the slippery rocks on the bed of the Urumea, exposed +to a flank-fire from the river-wall of the town. The breachers had +been isolated from the town, and guns placed to take the stormers in +flank. The confusion and slaughter were terrible, and at daybreak the +survivors fell back, with a loss of forty-nine officers and 520 men. + +The whole arrangement of the siege was bad. The plan of Major Smith, +of the engineers, a most excellent officer, which had been approved +by Wellington, was not followed, and the assault, contrary to +Wellington's explicit order, took place at night, instead of by day, +the consequence being confusion, delay, and defeat. The total loss to +the allies of this first siege of St. Sebastian was 1300 men. + +Neither of the Scudamores were present at the first siege, but both +witnessed the second assault, of the 31st of August, as Wellington +himself was present on the 30th, to see to the execution of the +preparation for attack, and they obtained leave to remain for the next +day to witness the assault. The siege had been resumed on the 5th of +that month, and on the 23d the batteries had opened fire in earnest, +and immense damage was done to the defenses and garrison. But upon +this occasion, as upon the former one, the proper precautions were not +taken; no lodgment had been effected in the horn-work, and, worst of +all, the blockade had been so negligently conducted by the fleet, that +large bodies of fresh troops, guns, and ammunition had been passed +in, and the defense was even stronger than it had been when the first +assault was delivered. + +General Graham took up his position on the heights of the Chofres to +view the assault, and the Scudamores stationed themselves near him. +A dense mist hid the fortress from view, and it was not until eight +o'clock that the batteries were able to open. Then for three hours +they poured a storm of shot and shell upon the defences. The +Scudamores sat down in one of the trenches, where they were a little +sheltered from the blazing heat of the sun, and Sam took his place at +a short distance from them. + +As the clock struck eleven the fire slackened, and at that moment Sam +exclaimed, "Grolly, Massa Tom, dere dey go." As he spoke Robinson's +brigade poured out from the trenches, and, passing through the +openings in the sea-wall, began to form on the beach. + +It was known that the French had mined the angle of the wall +overhanging the beach, and a sergeant, followed by twelve men, dashed +gallantly forward to try to cut the train leading to the mine. He was +unsuccessful, but the suddenness of the rush startled the French, who +at once fired the mine, which exploded, destroying the brave sergeant +and his party, and thirty of the leading men of the column, but not +doing a tithe of the damage which it would have inflicted had the +column been fairly under it. + +"Hurrah! dere dey go," Sam exclaimed as the column clambered over +the ruins and pursued its way unchecked along the beach. They had, +however, to make their way under a storm of fire. + +The French, as before, lined the wall, and poured a tremendous +musketry fire into their flank, and the batteries of Mount Orgullo and +St. Elmo plied them with shot and shell, while two pieces of cannon on +the cavalier and one on the horn-work raked them with grape. + +Still the column neither halted nor faltered, but dashed, like a wave, +up the breach. When, however, they reached the top they could go no +farther. A deep gulf separated them from the town, while from every +loop-hole and wall behind, the French musketry swept the breach. The +troops could not advance and would not retreat, but sullenly stood +their ground, heaping the breach with their dead. Fresh bodies of men +came up, and each time a crowd of brave men mounted the breach, only +to sink down beneath the storm of fire. + +"This is awful, horrible, Tom!" Peter said in a choked voice. "Come +away, I can't look at this slaughter, it is a thousand times worse +than any battle." + +Tom made no reply, his own eyes were dim with tears, and he rose to +go, taking one more look at the deadly breach, at whose foot the +survivors of the last attempt had sunk down, and whence the mass of +soldiers were keeping up a musketry fire against the guns and unseen +foes who were sweeping them away, when an officer ran up from General +Graham's side, and in a minute fifty guns from the Chofres batteries +opened a storm of fire upon the curtain and the traverses behind the +breach. + +It was a terrible trial to the nerves of the assaulting columns when +this terrific fire was poured upon a spot only twenty feet above them; +but they were not men to shrink, and the men of the light division +seized the opportunity to pull up the broken masonry and make a +breastwork, known in military terms as a lodgment. + +For half an hour the iron storm poured overhead unchecked, smashing +the traverse, knocking down the loop-holed walls, and killing numbers +of the defenders. Then it ceased, and the troops leapt to their feet, +and again rushed up the breach, while the 13th Portuguese Regiment, +followed by a detachment of the 24th, waded across the Urumea under a +heavy fire from the castle, and attacked the third breach. + +But still no entry could be effected. The French fire was as heavy as +ever, and the stormers again sank baffled to the foot of the great +breach. The assault seemed hopeless, the tide was rising, the reserves +were all engaged, and the men had done all that the most desperate +courage could do. For five hours the battle had raged, when, just as +all appeared lost, one of those circumstances occurred which upset all +calculations and decide the fate of battles. + +Behind the traverses the French had accumulated a great store of +powder barrels, shells, and other combustibles. Just at this moment +these caught fire. A bright flame wrapped the whole wall, followed by +a succession of loud explosions; hundreds of French grenadiers were +destroyed, and before the smoke had cleared away, the British burst +like a flood through the first traverse. + +Although bewildered by this sudden disaster, the French rallied, and +fought desperately; but the British, desperate with the long agony +of the last five hours, would not be denied; the light division +penetrated on the left, the Portuguese on the right. The French, still +resisting obstinately, were driven through the town to the line of +defense at the foot of Mount Orgullo, and the town of St. Sebastian +was won. + +"Will you go across, Peter, and enter the town?" + +"No, no, Tom; the sight of that horrible breach is enough for me. +Let us mount, and ride off at once. I am quite sick after this awful +suspense." + +It was as well that the Scudamores did not enter the town, as, had +they done so, they might have shared the fate of several other +officers, who were shot down while trying to stop the troops in their +wild excesses. No more disgraceful atrocities were ever committed by +the most barbarous nations of antiquity than those which disgraced the +British name at the storming of St. Sebastian. Shameful, monstrous as +had been the conduct of the troops at the storming of Ciudad Rodrigo +and at Badajos, it was infinitely worse at St. Sebastian. As Rapin +says, hell seemed to have broken loose. + +The castle held out until the 9th, when it surrendered, and the +governor and his heroic garrison marched out with the honors of war. +The British loss in the second siege exceeded 2500 men and officers. + +There was a pause of two months after the fall of St. Sebastian, +and it was not until the 10th of November that Wellington hurled +his forces against the lines which, in imitation of those of Torres +Vedras, Soult had formed and fortified on the river Nivelle to +withstand the invasion of France. After a few hours' desperate +fighting the French were turned out of their position with a loss of +killed, wounded, and prisoners, of 4265 men and officers, the loss of +the allies being 2694. + +Now the army of invasion poured into France. The French people, +disheartened by Napoleon's misfortunes in Germany, and by the long and +mighty sacrifices which they had for years been compelled to make, in +order to enable Napoleon to carry out his gigantic wars, showed but +slight hostility to the invaders. + +Wellington enforced the severest discipline, paid for everything +required for the troops, hanging marauders without mercy, and, finding +that it was impossible to keep the Spanish troops in order, he sent +the whole Spanish contingent, 20,000 strong, back across the Pyrenees. + +He then with the Anglo-Portuguese army moved on towards Bayonne, and +took up a position on both sides of the river Nive, driving the French +from their position on the right bank on December 9th. On the 13th, +however, Soult attacked that portion of the army on the right of the +river, and one of the most desperate conflicts of the war took place, +known as the battle of St. Pierre. General Hill commanded at this +battle, and with 14,000 Anglo-Portuguese, with 14 guns, repulsed the +furious and repeated attacks of 16,000 French, with 22 guns. + +In five days' fighting on the river the French lost more than as many +thousand men. + +The weather now for a time interrupted operations, but Wellington was +preparing for the passage of the Adour. Soult guarded the passages +of the river above Bayonne, and never dreamed that an attempt would +be made to bridge so wide and rough a river as is the Adour below +the town. With the assistance of the sailors of the fleet the great +enterprise was accomplished on the 13th of February, and leaving +General Hope to contain the force in the entrenched camp at Bayonne, +Wellington marched the rest of the army to the Gave. + +Behind this river Soult had massed his army. The British crossed by +pontoon bridges, and before the operation was concluded, and the +troops united, Soult fell upon them near Orthes. + +At first the French had the best of the fight, driving back both +wings of the allied forces, but Wellington threw the third and sixth +divisions upon the left flank of the attacking column and sent the +52nd Regiment to make a detour through a marsh and fall upon their +other flank. Taken suddenly between two fires the French wavered, +the British pressed forward again, and the French fell back fighting +obstinately, and in good order. The allies lost 2300 men, and the +French 4000. Soult fell back towards Toulouse, laying Bordeaux open to +the British. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +TOULOUSE. + + +Promotion for those who have the good fortune to have a post upon the +commander-in-chief's staff is rapid. They run far less risk than do +the regimental officers, and they have a tenfold better chance of +having their names mentioned in despatches. The Scudamores were so +mentioned for their conduct at Vittoria, the Pyrenees, and Orthes, +and shortly after the last-named battle the _Gazette_ from England +announced their promotion to majorities. This put an end to +their service as aides-de-camp, and they were attached to the +quarter-master's branch of the staff of Lord Beresford, who was upon +the point of starting with a small force to Bordeaux, where the +authorities, thinking more of party than of patriotism, had invited +the English to enter and take possession, intending to proclaim their +adhesion to the Bourbon dynasty. + +The boys were sorry at the exchange, as they feared that they should +lose the crowning battle of the campaign. It was evident that the +resistance of France was nearly at an end, the allies were approaching +Paris in spite of the almost superhuman efforts of Napoleon; the +people, sick of the war, refused all assistance to the military +authorities, and were longing for peace, and the end of the struggle +was rapidly approaching. + +Lord Beresford, however, divining their thoughts, assured them that +his stay at Bordeaux would be but short, and that they might rely +upon being present at the great battle which would probably be fought +somewhere near Toulouse, towards which town Soult had retreated after +the battle of Orthes. + +Upon the 8th of March, Beresford marched with 12,000 men for Bordeaux, +and meeting with no opposition by the way, entered that city on the +12th. The mayor, a royalist, came out to meet them, and by the upper +classes of the town they were received as friends rather than foes. +Handsome quarters were assigned to Lord Beresford and his staff, and +the Scudamores for a day or two enjoyed the luxury of comfortable +apartments and of good food after their hard fare for nine months. + +The day after they entered Bordeaux Tom had occasion to call at +the office of a banker in order to get a government draft cashed, +to pay for a number of wagons which had been purchased for the +quarter-master's department. The banker's name was Weale, an American, +said to be the richest man in Bordeaux. His fortune had been made, it +was said, by large government contracts. + +When Tom returned, Peter was surprised to see him looking pale and +excited. + +"What is the matter, Tom?" + +"Do you know, Peter, I am convinced that that American banker I have +been to see to-day is neither more nor less than that scoundrel, +Walsh, who bolted with all the bank funds, and was the cause of our +father's death." + +"You don't say so, Tom." + +"It is a fact, Peter, I could swear to him." + +"What shall we do, Tom?" + +"I only cashed one of the two drafts I had with me this morning; +Peter, you go this afternoon with the other, and, if you are as +certain as I feel about it, we will speak to Beresford at dinner." + +Peter returned in the afternoon satisfied that his brother's surmises +were correct, and that in the supposed American Weale they had really +discovered the English swindler Walsh. + +After dinner they asked Lord Beresford to speak to them for a few +minutes alone. + +The general was greatly surprised and interested at their +communication. + +"Of how much did this fellow rob your father's bank?" he asked. + +"The total defalcation, including money borrowed on title-deeds +deposited in the bank, which had to be made good, was, I heard, from +75,000_l._ to 80,000_l._," Tom said. + +"Very well," said Lord Beresford, "we will make the scoundrel pay up +with interest. Order out thirty men of the 13th." + +While the men were mustering, the general returned to the dining-room +and begged the officers who were dining with him to excuse him for +half an hour, as he had some unexpected business to perform. Then he +walked across with the Scudamores to the banker's house, which was +only in the next street. + +Twenty of the men were then ordered to form a cordon round the house +and to watch the various entrances. The other ten, together with the +officer in command, the general told to follow him into the house. The +arrangements completed, he rang at the bell, and the porter at once +opened the gate. + +He started and would have tried to shut it again, on seeing the armed +party. But Lord Beresford said, "I am the general commanding the +British troops here. Make no noise, but show me directly to your +master." + +The man hesitated, but seeing that the force was too great to be +resisted, led the way through the courtyard into the house itself. + +Some servants in the hall started up with amazement, and would have +run off, but Lord Beresford cried, "Stay quiet for your lives. No one +will be hurt; but if any one moves from the hall, he will be shot." +Then, followed by Tom and Peter only, he opened the door which the +porter pointed out to him as that of the room where the banker was +sitting. + +He was alone, and started to his feet upon beholding three British +officers enter unannounced. "What means this?" he demanded angrily. +"I am a citizen of the United States, and for any outrage upon me +satisfaction will be demanded by my Government." + +"I am Lord Beresford," the general said quietly, "and quite know what +I am doing. I do not quite agree with you that the Government of the +United States will make any demand for satisfaction for any outrage +upon your person, nor, if they do so, will it benefit you greatly; +for I am about, in five minutes' time, to order you to be shot, Mr. +Walsh." + +As the name was uttered the banker, who had listened with increasing +pallor to the stern words of the general, started violently, and +turned ghastly white. For a minute or so he was too surprised and +confounded to speak. Then he said, in a husky tone, "It is false; I am +an American citizen. I know nothing whatever about James Walsh." + +"James Walsh!" the general said; "I said nothing about James. It is +you who have told us his Christian name, which is, I have no doubt, +the correct one." + +He looked to Tom, who nodded assent. + +"I know nothing about any Walsh," the banker said doggedly. "Who says +I do?" + +"We do, James Walsh," Tom said, stepping forward. "Tom and Peter +Scudamore, the sons of the man you robbed and ruined." + +The banker stared at them wildly, and then, with a hoarse cry, dropped +into his chair. + +"James Walsh," the general said sternly, "your life is doubly forfeit. +As a thief and a swindler, the courts of law will punish you with +death;" for in those days death was the penalty of a crime of this +kind. "In the second place, as a traitor. As a man who has given aid +and assistance to the enemies of your country, your life is forfeit, +and I, as the general in command here, doom you to death. In five +minutes you will be shot in your courtyard as a thief and a traitor." + +"Spare me!" the wretched man said, slipping off his chair on to his +knees. "Spare my life, and take all that I have. I am rich, and can +restore much of that which I took. I will pay 50,000_l._" + +"Fifty thousand pounds!" the general said; "you stole 80,000_l._, +which, with interest, comes up to 100,000_l._, besides which you must +pay for acting as a traitor. The military chest is empty, and we want +money. I will value your wretched life at 25,000_l._ If you make that +sum a present to our military chest, and pay Major Scudamore the +100,000_l._ of which you swindled his father, I will spare you." + +"One hundred and twenty-five thousand pounds!" the banker said +fiercely. "Never, I will die first." + +"Very well," Lord Beresford said quietly. "Major Scudamore, please +call in the officer and four men." Tom did as requested, and Lord +Beresford then addressed the officer. "You will take this man, who is +an Englishman, who has been acting as a traitor, and giving assistance +to the French army, you will take a firing party, place him against +the wall of the yard, give him five minutes to make his peace with +God, and when the five minutes are up, unless he tells you before that +that he wishes to see me, shoot him." + +Pale and desperate, the banker was led out. + +"He will give way, I hope," Tom said, as the door closed behind him. + +"He will give way before the time is up," Lord Beresford said. "He is +a coward; I saw it in his face." + +Four minutes passed on, the door opened again, and the officer +returned with his prisoner. "He says he agrees to your terms, sir" + +"Very well" Lord Beresford answered; "remain outside with your men; +they may be wanted yet." + +The prisoner, without a word, led the way into an adjoining room, +which communicated with the public office. This was his private +parlor, and in a corner stood a safe. He unlocked it, and, taking out +some books and papers, sat down to the table. + +His mood had evidently changed. "I was a fool to hold out," he said, +"for I had my name for wealth against me, and might have known you +would not give way. After all, I do not know that I am altogether +sorry, for I have always had an idea that some day or other the thing +would come out, and now I can go back and be comfortable for the rest +of my life. How will you have the money, gentlemen? I have 50,000_l._ +in cash, and can give you a draft on the Bank of England for the rest. +You look surprised, but I have always been prepared to cut and run +from this country at the shortest notice, and every penny I have +beyond the cash absolutely required is in England or America." + +"I will take 25,000_l._ in cash for the use of the army," Lord +Beresford said. "I will send an officer of the commissariat to-morrow +for it. The 100,000_l._ you may pay these gentlemen in drafts on +England. Until I hear that these drafts are honored, I shall keep you +under surveillance, and you will not be suffered to leave your house." + +"It will be all right," Walsh said. "There--is my Bank of England +pass-book; you will see that I have 120,000_l._ standing to the credit +of J. Weale there. I have as much in America. I should not tell you +this did I not know that you are a gentleman, and therefore will not +raise terms now that you see I can pay higher. There, Mr. Scudamore, +is the draft, and, believe me or not, I am glad to repay it, and to +feel, for the first time for many years, a free man. Please to give +me a receipt for the 80,000_l._ due by me to the Bank, and for +20,000_l._, five years' interest on the same." + +Tom did as he was desired without speaking. There was a tone of +effrontery mingled with the half-earnestness of this successful +swindler that disgusted him. + +"There," the general said, as the receipts were handed over; "come +along, lads, the business is over, and I do not think that we have any +more to say to Mr. Weale." + +So saying, without further word, the three went out. + +Upon rejoining the officer without, Lord Beresford directed that a +sergeant and ten men were to be quartered in the house, and that a +sentry was to be placed at each entrance night and day, and that the +banker was not to be permitted to stir out under any pretence whatever +until further orders. + +"There, lads, I congratulate you heartily," he said as they issued +from the gate, in answer to the warm thanks in which the boys +expressed their gratitude to him; "it is a stroke of luck indeed that +you came with me to Bordeaux. It was rough-and-ready justice, and I +don't suppose a court of law in England would approve of it; but we +are under martial law, so even were that fellow disposed to question +the matter, which you may be very sure he will not, we are safe +enough. They say 'ill-gotten gains fly fast' but the scamp has +prospered on the money he stole. He owned to having another hundred +thousand safe in the States, and no doubt he has at least as much more +in securities of one sort or other here. I daresay he was in earnest +when he said that he did not mind paying the money to get rid of the +chance of detection and punishment, which must have been ever in his +mind. The best thing you can do, Scudamore, is to write to James +Pearson--he's my solicitor in London--and give him authority to +present this draft, and invest the sum in your joint names in good +securities. Inclose the draft. I shall be sending off an orderly with +despatches and letters at daybreak, and if you give me your letter +to-night, I will inclose it in a note of my own to Pearson." + +Five days later an order arrived for Lord Beresford to leave the +seventh division under Lord Dalhousie, in Bordeaux, and to march with +the fourth division to join the Commander-in-Chief, who was gradually +drawing near to Toulouse, beneath whose walls Soult was reorganizing +his army. The position was a very strong one, and had been rendered +almost impregnable by fortifications thrown upon the heights. +Wellington had, too, the disadvantage of having to separate his army, +as the town lay upon both sides of the Garonne. + +On the 10th of April the allied army attacked. Hill attacked the +defences of the town on the left bank, while Freyre's Spaniards, +Picton, with the third and light divisions, and Beresford with the +fourth and the sixth divisions, assaulted a French position. The +entrenchments in front of Picton were too strong to be more than +menaced. Freyre's Spaniards were repulsed with great loss, and the +brunt of the battle fell upon Beresford's division, which nobly +sustained the character of the British soldier for stubborn valor +in this the last battle of the war. The French fought stubbornly +and well, but fort by fort the British drove them from their strong +positions, and at five in the afternoon Soult withdrew the last of his +troops in good order across the canal which separated the position +they had defended from the town itself. The French lost five generals +and 3000 killed and wounded; the allies four generals and 4659 killed +and wounded, of which 2000 were Spaniards, for they upon this occasion +fought bravely, though unsuccessfully. + +On the 11th all was quiet, Wellington preparing for an attack upon the +city on the following day. Soult, however, finding that the British +cavalry had been sent off so as to menace his line of retreat, +evacuated the city in the night, drew off his army with great order +and ability, and by a march of twenty-two miles placed it in safety. +Upon the morning of the 12th Wellington entered Toulouse, and the +same afternoon two officers, one British, the other French, arrived +together from Paris, with the news of the abdication of Napoleon, and +the termination of the war. + +These officers had been detained for two days at Blois by the +officials there, and this delay had cost the blood of 8000 men, among +whom was Tom Scudamore, who had his left arm carried away by a cannon +ball. Sam, in the act of carrying his master from the field, was also +severely wounded in the head with a musket ball. + +Before the battle was fought they had received news from England that +the draft had been paid at the Bank of England, and that their future +was in consequence secure. The war being over, officers unattached to +regiments had little difficulty in getting leave of absence, as the +troops were to be embarked for England as soon as possible. Peter's +application, therefore, to accompany his brother was acceded to +without hesitation, and ten days after the battle of Toulouse he was +on board ship with Tom and Sam, both of whom were doing well. Three +days afterwards they landed in England. + +Rhoda met them, with Miss Scudamore, at Portsmith, having received a +letter telling them of Tom's wound, and of their being upon the point +of sailing. There was a great reduction of the army at the end of the +war, and the Scudamores were both placed upon half pay. This was a +matter of delight to Rhoda, and of satisfaction to themselves. They +had had enough of adventure to last for a life-time; and with the +prospect of a long peace the army no longer offered them any strong +attraction. + +When they returned to Miss Scudamore's their old friend Dr. Jarvis +came to visit them, and a happier party could not have been found in +England. The will of Mr. Scudamore, made before he was aware of his +ruin, was now acted upon. He had left 20,000_l._ to Rhoda, and the +rest of his fortune in equal parts between his boys. Both Tom and +Peter were fond of a country life, and they bought two adjoining +estates near Oxford, Rhoda agreeing to stop with them and Miss +Scudamore alternately. + +For a brief time there was a break in their happiness, Napoleon +escaped from Elba, and Europe was in a flame again. All the officers +on half pay were ordered to present themselves for duty, and the +Scudamores crossed with the army to Belgium, and fought at Waterloo. +Neither were hurt, nor was Sam, who had of course accompanied them. +Waterloo gave them another step in rank, and the Scudamores returned +as colonels to England. + +It was their last war. A few years afterwards they married sisters, +and Rhoda having the year previous married a gentleman whose estate +was in the same county, they remained as united as ever. Sambo held +for many a year the important position of butler to Tom, then he found +that one of the housemaids did not regard his color as any insuperable +obstacle, and they were accordingly married. It was difficult to say +after this exactly the position which Sam held. He lived at a cottage +on the edge of the estate, where it joined that of Peter, and his time +was spent in generally looking after things at both houses, and as +years went on his great delight was, above all things, to relate to +numerous young Scudamores the adventures of their father and uncle +when he first knew them as the Young Buglers. + +THE END. + + + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS *** + +***** This file should be named 9613-8.txt or 9613-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/9/6/1/9613/ + +Produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis, and +PG Distributed Proofreaders + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/9613-8.zip b/9613-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..74df004 --- /dev/null +++ b/9613-8.zip diff --git a/9613-h.zip b/9613-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..75e3742 --- /dev/null +++ b/9613-h.zip diff --git a/9613-h/9613-h.htm b/9613-h/9613-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..461532c --- /dev/null +++ b/9613-h/9613-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,12651 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="iso-8859-1"?> + +<!DOCTYPE html + PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd" > + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> + <head> + <meta content="pg2html (binary v0.17)" name="linkgenerator" /> + <title> + The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty + </title> + <style type="text/css" xml:space="preserve"> + body { margin:5%; background:#faebd0; text-align:justify} + P { text-indent: 1em; margin-top: .75em; margin-bottom: .75em; } + H1,H2,H3,H4,H5,H6 { text-align: center; margin-left: 15%; margin-right: 15%; } + hr { width: 50%; text-align: center;} + .foot { margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 5%; text-align: justify; font-size: 80%; font-style: italic;} + blockquote {font-size: 97%; font-style: italic; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} + .mynote {background-color: #DDE; color: #000; padding: .5em; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 95%;} + .toc { margin-left: 10%; margin-bottom: .75em;} + .toc2 { margin-left: 20%;} + .xx-small {font-size: 60%;} + .x-small {font-size: 75%;} + .small {font-size: 85%;} + .large {font-size: 115%;} + .x-large {font-size: 130%;} + .indent5 { margin-left: 5%;} + .indent10 { margin-left: 10%;} + .indent15 { margin-left: 15%;} + .indent20 { margin-left: 20%;} + .indent25 { margin-left: 25%;} + .indent30 { margin-left: 30%;} + .indent35 { margin-left: 35%;} + .indent40 { margin-left: 40%;} + div.fig { display:block; margin:0 auto; text-align:center; } + div.middle { margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; text-align: justify; } + .figleft {float: left; margin-left: 0%; margin-right: 1%;} + .figright {float: right; margin-right: 0%; margin-left: 1%;} + .pagenum {position: absolute; right: 1%; font-size: 0.6em; + font-variant: normal; font-style: normal; + text-align: right; background-color: #FFFACD; + border: 1px solid; padding: 0.3em;text-indent: 0em;} + .side { float: left; font-size: 75%; width: 15%; padding-left: 0.8em; + border-left: dashed thin; text-align: left; + text-indent: 0; font-weight: bold; font-style: italic; + font-weight: bold; color: black; background: #eeeeee; border: solid 1px;} + .head { float: left; font-size: 90%; width: 98%; padding-left: 0.8em; + border-left: dashed thin; text-align: center; + text-indent: 0; font-weight: bold; font-style: italic; + font-weight: bold; color: black; background: #eeeeee; border: solid 1px;} + p.pfirst, p.noindent {text-indent: 0} + span.dropcap { float: left; margin: 0 0.1em 0 0; line-height: 0.8 } + pre { font-style: italic; font-size: 90%; margin-left: 10%;} +</style> + </head> + <body> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Young Buglers + +Author: G.A. Henty + +Release Date: January, 2006 [EBook #9613] +First Posted: October 10, 2003 +Last Updated: April 12, 2019 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS *** + + + + +Etext produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis, and +PG Distributed Proofreaders + +HTML file produced by David Widger + + + + + + + +</pre> + <div style="height: 8em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h1> + THE YOUNG BUGLERS + </h1> + <p> + <br /> + </p> + <h2> + By G.A. Henty + </h2> + <p> + <br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <br /> + </p> + <p> + <b>CONTENTS</b> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2H_PREF"> PREFACE </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2H_4_0002"> <b>THE YOUNG BUGLERS</b> </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0001"> CHAPTER I. — A COACHING ADVENTURE. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0002"> CHAPTER II. — TWO YOUNG PICKLES. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0003"> CHAPTER III. — ENLISTED. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0004"> CHAPTER IV. — A TOUGH CUSTOMER. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0005"> CHAPTER V. — OVERBOARD. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0006"> CHAPTER VI. — PORTUGAL. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0007"> CHAPTER VII. — THE PASSAGE OF THE DUORO—TALAVERA. + </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0008"> CHAPTER VIII. — A PAUSE IN OPERATIONS. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0009"> CHAPTER IX. — WITH THE GUERILLAS. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0010"> CHAPTER X. — MADRID. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0011"> CHAPTER XI. — THE FIGHT ON THE COA. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0012"> CHAPTER XII. — BUSACO AND TORRES VEDRAS. + </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0013"> CHAPTER XIII. — ALBUERA. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0014"> CHAPTER XIV. — INVALIDED HOME. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0015"> CHAPTER XV. — CIUDAD RODRIGO AND BADAJOS. + </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0016"> CHAPTER XVI. — SALAMANCA. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0017"> CHAPTER XVII. — CAUGHT IN A TRAP. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0018"> CHAPTER XVIII. — JUST IN TIME. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0019"> CHAPTER XIX. — VITTORIA. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0020"> CHAPTER XX. — TOULOUSE. </a> + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2H_PREF" id="link2H_PREF"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + PREFACE + </h2> + <p> + To my Young Readers. + </p> + <p> + I remember that, as a boy, I regarded any attempt to mix instruction with + amusement as being as objectionable a practice as the administration of + powder in jam; but I think that this feeling arose from the fact that in + those days books contained a very small share of amusement and a very + large share of instruction. I have endeavored to avoid this, and I hope + that the accounts of battles and sieges, illustrated as they are by maps, + will be found as interesting as the lighter parts of the story. As in my + tale, "<i>The Young Franc-Tireurs</i>," I gave the outline of the + Franco-German war, so I have now endeavored to give the salient features + of the great Peninsular struggle. The military facts, with the names of + generals and regiments, the dates and places, are all strictly accurate, + and any one who has read with care the story of "The Young Buglers" could + pass an examination as to the leading events of the Peninsular war. + </p> + <p> + Yours truly, + </p> + <p> + THE AUTHOR. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2H_4_0002" id="link2H_4_0002"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h1> + THE YOUNG BUGLERS + </h1> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0001" id="link2HCH0001"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER I. — A COACHING ADVENTURE. + </h2> + <p> + Had any of the boys in the lower forms of Eton in the year 1808, been + asked who were the most popular boys of their own age, they would have + been almost sure to have answered, without the slightest hesitation, Tom + and Peter Scudamore, and yet it is probable that no two boys were more + often in disgrace. It was not that they were idle, upon the contrary, both + were fairly up in their respective forms, but they were constantly getting + into mischief of one sort or another; yet even with the masters they were + favorites, there was never anything low, disgraceful, or ungentlemanly in + their escapades, and they could be trusted never to attempt to screen + themselves from the consequences by prevarication, much less by lying. If + the masters heard that a party of youngsters had been seen far out of + bounds, they were pretty sure that the Scudamores were among them; a + farmer came in from a distance to complain that his favorite tree had been + stripped of its apples—for in those days apples were looked upon by + boys as fair objects of sport,—if the head-master's favorite white + poodle appeared dyed a deep blue, if Mr. Jones, the most unpopular master + in the school, upon coming out of his door trod upon a quantity of tallow + smeared all over the doorstep, and was laid up for a week in consequence, + there was generally a strong suspicion that Tom and Peter Scudamore were + concerned in the matter. One of their tricks actually came to the ears of + the Provost himself, and caused quite a sensation in the place, but in + this case, fortunately for them, they escaped undetected. + </p> + <p> + One fine summer afternoon they were out on the water with two or three + other boys of their own age, when a barge was seen ahead at some short + distance from the shore. She was apparently floating down with the stream, + and the fact that a horse was proceeding along the towing-path a little + way ahead was not noticed, as the rope was slack and was trailing under + water. The boys, therefore, as they were rowing against stream, steered + their boat to pass inside of her. Just as they came abreast of the horse a + man on the barge suddenly shouted to the rider of the horse to go on. He + did so, the rope tightened, rose from the water just under the bow of the + boat, and in another minute the boys were struggling in the water. All + were good swimmers, and would have cared little for the ducking had it + occurred accidentally, but the roars of laughter of the bargeman, and the + chaff with which he assailed them as they scrambled up the bank, showed + clearly enough that they had been upset maliciously. The boys were + furious, and one or two proposed that they should report the case, but Tom + Scudamore pointed out that the bargeman would of course declare that it + was a pure accident, and that the boys were themselves in fault in not + looking out whether the barge was being towed, before going inside her, + and so nothing would come of reporting. + </p> + <p> + The boat was dragged ashore and emptied, and in a few minutes they were + rowing back towards the town. The distance was but short, and they did not + repass the barge before they reached their boat-house. The brothers had + exchanged a few words in a low voice on the way, and instead of following + the example of the others, and starting at a run for the house where they + boarded to change their clothes, they walked down by the river and saw + that the barge had moored up against the bank, at a short distance below + the bridge. They watched for a time, and saw the bargeman fasten up the + hatch of the little cabin and go ashore. + </p> + <p> + That night two boys lowered themselves with a rope from the window of one + of the dames-houses, and walked rapidly down to the river. There were a + few flickering oil lamps burning, and the one or two old watchmen were + soundly asleep in their boxes. They did not meet a soul moving upon their + way to the object of the expedition, the barge that had run them down. + Very quietly they slipped on board, satisfied themselves by listening at + the half-open hatch to the snoring within that their enemy was there, then + loosened the moorings so that they could be thrown off at a moment's + notice. + </p> + <p> + "Now, Peter," the elder brother said, "open our lantern. The night is + quite still. You hold your hand behind it, so that the light will not fall + on our faces, and I will look whether he is only wrapped up in a blanket + or has a regular bed; we must not risk setting the place on fire. Get the + crackers ready." + </p> + <p> + A dark lantern was now taken out from under Tom's jacket, and was found to + be still alight, an important matter, for striking a light with flint and + steel was in those days a long and tedious business, and then opening it + Tom threw the light into the cabin. It was a tiny place, and upon a bench, + wrapped up in a blanket, the bargeman was lying. As the light fell on his + eyes, he moved, and a moment afterwards started up with an oath, and + demanded who was there. + </p> + <p> + No answer came in words, but half a dozen lighted crackers were thrown + into the cabin, when they began to explode with a tremendous uproar. In an + instant the hatch was shut down and fastened outside. The rope was cast + off, and in another minute she was floating down stream with the crackers + still exploding inside her, but with their noise almost deadened by the + tremendous outcry of shouts and howls, and by a continued and furious + banging at the hatch. + </p> + <p> + "There is no fear of his being choked, Tom, I hope?" + </p> + <p> + "No, I expect he's all right," Tom said, "it will be pretty stifling for a + bit no doubt, but there's a chimney hole and the smoke will find its way + out presently. The barge will drift down to the weir before it brings up, + there is not enough stream out for there to be any risk of her upsetting, + else we daren't have turned her adrift." + </p> + <p> + The next day the whole town was talking of the affair, and in the + afternoon the bargeman went up to the head-master and accused one of the + boys of an attempt to murder him. + </p> + <p> + Greatly surprised, the Provost demanded what reason the man had for + suspecting the boys, and the bargeman acknowledged that he had that + afternoon upset a boat with four or five boys in her. "They would not bear + you malice on that account," the Provost said; "they don't think much of a + swim such weather as this, unless indeed you did it on purpose." + </p> + <p> + The man hesitated in his answer, and the Provost continued, "You evidently + did do it on purpose, and in that case, although it was carried too far, + for I hear you had a very narrow escape of being stifled, still you + brought it upon yourself, and I hope it will be a lesson to you not to + risk the lives of Eton boys for your amusement. I know nothing about this + affair, but if you can point out the boys you suspect I will of course + inquire into it." + </p> + <p> + The bargeman departed, grumbling that he did not know one of the young + imps from another, but if he did find them, he'd wring their necks for + them to a certainty. The Provost had some inquiries made as to the boys + who had been upset, and whether they had all been in at lock-up time; + finding that they had all answered to their names, he made no further + investigation. + </p> + <p> + This affair had taken place in the summer before this story begins, on the + 15th of October, 1808. On that day a holiday was granted in consequence of + the head-master's birthday, and the boys set off, some to football, some + for long walks in the country. + </p> + <p> + The Scudamores, with several of their friends, strolled down the + towing-path for some miles, and walked back by the road. As they entered + their dames-house on their return, Tom Scudamore said for the twentieth + time, "Well, I would give anything to be a soldier, instead of having to + go in and settle down as a banker—it's disgusting!" + </p> + <p> + As they entered a boy came up. "Oh, Scudamore, Jackson's been asking for + you both. It's something particular, for he has been out three or four + times, and he wanted to send after you, but no one knew where you had + gone." + </p> + <p> + The boys at once went into the master's study, where they remained all the + afternoon. A short time after they went in, Mr. Jackson came out and said + a word or two to one of the senior boys, and the word was quickly passed + round, that there was to be no row, for the Scudamores had just heard of + the sudden death of their father. That evening, Mr. Jackson had beds made + up for them in his study, so that they might not have the pain of having + to talk with the other boys. The housekeeper packed up their things, and + next morning early they started by the coach for London. + </p> + <p> + Mr. Scudamore, the father of the young Etonians, was a banker. He was the + elder of two brothers, and had inherited his father's business, while his + brother had gone into the army. The banker had married the daughter of a + landowner in the neighborhood, and had lived happily and prosperously + until her death, seven years before this story begins. She had borne him + three children, the two boys, now fifteen and fourteen years old + respectively, and a girl, Rhoda, two years younger than Peter. The loss of + his wife afflicted him greatly, and he received another shock five years + later by the death of his brother, Colonel Scudamore, to whom he was much + attached. From the time of his wife's death he had greatly relaxed in his + attention to his business, and after his brother's death he left the + management almost entirely in the hands of his cashier, in whom he had + unlimited confidence. This confidence was wholly misplaced. For years the + cashier had been carrying on speculation upon his own account with the + monies of the bank. Gradually and without exciting the least suspicion he + had realized the various securities held by the bank, and at last + gathering all the available cash he, one Saturday afternoon, locked up the + bank and fled. + </p> + <p> + On Monday it was found that he was missing; Mr. Scudamore went down to the + bank, and had the books taken into his parlor for examination. Some hours + afterwards a clerk went in and found his master lying back in his chair + insensible. A doctor on arriving pronounced it to be apoplexy. He never + rallied, and a few hours afterwards the news spread through the country + that Scudamore, the banker, was dead, and that the bank had stopped + payment. + </p> + <p> + People could believe the former item of news, but were incredulous as to + the latter. Scudamore's bank was looked upon in Lincolnshire as at least + as safe as the Bank of England itself. But the sad truth was soon clear to + all, and for awhile there was great distress of mind among the people, for + many miles round, for most of them had entrusted all their savings of + years to the Scudamores' bank. When affairs were wound up, however, it was + found that things were not quite so bad as had been feared. Mr. Scudamore + had a considerable capital employed in the bank, and the sale of his + handsome house and estate realized a large sum, so that eventually every + one received back the money they had entrusted to the bank; but the whole + of the capital and the profits of years of successful enterprise had + vanished, and it was calculated by the executors that the swindler must + have appropriated at least 80,000<i>l.</i> + </p> + <p> + For the first month after their father's death the boys stayed with the + doctor who had long attended the family and had treated all their ailments + since they were born. In the great loss of their father the loss of their + fortune affected them but little, except that they were sorry to be + obliged to leave Eton; for the interest of the little fortune which their + mother had brought at her marriage, and which was all that now remained to + them, would not have been sufficient to pay for their expenses there, and + indeed such an education would have been out of place for two boys who had + to make their own way in life. At the end of this month it was arranged + that they were to go to their only existing relative, an elder sister of + Mr. Scudamore. The boys had never seen her, for she had not for many years + been friends with her brother. + </p> + <p> + The letter which she had written to the doctor, announcing her willingness + to receive them, made the boys laugh, although it did not hold out + prospects of a very pleasant future. "I am, of course," she said, + "prepared to do my duty. No one can say that I have ever failed in my + duty. My poor brother quarreled with me. It was his duty to apologize. He + did not do so. Had it been my duty to apologize I should have done so. As + I was right, and he was wrong, it was clearly not my duty. I shall now do + my duty to my niece and nephews. Yet I may be allowed to say that I regret + much that they are not all nieces. I do not like boys. They are always + noisy, and not always clean. They do not wipe their shoes, they are always + breaking things, they go about with all sorts of rubbish and dirt in their + pockets, their hair is always rough, they are fond of worrying cats, and + other cruel games. Altogether they are objectionable. Had my brother made + up his mind to leave his children in my charge, it was clearly his duty to + have had girls instead of boys. However, it is not because other people + fail in their duty that I should fail in mine. Therefore, let them come to + me this day fortnight. By that time I shall have got some strong and + suitable furniture in the room that my nephews will occupy, and shall have + time to make other arrangements. This letter will, if all goes well, reach + you, I believe, in three days after the date of posting, and they will + take the same time coming here. Assure them that I am prepared to do my + duty, and that I hope that they will make a serious effort at doing + theirs. Ask my nephews, upon the occasion of their first arrival, to make + as little noise as they can, because my cat, Minnie, is very shy, and if + she is scared at the first meeting, she will take a very long time to get + accustomed to them. I also particularly beg that they do not, as they come + up to the house, throw stones at any of the pigeons who may be resting + upon the roof, for the slates were all set right a few weeks ago, and I am + sure I do not wish to have the slater here again; they were hanging about + for ten days the last time they came. I do not know that I have anything + else to say." + </p> + <p> + The boys received the reading of this singular epistle with shouts of + laughter. + </p> + <p> + "Poor aunt," Tom said. "What does she think of us that she can suppose + that, upon our very first arrival, we should come in like wild Indians, + throwing stones at her pigeons, and frightening her Minnie into fits. Did + you ever hear such an extraordinary idea, Doctor Jarvis?" + </p> + <p> + "At any rate, boys," the doctor said, when the laughter had ceased, "you + may find your aunt a little peculiar, but she is evidently determined to + do her duty to you, and you must do yours to her, and not play more pranks + than you can help. As to you, Rhoda, you will evidently be in high favor, + and as you are fortunately a quiet little lady, you will, I have no doubt, + get on with her very well." + </p> + <p> + "I hope so," Rhoda said, smiling, "you see she means to be kind, though + she does write funny letters, and, at any rate, there are Minnie and the + pigeons; it sounds nice, you know. Do you know what aunt's place is like, + Dr. Jarvis, and how to get there from here." + </p> + <p> + "No, my dear, I never was in that part of England. It is close to + Marlborough that she lives, a very pretty country, I believe. There is, of + course, no way to go across from here. You must go up to London by coach + from here, and then to Marlborough by the western coach. I will write to + my brother James in town, where you stopped at night as you came through, + boys, and I know that he will take you all in for the night, and see that + you go off right in the morning." + </p> + <p> + "You're very kind, indeed, Doctor Jarvis. I do not know how to thank you + for all you have done for us," Tom said earnestly, and the others + cordially echoed the sentiment. + </p> + <p> + The day before starting the doctor had a long talk with the boys. He + pointed out to them that their future now depended upon themselves alone. + They must expect to find many unpleasantnesses in their way, but they must + take their little trials pleasantly, and make the best of everything. "I + have no fear as to Rhoda," their kind friend said. "She has that happy, + amiable, and quiet disposition that is sure to adapt itself to all + circumstances. I have no doubt she will become a favorite with your aunt. + Try to keep out of scrapes, boys. You know you are rather fond of + mischief, and your aunt will not be able to understand it. If you get into + any serious difficulty write to me, you can rely upon always finding a + friend in me." + </p> + <p> + The journey to London was no novelty to the boys, but Rhoda enjoyed it + immensely. Her place had been taken inside, but most of the journey she + rode outside with her brothers. She was greatly amazed at the bustle and + noise of London, and was quite confused at the shouting and crowd at the + place where the coach drew up, for two or three other coaches had just + arrived from other directions. Mr. Jarvis had sent his man-servant to meet + them, their luggage was sent direct to the booking-office from which the + coach started for Marlborough, and the servant carried a small bag + containing their night things. It was evening when they got in, and Rhoda + could scarcely keep her eyes open long enough to have tea, for the coach + had been two days and nights upon the road. The next day they stayed in + town, and Mrs. Jarvis took them out to see the sights of London—the + Tower and St. Paul's, and Westminster Abbey, and the beasts at Exeter + Change. The boys had twice before spent a whole day in London, their + father having, upon two occasions, made his visits to town to fit in with + their going up to school, but to Rhoda it was all new, and very, very + wonderful. + </p> + <p> + The next day the coach started early for Marlborough. It was to take + rather over twenty-four hours on the way. As before, Rhoda rode outside + with her brothers until the evening, but then, instead of going inside, + where there were five passengers already, she said, as the night was so + fine and warm, she would rather remain with them. They were sitting behind + the coachman, there were two male passengers upon the same seat with them, + and another in the box seat by the coachman. The conversation turned, as + in those days it was pretty sure to turn, upon highwaymen. Several coaches + had been lately stopped by three highwaymen, who worked together, and were + reported to be more reckless than the generality of their sort. They had + shot a coachman who refused to stop, the week before on Hounslow Heath, + they had killed a guard on the great north road, and they had shot two + passengers who resisted, near Exeter. + </p> + <p> + Tom and Peter were greatly amused by observing that the passenger who sat + next to them, and who, at the commencement of the conversation, showed a + brace of heavy pistols with which he was provided, with much boasting as + to what he should do if the coach were attacked, when he heard of the fate + of the passengers who had resisted, became very quiet indeed, and + presently took an opportunity, when he thought that he was not observed, + of slipping his pistols under the tarpaulin behind him. + </p> + <p> + "I hope those dreadful men won't stop our coach," Rhoda said. + </p> + <p> + "They won't hurt you if they do, Rhoda," Tom said assuringly. "I think it + would be rather a lark. I say, Peter," he went on in a whisper, "I think + we might astonish them with those pistols that coward next to you has hid + behind him." + </p> + <p> + "I should just think so," Peter said; "the bargee at Eton would be nothing + to it." + </p> + <p> + The hours went slowly on. Rhoda and the boys dozed uncomfortably against + each other and the baggage behind them, until they were suddenly roused by + a shout in the road beside them: "Stand for your lives!" + </p> + <p> + The moon was up, and they could see that there were three horsemen. One + galloped to the horses' heads, and seized the rein of one of the leaders, + the others rode by the coach. + </p> + <p> + The first answer to the challenge was a discharge from the blunderbuss of + the guard, which brought one of the highwaymen from his horse. + </p> + <p> + The other, riding up to the side of the coach, fired at the guard, and a + loud cry told that the shot had taken effect. In another moment the fellow + was by the side of the coachman. + </p> + <p> + "Hold up!" he said, "or I will blow your brains out!" + </p> + <p> + The coachman did as he was ordered, and indeed the man at the leader's + head had almost succeeded in stopping them. The passenger next to the boys + had, at the first challenge, again seized his pistols, and the boys + thought that he was going to fire after all. + </p> + <p> + "Lie down at our feet, Rhoda, quick!" Tom said, "and don't move till I + tell you." The fate of the guard evidently frightened away the short-lived + courage of the passenger, for, as the coachman again pulled up, he hastily + thrust the pistols in behind him. + </p> + <p> + "Get down, every one of you," the highwayman shouted. + </p> + <p> + "Lie still, Rhoda," Tom whispered. "Now, Peter, get in underneath the + tarpaulin." + </p> + <p> + This was done as the passengers descended. The luggage was not so heavily + piled as usual, and the boys found plenty of room beneath the tarpaulin. + </p> + <p> + "Now, Peter, you take one of these pistols and give me the other. Now peep + out. The moon is hidden, which is a good thing; now, look here, you shall + shoot that fellow standing down below, who is swearing at the ladies + inside for not getting out quicker. I'll take a shot at that fellow + standing in front of the horse's heads." + </p> + <p> + "Do you think you can hit him, Tom?" + </p> + <p> + "I have not the least idea, but I can try; and if you hit the other one, + the chances are he'll bolt, whether I hit him or not. Open the tarpaulin + at the side so as to see well, and rest the pistol upon something. You + must take a good shot, Peter, for if you miss him we shall be in a mess." + </p> + <p> + "All right," Peter said, in a whisper, "I can almost touch him with the + pistol." + </p> + <p> + In loud and brutal tones the highwayman now began to order the frightened + ladies to give up their watches and rings, enforcing his commands with + terrible curses. When suddenly a pistol flashed out just behind him, and + he fell off his horse with a ball through his shoulder. + </p> + <p> + Tom's shot, though equally well intended, was not so truly aimed. The + highwayman had dismounted, and was standing just in front of the leaders, + so that Tom had a fair view of him between them. The boys had both + occasionally fired their father's pistols, for, in those days, each + householder in the country always kept loaded pistols in his room, but his + skill was not sufficient to make sure of a man at that distance. The + bullet flew past at two feet to the left of his head. But its effect was + scarcely less startling than if it had actually hit him, for, in its + passage, it passed through the ear of the off leader. The horse made a + start at the sudden pain, and then dashed forward. The rest of the team, + already alarmed by the shot, followed her lead; before the startled + highwayman could get out of the way they were upon him, in another instant + he was under their heels, and the coach gave a sudden lurch as it passed + over his body. + </p> + <p> + "Lie still, Rhoda, a little longer; it's all right, but the horses have + run away," Tom exclaimed, as he scrambled forward, and caught hold of the + reins, which the coachman had tied to the rail of the seat as he got down. + "Catch hold of the reins, Peter, and help me pull." + </p> + <p> + Peter did so; but the united strength of the boys was wholly unequal to + arresting the headlong flight of the horses. + </p> + <p> + Fortunately the highwaymen had chosen a low bottom between two hills, to + arrest the coach, consequently the road was up a hill of moderate + steepness. The boys hoped that the horses would stop when they got to the + top; but they went on with redoubled speed. + </p> + <p> + "This is something like going it," Peter said. + </p> + <p> + "Isn't it, Peter? They know their way, and we ain't lively to meet + anything in the road. They will stop at their stable. At any rate, it's no + use trying to steer them. Here, Rhoda dear, get up; are you very much + frightened?" + </p> + <p> + Rhoda still lay quite still, and Peter, holding on with difficulty, for + the coach quite rocked with the speed at which they were going, climbed + over to her, and stooped, down. "Shall I help you up, Rhoda?" + </p> + <p> + "No, please, I would rather stop here till it's all over." + </p> + <p> + Fortunately the hill, up to the Tillage where they made the change, was a + steep one, and the horses broke into a trot before they reached the top, + and, in another minute drew up at the door of the inn. The astonishment of + the ostlers at seeing the horses covered with lather, and coachbox + tenanted only by two boys, behind whom a little white face now peered out, + was extreme, and they were unable to get beyond an ejaculation of hallo! + expressive of a depth of incredulous astonishment impossible to be + rendered by words. + </p> + <p> + "Look here," Tom said, with all the composure, and much of the impudence, + which then, as now, characterized the young Etonian, "don't be staring + like a pack of stuck pigs. You had better get the fresh horses in, and + drive back to the bottom, about four miles from here. There has been + regular row with some fellows, and I expect two or three are killed. Now, + just put up the ladder; I want to get my sister down." + </p> + <p> + Almost mechanically the men put the ladder up to the coach, and the boys + and Rhoda got down. + </p> + <p> + "Do you say the coach has been attacked by highwaymen in Burnet bottom?" + </p> + <p> + "I don't know anything about Burnet bottom," Tom said. "It was a bottom + about four miles off. There were three of them. The guard shot one of + them, and the others shot the guard. Then we were stopped by them, and + every one had to get down. Then the horses ran away, and here we are." + </p> + <p> + "Then there are two of those highwayman chaps with the passengers," one of + the men said. + </p> + <p> + "You need not be afraid of them," Tom said carelessly; "one got shot, and + I don't know about the other, but the wheel of the coach went over him, so + I do not suppose he will be much trouble. Now, if I were you, I should not + stand staring any more, but should make haste and take the coach back." + </p> + <p> + "Hullo, look at this grey," one of the men exclaimed, as, at last + understanding what had taken place, they began to bustle about to change + horses. "He's got blood all over the side of his head. One of those + scoundrels has shot him through the ear." + </p> + <p> + Tom burst out laughing. "I am the scoundrel!" he said. "Peter, that + explains why we went off so suddenly. I missed the fellow, and hit the + leader in the ear. However, it comes to the same thing. By the way, we may + as well take the pistols." + </p> + <p> + So saying, he ran up the ladder and brought down the pistols. By this time + the fresh horses were in. + </p> + <p> + "I can't make nought of it," one of the ostlers said, climbing up into the + coachman's seat. "Jump up, Bill and Harry. It's the rummiest go I ever + heard of in coaching." + </p> + <p> + "Landlady, can you get us some tea at once, please," Tom said, going up to + the landlady, who was looking on from the door of the house with an + astonishment equal to that of the men at the whole affair; "as quickly as + you can, for my sister looks regularly done up with fatigue, and then, + please let her lie down till the coach is ready to start again. It will be + three quarters of an hour before it is back, and then, I daresay, there + will be a lot of talking before they go on. I should think they will be + wanting breakfast. At any rate, an hour's rest will do you good, Rhoda." + </p> + <p> + Rhoda was too worn out with the over-excitement even to answer. + Fortunately there was hot water in order to make hot grog for the + outriders of the coach, some tea was quickly made, and in ten minutes + Rhoda was fast asleep on the landlady's bed. + </p> + <p> + Tom and Peter expressed their desire for something substantial in the way + of eating, for the morning had now fairly broken. The landlady brought in + some cold meat, upon which the boys made a vigorous attack, and then, + taking possession of two benches, they dozed off until the coach arrived. + </p> + <p> + It had but three horses, for one had been sent off to carry Bill, the + ostler, at full speed to the town at which they had last changed horses, + to fetch a doctor and the constable. The other two men had remained with + the guard, who was shot in the hip, and the highwayman, whose collar-bone + was broken by Peter's shot. The fellow shot by the guard, and the other + one, whom the coach wheels had passed over, were both dead. + </p> + <p> + "There's the coach, Tom." + </p> + <p> + "What a nuisance, Peter, they'll all be wanting to talk now, and I am just + so comfortably off. Well, I suppose it's no use trying to get any more + sleep." + </p> + <p> + So saying, they roused themselves, and went out to the door just as the + coach drew up. + </p> + <p> + There was a general shout of greeting from the passengers, which was + stopped, however, by a peremptory order from the coachman. + </p> + <p> + He was a large, stout man, with a face red from the effects of wind and + exposure. "Jack," he said, to a man who was standing near, for the news of + the attack upon the coach had quickly spread, and all the villagers were + astir to see it come in. "Jack, hold the leader's head. Thomas, open the + door, and let the insides out. Gents," he said solemnly, when this was + done, "I'm going to do what isn't a usual thing by no means, in fact, I + ain't no precedence for doing it; but then, I do not know any precedence + for this here business altogether. I never did hear of a coachman standing + up on his box to give a cheer, no, not to King George himself; but, then, + King George never polished off two highwaymen all to himself, leastway, + not as I've heard tell of. Now, these two young gents have done this. They + have saved my coach and my passengers from getting robbed, and so I'm + going to give 'em three cheers. I'll trouble you to help me up into the + box seat, gentlemen." + </p> + <p> + Assisted by the other passengers, the driver now gravely climbed up into + the box seat, steadied himself there by placing one hand upon the shoulder + of the passenger next him, took off his low-crowned hat, and said. "Follow + me, gents, with three cheers for those young gents standing there; better + plucked ones I never came across, and I've traveled a good many miles in + my day." + </p> + <p> + So saying, he gave three stentorian cheers, which were echoed by all the + passengers and villagers. + </p> + <p> + Then there was a momentary silence, and Tom, who, with his brother, had + been feeling very uncomfortable, although rather inclined to laugh, seeing + that he was expected to say something, said, "Thank you all very much; but + we'd much rather you hadn't done it." + </p> + <p> + Then there was a general laugh and movement, and a general pressing + forward of the passengers to shake the boys by the hand. The driver was + assisted down from his elevated position, and got off the coach and came + up to them. "That's the first speech I ever made, young gentlemen, and, if + I know myself, it will be the last; but, you see, I was druv to it. You're + a good sort, that's certain. What will you drink?" + </p> + <p> + The boys declared for beer, and drank solemnly with the driver, imitating + him in finishing their mugs at a draught, and turning them topsy-turvy. + There was now a great deal of talking, and many questions were asked. Tom + and Peter modestly said that there was really nothing to tell. They saw + that the gentleman next to them intended to use his pistols; but, not + seeing a good opportunity, put them down behind the tarpaulin, and the + thought occurred to them that, by slipping behind it, they would get a + good chance of a certain shot. Accordingly, they had fired, and then the + horse had run away; and there was an end of it. There was nothing + extraordinary in the whole matter. + </p> + <p> + "At any rate, my boys, you have saved me from a loss of a couple of + hundred pounds which I had got hid in my boots, but which those fellows + would have been sure to have have discovered," one of the passengers said. + </p> + <p> + There was a general chorus of satisfaction at many watches and trinkets + saved, and then the first passenger went on,— + </p> + <p> + "I propose, gentlemen and ladies, that when we get to the end of our + journey we make a subscription, according to the amount we have saved, and + that we get each of these young gentlemen a brace of the very best pistols + that can be bought. If they go on as they have begun, they will find them + useful." + </p> + <p> + There was a general exclamation of approval, and one of the ladies, who + had been an inside passenger, said, "And I think we ought to give a + handsome ring to their sister as a memorial through life. Of course, she + had not so much to do as her brothers, but she had the courage to keep + still, and she had to run the risk, both of being shot, and of being upset + by the coach just as they did." + </p> + <p> + This also was unanimously approved, and, after doing full justice to the + breakfast set before them, the party again took their places. Rhoda being + carried down asleep, by the landlady, and placed in the coach, one of the + inside passengers getting out to make room for her, and she was laid, + curled up, on the seat, with her head in a lady's lap, and slept quietly, + until, to her astonishment, she was woke up, and told that she was in + Marlborough. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0002" id="link2HCH0002"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER II. — TWO YOUNG PICKLES. + </h2> + <p> + An old-fashioned open carriage, drawn by a stiff, old-fashioned horse, and + driven by a stiff, old-fashioned man, was in waiting at the inn at which + the coach drew up at Marlborough. Into this the young Scudamores were soon + transferred, and, after a hearty good-bye from their fellow-passengers, + and an impressive one from the coachman, they started upon the concluding + part of their journey. + </p> + <p> + "How far is it to aunt's?" Tom asked. + </p> + <p> + "About six miles, young sir," the driver said gravely. + </p> + <p> + The young Scudamores had great difficulty to restrain their laughter at + Tom's new title; in fact, Peter nearly choked himself in his desperate + efforts to do so, and no further questions were asked for some time. + </p> + <p> + The ride was a pleasant one, and Rhoda, who had never been out of + Lincolnshire before, was delighted with the beautiful country through + which they were passing. The journey, long as it was—for the road + was a very bad one, and the horse had no idea of going beyond a slow trot—passed + quickly to them all; but they were glad when the driver pointed to a + quaint old-fashioned house standing back from the road, and said that they + were home. + </p> + <p> + "There are the pigeons, Rhoda, and there is Minnie asleep on that open + window-sill." + </p> + <p> + Very many times had the young Scudamores talked about their aunt, and had + pictured to themselves what she would be like; and their ideas of her so + nearly approached the truth, that she almost seemed to be an old + acquaintance as she came to the door as the carriage stopped. She was a + tall, upright, elderly lady, with a kind, but very decided face, and a + certain prim look about her manner and dress. + </p> + <p> + "Well, niece Rhoda and nephews, I am glad to see that you have arrived + safely," she said in a clear, distinct voice. "Welcome to the Yews. I hope + that we shall get on very well together. Joseph, I hope that you have not + driven Daisy too fast, and that you did not allow my nephews to use the + whip. You know I gave you very distinct instructions not to let them do + so." + </p> + <p> + "No, my lady, they never so much as asked." + </p> + <p> + "That is right," Miss Scudamore said, turning round and shaking hands with + the boys, who had now got out of the carriage and had helped Rhoda down. + "I am glad to hear what Joseph tells me, for I know that boys are + generally fond of furious driving and like lashing horses until they put + them into a gallop. And now, how are you, niece Rhoda! Give me a kiss. + That is right. You look pale and tired, child; you must have something to + eat, and then go to bed. Girls can't stand racketing about as boys can. + You look quiet and nice, child, and I have no doubt we shall suit very + well. It is very creditable to you that you have not been spoilt by your + brothers. Boys generally make their sisters almost as noisy and rude as + they are themselves." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think we are noisy and rude, aunt," Tom said, with a smile. + </p> + <p> + "Oh, you don't, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said, looking at him sharply, and + then shaking her head decidedly two or three times. "If your looks do not + belie you both sadly, you are about as hair-brained a couple of lads as my + worst enemies could wish to see sent to plague me; but," she added to + herself, as she turned to lead the way indoors, "I must do my duty, and + must make allowances; boys will be boys, boys will be boys, so they say at + least, though why they should be is more than I can make out. Now, Rhoda, + I will take you up with me. Your bedroom leads out of mine, dear. Hester," + she said to a prim-looking servant who had come out after her to the door; + "will you show my nephews to their room? Dinner will be ready at two; it + is just a quarter to the hour now. I see that you have got watches, so + that you will be able to be punctual; and I must request you, when you + have done washing, not to throw the water out of the window, because my + flower-beds are underneath." + </p> + <p> + Tom had great difficulty in keeping his countenance, while he assured his + aunt that his brother and himself never did empty their basins out of the + window. + </p> + <p> + "That is right," Miss Scudamore said doubtfully; "but I have heard that + boys do such things." + </p> + <p> + Once fairly in their room and the door shut, the boys had a great laugh + over their aunt's ideas as to boys. + </p> + <p> + "There is one comfort," Tom said at last; "whatever we do we shall never + surprise her." + </p> + <p> + "I think we shall get on very well with her," Peter said. "She means to be + kind, I am sure. This is a jolly room, Tom." + </p> + <p> + It was a low wainscoted room, with a very wide window divided into three + by mullions, and fitted with latticed panes. They were open, and a + delicious scent of flowers came in from the garden. The furniture was all + new and very strong, of dark stained wood, which harmonized well with the + paneling. There were no window curtains, but a valance of white dimity + hung above the window. There was a piece of carpet between the beds; the + rest of the floor was bare, but the boards were of old oak, and looked as + well without it. Several rows of pegs had been put upon the walls, and + there was a small chest of drawers by each bed. + </p> + <p> + "This is very jolly, Peter; but it is a pity that there are bars to the + window." + </p> + <p> + When they came down to dinner they found that Rhoda, quite done up with + her journey, had gone to bed. + </p> + <p> + "You like your room, I hope, nephews," Miss Scudamore said, after they had + taken their seats. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, aunt, very much. There is only one drawback to it." + </p> + <p> + "What is that, Thomas?" + </p> + <p> + "Oh, please, aunt, don't call me Thomas; it is a dreadful name; it is + almost as bad as Tommy. Please call me Tom. I am always called Tom by + every one." + </p> + <p> + "I am not fond of these nicknames," Miss Scudamore said. "There is a + flippancy about them of which I do not approve." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, aunt, in nicknames; but Tom is not a nickname; it is only a short + way of speaking. We never hear of a man being called Thomas, unless he is + a footman or an archbishop, or something of that sort." + </p> + <p> + "What do you mean by archbishop?" Miss Scudamore asked severely. + </p> + <p> + "Well, aunt, I was going to say footman, and then I thought of Thomas à + Becket; and there was Thomas the Rhymer. I have heard of him, but I never + read any of his rhymes. I wonder why they did not call them poems. But I + expect even Thomas à Becket was called Tom in his own family." + </p> + <p> + Miss Scudamore looked sharply at Tom, but he had a perfect command of his + face, and could talk the greatest nonsense with the most serious face. He + went on unmoved with her scrutiny. + </p> + <p> + "I have often wondered why I was not christened Tom, It would have been + much more sensible. For instance, Rhoda is christened Rhoda and not + Rhododendron." + </p> + <p> + "Rhododendron?" Miss Scudamore said, mystified. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, aunt, it is an American plant, I believe. We had one in the + green-house at home; it was sent poor papa by some friend who went out + there, I don't see anything else Rhoda could come from." + </p> + <p> + "You are speaking very ignorantly, nephew," Miss Scudamore said severely. + "I don't know anything about the plant you speak of, but the name of Rhoda + existed before America was ever heard of. It is a very old name." + </p> + <p> + "I expect," Peter said, "it must have meant originally a woman of Rhodes. + You see Crusaders and Templars were always having to do with Rhodes, and + they no doubt brought the name home, and so it got settled here." + </p> + <p> + "The name is mentioned in Scripture," Miss Scudamore said severely. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, aunt, and that makes it still more likely that it meant a woman of + Rhodes; you see Rhodes was a great place then." + </p> + <p> + Miss Scudamore was silent for some time. Then she went back to the subject + with which the conversation had commenced. "What is the objection you + spoke of to the room?" + </p> + <p> + "Oh! it is the bars to the window, aunt." + </p> + <p> + "I have just had them put up," Miss Scudamore said calmly. + </p> + <p> + "Just put up, aunt!" Tom repeated in surprise, "what for?" + </p> + <p> + "To prevent you getting out at night." + </p> + <p> + The boys could not help laughing this time, and then Peter said, "But why + should we want to get out at night, aunt?" + </p> + <p> + "Why should boys always want to do the things they ought not?" Miss + Scudamore said. "I've heard of boys being let down by ropes to go and buy + things. I dare say you have both done it yourselves." + </p> + <p> + "Well, aunt," Tom said, "perhaps we have; but then, you see, that was at + school." + </p> + <p> + "I do not see any difference, nephew. If you will get out at one window, + you will get out at another. There is mischief to be done in the country + as well as in towns; and so long as there is mischief to do, so long will + boys go out of their way to do it. And now I will tell you the rules of + this house, to which you will be expected to adhere. It is well to + understand things at once, as it prevents mistakes. We breakfast at eight, + dine at two, have tea at half-past six, and you will go to bed at + half-past eight. These hours will be strictly observed. I shall expect + your hands and faces to be washed, and your hairs brushed previous to each + meal. When you come indoors you will always take off your boots and put on + your shoes in the little room behind this. And now, if you have done + dinner I think that you had better go and lie down on your bed, and get + two or three hours' sleep. Take your boots off before you get into the + bed." + </p> + <p> + "She means well, Peter," the elder brother said, as they went upstairs, + "but I am afraid she will fidget our lives out." + </p> + <p> + For two or three days the boys wandered about enjoying the beautiful + walks, and surprising and pleasing their aunt by the punctuality with + which they were in to their meals. Then she told them that she had + arranged for them to go to a tutor, who lived at Warley, a large village a + mile distant, and who had some eight or ten pupils. The very first day's + experience at the school disgusted them. The boys were of an entirely + different class to those with whom they had hitherto associated, and the + master was violent and passionate. + </p> + <p> + "How do you like Mr. Jones, nephews?" Miss Scudamore asked upon their + return after their first day at school. + </p> + <p> + "We do not like him at all, aunt. In the first place, he is a good deal + too handy with that cane of his." + </p> + <p> + "'He who spares the rod—'" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, we know that, aunt, 'spoils the child,'" broke in Tom, "but we would + not mind so much if the fellow were a gentleman." + </p> + <p> + "I don't know what you may call a gentleman," Miss Scudamore said + severely. "He stands very high here a schoolmaster, while he visits the + vicar, and is well looked up to everywhere." + </p> + <p> + "He's not a gentleman for all that," Tom muttered; "he wouldn't be if he + visited the Queen. One does not mind being trashed by a gentleman; one is + used to that at Eton; but to be knocked about by a fellow like that! Well, + we shall see." + </p> + <p> + For a week the boys put up with the cruelty of their tutor, who at once + took an immense dislike to them on finding that they did not, like the + other boys, cringe before him, and that no trashing could extract a cry + from them. + </p> + <p> + It must not be supposed that they did not meditate vengeance, but they + could hit upon no plan which could be carried out without causing + suspicion that it was the act of one of the boys; and in that case they + knew that he would question them all round, and they would not tell a lie + to screen themselves. + </p> + <p> + Twice they appealed to their aunt, but she would not listen to them, + saying that the other boys did not complain, and that if their master was + more severe with them than with others, it could only be because they + behaved worse. It was too evident that they were boys of very violent + dispositions, and although she was sorry that their master found it + necessary to punish them, it was clearly her duty not to interfere. + </p> + <p> + The remark about violence arose from Miss Scudamore having read in the + little paper which was published once a week at Marlborough an account of + the incident of the stopping of the coach, about which the boys had agreed + to say nothing to her. The paper had described the conduct of her nephews + in the highest terms, but Miss Scudamore was terribly shocked. "The idea", + she said, "that she should have to associate with boys who had take a + fellow-creature's life was terrible to her, and their conduct in + resisting, when grown-up men had given up the idea as hopeless, showed a + violent spirit, which, in boys so young, was shocking." + </p> + <p> + A few days after this, as the boys were coming from school, they passed + the carrier's cart, coming in from Marlborough. + </p> + <p> + "Be you the young gentlemen at Miss Scudamore's?" the man asked. "Because, + if you be, I have got a parcel for you." + </p> + <p> + Tom answered him that they were, and he then handed them over a heavy + square parcel. Opening it after the cart had gone on, the boys, to their + great delight, found that it consisted of two cases, each containing a + brace of very handsome pistols. + </p> + <p> + "This is luck, Peter," Tom said. "If the parcel had been sent to the + house, aunt would never have let us have them; now we can take them in + quietly, get some powder and balls, and practice shooting every day in + some quiet place. That will be capital. Do you know I have thought of a + plan which will enrage old Jones horribly, and he will never suspect us?" + </p> + <p> + "No; have you, Tom? What is that?" + </p> + <p> + "Look here, Peter. I can carry you easily standing on my shoulders. If you + get a very long cloak, so as to fall well down on me, no one would suspect + in the dark that there were two of us; we should look like one + tremendously tall man. Well, you know, he goes every evening to + Dunstable's to sing with Miss Dunstable. They say he's making love to her. + We can waylay him in the narrow lane, and make him give up that new watch + he has just bought, that he's so proud of. I heard him say he had given + thirty guineas for it. Of course, we don't want to keep it, but we would + smash it up between a couple of big stones, and send him all the pieces." + </p> + <p> + "Capital, Tom; but where should we get the cloak?" + </p> + <p> + "There is that long wadded silk cloak of aunt's that she uses when she + goes out driving. It always hangs up in the closet in the hall." + </p> + <p> + "But how are we to get in again, Tom? I expect that he does not come back + till half-past nine or ten. We can slip out easily enough after we are + supposed to have gone to bed; but how are we to get back?" + </p> + <p> + "The only plan, Peter, is to get in through Rhoda's window. She is very + angry at that brute Jones treating us so badly, and if I take her into the + secret I feel sure she will agree." + </p> + <p> + Rhoda was appealed to, and although at first she said it was quite, quite + impossible, she finally agreed, although with much fear and trembling, to + assist them. First, the boys were to buy some rope and make a rope ladder, + which Rhoda was to take up to her room; she was to open the window wide + when she went to bed, but to pull the blind down as usual, so that if her + aunt came in she would not notice it. Then, when she heard her aunt come + tip to bed at half-past nine, she was to get up very quietly, drop the + rope ladder out, fastening it as they instructed her, and then get into + bed again, and go to sleep if she could, as the boys would not try to come + in until after Miss Scudamore was asleep. + </p> + <p> + Two nights after this the schoolmaster was returning from his usual visit + to Mr. Dunstable, when, to his horror, he saw a gigantic figure advance + from under a tree which overshadowed the lawn, and heard a deep voice say, + "Your money or your life!" + </p> + <p> + Like all bullies, the schoolmaster was a coward, and no sooner did he see + this terrible figure, and his ears caught the ominous click of a pistol + which accompanied the words, than his teeth chattered, his whole figure + trembled with fear, and he fell on his knees, crying, "Spare my life!—take + all that I have, but spare my life!" + </p> + <p> + "You miserable coward!" the giant said, "I do not want to take your + wretched life. What money have you?" + </p> + <p> + "I have only two shillings," he exclaimed; "I swear to you that I have + only two shillings." + </p> + <p> + "What is the use of two shillings to me?—give them to the first + beggar you see." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, sir," the schoolmaster said; "I swear to you that I will." + </p> + <p> + "Give me your watch." + </p> + <p> + The schoolmaster took out his watch, and, getting upon his feet, handed it + to the giant. + </p> + <p> + "There now, you can go; but see," he added, as the schoolmaster turned + with great alacrity to leave—"look here." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, sir." + </p> + <p> + "Look here, and mark my words well. Don't you go to that house where you + have been to-night, or it will be the worse for you. You are a wretch, and + I won't see that poor little girl marry you and be made miserable. Swear + to me you will give her up." + </p> + <p> + The schoolmaster hesitated, but there was again the ominous click of the + pistol. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, yes, I swear it," he said hastily. "I will give her up altogether." + </p> + <p> + "You had better keep your oath," the giant said, "for if you break it, if + I hear you go there any more—I shall be sure to hear of it—I + will put an ounce of lead in you, if I have to do it in the middle of your + school. Do you hear me? Now you may go." + </p> + <p> + Only too glad to escape, the schoolmaster walked quickly off, and in a + moment his steps could be heard as he ran at the top of his speed down the + lane. + </p> + <p> + In a moment the giant appeared to break in two, and two small figures + stood where the large one had been. + </p> + <p> + "Capital, Peter. Now, I'll take the cloak, and you keep the pistol, and + now for a run home—not that I'm afraid of that coward getting up a + pursuit. He'll be only too glad to get his head under the bedclothes." + </p> + <p> + Rhoda had carried out her brother's instructions with great exactness, and + was in a great fright when her aunt came in to see her in bed, lest she + should notice that the window was open. However, the night was a quiet + one, and the curtains fell partly across the blind, so that Miss Scudamore + suspected nothing, but Rhoda felt great relief when she said good-night, + took the candle, and left the room. She had had hard work to keep herself + awake until she heard her aunt come up to bed; and then, finding that she + did not again come into the room, she got up, fastened one end of the rope + ladder to a thick stick long enough to cross two of the mullions, let the + other end down very quietly, and then slipped into bed again. She did not + awake until Hester knocked at her door and told her it was time to get up. + She awoke with a great start, and in a, fright at once ran to the window. + Everything looked as usual. The rope ladder was gone, the window was + closed, and Rhoda knew that her brothers must have come in safely. + </p> + <p> + Great was the excitement in Warley next day, when it became known that the + schoolmaster had been robbed of his watch by a giant fully eight feet + high. This height of the robber was, indeed, received with much doubt, as + people thought that he might have been a tall man, but that the eight feet + must have been exaggerated by the fear of the schoolmaster. + </p> + <p> + Two or three days afterwards the surprise rose even higher, when a party + of friends who had assembled at Mr. Jones' to condole with him upon his + misfortune, were startled by the smashing of one of the windows by a small + packet, which fell upon the floor in their midst. + </p> + <p> + There was a rush to the door, but the night was a dark one, and no one was + to be seen; then they returned to the sitting-room, and the little packet + was opened, and found to contain some watchworks bent and broken, some + pulverized glass, and a battered piece of metal, which, after some + trouble, the schoolmaster recognized as the case of his watch. The + head-constable was sent for, and after examining the relics of the case, + he came to the same conclusion at which the rest had already arrived, + namely, that the watch could not have been stolen by an ordinary footpad, + but by some personal enemy of the schoolmaster's, whose object was not + plunder, but annoyance and injury. + </p> + <p> + To the population of Warley this solution was a very agreeable one. The + fact of a gigantic footpad being in the neighborhood was alarming for all, + and nervous people were already having great bolts and bars placed upon + their shutters and doors. The discovery, therefore, that the object of + this giant was not plunder, but only to gratify a spite against the + master, was a relief to the whole place. Every one was, of course, anxious + to know who this secret foe could be, and what crime Mr. Jones could have + committed to bring such a tremendous enemy upon him. The boys at the + school assumed a fresh importance in the eyes of the whole place, and + being encouraged now to tell all they knew of him, they gave such a + picture of the life that they had led at school, that a general feeling of + disgust was aroused against him. + </p> + <p> + The parents of one or two of the boys gave notice to take their sons away, + but the rest of the boys were boarders, and were no better off than + before. + </p> + <p> + Miss Scudamore was unshaken in her faith in Mr. Jones and considered the + rumor current about him to be due simply to the vindictive nature of boys. + </p> + <p> + "Well, aunt," Tom said one day, after a lecture of this sort from her, "I + know you mean to be kind to us, but Peter and I have stood it on that + account, but we can't stand it much longer, and we shall run away before + long." + </p> + <p> + "And where would you run to, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said calmly. + </p> + <p> + "That is our affair," Tom said quite as coolly, "only I don't like to do + it without giving you warning. You mean kindly, I know, aunt, but the way + you are always going on at us from morning to night whenever we are at + home, and the way in which you allow us to be treated by that tyrannical + brute, is too much altogether." + </p> + <p> + Miss Scudamore looked steadily at them. + </p> + <p> + "I am doing, nephew, what I consider to be for your good. You are willful, + and violent, and headstrong. It is my duty to cure you, and although it is + all very painful to me, at my time of life, to have such a charge thrust + upon me, still, whatever it costs, it must be done." + </p> + <p> + For the next month Mr. Jones' life was rendered a burden to him. The + chimney-pots were shut up with sods placed on them, and the fireplaces + poured volumes of smoke into the rooms and nearly choked him. Night after + night the windows of his bedroom were smashed; cats were let down the + chimney; his water-butts were found filled with mud, and the cord of the + bucket of his well was cut time after time; the flowers in his garden were + dug up and put in topsy-turvy. He himself could not stir out after dark + without being tripped up by strings fastened a few inches above the path; + and once, coming out of his door, a string fastened from scraper to + scraper brought him down the steps with such violence that the bridge of + his nose, which came on the edge of a step, was broken, and he was + confined to his bed for three or four days. In vain he tried every means + to discover and punish the authors of these provocations. A savage dog, + the terror of the neighborhood, was borrowed and chained up in the garden, + but was found poisoned next morning. + </p> + <p> + Watchmen were hired, but refused to stay for more than one night, for they + were so harassed and wearied out that they came to the conclusion that + they were haunted. If they were on one side of the house a voice would be + heard on the other. After the first few attempts, they no longer dared + venture to run, for between each round strings were tied in every + direction, and they had several heavy falls, while as they were carefully + picking their way with their lanterns, stones struck them from all + quarters. If one ventured for a moment from the other's side his lantern + was knocked out, and his feet were struck from under him with a sharp and + unexpected blow from a heavy cudgel; and they were once appalled by seeing + a gigantic figure stalk across the grass, and vanish in a little bush. + </p> + <p> + At the commencement of these trials the schoolmaster had questioned the + boys, one by one, if they had any hand in the proceeding. + </p> + <p> + All denied it. When it came to Tom Scudamore's turn, he said. "You never + do believe me, Mr. Jones, so it is of no use my saying that I didn't do + it; but if you ask Miss Scudamore, she will bear witness that we were in + bed hours before, and that there are bars on our windows through which a + cat could hardly get." + </p> + <p> + The boys had never used Rhoda's room after the first night's expedition, + making their escape now by waiting until the house was quiet, and then + slipping along the passage to the spare room, and thence by the window, + returning in the same way. + </p> + <p> + Under this continued worry, annoyance, and alarm, the schoolmaster grew + thin and worn, his school fell off more and more; for many of the boys, + whose rest was disturbed by all this racket, encouraged by the example of + the boys of the place who had already been taken away, wrote privately to + their friends. + </p> + <p> + The result was that the parents of two or three more wrote to say that + their boys would not return after the holidays, and no one was surprised + when it became known that Mr. Jones was about to close his school and + leave the neighborhood. + </p> + <p> + The excitement of the pranks that they had been playing had enabled the + boys to support the almost perpetual scoldings and complaints of their + aunt; but school once over, and their enemy driven from the place, they + made up their minds that they could no longer stand it. + </p> + <p> + One day, therefore, when Rhoda had, as an extraordinary concession, been + allowed to go for a walk with them, they told her that they intended to + run away. + </p> + <p> + Poor Rhoda was greatly distressed. + </p> + <p> + "You see, Rhoda dear," Tom said, "although we don't like leaving you, you + will really be happier when we are gone. It is a perpetual worry to you to + hear aunt going on, on, on—nagging, nagging, nagging for ever and + ever at us. She is fond of you and kind to you, and you would get on + quietly enough without us, while now she is in a fidget whenever you are + with us, and is constantly at you not to learn mischief and bad ways from + us. Besides you are always in a fright now, lest we should get into some + awful scrape, as I expect we should if we stopped here. If it weren't for + you, we should not let her off as easily as we do. No, no, Rhoda, it is + better for us all that we should go." + </p> + <p> + Poor Rhoda, though she cried bitterly at the thought of losing her + brothers, yet could not but allow to herself that in many respects she + should be more happy when she was freed from anxiety, lest they should get + into some scrape, and when her aunt would not be kept in a state of + continued irritation and scolding. She felt too that, although she herself + could get on well enough in her changed life, that it was very hard indeed + for the boys, accustomed as they had been to the jolly and independent + life of a public school, and to be their own master during the holidays, + with their ponies, amusements, and their freedom to come and go when they + chose. Rhoda was a thoughtful child, and felt that nothing that they could + go through could do them more harm or make them more unhappy than they now + were. She had thought it all over day after day, for she was sure that the + boys would, sooner or later come to it, and she had convinced herself that + it was better for them. Still it was with a very sad heart that she found + that the time had come. + </p> + <p> + For some time she cried in silence, and then, drying her eyes, she said, + trying to speak bravely, though her lips quivered. + </p> + <p> + "I shall miss you dreadfully, boys; but I will not say a word to keep you + here, for I am sure it is very, very bad for you. What do you mean to do? + Do you mean to go to sea?" + </p> + <p> + "No, Rhoda; you see uncle was in the army, and used to talk to us about + that; and, as we have never seen the sea, we don't care for it as some + boys do. No, we shall try and go as soldiers." + </p> + <p> + "But my dear Tom, they will never take you as soldiers; you are too + little." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, we are not old enough to enlist at present," Tom said; "but we might + go in as buglers. We have thought it all over, and have been paying old + Wetherley, who was once in the band of a regiment, to teach us the bugle, + and he says we can sound all the calls now as well as any bugler going. We + did not like to tell you till we had made up our minds to go; but we have + gone regularly to him every day since the first week we came here." + </p> + <p> + "Then you won't have to fight, Tom," Rhoda said joyfully. + </p> + <p> + "No," Tom said, in a rather dejected tone; "I am afraid they won't let us + fight; still we shall see fighting, which is the next best thing." + </p> + <p> + "I heard in Warley yesterday that there will be a movement of the army in + Spain soon, and that some more troops will be sent out, and we shall try + and get into a regiment that is going." + </p> + <p> + They talked very long and earnestly on their plans, and were so engrossed + that they quite forgot how time went, and got in late for tea, and were + terribly scolded in consequence. For once none of them cared for the + storm; the boys exulted over the thought that it would be the last + scolding they would have to suffer; and Rhoda had difficulty in gasping + down her tears at the thought that it was the last meal that she would + take with them, for they had settled that they would start that very + night. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0003" id="link2HCH0003"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER III. — ENLISTED. + </h2> + <p> + It was a bright moonlight night when the boys, after a sad farewell from + Rhoda, let themselves down from the window, and started upon their + journey. Each carried a bundle on a stick; each bundle contained a suit of + clothes, a few shirts and stockings, a pair of shoes, and a pistol. The + other pistols were carried loaded inside their jackets, for there was no + saying whom they might meet upon the road. They had put on the oldest suit + of clothes they possessed, so as to attract as little attention as + possible by the way. After they had once recovered from their parting with + Rhoda their spirits rose, and they tramped along lightly and cheerfully. + It was eleven o'clock when they started, and through the night they did + not meet a single person. Towards morning they got under a haystack near + the road, and slept for some hours; then they walked steadily on until + they had done twenty miles since their start. They went into a small inn, + and had some breakfast, and then purchasing some bread and cold ham, went + on through the town, and leaving the London road, followed that leading to + Portsmouth, and after a mile or two again took up their quarters until + evening, in a haystack. + </p> + <p> + It is not necessary to give the details of the journey to Portsmouth. + After the first two days' tramp, having no longer any fear of the pursuit, + which, no doubt, had been made for them when first missed, they walked by + day, and slept at night in sheds, or under haystacks, as they were afraid + of being questioned and perhaps stopped at inns. They walked only short + distances now, for the first night's long journey had galled their feet, + and, as Tom said, they were not pressed for time, and did not want to + arrive at Portsmouth like two limping tramps. Walking, therefore, only + twelve miles a day after the first two days, they arrived at Portsmouth + fresh and in high spirits. They had met with no adventures upon the road, + except that upon one occasion two tramps had attempted to seize their + bundles, but the production of the pistols, and the evident determination + of the boys to use them if necessary, made the men abandon their intention + and make off, with much bad language and many threats, at which the boys + laughed disdainfully. + </p> + <p> + Arrived at Portsmouth, their first care was to find a quiet little inn, + where they could put up. This they had little difficulty in doing, for + Portsmouth abounded with public-houses, and people were so much accustomed + to young fellows tramping in with their bundles, to join their ships, that + their appearance excited no curiosity whatever. Tom looked older than he + really was, although not tall for his age, while Peter, if anything, + overtopped his brother, but was slighter, and looked fully two years + younger. Refreshed by a long night's sleep between sheets, they started + out after breakfast to see the town, and were greatly impressed and + delighted by the bustle of the streets, full of soldiers and sailors, and + still more by the fortifications and the numerous ships of war lying in + the harbor, or out at Spithead. A large fleet of merchantmen was lying off + at anchor, waiting for a convoy, and a perfect fleet of little wherries + was plying backwards and forwards between the vessels and the shore. + </p> + <p> + "It makes one almost wish to be a sailor," Peter said, as they sat upon + the Southsea beach, and looked out at the animated ocean. + </p> + <p> + "It does, Peter; and if it had been ten years back, instead of at present, + I should have been ready enough to change our plans. But what is the use + of going to sea now? The French and Spanish navies skulk in harbor, and + the first time our fellows get them out they will he sure to smash them + altogether, and then there is an end to all fighting. No, Peter, it looks + tempting, I grant, but we shall see ten times as much with the army. We + must go and settle the thing to-morrow. There is no time to be lost if the + expedition starts in a fortnight or three weeks." + </p> + <p> + Returning into the town, the boys were greatly amused at seeing a sailor's + wedding. Four carriages and pair drove along; inside were women, while + four sailors sat on each roof, waving their hats to the passers-by, and + refreshing themselves by repeated pulls at some black bottles, with which + they were well supplied. Making inquiries, the boys found that the men + belonged to a fine frigate which had come in a day or two before, with + several prizes. + </p> + <p> + The next morning they went down to the barracks. Several non-commissioned + officers, with bunches of gay ribbons in their caps, were standing about. + Outside the gates were some boards, with notices, "Active young fellows + required. Good pay, plenty of prize-money, and chances, of promotion!" + </p> + <p> + The boys read several of these notices, which differed only from each + other in the name of the regiment; and then Tom gave an exclamation of + satisfaction as he glanced at a note at the foot of one of them, "Two or + three active lads wanted as buglers." + </p> + <p> + "There we are, Peter; and, oh, what luck! it is Uncle Peter's regiment! + Look here, Peter," he said, after a pause, "we won't say anything about + being his nephews, unless there is no other way of getting taken; for if + we do it won't be nice. We shall be taken notice of, and not treated like + other fellows, and that will cause all sorts of ill-feeling and jealousy, + and rows. It will be quite time to say who we are when we have done + something to show that we shan't do discredit to him. You see it isn't + much in our favor that we are here as two runaway boys. If we were older + we could go as volunteers, but of course we are too young for that." + </p> + <p> + It should be mentioned that in those days it was by no means unusual for + young men who had not sufficient interest to get commissions to obtain + permission to accompany a regiment as volunteers. They paid their own + expenses, and lived with the officers, but did duty as private soldiers. + If they distinguished themselves, they obtained commissions to fill up + vacancies caused in action. + </p> + <p> + "There is our sergeant, Tom; let's get it over at once." + </p> + <p> + "If you please," Tom said, as they went up to the sergeant, "are you the + recruiting sergeant of the Norfolk Rangers?" + </p> + <p> + "By Jove, Summers, you are in luck to-day," laughed one of the other + sergeants; "here are two valuable recruits for the Rangers. The Mounseers + will have no chance with the regiment with such giants as those in it. + Come, my fine fellows, let me persuade you to join the 15th. Such little + bantams as you are would be thrown away upon the Rangers." + </p> + <p> + There was a shout of laughter from the other non-commissioned officers. + </p> + <p> + Tom was too much accustomed to chaffing bargees at Eton to be put out of + countenance. + </p> + <p> + "We may be bantams," he said, "but I have seen a bantam lick a big + dunghill cock many a time. Fine feathers don't always make fine birds, my + man." + </p> + <p> + "Well answered, young one," the sergeant of the Rangers said, while there + was a general laugh among the others, for the sergeant of the 15th was not + a favorite. + </p> + <p> + "You think yourself sharp, youngster," he said angrily. "You want a + licking, you do; and if you were in the 15th, you'd get it pretty + quickly." + </p> + <p> + "Oh! I beg your pardon," Tom said gravely; "I did not know that the 15th + were famous for thrashing boys. Thank you; when I enlist it shall be in a + regiment where men hit fellows their own size." + </p> + <p> + There was a shout of laughter, and the sergeant, enraged, stepped forward, + and gave Tom a swinging box on the ear. + </p> + <p> + There was a cry of "shame" from the others; but before any of them could + interfere, Tom suddenly stooped, caught the sergeant by the bottom of the + trousers, and in an instant he fell on his back with a crash. + </p> + <p> + For a moment he was slightly stunned, and then, regaining his feet, he was + about to rush at Tom, when the others threw themselves in between them, + and said he should not touch the boy. He struck him first, and the boy had + only given him what served him right. + </p> + <p> + The sergeant was furious, and an angry quarrel was going on, when an + officer of the Rangers came suddenly out of barrack. + </p> + <p> + "Hullo, Summers, what is all this about? I am surprised at you. A lot of + non-commissioned officers, just in front of the barrack gates, quarreling + like drunken sailors in a pothouse. What does it all mean?" + </p> + <p> + "The fact is this, Captain Manley," the sergeant said, saluting, "these + two lads came up to speak to me, when Sergeant Billow chaffed them. The + lad gave the sergeant as good as he got, and the sergeant lost his temper, + and hit him a box on the ear, and in a moment the young one tripped him + up, and pretty nigh stunned him; when he got up he was going at the boy, + and, of course, we wouldn't have it." + </p> + <p> + "Quite right," Captain Manley said. "Sergeant Billow, I shall forward a + report to your regiment. Chaffing people in the street, and then losing + your temper, striking a boy, and causing a disturbance. Now, sergeant," he + went on, as the others moved away, "do you know those boys?" + </p> + <p> + "No, sir; they are strangers to me." + </p> + <p> + "Do you want to see the sergeant privately, lads, or on something + connected with the regiment?" + </p> + <p> + "I see that you have vacancies for buglers, sir," Tom said, "and my + brother and myself want to enlist if you will take us." + </p> + <p> + Captain Manley smiled. "You young scamps, you have got 'runaway from home' + as plainly on your faces as if it was printed there. If we were to enlist + you, we should be having your friends here after you to-morrow, and get + into a scrape for taking you." + </p> + <p> + "We have no friends who will interfere with us, sir, I can give you my + word of honor as a gentleman." Captain Manley laughed. "I mean," Tom said + confused, "my word of honor, as—as an intending bugler." + </p> + <p> + "Indeed we have no one to interfere with us in any way, sir," Peter put in + earnestly. "We wouldn't tell a lie even to enlist in the Rangers." + </p> + <p> + Captain Manley was struck by the earnestness of the boys' faces, and after + a pause he said to the sergeant,— + </p> + <p> + "That will do, Summers; I will take these lads up to my quarters and speak + to them." + </p> + <p> + Then, motioning to the boys to follow him, he re-entered the barracks, and + led the way up to his quarters. + </p> + <p> + "Sit down," he said, when they had entered his room. "Now, boys, this is a + foolish freak upon your part, which you will regret some day. Of course + you have run away from school." + </p> + <p> + "No, sir, we have run away from home," Tom said. + </p> + <p> + "So much the worse," Captain Manley said gravely. "Tell me frankly, why + did you do so? No unkindness at home can excuse boys from running away + from their parents." + </p> + <p> + "We have none, sir," Tom said. "We have lost them both—our mother + many years ago, our father six months. Our only living relation, except a + younger sister, is an aunt, who considers us as nuisances, and who, + although meaning to do her duty, simply drives us out of our minds." + </p> + <p> + Captain Manley could not resist a smile. "Do you not go to school?" + </p> + <p> + "We did go to a school near, but unfortunately it is broken up." + </p> + <p> + Captain Manley caught a little look of amusement between the boys. "I + should not be surprised if you had something to do with its breaking up," + he said with a laugh. "But to return to your coming here. There is + certainly less reason against your joining than I thought at first, but + you are too young." + </p> + <p> + "We are both strong, and are good walkers," Tom said. + </p> + <p> + "But you cannot be much over fifteen," Captain Manley said, "and your + brother is younger." + </p> + <p> + "We are accustomed to strong exercise, sir, and can thrash most fellows of + our own size." + </p> + <p> + "Very likely," Captain Manley said, "but we can't take that into + consideration. You are certainly young for buglers for service work; + however, I will go across with you to the orderly-room, and hear what the + colonel says." + </p> + <p> + Crossing the barrack-yard, they found the colonel was in and disengaged. + </p> + <p> + "Colonel Tritton," Captain Manley said, "these lads want to enlist as + buglers." + </p> + <p> + The colonel looked up and smiled. "They look regular young pickles," he + said. "I suppose they have run away from school." + </p> + <p> + "Not from school, colonel. They have lost both parents, and live with an + aunt, with whom they don't get on well. There does not seem to be much + chance of their being claimed." + </p> + <p> + "You are full young," the colonel said, "and I think you will be sorry, + boys, for the step you want to take." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think so, sir," Tom said. + </p> + <p> + "Of course, you don't at present," the colonel said. "However, that is + your business. Mind, you will have a rough time of it; you will have to + fight your way, you know." + </p> + <p> + "I'll back them to hold their own," Captain Manley said, laughing. "When I + went out at the barrack-gate just now there was a row among a lot of + recruiting sergeants, and when I went up to put a stop to it, I found that + a fellow of the 15th had chaffed these boys when they went up to speak to + Summers, and that they had got the best of it in that line; and the fellow + having lost his temper and struck one of them, he found himself on his + back on the pavement. The boy had tripped him up in an instant." + </p> + <p> + The colonel laughed, and then said suddenly and sharply to Peter, "Where + did you learn that trick, youngster?" + </p> + <p> + "At Eton," Peter answered promptly, and then colored up hotly at his + brother's reproachful glance. + </p> + <p> + "Oh, ho! At Eton, young gentlemen, eh!" the colonel said. "That alters the + matter. If you were at Eton your family must be people of property, and I + can't let you do such a foolish thing as enlist as buglers." + </p> + <p> + "Our father lost all his money suddenly, owing to a blackguard he trusted + cheating him. He found it out, and it killed him," Tom said quietly. + </p> + <p> + The colonel saw he was speaking the truth. "Well, well," he said kindly, + "we must see what we can do for you, boys. They are young, Manley, but + that will improve, and by the time that they have been a year at the depôt—" + </p> + <p> + "Oh, if you please, colonel," Tom said, "we want to go on foreign service, + and it's knowing that your regiment was under orders for foreign service + we came to it." + </p> + <p> + "Impossible!" the colonel said shortly. + </p> + <p> + "I am very sorry for that, sir," Tom said respectfully, "for we would + rather belong to this regiment than any in the service; but if you will + not let us go with it we must try another." + </p> + <p> + "Why would you rather belong to us than to any other?" the colonel asked, + as the boys turned to leave the room. + </p> + <p> + "I had rather not say, sir," Tom said. "We have a reason, and a very good + one, but it is not one we should like to tell." + </p> + <p> + The colonel was silent for a minute. He was struck with the boys' + appearance and manner, and was sorry at the thought of losing them, partly + from interest in themselves, partly because the sea service was generally + so much more attractive to boys, that it was not easy to get them to + enlist as buglers and drummers. + </p> + <p> + "You see, lads, I should really like to take you, but we shall be starting + in a fortnight, and it would be altogether impossible for you to learn to + sound the bugle, to say nothing of learning the calls, by that time." + </p> + <p> + "We can't play well, sir," Tom answered, his spirits rising again, "but we + have practiced for some time, and know a good many of the calls." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, indeed!" the colonel said, pleased; "that alters the case. Well, + lads, I should like to take you with the regiment, for you look + straightforward, sharp young fellows. So I will enlist you. Work hard for + the next fortnight, and if I hear a favorable report of you by that time, + you shall go." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you very much," the boys said warmly, delighted to find their hopes + realized. + </p> + <p> + "What are your names?" the colonel asked. + </p> + <p> + "Tom and Peter," Tom answered. + </p> + <p> + "Tom and Peter what?" the colonel said. + </p> + <p> + The boys looked at each other. The fact that they would of course be asked + their names had never occurred to them, and they not had therefore + consulted whether to give their own or another name. + </p> + <p> + "Come, boys," Colonel Tritton said good-temperedly, "never be ashamed of + your names; don't sail under false colors, lads. I am sure you will do + nothing to disgrace your names." + </p> + <p> + Tom looked at Peter, and saw that he agreed to give their real names, so + he said, "Tom and Peter Scudamore." + </p> + <p> + "Peter Scudamore! Why, Manley, these boys must be relations of the dear + old colonel. That explains why they chose the regiment. Now, boys, what + relation was he of yours?" + </p> + <p> + "I do not admit that he was a relation at all, colonel," Tom said gravely, + "and I hope that you will not ask the question. Supposing that he had been + a relation of ours, we should not wish it to be known. In the first place, + it would not be altogether creditable to his memory that relations of his + should be serving as buglers in his old regiment; and in the second place, + it might be that, from a kindness towards him, some of the officers might, + perhaps, treat us differently to other boys, which would make our position + more difficult by exciting jealousy among others. Should there be any + relation between him and us, it will be time enough for us to claim it + when we have shown ourselves worthy of it." + </p> + <p> + "Well said, boys," the officers both exclaimed. "You are quite right," the + colonel went on, "and I respect your motive for keeping silence. What you + say about jealousy which might arise is very sensible and true. At the + same time, I will promise you that I will keep my eye upon you, and that + if an opportunity should occur in which I can give you a chance of showing + that there is more in you than in other boys, be sure you shall have the + chance." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you very much indeed, colonel," both boys exclaimed. + </p> + <p> + "Now, Manley, I shall be obliged if you will take them to the adjutant, + and tell him to swear them in and attest them in regular form; the surgeon + will, of course, examine them. Please tell the quartermaster to get their + uniforms made without loss of time; and give a hint to the bugle-major + that I should be pleased if he will pay extra attention to them, and push + them on as fast as possible." + </p> + <p> + Captain Manley carried out these instructions, the boys were duly examined + by the surgeon and passed, and in half an hour became His Majesty's + servants. + </p> + <p> + "Now, boys," Captain Manley said as he crossed with them to the quarters + of the bandmaster, "you will have rather a difficult course to steer, but + I have no doubt you will get through it with credit. This is something + like a school, and you will have to fight before you find your place. + Don't be in a hurry to begin; take all good-natured chaff good-naturedly; + resent any attempt at bullying. I have no doubt you will be popular, and + it is well that you should be so, for then there will be no jealousy if + your luck seems better than that of others. They will, of course, know + that you are differently born and educated to themselves, but they will + not like you any the worse for that, if they find that you do not try to + keep aloof from them or give yourselves airs. And look here, boys, play + any tricks you like with the men, but don't do it with the + non-commissioned officers. There is nothing they hate so much as impudence + from the boys, and they have it in their power to do you a great deal of + good or of harm. You will not have much to do with the bandmaster. Only a + portion of the band accompanies us, and even that will be broken up when + we once enter upon active campaigning. Several of the company buglers have + either left lately, or have got their stripes and given up their bugles, + and I do not fancy that their places will be filled up before we get out + there. Now, your great object will be to get two of these vacancies. I am + afraid you are too young, still there will be plenty more vacancies after + we are once in the field, for a bullet has no respect for buglers; and you + see the better you behave the better your chance of being chosen." + </p> + <p> + "What is the difference exactly, sir?" Tom asked. + </p> + <p> + "The company bugler ranks on the strength of the company, messes, marches, + and goes into action with them; the other buglers merely form part of the + band, are under the bandmaster, play at the head of the regiment on its + march, and help in the hospitals during a battle." + </p> + <p> + "Macpherson," he said as he entered the bandmaster's quarters, where a + number of men and a few lads were practicing, "I have brought you two lads + who have entered as buglers." + </p> + <p> + The bandmaster was a Scotchman—a stiff-looking, elderly man. + </p> + <p> + "Weel, Captain Manley, I'm wanting boys, but they look vera young, and I + misdoubt they had better have been at school than here. However, I'll do + my best with them; they look smart lads, and we shall have plenty of time + at the depôt to get them into shape." + </p> + <p> + "Lots of time, Macpherson, lots of time. They say they know a few calls on + the bugle, so perhaps they had better stick to the calls at present; you + will have plenty of time to begin with them regularly with the notes when + all the bustle is over." + </p> + <p> + "Eh, ye know the calls, boys? Hardy and Graves, give them your bugles, and + let us hear them. Now for the advance." + </p> + <p> + Tom and Peter felt very nervous, but they had really practiced hard for an + hour a day for the last four months, and could play all the calls they + knew steadily and well. The bandmaster made no remark until they had + sounded some half a dozen calls as he named them, and then he said, "The + lads have a vera gude idea of it, Captain Manley. They are steadier and + clearer than mony a one of the boys already. Will ye begin at once, lads, + or will ye wait till ye get your uniform?" + </p> + <p> + "We had rather begin at once," the boys answered together. + </p> + <p> + "Vera gude. Hardy, take two bugles out of the chest, and then take these + lads—What's your name, boys? Eh? Scudamore? A vera gude name—take + them over to Corporal Skinner, he will be practicing with the others on + the ramp." + </p> + <p> + With a word of grateful thanks to Captain Manley as he went out before + them, the boys followed their new guide out to the ramparts. A guide was + hardly necessary, for an incessant bugling betokened the place, where, in + one of the bastions behind the barracks, seven or eight buglers were + sounding the various calls under the direction of Corporal Skinner. + </p> + <p> + The corporal was a man of few words, for he merely nodded when the boy—who + had not opened his lips on the way, indeed, he was too busy wondering who + these young swells were, and what they had run away for, to say a word—gave + the bandmaster's message to the effect that the new-comers knew some of + the calls and were to be under his tuition for the present, pointed to + them where to stand, and in another minute Tom and Peter were hard at work + adding to the deafening din. After half an hour's practice they were + pleased at seeing Captain Manley stroll up and call their instructor + aside, and they felt sure that he was speaking to him of them. This was + so, for the officer was carrying out the instructions he had received from + Colonel Tritton. + </p> + <p> + "Corporal," he said, "I want to say a word to you about those boys who + have just joined. They seem to have a fair idea of the calls." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, sir, they only know a few, but those they do know they can sound as + well as any of them." + </p> + <p> + "That is right, corporal. Now look here, what I am going to say is not to + go farther, you understand." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, sir, I will keep my mouth shut." + </p> + <p> + "Very well. You can see the lads are not like most of our band boys. They + are a gentleman's sons who have got into some scrape or other and run away + from school." + </p> + <p> + "I was thinking as much, sir." + </p> + <p> + "The colonel believes that he knows their family, Skinner; but of course, + that will not make any difference in regard to them. Still he would be + pleased, I know, if they could sound the calls well enough to go with the + regiment. They are most anxious to learn. Now I shall be glad if you can + get them up to the mark. It will, of course, entail a lot of extra trouble + upon you, but if you can get them fit in time, I will pay you a couple of + guineas for your extra time." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you, sir," the corporal saluted. "I think I can manage it—at + any rate if I don't it won't be for want of trying." + </p> + <p> + "Who are those nice-looking lads I saw with you, Manley?" Major James + asked as the captain came into the messroom to lunch. + </p> + <p> + "Those are two buglers in his Majesty's Norfolk Rangers." + </p> + <p> + There was a general laugh. + </p> + <p> + "No, but really, Manley, who are they? I was quite struck with them; good + style of boys." + </p> + <p> + "It is a fact, major. Harding will tell you so," and he nodded to the + adjutant. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, Manley is saying the thing that's right," the adjutant answered. + "The doctor passed them, and I swore them in." + </p> + <p> + "I am sorry for it," the major said. "There were three or four of us + standing on the mess-room steps and we all noticed them. They were + gentlemen, if I ever saw one, and a hard life they will have of it with + the band boys. However, they are not likely to stay there. They have run + away from school, of course, and will be claimed. I wonder you enlisted + them." + </p> + <p> + "The colonel's orders, major," the adjutant said. "Manley took them to + him, I believe, and then brought them to me." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think you need feel anxious about them among the boys, major," + Captain Manley said. "I fancy they can hold their own. I found them + outside the gate where a row was going on among some of the recruiting + sergeants, and one of those boys had just tripped up a sergeant of the + 15th and nearly broken his head." + </p> + <p> + There was a general laugh. + </p> + <p> + "They are quite interesting, these prodigies of yours, Manley. How did the + boy do it? I should not have thought him strong enough to have thrown a + man off his balance." + </p> + <p> + "I asked Summers about it afterwards," Captain Manley said, "the fellow + gave one of the boys a box on the ear, and in an instant the boy stooped, + caught his foot and pulled it forward and up. The thing was done in a + moment, and the sergeant was on his back before he knew what's what." + </p> + <p> + "By Jove," a young ensign said, "I have seen that trick done at Eton." + </p> + <p> + "That is just where the boy said he learnt it," Captain Manley said. "The + colonel asked him suddenly, and it slipped out." + </p> + <p> + "If they're Etonians, I ought to know them," the ensign said. "I only left + six months ago. What are their names?" + </p> + <p> + "Their name is Scudamore." + </p> + <p> + "By Jove, they were in the same house with me. Uncommonly sharp little + fellows, and up to no end of mischief. It was always believed, though no + one could prove it, that they were the boys who nearly suffocated the + bargee." + </p> + <p> + There was a roar of laughter. + </p> + <p> + "Tell us all about, Carruthers." + </p> + <p> + "Well, there was not very much known about it. It seems the fellow + purposely upset a boat with four or five of our fellows in it, and that + night a dozen lighted crackers were thrown down into the little cabin + where the fellow was asleep; the hatch was fastened and he was sent + drifting down stream with the crackers exploding all about him. The smoke + nearly suffocated the fellow, I believe There was a tremendous row about + it, but they could not bring it home to any one. We always put it down to + the Scudamores, though they never would own to it; but they were the only + fellows in the boat who would have done it, and they were always up to + mischief." + </p> + <p> + "But what makes them come here as buglers?" the major asked. + </p> + <p> + "Their father was a banker, I believe, down in the Eastern Counties + somewhere. He died suddenly in the middle of the half before I left, and + they went away to the funeral and never came back again." + </p> + <p> + "The fact is," Captain Manley said, "I fancy by what they say, though they + did not mention their father was a banker, that he lost all his money + suddenly and died of the shock. At any rate they are alone in the world, + and the colonel has no doubt that they are some relation—nephews, I + should imagine—of Peter Scudamore, who was our colonel when I + joined. One of them is called Peter. They acknowledged that they had a + particular reason for choosing this regiment; but they would neither + acknowledge or deny that he was a relation. Now that we know their father + was a banker, we shall find out without difficulty—indeed I have no + doubt the colonel will know whether Peter Scudamore had a brother a + banker." + </p> + <p> + "What's to be done, Manley?" Major James said. "I don't like the thought + of poor old Peter's nephews turning buglers. All of us field officers, and + the best part of you captains, served under him, and a better fellow never + stepped. I think between us we might do something." + </p> + <p> + "I would do anything I could," Carruthers said, "and there are Watson and + Talbot who were at Eton too. Dash it, I don't like to think of two + Etonians in a band," "You are all very good," Captain Manley said, "but + from what I see of the boys they will go their own way. They have plenty + of pride, and they acknowledge that their reason for refusing to say + whether they are any relation of the colonel was that they did not want to + be taken notice of or treated differently from other boys, because it + would cause jealousy, and make their position more difficult. All they + asked was that they might accompany the regiment, and not remain behind at + the depôt; and as, fortunately, they have both been practising with the + bugle, and can sound most of the calls as well as the others, the colonel + was able to grant their request. Had they been older, of course, we could + have arranged for them to go with us as volunteers, we who knew the + colonel, paying their expenses between us: as it is, the only thing we can + do for them—and that is what they would like best is to treat them + just like the other boys, but to give them every chance of distinguishing + themselves. If they don't get knocked over, they ought to win a commission + before the campaign is over." + </p> + <p> + In the meantime Tom and Peter had been introducing themselves to the + regiment. The exercise over, they had returned to dinner. It was a rough + meal, but the boys enjoyed it, and after it was over a number of the men + of the band, with whom they messed, crowded round to ask the usual + questions of new-comers—their curiosity heightened in the present + instance by the fact that the boys differed so widely from ordinary + recruits. + </p> + <p> + "Look here," Tom said, laughing, "I can't answer you all at once, but if + you put me on the table I will tell you all about us." + </p> + <p> + There was a general laugh, and many of the soldiers other than the band + sauntered up to see what was going on. + </p> + <p> + "The first thing to tell you," Tom said, "is our names. We go by the names + of Tom and Peter Scudamore, but I need scarcely tell you that these are + not our real names. The fact is—but this is quite a secret—we + are the eldest sons of Sir Arthur Wellesley—" + </p> + <p> + Here Tom was interrupted by a shout of laughter. + </p> + <p> + "Sir Arthur," Tom went on calmly, "wished to make us colonels of two of + the Life Guard regiments, but as they were not going on foreign service we + did not see it, and have accordingly entered the regiment which Sir + Arthur, our father, in speaking to a friend, said was the finest in the + service—namely, the Norfolk Rangers. We believe that it is the + custom, upon entering a regiment, to pay our footing, and I have given a + guinea to Corporal Skinner, and asked him to make it go as far as he + could." + </p> + <p> + There was great laughter over Tom's speech, which was just suited to + soldiers, and the boys from that moment were considered part of the + regiment. + </p> + <p> + "There's good stuff in those boys," an old sergeant said to another, + "plucky and cool. I shouldn't be surprised if what Tom Dillon said was + about right; he was waiting at mess just now, and though he didn't hear + all that was said, he picked up that there was an idea that these boys are + related to the old colonel. He was a good fellow, he was, and, though I + say nothing against Colonel Tritton, yet we missed Colonel Scudamore + terribly. Strict, and yet kind, just the sort of fellow to serve under. If + the boys take after him they will be a credit to the regiment, and mark my + words, we shan't see them in the band many years." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0004" id="link2HCH0004"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER IV. — A TOUGH CUSTOMER. + </h2> + <p> + Like most boys who are fond of play, Tom and Peter Scudamore were capable + of hard work at a pinch, and during the three weeks that they spent at + Portsmouth they certainly worked with a will. They had nothing to do in + the way of duty, except to practice the bugle, and this they did with a + zeal and perseverance that quite won the heart of Corporal Skinner, and + enabled him to look upon Captain Manley's two guineas as good as earned. + But even with the best will and the strongest lungs possible, boys can + only blow a bugle a certain number of hours a day. For an hour before + breakfast, for two hours before dinner, and for an hour and a half in the + evening they practiced, the evening work being extra, alone with their + instructor. There remained the whole afternoon to themselves. Their + employment of those hours had been undertaken at Peter's suggestion. + </p> + <p> + "Look here, Tom," he said, at the end of the first day's work, "from what + the corporal says, we shall have from one till about five to ourselves. + Now, we are going to Spain, and it seems to me that it would be of great + use to us, and might do us a great deal of good, to know something of + Spanish. We have got four pounds each left, and I don't think that we + could lay it out better than in getting a Spanish master and some books, + and in setting to in earnest at it. If we work with all our might for four + hours a day with a master, we shall have made some progress, and shall + pick up the pronunciation a little. I dare say we shall be another ten + days or a fortnight on the voyage, and shall have lots of time on our + hands. It will make it so much easier to pick it up when we get there if + we know a little to start with." + </p> + <p> + "I think it is a capital idea, Peter; I should think we are pretty sure to + find a master here." + </p> + <p> + There was no difficulty upon that score, for there were a large number of + Spanish in England at the time; men who had left the country rather than + remain under the French yoke, and among them were many who were glad to + get their living by teaching their native language. There were two or + three in this condition in Portsmouth, and to one of these the boys + applied. He was rather surprised at the application from the two young + buglers—for the uniforms were finished twenty-four hours after their + arrival—but at once agreed to devote his whole afternoons to them. + Having a strong motive for their work, and a determination to succeed in + it, the boys made a progress that astonished both themselves and their + teacher, and they now found the advantage of their grounding in Latin at + Eton. Absorbed in their work, they saw little of the other boys, except at + meals and when at practice. + </p> + <p> + One evening when at supper, one of the buglers, named Mitcham, a lad of + nearly eighteen, made some sneering remark about boys who thought + themselves above others, and gave themselves airs. Tom saw at once that + this allusion was meant for them, and took the matter up. + </p> + <p> + "I suppose you mean us, Mitcham. You are quite mistaken; neither my + brother nor myself think ourselves better than any one, nor have we any + idea of giving ourselves airs. The fact is—and I am not surprised + that you should think us unsociable—we are taking lessons in + Spanish. If we go with the regiment it will be very useful, and I have + heard it said that any one who lands in a foreign country, and who knows a + little of the grammar and pronunciation, will learn it in half the time + that he would were he altogether ignorant of both. I am sorry that I did + not mention it before, because I can understand that it must seem as if we + did not want to be sociable. I can assure you that we do; and that after + this fortnight is over we shall be ready to be as jolly as any one. You + see we are altogether behindhand with our work now, and have got to work + hard to put ourselves on your level." + </p> + <p> + Tom spoke so good-temperedly that there was a general feeling in his + favor, and several of them who had before thought with Mitcham, that the + new-comers were not inclined to be sociable, felt that they had been + mistaken. There was, however, a general feeling of surprise and amusement + at the idea of two boys voluntarily taking lessons in Spanish. Mitcham, + however, who was a surly-tempered young fellow, and who was jealous of the + progress which the boys were making, and of the general liking with which + they seemed to be regarded, said,— + </p> + <p> + "I believe that's only an excuse for getting away from us." + </p> + <p> + "Do you mean to say that you think that I am telling a lie?" Tom asked + quietly. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, if you put it in that way, young 'un," Mitcham said. + </p> + <p> + "Hold your tongue, Mitcham, or I'll pull your ears for you," Corporal + Skinner said: but his speech was cut short by Tom's putting one hand on + the barrack table, vaulting across it, and striking Mitcham a heavy blow + between the eyes. + </p> + <p> + There was a cry of "a fight!" among the boys, but the men interfered at + once. + </p> + <p> + "You don't know what you are doing, young 'un," one said to Tom; "when you + hit a fellow here, you must fight him. That's the rule, and you can't + fight Mitcham; he's two years older, at least, and a head taller." + </p> + <p> + "Of course I will fight him," Tom said. "I would fight him if he were + twice as big, if he called me a liar." + </p> + <p> + "Nonsense, young 'un!" another said, "it's not possible. He was wrong, and + if you had not struck him I would have licked him myself; but as you have + done so, you had better put up with a thrashing, and have done with it." + </p> + <p> + "I should think so, indeed!" Tom said disdainfully. "I may get a licking; + I dare say I shall; but it won't be all on one side. Look here, Mitcham, + we will have it out to-morrow, on the ramparts behind the barracks. But, + if you will apologize to me for calling me a liar, I'll say I am sorry I + hit you." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, blow your sorrow!" the lad said. "I'll give you the heartiest licking + you ever had in your life, my young cock." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, all right," Tom said cheerfully. "We will see all about it when the + time comes." + </p> + <p> + As it was evident now that there was no way out of it, no one interfered + further in the matter. Quarrels in the army are always settled by a fair + fight, as at school; but several of the older men questioned among + themselves whether they ought to let this go on, considering that Tom + Scudamore was only between fifteen and sixteen, while his opponent was two + years older, and was so much heavier and stronger. However, as it was + plain that Tom would not take a thrashing for the blow he had struck, and + there did not seem any satisfactory way out of it, nothing was done, + except that two or three of them went up to Mitcham, and strongly urged + him to shake hands with Tom, and confess that he had done wrong in giving + him the lie. This Mitcham would not hear of, and there was nothing further + to be done. + </p> + <p> + "I am afraid, Tom, you have no chance with that fellow." Peter said, as + they were undressing. + </p> + <p> + "No chance in the world, Peter; but I can box fairly, you know, and am + pretty hard. I shall be able to punish him a bit, and you may be sure I + shall never give in. It's no great odds getting a licking, and I suppose + that they will stop it before I am killed. Don't bother about it. I had + rather get knocked about in a fight than get flogged at Eton any day. I + would rather you did not come to see it, Peter, if you don't mind. When + you fought Evans it hurt me ten times as much as if I had been fighting, + and, although you licked him, it made me feel like a girl. I can stand + twice the punishment if I don't feel that any blow is hitting you as well + as myself." + </p> + <p> + Tom's prediction about the fight turned out to be nearly correct. He was + more active, and a vastly better boxer than his antagonist, and although + he was constantly knocked down, he punished him very heavily about the + face. In fact, the fight was exactly similar to that great battle, fifty + years afterwards, between Sayers and Heenan. Time after time Tom was + knocked down, and even his second begged him to give in, but he would not + hear of it. Breathless and exhausted, but always cool and smiling, he + faced his heavy antagonist, eluding his furious rushes, and managing to + strike a few straight blows at his eyes before being knocked down. By the + time that they had fought a quarter of an hour half the regiment was + assembled, and loud were the cheers which greeted Tom each time he came + up, very pale and bleeding, but confident, against his antagonist. + </p> + <p> + At last an old sergeant came forward. "Come," he said, "there has been + enough of this. You had better stop." + </p> + <p> + "Will he say he was sorry he called me a liar?" Tom asked. + </p> + <p> + "No, I won't," Mitcham answered. + </p> + <p> + The sergeant was about to use his authority to stop it, when Tom said to + him, in a low voice: + </p> + <p> + "Look, sergeant! please let us go on another five minutes. I think I can + stand that, and he can hardly see out of his eyes now. He won't see a bit + by that time." + </p> + <p> + The sergeant hesitated, but a glance at Tom's antagonist convinced him + that what he said was correct. Mitcham had at all times a round and rather + puffy face, and his cheeks were now so swollen with the effect of Tom's + straight, steady hitting, that he could with difficulty see. + </p> + <p> + It was a hard five minutes for Tom, for his antagonist, finding that he + was rapidly getting blind, rushed with fury upon him, trying to end the + fight. Tom had less difficulty in guarding the blows, given wildly and + almost at random, but he was knocked down time after time by the mere + force and weight of the rush. He felt himself getting weak, and could + hardly get up from his second's knee upon the call of time. He was not + afraid of being made to give in, but he was afraid of fainting, and of so + being unable to come up to time. + </p> + <p> + "Stick a knife into me; do anything!" he said to his second, "if I go off, + only bring me up to time. He can't hold out much longer." + </p> + <p> + Nor could he. His hitting became more and more at random, until at last, + on getting up from his second's knee, Mitcham cried in a hoarse voice, + "Where is he? I can't see him!" + </p> + <p> + Then Tom went forward with his hands down. "Look here, Mitcham, you can't + see, and I can hardly stand. I think we have both done enough. We neither + of us can give in, well because—because I am a gentleman, you + because you are bigger than I am; so let's shake hands, and say no more + about it." + </p> + <p> + Mitcham hesitated an instant, and then held out his hand. "You are a good + fellow, Scudamore, and there's my hand; but you have licked me fairly. I + can't come up to time, and you can. There, I am sorry I called you a + liar." + </p> + <p> + Tom took the hand, and shook it, and then a mist came over his eyes, and + his knees tottered, as, with the ringing cheers of the men in his ears, he + fainted into his second's arms. + </p> + <p> + "What a row the men are making!" the major said, as the sound of cheering + came through the open window of the mess-room, at which the officers were + sitting at lunch. "It's a fight of course, and a good one, judging by the + cheering. Does any one know who it is between?" + </p> + <p> + No one had heard. + </p> + <p> + "It's over now," the adjutant said, looking out of the window, "Here are + the men coming down in a stream. They look very excited over it. I wonder + who it has been. Stokes," he said, turning to one of the mess servants, + "go out, and find out who has been fighting, and all about it." + </p> + <p> + In a minute or two the man returned. "It's two of the band boys, sir." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, only two boys! I wonder they made such a fuss over that. Who are + they?" + </p> + <p> + "One was one of the boys who have just joined, sir. Tom Scudamore, they + call him." + </p> + <p> + "I guessed as much," Captain Manley laughed; "I knew they would not be + long here without a fight. Who was the other?" + </p> + <p> + "Well, sir, I almost thought it must be a mistake when they told me, + seeing they are so unequally matched, but they all say so, so in course + it's true—the other was Mitcham, the bugler of No. 3 Company." + </p> + <p> + "What a shame!" was the general exclamation, while Captain Manley got up + and called for his cap. + </p> + <p> + "A brutal shame, I call it," he said hotly. "Mitcham's nearly a man. It + ought not to have been allowed. I will go and inquire after the boy. I + will bet five pounds he was pretty nearly killed before he gave in." + </p> + <p> + "He didn't give in, Captain Manley," the servant said. "He won the fight. + They fought till Mitcham couldn't see, and then young Scudamore went up + and offered to draw it, but Mitcham acknowledged he was fairly licked. It + was a close thing, for the boy fainted right off; but he's come round now, + and says he's all right." + </p> + <p> + "Hurrah for Eton!" Carruthers shouted enthusiastically. "Hurrah! By Jove, + he is game, and no mistake. He won a hard fight or two at Eton, but + nothing like this. I call it splendid." + </p> + <p> + "The boy might have been killed," the major said gravely; while the + younger officers joined in Carruthers's exclamation at Tom's pluck. "It is + shameful that it was allowed. I suppose the quarrel began in their + quarters. Sergeant Howden is in charge of the room, and ought to have + stopped it at once. Every non-commissioned officer ought to have stopped + it. I will have Howden up before the colonel to-morrow." + </p> + <p> + "I think, major," Captain Manley said, "if you will excuse me, the best + plan, as far as the boy is concerned, is to take no notice of it. As it + is, he must have won the hearts of all the regiment by his pluck, and if + he is not seriously hurt, it is the very best thing, as it has turned out, + that could have happened. If any one gets into a scrape about it, it might + lessen the effect of the victory. I think if you call Howden up, and give + him a quiet wigging, it will do as well, and won't injure the boys. What + do you think?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, you are right, Manley, as it has turned out; but the boy might have + been killed. However, I won't do more than give Howden a hearty wigging, + and will then learn how the affair begun. I think, Dr. Stathers, that it + would be as well if you went round and saw both of them. You had better, I + think, order them into hospital for the night, and then the boy can go to + bed at once, and come out again to-morrow, if he has, as I hope, nothing + worse than a few bruises. Please come back, and tell us how you find + them." + </p> + <p> + The report was favorable, and the next morning Tom came out of hospital, + and took his place as usual, with the party upon the ramparts—pale, + and a good deal marked, but not much the worse for his battle; but it was + some days before the swelling of his adversary's face subsided + sufficiently for him to return to duty. + </p> + <p> + Tom's victory—as Captain Manley had predicted—quite won the + hearts of the whole regiment, and the nicknames of "Sir Tom," and "Sir + Peter"—which had been given to them in jest after Tom's speech about + Sir Arthur Wellesley—were now generally applied to them. The + conversation in the mess-room had got about, and the old soldiers who had + served under Colonel Scudamore would have done anything for the lads, + although, as yet, they were hardly known personally except to the band, as + their devotion to work kept them quite apart from the men. + </p> + <p> + It was just three weeks after they had joined before the order came for + embarkation, and a thrill of pleasure and excitement ran through the + regiment when it was known that they were to go on board in four days. Not + the least delighted were Tom and Peter. It had already been formally + settled that they were to accompany the regiment, and it was a proof of + the popularity that they had gained, that every one looked upon their + going as a matter of course, and that no comment was excited even among + those who were left behind. Three days before starting they had met + Captain Manley in the barrack-yard, and after saluting, Tom said, "If you + please, sir, we wanted to ask you a question." + </p> + <p> + "What is that, lads?" + </p> + <p> + "If you please, sir, we understand that the boys of the band have their + bags carried for them, but the company buglers carry knapsacks, like the + men?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, boys; the company buglers carry knapsacks and muskets." + </p> + <p> + "I am afraid we could not carry muskets and do much marching, sir, but we + have each a brace of pistols." + </p> + <p> + Captain Manley smiled. "Pistols would not look the thing on a + parade-ground, boys; but in a campaign people are not very particular, and + I have no doubt the colonel will overlook any little breach of strict + uniformity in your cases, as it is evident you can't carry muskets. You + can use your pistols, I hope," he said with a smile. "Hit a penny every + time at twenty paces!" + </p> + <p> + "No, sir, we can't do that," Tom said seriously. "We can hit a good-sized + apple nineteen times out of twenty." + </p> + <p> + "The deuce you can!" Captain Manley said. "How did you learn to do that?" + </p> + <p> + "We have practiced twelve shots a day for the last six months, sir. We + were thinking of asking you, sir, if you would like to carry a brace of + them through the campaign. They are splendid weapons; and we shall only + carry one each. They would get rusty and spoil, if we left them behind, + and we should be very pleased to think they might be useful to you, after + your great kindness to us." + </p> + <p> + "It is not a very regular thing, boys," Captain Manley said, "for a + captain to be borrowing a brace of pistols from two of his buglers; but + you are exceptional buglers, and there is something in what you say about + rusting. Besides, it is possible you may lose yours, so I will accept your + offer with thanks, with the understanding that I will carry the pistols, + and you shall have them again if anything happens to yours. But how about + the knapsacks?" + </p> + <p> + "We were thinking of having two made of the regimental pattern, sir, but + smaller and lighter, if you think that it would be allowed." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I think, boys, if you are allowed to carry pistols instead of + muskets, no great objection will be made as to the exact size of the + knapsacks. Yes, you can get them made, and I will speak to the colonel + about it." + </p> + <p> + "Perhaps," he hesitated, "you may be in want of a little money; do not + hesitate if you do. I can let you have five pounds, and you can pay me," + he said with a laugh, "out of your share of our first prize-money." + </p> + <p> + The boys colored hotly. + </p> + <p> + "No, thank you, Captain Manley; we have plenty of money. Shall we bring + the pistols to your quarters?" + </p> + <p> + "Do, lads, I am going in to lunch now, and will be in in half an hour." + </p> + <p> + The boys at once went out and ordered their knapsacks. They had just sold + their watches, which were large, handsome, and of gold, and had been given + to them by their father when they went to Eton. They were very sorry to + part with them, but they agreed that it would be folly to keep gold + watches when the twenty pounds which they obtained for them would buy two + stout and useful silver watches and would leave them twelve pounds in + money. They then returned to barracks, took out a brace of their pistols, + carefully cleaned them, and removed the silver plates upon the handles, + and then walked across to Captain Manley's quarters. + </p> + <p> + Rather to their surprise and confusion they found five or six other + officers there, for Captain Manley had mentioned at lunch to the amusement + of his friends that he was going to be unexpectedly provided with a brace + of pistols, and several of them at once said that they would go up with + him to his quarters, as they wanted to see the boys of whom they had + spoken so much during the last fortnight. Tom and Peter drew themselves up + and saluted stiffly. + </p> + <p> + "You need not be buglers here, boys," Captain Manley said. "This is my + room, we are all gentlemen, and though I could not, according to the + regulations, walk down the street with you, the strictest disciplinarian + would excuse my doing as I like here." + </p> + <p> + The boys flushed with pleasure at Captain Manley's kind address, and as he + finished Carruthers stepped forward and shook them warmly by the hand. + </p> + <p> + "How are you both?" he said. "You have not forgotten me, I hope." + </p> + <p> + "I had not seen you before. I did not know you were in the regiment, + Carruthers," the boys said warmly, pleased to find a face they had known + before; and then breaking off:—"I beg your pardon—Mr. + Carruthers." + </p> + <p> + "There are no misters here as far as I am concerned, Scudamore. There were + no misters at Eton. This is a change, isn't it? Better than grinding away + at Greek by a long way. Well, I congratulate you on your fight. You showed + there was some good in dear old Eton still. I wish you had let me know it + was coming off. I would have given anything to have seen it—from a + distance, you know. If it had been the right thing, I would have come and + been your backer." + </p> + <p> + There was a general laugh, and then the officers all began to talk to the + boys. They were quiet and respectful in their manners, and fully confirmed + the favorable report which Captain Manley had given of them. + </p> + <p> + "Where are the pistols, boys?" their friend asked presently. + </p> + <p> + "Here, sir," and the boys produced them from under their jackets. "We have + no case, sir; we were obliged to leave it behind us when we—" + </p> + <p> + "Ran away," one of the officers said, laughing. + </p> + <p> + "They are a splendid pair of pistols," Captain Manley said, examining + them; "beautifully finished, and rifled. They look quite new, too, though, + of course, they are not." + </p> + <p> + "They are new, sir," Tom said; "we have only had them six months, and they + were new then." + </p> + <p> + "Indeed," Captain Manley said surprised; "I thought, of course, they were + family pistols. Why, how on earth, if it is not an impertinent question, + did you boys get hold of two brace of such pistols as these? I have no + right to ask the question, boys. I see there has been a plate on the + handles. But you said you had no relations, and I was surprised into + asking." + </p> + <p> + The boys colored. + </p> + <p> + "The question was quite natural, sir; the pistols were presented to us by + some people we traveled with once; we took the plates off because they + made a great fuss about nothing, and we thought that it would look + cockey." + </p> + <p> + There was a laugh among the officers at the boys' confusion. + </p> + <p> + "No one would suspect you of being cockey, Scudamore," Captain Manley said + kindly; "come, let me see the plates." + </p> + <p> + The boys took the little silver plates from their pockets and handed them + silently to Captain Manley, who read aloud, to the surprise of those + around him,—"'To Tom' and 'Peter,' they are alike except the names. + 'To Tom Scudamore, presented by the passengers in the Highflyer coach on + the 4th of August, 1808, as a testimony of their appreciation of his + gallant conduct, by which their property was saved from plunder.' Why, + what is this, you young pickles, what were you up to on the 4th of August + last year?" + </p> + <p> + "There was nothing in it at all, sir," Tom said; "we were on the coach and + were stopped by highwaymen. One of the passengers had pistols, but was + afraid to use them, and hid them among the boxes. So when the passengers + were ordered to get down to be searched, we hid ourselves, and when the + highwaymen were collecting their watches, Peter shot one, and I drove the + coach over another. The matter was very simple indeed; but the passengers + saved their money, so made a great fuss about it." + </p> + <p> + There was much laughter over Tom's statement, and then he had to give a + detailed account of the whole affair, which elicited many expressions of + approval. + </p> + <p> + "It does you credit, boys," Captain Manley said, "and shows that you are + cool as well as plucky. One quality is as valuable as the other. There is + every hope that you will do the regiment credit, boys, and you may be sure + that we shall give you every chance. And now good-bye for the present." + </p> + <p> + "Good-bye, sir," Tom and Peter again drew themselves up, gave the military + salute, and went off to their comrades. + </p> + <p> + For when the order came to prepare for the embarkation, both Spanish and + bugling were given up, and the boys entered into the pleasure of the + holiday with immense zest. They had no regimental duties to perform beyond + being present at parade. They had no packing to do, and fewer purchases to + make. A ball or two of stout string, for, as Peter said, string is always + handy, and a large pocket-knife, each with a variety of blades, were the + principal items. They had a ring put to the knives, so that they could + sling them round the waist. They had, therefore, nothing to do but to + amuse themselves, and this they did with a heartiness which astonished the + other boys, and proved conclusively that they did not want to be + unsociable. They hired a boat for a sail and took five or six other boys + across to Ryde, only just returning in time for tattoo, and they played + such a number of small practical jokes, such as putting a handful of peas + into the bugles and other wind instruments, that the band-master declared + that he thought that they were all bewitched, and he threatened to thrash + the boys all round, because he could not find out who had done it. + </p> + <p> + Especially angry was the man who played the big drum. This was a gigantic + negro, named Sam, a kind-hearted fellow, constantly smiling, except when + the thought of his own importance made him assume a particularly grave + appearance. He was a general favorite, although the boys were rather + afraid of him, for he was apt to get into a passion if any jokes were + attempted upon him, and of all offences the greatest was to call him + Sambo. Now none of the men ventured upon this, for when he first joined, + Sam had fought two or three desperate battles on this ground, and his + great strength and the insensibility of his head to blows had invariably + given him the victory. But, treated with what he conceived proper respect, + Sam was one of the best-tempered and best-natured fellows in the regiment; + and he himself, when he once cooled down, was perfectly ready to join in + the laugh against himself, even after he had been most put out by a joke. + </p> + <p> + The day before the regiment was to embark, the officers gave a lawn party; + a large number of ladies were present, and the band was, of course, to + play. The piece which the bandmaster had selected for the commencement + began with four distinct beats of the big drum. Just before it began, + Captain Manley saw Tom and Peter, who with some of the other boys had + brought the music-stands into the ground, with their faces bright with + anticipated fun. + </p> + <p> + "What is the joke, boys?" he asked good-humoredly, as he passed them. + </p> + <p> + "I can't tell you, sir," Tom said; "but if you walk up close to the band, + and watch Sam's face when he begins, you will be amused, I think." + </p> + <p> + "Those are regular young pickles," Captain Manley said to the lady he was + walking with; "they are Etonians who have run away from home, and are up + to all kinds of mischief, but are the pluckiest and most straightforward + youngsters imaginable. I have no doubt that they are up to some trick with + our black drummer." + </p> + <p> + On their way to where the band was preparing to play, Captain Manley said + a word or two to several of the other officers, consequently there was + quite a little party standing watching the band when their leader lifted + his baton for the overture to begin. + </p> + <p> + There was nothing that Sam liked better than for the big drum to commence, + and with his head thrown well back and an air of extreme importance, he + lifted his arm and brought it down with what should have been a sounding + blow upon the drum. To his astonishment and to the surprise of all the + band, no deep boom was heard, only a low muffled sound. Mechanically Sam + raised his other arm and let it fall with a similar result. Sam looked a + picture of utter astonishment and dismay, with his eyes opened to their + fullest, and he gave vent to a loud cry, which completed the effect + produced by his face, and set most of those looking on, and even the band + themselves, into a roar of laughter. Sam now examined his sticks, they + appeared all right to the eye, but directly he felt them his astonishment + was turned into rage. They were perfectly soft. Taking out his knife he + cut them open, and found that the balls were merely filled with a wad of + soft cotton, the necessary weight being given by pieces of lead fastened + round the end of the stick inside the ball with waxed thread. + </p> + <p> + Sam was too enraged to say more than his usual exclamation of + astonishment, "Golly!" and he held out his drumsticks to be examined with + the face of a black statue of surprise. + </p> + <p> + Even the band-master was obliged to laugh as he took the sticks from Sam's + hand to examine them. + </p> + <p> + "These are not your sticks at all, Sam," he said, looking closely at them. + "Here, boy," he called to Tom, who might have been detected from the fact + of his being the only person present with a serious face, "run to the + band-room and see if you can find the sticks." + </p> + <p> + In a few minutes Tom returned with the real drumsticks, which, he said + truly, he had found on the shelf where they were usually kept. After that + things went on as usual; Sam played with a sulky fury. His dignity was + injured, and he declared over and over again that if he could "find de + rascal who did it, by jingo, I pound him to squash!" and there was no + doubt from his look that he thoroughly meant what he said. However, no + inquiries could bring to light the author of the trick. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0005" id="link2HCH0005"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER V. — OVERBOARD. + </h2> + <p> + There were no lighter hearts than those of Tom and Peter Scudamore on + board the transport "Nancy," as, among the hearty cheers of the troops on + board, and the waving of hats and handkerchiefs from friends who had come + out in small boats to say good-bye for the last time, she weighed anchor, + and set sail in company with some ten or twelve other transports, and + under convoy of two ships of war. It would be difficult to imagine a + prettier scene. The guns fired, the bands of the various regiments played, + and the white sails opened out bright in the sun as the sailors swarmed + into the rigging, anxious to outvie each other. Even the soldiers pulled + and hauled at the ropes, and ran round with the capstan bars to get the + anchors apeak. Tom and Peter, of course, had, like the other boys, got + very much in the way in their desire to assist, and, having been once or + twice knocked over by the rush of men coming along with ropes, they wisely + gave it up, and leaned over the side to enjoy the scene. + </p> + <p> + "This is splendid, Tom, isn't it?" + </p> + <p> + "Glorious, Peter; but it's blowing pretty strong. I am afraid that we + sha'n't find it quite so glorious when we get out of the shelter of the + island." + </p> + <p> + Peter laughed. "No; I suppose we sha'n't all look as jolly as we do now by + night-time. However, the wind is nor'-westerly, which will help us along + nicely, if, as I heard one of the sailors say just now, it does not go + round to the south." + </p> + <p> + "Bugler, sound companies one, two, and three to breakfast." + </p> + <p> + The order interrupted the conversation, and, for the next hour, the boys + had little time for talk. Half the regiment was on board the "Nancy," and, + after breakfast, the men were divided into three watches, of which one was + always to be on deck, for the ship was very crowded, and there was + scarcely room for all the men to be below together. The boys were in the + same watch, for the day previous to starting Tom had been appointed bugler + to the 2d Company, Peter to the 3d. The 1st Company, or Grenadiers, were + in the watch with the band, the 2d and 3d Companies were together, and the + 4th and 5th. + </p> + <p> + Tom was very ill for the first two days of the voyage, while Peter did not + feel the slightest effects from the motion. Upon the third day the wind + dropped suddenly, and the vessels rolled heavily in the swell, with their + sails flapping against the masts. Tom came up that morning upon deck + feeling quite well again, and the boys were immensely amused at seeing the + attempts of the soldiers to move about, the sudden rushes, and the heavy + falls. A parade had been ordered to take place; but as no one could have + stood steady without holding on, it was abandoned as impossible. The men + sat about under the bulwarks, and a few amused themselves and the rest by + trying to play various games, such as laying a penny on the deck, and + seeing which would pitch another to lay nearest to it, from a distance of + five yards. The difficulty of balancing oneself in a heavily rolling + vessel, and of pitching a penny with any degree of accuracy, is great, and + the manner in which the coins, instead of coming down flat and remaining + there, rolled away into the scuppers, the throwers not unfrequently + following them, produced fits of laughter. + </p> + <p> + Tom was still feeling weak from his two days' illness, and was not + disposed actively to enter into the fun; but Peter enjoyed the heavy + rolling, and was all over the ship. Presently he saw Sam, the black + drummer, sitting in a dark corner below quietly asleep; his cap was beside + him, and the idea at once occurred to Peter that here was a great + opportunity for a joke. He made his way to the caboose, and begged the + cook to give him a handful of flour. The cook at first refused, but was + presently coaxed into doing so, and Peter stole to where Sam was asleep, + and put the flour into his cap, relying that, in the darkness, Sam would + put it on without noticing it. Then, going up to the deck above, Peter put + his head down the hatchway, and shouted loudly, "Sam!" + </p> + <p> + The negro woke at the sound of his name. "What is it?" he asked. Receiving + no reply, he got on to his feet, muttering, "Some one call Sam, that for + certain, can't do without Sam, always want here, want there. I go up and + see." + </p> + <p> + So saying, he put on his cap, and made his way up to the upper deck. As he + stood at the hatchway and looked round, there was, first a titter, and + then a roar of laughter from the men sitting or standing along by the + bulwarks. In putting on his cap some of the flour had fallen out, and had + streaked his face with white. Sam was utterly unconscious that he was the + object of the laughter, and said to one of the men nearest to him, "Who + call Sam?" + </p> + <p> + The man could not reply, but Tom, who was sitting close by, said, "It was + no one here, Sam, it must have been the bandmaster; there he is, close to + the quarter-deck." + </p> + <p> + Sam made his way along towards the point indicated, and as he did so some + of the officers upon the quarter-deck caught sight of him. "Just look at + Sambo," Carruthers exclaimed, "somebody has been larking with him again. + Look how all the men are laughing, and he evidently has no suspicion of + the figure he is." + </p> + <p> + The sergeant, who, the bandmaster having remained at the depôt, was now + acting as chief of the band, did not see Sam until the latter was close to + him. "You want me, sergeant?" + </p> + <p> + Sergeant Wilson looked up, and was astonished. + </p> + <p> + "What on earth have you been doing to yourself, Sam?" he asked. + </p> + <p> + "Me been having little nap down below," Sam said. + </p> + <p> + "Yes; but your face, man. What have you been doing to your face?" + </p> + <p> + Sam, in his turn, looked astonished. "Nothing whatsomeber, sargeant." + </p> + <p> + "Take off your cap, man, and look inside it." Sam did as ordered; and as + he removed the cap, and the powder fell from it all over his face and + shoulders, there was a perfect shout of laughter from the soldiers and + crew, who had been looking on, and the officers, looking down from the + rail of the quarter-deck, retired to laugh unnoticed. + </p> + <p> + The astonishment and rage of Sam were unbounded, and he gave a perfect + yell of surprise and fury. He stamped wildly for a minute or two, and + then, with a sudden movement rushed up on to the quarter-deck with his cap + in his hand. The colonel, who was holding on by the shrouds, and talking + with the major, in ignorance of what was going on, was perfectly astounded + at this sudden vision of the irate negro, and neither he nor the major + could restrain their laughter. + </p> + <p> + "Scuse me, colonel, sah, for de liberty," Sam burst out; "but look at me, + sah; is dis right, sah, is it right to make joke like dis on de man dat + play de big drum of de regiment?" + </p> + <p> + "No, no, Sam; not at all right," the colonel said, with difficulty. "If + you report who has played the trick upon you, I shall speak to him very + seriously; but, Sam, I should have thought that you were quite big enough + to take the matter in your own hands." + </p> + <p> + "Me big enough, Massah Colonel, me plenty big; but me not able to find + him." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Sam, it is carrying a joke too far; still, it is only a trick off + duty, and I am afraid that it is beyond my power to interfere." + </p> + <p> + Sam thought for a moment, and, having by this time cooled down from his + first paroxysm of rage, he said, "Beg pardon, massa, you quite right, no + business of any one but Sam; but Sam too angry to 'top to think. Scuse + liberty, colonel," and Sam retired from the quarter-deck, and made a bolt + below down the nearest hatchway, when he plunged his head into a bucket of + water, and soon restored it to its usual ebony hue. + </p> + <p> + Then he went to the cook and tried to find out to whom he had given flour, + but the cook replied at once, "Lor, I've given flour to the men of each + mess to make puddings of, about thirty of them," and Sam felt as far off + as ever. + </p> + <p> + Presently, however, a big sailor began to make fun of him, and Sam + retorted by knocking him down, after which there was a regular fight, + which was carried on under the greatest difficulty, owing to the rolling + of the ship. At last Sambo got the best of it, and this restored him so + thoroughly to a good temper that he was able to join in the laugh at + himself, reserving, however, his right to "knock de rascal who did it into + a squash." + </p> + <p> + The following day the weather changed, a wind sprang up nearly from the + north, which increased rapidly, until toward afternoon it was blowing half + a gale, before which the whole fleet, with their main and topsails set, + ran southward at great speed. A heavy cross sea was running, the wares + raised by the gale clashing with the heavy swell previously rolling in + from the westward, and so violent and sudden were the lurches and rolls of + the "Nancy" that the master feared that her masts would go. + </p> + <p> + "How tremendously she rolls, Tom." + </p> + <p> + "Tremendously; the deck seems almost upright, and the water right under + our feet each time she goes over. She feels as if she were going to turn + topsy-turvy each roll. It's bad enough on deck; but it will be worse down + below." + </p> + <p> + "A great deal worse, Peter, it's nearly dark already; it will strike eight + bells in a minute or two, and then we shall have to go down. There's no + danger, of course, of the ship turning over, but it won't be pleasant down + below. Look out, Peter!" + </p> + <p> + The exclamation was caused by an awful crash. The ship had given a + tremendous lurch, when the long-boat, which was stowed amidships, suddenly + tore away from its fastenings and came crashing down. It passed within + three feet of where the boys were sitting, and completely tore away the + bulwark, leaving a great gap in the side, where it had passed through. + "Look, Tom, Sam's overboard!" Peter exclaimed. + </p> + <p> + Sam had been sitting on the bulwark, a few feet from them, holding on by a + shroud, when the boat came down upon him; with a cry he had let go of the + shroud and started back, falling into the water just as the boat struck + the bulwark. "There he is, Tom," Peter said, as he saw the black only a + few yards from the side. "He is hurt, come on," catching up the end of a + long rope coiled up on the deck close to their feet, the boys jumped + overboard together. A dozen strokes took them up to Sam; but the black + hull of the ship had already glanced past them. They could hear loud + shouts, but could not distinguish a word. + </p> + <p> + "Quick, round him, Peter!" and, in a moment, the boys twisted the rope + round the body of the black, and knotted it just as the drag of the ship + tightened it. Thus Sam's safety was secured, but the strain was so + tremendous as they tore through the water, that it was impossible for the + boys to hold on, and, in a moment, they were torn from their hold. + </p> + <p> + "All right, Peter," Tom said cheerily, as they dashed the water from their + eyes, "there is the boat." + </p> + <p> + The remains of the boat were not ten yards distant, and in a few strokes + they had gained it. It was stove in and broken, but still held together, + floating on a level with the water's edge. With some trouble the boys got + inside her, and sat down on the bottom, so that their heads were just out + of water. + </p> + <p> + Then they had time to look round. The ship was already disappearing in the + gathering darkness. + </p> + <p> + "This boat will soon go to pieces, Tom," was Peter's first remark. + </p> + <p> + "I expect it will, Peter; but we must stick to its pieces. We had better + get off our boots. The water is pretty warm, that's one comfort." + </p> + <p> + "Do you think the ship will come back for us, Tom?" + </p> + <p> + "I don't think she can, Peter; at any rate, it is certain she can't find + us, it would take a long time to bring her round, and then, you see, she + could not sail straight back against the wind." + </p> + <p> + "Look here, Tom, I remember when I climbed up to look into the boats + yesterday that there were some little casks lashed under the seats, and a + sailor told me they were always kept full of water in case the boats were + wanted suddenly. If they are still there we might empty them out, and they + could keep us afloat any time." + </p> + <p> + "Hurrah! Peter, capital, let's see." + </p> + <p> + To their great delight the boys found four small water-kegs fastened under + the seats. Three of these they emptied, and fastening one of them to that + which they had left full, and then each taking hold of one of the slings + which were fastened to the kegs for convenience of carriage, they waited + quietly. In less than ten minutes from the time when they first gained + their frail refuge, a great wave broke just upon them, and completely + smashed up the remains of the boat. They had cut off some rope from the + mast, which they found with its sail furled ready for use in the boat, and + now roughly lashed themselves together, face to face, so that they had a + keg on each side. They had also fastened a long piece of rope to the other + kegs, so that they would float near them. + </p> + <p> + It was a long and terrible night for them, generally their heads and + chests were well above the water, but at times a wave would break with its + white crest, and, for a time, the foam would be over their heads. + Fortunately the water was warm, and the wind fell a good deal. The boys + talked occasionally to each other, and kept up each other's courage. Once + or twice, in spite of the heavy sea, they were so much overcome with + exhaustion that they dozed uneasily for a while, with their heads upon + each other's shoulders, and great was their feeling of relief and pleasure + when morning began to break. + </p> + <p> + "It is going to be a splendid day, Peter, and the wind is dropping fast." + </p> + <p> + "Look, Tom," Peter said, "there are some of the planks of the boat jammed + in with the kegs." + </p> + <p> + It was as Peter said; the two kegs, one empty and the other full, were + floating about ten yards off, at the length of the rope by which they were + attached to the boys, while with them was a confused mass of wreckage of + the boat. + </p> + <p> + "That is capital, Peter, we will see if we can't make a raft presently." + </p> + <p> + As the sun rose and warmed the air, the boys strength and spirits revived, + and in a few hours they were so refreshed that they determined to set + about their raft. The wind had now entirely dropped, the waves were still + very high, but they came in long, smooth, regular swells, over which they + rose and fell almost imperceptibly. + </p> + <p> + "They must be rolling a good deal more in the 'Nancy' than we are here, + Peter. Now, the first thing is to have a drink. What a blessing it is we + have water." With their knives they soon got the bung out of the + water-keg, and each took a long drink, and then carefully closed it up + again. + </p> + <p> + "There, Peter, we have drunk as much as we wanted this time; but we must + be careful, there is no saying how long we may be before we are picked up. + Hurrah, Peter, here are the masts and sails, so we shall have plenty of + cord." + </p> + <p> + It took the boys nearly three hours to complete their task to their + satisfaction. When it was concluded they had the three empty kegs lashed + in a triangle about five feet apart, while two planks crossing the + triangle, assisted to keep all firm and tight; floating in the center of + the triangle was the keg of water. "There, I don't think we can improve + that, Peter," Tom said at last, "now, let us get on and try it." They did + so, and, to their great delight, found that it floated a few inches above + water. "We may as well get the masts on board, Peter, and let the sails + tow alongside. They may come in useful; and now the first thing is to dry + ourselves and our clothes." + </p> + <p> + The clothes were soon spread out to dry, and the boys luxuriated in the + warmth of the sun. + </p> + <p> + "What great, smooth waves these are, Tom, sometimes we are down in a + valley which runs miles long, and then we are up on a hill." + </p> + <p> + "Here we lay, all the day, in the bay of Biscay, oh!" Tom laughed. "I only + hope that the wished-for morrow may bring the sail in sight, Peter. + However, we can hold on for a few days, I suppose. That is a four-gallon + keg, so that we have got a quart of water each for eight days, and hunger + isn't so bad to bear as thirst. We have pretty well done for our uniforms, + our bugles are the only things that have not suffered." + </p> + <p> + For the boys' companies being on deck at the time of the accident, they + both had their bugles on when they jumped overboard. + </p> + <p> + "Our last upset was when that bargee canted us over at Eton, rather a + different business that, Peter." + </p> + <p> + "My shirt is not dry yet, Tom; but I shall put it on again, for the sun is + too hot to be pleasant." + </p> + <p> + Tom followed Peter's example. + </p> + <p> + "Do you think, Tom, that we had better try to get up a sort of sail and + make for land, or remain where we are?" + </p> + <p> + "Remain where we are, Peter, I should say. I suppose we must be a hundred + miles from the French coast, and even if the wind blew fair we should be a + long time getting there, and with the certainty of a prison when we + arrived. Still, if there were a strong west wind, I suppose it would be + our best way; as it is we have nothing to do but to wait quietly, and hope + for a ship. We are in the right line, and there must be lots of vessels on + their way, besides those which sailed with us, for Portsmouth. So we must + keep watch and watch. Now, Peter, you lie down on that plank, it is just + about long enough, you shall have two hours' sleep, and then I'll have + two, after that we will have four hours each." + </p> + <p> + "How are we to count time?" Peter said laughing. + </p> + <p> + "I never thought of that," Tom said, looking at his watch. "Of course it + has stopped. We must guess as near as we can; at any rate, you go to sleep + first, and, when I am too sleepy to keep watch any longer, I will wake you + up." + </p> + <p> + So passed that day and the next night. A light breeze sprung up from the + southwest, and the sun again shone out brightly. + </p> + <p> + "I feel as if I wanted breakfast horribly," Peter said, with an attempt at + a smile. "Do you think that there is any possibility of catching + anything?" + </p> + <p> + "We have nothing to make hooks with, Peter, and nothing to bait them with + if we had." + </p> + <p> + "There are lots of tiny fish swimming all about, Tom, if we could but + catch them." + </p> + <p> + Tom was silent for awhile; then he said, "Look here, Peter. Let us cut a + piece off the sail about five feet long, and say three feet wide, double + it longways, and sew up the ends so as to make a bag; we can unravel some + string, and make holes with our knives. Then we can sink it down two or + three feet, and watch it; and when we see that some little fish have got + in it, we can draw it up very gently, and, by raising it gradually from + the sea, the water will run out, and we shall catch the fish." + </p> + <p> + Peter agreed that at any rate it was worth trying; for, even if it did not + succeed, it was better for them to be doing something than sitting idle. + The sail and the floating wreckage were pulled alongside, and the boys set + to work. In three hours a large and shallow bag was made, with some + improvements upon Tom's original plan. The mouth was kept open by two + crossed pieces of wood, and four cords from the corners were attached to + the end of the oar which formed their fishing-rod. At last it was + finished, and the bag lowered. + </p> + <p> + To the horror of the boys, it was discovered that it would not sink. They + were ready to cry with vexation, for the want of food had made them feel + faint and weak. + </p> + <p> + "What have we got that is heavy?" Tom asked in despair. + </p> + <p> + "I have got fourpence in halfpence, Tom, and there are our knives and + watches." + </p> + <p> + Their pockets were ransacked, and the halfpence, knives, and watches were + placed in the bottom of the bag and lowered. Still the wood-work kept + afloat. + </p> + <p> + "There are the bugles, Tom," Peter cried in delight. These had been + fastened to the raft, and were now hastily untied and placed in the canvas + bag. + </p> + <p> + It sank now, and the boys lowered it five or six feet, so that they could + partly see into it. "There are lots of little fish swimming about, Tom," + Peter said in a whisper. "Some are almost as long as one's hand. Do you + think that they will go in, Tom?" + </p> + <p> + "I hope the glitter of the bugles and watches will attract them, Peter." + </p> + <p> + "There, Tom, there—I saw a whole swarm of little ones go in." + </p> + <p> + "Wait a minute or two, Peter, to let them get well down, and then draw up + as quietly as possible." + </p> + <p> + Very cautiously the boys raised the point of their rod until the top of + the square-mouthed bag was level with the surface; then they brought it + close to them and looked in, and as they did so gave a simultaneous cheer. + There, in the bottom of the canvas, two feet below them, were a number of + little fish moving about. Raising the rod still higher, they gradually + lifted the net out of the sea, the water running quickly off as they did + so, and then they proceeded to examine their prize. + </p> + <p> + "We will take out one and one, Peter; give them a nip as you take them up, + that will kill them." There were two fish of about three inches long, + another three or four of two inches, and some thirty or forty the size of + minnows. It was scarcely more than a mouthful each, but it was a stay for + a moment to their stomachs, and no one ever said a thanksgiving with + deeper feeling and heartiness than did the boys when they had emptied + their canvas net. + </p> + <p> + "We need not be anxious about food now, Peter; if we can catch these in + five minutes, we can get enough each day to satisfy us. They quench the + thirst too. We must limit ourselves to half a pint of water a day, and we + can hold on for a fortnight. We are safe to be picked up before that." + </p> + <p> + All the afternoon and evening the boys continued to let down and draw up + their net, sometimes bringing in only a few tiny fish, sometimes getting + half a dozen of the larger kind. By nightfall they had satisfied the + cravings of hunger, and felt stronger and better. One or two sails had + been seen during the day, but always at such distances that it was evident + at once that they could not pass within hail. That night, fatigued with + their exertions, both laid down and went to sleep until morning, and slept + more comfortably than before; for they had fastened a piece of the sail + tightly on the top of the raft, and lay softly suspended in that, instead + of being balanced upon a narrow and uncomfortable plank. They felt new + creatures when they woke, pulled up their net, had a mouthful of raw fish, + took off their clothes, and had a swim, and then set to earnestly to fish. + The sun was brighter, and the fish in consequence kept deeper than upon + the preceding day; still by evening they had caught enough to take the + edge off, if not to satisfy, their hunger. The fishing, however, during + the last hours of daylight was altogether neglected, for behind them they + could see a sail, which appeared as if it might possibly come close enough + to observe them. There was still the long, steady swell coming in from the + Atlantic, and a light breeze was blowing from the north. The boys had been + so intent upon their fishing, that they had not noticed her until she was + within nine or ten miles of them. "She will not be up for an hour and a + half, Peter," Tom said, "and the sun will be down long before that. I fear + that the chance of their seeing us is very small indeed. However, we will + try. Let us get the net out of the water, and hold it and the oar up. It + is possible that some one may see the canvas with a telescope before the + sun goes down. Take the things out of the net." + </p> + <p> + The oar with the canvas bag was elevated, and the boys anxiously watched + the course of the vessel. She was a large ship, but they could only see + her when they rose upon the top of the long smooth waves. "I should think + that she will pass within a mile of us, Peter," Tom said, after half an + hour's watching, "but I fear that she will not be much closer. How + unfortunate she had not come along an hour earlier. She would have been + sure to see us if it had been daylight. I don't think that there is much + chance now, for there is no moon. However, thank God, we can hold on very + well now, and next time we may have better luck." + </p> + <p> + The sun had set more than half an hour before the ship came abreast of + them. They had evidently not been seen. + </p> + <p> + "Now, Peter," Tom said, "let us both hallo together; the wind is very + light, and it is just possible they may hear us." + </p> + <p> + Again and again the boys shouted, but the ship sailed steadily on. Peter + dashed the tears aside, and Tom said, with a quiver in his voice, "Never + mind, Peter; better luck next time, old boy. God has been so good to us, + that I feel quite confident we shall be saved." + </p> + <p> + "So do I, Tom," Peter said. "It was only a disappointment for a minute. We + may as well put the oar down, for my arm and back ache holding it." + </p> + <p> + "Mind how you do it, Peter. If we let the end go through the canvas, we + shall lose our watches and bugles, and then we shall not be able to fish." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, Tom, the bugles!" + </p> + <p> + "What, Peter?" Tom said, astonished. + </p> + <p> + "We can make them hear, Tom, don't you see?" + </p> + <p> + "Hurrah, Peter! so we can. What a fool I was to forget it!" + </p> + <p> + In a moment the bugles rang out the assembly across the water. Again and + again the sharp, clear sound rose on the quiet evening air. + </p> + <p> + "Look, Peter, there are men going up the rigging to look round. Sound + again!" + </p> + <p> + Again and again they sounded the call, and then they saw the ship's head + come round, and her bow put towards them, and then they fell on their + knees and thanked God that they were saved. + </p> + <p> + In ten minutes the ship was close to them, thrown up into the wind, a boat + was lowered, and in another minute or two was alongside. + </p> + <p> + "Hallo!" the officer in charge exclaimed, "two boys, all alone. Here, help + them in, lads—that's it; now pull for the ship. Here, boys, take a + little brandy from this flask. How long have you been on that raft?" + </p> + <p> + "It is three days since we went overboard, sir; but we were in the water + for about eighteen hours before we made the raft." + </p> + <p> + Tom and Peter drank a little brandy, and felt better for it; but they were + weaker than they thought, for they had to be helped up the side of the + ship. A number of officers were grouped round the gangway, and the boys + saw that they were on board a vessel of war. + </p> + <p> + "Only these boys?" asked the captain in surprise of the officer who had + brought them on board. + </p> + <p> + "That is all, sir." + </p> + <p> + "Doctor, you had better see to them," the captain said. "If they are + strong enough to talk, after they have had some soup, let them come to my + cabin; if not, let them turn in in the sick bay, and I will see them in + the morning. One question though, boys. Are there any others about—any + one for me to look for or pick up?" + </p> + <p> + "No one else, sir," Tom said, and then followed the doctor aft. A basin of + soup and a glass of sherry did wonders for the boys, and in an hour they + proceeded to the captain's cabin, dressed in clothes which the doctor had + borrowed from two of the midshipmen for them, for their own could never be + worn again; indeed, they had not brought their jackets from the raft, + those garments having shrunk so from the water, that the boys had not been + able to put them on again, after first taking them off to dry. + </p> + <p> + The doctor accompanied them, and in the captain's cabin they found the + first lieutenant, who had been in charge of the boat which picked them up. + </p> + <p> + "I am glad to see you looking so much better," the captain said as they + entered. "Sit down. Do you know," he went on with a smile, "I do not think + that any of us would have slept had you not recovered sufficiently to tell + your story to-night. We have been puzzling over it in vain. How you two + boys came to be adrift alone on a raft, made up of three water-kegs, as + Mr. Armstrong tells me, and how you came to have two bugles with you on + the raft, is altogether beyond us." + </p> + <p> + "The last matter is easily explained, sir," Tom said. "My brother and + myself are buglers in H.M.'s Regiment of Norfolk Rangers, and as we were + on duty when we went overboard, we had our bugles slung over our + shoulders." + </p> + <p> + "Buglers!" the captain said in surprise. "Why from your appearance and + mode of expressing yourselves, I take you to be gentlemen's sons." + </p> + <p> + "So we are, sir," Tom said quietly, "and I hope gentlemen—at any + rate we have been Etonians. But we have lost our father, and are now + buglers in the Rangers." + </p> + <p> + "Well, lads," the captain said after a pause, "and now tell us how you + came upon this little raft?" + </p> + <p> + Tom related modestly the story of their going overboard from the "Nancy," + of the formation of the raft, and of their after proceedings. Their + hearers were greatly astonished at the story; and the captain said, "Young + gentlemen, you have done a very gallant action, and have behaved with a + coolness and bravery which would have done credit to old sailors. Had your + father been alive he might have been proud indeed of you. I should be + proud had you been my sons. If you are disposed to change services I will + write directly we reach the Tagus to obtain your discharge, and will give + you midshipmen's berths on board this ship. Don't answer now; you can + think it over by the time we reach Portugal. I will not detain you now; a + night's rest will set you up. Mr. Armstrong will introduce you to the + midshipmen to-morrow; you are passengers here now, and will mess with + them. Good-night." + </p> + <p> + It was not many minutes before the boys were asleep in their hammocks. If + people's ears really tingle when they are being spoken about, Tom and + Peter would have had but little sleep that night. The first lieutenant + related the circumstances to the other lieutenants; the second lieutenant, + whose watch it was, told the gunner, who related it to the petty officers; + the doctor told his mates, who retailed the story to the midshipmen; and + so gradually it went over the whole ship, and officers and men agreed that + it was one of the pluckiest and coolest things ever done. + </p> + <p> + The boys slept until nearly breakfast time, and were just dressed when Mr. + Armstrong came for them and took them to the midshipmen's berth, where + they were received with a warmth and heartiness which quite surprised + them. The midshipmen and mates pressed forward to shake hands with them, + and the stiflingly close little cock-pit was the scene of an ovation. The + boys were quite glad when the handshaking was over, and they sat down to + the rough meal which was then usual among midshipmen. As the vessel had + only left England four days before, the fare was better than it would have + been a week later, for there was butter, cold ham and tongue upon the + table. After breakfast they were asked to tell the story over again, and + this they did with great modesty. Many questions were asked, and it was + generally regretted that they were not sailors. Upon going up on deck + there was quite an excitement among the sailors to get a look at them, and + the gunner and other petty officers came up and shook hands with them + heartily, and the boys wished from the depths of their hearts that people + would not make such a fuss about nothing; for, as Tom said to Peter, "Of + course we should not have jumped overboard if we had thought that we could + not have kept hold of the rope." + </p> + <p> + That day they dined in the cabin with the captain, who, after the officers + present had withdrawn, asked them if they would tell him about their past + lives. This the boys did frankly, and took the opportunity of explaining + that they had chosen the army because the enemies' fleet having been + destroyed, there was less chance of active service in the navy than with + the army just starting for Lisbon, and that their uncle having commanded + the regiment that they were in, they had entered it, and had received so + much kindness that they had fair reason to hope that they would eventually + obtain commissions. Hence, while thanking him most warmly for his offer, + they had decided to go on in the path that they had chosen. + </p> + <p> + The captain remarked that, after what they had said, although he should + have been glad to have them with him, he thought that they had decided + rightly. + </p> + <p> + The next morning, when the boys woke, they were surprised at the absence + of any motion of the vessel, and upon going on deck they found that they + were running up the Tagus, and that Lisbon was in sight. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0006" id="link2HCH0006"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VI. — PORTUGAL. + </h2> + <p> + The boys were delighted with the appearance of the Tagus, covered as it + now was with a fleet of transports and merchantmen. As they were looking + at it, the officer commanding the marines on board, who had talked a good + deal to them upon the preceding day, came up to them. "I thought that you + would be in a fix about clothes, my lads," he said. "You could not very + well join in these midshipman's uniforms, so I set the tailor yesterday to + cut down a couple of spare suits of my corps. The buttons will not be + right, but you can easily alter that when you join. You had better go + below at once and see if the things fit pretty well. I have told the + tailor to take them to the cock-pit and if they do not fit they can alter + them at once." + </p> + <p> + Thanking the officer very much for his thoughtful kindness, and much + relieved in mind—for they had already been wondering what they + should do—the boys ran below, and found that the tailor had guessed + their sizes pretty correctly, aided as he had been by the trousers they + had worn when they came on board. A few alterations were necessary, and + these he promised to get finished in a couple of hours. They had scarcely + gone on deck again when the anchor was let fall, and a boat was lowered, + in order that the captain might proceed to shore with the despatches of + which he was the bearer. + </p> + <p> + Just as he was upon the point of leaving the deck, his eye fell upon the + boys. "I shall be back again in an hour or two," he said; "do not leave + until I return. I will find out where your regiment is, and if it has + marched I will give you a certificate of how I picked you up, otherwise + you may be stopped on the way, and get into a scrape as two boys who have + strayed away from their regiment." + </p> + <p> + So saying, the captain got into his boat and rowed to shore. It was one + o'clock before he returned. The boys had dinner with the gunroom officers, + then changed their dress, and had now the appearance of buglers in the + marines. + </p> + <p> + The captain at once sent for them. "Your regiment went on yesterday with + the rest of the division. It halts to-day ten miles out of the town. There + is the certificate I spoke of. Mr. Armstrong is just going off with two + boats' crew to assist in unloading stores; I have asked him to hand you + over to the charge of some officer going up with a convoy. And now + good-bye, lads. I wish you every luck, and hope that some day or other you + may win your epaulets." + </p> + <p> + With renewed thanks for his kindness, the boys went up on deck. There they + shook hands and said good-bye to all the officers and midshipmen. As they + were waiting while the boats were being lowered, two of the sailors went + aft to the captain, who had come up from below and was walking alone on + the quarter-deck, and, with a touch of the hat, the spokesman said, "Your + honor, we're come to ax as how, if your honor has no objection, we might + just give a parting cheer to those 'ere youngsters." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Jones," the captain said, smiling, "it's rather an unusual thing + for the crew of one of His Majesty's ships to cheer two young soldiers." + </p> + <p> + "It is unusual, your honor, mighty unusual, because soldiers ain't in + general of much account at sea; but you see, your honor, this ain't a + usual circumstance, nohow. These here boys, which ain't much more than + babbies, have done what there ain't many men, not even of those who are + born and bred to the sea, would have done; and we should just like to give + them a bit of a cheer for good luck." + </p> + <p> + "Very well, Jones, tell the men they can do as they like." + </p> + <p> + Accordingly, as the boys took their seats in the boat they were surprised + at seeing the crew clustering to the side of the ship, while some of the + men ran up the rigging. + </p> + <p> + "What can the men be up to?" Tom asked Mr. Armstrong in surprise. + </p> + <p> + The lieutenant smiled, for he knew what was coming. + </p> + <p> + "Sheer off, men," he said, and as he did so the boatswain of the ship gave + the word, "Now, lads, three cheers for them boys; may they have the luck + they deserve." + </p> + <p> + Three thundering cheers burst from the whole crew, the men in the boats + tossing their oars in the naval fashion of acknowledgment of the salute. + Tom and Peter, astonished and affected, stood up, took off their caps, and + waved their hands in thanks to the crowd of faces looking down upon them, + and then sat down again and wiped their eyes. + </p> + <p> + "Row on," the lieutenant said, and the oars fell in the water with a + splash; one more cheer arose, and then the boats rowed for the + landing-place. The boys were too much affected to look up or speak, until + they reached the shore, nor did they notice a boat which rowed past them + upon its way to the vessel they had left, just after they had started. It + contained an officer in a general's uniform. The boat steered to the + ship's side, and the officer ascended the ladder. The captain was on deck. + "Ah, Craufurd," he said, "this is an unexpected pleasure." + </p> + <p> + "I have just come back from my division for a few hours, Merivale; there + are a lot of stores which are essential, and some of my artillery is not + landed, so I thought I could hurry things up a bit. My spare charger, and + most of the chargers of my staff, are being landed, too; the ship they + came in was a day or two late; and as I had to confer with the Portuguese + Minister of War, I am killing a good many birds with one stone. I heard + you had just come in, and as I was on board the "Clio" about my charger, I + thought it would not be much out of my way to run round and shake hands + with you." + </p> + <p> + "I am very glad you did. Come into my cabin; you can spare time to take + some lunch, I hope." + </p> + <p> + While they were at lunch General Craufurd remarked, "So you have just lost + one of your officers, I see; promoted to another ship, eh?" + </p> + <p> + "Lost an officer!" Captain Merivale said in surprise. "No, not that I have + heard of. What makes you think so?" + </p> + <p> + "I thought so by the cheering the ship's crew gave that boat that left the + ship just before I came up. There was only a naval lieutenant in her, and + I supposed that he had just got his ship, and I thought by the heartiness + of the cheering what a good fellow he must be." + </p> + <p> + "But it was not the lieutenant the men were cheering," Captain Merivale + said with a smile. + </p> + <p> + "No!" General Craufurd said, surprised. "Why, there was no one else in the + boat. I looked attentively as I passed. There was only a lieutenant, a + midshipman who was steering, the men rowing, and two little marine + buglers, who had their handkerchiefs up to their faces. So you see I took + a very minute survey." + </p> + <p> + "You did indeed," Captain Merivale said, laughing. "Well, it was just + these little buglers that the crew of the ship were cheering." + </p> + <p> + General Craufurd looked up incredulously. "You're joking, Merivale. The + crew of His Majesty's frigate 'Latona' cheer two buglers of marines! No, + no, that won't do." + </p> + <p> + "It is a fact, though, Craufurd, unlikely as it seems, except that the + buglers belong to the Norfolk Rangers, and not to the Marines." + </p> + <p> + "The Rangers! They are in Hill's division. What is it all about? There + must be something very strange about it." + </p> + <p> + "There is indeed," Captain Merivale said, "very strange." And he then + related the whole story to his visitor. + </p> + <p> + "They are trumps indeed," the general said when the narrative was ended, + "and I am very glad that I happened to hear it. I will speak to Hill about + it, and will keep my eye upon them. Be assured they shall have their + epaulets as soon as possible—that is, if their conduct is at all + equal to their pluck. It is the least we can do when, as you say, they + have refused midshipmen's berths to stick to us. And now I must be off." + </p> + <p> + The boat landed General Craufurd at the same landing-place at which Tom + and Peter had disembarked half an hour before. Lieutenant Armstrong had + spoken a few words to the officer who was superintending the landing of + stores and horses, and he, being far too busy to stop to talk, briefly + said that the boys could go up to join their regiment with a convoy of + stores which would start that night. + </p> + <p> + After saying good-bye to their friend the lieutenant, the boys sat down + upon some bales, and were watching with much amusement and interest the + busy scene before them. As General Craufurd passed they rose and saluted. + </p> + <p> + "You are the boys from the 'Latona,' are you not?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, sir," the boys answered in surprise. + </p> + <p> + "Can you ride?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, sir." + </p> + <p> + "Follow me, then." + </p> + <p> + Much surprised, the boys followed the general until he made his way + through the confusion to a group of newly landed horses. Near them were a + couple of mounted Hussars, who, at the sight of the general, rode forward + with his charger. He made a sign to them to wait a moment, and walked up + to the men who were holding the newly landed horses. + </p> + <p> + "Which of you have got charge of two horses?" + </p> + <p> + Several of the men answered at once. + </p> + <p> + "Which of you are servants of officers on my staff?" + </p> + <p> + Three of those who had answered before replied now. + </p> + <p> + "Very well; just put saddles on to two of them. These lads will ride them; + they are going out with me at once; they will hand them over to your + masters." + </p> + <p> + In another five minutes Tom and Peter, to their surprise and delight, were + clattering along through the streets of Lisbon upon two first-rate horses + in company with the two Hussars, while, twenty lengths ahead, trotted + General Craufurd with two officers who had been down to Lisbon upon duty + similar to his own. Once outside the town, the general put his horse into + a gallop, and his followers of course did the same. Once or twice General + Craufurd glanced back to see how the boys rode, for a doubt had crossed + his mind as to whether he had been wise in putting them upon such valuable + horses, but when he saw that they were evidently accustomed to the work, + he paid no further attention to them. + </p> + <p> + The officers riding beside him, however, looked back several times. + </p> + <p> + "What luck we have, to be sure, Tom," Peter said, "and I can't understand + this a bit. How could the general know that we came from the 'Latona'; as + he evidently did, and by the way these officers have looked back twice, I + can't help thinking that he is talking about us." + </p> + <p> + Tom was as puzzled as Peter, but they soon forgot the subject, and engaged + in an animated conversation with the Hussars as to the situation and + position of the army, and the supposed strength and locality of the + French, concerning which they were, of course, in complete ignorance. An + hour and a half's sharp riding took them to Torres Vedras, a small town + which afterwards became celebrated for the tremendous lines which + Wellington erected there. The troops were encamped in its vicinity, the + general having his quarters at the house of the Alcalde, or Mayor. + </p> + <p> + "Your regiment is a mile and a half distant, lads," General Craufurd said + as they drew up at his quarters; "you will have difficulty in finding it + this evening. Sergeant, take these lads round to the house where my + orderlies are quartered, and give them some supper. They can join their + regiment in the morning. I have heard of you, lads, from Captain Merivale, + and shall mention your conduct to General Hill, and be assured I will keep + my eye upon you." + </p> + <p> + The boys were soon asleep upon a heap of straw, and at six next morning + were upon the road, having already had some coffee and bread for + breakfast. They had no difficulty in finding their way, for orderlies were + already galloping about, and the bugle calls came sharp upon their ears. + The division was to march at seven. The Rangers happened to be the first + in advance, so that they passed through the other regiments to arrive at + theirs. + </p> + <p> + The tents were down when they arrived, and packed in readiness for the + bullock carts which stood by. The boys paused a little distance off, and + looked on with delight at the busy scene. At a note on the bugle the tents + and other baggage were stowed in the carts, and then the men hitched on + their knapsacks, unpiled arms, and began to fall into rank. + </p> + <p> + No one noticed the boys as they passed between the groups and approached + the band, who were mustering by the colors, which were as usual placed in + front of the guard tent. + </p> + <p> + "There's Sambo," Tom said; "I am glad they got him safe on board." + </p> + <p> + The negro was the first to perceive the boys as they came close up to him. + As he saw them he gave a sudden start, his eyes opened wider and wider + until the whites showed all round, his teeth chattered, the shiny black of + his face turned to a sort of dirty gray, and he threw up his hands with a + loud cry, "oh, golly, here's dose boys' spirits!" + </p> + <p> + He stepped back, heedless that the big drum was behind him, and the next + moment went back with a crash into it, and remained there with his knees + doubled up and his face looking out between them, too frightened and + horror-struck to make the least movement to extricate himself. + </p> + <p> + For a moment no one noticed him, for at his cry they had all turned to the + boys, and stood as if petrified at seeing those whom they believed had + been drowned before their eyes a week before. The silence did not last + long, the boys bursting into a shout of laughter at Sam's appearance. + </p> + <p> + "Spirits! Sam," Tom said; "not by a long way yet, man. How are you all? + Come, get out of that, Sam and shake hands." And as the band with a shout + crowded round them, the boys helped Sam, who was trembling all over from + the shock and fright, from the drum. + </p> + <p> + For a moment the boys were quite confused and bewildered, for as they + hauled Sam to his feet their comrades of the band pressed round them + cheering, every one trying to shake them by the hand. + </p> + <p> + The news spread like wildfire among the troops, and there was at once a + general rush to the spot. The boys were seized in an instant, and each + raised on the shoulders of two of the grenadiers, and as they made their + appearance above the heads of the crowd a tremendous cheer broke from the + whole regiment. + </p> + <p> + "What can be the matter?" was the general exclamation of the colonel and + officers, who were just finishing their breakfasts in a cottage which + stood close behind the spot where their tents had been pitched in the rear + of the regiment. "What can be the matter?"—and as the cheering + continued there was a general rush to the door. There they stood + astonished at seeing the whole of the men clustered in one spot, shouting + and waving their caps. + </p> + <p> + "What can be the matter?" the colonel said again; "the whole regiment + seems to have gone mad." + </p> + <p> + "We shall know in a minute," Captain Manley said; "they are coming in this + direction." + </p> + <p> + "Look at that fellow Sambo," exclaimed Carruthers; "he looks madder than + all the rest." + </p> + <p> + In spite of the intense surprise which all were feeling, there was a + general laugh, for the black was performing antics like one possessed; his + cap was gone, he jumped, he yelled, he waved his arms, with a drumstick in + each hand, wildly over his head, he twisted round and round; he seemed + really out of his mind. Suddenly he left the crowd, and rushed on ahead at + full speed towards the group of officers, still leaping and yelling and + waving his drumsticks. + </p> + <p> + The officers instinctively drew together as he approached, for they + thought that the gigantic negro was really out of his mind. He stopped + suddenly as he came up to them, and tried to fall into his usual attitude + of attention. + </p> + <p> + "Oh, Massa Colonel," he said in hoarse, sobbing tones, "only to think, + only to think. Scuse Sam, sar, but Sam feel he's going to bust right up + wid joy, massa. Dat no matter, but only to think. Bress de Almighty, sar! + only to think!" + </p> + <p> + None of the officers spoke for a minute in answer to these disjointed + exclamations. They were affected at the man's great emotion. His black + skin was still strangely pale, his eyes were distended, his lips quivered, + tears were rolling down his cheeks, and his huge frame was shaken with + sobs. + </p> + <p> + "Calm yourself, Sam—be calm, my man," the colonel said kindly. "Try + and tell us what has happened. What are the men so excited about? What is + the matter with them?" + </p> + <p> + "Oh, Massa Colonel," Sam said, "me try tell you all 'boat it. Only to + think, sar, dose boys cum back again; dose boys, sar, bress dem, dat + jumped into de water and got drowned just to save dis poor niggar, sar. + Dey cum back again; only tink ob dat!" + </p> + <p> + The officers looked at one another in surprise. + </p> + <p> + "I do believe he means the Scudamores! colonel," Captain Manley exclaimed; + "but no, it is impossible, no one could have lived five minutes in that + sea, and we know that they could not have been picked up, for we were the + last ship in the fleet." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, yes, sar, dat's dem, dey cum back sure enuff," Sam said. + </p> + <p> + Then Carruthers exclaimed, "I do believe it is so; there are a couple of + boys on the shoulders of the men in the middle of the crowd. Yes, and, by + Jove, it is the Scudamores. Hurrah! I am glad." + </p> + <p> + There was a general exclamation of pleasure from the whole group, for the + regret for the boys, who had, as was believed, perished in the performance + of such a gallant action, had been general and sincere, and Captain Manley + lifted his cap and said reverently, "Thank God, these gallant lads are + saved;" and those around, although some of them were but little addicted + to prayer, repeated the words and imitated the action. + </p> + <p> + Carruthers would have stepped forward in his eagerness to greet his former + school-fellows, but Captain Manley laid his hand quietly on his shoulder + and said in a low tone, "Wait, Carruthers, let the colonel welcome them." + </p> + <p> + And now the crowd came up to the cottage, those in front falling back as + they approached, so as to let the grenadiers come forward with their + burden. The boys were lowered to the ground, and stood at once at + attention; their faces were both flushed with excitement, and their eyes + swollen with tears, so much were they both moved by the welcome which had + greeted them. + </p> + <p> + There was a dead silence for a moment, and then Colonel Tritton said in a + loud, clear voice, which was heard all over the throng of men, "I am glad, + lads, to see you back again. I never expected to have seen you again after + we caught a glimpse of you as the sea washed you away. You have seen how + the men have welcomed you, and I can assure you that the pleasure of the + officers that two such gallant young fellows should have been saved is no + less than that of your comrades. A braver act than that which you + performed was never done. I shake hands with you, and congratulate you in + the name of the whole regiment." And, suiting the action to the words, + Colonel Tritton stepped forward and shook the boys warmly by the hand, + amidst a great cheer upon the part of the whole regiment. Then he held up + his hand for silence again. "Bugler, sound the assembly; fall in, my lads, + or we shall be late. Come in here, boys; you can get something to eat, and + tell us in a few words how you were saved, for, even now that I see you it + seems almost impossible." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0007" id="link2HCH0007"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VII. — THE PASSAGE OF THE DUORO—TALAVERA. + </h2> + <p> + Very severe was the drill and discipline, and not very abundant was the + food, and there was a general feeling of pleasure when, by the general + concentration of the army at Coimbra, it was evident that active + operations were about to commence. On the 5th of May 9000 Portuguese, 3000 + Germans, and 13,000 British troops were assembled. Sir Arthur was already + there, and upon the 6th General Beresford marched with 10,000 men, and + orders were issued for the rest of the army to march out early the next + day. + </p> + <p> + The Norfolk Rangers were in high glee that night, and many were the tales + told by the old soldiers of former engagements in which they had taken + part. Next morning, at daybreak, the tents were struck, the baggage + packed, and the wagons loaded. The people of Coimbra came out in crowds to + see the troops march, and many were the blessings and good wishes poured + out as the long line wound through the streets of the city. + </p> + <p> + Hill's division was the last, and the rain was pouring down with great + force by the time they started. The march, however, was not a very long + one, for Beresford's division, which was to operate upon the Upper Duoro, + had a long distance to make, and it was necessary that all should be ready + for simultaneous action. For this purpose the army halted the next day, + and upon the 9th marched to Aveiro on the River Vonga. Here a large + flotilla of boats was found, and the Norfolk Rangers with two other + regiments were ordered to embark at once. The Portuguese fishermen entered + heart and soul into the business, and in perfect silence the little flats + were rowed up the lake of Ovar. + </p> + <p> + The soldiers were greatly crowded in the boats, and were glad, indeed, + when just as morning dawned they landed at the town of Ovar. + </p> + <p> + By this movement they were placed upon the right flank of Francheschi, the + general who commanded the advanced division of the French army. Soon after + they had landed the French were attacked in front, and finding their flank + turned, and the whole British force, which they had believed to be seven + days' march away, in their front, they fell back hastily. + </p> + <p> + To their great disappointment, the Rangers took no share in this the first + skirmish of the war. But Hill's orders were not to press on the enemy's + rear. Three days more of marching and skirmishing brought them close to + the Duoro on the evening of the 11th. The enemy crossed that evening and + destroyed the bridge, and during the night the British troops were all + brought up, and massed behind the hill called the Serra. This hill stood + upon a sharp elbow which the river makes just above the town of Oporto, + and the British were here completely hidden from Marshal Soult, who had no + idea that they were so close at hand. Indeed, knowing that the bridge was + broken and that all the boats had been carefully taken over to that side + of the river, the Marshal dreamt not that Sir Arthur would attempt to + cross, but imagined that he would take boats lower down near the mouth of + the river and there endeavor to cross. To prevent such an attempt Soult + had massed his army below Oporto. + </p> + <p> + The troops were ordered to pile arms, and eat their breakfast, but to keep + in position. "I wonder how we are to cross the river, Tom?" Peter said. + "It is three hundred yards across, with a rapid current, no man in the + world could swim that, and carry his musket and ammunition across." + </p> + <p> + "I expect Sir Arthur is reconnoitering, Peter; I saw him go up the hill to + that convent there; he must be able to see from there right over Oporto." + </p> + <p> + An hour passed, and then two or three officers were seen coming down from + the hill; one went up to General Hill, who happened at that moment to be + talking to Colonel Tritton. "You are to prepare to cross, sir, Colonel + Waters has discovered a small boat brought across by a Portuguese in the + night. They are going to cross to that great convent you see upon the + other side. They will bring back boats with them, and you will cross at + once, take possession of the convent, and hold it against any force that + may be brought against you until reinforcements arrive." + </p> + <p> + Very quickly were the orders passed, and with a smile of satisfaction the + men took their arms and fell in. They were moved near the river, and kept + under shelter of some houses. + </p> + <p> + "Keep near me," Colonel Tritton said to Tom and Peter, "I may want you to + carry messages, there will be no sounding of bugles to-day." + </p> + <p> + Keeping under the shade of some trees so that they could command a view of + the river without being seen from the opposite side, Colonel Tritton with + two of his officers and his two buglers, watched what was going on. A few + paces ahead of them were Generals Paget and Hill, like themselves, + watching the daring experiment. Behind, under shelter of the houses, were + the troops in dense masses. The Rangers, as the first regiment in General + Hill's division, were in front, and would naturally be the first to cross. + It was a most anxious moment, as Colonel Waters and two Portuguese pushed + the tiny boat from shore and pulled across stream. The bulk of the Serra + Hill hid the river at this point, and even the convent opposite, from the + sight of the French army formed up below the town, but there were no doubt + stragglers all over the city, and the whole baggage of the French army was + in retreat by the road to Valarga which ran at a short distance behind the + convent. + </p> + <p> + Most anxiously their eyes were strained upon the opposite bank, from which + they expected to see the flash of musketry, as the little boat neared the + convent. All, however, was as still as death. Behind them they heard a + rumble, and looking round saw eighteen guns on their way up the hill. From + this eminence they could command the ground around the Seminary, as the + convent across the water was called, and thus afford some aid to the + troops as they crossed. + </p> + <p> + There was a murmur of satisfaction as the boat neared the opposite shore, + and after lying still for a moment to reconnoiter the convent, pulled + boldly up to the landing-place, where its occupants disembarked and + entered the Seminary. Their absence was not long. In a few minutes they + reappeared with eight or ten men, and then at once entered and cast off + three large boats moored along side. + </p> + <p> + The boys could hardly repress a cheer as they saw them fairly under weigh. + An officer now left the side of the General, and came to Colonel Tritton, + "You will get your first company in readiness to embark, sir; do not let + them show themselves until the last moment." + </p> + <p> + Colonel Tritton joined his men. "Captain Manley, take your company + forward, when the first boat touches the shore embark. Let there be no + noise or confusion." + </p> + <p> + "God bless you, Peter," Tom said, as they separated; "your company won't + be many minutes after us;" for the bugler of the first company was ill, + and Tom was ordered to take his place. + </p> + <p> + As the boat touched the shore Captain Manley ordered the leading files of + his company to come from under cover and take their place in the boat. + Twenty-four men entered, and when the other boats were also full Captain + Manley took his place, followed by his bugler, and the boats pushed off + again. + </p> + <p> + There was a dead silence in the boat, broken only by the sound of the oars + as the Portuguese tugged manfully at them, each oar being double-banked by + a soldier. The rest sat with their muskets in their hands, their pouches + open ready for use, and their eyes fixed upon the shore. All was quiet, + and with a sigh of relief, and a hearty hurrah muttered under their + breath, the men leapt from the boat and ran up to the Seminary. + </p> + <p> + It was a large building with a flat roof, and the enclosure around it was + surrounded by a high wall which swept round to the water's edge on either + side. The only entrance was through a stout gate studded with iron. This + was already closed and barred; the captain at once distributed his men at + the upper windows of the Seminary, with orders not to show themselves + until the alarm was given. + </p> + <p> + They had scarcely taken their places when they were joined by the + occupants of the second boat, while those of the third, in which General + Paget himself crossed, were but a minute or two later. Just as they + touched the shore, however, there was a sudden shout heard, this was + followed by others, and in five minutes a wild hubbub was heard in the + town. Drums beat to arms, and it was evident that the enemy were at last + awake to the fact that the British had effected a lodgment upon their side + of the stream. + </p> + <p> + "We shall have it hot presently," Captain Manley said to Tom. "They will + be a quarter of an hour before they can get round here, and we shall have + the three boats back by that time. The one we came in is half-way across + already." + </p> + <p> + Seven or eight minutes later a heavy column of men was seen pouring out of + the upper gate of the town. As they got into the open ground, they threw + out clouds of skirmishers, and pushed down towards the convent. A heavy + fire was at once opened upon them by the English guns upon the Serra Hill. + There was no longer any need for concealment. The soldiers in the convent + took their places at the windows, and as they did so could hear the loud + hurrahs of their comrades as they crowded down to the bank upon the other + side of the river to await their turn to embark. Before the enemy were + within musket-shot, three boat loads more had been landed, and there were, + therefore, 150 men now in the convent. From the gates of the city the + French artillery came pouring out, and, taking up a position upon an + eminence, opened fire upon the convent just as the infantry had got within + musket-range. + </p> + <p> + So suddenly did the noise of the enemy's cannonade, the crashing of the + balls against the thick walls of the Seminary, the rattle of the enemy's + musketry, and the louder roar of the muskets of the defenders, blended on + both sides with shouts and cheers, break out, that for a minute or two Tom + felt almost bewildered. He had no time, however, to think, for an officer + came up to Captain Manley. "The general is up on the roof; he wants a + bugler sent up to him." + </p> + <p> + Captain Manley nodded to Tom, who followed the aide-de-camp on to the + roof. Here he could see all that was passing, and an exciting sight it + was. Crowds of French soldiers were approaching the wall, keeping up a + tremendous musketry fire, whilst behind them three batteries of field-guns + were sending their messengers of death. From every upper window of the + convent the answering flashes came thick and fast, while overhead hummed + the shot from the British guns, on the Serra Hill. Oporto itself was in a + state of uproar. Drums were beating, trumpets sounding, bells clanging, + while from the house-tops the population, men and women, were waving their + handkerchiefs to the English, gesticulating and making all sorts of + pantomimic expression of joy. + </p> + <p> + Looking at the river behind, Tom saw with pleasure that some more boats + had been obtained, and that strong reinforcements would soon be across. + The whistling of the bullets and the hum of the round shot were incessant, + and Tom acknowledged to himself that he felt horribly uncomfortable—much + more uncomfortable than he had any idea that he should feel under fire. + Had he been actively engaged, he would have hardly experienced this + feeling; but to stand impassive under a heavy fire is trying to the nerves + of the oldest soldier. He was angry with himself that he was not more + indifferent to the whizzing of the balls; but the sensation of discomfort + under fire is beyond the control of the will, and it is no unusual thing + to see a young soldier who, later in the day, may display an almost + reckless courage, yet at first flinch whenever balls hiss close by him, in + spite of all his efforts to the contrary. Tom was able, however, to + control any outward manifestation of his feelings, and took his place a + few paces behind General Paget, who was standing with one of his officers + by his side, watching the force which, momentarily increasing, was, in + spite of the British fire, making its way onward towards the gate. + </p> + <p> + It was evident that the general considered the danger to be pressing, as + he once or twice looked back to see how quickly the reinforcements were + crossing the river. The first time that he did so, his eye fell on Tom. + "Get behind those big chimneys, lad. There is no use in exposing yourself + unnecessarily." + </p> + <p> + Tom obeyed the order with alacrity, and, once in shelter, was soon able to + bring his nerves under control, and to look round the corner of his + shelter without flinching when the bullets sang past. In five minutes + General Hill joined Paget on the roof, and just as he did so the latter + was severely wounded and fell. + </p> + <p> + Tom ran forward to assist him, and, kneeling beside him, partially + supported him until four men came up and carried him below. The position + of the little garrison was now very precarious, the artillery fire + concentrated upon them was heavy, and the French swarmed up to the wall, + which they in vain endeavored to climb. The English kept up a tremendous + fire upon them, cheering constantly as fresh reinforcements arrived, or as + the enemy was momentarily repulsed. + </p> + <p> + Tom had now lost all nervousness, and was standing eagerly watching the + fight, when a ball knocked his shako off. The general happened to turn + around at the moment. "That was a narrow escape," he said with a smile. + "What is your name, lad?" + </p> + <p> + "Scudamore, sir," Tom answered. + </p> + <p> + "Scudamore—Scudamore. Yes, I remember the name now. You are one of + the lads General Craufurd spoke to me about. I want to see you. Come to me + to-morrow with your brother. Go down now and join your company; I do not + want you here." + </p> + <p> + Tom gladly went down, for he longed to be doing something. He soon found + his company, and, taking up a firelock of one of the men who had fallen, + was soon hard at work loading and firing into the assailants. For an hour + the strife continued. Fortunately General Murray had found some boats + three miles higher up the stream, and had crossed, thus menacing the + enemy's line of retreat. Suddenly a great pealing of bells were heard in + Oporto, with shouting and cheering, and the house-tops were covered with + people waving their handkerchiefs. The French were evacuating the town. + The inhabitants at once took across some large barges to Villa Neva, a + suburb lying across the river and just below the Serra Hill. Here + Sherbrooke began to cross. + </p> + <p> + It was now the time for the English to take the offensive. There were now + three battalions in the seminary, and as the French drew sullenly off to + join the column now flowing steadily out from Oporto along the Valonga + road, the gates were thrown open, and the English passing out formed + outside the walls, and poured volley after volley into the retreating foe. + Had Murray fallen upon their flank, the disaster of the French would have + been complete; but this general feared that the enemy would turn upon him, + and destroy his division before assistance could arrive, and he therefore + remained inactive, and allowed the long column of fugitives to pass + unmolested. + </p> + <p> + For the next eight days the English army followed hotly in pursuit, and + several skirmishes occurred; but Soult effected a most masterly retreat, + saving his army, when it seemed upon the brink of destruction, by leaving + his guns and baggage behind him, and leading his men by paths over + mountains supposed to be impassable for any large body of men. He lost + altogether 6000 men in this short campaign. This included 3600 prisoners + either captured in action or left behind in the hospitals, and 1400 + killed. The number of guns left behind was fifty-eight. The English had + only 300 killed and wounded. + </p> + <p> + Sir Arthur's plans for the invasion of Spain were not yet complete, and he + accordingly halted his army to await supplies and reinforcements. During + this time the young buglers had no opportunity of calling upon + Major-General Hill. The transport supplied by the Spanish Government had + failed grossly, and the troops were badly fed at a time when, taking long + marches, they most required support. The first day after they halted the + boys determined that they would, as soon as they were off duty, call upon + General Hill. While parade was going on, however, they saw the general + ride up to Colonel Tritton, and enter into conversation with him. The + bugler, who was standing near, was ordered to sound the call for the + officers to assemble in front; and when they did so, Colonel Tritton left + the general's side and spoke a few words with them. There was a short + conversation, and then the colonel rejoined the general's side, and the + officers returned to their places. The colonel now rode forward to the + center of the line, and said in loud tones, "Men, I have a piece of news + to tell you which I think that you will be glad to hear. Upon my arrival + at Lisbon I reported the gallant conduct of Tom and Peter Scudamore in + rescuing one of their comrades when washed overboard in the Bay of Biscay. + Captain Merivale, of the "Latona," also reported it, and General Hill, + when he heard the circumstances, was also good enough to send home a + report recommending them for promotion. He has received an answer from the + Commander-in-Chief announcing that they are both granted commissions in + this regiment as a reward for their act of distinguished gallantry. The + regiment is dismissed." + </p> + <p> + As the men fell out they gave a loud and general cheer, and Tom and Peter + were surrounded by their comrades, who shook them by the hand, and + congratulated them upon their promotion. The boys were too much surprised + and affected to speak, and they had scarcely recovered from their + bewilderment, when Carruthers came up to them, and led them to the + colonel. Here General Hill first, and then all the officers, warmly shook + hands with them. The boys were much touched by the warmth with which they + were received, and were soon hurried off to the tents of the officers. + Several of the ensigns were slight young men, and they insisted upon + rigging the boys out in uniform, and the boys had the less scruple in + accepting the kind offer, inasmuch as they expected every day to enter + Spain, when the baggage would be cut down to the smallest possible + proportion, and the officers as well as the men be obliged to leave almost + everything behind them. Sam was delighted at the promotion of his friends, + and asked to be appointed their servant, a request which was at once + acceded to. The regiment had now been three months in Spain, and the boys + had continued to work hard at Spanish, devoting several hours a day to its + study, and talking it whenever they could find an opportunity—no + difficult matter, as Portugal was full of Spanish who had crossed the + frontier to avoid the hated yoke of the French. + </p> + <p> + The delay in invading Spain was caused partly from want of transport, but + more by the utter incapacity of the Spanish Junta or government, and by + the arrogance and folly of Cuesta, the Spanish Commander-in-Chief, who was + always proposing impracticable schemes to Wellington, and, inflated with + Spanish pride and obstinacy, believed that his own worthless troops were + fully a match for the French, and was jealous in the highest degree of the + British general. + </p> + <p> + At last, on the 27th of June, the British army advanced. Scarcely had they + made a day's march, however, when the utter faithlessness of the Spaniards + became manifest. The provisions and transport promised were not + forthcoming, and from the very day of their advance the British were badly + fed, and indeed often not fed at all; and so great were their sufferings + during the campaign—sufferings caused by the heartlessness of the + people whom they had come to deliver from a foreign yoke, that the British + soldiers came to cherish a deep and bitter hatred against the Spanish; and + it was this intense feeling of animosity which had no little to do with + the cruel excesses of the English soldiery upon the capture of Burgos and + San Sebastian. + </p> + <p> + After many delays from these causes, the British army reached Oropesa upon + the 20th July, and there formed a junction with Cuesta's army. Upon the + 22d the allied armies moved forward, and upon the same day the Spaniards + came in contact with the French, and should have inflicted a severe blow + upon them, but the ignorance and timidity of the Spanish generals enabled + the enemy to draw off and concentrate without loss. + </p> + <p> + The British troops had now been for many days upon half rations, and Sir + Arthur gave notice to the Junta, that unless his requisitions were + complied with, he should retire from Spain. Cuesta, however, believing + that the French were retreating in haste, pushed his army across the river + Alberche, with the vain idea of defeating them, and entering Madrid in + triumph. Sir Arthur, seeing the fatal consequences which would ensue, were + the Spaniards attacked alone, laid aside his previously-formed resolution, + and put his army in motion across the Alberche. The position of the allied + armies was now most dangerous—far more so, indeed, than the English + general supposed. Badly informed by the Spanish, he greatly underrated the + enemy's forces. Taking advantage of the delay caused by the want of + provisions and carriage, Soult, Victor, and Ney were marching their forces + from various points, and concentrating to crush the invading army. Upon + the 26th the French met the Spanish army. General Zayas, who commanded the + Spanish advance of 4000 infantry and 2000 cavalry, scarcely offered any + resistance, his men broke and fled in disorder, and the panic would have + spread to the whole Spanish army, had not General Albuquerque brought up + 3000 more cavalry and held the French at bay, while Cuesta retreated in + great disorder. The Spanish loss by dispersion and flight was no less than + 4000 men, and the whole army would have been broken up had not General + Sherbrooke advanced with his division, and placed it between the French + and the flying Spaniards. + </p> + <p> + The allies now recrossed the Alberche and took up a position to cover + Talavera. Sir Arthur chose a strong defensive position, as it was evident + that the Spanish were worse than useless in the open field. The Spaniards + were placed with their right resting upon Talavera, their left upon a + mound whereon a large field-redoubt was constructed. Their front was + covered by a convent, by ditches, stone walls, breastworks, and felled + trees; and thus, worthless as were the troops, they could scarcely be + driven from a position almost impregnable. + </p> + <p> + The line beyond the Spanish was continued by Campbell's division, next to + which came that of Sherbrooke, its left extending to a steep hill. + Mackenzie and Donkin had not yet fallen hack from the Alberche. Hill was + in rear. The British troops, including the German legion, were 19,000 + strong, with thirty guns. The Spaniards had 33,000 men and seventy guns. + The Spanish contingent could, however, be in no way relied upon, and were, + indeed, never seriously engaged. The real battle was between the 19,000 + British troops and 50,000 French. The French attacked the British outposts + with great impetuosity, and Mackenzie and Donkin were driven in with a + loss of 4000 men. The latter took up his position with his brigade on the + hill on Sherbrooke's left; the former took post with Campbell's division, + to which he belonged. The French cavalry now galloped up towards the + portion of the line held by the Spanish, and discharged their pistols at + them, whereupon 10,000 Spanish infantry and the whole of their artillery + broke and fled in wild confusion. For miles they continued their flight, + but in the evening the Spanish cavalry were sent round in pursuit, and + drove some 4000 of these cowards back to their lines. Seeing the wild + confusion which was raging on the allies' right, Victor resolved, although + evening was at hand, to make a sudden dash upon the hill upon their left, + which, held only by Donkin's brigade, was the key of the position. The + hill was very steep upon the front, or French side, while towards the rear + it sloped gradually. Ruffin's division was ordered to the attack, followed + by Villette in support, while Lapisse was ordered to engage the German + legion, which was on the left of Sherbrooke's division. + </p> + <p> + Hill's division was lying down behind the hill when Ruffin's troops + advanced to the attack. There was no expectation of an attack that + evening, and the woods and increasing darkness covered the movements of + the French troops. Weary and hungry, the English soldiers, disgusted at + the inhuman neglect of the Spaniards, and furious at their cowardice, were + chatting over the events of the day and discussing the chances, by no + means bright, of the expected battle to-morrow. All that day they had had + no food whatever save a small portion of grain, served out raw and + unground. Tom and Peter had been chatting with the officers, who were + grouped under a tree, when Sambo came up to them and beckoned them aside. + </p> + <p> + "Look here, Massa Tom, here six eggs; tree for you, tree for Massa Peter." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you, Sam, that is capital; but you know you will get into a row if + you get caught taking things." + </p> + <p> + "Me no take 'em, massa. Old hen give them to me." + </p> + <p> + Tom laughed. + </p> + <p> + "How was that, Sam?" + </p> + <p> + "Well, Massa, me saw her sitting on nest. Me went up and said to her, + 'Give me some eggs, old girl.' She say 'Cluck.' I says, 'Cluck means yes, + I suppose?' She say 'Cluck' again. Clear 'nuff that, so me take eggs, eat + tree, bring six, young massa." + </p> + <p> + "I am afraid, Sam," Tom said, laughing, "your story would hardly save you + from the triangles, if you had been caught. However, as it is rude to + return a present, of course you cannot take them back to the hen. I + suppose they are raw?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, massa; no good make fire; make hole bofe ends, suck 'em." + </p> + <p> + "All right, Sam; it is not the nicest way, but, under the circumstances, + perhaps it is the best; at any rate, I am too hungry to wait till we can + get a fire lighted." + </p> + <p> + So saying, the boys sucked the raw eggs, and then joined the men, when, + just as they did so, first a dropping rifle shot, and then a perfect roar + of musketry broke out upon the hill above them. It needed no order to be + given. The men fell into their places and prepared to climb the hill and + assist Donkin's brigade, which was evidently unable alone to resist the + attack. Knapsacks were thrown off, firelocks tightly grasped, and the + regiment impatiently awaited orders to advance. None were more impatient + than the colonel, who after a few minutes, seeing by the fire that the + English were falling back, and that the French had gained the crest of the + hill, waited no longer for orders, but gave the word for the regiment to + advance. They were but half way up the hill when General Hill himself + galloped down to meet them, and then turning, led the way beside Colonel + Tritton. + </p> + <p> + General Hill had had a narrow escape. Donkin had repulsed the French who + attacked him in front, but his force was insufficient to guard the whole + crest of the hill. Consequently, the enemy had come up round his flank, + and were now in actual possession of the crest. General Hill, ignorant of + this, had ridden with his brigade-major right into the midst of the French + before he found out his mistake. His brigade-major, Fordyce, was killed, + his own horse wounded, and his bridle seized by a French grenadier. He + had, however, broken away, and had ridden off under a storm of bullets. + </p> + <p> + With a cheer the Norfolk Rangers followed their gallant leader. They + reached the crest, poured a tremendous volley into the enemy, and charged + with the bayonet. The French, of whom but a small portion had as yet + gained the crest, were unable to resist the impetuous onslaught, and at + once gave way. + </p> + <p> + The Rangers were now joined by the 48th and the 29th, so that these, with + Donkin's brigade, formed a strong body of troops. The French, who had + fallen back, now united with their main body, and the attack was renewed + with all the force of Ruffin's division. The heavy mass pressed upwards, + in spite of the destructive fire of the British, and were within twenty + yards of the crest, when, with a hearty cheer, the English troops burst + upon them with the bayonet, and the French again fell back, broken and + disheartened. + </p> + <p> + This ended the fighting on the 27th of July. Long lines of bivouac fires + soon blazed upon either side. The wounded were carried down the hill to + the field-hospital, which had been erected under its cover, and the men, + eating their scanty supper, wrapped themselves in their great coats, and + were soon asleep. The officers chatted for a short time longer, but as all + were tired, and the next day was sure to be a severe one, they, too, soon + lay down by their fire. + </p> + <p> + When morning broke, it was seen that the enemy had massed a large force of + artillery upon a hill just opposite to the one held by the English. Soon + afterwards Ruffin's division, as before supported by Villette, advanced to + the attack, covered by the tremendous fire from his artillery. The British + had no adequate force of artillery to reply to the iron storm, and the + balls swept through their lines, mowing down their ranks, and causing + great loss. The regiments in reserve lay down to avoid the iron shower, + while the Rangers and 48th prepared to resist the French when they came + within fighting distance. + </p> + <p> + As their men approached the summit of the hill, the French artillery was + obliged to cease playing in that direction, and turned its attention to + the British center, while a fierce musketry contest took place between the + French and Hill and Donkin's men. + </p> + <p> + The ground was rough, and the troops on both sides, broken up into small + bodies, fought desperately. General Hill was wounded, and the British + troops fell fast. The French, however, suffered even more, and, as Hill + brought up his reserve, the English gained ground foot by foot, until they + drove them again down the steep side of the hill. As the French retired, + their artillery once more opened fire to cover their retreat. + </p> + <p> + A pause now ensued; the French in this brief contest had lost 1400 men, + and the British had suffered severely. The French then held a council of + war, and determined to attack along the whole line in force. Hours passed + away; the English munched their corn, smoked their pipes, and watched the + enemy scattered over the plain. The weather was very hot, and the men of + both sides went down to a little stream which divided their positions, + drank, and filled their water-bottles in perfect amity. Some of the + officers, who spoke French conversed with the French officers, exchanged + cigars for brandy, and joked and laughed as if they had been the best of + friends. + </p> + <p> + At one o'clock the French drums were heard to beat, and the men were soon + formed in order. Tom and Peter stood with a group of officers on the brow + of the hill. Nothing could be finer than the sight. Far away the view + stretched over the country, thickly wooded, and with château and + farm-houses scatted here and there. Through the trees the dense masses of + the French could be seen, as they moved in columns towards the positions + from which they were to attack. Upon an eminence, nearly opposite to their + position, the boys could see a long line of the French artillery. Far + away, to the right, rose the churches of Talavera, while behind the hill + were the British and Spanish cavalry, ready to charge should the French + endeavor to turn the British left by pushing round its foot. Fifty paces + from the officers of the Norfolk Rangers sat Sir Arthur Wellesley, on + horseback, watching attentively through a field-glass the movements of the + enemy, and at a short distance behind him were his staff. The British + troops were standing in easy order, a little behind the crest of the hill, + so as to be sheltered from the artillery fire with which the French were + sure to cover the advance of their column of attack. + </p> + <p> + "This is a grand sight, Peter," Tom said, "but I wish they would begin; it + makes one fidgety waiting for it." + </p> + <p> + Scarcely had Tom spoken when, as if in answer to his wish, a series of + jets of white smoke puffed out from the opposite hill, and two or three + seconds later came the thunder of eighty guns, and the whizzing sound of + as many balls. Instinctively the group drew back a pace, but it was not + upon them that this tremendous fire was opened. It was directed against + the right of the British line, and almost at the same moment a cloud of + skirmishers appeared among the trees, followed by the dark columns of + Sebastiani's division. + </p> + <p> + Upon these the English guns at once opened fire; but rushing forward with + their usual impetuosity, they cleared away the obstacles which had been + raised across the British front, and charged with fury against the British + position. Campbell's division, however, assisted by Mackenzie's brigade + and two Spanish battalions, stood firm, and driving back the skirmishers, + advanced in line, cheering loudly. The head of the French column withered + away under their tremendous fire, and, pushing forward, they overlapped + it, and drove them back with terrible loss, capturing ten guns. Then + Campbell prudently recalled his men to their first position, and the + British artillery, which had necessarily been silent while friend and foe + were mingled together, opened furiously upon the French as they tried to + re-form upon their supports. A Spanish cavalry regiment dashed down upon + their flank, and they retired again in great disorder. + </p> + <p> + Every incident of the fight could be seen from the British position on the + hill, and the troops almost held their breath with excitement as the + British lines clashed against the head of the French column, and a loud + shout of triumph burst out spontaneously as the French broke and fled. + </p> + <p> + But it was now the turn of the left. Already Villette's division, preceded + by the Grenadiers and supported by Ruffin's division, was advancing, and + the British cavalry were ordered to charge them. The ground was, however, + quite unfit for cavalry. Colonel Arentschild, a very experienced officer, + who commanded the German Hussars, drew up his regiment at the edge of a + deep cleft which crossed their front, and refused to take his men to + certain destruction. The 23d Dragoons, however, dashed into the ravine. + Men and horses rolled over in all directions; still, they got across, and, + charging furiously between the French infantry regiments, which poured in + a terrible fire, fell upon a brigade of Chasseurs in their rear. Victor + sent up his Polish lancers and Westphalian light horse to the assistance + of the Chasseurs, who already outnumbered the 23d, and this gallant + regiment was completely broken, the survivors escaping to the shelter of + Bassecourt's Spanish division, which lay beyond the hill, having lost 257 + men and officers. + </p> + <p> + Tom and Peter did not see this disastrous affair, for on the approach of + the enemy's column they fell into their places in the ranks. It was, + however, in vain that the French tried to gain the crest of the hill, + their efforts at this point being indeed far more feeble than they had + been either in the morning or upon the previous night. It was in the + center that their great effort was made. Here Lapisse threw his division + against that of Sherbrooke, and, covered by his own artillery and by the + guns upon the hill, charged right up to the position. The British, + however, repulsed them, and the guards, carried away by the excitement of + the moment, followed them with reckless ardor. The French reserves of + infantry and cavalry came up, the artillery plied the British with shot + and shell, the fugitives rallied and again came to the attack, and the + Guards fell back in confusion. The Germans next to them, severely pressed, + began to waver, and for a time it seemed that the British, victorious upon + both flanks, were yet to lose the battle by being broken in the center. + </p> + <p> + Now, however, the 48th, which Sir Arthur had ordered down from the hill + when he saw the rash advance of the Guards, was seen advancing in line + through the disordered masses. Wheeling back, it allowed the retreating + regiments to pass through it and then again formed and fell upon the flank + of the victorious French column. The French paused in their advance, the + Guards and Germans rallied and came back again to the fight, the shots of + the British guns plowed lines in the column, the French wavered, and, as + the British light cavalry trotted up with the intention of charging them, + fell back, and drew off to their first position amidst shouts of victory + along the whole length of the British line. + </p> + <p> + Thus the battle ceased, each party occupying the ground it had held in the + morning. The British loss in killed, wounded, and missing, in the two + days' fighting, was 6200; that of the French 7400. Had the British been in + a condition to have sallied from their position and pursued the retiring + enemy, the victory would have had far greater results; but, exhausted and + half-starved, the British were incapable of following up their advantage. + </p> + <p> + The next morning at daybreak, the French army quitted its position, and, + retiring across the Alberche, formed line of battle there, and awaited the + attack, should the English take the offensive. This they were in no + position to do, although in the course of the day Craufurd had come up + with the 43d, 52d, and 95th Regiments. These three regiments had heard of + the first day's fighting from the Spanish fugitives, and had marched with + all speed to the assistance of their friends. They had, carrying their kit + and ammunition, weighing from 50 lb. to 60 lb., actually marched sixty-two + miles in twenty-six hours in the hottest season of the year, one of the + greatest feats recorded in military history. + </p> + <p> + The Rangers had suffered heavily, and in the two days' fighting had lost + thirty-eight killed and 109 wounded. Among the former were two officers, + while several others were wounded. The Scudamores had, fortunately, both + escaped without a scratch. The inhumanity of the Spaniards was now more + markedly shown than ever. Although both in Cuesta's army, and in the town + of Talavera provisions were abundant, yet the inhabitants carefully + concealed them, while both the wounded and fighting men of the British + army were in want. So great was the misery and indignation of the soldiers + at this shameful treatment, from those for whom they were doing so much, + that they would willingly have attacked the Spanish army and plundered the + town; and from this period to the end of the war the British hated the + Spanish with a deep and bitter hatred. + </p> + <p> + Wellesley now received news that Soult had crossed the mountains through + the pass of Banos, which had been left undefended by the Spanish, and was + marching upon his rear. Believing that Soult had only 13,000 men with him—whereas + in fact, he had 50,000—Sir Arthur left the Spanish army at Talavera + in charge of the hospitals, with 6000 sick and wounded, and retraced his + steps, with the intention of giving battle to this new enemy. + </p> + <p> + Upon the 3d, however, he learned the real strength of Soult's army, and + upon the same day heard that General Cuesta had basely retreated from + Talavera, without having provided any transport whatever, according to his + promise, for the British sick and wounded. All of these who had strength + to crawl rejoined the British army, but 1500, who were unable to walk, + were left behind, and fell into the hands of the French, by whom they were + treated with far greater kindness and attention than they had been by the + Spanish. Upon the 4th Cuesta joined Sir Arthur, and at six o'clock next + morning the only possible course for safety was adopted. Victor was + advancing from Talavera, Soult was hurrying from Placentia to cut off the + retreat of the British, and accordingly Sir Arthur fell back upon + Arzobispo, on the Tagus. + </p> + <p> + The artillery, the baggage and wounded, first crossed the bridge, and at + two o'clock the entire army was across. So great was the hunger of the men + that a herd of swine happening to be seen close to the line of march, the + soldiers ran upon them, shot and bayoneted them, and devoured them raw. + Taking up a strong position, guarding the bridges of the Tagus, the + British army remained quiet until the end of August. During this time they + became so weakened by starvation that they could scarcely walk; a great + portion of the cavalry horses, and nearly all the baggage animals died of + hunger, and at last, Sir Arthur, finding that no remonstrances availed + with the Junta, fell back again to the Portuguese frontier by slow + marches, for the army was so utterly enfeebled that it resembled a vast + body of invalids, rather than an army of unbeaten soldiers. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0008" id="link2HCH0008"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VIII. — A PAUSE IN OPERATIONS. + </h2> + <p> + Talavera was fought in July, 1809, and for four months longer Sir Arthur + Wellesley kept his troops on the Spanish frontier, where his presence + served as a check against any invasion, even by a very formidable army, of + Portugal. After the utter bad faith and cowardice shown by the Spanish, + the great commander was determined never again to trust in their promises, + or to undertake any movement dependent for success upon their + co-operation. The Junta then declared that the Spaniards would alone and + unaided sweep the French beyond the Pyrenees, and a Spanish army of 45,000 + infantry, 7000 cavalry, and 60 guns advanced in November against Madrid. + It was met by a French army of 24,000 infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 50 guns. + The battle began at eleven in the morning, and by three the French, with a + loss of only 1700 killed and wounded, had utterly routed the Spanish, with + a loss of 5000 killed and wounded, 45 guns, and 26,000 prisoners! After + this signal and disgraceful defeat, Lord Wellington—for he had now + been raised to the peerage—felt that nothing whatever could be done + at present in Spain, and so fell back into Portugal, where for many months + he occupied himself in preparing to meet the storm which would, he knew, + fall ere long upon that country. The Portuguese authorities were as + incapable, as untrustworthy, and as intractable as were those of Spain; + but here, happily, Lord Wellington had more power. England was paying + large subsidies towards keeping up the Portuguese army, which was + commanded by Lord Beresford, having under him many British officers. The + Portuguese troops were hardy, obedient, and far braver than the Spaniards; + but difficulties often arose in keeping the army together, because the + Portuguese Government, although England was paying the principal expenses + of the army, yet starved their soldiers, and often kept them for months + without pay. It was only by the strongest remonstrances, and by the + oft-repeated threat that he would embark the British troops, and abandon + Portugal altogether, unless these and other abuses were done away with, + that Lord Wellington succeeded in reducing this incapable and insolent + Government to reason. + </p> + <p> + Reinforcements arrived but slowly from England, for a considerable portion + of the available troops of England were frittered away in holding Cadiz + and in an expedition to Sicily. In these two places some 25,000 English + troops were wasted—a force, which, had it been added to Wellington's + army, would have enabled him to take the field against the French, instead + of being forced to remain in Portugal for upwards of a year without + discharging a single shot against the enemy. Tom and Peter Scudamore, + however, were not destined to remain inactive all these weary months. One + day in November, just before the army fell back from the Spanish frontier, + General Hill was dining at mess with the regiment; for, rough as was the + accommodation, the officers had succeeded in establishing a general mess. + The conversation turned upon the difficulty of discovering what force the + various French generals had at their disposal, the reports received by the + Commander-in-Chief being often ridiculously incorrect. There was also an + immense difficulty in communicating with the guerilla chiefs who, almost + always beaten when they came to blows with any considerable bodies of the + French, yet managed to harass them terribly by cutting off convoys, + falling upon small parties, and attacking outposts and bands of foragers. + Knowing every mountain pass and road, these men could, if they would, keep + Lord Wellington informed of every considerable movement of the enemy, and + might in return receive instruction for acting, when required, in concert + before the communication of an advancing army, or might create a diversion + by uniting their bands, and threatening some important post. + </p> + <p> + The next day the boys went to Colonel Tritton's quarters, and, referring + to the conversation of the day before, said that they were willing to + carry any messages that the general might require sent, and to obtain any + information wanted. + </p> + <p> + "Nonsense, boys, you would be hung as spies before you had been gone a + week." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think so, sir," Tom said; "we have had very little to do during + the six months we have been out here except to learn the language of the + country, and I think now we could pass very well as Spanish boys. Besides, + who would suspect boys? We are quite ready to chance detection if we can + be allowed to go." + </p> + <p> + "I don't like it, boys; you are too young. Well, if not too young," he + said, in answer to a movement of Tom's to speak, "we all like you too well + to run the risk of hearing you have been hung like a couple of young + puppies." + </p> + <p> + "You are very kind, colonel; but you know you promised to give us a chance + if you could, and having a chance of course means having extra danger; but + I really don't think that there would be any great danger in it." + </p> + <p> + "Well, boys," Colonel Tritton said, after a few moments' thought, "I do + not feel justified in refusing your application, and will mention it to + General Hill. There are very few officers in the army who speak Spanish + fluently, and you being boys would, as you say, avert suspicion. But I + tell you fairly that I hope General Hill will at once refuse to entertain + the idea." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you, sir," the boys said. "Of course that is all we could ask you + to do." + </p> + <p> + The next day, after parade was over, Colonel Tritton walked on to General + Hill's quarters at a sort of half farm-house, half country-seat, a short + distance from the village, round which the Rangers were encamped. As he + came up to the house, General Hill came out from his door talking to a + Spanish officer, who had the day before brought some despatches from one + of the Spanish generals to Lord Wellington. + </p> + <p> + Colonel Tritton joined them, and they stood talking together upon the + state of affairs in Spain, and of the advance of the Spanish army on + Madrid, which was then just taking place. As they did so two very ragged, + unkempt Spanish boys, shoeless and wretched-looking, limped up, and began + to beg. General Hill shook his head, and the Spaniard impatiently motioned + them away. + </p> + <p> + "Por Dios," one whined; "give us something; we are starving. The French + have burnt down our houses, and killed our fathers and mothers—we + are starving. 'Por l'amor de Dios!'" + </p> + <p> + "What's the poor little beggar say?" General Hill asked the Spaniard. + </p> + <p> + "The usual story—house burnt, father and mother killed, starving. I + dare say it's all a lie." + </p> + <p> + "Where did you live?" he asked in Spanish. + </p> + <p> + "In the village of Oros, near Valencia." + </p> + <p> + "And how did you come here?" + </p> + <p> + "The French burnt the village because the guerillas had killed a party of + theirs in it, and they killed all the people, and then carried off the + mules and horses, and took us to drive some of them. That was four months + ago. We had to drive till the other day at Tamanes, when our men beat the + French; our mules were taken, and, as they did not want us as drivers we + had nothing to do but to come on in hopes that the kind English would give + us food." + </p> + <p> + The Spanish officer translated what the boy said, and General Hill + remarked, "Yes, that was a brilliant affair of the Duke del Pasque's. + Here," he called to an orderly, "give these boys some bread. I will see + what can be done for them afterwards. I am afraid nothing. Poor little + wretches! their story is a very common one." + </p> + <p> + The boys received the bread with a great show of thankfulness, and, + sitting down by the roadside, began to munch it with great appetite. The + Spanish officer now mounted his horse and rode off, while General Hill and + Colonel Tritton remained standing where he had left them. Colonel Tritton + then told General Hill of the Scudamores' request to be allowed to + penetrate into Spain as spies or with dispatches. + </p> + <p> + "The young pickles!" General Hill laughed. "What will they be wanting to + do next? Pooh, pooh! it would be out of the question." + </p> + <p> + "I believe they do really speak Spanish exceedingly well." Colonel Tritton + said. "They generally act as interpreters for us, and none of the officers + speak Spanish with anything like the same fluency." + </p> + <p> + "As far as the language goes, they might get on, perhaps," General Hill + said; "but they look as thorough English boys as you could see. They would + be detected at once." + </p> + <p> + "Yes," Colonel Tritton said, "they are both thorough English boys; I + should know them anywhere. What a contrast to the miserable, limping, + hang-dog lads there! Poor little chaps! Why, upon my word, I believe the + fellows are laughing." + </p> + <p> + General Hill looked sharply at them, and, as he looked from one to the + other, he said sarcastically, "Poor little chaps indeed! You said that + very naturally, Tritton. It really does you credit as an actor." + </p> + <p> + Colonel Tritton looked at the general with an expression of blank + astonishment. + </p> + <p> + "What," said the general, "were you really taken in too" + </p> + <p> + "Taken in?" repeated Colonel Tritton vaguely. + </p> + <p> + "Don't you see, Tritton, those poor little chaps you are pitying so are + those two young scamps we were talking about." + </p> + <p> + Colonel Tritton stared in astonishment at the boys, and then, as he + recognized them, he joined the general in a shout of laughter, while the + two boys stood up and saluted with an attempt at gravity which was only + partially successful, so amused were they at the astonishment of their + colonel, as well as pleased at the success of their disguise. + </p> + <p> + Just at this moment there was a sound of tramping horses, and directly + afterwards an officer rode up, followed by four or five others, and at a + short distance in the rear by an escort of orderlies. The boys needed not + the exclamation of General Hill, "Here is Wellington." They knew who the + rider was, who checked his horse as he reached the gate, for they had + often seen him as he rode through the camp. A slight man, very careful and + neat in his dress, with an aquiline nose and piercing eyes. Peter was + rising as he drew up his horse, when Tom said, "Don't get up, Peter; go on + with your bread. It would look absurd for us to salute now, and would draw + attention to us," he went on, as Lord Wellington dismounted, threw the + bridle off his horse to an orderly, and saying to General Hill, "I wanted + to see you; come in." Colonel Tritton went into the house, followed by the + two officers. "We'll stop here till they come out again, Peter. Perhaps + General Hill may speak to him about us. At any rate, we will keep up our + disguise till they've gone. Let us play at odd and even." It was a game of + which Spanish boys are very fond, and they may be seen in any of the + Spanish towns sitting by the houses on door-steps in the sun playing. It + was half an hour before the general came out again. He was about to mount + his horse, when he glanced at the boys, who were sitting against the wall + a few paces off, seemingly absorbed in their play, and paying no attention + whatever to him. Suddenly he changed his mind, dropped his rein, and + walked up to them. + </p> + <p> + "What are you playing for?" he asked abruptly in Spanish. + </p> + <p> + "Reals, señor," Tom said looking up, but not moving. + </p> + <p> + "You are poor; how can you pay?" asked the general. + </p> + <p> + "Oh! we don't pay," Tom laughed. "We keep count. I owe him twelve thousand + now. I will pay him when I get rich. He can wait." And he held out his + closed hand again for Peter to guess the number of stones it contained. + </p> + <p> + "Come inside," Lord Wellington said abruptly, and, turning led the way + into the house again, followed by General Hill, Colonel Tritton, and the + two boys. + </p> + <p> + "It is not often I change my mind," he said to General Hill; "but for once + I do so now. When you told me about these lads, I refused to employ them + on such dangerous service, even when you told me of the courage and + coolness which they exhibited on the voyage. Now I have tried them myself, + I see that they will do. If they could keep up their disguise when I spoke + to them suddenly, and answer without hesitation or any excitement which + could have shown that they were not what they pretended to be, they can do + so with a French general. I am no judge of the purity of their Spanish; + but as you tell me they deceived a Spanish officer just now, they will be + able to pass with Frenchmen. Now, lads," he went on turning to them, "you + have thought over, of course, the risks you are going to run, and are + prepared, if detected, to be hung like dogs." The boys bowed. + </p> + <p> + "You will receive detailed instructions through Colonel Tritton, together + with such despatches as I may wish sent. They will be written as small as + possible. You will not go for a week; devote all your time to studying the + map. The largest size we have shall be sent to your colonel this + afternoon. Of course you will be supplied with money, and for anything you + can think of likely to assist you, speak to Colonel Tritton. You are + beginning well, young sirs. If you like, you ought to made a noise in the + world. Now, Hill, I must be off." + </p> + <p> + And the general left the room with the officers, while the boys were + stammering out their thanks. + </p> + <p> + "Where did you dress up, boys?" Colonel Tritton asked them after the + general had ridden off. "You did not come out from camp like this I hope?" + </p> + <p> + "No, colonel; we changed in that little wood there." + </p> + <p> + "What have you colored your skins with?" + </p> + <p> + "We got some iodine from the doctor, sir, and mixed it with water till it + was just thick enough to tinge our skin. It will wash pretty well off with + plenty of scrubbing, but we mean to use walnut juice when we start; it + lasts much longer, and is a better brown." + </p> + <p> + "I am not sure, boys, that you had not better leave your faces alone, they + and your hands are so sunburnt that you would pass well enough, though you + must dye your arms and legs. Fortunately, your hair is pretty dark, for + you can't well carry dye. Think well over all these things, for your lives + may depend on some trifle of this kind. I shall see you at mess." + </p> + <p> + So saying, Colonel Tritton walked on, leaving the boys to follow at their + leisure. Just as they were about to turn off to make for the woods they + saw a soldier coming along the road. + </p> + <p> + "That's Sam, if I am not mistaken, Peter, we will have some fun with him. + We can trust him to say nothing in the regiment about meeting us like + this." + </p> + <p> + The two boys accordingly sat down by a low wall by the roadside, and as + Sam came up talked away to each other in Spanish. He passed without paying + any attention to them. After he had gone a few yards, Tom said in a deep, + loud voice, "Sambo." The black halted suddenly, and turned round. First he + looked angrily at the boys, then he went to the side of the road and + looked over the wall. Then with a very perplexed air he looked up and down + the road. + </p> + <p> + "Who dat have impudence to call dis colored gentleman Sambo," he said to + himself. "Some fellow did, dat for sartin, not dose little Spanish trash, + dey not know Sam's name, some rascal in regiment; he's hid somewhere. I + pound him to squash when I find him." + </p> + <p> + Muttering thus he turned to proceed on his way, but before he had gone + twenty yards, he again heard a deep shout. "Here, you, Sambo." + </p> + <p> + The black jumped as if he was shot, "My golly," he exclaimed, and then + walked back to the boys, who were talking together, shook his head and + again looked over the wall. Then he stooped down to the boys, and shook + his fist in their faces, "You little debils, you call Sambo, I pound you + to squash." The boys both leapt to their feet with an air of intense + surprise and alarm, and began to cry out in Spanish. + </p> + <p> + "No, can't be you," Sam said, "dis chile must be witched, no place for men + to hide, sartin not dem boys. Stone wall can't call Sambo all by self, + Sam's going out of mind. Oh! Lor, dis berry bad affair," and Sam sat down + by the roadside with a face of such perfect bewilderment and dismay that + the boys could stand it no longer, but went off together into a scream of + laughter, which caused Sam to jump to his feet again. "What you larf for, + what you larf for, you little rascals, you play trick, eh? you call Sambo, + who taught you dat name?" and he seized the two boys and shook them + furiously. + </p> + <p> + "Oh! Sam, Sam, you will kill us with laughing," Tom got out at last. "Do + leave go, man, or we shall choke," and as Sam, astonished, loosed his + hold, the boys sat down and laughed till their sides ached. + </p> + <p> + "Golly," exclaimed the negro, as he looked at them, "Dose boys again. What + on earth you do, Massa Tom, Massa Peter, in dose ragged close, what you + dress up like two beggars for? Lor! how you take in dis chile, me tink you + little Spanish trash, sure enuff." It was some time before the boys could + compose themselves, and then Tom made Sam sit close by his side. + </p> + <p> + "Look here, Sam, this isn't a joke, this is a serious business and before + I tell you anything about it, you must promise to keep the secret + strictly, as it would do us a great deal of harm if it was known." Sam + declared at once that if they tore him to pieces with wild horses he would + say nothing. Tom then explained the whole thing to him and Sam at once + declared that he would go too. + </p> + <p> + "Quite impossible, Sam. You do not speak a word of Spanish and although at + any of the seaport towns you could pass as a runaway sailor, there could + be no possible reason for your wandering about the country with two + Spanish boys." + </p> + <p> + Sam thought for some time. "Now dat berry unlucky Massa Tom, dat Sam play + big drum. Big drum fine music, but big drum not go well by self. If Sam + had played fiddle, Sam could go, but Sam couldn't go nohow with big drum." + </p> + <p> + "I should think not, Sam, with the name of the regiment painted on it. No, + no, you must stay behind. There won't be any fighting now till the spring, + and by that time we shall be back with the regiment." + </p> + <p> + "But what you do without Sam? who black Massa's boots? who brush his + clothes?" + </p> + <p> + Tom laughed. "These clothes would fall all to pieces, if they were brushed + much, Sam, and at present we have no boots to be blacked." + </p> + <p> + "Where you get dose clothes, Massa Tom," Sam asked, examining with great + disgust the rags the boys had on. + </p> + <p> + "We bought some peasant's clothes about our size, and the first beggar + boys we saw we offered to exchange. You should have seen their faces of + astonishment. When we got the clothes we made them into a bundle, and took + them to the bakehouse, and got the baker to put them into the oven for a + few hours to kill anything there might be in them. Now, Sam, it is time + for us to be going. It will take us an hour's scrubbing to get the color + off us. Be sure you keep our secret." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0009" id="link2HCH0009"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER IX. — WITH THE GUERILLAS. + </h2> + <p> + It was on a fine morning at the end of March that a cortége of muleteers + and mules left the little town of Alonqua. It was now four months since + the Scudamores left the army, and in the intervening time they had tramped + through a large portion of Spain. They had carried with them only a dozen + or so little despatches done up in tiny rolls of the length and about the + thickness of a bodkin, These were sewn inside the lining of their coats, + in the middle of the cloth where it was doubled in at the seams, so that, + even were the clothes to be examined carefully and felt all over, the + chances of detection were slight indeed. They had each, on starting, half + a dozen pieces of Spanish gold coin sewn between the thicknesses of + leather of the soles of each of their shoes, for they did not start in the + beggar clothes in which they had first disguised themselves. Their clothes + were, indeed, worn and somewhat patched, but were of stout material, and + they wore shoes, but no stockings. They had, indeed, the appearance of + Spanish boys of the peasant class. The weather in the north of Spain is + often very cold in winter, and the boys felt that, with rags and bare + feet, they should suffer severely. All that they had to say and do had + been learned by heart. The names and addresses of the agents of the + British Government at every town had been laboriously learned before + starting, and, as Peter said ruefully, it was worse than a dozen Greek + impositions. + </p> + <p> + At each place of any importance they would find the person to whom they + were instructed to apply, would accost him with some password, and would + be put up by him while they remained there. When they had gained the + intelligence they required—of the number of French troops in the + place and its neighborhood, a knowledge always obtained by going round, + counting the men on parade, or, in the case of small villages, finding out + easily enough from a peasant the number, quartered there, they would write + a report on the number the intentions as far as they could learn them, the + amount of food in store, and the sentiments of the population, would + enclose the despatch in a goose-quill and give it to their host, who was + responsible for forwarding it. + </p> + <p> + In a great number of cases, indeed, the man to whom they were accredited + was a muleteer. These men hated the French with a hatred even more deep + and deadly than that of other Spaniards, for, in addition to the national + causes of hatred, their mules were constantly being requisitioned or + seized by the troops and they themselves forced to accompany the army for + long distances at a nominal rate of pay for themselves and their animals. + Then, too, they were in close connection with the guerillas, for whom they + carried goods up into the mountains from the towns, and when the chance + came would leave their animals in the mountains and join in cutting off an + enemy's convoy. They acted as messengers and spies too, and took their + friends in the hills early news of intended movements of the enemy. Many a + day had the boys traveled in the company of these muleteers, merry, + careless fellows, singing and talking to their mules, apparently the + best-natured of men, until something would be said which would recall the + hated foe, and then their black eyes would flash, their fingers clutch + their knife-handles, and they would pour out long strings of deep Spanish + oaths. Great was the surprise of these men on receiving the password from + two boys, but they never hesitated an instant in taking them in, in giving + them hospitality as long as they remained, and in either accompanying them + to the next town, or handing them over to the charge of some comrade going + in that direction. Not even to them did the Scudamores ever betray that + they were not what they were taken to be, two Spanish boys employed by the + English commander as messengers. Often they were questioned how the + English had come to entrust important communications to two boys, and + their reply always was that their father and mother had fled to Portugal + from the French, and were living there near the English lines, and that + they had offered their lives in case of their sons' treachery. + </p> + <p> + This system of hostages seemed probable enough to their questioners, and + if the boys' fare was rather harder, and their treatment more + unceremonious than it would have been had they said that they were British + officers in disguise, they ran far less risk of detection from an + accidental word or sign. Indeed it would have been next to impossible for + them, had they desired it, to convince any one of their identity. There + was no fear now of their accent betraying them. Since they had left the + army they had never, even when alone together, spoken in English. They + made the rule and kept to it for two reasons, the one being that they + found that if they did not get into this habit of always speaking Spanish, + they might inadvertently address each other in English, and thus betray + themselves; the second, that they wanted to learn to speak absolutely like + natives. This they had in the four months thoroughly learned to do. At + first their pronunciation and occasional mistakes excited curiosity when + asked questions as to the part of Spain from which they had come, but + their constant communication with their muleteer friends had quite removed + this, and for the last two months not one person had doubted that they + were not only Spanish, but that they came from the northern provinces. + </p> + <p> + Hitherto they had journeyed principally between large towns and over + country held by the French, but that part of their work was finished; they + had accurately computed the number of the army with which Massena was to + advance shortly to besiege Ciudad Rodrigo, and they had now to carry the + despatches to the guerilla leaders. Hitherto they had not in a single + instance excited suspicion. Not a Frenchman had asked them a question, and + no adventure of anything like an exciting nature had taken place. They + were now, however, entering into a country entirely different from that + which they had hitherto traversed. The northeast of Spain is wild and + mountainous, and offers immense natural facilities for irregular warfare. + Through the various passes of the Pyrenees lead all the roads from France, + whether to Vittoria on the great road to Madrid, or through Navarre to + Catalonia. Here and there fortified towns still held out against the + French, and the town of Gerona, in Catalonia, had only fallen after a six + months' regular siege, and a desperate defense which fully rivals that of + Saragossa. Is it not a little singular that the Spaniards, who in the open + field were, with a few remarkable exceptions, absolutely contemptible, yet + frequently defended towns with wonderful fortitude, courage, and + desperation. It may, indeed, be said that in every siege where the + Spaniards were commanded by brave and resolute chiefs they behaved + admirably. This great range of hill country was the stronghold of the + guerillas, and every convoy from France had to be protected by a large + force, and even then often suffered greatly from the harassing attacks of + their active enemies. + </p> + <p> + The bands of the guerilla chiefs differed greatly in strength, varying + from merely ten or a dozen men to three or four thousand, and indeed each + band varied continually. The men, when not required, would scatter to + their homes, cultivate their little patches of ground, and throw down the + spade and take up the rifle again when they heard of a convoy to cut off, + or an invading column to beat back. The bands, too, would vary in + proportion to the renown of their chiefs. An energetic man, who, at the + head of a handful, had performed some daring feats, would find himself a + week afterwards the leader of many hundreds, while a chief who was slow + and dilatory would find his band melt away like snow in summer. + </p> + <p> + The character of the warfare depended much upon the character of the + French generals. A few of these kept the troops under their command + sternly in hand, would permit no plundering, and insisted upon their fair + treatment of the Spaniards. These in turn wanted nothing better than to + remain quietly in their homes, and the guerilla bands would melt away to + nothing. Other generals, furious at the savage nature of the warfare, and + the incessant toil and loss entailed upon their troops, allowed the latter + to do as they pleased, and burning houses and dead bodies marked their + course. Then the peasantry, now turned guerillas, retaliated as savagely, + giving no quarter, sacrificing all prisoners, and putting the wounded to + death, sometimes with torture. On both sides horrible atrocities were + committed. + </p> + <p> + The guerillas were armed partly with rifles and carbines, partly with + muskets landed on the coast by the British Government, who also, from time + to time, sent powder and money to assist them to continue their resistance + to the French. Although nowhere really formidable, yet, being scattered + over a great extent of country, these bands occupied very large bodies of + French troops, who would otherwise have been disposable for general + operations in the field. The English commander-in-chief had, of course, no + shadow of authority over the guerillas, or, indeed, over any of the + Spanish troops, and his communication to them simply asked what arms and + ammunition they required, and begged them to send him a list of the number + of men they could each throw on the French communications and lines of + retreat in case he should find himself in a position to make a general + advance against them. He also recommended most strongly the bearers of the + despatch to their care. It was to the chief known as Nunez that they were + now bound. The mule train was nominally destined for Vittoria, to which + town the leader had got a pass, specifying the number of mules and the + nature of the goods they carried, from the French commandant at Alonqua, + for no one was allowed to take the goods about the country without a pass, + in order to prevent supplies being forwarded to the mountains. This pass, + however, only mentioned twelve mules with four drivers, and this was the + number which started from Alonqua. Another score of mules, however, joined + them at a short distance from the town where a by-road turned off. Some of + these had gone out from the town unloaded, as if taken out to graze, + others had not entered the town, but had come direct from the sea-coast by + by-paths with powder, and had been awaiting the departure of Garcias, the + name of the leader of the party. They had eight men with them, all armed + to the teeth. + </p> + <p> + "Is it all right, Garcias?" + </p> + <p> + "All right," the leader said; "they have sent out their squadrons on the + other road, so I think we are safe for to-day." + </p> + <p> + "What boys have you got there with you?" + </p> + <p> + "They have business with Nunez; letter from the coast." + </p> + <p> + The cavalcade was now in motion again, and wound gradually up into the + hills. Presently they came to a point where four roads met. A clump of + trees grew hard by, and the boys gave a start of horror at seeing the + bodies of six French soldiers swinging from them. "Ay, that's Nunez's + work, I expect," Garcias said coolly. "There were three of his men + swinging there last week, so as a lesson he has hung up six of the French. + He is a rough boy to play with, is Nunez." + </p> + <p> + At sunset the party slept in a small farm, and at daybreak continued their + journey. They were now in the heart of the mountains, and their path lay + sometimes up deep ravines, sometimes along rocky ledges. At last, about + midday, they entered a valley in which stood a small village. "That's + Nunez's head-quarters to-day," Garcias said; "to-morrow he may be no one + knows where." + </p> + <p> + "But does he have to sally out by the wretched road by which we have + come?" Tom asked. + </p> + <p> + "No, no," Garcias replied; "he would not catch much prey that way. There + are three other ways out of the valley. That winding path you see there + leads up to Santona. That road on the other side leads out on to the + plain, and thence to Vittoria; while the footpath over the brow opposite + leads right down into the wide valley through which the main north road + runs. So you see this is a handy spot. From that brow we can see the + convoys going to and from France, and can pour down upon them if they are + weak; while, if a column is sent in search of us, we can vanish away long + before they can catch us. Nunez does not use the direct road over the brow + for his attack, but follows the Santona or Vittoria road for a while, and + then makes a swoop round. He does not want to bring the French up to this + village, for his family and the families of many of the men live here." + </p> + <p> + As they approached the village, they found that there was a good deal of + bustle going on. Armed men were coming out of the cottages, and gathering + in a group round a rough stone cross, which stood in the center of a sort + of green. "We are just in time," Garcias said; "Nunez is starting on some + expedition or other." + </p> + <p> + When they reached the spot there were nearly two hundred men assembled. + They greeted Garcias with shouts of welcome as he arrived. "Ah, ah! + Garcias, just in time. Our last skin of wine was emptied last night; we + will bring some more up to-morrow; but if you had not come we should have + had to start thirsty, and that's unlucky besides being unpleasant." + </p> + <p> + "Where is Nunez!" Garcias asked. + </p> + <p> + "Here he comes," was the reply; and the boys turning saw a figure + approaching, which by no means answered to the expectation of the + celebrated guerilla chief. He was small and almost humpbodied, but very + broad. His head seemed too large for his body, and a pair of fierce eyes + gleamed out from beneath his shaggy eyebrows. His mustache was thin and + bristly and his month wide, but with thin lips. The boys could understand + the reputation for cruelty and mercilessness which attached to this + sinister-looking figure, but there was none of the savage power which they + had expected to see in so celebrated a leader. + </p> + <p> + "Any news, Garcias?" he asked shortly, as he came up. + </p> + <p> + "None, captain, except that these boys have brought some despatches for + you from the English Lord." + </p> + <p> + Nunez looked sharply at them, and held out his hand without speaking. Tom + gave him the little quill. + </p> + <p> + The guerilla opened it, read the contents, and, saying briefly, "An answer + to-morrow," strode on to his men, and in a few minutes they were defiling + out at the end of the valley. + </p> + <p> + "That hardly seems a strong enough body to attack a French convoy, + Garcias," Tom remarked. + </p> + <p> + "No, it would not be, but there is only a part of his band here; the rest + will join him at some place agreed on—perhaps ten miles from here. I + believe he has about thousand men under his orders. Now come along; we + shall be none the worse for dinner," and, leaving his men to unload the + mules, he led the way into the little posada, or inn. + </p> + <p> + "Ah! Mother Morena," he said to an old woman who was crouching near a + blazing wood fire, "warming yourself as usual; it's well you've a good + fire, for you will be able to get us some dinner all the more quickly. + Twelve of us altogether, and all as hungry as wolves." + </p> + <p> + "Ah!" exclaimed the old woman crossly; "it seems as if I were never to + have an hour's quiet, just as all that roaring, greedy lot, with their + Mother Morena here and Mother Morena there, and their grumbling at the + olla, and their curses and their quarrels, are off, and I think I am going + to have a quiet afternoon, then you come in with your twelve hungry + wolves." + </p> + <p> + "Ah! mother, but wolves don't pay, and we do, you see." + </p> + <p> + The frugal supper over, the boys laid down on the benches, and were soon + asleep. The next day passed slowly, for the band were not expected to + return until late at night—perhaps not until the next morning, as + the pass where the attack would be made was some fifteen miles off, and + the convoy might not pass there until late in the afternoon. The boys soon + made friends with some of the women and children of the place, to whom + they told stories of the great cities of the plain, and of the great water + which washed the shores of Spain. The greater portion of the Spanish + peasantry are incredibly ignorant, and very few of the inhabitants of this + village had ever gone beyond the mountains. Walking about in the village, + but apparently mixing but very little in the games of the other children, + were two little girls, whose gay dress of rich silk seemed strangely out + of place in such a spot. + </p> + <p> + Tom asked one of the women who they were, and she replied, with a toss of + the head, "They are the captain's children. The last time the band went + out they found among the baggage and brought up here, the dresses of the + children of some fine lady, and the captain kept them all as part of his + share, just as if there were no children in the village whom it would + become a great deal better than those stuck-up little things. Not," she + said, softening a little, "that they were not nice enough before they got + these things; but since they came their heads have been quite turned by + the finery and they are almost too grand to speak to their old + playfellows." + </p> + <p> + "Is their mother alive?" + </p> + <p> + "No, poor thing, she was killed by the French when the village she lived + in was burned by them, because some of them were found hung in the + neighborhood. The captain was away at the time and the children were out + in the woods. When he came back he found them crying by the side of their + mother's body, in the middle of the burning village. So then he took to + the mountains, and he never spares a Frenchman who falls into his hands. + He has suffered, of course, but he brought it upon himself, for he had a + hand in hanging the French soldiers, and now he is a devil. It will be bad + for us all; for some day, when the French are not busy with other things, + they will rout us out here, and then who can blame them if they pay us for + all the captain's deeds? Ah! me, they are terrible times, and Father Predo + says he thinks the end of the world must be very near. I hope it will come + before the French have time to hunt us down." + </p> + <p> + The boys had a hard struggle not to smile, but the woman spoke so + earnestly and seriously, that they could only shake their heads in grave + commiseration for her trouble; and then Tom asked, "Is the captain very + fond of the children?" + </p> + <p> + "He worships them," the woman said; "he has no heart and no pity for + others. He thinks no more of blood than I do of water; but he is as tender + as a woman with them. One of them was ill the other day—a mere + nothing, a little fever—and he sat by her bedside for eight days + without ever lying down." + </p> + <p> + "I suppose," Tom said, "they never bring prisoners up here?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, they do," the woman said; "not common soldiers; they kill them at + once; but sometimes officers, if they want to exchange them for some of + ours who may have been taken, or if they think they are likely to get a + high ransom for them. But there, it always comes to the same thing; there, + where you see that mound on the hillside, that's where they are. They + blindfold them on their way up here, lest they might find their way back + after all. Only one or two have ever gone down again. I wish they would + finish with them all down below; they are devils and heretics these + French; but I don't care about seeing them killed. Many of us do, though, + and we have not many diversions up here, so I suppose it's all for the + best." + </p> + <p> + "I wish that fellow had given us our answer before he went away," Tom said + to Peter when they were alone. "I hope he won't bring any prisoners up + here; these massacres are frightful, and one side seems as bad as the + other. Well, in another month we shall have finished with all this work, + and be making for the frontier again. Shan't I be glad when we catch sight + of the first red-coats!" + </p> + <p> + In the middle of the night the boys were roused by a general bustle, and + found that a messenger had just arrived, saying that the expedition had + been successful, that a portion of the enemy had been cut off, their + rear-guard destroyed, and that the whole band would be up soon after + daylight. The village was astir early, but it was not until nine o'clock + that the guerilla band arrived. The boys saw at a glance that they were + stronger in numbers than when they started, and that with them were some + twenty or thirty baggage animals. + </p> + <p> + The women flocked out to meet them with shrill cries of welcome. The booty + taken was not of any great value in money, but was more valuable than gold + to the guerillas. + </p> + <p> + Each one of the band carried, in addition to his own piece, a new French + musket, while in the barrels on the mules were powder and ball; there were + bales of cloth, and some cases of brandy and champagne, and a few boxes + and portmanteaus of officers' baggage. In the rear of all, under a strong + guard, were two French officers, both wounded, a lady and a child of some + seven or eight years old. + </p> + <p> + After a boisterous greeting to their wives, the band broke up, and + scattered over the village, three or four men remaining to guard the + captives, who were told to sit down against a wall. + </p> + <p> + The whole band were soon engaged in feasting, but no one paid the least + attention to the prisoners. The lady had sunk down exhausted, with the + little girl nestled close to her, the officers faint and pale from loss of + blood, leaned against the wall. One of them asked the guards for some + water, but the men paid no attention to the request, answering only with a + savage curse. Tom and Peter, who were standing by, immediately went to the + inn, filled a jug with water, and, taking a drinking horn and some bread, + went back. One of the guards angrily ordered them back as they approached. + </p> + <p> + "I am not going to free them," Tom said, soothingly; "there can be no + reason why they should die of thirst, if they are enemies." + </p> + <p> + "I am thirsty myself," one of the guard said, "and it does us good to see + them thirst." + </p> + <p> + "What, has no one brought you anything to drink?" Tom said, in a tone of + surprise. "Here, Peter, you give this bread and water to these prisoners; + I will run to Mother Morena's and bring some wine for the guard." + </p> + <p> + The guard would not allow Peter to approach the captives until Tom arrived + with a large jug of wine, and a cold fowl, which he had obtained at the + inn. These the Spaniards accepted, and allowed the boys to give the water + to the prisoners. All drank eagerly, with every expression of + thankfulness, the lady seizing Peter's hand and kissing it as he handed + the horn to the child. The lady was a very bright, pretty woman, though + now pale and worn with fatigue and emotion, and the child was a lovely + little creature. + </p> + <p> + The boys, on leaving the prisoners, hurried to Garcias. + </p> + <p> + "What are they going to do with the prisoners, Garcias?" + </p> + <p> + "They have brought them up here to exchange for Nunez's lieutenant, who + was taken last week. One of the men went off last night to Vittoria with a + letter to offer to exchange. One of the officers is a colonel, and the + young one a captain. The lady is, they say, the wife of General Reynier." + </p> + <p> + "Then they are safe," Tom said joyfully, "for, of course the French would + exchange a guerilla against three such prisoners." + </p> + <p> + "Yes," Garcias said, "they are safe if Vagas has not been shot before the + messenger gets to Vittoria. The messenger will hear directly he gets + there, and if they have finished Vagas, he will come straight back, for + his letter will be of no use then." + </p> + <p> + "But the French would pay a ransom for them." + </p> + <p> + "Yes; but the captain is never fond of ransoming, and if the news comes + that Vagas is shot it is all up with them." + </p> + <p> + "But they will never murder a woman and child in cold blood!" Tom said, in + tones of indignant horror. + </p> + <p> + "Women are killed on both sides," the muleteer said, placidly. "I don't + hold to it myself, but I don't know, after all, why a woman's life is a + bit more precious than a man's. Vagas's wife and children are here, too, + and if the news comes of his death, she would stir the band up to kill the + prisoners, even if the captain wanted to save them, which he certainly + will not do." + </p> + <p> + "When is the messenger expected back?" + </p> + <p> + "If he goes to Vittoria and finds Vagas is alive, and arranges for the + exchange, he won't be back till late to-night, perhaps not till to-morrow; + but, if he hears, either on the way or directly he gets there, that he is + dead, he may be back this afternoon." Soon after this conversation Garcias + was sent for to the chief, and returned with a small note, which he handed + to the boys as the answer to the despatch, and urged them to go at once. + The boys said that they could not leave until they saw the end of this + terrible drama which was passing before their eyes. It was early in the + afternoon when a man was seen coming along the path from Vittoria. A + hundred eager eyes examined him, and ere long it was declared as certain + that it was the messenger. The boys' heart sank within them as they saw + the fierce look cast by the Spaniards in the direction of the prisoners, + for every one in the village was well aware of the meaning of this early + return. The boys had arranged upon the course they would pursue, and they + at once hurried to Garcias. + </p> + <p> + "Please come with us at once to Nunez. We want to see him before the + messenger arrives." + </p> + <p> + "I will come with you," Garcias said; "but if you think that any talking + of yours will persuade Nunez to move out of his way, you are mistaken. It + is more likely to cost you your own lives, I can tell you; however, I gave + you the promise I would do my best for you when you started with me, and I + will go with you now, though what you want to interfere for here is more + than I can make out. Pshaw! what matters two or three of these accursed + French, more or less?" + </p> + <p> + As they neared the chief's house they saw him coming towards them. His + brow was as black as thunder; he was evidently prepared for the news of + his lieutenant's death. + </p> + <p> + "These messengers want to speak to you for a moment," Garcias said. + </p> + <p> + The chief stopped with an impatient gesture. + </p> + <p> + "Señor," Tom said, with a dignity which surprised the chief; "we are not + what we seem. We are two English officers, and we have come to beg of you, + to implore you, not to tarnish the cause for which you fight by shedding + the blood of women and children." + </p> + <p> + The boys had agreed that it would be altogether hopeless to try to save + the French officers. + </p> + <p> + "British officers, indeed," exclaimed Nunez, "a likely story. Do you know + them as such, Garcias?" + </p> + <p> + "No," Garcias said bluntly, "I never guessed at it; but now they say so, I + think it's likely enough, for they don't seem to see things in the same + way as other people." + </p> + <p> + "I can give you proof of it," Tom said, calmly, pulling up the sleeve of + his coat, and showing a cicatrix in his forearm. Taking a knife from his + pocket, he cut into the skin, and drew forth a tiny silver tube. This he + opened, and handed to Nunez a paper signed by Lord Wellington, declaring + the bearers to be British officers, and requesting all loyal Spaniards to + give them every assistance. + </p> + <p> + The captain read it through, and flung it down. "You may be officers," he + said contemptuously; "but if you were Lord Wellington himself, I would not + spare these accursed French. Listen!" and as he spoke a howl of rage ran + from the other end of the village, and told too plainly the nature of the + tidings the messenger had brought. + </p> + <p> + "I again protest," Tom said firmly. "I protest, as a British officer, and + in the name of humanity, against this cold-blooded murder of a woman and + child. It is a disgrace to Spain, a disgrace to the cause, it is a brutal + and cowardly act." + </p> + <p> + The guerilla furiously drew a pistol; but Garcias placed himself between + him and Tom. "I have promised him a safe conduct," he said, "and have + given my word for his safety. He is only a boy, and a young fool; don't + trouble with him." + </p> + <p> + Fortunately at this moment, for the guerilla was still irresolutely + handling his pistol, a crowd was seen coming towards them, headed by a + woman who seemed frantic with rage and grief. All were shouting, "Death to + the assassins! death to the French!" The chief at once moved forward to + meet them. + </p> + <p> + Tom and Peter gave a significant glance towards each other, and then Tom + turned to go back towards the house which Nunez inhabited, while Peter + hurried towards the spot where the prisoners were kept. Already a crowd + was assembling who were talking threateningly at the French officers. + Peter made his way through them until he stood by the lady, who, with her + child clinging to her neck, looked in terror at the angry crowd, whose + attention, however, was directed to the officers, who stood looking calmly + indifferent to their threats and insults. + </p> + <p> + "Do you speak Spanish, madam?" Peter asked, leaning over her. + </p> + <p> + She shook her head. + </p> + <p> + "Do you speak English?" he asked, in that tongue. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, yes, a little." the lady said, eagerly; "who are you? What is this + fierce crowd about?" + </p> + <p> + "Hush!" Peter said. "I am a friend. Listen. In a few minutes they are + going to shoot you all." The lady gave a stifled cry, and pressed her + child close to her. "Remember, when they come to you, ask for a priest; + gain a few minutes, and I hope to save you and the child." + </p> + <p> + So saying, he slipped away into the crowd again. He had scarcely done so + when Nunez arrived, accompanied by many of his men. The crowd fell back, + and he strode up to the French officers. "French dogs," he said, "you are + to die. I spared you to exchange, but your compatriots have murdered my + lieutenant, and so now it's your turn. You may think yourselves lucky that + I shoot you, instead of hanging you. Take them to that wall," he said, + pointing to one some twenty yards off. + </p> + <p> + The Frenchmen understood enough Spanish to know that their fate was + sealed. Without a word they took each other's hands, and marched proudly + to the spot pointed out. Here, turning round, they looked with calm + courage at the Spaniards, who formed up with leveled muskets at a few + paces distance. "Vive la France! Tirez," said the elder, in a firm, voice, + and in a moment they fell back dead, pierced with a dozen balls. + </p> + <p> + Peter had turned away when Nunez appeared on the scene, to avoid seeing + the murder, and with his eyes fixed in the direction in which Tom had + gone, he listened almost breathlessly to what should come. The French lady + had sat immovable, cowering over her child, while her countrymen were + taken away and murdered. As Nunez passed where she crouched, he said to + two of his men, "Put your muskets to their heads, and finish them!" As the + men approached, she lifted up her face, pale as death, and said,— + </p> + <p> + "Un prêtre, uno padre!" + </p> + <p> + "She wants a priest," the men said, drawing back; "she has a right to + absolution." + </p> + <p> + There was a murmur of assent from those around, and two or three started + to the priest's house, situated only a few yards away, being one of the + end houses of the village. The priest soon appeared, came up to the spot, + and received orders to shrive the Frenchwoman. He attempted a + remonstrance, but was silenced by a threat from Nunez, and knowing from + experience of such scenes that his influence went for nothing with Nunez + and his fierce band, he bent over her, and the crowd drew back, to let + them speak unheard. At this moment, to Peter's intense relief, he saw Tom + approaching with the captain's two children walking beside him. Absorbed + in what was passing before them, no one else looked round, and Peter + slipped away and joined his brother. They came within twenty yards of the + crowd, and then paused. + </p> + <p> + "Wait a minute," Tom said to the children, "your father is busy." + </p> + <p> + In another minute Nunez shouted roughly, "There that will do; finish with + it and have done! I want to be off to my dinner." + </p> + <p> + Tom and Peter simultaneously drew out a large Spanish knife, and each took + one of the children firmly by the shoulder. + </p> + <p> + "Stop! Señor Nunez!" Tom shouted in a loud, clear tone. "Stop! or by + heaven there will be four victims instead of two! Let one of you lift a + finger against these captives—let one of you come one step nearer to + us—and, by the Holy Virgin, we will drive our knives into these + children's hearts!" + </p> + <p> + A cry of astonishment broke from the crowd, and one of agony and rage from + Nunez, who tottered against a wall in horror at the danger in which his + daughters were placed. + </p> + <p> + "Listen! all of you," Tom said, "we are English officers, we have shown + our papers to Nunez, and he knows it is so. We will not suffer this murder + of a mother and her child. If they are to die, we will die with them; but + these two children shall die too! Now, what is it to be?" + </p> + <p> + A dozen of the guerillas leveled their guns at the two daring boys. + </p> + <p> + "No! no!" Nunez shrieked; "lower your guns. Don't hurt the children, + señors. The captives shall not be hurt; I swear it! They shall go free. + Give me my children." + </p> + <p> + "Not if I know it," Tom said; "Do you think I could trust the word of a + man who would murder women and children in cold blood? No; these girls + shall go with us as hostages, till we are safe under French guard." + </p> + <p> + "They will tell them the way up here," said one of the woman in the group, + "and then we shall be all killed." + </p> + <p> + "No," Tom said; "the lady shall swear not to tell the way up here. She + shall swear on your priest's crucifix. We will give you our words as + British officers." + </p> + <p> + "But how are the children to get back here again?" another asked, for + Nunez was so paralyzed that he could only gaze on the children, who were + crying bitterly, and implore them to stand quiet, and not try to get away. + After more parleying the arrangements were completed. The crowd fell back + on either side, so as to leave a large space round the French lady. Tom + and Peter then went up to them with the little girls. The lady was sobbing + with joy and excitement at this unexpected relief. + </p> + <p> + "Can you walk?" Tom asked her in English. + </p> + <p> + "Yes," she said, getting up hastily, but almost falling again. + </p> + <p> + "Garcias will go first, as guide. The priest will give you his arm," Tom + went on, "these two young women will go with you and carry your child if + necessary. You will walk on, twenty yards ahead of us. We follow with + these girls. No one is to follow us, or accompany us. We are to go on like + that till we come upon your outposts, and then the priest and the two + women will bring back Nunez's children." + </p> + <p> + "You will send them safe back, you swear?" asked Nunez, in tremulous + tones. + </p> + <p> + "Psha!" Tom said contemptuously, "you don't suppose we are + child-murderers, like yourself." + </p> + <p> + "Remember!" the guerilla said, in a sudden burst of passion, "if you ever + cross my path again, I will—" + </p> + <p> + "Do terrible things no doubt," Tom said scornfully; "and do you beware, + too. It is wild beasts like yourself who have brought disgrace and ruin on + Spain. No defeat could dishonor and disgrace her as much as your fiendish + cruelty. It is in revenge for the deeds that you and those like you do, + that the French carry the sword and fire to your villages. We may drive + the French out, but never will a country which fights by murder and + treachery become a great nation. Are you ready, Garcias!" + </p> + <p> + "I am ready," the muleteer said, stepping forward from the silent and + scowling throng. + </p> + <p> + "We can trust you," Tom said heartily; "take us the short way straight + down into the valley; we may have the luck to come upon a passing French + troop in an hour. Think of that, madam," he said to the French lady, "let + that give you strength and courage." + </p> + <p> + So saying, the procession set out in the order Tom had indicated, amidst + the curses of the guerillas, who were furious at seeing themselves thus + bearded. At the brow of the hill Tom looked back, and saw that the + guerillas were still standing in a group, in front of which he could + distinguish the figure of Nunez. Taking off his hat, he waved an ironical + farewell, and then followed the party down the hillside into the broad + valley below. They could see the road stretching like a thread along it, + but to their disappointment, not a figure was visible upon it. Now that + there was no longer danger of treachery, the party closed up together. + </p> + <p> + "How far is it to Vittoria, Garcias?" + </p> + <p> + "Twenty good miles, señor." + </p> + <p> + "But we shall never get there," Tom said in dismay. "I am sure the lady + could not walk another five miles; she is quite exhausted now." + </p> + <p> + "You will not have to go five miles, señor. There is a body of four or + five hundred French in that large village you see there; it is not more + than three miles at most." + </p> + <p> + It was a weary journey, for the French lady, exhausted by fatigue and + excitement, was often obliged to stop and sit down to rest, and, indeed, + could not have got on at all had not Garcias on one side and the padre on + the other helped her on. At last, just as the sun was setting, they + approached the village, and could see the French sentries at its entrance. + When within a hundred yards they paused. + </p> + <p> + "We are safe now," Tom said; "it is not necessary for you to go farther. + Good-by, little ones; I am sorry we have given you such a fright, but it + was not our fault. Good-by, padre; I know that you will not grudge your + walk, for the sake of its saving the lives of these unfortunates. Good-by, + Garcias; thanks for your kindness and fidelity. I will report them when I + return, and will, if I get a chance, send you a remembrance of our journey + together." + </p> + <p> + "Good-by, señors," Garcias said, shaking them by the hand; "you English + are different to us, and I am not surprised now at your General holding + Portugal against all the French armies." Then he lowered his voice, so + that the Spanish women standing by could not hear him. "Be on your guard, + señors; don't move on from the village without a strong convoy is going + on; change your disguise, if possible; distrust every one you come across, + and, in heaven's name, get back to your lines as soon as possible, for you + may be assured that your steps will be dogged, and that you will be safe + nowhere in Spain from Nunez's vengeance. The guerillas communicate with + each other, and you are doomed if you fall into the hands of any, except, + perhaps, one or two of the greater chiefs. Be always on your guard; sleep + with your eyes open. Remember, except in the middle of a French regiment, + you will never be really safe." + </p> + <p> + "Thanks, Garcias!" the boys said earnestly, "we will do our best to keep + our throats safe. At any rate, if we go down, it shall not be for want of + watchfulness!" + </p> + <p> + Another shake of the hands, and the party separated. The Spanish woman who + was carrying the sleeping French child handed her over to Tom, who took + her without waking her while Peter lent his arm to the French lady. + </p> + <p> + "Madam," Tom said in English, "you will soon be among your friends. I know + that you will keep your promise not to divulge the situation of the + village you have left. I must ask you, also, to promise me not to say that + we speak English, or to say anything which may create a suspicion that we + are not what we seem. You will, of course, relate your adventures, and + speak of us merely as Spanish boys, who acted as they did being moved by + pity for you. We must accompany you for some time, for Nunez will move + heaven and earth to get us assassinated, and all we want is that you shall + obtain permission for us to sleep in the guard-room, so as to be under + shelter of French bayonets until we can decide upon our course of action." + </p> + <p> + The lady assented with a gesture, for she was too exhausted to speak, and + as they reached the French sentries she tottered and sank down on the + ground insensible. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0010" id="link2HCH0010"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER X. — MADRID. + </h2> + <p> + The French sentries, who had been watching with surprise the slow approach + of two peasant boys, the one carrying a child, the other assisting a woman + clad in handsome, but torn and disheveled clothes, on seeing the latter + fall, called to their comrades, and a sergeant and some soldiers came out + from a guard-room close by. + </p> + <p> + "Hallo!" said the sergeant. "What's all this? Who is this woman? And where + do you come from?" + </p> + <p> + The boys shook their heads. + </p> + <p> + "Of course," the sergeant said, lifting the lady, "they don't understand + French; how should they? She looks a lady, poor thing. Who can she be, I + wonder?" + </p> + <p> + "General Reynier," Tom said, touching her. + </p> + <p> + "General Reynier!" exclaimed the sergeant to his comrades. "It must be the + general's wife. I heard she was among those killed or carried off from + that convoy that came through last night. Jacques, fetch out Captain + Thibault, and you, Noel, run for Dr. Pasques." + </p> + <p> + The officer on guard came out, and, upon hearing the sergeant's report, + had Madame Reynier at once carried into a house hard by, and sent a + message to the colonel of the regiment. The little girl, still asleep, was + also carried in and laid down, and the regimental doctor and the colonel + soon arrived. The former went into the house, the latter endeavored in + vain to question the boys in French. Finding it useless, he walked up and + down impatiently until a message came down from the doctor that the lady + had recovered from her fainting fit, and wished to see him at once. + </p> + <p> + Tom and Peter, finding that no one paid any attention to them, sat, + quietly down by the guard-house. + </p> + <p> + In a few minutes the French colonel came down. "Where are those boys?" he + exclaimed hastily. There was quite a crowd of soldiers round the house, + for the news of the return of General Reynier's wife and child had + circulated rapidly and created quite an excitement. "Where are those + boys?" he shouted again. + </p> + <p> + The sergeant of the guard came forward. + </p> + <p> + "I had no orders to keep them prisoners, sir," he said in an apologetic + tone, for he had not noticed the boys, and thought that he was going to + get into a scrape for not detaining them; but he was interrupted by one of + the soldiers who had heard the question, bringing them forward. + </p> + <p> + To the astonishment of the soldiers, the colonel rushed forward, and, with + a Frenchman's enthusiasm, actually kissed them. "Mes braves garçons!" he + exclaimed. "Mes braves garçons! Look you, all of you," he exclaimed to the + soldiers, "you see these boys, they are heroes, they have saved, at the + risk of their own lives, mark you, General Reynier's wife and daughter; + they have braved the fury of that accursed Nunez and his band, and have + brought them out from that den of wolves." And then, in excited tones, he + described the scene as he had heard it from Madame Reynier. + </p> + <p> + At this relation the enthusiasm of the French soldiers broke out in a + chorus of cheers and excited exclamations. The men crowded round the boys, + shook them by the hands, patted them on the back, and in a hundred strange + oaths vowed an eternal friendship for them. + </p> + <p> + After a minute or two, the colonel raised his hand for silence. "Look + you," he said to the men. "You can imagine that, after what these boys + have done, their life is not safe for a moment. This accursed Nunez will + dog them and have them assassinated if he can. So I leave them to you; you + will take care of them, my children, will you not?" + </p> + <p> + A chorus of assurances was the reply, and the boys found themselves as it + were adopted into the regiment. The soldiers could not do enough for them, + but, as neither party understood the other's language, the intercourse did + not make much progress. They had, however, real difficulty in refusing the + innumerable offers of a glass of wine or brandy made to them by every + group of soldiers as they moved about through the village. + </p> + <p> + The boys felt that their position was a false one; and although, in point + of fact, they had no report to make upon the regiment, still the + possibility that if discovered they might be thought to have been acting + as spies on men who treated them with so much friendliness was repugnant + to them. However, their stay was not to be prolonged, for the regiment had + already been stationed for a month at the village, and was to be relieved + by another expected hourly from France, and was then to go on to Madrid. + This they learned from one of the soldiers who could speak a few words of + Spanish. + </p> + <p> + It was upon the third day after their arrival that the expected regiment + came in, and next morning the boys started soon after daybreak with their + friends. They had not seen Madame Reynier during their stay in the + village, for she was laid up with a sharp attack of illness after the + excitement she had gone through. She was still far from fit to travel, but + she insisted on going on, and a quantity of straw was accordingly laid in + a cart, pillows and cushions were heaped on this, and an awning was + arranged above to keep off the sun. The regiment had taken on the + transport animals which had come in with the baggage of the troops the + night before; hence the mule drivers and other followers were all + strangers. The boys were marching beside the regiment, talking with one of + the sergeants who had been previously for two years in Spain, and spoke a + little Spanish, when the colonel, who had been riding alongside Madame + Reynier, told them as he passed on to the head of the regiment, that she + wished to speak to them. + </p> + <p> + The boys fell out, and allowed the troops and the line of baggage animals + and carts to pass them. As the latter came along, Tom observed one of the + Spanish drivers glance in their direction, and immediately avert his head. + </p> + <p> + "Peter, that fellow is one of Nunez's band; I will almost swear to his + face. No doubt he has joined the convoy for the purpose of stabbing us on + the first opportunity. I expected this. We must get rid of them at once." + </p> + <p> + The boys had both been furnished with heavy cavalry pistols by order of + the colonel, to defend themselves against any sudden attack, and, placing + his hand on the butt in readiness for instant use, Tom, accompanied by his + brother walked up to the Spaniard. + </p> + <p> + "You and those with you are known," he said. "Unless you all fall out at + the next village we come to, I will denounce you, and you haven't five + minutes to live after I do so. Mind, if one goes on you all suffer." + </p> + <p> + The Spaniard uttered a deep execration, and put his hand on his knife, but + seeing that the boys were in readiness, and that the French baggage guard + marching alongside would certainly shoot him before he could escape, he + relinquished his design. + </p> + <p> + "Mind," Tom said, "the first village; it is only a mile ahead, and we + shall probably halt there for five minutes; if one of you goes a single + foot beyond it, you will swing in a row." + </p> + <p> + So saying, the boys dropped behind again until Madame Reynier's cart came + along. The sides were open, and the lady, who was sitting up, supported by + pillows, with her child beside her, saw them, and called to them to climb + up to her. They did so at once, and she then poured forth her thanks in + tones of the deepest gratitude. + </p> + <p> + "My husband is not at Madrid," she said when she saw by the boys' + confusion that they would be really glad if she would say no more; "but + when he hears of it he will thank you for saving his wife and child. Of + course," she went on, "I can see that you are not what you seem. Spanish + boys would not have acted so. Spanish boys do not speak English. That + makes it impossible for me in any way to endeavor to repay my obligation. + Had you been even Spanish peasants, the matter would have been + comparatively easy; then my husband could have made you rich and + comfortable for life; as it is—" + </p> + <p> + She paused, evidently hoping that they would indicate some way in which + she could serve them. + </p> + <p> + "As it is, madam," Tom said, "you can, if you will, be of great service to + us by procuring for us fresh disguises in Madrid, for I fear that after + what happened with Nunez our lives will not be safe from his vengeance + anywhere in Spain. Already we have discovered that some of his band are + accompanying this convoy with the intention of killing us at the first + opportunity." + </p> + <p> + "Why do you not denounce them instantly?" Madame Reynier said, rising in + her excitement and looking round. + </p> + <p> + "We cannot well do that," Tom said, "at least not if it can be avoided. + They know already that we have recognized them, and will leave at the next + village; so we are safe at present, but in Madrid we shall be no longer + so. We cannot remain permanently under the guard of the bayonets of the + 63d Line; and indeed our position is as you may guess, a false and + unpleasant one, from which we would free ourselves at the first + opportunity. We shall therefore ask you, when you get to Madrid, to + provide us with fresh disguises and a pass to travel west as far as the + limits of the French lines." + </p> + <p> + "You can consider that as done," Madame Reynier answered; "I only regret + that it is so slight a return. And now," she said lightly, to change the + conversation, "I must introduce you to this young lady. Julie," she asked + in French, "do you remember those boys?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes," Julie said; "these are the boys who gave mamma and Julie water when + those wicked men would not give us anything to drink when we were thirsty; + and it was these boys that mamma said prevented the wicked men from + killing us. They are good boys, nice boys, but they are very ragged and + dirty." + </p> + <p> + Madame Reynier smiled, and translated Julie's answer. + </p> + <p> + "You know," she went on, hesitatingly, "that I know that—that you + are English officers. I heard you say so when you saved us. But how is it + that you can be officers so very young?" + </p> + <p> + Tom explained that in England the officers entered for the most part + directly, and not, as in the French army, by promotion from the ranks, and + that, consequently, the junior officers were much younger than those of + equal rank in the French service. + </p> + <p> + The convoy had now reached the village, and a halt was ordered, and the + boys alighting, walked forward to see that their unwelcome attendants + quitted them. As the soldiers fell out from their order of march and sat + down under the shade of the houses many of the Spaniards with the + baggage-train followed their example, and the boys saw the man to whom + they had spoken go up to four others, and in a short time these separated + themselves from the rest, went carelessly round a corner, and when the + order came to continue the march, failed to make their appearance. Their + absence passed unnoticed save by the boys, for the natives frequently took + advantage of the passage of troops and convoys to travel from one part of + the country to another, for the guerillas were for the most part little + better than brigands, and would plunder their own countrymen without + scruple whenever the opportunity was favorable. + </p> + <p> + The march to Madrid was accomplished without adventure, and the boys + improved the occasion by endeavoring to pick up as many French phrases as + they could, as they marched along by the side of the sergeant who had + specially taken them under his charge. He knew a little Spanish, so they + managed to keep up a conversation with him in a strange medley of the two + languages, which helped to pass the time away merrily. At Madrid they took + up their quarters in the barracks with the regiment; they had already + explained their plan of disguise to Madame Reynier, and she had promised + to provide all that was necessary and to obtain the military pass for + them. + </p> + <p> + They had soon reason to congratulate themselves that their stay in Madrid + was under the protection of French bayonets. During the day after their + arrival they remained quietly in barracks, as the appearance of two + Spanish peasants walking about the street with French soldiers would have + excited comments. In the evening, however, they agreed with their friend + the sergeant, who was going into the town with three or four of his + comrades, that they should accompany them, not, however, walking actually + with them, but following a few paces behind, so as to be within reach of + their assistance should any one molest them. + </p> + <p> + They reached the Piazza del Sol, the great central square of Madrid, + without incident, and amused themselves with the sight of the constant + stream of people passing to and fro, the ladies in their graceful black + mantillas, the men in cloaks and Spanish sombreros, or round felt hats. + Presently the sergeant and his companions left the square, and turning + down one of the narrow streets which run into it, amused themselves by + looking into the shops, with their gay fans, bright handkerchiefs, and + other articles of Spanish manufacture. + </p> + <p> + Tom and Peter followed their example, keeping some ten paces behind them. + It was now nearly dark, and the streets were but badly lighted except by + the lamps in the shop windows. + </p> + <p> + "It may be all fancy, Tom," Peter said, "but I can't help thinking that we + are followed. There are three follows who have passed us twice, and I am + pretty sure they are particularly noticing us. Keep your hand on your + pistol." + </p> + <p> + As the boys paused at another shop window, the three men again approached, + this time from ahead. + </p> + <p> + "Look out, Tom," Peter said sharply. + </p> + <p> + As the men came up to them, one of them exclaimed, + </p> + <p> + "Now!" + </p> + <p> + The boys faced round, pistol in hand, with a cry to their friends, just as + the three Spaniards, with drawn knives, were upon them. + </p> + <p> + The sudden movement disconcerted them, and two sprang back from the + leveled tubes of the pistols, with fierce oaths of surprise, the third, + however, rushed in and struck at Tom; the latter instinctively moved + aside, and the knife inflicted a heavy gash on the shoulder, and almost at + the same moment Peter's bullet crashed through the fellow's skull. + </p> + <p> + His comrades, with a cry of rage, rushed in, but before they could strike, + the sergeant was up and ran one through the body with his sword, whereon + the other fled. The whole affair lasted only three or four seconds. In + less than a minute the street was absolutely deserted, for rows and fights + were so common between the soldiers and the people, that all prudent + people got out of the way the moment a knife was drawn. + </p> + <p> + "Well done, lad," the sergeant said to Peter, "I thought your brother was + done for. Luckily I had faced your way when the fellow attacked you, and + was on my way to help you before they began, but I feared I should be too + late. That was a wonderfully pretty snap shot of yours, and you were as + cool as old hands. Peste! I don't know what to make of you boys. Now come + along, we had better get away from this carrion before any one comes up + and asks questions. First, though, let me tie up your shoulder." + </p> + <p> + This was soon done, and while the sergeant was engaged upon it, his + comrades, old soldiers, turned over the dead Spaniards, searched their + pockets, and chuckled as they found several gold pieces. + </p> + <p> + One or two French soldiers alone came near them before they left the spot, + attracted by the sound of the pistol. A word from the sergeant, "These + scoundrels attacked us, they have got their <i>coup</i>," satisfied them, + and the boys and their friend soon regained the crowded main street, + leaving the bodies for the watch to find and bury. + </p> + <p> + Arrived at the barracks, Tom's arm was examined by the surgeon, and the + cut pronounced a deep flesh wound, but of no consequence; it was soon + strapped up, and with his arm in a sling Tom went down to the sergeant's + quarters, where they slept. Here they had to go through much patting on + the back, for their friend had described the readiness and coolness with + which they stood at bay, and popular as they were before they were now + more so than ever. For the rest of their stay in Madrid the boys did not + stir out of barracks. One at least of Nunez's envoys they knew to be + alive, and he could enlist any number of the lower class against them, so + they resolved not to go out until they should finally start. + </p> + <p> + After a fortnight's stay they were sent for to the colonel's quarters, + where they found Madame Reynier and her child. "I had a letter from my + husband this morning," she said, "from his camp near Cordova, thanking you + with all his heart for the inestimable service you rendered him, and + begging me to tell you that you can count on his gratitude to the extent + of his life at any and all times. You need no assurance of mine. And now + about your journey. All is prepared for you to leave to-morrow morning. + You are to come here to the colonel's quarters soon after daybreak. Here + are your two disguises, for the one as a young bachelor of medicine, for + the other as a young novice. Here is your pass, signed by the minister, + authorizing you both to pass on to your relations at Ciudad Rodrigo, and + to go unmolested thence where you choose, also recommending you to the + care of all French and Spanish authorities. A regiment marches to-morrow + morning for the frontier; the colonel is a cousin of my husband. I have + told him that some friends of yours rendered me much kindness and service + on my way down, and that I particularly commend you to his care. He has + promised to allow you to follow the regiment, and to see that you get + quarters at each halting-place. He does not know you for anything but what + you appear to be. When you have put on these dresses to-morrow morning, + step out by the private door from these quarters, looking carefully when + you start to see that there is no one in the street. Then go boldly to No. + 15, Rue St. Geronimo; go into the courtyard, there you will see two stout + mules with all necessaries, under charge of a soldier, who will have + instructions to hand them over to you without asking any questions; then + go down to the Retiro and wait till the 16th come along. The Colonel will + be on the look-out for you, and you will ride up to him and hand him this + note. And now farewell, dear boys; never shall I forget you, or cease to + pray for you, and may be when this terrible war is over we may meet as + friends again. Keep these little tokens of remembrance of your grateful + friends." So saying, Madame Reynier pressed into the boys' hands two + magnificent gold watches and chains, held her child up for each of them to + kiss, threw her arms round their necks and kissed them herself, and then + drawing down her veil to conceal the tears which were standing in her + eyes, left them hastily. + </p> + <p> + That night the boys said good-by to their friend the sergeant, and to + those soldiers with whom they had most companionship. "You have guessed, + no doubt, sergeant," Tom said, in his mixture of Spanish and French, "that + we are not exactly what we seem to be, but if we should ever meet again, + under different circumstances, I want you to remember that our connection + with the regiment has been in a way forced upon us. I should not like you + to think, that is that under the pretence of friendship, we have been + treacherously learning things. Do you understand?" + </p> + <p> + "I understand, mes braves," the sergeant said, "Jacques Pinteau is no + fool, and he saw from the first that you were not two ragged Spanish + peasant boys by birth. I daresay I can guess what you are, but there need + be no ill-will for that, and as you only came among us by accident, as it + were, there is no more to be said either way. There is one thing certain, + wherever or however we meet, we shall be friends." + </p> + <p> + So well were Madame Reynier's plans arranged that the boys passed from + Madrid to the frontier without a single hitch or unpleasantness. Tom was + soberly attired as a student at the university, Peter was muffled up to + the eyes as a timid young novice, going from school to enter a convent, of + which his aunt was lady superior, at Ciudad Rodrigo. The colonel, and, + following his example, the officers of the regiment were polite and civil. + The marches were of easy length, the mules stout and smooth-going, with + well-filled traveling sacks. The weather was delightful, and the boys + enjoyed the fortnight's march exceedingly. Upon the road they learned that + Massena had laid siege to Ciudad Rodrigo, and that the 16th was on its way + to join the besieging army. + </p> + <p> + It was the end of June, 1810, when the 16th joined Massena's force before + Ciudad Rodrigo. The siege had continued for some time, the British light + division, under General Craufurd, lay upon the other side of the river + Agueda, which separated them alike from the town and the French army. The + colonel of the 16th politely expressed to Tom his regret that he could + not, for the present, conduct them to their final destination, but that he + hoped that the gate would soon be open for them. Tom thanked him for the + civility which he had shown them upon the road, and said that he would, + with his sister, take up his abode for the present a few miles from the + beleaguered fortress. On leaving the regiment the boys went higher up the + Agueda to the little town of Villar, where there was a bridge. This + however, was watched by the troops of both armies, and there was, at + present, no chance of affecting a passage. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0011" id="link2HCH0011"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XI. — THE FIGHT ON THE COA. + </h2> + <p> + All through the winter of 1809-1810, Wellington had remained quietly on + the frontier of Portugal, engaged in disciplining his troops, many of whom + were raw drafts from the militia, in urging upon the home Government the + necessity of fresh reinforcements, if the war was to be carried on with + the smallest hopes of success, and in controversies and disputes with the + Portuguese regency. This body of incapables starved their own army, + refused supplies and transport to the British, and behaved with such + arrogance and insolence that Wellington was several times driven to use + the threat that, unless measures were taken to keep the Portuguese troops + from starving, and to supply food to the British, he would put his army on + board the transports at Lisbon, and give up the struggle altogether. + </p> + <p> + Spring found the army still on the frontier, and when the French advanced + in force in May to lay siege to the Spanish frontier fortress of Ciudad + Rodrigo, Wellington to the intense disappointment of his own troops, and + the bitter anger of the Portuguese and Spaniards, refused to fight a + battle to save the fortress, which, under its gallant old governor, Andrea + Hernati, was defending itself nobly. + </p> + <p> + Wellington's position was, however, a very difficult one, and his + responsibilities were immense. Allowing for the detachments which were + massing to check three other French columns advancing in different + directions, he had but 25,000 men with which to attempt to raise the siege + of Ciudad Rodrigo, or to draw off the besieged garrison. Massena had under + him 60,000 French veterans, and was desiring nothing more than that + Wellington should attack him. The chances of victory then were by no means + strong, and in any case victory could only have been purchased by a loss + of men which would have completely crippled the British general, and would + have rendered it absolutely necessary for him to fall back again at once. + A defeat or even a heavy loss of men, would have so dispirited the + faint-hearted Government at home that they would undoubtedly have recalled + the whole expedition, and resigned Portugal to its fate. Thus Wellington + decided not to risk the whole fate of the British army and of Portugal for + merely a temporary advantage, and so stood firm against the murmurs of his + own troops, the furious reproaches of the Portuguese and Spaniards, and + the moving entreaties for aid of the gallant governor of the besieged + town. + </p> + <p> + At the same time that he refused to risk a general battle, he kept + Craufurd's division in advance of the Coa, and within two hours' march of + the enemy, thereby encouraging the garrison of Ciudad Rodrigo, and + preventing Massena from pushing forward a portion of his army while the + rest pursued the siege. + </p> + <p> + Craufurd's front was guarded by the Agueda, a river only passable by two + or three bridges and fords in wet weather, but fordable in many places in + the dry season. At the commencement of June the Agueda fell, and the + French crossed in strength at various places. Craufurd, however, still + maintained his position in front of the Coa with great skill and boldness. + He had under his command only 4000 infantry, 1100 cavalry, and six guns, + and his maintenance of his position, almost within gun-shot of an enemy's + army, 60,000 strong, for three months, is one of the finest feats of + military audacity and ability ever performed. + </p> + <p> + Until the 11th of July the boys remained quietly at a cottage occupied by + peasants, who believed their story that they were only waiting to proceed + when the French army advanced. They were freed from molestation or inquiry + upon the part of the French by the pass with which Madame Reynier had + supplied them. + </p> + <p> + Upon that day Ciudad Rodrigo surrendered, and Massena prepared at once to + enter Portugal. Upon the 21st the cavalry advanced in great force, and + upon the following day the boys resolved upon endeavoring to rejoin the + British army. The Agueda was now easily fordable in many places, but the + boys determined to swim across, at a distance from the point at which the + French army was now pouring forward. + </p> + <p> + As evening came on they left the cottage, and walked two miles up the + stream, and, as soon as night fell, took off the costumes which had proved + of such service to them and left them on the bank; then fastening their + peasants' suits upon two bundles of rushes to keep them dry, entered the + little river, and were soon upon the opposite shore. They knew, from what + they had heard in the afternoon, that Craufurd had fallen back upon + Almeida, a fortified town, and that it was probable he would at once cross + the Coa, as resistance to the force now approaching him seemed nothing + short of madness. + </p> + <p> + No good, indeed, could be gained by a fight in such a position, with a + deep river in the rear, crossed by only a narrow bridge, and commanded by + both banks, and Wellington's orders had been imperative "that, upon no + account whatever was Craufurd to fight beyond the Coa." + </p> + <p> + Craufurd, however, a rash and obstinate, although a skilful general, was + determined upon having a brush with the enemy before he fell back. He + anticipated, no doubt, that only an advanced guard of the enemy would come + up at first, and his intention was to inflict a severe check upon them + with the magnificent little division under his command, and then fall back + triumphantly across the Coa. Massena, however, was well aware of the + fighting powers of the light division, and was preparing to hurl suddenly + upon him a force more than sufficient to crush it. + </p> + <p> + The Scudamores had but little fear of meeting with any large body of the + enemy, as the main French advance was direct from Ciudad Rodrigo; their + cavalry would, however, be scattered all over the country, and were they + to fall into the hands of any of these parties they would have been shot + instantly, upon suspicion of endeavoring to convey news of the French + movements to Craufurd. + </p> + <p> + The point where they crossed the river was between Villar and Naves Frias, + and, after an hour's walking, they struck the little rivulet called Duas + Casas. This they crossed at once, as they knew that by following its + southern bank until they saw some high ground to their left they would + find themselves near Almeida, which they hoped to reach before the English + retreated. + </p> + <p> + All night they tramped through the fields of stubble, where the corn had + been long since cut for the use of Craufurd's cavalry, but walking at + night through an unknown country is slow work, and when day began to break + they entered a small wood just beyond the point where the Turones, as the + southern arm of the Duas Casas is called, branches off from the main + stream. Several times in the course of the day bodies of the enemy's + cavalry came near their place of concealment, and the Scudamores + congratulated themselves that they had not given way to their impatience, + and tried to push on across the twenty miles that alone separated them + from their friends. + </p> + <p> + At nightfall the wind rose, and a heavy rain began to fall. They had no + stars by which to steer their course, and were, therefore, forced to + follow the bank of the Turones, although they knew that it would lead them + some distance to the north of Almeida. It was slow work, indeed, for they + had to grope their way along in the storm, following every turn and bend + of the river, which formed their only guide. After several hours' toil + they came into a road running north and south. This they knew was the road + leading from Guarda to Almeida, and it gave them a clue as to the distance + they had come. Still following the river, they continued their course + until they approached San Pedro, whence they knew that a road ran directly + to the British position in front of Almeida, that is if the British still + maintained their position there. + </p> + <p> + As they approached the village, they heard a deep, hollow sound, and + stopping to listen, and laying their ears to the ground, could distinguish + the rumble of heavy carriages. + </p> + <p> + "The French are advancing in force, Peter; we are just in time; they are + going to attack us in the morning at daybreak. We know the direction now; + let us turn to the left, and try to get on in advance of them. They + probably will not push on much farther until there is light enough to + permit them to form order of battle; they are evidently, by the sound, + going to the left, rather than straight on." + </p> + <p> + The Scudamores now hurried on, and presently the rumbling of the artillery + died away, and they ventured to push to their left, and to get on the + road, which they found deserted. Half an hour's run, for they knew that + every minute was of importance, and they heard the welcome challenge, "Who + comes there?" "Two British officers," they answered, and in a few minutes + they were taken to the officer in charge of the picket, and having once + convinced him of their identity, were heartily greeted and welcomed. + </p> + <p> + "The French are advancing in great force to attack," Tom said; "please + forward us instantly to the general." + </p> + <p> + The matter was too important for an instant's delay, and a sergeant was at + once told off to accompany them. + </p> + <p> + The first faint blush of daylight was in the east when they arrived at the + cottage which served as General Craufurd's quarters, and, upon their + speaking to the sentinel at the door, a window was thrown open, and a deep + voice demanded "What is it?" + </p> + <p> + "We have just arrived through the French lines," Tom said, "the enemy are + at hand in force." + </p> + <p> + The casement closed, and an instant afterwards the general came out. "Who + are you?" + </p> + <p> + "We belong to the Norfolk Rangers, general, and have been detached on + service in the interior; we have only just made our way back." + </p> + <p> + "How am I to know your story is true?" the general asked sharply. + </p> + <p> + "You may, perhaps, remember, sir, we landed from the 'Latona,' and you + kindly lent us horses to accompany you." + </p> + <p> + "Aha! I remember," the general said. "Well, your news?" + </p> + <p> + "The French have crossed the Turones in force, sir; at least they have a + good many guns with them." + </p> + <p> + "Which way were they going?" + </p> + <p> + "As far as we could judge by the sound, sir, they were taking up a + position between Villa Formosa and Fort Conception." + </p> + <p> + "Good," the general said shortly; then turning to three or four of his + staff who had followed him from the cottage, "Get the troops under arms at + once. Come in here, gentlemen." + </p> + <p> + The Scudamores entered, and as they came into the light of a candle which + stood on the table the general smiled grimly. + </p> + <p> + "It is lucky you were able to recall yourselves to my memory, for I should + have needed some strong evidence to persuade me you were British officers + had I seen you before you spoke. You are wet to the skin; there is a + brandy bottle, and you will find some bread and cold fowl in that + cupboard." + </p> + <p> + Five minutes later the boys followed General Craufurd from his hut. + </p> + <p> + Short as was the time which had elapsed since their arrival, the troops + were already under arms, for three months of incessant alarm and + watchfulness had enabled this splendid division to act as one man, and to + fall in at any hour of the day or night in an incredibly short time. Ten + minutes later and the ramble of the baggage wagons was heard along the + road towards the bridge. The morning was clearing fast, the clouds lifted, + and the daylight seemed to break with unusual suddenness. + </p> + <p> + The dark masses of the French became visible forming up before the + Turones, and Craufurd hurried forward his cavalry and guns to check their + advance. + </p> + <p> + "Hurry the infantry up, hurry them up," the general said urgently to the + officers by him. "Let them take post along the ridge, and then fall back + fighting towards the bridge. Major MacLeod," he said to an officer of the + 43d, "take these gentlemen with you; they are officers of the Norfolk + Rangers. They will join your regiment for the present. When your regiment + falls back, occupy that stone inclosure a little way down the slope at the + left of the road, and hold the enemy in check while the troops file over + the bridge." + </p> + <p> + The officer addressed looked with surprise at the boys, and signing to + them to follow, hurried off to his regiment, which was on the left of the + British line. + </p> + <p> + Next to them came a regiment of Portuguese riflemen, with a wing of the + 95th upon either flank, while the 52d formed the right of the line. + </p> + <p> + Upon reaching the regiment, Major MacLeod briefly introduced the boys to + the colonel, who said, "As you have no arms, gentlemen, I think you had + better make for the bridge at once." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you, sir," Tom replied, "there will be some muskets disposable + before long, and directly they are so we will take our place in the + ranks." + </p> + <p> + They had now leisure to look round and examine their position, and a + glance was sufficient to show how great was the peril in which General + Craufurd's obstinacy had placed his little force. In front of them were + 24,000 French infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 30 pieces of artillery. An + overwhelming force indeed, and one which could scarcely have been + withstood by the 4000 British infantry, even under the most favorable + conditions of position. The position, however, was here wholly against the + British. They stood at the edge of a plateau, and behind them the ground + fell away in a steep hillside to the Coa, a mile distant, and across the + Coa there was but a single bridge. + </p> + <p> + The enemy was approaching fast. Ney's great brigade of cavalry swept the + British horse before them, and the infantry were following at a run. + </p> + <p> + Resistance on the edge of the plateau was hopeless, and Craufurd ordered + the infantry to fall back at once. The 43d filed into the inclosure, + rapidly cut loopholes in the wall, and as the enemy appeared on the crest + above opened a tremendous fire, under cover of which the cavalry and + artillery trotted briskly and in good order down the road to the bridge. + </p> + <p> + The Scudamores, having no duty, stood at the entrance to the inclosure and + watched the fight on their right. As the masses of French infantry + appeared on the edge of the plateau they made no pause, but opening a + heavy fire pressed forward on the retiring British troops, who were + falling back in open order, contesting every inch of ground. So rapidly + and hotly, however, did the French press after them that the British were + soon pushed back beyond the line of the inclosure, and as the French + followed closely, it was evident that the 43d would be cut oft and + surrounded. + </p> + <p> + Their colonel saw their danger, and called upon them to fall in and + retreat, but the entrance was so narrow that it was clear at a glance that + ere one company could pass through it the French would be upon them, and + the regiment caught like rats in a trap. + </p> + <p> + Officers and men alike saw the danger, and there was a pause of + consternation. + </p> + <p> + Peter was standing next to the colonel, and said suddenly as the idea + flashed across him, "The wall is not very strong, sir, if the men mass + against it and push together I think it will go." + </p> + <p> + The colonel caught at the idea. "Now, lads, steady, form against the rear + wall four deep, close together, shoulder to shoulder, as close as you can + pack; now get ready, one, two, three!" and at the word the heavy mass of + men swung themselves against the wall; it swayed with the shock, and many + stones were displaced; another effort and the wall tottered and fell, and + with a glad shout the 43d burst out, and trotting on at the double soon + joined the rifles and 95th. + </p> + <p> + The ground was rough and broken with rocks, vineyards and inclosures, and + the troops, fighting with admirable coolness and judgment, took advantage + of every obstacle and fell back calmly and in good order before the + overwhelming force opposed to them. + </p> + <p> + Fortunately the jealousies of the French generals, which throughout the + campaign contributed in no slight degree to the success of the British, + was now the cause of their safety, for Montbrun, who commanded the French + heavy cavalry, refused to obey Ney's order to charge straight down to the + bridge, in which case the whole English infantry would have been cut off; + the French hussars, however, being on the British rear, charged among them + whenever the ground permitted them to do so. + </p> + <p> + Upon the British right the ground was more open than upon the left, and + the 52d was therefore obliged to fall back more quickly than the rest of + the line, and were the first to arrive at the bridge head, which was still + choked with artillery and cavalry. This was the most dangerous moment, the + rest of the infantry could not retreat until the bridge was clear, and the + French with exulting shouts pressed hard upon them to drive them back upon + the river. + </p> + <p> + Major MacLeod, seeing the urgent danger, rallied four companies of his + regiment upon the little hill on the right of the road, while Major Rowan + collected two companies on another to the left. Here they were joined by + many of the riflemen, and for a while the French advance was checked. + </p> + <p> + The Scudamores had remained throughout close to Major MacLeod, and had + long since armed themselves with the muskets and pouches of fallen men, + and with 43d shakoes on their heads, were fighting among the ranks. + </p> + <p> + The cloud of French skirmishers pressed hotly forward, and MacLeod, seeing + that the bridge was still blocked, resolved suddenly upon a desperate + measure. Taking off his cap, he pointed to the enemy, and calling upon his + men to follow him, rode boldly at them. Peter Scudamore caught up a bugle + which had fallen from a dead bugler by his side, blew the charge, and the + soldiers, cheering loudly, followed MacLeod against the enemy. + </p> + <p> + Astounded at this sudden and unexpected attack, the French skirmishers + paused, and then fell back before the furious charge of the 43d, who + pressed after them with loud and continuous cheering. Looking back, + MacLeod saw that the bridge was now clear, and recalled the troops, who + fell back rapidly again before the French infantry had recovered + sufficiently from their surprise to press them. + </p> + <p> + The hussars were, however, again forward, and were galloping down the + road, which was here sunken between somewhat high banks. Tom and Peter + were with the last company, which turned and prepared to receive them, + when Tom, pointing to a coil of rope upon a cart which had broken down, + shouted, "Quick, tie it to these posts across the road." Two or three men + sprang to assist him, and in a minute the rope was stretched across the + road at a foot from the ground, and fastened round a stone post on either + side. They had scarcely seized their muskets and leapt on the bank again, + when the French cavalry came thundering down the road. "Fire, a few of + you," Tom said, "so as to call their attention up here," and in accordance + with his order a dropping fire was opened. The French came along at a + gallop; a few of the leading horses saw the rope and leapt it, but those + behind caught it and fell, the mass behind pressed on, and in an instant + the lane was choked with a confused mass of men and horses. "Now a + volley," Tom cried, "and then to the bridge." + </p> + <p> + Every musket was emptied in to the struggling mass, and then with a cheer, + the men ran briskly down to the bridge, and crossed—the last of the + British troops over the Coa. + </p> + <p> + The rest of the infantry and artillery had already taken ground on the + heights behind the river, and these opened fire upon the French as they + approached the head of the bridge in pursuit. The British were now, + however, safe in the position which they ought to have taken up before the + advance of the French, and had General Craufurd obeyed his orders not to + fight beyond the Coa, the lives of 306 of his gallant troops, including + the officers, would have been saved. + </p> + <p> + The battle, however, was not yet over. The artillery on both sides played + across the ravine, the French skirmishers swarmed down to the river bank, + and between them and the British infantry a rapid fire was exchanged, + while a heavy column marched down to the bridge. With a deep-sounding + cheer they advanced upon it, while with answering cheers the British + opened fire upon them. The depth of the ravine at first deceived the + British marksmen, and the column pressed on until its head was + three-quarters across the bridge. Then the shower smote it, and beneath + that terrible fire the head of the column melted away. Still it pressed on + until across the bridge the corpses lay piled in a mass as high as the + parapet, and beyond this heap, this terrible line, there was no living. + Then sullenly and slowly the French fell back, while the British cheers + rose exultingly along the hillside. + </p> + <p> + Twice again did fresh columns pour on to the bridge, but only to melt away + under the British fire, neither of them reaching the dreadful line which + marked the point reached by the head of the first. The artillery and + musketry fire on both sides continued until four in the afternoon, when a + heavy rain set in, and the fire ceased altogether. + </p> + <p> + As the Coa was fordable at several points lower down, and the French could + therefore have turned the position next day, the British troops fell back + during the night behind the Pinhel river, where Picton's division was also + encamped. + </p> + <p> + Next morning the boys exchanged their Spanish suits for the uniform of + British officers, which they obtained from the effects of some of those + who had fallen upon the previous day, these being, as is usual in a + campaign, at once sold by auction, the amount realized being received by + the paymaster for the benefit of the dead men's relatives. Major MacLeod + had witnessed their ready presence of mind in throwing the rope across the + road, and so checking the French charge, and giving time to the rear-guard + to cross the bridge, and had made a very favorable report upon the + subject. + </p> + <p> + Two days later and they joined the Rangers, who were stationed at Guarda, + and were received with the greatest heartiness by their brother officers, + with warm but respectful greetings by the men, and with uproarious + demonstrations of gladness on the part of Sambo. + </p> + <p> + "The betting was two to one that you had gone down, boys," Captain Manley + said, after the first greetings; "but Carruthers and myself have taken up + all offers, and win I don't know how many dinners and bottles of wine. I + had the strongest faith you would get through somehow. You will take up + your quarters with me. I have two bedrooms upstairs there, which Sam has + taken possession of in your name. He would have it that you were sure to + be back in time for the first fight. Dinner will be ready at six, and + after that there will be a general gathering round the fire in the open to + hear your adventures. No doubt you would be dining with the colonel, but I + know he is engaged to the general." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, he told us so," Tom said, "and we are to dine with him to-morrow." + </p> + <p> + "All right, then; we'll make a night of it. Carruthers is coming to dine, + and Burke and Lethbridge; but the room won't hold more than six. We are + going to have a feast, for Sam has got hold of a sucking-pig; where he got + it from I dare not inquire, and Lethbridge said his fellow had, somehow or + other, found a turkey; as to wine, we shall have it of the best, for Burke + is quartered at the monastery, and the monks are so delighted at finding + him a good Catholic that they have given him the run of their cellar." + </p> + <p> + It was a jovial dinner, and no words can express the satisfaction and + delight which beamed on Sam's face as he stood behind his master, or the + grin of pride with which he placed the sucking-pig on the table. + </p> + <p> + "Sam, Sam!" Captain Manley said reprovingly, "I fear that pig is not + honestly come by, and that one of these days we shall hear that you have + come to a bad end." + </p> + <p> + "No, no, Massa Captain Manley, sar," Sam said, "dat pig come quite honest, + dat pig made present to Sam." + </p> + <p> + "A likely story that, Sam. Come, out with it. I have no doubt it was quite + as honest as Lethbridge's turkey anyhow. Come, tell us how it was." + </p> + <p> + Thus invoked, Sam's face assumed the pompons air with which he always + related a story, and he began,— + </p> + <p> + "Well, sar, de affair happened in dis way. When de massas arribe, two + o'clock, and went in for long talk wid de colonel, dis chile said to + himself, 'Now what am I going to get them for dinner?' De rations sarve + out dis morning war all skin and bone, and war pretty nigh finished at + lunch. Sam say to himself, 'Captain Manley's sure to say, 'You dine wid + me;' but as Captain Manley hadn't got no food himself, de invitation was + berry kind, berry kind indeed; but massa wasn't likely to get fat on dat + invitation." + </p> + <p> + Sam's narrative was interrupted by a perfect shout of laughter upon the + part of all at table, Captain Manley joining heartily in the laugh against + himself. When they had a little recovered again, Sam went on as gravely as + ever. "Dis struck Sam berry serious, not to have nothing for dinner after + being away seben months; presently idea occur to dis chile, and he stroll + permiscuous up to big farm-house on hill. When Sam got near house, kept + out of sight of window; at last got quite close, took off shako, and put + head suddenly in at window. Sure enough, just what Sam expected, dere sat + missus of farm, fat ole woman, wid fat ole servant opposite her. De door + was open, and dis little pig and several of his broders and sisters was a + frisking in and out. De old women look up bofe togeder, and dey give a + awful shriek when dey saw dis chile's head; dey fought it were de debil, + sure enough. Dey drop down on dere knees, and begin to pray as fast as + maybe. Den I give a loud 'Yah! yah!' and dey screams out fresh. 'Oh! good + massa debil!' says the ole woman, 'what you want? I been berry, berry bad, + but don't take me away.' You see, Massa Tom, I pick up little Spanish, + 'nuff to understand since you been gone. I not say nuffin, and de ole + woman den go on, 'If you want one soul Massa Debil, take dis here,' + pointing to her serbant;' she been much more wicked nor me.' Den de + serbant she set up awful shriek, and I says, 'Dis time I hab pity on you, + next time I come, if you not good I carry you bofe away. But must take + soul away to big debil 'else he neber forgibe me. Dere, I will carry off + soul of little pig. Gib it me.' De serbant she gives cry ob joy, jump up, + seize little pig, and berry much afraid, bring him to window. Before I + take him I say to old missus, 'Dis a free gibt on your part?' and she say, + 'Oh, yes, oh, yes, good Massa Debil, you can take dem all if you like.' I + say, 'No; only one—and now me gib you bit advice. My Massa down + below hear you very bad ole women, never gib noting to de poor, berry + hard, berry hard. Me advise you change your conduct, or, as sure as eggs + is eggs, he send me up again for you no time.' Den I gave two great 'Yah! + yah's!' again berry loud, and showed de white ob my eyes, and dey went + down on to knees again, and I go quietly round corner ob house, and walk + home wid de pig which was giben to me. Noting like stealing about dat, + Massa Manley, sar!" + </p> + <p> + Sam's story was received with roars of laughter, and when they had + recovered themselves a little, Captain Manley said, "It is lucky we march + to-morrow, Sam, for if the good woman were to catch a glimpse of you in + uniform, and were to find she had been tricked, she might lay a complaint + against you, and although, as you say, the pig was freely given to you, I + imagine the Provost Marshal might consider that it was obtained under + false pretences. But here are the other men outside, we had better + adjourn, for every one is longing to hear your adventures." + </p> + <p> + It was a lovely evening, and as the officers of the Norfolk Rangers sat or + lay round the fire, which was lit for light and cheerfulness rather than + warmth, the boys, after their long wanderings among strangers, felt how + pleasant and bright life was among friends and comrades. They had first to + relate their adventures with the guerillas, after which it was agreed that + they had earned the right to be silent for the rest of the evening, and + song, and jest, and merry story went round the ring. + </p> + <p> + Sam was installed under the direction of the doctor, a jovial Irishman, as + concocter of punch, and his office was by no means a sinecure. + </p> + <p> + "Now, major, give us the song of the regiment," Captain Manley said, and, + as he spoke, there was a general cry round the circle of "The Rangers, the + Rangers." "I'm agreeable," the major said. "Give me another tumbler of + punch to get my pipes in order. Make it a little sweeter than the last + brew, Sam; yes, that's better. Well, here goes—full chorus, and no + shirking." + </p> + <h3> + THE RANGERS. + </h3> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + "Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah! + Here's to the corps that we love so well; + Ever the first in the deadly fray, + Steady and firm amid shot and shell. + Scattered as skirmishers out in the front, + Contesting each foot of the ground we hold, + Nor yielding a step though we bear the brunt + Of the first attack of the foeman bold. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah! + Here's to the corps that we love so well; + Ever the first in the deadly fray, + Steady and firm amid shot and shell. + + "Steady boys, steady, the foe falls back, + Sullenly back to the beat of the drum, + Hark to the thunder that nears our flank + Rally in square, boys, their cavalry come. + Squadron on squadron, wave upon wave, + Dashing along with an ocean's force, + But they break into spray on our bayonets' points, + And we mock at the fury of rider and horse. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c. + + "The gunner may boast of the death he deals + As he shatters the foe with his iron hail, + And may laugh with pride as he checks the charge, + Or sees the dark column falter and quail. + But the gunner fights with the foe afar, + In the rear of the line is the battery's place, + The Ranger fights with a sterner joy + For he strives with his foemen face to face. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c. + + "The cavalry man is dashing and gay, + His steed is fast, and his blade is fine, + He blithely rides to the fiercest fray, + And cuts his way through the foeman's line, + But the wild, fierce joys of the deadly breach, + Or the patient pluck of the serried square + Are far away from the horseman's reach, + While the Norfolk Rangers are sure to be there. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c." +</pre> + <p> + Long, loud, and hearty was the cheering as the last chorus concluded. + "Very good song, very well sung, jolly companions every one," shouted the + doctor. "Now, Manley, keep the ball rolling, give us the 'The Bivouac,'" + Captain Manley emptied his glass, and, without hesitation, began— + </p> + <h3> + THE BIVOUAC. + </h3> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + "The weary march is over, boys, the camp fire's burning bright, + So gather round the blazing logs, we'll keep high feast to-night, + For every heart is full of joy, and every cheek aglow, + That after months of waiting, at last we meet the foe. + To-morrow's sun will see the fight, and ere that sun goes down, + Our glorious flag another wreath of victory shall crown. + + Hurrah, hurrah for the bivouac, + With comrades tried and true, + With faces bright, and spirits light, + And the foemen's fires in view. + + "Then fill your cups with Spanish wine, and let the toast go round, + Here's a health to all who love us on dear old England's ground. + Be their tresses gold or auburn, or black as ebon's hue, + Be their eyes of witching hazel, loving gray, or heaven's blue, + Here's to them all, the girls we love, God bless them every one; + May we all be here to toast them when to-morrow's work is done. + + Hurrah, hurrah, &c. + + "But whate'er to-morrow bring us, it shall shed no gloom to-night, + For a British soldier does not flinch from thought of death in fight; + No better ending could we wish, no worthier do we know, + Than to fall for King and country, with our face towards the foe; + And if we go, our friends who stay will keep our memory bright, + And will drink to us in silence by many a camp-fire's light. + + Hurrah, hurrah, &c." +</pre> + <p> + When the last chorus had ceased, the boys, who had had a long march that + morning, and were thoroughly tired, stole quietly off to bed, but it was + not till long after they had gone to sleep that the jovial party round the + fire broke up, and that Sam was relieved from his duties of concocter of + punch. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0012" id="link2HCH0012"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XII. — BUSACO AND TORRES VEDRAS. + </h2> + <p> + Instead of pressing forward upon his invasion of Portugal, Massena + prepared to besiege Almeida, and for a month the British and Portuguese + army remained in their position within a few hours' march of that town. + Wellington expected that Almeida would be able to resist for two months, + and hoped to find some opportunity for falling suddenly upon the + besiegers; but even a resistance of two months would have made it so late + in the season that Massena must have postponed his invasion until the next + spring. + </p> + <p> + Upon the morning of the 26th of August the French batteries opened fire, + and from Guarda the dull, heavy roar of artillery could be heard all day. + As darkness fell, the officers of the Rangers were, as usual, assembling + round their fire, when the earth seemed to shake beneath their feet, and a + flash like that of summer lightning lit the eastern sky. "What can that + be?" was the general exclamation. A minute later, and a deep, heavy, + prolonged roar sounded in their ears—then all was quiet. + </p> + <p> + "That is a big magazine," Captain Manley said, "and I'm afraid it's the + town, for it sounded too heavy for a mere field magazine. If it be the + town, you'll see it won't hold out much longer; even if the actual damage + is not very great, a great explosion always damages the morale of a + defense, and in that case we shall have Massena upon us, and there will be + wigs on the green ere many days are over." + </p> + <p> + Captain Manley's conclusions were correct. The magazine of Almeida had + exploded with terrific effect. Only six houses were left standing in the + town, a considerable portion of the ramparts was thrown down, and five + hundred people killed on the spot. The stones were hurled in all + directions with such force that forty of the besiegers were hurt in the + trenches. + </p> + <p> + Colonel Cox, who commanded, endeavored to rally the panic-stricken + garrison, and upon the following morning attempted to negotiate with + Massena, who sent an officer to demand instant surrender. + </p> + <p> + Defense was, in fact, impossible, but Colonel Cox attempted to negotiate, + because he hoped that Wellington would at once advance to his rescue. His + intentions were frustrated, however, by the treachery and mutiny of the + principal Portuguese officers under him, and the French at once took + possession of the ruins. + </p> + <p> + The British army fell back a short distance when the news of the disaster + arrived, and a fortnight of great anxiety and watchfulness passed, as it + was not certain by which road or roads Massena would advance. + </p> + <p> + It was not until the 18th of September that Massena fairly commenced his + march, having chosen the road from Visen through Martagoa, and the next + day the news reached the Rangers that the British army was to concentrate + on the heights of Busaco. + </p> + <p> + "So we are going to have a fight for it," Carruthers said to the boys, as + the officers assembled in readiness to take their places when the troops + had fallen in. "What will be the end of it?" + </p> + <p> + "We shall lick them," an old captain said, "though they are two to one, + and then they will march round us somehow, and then we shall have to fall + back in all haste on Lisbon, and embark there, and we shall eat our + Christmas dinner in England." + </p> + <p> + There was a general murmur of assent, for at that time the belief was + almost universal in the British army that they would be forced to abandon + Portugal. + </p> + <p> + "I do not know," Major Fanshawe said. "I heard last night, from a man who + has just returned from sick leave at Lisbon, that there are thousands of + peasants employed under our engineers in getting up some tremendous works + some fifteen miles this side of Lisbon. I should not be surprised yet if + Massena finds the chief a nut too hard to crack, with all his force." + </p> + <p> + "I have heard something about these works at Torres Vedras," Captain + Manley said, "a mere rumor; still I believe there must be something in it. + Wellington has only some twenty-five thousand British troops, and as many + Portuguese, while Massena has over a hundred thousand veterans at his + command. Our game would be hopeless unless we have something to fall back + on. No; I have every faith in our general. But there goes the bugle." + </p> + <p> + On the 24th the Rangers, with the rest of Picton's division, arrived on + the crest of Busaco, where Cole's and Craufurd's divisions arrived on the + same day. This position was one of immense strength, being a long ridge, + with a very deep valley in front. Upon the opposite side of this ravine + the slope was as steep and sharp as that of Busaco itself, so that the + opposite crest was within easy cannon shot. The enemy, in order to attack + the British position, would have to descend into the bottom of this steep + ravine, and then climb up the precipitous ascent, to meet the British + soldiers awaiting them, fresh and unshaken, at the top. So strong, indeed, + was the position that the English generals were doubtful whether Massena + would venture to attack. + </p> + <p> + Upon the 25th Craufurd moved his division forward, and would have repeated + his mistake of the Coa had not Wellington himself gone forward and + recalled the troops, bringing them off with difficulty in the face of the + advancing masses of the French. By three in the afternoon, 40,000 French + infantry were on the ridge opposite Busaco, and it appeared probable that + the battle would take place that afternoon, in which case the British + position would have been precarious, for neither Spencer's, Hill's, nor + Leith's divisions were up. + </p> + <p> + Massena, however, was miles behind, and Ney, who commanded the advance, + could not attack without orders; thus, the moment favorable for the French + passed by. When Massena arrived next day, the British divisions were all + up and in their places, and the long crest of Busaco swarmed with troops. + Hill occupied the right across the road to Pena Cova, then came Leith's + 5th division, then came Picton with the 3d division, with Spencer's + division, the 1st, next to him. On a plateau in front of a convent lay + Craufurd and Pack, while Cole, with the 4th division, was on the left. + </p> + <p> + The 27th and 28th were passed in comparative tranquillity, the rival + armies surveying each other across the chasm. From the woods far below + came up the constant crack of the rifle, as the skirmishers on either side + pushed each other backwards; and on the evening of the 28th this fighting + increased so much in strength and intensity, that the British troops were + some time under arms in expectation of a night attack, for the enemy's + riflemen had pressed far up on the hill-side towards the British lines. As + the night went on, however, the fire ceased, and the dark ravine between + the two long lines of bright watch-fires became hushed and still. + </p> + <p> + The Rangers were with Picton's division, and were out as an advance half + way down the ravine, two companies being down in the bottom as + skirmishers. Morning was but just breaking when a heavy fire burst out in + front. The regiment sprang to its feet, and prepared for action. It was + not long in coming, for the fire rolled rapidly up the hill towards them, + and the skirmishing companies came running back, pressed by a heavy column + of the enemy. Reynier had formed in two divisions, one of which was now + pressing forward against Picton's right, while the object of the other was + to gain the crest still farther to the right, and so place themselves + between Picton and Leigh. The whole regiment was at once engaged, but the + French assault was too powerful to be resisted, and the Rangers and the + other regiments of the advanced brigade gave way sullenly, while the + French eagerly pressed up the hill, although a battery opened upon them + from the crest, while they were unsupported by their own artillery. + </p> + <p> + "Golly, Massa Peter, dese fellows fight berry hard; look as if dey lick us + dis time," the black, who was in Peter's company, said to him as the + regiment retreated. + </p> + <p> + "The battle has only begun yet, Sam. We have plenty of fresh troops at the + top of the hill." + </p> + <p> + "Good ting, dat, Massa Peter. Berry hard work, dis—climb hill, carry + kit, fire gun, dodge de bullets, all sam time." + </p> + <p> + "You didn't dodge that bullet sharp enough, Sam," Peter said with a laugh, + as the negro's shako was carried off with a ball. + </p> + <p> + "Him cum too fast. Dere, you frog-eating thief." he said angrily as he + fired his musket at an advancing foe. "Dat serve you right," he went on to + himself as the Frenchman fell. "You spoil Sam's hat. Dis colored gentleman + catch cold first time him come on to rain." + </p> + <p> + The French continued their impetuous advance. Picton's right, as they + climbed the hill, fell back towards his center, and in half an hour from + the first shot being fired the head of the French column had won the + crest, and, being between Leigh and Picton's divisions, had cut the + British position. Then the column nearest to Picton's division began to + wheel to its right, so as to sweep the crest. + </p> + <p> + "Lie down, the Rangers; every man down," shouted the colonel, and the + breathless men threw themselves panting on the ground. A wild Irish shout + was heard behind them as they did so, and a tremendous volley of musketry + rang over their heads, and then the 88th and a wing of the 45th dashed + across them, and, with fierce cheers, charged that portion of the column + engaged in wheeling. Breathless and in disorder from their prodigious + efforts, the French were unable to resist this fresh attack. In an instant + the British were among them, and mixed up in wild confusion, fighting hand + to hand, the mass of combatants went mingled together down the hill. Nor + was the success of the French column which had gained the crest of long + duration, for Leith brought up one of his brigades; Colonel Cameron, with + the 9th Regiment, dashed at the enemy with the bayonet, without firing a + single shot, while the 38th attacked their flank; and the French, unable + to resist the onslaught, relinquished their position and retreated down + the hill. Nor upon the French right had Ney's attack proved more + successful. + </p> + <p> + Napier thus describes the combat in this quarter of the field:—"When + the light broke, three heavy masses detached from the sixth corps were + seen to enter the woods below, and to throw forward a profusion of + skirmishers; one of them, under General Marchand, emerging from the dark + chasm and following the main road, seemed intent to turn the right of the + light division; a second, under Loison, made straight up the mountain + against the front; the third remained in reserve. Simon's brigade, leading + Loison's attack, ascended with a wonderful alacrity, and though the light + troops plied it incessantly with musketry, and the artillery bullets swept + through it from the first to the last section, its order was never + disturbed, nor its speed in the least abated. Ross's guns were worked with + incredible quickness, yet their range was palpably contracted every round; + the enemy's shots came ringing up in a sharper key, the English + skirmishers, breathless and begrimed with powder, rushed over the edge of + the ascent, the artillery drew back, and the victorious cries of the + French were heard within a few yards of the summit. Craufurd, standing + alone on one of the rocks, had been intently watching the progress of + their attack, and now, with a shrill tone, ordered the two regiments in + reserve to charge. The next moment a horrid shout startled the French + column, and eighteen hundred British bayonets went sparkling over the + hill. Yet so brave, so hardy were the leading French, that each man of the + first section raised his musket, and two officers and ten men fell before + them. Not a Frenchman had missed his mark. They could do no more. The head + of their column was violently thrown back upon the rear, both flanks were + overlapped at the same time by the English wings, three terrible + discharges at five yards' distance shattered the wavering mass, and a long + line of broken arms and bleeding carcases marked the line of flight." + </p> + <p> + Ney did not renew the attack, and with some desultory skirmishing the + battle ended at two o'clock, and an hour's truce enabled both parties to + carry off their wounded. + </p> + <p> + Small parties of the French came in contact with the English skirmishers + during the afternoon, but the battle of Busaco was over. + </p> + <p> + "Don't call dat much of battle," Sam said discontentedly. "Just little + fierce fight, berry out of bref, and den, just as second wind came, all + ober." + </p> + <p> + The battle of Busaco was indeed one of secondary importance. The losses + were not great on either side, although that of the French was fully + threefold greater than that of the British, as the former were exposed + during their attack to the grape and shell of the British guns, while the + French guns afforded no assistance to their infantry. The French loss, in + killed and wounded and prisoners, did not exceed 4000, of which only 800 + were killed. Nor was any strategical advantage gained by the battle, for + the French, upon the following day, found a road across the hills to the + British left from Martagoa through Bonzalva. + </p> + <p> + Throughout the day they made feints of renewing the attack upon the + English position, and it was not until late in the afternoon that long + columns of men were seen crossing the hill to the left; and Wellington + discovered that Busaco had been won in vain, for that his flank was + turned, and there was nothing for it but to fall back upon Torres Vedras. + Before night the whole British army was in retreat. + </p> + <p> + "What a horrible scene of confusion," Tom remarked, as they marched into + the town of Coimbra next day. + </p> + <p> + "Confusion!" Captain Manley said; "it is enough to drive a + commander-in-chief out of his mind. Here Wellington has for weeks been + endeavoring to get the Portuguese Government to compel all the population + to retire upon Lisbon, carrying all they can, destroying the mills, and + burning all the corn they could not carry off. The Government did issue + the order, but it has taken no steps whatever to carry it out, although + they knew all along that we could never repel the invasion in the open. As + it is, the greater portion of these poor wretches will lose all they + possess, which they might have carried off quietly enough during the last + two months. Many of them will lose their lives, and they will block the + roads so that we shall have the French down on us to a certainty." + </p> + <p> + Nothing could be more sad than the scene. The streets of Coimbra were + crowded with fugitives from the country round, and these, as well as the + inhabitants, were all preparing to push onwards towards Lisbon. Bullock + carts and carriages, mules, donkeys, and horses were crowded together, all + laden with the aged, the children, the sick, and such property as was most + portable and valuable. Happily Massena had a circuitous detour to make; + the road in the mountain defile was scarcely passable, and throughout the + march he displayed but little energy; consequently it was not until the + morning of the first of October that his cavalry engaged those of the + light division which was covering the retreat. The division fell back + through the town, and the inhabitants, who had lingered to the last in + some vague hope that the French would not come, now rushed out again. The + bridge behind the town was choked, and the troops had to halt for some + time. In the rear the pistol shots of the cavalry told of the approach of + the French, and the din made by the panic-stricken fugitives was increased + by the yells of the prisoners shut up and forgotten in the prison hard by. + Their cries and supplications were too painful to be resisted, and the + British forced the prison doors and let them free. Once across the bridge, + the troops found the defile of Condeixa so choked up that it was + impossible to effect a passage, and, had the French pressed them the + division must have been destroyed. + </p> + <p> + The French infantry, however, had not arrived, and by night the road was + cleared, and the troops passed on. + </p> + <p> + There was no pursuit, for Massena allowed his troops to halt and plunder + Coimbra, and the British by easy marches, fell back to Torres Vedras; but + though unpursued, the disorder and relaxation of discipline which always + marks a retreat, showed itself, and Wellington was obliged to hang several + plunderers, and to resort to other severe measures to restore to + discipline that army which, only a week before, had repulsed the best + troops of France. Towards the end of the march the French pressed them + again, and Craufurd, with his light division, had a narrow escape of being + cut off. + </p> + <p> + Great was the satisfaction of the British troops when they took up the + position so carefully prepared for them; equally great the surprise of + Massena and the French army when they beheld the almost impregnable line + of redoubts and fortresses of whose very existence they had only heard a + confused rumor two or three days before. And yet formidable as was the + chain of forts occupied by the British, this was weak in comparison to the + second line, some five or six miles in the rear, to which Wellington would + have fallen back if driven from his first position. This second position + was indeed that which he had originally intended to have taken up, the + redoubts on the exterior range of hills being intended as outposts; but, + while Massena delayed his advance, the outside line of fortifications had + so grown and increased in strength, that Wellington resolved to hold them + in the first place. + </p> + <p> + There were, therefore, as will be seen by the plan, three lines of + defense. The first from Alhandra on the Tagus to Zizandre on the + sea-coast. This, following the windings of the hills, was twenty-nine + miles long; the second and main line was from Quintella on the Tagus to + the mouth of the San Lorenza, twenty-four miles in length; the third, + intended to cover an embarkation, in case of necessity, extended from + Passo d'Arcos on the Tagus to the town of Junquera on the coast. + </p> + <p> + Massena spent some days in surveying the British position, and came to the + conclusion that it was too strong to be attacked. Had the order of + Wellington been carried out, and the whole country wasted of provisions, + the French army must have made a precipitate retreat to avoid starvation, + for they had no provisions or connection with Spain. Wilson and Trant, + with Portuguese levies, hung upon their rear, and captured Coimbra, where + Massena had left his sick and wounded, 5000 in number, upon the very day + after the main French army advanced from the town. So vast were the + supplies, however, left in the country that Massena was able to take up + his position, first immediately in front of the British lines, and + afterwards at Santarem, within a day's march of them, and to maintain his + army in food throughout the winter until the beginning of March. + </p> + <p> + "Have you seen the <i>Gazette</i>, Scudamore?" Carruthers asked, rushing + into the tent one morning about a week after the regiment had settled down + in its tents on the heights of Torres Vedras. + </p> + <p> + "No; what's up?" Tom replied. + </p> + <p> + "There you are; you have both got your steps. Thomas Scudamore, ensign, + Norfolk Rangers, to be lieutenant, for distinguished services in the + field. Peter Scudamore, ditto, ditto. I wondered the chief had done + nothing for you after your journey through Spain." + </p> + <p> + "I am sure I did not expect anything," Tom answered, "and was quite + content when the colonel told us that Lord Wellington had said he was + pleased with the manner we had done our work. However, I am very glad; but + it is not pleasant going over five or six fellows' heads." + </p> + <p> + "Fortune of war," Carruthers said laughing. "Besides, two of them are at + the depôt, Sankey is away on sick leave, and none of the three who are + senior to you here will ever set the Thames on fire. No, no, you have + fairly earned your step and no one can say a word against it." + </p> + <p> + The news soon spread, and the boys were heartily congratulated by all the + officers of the regiment on their promotion, which placed them next on the + list to Carruthers, who had previously been the junior lieutenant. + Promotion in those days was rapid, and after a severe engagement an ensign + only joined upon the previous week might find himself a lieutenant, from + the number of death vacancies caused in the ranks above him. The Norfolk + Rangers had not suffered heavily at Talavera, or the boys might have had + their lieutenant's rank before this, without performing any exceptional + services. + </p> + <p> + "I wish we could get two months' leave, Tom," Peter said that night. "Of + course it is impossible, but it would be jolly to drop in upon Rhoda. By + her letter she seems well and happy, and aunt is very kind to her. It + would be nice; and now we are lieutenants, aunt wouldn't tell us to rub + our shoes." + </p> + <p> + "No," Tom laughed, "or be afraid of our pelting her pigeons and Minnie." + </p> + <p> + "No," Peter said. "Evidently she is coming round. Rhoda said that since + she has heard that we have got our commissions she has given up + prophesying once or twice a day that we shall come to a bad end—probably + hanging." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, and Rhoda said in her letter yesterday that aunt was quite touched + with those lace mantillas we got at Madrid, and sent off the day after we + rejoined, and actually remarked that, although we could no longer be + looked upon as boys, and seemed really as hair-brained and fond of getting + into scrapes as ever, yet it was evident that we were good, kindly lads, + and meant well at heart." + </p> + <p> + "I wish," Tom said, with a sudden burst of laughter, "that we could dress + in our old disguises, I as a student of theology you as a mild young + novice; what a lark we would have with her!" and the boys went off into + such shouts of laughter, that their aunt would have thought them more + scatter-brained than ever if she had heard them, while from the tent of + Captain Manley on one side, and of Carruthers and another young officer on + the other, came indignant expostulations, and entreaties that they would + keep quiet, and let other people go to sleep. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0013" id="link2HCH0013"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XIII. — ALBUERA. + </h2> + <p> + Very heavily did five months in the lines of Torres Vedras pass to the + Norfolk Rangers. When, in the beginning of November, Massena fell back to + Sautarem, the greater portion of the army followed him in readiness for + attack should any openings be found. Massena, however, entrenched himself + in a very strong position, and Wellington could no more attack him than he + could attack the lines of Torres Vedras; so that both armies faced each + other in inactivity until the beginning of March, when Massena broke up + his camp and began to retreat. + </p> + <p> + The Norfolk Rangers had been one of the regiments which had remained in + their quarters on Torres Vedras throughout the winter, and great was the + joy with which they received orders to strike their tents and push on in + pursuit. The retreat of Massena was masterly. Ney's division covered the + rear, and several sharp fights took place which are known in history as + the combats of Pombal, Redinha, Cazal Nova, Foz d'Aronce, and Sabugal. + </p> + <p> + In most of these the enemy were driven from their position by the British + outflanking them and threatening their line of retreat; but in the last, + by a mistake of General Erskine, a portion of his division attacked the + enemy in rear, and, although vastly outnumbered, drove him off from the + crest he held with desperate valor. Wellington himself said, "This was one + of the most glorious actions British troops were ever engaged in." + </p> + <p> + The next day the French crossed the Coa and Turones, and took up their + position under the guns of Ciudad Rodrigo, which they had left six months + before with the full assurance that they were going to conquer Portugal, + and drive the British into the sea. The invasion cost Massena thirty + thousand men, killed in battle, taken prisoners, or dead from hardships, + fatigues and fevers. + </p> + <p> + The Scudamores were not present at the battle of Sabugal, for on the + afternoon after the combat of Foz d'Aronce an orderly rode up to the + regiment and handed a note to the colonel. He read it, and at once + summoned the Scudamores at his side. + </p> + <p> + "An order from the commander-in-chief," he said, "for you to go to him at + once." + </p> + <p> + Following the orderly, the boys soon arrived at the cottage at which Lord + Wellington had established his headquarters. + </p> + <p> + "His lordship is with Lord Beresford," the aide-de-camp to whom they gave + their names said, "but the orders are that you are to be shown in at + once." + </p> + <p> + The lads were ushered into a small room, where, seated at a table, were + the commanders-in-chief of the British and the Portuguese troops. + </p> + <p> + "Young gentlemen," the former said, looking up with his keen piercing + eyes, "I have not seen you since your return from Spain. I am content with + what you did, and with the detailed report you sent me in. I shall keep my + eye upon you. Lord Beresford has asked me for two officers as + aides-de-camp, and he specially requires them to have a perfect knowledge + of Spanish. I have mentioned your names to him. It is not often that I + confidently recommend young officers, but from what I know of you I have + felt able to do so in the present case. You will, with him, have + opportunities of distinguishing yourselves such as you could not have with + your regiment. You accept the appointments?" + </p> + <p> + Tom and Peter would far rather have remained with their regiment, but they + felt that, after what Lord Wellington had said, they could not refuse; + they consequently expressed at once their willingness to serve, and their + thanks to the general for his kindness in recommending them. + </p> + <p> + "You can ride, I hope?" Lord Beresford, a powerfully-built, + pleasant-looking man, said. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, sir, we can both ride, but at present—" + </p> + <p> + "You have no horses, of course?" Lord Beresford put in. "I will provide + you with horses, and will assign servants to you from one of the cavalry + regiments with me. Will you join me at daybreak to-morrow? we shall march + at once." + </p> + <p> + There was a general expression of regret when the Scudamores informed + their comrades that they were again ordered on detached duty. As to Sam, + when Tom told him that he could not accompany them, he was uproarious in + his lamentations, and threatened to desert from his regiment in order to + follow them. At this the boys laughed, and told Sam that he would be + arrested and sent back before he had gone six hours. + </p> + <p> + "I tink, Massa Tom, dat you might hab told de general dat you hab got an + fust-class serbent, and dat you bring him wid you." + </p> + <p> + "But we shall be mounted now, Sam, and must have mounted men with us. You + can't ride, you know." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, massa, dis child ride first-rate, he can." + </p> + <p> + "Why, Sam, I heard you say not long ago you had never ridden on a horse + all your life." + </p> + <p> + "Never hab, massa, dat's true 'nuff; but Sam sure he can ride. Berry easy + ting dat. Sit on saddle, one leg each side—not berry difficult dat. + Sam see tousand soldiers do dat ebery day; dey sit quite easy on saddle; + much more easy dat dan beat big drum." + </p> + <p> + The boys laughed heartily at Sam's notion of riding without practice, and + assured him that it was not so easy as he imagined. + </p> + <p> + "Look here, Sam," Peter said at last, "you practice riding a little, and + then next time we get away we will ask for you to go with us." And with + this Sam was obliged to be content. + </p> + <p> + Half an hour later, when the boys were chatting with Captain Manley, + Carruthers, and two or three other officers, in the tent of the + first-named officer, they heard a commotion outside, with shouts of + laughter, in which they joined as soon as they went out and saw what was + going on. + </p> + <p> + Sam, upon leaving the Scudamores, determined at once upon trying the + experiment of riding, in order that he might—for he had no doubt all + would be easy enough—ride triumphantly up to his masters' tent and + prove his ability to accompany them at once. He was not long before he saw + a muleteer coming along sitting carelessly on his mule, with both legs on + one side of the animal, side-saddle fashion, as is the frequent custom of + muleteers. It was evident, by the slowness of his pace, that he was not + pressed for time. + </p> + <p> + Sam thought that this was a fine opportunity. + </p> + <p> + "Let me have a ride?" he said to the muleteer in broken Portuguese. + </p> + <p> + The man shook his head. Sam held out a quarter of a dollar. "There," he + said, "I'll give you that for a hour's ride." + </p> + <p> + The muleteer hesitated, and then said, "The mule is very bad tempered with + strangers." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, dat all nonsense," Sam thought, "he only pretend dat as excuse; any + one can see de creature as quiet as lamb; don't he let his master sit on + him sideways?" + </p> + <p> + "All right," he said aloud, "I try him." + </p> + <p> + The muleteer dismounted, and Sam prepared to take his place on the saddle. + By this time several of the Rangers had gathered round, and these + foreseeing, from the appearance of the mule and the look of sly amusement + in the face of the muleteer, that there was likely to be some fun, at once + proposed to assist, which they did by giving advice to Sam of the most + opposite nature. Sam was first going to mount on the off side, but this + irregularity was repressed, and one wag, taking the stirrup of the near + side in his hand, said, "Now, Sam, up you go, never mind what these + fellows say, you put your right foot in the stirrup, and lift your left + over the saddle." + </p> + <p> + Sam acted according to these instructions, and found himself, to his + intense amazement and the delight of the bystanders, sitting with his face + to the mule's tail. + </p> + <p> + "Hullo," he exclaimed in astonishment, "dis all wrong; you know noting + about de business, you Bill Atkins." + </p> + <p> + And Sam prepared to descend, when, at his first movement, the mule put + down his head and flung his heels high in the air. Sam instinctively threw + himself forward, but not recovering his upright position before the mule + again flung up her hind quarters, he received a violent blow on the nose. + "Golly!" exclaimed the black in a tone of extreme anguish, as, with water + streaming from his eyes, he instinctively clutched the first thing which + came to hand, the root of the mule's tail, and held on like grim death. + The astonished mule lashed out wildly and furiously, but Sam, with his + body laid close on her back, his hands grasping her tail, and his legs and + feet pressing tight to her flanks, held on with the clutch of despair. + </p> + <p> + "Seize de debil!—seize him!—he gone mad!"—he shouted + frantically, but the soldiers were in such fits of laughter that they + could do nothing. + </p> + <p> + Then the mule, finding that he could not get rid of this singular burden + by kicking, started suddenly off at full gallop. + </p> + <p> + "Stop him—stop him," yelled Sam. "Gracious me, dis am drefful." + </p> + <p> + This was the sight which met the eyes of the Scudamores and their brother + officers as they issued from their tents. The soldiers were all out of + their tents now, and the air rang with laughter mingled with shouts of "Go + it, moke!" "Hold on, Sam!" + </p> + <p> + "Stop that mule," Captain Manley shouted, "or the man will be killed." + </p> + <p> + Several soldiers ran to catch at the bridle, but the mule swerved and + dashed away out of camp along the road. + </p> + <p> + "Look, look," Tom said, "there are the staff, and Lord Wellington among + them. The mule's going to charge them." + </p> + <p> + The road was somewhat narrow, with a wall of four feet high on either + side, and the general, who was riding at the head of the party, drew his + rein when he saw the mule coming along at a furious gallop. The staff did + the same, and a general shout was raised to check or divert her wild + career. The obstinate brute, however, maddened by the shouts which had + greeted her from all sides, and the strange manner in which she was being + ridden, never swerved from her course. When she was within five yards of + the party, the general turned his horse, touched him with his spur, and + leaped him lightly over the wall; one or two others followed his example, + but the others had not time to do so before the mule was among them. Two + horses and riders were thrown down, one on either side, with the impetus + of the shock, and then, kicking, striking and charging, the animal made + its way past the others and dashed on in despite of the attempts to stop + her, and the cries of "Shoot the brute," "Ride him down," and the angry + ejaculations of those injured in its passage. Thirty yards behind the + group of officers were the escort, and these prepared to catch the mule, + when turning to the left she leaped the wall, eliciting a scream of terror + from Sam, who was nearly shaken from his hold by the sudden jerk. + </p> + <p> + The anger of the officers was changed into a burst of amusement at seeing + Sam's dark face and staring eyes over the mule's crupper, and even Lord + Wellington smiled grimly. An order was hastily given, and four troopers + detached themselves from the escort and started off in pursuit. The mule + was, however, a fast one, and maddened by fright, and it was some time + before the foremost of the troopers was up to her. As he came alongside, + the mule suddenly swerved round and lashed out viciously, one of her heels + coming against the horse's ribs, and the other against the leg of the + rider, who, in spite of his thick jack-boot, for some time thought that + his leg was broken. + </p> + <p> + He fell behind, and the others, rendered cautious by the lesson, came up + but slowly, and prepared to close upon the animal's head, one from each + side. Just as they were going to do so, however, they were startled by a + scattered fire of musketry, and by the sound of balls whizzing about their + ears, and discovered that in the ardor of the chase they had passed over + the space which separated the French from the English lines, and that they + were close to the former. At the same moment they saw a party of cavalry + stealing round to cut off their retreat. Turning their horses, the + dragoons rode off at full speed, but the French cavalry, on fresher + horses, would have caught them before they reached the English lines had + not a troop of British horse dashed forward to meet them upon seeing their + danger. As to the mule, she continued her wild gallop into the French + lines, where she was soon surrounded and captured. + </p> + <p> + The boys were greatly vexed at the loss of their faithful black, but they + had little time for grieving, for an hour after they rode off with General + Beresford's division. Three days' march brought them to Campo Mayor, a + town which had, two days before, surrendered to the French, who, surprised + by the sudden appearance of the British, evacuated the place hastily and + retreated, after suffering much from a brilliant charge of the 13th + Hussars, who, although unsupported, charged right through the French + cavalry, and Beresford then prepared to lay siege to Badajos. Had he + pushed forward at once, he would have found the place unprepared for a + siege, but, delaying a few days at Elvas to give his tired troops repose, + the French repaired the walls, and were in a position to offer a + respectable defense, when he made his appearance under its walls. The army + was very badly provided with heavy guns, but the approaches were opened + and the siege commenced in regular form, when the news arrived that Soult + was marching with a powerful army to its relief. The guns were therefore + withdrawn, the siege raised, and Beresford marched to meet Soult at + Albuera. + </p> + <p> + On the 15th of May he took up his position on rising ground looking down + on Albuera, having the river in his front. Acting with him, and nominally + under his orders, was a Spanish force under Blake. This was intended to + occupy the right of the position, but with the usual Spanish dilatoriness, + instead of being upon the ground, as he had promised, by noon, Blake did + not arrive until past midnight; the French accordingly crossed the river + unmolested, and the British general found his right turned. + </p> + <p> + Beresford's position was now a very faulty one, as the woods completely + hid the movements of the enemy, and a high hill, which they had at once + seized, flanked the whole allied position and threatened its line of + retreat. + </p> + <p> + When the morning of the 16th dawned the armies were numerically very + unequal. The British had 30,000 infantry, 2,000 cavalry, and 38 guns; the + French, 19,000 infantry, 4,000 cavalry, and 40 guns; but of these the + French were all veteran troops, while Beresford had but 6,000 British + troops, the remainder being Spanish and Portuguese, upon whom no reliance + whatever was to be placed. The British officers present were all of + opinion that their chances of success, under the circumstances, were + slight indeed. + </p> + <p> + The battle commenced at nine in the morning by an attack by the French + general Godinot upon the bridge of Albuera. Their columns were, however, + so completely plowed by the guns of the Portuguese upon the eminence + behind it, that they made no progress, and Beresford perceived at once + that the main attack would be made on his right. He despatched Tom + Scudamore with orders to Blake to throw back his troops at right angles to + the main front. The pig-headed Spaniard refused to obey, asserting that + the main attack was in front. Colonel Hardinge was sent to insist upon the + order being carried out, but Blake still refused, and Beresford himself + rode furiously across and took the command just as the French column + debouched from the wood on the right. + </p> + <p> + Before the Spanish movement was completed the French were among them. + Their cavalry swept round to the right rear, and menaced the line of + retreat, the infantry charged the wavering Spanish battalions, and the + latter at once fell into confusion and began to fall back. William Stewart + now arrived with a brigade of the second division to endeavor to retrieve + the day; but as they were advancing into position, four regiments of + French cavalry, whose movements were hidden in the driving rain until they + were close at hand, fell upon them and rode down two-thirds of the + brigade, the 31st regiment alone having time to form square and repulse + the horsemen. + </p> + <p> + Beresford himself, with his staff, was in the middle of the mélée, and the + lads found themselves engaged in hand-to-hand combats with the French + troopers. All was confusion. Peter was unhorsed by the shock of a French + hussar, but Tom shot the trooper before he could cut Peter down. Free for + a moment, he looked round, and saw a French lancer charging, lance at + rest, at Lord Beresford. "Look out, sir!" he shouted, and the general, + turning round, swept aside the lance thrust with his arm; and as the + lancer, carried on by the impetus of his charge, dashed against him, he + seized him by the throat and waist, lifted him bodily from his saddle, and + hurled him insensible to the ground. Just at this moment General Lumley + arrived with some Portuguese cavalry, and the French lancers galloped off. + </p> + <p> + The Spanish cavalry, who had orders to charge the French cavalry in flank, + galloped up until within a few yards of them, and then turned and fled + shamefully. + </p> + <p> + Beresford, now furious at the cowardice of the Spanish infantry, seized + one of their ensigns by the shoulder, and dragged him, with his colors, to + the front by main force, but the infantry would not even then advance. + </p> + <p> + The driving rain saved the allied army at this critical moment, for Soult + was unable to see the terrible confusion which reigned in their ranks, and + kept his heavy columns in hand when an attack would have carried with it + certain victory. + </p> + <p> + In the pause which ensued, the British regiments began to make their way + to the front. Colbourn, with the 31st Regiment, was already there; Stewart + brought up Haughton's brigade; and the 29th burst its way through the + flying Spaniards and joined the 31st, these movements being made under a + storm of shot and shell from the French artillery. Colonel Hartman brought + up the British artillery, and the Spanish generals Zayas and Ballesteros + succeeded in checking and bringing forward again some of the Spanish + infantry. + </p> + <p> + The French advanced in great force, the artillery on both sides poured in + grape at short distance, and the carnage was terrible. Still the little + band of British held their ground. Stewart was twice wounded, Haughton and + Colonels Duckworth and Inglis slain. Of the 57th Regiment twenty-two + officers and four hundred men fell out of the five hundred that had + mounted the hill, and the other regiments had suffered nearly as severely. + Not a third were standing unhurt, and fresh columns of the French were + advancing. + </p> + <p> + The battle looked desperate, and Beresford made preparations for a + retreat. At this moment, however, Colonel Hardinge brought up General Cole + with the fourth division, and Colonel Abercrombie with the third brigade + of Colbourn's second division. Beresford recalled his order for retreat, + and the terrible fight continued. The fourth division was composed of two + brigades, the one, a Portuguese under General Harvey, was pushed down to + the right to keep off the French cavalry, while the Fusilier brigade, + composed of the 7th and 23rd fusilier regiments, under Sir William Myers, + climbed the desperately contested hill, which Abercombie ascended also, + more on the left. + </p> + <p> + It was time, for the whole of the French reserves were now coming into + action; six guns were already in the enemy's possession, the remnant of + Haughton's brigade could no longer sustain its ground, and the heavy + French columns were advancing exultantly to assured victory. + </p> + <p> + Suddenly, through the smoke, Cole's fusilier brigade appeared on the right + of Haughton's brigade, just as Abercrombie came up on its left. Startled + by the sight, and by the heavy fire, the French column paused, and, to + quote Napier's glowing words, "hesitated, and then, vomiting forth a storm + of fire, hastily endeavored to enlarge their front, while a fearful + discharge of grape from all their artillery whistled through the British + ranks. Myers was killed, Cole and the three colonels, Ellis, Blakeney and + Hawkshawe, fell wounded; and the fusilier battalions, struck by the iron + tempest, reeled and staggered like sinking ships; but suddenly and sternly + recovering, they closed with their terrible enemies, and then was seen + with what a strength and majesty the British soldier fights. In vain did + Soult with voice and gesture animate his Frenchmen; in vain did the + hardiest veterans break from the crowded columns and sacrifice their lives + to gain time for the mass to open out on such a fair field; in vain did + the mass itself bear up, and, fiercely striving, fire indiscriminately + upon friends and foes, while the horsemen hovering on its flank threatened + to charge the advancing line. Nothing could stop that astonishing + infantry; no sudden burst of undisciplined valor, no nervous enthusiasm + weakened the stability of their order; their flashing eyes were bent on + the dark columns in their front, their measured tread shook the ground, + their dreadful volleys swept away the head of every formation, their + deafening shouts overpowered the dissonant cries that broke from all parts + of the tumultuous crowd, as, slowly and with horrid carnage, it was pushed + by the incessant vigor of the attack to the farthest edge of the hill. In + vain did the French reserves mix with the struggling multitude to sustain + the fight; their efforts only increased the irremediable confusion, and + the mighty mass breaking off like a loosened cliff, went headlong down the + steep; the rain flowed after in streams discolored with blood, and + eighteen hundred unwounded men, the remnant of six thousand unconquerable + British soldiers, stood triumphant on the fatal hill." + </p> + <p> + While this dreadful fight was going on, Hamilton's and Collier's + Portuguese divisions, ten thousand strong, marched to support the British, + but they did not reach the summit of the hill until the battle was over; + they suffered, however, a good deal of loss from the French artillery, + which, to cover the retreat, opened furiously upon them. + </p> + <p> + The French were in no position to renew the attack, the allies quite + incapable of pursuit, and when night fell the two armies were in the same + position they had occupied twenty-four hours before. + </p> + <p> + Never was British valor more conspicuously displayed than at the battle of + Albuera. Out of 6,000 infantry they lost 4,200 killed and wounded, while + the Spanish and Portuguese had but 2,600 killed and wounded out of a total + of 34,000; the French loss was over 8,000. + </p> + <p> + This desperate fight had lasted but four hours, but to all engaged it + seemed an age. The din, the whirl, the storm of shot, the fierce charges + of the cavalry, the swaying backwards and forwards of the fight, the + disastrous appearance of the battle from the first, all combined to make + up a perfectly bewildering confusion. + </p> + <p> + The Scudamores, after its commencement, had seen but little of each other. + Whenever one or other of them found their way to the general, who was ever + in the thickest of the fray, it was but to remain there for a moment or + two before being despatched with fresh messages. + </p> + <p> + Tom's horse was shot under him early in the day, but he obtained a remount + from an orderly and continued his duty until, just as the day was won, he + received a musket ball in the shoulder. He half fell, half dismounted, + and, giddy and faint, lay down and remained there until the cessation of + the fire told him that the battle was over. Then he staggered to his feet + and sought a surgeon. He presently found one hard at work under a tree, + but there was so large a number of wounded men lying or sitting round, + that Tom saw that it would be hours before he could be attended to. As he + turned to go he saw an officer of the staff ride by. + </p> + <p> + "Ah, Scudamore! Are you hit too?—not very badly, I hope? The chief + was asking after you just now." + </p> + <p> + "My shoulder is smashed, I think," Tom said, "and the doctor has his hands + full at present; but if you will tie my arm tight across my chest with my + sash, I shall be able to get on." + </p> + <p> + The officer at once leapt from his horse, and proceeded to bind Tom's arm + in the position he requested. + </p> + <p> + "Have you seen my brother," Tom asked. + </p> + <p> + "No, I have not; he was close to Beresford when the fusiliers dashed up + the hill; his horse fell dead, but he was not hit, for I saw him jump up + all right. I did not see him afterwards. As he could not have got a fresh + mount then, I expect he joined the fusiliers and went up the hill." + </p> + <p> + "Is the loss heavy?" Tom asked. + </p> + <p> + "Awful—awful," the officer said. "If it had lasted another quarter + of an hour, there would have been nobody left alive; as it is, there are + not 2,000 men at the outside on their feet." + </p> + <p> + "What, altogether?" Tom exclaimed. + </p> + <p> + "Altogether," the officer answered sadly. "We have lose two men out of + every three who went into it." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you," Tom said. "Now where shall I find the general?" + </p> + <p> + "Up on the hill. I shall see you there in a few minutes. I hope you will + find your brother all right." + </p> + <p> + Very slowly did Tom make his way up the steep slope, sitting down to rest + many times, for he was faint from loss of blood and sick with the pain of + his wound, and it was a long half hour before he joined the group of + officers clustered round the commander-in-chief. + </p> + <p> + He was heartily greeted; but in answer to his question as to whether any + one had seen his brother, no one could give a satisfactory reply. One, + however, was able to confirm what had been before told to him, for he had + seen Peter on foot advancing with the fusilier brigade. Tom's heart felt + very heavy as he turned away towards the front, where the fusiliers were + standing on the ground they had so hardly won. The distance he had to + traverse was but short, but the journey was a ghastly one. The ground was + literally heaped with dead. Wounded men were seen sitting up trying to + stanch their wounds, others lay feebly groaning, while soldiers were + hurrying to and fro from the water carts, with pannikins of water to + relieve their agonizing thirst. + </p> + <p> + "Do you know, sergeant, whether they have collected the wounded officers, + and, if so, where they are?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, sir, most of them are there at the right flank of the regiment." + </p> + <p> + Tom made his way towards the spot indicated, where a small group of + officers were standing, while a surgeon was examining a long line of + wounded laid side by side upon the ground. Tom hardly breathed as he ran + his eye along their faces, and his heart seemed to stop as he recognized + in the very one the surgeon was then examining the dead-white face of + Peter. + </p> + <p> + He staggered forward and said in a gasping voice, "He is my brother—is + he dead?" + </p> + <p> + The surgeon looked up. "Sit down," he said sharply, and Tom, unable to + resist the order, sank rather than sat down, his eyes still riveted on + Peter's face. + </p> + <p> + "No," the surgeon said, answering the question, "he has only fainted from + loss of blood, but he is hit hard, the bullet has gone in just above the + hip, and until I know its course I can't say whether he has a chance or + not." + </p> + <p> + "Here, sergeant, give me the probe," and with this he proceeded cautiously + to examine the course of the ball. As he did so his anxious face + brightened a little. + </p> + <p> + "He was struck slantingly," he said, "the ball has gone round by the back; + turn him over, sergeant. Ah, I thought so; it has gone out on the other + side. Well, I think it has missed any vital part, and in that case I can + give you hope. There," he said after he had finished dressing the wound + and fastening a bandage tightly round the body; "now pour some + brandy-and-water down his throat, sergeant, and sprinkle his face with + water. Now, sir, I will look at your shoulder." + </p> + <p> + But he spoke to insensible ears, for Tom, upon hearing the more favorable + report as to Peter's state, had fainted dead off. + </p> + <p> + The surgeon glanced at him. "He'll come round all right," he said. "I will + go on in the mean time," and set to work at the next in the ghastly line. + </p> + <p> + It was some time before Tom recovered his consciousness; when he did so, + it was with a feeling of intense agony in the shoulder. + </p> + <p> + "Lie quiet," the surgeon said, "I shan't be long about it." + </p> + <p> + It seemed to Tom, nevertheless, as if an interminable time passed before + the surgeon spoke again. + </p> + <p> + "You'll do," he said. "It is an awkward shot, for it has broken the + shoulder bone and carried a portion away, but with quiet and care you will + get the use of your arm again. You are lucky, for if it had gone two + inches to the left it would have smashed the arm at the socket, and two + inches the other way and it would have been all up with you. Now lie quiet + for awhile; you can do nothing for your brother at present. It may be + hours before he recovers consciousness." + </p> + <p> + Tom was too faint and weak to argue, and a minute later he dropped off to + sleep, from which he did not wake until it was dusk. Sitting up, he saw + that he had been aroused by the approach of an officer, whom he recognized + as one of General Beresford's staff. + </p> + <p> + "How are you, Scudamore?" he asked. "The general has just sent me to + inquire." + </p> + <p> + "He is very kind," Tom said. "I think that I am all right, only I am + horribly thirsty." + </p> + <p> + The officer unslung a flask from his shoulder. "This is weak + brandy-and-water. I have brought it over for you. I am sorry to hear your + brother is so bad, but the doctor gives strong hopes of him in his + report." + </p> + <p> + Tom bent down over Peter. "He is breathing quietly," he said. "I hope it + is a sort of sleep he has fallen into. What are we doing?" + </p> + <p> + "Nothing," the officer answered; "there is nothing to do; every unbounded + man is under arms in case the French attack us in the night. I expect, + however, they will wait till morning, and if they come on then, I fear our + chance is a slight one indeed. We have only 1,800 of our infantry; the + German regiments and the Portuguese will do their best; but the Spanish + are utterly useless. Soult has lost more men than we have, but we are like + a body which has lost its back-bone; and if the French, who are all good + soldiers, renew the battle, I fear it is all up with us." + </p> + <p> + "Have you got all our wounded in?" Tom asked. + </p> + <p> + "No," the officer said bitterly. "Our unwounded men must stand to arms, + and Lord Beresford sent over to Blake just now to ask for the assistance + of a battalion of Spaniards to collect our wounded, and the brute sent + back to say that it was the custom in allied armies for each army to + attend to its own wounded." + </p> + <p> + "The brute!" Tom repeated with disgust. "How the poor fellows must be + suffering!" + </p> + <p> + "The men who are but slightly wounded have been taking water to all they + can find, and the doctors are at work now, and will be all night going + about dressing wounds. The worst of it is, if the fight begins again + to-morrow, all the wounded who cannot crawl away must remain under fire. + However, the French wounded are all over the hill too, and perhaps the + French will avoid a cannonade as much as possible, for their sake. It is a + bad look-out altogether; and between ourselves, Beresford has written to + Lord Wellington to say that he anticipates a crushing defeat." + </p> + <p> + "Is there any chance of reinforcements?" Tom asked. + </p> + <p> + "We hope that the third brigade of the fourth division will be up + to-morrow by midday; they are ordered to come on by forced marches. If + Soult does not attack till they arrive, it will make all the difference, + for 1,500 fresh men will nearly double our strength. But I must be going + now. Good-bye." + </p> + <p> + The surgeon presently came round again to see how the wounded officers + were getting on. Tom asked him whether there was anything he could do for + Peter; but the surgeon, after feeling his pulse, said: "No, not as long as + he breathes quietly like this; but if he moves pour a little + brandy-and-water down his throat. Now gentlemen, all who can must look + after the others, for there is not an available man, and I must be at work + all night on the field." + </p> + <p> + There were many of the officers who were not hit too severely to move + about, and these collected some wood and made a fire, so as to enable them + to see and attend to their more severely wounded comrades. Tom took his + place close to Peter, where he could watch his least movement, and once or + twice during the night poured a little brandy-and-water between his lips. + The other officers took it by turns to attend to their comrades, to keep + up the fire, and to sleep. Those whose turn it was to be awake sat round + the fire smoking, and talking as to the chances of the morrow, getting up + occasionally to give drink to such of the badly wounded as were awake. + </p> + <p> + Tom, faint with his wound, found it, towards morning, impossible to keep + awake, and dozed off, to wake with a start and find that it was broad + daylight. Soon afterwards, to his intense satisfaction, Peter opened his + eyes. Tom bent over him. "Don't try to move, Peter; lie quiet, old boy." + </p> + <p> + "What's the matter?" Peter asked with a puzzled look. + </p> + <p> + "You have been hit in the body, Peter, but the doctor means to get you + round in no time. Yes," he continued, seeing Peter's eyes fixed on his + bandaged shoulder, "I have had a tap too, but there's no great harm done. + There, drink some brandy-and-water, and go off to sleep again, if you + can." + </p> + <p> + The morning passed very slowly, the troops being all under arms, expecting + the renewed attack of Soult, but it came not; and when early in the + afternoon, the third brigade of the fourth division marched into camp, + they were received with general cheering. A heavy load seemed taken off + every one's heart, and they felt now that they could fight, if fight they + must, with a hope of success. + </p> + <p> + The new-comers, wearied as they were with their long forced marches, at + once took the outpost duties, and those relieved set about the duty of + collecting and bringing in all the wounded. + </p> + <p> + Next morning the joyful news came that Soult was retiring, and all felt + with a thrill of triumph that their sacrifices and efforts had not been in + vain, and that the hard-fought battle of Albuera was forever to take its + place among the great victories of the British army. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0014" id="link2HCH0014"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XIV. — INVALIDED HOME. + </h2> + <p> + Two days after the battle of Albuera, Lord Wellington himself arrived, and + from the officers of his staff Tom heard the details of the battle of + Fuentes d'Onoro, which had been fought a few days previously, and which + had been nearly as hardly contested as had Albuera itself, both sides + claiming the victory. + </p> + <p> + The next day, the bulk of Beresford's army returned to the neighborhood of + Badajos, which they again invested, while a long convoy of wounded started + for Lisbon. The Scudamores accompanied it as far as Campo Major, where a + large hospital had been prepared for those too ill to bear the journey. + Peter was still unconscious. Fever had set in upon the day after the + battle, and for three weeks he lay between life and death. Tom's arm was + mending very slowly, and he would have had hard work indeed in nursing + Peter had it not been for the arrival of unexpected assistance. A large + villa had been taken close to the main hospital for the use of officers, + and one of the rooms was allotted to the Scudamores. + </p> + <p> + Upon the evening of the second day after their arrival, Tom was sitting by + Peter's bedside, when, after a preliminary tap, the door opened, and to + Tom's perfect amazement Sambo entered. The negro hurried forward, threw + himself on his knees, seized Tom's hand and kissed it passionately, and + then looking at the thin and fever-flushed face of Peter, he hid his face + in his hands and sobbed unrestrainedly. + </p> + <p> + "Hush, Sam, hush," Tom said soothingly. "My poor fellow, why, where have + you come from? I thought you were a prisoner with the French." + </p> + <p> + "I knew how it would be, Massa Tom," the black said, paying no attention + to the questions. "First thing Sam said to himself when he got among + French fellows, 'Dere, dose young gentlemen dey get into all sorts of + danger widout Sam, sartin sure dey get hurt widout Sam to look after dem.' + Dat idea troubled Sam berry much, took away Sam's sleep altogether." + </p> + <p> + "Well it turned out so, as you see, Sam," Tom said with a smile, "but tell + me how did you get away? But first give me some lemonade out of that jug, + then you can tell me all about it." + </p> + <p> + "Why, Massa Tom," Sam said, when he had complied with the request, "you + didn't think dat dis chile was going to stop prisoner with dose French + chaps; Sam not such a fool as dat, nohow. When dat cussed mule—I + tell you fair, Massa Tom, dis chile conclude dat riding not such a berry + easy ting after all—when dat cussed mule ran into French camp, de + soldiers dey catch him, and dey take Sam off, and den dey jabber and laugh + for all de world like great lots of monkeys. Well, for some time Sam he + didn't say nothing, all de wind shook out of his body. Besides which he + couldn't understand what dey say. Den all of a sudden, to Sam's surprise, + up came a colored soldier, and he speak to Sam in de English tongue. + 'Holla, broder, how you come here?" I ask. 'I been cook on board English + merchant ship,' he say. 'Ship she taken by French privateer. When dey come + to port dey say to me, "You not Englishman, you hab choice, you go to + prison, or you be French soldier." Natural, I not want go prison, so I + conclude be French soldier. I daresay dey gib you choice too.' Well, + massa, a wink as good as a nod to blind hoss. So dey take me to tent, put + me under guard, and next day a French officer come dat speak English. He + ask me all sorts ob questions, and at last he ask me why I list English + soldier. So you see I had got a little lie all ready, and me tell him, me + one poor Melican negro man, cook on board Melican ship. Ship taken by + English man-ob-war. Put Sam in prison and give him choice to go as + soldier. "Den you not care about English,' de officer say, and Sam draw + hisself up and pat his chest and say, 'Me Melican citizen, me no + Britisher's slave, some day me go back States, go on board Melican + man-ob-war, me pay out dese Britishers for make Sam slave.' Den de officer + laugh, and say dat if I like I could fight dem now; and if I prefer French + uniform to French prison, me could have him. Ob course I accep' offer, and + harp an hour after me in French uniform. French officer try to make joke + ob Sam, and ask whether I like cavalry or foot soldier. Sam say he had + enuff of quadruples at present. Me remain French soldier three weeks, den + cum great battle, dey call him Fuentes donory. Sam's regiment fight. Sam + not like fire at red coats, so break bullet off catridge, neber put him in + gun. We charge right into middle of village full of English soldiers, de + bullets fly all about. Sam not see de point ob getting kill by mistake, so + he tumble down, pretend to be dead. Presently French beaten back; when + English soldier wid doctor cum look at wounded, dey turn Sam ober, and dey + say, 'Hullo, here dead nigger.' 'Nigger yourself, John Atkins,' I say for + sure enuff it's de ole regiment—'you say dat once again me knock + your head off;' me jump up, and all de world call out, 'Hullo, why it's + Sam.' Den me splain matter, and all berry glad, cept John Atkins, and next + morning me gib him licking he member all his life, me pound him most to a + squash. Four days ago colonel send for Sam, say, 'Sam, berry bad job, bofe + Massas wounded bad, send you to nurse dem;' so dis chile come. Dat all, + Massa Tom. Here letter for you from colonel, now you read dis letter, den + you get in bed, you sleep all night, Sam watch Massa Peter." + </p> + <p> + Greatly relieved to have his faithful servant again, and to know that + Peter would be well cared for, instead of being left in charge of the + Spanish hospital orderly, whenever weakness and pain obliged him to lie + down, Tom abandoned his place by the bedside, and prepared for a tranquil + night's rest, first reading the colonel's letter. + </p> + <p> + "We are all grieved, my dear Scudamore, at hearing that you are both + wounded, and that your brother is at present in a serious state. We trust, + however, that he will pull through. I hear that Beresford has praised you + both most highly in despatches, and that your names are sent home for + companies. I heartily congratulate you. We have had some tough work at + Fuentes d'Onoro, although nothing to what yours must have been at Albuera, + still it was hot enough in all conscience, and we had over a hundred + casualties in the regiment. Carruthers and Manley were both slightly + wounded. Jones, Anstruther, Palmer, and Chambers were killed, and several + of the others hit more or less hard. Sam has leave to remain with you + until you rejoin, which will not, I fear, be for some little time. Every + one sends kind messages. Yours truly, J. Tritton." + </p> + <p> + Nothing could exceed the care and devotion with which Sam nursed his two + masters, and Tom had the greatest difficulty in persuading him to lie down + and get a short sleep each day while he sat by Peter's bed. At the end of + three weeks Peter took a favorable turn. His fever abated, and he awoke to + consciousness. Another fortnight and he was sufficiently convalescent to + be moved, and accordingly they started to travel by very easy stages to + Lisbon, there to take ship for England, as the doctor ordered Tom as well + as his brother to go home for a while to recruit. Tom was the less + reluctant to do so, as it was evident that with the force at his command + Wellington would not be able to undertake any great operation, and that + the siege and capture of Badajoz was the utmost likely to be accomplished + in that season's campaign. The mails in due course had brought out the <i>Gazette</i>, + and in it Tom and Peter Scudamore were promoted to be captains, + unattached. + </p> + <p> + Colonel Tritton, upon being applied to, readily gave leave for Sam to + accompany his masters. It was a long journey to Lisbon, but the jolting of + the country cart was made bearable by a layer of hay, two feet deep, upon + which the mattresses were laid, Sam seeing that at each night's halt the + hay was taken out, well shaken, and then returned to the cart, so as to + preserve it light and elastic. A thick canopy of boughs kept off the heat + of the sun, and under it, within reach of the invalids hung a gourd of + fresh water, and a basket of fruit. Several other cart-loads of wounded + officers accompanied them, and at night they would draw up by a grove of + trees where water was handy, those who could walk would get out, the + others would be lifted out on their mattresses, a great fire made, and + round it the beds laid in a circle, and then the evening would be spent in + pleasant chat, with many an anecdote and an occasional song, until the + fire burnt low, the talk died away, and each, covered in his blankets to + keep off the night dew, fell asleep. Pleasant as was the journey, however, + it was with a thrill of delight that they caught their first sight of + Lisbon, with its broad river, and the blue line of the sea beyond. A few + days later, and they embarked on board a transport, which seven days + afterwards, after a calm passage, arrived at Spithead. + </p> + <p> + Peter was by this time gaining strength fast, but his back was so stiff + and sore that he was unable to move it, and was obliged to swing himself + along on crutches. The next day the coach took them to London, and they + started the morning after for Marlborough. This time they had to go inside + the coach, two gentlemen, who had previously secured the seats, kindly + giving them up in favor of the wounded young officers, while Sam took his + place on the roof, and amused his fellow-passengers with wonderful + accounts of his adventures at the war. At the inn at which they took + dinner, they alighted, and Tom recognized in the driver the same coachman + who had driven them upon the memorable occasion of their being stopped by + highwaymen three years before. "You don't remember us, coachman, do you?" + </p> + <p> + "No, gentlemen, I can't say as how,—but eh! no, why you're the werry + boys as shot the highwaymen. Well, I am glad to see you again, though you + do look white and bad, both of you. I heard as how there were two wounded + officers inside, and that black soldier has been telling all sorts of + tales of the wonderful things as his masters had done, but not knowing as + how it was you, I didn't much believe all he was telling. Now I quite see + as how it was true; and how are you both?" + </p> + <p> + "Getting on all right," Tom said, returning the warm shake of the + coachman's hand, "and do you know, those pistols have saved our lives more + than once." + </p> + <p> + "Have they now," the coachman said, in high admiration, "but there, we + most be moving, we are three minutes after time as it is; I shall see you + again next time we stop, gentlemen." + </p> + <p> + During the next stage the coachman and guard recounted to the outside + passengers the affair of the stopping the coach, and Sam's black face + shone with delight at the tale. Then he had his say, and related the story + of his falling overboard and being rescued, and in consequence the lads + were quite embarrassed when they next halted, by the attention of their + fellow-travelers, who could scarcely understand how it was possible that + two mere boys should have performed such feats of bravery. + </p> + <p> + Arrived at Marlborough they looked round in vain for the one-horsed + vehicle which had before met them. "I expect that aunt has not got our + letter, Peter," Tom said. "It would probably go up to town in the coach + with us, and is likely enough in the letter-bag in the boot. Well, we must + have a post-chaise. Won't aunt and Rhoda be surprised; but they must be + expecting us, because they will have had our letter from Lisbon." + </p> + <p> + The horses were soon in, Sam took his seat in the rumble, and in a few + minutes they were bounding over the road at a very different pace to that + at which they had before traversed it. "There's the house among the + trees," Peter said at last, "with aunt's pigeons on the roof as usual, and + there's Minnie asleep on the window-sill, and there! yes, there's Rhoda." + </p> + <p> + As he spoke a girl, who was sitting reading under a tree, leapt to her + feet, on hearing a carriage stop, and then, catching sight of Peter waving + his hat, while Tom made frantic efforts to open the door, gave a scream of + delight, and rushed towards them, threw her arms round Tom's neck as he + jumped out, and then leapt into the chaise and hugged and cried over + Peter. He was soon helped out, and as they turned to go towards the house + they saw their aunt coming out to meet them. + </p> + <p> + Tom ran forward and throwing his arms round her neck kissed her heartily, + and before she could recover from her surprise, Peter was alongside. + "Please, aunt, you must kiss me," he said, "for I want my arms for my + crutches." His aunt leaned forward and kissed him, and then wiped the + tears from her eyes. + </p> + <p> + "I am glad to see you back, my dear nephews," she said. "We did not + understand each other very well before, but we shan't make any more + mistakes. This is your black servant, I suppose," she said, as Sam came + along, with a trunk in each hand. "Dear! dear! what a dreadfully ugly + man." + </p> + <p> + "How do you do, Sam?" Rhoda said, when he came up. "We have heard so much + of you, and how kindly you nursed my brothers." + </p> + <p> + "Sam quite well, tank you, little missy," Sam said, grinning all over his + face and showing his white teeth. + </p> + <p> + Miss Scudamore shrank towards Tom as Sam passed on, "Dear me, what + sharp-looking teeth he has, Tom. They don't eat curious things, these + black men, do they?" + </p> + <p> + "What sort of curious things, aunt?" + </p> + <p> + "Well, my dear, I know that these outlandish people do eat strange things, + and I have heard the Chinese eat dogs and cats. Now, if he has a fancy for + cats, I daresay I could buy him some in the village, only he will have to + cook them himself, I could never ask Hannah to cook cats; but please ask + him not to touch Minnie." + </p> + <p> + Peter had to stop in his walk and grasp his crutches tightly, not to burst + into a scream of laughter, while Tom answered with great gravity, "My dear + aunt, do not alarm yourself, I will answer for the safety of Minnie as far + as Sam is concerned." + </p> + <p> + When they reached the house, Miss Scudamore said— + </p> + <p> + "I think you young people will enjoy yourselves more if you go and sit + under the shade of the elm there, you will have a deal to say to each + other, and had better be alone." They were all glad at the suggestion, as + they were longing to be alone together. + </p> + <p> + Sam, by Miss Scudamore's directions, carried out a great easy chair, of + which Peter took possession. Rhoda sat on the grass at his feet, and Tom + threw himself down at full length. They were all too happy to speak much + for a time, and could only look fondly at each other. "You have grown a + great deal, Rhoda, but I do not think that you are altered a bit + otherwise." + </p> + <p> + "You are neither of you altered so much as I expected," Rhoda said. "I had + made up my mind that you would be changed a great deal. It sounds so grand—Captains, + indeed! I expected to have curtsey to you and treat you with great + respect; instead of that you look regular boys, both of you. Of course you + are big, and Peter looks very tall; how tall are you, Peter?" + </p> + <p> + "Just over six feet," Peter said. + </p> + <p> + "Yes," Rhoda said, "you are tall enough, and Tom is broad enough for men, + but somehow you look regular boys still." + </p> + <p> + "This is very disrespectful Rhoda, to two Captains in His Majesty's + service." + </p> + <p> + "It seems ridiculous, doesn't it," Rhoda said. + </p> + <p> + "It does," Tom said heartily, and the three went off into a shout of + laughter. + </p> + <p> + "It isn't really ridiculous you know," Rhoda said, when they had recovered + their gravity. "To think of all the dangers you have gone through. Aunt + was as proud as could be when she saw your names over and over again in + despatches, and I have been like a little peacock. Your doings have been + the talk of every one round here, and I am sure that if they had known you + had been coming, the village would have put up a triumphal arch, and + presented you with an address." + </p> + <p> + "Thank goodness, they did not know it then," Tom said, "for it would have + been a deal worse to stand than the fire of a French battery. Well, Rhoda, + and now as to yourself; so you have really been always very happy with + aunt?" + </p> + <p> + "Very happy," Rhoda said; "she is most kind and indulgent, and so that I + attend to her little fancies, I can do just as I like. I have had lessons + regularly from the rector's eldest daughter, who has been educated for a + governess; and in every respect, aunt is all that is kind. Fancy her being + afraid of Sam eating Minnie." + </p> + <p> + After chatting for upwards of an hour, they went into the house, and the + rest of the day was spent in talking over all that had happened since they + left. Sam was in the kitchen where he made himself very much at home, and + although Hannah and the cook were at first rather awed by his size, his + black face and rolling eyes, they were soon pacified by his good humor and + readiness to make himself useful, and were wonderfully interested by his + long stories about what "Massas" had done in the war. + </p> + <p> + Miss Scudamore, who was a little uneasy as to how things would go on in + the kitchen, made some excuse for going in once or twice in the course of + the evening. She found things going on much better that she had expected, + indeed so much better, that after Rhoda had gone up to bed, where Peter + had two hours before betaken himself, she said to Tom as he was lighting + his candle, "One minute, nephew; I could not speak before Rhoda, but I + wanted to say something to you about your negro. I have heard that all + soldiers are very much given to make love, and we know from Shakespeare, + that Othello, who was black too, you will remember, nephew, made love to + Desdemona, which shows that color does not make so much difference as one + would think. Now I do hope your man will not make love to Hannah, I don't + think she would like it, my dear, and yet you know she might; one never + knows what women will do; they are always making fools of themselves," she + added angrily, thinking at the moment how a young girl she had trained up + as a cook had, after being with her three years, left a few weeks before + to marry the village blacksmith, "and I should be sorry to lose Hannah. + She has been with us more than twenty years. If he must fall in love with + one, my dear, let it be the cook." + </p> + <p> + Tom had a great command of his countenance, but he had great difficulty in + steadying his muscles. After a moment or two he said, "I will give Sam a + hint, aunt, if it becomes necessary, but I do not think you need fear. I + do not fancy Sam is matrimonially inclined at present, and he wouldn't + leave us even to marry Desdemona herself. Good night, aunt." + </p> + <p> + So saying, Tom went upstairs, where he repeated to Peter, who was still + awake, his conversation with his aunt, and the two went into shouts of + laughter over the idea of Sam making love to the prim Hannah. + </p> + <p> + The next six months passed over quietly and happily. The boys were made a + great deal of by the whole county, and Miss Scudamore was greatly + gratified at the name and credit they had gained for themselves. She no + longer worried about them, but as Rhoda declared, quite spoiled them, and + as Sam made no attempt to win the love of the faithful Hannah, there was + no cloud to mar the pleasure of the holiday. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0015" id="link2HCH0015"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XV. — CIUDAD RODRIGO AND BADAJOS. + </h2> + <p> + It was in the beginning of December, 1811, that the Scudamores again + sailed up the Tagus to Lisbon, after an absence of just six months. When + they had passed the medical board, they were transferred from the + unattached list to the 52d Regiment, which was, fortunately for them, also + in Spain. No events of great importance had taken place during their + absence. Wellington, after the battles of Fuentes d'Onoro and Albuera, had + been compelled to fall back again to the frontier in the face of greatly + superior forces, and had maintained his old position on the Coa till the + approach of winter compelled the French to retire into the interior, where + they had their magazines and depôts. + </p> + <p> + The Scudamores found that the 52d were encamped on the Agueda, and they at + once prepared to go up country to join them. Their chargers—presents + from their aunt on leaving—were fresh and vigorous, and they + purchased a strong country horse for Sambo, who, thanks to some practice + which he had had in England, was now able to cut a respectable figure on + horseback. A few hours were sufficient to make their preparations, and at + noon on the day after landing, they mounted, and, followed by Sam, + accompanied by a muleteer and two mules carrying their baggage, they + started from the hotel at which they had put up. + </p> + <p> + As they rode down the main street they saw several mounted officers + approaching, and at once recognized in the leader the commander-in-chief, + who had just arrived from the front to pay one of his flying visits, to + endeavor to allay the jealousies in the Portuguese Council, and to insist + upon the food which the British Government was actually paying for, being + supplied to the starving Portuguese soldiers. Drawing their horses aside, + they saluted Lord Wellington as he rode past. He glanced at them keenly, + as was his custom, and evidently recognized them as he returned the + salute. + </p> + <p> + When he had passed, they turned their horses and continued their way. They + had not gone fifty yards, however, when an officer came up at a gallop. + Lord Wellington wished them to call at his quarters in an hour's time. + </p> + <p> + There are few things more annoying than, after having got through all the + trouble of packing and getting fairly on the road, to be stopped; but + there was no help for it, and the boys rode back to their hotel again, + where, putting up their horses, they told Sam not to let the muleteer + leave, for they should probably be on the road again in an hour. + </p> + <p> + At the appointed time they called at the head-quarters, and giving their + cards to two officers on duty, took their seats in the anteroom. It now + became evident to them that their chance of an early interview was not + great, and that they would in all probability be obliged to pass another + night in Madrid. Portuguese grandees passed in and out, staff officers of + rank entered and left, important business was being transacted, and the + chance of two Line captains having an interview with the + commander-in-chief appeared but slight. Two hours passed wearily, and then + an orderly sergeant came into the room and read out from a slip of paper + the names "Captain Thomas Scudamore; Captain Peter Scudamore. This way, if + you please," he added, as the boys rose in answer to their names, and he + led the way into a room where a colonel on the staff was seated before a + table covered with papers. + </p> + <p> + "Gentlemen," he said, "I have news which I think will be pleasant to you + both. Lord Wellington has not forgotten the services you rendered in + carrying his communications to the guerilla chiefs. Your reports were + clear and concise, and your knowledge of Spanish especially valuable. Lord + Beresford, too, has reported most favorably of your conduct while with + him. There happen to be two vacancies on his staff, and he has desired me + to fill them up with your names." + </p> + <p> + Although the Scudamores would in some respects rather have remained with + their regiment, yet they could not refuse an honor which was generally + coveted as being a post in which an active officer had plenty of + opportunities of distinguishing himself, and which was certain to lead to + speedy promotion. They accordingly expressed their warm thanks for the + honor which Lord Wellington had done them. + </p> + <p> + "Are you well mounted?" Colonel Somerset asked. + </p> + <p> + "We have one capital charger each," Tom said. + </p> + <p> + "You will want another," Colonel Somerset remarked. "There are a lot of + remounts landed to-day. Here is an order to Captain Halket, the officer in + charge. Choose any two you like. The amount can be stopped from your pay. + How about servants; you are entitled to two each?" + </p> + <p> + "We have one man of the Norfolk Rangers—a very faithful fellow, who + has returned with us from leave; if he could be transferred, he would do + for us both if we had a cavalry man each for our horses." + </p> + <p> + The colonel at once wrote an order for Sam's transfer from his regiment on + detached service, and also one to the officer commanding a cavalry + regiment stationed in Madrid, to supply them with two troopers as + orderlies. + </p> + <p> + "May I ask, sir, if we are likely to stay in Madrid long—as, if so, + we will look out for quarters?" Tom asked. + </p> + <p> + "No; the general returns to-morrow, or next day at latest, to Almeida, and + of course you will accompany him. Oh, by-the-by, Lord Wellington will be + glad if you will dine with him to-day—sharp six. By-the-way, you + will want to get staff uniform. There is the address of a Spanish tailor, + who has fitted out most of the men who have been appointed here. He works + fast, and will get most of the things you want ready by to-morrow night. + Don't get more things than are absolutely necessary—merely undress + suits. Excuse my asking how are you off for money? I will give you an + order on the paymaster if you like." + </p> + <p> + Tom replied that they had plenty of money, which indeed they had, for + their aunt had given them so handsome a present upon starting, that they + had tried to persuade her to be less generous, urging that they really had + no occasion for any money beyond their pay. She had insisted, however, + upon their accepting two checks, saying that one never knew what was + wanted, and it was always useful to have a sum to fall back on in case of + need. + </p> + <p> + Two days later the Scudamores, in their new staff uniforms, were, with + some six or eight other officers, riding in the suite of Lord Wellington + on the road to the Coa. The lads thought they had never had a more + pleasant time, the weather was fine and the temperature delightful, their + companions, all older somewhat than themselves, were yet all young men in + high health and spirits. The pace was good, for Lord Wellington was a hard + rider, and time was always precious with him. At the halting-places the + senior officers of the staff kept together, while the aides-de-camp made + up a mess of their own, always choosing a place as far away as possible + from that of the chief, so that they could laugh, joke, and even sing, + without fear of disturbing his lordship. + </p> + <p> + Sam soon became a high favorite with the light-hearted young fellows, and + his services as forager for the mess were in high esteem. + </p> + <p> + Three days of hard riding took them to Almeida, where the breaches caused + by the great explosion had been repaired, and the place put into a + defensible position. Tom and Peter had been afraid that there would be at + least four months of enforced inactivity before the spring; but they soon + found that the post of aide-de-camp to Wellington was no sinecure. For the + next month they almost lived in the saddle. The greater portion of the + English army was indeed lying on the Agueda, but there were detached + bodies of British and large numbers of Portuguese troops at various points + along the whole line of the Portuguese frontier, and with the commanders + of these Lord Wellington was in constant communication. + </p> + <p> + Towards the end of December some large convoys of heavy artillery arrived + at Almeida, but every one supposed that they were intended to fortify this + place, and none, even of those most in the confidence of the + commander-in-chief, had any idea that a winter campaign was about to + commence. The French were equally unsuspicious of the truth. Twice as + strong as the British, they dreamt not that the latter would take the + offensive, and the French marshals had scattered their troops at + considerable distances from the frontier in winter quarters. + </p> + <p> + Upon the last day of the year the Scudamores both happened to have + returned to the front—Tom from Lisbon, and Peter from a long ride to + a distant Portuguese division. There was a merry party gathered round a + blazing fire in the yard of the house where they, with several other + aides-de-camp, were quartered. Some fifty officers of all ranks were + present, for a general invitation had been issued to all unattached + officers in honor of the occasion. Each brought in what liquor he could + get hold of, and any provisions which he had been able to procure, and the + evening was one of boisterous fun and jollity. In the great kitchen blazed + a fire, before which chickens and ducks were roasting, turkeys and geese + cut up in pieces for greater rapidity of cooking, were grilling over the + fire, and as they came off the gridiron they were taken round by the + soldier-servants to their masters as they sat about on logs of wood, + boxes, and other substitutes for chairs. Most of the officers present had + already supped, and the late-comers were finishing their frugal meal, + after which the soldiers would take their turn. There was a brewing of + punch and an uncorking of many a bottle of generous wine; then the song + and laugh went round, and all prepared to usher in the new year joyously, + when a colonel of the staff, who had been dining with Lord Wellington, + entered. "Here's a seat, colonel," was shouted in a dozen places, but he + shook his head and held up his hand. + </p> + <p> + "Gentlemen, I am sorry to disturb you, but orders must be obeyed. + Villiers, Hogan, Scudamores both, Esdaile, Cooper, and Johnson, here are + despatches which have to be taken off at once. Gentlemen, I should + recommend you all to look to your horses. All attached to the transport + had better go to their head-quarters for orders." + </p> + <p> + "What is up, colonel?" was the general question. + </p> + <p> + "The army moves forward at daybreak. We are going to take Ciudad." + </p> + <p> + A cheer of surprise and delight burst from all. There was an emptying of + glasses, a pouring out of one more bumper to success, and in five minutes + the court was deserted save by some orderlies hastily devouring the + interrupted supper, and ere long the tramp of horses could be heard, as + the Scudamores and their comrades dashed off in different directions with + their despatches. + </p> + <p> + The next morning a bridge was thrown over the Agueda at Marialva, six + miles below Ciudad, but the investment was delayed, owing to the slowness + and insufficiency of the transport. Ciudad Rodrigo was but a third-class + fortress, and could have been captured by the process of a regular siege + with comparatively slight loss to the besiegers. Wellington knew, however, + that he could not afford the time for a regular siege. Long before the + approaches could have been made, and the breaches effected according to + rule, the French marshals would have been up with overwhelming forces. + </p> + <p> + Beginning the investment on the 7th, Wellington determined that it must be + taken at all costs in twenty-four days, the last day of the month being + the very earliest date at which, according to his calculations, any + considerable body of French could come up to its relief. + </p> + <p> + Ciudad lies on rising ground on the bank of the Agueda. The fortifications + were fairly strong, and being protected by a very high glacis, it was + difficult to effect a breach in them. The glacis is the smooth ground + outside the ditch. In well-constructed works the walls of the + fortification rise but very little above the ground beyond, from which + they are separated by a broad and deep ditch. Thus the ground beyond the + ditch, that is, the glacis, covers the walls from the shot of a besieger, + and renders it extremely difficult to reach them. In the case of Ciudad, + however, there were outside the place two elevated plateaux, called the + great and small Teson: Guns placed on these could look down upon Ciudad, + and could therefore easily breach the walls. These, then, were the spots + from which Wellington determined to make the attack. The French, however, + were aware of the importance of the position, and had erected on the + higher Teson an inclosed and palisadoed redoubt, mounting two guns and a + howitzer. A great difficulty attending the operation was that there were + neither fuel nor shelter to be obtained on the right bank of the river, + and the weather set in very cold, with frost and snow, at the beginning of + the siege. Hence the troops had to be encamped on the left bank, and each + division, as its turn came, to occupy the trenches for twenty-four hours, + took cooked provisions with it, and waded across the Agueda. + </p> + <p> + On the 8th, Pack's division of Portuguese and the light division waded the + river three miles above the fortress, and, making a circuit took up a + place near the great Teson. There they remained quiet all day. The French + seeing that the place was not yet entirely invested paid but little heed + to them. At nightfall, however, Colonel Colborne, with two companies from + each of the regiments of the light division, attacked the redoubt of San + Francisco with such a sudden rush that it was carried with the loss of + only twenty-four men, the defenders, few and unprepared, being all taken + prisoners. Scarcely, however, was the place captured than every gun of + Ciudad which could be brought to bear upon it opened with fury. All night, + under a hail of shot and shell, the troops labored steadily, and by + daybreak the first parallel, that is to say, a trench protected by a bank + of earth six hundred yards in length was sunk three feet deep. The next + day the first division, relieved the light division. + </p> + <p> + Tom and Peter, now that the army was stationary, had an easier time of it, + and obtained leave to cross the river to see the operations. The troops + had again to wade through the bitter cold water, and at any other time + would have grumbled rarely at the discomfort. When they really engage in + the work of war, however, the British soldier cares for nothing, and + holding up their rifles, pouches and haversacks, to keep dry, the men + crossed the river laughing and joking. There was but little done all day, + for the fire of the enemy was too fast and deadly for men to work under it + in daylight. At night the Scudamores left their horses with those of the + divisional officers, and accompanied the troops into the trenches, to + learn the work which had there to be done. Directly it was dusk twelve + hundred men fell to work to construct their batteries. The night was dark, + and it was strange to the Scudamores to hear the thud of so many picks and + shovels going, to hear now and then a low spoken order, but to see nothing + save when the flash of the enemy's guns momentarily lit up the scene. + Every half minute or so the shot, shell, and grape came tearing through + the air, followed occasionally by a low cry or a deep moan. Exciting as it + was for a time, the boys having no duty, found it difficult long to keep + awake, and presently dozed off—at first to wake with a start + whenever a shell fell close, but presently to sleep soundly until dawn. By + that time the batteries, eighteen feet thick, were completed. + </p> + <p> + On the 10th the fourth division, and on the 11th the third, carried on the + works, but were nightly disturbed, not only by the heavy fire from the + bastions, but from some guns which the French had mounted on the convent + of San Francisco in the suburb on the left. Little was effected in the + next two days, for the frost hardened the ground and impeded the work. On + the night of the 13th the Santa Cruz convent was carried and the trenches + pushed forward, and on the next afternoon the breaching batteries opened + fire with twenty-five guns upon the points of the wall at which it had + been determined to make the breaches, while two cannons kept down the fire + of the French guns at the convent of San Francisco. The French replied + with more than fifty pieces, and all night the tremendous fire was kept up + on both sides without intermission. Just at daybreak the sound of musketry + mingled with the roar of cannon, as the 40th Regiment attacked and carried + the convent of San Francisco. Through the 16th, 17th, and 18th the + artillery duel continued, some times one side, sometimes the other + obtaining the advantage; but during each night the trenches of the + besiegers were pushed forward, and each day saw the breaches in the + ramparts grow larger and larger. On the 19th the breaches were reported as + practicable—that is, that it would be possible for men to scramble + up the fallen rubbish to the top, and orders were therefore given for the + assault for that night. + </p> + <p> + The attack was to be made at four points simultaneously; the 5th, 94th, + and 77th were to attack from the convent of Santa Cruz, to make for the + ditch, enter it, and work their way along to the great breach; Mackinnon's + brigade of the third division was to attack the great breach from the + front; the light division posted behind the convent of San Francisco were + to attack from the left, and make their way to the small breach; while a + false attack, to be converted into a real one if the resistance was + slight, was to be made by Pack's Portuguese at the St. Jago gate at the + opposite side of the town. As night fell the troops moved into their + position, and Lord Wellington went to the convent of San Francisco, from + whose roof he could survey the operations. The Scudamores, with the rest + of the staff, took up their places behind him. Suddenly there was a shout + on the far right, followed by a sound of confused cheering and firing, + while flashes of flame leapt out along the walls, and the guns of the + place opened fire with a crash. Now the 5th, 94th, and 77th rushed with + great swiftness along the ditch, when, at the foot of the great breach, + they were met by the third division. Together they poured up the breach, + and the roar of musketry was tremendous. Once at the top of the breach, + however, they made no progress. From a trench which had been cut beyond + it, a ring of fire broke out, while muskets flashed from every window in + the houses near. It was evident that some serious obstacle had been + encountered, and that the main attack was arrested. + </p> + <p> + "This is terrible," Peter said, as almost breathless they watched the + storm of fire on and around the breach. "This is a thousand times worse + than a battle. It is awful to think how the shot must be telling on that + dense mass. Can nothing be done?" + </p> + <p> + "Hurrah! There go the light division at the small breach," Tom exclaimed, + as the French fire broke out along the ramparts in that quarter. A violent + cheer came up even above the din from the great breach, but no answering + fire lights the scene, for Major Napier, who commanded, had forbidden his + men to load, telling them to trust entirely to the bayonet. There was no + delay here; the firing of the French ceased almost immediately, as with a + fierce rush the men of the light division bounded up the ruins and won the + top of the breach. For a moment or two there was a pause, for the French + opened so fierce a fire from either side, that the troops wavered. The + officers sprang to the front, the soldiers followed with the bayonet, and + the French, unable to stand the fierce onslaught, broke and fled into the + town. Then the men of the light division, rushing along the walls, took + the French who were defending the great breach in rear, and as these gave + way, the attacking party swept across the obstacles which, had hitherto + kept them, and the town was won. Pack's Portuguese had effected an + entrance at the St. Jago gate, which they found almost deserted, for the + garrison was weak, and every available man had been taken for the defence + of the breaches. + </p> + <p> + Thus was Ciudad Rodrigo taken after twelve days' siege, with a loss of + twelve hundred men and ninety officers, of which six hundred and fifty men + and sixty officers fell in that short, bloody fight at the breaches. Among + the killed was General Craufurd, who had commanded at the fight on the + Coa. + </p> + <p> + Upon entering the town three days afterwards, at the termination of the + disgraceful scene of riot and pillage with which the British soldier, + there as at other places, tarnished the laurels won by his bravery in + battle, the boys went to the scene of the struggle, and then understood + the cause of the delay upon the part of the stormers. From the top of the + breach there was a perpendicular fall of sixteen feet, and the bottom of + this was planted with sharp spikes, and strewn with the fragments of + shells which the French had rolled down into it. Had it not been for the + light division coming up, and taking the defenders—who occupied the + loopholed and fortified houses which commanded this breach—in rear, + the attack here could never have succeeded. + </p> + <p> + The next few days were employed in repairing the breaches, and putting the + place again in a state of defence, as it was probable that Marmont might + come up and besiege it. The French marshal, however, when hurrying to the + relief of the town, heard the news of its fall, and as the weather was + very bad for campaigning, and provisions short, he fall back again to his + winter quarters, believing that Wellington would, content with his + success, make no fresh movement until the spring. The English general, + however, was far too able a strategist not to profit by the supineness of + his adversary, and, immediately Ciudad Rodrigo was taken, he began to make + preparations for the siege of Badajos, a far stronger fortress than + Ciudad, and defended by strong detached forts. Three days after the fall + of Rodrigo General Hill came up with his division; to this the Norfolk + Rangers now belonged, and the Scudamores had therefore the delight of + meeting all their old friends again. They saw but little of them, however, + for they were constantly on the road to Lisbon with despatches, every + branch of the service being now strained to get the battering-train + destined for the attack on Badajos to the front, while orders were sent to + Silviera, Trant, Wilson, Lecca, and the other partisan leaders, to hold + all the fords and defiles along the frontier, so as to prevent the French + from making a counter-invasion of Portugal. + </p> + <p> + On the 11th of March the army arrived at Elvas, and on the 15th a pontoon + bridge was thrown across the Guadiana. The following day the British + troops crossed the river, and invested Badajos, with fifteen thousand men, + while Hill and Graham, with thirty thousand more moved forward, so as to + act as a covering army, in case the French should advance to raise the + siege. Badajos was defended by five thousand men, under General + Phillipson, a most able and energetic commander, who had in every way + strengthened the defences, and put them in a position to offer an + obstinate resistance. + </p> + <p> + Before attacking the fortress it was necessary to capture one of the + outlying forts, and that known as the Picurina was selected, because the + bastion of the Trinidad, which lay behind it, was the weakest portion of + the fortress. The trenches were commenced against this on the night of the + 17th, and, although the French made some vigorous sorties, the works + progressed so rapidly that all was ready for an assault on the forts on + the 25th, a delay of two days having been occasioned by the French taking + guns across the river, which swept the trenches, and rendered work + impossible, until a division was sent round to drive in the French guns + and invest the fortress on that side. The Picurina was strong, and + desperately defended, but it was captured after a furious assault, which + lasted one hour, and cost nineteen officers and three hundred men. It was + not, however, until next evening that the fort could be occupied, for the + guns of the town poured such a hail of shot and shell into it, that a + permanent footing could not be obtained in it. Gradually, day by day, the + trenches were driven nearer to the doomed city, and the cannon of the + batteries worked day and night to establish a breach. Soult was known to + be approaching, but he wanted to gather up all his available forces, as he + believed the town capable of holding out for another month, at least. + Still he was approaching, and, although the three breaches were scarcely + yet practicable, and the fire of the town by no means overpowered, + Wellington determined upon an instant assault, and on the night of the 6th + of April the troops prepared for what turned out to be the most terrible + and bloody assault in the annals of the British army. There were no less + than six columns of attack, comprising in all eighteen thousand men. + Picton, on the right with the third division was to cross the Rivillas and + storm the castle. Wilson, with the troops in the trenches, was to attack + San Roque. In the center the fourth and light division, under Colville and + Barnard, were to assault the breaches; and on the left Leith, with the + fifth division, was to make a false attack upon the fort of Pardaleras, + and a real attack upon the bastion of San Vincente by the river side. + Across the river the Portugese division, under Power, was to attack the + works at the head of the bridge. The night was dark and clouded, and all + was as still as death outside the town, when a lighted carcass, that is a + large iron canister filled with tar and combustibles, fell close to the + third division, and, exposing their ranks, forced them to commence the + attack before the hour appointed. Crossing the Rivillas by a narrow + bridge, under a tremendous fire, the third division assaulted the castle, + and, although their scaling-ladders were over and over again hurled down, + the stormers at last obtained a footing, and the rest of the troops poured + in and the castle was won. A similar and more rapid success attended the + assault on San Roque, which was attacked so suddenly and violently, that + it was taken with scarce any resistance. In the mean time the assaults + upon the breaches had commenced, and it is best to give the account of + this terrible scene in the words of its eloquent and graphic historian, as + the picture is one of the most vivid that was ever drawn. + </p> + <p> + "All this time the tumult at the breaches was such as if the very earth + had been rent asunder, and its central fires bursting upwards + uncontrolled. The two divisions had reached the glacis just as the firing + at the castle commenced, and the flash of a single musket, discharged from + the covered-way as a signal, showed them that the French were ready; yet + no stir was heard and darkness covered the breaches. Some hay-packs were + thrown, some ladders placed, and the forlorn hopes and storming parties of + the light division, five hundred in all, descended into the ditch without + opposition; but then a bright flame shooting upwards displayed all the + terrors of the scene. The ramparts, crowded with dark figures and + glittering arms were on one side, on the other the red columns of the + British, deep and broad, were coming on like streams of burning lava. It + was the touch of the magician's wand, for a crash of thunder followed, and + with incredible violence the storming parties were dashed to pieces by the + explosion of hundreds of shells and powder-barrels. For an instant the + light division stood on the brink of the ditch, amazed at the terrific + sight; but then, with a shout that matched even the sound of the + explosion, the men flew down the ladders, or, disdaining their aid, + leaped, reckless of the depth, into the gulf below—and at the same + moment, amidst a blaze of musketry that dazzled the eyes, the fourth + division came running in, and descended with a like fury. There were only + five ladders for the two columns, which were close together; and a deep + cut, made in the bottom of the ditch as far as the counter-guard of the + Trinidad, was filled with water from the inundation. Into that watery + snare the head of the fourth division fell, and it is said above a hundred + of the fusiliers, the men of Albuera, were there smothered. Those who + followed checked not, but, as if such a disaster had been expected, turned + to the left, and thus came upon the face of the unfinished ravelin, which, + being rough and broken, was mistaken for the breach, and instantly covered + with men; yet a wide and deep chasm was still between them and the + ramparts, from whence came a deadly fire, wasting their ranks. Thus + baffled, they also commenced a rapid discharge of musketry and disorder + ensued; for the men of the light division, whose conducting engineer had + been disabled early and whose flank was confined by an unfinished ditch + intended to cut off the bastion of Santa Maria, rushed towards the + breaches of the curtain and the Trinidad, which were, indeed, before them, + but which the fourth division had been destined to storm. Great was the + confusion, for the ravelin was quite crowded with men of both divisions; + and while some continued to fire, others jumped down and ran towards the + breach; many also passed between the ravelin and the counterguard of the + Trinidad, the two divisions got mixed, the reserves, which should have + remained at the quarries, also came pouring in, until the ditch was quite + filled, the rear still crowding forward, and all cheering vehemently. The + enemy's shouts also were loud and terrible, and the bursting of shells, + and of grenades, and the roaring of guns from the flanks, answered by the + iron howitzers from the battery of the parallel, the heavy roll, and + horrid explosion of the powder-barrels, the whizzing flight of the blazing + splinters, the loud exhortations of the officers, and the continual + clatter of the muskets, made a maddening din. Now a multitude bounded up + the great breach, as if driven by a whirlwind, but across the top + glittered a range of sword-blades, sharp-pointed, keen-edged on both + sides, and firmly fixed in ponderous beams chained together, and set deep + in the ruins; and for ten feet in front the ascent was covered with loose + planks, studded with sharp iron points, on which, feet being set, the + planks moved, and the unhappy soldiers, falling forward on the spikes, + rolled down upon the ranks behind. Then the Frenchmen, shouting at the + success of their stratagem, and, leaping forward, plied their shot with + terrible rapidity, for every man had several muskets, and each musket, in + addition to its ordinary charge, contained a small cylinder of wood, stuck + full of wooden slugs, which scattered like hail when they were discharged. + Once and again the assailants rushed up the breaches, but always the + sword-blades, immovable and impassable, stopped their charge, and the + hissing shells and thundering powder-barrels exploded unceasingly. + Hundreds of men had fallen, hundreds more were dropping, still, the heroic + officers called aloud for new trials, and sometimes followed by many, + sometimes by a few, ascended the ruins; and so furious were the men + themselves, that, in one of these charges, the rear strove to push the + foremost on to the sword-blades, willing even to make a bridge of their + writhing bodies, but the others frustrated the attempt by dropping down; + and men fell so fast from the shot, it was hard to know who went down + voluntarily, who were stricken and many stooped unhurt that never rose + again. Vain also would it have been to break through the sword-blades, for + the trench and parapet behind the breach were finished, and the + assailants, crowded into even a narrower space than the ditch was, would + still have been separated from their enemies, and the slaughter would have + continued. At the beginning of this dreadful conflict Andrew Barnard had, + with prodigious efforts, separated his division from the other, and + preserved some degree of military array; but now the tumult was such, no + command would be heard distinctly except by those close at hand, and the + mutilated carcasses heaped on each other, and the wounded struggling to + avoid being trampled upon, broke the formations; order was impossible! + Officers of all ranks, followed more or less numerously by the men, were + seen to start out as if struck by sudden madness, and rash into the + breach, which, yawning and glittering with steel, seemed like the mouth of + a huge dragon belching forth smoke and flame. In one of these attempts, + Colonel Macleod, of the 43rd, a young man whose feeble body would have + been quite unfit for war if it had not been sustained by an unconquerable + spirit, was killed; wherever his voice was heard his soldiers had + gathered, and with such a strong resolution did he lead them up the fatal + ruins that, when one behind him, in falling, plunged a bayonet into his + back, he complained, not; but, continuing his course, was shot dead within + a yard of the sword-blades. Yet there was no want of gallant leaders, or + desperate followers, until two hours passed in these vain efforts had + convinced the troops the breach of the Trinidad was impregnable; and, as + the opening in the curtain, although less strong, was retired, and the + approach to it impeded by deep holes and cuts made in the ditch, the + soldiers did not much notice it after the partial failure of one attack + which had been made early. Gathering in dark groups, and leaning on their + muskets, they looked up with sullen desperation at the Trinidad, while the + enemy, stepping out on the ramparts, and aiming their shots by the light + of the fire-balls which they threw over, asked, as their victims fell, + 'Why they did not come into Badajos?' In this dreadful situation, while + the dead were lying in heaps, and others continually falling, the wounded + crawling about to get some shelter from the merciless shower above, and + withal a sickening stench from the burnt flesh of the slain, Captain + Nicholas, of the engineers, was observed by Lieutenant Shaw, of the 43rd, + making incredible efforts to force his way with a few men into the Santa + Maria Bastion. Shaw immediately collected fifty soldiers, of all + regiments, and joined him, and although there was a deep cut along the + foot of that breach also, it was instantly passed, and these two young + officers led their gallant band, with a rush, up the ruins; but when they + had gained two-thirds of the ascent, a concentrated fire of musketry and + grape dashed nearly the whole dead to the earth. Nicholas was mortally + wounded, and the intrepid Shaw stood alone! With inexpressible coolness he + looked at his watch, and saying it was too late to carry the reaches, + rejoined the masses at the other attack. After this no further effort was + made at any point, and the troops remained passive but unflinching beneath + the enemy's shot, which streamed without intermission; for, of the + riflemen on the glacis many leaped early into the ditch and joined in the + assault, and the rest, raked by a cross-fire of grape from the distant + bastions, baffled in their aim by the smoke and flames from the + explosions, and too few in number, entirely failed to quell the French + musketry. About midnight, when two thousand brave men had fallen, + Wellington, who was on a height close to the quarries, ordered the + remainder to retire and re-form for a second assault; he had heard the + castle was taken, but thinking the enemy would still resist in the town, + was resolved to assail the breaches again. This retreat from the ditch was + not effected without further carnage and confusion. The French fire never + slackened. A cry arose that the enemy was making a sally from the distant + flanks, and there was a rush towards the ladders. Then the groans and + lamentations of the wounded, who could not move and expected to be slain, + increased, and many officers who had not heard of the order, endeavored to + stop the soldiers from going back; some would even have removed the + ladders but were unable to break the crowd." + </p> + <p> + While this terrible scene was passing, the victory had been decided + elsewhere. The capture of the castle by Picton would, in itself, have + caused the fall of the town upon the following day, but Leith, with the + fifth division, after hard fighting, scaled the St. Vincente bastion, and + came up through the town and took the defenders of the breaches in the + rear. Then the French gave way, the British poured in, and the dreadful + scenes which had marked the fall of Ciudad Rodrigo were repeated, and even + surpassed. Up to the present day the name of an Englishman is coupled with + a curse in the town of Badajos. At this siege, as at the last, the + Scudamores acted the part of lookers on, and although they bitterly + regretted it, it was well for them that it was so. The capture of Badajos + cost the allied army five thousand men, of whom three thousand five + hundred fell on the night of the assault. Each of the divisions which + attacked the breaches lost over twelve hundred men, and the 52nd Regiment, + who formed part of the light division, lost their full share. Among the + ranks of the officers the slaughter was particularly great, and scarce one + escaped without a wound. The Scudamores would fain have volunteered to + join their regiment in the assault, but it was well known that Lord + Wellington would not allow staff officers to go outside their own work. + Therefore they had looked on with beating hearts and pale faces, and with + tears in their eyes, at that terrible fight at the Triudad, and had + determined that when morning came they would resign their staff + appointments and ask leave to join their regiment. But when morning came, + and the list of the killed and wounded was sent in, and they went down + with a party to the breach to collect the wounded, they could not but feel + that they had in all probability escaped death, or what a soldier fears + more, mutilation. "After all, Tom," Peter said, "we have done some active + service, and our promotion shows that we are not cowards; there can be no + reason why we should not do our duty as the chief has marked it out for + us, especially when it is quite as likely to lead to rapid promotion as is + such a murderous business as this." After this no more was said about + resigning the staff appointment, which gave them plenty of hard work, and + constant change of scene, whereas had they remained with the regiment they + would often have been stationed for months in one place without a move. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0016" id="link2HCH0016"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XVI. — SALAMANCA. + </h2> + <p> + The great triumphs of Ciudad Rodrigo and Badajos did not lead to the rapid + successes which Wellington had hoped. The French generals, on hearing of + the loss of the latter fortress, again fell back, and Wellington was so + much hampered by shortness of money, by the inefficiency, obstinacy, and + intrigues of the Portuguese Government, and by want of transport, that it + was nearly three months before he could get everything in readiness for an + advance into Spain. At last all was prepared, and on the 13th of June the + army once more crossed the Agueda and marched towards the Tamar in four + columns. On the 17th it was within six miles of Salamanca, and Marshal + Marmont, unable for the moment to stem the tide of invasion, evacuated the + city, which that evening blazed with illuminations, the people being half + wild with joy at their approaching deliverance. The French, however, had + not entirely departed, for eight hundred men still held some very strong + forts overlooking and guarding the city. + </p> + <p> + These forts held out desperately; the British battering train was weak, + and upon the 23d Marmont, having received considerable reinforcements, + advanced to raise the siege. Wellington, however, refused to be tempted to + leave his trenches to deliver a general battle, but faced the enemy with a + portion of his army while he continued the siege. + </p> + <p> + Marmont, upon his part, believing that the forts could hold out for + fifteen days, put off the attack, as he knew that large reinforcements + were coming up. His calculations were frustrated by one of the forts + taking fire on the 27th, when an assault was delivered, and the whole of + the forts surrendered; Marmont at once fell back across the Douro, there + to await the arrival of his reinforcements. + </p> + <p> + Wellington, on his part, followed slowly, and his army took up a position + between Canizal and Castrejon, thereby covering the roads from Toro and + Tordesillas, the only points at which the French could cross the river. + The reports of the spies all agreed that the former was the place at which + the crossing would be made. + </p> + <p> + On the 16th of July an officer rode into Canizal, at headlong pace, with + the news that a reconnoitering party had crossed the Douro that morning + near Tordesillas, and had found that place deserted, except by a garrison; + and an hour later the news came in that three divisions of the enemy were + already across the river at Toro. Five minutes later the Scudamores were + on horseback, carrying orders that the whole of the army, with the + exception of the fourth and light divisions, which were on the Trabancos, + under General Cotton, were to concentrate at Canizal that night. By the + morning the movement was accomplished. + </p> + <p> + The day wore on in somewhat anxious expectation, and towards afternoon + Wellington, accompanied by Lord Beresford, and escorted by Alten's, Bock's + and Le Marchant's brigades of cavalry, started to make a reconnaissance of + the enemy's movements. Caution was needed for the advance, as it was quite + uncertain whether the French were pushing on through the open country + towards Canizal, or whether they were following the direct road from Toro + to Salamanca. Evening closed in, but no signs of the French army were + seen, and the party halted about six miles from Toro, and small parties of + cavalry were despatched right and left to scour the country, and find out + where the enemy had gone. + </p> + <p> + "It's very strange where the French can have got to," was the remark made, + for the fiftieth time among the staff. + </p> + <p> + The detached parties returned, bringing no news whatever, and Lord + Wellington again advanced slowly and cautiously towards Toro. Small + parties were pushed on ahead, and presently an officer rode back with the + news that he had been as far as the river, and that not a Frenchman was to + be seen. It was too late to do any more, and they remained in uncertainty + whether the enemy had recrossed the river after making a demonstration, or + whether they had marched to their right, so as to make a circuit, and + throw themselves between Ciudad Rodrigo and Salamanca, upon the line of + communication of the British army. + </p> + <p> + Lord Wellington, with his staff, took possession of a deserted farm-house, + the cavalry picketed their horses round it, and the Scudamores, who had + been more than twenty-four hours in the saddle, wrapped themselves in + their cloaks, and stretching themselves on the floor, were soon asleep. + Just at midnight the sound of a horse's footfall approaching at a gallop + was heard, and an officer, who had ridden, without drawing rein, from + Canizal, dashed up to the farm. + </p> + <p> + Five minutes later the whole party were in the saddle again. The news was + important, indeed. Marmont had drawn his whole army back across the Toro + on the night of the 16th, had marched to Tordesillas, crossed there, and + in the afternoon, after a march of fifty miles, had fallen upon Cotton's + outposts, and driven them across the Trabancos. + </p> + <p> + Not a moment's time was lost by Wellington after he received the news; + but, unfortunately, six precious hours had already been wasted, owing to + the despatches not having reached him at Canizal. With the three brigades + of cavalry he set off at once towards Alaejos, while an officer was + despatched to Canizal, to order the fifth division to march with all speed + to Torrecilla de la Orden, six miles in the rear of Cotton's position at + Castrejon. + </p> + <p> + Four hours' riding brought them to Alaejos, where a halt for two or three + hours was ordered, to rest the weary horses and men. Soon after daybreak, + however, all thought of sleep was banished by the roar of artillery, which + told that Marmont was pressing hard upon Cotton's troops. "To horse!" was + the cry, and Lords Wellington and Beresford, with their staff, rode off at + full speed towards the scene of action, with the cavalry following hard + upon their heels. An hour's ride brought them to the ground. Not much + could be seen, for the country was undulating and bare, like the Brighton + Downs, and each depression was full of the white morning mist, which + wreathed and tossed fantastically from the effects of the discharges of + firearms, the movements of masses of men, and the charges of cavalry + hidden within it. Upon a crest near at hand were a couple of British guns, + with a small escort of horse. + </p> + <p> + Suddenly, from the mist below, a party of some fifty French horsemen + dashed out and made for the guns. The supporting squadron, surprised by + the suddenness of the attack, broke and fled; the French followed hard + upon them, and just as Lord Wellington, with his staff, gained the crest, + pursuers and pursued came upon them, and in pell-mell confusion the whole + were borne down to the bottom of the hill. For a few minutes it was a wild + mélée. Lords Wellington, Beresford, and their staff, with their swords + drawn, were in the midst of the fight, and friends and foes were mingled + together, when the leading squadrons of the cavalry from Alaejos came + thundering down, and very few of the Frenchmen who had made that gallant + charge escaped to tell the tale. + </p> + <p> + The mists were now rapidly clearing up, and in a short time the whole + French army could be seen advancing. They moved towards the British left, + and Wellington ordered the troops at once to retire. The British fell back + in three columns, and marched for the Guarena, through Torrecilla de la + Orden. The French also marched straight for the river, and now one of the + most singular sights ever presented in warfare was to be seen. + </p> + <p> + The hostile armies were marching abreast, the columns being but a few + hundred yards apart, the officers on either side waving their hands to + each other. For ten miles the armies thus pressed forward the officers + urging the men, and these straining every nerve to get first to the river. + From time to time the artillery of either side, finding a convenient + elevation, would pour a few volleys of grape into the opposing columns, + but the position of the two armies, did not often admit of this. Gradually + Cotton's men, fresher than the French, who had, in the two previous days, + marched fifty miles, gained ground, and, reaching the river, marched + across by the ford, the winners of the great race by so little that one + division, which halted for a moment to drink, was swept by forty pieces of + French artillery, which arrived on the spot almost simultaneously with it. + </p> + <p> + On the Guarena the British found the remaining divisions of the army, + which had been brought up from Canizal. These checked Marmont in an + attempt to cross at Vallesa, while the 29th and 40th Regiments, with a + desperate bayonet charge, drove Carier's French division back as it + attempted to push forward beyond Castrillo. Thus the two armies faced each + other on the Guarena, and Marmont had gained absolutely nothing by his + false movement at Toro, and his long and skillful detour by Tordesillas. + </p> + <p> + Quickly the rest of the day passed, as did the one which followed, the + troops on both sides resting after their fatigues. Wellington expected to + be attacked on the next morning and his army was arranged in two lines + ready for the combat. At daybreak, however, Marmont moved his army up the + river, crossed at a ford there, and marched straight for Salamanca, thus + turning Wellington's right, and threatening his communications. The + British at once fell back, and the scene of the previous day was repeated + the armies marching along the crest of two parallel hills within musket + shot distance of each other. + </p> + <p> + This time however, the French troops, although they had marched + considerably farther than the English proved themselves the best marchers, + and when night fell Wellington had the mortification of seeing them in + possession of the ford of Huerta on the Tormes, thus securing for Marmont + the junction with an army which was approaching under King Joseph, and + also the option of either fighting or refusing battle. Wellington felt his + position seriously threatened, and sent off a despatch to the Spanish + General Castanos, stating his inability to hold his ground, and the + probability that he should be obliged to fall back upon Portugal. This + letter proved the cause of the victory of Salamanca for it was intercepted + by the French, and Marmont, fearing that Wellington would escape him, + prepared at once to throw himself upon the road to Ciudad Rodrigo, and + thus cut the British line of retreat, in spite of the positive order which + he had received from King Joseph not to fight until he himself arrived + with his army. + </p> + <p> + Upon the 21st both armies crossed the Tormes, the French at Alba and + Huerta, the British at Aldea Lengua, and San Marta. Upon that day the news + reached Wellington that General Chauvel, with 2000 cavalry, and 20 guns, + would reach Marmont on the evening of the 22d, or the morning of the 23d, + and the English general therefore resolved to retreat, unless Marmont + should, by some mistake, give him a chance of fighting to advantage. + </p> + <p> + Close to the British right, and the French left, were two steep and rugged + hills, called the Hermanitos, or Brothers, and soon after daybreak on the + 22d, the French seized upon the one nearest to them, while the British + took possession of the other. Then, watching each other, the two armies + remained until noon, for Wellington could not commence his retreat by + daylight; but a long cloud of dust along the road to Ciudad Rodrigo showed + that the baggage of the army was already <i>en route</i> for Portugal. + Marmont now determined to make a bold stroke to cut off Wellington's + retreat, and, although all his troops had not yet arrived, he ordered + Maucune, with two divisions, to march round by the left and menace the + Ciudad road. It was at three o'clock in the afternoon, and Wellington, who + had been up all night, thinking that Marmont would make no move that day, + had gone to lie down for an hour or two, when Tom Scudamore who, from an + elevated point, was watching the movements of the enemy, hurried in with + the news that the French were pushing their left round towards the Ciudad + Road. + </p> + <p> + Wellington leaped to his feet, and hurried to the high ground, where he + beheld, with stern satisfaction, that Marmont, in his eagerness to prevent + the British escape, had committed the flagrant error of detaching his wing + from his main body. Instantly he issued orders for an attack, and the + great mass of men upon the British Hermanito moved down upon the plain to + attack Maucune in flank, while the third division was ordered to throw + itself across his line of march, and to attack him in front. As the + advance across the plain would be taken in flank by the fire from the + French Hermanito, General Pack was ordered to assail that position + directly the British line had passed it. + </p> + <p> + Marmont, standing on the French Hermanito, was thunder-struck at beholding + the plain suddenly covered with enemies, and a tremendous fire was at once + opened upon the advancing British. Officer after officer was despatched to + hurry up the French troops still upon the march, and when Marmont saw the + third division dash across Maucune's path, he was upon the point of + hurrying himself to the spot, when a shell burst close to him, and he was + dashed to the earth with a broken arm, and two deep wounds in his side. + </p> + <p> + Thus, at the critical point of the battle, the French army was left + without a head. + </p> + <p> + It was just five o'clock when Pakenham, with the third division, fell like + a thunderbolt upon the head of Maucune's troops. These, taken by surprise + by this attack, on the part of an enemy whom they had thought to see in + full flight, yet fought gallantly, and strove to gain time to open out + into order of battle. Bearing onwards, however, with irresistible force, + the third division broke the head of the column, and drove it back upon + its supports. Meanwhile, the battle raged all along the line; in the plain + the fourth division carried the village of Arapiles, and drove back + Bonnet's division with the bayonet, and the fifth division attacked + Maucune's command in flank, while Pakenham was destroying its front. + </p> + <p> + Marmont was succeeded in his command by Bonnet, who was also wounded, and + Clausel, an able general, took the command. He reinforced Maucune with his + own divisions, which had just arrived, and, for a while, restored the + battle. Then, past the right and left of Pakenham's division, the British + cavalry, under Le Marchant, Anson, and D'Urban, burst through the smoke + and dust, rode down twelve hundred of the French infantry, and then dashed + on at the line behind. Nobly the charge was pressed, the third division + following at a run, and the charge ceased not until the French left was + entirely broken and five guns, and two thousand prisoners taken. + </p> + <p> + But forty minutes had passed since the first gun was fired, and the French + defeat was already all but irretrievable, and the third, fourth, and fifth + divisions now in line, swept forward as to assured victory. Clausel, + however, proved equal to the emergency. He reinforced Bonnet's division + with that of Fereij, as yet fresh and unbroken, and, at the same moment, + Sarrut's and Brennier's divisions issued from the forest, and formed in + the line of battle. Behind them the broken troops of Maucune's two + divisions re-formed, and the battle was renewed with terrible force. + </p> + <p> + Pack, at the same moment, attempted unsuccessfully to carry the French + Hermanito by assault with his Portuguese division, and the fate of the + battle was again in the balance; the British divisions outnumbered, and + outflanked, began to fall back, Generals Cole, Leith, and Spry, were all + wounded, and the French cavalry threatened the flank of the line. + Wellington, however, had still plenty of reserves in hand, and at this + critical moment he launched them at the enemy. The sixth division was + brought up from the second line, and hurled at the center of the enemy in + a fierce and prolonged charge, while the light and first divisions were + directed against the French divisions which were descending from the + French Hermanito, and against that of Foy, while the seventh division and + the Spaniards were brought up behind the first line. Against so tremendous + an assault as this the French could make no stand, and were pushed back in + ever increasing disorder to the edge of the forest, where Foy's and + Maucune's divisions stood at bay, and covered their retreat in the fast + gathering darkness. + </p> + <p> + Wellington believed that he should capture a great portion of the beaten + army, for he relied upon the Castle of Alba de Formes, commanding the ford + at that place, being held by the Spaniards, but these had evacuated the + place on the preceding day, and had not even informed Wellington that they + had done so. + </p> + <p> + Thus, hidden by the night, the French retreated with but slight loss from + the pursuing columns. In the battle the French had forty-two thousand men + and seventy-four guns; the Allies forty-six thousand and sixty guns, but + of the infantry a division were composed of Spaniards, and these could not + be relied upon in any way. It was probably the most rapidly fought action + ever known, and a French officer described it as the defeat of forty + thousand men in forty minutes. The French loss was over twelve thousand in + killed, wounded, and prisoners, and so completely were they dispersed that + Clausel a week afterwards could only collect twenty thousand to their + standards. It was a great victory, and celebrated as the first which + Wellington had gained over the French, for although at Talavera and Busaco + he had repulsed the French attack, he was not in either case in a position + to do more than hold his ground. + </p> + <p> + Throughout this short and desperate fight the Scudamores had been fully + engaged in conveying orders from one part of the field to another. Shot + and shell flew around them in all directions, and yet when they met at the + end of the action they found that they had escaped without a scratch. The + day following the battle the pursuit began. Had King Joseph's advancing + army united with Clausel's broken troops, he could have opposed + Wellington's advance with a force far superior in numbers to that defeated + at Salamanca. But Joseph, after hesitating, fell back in one direction, + Clausel retreated in another, the opportunity for concentration was lost, + and Wellington found no foe to bar his way on his triumphant march upon + Madrid. + </p> + <p> + Joseph fell back from the capital as the English approached, leaving some + thousands of men in the strong place known as the Retiro, together with an + immense amount of arms, ammunition, and military stores of all kinds, all + of which, including the troops, fell into the hands of the English within + a few days of their arrival at Madrid. + </p> + <p> + It was a proud moment for the Scudamores, as riding behind Lord Wellington + they entered Madrid on the 14th August. + </p> + <p> + The city was half mad with joy. Crowds lined the streets, while every + window and balcony along the route was filled with ladies, who waved their + scarves, clapped their hands, and showered flowers upon the heads of their + deliverers. Those below, haggard and half-starved, for the distress in + Madrid was intense, thronged round the general's horse, a shouting, + weeping throng, kissing his cloak, his horse, any portion of his + equipments which they could touch. Altogether it was one of the most + glorious, most moving, most enthusiastic welcomes ever offered to a + general. + </p> + <p> + The next fortnight was spent in a round of fêtes, bull fights, and balls, + succeeding each other rapidly, but these rejoicings were but a thin veil + over the distress which was general throughout the town. The people were + starving, and many deaths occurred daily from hunger. The British could do + but little to relieve the suffering which they saw around them, for they + themselves were—owing to the utter breakdown of all the arrangements + undertaken by the Portuguese government, and to the indecision and + incapacity of the Home Government—badly fed, and much in arrears of + their pay. Nevertheless, the officers did what they could, got up soup + kitchens, and fed daily many hundreds of starving wretches. + </p> + <p> + The heat was excessive and a very great deal of illness took place among + the troops. The French were gathering strength in the South, and + Wellington determined upon marching north and seizing Burgos, an important + place, but poorly fortified. Leaving General Hill with two divisions at + Madrid, he marched with the rest of the army upon Burgos. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0017" id="link2HCH0017"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XVII. — CAUGHT IN A TRAP. + </h2> + <p> + So much had passed between the first visit of the Scudamores to Madrid as + Spanish peasant boys, and their second entry as captains upon Lord + Wellington's staff, that they had scarcely given a thought to the dangers + they had at that time run, or to the deadly hatred with which they had + inspired the guerilla chief Nunez. When they first rode into the town, + indeed, they had spoken of it one to the other, and had agreed that it + would be pleasant to be able to walk through the streets without fear of + assassination; for even, as Tom said, if the scoundrel had any of his band + there, they would not be likely to recognize them in their uniforms. + </p> + <p> + One evening, however, when they had been in Madrid about a fortnight, an + incident happened which caused them to doubt whether their security from + the hatred of the guerilla was as complete as they had fancied. They were + sitting with a number of other officers in a large café in the Puerta del + Sol, the principal square in Madrid, when a girl came round begging; + instead of holding out her hand silently with a murmur for charity in the + name of the holy Virgin, she began a long story, poured out in rapid + language. + </p> + <p> + Several of the officers present knew more or less Spanish, but they were + unable to follow her quick utterances, and one of them said laughingly, + "Scudamore, this is a case for you, she is beyond us altogether." + </p> + <p> + The girl followed the direction of the speaker's eye, and moved across to + the brothers, who happened to be sitting next to each other, and began her + story again. It was a complicated tale of French oppression, and the boys, + interrupting her here and there to ask for details, talked with her for + some minutes. + </p> + <p> + "I believe she is lying," Tom said, in English, "she tells her story as if + she had learned it by heart, and gets confused whenever we cross-question + her; there, give her a few coppers, I am out of change." + </p> + <p> + As Peter put his hand into his pocket for the money, Tom glanced up + sharply at the girl. She was not, as might have been expected, watching + Peter's movements with interest, but was looking inquiringly at some one + in the crowd of promenaders. Tom followed her glance, and saw a peasant, + standing half-hidden behind a group of passers, nod to her, and motion her + to come to him. She waited until Peter put the coins into her hand; then, + with a brief word of thanks, she moved away into the crowd. + </p> + <p> + "Peter, I believe those scoundrels are up to their old game, and that we + are watched. Once or twice since we have been sitting here I have noticed + a heavy-looking fellow glance at us very closely as he passed, and I just + saw the same fellow, who was evidently hiding from observation, nod to + that girl, and beckon her away." + </p> + <p> + "Her story was a lie from beginning to end," Peter said, "and it is quite + possible that it was a got-up thing, on purpose to see whether we could + talk Spanish well. I don't think any one could swear to us who only saw us + then; but the fact of our speaking Spanish so well would go a long way + towards settling the point in the mind of any one who suspected us!" + </p> + <p> + "We must be careful in future, Peter, and avoid quiet streets after dark, + and keep a sharp look-out at all times, or we shall get a knife between + our ribs, as sure as fate." + </p> + <p> + Time, however, passed on without anything occurring to give any support to + their suspicion, they could not discover that they were being watched, or + their footsteps dogged. They, nevertheless, continued to be, to a certain + extent, upon their guard after dark; in the daytime the number of English + soldiers about the streets was so large that there was very little danger + of any attack. + </p> + <p> + On the evening before the army marched for Burgos, Tom, whose turn it was + for duty at head-quarters, received a despatch, to carry to one of the + generals of division encamped a mile or two out of the town. He did not + need to go round to his quarters, as his horse was standing saddled in + readiness in the courtyard. He was but an hour away, and, as he knew that + he would not be farther required, he rode round to the house where he was + quartered. His orderly came forward at his shout, and took his horse, and + he mounted the broad stairs of the house, which was a very handsome one, + and rang at the door on the second floor; for in Spain, as indeed almost + all over the Continent, each floor is a separate dwelling. + </p> + <p> + Sam opened it. + </p> + <p> + "Nothing new, Sam?" + </p> + <p> + "No, sar, nothing new." + </p> + <p> + Tom passed through the sitting-room, and entered Peter's bedroom. It was + in darkness. + </p> + <p> + "Asleep, old man?" he asked. + </p> + <p> + There was no answer. He came back into the sitting room, where two lamps + were burning, and looked at his watch. "Half-past eleven. He is off to bed + early. Sam, bring me some supper if you have got anything, I am hungry." + </p> + <p> + Sam came in, in a minute, with a small tray. + </p> + <p> + "How long has my brother been gone to bed?" + </p> + <p> + "Me did not know he gone to bed at all," Sam said, in surprise. "Me + thought Massa Peter been reading book." + </p> + <p> + Tom took up a light, and went into the bedroom, it was empty. "Sam, + there's something wrong here!" Tom said sharply, for a sudden sensation of + alarm seized him. "Peter is not here." + </p> + <p> + Sam came into the bedroom, and looked round in astonishment. "What become + of him?" he said. "Where de debil he got to?" + </p> + <p> + "That's what I want to know, Sam. Now, then, just give all your attention. + What time did he come in?" + </p> + <p> + "He came in at about nine o'clock, sar, with three other officers, Captain + Farquharson, Major Heriot, and Captain Brown. Dey have bottle wine, and + sit here and smoke. Well, Massa Tom, Sam sit in his room, and smoke him + pipe, and he doze off a little; after a bit, may be ten o'clock, Sam hear + dem move, and go to door; they were saying good-night, when Massa Peter + said, 'I will just go down to see that the horses are all right.' Den dey + all go down togeder." + </p> + <p> + "Did they shut the door?" Tom asked. + </p> + <p> + "No, Massa Tom, dey did not shut de door, because, a little while after, + Sam, he wake up wid little start; he hear de door bang, and 'spose Massa + Peter come back. Sam go off to sleep again till you ring bell." + </p> + <p> + Tom looked very grave. "What can Peter have gone off with Farquharson at + this time of night for?" + </p> + <p> + Then he looked round the room, and said, almost with a cry, "Sam, look + there, there are his cap and sword. He has not gone out with the others at + all. What can have happened?" + </p> + <p> + Tom first glanced into his own room, and then ran downstairs in haste, + followed by Sam, who was now also thoroughly alarmed. The orderly had just + made the horse comfortable for the night, and was leaving the stable. + </p> + <p> + "Johnstone, when did you see my brother?" + </p> + <p> + "Well, it may be an hour, or an hour and a half back, sir. He came down + with some other officers; I did not see them, but I heard them talking for + a minute or two before he came in to look at the horses, and he asked if + they were all right, and said they must be saddled by half-past five, and + then he went up again—at least, I suppose he went up, for he had not + got his cap on. Is anything wrong, sir?" + </p> + <p> + "I don't know, I am afraid to think," Tom said, in a dazed way. "He is not + upstairs; he has not gone out; what can have become of him?" + </p> + <p> + He stood quiet for a minute or two, and then, with a great effort, brought + his thoughts within control again. "The first thing is to assure ourselves + whether he returned upstairs. Sam, fetch a lamp, the stairs are not + lighted, and I want to examine them." + </p> + <p> + Sam soon returned with the lamp, and Tom, beginning at the street door, + examined every step carefully all the way up, Sam and the soldier + following him. + </p> + <p> + "There has been no scuffle on the stairs," he said; then he went through + the little hall into the sitting-room again. Nothing appeared to have been + disturbed. Then he looked at the floor, which was of polished oak, and + knelt down to examine it more closely. "There have been men with dirty + shoes standing here," he cried. "Do you see the marks on each side of the + door, and there, do you see that scratch and that? There has been a + scuffle. Good heavens! what has taken place here?" + </p> + <p> + Sam's face was pale with apprehension that something had happened to + Peter; but, he said, "How dat be, Massa Tom, with Sam in the next room all + the time?" + </p> + <p> + Tom made no reply; but was closely examining the floor—back across + the hall. "There is a mark; there is another," he said, "not made by + boots, but by their native sandals." Then he went out from the door, and + up the next flight of stairs. + </p> + <p> + "There," he said, "just as I thought." Just round the angle of the stairs + two steps were dirty and stained, as if dirty feet had been trampling upon + them for some time. "I suppose they knew I was out, and watched here, for + hours, perhaps. Then, when Peter went down, they slipped in through the + open door, and then"—without completing the sentence, Tom went back + into the room, and threw himself into a chair in tearless despair. + </p> + <p> + Sam sobbed loudly. For some time there was silence. "There is no blood, + sir, that I can see, not a speck," the orderly said. "They can't have + killed Captain Scudamore, and, if they had, why should they have carried + his body away?" + </p> + <p> + This was the question Tom had been asking himself. Assassinations were, in + Madrid, every-day occurrences, and that Peter and he were especially + liable to be murdered, owing to the hatred of Nunez and his gang, was + clear; but, so far as he could see, not a drop of blood had been shed + here. Presently Sam began to sob more loudly. "Dis break my heart, Massa + Tom, to tink dat Sam be next door all de time, and, instead of watching, + he sleep so sound dat Massa Peter carried straight away." + </p> + <p> + "You are not to blame, Sam, there was, probably, no noise whatever. But, + what can it all mean? Johnstone, you had better go to bed, you can do no + good now. Sam, give me my pistols; take that big stick of yours, and come + round with me to head-quarters, we will call in at Captain Farquharson's + on the way." + </p> + <p> + That officer, on being roused, and made to understand what was the matter, + confirmed the account given by the orderly; he and his companions had + parted at the street door, and Peter had gone down the yard to the stable. + </p> + <p> + "It is clear that Peter has been carried off," Tom said, "and I have not + the least doubt that it has been done by some of the band of Nunez. As you + have heard me say, they owe us a grudge, and have, no doubt, been on the + look-out ever since we came here. We have been on guard, and never gave + them a chance, and, I suppose, they got desperate when they found the army + was moving again, and so carried out this audacious plan." + </p> + <p> + "If your brother had been found murdered I should understand it," Captain + Farquharson said; "but, what on earth did they carry him off for?" + </p> + <p> + Tom was silent for a minute. + </p> + <p> + "That fiend, Nunez, would have had us stabbed if he could do nothing else; + but he would, if I judge him rightly, be really contented with nothing + short of putting us to death himself in some horrible manner. My own idea + is, that Peter is hidden away somewhere near, will be kept in concealment + until the road is clear, and will then be taken to Nunez. I must go off + and try and save him at all hazards." + </p> + <p> + Captain Farquharson was silent, while Tom walked up and down the room + thoughtfully. + </p> + <p> + "I don't suppose the chief would refuse me leave," Tom said. "If he does, + I must throw up my commission." + </p> + <p> + "No, no; you are sure to get leave for such a thing as this, but the + difficulty of the affair will be to know how to proceed. The country will + swarm with French, the guerillas are sure to keep a sharp look-out, and if + you find him, how are you going to rescue him?" + </p> + <p> + "I don't know," Tom said, "but it's got to be done; that's clear. I can't + set out as a Spanish peasant," he went on after a pause. "They know me as + that now. At least, if I do I must get up as an old man and change my + appearance. I might go as a woman, but I am too tall in the first place, + and then women don't go wandering over the country in such times as this. + But there, I have time to think it over before morning. I suppose the + general will be moving about five o'clock; I will see him the first thing, + and tell him the whole story. Good-night." + </p> + <p> + And so Tom went back to his quarters, and sat thinking deeply until + morning, while Sam sat gloomily in his little room, sometimes with tears + rolling down his cheeks, sometimes muttering terrible threats against the + guerillas, at other times cursing himself for having been asleep instead + of watching over his young master's safety. Tom had briefly told him that + he intended to get leave in order to search for Peter. At daybreak, when + he heard Tom moving, he went into the sitting-room. + </p> + <p> + "Look here, Massa Tom, Sam only one word to say. He going to look for + Massa Peter. Sam know dat him color berry spicuous, dat people look at him + and tink he de debil. Sam don't spect he going wid you. Dat wouldn't do. + Dese fellows watch him, know dat black fellow here. Only Sam go somehow. + He trabel night, hide up at day time. He join you de last ting when you go + to mash up dem guerillas like squash. Anyhow, Sam must go. If can get + leave, berry well, if not he desert. Anyhow he go, dat sartin. Sam kill + himself if he stay behind." + </p> + <p> + Tom had already thought over this. He was sure that the faithful negro + would not remain behind, but he had seen that his companionship would be + fatal. He had, therefore, formed some plan in his head similar to that + which Sam proposed, and he knew that when the moment for action came his + courage, strength, and devotion would be invaluable. + </p> + <p> + "You shall go, Sam," he said, holding out his hand to his attached + follower. "As you say, you can't go with me, but you shall go somehow." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you, Massa Tom," the negro said gratefully, "You berry sure if + Massa Peter die Sam die too." + </p> + <p> + Tom now went to head-quarters, and found that Lord Wellington was just up. + Sending in to say that he wished to speak with him for a few minutes on a + matter of urgent personal importance, he was admitted, and related as + concisely as he could Peter's disappearance, and told the story of the + affair with the guerillas, which accounted for the intense desire for + vengeance on the part of Nunez. He ended by asking for leave of absence. + </p> + <p> + The general heard him to the end, asking a brief question here and there. + </p> + <p> + "You can have the leave certainly, Captain Scudamore, I know that it is + needless for me to point out the risks that you will run, both from the + French and guerillas. I think that it might be an advantage if I give you + a note which you can, in case of absolute necessity, show to any French + officer." + </p> + <p> + So saying, the general sat down and wrote as follows:— + </p> + <p> + "To the French officer commanding.—The Earl of Wellington, + commander-in-chief of His Britannic Majesty's forces in Spain, gives his + assurance that the bearer of this, Captain Scudamore, although not in + English uniform, is not engaged upon any mission connected with the army, + or to obtain information respecting the strength and position of the + French forces. His business is entirely private, and he is engaged in an + attempt to discover and rescue a brother who has been carried off by the + guerilla chief Nunez in order to gratify private vengeance. The Earl of + Wellington, confiding in the natural courtesy of the French nation, trusts + that officers of that service will, if applied to, assist Captain + Scudamore in any way in their power, and he will feel personally obliged + to them by their so doing." + </p> + <p> + Tom expressed his deep gratitude for this, which might, he foresaw, be of + inestimable advantage to him. + </p> + <p> + "I am taking my servant with me, sir—the negro; he will not travel + with me by day, but will join me wherever I tell him; he is very strong + and brave, and is deeply attached to us." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, I remember," the general said; "that is the man whose life you + saved. Do you leave at once?" + </p> + <p> + "No, sir; I am thinking of riding with you to-morrow at any rate. The + route lies on the way I have to go, and I am sure to be watched here." + </p> + <p> + "Very well," the general said; "I wish you good fortune; but you have a + difficult, almost a desperate, service before you." + </p> + <p> + Upon leaving head-quarters, Tom again called on Captain Farquharson. + </p> + <p> + "Farquharson, I hear that it will be eleven before the chief leaves. I + wish you would go to that little shop opposite the opera-house; they have + got wigs and all that sort of thing there. Please get me two old men's + wigs and beards, and one set of those mutton-chop shaped whiskers, and a + woman's wig. I haven't made up my mind yet what I am going to wear, but I + want these things to choose from. I am sure to be watched, and if I were + to go there they would find out, five minutes afterwards, what I had + bought. In the meantime I am going to the head of the police to give + notice of Peter's disappearance, and to ask him to have the carts leaving + the town for the next few days searched. I have no doubt the fellows will + outwit the police, but it's no use throwing away a chance." + </p> + <p> + It was six days after this that an old man, with long white hair and gray + beard, and with a box containing cheap trinkets, beads, necklaces, + earrings, knives, scissors, and other like articles, was sitting at the + junction of two roads near the lower slopes of the Pyrenees, some twenty + miles north of Vittoria. He had one of his sandals off, and appeared to + have just risen from a bed of leaves in the forest behind him. The dawn + had broken, but it was still twilight. Presently he heard a footstep + coming along the road, and at once applied himself to wrapping the + bandages, which serve for stockings to the Spanish peasant, round his leg, + looking eagerly from under his wide sombrero to see who was approaching. + As the new-comer came in sight, the pedlar at once ceased his employment + and rose to meet him. He had recognized the figure, but the face was + hidden, the Spanish cloak, worn as is usual by peasant and noble alike, + with one end thrown over the shoulder, hiding the chin and lower part of + the face, while the wide felt hat, pressed well down in front, allowed + scarcely a glimpse even of the nose. That, however, would have been + sufficient in the present case, for the man was a negro. + </p> + <p> + Upon seeing the pedlar rise, he ran forward to meet him. + </p> + <p> + "Ah, Massa Tom, tank de Lord me find you safe and sound. I always keep on + tinking you taken prisoner or killed eider by de French or de robbers—one + as bad as de oder." + </p> + <p> + "I have thought the same of you, Sam, for your risk has been far greater + than mine. Well, thank God, it is all right thus far. But come back into + the wood, I have got some food there, and here any one might come along." + </p> + <p> + They were soon deep in the wood, where, by a pile of grass and leaves + which had evidently been used as a bed, was an open wallet, with some + bread, cheese, cold meat and a small skin of wine. + </p> + <p> + "Are you hungry, Sam?" + </p> + <p> + "Downright starving, sar; dis chile eat noting for two days." + </p> + <p> + "Why, how is that, Sam; you had six days' provision with you when you + started?" + </p> + <p> + "Dat true enough, sar, but Sam's appetite bigger than usual, noting to do + all day sitting in de woods, waiting for night to come so as to go on + again; so had to eat, and de food all went before Sam thought dat dere was + two more days before he meet you." + </p> + <p> + "Well, sit down now, Sam, and eat away; we have plenty of time." + </p> + <p> + They had much to tell each other. They had traveled by the same road, one + by night, the other by day—Sam passing the days sleeping in the + woods, his master traveling by day and at night sleeping in wretched + village posadas. He, too, would far rather have slept in the woods, for + the insects and filth made sleep almost impossible in these places, + besides which he ran a good deal of risk as to the discovery of his + disguise. He had, however, chosen the inns in hopes of hearing something + which might give him a clue as to the object of his search. The only + information, which he had gained was to the effect that Nunez still had + his quarters at the old place. He had been driven out of it, and the + village had been burned by the French, but the position was a convenient + one, and the houses had been cleared and roughly roofed with boughs of + trees and straw, and the band was still there. This much was satisfactory, + and he could hardly have expected to learn more, unless he had happened to + meet some of the members of the band itself. They had not traveled by the + main road, as upon that large forces of the French were collected; and + even if Tom could have passed through, boldly, Sam could not have made his + way. Even by the road they had chosen Tom had met several bodies of + French, while at Vittoria a very large force was assembling, destined for + the relief of Burgos. + </p> + <p> + Sam had but few incidents to relate. He had been carefully instructed by + Tom before starting as to the road he should take, and the position and + distances apart of the towns and villages upon it. He had traveled only at + night, and had but once or twice exchanged a word with passers by. People + did not travel much at night in so disturbed a country, and when Sam heard + a foot-passenger approaching, or, as was more frequently the case, a party + of French cavalry, he left the road and lay down, until they had passed. + The one or two foot-passengers he had met suddenly he had passed with the + usual Spanish muttered salutation, and the darkness and the disguise + prevented any recognition of his color. + </p> + <p> + "Now, sar," Sam said, when they had finished breakfast, "what am to be + done next?" + </p> + <p> + "I do not think, Sam, that the party who have got Peter have arrived yet. + They could only have started on the day that we did; they have as long a + road to go, and most likely they have got a bullock-cart, which won't + travel more than fifteen miles a day at the outside. They have got Peter + in a cart covered up with something, we may be sure. I don't think they + will be here for another day or so at the earliest. If we knew what sort + of cart it was, we could attack them on the way if there are not too many + of them; but unfortunately we don't know that; and as there are three or + four roads up to the village, and they are sure to make a detour, we don't + know which they will come by. I hope to learn at the village. We will stay + where we are till dark, then we will push on; it is only a couple of miles + or so from here. I will steal into the place after dark, and try and + overhear what is going on. You shall remain at a point where you can see + down into the village and can hear a shout. I will give you this letter of + Lord Wellington, and if you hear a pistol shot and hear me shout 'Sam!' + you will know I am caught, and must make off as hard as you can to that + small town in the plain, where there is a French garrison; ask for the + commanding-officer, show this letter, and offer to guide them so as to + surprise Nunez and his band. That is our sole chance. But I don't think + there is much risk of being caught. I shall be very careful, you may rely + upon it; and as I know the position of the house, I shall be able to make + my way about. Once night has fallen they go off to bed; and even if I + walked boldly about the place I should likely enough meet no one all + night." + </p> + <p> + That evening Tom entered the village as soon as it was fairly dark. He + knew, from his former experience, that sentries were always placed at + points whence they could get a view of the roads, and he made his way so + as to avoid any risk of observation by them; but when he reached a place + whence he could in turn view the posts of the watchers, he found that they + were deserted, and concluded that the brigands had become careless, from + the belief that, now the French had once destroyed the village, they would + not be likely to come up to search for them there a second time; besides + which, they might reckon that the French had their hands much too full + with the advance of the Allied Army to spare either men or time in raids + upon the guerillas. In this particular, indeed, they would have argued + wrongly, for the French during the whole war, however much they were + pressed by Wellington, always kept sufficient forces in hand to scatter + the guerillas as fast as they become formidable. + </p> + <p> + Tom had now taken off his beard and wig, and had put on the small whisker, + which is the general fashion of wearing the hair throughout Spain. Thus he + trusted, if surprised in the dark, to pass as one of the band. So quiet + was the village when he entered, that he at first thought it was deserted; + at last, however, he saw a light in one of the houses in the center of the + village. Approaching carefully and noiselessly he saw a group of five men + sitting and drinking round a fire made on the ground, in the center of one + of the windowless rooms, the smoke finding its way out through the roof. + </p> + <p> + "I tell you," one said, "I am getting sick of this life; I am ready to go + and kill the French, but to be left up here, where there is nothing to do, + no one to talk to, not a roof to cover one; bah! I am sick of it. But + Nunez will be back in three days, and we shall be merry enough then." + </p> + <p> + "Not we," another said, "this was a pleasant village in the old days, what + is it now? There are no women, not even old mother Morena, who used to + cook well, if she was free of her tongue. There is not even a priest now + to shrive us if one is brought in to die." + </p> + <p> + "Nunez will come back in a good temper if it is true what Lope said + yesterday when he came through, that the lads at Madrid had got one of + those English boys who made a fool of him two years ago. That was a go. + Demonio! but it was a fine thing. If it is true that they have got him and + are bringing him here I would not be in his skin for all the treasures of + King Joseph. Yes, Nunez was always a devil, but he is worse now. Somehow + we always have bad luck, and the band gets smaller and smaller, I don't + suppose there's above fifty with him now. I expect we shall have them + pretty well all here this week." + </p> + <p> + "No fear of a visit from the French?" + </p> + <p> + "None; Reynier at Vittoria is busy now in sending every man he can spare + forward to the army that's gathering near Burgos." + </p> + <p> + This was enough for Tom, who stole silently away to the spot where Sam was + anxiously awaiting him. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0018" id="link2HCH0018"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XVIII. — JUST IN TIME. + </h2> + <p> + "I shall go straight back to Vittoria, Sam. By what they say, General + Reynier is in command there, and as it was through his wife that all this + terrible business has come about, we have a right to expect him to do his + best to get us out of it. I will start at once. Now look here, Sam. You + must put yourself where you can keep watch over the village. If you see + any party come in, either to-night or to-morrow, you must try and discover + if Peter is among them. If he is, light a fire down in that hollow where + it can't be seen from above, but where we can see it on that road. It's + twenty miles to Vittoria; if I can get to see General Reynier to-morrow, I + may be back here with cavalry by night; if he is out or anything prevents + it, I will be here next night, as soon after dusk as it will be safe. I + will dismount the men and take them over the hill, so as to avoid the + sentinel who is sure to be posted on the road when Nunez arrives. If they + come in the afternoon, Sam, and you find that anything is going to be done + at once, do everything you can to delay matters." + </p> + <p> + "All right, Massa Tom, if, when you come back you find Massa Peter dead, + you be berry sure you find dis chile gone down too." + </p> + <p> + It was seven o'clock next morning when Tom entered Vittoria, and a few + cautious inquiries proved the fact that General Reynier was really in + command of the French division there. He at once sought his head-quarters, + and after some talk with a woman selling fruit near the house, heard that + the general and his staff had started at daybreak, but whither of course + she knew not. Tom hesitated for some time, and then, seeing an officer + standing at the door, went up to him and asked if the general would be + back soon. + </p> + <p> + "He will be back in an hour or two," the officer replied in Spanish, "but + it is no use your waiting to see him. He has his hands full and can't be + bothered with petitions as to cattle stolen or orchards robbed. Wait till + we have driven the English back, and then we shall have time to talk to + you." + </p> + <p> + "Your pardon," Tom said humbly. "It is not a complaint that I have to + make, it is something of real importance which I have to communicate to + him." + </p> + <p> + "You can tell me, I am Colonel Decamps; it will be all the same thing if + your news is really important." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you very kindly, señor, it must be the general himself; I will wait + here." Thereupon Tom sat down with his back to the wall a short distance + off, pulled out some bread and fruit he had bought in the town, and began + quietly to eat his breakfast. An hour later a pretty carriage with two + fine horses drew up to the door. It was empty, and was evidently intended + for some one in the house. Suddenly, the thought flashed across his mind, + perhaps Madame Reynier and her child were there. It was curious that the + thought had not occurred to him before, but it had not, and he drew near, + when a sentry at the door roughly ordered him to stand further back. + Presently a lady came to the door, accompanied by a little girl. There she + stood for a minute talking with the officer with whom Tom had spoken. At + the moment a young officer passed Tom on his way to the house. + </p> + <p> + "Monsieur," Tom said, in French, "do me the favor to place that ring in + the hands of Madame Reynier. It is a matter of life and death. She will + recognize the ring, it is her own," he added, as the young officer in + surprise hesitated. He was a bright handsome young fellow, and after a + moment's, pause, he went up to the lady. "My dear aunt," he said, "here is + a mystery. An old Spanish beggar speaks French, not very good French, but + enough to make out, and he begs me to give you this ring, which he says is + yours, and which, by the way, looks a valuable one." Madame Reynier, in + some surprise, held out her hand for the ring. "It is not mine," she + began, when a sudden thought struck her, and turning it round she saw "a + Louise Reynier, tumors reconnaissance," which she had had engraved on it, + before giving it to Tom. "Who gave it to you, Jules?" she asked eagerly. + </p> + <p> + "That old pedler," Jules said. + </p> + <p> + "Bring him in," Madame Reynier said, "the carriage must wait; I must speak + to him and alone." + </p> + <p> + "My dear aunt," began her nephew. + </p> + <p> + "Don't be afraid, Jules, I am not going to run away with him, and if you + are a good boy you shall know all about it afterwards, wait here, Louise, + with your cousin;" and beckoning to Tom to follow her, she went into the + house, the two officers looking astounded at each other as the supposed + Spanish pedler followed her into her sitting-room. + </p> + <p> + "What is your message?" she asked. + </p> + <p> + Tom's answer was to remove his wide hat, wig, and beard. + </p> + <p> + "Himself!" Madame Reynier exclaimed, "my preserver," and she held out both + her hands to him. "How glad I am, but oh! how foolish to come here again, + and—and"—she hesitated at the thought that he, an English spy, + ought not to come to her, the wife of a French general. + </p> + <p> + Tom guessed her thought. "Even General Reynier might succor us without + betraying the interests of his country. Read that, madame; it is an open + letter," and he handed her Lord Wellington's letter. + </p> + <p> + She glanced through it and turned pale. "Your brother! is he in the hands + of the guerillas? Where? How?" + </p> + <p> + "He is in the hands of that scoundrel Nunez; he swore he would be revenged + for that day's work, and he has had Peter carried off. No doubt to kill + him with torture." + </p> + <p> + "Oh! and it is through me," Madame Reynier exclaimed, greatly distressed. + "What can we do! Please let me consult with my friends, every soldier + shall be at your service," and she opened the door. "Colonel Deschamps, + Jules, come here directly, and bring Louise with you." These officers, on + entering, were struck dumb with astonishment on finding a young peasant + instead of an old pedler, and at seeing tears standing in Madame Reynier's + eyes. "Louise," she said to her daughter, "look at this gentleman, who is + he?" + </p> + <p> + The child looked hard at Tom; he was dressed nearly as when she first saw + him—and as he smiled she recognized him. "Oh, it is the good boy!" + she cried, and leaped into Tom's arms, and kissed him heartily. + </p> + <p> + "Do you think we have gone mad, Jules, Louise and I? This is one of the + young English officers who saved our lives, as you have often heard me + tell you." + </p> + <p> + Jules stepped forward, and shook Tom's hand heartily, but Colonel + Deschamps looked very serious. "But, madame," he began, "you are wrong to + tell me this." + </p> + <p> + "No, Colonel;" Madame Reynier said, "here is a letter, of which this + gentleman is the bearer, from Lord Wellington himself, vouching for him, + and asking for the help of every Frenchman." + </p> + <p> + Colonel Deschamps read it, and his brow cleared, and he held out his hand + to Tom. "Pardon my hesitation, sir," he said in Spanish; "but I feared + that I was placed in a painful position, between what I owe to my country, + and what all French soldiers owe to you, for what you did for Madame + Reynier. I am, indeed, glad to find that this letter absolves me from the + former duty, and leaves me free to do all I can to discharge the latter + debt. Where is your brother, and why has he been carried off? I have known + hundreds of our officers assassinated by these Spanish wolves, but never + one carried away. An English officer, too, it makes it the more strange!" + </p> + <p> + Tom now related the story of Peter's abduction; the previous attempts of + members of Nunez's band to assassinate them, and the reasons he had for + believing that Peter was close to, if not already at, the headquarters of + that desperado. + </p> + <p> + "Is he still there?" Jules asked. "We routed him out directly the general + came up here. My aunt declared herself bound by a promise, and would give + us no clue as to the position of the village, but he had made himself such + a scourge, that there were plenty of others ready to tell; if we had known + the roads, we would have killed the whole band, but unfortunately they + took the alarm and made off. So he has gone back there again. Ah! there is + the general." + </p> + <p> + Madame Reynier went out to meet her husband, and drawing him aside into + another room, explained the whole circumstance to him, with difficulty + detaining him long enough to tell her story, as the moment he found that + his wife and child's deliverer was in the next room, he desired to rush + off to see him. The story over, he rushed impetuously into the room, where + Tom was explaining his plans to his French friends, seized him in his + arms, and kissed him on both cheeks, as if he had been his son. + </p> + <p> + "I have longed for this day!" he said, wiping his eyes. "I have prayed + that I might some day meet you, to thank you for my wife and child, who + would have been lost to me, but for you. And now I hear your gallant + brother is paying with his life for that good deed. Tell me what to do, + and if necessary I will put the whole division at your orders." + </p> + <p> + "I do not think that he will have above fifty men with him, general; say + eighty, at the outside. Two squadrons of cavalry will be sufficient. They + must dismount at the bottom of the hill, and I will lead them up. We must + not get within sight of the hill till it is too dark for their look-out to + see us, or the alarm would be given, and we should catch no one. We shall + know if they have arrived, by a fire my man is to light. If they have not + come, then I would put sentries on guard upon every road leading there, + and search every cart that comes up; they are sure to have got him hid + under some hay, or something of that sort, and there are not likely to be + more than two or three men actually with it, so as not to attract + attention. It will be all right if they do not arrive there to-day." + </p> + <p> + "It is about five hours' ride for cavalry," the general said, "that is at + an easy pace; it will not be dark enough to approach the hill without + being seen till eight o'clock. Two squadrons shall be paraded here at + three o'clock. I will go with you myself; yes, and you shall go too, + Jules," he said, in answer to an anxious look from his nephew. "In the + mean time you can lend our friend some clothes; you are about the same + size." + </p> + <p> + "Come along," Jules said laughing; "I think we can improve your + appearance," and, indeed, he did so, for in half an hour Tom returned + looking all over a dashing young French hussar, and little Louise clapped + her hands and said— + </p> + <p> + "He does look nice, mamma, don't he? Why can't he stay with us always, and + dress like that? and we know he's brave, and he would help papa and Jules + to kill the wicked English." + </p> + <p> + There was a hearty laugh, and Jules was about to tell her that Tom was + himself one of the wicked English, but Madame Reynier shook her head, for, + as she told him afterwards, it was as well not to tell her, for little + mouths would talk, and there was no occasion to set everyone wondering and + talking about the visit of an English officer to General Reynier. "There + is no treason in it, Jules, still one does not want to be suspected of + treason, even by fools." + </p> + <p> + Sam watched all night, without hearing any sound of vehicles, but in the + morning he saw that several more guerillas had come in during the night. + In the morning parties of twos and threes began to come in from the + direction of Vittoria, and it was evident from the shouting and noise in + the village that these brought satisfactory news of some kind. In the + afternoon most of them went out again in a body to the wood at the foot of + the hill, and soon afterwards Sam saw a cart coming along across the + plain. Two men walked beside it, and Sam could see one, if not two more + perched upon the top of the load. Three others walked along at a distance + of some fifty yards ahead, and as many more at about the same distance + behind. He could see others making their way through the fields. "Dis + berry bad job," Sam said to himself; "me berry much afraid dat Massa Tom + he not get back in time. Der's too many for Sam to fight all by himself, + but he must do someting." Whereupon Sam set to to think with all his + might, and presently burst into a broad grin. "Sure enough dat do," he + said; "now let me arrange all about what dey call de pamerphernalia." + First, he emptied out the contents of a couple of dozen pistol cartridges; + he wetted the powder and rolled it up in six cartridges, like squibs, + three short ones and three much longer. Then he opened Tom's kit, and took + out a small box of paints, which Tom had carried with him for making dark + lines on his face, and in other ways to assist his disguise. Taking some + white paint, Sam painted his eyelids up to his eyebrows, and a circle on + his cheeks, giving the eyes at a short distance the appearance of ghastly + saucers. + </p> + <p> + "Dat will do for de present," he said; "now for business. If dey wait till + it get dark, all right; if not, Sam do for Nunez and two or three more, + and den go down with Massa Peter!" + </p> + <p> + Then carefully examining the priming of the pair of pistols, which he + carried—the very pistols given to Peter by the passengers of the + Marlborough coach—he prepared to set out. + </p> + <p> + It was now six o'clock, and he calculated that the waggon would by this + time have mounted the hill, and reached the village; he had already + collected a large heap of dry sticks and some logs, at the point Tom had + pointed out, these he now lit, and then started for the top of the hill. + Looking back, just as he reached the crest, he could see, knowing where it + was, a very light smoke curling up over a clump of trees which intervened + between him and the fire, but it was so slight that he was convinced that + it would not be noticed by an ordinary observer. Sam saw at once, on + reaching the top of the hill, that the guerillas were crowded round the + waggon, which stood at the edge of a small clump of trees in the middle of + the village. The moment was favourable, and he at once started forward, + sometimes making a detour, so as to have the shelter of a tree, sometimes + stooping behind a low stone wall, until he reached the first house in the + village. It was now comparatively easy work, for there were enclosures and + walls, the patches of garden-ground were breast-high with weeds, and, + stooping and crawling, Sam soon reached a house close to the waggon. It + was a mere hut, and had not been repaired. The roof was gone, but the + charred shutters and doors still hung on their hinges. It was the very + place from which to see without being seen. Sam entered by a door from + behind, and found that, through a slight opening in the window-shutter, he + could see all that was going on. Some fifty guerillas were standing or + sitting in groups at a distance of twenty yards. + </p> + <p> + In the centre of the groups, lying on the ground, was a figure which he at + once recognized as Peter. It was wound round and round with ropes; beside + it stood, or rather danced, Nunez pouring forth strings of abuse, of + threats, and of curses, and enforcing them with repeated kicks at the + motionless figure. + </p> + <p> + "De debil!" muttered Sam, "me neber able to stand dis. If you not stop + dat, Massa Nunez, me put a bullet through dat ugly head of yours, as sure + as you stand dere. But me mustn't do it till last ting; for, whether I + kill him or not, it's all up with Massa Peter and me if I once fire." + </p> + <p> + Fortunately Nunez was tired, and in a short time he desisted, and threw + himself down on the ground. "Take off his ropes, one of you," he said: + "there would be no fear of his running away had he three or four days to + live, instead of as many hours. Take the gag out of his mouth, throw some + water over him to bring him round, and pour some wine down his throat. I + want him to be fresh, so as to be able to enjoy the pleasure we have in + store for him. And now let's have dinner." + </p> + <p> + Sam felt that for another hour at least Peter was safe, and therefore, + with the same precaution as before, he crept away from his hiding-place, + through the village, and over the hill-crest, to the place where he had + made his fire. The logs were burning well, but gave out but little smoke. + Sam looked at the sky. "Dusk cum on berry fast," he said; "another hour + Massa Tom come on with soldiers. If he see fire, he hurry up sharp." So + saying, Sam heaped on a pile of wood, and then made his way back. He knew + that Tom would not approach until it was too dark for the movements of the + troops to be seen by the look-outs, and that he could not be expected to + reach the village until fully an hour after dark. "Just another hour and a + half," he said to himself; "ebery thing depend upon what happen before dat + time." It was quite dusk before he regained the shelter of the cottage. He + had gone round by the wagon, and had taken from it a large stable-fork, + muttering as he did so. "Golly! dis de berry ting." Close by he saw the + carcase of a bullock which the guerillas had just slaughtered, and from + this he cut off the horns and tail. + </p> + <p> + When Sam peeped out through the shutter he saw that something was going to + be done. Nunez was sitting smoking a cigarette, with a look of savage + pleasure in his face, while the men heaped up a large fire in front of the + trees. + </p> + <p> + "I don't like dat gentleman's look," Sam said to himself. "It's time dis + chile begin to dress for de pantomime, dat quite plain. Massa Tom get here + too late." Thus saying, Sam began to deliberately undress. + </p> + <p> + Peter, his arms and feet still bound, was sitting with his back against a + tree, watching what were, he was convinced, the preparations for his + death. For the last ten days he had lived in a sort of confused and + painful dream. From the moment, when, upon entering his room two hands + suddenly gripped his throat, others thrust a gag in the mouth, and then + blindfolded him, while some one from behind lashed his arms to his side, + and then altogether, lifting him like a log, carried him downstairs and + threw him into a cart, he had not till now seen anything. The bandage had + never been removed from his eyes, or the cords from his limbs. Sometimes + he had been made to sit up, and soup and wine had been poured down his + throat, or a piece of bread thrust into his mouth; then he had been again + gagged and thrown into a cart. Over him brushwood and fagots had been + piled, and there he had lain, until at night a stop was made, when he was + taken out, fed, and then thrust back again and covered over. + </p> + <p> + From the first he had never doubted who were his captors, or what was his + destination, and he therefore experienced no surprise whatever, when, on + his arrival at the village, on the bandage being taken off his eyes, he + saw where he was. That it was useless to beg for mercy of the savages into + whose power he had fallen he knew well enough, and he looked as calm and + indifferent, as if he did not hear a word of the threats and imprecations + which Nunez was heaping on him. + </p> + <p> + "You see that fire," the enraged guerilla said, "there you shall be + roasted! English pig that you are! But not yet. That were too quick a + death! Here," he said to his followers, "make a little fire by the side of + the big one—there under the arm of that tree; and put on plenty of + green leaves: we will smoke our pig a bit before we roast him!" + </p> + <p> + Peter still eyed him unflinchingly. He was determined that no pain should + wring a complaint or prayer for mercy. Even now he did not quite despair, + for he thought that he had just one chance of life. He was sure that Tom + would move heaven and earth to save him. He reckoned that he would at once + guess who had carried him off, and with what object; and he felt that Tom + would be certain to set off to his rescue. All this he had reflected over + in his long days of weary suffering, and from the moment that he was + unbandaged, and propped against the tree, he had listened attentively for + any unusual sound. How Tom could rescue him he did not see. He was so + utterly crippled, from his long confinement, that he knew that it would be + hours, perhaps days, before he could walk a step; yet, still he thought it + possible that Tom might try; and he feared more than he hoped, for he + trembled lest, if Tom were really there, that he would do some rash thing, + which would involve him in his fate. "Whether Tom is here or not," Peter + thought as he looked unflinchingly at Nunez, "one thing is certain, if I + know my brother, you will not have many days to live after me, for Tom + will follow you all over Spain, but he will avenge me at last!" Such were + Peter's thoughts, and so likely did he think it that Tom was present, that + he was scarcely surprised when he heard, as from the ground behind him, a + well-known voice. + </p> + <p> + "Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam here, Massa Tom he be here in + another half hour with French soldiers. If dey go to kill you before dat, + Sam play dem trick. Can you run, Massa Peter, if I cut de cord?" + </p> + <p> + "No, Sam." + </p> + <p> + "Dat bad job. Neber mind, Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam keep + quiet as long as he can, but when de worst come Sam do de trick all + right." + </p> + <p> + "Don't show yourself, Sam. It would only cost you your life, and couldn't + help me; besides, it would put them on their guard. They won't kill me + yet. They will smoke me, and so on, but they will make it last as long as + they can." + </p> + <p> + Peter was able to say this, for at the moment Nunez was occupied in + rolling and lighting a second cigarette. Peter received no answer, for + Sam, seeing some guerillas bringing sticks and leaves to make a fire, as + Nunez, had ordered, crept back again into the deep shadow behind. The fire + was now giving out volumes of smoke, a guerilla climbed up the tree and + slung a rope over it, and three others approached Peter. His heart beat + rapidly; but it was with hope, not fear. He knew, from the words of Nunez, + that at present he was not going to be burned, but, as he guessed, to be + hung over the smoke until he was insensible, and then brought to life + again with buckets of water, only to have the suffocation repeated, until + it pleased Nunez to try some fresh mode of torture. + </p> + <p> + It was as he imagined. The rope was attached to his legs, and amid the + cheers of the guerillas, two men hauled upon the other end until Peter + swung, head downwards, over the fire. There was no flame, but dense + volumes of pungent smoke rose in his face. For a moment his eyes smarted + with agony, then a choking sensation seized him, his blood seemed to rush + into his head, and his veins to be bursting: and there was a confused din + in his ears and a last throb of pain, and then he was insensible. + </p> + <p> + "That's enough for the present," Nunez said; "cut him down." + </p> + <p> + The men advanced to do so, but paused, with astonishment, for from behind + the great fire was a loud yell—"Yah, yah, yah!"—each louder + than the last, and then, leaping through the flames appeared, as they + supposed, the devil. Sam's appearance was indeed amply sufficient to + strike horror in the minds of a band of intensely superstitious men. He + had entirely stripped himself, with the exception of his sandals, which he + had retained in order to be able to run freely; on his head were two great + horns; in one hand he held a fork, and in the other what appeared to be + his tail, but which really belonged to the slaughtered bullock. From his + month, his horns, and the end of his tail poured volumes of fire, arising, + it needs not to say, from the squibs he had prepared. The great white + circles round the eyes added to the ghastliness of his appearance, and + seeing the terrible figure leap apparently from the flames, it is no + wonder that a scream of terror rose from the guerillas. Whatever a Spanish + peasant may believe about saints and angels, he believes yet more + implicitly in a devil. Black, with horns, and a tail—and here he was—with + these appendages tipped with fire! Those who were able turned and fled in + terror, those who were too frightened to run fell on their knees and + screamed for mercy, while one or two fell insensible from fear. Taking the + squibs from his mouth, and giving one more startling yell, to quicken the + fugitives, Sam made two strides to where Peter was hanging, cut the rope, + and lowered him down. + </p> + <p> + Nunez had at first joined in the flight, but looking over his shoulder he + saw what Sam was doing. His rage and frenzy, at the thought of being + cheated of his victim, even by the evil one himself, overcame his fear, + and he rushed back, shouting, "He is mine! He is mine! I won't give him to + you!" and fired a pistol almost in Sam's face. The ball carried away a + portion of one of Sam's ears, and with a yell, even more thrilling than + those he had given before, he plunged his pitchfork into the body of the + guerilla, then, exerting all his immense strength, he lifted him upon it, + as if he had been a truss of straw, took three steps to the great bonfire + and cast the brigand into it. + </p> + <p> + There was a volume of sparks, a tumbling together of big logs, and the + most cruel of the Spanish guerillas had ceased to exist. + </p> + <p> + This awful sight completed the discomfiture of the guerillas—some + hearing their chief's shouts and the sound o his pistol had looked round, + but the sight of the gigantic fiend casting him into the fire was too much + for them. With cries of horror and fear they continued their flight; a few + of them, who had fallen on their knees, gained strength enough, from fear, + to rise and fly; the rest lay on their faces. Sam saw that for the present + all was clear, and lifting up Peter's still insensible body, as if it had + no weight whatever, he turned and went at a brisk trot out of the village, + then over the crest and down towards the fire. + </p> + <p> + Then he heard a ring of metal in front of him, and a voice said, "<i>Qui + vive</i>!" while another voice said, "Is that you, Sam?" + </p> + <p> + "Bress de Lord! Massa Tom, dis is me sure enough: and what is much better, + here is Massa Peter." + </p> + <p> + "Thank God!" Tom said fervently. "Is he hurt? Why don't you speak, Peter?" + </p> + <p> + "He all right, Massa Tom. He talk in a minute or two. Now smoke choke him, + he better presently. Here, massa, you take him down to fire, pour a little + brandy down his throat. Now, massa officer, I lead de way back to + village." + </p> + <p> + As Tom took Peter in his arms a sudden fire of musketry was heard down on + the road. + </p> + <p> + "Our fellows have got them," Jules said. "I don't know what has alarmed + them, but they are running away!" + </p> + <p> + "Push forward," General Reynier said, "and give no quarter! Jules, keep by + the negro, and see that he comes to no harm. The men might mistake him for + a guerilla." + </p> + <p> + The night was pitch dark, and the extraordinary appearance of Sam could + not be perceived until after scouring the village and shooting the few + wretches whom they found there, they gathered round the fire. Before + reaching it, however, Sam had slipped away for a moment into the hut where + he had stripped; here he quickly dressed himself, removed the paint from + his face, and rejoined the group, who were not a little surprised at + seeing his black face. + </p> + <p> + In a short time the parties who had been posted on all the various roads + came in, and it was found that they had between them killed some thirty or + forty of the brigands, and had brought in two or three prisoners. + </p> + <p> + "Have you killed or taken Nunez?" General Reynier asked. "Our work is only + half done if that scoundrel has escaped." + </p> + <p> + "I have asked the prisoners," one of the officers said, "and they tell an + extraordinary story, that the devil has just thrown him into the fire!" + </p> + <p> + "What do they mean by such folly as that," the general asked angrily. + "Were they making fun of you?" + </p> + <p> + "No, sir, they were certainly serious enough over it, and they were all + running for their lives when they fell into our hands; they had been + horribly frightened at something." + </p> + <p> + "Ask that fellow there," the general said, pointing to a prisoner who had + been brought in by another detachment, "he cannot have spoken to the + others." + </p> + <p> + The man was brought forward, and then Jules asked him in Spanish: "What + were you all running away for?" + </p> + <p> + The man gave a glance of horror at the fire. "The devil came with his + pitchfork, fire came out of his mouth, his tail and his horns were tipped + with sparks, the captain fired at him, of course the bullet did no good, + and the devil put his fork into him, carried him to the fire, and threw + him in." + </p> + <p> + Jules and some of the other young officers burst out laughing, but the + general said:— + </p> + <p> + "Humph! We can easily prove a portion of the story. See if there are any + human remains in that fire." + </p> + <p> + The wind was blowing the other way, but as a sergeant went up to the fire + in obedience to the general's order, he said:— + </p> + <p> + "There is a great smell of burnt flesh here, and, sapristi, yes," as he + tossed over the logs with his foot "there is a body here, sir, pretty well + burnt up." + </p> + <p> + "It's a curious story," the general said. "Where is that negro, perhaps he + can enlighten us?" + </p> + <p> + But Sam had already left to look after Peter. + </p> + <p> + "Jules, put these fellows against that wall and give them a volley, then + march the men down to the wood where their horses are. We will bivouac + here for the night." + </p> + <p> + A party now brought up Peter, who had quite come round, but was unable to + stand, or indeed to move his arms, so injured was he by the ropes, which + had completely cut their way into his flesh. However, he was cheerful and + bright, and able really to enjoy the supper which was soon prepared. That + done, General Reynier said:— + </p> + <p> + "Captain Scudamore, will you call your black man when he has finished his + supper, which, no doubt, he needs? I want him to tell me what took place + before we arrived. The prisoners were full of some cock-and-bull story, + that the devil had stuck his fork into their captain and pitched him into + the fire, and the story is corroborated, at least to the extent of the + fact that, on turning the fire over, we found a body there." + </p> + <p> + Sam, called and questioned, told the whole story, which Tom translated as + he went on to the French officers, and it was received with a chorus of + laughter at the thought of the oddity of Sam's appearance, and of the + brigands' terror, and with warm admiration for the able stratagem and + courage shown by the black. + </p> + <p> + Tom was delighted, and Peter, who had until now been entirely ignorant of + the manner in which he had been saved, feebly pressed Sam's hand and said + a few words of gratitude and thanks, which so delighted Sam that he + retired to cry quietly. + </p> + <p> + The next day they moved down to Vittoria, where Peter was tenderly nursed + by Madame Reynier. A week later he was fit to sit on horseback, and the + next day, after a hearty and affectionate parting, they started to rejoin + their own army. Both were now dressed as Spanish gentlemen, and Jules, + with four troopers accompanied them as an escort. + </p> + <p> + They made a long detour to avoid the French army in the field under + Clausel, and at last came within sight of the British outposts. Here Jules + and his escort halted, and after a warm embrace with the merry young + Frenchman, they rode forward, and, after the usual parleying with the + pickets, were passed forward to the officer commanding the post. He + happened to be well known to them, and after the first surprise, and a few + words of explanation, they rode on towards the head-quarters of the army + besieging Burgos. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0019" id="link2HCH0019"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XIX. — VITTORIA. + </h2> + <p> + General Clausel fell back as Wellington advanced to Burgos, and the + British laid siege to the castle of that place. Like all Wellington's + sieges this was commenced with a wholly insufficient train of artillery, + and without the time necessary to carry out regular siege operations. A + considerable portion of the army were posted so as to watch Clausel. The + place was badly fortified, but the French under Governor Dubreton defended + themselves with immense skill and courage, the English assaults were + repulsed, successful sorties were made by the garrison, and at last, after + the failure of the fourth assault, the siege was given up, and the allied + armies turned their faces once more towards Portugal. + </p> + <p> + It was time; the operations in the south upon which Wellington had relied + to keep at least a portion of the French forces engaged, had failed + signally, and the French generals were bringing up their troops from all + parts of Spain, and General Souham, having under him Generals Clausel, + Maucune, and Foy, with a force far superior to that of the British, + advanced to give battle. Then Wellington, whose Anglo-Portuguese troops + were much weakened by sickness, fell back rapidly, sending orders to + General Hill, who commanded the troops left behind in Madrid, to evacuate + that city, and to fall back and unite with him on the Tormes. + </p> + <p> + It was only by some masterly maneuvering and some stiff fighting at Venta + de Pozo, on the Carrion, and on the Huebra, that Wellington drew off his + army to Ciudad Rodrigo. + </p> + <p> + During the retreat the British suffered very severely, and the discipline + of the army became greatly impaired, so much so that Lord Wellington + issued a general order rebuking the army, saying that "discipline had + deteriorated during the campaign in a greater degree than he had ever + witnessed or read of in any army, and this without any unusual privation + or hardship, or any long marches." + </p> + <p> + The number of stragglers may be imagined by the fact that the loss of the + allied army was upwards of nine thousand, of whom not more than two + thousand were killed and wounded at Burgos, and in the combats during the + retreat. This number includes the Spanish as well as the Anglo-Portuguese + loss. + </p> + <p> + It was the beginning of December when the allied army reached their winter + quarters around Ciudad Rodrigo. It was fortunate that the season of the + year, and the necessity which the French had to refill their magazines, + and collect food, gave breathing time and rest to the British. Although + strengthened by his junction with Hill, and by the arrival of + reinforcements from the coast, Wellington was not in a position to have + made a stand against such a force as the French could have brought against + him. + </p> + <p> + Tom and Peter Scudamore had rejoined the army at the hottest part of the + siege of Burgos, and had taken up their work at once. Lord Wellington + heard from Tom a brief account of what had taken place, and said a few + kind words expressive of his pleasure at their both having escaped from so + great a peril, and, grave and preoccupied as he was with the position of + his army, he yet laughed at the account of the scare Sam had given the + guerillas. Among their friends nothing was talked of for a day or two but + their adventure. The times were stirring, however, and one event rapidly + drove out another. Sam became a greater favorite than ever among the + officers of the staff, while the orderlies were never tired of hearing how + he pretty nearly frightened a band of guerillas to death by pretending to + be the evil one in person. + </p> + <p> + The next four months were passed in preparations for the grand attack with + which Wellington confidently hoped to drive the French out of Spain. The + news of the defeat of Napoleon in Russia had cheered the hearts of the + enemies of France, and excited them to make a great effort to strike a + decisive blow. The French army was weakened by the withdrawal of several + corps to strengthen the armies which Napoleon was raising for his campaign + in Germany, and British gold had been so freely spent, that the Portuguese + army was now in a really efficient state; a portion of the Spanish army + had been handed over to Wellington, and were now in a far more trustworthy + condition than they had been heretofore, while the whole of the north of + Spain was in a state of insurrection, which the French, in spite of all + their efforts, were unable to repress. + </p> + <p> + The invasion was delayed until the end of May, in order that the crops + might be in a fit state for the subsistence of the cavalry and baggage + animals; but in the last week in that month all was ready, and, in several + columns, the allied army poured into Spain nearly a hundred thousand + strong. The French, ignorant alike of Wellington's intentions and + preparations, were in no position to stem effectually this mighty wave of + war, and were driven headlong before it, with many fierce skirmishes, + until their scattered forces were, for the most part, united on the Ebro. + </p> + <p> + Here Joseph occupied a strong position, which he thought to hold until the + whole of his troops could come up; but Wellington made a detour, swept + round his right, and the French fell back in haste, and took up their + position in the basin of Vittoria, where all the stores and baggage which + had been carried off as the army retreated from Madrid, Valladolid, + Burgos, and other towns, were collected. At Vittoria were gathered the + Court, and an enormous mass of fugitives, as all the Spaniards who had + adhered to the cause of Joseph had, with their wives and families, + accompanied the French in their retreat. Hence the accumulation of baggage + animals, and carts, of stores of all descriptions, of magazines, of food + and artillery, of helpless, frightened people, was enormous, and, for the + retreat of the army in case of defeat, there was but one good road, + already encumbered with baggage and fugitives! + </p> + <p> + This terrible accumulation arose partly from the fault of Joseph, who was + wholly unequal to the supreme command in an emergency like the present. + Confused and bewildered by the urgency of the danger, he had hesitated, + wavered, and lost precious time. By resistance at any of the rivers, which + Wellington had passed unopposed, he might easily have gained a few days, + and thus have allowed time for the great mass of fugitives to reach the + French frontier, and for Foy and Clausel, each of whom were within a day's + march upon the day of the battle, to have arrived with a reinforcement of + 20,000 good fighting men. Instead of this, he had suffered himself to be + outflanked day after day, and his army forced into retreat, without an + effort at resistance—a course of action irritating and disheartening + to all troops, but especially to the French, who, admirable in attack, are + easily dispirited, and are ill suited to defensive warfare. + </p> + <p> + The position which he had now chosen for the battle, on which his kingdom + was to be staked, was badly selected for the action. The front was, + indeed, covered by the river Zadora, but this was crossed by seven + available bridges, none of which had been broken down, while there was but + the one good line of retreat, and this, besides being already encumbered + with baggage-wagons, could be easily turned by the allies. The French + army, weakened by 5000 men, who had marched upon the preceding days, in + charge of convoys for France, were still about 70,000 strong, the allies—British, + Portuguese, and Spanish—about 80,000. The French were the strongest + in artillery. + </p> + <p> + Wellington, seeing that Joseph had determined to stand at bay, made his + arrangements for the battle. On the left, Graham, with 20,000 men, was to + attempt to cross the Zadora at Gamara Mayor, when he would find himself on + the main road, behind Vittoria, and so cut the French line of retreat. + Hill, with a like force, was to attack on the right, through the defile of + Puebla, and so, entering the basin of Vittoria, to threaten the French + right, and obtain possession of the bridge of Nanclares. In the center, + Wellington himself, with 30,000 troops, would force the four bridges in + front of the French center, and attack their main position. + </p> + <p> + At daybreak on the 21st of June, 1813, the weather being rainy with some + mist, the troops moved from their quarters on the Bayas, passed in columns + over the bridges in front, and slowly approached the Zadora. About ten + o'clock, Hill seized the village of Puebla, and commenced the passage of + the defile, while one of the Portuguese battalions scaled the heights + above. Here the French met them, and a fierce fight ensued; the French + were reinforced on their side, while the 71st Regiment and a battalion of + light infantry joined the Portuguese. + </p> + <p> + Villette's division was sent from the French center to join the fray, + while Hill sent up reinforcements. While the fight on the heights still + raged, the troops in the defile made their way through, and, driving the + French back, won the village of Subijano de Alava, in front of the French + main position. + </p> + <p> + Meanwhile, far to the left, Graham came into action with Reille's division + at Gamara Mayor. The French here, knowing the vital importance of the + position, fought desperately, and the village of Gamara was taken and + retaken several times, but no effort upon the part of the allies sufficed + to carry either the bridge at this place or that by which the main road + crossed the river higher up. A force, however, was pushed still farther to + the left, and there took up a position on the road at Durana, drove back a + Franco-Spanish force which occupied it, and thus effectively cut the main + line of retreat to France for Joseph's army. The main force under + Wellington himself was later in coming into action, the various columns + being delayed by the difficulties of making their way through the defiles. + </p> + <p> + While waiting, however, for the third and seventh divisions, which were + the last to arrive, a peasant informed Wellington that the bridge of Tres + Puentes was unbroken and unguarded. Kempt's brigade of the light division + were immediately ordered to cross, and, being concealed by the + inequalities of the ground, they reached it and passed over unobserved, + taking their place under shelter of a crest within a few hundred yards of + the French main line of battle, and actually in rear of his advanced + posts. + </p> + <p> + Some French cavalry now advanced, but no attack was made upon this + isolated body of British troops, for the French were virtually without a + commander. + </p> + <p> + Joseph, finding his flank menaced by the movements of Graham and Hill, now + ordered the army to fall back to a crest two miles in the rear, but at + this moment the third and seventh divisions advanced at a run towards the + bridge of Mendoza, the French artillery opened upon them, the British guns + replied, a heavy musketry fire broke out on both sides, and the battle + commenced in earnest. Now the advantage gained by the passage of Kempt's + brigade became manifest, for the riflemen of his division advanced and + took the French advanced cavalry and artillery in flank. These, thus + unexpectedly attacked, fell back hastily, and a brigade of the third + division took advantage of the moment and crossed the bridge of Mendoza. + The other brigade forded the river a little higher up, the seventh + division and Vandeleur's brigade of the light division followed, Hill + pushed the enemy farther back, and the fourth division crossed by the + bridge of Nanclares; other troops forded the river, and the battle became + general all along the line. + </p> + <p> + Seeing that the hill in front of Arinez was nearly denuded of troops by + the withdrawal of Villette's division earlier in the day to oppose Hill, + Wellington launched Picton with the third division and Kempt's brigade + against it, and the French, thus attacked with great strength and fury, + and dispirited by the order to retreat, began to fall back. Fifty pieces + of artillery and a cloud of skirmishers covered the movement, and the + British guns answering, the whole basin became filled with a heavy smoke, + under cover of which the French retired to the heights in front of + Gomecha, upon which their reserves were posted. Picton and Kempt carried + the village of Arinez with the bayonet, Vandeleur captured the village of + Margarita, and the 87th Regiment won that of Hermandad. + </p> + <p> + This advance turned the flank of the French troops near Subijana de Alava, + and of those on the Puebla mountain, and both fell back in disorder for + two miles, until they made a junction with the main body of their army. + Still the British troops pressed forward, the French again fell back, and + for six miles a running fight of musketry and artillery was kept up, the + ground being very broken, and preventing the concerted action of large + bodies of troops. At six o'clock in the afternoon the French stood at bay + on the last heights before Vittoria, upon which stood the villages of Ali + and Armentia. Behind them was the plain upon which the city stood, and + beyond the city thousands of carriages, animals, and non-combatants, + women, and children, were crowded together in the extremity of terror as + the British shots rang menacingly over their heads. + </p> + <p> + The French here defended themselves desperately, and for a while the + allied advance was checked by the terrible fire of shot and shell. Then + the fourth division with a rush carried a hill on the left, and the French + again commenced their retreat. Joseph, finding the great road absolutely + blocked up, gave orders for a retreat by the road to Salvatierra, and the + army, leaving the town of Vittoria on its left, moved off in a compact + mass towards the indicated road. This, however, like the other, was choked + with carriages. It led through a swamp, and had deep ditches on each side; + the artillery, therefore, had to cut their traces and leave their guns + behind them, the infantry and cavalry thrust aside the encumbrances and + continued their march. Reille, who had defended the upper bridges nobly + until the last moment, now came up, and his division acting as a rear + guard, covered the retreat, and the French retired with little further + loss. + </p> + <p> + They had lost the battle solely and entirely from the utter incapacity of + their general, for their loss had been but little greater than that of the + allies, and they fell back in perfect order and full of fighting. The + French loss, including prisoners, was not more than 6000, and that of the + allies exceeded 5000. The French loss, however, in material was enormous. + They carried off two guns only, and 143 fell into the hands of the + British. They lost all their parks of ammunition, all their baggage, all + their stores, all their treasures, all their booty. Last of all, they lost + Spain. + </p> + <p> + The British pursued the French army for some days, and then invested the + two fortresses of San Sebastian and Pampeluna. + </p> + <p> + Ten days after the battle of Vittoria, Napoleon despatched Soult, one of + the best of his generals, to displace Joseph and assume the supreme + command of the French troops. Traveling with great speed, he reached the + frontier upon the 11th of July and took command. He soon collected + together the divisions which had retired beaten but not routed from + Vittoria, drew together the troops from Bayonne and the surrounding towns, + and in a few days found himself at the head of an army, including the + garrisons, of 114,000 men. Besides these there were the armies of Aragon + and Catalonia, numbering 60,000 men. + </p> + <p> + After spending a few days in organizing the army, Soult moved forward to + relieve Pampeluna, and then in the heart of the Pyrenees were fought those + desperate combats at Maya, Roncevalles, Buenza, Sauroren, and Dona Maria, + which are known in history as the battles of the Pyrenees. In these + terrible nine days' fighting there were ten serious combats, in which the + allies lost 7300 men, the French, including prisoners, over 15,000, and + Soult fell back baffled and beaten across the frontier. + </p> + <p> + Throughout this account of the short and sanguinary campaign by which in + two short months Wellington shattered the power of the French and drove + them headlong from the Peninsula, but little has been said respecting the + doings of the Scudamores. Their duties had been heavy, but devoid of any + personal achievements or events. Wellington, the incarnation of activity + himself, spared no one around him, and from early dawn until late at night + they were on horseback, carrying orders and bringing back reports. At + night their quarters were sometimes in a village hut, sometimes in a + straggling château, which afforded accommodation to the commander-in-chief + and his whole staff. + </p> + <p> + Sam, a good horseman now, was in the highest of spirits at being able to + accompany his masters, and, although the Spanish women crossed themselves + in horror when they first saw his black face, the boys would hear shouts + of laughter arising before they had been a quarter of an hour in fresh + quarters. He was a capital cook, and a wonderful hand at hunting up + provisions. + </p> + <p> + There might not be a sign of a feathered creature in a village when the + staff came in, but in half an hour Sam would be sure to return from + foraging with a couple of fowls and his handkerchief full of eggs. These + were, of course, paid for, as the orders against pillaging were of the + strictest character, and the army paid, and paid handsomely for everything + it ate. + </p> + <p> + It was, however, difficult to persuade the peasants that payment was + intended, and they would hide everything away with vigilant care at the + approach of the troops. When by the display of money they were really + persuaded that payment was intended, they would produce all that they had + willingly enough, but the number of officers wanting to purchase was so + great and the amount of live stock so small in the war-ravaged country, + that few indeed could obtain even for money anything beside the tough + rations of freshly-killed beef issued by the commissariat. + </p> + <p> + Let the supply be ever so short, however, Sam never returned empty-handed, + and the fowls were quickly plucked and on the fire before any one else had + succeeded in discovering that there was a bird in the village. + </p> + <p> + Sam's foraging powers passed into a joke with the staff, and the + Scudamores became so curious to discover the reason of his success, that + after repeated questioning they persuaded him to tell them. + </p> + <p> + "Well, massa, de matter berry simple—just easy as fallin' off log. + Sam go along, look into yard ob de cottages, presently see feather here, + feather there. Dat sign ob fowl. Den knock at door. Woman open always, gib + little squeak when she see dis gentleman's colored face. Den she say, + 'What you want? Dis house full. Quarter-master take him up for three, four + officer.' Den Sam say, 'Illustrious madam, me want to buy two fowls and + eggs for master,' and Sam show money in hand. Den she hesitate a little, + and not believe Sam mean to pay. Den she say, 'No fowls here.' Den Sam + point to de feathers. Den she get in rage and tell lie and say, 'Dem birds + all stole yesterday.' Den Sam see it time to talk to de birds—he + know dem shut up somewhere in de dark, and Sam he begin to crow berry + loud; Sam berry good at dat. He crow for all de world like de cock. Dis + wake dem up, and a minute one, two, three, half a dozen cock begin to + answer eider from a loft ober house, or from shed, or from somewhere. Den + de woman in terrible fright, she say, 'Me sell you two quick, if you will + go away and swear you tell no one.' Den Sam swear. Den she run away, come + back wid de fowls and some eggs, and always berry much astonished when Sam + pay for dem. After dat she lose her fear, she see me pay, and she sells de + chickens to oders when they come till all gone. Dat how dis chile manage + de affairs, Massa Tom." + </p> + <p> + The Scudamores had a hearty laugh, and were well pleased to find that + Sam's method was one to which not even the strictest disciplinarian could + object, a matter concerning which they had previously had grave doubts. + </p> + <p> + While the battles of the Pyrenees were being fought, the siege of St. + Sebastian had continued, and once again the British troops had suffered a + terrible loss, from the attempt to carry a fortress with an insufficient + siege-train, and without the time necessary to drive the trenches forward + in regular form. St. Sebastian stood upon a peninsula. In front of the + neck of this peninsula was the hill of San Bartholomeo, on which stood the + convent of that name. At the narrowest part of the neck stood a redoubt, + which was called the Cask Redoubt, because it was constructed of casks + filled with stand. Behind this came the horn-work and other + fortifications. Then came the town, while at the end of the peninsula rose + a steep rock, called Mount Orgullo, on which stood the citadel. Upon its + left side this neck of land was separated from the mainland by the River + Urumea; and upon the heights of Mount Olia and the Chofres, across the + Urumea, were placed the British batteries, which breached the + fortifications facing the river. + </p> + <p> + General Graham commanded the allied forces, which were detached to + undertake the siege, and on the 10th of July batteries were commenced + against the convent of San Bartholomeo, which had been fortified by the + French. On the 17th the convent was in ruins, and an assault was made upon + the position. The 9th Regiment took the place in gallant style, but an + attempt being made to carry the cask redoubt, with a rush, the assault was + repulsed, the British remaining possessors of San Bartholomeo. + </p> + <p> + On the 24th the batteries on Mount Olia, having effected what was believed + to be a practicable breach, 2000 men of the fifth division, consisting of + the 3d battalion of the Royals, the 38th, and the 9th, made an assault at + night. To arrive at the breach they had to make their way along the + slippery rocks on the bed of the Urumea, exposed to a flank-fire from the + river-wall of the town. The breachers had been isolated from the town, and + guns placed to take the stormers in flank. The confusion and slaughter + were terrible, and at daybreak the survivors fell back, with a loss of + forty-nine officers and 520 men. + </p> + <p> + The whole arrangement of the siege was bad. The plan of Major Smith, of + the engineers, a most excellent officer, which had been approved by + Wellington, was not followed, and the assault, contrary to Wellington's + explicit order, took place at night, instead of by day, the consequence + being confusion, delay, and defeat. The total loss to the allies of this + first siege of St. Sebastian was 1300 men. + </p> + <p> + Neither of the Scudamores were present at the first siege, but both + witnessed the second assault, of the 31st of August, as Wellington himself + was present on the 30th, to see to the execution of the preparation for + attack, and they obtained leave to remain for the next day to witness the + assault. The siege had been resumed on the 5th of that month, and on the + 23d the batteries had opened fire in earnest, and immense damage was done + to the defenses and garrison. But upon this occasion, as upon the former + one, the proper precautions were not taken; no lodgment had been effected + in the horn-work, and, worst of all, the blockade had been so negligently + conducted by the fleet, that large bodies of fresh troops, guns, and + ammunition had been passed in, and the defense was even stronger than it + had been when the first assault was delivered. + </p> + <p> + General Graham took up his position on the heights of the Chofres to view + the assault, and the Scudamores stationed themselves near him. A dense + mist hid the fortress from view, and it was not until eight o'clock that + the batteries were able to open. Then for three hours they poured a storm + of shot and shell upon the defences. The Scudamores sat down in one of the + trenches, where they were a little sheltered from the blazing heat of the + sun, and Sam took his place at a short distance from them. + </p> + <p> + As the clock struck eleven the fire slackened, and at that moment Sam + exclaimed, "Grolly, Massa Tom, dere dey go." As he spoke Robinson's + brigade poured out from the trenches, and, passing through the openings in + the sea-wall, began to form on the beach. + </p> + <p> + It was known that the French had mined the angle of the wall overhanging + the beach, and a sergeant, followed by twelve men, dashed gallantly + forward to try to cut the train leading to the mine. He was unsuccessful, + but the suddenness of the rush startled the French, who at once fired the + mine, which exploded, destroying the brave sergeant and his party, and + thirty of the leading men of the column, but not doing a tithe of the + damage which it would have inflicted had the column been fairly under it. + </p> + <p> + "Hurrah! dere dey go," Sam exclaimed as the column clambered over the + ruins and pursued its way unchecked along the beach. They had, however, to + make their way under a storm of fire. + </p> + <p> + The French, as before, lined the wall, and poured a tremendous musketry + fire into their flank, and the batteries of Mount Orgullo and St. Elmo + plied them with shot and shell, while two pieces of cannon on the cavalier + and one on the horn-work raked them with grape. + </p> + <p> + Still the column neither halted nor faltered, but dashed, like a wave, up + the breach. When, however, they reached the top they could go no farther. + A deep gulf separated them from the town, while from every loop-hole and + wall behind, the French musketry swept the breach. The troops could not + advance and would not retreat, but sullenly stood their ground, heaping + the breach with their dead. Fresh bodies of men came up, and each time a + crowd of brave men mounted the breach, only to sink down beneath the storm + of fire. + </p> + <p> + "This is awful, horrible, Tom!" Peter said in a choked voice. "Come away, + I can't look at this slaughter, it is a thousand times worse than any + battle." + </p> + <p> + Tom made no reply, his own eyes were dim with tears, and he rose to go, + taking one more look at the deadly breach, at whose foot the survivors of + the last attempt had sunk down, and whence the mass of soldiers were + keeping up a musketry fire against the guns and unseen foes who were + sweeping them away, when an officer ran up from General Graham's side, and + in a minute fifty guns from the Chofres batteries opened a storm of fire + upon the curtain and the traverses behind the breach. + </p> + <p> + It was a terrible trial to the nerves of the assaulting columns when this + terrific fire was poured upon a spot only twenty feet above them; but they + were not men to shrink, and the men of the light division seized the + opportunity to pull up the broken masonry and make a breastwork, known in + military terms as a lodgment. + </p> + <p> + For half an hour the iron storm poured overhead unchecked, smashing the + traverse, knocking down the loop-holed walls, and killing numbers of the + defenders. Then it ceased, and the troops leapt to their feet, and again + rushed up the breach, while the 13th Portuguese Regiment, followed by a + detachment of the 24th, waded across the Urumea under a heavy fire from + the castle, and attacked the third breach. + </p> + <p> + But still no entry could be effected. The French fire was as heavy as + ever, and the stormers again sank baffled to the foot of the great breach. + The assault seemed hopeless, the tide was rising, the reserves were all + engaged, and the men had done all that the most desperate courage could + do. For five hours the battle had raged, when, just as all appeared lost, + one of those circumstances occurred which upset all calculations and + decide the fate of battles. + </p> + <p> + Behind the traverses the French had accumulated a great store of powder + barrels, shells, and other combustibles. Just at this moment these caught + fire. A bright flame wrapped the whole wall, followed by a succession of + loud explosions; hundreds of French grenadiers were destroyed, and before + the smoke had cleared away, the British burst like a flood through the + first traverse. + </p> + <p> + Although bewildered by this sudden disaster, the French rallied, and + fought desperately; but the British, desperate with the long agony of the + last five hours, would not be denied; the light division penetrated on the + left, the Portuguese on the right. The French, still resisting + obstinately, were driven through the town to the line of defense at the + foot of Mount Orgullo, and the town of St. Sebastian was won. + </p> + <p> + "Will you go across, Peter, and enter the town?" + </p> + <p> + "No, no, Tom; the sight of that horrible breach is enough for me. Let us + mount, and ride off at once. I am quite sick after this awful suspense." + </p> + <p> + It was as well that the Scudamores did not enter the town, as, had they + done so, they might have shared the fate of several other officers, who + were shot down while trying to stop the troops in their wild excesses. No + more disgraceful atrocities were ever committed by the most barbarous + nations of antiquity than those which disgraced the British name at the + storming of St. Sebastian. Shameful, monstrous as had been the conduct of + the troops at the storming of Ciudad Rodrigo and at Badajos, it was + infinitely worse at St. Sebastian. As Rapin says, hell seemed to have + broken loose. + </p> + <p> + The castle held out until the 9th, when it surrendered, and the governor + and his heroic garrison marched out with the honors of war. The British + loss in the second siege exceeded 2500 men and officers. + </p> + <p> + There was a pause of two months after the fall of St. Sebastian, and it + was not until the 10th of November that Wellington hurled his forces + against the lines which, in imitation of those of Torres Vedras, Soult had + formed and fortified on the river Nivelle to withstand the invasion of + France. After a few hours' desperate fighting the French were turned out + of their position with a loss of killed, wounded, and prisoners, of 4265 + men and officers, the loss of the allies being 2694. + </p> + <p> + Now the army of invasion poured into France. The French people, + disheartened by Napoleon's misfortunes in Germany, and by the long and + mighty sacrifices which they had for years been compelled to make, in + order to enable Napoleon to carry out his gigantic wars, showed but slight + hostility to the invaders. + </p> + <p> + Wellington enforced the severest discipline, paid for everything required + for the troops, hanging marauders without mercy, and, finding that it was + impossible to keep the Spanish troops in order, he sent the whole Spanish + contingent, 20,000 strong, back across the Pyrenees. + </p> + <p> + He then with the Anglo-Portuguese army moved on towards Bayonne, and took + up a position on both sides of the river Nive, driving the French from + their position on the right bank on December 9th. On the 13th, however, + Soult attacked that portion of the army on the right of the river, and one + of the most desperate conflicts of the war took place, known as the battle + of St. Pierre. General Hill commanded at this battle, and with 14,000 + Anglo-Portuguese, with 14 guns, repulsed the furious and repeated attacks + of 16,000 French, with 22 guns. + </p> + <p> + In five days' fighting on the river the French lost more than as many + thousand men. + </p> + <p> + The weather now for a time interrupted operations, but Wellington was + preparing for the passage of the Adour. Soult guarded the passages of the + river above Bayonne, and never dreamed that an attempt would be made to + bridge so wide and rough a river as is the Adour below the town. With the + assistance of the sailors of the fleet the great enterprise was + accomplished on the 13th of February, and leaving General Hope to contain + the force in the entrenched camp at Bayonne, Wellington marched the rest + of the army to the Gave. + </p> + <p> + Behind this river Soult had massed his army. The British crossed by + pontoon bridges, and before the operation was concluded, and the troops + united, Soult fell upon them near Orthes. + </p> + <p> + At first the French had the best of the fight, driving back both wings of + the allied forces, but Wellington threw the third and sixth divisions upon + the left flank of the attacking column and sent the 52nd Regiment to make + a detour through a marsh and fall upon their other flank. Taken suddenly + between two fires the French wavered, the British pressed forward again, + and the French fell back fighting obstinately, and in good order. The + allies lost 2300 men, and the French 4000. Soult fell back towards + Toulouse, laying Bordeaux open to the British. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0020" id="link2HCH0020"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XX. — TOULOUSE. + </h2> + <p> + Promotion for those who have the good fortune to have a post upon the + commander-in-chief's staff is rapid. They run far less risk than do the + regimental officers, and they have a tenfold better chance of having their + names mentioned in despatches. The Scudamores were so mentioned for their + conduct at Vittoria, the Pyrenees, and Orthes, and shortly after the + last-named battle the <i>Gazette</i> from England announced their + promotion to majorities. This put an end to their service as + aides-de-camp, and they were attached to the quarter-master's branch of + the staff of Lord Beresford, who was upon the point of starting with a + small force to Bordeaux, where the authorities, thinking more of party + than of patriotism, had invited the English to enter and take possession, + intending to proclaim their adhesion to the Bourbon dynasty. + </p> + <p> + The boys were sorry at the exchange, as they feared that they should lose + the crowning battle of the campaign. It was evident that the resistance of + France was nearly at an end, the allies were approaching Paris in spite of + the almost superhuman efforts of Napoleon; the people, sick of the war, + refused all assistance to the military authorities, and were longing for + peace, and the end of the struggle was rapidly approaching. + </p> + <p> + Lord Beresford, however, divining their thoughts, assured them that his + stay at Bordeaux would be but short, and that they might rely upon being + present at the great battle which would probably be fought somewhere near + Toulouse, towards which town Soult had retreated after the battle of + Orthes. + </p> + <p> + Upon the 8th of March, Beresford marched with 12,000 men for Bordeaux, and + meeting with no opposition by the way, entered that city on the 12th. The + mayor, a royalist, came out to meet them, and by the upper classes of the + town they were received as friends rather than foes. Handsome quarters + were assigned to Lord Beresford and his staff, and the Scudamores for a + day or two enjoyed the luxury of comfortable apartments and of good food + after their hard fare for nine months. + </p> + <p> + The day after they entered Bordeaux Tom had occasion to call at the office + of a banker in order to get a government draft cashed, to pay for a number + of wagons which had been purchased for the quarter-master's department. + The banker's name was Weale, an American, said to be the richest man in + Bordeaux. His fortune had been made, it was said, by large government + contracts. + </p> + <p> + When Tom returned, Peter was surprised to see him looking pale and + excited. + </p> + <p> + "What is the matter, Tom?" + </p> + <p> + "Do you know, Peter, I am convinced that that American banker I have been + to see to-day is neither more nor less than that scoundrel, Walsh, who + bolted with all the bank funds, and was the cause of our father's death." + </p> + <p> + "You don't say so, Tom." + </p> + <p> + "It is a fact, Peter, I could swear to him." + </p> + <p> + "What shall we do, Tom?" + </p> + <p> + "I only cashed one of the two drafts I had with me this morning; Peter, + you go this afternoon with the other, and, if you are as certain as I feel + about it, we will speak to Beresford at dinner." + </p> + <p> + Peter returned in the afternoon satisfied that his brother's surmises were + correct, and that in the supposed American Weale they had really + discovered the English swindler Walsh. + </p> + <p> + After dinner they asked Lord Beresford to speak to them for a few minutes + alone. + </p> + <p> + The general was greatly surprised and interested at their communication. + </p> + <p> + "Of how much did this fellow rob your father's bank?" he asked. + </p> + <p> + "The total defalcation, including money borrowed on title-deeds deposited + in the bank, which had to be made good, was, I heard, from 75,000<i>l.</i> + to 80,000<i>l.</i>," Tom said. + </p> + <p> + "Very well," said Lord Beresford, "we will make the scoundrel pay up with + interest. Order out thirty men of the 13th." + </p> + <p> + While the men were mustering, the general returned to the dining-room and + begged the officers who were dining with him to excuse him for half an + hour, as he had some unexpected business to perform. Then he walked across + with the Scudamores to the banker's house, which was only in the next + street. + </p> + <p> + Twenty of the men were then ordered to form a cordon round the house and + to watch the various entrances. The other ten, together with the officer + in command, the general told to follow him into the house. The + arrangements completed, he rang at the bell, and the porter at once opened + the gate. + </p> + <p> + He started and would have tried to shut it again, on seeing the armed + party. But Lord Beresford said, "I am the general commanding the British + troops here. Make no noise, but show me directly to your master." + </p> + <p> + The man hesitated, but seeing that the force was too great to be resisted, + led the way through the courtyard into the house itself. + </p> + <p> + Some servants in the hall started up with amazement, and would have run + off, but Lord Beresford cried, "Stay quiet for your lives. No one will be + hurt; but if any one moves from the hall, he will be shot." Then, followed + by Tom and Peter only, he opened the door which the porter pointed out to + him as that of the room where the banker was sitting. + </p> + <p> + He was alone, and started to his feet upon beholding three British + officers enter unannounced. "What means this?" he demanded angrily. "I am + a citizen of the United States, and for any outrage upon me satisfaction + will be demanded by my Government." + </p> + <p> + "I am Lord Beresford," the general said quietly, "and quite know what I am + doing. I do not quite agree with you that the Government of the United + States will make any demand for satisfaction for any outrage upon your + person, nor, if they do so, will it benefit you greatly; for I am about, + in five minutes' time, to order you to be shot, Mr. Walsh." + </p> + <p> + As the name was uttered the banker, who had listened with increasing + pallor to the stern words of the general, started violently, and turned + ghastly white. For a minute or so he was too surprised and confounded to + speak. Then he said, in a husky tone, "It is false; I am an American + citizen. I know nothing whatever about James Walsh." + </p> + <p> + "James Walsh!" the general said; "I said nothing about James. It is you + who have told us his Christian name, which is, I have no doubt, the + correct one." + </p> + <p> + He looked to Tom, who nodded assent. + </p> + <p> + "I know nothing about any Walsh," the banker said doggedly. "Who says I + do?" + </p> + <p> + "We do, James Walsh," Tom said, stepping forward. "Tom and Peter + Scudamore, the sons of the man you robbed and ruined." + </p> + <p> + The banker stared at them wildly, and then, with a hoarse cry, dropped + into his chair. + </p> + <p> + "James Walsh," the general said sternly, "your life is doubly forfeit. As + a thief and a swindler, the courts of law will punish you with death;" for + in those days death was the penalty of a crime of this kind. "In the + second place, as a traitor. As a man who has given aid and assistance to + the enemies of your country, your life is forfeit, and I, as the general + in command here, doom you to death. In five minutes you will be shot in + your courtyard as a thief and a traitor." + </p> + <p> + "Spare me!" the wretched man said, slipping off his chair on to his knees. + "Spare my life, and take all that I have. I am rich, and can restore much + of that which I took. I will pay 50,000<i>l.</i>" + </p> + <p> + "Fifty thousand pounds!" the general said; "you stole 80,000<i>l.</i>, + which, with interest, comes up to 100,000<i>l.</i>, besides which you must + pay for acting as a traitor. The military chest is empty, and we want + money. I will value your wretched life at 25,000<i>l.</i> If you make that + sum a present to our military chest, and pay Major Scudamore the 100,000<i>l.</i> + of which you swindled his father, I will spare you." + </p> + <p> + "One hundred and twenty-five thousand pounds!" the banker said fiercely. + "Never, I will die first." + </p> + <p> + "Very well," Lord Beresford said quietly. "Major Scudamore, please call in + the officer and four men." Tom did as requested, and Lord Beresford then + addressed the officer. "You will take this man, who is an Englishman, who + has been acting as a traitor, and giving assistance to the French army, + you will take a firing party, place him against the wall of the yard, give + him five minutes to make his peace with God, and when the five minutes are + up, unless he tells you before that that he wishes to see me, shoot him." + </p> + <p> + Pale and desperate, the banker was led out. + </p> + <p> + "He will give way, I hope," Tom said, as the door closed behind him. + </p> + <p> + "He will give way before the time is up," Lord Beresford said. "He is a + coward; I saw it in his face." + </p> + <p> + Four minutes passed on, the door opened again, and the officer returned + with his prisoner. "He says he agrees to your terms, sir" + </p> + <p> + "Very well" Lord Beresford answered; "remain outside with your men; they + may be wanted yet." + </p> + <p> + The prisoner, without a word, led the way into an adjoining room, which + communicated with the public office. This was his private parlor, and in a + corner stood a safe. He unlocked it, and, taking out some books and + papers, sat down to the table. + </p> + <p> + His mood had evidently changed. "I was a fool to hold out," he said, "for + I had my name for wealth against me, and might have known you would not + give way. After all, I do not know that I am altogether sorry, for I have + always had an idea that some day or other the thing would come out, and + now I can go back and be comfortable for the rest of my life. How will you + have the money, gentlemen? I have 50,000<i>l.</i> in cash, and can give + you a draft on the Bank of England for the rest. You look surprised, but I + have always been prepared to cut and run from this country at the shortest + notice, and every penny I have beyond the cash absolutely required is in + England or America." + </p> + <p> + "I will take 25,000<i>l.</i> in cash for the use of the army," Lord + Beresford said. "I will send an officer of the commissariat to-morrow for + it. The 100,000<i>l.</i> you may pay these gentlemen in drafts on England. + Until I hear that these drafts are honored, I shall keep you under + surveillance, and you will not be suffered to leave your house." + </p> + <p> + "It will be all right," Walsh said. "There—is my Bank of England + pass-book; you will see that I have 120,000<i>l.</i> standing to the + credit of J. Weale there. I have as much in America. I should not tell you + this did I not know that you are a gentleman, and therefore will not raise + terms now that you see I can pay higher. There, Mr. Scudamore, is the + draft, and, believe me or not, I am glad to repay it, and to feel, for the + first time for many years, a free man. Please to give me a receipt for the + 80,000<i>l.</i> due by me to the Bank, and for 20,000<i>l.</i>, five + years' interest on the same." + </p> + <p> + Tom did as he was desired without speaking. There was a tone of effrontery + mingled with the half-earnestness of this successful swindler that + disgusted him. + </p> + <p> + "There," the general said, as the receipts were handed over; "come along, + lads, the business is over, and I do not think that we have any more to + say to Mr. Weale." + </p> + <p> + So saying, without further word, the three went out. + </p> + <p> + Upon rejoining the officer without, Lord Beresford directed that a + sergeant and ten men were to be quartered in the house, and that a sentry + was to be placed at each entrance night and day, and that the banker was + not to be permitted to stir out under any pretence whatever until further + orders. + </p> + <p> + "There, lads, I congratulate you heartily," he said as they issued from + the gate, in answer to the warm thanks in which the boys expressed their + gratitude to him; "it is a stroke of luck indeed that you came with me to + Bordeaux. It was rough-and-ready justice, and I don't suppose a court of + law in England would approve of it; but we are under martial law, so even + were that fellow disposed to question the matter, which you may be very + sure he will not, we are safe enough. They say 'ill-gotten gains fly fast' + but the scamp has prospered on the money he stole. He owned to having + another hundred thousand safe in the States, and no doubt he has at least + as much more in securities of one sort or other here. I daresay he was in + earnest when he said that he did not mind paying the money to get rid of + the chance of detection and punishment, which must have been ever in his + mind. The best thing you can do, Scudamore, is to write to James Pearson—he's + my solicitor in London—and give him authority to present this draft, + and invest the sum in your joint names in good securities. Inclose the + draft. I shall be sending off an orderly with despatches and letters at + daybreak, and if you give me your letter to-night, I will inclose it in a + note of my own to Pearson." + </p> + <p> + Five days later an order arrived for Lord Beresford to leave the seventh + division under Lord Dalhousie, in Bordeaux, and to march with the fourth + division to join the Commander-in-Chief, who was gradually drawing near to + Toulouse, beneath whose walls Soult was reorganizing his army. The + position was a very strong one, and had been rendered almost impregnable + by fortifications thrown upon the heights. Wellington had, too, the + disadvantage of having to separate his army, as the town lay upon both + sides of the Garonne. + </p> + <p> + On the 10th of April the allied army attacked. Hill attacked the defences + of the town on the left bank, while Freyre's Spaniards, Picton, with the + third and light divisions, and Beresford with the fourth and the sixth + divisions, assaulted a French position. The entrenchments in front of + Picton were too strong to be more than menaced. Freyre's Spaniards were + repulsed with great loss, and the brunt of the battle fell upon + Beresford's division, which nobly sustained the character of the British + soldier for stubborn valor in this the last battle of the war. The French + fought stubbornly and well, but fort by fort the British drove them from + their strong positions, and at five in the afternoon Soult withdrew the + last of his troops in good order across the canal which separated the + position they had defended from the town itself. The French lost five + generals and 3000 killed and wounded; the allies four generals and 4659 + killed and wounded, of which 2000 were Spaniards, for they upon this + occasion fought bravely, though unsuccessfully. + </p> + <p> + On the 11th all was quiet, Wellington preparing for an attack upon the + city on the following day. Soult, however, finding that the British + cavalry had been sent off so as to menace his line of retreat, evacuated + the city in the night, drew off his army with great order and ability, and + by a march of twenty-two miles placed it in safety. Upon the morning of + the 12th Wellington entered Toulouse, and the same afternoon two officers, + one British, the other French, arrived together from Paris, with the news + of the abdication of Napoleon, and the termination of the war. + </p> + <p> + These officers had been detained for two days at Blois by the officials + there, and this delay had cost the blood of 8000 men, among whom was Tom + Scudamore, who had his left arm carried away by a cannon ball. Sam, in the + act of carrying his master from the field, was also severely wounded in + the head with a musket ball. + </p> + <p> + Before the battle was fought they had received news from England that the + draft had been paid at the Bank of England, and that their future was in + consequence secure. The war being over, officers unattached to regiments + had little difficulty in getting leave of absence, as the troops were to + be embarked for England as soon as possible. Peter's application, + therefore, to accompany his brother was acceded to without hesitation, and + ten days after the battle of Toulouse he was on board ship with Tom and + Sam, both of whom were doing well. Three days afterwards they landed in + England. + </p> + <p> + Rhoda met them, with Miss Scudamore, at Portsmith, having received a + letter telling them of Tom's wound, and of their being upon the point of + sailing. There was a great reduction of the army at the end of the war, + and the Scudamores were both placed upon half pay. This was a matter of + delight to Rhoda, and of satisfaction to themselves. They had had enough + of adventure to last for a life-time; and with the prospect of a long + peace the army no longer offered them any strong attraction. + </p> + <p> + When they returned to Miss Scudamore's their old friend Dr. Jarvis came to + visit them, and a happier party could not have been found in England. The + will of Mr. Scudamore, made before he was aware of his ruin, was now acted + upon. He had left 20,000<i>l.</i> to Rhoda, and the rest of his fortune in + equal parts between his boys. Both Tom and Peter were fond of a country + life, and they bought two adjoining estates near Oxford, Rhoda agreeing to + stop with them and Miss Scudamore alternately. + </p> + <p> + For a brief time there was a break in their happiness, Napoleon escaped + from Elba, and Europe was in a flame again. All the officers on half pay + were ordered to present themselves for duty, and the Scudamores crossed + with the army to Belgium, and fought at Waterloo. Neither were hurt, nor + was Sam, who had of course accompanied them. Waterloo gave them another + step in rank, and the Scudamores returned as colonels to England. + </p> + <p> + It was their last war. A few years afterwards they married sisters, and + Rhoda having the year previous married a gentleman whose estate was in the + same county, they remained as united as ever. Sambo held for many a year + the important position of butler to Tom, then he found that one of the + housemaids did not regard his color as any insuperable obstacle, and they + were accordingly married. It was difficult to say after this exactly the + position which Sam held. He lived at a cottage on the edge of the estate, + where it joined that of Peter, and his time was spent in generally looking + after things at both houses, and as years went on his great delight was, + above all things, to relate to numerous young Scudamores the adventures of + their father and uncle when he first knew them as the Young Buglers. + </p> + <h3> + THE END. + </h3> + <div style="height: 6em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS *** + +***** This file should be named 9613-h.htm or 9613-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/9/6/1/9613/ + +Etext produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis, and +PG Distributed Proofreaders + +HTML file produced by David Widger + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + </body> +</html> diff --git a/9613.txt b/9613.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..06e4932 --- /dev/null +++ b/9613.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11270 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Young Buglers + +Author: G.A. Henty + +Posting Date: November 12, 2011 [EBook #9613] +Release Date: January, 2006 +First Posted: October 10, 2003 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS *** + + + + +Produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis, and +PG Distributed Proofreaders + + + + + + + + + + +THE YOUNG BUGLERS + +by G.A. Henty + + + + +PREFACE + + +To my Young Readers. + +I remember that, as a boy, I regarded any attempt to mix instruction +with amusement as being as objectionable a practice as the +administration of powder in jam; but I think that this feeling arose +from the fact that in those days books contained a very small share +of amusement and a very large share of instruction. I have endeavored +to avoid this, and I hope that the accounts of battles and sieges, +illustrated as they are by maps, will be found as interesting +as the lighter parts of the story. As in my tale, "_The Young +Franc-Tireurs_," I gave the outline of the Franco-German war, so +I have now endeavored to give the salient features of the great +Peninsular struggle. The military facts, with the names of generals +and regiments, the dates and places, are all strictly accurate, and +any one who has read with care the story of "The Young Buglers" could +pass an examination as to the leading events of the Peninsular war. + +Yours truly, + +THE AUTHOR. + + + + +CONTENTS + + + CHAPTER I. A Coaching Adventure + + CHAPTER II. The Young Pickles + + CHAPTER III. Enlisted + + CHAPTER IV. A Tough Customer + + CHAPTER V. Overboard + + CHAPTER VI. Portugal + + CHAPTER VII. The Passage of the Douro--Talavera + + CHAPTER VIII. A Pause in Operations + + CHAPTER IX. "With the Guerillas" + + CHAPTER X. Madrid + + CHAPTER XI. The Fight on the Coa + + CHAPTER XII. Busaco and Torres Vedras + + CHAPTER XIII. Albuera + + CHAPTER XIV. Invalided Home + + CHAPTER XV. Ciudad Rodrigo and Badajos + + CHAPTER XVI. Salamanca + + CHAPTER XVII. Caught in a Trap + + CHAPTER XVIII. Just in Time + + CHAPTER XIX. Vittoria + + CHAPTER XX. Toulouse + + + + +THE YOUNG BUGLERS. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +A COACHING ADVENTURE. + + +Had any of the boys in the lower forms of Eton in the year 1808, been +asked who were the most popular boys of their own age, they would have +been almost sure to have answered, without the slightest hesitation, +Tom and Peter Scudamore, and yet it is probable that no two boys +were more often in disgrace. It was not that they were idle, upon the +contrary, both were fairly up in their respective forms, but they were +constantly getting into mischief of one sort or another; yet even +with the masters they were favorites, there was never anything low, +disgraceful, or ungentlemanly in their escapades, and they could be +trusted never to attempt to screen themselves from the consequences +by prevarication, much less by lying. If the masters heard that a +party of youngsters had been seen far out of bounds, they were pretty +sure that the Scudamores were among them; a farmer came in from a +distance to complain that his favorite tree had been stripped of +its apples--for in those days apples were looked upon by boys as +fair objects of sport,--if the head-master's favorite white poodle +appeared dyed a deep blue, if Mr. Jones, the most unpopular master +in the school, upon coming out of his door trod upon a quantity of +tallow smeared all over the doorstep, and was laid up for a week in +consequence, there was generally a strong suspicion that Tom and Peter +Scudamore were concerned in the matter. One of their tricks actually +came to the ears of the Provost himself, and caused quite a sensation +in the place, but in this case, fortunately for them, they escaped +undetected. + +One fine summer afternoon they were out on the water with two or three +other boys of their own age, when a barge was seen ahead at some short +distance from the shore. She was apparently floating down with the +stream, and the fact that a horse was proceeding along the towing-path +a little way ahead was not noticed, as the rope was slack and was +trailing under water. The boys, therefore, as they were rowing against +stream, steered their boat to pass inside of her. Just as they came +abreast of the horse a man on the barge suddenly shouted to the rider +of the horse to go on. He did so, the rope tightened, rose from the +water just under the bow of the boat, and in another minute the boys +were struggling in the water. All were good swimmers, and would +have cared little for the ducking had it occurred accidentally, but +the roars of laughter of the bargeman, and the chaff with which he +assailed them as they scrambled up the bank, showed clearly enough +that they had been upset maliciously. The boys were furious, and one +or two proposed that they should report the case, but Tom Scudamore +pointed out that the bargeman would of course declare that it was +a pure accident, and that the boys were themselves in fault in not +looking out whether the barge was being towed, before going inside +her, and so nothing would come of reporting. + +The boat was dragged ashore and emptied, and in a few minutes they +were rowing back towards the town. The distance was but short, and +they did not repass the barge before they reached their boat-house. +The brothers had exchanged a few words in a low voice on the way, and +instead of following the example of the others, and starting at a run +for the house where they boarded to change their clothes, they walked +down by the river and saw that the barge had moored up against the +bank, at a short distance below the bridge. They watched for a time, +and saw the bargeman fasten up the hatch of the little cabin and go +ashore. + +That night two boys lowered themselves with a rope from the window +of one of the dames-houses, and walked rapidly down to the river. +There were a few flickering oil lamps burning, and the one or two +old watchmen were soundly asleep in their boxes. They did not meet a +soul moving upon their way to the object of the expedition, the barge +that had run them down. Very quietly they slipped on board, satisfied +themselves by listening at the half-open hatch to the snoring within +that their enemy was there, then loosened the moorings so that they +could be thrown off at a moment's notice. + +"Now, Peter," the elder brother said, "open our lantern. The night is +quite still. You hold your hand behind it, so that the light will not +fall on our faces, and I will look whether he is only wrapped up in a +blanket or has a regular bed; we must not risk setting the place on +fire. Get the crackers ready." + +A dark lantern was now taken out from under Tom's jacket, and was +found to be still alight, an important matter, for striking a light +with flint and steel was in those days a long and tedious business, +and then opening it Tom threw the light into the cabin. It was a +tiny place, and upon a bench, wrapped up in a blanket, the bargeman +was lying. As the light fell on his eyes, he moved, and a moment +afterwards started up with an oath, and demanded who was there. + +No answer came in words, but half a dozen lighted crackers were thrown +into the cabin, when they began to explode with a tremendous uproar. +In an instant the hatch was shut down and fastened outside. The rope +was cast off, and in another minute she was floating down stream with +the crackers still exploding inside her, but with their noise almost +deadened by the tremendous outcry of shouts and howls, and by a +continued and furious banging at the hatch. + +"There is no fear of his being choked, Tom, I hope?" + +"No, I expect he's all right," Tom said, "it will be pretty stifling +for a bit no doubt, but there's a chimney hole and the smoke will find +its way out presently. The barge will drift down to the weir before it +brings up, there is not enough stream out for there to be any risk of +her upsetting, else we daren't have turned her adrift." + +The next day the whole town was talking of the affair, and in the +afternoon the bargeman went up to the head-master and accused one of +the boys of an attempt to murder him. + +Greatly surprised, the Provost demanded what reason the man had for +suspecting the boys, and the bargeman acknowledged that he had that +afternoon upset a boat with four or five boys in her. "They would not +bear you malice on that account," the Provost said; "they don't think +much of a swim such weather as this, unless indeed you did it on +purpose." + +The man hesitated in his answer, and the Provost continued, "You +evidently did do it on purpose, and in that case, although it was +carried too far, for I hear you had a very narrow escape of being +stifled, still you brought it upon yourself, and I hope it will be a +lesson to you not to risk the lives of Eton boys for your amusement. I +know nothing about this affair, but if you can point out the boys you +suspect I will of course inquire into it." + +The bargeman departed, grumbling that he did not know one of the young +imps from another, but if he did find them, he'd wring their necks for +them to a certainty. The Provost had some inquiries made as to the +boys who had been upset, and whether they had all been in at lock-up +time; finding that they had all answered to their names, he made no +further investigation. + +This affair had taken place in the summer before this story begins, +on the 15th of October, 1808. On that day a holiday was granted in +consequence of the head-master's birthday, and the boys set off, some +to football, some for long walks in the country. + +The Scudamores, with several of their friends, strolled down the +towing-path for some miles, and walked back by the road. As they +entered their dames-house on their return, Tom Scudamore said for the +twentieth time, "Well, I would give anything to be a soldier, instead +of having to go in and settle down as a banker--it's disgusting!" + +As they entered a boy came up. "Oh, Scudamore, Jackson's been asking +for you both. It's something particular, for he has been out three or +four times, and he wanted to send after you, but no one knew where you +had gone." + +The boys at once went into the master's study, where they remained all +the afternoon. A short time after they went in, Mr. Jackson came out +and said a word or two to one of the senior boys, and the word was +quickly passed round, that there was to be no row, for the Scudamores +had just heard of the sudden death of their father. That evening, Mr. +Jackson had beds made up for them in his study, so that they might not +have the pain of having to talk with the other boys. The housekeeper +packed up their things, and next morning early they started by the +coach for London. + +Mr. Scudamore, the father of the young Etonians, was a banker. He was +the elder of two brothers, and had inherited his father's business, +while his brother had gone into the army. The banker had married the +daughter of a landowner in the neighborhood, and had lived happily and +prosperously until her death, seven years before this story begins. +She had borne him three children, the two boys, now fifteen and +fourteen years old respectively, and a girl, Rhoda, two years younger +than Peter. The loss of his wife afflicted him greatly, and he +received another shock five years later by the death of his brother, +Colonel Scudamore, to whom he was much attached. From the time of his +wife's death he had greatly relaxed in his attention to his business, +and after his brother's death he left the management almost entirely +in the hands of his cashier, in whom he had unlimited confidence. +This confidence was wholly misplaced. For years the cashier had +been carrying on speculation upon his own account with the monies +of the bank. Gradually and without exciting the least suspicion he +had realized the various securities held by the bank, and at last +gathering all the available cash he, one Saturday afternoon, locked up +the bank and fled. + +On Monday it was found that he was missing; Mr. Scudamore went down +to the bank, and had the books taken into his parlor for examination. +Some hours afterwards a clerk went in and found his master lying back +in his chair insensible. A doctor on arriving pronounced it to be +apoplexy. He never rallied, and a few hours afterwards the news spread +through the country that Scudamore, the banker, was dead, and that the +bank had stopped payment. + +People could believe the former item of news, but were incredulous as +to the latter. Scudamore's bank was looked upon in Lincolnshire as at +least as safe as the Bank of England itself. But the sad truth was +soon clear to all, and for awhile there was great distress of mind +among the people, for many miles round, for most of them had entrusted +all their savings of years to the Scudamores' bank. When affairs were +wound up, however, it was found that things were not quite so bad as +had been feared. Mr. Scudamore had a considerable capital employed +in the bank, and the sale of his handsome house and estate realized +a large sum, so that eventually every one received back the money +they had entrusted to the bank; but the whole of the capital and the +profits of years of successful enterprise had vanished, and it was +calculated by the executors that the swindler must have appropriated +at least 80,000_l._ + +For the first month after their father's death the boys stayed with +the doctor who had long attended the family and had treated all their +ailments since they were born. In the great loss of their father the +loss of their fortune affected them but little, except that they were +sorry to be obliged to leave Eton; for the interest of the little +fortune which their mother had brought at her marriage, and which was +all that now remained to them, would not have been sufficient to pay +for their expenses there, and indeed such an education would have been +out of place for two boys who had to make their own way in life. At +the end of this month it was arranged that they were to go to their +only existing relative, an elder sister of Mr. Scudamore. The boys had +never seen her, for she had not for many years been friends with her +brother. + +The letter which she had written to the doctor, announcing her +willingness to receive them, made the boys laugh, although it did not +hold out prospects of a very pleasant future. "I am, of course," she +said, "prepared to do my duty. No one can say that I have ever failed +in my duty. My poor brother quarreled with me. It was his duty to +apologize. He did not do so. Had it been my duty to apologize I should +have done so. As I was right, and he was wrong, it was clearly not my +duty. I shall now do my duty to my niece and nephews. Yet I may be +allowed to say that I regret much that they are not all nieces. I do +not like boys. They are always noisy, and not always clean. They do +not wipe their shoes, they are always breaking things, they go about +with all sorts of rubbish and dirt in their pockets, their hair is +always rough, they are fond of worrying cats, and other cruel games. +Altogether they are objectionable. Had my brother made up his mind to +leave his children in my charge, it was clearly his duty to have had +girls instead of boys. However, it is not because other people fail +in their duty that I should fail in mine. Therefore, let them come to +me this day fortnight. By that time I shall have got some strong and +suitable furniture in the room that my nephews will occupy, and shall +have time to make other arrangements. This letter will, if all goes +well, reach you, I believe, in three days after the date of posting, +and they will take the same time coming here. Assure them that I am +prepared to do my duty, and that I hope that they will make a serious +effort at doing theirs. Ask my nephews, upon the occasion of their +first arrival, to make as little noise as they can, because my cat, +Minnie, is very shy, and if she is scared at the first meeting, +she will take a very long time to get accustomed to them. I also +particularly beg that they do not, as they come up to the house, throw +stones at any of the pigeons who may be resting upon the roof, for the +slates were all set right a few weeks ago, and I am sure I do not wish +to have the slater here again; they were hanging about for ten days +the last time they came. I do not know that I have anything else to +say." + +The boys received the reading of this singular epistle with shouts of +laughter. + +"Poor aunt," Tom said. "What does she think of us that she can suppose +that, upon our very first arrival, we should come in like wild +Indians, throwing stones at her pigeons, and frightening her Minnie +into fits. Did you ever hear such an extraordinary idea, Doctor +Jarvis?" + +"At any rate, boys," the doctor said, when the laughter had ceased, +"you may find your aunt a little peculiar, but she is evidently +determined to do her duty to you, and you must do yours to her, and +not play more pranks than you can help. As to you, Rhoda, you will +evidently be in high favor, and as you are fortunately a quiet little +lady, you will, I have no doubt, get on with her very well." + +"I hope so," Rhoda said, smiling, "you see she means to be kind, +though she does write funny letters, and, at any rate, there are +Minnie and the pigeons; it sounds nice, you know. Do you know what +aunt's place is like, Dr. Jarvis, and how to get there from here." + +"No, my dear, I never was in that part of England. It is close to +Marlborough that she lives, a very pretty country, I believe. There +is, of course, no way to go across from here. You must go up to London +by coach from here, and then to Marlborough by the western coach. I +will write to my brother James in town, where you stopped at night as +you came through, boys, and I know that he will take you all in for +the night, and see that you go off right in the morning." + +"You're very kind, indeed, Doctor Jarvis. I do not know how to thank +you for all you have done for us," Tom said earnestly, and the others +cordially echoed the sentiment. + +The day before starting the doctor had a long talk with the boys. He +pointed out to them that their future now depended upon themselves +alone. They must expect to find many unpleasantnesses in their way, +but they must take their little trials pleasantly, and make the best +of everything. "I have no fear as to Rhoda," their kind friend said. +"She has that happy, amiable, and quiet disposition that is sure to +adapt itself to all circumstances. I have no doubt she will become a +favorite with your aunt. Try to keep out of scrapes, boys. You know +you are rather fond of mischief, and your aunt will not be able to +understand it. If you get into any serious difficulty write to me, you +can rely upon always finding a friend in me." + +The journey to London was no novelty to the boys, but Rhoda enjoyed it +immensely. Her place had been taken inside, but most of the journey +she rode outside with her brothers. She was greatly amazed at the +bustle and noise of London, and was quite confused at the shouting and +crowd at the place where the coach drew up, for two or three other +coaches had just arrived from other directions. Mr. Jarvis had sent +his man-servant to meet them, their luggage was sent direct to the +booking-office from which the coach started for Marlborough, and the +servant carried a small bag containing their night things. It was +evening when they got in, and Rhoda could scarcely keep her eyes open +long enough to have tea, for the coach had been two days and nights +upon the road. The next day they stayed in town, and Mrs. Jarvis took +them out to see the sights of London--the Tower and St. Paul's, and +Westminster Abbey, and the beasts at Exeter Change. The boys had twice +before spent a whole day in London, their father having, upon two +occasions, made his visits to town to fit in with their going up to +school, but to Rhoda it was all new, and very, very wonderful. + +The next day the coach started early for Marlborough. It was to +take rather over twenty-four hours on the way. As before, Rhoda rode +outside with her brothers until the evening, but then, instead of +going inside, where there were five passengers already, she said, as +the night was so fine and warm, she would rather remain with them. +They were sitting behind the coachman, there were two male passengers +upon the same seat with them, and another in the box seat by the +coachman. The conversation turned, as in those days it was pretty sure +to turn, upon highwaymen. Several coaches had been lately stopped by +three highwaymen, who worked together, and were reported to be more +reckless than the generality of their sort. They had shot a coachman +who refused to stop, the week before on Hounslow Heath, they had +killed a guard on the great north road, and they had shot two +passengers who resisted, near Exeter. + +Tom and Peter were greatly amused by observing that the passenger who +sat next to them, and who, at the commencement of the conversation, +showed a brace of heavy pistols with which he was provided, with much +boasting as to what he should do if the coach were attacked, when he +heard of the fate of the passengers who had resisted, became very +quiet indeed, and presently took an opportunity, when he thought that +he was not observed, of slipping his pistols under the tarpaulin +behind him. + +"I hope those dreadful men won't stop our coach," Rhoda said. + +"They won't hurt you if they do, Rhoda," Tom said assuringly. "I think +it would be rather a lark. I say, Peter," he went on in a whisper, "I +think we might astonish them with those pistols that coward next to +you has hid behind him." + +"I should just think so," Peter said; "the bargee at Eton would be +nothing to it." + +The hours went slowly on. Rhoda and the boys dozed uncomfortably +against each other and the baggage behind them, until they were +suddenly roused by a shout in the road beside them: "Stand for your +lives!" + +The moon was up, and they could see that there were three horsemen. +One galloped to the horses' heads, and seized the rein of one of the +leaders, the others rode by the coach. + +The first answer to the challenge was a discharge from the blunderbuss +of the guard, which brought one of the highwaymen from his horse. + +The other, riding up to the side of the coach, fired at the guard, and +a loud cry told that the shot had taken effect. In another moment the +fellow was by the side of the coachman. + +"Hold up!" he said, "or I will blow your brains out!" + +The coachman did as he was ordered, and indeed the man at the leader's +head had almost succeeded in stopping them. The passenger next to the +boys had, at the first challenge, again seized his pistols, and the +boys thought that he was going to fire after all. + +"Lie down at our feet, Rhoda, quick!" Tom said, "and don't move +till I tell you." The fate of the guard evidently frightened away +the short-lived courage of the passenger, for, as the coachman again +pulled up, he hastily thrust the pistols in behind him. + +"Get down, every one of you," the highwayman shouted. + +"Lie still, Rhoda," Tom whispered. "Now, Peter, get in underneath the +tarpaulin." + +This was done as the passengers descended. The luggage was not so +heavily piled as usual, and the boys found plenty of room beneath the +tarpaulin. + +"Now, Peter, you take one of these pistols and give me the other. Now +peep out. The moon is hidden, which is a good thing; now, look here, +you shall shoot that fellow standing down below, who is swearing at +the ladies inside for not getting out quicker. I'll take a shot at +that fellow standing in front of the horse's heads." + +"Do you think you can hit him, Tom?" + +"I have not the least idea, but I can try; and if you hit the other +one, the chances are he'll bolt, whether I hit him or not. Open the +tarpaulin at the side so as to see well, and rest the pistol upon +something. You must take a good shot, Peter, for if you miss him we +shall be in a mess." + +"All right," Peter said, in a whisper, "I can almost touch him with +the pistol." + +In loud and brutal tones the highwayman now began to order the +frightened ladies to give up their watches and rings, enforcing his +commands with terrible curses. When suddenly a pistol flashed out +just behind him, and he fell off his horse with a ball through his +shoulder. + +Tom's shot, though equally well intended, was not so truly aimed. +The highwayman had dismounted, and was standing just in front of the +leaders, so that Tom had a fair view of him between them. The boys had +both occasionally fired their father's pistols, for, in those days, +each householder in the country always kept loaded pistols in his +room, but his skill was not sufficient to make sure of a man at that +distance. The bullet flew past at two feet to the left of his head. +But its effect was scarcely less startling than if it had actually hit +him, for, in its passage, it passed through the ear of the off leader. +The horse made a start at the sudden pain, and then dashed forward. +The rest of the team, already alarmed by the shot, followed her lead; +before the startled highwayman could get out of the way they were upon +him, in another instant he was under their heels, and the coach gave a +sudden lurch as it passed over his body. + +"Lie still, Rhoda, a little longer; it's all right, but the horses +have run away," Tom exclaimed, as he scrambled forward, and caught +hold of the reins, which the coachman had tied to the rail of the seat +as he got down. "Catch hold of the reins, Peter, and help me pull." + +Peter did so; but the united strength of the boys was wholly unequal +to arresting the headlong flight of the horses. + +Fortunately the highwaymen had chosen a low bottom between two hills, +to arrest the coach, consequently the road was up a hill of moderate +steepness. The boys hoped that the horses would stop when they got to +the top; but they went on with redoubled speed. + +"This is something like going it," Peter said. + +"Isn't it, Peter? They know their way, and we ain't lively to meet +anything in the road. They will stop at their stable. At any rate, +it's no use trying to steer them. Here, Rhoda dear, get up; are you +very much frightened?" + +Rhoda still lay quite still, and Peter, holding on with difficulty, +for the coach quite rocked with the speed at which they were going, +climbed over to her, and stooped, down. "Shall I help you up, Rhoda?" + +"No, please, I would rather stop here till it's all over." + +Fortunately the hill, up to the Tillage where they made the change, +was a steep one, and the horses broke into a trot before they reached +the top, and, in another minute drew up at the door of the inn. +The astonishment of the ostlers at seeing the horses covered with +lather, and coachbox tenanted only by two boys, behind whom a little +white face now peered out, was extreme, and they were unable to get +beyond an ejaculation of hallo! expressive of a depth of incredulous +astonishment impossible to be rendered by words. + +"Look here," Tom said, with all the composure, and much of the +impudence, which then, as now, characterized the young Etonian, "don't +be staring like a pack of stuck pigs. You had better get the fresh +horses in, and drive back to the bottom, about four miles from here. +There has been regular row with some fellows, and I expect two or +three are killed. Now, just put up the ladder; I want to get my sister +down." + +Almost mechanically the men put the ladder up to the coach, and the +boys and Rhoda got down. + +"Do you say the coach has been attacked by highwaymen in Burnet +bottom?" + +"I don't know anything about Burnet bottom," Tom said. "It was a +bottom about four miles off. There were three of them. The guard shot +one of them, and the others shot the guard. Then we were stopped by +them, and every one had to get down. Then the horses ran away, and +here we are." + +"Then there are two of those highwayman chaps with the passengers," +one of the men said. + +"You need not be afraid of them," Tom said carelessly; "one got shot, +and I don't know about the other, but the wheel of the coach went over +him, so I do not suppose he will be much trouble. Now, if I were you, +I should not stand staring any more, but should make haste and take +the coach back." + +"Hullo, look at this grey," one of the men exclaimed, as, at last +understanding what had taken place, they began to bustle about to +change horses. "He's got blood all over the side of his head. One of +those scoundrels has shot him through the ear." + +Tom burst out laughing. "I am the scoundrel!" he said. "Peter, that +explains why we went off so suddenly. I missed the fellow, and hit the +leader in the ear. However, it comes to the same thing. By the way, we +may as well take the pistols." + +So saying, he ran up the ladder and brought down the pistols. By this +time the fresh horses were in. + +"I can't make nought of it," one of the ostlers said, climbing up into +the coachman's seat. "Jump up, Bill and Harry. It's the rummiest go I +ever heard of in coaching." + +"Landlady, can you get us some tea at once, please," Tom said, going +up to the landlady, who was looking on from the door of the house +with an astonishment equal to that of the men at the whole affair; +"as quickly as you can, for my sister looks regularly done up with +fatigue, and then, please let her lie down till the coach is ready to +start again. It will be three quarters of an hour before it is back, +and then, I daresay, there will be a lot of talking before they go on. +I should think they will be wanting breakfast. At any rate, an hour's +rest will do you good, Rhoda." + +Rhoda was too worn out with the over-excitement even to answer. +Fortunately there was hot water in order to make hot grog for the +outriders of the coach, some tea was quickly made, and in ten minutes +Rhoda was fast asleep on the landlady's bed. + +Tom and Peter expressed their desire for something substantial in the +way of eating, for the morning had now fairly broken. The landlady +brought in some cold meat, upon which the boys made a vigorous attack, +and then, taking possession of two benches, they dozed off until the +coach arrived. + +It had but three horses, for one had been sent off to carry Bill, +the ostler, at full speed to the town at which they had last changed +horses, to fetch a doctor and the constable. The other two men had +remained with the guard, who was shot in the hip, and the highwayman, +whose collar-bone was broken by Peter's shot. The fellow shot by the +guard, and the other one, whom the coach wheels had passed over, were +both dead. + +"There's the coach, Tom." + +"What a nuisance, Peter, they'll all be wanting to talk now, and I am +just so comfortably off. Well, I suppose it's no use trying to get any +more sleep." + +So saying, they roused themselves, and went out to the door just as +the coach drew up. + +There was a general shout of greeting from the passengers, which was +stopped, however, by a peremptory order from the coachman. + +He was a large, stout man, with a face red from the effects of wind +and exposure. "Jack," he said, to a man who was standing near, for +the news of the attack upon the coach had quickly spread, and all +the villagers were astir to see it come in. "Jack, hold the leader's +head. Thomas, open the door, and let the insides out. Gents," he said +solemnly, when this was done, "I'm going to do what isn't a usual +thing by no means, in fact, I ain't no precedence for doing it; but +then, I do not know any precedence for this here business altogether. +I never did hear of a coachman standing up on his box to give a cheer, +no, not to King George himself; but, then, King George never polished +off two highwaymen all to himself, leastway, not as I've heard tell +of. Now, these two young gents have done this. They have saved my +coach and my passengers from getting robbed, and so I'm going to give +'em three cheers. I'll trouble you to help me up into the box seat, +gentlemen." + +Assisted by the other passengers, the driver now gravely climbed up +into the box seat, steadied himself there by placing one hand upon +the shoulder of the passenger next him, took off his low-crowned hat, +and said. "Follow me, gents, with three cheers for those young gents +standing there; better plucked ones I never came across, and I've +traveled a good many miles in my day." + +So saying, he gave three stentorian cheers, which were echoed by all +the passengers and villagers. + +Then there was a momentary silence, and Tom, who, with his brother, +had been feeling very uncomfortable, although rather inclined to +laugh, seeing that he was expected to say something, said, "Thank you +all very much; but we'd much rather you hadn't done it." + +Then there was a general laugh and movement, and a general pressing +forward of the passengers to shake the boys by the hand. The driver +was assisted down from his elevated position, and got off the coach +and came up to them. "That's the first speech I ever made, young +gentlemen, and, if I know myself, it will be the last; but, you see, +I was druv to it. You're a good sort, that's certain. What will you +drink?" + +The boys declared for beer, and drank solemnly with the driver, +imitating him in finishing their mugs at a draught, and turning them +topsy-turvy. There was now a great deal of talking, and many questions +were asked. Tom and Peter modestly said that there was really nothing +to tell. They saw that the gentleman next to them intended to use his +pistols; but, not seeing a good opportunity, put them down behind the +tarpaulin, and the thought occurred to them that, by slipping behind +it, they would get a good chance of a certain shot. Accordingly, they +had fired, and then the horse had run away; and there was an end of +it. There was nothing extraordinary in the whole matter. + +"At any rate, my boys, you have saved me from a loss of a couple +of hundred pounds which I had got hid in my boots, but which those +fellows would have been sure to have have discovered," one of the +passengers said. + +There was a general chorus of satisfaction at many watches and +trinkets saved, and then the first passenger went on,-- + +"I propose, gentlemen and ladies, that when we get to the end of our +journey we make a subscription, according to the amount we have saved, +and that we get each of these young gentlemen a brace of the very best +pistols that can be bought. If they go on as they have begun, they +will find them useful." + +There was a general exclamation of approval, and one of the ladies, +who had been an inside passenger, said, "And I think we ought to give +a handsome ring to their sister as a memorial through life. Of course, +she had not so much to do as her brothers, but she had the courage to +keep still, and she had to run the risk, both of being shot, and of +being upset by the coach just as they did." + +This also was unanimously approved, and, after doing full justice to +the breakfast set before them, the party again took their places. +Rhoda being carried down asleep, by the landlady, and placed in the +coach, one of the inside passengers getting out to make room for her, +and she was laid, curled up, on the seat, with her head in a lady's +lap, and slept quietly, until, to her astonishment, she was woke up, +and told that she was in Marlborough. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +TWO YOUNG PICKLES. + + +An old-fashioned open carriage, drawn by a stiff, old-fashioned horse, +and driven by a stiff, old-fashioned man, was in waiting at the inn at +which the coach drew up at Marlborough. Into this the young Scudamores +were soon transferred, and, after a hearty good-bye from their +fellow-passengers, and an impressive one from the coachman, they +started upon the concluding part of their journey. + +"How far is it to aunt's?" Tom asked. + +"About six miles, young sir," the driver said gravely. + +The young Scudamores had great difficulty to restrain their laughter +at Tom's new title; in fact, Peter nearly choked himself in his +desperate efforts to do so, and no further questions were asked for +some time. + +The ride was a pleasant one, and Rhoda, who had never been out of +Lincolnshire before, was delighted with the beautiful country through +which they were passing. The journey, long as it was--for the road +was a very bad one, and the horse had no idea of going beyond a slow +trot--passed quickly to them all; but they were glad when the driver +pointed to a quaint old-fashioned house standing back from the road, +and said that they were home. + +"There are the pigeons, Rhoda, and there is Minnie asleep on that open +window-sill." + +Very many times had the young Scudamores talked about their aunt, and +had pictured to themselves what she would be like; and their ideas of +her so nearly approached the truth, that she almost seemed to be an +old acquaintance as she came to the door as the carriage stopped. She +was a tall, upright, elderly lady, with a kind, but very decided face, +and a certain prim look about her manner and dress. + +"Well, niece Rhoda and nephews, I am glad to see that you have arrived +safely," she said in a clear, distinct voice. "Welcome to the Yews. I +hope that we shall get on very well together. Joseph, I hope that you +have not driven Daisy too fast, and that you did not allow my nephews +to use the whip. You know I gave you very distinct instructions not to +let them do so." + +"No, my lady, they never so much as asked." + +"That is right," Miss Scudamore said, turning round and shaking hands +with the boys, who had now got out of the carriage and had helped +Rhoda down. "I am glad to hear what Joseph tells me, for I know that +boys are generally fond of furious driving and like lashing horses +until they put them into a gallop. And now, how are you, niece Rhoda! +Give me a kiss. That is right. You look pale and tired, child; you +must have something to eat, and then go to bed. Girls can't stand +racketing about as boys can. You look quiet and nice, child, and I +have no doubt we shall suit very well. It is very creditable to you +that you have not been spoilt by your brothers. Boys generally make +their sisters almost as noisy and rude as they are themselves." + +"I don't think we are noisy and rude, aunt," Tom said, with a smile. + +"Oh, you don't, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said, looking at him sharply, +and then shaking her head decidedly two or three times. "If your looks +do not belie you both sadly, you are about as hair-brained a couple of +lads as my worst enemies could wish to see sent to plague me; but," +she added to herself, as she turned to lead the way indoors, "I must +do my duty, and must make allowances; boys will be boys, boys will be +boys, so they say at least, though why they should be is more than I +can make out. Now, Rhoda, I will take you up with me. Your bedroom +leads out of mine, dear. Hester," she said to a prim-looking servant +who had come out after her to the door; "will you show my nephews to +their room? Dinner will be ready at two; it is just a quarter to the +hour now. I see that you have got watches, so that you will be able +to be punctual; and I must request you, when you have done washing, +not to throw the water out of the window, because my flower-beds are +underneath." + +Tom had great difficulty in keeping his countenance, while he assured +his aunt that his brother and himself never did empty their basins out +of the window. + +"That is right," Miss Scudamore said doubtfully; "but I have heard +that boys do such things." + +Once fairly in their room and the door shut, the boys had a great +laugh over their aunt's ideas as to boys. + +"There is one comfort," Tom said at last; "whatever we do we shall +never surprise her." + +"I think we shall get on very well with her," Peter said. "She means +to be kind, I am sure. This is a jolly room, Tom." + +It was a low wainscoted room, with a very wide window divided into +three by mullions, and fitted with latticed panes. They were open, and +a delicious scent of flowers came in from the garden. The furniture +was all new and very strong, of dark stained wood, which harmonized +well with the paneling. There were no window curtains, but a valance +of white dimity hung above the window. There was a piece of carpet +between the beds; the rest of the floor was bare, but the boards were +of old oak, and looked as well without it. Several rows of pegs had +been put upon the walls, and there was a small chest of drawers by +each bed. + +"This is very jolly, Peter; but it is a pity that there are bars to +the window." + +When they came down to dinner they found that Rhoda, quite done up +with her journey, had gone to bed. + +"You like your room, I hope, nephews," Miss Scudamore said, after they +had taken their seats. + +"Yes, aunt, very much. There is only one drawback to it." + +"What is that, Thomas?" + +"Oh, please, aunt, don't call me Thomas; it is a dreadful name; it is +almost as bad as Tommy. Please call me Tom. I am always called Tom by +every one." + +"I am not fond of these nicknames," Miss Scudamore said. "There is a +flippancy about them of which I do not approve." + +"Yes, aunt, in nicknames; but Tom is not a nickname; it is only a +short way of speaking. We never hear of a man being called Thomas, +unless he is a footman or an archbishop, or something of that sort." + +"What do you mean by archbishop?" Miss Scudamore asked severely. + +"Well, aunt, I was going to say footman, and then I thought of Thomas +a Becket; and there was Thomas the Rhymer. I have heard of him, but +I never read any of his rhymes. I wonder why they did not call them +poems. But I expect even Thomas a Becket was called Tom in his own +family." + +Miss Scudamore looked sharply at Tom, but he had a perfect command of +his face, and could talk the greatest nonsense with the most serious +face. He went on unmoved with her scrutiny. + +"I have often wondered why I was not christened Tom, It would have +been much more sensible. For instance, Rhoda is christened Rhoda and +not Rhododendron." + +"Rhododendron?" Miss Scudamore said, mystified. + +"Yes, aunt, it is an American plant, I believe. We had one in the +green-house at home; it was sent poor papa by some friend who went out +there, I don't see anything else Rhoda could come from." + +"You are speaking very ignorantly, nephew," Miss Scudamore said +severely. "I don't know anything about the plant you speak of, but the +name of Rhoda existed before America was ever heard of. It is a very +old name." + +"I expect," Peter said, "it must have meant originally a woman of +Rhodes. You see Crusaders and Templars were always having to do with +Rhodes, and they no doubt brought the name home, and so it got settled +here." + +"The name is mentioned in Scripture," Miss Scudamore said severely. + +"Yes, aunt, and that makes it still more likely that it meant a woman +of Rhodes; you see Rhodes was a great place then." + +Miss Scudamore was silent for some time. Then she went back to the +subject with which the conversation had commenced. "What is the +objection you spoke of to the room?" + +"Oh! it is the bars to the window, aunt." + +"I have just had them put up," Miss Scudamore said calmly. + +"Just put up, aunt!" Tom repeated in surprise, "what for?" + +"To prevent you getting out at night." + +The boys could not help laughing this time, and then Peter said, "But +why should we want to get out at night, aunt?" + +"Why should boys always want to do the things they ought not?" Miss +Scudamore said. "I've heard of boys being let down by ropes to go and +buy things. I dare say you have both done it yourselves." + +"Well, aunt," Tom said, "perhaps we have; but then, you see, that was +at school." + +"I do not see any difference, nephew. If you will get out at one +window, you will get out at another. There is mischief to be done in +the country as well as in towns; and so long as there is mischief to +do, so long will boys go out of their way to do it. And now I will +tell you the rules of this house, to which you will be expected to +adhere. It is well to understand things at once, as it prevents +mistakes. We breakfast at eight, dine at two, have tea at half-past +six, and you will go to bed at half-past eight. These hours will be +strictly observed. I shall expect your hands and faces to be washed, +and your hairs brushed previous to each meal. When you come indoors +you will always take off your boots and put on your shoes in the +little room behind this. And now, if you have done dinner I think +that you had better go and lie down on your bed, and get two or three +hours' sleep. Take your boots off before you get into the bed." + +"She means well, Peter," the elder brother said, as they went +upstairs, "but I am afraid she will fidget our lives out." + +For two or three days the boys wandered about enjoying the beautiful +walks, and surprising and pleasing their aunt by the punctuality +with which they were in to their meals. Then she told them that she +had arranged for them to go to a tutor, who lived at Warley, a large +village a mile distant, and who had some eight or ten pupils. The very +first day's experience at the school disgusted them. The boys were +of an entirely different class to those with whom they had hitherto +associated, and the master was violent and passionate. + +"How do you like Mr. Jones, nephews?" Miss Scudamore asked upon their +return after their first day at school. + +"We do not like him at all, aunt. In the first place, he is a good +deal too handy with that cane of his." + +"'He who spares the rod--'" + +"Yes, we know that, aunt, 'spoils the child,'" broke in Tom, "but we +would not mind so much if the fellow were a gentleman." + +"I don't know what you may call a gentleman," Miss Scudamore said +severely. "He stands very high here a schoolmaster, while he visits +the vicar, and is well looked up to everywhere." + +"He's not a gentleman for all that," Tom muttered; "he wouldn't be if +he visited the Queen. One does not mind being trashed by a gentleman; +one is used to that at Eton; but to be knocked about by a fellow like +that! Well, we shall see." + +For a week the boys put up with the cruelty of their tutor, who at +once took an immense dislike to them on finding that they did not, +like the other boys, cringe before him, and that no trashing could +extract a cry from them. + +It must not be supposed that they did not meditate vengeance, but they +could hit upon no plan which could be carried out without causing +suspicion that it was the act of one of the boys; and in that case +they knew that he would question them all round, and they would not +tell a lie to screen themselves. + +Twice they appealed to their aunt, but she would not listen to them, +saying that the other boys did not complain, and that if their master +was more severe with them than with others, it could only be because +they behaved worse. It was too evident that they were boys of very +violent dispositions, and although she was sorry that their master +found it necessary to punish them, it was clearly her duty not to +interfere. + +The remark about violence arose from Miss Scudamore having read in the +little paper which was published once a week at Marlborough an account +of the incident of the stopping of the coach, about which the boys +had agreed to say nothing to her. The paper had described the conduct +of her nephews in the highest terms, but Miss Scudamore was terribly +shocked. "The idea", she said, "that she should have to associate with +boys who had take a fellow-creature's life was terrible to her, and +their conduct in resisting, when grown-up men had given up the idea +as hopeless, showed a violent spirit, which, in boys so young, was +shocking." + +A few days after this, as the boys were coming from school, they +passed the carrier's cart, coming in from Marlborough. + +"Be you the young gentlemen at Miss Scudamore's?" the man asked. +"Because, if you be, I have got a parcel for you." + +Tom answered him that they were, and he then handed them over a heavy +square parcel. Opening it after the cart had gone on, the boys, to +their great delight, found that it consisted of two cases, each +containing a brace of very handsome pistols. + +"This is luck, Peter," Tom said. "If the parcel had been sent to the +house, aunt would never have let us have them; now we can take them in +quietly, get some powder and balls, and practice shooting every day in +some quiet place. That will be capital. Do you know I have thought of +a plan which will enrage old Jones horribly, and he will never suspect +us?" + +"No; have you, Tom? What is that?" + +"Look here, Peter. I can carry you easily standing on my shoulders. If +you get a very long cloak, so as to fall well down on me, no one would +suspect in the dark that there were two of us; we should look like +one tremendously tall man. Well, you know, he goes every evening to +Dunstable's to sing with Miss Dunstable. They say he's making love to +her. We can waylay him in the narrow lane, and make him give up that +new watch he has just bought, that he's so proud of. I heard him say +he had given thirty guineas for it. Of course, we don't want to keep +it, but we would smash it up between a couple of big stones, and send +him all the pieces." + +"Capital, Tom; but where should we get the cloak?" + +"There is that long wadded silk cloak of aunt's that she uses when she +goes out driving. It always hangs up in the closet in the hall." + +"But how are we to get in again, Tom? I expect that he does not come +back till half-past nine or ten. We can slip out easily enough after +we are supposed to have gone to bed; but how are we to get back?" + +"The only plan, Peter, is to get in through Rhoda's window. She is +very angry at that brute Jones treating us so badly, and if I take her +into the secret I feel sure she will agree." + +Rhoda was appealed to, and although at first she said it was quite, +quite impossible, she finally agreed, although with much fear and +trembling, to assist them. First, the boys were to buy some rope and +make a rope ladder, which Rhoda was to take up to her room; she was to +open the window wide when she went to bed, but to pull the blind down +as usual, so that if her aunt came in she would not notice it. Then, +when she heard her aunt come tip to bed at half-past nine, she was to +get up very quietly, drop the rope ladder out, fastening it as they +instructed her, and then get into bed again, and go to sleep if she +could, as the boys would not try to come in until after Miss Scudamore +was asleep. + +Two nights after this the schoolmaster was returning from his usual +visit to Mr. Dunstable, when, to his horror, he saw a gigantic figure +advance from under a tree which overshadowed the lawn, and heard a +deep voice say, "Your money or your life!" + +Like all bullies, the schoolmaster was a coward, and no sooner did he +see this terrible figure, and his ears caught the ominous click of +a pistol which accompanied the words, than his teeth chattered, his +whole figure trembled with fear, and he fell on his knees, crying, +"Spare my life!--take all that I have, but spare my life!" + +"You miserable coward!" the giant said, "I do not want to take your +wretched life. What money have you?" + +"I have only two shillings," he exclaimed; "I swear to you that I have +only two shillings." + +"What is the use of two shillings to me?--give them to the first +beggar you see." + +"Yes, sir," the schoolmaster said; "I swear to you that I will." + +"Give me your watch." + +The schoolmaster took out his watch, and, getting upon his feet, +handed it to the giant. + +"There now, you can go; but see," he added, as the schoolmaster turned +with great alacrity to leave--"look here." + +"Yes, sir." + +"Look here, and mark my words well. Don't you go to that house where +you have been to-night, or it will be the worse for you. You are a +wretch, and I won't see that poor little girl marry you and be made +miserable. Swear to me you will give her up." + +The schoolmaster hesitated, but there was again the ominous click of +the pistol. + +"Yes, yes, I swear it," he said hastily. "I will give her up +altogether." + +"You had better keep your oath," the giant said, "for if you break it, +if I hear you go there any more--I shall be sure to hear of it--I will +put an ounce of lead in you, if I have to do it in the middle of your +school. Do you hear me? Now you may go." + +Only too glad to escape, the schoolmaster walked quickly off, and in a +moment his steps could be heard as he ran at the top of his speed down +the lane. + +In a moment the giant appeared to break in two, and two small figures +stood where the large one had been. + +"Capital, Peter. Now, I'll take the cloak, and you keep the pistol, +and now for a run home--not that I'm afraid of that coward getting +up a pursuit. He'll be only too glad to get his head under the +bedclothes." + +Rhoda had carried out her brother's instructions with great exactness, +and was in a great fright when her aunt came in to see her in bed, +lest she should notice that the window was open. However, the night +was a quiet one, and the curtains fell partly across the blind, so +that Miss Scudamore suspected nothing, but Rhoda felt great relief +when she said good-night, took the candle, and left the room. She had +had hard work to keep herself awake until she heard her aunt come up +to bed; and then, finding that she did not again come into the room, +she got up, fastened one end of the rope ladder to a thick stick long +enough to cross two of the mullions, let the other end down very +quietly, and then slipped into bed again. She did not awake until +Hester knocked at her door and told her it was time to get up. She +awoke with a great start, and in a, fright at once ran to the window. +Everything looked as usual. The rope ladder was gone, the window was +closed, and Rhoda knew that her brothers must have come in safely. + +Great was the excitement in Warley next day, when it became known that +the schoolmaster had been robbed of his watch by a giant fully eight +feet high. This height of the robber was, indeed, received with much +doubt, as people thought that he might have been a tall man, but +that the eight feet must have been exaggerated by the fear of the +schoolmaster. + +Two or three days afterwards the surprise rose even higher, when a +party of friends who had assembled at Mr. Jones' to condole with him +upon his misfortune, were startled by the smashing of one of the +windows by a small packet, which fell upon the floor in their midst. + +There was a rush to the door, but the night was a dark one, and no one +was to be seen; then they returned to the sitting-room, and the little +packet was opened, and found to contain some watchworks bent and +broken, some pulverized glass, and a battered piece of metal, which, +after some trouble, the schoolmaster recognized as the case of his +watch. The head-constable was sent for, and after examining the relics +of the case, he came to the same conclusion at which the rest had +already arrived, namely, that the watch could not have been stolen by +an ordinary footpad, but by some personal enemy of the schoolmaster's, +whose object was not plunder, but annoyance and injury. + +To the population of Warley this solution was a very agreeable one. +The fact of a gigantic footpad being in the neighborhood was alarming +for all, and nervous people were already having great bolts and bars +placed upon their shutters and doors. The discovery, therefore, that +the object of this giant was not plunder, but only to gratify a spite +against the master, was a relief to the whole place. Every one was, of +course, anxious to know who this secret foe could be, and what crime +Mr. Jones could have committed to bring such a tremendous enemy upon +him. The boys at the school assumed a fresh importance in the eyes of +the whole place, and being encouraged now to tell all they knew of +him, they gave such a picture of the life that they had led at school, +that a general feeling of disgust was aroused against him. + +The parents of one or two of the boys gave notice to take their sons +away, but the rest of the boys were boarders, and were no better off +than before. + +Miss Scudamore was unshaken in her faith in Mr. Jones and considered +the rumor current about him to be due simply to the vindictive nature +of boys. + +"Well, aunt," Tom said one day, after a lecture of this sort from her, +"I know you mean to be kind to us, but Peter and I have stood it on +that account, but we can't stand it much longer, and we shall run away +before long." + +"And where would you run to, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said calmly. + +"That is our affair," Tom said quite as coolly, "only I don't like to +do it without giving you warning. You mean kindly, I know, aunt, but +the way you are always going on at us from morning to night whenever +we are at home, and the way in which you allow us to be treated by +that tyrannical brute, is too much altogether." + +Miss Scudamore looked steadily at them. + +"I am doing, nephew, what I consider to be for your good. You are +willful, and violent, and headstrong. It is my duty to cure you, and +although it is all very painful to me, at my time of life, to have +such a charge thrust upon me, still, whatever it costs, it must be +done." + +For the next month Mr. Jones' life was rendered a burden to him. The +chimney-pots were shut up with sods placed on them, and the fireplaces +poured volumes of smoke into the rooms and nearly choked him. Night +after night the windows of his bedroom were smashed; cats were let +down the chimney; his water-butts were found filled with mud, and the +cord of the bucket of his well was cut time after time; the flowers +in his garden were dug up and put in topsy-turvy. He himself could not +stir out after dark without being tripped up by strings fastened a +few inches above the path; and once, coming out of his door, a string +fastened from scraper to scraper brought him down the steps with such +violence that the bridge of his nose, which came on the edge of a +step, was broken, and he was confined to his bed for three or four +days. In vain he tried every means to discover and punish the authors +of these provocations. A savage dog, the terror of the neighborhood, +was borrowed and chained up in the garden, but was found poisoned next +morning. + +Watchmen were hired, but refused to stay for more than one night, for +they were so harassed and wearied out that they came to the conclusion +that they were haunted. If they were on one side of the house a voice +would be heard on the other. After the first few attempts, they no +longer dared venture to run, for between each round strings were tied +in every direction, and they had several heavy falls, while as they +were carefully picking their way with their lanterns, stones struck +them from all quarters. If one ventured for a moment from the other's +side his lantern was knocked out, and his feet were struck from under +him with a sharp and unexpected blow from a heavy cudgel; and they +were once appalled by seeing a gigantic figure stalk across the grass, +and vanish in a little bush. + +At the commencement of these trials the schoolmaster had questioned +the boys, one by one, if they had any hand in the proceeding. + +All denied it. When it came to Tom Scudamore's turn, he said. "You +never do believe me, Mr. Jones, so it is of no use my saying that I +didn't do it; but if you ask Miss Scudamore, she will bear witness +that we were in bed hours before, and that there are bars on our +windows through which a cat could hardly get." + +The boys had never used Rhoda's room after the first night's +expedition, making their escape now by waiting until the house was +quiet, and then slipping along the passage to the spare room, and +thence by the window, returning in the same way. + +Under this continued worry, annoyance, and alarm, the schoolmaster +grew thin and worn, his school fell off more and more; for many of +the boys, whose rest was disturbed by all this racket, encouraged by +the example of the boys of the place who had already been taken away, +wrote privately to their friends. + +The result was that the parents of two or three more wrote to say +that their boys would not return after the holidays, and no one was +surprised when it became known that Mr. Jones was about to close his +school and leave the neighborhood. + +The excitement of the pranks that they had been playing had enabled +the boys to support the almost perpetual scoldings and complaints of +their aunt; but school once over, and their enemy driven from the +place, they made up their minds that they could no longer stand it. + +One day, therefore, when Rhoda had, as an extraordinary concession, +been allowed to go for a walk with them, they told her that they +intended to run away. + +Poor Rhoda was greatly distressed. + +"You see, Rhoda dear," Tom said, "although we don't like leaving you, +you will really be happier when we are gone. It is a perpetual worry +to you to hear aunt going on, on, on--nagging, nagging, nagging for +ever and ever at us. She is fond of you and kind to you, and you +would get on quietly enough without us, while now she is in a fidget +whenever you are with us, and is constantly at you not to learn +mischief and bad ways from us. Besides you are always in a fright now, +lest we should get into some awful scrape, as I expect we should if +we stopped here. If it weren't for you, we should not let her off as +easily as we do. No, no, Rhoda, it is better for us all that we should +go." + +Poor Rhoda, though she cried bitterly at the thought of losing her +brothers, yet could not but allow to herself that in many respects she +should be more happy when she was freed from anxiety, lest they should +get into some scrape, and when her aunt would not be kept in a state +of continued irritation and scolding. She felt too that, although she +herself could get on well enough in her changed life, that it was very +hard indeed for the boys, accustomed as they had been to the jolly and +independent life of a public school, and to be their own master during +the holidays, with their ponies, amusements, and their freedom to come +and go when they chose. Rhoda was a thoughtful child, and felt that +nothing that they could go through could do them more harm or make +them more unhappy than they now were. She had thought it all over day +after day, for she was sure that the boys would, sooner or later come +to it, and she had convinced herself that it was better for them. +Still it was with a very sad heart that she found that the time had +come. + +For some time she cried in silence, and then, drying her eyes, she +said, trying to speak bravely, though her lips quivered. + +"I shall miss you dreadfully, boys; but I will not say a word to keep +you here, for I am sure it is very, very bad for you. What do you mean +to do? Do you mean to go to sea?" + +"No, Rhoda; you see uncle was in the army, and used to talk to us +about that; and, as we have never seen the sea, we don't care for it +as some boys do. No, we shall try and go as soldiers." + +"But my dear Tom, they will never take you as soldiers; you are too +little." + +"Yes, we are not old enough to enlist at present," Tom said; "but we +might go in as buglers. We have thought it all over, and have been +paying old Wetherley, who was once in the band of a regiment, to teach +us the bugle, and he says we can sound all the calls now as well as +any bugler going. We did not like to tell you till we had made up our +minds to go; but we have gone regularly to him every day since the +first week we came here." + +"Then you won't have to fight, Tom," Rhoda said joyfully. + +"No," Tom said, in a rather dejected tone; "I am afraid they won't let +us fight; still we shall see fighting, which is the next best thing." + +"I heard in Warley yesterday that there will be a movement of the +army in Spain soon, and that some more troops will be sent out, and +we shall try and get into a regiment that is going." + +They talked very long and earnestly on their plans, and were so +engrossed that they quite forgot how time went, and got in late for +tea, and were terribly scolded in consequence. For once none of +them cared for the storm; the boys exulted over the thought that it +would be the last scolding they would have to suffer; and Rhoda had +difficulty in gasping down her tears at the thought that it was the +last meal that she would take with them, for they had settled that +they would start that very night. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +ENLISTED. + + +It was a bright moonlight night when the boys, after a sad farewell +from Rhoda, let themselves down from the window, and started upon +their journey. Each carried a bundle on a stick; each bundle contained +a suit of clothes, a few shirts and stockings, a pair of shoes, and a +pistol. The other pistols were carried loaded inside their jackets, +for there was no saying whom they might meet upon the road. They had +put on the oldest suit of clothes they possessed, so as to attract as +little attention as possible by the way. After they had once recovered +from their parting with Rhoda their spirits rose, and they tramped +along lightly and cheerfully. It was eleven o'clock when they started, +and through the night they did not meet a single person. Towards +morning they got under a haystack near the road, and slept for some +hours; then they walked steadily on until they had done twenty miles +since their start. They went into a small inn, and had some breakfast, +and then purchasing some bread and cold ham, went on through the town, +and leaving the London road, followed that leading to Portsmouth, and +after a mile or two again took up their quarters until evening, in a +haystack. + +It is not necessary to give the details of the journey to Portsmouth. +After the first two days' tramp, having no longer any fear of the +pursuit, which, no doubt, had been made for them when first missed, +they walked by day, and slept at night in sheds, or under haystacks, +as they were afraid of being questioned and perhaps stopped at inns. +They walked only short distances now, for the first night's long +journey had galled their feet, and, as Tom said, they were not pressed +for time, and did not want to arrive at Portsmouth like two limping +tramps. Walking, therefore, only twelve miles a day after the first +two days, they arrived at Portsmouth fresh and in high spirits. +They had met with no adventures upon the road, except that upon one +occasion two tramps had attempted to seize their bundles, but the +production of the pistols, and the evident determination of the boys +to use them if necessary, made the men abandon their intention and +make off, with much bad language and many threats, at which the boys +laughed disdainfully. + +Arrived at Portsmouth, their first care was to find a quiet little +inn, where they could put up. This they had little difficulty in +doing, for Portsmouth abounded with public-houses, and people were so +much accustomed to young fellows tramping in with their bundles, to +join their ships, that their appearance excited no curiosity whatever. +Tom looked older than he really was, although not tall for his age, +while Peter, if anything, overtopped his brother, but was slighter, +and looked fully two years younger. Refreshed by a long night's sleep +between sheets, they started out after breakfast to see the town, and +were greatly impressed and delighted by the bustle of the streets, +full of soldiers and sailors, and still more by the fortifications and +the numerous ships of war lying in the harbor, or out at Spithead. +A large fleet of merchantmen was lying off at anchor, waiting for a +convoy, and a perfect fleet of little wherries was plying backwards +and forwards between the vessels and the shore. + +"It makes one almost wish to be a sailor," Peter said, as they sat +upon the Southsea beach, and looked out at the animated ocean. + +"It does, Peter; and if it had been ten years back, instead of at +present, I should have been ready enough to change our plans. But what +is the use of going to sea now? The French and Spanish navies skulk in +harbor, and the first time our fellows get them out they will he sure +to smash them altogether, and then there is an end to all fighting. +No, Peter, it looks tempting, I grant, but we shall see ten times as +much with the army. We must go and settle the thing to-morrow. There +is no time to be lost if the expedition starts in a fortnight or three +weeks." + +Returning into the town, the boys were greatly amused at seeing a +sailor's wedding. Four carriages and pair drove along; inside were +women, while four sailors sat on each roof, waving their hats to the +passers-by, and refreshing themselves by repeated pulls at some black +bottles, with which they were well supplied. Making inquiries, the +boys found that the men belonged to a fine frigate which had come in a +day or two before, with several prizes. + +The next morning they went down to the barracks. Several +non-commissioned officers, with bunches of gay ribbons in their caps, +were standing about. Outside the gates were some boards, with notices, +"Active young fellows required. Good pay, plenty of prize-money, and +chances, of promotion!" + +The boys read several of these notices, which differed only from each +other in the name of the regiment; and then Tom gave an exclamation of +satisfaction as he glanced at a note at the foot of one of them, "Two +or three active lads wanted as buglers." + +"There we are, Peter; and, oh, what luck! it is Uncle Peter's +regiment! Look here, Peter," he said, after a pause, "we won't say +anything about being his nephews, unless there is no other way of +getting taken; for if we do it won't be nice. We shall be taken notice +of, and not treated like other fellows, and that will cause all sorts +of ill-feeling and jealousy, and rows. It will be quite time to say +who we are when we have done something to show that we shan't do +discredit to him. You see it isn't much in our favor that we are here +as two runaway boys. If we were older we could go as volunteers, but +of course we are too young for that." + +It should be mentioned that in those days it was by no means unusual +for young men who had not sufficient interest to get commissions to +obtain permission to accompany a regiment as volunteers. They paid +their own expenses, and lived with the officers, but did duty as +private soldiers. If they distinguished themselves, they obtained +commissions to fill up vacancies caused in action. + +"There is our sergeant, Tom; let's get it over at once." + +"If you please," Tom said, as they went up to the sergeant, "are you +the recruiting sergeant of the Norfolk Rangers?" + +"By Jove, Summers, you are in luck to-day," laughed one of the other +sergeants; "here are two valuable recruits for the Rangers. The +Mounseers will have no chance with the regiment with such giants as +those in it. Come, my fine fellows, let me persuade you to join the +15th. Such little bantams as you are would be thrown away upon the +Rangers." + +There was a shout of laughter from the other non-commissioned +officers. + +Tom was too much accustomed to chaffing bargees at Eton to be put out +of countenance. + +"We may be bantams," he said, "but I have seen a bantam lick a big +dunghill cock many a time. Fine feathers don't always make fine birds, +my man." + +"Well answered, young one," the sergeant of the Rangers said, while +there was a general laugh among the others, for the sergeant of the +15th was not a favorite. + +"You think yourself sharp, youngster," he said angrily. "You want a +licking, you do; and if you were in the 15th, you'd get it pretty +quickly." + +"Oh! I beg your pardon," Tom said gravely; "I did not know that the +15th were famous for thrashing boys. Thank you; when I enlist it shall +be in a regiment where men hit fellows their own size." + +There was a shout of laughter, and the sergeant, enraged, stepped +forward, and gave Tom a swinging box on the ear. + +There was a cry of "shame" from the others; but before any of them +could interfere, Tom suddenly stooped, caught the sergeant by the +bottom of the trousers, and in an instant he fell on his back with a +crash. + +For a moment he was slightly stunned, and then, regaining his feet, he +was about to rush at Tom, when the others threw themselves in between +them, and said he should not touch the boy. He struck him first, and +the boy had only given him what served him right. + +The sergeant was furious, and an angry quarrel was going on, when an +officer of the Rangers came suddenly out of barrack. + +"Hullo, Summers, what is all this about? I am surprised at you. A lot +of non-commissioned officers, just in front of the barrack gates, +quarreling like drunken sailors in a pothouse. What does it all mean?" + +"The fact is this, Captain Manley," the sergeant said, saluting, +"these two lads came up to speak to me, when Sergeant Billow chaffed +them. The lad gave the sergeant as good as he got, and the sergeant +lost his temper, and hit him a box on the ear, and in a moment the +young one tripped him up, and pretty nigh stunned him; when he got up +he was going at the boy, and, of course, we wouldn't have it." + +"Quite right," Captain Manley said. "Sergeant Billow, I shall forward +a report to your regiment. Chaffing people in the street, and then +losing your temper, striking a boy, and causing a disturbance. Now, +sergeant," he went on, as the others moved away, "do you know those +boys?" + +"No, sir; they are strangers to me." + +"Do you want to see the sergeant privately, lads, or on something +connected with the regiment?" + +"I see that you have vacancies for buglers, sir," Tom said, "and my +brother and myself want to enlist if you will take us." + +Captain Manley smiled. "You young scamps, you have got 'runaway from +home' as plainly on your faces as if it was printed there. If we +were to enlist you, we should be having your friends here after you +to-morrow, and get into a scrape for taking you." + +"We have no friends who will interfere with us, sir, I can give you my +word of honor as a gentleman." Captain Manley laughed. "I mean," Tom +said confused, "my word of honor, as--as an intending bugler." + +"Indeed we have no one to interfere with us in any way, sir," Peter +put in earnestly. "We wouldn't tell a lie even to enlist in the +Rangers." + +Captain Manley was struck by the earnestness of the boys' faces, and +after a pause he said to the sergeant,-- + +"That will do, Summers; I will take these lads up to my quarters and +speak to them." + +Then, motioning to the boys to follow him, he re-entered the barracks, +and led the way up to his quarters. + +"Sit down," he said, when they had entered his room. "Now, boys, this +is a foolish freak upon your part, which you will regret some day. Of +course you have run away from school." + +"No, sir, we have run away from home," Tom said. + +"So much the worse," Captain Manley said gravely. "Tell me frankly, +why did you do so? No unkindness at home can excuse boys from running +away from their parents." + +"We have none, sir," Tom said. "We have lost them both--our mother +many years ago, our father six months. Our only living relation, +except a younger sister, is an aunt, who considers us as nuisances, +and who, although meaning to do her duty, simply drives us out of our +minds." + +Captain Manley could not resist a smile. "Do you not go to school?" + +"We did go to a school near, but unfortunately it is broken up." + +Captain Manley caught a little look of amusement between the boys. "I +should not be surprised if you had something to do with its breaking +up," he said with a laugh. "But to return to your coming here. There +is certainly less reason against your joining than I thought at first, +but you are too young." + +"We are both strong, and are good walkers," Tom said. + +"But you cannot be much over fifteen," Captain Manley said, "and your +brother is younger." + +"We are accustomed to strong exercise, sir, and can thrash most +fellows of our own size." + +"Very likely," Captain Manley said, "but we can't take that into +consideration. You are certainly young for buglers for service work; +however, I will go across with you to the orderly-room, and hear what +the colonel says." + +Crossing the barrack-yard, they found the colonel was in and +disengaged. + +"Colonel Tritton," Captain Manley said, "these lads want to enlist as +buglers." + +The colonel looked up and smiled. "They look regular young pickles," +he said. "I suppose they have run away from school." + +"Not from school, colonel. They have lost both parents, and live with +an aunt, with whom they don't get on well. There does not seem to be +much chance of their being claimed." + +"You are full young," the colonel said, "and I think you will be +sorry, boys, for the step you want to take." + +"I don't think so, sir," Tom said. + +"Of course, you don't at present," the colonel said. "However, that is +your business. Mind, you will have a rough time of it; you will have +to fight your way, you know." + +"I'll back them to hold their own," Captain Manley said, laughing. +"When I went out at the barrack-gate just now there was a row among a +lot of recruiting sergeants, and when I went up to put a stop to it, I +found that a fellow of the 15th had chaffed these boys when they went +up to speak to Summers, and that they had got the best of it in that +line; and the fellow having lost his temper and struck one of them, he +found himself on his back on the pavement. The boy had tripped him up +in an instant." + +The colonel laughed, and then said suddenly and sharply to Peter, +"Where did you learn that trick, youngster?" + +"At Eton," Peter answered promptly, and then colored up hotly at his +brother's reproachful glance. + +"Oh, ho! At Eton, young gentlemen, eh!" the colonel said. "That +alters the matter. If you were at Eton your family must be people of +property, and I can't let you do such a foolish thing as enlist as +buglers." + +"Our father lost all his money suddenly, owing to a blackguard he +trusted cheating him. He found it out, and it killed him," Tom said +quietly. + +The colonel saw he was speaking the truth. "Well, well," he said +kindly, "we must see what we can do for you, boys. They are young, +Manley, but that will improve, and by the time that they have been a +year at the depot--" + +"Oh, if you please, colonel," Tom said, "we want to go on foreign +service, and it's knowing that your regiment was under orders for +foreign service we came to it." + +"Impossible!" the colonel said shortly. + +"I am very sorry for that, sir," Tom said respectfully, "for we would +rather belong to this regiment than any in the service; but if you +will not let us go with it we must try another." + +"Why would you rather belong to us than to any other?" the colonel +asked, as the boys turned to leave the room. + +"I had rather not say, sir," Tom said. "We have a reason, and a very +good one, but it is not one we should like to tell." + +The colonel was silent for a minute. He was struck with the boys' +appearance and manner, and was sorry at the thought of losing them, +partly from interest in themselves, partly because the sea service was +generally so much more attractive to boys, that it was not easy to get +them to enlist as buglers and drummers. + +"You see, lads, I should really like to take you, but we shall be +starting in a fortnight, and it would be altogether impossible for you +to learn to sound the bugle, to say nothing of learning the calls, by +that time." + +"We can't play well, sir," Tom answered, his spirits rising again, +"but we have practiced for some time, and know a good many of the +calls." + +"Oh, indeed!" the colonel said, pleased; "that alters the case. Well, +lads, I should like to take you with the regiment, for you look +straightforward, sharp young fellows. So I will enlist you. Work hard +for the next fortnight, and if I hear a favorable report of you by +that time, you shall go." + +"Thank you very much," the boys said warmly, delighted to find their +hopes realized. + +"What are your names?" the colonel asked. + +"Tom and Peter," Tom answered. + +"Tom and Peter what?" the colonel said. + +The boys looked at each other. The fact that they would of course +be asked their names had never occurred to them, and they not had +therefore consulted whether to give their own or another name. + +"Come, boys," Colonel Tritton said good-temperedly, "never be ashamed +of your names; don't sail under false colors, lads. I am sure you will +do nothing to disgrace your names." + +Tom looked at Peter, and saw that he agreed to give their real names, +so he said, "Tom and Peter Scudamore." + +"Peter Scudamore! Why, Manley, these boys must be relations of the +dear old colonel. That explains why they chose the regiment. Now, +boys, what relation was he of yours?" + +"I do not admit that he was a relation at all, colonel," Tom said +gravely, "and I hope that you will not ask the question. Supposing +that he had been a relation of ours, we should not wish it to be +known. In the first place, it would not be altogether creditable to +his memory that relations of his should be serving as buglers in +his old regiment; and in the second place, it might be that, from +a kindness towards him, some of the officers might, perhaps, treat +us differently to other boys, which would make our position more +difficult by exciting jealousy among others. Should there be any +relation between him and us, it will be time enough for us to claim +it when we have shown ourselves worthy of it." + +"Well said, boys," the officers both exclaimed. "You are quite right," +the colonel went on, "and I respect your motive for keeping silence. +What you say about jealousy which might arise is very sensible and +true. At the same time, I will promise you that I will keep my eye +upon you, and that if an opportunity should occur in which I can give +you a chance of showing that there is more in you than in other boys, +be sure you shall have the chance." + +"Thank you very much indeed, colonel," both boys exclaimed. + +"Now, Manley, I shall be obliged if you will take them to the +adjutant, and tell him to swear them in and attest them in regular +form; the surgeon will, of course, examine them. Please tell the +quartermaster to get their uniforms made without loss of time; and +give a hint to the bugle-major that I should be pleased if he will pay +extra attention to them, and push them on as fast as possible." + +Captain Manley carried out these instructions, the boys were duly +examined by the surgeon and passed, and in half an hour became His +Majesty's servants. + +"Now, boys," Captain Manley said as he crossed with them to the +quarters of the bandmaster, "you will have rather a difficult course +to steer, but I have no doubt you will get through it with credit. +This is something like a school, and you will have to fight before you +find your place. Don't be in a hurry to begin; take all good-natured +chaff good-naturedly; resent any attempt at bullying. I have no doubt +you will be popular, and it is well that you should be so, for then +there will be no jealousy if your luck seems better than that of +others. They will, of course, know that you are differently born and +educated to themselves, but they will not like you any the worse for +that, if they find that you do not try to keep aloof from them or give +yourselves airs. And look here, boys, play any tricks you like with +the men, but don't do it with the non-commissioned officers. There is +nothing they hate so much as impudence from the boys, and they have +it in their power to do you a great deal of good or of harm. You will +not have much to do with the bandmaster. Only a portion of the band +accompanies us, and even that will be broken up when we once enter +upon active campaigning. Several of the company buglers have either +left lately, or have got their stripes and given up their bugles, and +I do not fancy that their places will be filled up before we get out +there. Now, your great object will be to get two of these vacancies. I +am afraid you are too young, still there will be plenty more vacancies +after we are once in the field, for a bullet has no respect for +buglers; and you see the better you behave the better your chance of +being chosen." + +"What is the difference exactly, sir?" Tom asked. + +"The company bugler ranks on the strength of the company, messes, +marches, and goes into action with them; the other buglers merely form +part of the band, are under the bandmaster, play at the head of the +regiment on its march, and help in the hospitals during a battle." + +"Macpherson," he said as he entered the bandmaster's quarters, where a +number of men and a few lads were practicing, "I have brought you two +lads who have entered as buglers." + +The bandmaster was a Scotchman--a stiff-looking, elderly man. + +"Weel, Captain Manley, I'm wanting boys, but they look vera young, and +I misdoubt they had better have been at school than here. However, +I'll do my best with them; they look smart lads, and we shall have +plenty of time at the depot to get them into shape." + +"Lots of time, Macpherson, lots of time. They say they know a few +calls on the bugle, so perhaps they had better stick to the calls at +present; you will have plenty of time to begin with them regularly +with the notes when all the bustle is over." + +"Eh, ye know the calls, boys? Hardy and Graves, give them your bugles, +and let us hear them. Now for the advance." + +Tom and Peter felt very nervous, but they had really practiced hard +for an hour a day for the last four months, and could play all the +calls they knew steadily and well. The bandmaster made no remark until +they had sounded some half a dozen calls as he named them, and then +he said, "The lads have a vera gude idea of it, Captain Manley. They +are steadier and clearer than mony a one of the boys already. Will ye +begin at once, lads, or will ye wait till ye get your uniform?" + +"We had rather begin at once," the boys answered together. + +"Vera gude. Hardy, take two bugles out of the chest, and then take +these lads--What's your name, boys? Eh? Scudamore? A vera gude +name--take them over to Corporal Skinner, he will be practicing with +the others on the ramp." + +With a word of grateful thanks to Captain Manley as he went out before +them, the boys followed their new guide out to the ramparts. A guide +was hardly necessary, for an incessant bugling betokened the place, +where, in one of the bastions behind the barracks, seven or eight +buglers were sounding the various calls under the direction of +Corporal Skinner. + +The corporal was a man of few words, for he merely nodded when the +boy--who had not opened his lips on the way, indeed, he was too busy +wondering who these young swells were, and what they had run away for, +to say a word--gave the bandmaster's message to the effect that the +new-comers knew some of the calls and were to be under his tuition for +the present, pointed to them where to stand, and in another minute Tom +and Peter were hard at work adding to the deafening din. After half +an hour's practice they were pleased at seeing Captain Manley stroll +up and call their instructor aside, and they felt sure that he was +speaking to him of them. This was so, for the officer was carrying out +the instructions he had received from Colonel Tritton. + +"Corporal," he said, "I want to say a word to you about those boys who +have just joined. They seem to have a fair idea of the calls." + +"Yes, sir, they only know a few, but those they do know they can sound +as well as any of them." + +"That is right, corporal. Now look here, what I am going to say is not +to go farther, you understand." + +"Yes, sir, I will keep my mouth shut." + +"Very well. You can see the lads are not like most of our band boys. +They are a gentleman's sons who have got into some scrape or other and +run away from school." + +"I was thinking as much, sir." + +"The colonel believes that he knows their family, Skinner; but of +course, that will not make any difference in regard to them. Still he +would be pleased, I know, if they could sound the calls well enough to +go with the regiment. They are most anxious to learn. Now I shall be +glad if you can get them up to the mark. It will, of course, entail a +lot of extra trouble upon you, but if you can get them fit in time, I +will pay you a couple of guineas for your extra time." + +"Thank you, sir," the corporal saluted. "I think I can manage it--at +any rate if I don't it won't be for want of trying." + +"Who are those nice-looking lads I saw with you, Manley?" Major James +asked as the captain came into the messroom to lunch. + +"Those are two buglers in his Majesty's Norfolk Rangers." + +There was a general laugh. + +"No, but really, Manley, who are they? I was quite struck with them; +good style of boys." + +"It is a fact, major. Harding will tell you so," and he nodded to the +adjutant. + +"Yes, Manley is saying the thing that's right," the adjutant answered. +"The doctor passed them, and I swore them in." + +"I am sorry for it," the major said. "There were three or four of us +standing on the mess-room steps and we all noticed them. They were +gentlemen, if I ever saw one, and a hard life they will have of it +with the band boys. However, they are not likely to stay there. They +have run away from school, of course, and will be claimed. I wonder +you enlisted them." + +"The colonel's orders, major," the adjutant said. "Manley took them to +him, I believe, and then brought them to me." + +"I don't think you need feel anxious about them among the boys, +major," Captain Manley said. "I fancy they can hold their own. I +found them outside the gate where a row was going on among some of +the recruiting sergeants, and one of those boys had just tripped up +a sergeant of the 15th and nearly broken his head." + +There was a general laugh. + +"They are quite interesting, these prodigies of yours, Manley. How did +the boy do it? I should not have thought him strong enough to have +thrown a man off his balance." + +"I asked Summers about it afterwards," Captain Manley said, "the +fellow gave one of the boys a box on the ear, and in an instant the +boy stooped, caught his foot and pulled it forward and up. The thing +was done in a moment, and the sergeant was on his back before he knew +what's what." + +"By Jove," a young ensign said, "I have seen that trick done at Eton." + +"That is just where the boy said he learnt it," Captain Manley said. +"The colonel asked him suddenly, and it slipped out." + +"If they're Etonians, I ought to know them," the ensign said. "I only +left six months ago. What are their names?" + +"Their name is Scudamore." + +"By Jove, they were in the same house with me. Uncommonly sharp little +fellows, and up to no end of mischief. It was always believed, though +no one could prove it, that they were the boys who nearly suffocated +the bargee." + +There was a roar of laughter. + +"Tell us all about, Carruthers." + +"Well, there was not very much known about it. It seems the fellow +purposely upset a boat with four or five of our fellows in it, and +that night a dozen lighted crackers were thrown down into the little +cabin where the fellow was asleep; the hatch was fastened and he +was sent drifting down stream with the crackers exploding all about +him. The smoke nearly suffocated the fellow, I believe There was a +tremendous row about it, but they could not bring it home to any one. +We always put it down to the Scudamores, though they never would own +to it; but they were the only fellows in the boat who would have done +it, and they were always up to mischief." + +"But what makes them come here as buglers?" the major asked. + +"Their father was a banker, I believe, down in the Eastern Counties +somewhere. He died suddenly in the middle of the half before I left, +and they went away to the funeral and never came back again." + +"The fact is," Captain Manley said, "I fancy by what they say, though +they did not mention their father was a banker, that he lost all his +money suddenly and died of the shock. At any rate they are alone +in the world, and the colonel has no doubt that they are some +relation--nephews, I should imagine--of Peter Scudamore, who was our +colonel when I joined. One of them is called Peter. They acknowledged +that they had a particular reason for choosing this regiment; but +they would neither acknowledge or deny that he was a relation. Now +that we know their father was a banker, we shall find out without +difficulty--indeed I have no doubt the colonel will know whether Peter +Scudamore had a brother a banker." + +"What's to be done, Manley?" Major James said. "I don't like the +thought of poor old Peter's nephews turning buglers. All of us field +officers, and the best part of you captains, served under him, and +a better fellow never stepped. I think between us we might do +something." + +"I would do anything I could," Carruthers said, "and there are Watson +and Talbot who were at Eton too. Dash it, I don't like to think of two +Etonians in a band," "You are all very good," Captain Manley said, +"but from what I see of the boys they will go their own way. They have +plenty of pride, and they acknowledge that their reason for refusing +to say whether they are any relation of the colonel was that they +did not want to be taken notice of or treated differently from other +boys, because it would cause jealousy, and make their position more +difficult. All they asked was that they might accompany the regiment, +and not remain behind at the depot; and as, fortunately, they have +both been practising with the bugle, and can sound most of the calls +as well as the others, the colonel was able to grant their request. +Had they been older, of course, we could have arranged for them to go +with us as volunteers, we who knew the colonel, paying their expenses +between us: as it is, the only thing we can do for them--and that is +what they would like best is to treat them just like the other boys, +but to give them every chance of distinguishing themselves. If they +don't get knocked over, they ought to win a commission before the +campaign is over." + +In the meantime Tom and Peter had been introducing themselves to the +regiment. The exercise over, they had returned to dinner. It was a +rough meal, but the boys enjoyed it, and after it was over a number +of the men of the band, with whom they messed, crowded round to ask +the usual questions of new-comers--their curiosity heightened in the +present instance by the fact that the boys differed so widely from +ordinary recruits. + +"Look here," Tom said, laughing, "I can't answer you all at once, but +if you put me on the table I will tell you all about us." + +There was a general laugh, and many of the soldiers other than the +band sauntered up to see what was going on. + +"The first thing to tell you," Tom said, "is our names. We go by the +names of Tom and Peter Scudamore, but I need scarcely tell you that +these are not our real names. The fact is--but this is quite a +secret--we are the eldest sons of Sir Arthur Wellesley--" + +Here Tom was interrupted by a shout of laughter. + +"Sir Arthur," Tom went on calmly, "wished to make us colonels of two +of the Life Guard regiments, but as they were not going on foreign +service we did not see it, and have accordingly entered the regiment +which Sir Arthur, our father, in speaking to a friend, said was the +finest in the service--namely, the Norfolk Rangers. We believe that +it is the custom, upon entering a regiment, to pay our footing, and I +have given a guinea to Corporal Skinner, and asked him to make it go +as far as he could." + +There was great laughter over Tom's speech, which was just suited to +soldiers, and the boys from that moment were considered part of the +regiment. + +"There's good stuff in those boys," an old sergeant said to another, +"plucky and cool. I shouldn't be surprised if what Tom Dillon said +was about right; he was waiting at mess just now, and though he didn't +hear all that was said, he picked up that there was an idea that +these boys are related to the old colonel. He was a good fellow, he +was, and, though I say nothing against Colonel Tritton, yet we missed +Colonel Scudamore terribly. Strict, and yet kind, just the sort of +fellow to serve under. If the boys take after him they will be a +credit to the regiment, and mark my words, we shan't see them in the +band many years." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +A TOUGH CUSTOMER. + + +Like most boys who are fond of play, Tom and Peter Scudamore were +capable of hard work at a pinch, and during the three weeks that +they spent at Portsmouth they certainly worked with a will. They had +nothing to do in the way of duty, except to practice the bugle, and +this they did with a zeal and perseverance that quite won the heart +of Corporal Skinner, and enabled him to look upon Captain Manley's +two guineas as good as earned. But even with the best will and the +strongest lungs possible, boys can only blow a bugle a certain number +of hours a day. For an hour before breakfast, for two hours before +dinner, and for an hour and a half in the evening they practiced, the +evening work being extra, alone with their instructor. There remained +the whole afternoon to themselves. Their employment of those hours had +been undertaken at Peter's suggestion. + +"Look here, Tom," he said, at the end of the first day's work, "from +what the corporal says, we shall have from one till about five to +ourselves. Now, we are going to Spain, and it seems to me that it +would be of great use to us, and might do us a great deal of good, to +know something of Spanish. We have got four pounds each left, and I +don't think that we could lay it out better than in getting a Spanish +master and some books, and in setting to in earnest at it. If we work +with all our might for four hours a day with a master, we shall have +made some progress, and shall pick up the pronunciation a little. I +dare say we shall be another ten days or a fortnight on the voyage, +and shall have lots of time on our hands. It will make it so much +easier to pick it up when we get there if we know a little to start +with." + +"I think it is a capital idea, Peter; I should think we are pretty +sure to find a master here." + +There was no difficulty upon that score, for there were a large number +of Spanish in England at the time; men who had left the country rather +than remain under the French yoke, and among them were many who were +glad to get their living by teaching their native language. There were +two or three in this condition in Portsmouth, and to one of these the +boys applied. He was rather surprised at the application from the two +young buglers--for the uniforms were finished twenty-four hours after +their arrival--but at once agreed to devote his whole afternoons to +them. Having a strong motive for their work, and a determination +to succeed in it, the boys made a progress that astonished both +themselves and their teacher, and they now found the advantage of +their grounding in Latin at Eton. Absorbed in their work, they saw +little of the other boys, except at meals and when at practice. + +One evening when at supper, one of the buglers, named Mitcham, a lad +of nearly eighteen, made some sneering remark about boys who thought +themselves above others, and gave themselves airs. Tom saw at once +that this allusion was meant for them, and took the matter up. + +"I suppose you mean us, Mitcham. You are quite mistaken; neither my +brother nor myself think ourselves better than any one, nor have we +any idea of giving ourselves airs. The fact is--and I am not surprised +that you should think us unsociable--we are taking lessons in Spanish. +If we go with the regiment it will be very useful, and I have heard +it said that any one who lands in a foreign country, and who knows a +little of the grammar and pronunciation, will learn it in half the +time that he would were he altogether ignorant of both. I am sorry +that I did not mention it before, because I can understand that it +must seem as if we did not want to be sociable. I can assure you that +we do; and that after this fortnight is over we shall be ready to be +as jolly as any one. You see we are altogether behindhand with our +work now, and have got to work hard to put ourselves on your level." + +Tom spoke so good-temperedly that there was a general feeling in his +favor, and several of them who had before thought with Mitcham, that +the new-comers were not inclined to be sociable, felt that they had +been mistaken. There was, however, a general feeling of surprise +and amusement at the idea of two boys voluntarily taking lessons in +Spanish. Mitcham, however, who was a surly-tempered young fellow, and +who was jealous of the progress which the boys were making, and of the +general liking with which they seemed to be regarded, said,-- + +"I believe that's only an excuse for getting away from us." + +"Do you mean to say that you think that I am telling a lie?" Tom asked +quietly. + +"Yes, if you put it in that way, young 'un," Mitcham said. + +"Hold your tongue, Mitcham, or I'll pull your ears for you," Corporal +Skinner said: but his speech was cut short by Tom's putting one hand +on the barrack table, vaulting across it, and striking Mitcham a heavy +blow between the eyes. + +There was a cry of "a fight!" among the boys, but the men interfered +at once. + +"You don't know what you are doing, young 'un," one said to Tom; +"when you hit a fellow here, you must fight him. That's the rule, and +you can't fight Mitcham; he's two years older, at least, and a head +taller." + +"Of course I will fight him," Tom said. "I would fight him if he were +twice as big, if he called me a liar." + +"Nonsense, young 'un!" another said, "it's not possible. He was wrong, +and if you had not struck him I would have licked him myself; but as +you have done so, you had better put up with a thrashing, and have +done with it." + +"I should think so, indeed!" Tom said disdainfully. "I may get a +licking; I dare say I shall; but it won't be all on one side. Look +here, Mitcham, we will have it out to-morrow, on the ramparts behind +the barracks. But, if you will apologize to me for calling me a liar, +I'll say I am sorry I hit you." + +"Oh, blow your sorrow!" the lad said. "I'll give you the heartiest +licking you ever had in your life, my young cock." + +"Oh, all right," Tom said cheerfully. "We will see all about it when +the time comes." + +As it was evident now that there was no way out of it, no one +interfered further in the matter. Quarrels in the army are always +settled by a fair fight, as at school; but several of the older men +questioned among themselves whether they ought to let this go on, +considering that Tom Scudamore was only between fifteen and sixteen, +while his opponent was two years older, and was so much heavier and +stronger. However, as it was plain that Tom would not take a thrashing +for the blow he had struck, and there did not seem any satisfactory +way out of it, nothing was done, except that two or three of them went +up to Mitcham, and strongly urged him to shake hands with Tom, and +confess that he had done wrong in giving him the lie. This Mitcham +would not hear of, and there was nothing further to be done. + +"I am afraid, Tom, you have no chance with that fellow." Peter said, +as they were undressing. + +"No chance in the world, Peter; but I can box fairly, you know, and am +pretty hard. I shall be able to punish him a bit, and you may be sure +I shall never give in. It's no great odds getting a licking, and I +suppose that they will stop it before I am killed. Don't bother about +it. I had rather get knocked about in a fight than get flogged at Eton +any day. I would rather you did not come to see it, Peter, if you +don't mind. When you fought Evans it hurt me ten times as much as if I +had been fighting, and, although you licked him, it made me feel like +a girl. I can stand twice the punishment if I don't feel that any blow +is hitting you as well as myself." + +Tom's prediction about the fight turned out to be nearly correct. He +was more active, and a vastly better boxer than his antagonist, and +although he was constantly knocked down, he punished him very heavily +about the face. In fact, the fight was exactly similar to that great +battle, fifty years afterwards, between Sayers and Heenan. Time after +time Tom was knocked down, and even his second begged him to give in, +but he would not hear of it. Breathless and exhausted, but always +cool and smiling, he faced his heavy antagonist, eluding his furious +rushes, and managing to strike a few straight blows at his eyes before +being knocked down. By the time that they had fought a quarter of +an hour half the regiment was assembled, and loud were the cheers +which greeted Tom each time he came up, very pale and bleeding, but +confident, against his antagonist. + +At last an old sergeant came forward. "Come," he said, "there has been +enough of this. You had better stop." + +"Will he say he was sorry he called me a liar?" Tom asked. + +"No, I won't," Mitcham answered. + +The sergeant was about to use his authority to stop it, when Tom said +to him, in a low voice: + +"Look, sergeant! please let us go on another five minutes. I think I +can stand that, and he can hardly see out of his eyes now. He won't +see a bit by that time." + +The sergeant hesitated, but a glance at Tom's antagonist convinced him +that what he said was correct. Mitcham had at all times a round and +rather puffy face, and his cheeks were now so swollen with the effect +of Tom's straight, steady hitting, that he could with difficulty see. + +It was a hard five minutes for Tom, for his antagonist, finding that +he was rapidly getting blind, rushed with fury upon him, trying to end +the fight. Tom had less difficulty in guarding the blows, given wildly +and almost at random, but he was knocked down time after time by the +mere force and weight of the rush. He felt himself getting weak, and +could hardly get up from his second's knee upon the call of time. +He was not afraid of being made to give in, but he was afraid of +fainting, and of so being unable to come up to time. + +"Stick a knife into me; do anything!" he said to his second, "if I go +off, only bring me up to time. He can't hold out much longer." + +Nor could he. His hitting became more and more at random, until at +last, on getting up from his second's knee, Mitcham cried in a hoarse +voice, "Where is he? I can't see him!" + +Then Tom went forward with his hands down. "Look here, Mitcham, you +can't see, and I can hardly stand. I think we have both done enough. +We neither of us can give in, well because--because I am a gentleman, +you because you are bigger than I am; so let's shake hands, and say no +more about it." + +Mitcham hesitated an instant, and then held out his hand. "You are a +good fellow, Scudamore, and there's my hand; but you have licked me +fairly. I can't come up to time, and you can. There, I am sorry I +called you a liar." + +Tom took the hand, and shook it, and then a mist came over his eyes, +and his knees tottered, as, with the ringing cheers of the men in his +ears, he fainted into his second's arms. + +"What a row the men are making!" the major said, as the sound of +cheering came through the open window of the mess-room, at which the +officers were sitting at lunch. "It's a fight of course, and a good +one, judging by the cheering. Does any one know who it is between?" + +No one had heard. + +"It's over now," the adjutant said, looking out of the window, "Here +are the men coming down in a stream. They look very excited over it. I +wonder who it has been. Stokes," he said, turning to one of the mess +servants, "go out, and find out who has been fighting, and all about +it." + +In a minute or two the man returned. "It's two of the band boys, sir." + +"Oh, only two boys! I wonder they made such a fuss over that. Who are +they?" + +"One was one of the boys who have just joined, sir. Tom Scudamore, +they call him." + +"I guessed as much," Captain Manley laughed; "I knew they would not be +long here without a fight. Who was the other?" + +"Well, sir, I almost thought it must be a mistake when they told me, +seeing they are so unequally matched, but they all say so, so in +course it's true--the other was Mitcham, the bugler of No. 3 Company." + +"What a shame!" was the general exclamation, while Captain Manley got +up and called for his cap. + +"A brutal shame, I call it," he said hotly. "Mitcham's nearly a man. +It ought not to have been allowed. I will go and inquire after the +boy. I will bet five pounds he was pretty nearly killed before he gave +in." + +"He didn't give in, Captain Manley," the servant said. "He won the +fight. They fought till Mitcham couldn't see, and then young Scudamore +went up and offered to draw it, but Mitcham acknowledged he was fairly +licked. It was a close thing, for the boy fainted right off; but he's +come round now, and says he's all right." + +"Hurrah for Eton!" Carruthers shouted enthusiastically. "Hurrah! By +Jove, he is game, and no mistake. He won a hard fight or two at Eton, +but nothing like this. I call it splendid." + +"The boy might have been killed," the major said gravely; while the +younger officers joined in Carruthers's exclamation at Tom's pluck. +"It is shameful that it was allowed. I suppose the quarrel began in +their quarters. Sergeant Howden is in charge of the room, and ought to +have stopped it at once. Every non-commissioned officer ought to have +stopped it. I will have Howden up before the colonel to-morrow." + +"I think, major," Captain Manley said, "if you will excuse me, the +best plan, as far as the boy is concerned, is to take no notice of +it. As it is, he must have won the hearts of all the regiment by his +pluck, and if he is not seriously hurt, it is the very best thing, as +it has turned out, that could have happened. If any one gets into a +scrape about it, it might lessen the effect of the victory. I think if +you call Howden up, and give him a quiet wigging, it will do as well, +and won't injure the boys. What do you think?" + +"Yes, you are right, Manley, as it has turned out; but the boy might +have been killed. However, I won't do more than give Howden a hearty +wigging, and will then learn how the affair begun. I think, Dr. +Stathers, that it would be as well if you went round and saw both of +them. You had better, I think, order them into hospital for the night, +and then the boy can go to bed at once, and come out again to-morrow, +if he has, as I hope, nothing worse than a few bruises. Please come +back, and tell us how you find them." + +The report was favorable, and the next morning Tom came out of +hospital, and took his place as usual, with the party upon the +ramparts--pale, and a good deal marked, but not much the worse for his +battle; but it was some days before the swelling of his adversary's +face subsided sufficiently for him to return to duty. + +Tom's victory--as Captain Manley had predicted--quite won the hearts +of the whole regiment, and the nicknames of "Sir Tom," and "Sir +Peter"--which had been given to them in jest after Tom's speech +about Sir Arthur Wellesley--were now generally applied to them. The +conversation in the mess-room had got about, and the old soldiers who +had served under Colonel Scudamore would have done anything for the +lads, although, as yet, they were hardly known personally except to +the band, as their devotion to work kept them quite apart from the +men. + +It was just three weeks after they had joined before the order came +for embarkation, and a thrill of pleasure and excitement ran through +the regiment when it was known that they were to go on board in four +days. Not the least delighted were Tom and Peter. It had already been +formally settled that they were to accompany the regiment, and it +was a proof of the popularity that they had gained, that every one +looked upon their going as a matter of course, and that no comment +was excited even among those who were left behind. Three days before +starting they had met Captain Manley in the barrack-yard, and after +saluting, Tom said, "If you please, sir, we wanted to ask you a +question." + +"What is that, lads?" + +"If you please, sir, we understand that the boys of the band have +their bags carried for them, but the company buglers carry knapsacks, +like the men?" + +"Yes, boys; the company buglers carry knapsacks and muskets." + +"I am afraid we could not carry muskets and do much marching, sir, but +we have each a brace of pistols." + +Captain Manley smiled. "Pistols would not look the thing on a +parade-ground, boys; but in a campaign people are not very particular, +and I have no doubt the colonel will overlook any little breach of +strict uniformity in your cases, as it is evident you can't carry +muskets. You can use your pistols, I hope," he said with a smile. "Hit +a penny every time at twenty paces!" + +"No, sir, we can't do that," Tom said seriously. "We can hit a +good-sized apple nineteen times out of twenty." + +"The deuce you can!" Captain Manley said. "How did you learn to do +that?" + +"We have practiced twelve shots a day for the last six months, sir. We +were thinking of asking you, sir, if you would like to carry a brace +of them through the campaign. They are splendid weapons; and we shall +only carry one each. They would get rusty and spoil, if we left them +behind, and we should be very pleased to think they might be useful to +you, after your great kindness to us." + +"It is not a very regular thing, boys," Captain Manley said, "for a +captain to be borrowing a brace of pistols from two of his buglers; +but you are exceptional buglers, and there is something in what you +say about rusting. Besides, it is possible you may lose yours, so I +will accept your offer with thanks, with the understanding that I will +carry the pistols, and you shall have them again if anything happens +to yours. But how about the knapsacks?" + +"We were thinking of having two made of the regimental pattern, sir, +but smaller and lighter, if you think that it would be allowed." + +"Well, I think, boys, if you are allowed to carry pistols instead of +muskets, no great objection will be made as to the exact size of the +knapsacks. Yes, you can get them made, and I will speak to the colonel +about it." + +"Perhaps," he hesitated, "you may be in want of a little money; do +not hesitate if you do. I can let you have five pounds, and you +can pay me," he said with a laugh, "out of your share of our first +prize-money." + +The boys colored hotly. + +"No, thank you, Captain Manley; we have plenty of money. Shall we +bring the pistols to your quarters?" + +"Do, lads, I am going in to lunch now, and will be in in half an +hour." + +The boys at once went out and ordered their knapsacks. They had just +sold their watches, which were large, handsome, and of gold, and had +been given to them by their father when they went to Eton. They were +very sorry to part with them, but they agreed that it would be folly +to keep gold watches when the twenty pounds which they obtained for +them would buy two stout and useful silver watches and would leave +them twelve pounds in money. They then returned to barracks, took out +a brace of their pistols, carefully cleaned them, and removed the +silver plates upon the handles, and then walked across to Captain +Manley's quarters. + +Rather to their surprise and confusion they found five or six other +officers there, for Captain Manley had mentioned at lunch to the +amusement of his friends that he was going to be unexpectedly provided +with a brace of pistols, and several of them at once said that they +would go up with him to his quarters, as they wanted to see the boys +of whom they had spoken so much during the last fortnight. Tom and +Peter drew themselves up and saluted stiffly. + +"You need not be buglers here, boys," Captain Manley said. "This is +my room, we are all gentlemen, and though I could not, according +to the regulations, walk down the street with you, the strictest +disciplinarian would excuse my doing as I like here." + +The boys flushed with pleasure at Captain Manley's kind address, and +as he finished Carruthers stepped forward and shook them warmly by the +hand. + +"How are you both?" he said. "You have not forgotten me, I hope." + +"I had not seen you before. I did not know you were in the regiment, +Carruthers," the boys said warmly, pleased to find a face they +had known before; and then breaking off:--"I beg your pardon--Mr. +Carruthers." + +"There are no misters here as far as I am concerned, Scudamore. There +were no misters at Eton. This is a change, isn't it? Better than +grinding away at Greek by a long way. Well, I congratulate you on your +fight. You showed there was some good in dear old Eton still. I wish +you had let me know it was coming off. I would have given anything +to have seen it--from a distance, you know. If it had been the right +thing, I would have come and been your backer." + +There was a general laugh, and then the officers all began to talk to +the boys. They were quiet and respectful in their manners, and fully +confirmed the favorable report which Captain Manley had given of them. + +"Where are the pistols, boys?" their friend asked presently. + +"Here, sir," and the boys produced them from under their jackets. "We +have no case, sir; we were obliged to leave it behind us when we--" + +"Ran away," one of the officers said, laughing. + +"They are a splendid pair of pistols," Captain Manley said, examining +them; "beautifully finished, and rifled. They look quite new, too, +though, of course, they are not." + +"They are new, sir," Tom said; "we have only had them six months, and +they were new then." + +"Indeed," Captain Manley said surprised; "I thought, of course, they +were family pistols. Why, how on earth, if it is not an impertinent +question, did you boys get hold of two brace of such pistols as these? +I have no right to ask the question, boys. I see there has been a +plate on the handles. But you said you had no relations, and I was +surprised into asking." + +The boys colored. + +"The question was quite natural, sir; the pistols were presented to us +by some people we traveled with once; we took the plates off because +they made a great fuss about nothing, and we thought that it would +look cockey." + +There was a laugh among the officers at the boys' confusion. + +"No one would suspect you of being cockey, Scudamore," Captain Manley +said kindly; "come, let me see the plates." + +The boys took the little silver plates from their pockets and handed +them silently to Captain Manley, who read aloud, to the surprise of +those around him,--"'To Tom' and 'Peter,' they are alike except the +names. 'To Tom Scudamore, presented by the passengers in the Highflyer +coach on the 4th of August, 1808, as a testimony of their appreciation +of his gallant conduct, by which their property was saved from +plunder.' Why, what is this, you young pickles, what were you up to on +the 4th of August last year?" + +"There was nothing in it at all, sir," Tom said; "we were on the coach +and were stopped by highwaymen. One of the passengers had pistols, +but was afraid to use them, and hid them among the boxes. So when the +passengers were ordered to get down to be searched, we hid ourselves, +and when the highwaymen were collecting their watches, Peter shot one, +and I drove the coach over another. The matter was very simple indeed; +but the passengers saved their money, so made a great fuss about it." + +There was much laughter over Tom's statement, and then he had to +give a detailed account of the whole affair, which elicited many +expressions of approval. + +"It does you credit, boys," Captain Manley said, "and shows that you +are cool as well as plucky. One quality is as valuable as the other. +There is every hope that you will do the regiment credit, boys, and +you may be sure that we shall give you every chance. And now good-bye +for the present." + +"Good-bye, sir," Tom and Peter again drew themselves up, gave the +military salute, and went off to their comrades. + +For when the order came to prepare for the embarkation, both Spanish +and bugling were given up, and the boys entered into the pleasure +of the holiday with immense zest. They had no regimental duties to +perform beyond being present at parade. They had no packing to do, and +fewer purchases to make. A ball or two of stout string, for, as Peter +said, string is always handy, and a large pocket-knife, each with +a variety of blades, were the principal items. They had a ring put +to the knives, so that they could sling them round the waist. They +had, therefore, nothing to do but to amuse themselves, and this they +did with a heartiness which astonished the other boys, and proved +conclusively that they did not want to be unsociable. They hired a +boat for a sail and took five or six other boys across to Ryde, only +just returning in time for tattoo, and they played such a number of +small practical jokes, such as putting a handful of peas into the +bugles and other wind instruments, that the band-master declared that +he thought that they were all bewitched, and he threatened to thrash +the boys all round, because he could not find out who had done it. + +Especially angry was the man who played the big drum. This was a +gigantic negro, named Sam, a kind-hearted fellow, constantly smiling, +except when the thought of his own importance made him assume a +particularly grave appearance. He was a general favorite, although the +boys were rather afraid of him, for he was apt to get into a passion +if any jokes were attempted upon him, and of all offences the greatest +was to call him Sambo. Now none of the men ventured upon this, for +when he first joined, Sam had fought two or three desperate battles on +this ground, and his great strength and the insensibility of his head +to blows had invariably given him the victory. But, treated with what +he conceived proper respect, Sam was one of the best-tempered and +best-natured fellows in the regiment; and he himself, when he once +cooled down, was perfectly ready to join in the laugh against himself, +even after he had been most put out by a joke. + +The day before the regiment was to embark, the officers gave a lawn +party; a large number of ladies were present, and the band was, of +course, to play. The piece which the bandmaster had selected for the +commencement began with four distinct beats of the big drum. Just +before it began, Captain Manley saw Tom and Peter, who with some of +the other boys had brought the music-stands into the ground, with +their faces bright with anticipated fun. + +"What is the joke, boys?" he asked good-humoredly, as he passed them. + +"I can't tell you, sir," Tom said; "but if you walk up close to the +band, and watch Sam's face when he begins, you will be amused, I +think." + +"Those are regular young pickles," Captain Manley said to the lady +he was walking with; "they are Etonians who have run away from home, +and are up to all kinds of mischief, but are the pluckiest and most +straightforward youngsters imaginable. I have no doubt that they are +up to some trick with our black drummer." + +On their way to where the band was preparing to play, Captain Manley +said a word or two to several of the other officers, consequently +there was quite a little party standing watching the band when their +leader lifted his baton for the overture to begin. + +There was nothing that Sam liked better than for the big drum to +commence, and with his head thrown well back and an air of extreme +importance, he lifted his arm and brought it down with what should +have been a sounding blow upon the drum. To his astonishment and to +the surprise of all the band, no deep boom was heard, only a low +muffled sound. Mechanically Sam raised his other arm and let it fall +with a similar result. Sam looked a picture of utter astonishment and +dismay, with his eyes opened to their fullest, and he gave vent to a +loud cry, which completed the effect produced by his face, and set +most of those looking on, and even the band themselves, into a roar of +laughter. Sam now examined his sticks, they appeared all right to the +eye, but directly he felt them his astonishment was turned into rage. +They were perfectly soft. Taking out his knife he cut them open, and +found that the balls were merely filled with a wad of soft cotton, the +necessary weight being given by pieces of lead fastened round the end +of the stick inside the ball with waxed thread. + +Sam was too enraged to say more than his usual exclamation of +astonishment, "Golly!" and he held out his drumsticks to be examined +with the face of a black statue of surprise. + +Even the band-master was obliged to laugh as he took the sticks from +Sam's hand to examine them. + +"These are not your sticks at all, Sam," he said, looking closely at +them. "Here, boy," he called to Tom, who might have been detected from +the fact of his being the only person present with a serious face, +"run to the band-room and see if you can find the sticks." + +In a few minutes Tom returned with the real drumsticks, which, he +said truly, he had found on the shelf where they were usually kept. +After that things went on as usual; Sam played with a sulky fury. His +dignity was injured, and he declared over and over again that if he +could "find de rascal who did it, by jingo, I pound him to squash!" +and there was no doubt from his look that he thoroughly meant what he +said. However, no inquiries could bring to light the author of the +trick. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +OVERBOARD. + + +There were no lighter hearts than those of Tom and Peter Scudamore +on board the transport "Nancy," as, among the hearty cheers of the +troops on board, and the waving of hats and handkerchiefs from friends +who had come out in small boats to say good-bye for the last time, +she weighed anchor, and set sail in company with some ten or twelve +other transports, and under convoy of two ships of war. It would be +difficult to imagine a prettier scene. The guns fired, the bands of +the various regiments played, and the white sails opened out bright +in the sun as the sailors swarmed into the rigging, anxious to outvie +each other. Even the soldiers pulled and hauled at the ropes, and ran +round with the capstan bars to get the anchors apeak. Tom and Peter, +of course, had, like the other boys, got very much in the way in their +desire to assist, and, having been once or twice knocked over by the +rush of men coming along with ropes, they wisely gave it up, and +leaned over the side to enjoy the scene. + +"This is splendid, Tom, isn't it?" + +"Glorious, Peter; but it's blowing pretty strong. I am afraid that we +sha'n't find it quite so glorious when we get out of the shelter of +the island." + +Peter laughed. "No; I suppose we sha'n't all look as jolly as we do +now by night-time. However, the wind is nor'-westerly, which will help +us along nicely, if, as I heard one of the sailors say just now, it +does not go round to the south." + +"Bugler, sound companies one, two, and three to breakfast." + +The order interrupted the conversation, and, for the next hour, +the boys had little time for talk. Half the regiment was on board +the "Nancy," and, after breakfast, the men were divided into three +watches, of which one was always to be on deck, for the ship was very +crowded, and there was scarcely room for all the men to be below +together. The boys were in the same watch, for the day previous to +starting Tom had been appointed bugler to the 2d Company, Peter to the +3d. The 1st Company, or Grenadiers, were in the watch with the band, +the 2d and 3d Companies were together, and the 4th and 5th. + +Tom was very ill for the first two days of the voyage, while Peter did +not feel the slightest effects from the motion. Upon the third day the +wind dropped suddenly, and the vessels rolled heavily in the swell, +with their sails flapping against the masts. Tom came up that morning +upon deck feeling quite well again, and the boys were immensely amused +at seeing the attempts of the soldiers to move about, the sudden +rushes, and the heavy falls. A parade had been ordered to take place; +but as no one could have stood steady without holding on, it was +abandoned as impossible. The men sat about under the bulwarks, and a +few amused themselves and the rest by trying to play various games, +such as laying a penny on the deck, and seeing which would pitch +another to lay nearest to it, from a distance of five yards. The +difficulty of balancing oneself in a heavily rolling vessel, and of +pitching a penny with any degree of accuracy, is great, and the manner +in which the coins, instead of coming down flat and remaining there, +rolled away into the scuppers, the throwers not unfrequently following +them, produced fits of laughter. + +Tom was still feeling weak from his two days' illness, and was not +disposed actively to enter into the fun; but Peter enjoyed the heavy +rolling, and was all over the ship. Presently he saw Sam, the black +drummer, sitting in a dark corner below quietly asleep; his cap was +beside him, and the idea at once occurred to Peter that here was a +great opportunity for a joke. He made his way to the caboose, and +begged the cook to give him a handful of flour. The cook at first +refused, but was presently coaxed into doing so, and Peter stole to +where Sam was asleep, and put the flour into his cap, relying that, in +the darkness, Sam would put it on without noticing it. Then, going up +to the deck above, Peter put his head down the hatchway, and shouted +loudly, "Sam!" + +The negro woke at the sound of his name. "What is it?" he asked. +Receiving no reply, he got on to his feet, muttering, "Some one call +Sam, that for certain, can't do without Sam, always want here, want +there. I go up and see." + +So saying, he put on his cap, and made his way up to the upper deck. +As he stood at the hatchway and looked round, there was, first a +titter, and then a roar of laughter from the men sitting or standing +along by the bulwarks. In putting on his cap some of the flour had +fallen out, and had streaked his face with white. Sam was utterly +unconscious that he was the object of the laughter, and said to one of +the men nearest to him, "Who call Sam?" + +The man could not reply, but Tom, who was sitting close by, said, "It +was no one here, Sam, it must have been the bandmaster; there he is, +close to the quarter-deck." + +Sam made his way along towards the point indicated, and as he did so +some of the officers upon the quarter-deck caught sight of him. "Just +look at Sambo," Carruthers exclaimed, "somebody has been larking with +him again. Look how all the men are laughing, and he evidently has no +suspicion of the figure he is." + +The sergeant, who, the bandmaster having remained at the depot, was +now acting as chief of the band, did not see Sam until the latter was +close to him. "You want me, sergeant?" + +Sergeant Wilson looked up, and was astonished. + +"What on earth have you been doing to yourself, Sam?" he asked. + +"Me been having little nap down below," Sam said. + +"Yes; but your face, man. What have you been doing to your face?" + +Sam, in his turn, looked astonished. "Nothing whatsomeber, sargeant." + +"Take off your cap, man, and look inside it." Sam did as ordered; and +as he removed the cap, and the powder fell from it all over his face +and shoulders, there was a perfect shout of laughter from the soldiers +and crew, who had been looking on, and the officers, looking down from +the rail of the quarter-deck, retired to laugh unnoticed. + +The astonishment and rage of Sam were unbounded, and he gave a perfect +yell of surprise and fury. He stamped wildly for a minute or two, and +then, with a sudden movement rushed up on to the quarter-deck with +his cap in his hand. The colonel, who was holding on by the shrouds, +and talking with the major, in ignorance of what was going on, was +perfectly astounded at this sudden vision of the irate negro, and +neither he nor the major could restrain their laughter. + +"Scuse me, colonel, sah, for de liberty," Sam burst out; "but look at +me, sah; is dis right, sah, is it right to make joke like dis on de +man dat play de big drum of de regiment?" + +"No, no, Sam; not at all right," the colonel said, with difficulty. +"If you report who has played the trick upon you, I shall speak to him +very seriously; but, Sam, I should have thought that you were quite +big enough to take the matter in your own hands." + +"Me big enough, Massah Colonel, me plenty big; but me not able to find +him." + +"Well, Sam, it is carrying a joke too far; still, it is only a trick +off duty, and I am afraid that it is beyond my power to interfere." + +Sam thought for a moment, and, having by this time cooled down from +his first paroxysm of rage, he said, "Beg pardon, massa, you quite +right, no business of any one but Sam; but Sam too angry to 'top to +think. Scuse liberty, colonel," and Sam retired from the quarter-deck, +and made a bolt below down the nearest hatchway, when he plunged his +head into a bucket of water, and soon restored it to its usual ebony +hue. + +Then he went to the cook and tried to find out to whom he had given +flour, but the cook replied at once, "Lor, I've given flour to the men +of each mess to make puddings of, about thirty of them," and Sam felt +as far off as ever. + +Presently, however, a big sailor began to make fun of him, and Sam +retorted by knocking him down, after which there was a regular fight, +which was carried on under the greatest difficulty, owing to the +rolling of the ship. At last Sambo got the best of it, and this +restored him so thoroughly to a good temper that he was able to join +in the laugh at himself, reserving, however, his right to "knock de +rascal who did it into a squash." + +The following day the weather changed, a wind sprang up nearly from +the north, which increased rapidly, until toward afternoon it was +blowing half a gale, before which the whole fleet, with their main +and topsails set, ran southward at great speed. A heavy cross sea was +running, the wares raised by the gale clashing with the heavy swell +previously rolling in from the westward, and so violent and sudden +were the lurches and rolls of the "Nancy" that the master feared that +her masts would go. + +"How tremendously she rolls, Tom." + +"Tremendously; the deck seems almost upright, and the water right +under our feet each time she goes over. She feels as if she were going +to turn topsy-turvy each roll. It's bad enough on deck; but it will be +worse down below." + +"A great deal worse, Peter, it's nearly dark already; it will strike +eight bells in a minute or two, and then we shall have to go down. +There's no danger, of course, of the ship turning over, but it won't +be pleasant down below. Look out, Peter!" + +The exclamation was caused by an awful crash. The ship had given a +tremendous lurch, when the long-boat, which was stowed amidships, +suddenly tore away from its fastenings and came crashing down. +It passed within three feet of where the boys were sitting, and +completely tore away the bulwark, leaving a great gap in the side, +where it had passed through. "Look, Tom, Sam's overboard!" Peter +exclaimed. + +Sam had been sitting on the bulwark, a few feet from them, holding on +by a shroud, when the boat came down upon him; with a cry he had let +go of the shroud and started back, falling into the water just as the +boat struck the bulwark. "There he is, Tom," Peter said, as he saw the +black only a few yards from the side. "He is hurt, come on," catching +up the end of a long rope coiled up on the deck close to their feet, +the boys jumped overboard together. A dozen strokes took them up to +Sam; but the black hull of the ship had already glanced past them. +They could hear loud shouts, but could not distinguish a word. + +"Quick, round him, Peter!" and, in a moment, the boys twisted the rope +round the body of the black, and knotted it just as the drag of the +ship tightened it. Thus Sam's safety was secured, but the strain was +so tremendous as they tore through the water, that it was impossible +for the boys to hold on, and, in a moment, they were torn from their +hold. + +"All right, Peter," Tom said cheerily, as they dashed the water from +their eyes, "there is the boat." + +The remains of the boat were not ten yards distant, and in a few +strokes they had gained it. It was stove in and broken, but still held +together, floating on a level with the water's edge. With some trouble +the boys got inside her, and sat down on the bottom, so that their +heads were just out of water. + +Then they had time to look round. The ship was already disappearing in +the gathering darkness. + +"This boat will soon go to pieces, Tom," was Peter's first remark. + +"I expect it will, Peter; but we must stick to its pieces. We had +better get off our boots. The water is pretty warm, that's one +comfort." + +"Do you think the ship will come back for us, Tom?" + +"I don't think she can, Peter; at any rate, it is certain she can't +find us, it would take a long time to bring her round, and then, you +see, she could not sail straight back against the wind." + +"Look here, Tom, I remember when I climbed up to look into the boats +yesterday that there were some little casks lashed under the seats, +and a sailor told me they were always kept full of water in case the +boats were wanted suddenly. If they are still there we might empty +them out, and they could keep us afloat any time." + +"Hurrah! Peter, capital, let's see." + +To their great delight the boys found four small water-kegs fastened +under the seats. Three of these they emptied, and fastening one of +them to that which they had left full, and then each taking hold of +one of the slings which were fastened to the kegs for convenience of +carriage, they waited quietly. In less than ten minutes from the time +when they first gained their frail refuge, a great wave broke just +upon them, and completely smashed up the remains of the boat. They had +cut off some rope from the mast, which they found with its sail furled +ready for use in the boat, and now roughly lashed themselves together, +face to face, so that they had a keg on each side. They had also +fastened a long piece of rope to the other kegs, so that they would +float near them. + +It was a long and terrible night for them, generally their heads and +chests were well above the water, but at times a wave would break with +its white crest, and, for a time, the foam would be over their heads. +Fortunately the water was warm, and the wind fell a good deal. The +boys talked occasionally to each other, and kept up each other's +courage. Once or twice, in spite of the heavy sea, they were so much +overcome with exhaustion that they dozed uneasily for a while, with +their heads upon each other's shoulders, and great was their feeling +of relief and pleasure when morning began to break. + +"It is going to be a splendid day, Peter, and the wind is dropping +fast." + +"Look, Tom," Peter said, "there are some of the planks of the boat +jammed in with the kegs." + +It was as Peter said; the two kegs, one empty and the other full, were +floating about ten yards off, at the length of the rope by which they +were attached to the boys, while with them was a confused mass of +wreckage of the boat. + +"That is capital, Peter, we will see if we can't make a raft +presently." + +As the sun rose and warmed the air, the boys strength and spirits +revived, and in a few hours they were so refreshed that they +determined to set about their raft. The wind had now entirely dropped, +the waves were still very high, but they came in long, smooth, regular +swells, over which they rose and fell almost imperceptibly. + +"They must be rolling a good deal more in the 'Nancy' than we are +here, Peter. Now, the first thing is to have a drink. What a blessing +it is we have water." With their knives they soon got the bung out of +the water-keg, and each took a long drink, and then carefully closed +it up again. + +"There, Peter, we have drunk as much as we wanted this time; but we +must be careful, there is no saying how long we may be before we are +picked up. Hurrah, Peter, here are the masts and sails, so we shall +have plenty of cord." + +It took the boys nearly three hours to complete their task to their +satisfaction. When it was concluded they had the three empty kegs +lashed in a triangle about five feet apart, while two planks crossing +the triangle, assisted to keep all firm and tight; floating in the +center of the triangle was the keg of water. "There, I don't think +we can improve that, Peter," Tom said at last, "now, let us get on +and try it." They did so, and, to their great delight, found that +it floated a few inches above water. "We may as well get the masts +on board, Peter, and let the sails tow alongside. They may come in +useful; and now the first thing is to dry ourselves and our clothes." + +The clothes were soon spread out to dry, and the boys luxuriated in +the warmth of the sun. + +"What great, smooth waves these are, Tom, sometimes we are down in a +valley which runs miles long, and then we are up on a hill." + +"Here we lay, all the day, in the bay of Biscay, oh!" Tom laughed. +"I only hope that the wished-for morrow may bring the sail in sight, +Peter. However, we can hold on for a few days, I suppose. That is a +four-gallon keg, so that we have got a quart of water each for eight +days, and hunger isn't so bad to bear as thirst. We have pretty well +done for our uniforms, our bugles are the only things that have not +suffered." + +For the boys' companies being on deck at the time of the accident, +they both had their bugles on when they jumped overboard. + +"Our last upset was when that bargee canted us over at Eton, rather a +different business that, Peter." + +"My shirt is not dry yet, Tom; but I shall put it on again, for the +sun is too hot to be pleasant." + +Tom followed Peter's example. + +"Do you think, Tom, that we had better try to get up a sort of sail +and make for land, or remain where we are?" + +"Remain where we are, Peter, I should say. I suppose we must be a +hundred miles from the French coast, and even if the wind blew fair +we should be a long time getting there, and with the certainty of a +prison when we arrived. Still, if there were a strong west wind, I +suppose it would be our best way; as it is we have nothing to do but +to wait quietly, and hope for a ship. We are in the right line, and +there must be lots of vessels on their way, besides those which sailed +with us, for Portsmouth. So we must keep watch and watch. Now, Peter, +you lie down on that plank, it is just about long enough, you shall +have two hours' sleep, and then I'll have two, after that we will have +four hours each." + +"How are we to count time?" Peter said laughing. + +"I never thought of that," Tom said, looking at his watch. "Of course +it has stopped. We must guess as near as we can; at any rate, you go +to sleep first, and, when I am too sleepy to keep watch any longer, I +will wake you up." + +So passed that day and the next night. A light breeze sprung up from +the southwest, and the sun again shone out brightly. + +"I feel as if I wanted breakfast horribly," Peter said, with an +attempt at a smile. "Do you think that there is any possibility of +catching anything?" + +"We have nothing to make hooks with, Peter, and nothing to bait them +with if we had." + +"There are lots of tiny fish swimming all about, Tom, if we could but +catch them." + +Tom was silent for awhile; then he said, "Look here, Peter. Let us cut +a piece off the sail about five feet long, and say three feet wide, +double it longways, and sew up the ends so as to make a bag; we can +unravel some string, and make holes with our knives. Then we can sink +it down two or three feet, and watch it; and when we see that some +little fish have got in it, we can draw it up very gently, and, by +raising it gradually from the sea, the water will run out, and we +shall catch the fish." + +Peter agreed that at any rate it was worth trying; for, even if it did +not succeed, it was better for them to be doing something than sitting +idle. The sail and the floating wreckage were pulled alongside, and +the boys set to work. In three hours a large and shallow bag was made, +with some improvements upon Tom's original plan. The mouth was kept +open by two crossed pieces of wood, and four cords from the corners +were attached to the end of the oar which formed their fishing-rod. At +last it was finished, and the bag lowered. + +To the horror of the boys, it was discovered that it would not sink. +They were ready to cry with vexation, for the want of food had made +them feel faint and weak. + +"What have we got that is heavy?" Tom asked in despair. + +"I have got fourpence in halfpence, Tom, and there are our knives and +watches." + +Their pockets were ransacked, and the halfpence, knives, and watches +were placed in the bottom of the bag and lowered. Still the wood-work +kept afloat. + +"There are the bugles, Tom," Peter cried in delight. These had been +fastened to the raft, and were now hastily untied and placed in the +canvas bag. + +It sank now, and the boys lowered it five or six feet, so that they +could partly see into it. "There are lots of little fish swimming +about, Tom," Peter said in a whisper. "Some are almost as long as +one's hand. Do you think that they will go in, Tom?" + +"I hope the glitter of the bugles and watches will attract them, +Peter." + +"There, Tom, there--I saw a whole swarm of little ones go in." + +"Wait a minute or two, Peter, to let them get well down, and then draw +up as quietly as possible." + +Very cautiously the boys raised the point of their rod until the +top of the square-mouthed bag was level with the surface; then they +brought it close to them and looked in, and as they did so gave a +simultaneous cheer. There, in the bottom of the canvas, two feet below +them, were a number of little fish moving about. Raising the rod +still higher, they gradually lifted the net out of the sea, the water +running quickly off as they did so, and then they proceeded to examine +their prize. + +"We will take out one and one, Peter; give them a nip as you take them +up, that will kill them." There were two fish of about three inches +long, another three or four of two inches, and some thirty or forty +the size of minnows. It was scarcely more than a mouthful each, but +it was a stay for a moment to their stomachs, and no one ever said a +thanksgiving with deeper feeling and heartiness than did the boys when +they had emptied their canvas net. + +"We need not be anxious about food now, Peter; if we can catch these +in five minutes, we can get enough each day to satisfy us. They quench +the thirst too. We must limit ourselves to half a pint of water a day, +and we can hold on for a fortnight. We are safe to be picked up before +that." + +All the afternoon and evening the boys continued to let down and draw +up their net, sometimes bringing in only a few tiny fish, sometimes +getting half a dozen of the larger kind. By nightfall they had +satisfied the cravings of hunger, and felt stronger and better. One or +two sails had been seen during the day, but always at such distances +that it was evident at once that they could not pass within hail. That +night, fatigued with their exertions, both laid down and went to sleep +until morning, and slept more comfortably than before; for they had +fastened a piece of the sail tightly on the top of the raft, and lay +softly suspended in that, instead of being balanced upon a narrow and +uncomfortable plank. They felt new creatures when they woke, pulled +up their net, had a mouthful of raw fish, took off their clothes, and +had a swim, and then set to earnestly to fish. The sun was brighter, +and the fish in consequence kept deeper than upon the preceding day; +still by evening they had caught enough to take the edge off, if not +to satisfy, their hunger. The fishing, however, during the last hours +of daylight was altogether neglected, for behind them they could see +a sail, which appeared as if it might possibly come close enough to +observe them. There was still the long, steady swell coming in from +the Atlantic, and a light breeze was blowing from the north. The boys +had been so intent upon their fishing, that they had not noticed her +until she was within nine or ten miles of them. "She will not be up +for an hour and a half, Peter," Tom said, "and the sun will be down +long before that. I fear that the chance of their seeing us is very +small indeed. However, we will try. Let us get the net out of the +water, and hold it and the oar up. It is possible that some one may +see the canvas with a telescope before the sun goes down. Take the +things out of the net." + +The oar with the canvas bag was elevated, and the boys anxiously +watched the course of the vessel. She was a large ship, but they could +only see her when they rose upon the top of the long smooth waves. "I +should think that she will pass within a mile of us, Peter," Tom said, +after half an hour's watching, "but I fear that she will not be much +closer. How unfortunate she had not come along an hour earlier. She +would have been sure to see us if it had been daylight. I don't think +that there is much chance now, for there is no moon. However, thank +God, we can hold on very well now, and next time we may have better +luck." + +The sun had set more than half an hour before the ship came abreast of +them. They had evidently not been seen. + +"Now, Peter," Tom said, "let us both hallo together; the wind is very +light, and it is just possible they may hear us." + +Again and again the boys shouted, but the ship sailed steadily on. +Peter dashed the tears aside, and Tom said, with a quiver in his +voice, "Never mind, Peter; better luck next time, old boy. God has +been so good to us, that I feel quite confident we shall be saved." + +"So do I, Tom," Peter said. "It was only a disappointment for a +minute. We may as well put the oar down, for my arm and back ache +holding it." + +"Mind how you do it, Peter. If we let the end go through the canvas, +we shall lose our watches and bugles, and then we shall not be able to +fish." + +"Oh, Tom, the bugles!" + +"What, Peter?" Tom said, astonished. + +"We can make them hear, Tom, don't you see?" + +"Hurrah, Peter! so we can. What a fool I was to forget it!" + +In a moment the bugles rang out the assembly across the water. Again +and again the sharp, clear sound rose on the quiet evening air. + +"Look, Peter, there are men going up the rigging to look round. Sound +again!" + +Again and again they sounded the call, and then they saw the ship's +head come round, and her bow put towards them, and then they fell on +their knees and thanked God that they were saved. + +In ten minutes the ship was close to them, thrown up into the wind, a +boat was lowered, and in another minute or two was alongside. + +"Hallo!" the officer in charge exclaimed, "two boys, all alone. Here, +help them in, lads--that's it; now pull for the ship. Here, boys, take +a little brandy from this flask. How long have you been on that raft?" + +"It is three days since we went overboard, sir; but we were in the +water for about eighteen hours before we made the raft." + +Tom and Peter drank a little brandy, and felt better for it; but they +were weaker than they thought, for they had to be helped up the side +of the ship. A number of officers were grouped round the gangway, and +the boys saw that they were on board a vessel of war. + +"Only these boys?" asked the captain in surprise of the officer who +had brought them on board. + +"That is all, sir." + +"Doctor, you had better see to them," the captain said. "If they are +strong enough to talk, after they have had some soup, let them come +to my cabin; if not, let them turn in in the sick bay, and I will see +them in the morning. One question though, boys. Are there any others +about--any one for me to look for or pick up?" + +"No one else, sir," Tom said, and then followed the doctor aft. A +basin of soup and a glass of sherry did wonders for the boys, and in +an hour they proceeded to the captain's cabin, dressed in clothes +which the doctor had borrowed from two of the midshipmen for them, +for their own could never be worn again; indeed, they had not brought +their jackets from the raft, those garments having shrunk so from the +water, that the boys had not been able to put them on again, after +first taking them off to dry. + +The doctor accompanied them, and in the captain's cabin they found the +first lieutenant, who had been in charge of the boat which picked them +up. + +"I am glad to see you looking so much better," the captain said as +they entered. "Sit down. Do you know," he went on with a smile, "I +do not think that any of us would have slept had you not recovered +sufficiently to tell your story to-night. We have been puzzling over +it in vain. How you two boys came to be adrift alone on a raft, made +up of three water-kegs, as Mr. Armstrong tells me, and how you came to +have two bugles with you on the raft, is altogether beyond us." + +"The last matter is easily explained, sir," Tom said. "My brother and +myself are buglers in H.M.'s Regiment of Norfolk Rangers, and as we +were on duty when we went overboard, we had our bugles slung over our +shoulders." + +"Buglers!" the captain said in surprise. "Why from your appearance and +mode of expressing yourselves, I take you to be gentlemen's sons." + +"So we are, sir," Tom said quietly, "and I hope gentlemen--at any +rate we have been Etonians. But we have lost our father, and are now +buglers in the Rangers." + +"Well, lads," the captain said after a pause, "and now tell us how you +came upon this little raft?" + +Tom related modestly the story of their going overboard from the +"Nancy," of the formation of the raft, and of their after proceedings. +Their hearers were greatly astonished at the story; and the captain +said, "Young gentlemen, you have done a very gallant action, and have +behaved with a coolness and bravery which would have done credit to +old sailors. Had your father been alive he might have been proud +indeed of you. I should be proud had you been my sons. If you are +disposed to change services I will write directly we reach the Tagus +to obtain your discharge, and will give you midshipmen's berths on +board this ship. Don't answer now; you can think it over by the time +we reach Portugal. I will not detain you now; a night's rest will set +you up. Mr. Armstrong will introduce you to the midshipmen to-morrow; +you are passengers here now, and will mess with them. Good-night." + +It was not many minutes before the boys were asleep in their hammocks. +If people's ears really tingle when they are being spoken about, +Tom and Peter would have had but little sleep that night. The first +lieutenant related the circumstances to the other lieutenants; the +second lieutenant, whose watch it was, told the gunner, who related +it to the petty officers; the doctor told his mates, who retailed the +story to the midshipmen; and so gradually it went over the whole ship, +and officers and men agreed that it was one of the pluckiest and +coolest things ever done. + +The boys slept until nearly breakfast time, and were just dressed when +Mr. Armstrong came for them and took them to the midshipmen's berth, +where they were received with a warmth and heartiness which quite +surprised them. The midshipmen and mates pressed forward to shake +hands with them, and the stiflingly close little cock-pit was the +scene of an ovation. The boys were quite glad when the handshaking was +over, and they sat down to the rough meal which was then usual among +midshipmen. As the vessel had only left England four days before, +the fare was better than it would have been a week later, for there +was butter, cold ham and tongue upon the table. After breakfast they +were asked to tell the story over again, and this they did with great +modesty. Many questions were asked, and it was generally regretted +that they were not sailors. Upon going up on deck there was quite an +excitement among the sailors to get a look at them, and the gunner and +other petty officers came up and shook hands with them heartily, and +the boys wished from the depths of their hearts that people would not +make such a fuss about nothing; for, as Tom said to Peter, "Of course +we should not have jumped overboard if we had thought that we could +not have kept hold of the rope." + +That day they dined in the cabin with the captain, who, after the +officers present had withdrawn, asked them if they would tell him +about their past lives. This the boys did frankly, and took the +opportunity of explaining that they had chosen the army because the +enemies' fleet having been destroyed, there was less chance of active +service in the navy than with the army just starting for Lisbon, and +that their uncle having commanded the regiment that they were in, they +had entered it, and had received so much kindness that they had fair +reason to hope that they would eventually obtain commissions. Hence, +while thanking him most warmly for his offer, they had decided to go +on in the path that they had chosen. + +The captain remarked that, after what they had said, although he +should have been glad to have them with him, he thought that they had +decided rightly. + +The next morning, when the boys woke, they were surprised at the +absence of any motion of the vessel, and upon going on deck they found +that they were running up the Tagus, and that Lisbon was in sight. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +PORTUGAL. + + +The boys were delighted with the appearance of the Tagus, covered as +it now was with a fleet of transports and merchantmen. As they were +looking at it, the officer commanding the marines on board, who had +talked a good deal to them upon the preceding day, came up to them. "I +thought that you would be in a fix about clothes, my lads," he said. +"You could not very well join in these midshipman's uniforms, so I set +the tailor yesterday to cut down a couple of spare suits of my corps. +The buttons will not be right, but you can easily alter that when you +join. You had better go below at once and see if the things fit pretty +well. I have told the tailor to take them to the cock-pit and if they +do not fit they can alter them at once." + +Thanking the officer very much for his thoughtful kindness, and much +relieved in mind--for they had already been wondering what they should +do--the boys ran below, and found that the tailor had guessed their +sizes pretty correctly, aided as he had been by the trousers they +had worn when they came on board. A few alterations were necessary, +and these he promised to get finished in a couple of hours. They had +scarcely gone on deck again when the anchor was let fall, and a boat +was lowered, in order that the captain might proceed to shore with the +despatches of which he was the bearer. + +Just as he was upon the point of leaving the deck, his eye fell upon +the boys. "I shall be back again in an hour or two," he said; "do not +leave until I return. I will find out where your regiment is, and if +it has marched I will give you a certificate of how I picked you up, +otherwise you may be stopped on the way, and get into a scrape as two +boys who have strayed away from their regiment." + +So saying, the captain got into his boat and rowed to shore. It was +one o'clock before he returned. The boys had dinner with the gunroom +officers, then changed their dress, and had now the appearance of +buglers in the marines. + +The captain at once sent for them. "Your regiment went on yesterday +with the rest of the division. It halts to-day ten miles out of the +town. There is the certificate I spoke of. Mr. Armstrong is just going +off with two boats' crew to assist in unloading stores; I have asked +him to hand you over to the charge of some officer going up with a +convoy. And now good-bye, lads. I wish you every luck, and hope that +some day or other you may win your epaulets." + +With renewed thanks for his kindness, the boys went up on deck. There +they shook hands and said good-bye to all the officers and midshipmen. +As they were waiting while the boats were being lowered, two of the +sailors went aft to the captain, who had come up from below and was +walking alone on the quarter-deck, and, with a touch of the hat, the +spokesman said, "Your honor, we're come to ax as how, if your honor +has no objection, we might just give a parting cheer to those 'ere +youngsters." + +"Well, Jones," the captain said, smiling, "it's rather an unusual +thing for the crew of one of His Majesty's ships to cheer two young +soldiers." + +"It is unusual, your honor, mighty unusual, because soldiers ain't in +general of much account at sea; but you see, your honor, this ain't a +usual circumstance, nohow. These here boys, which ain't much more than +babbies, have done what there ain't many men, not even of those who +are born and bred to the sea, would have done; and we should just like +to give them a bit of a cheer for good luck." + +"Very well, Jones, tell the men they can do as they like." + +Accordingly, as the boys took their seats in the boat they were +surprised at seeing the crew clustering to the side of the ship, while +some of the men ran up the rigging. + +"What can the men be up to?" Tom asked Mr. Armstrong in surprise. + +The lieutenant smiled, for he knew what was coming. + +"Sheer off, men," he said, and as he did so the boatswain of the ship +gave the word, "Now, lads, three cheers for them boys; may they have +the luck they deserve." + +Three thundering cheers burst from the whole crew, the men in the +boats tossing their oars in the naval fashion of acknowledgment of +the salute. Tom and Peter, astonished and affected, stood up, took +off their caps, and waved their hands in thanks to the crowd of faces +looking down upon them, and then sat down again and wiped their eyes. + +"Row on," the lieutenant said, and the oars fell in the water with +a splash; one more cheer arose, and then the boats rowed for the +landing-place. The boys were too much affected to look up or speak, +until they reached the shore, nor did they notice a boat which rowed +past them upon its way to the vessel they had left, just after they +had started. It contained an officer in a general's uniform. The boat +steered to the ship's side, and the officer ascended the ladder. The +captain was on deck. "Ah, Craufurd," he said, "this is an unexpected +pleasure." + +"I have just come back from my division for a few hours, Merivale; +there are a lot of stores which are essential, and some of my +artillery is not landed, so I thought I could hurry things up a bit. +My spare charger, and most of the chargers of my staff, are being +landed, too; the ship they came in was a day or two late; and as I had +to confer with the Portuguese Minister of War, I am killing a good +many birds with one stone. I heard you had just come in, and as I was +on board the "Clio" about my charger, I thought it would not be much +out of my way to run round and shake hands with you." + +"I am very glad you did. Come into my cabin; you can spare time to +take some lunch, I hope." + +While they were at lunch General Craufurd remarked, "So you have just +lost one of your officers, I see; promoted to another ship, eh?" + +"Lost an officer!" Captain Merivale said in surprise. "No, not that I +have heard of. What makes you think so?" + +"I thought so by the cheering the ship's crew gave that boat that left +the ship just before I came up. There was only a naval lieutenant in +her, and I supposed that he had just got his ship, and I thought by +the heartiness of the cheering what a good fellow he must be." + +"But it was not the lieutenant the men were cheering," Captain +Merivale said with a smile. + +"No!" General Craufurd said, surprised. "Why, there was no one else +in the boat. I looked attentively as I passed. There was only a +lieutenant, a midshipman who was steering, the men rowing, and two +little marine buglers, who had their handkerchiefs up to their faces. +So you see I took a very minute survey." + +"You did indeed," Captain Merivale said, laughing. "Well, it was just +these little buglers that the crew of the ship were cheering." + +General Craufurd looked up incredulously. "You're joking, Merivale. +The crew of His Majesty's frigate 'Latona' cheer two buglers of +marines! No, no, that won't do." + +"It is a fact, though, Craufurd, unlikely as it seems, except that the +buglers belong to the Norfolk Rangers, and not to the Marines." + +"The Rangers! They are in Hill's division. What is it all about? There +must be something very strange about it." + +"There is indeed," Captain Merivale said, "very strange." And he then +related the whole story to his visitor. + +"They are trumps indeed," the general said when the narrative was +ended, "and I am very glad that I happened to hear it. I will speak to +Hill about it, and will keep my eye upon them. Be assured they shall +have their epaulets as soon as possible--that is, if their conduct is +at all equal to their pluck. It is the least we can do when, as you +say, they have refused midshipmen's berths to stick to us. And now I +must be off." + +The boat landed General Craufurd at the same landing-place at which +Tom and Peter had disembarked half an hour before. Lieutenant +Armstrong had spoken a few words to the officer who was superintending +the landing of stores and horses, and he, being far too busy to stop +to talk, briefly said that the boys could go up to join their regiment +with a convoy of stores which would start that night. + +After saying good-bye to their friend the lieutenant, the boys sat +down upon some bales, and were watching with much amusement and +interest the busy scene before them. As General Craufurd passed they +rose and saluted. + +"You are the boys from the 'Latona,' are you not?" + +"Yes, sir," the boys answered in surprise. + +"Can you ride?" + +"Yes, sir." + +"Follow me, then." + +Much surprised, the boys followed the general until he made his way +through the confusion to a group of newly landed horses. Near them +were a couple of mounted Hussars, who, at the sight of the general, +rode forward with his charger. He made a sign to them to wait a +moment, and walked up to the men who were holding the newly landed +horses. + +"Which of you have got charge of two horses?" + +Several of the men answered at once. + +"Which of you are servants of officers on my staff?" + +Three of those who had answered before replied now. + +"Very well; just put saddles on to two of them. These lads will ride +them; they are going out with me at once; they will hand them over to +your masters." + +In another five minutes Tom and Peter, to their surprise and +delight, were clattering along through the streets of Lisbon upon +two first-rate horses in company with the two Hussars, while, twenty +lengths ahead, trotted General Craufurd with two officers who had been +down to Lisbon upon duty similar to his own. Once outside the town, +the general put his horse into a gallop, and his followers of course +did the same. Once or twice General Craufurd glanced back to see how +the boys rode, for a doubt had crossed his mind as to whether he had +been wise in putting them upon such valuable horses, but when he saw +that they were evidently accustomed to the work, he paid no further +attention to them. + +The officers riding beside him, however, looked back several times. + +"What luck we have, to be sure, Tom," Peter said, "and I can't +understand this a bit. How could the general know that we came from +the 'Latona'; as he evidently did, and by the way these officers have +looked back twice, I can't help thinking that he is talking about us." + +Tom was as puzzled as Peter, but they soon forgot the subject, and +engaged in an animated conversation with the Hussars as to the +situation and position of the army, and the supposed strength and +locality of the French, concerning which they were, of course, in +complete ignorance. An hour and a half's sharp riding took them to +Torres Vedras, a small town which afterwards became celebrated for +the tremendous lines which Wellington erected there. The troops were +encamped in its vicinity, the general having his quarters at the house +of the Alcalde, or Mayor. + +"Your regiment is a mile and a half distant, lads," General Craufurd +said as they drew up at his quarters; "you will have difficulty in +finding it this evening. Sergeant, take these lads round to the house +where my orderlies are quartered, and give them some supper. They can +join their regiment in the morning. I have heard of you, lads, from +Captain Merivale, and shall mention your conduct to General Hill, and +be assured I will keep my eye upon you." + +The boys were soon asleep upon a heap of straw, and at six next +morning were upon the road, having already had some coffee and bread +for breakfast. They had no difficulty in finding their way, for +orderlies were already galloping about, and the bugle calls came sharp +upon their ears. The division was to march at seven. The Rangers +happened to be the first in advance, so that they passed through the +other regiments to arrive at theirs. + +The tents were down when they arrived, and packed in readiness for the +bullock carts which stood by. The boys paused a little distance off, +and looked on with delight at the busy scene. At a note on the bugle +the tents and other baggage were stowed in the carts, and then the men +hitched on their knapsacks, unpiled arms, and began to fall into rank. + +No one noticed the boys as they passed between the groups and +approached the band, who were mustering by the colors, which were as +usual placed in front of the guard tent. + +"There's Sambo," Tom said; "I am glad they got him safe on board." + +The negro was the first to perceive the boys as they came close up +to him. As he saw them he gave a sudden start, his eyes opened wider +and wider until the whites showed all round, his teeth chattered, the +shiny black of his face turned to a sort of dirty gray, and he threw +up his hands with a loud cry, "oh, golly, here's dose boys' spirits!" + +He stepped back, heedless that the big drum was behind him, and the +next moment went back with a crash into it, and remained there with +his knees doubled up and his face looking out between them, too +frightened and horror-struck to make the least movement to extricate +himself. + +For a moment no one noticed him, for at his cry they had all turned to +the boys, and stood as if petrified at seeing those whom they believed +had been drowned before their eyes a week before. The silence did +not last long, the boys bursting into a shout of laughter at Sam's +appearance. + +"Spirits! Sam," Tom said; "not by a long way yet, man. How are you +all? Come, get out of that, Sam and shake hands." And as the band with +a shout crowded round them, the boys helped Sam, who was trembling all +over from the shock and fright, from the drum. + +For a moment the boys were quite confused and bewildered, for as they +hauled Sam to his feet their comrades of the band pressed round them +cheering, every one trying to shake them by the hand. + +The news spread like wildfire among the troops, and there was at once +a general rush to the spot. The boys were seized in an instant, and +each raised on the shoulders of two of the grenadiers, and as they +made their appearance above the heads of the crowd a tremendous cheer +broke from the whole regiment. + +"What can be the matter?" was the general exclamation of the colonel +and officers, who were just finishing their breakfasts in a cottage +which stood close behind the spot where their tents had been pitched +in the rear of the regiment. "What can be the matter?"--and as the +cheering continued there was a general rush to the door. There they +stood astonished at seeing the whole of the men clustered in one spot, +shouting and waving their caps. + +"What can be the matter?" the colonel said again; "the whole regiment +seems to have gone mad." + +"We shall know in a minute," Captain Manley said; "they are coming in +this direction." + +"Look at that fellow Sambo," exclaimed Carruthers; "he looks madder +than all the rest." + +In spite of the intense surprise which all were feeling, there was a +general laugh, for the black was performing antics like one possessed; +his cap was gone, he jumped, he yelled, he waved his arms, with a +drumstick in each hand, wildly over his head, he twisted round and +round; he seemed really out of his mind. Suddenly he left the crowd, +and rushed on ahead at full speed towards the group of officers, still +leaping and yelling and waving his drumsticks. + +The officers instinctively drew together as he approached, for they +thought that the gigantic negro was really out of his mind. He stopped +suddenly as he came up to them, and tried to fall into his usual +attitude of attention. + +"Oh, Massa Colonel," he said in hoarse, sobbing tones, "only to +think, only to think. Scuse Sam, sar, but Sam feel he's going to bust +right up wid joy, massa. Dat no matter, but only to think. Bress de +Almighty, sar! only to think!" + +None of the officers spoke for a minute in answer to these disjointed +exclamations. They were affected at the man's great emotion. His black +skin was still strangely pale, his eyes were distended, his lips +quivered, tears were rolling down his cheeks, and his huge frame was +shaken with sobs. + +"Calm yourself, Sam--be calm, my man," the colonel said kindly. "Try +and tell us what has happened. What are the men so excited about? What +is the matter with them?" + +"Oh, Massa Colonel," Sam said, "me try tell you all 'boat it. Only to +think, sar, dose boys cum back again; dose boys, sar, bress dem, dat +jumped into de water and got drowned just to save dis poor niggar, +sar. Dey cum back again; only tink ob dat!" + +The officers looked at one another in surprise. + +"I do believe he means the Scudamores! colonel," Captain Manley +exclaimed; "but no, it is impossible, no one could have lived five +minutes in that sea, and we know that they could not have been picked +up, for we were the last ship in the fleet." + +"Yes, yes, sar, dat's dem, dey cum back sure enuff," Sam said. + +Then Carruthers exclaimed, "I do believe it is so; there are a couple +of boys on the shoulders of the men in the middle of the crowd. Yes, +and, by Jove, it is the Scudamores. Hurrah! I am glad." + +There was a general exclamation of pleasure from the whole group, for +the regret for the boys, who had, as was believed, perished in the +performance of such a gallant action, had been general and sincere, +and Captain Manley lifted his cap and said reverently, "Thank God, +these gallant lads are saved;" and those around, although some of them +were but little addicted to prayer, repeated the words and imitated +the action. + +Carruthers would have stepped forward in his eagerness to greet his +former school-fellows, but Captain Manley laid his hand quietly on his +shoulder and said in a low tone, "Wait, Carruthers, let the colonel +welcome them." + +And now the crowd came up to the cottage, those in front falling back +as they approached, so as to let the grenadiers come forward with +their burden. The boys were lowered to the ground, and stood at once +at attention; their faces were both flushed with excitement, and their +eyes swollen with tears, so much were they both moved by the welcome +which had greeted them. + +There was a dead silence for a moment, and then Colonel Tritton said +in a loud, clear voice, which was heard all over the throng of men, "I +am glad, lads, to see you back again. I never expected to have seen +you again after we caught a glimpse of you as the sea washed you away. +You have seen how the men have welcomed you, and I can assure you +that the pleasure of the officers that two such gallant young fellows +should have been saved is no less than that of your comrades. A braver +act than that which you performed was never done. I shake hands with +you, and congratulate you in the name of the whole regiment." And, +suiting the action to the words, Colonel Tritton stepped forward and +shook the boys warmly by the hand, amidst a great cheer upon the part +of the whole regiment. Then he held up his hand for silence again. +"Bugler, sound the assembly; fall in, my lads, or we shall be late. +Come in here, boys; you can get something to eat, and tell us in a few +words how you were saved, for, even now that I see you it seems almost +impossible." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +THE PASSAGE OF THE DUORO--TALAVERA. + + +Very severe was the drill and discipline, and not very abundant was +the food, and there was a general feeling of pleasure when, by the +general concentration of the army at Coimbra, it was evident that +active operations were about to commence. On the 5th of May 9000 +Portuguese, 3000 Germans, and 13,000 British troops were assembled. +Sir Arthur was already there, and upon the 6th General Beresford +marched with 10,000 men, and orders were issued for the rest of the +army to march out early the next day. + +The Norfolk Rangers were in high glee that night, and many were the +tales told by the old soldiers of former engagements in which they +had taken part. Next morning, at daybreak, the tents were struck, the +baggage packed, and the wagons loaded. The people of Coimbra came out +in crowds to see the troops march, and many were the blessings and +good wishes poured out as the long line wound through the streets of +the city. + +Hill's division was the last, and the rain was pouring down with great +force by the time they started. The march, however, was not a very +long one, for Beresford's division, which was to operate upon the +Upper Duoro, had a long distance to make, and it was necessary that +all should be ready for simultaneous action. For this purpose the army +halted the next day, and upon the 9th marched to Aveiro on the River +Vonga. Here a large flotilla of boats was found, and the Norfolk +Rangers with two other regiments were ordered to embark at once. The +Portuguese fishermen entered heart and soul into the business, and in +perfect silence the little flats were rowed up the lake of Ovar. + +The soldiers were greatly crowded in the boats, and were glad, indeed, +when just as morning dawned they landed at the town of Ovar. + +By this movement they were placed upon the right flank of Francheschi, +the general who commanded the advanced division of the French army. +Soon after they had landed the French were attacked in front, and +finding their flank turned, and the whole British force, which they +had believed to be seven days' march away, in their front, they fell +back hastily. + +To their great disappointment, the Rangers took no share in this the +first skirmish of the war. But Hill's orders were not to press on the +enemy's rear. Three days more of marching and skirmishing brought them +close to the Duoro on the evening of the 11th. The enemy crossed that +evening and destroyed the bridge, and during the night the British +troops were all brought up, and massed behind the hill called the +Serra. This hill stood upon a sharp elbow which the river makes just +above the town of Oporto, and the British were here completely hidden +from Marshal Soult, who had no idea that they were so close at hand. +Indeed, knowing that the bridge was broken and that all the boats +had been carefully taken over to that side of the river, the Marshal +dreamt not that Sir Arthur would attempt to cross, but imagined that +he would take boats lower down near the mouth of the river and there +endeavor to cross. To prevent such an attempt Soult had massed his +army below Oporto. + +The troops were ordered to pile arms, and eat their breakfast, but to +keep in position. "I wonder how we are to cross the river, Tom?" Peter +said. "It is three hundred yards across, with a rapid current, no man +in the world could swim that, and carry his musket and ammunition +across." + +"I expect Sir Arthur is reconnoitering, Peter; I saw him go up the +hill to that convent there; he must be able to see from there right +over Oporto." + +An hour passed, and then two or three officers were seen coming down +from the hill; one went up to General Hill, who happened at that +moment to be talking to Colonel Tritton. "You are to prepare to cross, +sir, Colonel Waters has discovered a small boat brought across by a +Portuguese in the night. They are going to cross to that great convent +you see upon the other side. They will bring back boats with them, and +you will cross at once, take possession of the convent, and hold it +against any force that may be brought against you until reinforcements +arrive." + +Very quickly were the orders passed, and with a smile of satisfaction +the men took their arms and fell in. They were moved near the river, +and kept under shelter of some houses. + +"Keep near me," Colonel Tritton said to Tom and Peter, "I may want you +to carry messages, there will be no sounding of bugles to-day." + +Keeping under the shade of some trees so that they could command a +view of the river without being seen from the opposite side, Colonel +Tritton with two of his officers and his two buglers, watched what +was going on. A few paces ahead of them were Generals Paget and Hill, +like themselves, watching the daring experiment. Behind, under shelter +of the houses, were the troops in dense masses. The Rangers, as the +first regiment in General Hill's division, were in front, and would +naturally be the first to cross. It was a most anxious moment, as +Colonel Waters and two Portuguese pushed the tiny boat from shore and +pulled across stream. The bulk of the Serra Hill hid the river at this +point, and even the convent opposite, from the sight of the French +army formed up below the town, but there were no doubt stragglers all +over the city, and the whole baggage of the French army was in retreat +by the road to Valarga which ran at a short distance behind the +convent. + +Most anxiously their eyes were strained upon the opposite bank, from +which they expected to see the flash of musketry, as the little boat +neared the convent. All, however, was as still as death. Behind them +they heard a rumble, and looking round saw eighteen guns on their way +up the hill. From this eminence they could command the ground around +the Seminary, as the convent across the water was called, and thus +afford some aid to the troops as they crossed. + +There was a murmur of satisfaction as the boat neared the opposite +shore, and after lying still for a moment to reconnoiter the convent, +pulled boldly up to the landing-place, where its occupants disembarked +and entered the Seminary. Their absence was not long. In a few minutes +they reappeared with eight or ten men, and then at once entered and +cast off three large boats moored along side. + +The boys could hardly repress a cheer as they saw them fairly under +weigh. An officer now left the side of the General, and came to +Colonel Tritton, "You will get your first company in readiness to +embark, sir; do not let them show themselves until the last moment." + +Colonel Tritton joined his men. "Captain Manley, take your company +forward, when the first boat touches the shore embark. Let there be no +noise or confusion." + +"God bless you, Peter," Tom said, as they separated; "your company +won't be many minutes after us;" for the bugler of the first company +was ill, and Tom was ordered to take his place. + +As the boat touched the shore Captain Manley ordered the leading files +of his company to come from under cover and take their place in the +boat. Twenty-four men entered, and when the other boats were also full +Captain Manley took his place, followed by his bugler, and the boats +pushed off again. + +There was a dead silence in the boat, broken only by the sound of +the oars as the Portuguese tugged manfully at them, each oar being +double-banked by a soldier. The rest sat with their muskets in their +hands, their pouches open ready for use, and their eyes fixed upon the +shore. All was quiet, and with a sigh of relief, and a hearty hurrah +muttered under their breath, the men leapt from the boat and ran up to +the Seminary. + +It was a large building with a flat roof, and the enclosure around it +was surrounded by a high wall which swept round to the water's edge +on either side. The only entrance was through a stout gate studded +with iron. This was already closed and barred; the captain at once +distributed his men at the upper windows of the Seminary, with orders +not to show themselves until the alarm was given. + +They had scarcely taken their places when they were joined by the +occupants of the second boat, while those of the third, in which +General Paget himself crossed, were but a minute or two later. Just as +they touched the shore, however, there was a sudden shout heard, this +was followed by others, and in five minutes a wild hubbub was heard in +the town. Drums beat to arms, and it was evident that the enemy were +at last awake to the fact that the British had effected a lodgment +upon their side of the stream. + +"We shall have it hot presently," Captain Manley said to Tom. "They +will be a quarter of an hour before they can get round here, and we +shall have the three boats back by that time. The one we came in is +half-way across already." + +Seven or eight minutes later a heavy column of men was seen pouring +out of the upper gate of the town. As they got into the open ground, +they threw out clouds of skirmishers, and pushed down towards the +convent. A heavy fire was at once opened upon them by the English guns +upon the Serra Hill. There was no longer any need for concealment. The +soldiers in the convent took their places at the windows, and as they +did so could hear the loud hurrahs of their comrades as they crowded +down to the bank upon the other side of the river to await their turn +to embark. Before the enemy were within musket-shot, three boat loads +more had been landed, and there were, therefore, 150 men now in the +convent. From the gates of the city the French artillery came pouring +out, and, taking up a position upon an eminence, opened fire upon the +convent just as the infantry had got within musket-range. + +So suddenly did the noise of the enemy's cannonade, the crashing of +the balls against the thick walls of the Seminary, the rattle of the +enemy's musketry, and the louder roar of the muskets of the defenders, +blended on both sides with shouts and cheers, break out, that for a +minute or two Tom felt almost bewildered. He had no time, however, to +think, for an officer came up to Captain Manley. "The general is up on +the roof; he wants a bugler sent up to him." + +Captain Manley nodded to Tom, who followed the aide-de-camp on to the +roof. Here he could see all that was passing, and an exciting sight +it was. Crowds of French soldiers were approaching the wall, keeping +up a tremendous musketry fire, whilst behind them three batteries of +field-guns were sending their messengers of death. From every upper +window of the convent the answering flashes came thick and fast, while +overhead hummed the shot from the British guns, on the Serra Hill. +Oporto itself was in a state of uproar. Drums were beating, trumpets +sounding, bells clanging, while from the house-tops the population, +men and women, were waving their handkerchiefs to the English, +gesticulating and making all sorts of pantomimic expression of joy. + +Looking at the river behind, Tom saw with pleasure that some more +boats had been obtained, and that strong reinforcements would soon be +across. The whistling of the bullets and the hum of the round shot +were incessant, and Tom acknowledged to himself that he felt horribly +uncomfortable--much more uncomfortable than he had any idea that he +should feel under fire. Had he been actively engaged, he would have +hardly experienced this feeling; but to stand impassive under a heavy +fire is trying to the nerves of the oldest soldier. He was angry with +himself that he was not more indifferent to the whizzing of the balls; +but the sensation of discomfort under fire is beyond the control of +the will, and it is no unusual thing to see a young soldier who, later +in the day, may display an almost reckless courage, yet at first +flinch whenever balls hiss close by him, in spite of all his efforts +to the contrary. Tom was able, however, to control any outward +manifestation of his feelings, and took his place a few paces behind +General Paget, who was standing with one of his officers by his side, +watching the force which, momentarily increasing, was, in spite of the +British fire, making its way onward towards the gate. + +It was evident that the general considered the danger to be pressing, +as he once or twice looked back to see how quickly the reinforcements +were crossing the river. The first time that he did so, his eye fell +on Tom. "Get behind those big chimneys, lad. There is no use in +exposing yourself unnecessarily." + +Tom obeyed the order with alacrity, and, once in shelter, was soon +able to bring his nerves under control, and to look round the corner +of his shelter without flinching when the bullets sang past. In five +minutes General Hill joined Paget on the roof, and just as he did so +the latter was severely wounded and fell. + +Tom ran forward to assist him, and, kneeling beside him, partially +supported him until four men came up and carried him below. The +position of the little garrison was now very precarious, the artillery +fire concentrated upon them was heavy, and the French swarmed up +to the wall, which they in vain endeavored to climb. The English +kept up a tremendous fire upon them, cheering constantly as fresh +reinforcements arrived, or as the enemy was momentarily repulsed. + +Tom had now lost all nervousness, and was standing eagerly watching +the fight, when a ball knocked his shako off. The general happened to +turn around at the moment. "That was a narrow escape," he said with a +smile. "What is your name, lad?" + +"Scudamore, sir," Tom answered. + +"Scudamore--Scudamore. Yes, I remember the name now. You are one of +the lads General Craufurd spoke to me about. I want to see you. Come +to me to-morrow with your brother. Go down now and join your company; +I do not want you here." + +Tom gladly went down, for he longed to be doing something. He soon +found his company, and, taking up a firelock of one of the men who had +fallen, was soon hard at work loading and firing into the assailants. +For an hour the strife continued. Fortunately General Murray had +found some boats three miles higher up the stream, and had crossed, +thus menacing the enemy's line of retreat. Suddenly a great pealing +of bells were heard in Oporto, with shouting and cheering, and the +house-tops were covered with people waving their handkerchiefs. The +French were evacuating the town. The inhabitants at once took across +some large barges to Villa Neva, a suburb lying across the river and +just below the Serra Hill. Here Sherbrooke began to cross. + +It was now the time for the English to take the offensive. There were +now three battalions in the seminary, and as the French drew sullenly +off to join the column now flowing steadily out from Oporto along the +Valonga road, the gates were thrown open, and the English passing out +formed outside the walls, and poured volley after volley into the +retreating foe. Had Murray fallen upon their flank, the disaster of +the French would have been complete; but this general feared that the +enemy would turn upon him, and destroy his division before assistance +could arrive, and he therefore remained inactive, and allowed the long +column of fugitives to pass unmolested. + +For the next eight days the English army followed hotly in pursuit, +and several skirmishes occurred; but Soult effected a most masterly +retreat, saving his army, when it seemed upon the brink of +destruction, by leaving his guns and baggage behind him, and leading +his men by paths over mountains supposed to be impassable for any +large body of men. He lost altogether 6000 men in this short campaign. +This included 3600 prisoners either captured in action or left behind +in the hospitals, and 1400 killed. The number of guns left behind was +fifty-eight. The English had only 300 killed and wounded. + +Sir Arthur's plans for the invasion of Spain were not yet +complete, and he accordingly halted his army to await supplies and +reinforcements. During this time the young buglers had no opportunity +of calling upon Major-General Hill. The transport supplied by the +Spanish Government had failed grossly, and the troops were badly fed +at a time when, taking long marches, they most required support. The +first day after they halted the boys determined that they would, as +soon as they were off duty, call upon General Hill. While parade was +going on, however, they saw the general ride up to Colonel Tritton, +and enter into conversation with him. The bugler, who was standing +near, was ordered to sound the call for the officers to assemble in +front; and when they did so, Colonel Tritton left the general's side +and spoke a few words with them. There was a short conversation, +and then the colonel rejoined the general's side, and the officers +returned to their places. The colonel now rode forward to the center +of the line, and said in loud tones, "Men, I have a piece of news to +tell you which I think that you will be glad to hear. Upon my arrival +at Lisbon I reported the gallant conduct of Tom and Peter Scudamore +in rescuing one of their comrades when washed overboard in the Bay +of Biscay. Captain Merivale, of the "Latona," also reported it, and +General Hill, when he heard the circumstances, was also good enough to +send home a report recommending them for promotion. He has received +an answer from the Commander-in-Chief announcing that they are both +granted commissions in this regiment as a reward for their act of +distinguished gallantry. The regiment is dismissed." + +As the men fell out they gave a loud and general cheer, and Tom and +Peter were surrounded by their comrades, who shook them by the hand, +and congratulated them upon their promotion. The boys were too much +surprised and affected to speak, and they had scarcely recovered from +their bewilderment, when Carruthers came up to them, and led them +to the colonel. Here General Hill first, and then all the officers, +warmly shook hands with them. The boys were much touched by the warmth +with which they were received, and were soon hurried off to the tents +of the officers. Several of the ensigns were slight young men, and +they insisted upon rigging the boys out in uniform, and the boys +had the less scruple in accepting the kind offer, inasmuch as they +expected every day to enter Spain, when the baggage would be cut down +to the smallest possible proportion, and the officers as well as +the men be obliged to leave almost everything behind them. Sam was +delighted at the promotion of his friends, and asked to be appointed +their servant, a request which was at once acceded to. The regiment +had now been three months in Spain, and the boys had continued to +work hard at Spanish, devoting several hours a day to its study, and +talking it whenever they could find an opportunity--no difficult +matter, as Portugal was full of Spanish who had crossed the frontier +to avoid the hated yoke of the French. + +The delay in invading Spain was caused partly from want of +transport, but more by the utter incapacity of the Spanish Junta or +government, and by the arrogance and folly of Cuesta, the Spanish +Commander-in-Chief, who was always proposing impracticable schemes to +Wellington, and, inflated with Spanish pride and obstinacy, believed +that his own worthless troops were fully a match for the French, and +was jealous in the highest degree of the British general. + +At last, on the 27th of June, the British army advanced. Scarcely had +they made a day's march, however, when the utter faithlessness of the +Spaniards became manifest. The provisions and transport promised were +not forthcoming, and from the very day of their advance the British +were badly fed, and indeed often not fed at all; and so great were +their sufferings during the campaign--sufferings caused by the +heartlessness of the people whom they had come to deliver from a +foreign yoke, that the British soldiers came to cherish a deep and +bitter hatred against the Spanish; and it was this intense feeling of +animosity which had no little to do with the cruel excesses of the +English soldiery upon the capture of Burgos and San Sebastian. + +After many delays from these causes, the British army reached Oropesa +upon the 20th July, and there formed a junction with Cuesta's army. +Upon the 22d the allied armies moved forward, and upon the same +day the Spaniards came in contact with the French, and should have +inflicted a severe blow upon them, but the ignorance and timidity of +the Spanish generals enabled the enemy to draw off and concentrate +without loss. + +The British troops had now been for many days upon half rations, and +Sir Arthur gave notice to the Junta, that unless his requisitions were +complied with, he should retire from Spain. Cuesta, however, believing +that the French were retreating in haste, pushed his army across the +river Alberche, with the vain idea of defeating them, and entering +Madrid in triumph. Sir Arthur, seeing the fatal consequences which +would ensue, were the Spaniards attacked alone, laid aside his +previously-formed resolution, and put his army in motion across +the Alberche. The position of the allied armies was now most +dangerous--far more so, indeed, than the English general supposed. +Badly informed by the Spanish, he greatly underrated the enemy's +forces. Taking advantage of the delay caused by the want of provisions +and carriage, Soult, Victor, and Ney were marching their forces from +various points, and concentrating to crush the invading army. Upon the +26th the French met the Spanish army. General Zayas, who commanded +the Spanish advance of 4000 infantry and 2000 cavalry, scarcely +offered any resistance, his men broke and fled in disorder, and the +panic would have spread to the whole Spanish army, had not General +Albuquerque brought up 3000 more cavalry and held the French at +bay, while Cuesta retreated in great disorder. The Spanish loss by +dispersion and flight was no less than 4000 men, and the whole army +would have been broken up had not General Sherbrooke advanced with his +division, and placed it between the French and the flying Spaniards. + +The allies now recrossed the Alberche and took up a position to cover +Talavera. Sir Arthur chose a strong defensive position, as it was +evident that the Spanish were worse than useless in the open field. +The Spaniards were placed with their right resting upon Talavera, +their left upon a mound whereon a large field-redoubt was constructed. +Their front was covered by a convent, by ditches, stone walls, +breastworks, and felled trees; and thus, worthless as were the troops, +they could scarcely be driven from a position almost impregnable. + +The line beyond the Spanish was continued by Campbell's division, next +to which came that of Sherbrooke, its left extending to a steep hill. +Mackenzie and Donkin had not yet fallen hack from the Alberche. Hill +was in rear. The British troops, including the German legion, were +19,000 strong, with thirty guns. The Spaniards had 33,000 men and +seventy guns. The Spanish contingent could, however, be in no way +relied upon, and were, indeed, never seriously engaged. The real +battle was between the 19,000 British troops and 50,000 French. +The French attacked the British outposts with great impetuosity, +and Mackenzie and Donkin were driven in with a loss of 4000 men. +The latter took up his position with his brigade on the hill on +Sherbrooke's left; the former took post with Campbell's division, to +which he belonged. The French cavalry now galloped up towards the +portion of the line held by the Spanish, and discharged their pistols +at them, whereupon 10,000 Spanish infantry and the whole of their +artillery broke and fled in wild confusion. For miles they continued +their flight, but in the evening the Spanish cavalry were sent round +in pursuit, and drove some 4000 of these cowards back to their lines. +Seeing the wild confusion which was raging on the allies' right, +Victor resolved, although evening was at hand, to make a sudden dash +upon the hill upon their left, which, held only by Donkin's brigade, +was the key of the position. The hill was very steep upon the front, +or French side, while towards the rear it sloped gradually. Ruffin's +division was ordered to the attack, followed by Villette in support, +while Lapisse was ordered to engage the German legion, which was on +the left of Sherbrooke's division. + +Hill's division was lying down behind the hill when Ruffin's troops +advanced to the attack. There was no expectation of an attack that +evening, and the woods and increasing darkness covered the movements +of the French troops. Weary and hungry, the English soldiers, +disgusted at the inhuman neglect of the Spaniards, and furious +at their cowardice, were chatting over the events of the day and +discussing the chances, by no means bright, of the expected battle +to-morrow. All that day they had had no food whatever save a small +portion of grain, served out raw and unground. Tom and Peter had been +chatting with the officers, who were grouped under a tree, when Sambo +came up to them and beckoned them aside. + +"Look here, Massa Tom, here six eggs; tree for you, tree for Massa +Peter." + +"Thank you, Sam, that is capital; but you know you will get into a row +if you get caught taking things." + +"Me no take 'em, massa. Old hen give them to me." + +Tom laughed. + +"How was that, Sam?" + +"Well, Massa, me saw her sitting on nest. Me went up and said to her, +'Give me some eggs, old girl.' She say 'Cluck.' I says, 'Cluck means +yes, I suppose?' She say 'Cluck' again. Clear 'nuff that, so me take +eggs, eat tree, bring six, young massa." + +"I am afraid, Sam," Tom said, laughing, "your story would hardly save +you from the triangles, if you had been caught. However, as it is rude +to return a present, of course you cannot take them back to the hen. I +suppose they are raw?" + +"Yes, massa; no good make fire; make hole bofe ends, suck 'em." + +"All right, Sam; it is not the nicest way, but, under the +circumstances, perhaps it is the best; at any rate, I am too hungry to +wait till we can get a fire lighted." + +So saying, the boys sucked the raw eggs, and then joined the men, +when, just as they did so, first a dropping rifle shot, and then a +perfect roar of musketry broke out upon the hill above them. It needed +no order to be given. The men fell into their places and prepared to +climb the hill and assist Donkin's brigade, which was evidently unable +alone to resist the attack. Knapsacks were thrown off, firelocks +tightly grasped, and the regiment impatiently awaited orders to +advance. None were more impatient than the colonel, who after a few +minutes, seeing by the fire that the English were falling back, and +that the French had gained the crest of the hill, waited no longer for +orders, but gave the word for the regiment to advance. They were but +half way up the hill when General Hill himself galloped down to meet +them, and then turning, led the way beside Colonel Tritton. + +General Hill had had a narrow escape. Donkin had repulsed the French +who attacked him in front, but his force was insufficient to guard the +whole crest of the hill. Consequently, the enemy had come up round +his flank, and were now in actual possession of the crest. General +Hill, ignorant of this, had ridden with his brigade-major right +into the midst of the French before he found out his mistake. His +brigade-major, Fordyce, was killed, his own horse wounded, and his +bridle seized by a French grenadier. He had, however, broken away, and +had ridden off under a storm of bullets. + +With a cheer the Norfolk Rangers followed their gallant leader. They +reached the crest, poured a tremendous volley into the enemy, and +charged with the bayonet. The French, of whom but a small portion +had as yet gained the crest, were unable to resist the impetuous +onslaught, and at once gave way. + +The Rangers were now joined by the 48th and the 29th, so that these, +with Donkin's brigade, formed a strong body of troops. The French, +who had fallen back, now united with their main body, and the attack +was renewed with all the force of Ruffin's division. The heavy mass +pressed upwards, in spite of the destructive fire of the British, and +were within twenty yards of the crest, when, with a hearty cheer, the +English troops burst upon them with the bayonet, and the French again +fell back, broken and disheartened. + +This ended the fighting on the 27th of July. Long lines of bivouac +fires soon blazed upon either side. The wounded were carried down the +hill to the field-hospital, which had been erected under its cover, +and the men, eating their scanty supper, wrapped themselves in their +great coats, and were soon asleep. The officers chatted for a short +time longer, but as all were tired, and the next day was sure to be a +severe one, they, too, soon lay down by their fire. + +When morning broke, it was seen that the enemy had massed a large +force of artillery upon a hill just opposite to the one held by the +English. Soon afterwards Ruffin's division, as before supported by +Villette, advanced to the attack, covered by the tremendous fire from +his artillery. The British had no adequate force of artillery to reply +to the iron storm, and the balls swept through their lines, mowing +down their ranks, and causing great loss. The regiments in reserve lay +down to avoid the iron shower, while the Rangers and 48th prepared to +resist the French when they came within fighting distance. + +As their men approached the summit of the hill, the French artillery +was obliged to cease playing in that direction, and turned its +attention to the British center, while a fierce musketry contest took +place between the French and Hill and Donkin's men. + +The ground was rough, and the troops on both sides, broken up into +small bodies, fought desperately. General Hill was wounded, and the +British troops fell fast. The French, however, suffered even more, +and, as Hill brought up his reserve, the English gained ground foot by +foot, until they drove them again down the steep side of the hill. As +the French retired, their artillery once more opened fire to cover +their retreat. + +A pause now ensued; the French in this brief contest had lost 1400 +men, and the British had suffered severely. The French then held a +council of war, and determined to attack along the whole line in +force. Hours passed away; the English munched their corn, smoked their +pipes, and watched the enemy scattered over the plain. The weather +was very hot, and the men of both sides went down to a little stream +which divided their positions, drank, and filled their water-bottles +in perfect amity. Some of the officers, who spoke French conversed +with the French officers, exchanged cigars for brandy, and joked and +laughed as if they had been the best of friends. + +At one o'clock the French drums were heard to beat, and the men were +soon formed in order. Tom and Peter stood with a group of officers on +the brow of the hill. Nothing could be finer than the sight. Far away +the view stretched over the country, thickly wooded, and with chateau +and farm-houses scatted here and there. Through the trees the dense +masses of the French could be seen, as they moved in columns towards +the positions from which they were to attack. Upon an eminence, +nearly opposite to their position, the boys could see a long line of +the French artillery. Far away, to the right, rose the churches of +Talavera, while behind the hill were the British and Spanish cavalry, +ready to charge should the French endeavor to turn the British left by +pushing round its foot. Fifty paces from the officers of the Norfolk +Rangers sat Sir Arthur Wellesley, on horseback, watching attentively +through a field-glass the movements of the enemy, and at a short +distance behind him were his staff. The British troops were standing +in easy order, a little behind the crest of the hill, so as to be +sheltered from the artillery fire with which the French were sure to +cover the advance of their column of attack. + +"This is a grand sight, Peter," Tom said, "but I wish they would +begin; it makes one fidgety waiting for it." + +Scarcely had Tom spoken when, as if in answer to his wish, a series +of jets of white smoke puffed out from the opposite hill, and two or +three seconds later came the thunder of eighty guns, and the whizzing +sound of as many balls. Instinctively the group drew back a pace, but +it was not upon them that this tremendous fire was opened. It was +directed against the right of the British line, and almost at the same +moment a cloud of skirmishers appeared among the trees, followed by +the dark columns of Sebastiani's division. + +Upon these the English guns at once opened fire; but rushing forward +with their usual impetuosity, they cleared away the obstacles which +had been raised across the British front, and charged with fury +against the British position. Campbell's division, however, assisted +by Mackenzie's brigade and two Spanish battalions, stood firm, and +driving back the skirmishers, advanced in line, cheering loudly. The +head of the French column withered away under their tremendous fire, +and, pushing forward, they overlapped it, and drove them back with +terrible loss, capturing ten guns. Then Campbell prudently recalled +his men to their first position, and the British artillery, which had +necessarily been silent while friend and foe were mingled together, +opened furiously upon the French as they tried to re-form upon their +supports. A Spanish cavalry regiment dashed down upon their flank, and +they retired again in great disorder. + +Every incident of the fight could be seen from the British position on +the hill, and the troops almost held their breath with excitement as +the British lines clashed against the head of the French column, and a +loud shout of triumph burst out spontaneously as the French broke and +fled. + +But it was now the turn of the left. Already Villette's division, +preceded by the Grenadiers and supported by Ruffin's division, was +advancing, and the British cavalry were ordered to charge them. The +ground was, however, quite unfit for cavalry. Colonel Arentschild, a +very experienced officer, who commanded the German Hussars, drew up +his regiment at the edge of a deep cleft which crossed their front, +and refused to take his men to certain destruction. The 23d Dragoons, +however, dashed into the ravine. Men and horses rolled over in all +directions; still, they got across, and, charging furiously between +the French infantry regiments, which poured in a terrible fire, +fell upon a brigade of Chasseurs in their rear. Victor sent up his +Polish lancers and Westphalian light horse to the assistance of the +Chasseurs, who already outnumbered the 23d, and this gallant regiment +was completely broken, the survivors escaping to the shelter of +Bassecourt's Spanish division, which lay beyond the hill, having lost +257 men and officers. + +Tom and Peter did not see this disastrous affair, for on the approach +of the enemy's column they fell into their places in the ranks. It +was, however, in vain that the French tried to gain the crest of the +hill, their efforts at this point being indeed far more feeble than +they had been either in the morning or upon the previous night. It was +in the center that their great effort was made. Here Lapisse threw his +division against that of Sherbrooke, and, covered by his own artillery +and by the guns upon the hill, charged right up to the position. The +British, however, repulsed them, and the guards, carried away by the +excitement of the moment, followed them with reckless ardor. The +French reserves of infantry and cavalry came up, the artillery plied +the British with shot and shell, the fugitives rallied and again came +to the attack, and the Guards fell back in confusion. The Germans next +to them, severely pressed, began to waver, and for a time it seemed +that the British, victorious upon both flanks, were yet to lose the +battle by being broken in the center. + +Now, however, the 48th, which Sir Arthur had ordered down from the +hill when he saw the rash advance of the Guards, was seen advancing +in line through the disordered masses. Wheeling back, it allowed the +retreating regiments to pass through it and then again formed and fell +upon the flank of the victorious French column. The French paused in +their advance, the Guards and Germans rallied and came back again to +the fight, the shots of the British guns plowed lines in the column, +the French wavered, and, as the British light cavalry trotted up with +the intention of charging them, fell back, and drew off to their +first position amidst shouts of victory along the whole length of the +British line. + +Thus the battle ceased, each party occupying the ground it had held in +the morning. The British loss in killed, wounded, and missing, in the +two days' fighting, was 6200; that of the French 7400. Had the British +been in a condition to have sallied from their position and pursued +the retiring enemy, the victory would have had far greater results; +but, exhausted and half-starved, the British were incapable of +following up their advantage. + +The next morning at daybreak, the French army quitted its position, +and, retiring across the Alberche, formed line of battle there, and +awaited the attack, should the English take the offensive. This they +were in no position to do, although in the course of the day Craufurd +had come up with the 43d, 52d, and 95th Regiments. These three +regiments had heard of the first day's fighting from the Spanish +fugitives, and had marched with all speed to the assistance of their +friends. They had, carrying their kit and ammunition, weighing from 50 +lb. to 60 lb., actually marched sixty-two miles in twenty-six hours in +the hottest season of the year, one of the greatest feats recorded in +military history. + +The Rangers had suffered heavily, and in the two days' fighting had +lost thirty-eight killed and 109 wounded. Among the former were two +officers, while several others were wounded. The Scudamores had, +fortunately, both escaped without a scratch. The inhumanity of the +Spaniards was now more markedly shown than ever. Although both in +Cuesta's army, and in the town of Talavera provisions were abundant, +yet the inhabitants carefully concealed them, while both the wounded +and fighting men of the British army were in want. So great was the +misery and indignation of the soldiers at this shameful treatment, +from those for whom they were doing so much, that they would willingly +have attacked the Spanish army and plundered the town; and from this +period to the end of the war the British hated the Spanish with a deep +and bitter hatred. + +Wellesley now received news that Soult had crossed the mountains +through the pass of Banos, which had been left undefended by the +Spanish, and was marching upon his rear. Believing that Soult had only +13,000 men with him--whereas in fact, he had 50,000--Sir Arthur left +the Spanish army at Talavera in charge of the hospitals, with 6000 +sick and wounded, and retraced his steps, with the intention of giving +battle to this new enemy. + +Upon the 3d, however, he learned the real strength of Soult's army, +and upon the same day heard that General Cuesta had basely retreated +from Talavera, without having provided any transport whatever, +according to his promise, for the British sick and wounded. All of +these who had strength to crawl rejoined the British army, but 1500, +who were unable to walk, were left behind, and fell into the hands +of the French, by whom they were treated with far greater kindness +and attention than they had been by the Spanish. Upon the 4th Cuesta +joined Sir Arthur, and at six o'clock next morning the only possible +course for safety was adopted. Victor was advancing from Talavera, +Soult was hurrying from Placentia to cut off the retreat of the +British, and accordingly Sir Arthur fell back upon Arzobispo, on the +Tagus. + +The artillery, the baggage and wounded, first crossed the bridge, and +at two o'clock the entire army was across. So great was the hunger of +the men that a herd of swine happening to be seen close to the line +of march, the soldiers ran upon them, shot and bayoneted them, and +devoured them raw. Taking up a strong position, guarding the bridges +of the Tagus, the British army remained quiet until the end of August. +During this time they became so weakened by starvation that they could +scarcely walk; a great portion of the cavalry horses, and nearly all +the baggage animals died of hunger, and at last, Sir Arthur, finding +that no remonstrances availed with the Junta, fell back again to the +Portuguese frontier by slow marches, for the army was so utterly +enfeebled that it resembled a vast body of invalids, rather than an +army of unbeaten soldiers. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +A PAUSE IN OPERATIONS. + + +Talavera was fought in July, 1809, and for four months longer Sir +Arthur Wellesley kept his troops on the Spanish frontier, where his +presence served as a check against any invasion, even by a very +formidable army, of Portugal. After the utter bad faith and cowardice +shown by the Spanish, the great commander was determined never again +to trust in their promises, or to undertake any movement dependent +for success upon their co-operation. The Junta then declared that +the Spaniards would alone and unaided sweep the French beyond the +Pyrenees, and a Spanish army of 45,000 infantry, 7000 cavalry, and 60 +guns advanced in November against Madrid. It was met by a French army +of 24,000 infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 50 guns. The battle began at +eleven in the morning, and by three the French, with a loss of only +1700 killed and wounded, had utterly routed the Spanish, with a loss +of 5000 killed and wounded, 45 guns, and 26,000 prisoners! After this +signal and disgraceful defeat, Lord Wellington--for he had now been +raised to the peerage--felt that nothing whatever could be done at +present in Spain, and so fell back into Portugal, where for many +months he occupied himself in preparing to meet the storm which would, +he knew, fall ere long upon that country. The Portuguese authorities +were as incapable, as untrustworthy, and as intractable as were those +of Spain; but here, happily, Lord Wellington had more power. England +was paying large subsidies towards keeping up the Portuguese army, +which was commanded by Lord Beresford, having under him many British +officers. The Portuguese troops were hardy, obedient, and far braver +than the Spaniards; but difficulties often arose in keeping the army +together, because the Portuguese Government, although England was +paying the principal expenses of the army, yet starved their soldiers, +and often kept them for months without pay. It was only by the +strongest remonstrances, and by the oft-repeated threat that he would +embark the British troops, and abandon Portugal altogether, unless +these and other abuses were done away with, that Lord Wellington +succeeded in reducing this incapable and insolent Government to +reason. + +Reinforcements arrived but slowly from England, for a considerable +portion of the available troops of England were frittered away in +holding Cadiz and in an expedition to Sicily. In these two places some +25,000 English troops were wasted--a force, which, had it been added +to Wellington's army, would have enabled him to take the field against +the French, instead of being forced to remain in Portugal for upwards +of a year without discharging a single shot against the enemy. Tom and +Peter Scudamore, however, were not destined to remain inactive all +these weary months. One day in November, just before the army fell +back from the Spanish frontier, General Hill was dining at mess with +the regiment; for, rough as was the accommodation, the officers had +succeeded in establishing a general mess. The conversation turned upon +the difficulty of discovering what force the various French generals +had at their disposal, the reports received by the Commander-in-Chief +being often ridiculously incorrect. There was also an immense +difficulty in communicating with the guerilla chiefs who, almost +always beaten when they came to blows with any considerable bodies +of the French, yet managed to harass them terribly by cutting off +convoys, falling upon small parties, and attacking outposts and bands +of foragers. Knowing every mountain pass and road, these men could, +if they would, keep Lord Wellington informed of every considerable +movement of the enemy, and might in return receive instruction for +acting, when required, in concert before the communication of an +advancing army, or might create a diversion by uniting their bands, +and threatening some important post. + +The next day the boys went to Colonel Tritton's quarters, and, +referring to the conversation of the day before, said that they were +willing to carry any messages that the general might require sent, and +to obtain any information wanted. + +"Nonsense, boys, you would be hung as spies before you had been gone a +week." + +"I don't think so, sir," Tom said; "we have had very little to do +during the six months we have been out here except to learn the +language of the country, and I think now we could pass very well as +Spanish boys. Besides, who would suspect boys? We are quite ready to +chance detection if we can be allowed to go." + +"I don't like it, boys; you are too young. Well, if not too young," he +said, in answer to a movement of Tom's to speak, "we all like you too +well to run the risk of hearing you have been hung like a couple of +young puppies." + +"You are very kind, colonel; but you know you promised to give us a +chance if you could, and having a chance of course means having extra +danger; but I really don't think that there would be any great danger +in it." + +"Well, boys," Colonel Tritton said, after a few moments' thought, "I +do not feel justified in refusing your application, and will mention +it to General Hill. There are very few officers in the army who +speak Spanish fluently, and you being boys would, as you say, avert +suspicion. But I tell you fairly that I hope General Hill will at once +refuse to entertain the idea." + +"Thank you, sir," the boys said. "Of course that is all we could ask +you to do." + +The next day, after parade was over, Colonel Tritton walked on +to General Hill's quarters at a sort of half farm-house, half +country-seat, a short distance from the village, round which the +Rangers were encamped. As he came up to the house, General Hill came +out from his door talking to a Spanish officer, who had the day before +brought some despatches from one of the Spanish generals to Lord +Wellington. + +Colonel Tritton joined them, and they stood talking together upon the +state of affairs in Spain, and of the advance of the Spanish army on +Madrid, which was then just taking place. As they did so two very +ragged, unkempt Spanish boys, shoeless and wretched-looking, limped +up, and began to beg. General Hill shook his head, and the Spaniard +impatiently motioned them away. + +"Por Dios," one whined; "give us something; we are starving. The +French have burnt down our houses, and killed our fathers and +mothers--we are starving. 'Por l'amor de Dios!'" + +"What's the poor little beggar say?" General Hill asked the Spaniard. + +"The usual story--house burnt, father and mother killed, starving. I +dare say it's all a lie." + +"Where did you live?" he asked in Spanish. + +"In the village of Oros, near Valencia." + +"And how did you come here?" + +"The French burnt the village because the guerillas had killed a party +of theirs in it, and they killed all the people, and then carried off +the mules and horses, and took us to drive some of them. That was four +months ago. We had to drive till the other day at Tamanes, when our +men beat the French; our mules were taken, and, as they did not want +us as drivers we had nothing to do but to come on in hopes that the +kind English would give us food." + +The Spanish officer translated what the boy said, and General Hill +remarked, "Yes, that was a brilliant affair of the Duke del Pasque's. +Here," he called to an orderly, "give these boys some bread. I will +see what can be done for them afterwards. I am afraid nothing. Poor +little wretches! their story is a very common one." + +The boys received the bread with a great show of thankfulness, and, +sitting down by the roadside, began to munch it with great appetite. +The Spanish officer now mounted his horse and rode off, while General +Hill and Colonel Tritton remained standing where he had left them. +Colonel Tritton then told General Hill of the Scudamores' request to +be allowed to penetrate into Spain as spies or with dispatches. + +"The young pickles!" General Hill laughed. "What will they be wanting +to do next? Pooh, pooh! it would be out of the question." + +"I believe they do really speak Spanish exceedingly well." Colonel +Tritton said. "They generally act as interpreters for us, and none of +the officers speak Spanish with anything like the same fluency." + +"As far as the language goes, they might get on, perhaps," General +Hill said; "but they look as thorough English boys as you could see. +They would be detected at once." + +"Yes," Colonel Tritton said, "they are both thorough English boys; I +should know them anywhere. What a contrast to the miserable, limping, +hang-dog lads there! Poor little chaps! Why, upon my word, I believe +the fellows are laughing." + +General Hill looked sharply at them, and, as he looked from one to the +other, he said sarcastically, "Poor little chaps indeed! You said that +very naturally, Tritton. It really does you credit as an actor." + +Colonel Tritton looked at the general with an expression of blank +astonishment. + +"What," said the general, "were you really taken in too" + +"Taken in?" repeated Colonel Tritton vaguely. + +"Don't you see, Tritton, those poor little chaps you are pitying so +are those two young scamps we were talking about." + +Colonel Tritton stared in astonishment at the boys, and then, as he +recognized them, he joined the general in a shout of laughter, while +the two boys stood up and saluted with an attempt at gravity which was +only partially successful, so amused were they at the astonishment of +their colonel, as well as pleased at the success of their disguise. + +Just at this moment there was a sound of tramping horses, and directly +afterwards an officer rode up, followed by four or five others, and +at a short distance in the rear by an escort of orderlies. The boys +needed not the exclamation of General Hill, "Here is Wellington." They +knew who the rider was, who checked his horse as he reached the gate, +for they had often seen him as he rode through the camp. A slight man, +very careful and neat in his dress, with an aquiline nose and piercing +eyes. Peter was rising as he drew up his horse, when Tom said, "Don't +get up, Peter; go on with your bread. It would look absurd for us +to salute now, and would draw attention to us," he went on, as Lord +Wellington dismounted, threw the bridle off his horse to an orderly, +and saying to General Hill, "I wanted to see you; come in." Colonel +Tritton went into the house, followed by the two officers. "We'll +stop here till they come out again, Peter. Perhaps General Hill may +speak to him about us. At any rate, we will keep up our disguise till +they've gone. Let us play at odd and even." It was a game of which +Spanish boys are very fond, and they may be seen in any of the Spanish +towns sitting by the houses on door-steps in the sun playing. It was +half an hour before the general came out again. He was about to mount +his horse, when he glanced at the boys, who were sitting against the +wall a few paces off, seemingly absorbed in their play, and paying no +attention whatever to him. Suddenly he changed his mind, dropped his +rein, and walked up to them. + +"What are you playing for?" he asked abruptly in Spanish. + +"Reals, senor," Tom said looking up, but not moving. + +"You are poor; how can you pay?" asked the general. + +"Oh! we don't pay," Tom laughed. "We keep count. I owe him twelve +thousand now. I will pay him when I get rich. He can wait." And he +held out his closed hand again for Peter to guess the number of stones +it contained. + +"Come inside," Lord Wellington said abruptly, and, turning led the way +into the house again, followed by General Hill, Colonel Tritton, and +the two boys. + +"It is not often I change my mind," he said to General Hill; "but for +once I do so now. When you told me about these lads, I refused to +employ them on such dangerous service, even when you told me of the +courage and coolness which they exhibited on the voyage. Now I have +tried them myself, I see that they will do. If they could keep up +their disguise when I spoke to them suddenly, and answer without +hesitation or any excitement which could have shown that they were +not what they pretended to be, they can do so with a French general. +I am no judge of the purity of their Spanish; but as you tell me they +deceived a Spanish officer just now, they will be able to pass with +Frenchmen. Now, lads," he went on turning to them, "you have thought +over, of course, the risks you are going to run, and are prepared, if +detected, to be hung like dogs." The boys bowed. + +"You will receive detailed instructions through Colonel Tritton, +together with such despatches as I may wish sent. They will be written +as small as possible. You will not go for a week; devote all your time +to studying the map. The largest size we have shall be sent to your +colonel this afternoon. Of course you will be supplied with money, and +for anything you can think of likely to assist you, speak to Colonel +Tritton. You are beginning well, young sirs. If you like, you ought to +made a noise in the world. Now, Hill, I must be off." + +And the general left the room with the officers, while the boys were +stammering out their thanks. + +"Where did you dress up, boys?" Colonel Tritton asked them after the +general had ridden off. "You did not come out from camp like this I +hope?" + +"No, colonel; we changed in that little wood there." + +"What have you colored your skins with?" + +"We got some iodine from the doctor, sir, and mixed it with water till +it was just thick enough to tinge our skin. It will wash pretty well +off with plenty of scrubbing, but we mean to use walnut juice when we +start; it lasts much longer, and is a better brown." + +"I am not sure, boys, that you had not better leave your faces alone, +they and your hands are so sunburnt that you would pass well enough, +though you must dye your arms and legs. Fortunately, your hair is +pretty dark, for you can't well carry dye. Think well over all these +things, for your lives may depend on some trifle of this kind. I shall +see you at mess." + +So saying, Colonel Tritton walked on, leaving the boys to follow at +their leisure. Just as they were about to turn off to make for the +woods they saw a soldier coming along the road. + +"That's Sam, if I am not mistaken, Peter, we will have some fun with +him. We can trust him to say nothing in the regiment about meeting us +like this." + +The two boys accordingly sat down by a low wall by the roadside, and +as Sam came up talked away to each other in Spanish. He passed without +paying any attention to them. After he had gone a few yards, Tom said +in a deep, loud voice, "Sambo." The black halted suddenly, and turned +round. First he looked angrily at the boys, then he went to the side +of the road and looked over the wall. Then with a very perplexed air +he looked up and down the road. + +"Who dat have impudence to call dis colored gentleman Sambo," he said +to himself. "Some fellow did, dat for sartin, not dose little Spanish +trash, dey not know Sam's name, some rascal in regiment; he's hid +somewhere. I pound him to squash when I find him." + +Muttering thus he turned to proceed on his way, but before he had gone +twenty yards, he again heard a deep shout. "Here, you, Sambo." + +The black jumped as if he was shot, "My golly," he exclaimed, and then +walked back to the boys, who were talking together, shook his head +and again looked over the wall. Then he stooped down to the boys, and +shook his fist in their faces, "You little debils, you call Sambo, I +pound you to squash." The boys both leapt to their feet with an air of +intense surprise and alarm, and began to cry out in Spanish. + +"No, can't be you," Sam said, "dis chile must be witched, no place for +men to hide, sartin not dem boys. Stone wall can't call Sambo all by +self, Sam's going out of mind. Oh! Lor, dis berry bad affair," and Sam +sat down by the roadside with a face of such perfect bewilderment and +dismay that the boys could stand it no longer, but went off together +into a scream of laughter, which caused Sam to jump to his feet again. +"What you larf for, what you larf for, you little rascals, you play +trick, eh? you call Sambo, who taught you dat name?" and he seized the +two boys and shook them furiously. + +"Oh! Sam, Sam, you will kill us with laughing," Tom got out at last. +"Do leave go, man, or we shall choke," and as Sam, astonished, loosed +his hold, the boys sat down and laughed till their sides ached. + +"Golly," exclaimed the negro, as he looked at them, "Dose boys again. +What on earth you do, Massa Tom, Massa Peter, in dose ragged close, +what you dress up like two beggars for? Lor! how you take in dis +chile, me tink you little Spanish trash, sure enuff." It was some time +before the boys could compose themselves, and then Tom made Sam sit +close by his side. + +"Look here, Sam, this isn't a joke, this is a serious business and +before I tell you anything about it, you must promise to keep the +secret strictly, as it would do us a great deal of harm if it was +known." Sam declared at once that if they tore him to pieces with wild +horses he would say nothing. Tom then explained the whole thing to him +and Sam at once declared that he would go too. + +"Quite impossible, Sam. You do not speak a word of Spanish and +although at any of the seaport towns you could pass as a runaway +sailor, there could be no possible reason for your wandering about the +country with two Spanish boys." + +Sam thought for some time. "Now dat berry unlucky Massa Tom, dat Sam +play big drum. Big drum fine music, but big drum not go well by self. +If Sam had played fiddle, Sam could go, but Sam couldn't go nohow with +big drum." + +"I should think not, Sam, with the name of the regiment painted on it. +No, no, you must stay behind. There won't be any fighting now till the +spring, and by that time we shall be back with the regiment." + +"But what you do without Sam? who black Massa's boots? who brush his +clothes?" + +Tom laughed. "These clothes would fall all to pieces, if they were +brushed much, Sam, and at present we have no boots to be blacked." + +"Where you get dose clothes, Massa Tom," Sam asked, examining with +great disgust the rags the boys had on. + +"We bought some peasant's clothes about our size, and the first beggar +boys we saw we offered to exchange. You should have seen their faces +of astonishment. When we got the clothes we made them into a bundle, +and took them to the bakehouse, and got the baker to put them into +the oven for a few hours to kill anything there might be in them. +Now, Sam, it is time for us to be going. It will take us an hour's +scrubbing to get the color off us. Be sure you keep our secret." + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +WITH THE GUERILLAS. + + +It was on a fine morning at the end of March that a cortege of +muleteers and mules left the little town of Alonqua. It was now four +months since the Scudamores left the army, and in the intervening time +they had tramped through a large portion of Spain. They had carried +with them only a dozen or so little despatches done up in tiny rolls +of the length and about the thickness of a bodkin, These were sewn +inside the lining of their coats, in the middle of the cloth where +it was doubled in at the seams, so that, even were the clothes to be +examined carefully and felt all over, the chances of detection were +slight indeed. They had each, on starting, half a dozen pieces of +Spanish gold coin sewn between the thicknesses of leather of the soles +of each of their shoes, for they did not start in the beggar clothes +in which they had first disguised themselves. Their clothes were, +indeed, worn and somewhat patched, but were of stout material, and +they wore shoes, but no stockings. They had, indeed, the appearance of +Spanish boys of the peasant class. The weather in the north of Spain +is often very cold in winter, and the boys felt that, with rags and +bare feet, they should suffer severely. All that they had to say and +do had been learned by heart. The names and addresses of the agents +of the British Government at every town had been laboriously learned +before starting, and, as Peter said ruefully, it was worse than a +dozen Greek impositions. + +At each place of any importance they would find the person to whom +they were instructed to apply, would accost him with some password, +and would be put up by him while they remained there. When they had +gained the intelligence they required--of the number of French troops +in the place and its neighborhood, a knowledge always obtained by +going round, counting the men on parade, or, in the case of small +villages, finding out easily enough from a peasant the number, +quartered there, they would write a report on the number the +intentions as far as they could learn them, the amount of food +in store, and the sentiments of the population, would enclose +the despatch in a goose-quill and give it to their host, who was +responsible for forwarding it. + +In a great number of cases, indeed, the man to whom they were +accredited was a muleteer. These men hated the French with a hatred +even more deep and deadly than that of other Spaniards, for, in +addition to the national causes of hatred, their mules were constantly +being requisitioned or seized by the troops and they themselves forced +to accompany the army for long distances at a nominal rate of pay for +themselves and their animals. Then, too, they were in close connection +with the guerillas, for whom they carried goods up into the mountains +from the towns, and when the chance came would leave their animals in +the mountains and join in cutting off an enemy's convoy. They acted as +messengers and spies too, and took their friends in the hills early +news of intended movements of the enemy. Many a day had the boys +traveled in the company of these muleteers, merry, careless fellows, +singing and talking to their mules, apparently the best-natured of +men, until something would be said which would recall the hated foe, +and then their black eyes would flash, their fingers clutch their +knife-handles, and they would pour out long strings of deep Spanish +oaths. Great was the surprise of these men on receiving the password +from two boys, but they never hesitated an instant in taking them in, +in giving them hospitality as long as they remained, and in either +accompanying them to the next town, or handing them over to the charge +of some comrade going in that direction. Not even to them did the +Scudamores ever betray that they were not what they were taken to be, +two Spanish boys employed by the English commander as messengers. +Often they were questioned how the English had come to entrust +important communications to two boys, and their reply always was that +their father and mother had fled to Portugal from the French, and were +living there near the English lines, and that they had offered their +lives in case of their sons' treachery. + +This system of hostages seemed probable enough to their questioners, +and if the boys' fare was rather harder, and their treatment more +unceremonious than it would have been had they said that they were +British officers in disguise, they ran far less risk of detection +from an accidental word or sign. Indeed it would have been next to +impossible for them, had they desired it, to convince any one of their +identity. There was no fear now of their accent betraying them. Since +they had left the army they had never, even when alone together, +spoken in English. They made the rule and kept to it for two reasons, +the one being that they found that if they did not get into this habit +of always speaking Spanish, they might inadvertently address each +other in English, and thus betray themselves; the second, that they +wanted to learn to speak absolutely like natives. This they had in the +four months thoroughly learned to do. At first their pronunciation +and occasional mistakes excited curiosity when asked questions as +to the part of Spain from which they had come, but their constant +communication with their muleteer friends had quite removed this, and +for the last two months not one person had doubted that they were not +only Spanish, but that they came from the northern provinces. + +Hitherto they had journeyed principally between large towns and over +country held by the French, but that part of their work was finished; +they had accurately computed the number of the army with which Massena +was to advance shortly to besiege Ciudad Rodrigo, and they had now to +carry the despatches to the guerilla leaders. Hitherto they had not in +a single instance excited suspicion. Not a Frenchman had asked them +a question, and no adventure of anything like an exciting nature had +taken place. They were now, however, entering into a country entirely +different from that which they had hitherto traversed. The northeast +of Spain is wild and mountainous, and offers immense natural +facilities for irregular warfare. Through the various passes of the +Pyrenees lead all the roads from France, whether to Vittoria on the +great road to Madrid, or through Navarre to Catalonia. Here and there +fortified towns still held out against the French, and the town of +Gerona, in Catalonia, had only fallen after a six months' regular +siege, and a desperate defense which fully rivals that of Saragossa. +Is it not a little singular that the Spaniards, who in the open field +were, with a few remarkable exceptions, absolutely contemptible, yet +frequently defended towns with wonderful fortitude, courage, and +desperation. It may, indeed, be said that in every siege where the +Spaniards were commanded by brave and resolute chiefs they behaved +admirably. This great range of hill country was the stronghold of the +guerillas, and every convoy from France had to be protected by a large +force, and even then often suffered greatly from the harassing attacks +of their active enemies. + +The bands of the guerilla chiefs differed greatly in strength, varying +from merely ten or a dozen men to three or four thousand, and indeed +each band varied continually. The men, when not required, would +scatter to their homes, cultivate their little patches of ground, and +throw down the spade and take up the rifle again when they heard of a +convoy to cut off, or an invading column to beat back. The bands, too, +would vary in proportion to the renown of their chiefs. An energetic +man, who, at the head of a handful, had performed some daring feats, +would find himself a week afterwards the leader of many hundreds, +while a chief who was slow and dilatory would find his band melt away +like snow in summer. + +The character of the warfare depended much upon the character of the +French generals. A few of these kept the troops under their command +sternly in hand, would permit no plundering, and insisted upon their +fair treatment of the Spaniards. These in turn wanted nothing better +than to remain quietly in their homes, and the guerilla bands would +melt away to nothing. Other generals, furious at the savage nature +of the warfare, and the incessant toil and loss entailed upon their +troops, allowed the latter to do as they pleased, and burning houses +and dead bodies marked their course. Then the peasantry, now turned +guerillas, retaliated as savagely, giving no quarter, sacrificing all +prisoners, and putting the wounded to death, sometimes with torture. +On both sides horrible atrocities were committed. + +The guerillas were armed partly with rifles and carbines, partly with +muskets landed on the coast by the British Government, who also, from +time to time, sent powder and money to assist them to continue their +resistance to the French. Although nowhere really formidable, yet, +being scattered over a great extent of country, these bands occupied +very large bodies of French troops, who would otherwise have +been disposable for general operations in the field. The English +commander-in-chief had, of course, no shadow of authority over the +guerillas, or, indeed, over any of the Spanish troops, and his +communication to them simply asked what arms and ammunition they +required, and begged them to send him a list of the number of men they +could each throw on the French communications and lines of retreat in +case he should find himself in a position to make a general advance +against them. He also recommended most strongly the bearers of the +despatch to their care. It was to the chief known as Nunez that they +were now bound. The mule train was nominally destined for Vittoria, to +which town the leader had got a pass, specifying the number of mules +and the nature of the goods they carried, from the French commandant +at Alonqua, for no one was allowed to take the goods about the country +without a pass, in order to prevent supplies being forwarded to the +mountains. This pass, however, only mentioned twelve mules with four +drivers, and this was the number which started from Alonqua. Another +score of mules, however, joined them at a short distance from the town +where a by-road turned off. Some of these had gone out from the town +unloaded, as if taken out to graze, others had not entered the town, +but had come direct from the sea-coast by by-paths with powder, and +had been awaiting the departure of Garcias, the name of the leader of +the party. They had eight men with them, all armed to the teeth. + +"Is it all right, Garcias?" + +"All right," the leader said; "they have sent out their squadrons on +the other road, so I think we are safe for to-day." + +"What boys have you got there with you?" + +"They have business with Nunez; letter from the coast." + +The cavalcade was now in motion again, and wound gradually up into the +hills. Presently they came to a point where four roads met. A clump of +trees grew hard by, and the boys gave a start of horror at seeing the +bodies of six French soldiers swinging from them. "Ay, that's Nunez's +work, I expect," Garcias said coolly. "There were three of his men +swinging there last week, so as a lesson he has hung up six of the +French. He is a rough boy to play with, is Nunez." + +At sunset the party slept in a small farm, and at daybreak continued +their journey. They were now in the heart of the mountains, and their +path lay sometimes up deep ravines, sometimes along rocky ledges. +At last, about midday, they entered a valley in which stood a small +village. "That's Nunez's head-quarters to-day," Garcias said; +"to-morrow he may be no one knows where." + +"But does he have to sally out by the wretched road by which we have +come?" Tom asked. + +"No, no," Garcias replied; "he would not catch much prey that way. +There are three other ways out of the valley. That winding path you +see there leads up to Santona. That road on the other side leads out +on to the plain, and thence to Vittoria; while the footpath over the +brow opposite leads right down into the wide valley through which the +main north road runs. So you see this is a handy spot. From that brow +we can see the convoys going to and from France, and can pour down +upon them if they are weak; while, if a column is sent in search of +us, we can vanish away long before they can catch us. Nunez does not +use the direct road over the brow for his attack, but follows the +Santona or Vittoria road for a while, and then makes a swoop round. He +does not want to bring the French up to this village, for his family +and the families of many of the men live here." + +As they approached the village, they found that there was a good deal +of bustle going on. Armed men were coming out of the cottages, and +gathering in a group round a rough stone cross, which stood in the +center of a sort of green. "We are just in time," Garcias said; "Nunez +is starting on some expedition or other." + +When they reached the spot there were nearly two hundred men +assembled. They greeted Garcias with shouts of welcome as he arrived. +"Ah, ah! Garcias, just in time. Our last skin of wine was emptied last +night; we will bring some more up to-morrow; but if you had not come +we should have had to start thirsty, and that's unlucky besides being +unpleasant." + +"Where is Nunez!" Garcias asked. + +"Here he comes," was the reply; and the boys turning saw a figure +approaching, which by no means answered to the expectation of the +celebrated guerilla chief. He was small and almost humpbodied, but +very broad. His head seemed too large for his body, and a pair of +fierce eyes gleamed out from beneath his shaggy eyebrows. His mustache +was thin and bristly and his month wide, but with thin lips. The boys +could understand the reputation for cruelty and mercilessness which +attached to this sinister-looking figure, but there was none of the +savage power which they had expected to see in so celebrated a leader. + +"Any news, Garcias?" he asked shortly, as he came up. + +"None, captain, except that these boys have brought some despatches +for you from the English Lord." + +Nunez looked sharply at them, and held out his hand without speaking. +Tom gave him the little quill. + +The guerilla opened it, read the contents, and, saying briefly, "An +answer to-morrow," strode on to his men, and in a few minutes they +were defiling out at the end of the valley. + +"That hardly seems a strong enough body to attack a French convoy, +Garcias," Tom remarked. + +"No, it would not be, but there is only a part of his band here; the +rest will join him at some place agreed on--perhaps ten miles from +here. I believe he has about thousand men under his orders. Now come +along; we shall be none the worse for dinner," and, leaving his men to +unload the mules, he led the way into the little posada, or inn. + +"Ah! Mother Morena," he said to an old woman who was crouching near a +blazing wood fire, "warming yourself as usual; it's well you've a good +fire, for you will be able to get us some dinner all the more quickly. +Twelve of us altogether, and all as hungry as wolves." + +"Ah!" exclaimed the old woman crossly; "it seems as if I were never to +have an hour's quiet, just as all that roaring, greedy lot, with their +Mother Morena here and Mother Morena there, and their grumbling at +the olla, and their curses and their quarrels, are off, and I think I +am going to have a quiet afternoon, then you come in with your twelve +hungry wolves." + +"Ah! mother, but wolves don't pay, and we do, you see." + +The frugal supper over, the boys laid down on the benches, and were +soon asleep. The next day passed slowly, for the band were not +expected to return until late at night--perhaps not until the next +morning, as the pass where the attack would be made was some fifteen +miles off, and the convoy might not pass there until late in the +afternoon. The boys soon made friends with some of the women and +children of the place, to whom they told stories of the great cities +of the plain, and of the great water which washed the shores of Spain. +The greater portion of the Spanish peasantry are incredibly ignorant, +and very few of the inhabitants of this village had ever gone beyond +the mountains. Walking about in the village, but apparently mixing but +very little in the games of the other children, were two little girls, +whose gay dress of rich silk seemed strangely out of place in such a +spot. + +Tom asked one of the women who they were, and she replied, with a toss +of the head, "They are the captain's children. The last time the band +went out they found among the baggage and brought up here, the dresses +of the children of some fine lady, and the captain kept them all as +part of his share, just as if there were no children in the village +whom it would become a great deal better than those stuck-up little +things. Not," she said, softening a little, "that they were not nice +enough before they got these things; but since they came their heads +have been quite turned by the finery and they are almost too grand to +speak to their old playfellows." + +"Is their mother alive?" + +"No, poor thing, she was killed by the French when the village she +lived in was burned by them, because some of them were found hung in +the neighborhood. The captain was away at the time and the children +were out in the woods. When he came back he found them crying by the +side of their mother's body, in the middle of the burning village. So +then he took to the mountains, and he never spares a Frenchman who +falls into his hands. He has suffered, of course, but he brought it +upon himself, for he had a hand in hanging the French soldiers, and +now he is a devil. It will be bad for us all; for some day, when the +French are not busy with other things, they will rout us out here, and +then who can blame them if they pay us for all the captain's deeds? +Ah! me, they are terrible times, and Father Predo says he thinks the +end of the world must be very near. I hope it will come before the +French have time to hunt us down." + +The boys had a hard struggle not to smile, but the woman spoke so +earnestly and seriously, that they could only shake their heads in +grave commiseration for her trouble; and then Tom asked, "Is the +captain very fond of the children?" + +"He worships them," the woman said; "he has no heart and no pity for +others. He thinks no more of blood than I do of water; but he is as +tender as a woman with them. One of them was ill the other day--a mere +nothing, a little fever--and he sat by her bedside for eight days +without ever lying down." + +"I suppose," Tom said, "they never bring prisoners up here?" + +"Yes, they do," the woman said; "not common soldiers; they kill them +at once; but sometimes officers, if they want to exchange them for +some of ours who may have been taken, or if they think they are likely +to get a high ransom for them. But there, it always comes to the same +thing; there, where you see that mound on the hillside, that's where +they are. They blindfold them on their way up here, lest they might +find their way back after all. Only one or two have ever gone down +again. I wish they would finish with them all down below; they are +devils and heretics these French; but I don't care about seeing them +killed. Many of us do, though, and we have not many diversions up +here, so I suppose it's all for the best." + +"I wish that fellow had given us our answer before he went away," +Tom said to Peter when they were alone. "I hope he won't bring any +prisoners up here; these massacres are frightful, and one side seems +as bad as the other. Well, in another month we shall have finished +with all this work, and be making for the frontier again. Shan't I be +glad when we catch sight of the first red-coats!" + +In the middle of the night the boys were roused by a general bustle, +and found that a messenger had just arrived, saying that the +expedition had been successful, that a portion of the enemy had been +cut off, their rear-guard destroyed, and that the whole band would be +up soon after daylight. The village was astir early, but it was not +until nine o'clock that the guerilla band arrived. The boys saw at a +glance that they were stronger in numbers than when they started, and +that with them were some twenty or thirty baggage animals. + +The women flocked out to meet them with shrill cries of welcome. The +booty taken was not of any great value in money, but was more valuable +than gold to the guerillas. + +Each one of the band carried, in addition to his own piece, a new +French musket, while in the barrels on the mules were powder and ball; +there were bales of cloth, and some cases of brandy and champagne, and +a few boxes and portmanteaus of officers' baggage. In the rear of all, +under a strong guard, were two French officers, both wounded, a lady +and a child of some seven or eight years old. + +After a boisterous greeting to their wives, the band broke up, and +scattered over the village, three or four men remaining to guard the +captives, who were told to sit down against a wall. + +The whole band were soon engaged in feasting, but no one paid the +least attention to the prisoners. The lady had sunk down exhausted, +with the little girl nestled close to her, the officers faint and pale +from loss of blood, leaned against the wall. One of them asked the +guards for some water, but the men paid no attention to the request, +answering only with a savage curse. Tom and Peter, who were standing +by, immediately went to the inn, filled a jug with water, and, taking +a drinking horn and some bread, went back. One of the guards angrily +ordered them back as they approached. + +"I am not going to free them," Tom said, soothingly; "there can be no +reason why they should die of thirst, if they are enemies." + +"I am thirsty myself," one of the guard said, "and it does us good to +see them thirst." + +"What, has no one brought you anything to drink?" Tom said, in a tone +of surprise. "Here, Peter, you give this bread and water to these +prisoners; I will run to Mother Morena's and bring some wine for the +guard." + +The guard would not allow Peter to approach the captives until Tom +arrived with a large jug of wine, and a cold fowl, which he had +obtained at the inn. These the Spaniards accepted, and allowed the +boys to give the water to the prisoners. All drank eagerly, with every +expression of thankfulness, the lady seizing Peter's hand and kissing +it as he handed the horn to the child. The lady was a very bright, +pretty woman, though now pale and worn with fatigue and emotion, and +the child was a lovely little creature. + +The boys, on leaving the prisoners, hurried to Garcias. + +"What are they going to do with the prisoners, Garcias?" + +"They have brought them up here to exchange for Nunez's lieutenant, +who was taken last week. One of the men went off last night to +Vittoria with a letter to offer to exchange. One of the officers is a +colonel, and the young one a captain. The lady is, they say, the wife +of General Reynier." + +"Then they are safe," Tom said joyfully, "for, of course the French +would exchange a guerilla against three such prisoners." + +"Yes," Garcias said, "they are safe if Vagas has not been shot before +the messenger gets to Vittoria. The messenger will hear directly he +gets there, and if they have finished Vagas, he will come straight +back, for his letter will be of no use then." + +"But the French would pay a ransom for them." + +"Yes; but the captain is never fond of ransoming, and if the news +comes that Vagas is shot it is all up with them." + +"But they will never murder a woman and child in cold blood!" Tom +said, in tones of indignant horror. + +"Women are killed on both sides," the muleteer said, placidly. "I +don't hold to it myself, but I don't know, after all, why a woman's +life is a bit more precious than a man's. Vagas's wife and children +are here, too, and if the news comes of his death, she would stir the +band up to kill the prisoners, even if the captain wanted to save +them, which he certainly will not do." + +"When is the messenger expected back?" + +"If he goes to Vittoria and finds Vagas is alive, and arranges for +the exchange, he won't be back till late to-night, perhaps not till +to-morrow; but, if he hears, either on the way or directly he gets +there, that he is dead, he may be back this afternoon." Soon after +this conversation Garcias was sent for to the chief, and returned +with a small note, which he handed to the boys as the answer to the +despatch, and urged them to go at once. The boys said that they could +not leave until they saw the end of this terrible drama which was +passing before their eyes. It was early in the afternoon when a man +was seen coming along the path from Vittoria. A hundred eager eyes +examined him, and ere long it was declared as certain that it was the +messenger. The boys' heart sank within them as they saw the fierce +look cast by the Spaniards in the direction of the prisoners, for +every one in the village was well aware of the meaning of this early +return. The boys had arranged upon the course they would pursue, and +they at once hurried to Garcias. + +"Please come with us at once to Nunez. We want to see him before the +messenger arrives." + +"I will come with you," Garcias said; "but if you think that any +talking of yours will persuade Nunez to move out of his way, you are +mistaken. It is more likely to cost you your own lives, I can tell +you; however, I gave you the promise I would do my best for you when +you started with me, and I will go with you now, though what you want +to interfere for here is more than I can make out. Pshaw! what matters +two or three of these accursed French, more or less?" + +As they neared the chief's house they saw him coming towards them. His +brow was as black as thunder; he was evidently prepared for the news +of his lieutenant's death. + +"These messengers want to speak to you for a moment," Garcias said. + +The chief stopped with an impatient gesture. + +"Senor," Tom said, with a dignity which surprised the chief; "we are +not what we seem. We are two English officers, and we have come to beg +of you, to implore you, not to tarnish the cause for which you fight +by shedding the blood of women and children." + +The boys had agreed that it would be altogether hopeless to try to +save the French officers. + +"British officers, indeed," exclaimed Nunez, "a likely story. Do you +know them as such, Garcias?" + +"No," Garcias said bluntly, "I never guessed at it; but now they say +so, I think it's likely enough, for they don't seem to see things in +the same way as other people." + +"I can give you proof of it," Tom said, calmly, pulling up the sleeve +of his coat, and showing a cicatrix in his forearm. Taking a knife +from his pocket, he cut into the skin, and drew forth a tiny silver +tube. This he opened, and handed to Nunez a paper signed by Lord +Wellington, declaring the bearers to be British officers, and +requesting all loyal Spaniards to give them every assistance. + +The captain read it through, and flung it down. "You may be officers," +he said contemptuously; "but if you were Lord Wellington himself, I +would not spare these accursed French. Listen!" and as he spoke a howl +of rage ran from the other end of the village, and told too plainly +the nature of the tidings the messenger had brought. + +"I again protest," Tom said firmly. "I protest, as a British officer, +and in the name of humanity, against this cold-blooded murder of a +woman and child. It is a disgrace to Spain, a disgrace to the cause, +it is a brutal and cowardly act." + +The guerilla furiously drew a pistol; but Garcias placed himself +between him and Tom. "I have promised him a safe conduct," he said, +"and have given my word for his safety. He is only a boy, and a young +fool; don't trouble with him." + +Fortunately at this moment, for the guerilla was still irresolutely +handling his pistol, a crowd was seen coming towards them, headed by +a woman who seemed frantic with rage and grief. All were shouting, +"Death to the assassins! death to the French!" The chief at once moved +forward to meet them. + +Tom and Peter gave a significant glance towards each other, and then +Tom turned to go back towards the house which Nunez inhabited, while +Peter hurried towards the spot where the prisoners were kept. Already +a crowd was assembling who were talking threateningly at the French +officers. Peter made his way through them until he stood by the lady, +who, with her child clinging to her neck, looked in terror at the +angry crowd, whose attention, however, was directed to the officers, +who stood looking calmly indifferent to their threats and insults. + +"Do you speak Spanish, madam?" Peter asked, leaning over her. + +She shook her head. + +"Do you speak English?" he asked, in that tongue. + +"Yes, yes, a little." the lady said, eagerly; "who are you? What is +this fierce crowd about?" + +"Hush!" Peter said. "I am a friend. Listen. In a few minutes they are +going to shoot you all." The lady gave a stifled cry, and pressed +her child close to her. "Remember, when they come to you, ask for a +priest; gain a few minutes, and I hope to save you and the child." + +So saying, he slipped away into the crowd again. He had scarcely done +so when Nunez arrived, accompanied by many of his men. The crowd fell +back, and he strode up to the French officers. "French dogs," he said, +"you are to die. I spared you to exchange, but your compatriots have +murdered my lieutenant, and so now it's your turn. You may think +yourselves lucky that I shoot you, instead of hanging you. Take them +to that wall," he said, pointing to one some twenty yards off. + +The Frenchmen understood enough Spanish to know that their fate was +sealed. Without a word they took each other's hands, and marched +proudly to the spot pointed out. Here, turning round, they looked with +calm courage at the Spaniards, who formed up with leveled muskets at +a few paces distance. "Vive la France! Tirez," said the elder, in a +firm, voice, and in a moment they fell back dead, pierced with a dozen +balls. + +Peter had turned away when Nunez appeared on the scene, to avoid +seeing the murder, and with his eyes fixed in the direction in which +Tom had gone, he listened almost breathlessly to what should come. +The French lady had sat immovable, cowering over her child, while her +countrymen were taken away and murdered. As Nunez passed where she +crouched, he said to two of his men, "Put your muskets to their heads, +and finish them!" As the men approached, she lifted up her face, pale +as death, and said,-- + +"Un pretre, uno padre!" + +"She wants a priest," the men said, drawing back; "she has a right to +absolution." + +There was a murmur of assent from those around, and two or three +started to the priest's house, situated only a few yards away, being +one of the end houses of the village. The priest soon appeared, came +up to the spot, and received orders to shrive the Frenchwoman. He +attempted a remonstrance, but was silenced by a threat from Nunez, +and knowing from experience of such scenes that his influence went +for nothing with Nunez and his fierce band, he bent over her, and the +crowd drew back, to let them speak unheard. At this moment, to Peter's +intense relief, he saw Tom approaching with the captain's two children +walking beside him. Absorbed in what was passing before them, no one +else looked round, and Peter slipped away and joined his brother. They +came within twenty yards of the crowd, and then paused. + +"Wait a minute," Tom said to the children, "your father is busy." + +In another minute Nunez shouted roughly, "There that will do; finish +with it and have done! I want to be off to my dinner." + +Tom and Peter simultaneously drew out a large Spanish knife, and each +took one of the children firmly by the shoulder. + +"Stop! Senor Nunez!" Tom shouted in a loud, clear tone. "Stop! or by +heaven there will be four victims instead of two! Let one of you lift +a finger against these captives--let one of you come one step nearer +to us--and, by the Holy Virgin, we will drive our knives into these +children's hearts!" + +A cry of astonishment broke from the crowd, and one of agony and rage +from Nunez, who tottered against a wall in horror at the danger in +which his daughters were placed. + +"Listen! all of you," Tom said, "we are English officers, we have +shown our papers to Nunez, and he knows it is so. We will not suffer +this murder of a mother and her child. If they are to die, we will die +with them; but these two children shall die too! Now, what is it to +be?" + +A dozen of the guerillas leveled their guns at the two daring boys. + +"No! no!" Nunez shrieked; "lower your guns. Don't hurt the children, +senors. The captives shall not be hurt; I swear it! They shall go +free. Give me my children." + +"Not if I know it," Tom said; "Do you think I could trust the word of +a man who would murder women and children in cold blood? No; these +girls shall go with us as hostages, till we are safe under French +guard." + +"They will tell them the way up here," said one of the woman in the +group, "and then we shall be all killed." + +"No," Tom said; "the lady shall swear not to tell the way up here. She +shall swear on your priest's crucifix. We will give you our words as +British officers." + +"But how are the children to get back here again?" another asked, for +Nunez was so paralyzed that he could only gaze on the children, who +were crying bitterly, and implore them to stand quiet, and not try to +get away. After more parleying the arrangements were completed. The +crowd fell back on either side, so as to leave a large space round the +French lady. Tom and Peter then went up to them with the little girls. +The lady was sobbing with joy and excitement at this unexpected +relief. + +"Can you walk?" Tom asked her in English. + +"Yes," she said, getting up hastily, but almost falling again. + +"Garcias will go first, as guide. The priest will give you his arm," +Tom went on, "these two young women will go with you and carry your +child if necessary. You will walk on, twenty yards ahead of us. We +follow with these girls. No one is to follow us, or accompany us. We +are to go on like that till we come upon your outposts, and then the +priest and the two women will bring back Nunez's children." + +"You will send them safe back, you swear?" asked Nunez, in tremulous +tones. + +"Psha!" Tom said contemptuously, "you don't suppose we are +child-murderers, like yourself." + +"Remember!" the guerilla said, in a sudden burst of passion, "if you +ever cross my path again, I will--" + +"Do terrible things no doubt," Tom said scornfully; "and do you +beware, too. It is wild beasts like yourself who have brought disgrace +and ruin on Spain. No defeat could dishonor and disgrace her as much +as your fiendish cruelty. It is in revenge for the deeds that you and +those like you do, that the French carry the sword and fire to your +villages. We may drive the French out, but never will a country which +fights by murder and treachery become a great nation. Are you ready, +Garcias!" + +"I am ready," the muleteer said, stepping forward from the silent and +scowling throng. + +"We can trust you," Tom said heartily; "take us the short way straight +down into the valley; we may have the luck to come upon a passing +French troop in an hour. Think of that, madam," he said to the French +lady, "let that give you strength and courage." + +So saying, the procession set out in the order Tom had indicated, +amidst the curses of the guerillas, who were furious at seeing +themselves thus bearded. At the brow of the hill Tom looked back, and +saw that the guerillas were still standing in a group, in front of +which he could distinguish the figure of Nunez. Taking off his hat, +he waved an ironical farewell, and then followed the party down +the hillside into the broad valley below. They could see the road +stretching like a thread along it, but to their disappointment, not +a figure was visible upon it. Now that there was no longer danger of +treachery, the party closed up together. + +"How far is it to Vittoria, Garcias?" + +"Twenty good miles, senor." + +"But we shall never get there," Tom said in dismay. "I am sure the +lady could not walk another five miles; she is quite exhausted now." + +"You will not have to go five miles, senor. There is a body of four +or five hundred French in that large village you see there; it is not +more than three miles at most." + +It was a weary journey, for the French lady, exhausted by fatigue +and excitement, was often obliged to stop and sit down to rest, and, +indeed, could not have got on at all had not Garcias on one side and +the padre on the other helped her on. At last, just as the sun was +setting, they approached the village, and could see the French +sentries at its entrance. When within a hundred yards they paused. + +"We are safe now," Tom said; "it is not necessary for you to go +farther. Good-by, little ones; I am sorry we have given you such a +fright, but it was not our fault. Good-by, padre; I know that you will +not grudge your walk, for the sake of its saving the lives of these +unfortunates. Good-by, Garcias; thanks for your kindness and fidelity. +I will report them when I return, and will, if I get a chance, send +you a remembrance of our journey together." + +"Good-by, senors," Garcias said, shaking them by the hand; "you +English are different to us, and I am not surprised now at your +General holding Portugal against all the French armies." Then he +lowered his voice, so that the Spanish women standing by could not +hear him. "Be on your guard, senors; don't move on from the village +without a strong convoy is going on; change your disguise, if +possible; distrust every one you come across, and, in heaven's name, +get back to your lines as soon as possible, for you may be assured +that your steps will be dogged, and that you will be safe nowhere in +Spain from Nunez's vengeance. The guerillas communicate with each +other, and you are doomed if you fall into the hands of any, except, +perhaps, one or two of the greater chiefs. Be always on your guard; +sleep with your eyes open. Remember, except in the middle of a French +regiment, you will never be really safe." + +"Thanks, Garcias!" the boys said earnestly, "we will do our best to +keep our throats safe. At any rate, if we go down, it shall not be for +want of watchfulness!" + +Another shake of the hands, and the party separated. The Spanish woman +who was carrying the sleeping French child handed her over to Tom, who +took her without waking her while Peter lent his arm to the French +lady. + +"Madam," Tom said in English, "you will soon be among your friends. I +know that you will keep your promise not to divulge the situation of +the village you have left. I must ask you, also, to promise me not +to say that we speak English, or to say anything which may create a +suspicion that we are not what we seem. You will, of course, relate +your adventures, and speak of us merely as Spanish boys, who acted as +they did being moved by pity for you. We must accompany you for some +time, for Nunez will move heaven and earth to get us assassinated, and +all we want is that you shall obtain permission for us to sleep in the +guard-room, so as to be under shelter of French bayonets until we can +decide upon our course of action." + +The lady assented with a gesture, for she was too exhausted to speak, +and as they reached the French sentries she tottered and sank down on +the ground insensible. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +MADRID. + + +The French sentries, who had been watching with surprise the slow +approach of two peasant boys, the one carrying a child, the other +assisting a woman clad in handsome, but torn and disheveled clothes, +on seeing the latter fall, called to their comrades, and a sergeant +and some soldiers came out from a guard-room close by. + +"Hallo!" said the sergeant. "What's all this? Who is this woman? And +where do you come from?" + +The boys shook their heads. + +"Of course," the sergeant said, lifting the lady, "they don't +understand French; how should they? She looks a lady, poor thing. Who +can she be, I wonder?" + +"General Reynier," Tom said, touching her. + +"General Reynier!" exclaimed the sergeant to his comrades. "It must be +the general's wife. I heard she was among those killed or carried off +from that convoy that came through last night. Jacques, fetch out +Captain Thibault, and you, Noel, run for Dr. Pasques." + +The officer on guard came out, and, upon hearing the sergeant's +report, had Madame Reynier at once carried into a house hard by, and +sent a message to the colonel of the regiment. The little girl, still +asleep, was also carried in and laid down, and the regimental doctor +and the colonel soon arrived. The former went into the house, the +latter endeavored in vain to question the boys in French. Finding it +useless, he walked up and down impatiently until a message came down +from the doctor that the lady had recovered from her fainting fit, and +wished to see him at once. + +Tom and Peter, finding that no one paid any attention to them, sat, +quietly down by the guard-house. + +In a few minutes the French colonel came down. "Where are those boys?" +he exclaimed hastily. There was quite a crowd of soldiers round the +house, for the news of the return of General Reynier's wife and child +had circulated rapidly and created quite an excitement. "Where are +those boys?" he shouted again. + +The sergeant of the guard came forward. + +"I had no orders to keep them prisoners, sir," he said in an +apologetic tone, for he had not noticed the boys, and thought that +he was going to get into a scrape for not detaining them; but he +was interrupted by one of the soldiers who had heard the question, +bringing them forward. + +To the astonishment of the soldiers, the colonel rushed forward, and, +with a Frenchman's enthusiasm, actually kissed them. "Mes braves +garcons!" he exclaimed. "Mes braves garcons! Look you, all of you," +he exclaimed to the soldiers, "you see these boys, they are heroes, +they have saved, at the risk of their own lives, mark you, General +Reynier's wife and daughter; they have braved the fury of that +accursed Nunez and his band, and have brought them out from that den +of wolves." And then, in excited tones, he described the scene as he +had heard it from Madame Reynier. + +At this relation the enthusiasm of the French soldiers broke out in +a chorus of cheers and excited exclamations. The men crowded round +the boys, shook them by the hands, patted them on the back, and in a +hundred strange oaths vowed an eternal friendship for them. + +After a minute or two, the colonel raised his hand for silence. "Look +you," he said to the men. "You can imagine that, after what these boys +have done, their life is not safe for a moment. This accursed Nunez +will dog them and have them assassinated if he can. So I leave them to +you; you will take care of them, my children, will you not?" + +A chorus of assurances was the reply, and the boys found themselves as +it were adopted into the regiment. The soldiers could not do enough +for them, but, as neither party understood the other's language, +the intercourse did not make much progress. They had, however, real +difficulty in refusing the innumerable offers of a glass of wine or +brandy made to them by every group of soldiers as they moved about +through the village. + +The boys felt that their position was a false one; and although, in +point of fact, they had no report to make upon the regiment, still +the possibility that if discovered they might be thought to have been +acting as spies on men who treated them with so much friendliness was +repugnant to them. However, their stay was not to be prolonged, for +the regiment had already been stationed for a month at the village, +and was to be relieved by another expected hourly from France, and was +then to go on to Madrid. This they learned from one of the soldiers +who could speak a few words of Spanish. + +It was upon the third day after their arrival that the expected +regiment came in, and next morning the boys started soon after +daybreak with their friends. They had not seen Madame Reynier during +their stay in the village, for she was laid up with a sharp attack of +illness after the excitement she had gone through. She was still far +from fit to travel, but she insisted on going on, and a quantity of +straw was accordingly laid in a cart, pillows and cushions were heaped +on this, and an awning was arranged above to keep off the sun. The +regiment had taken on the transport animals which had come in with the +baggage of the troops the night before; hence the mule drivers and +other followers were all strangers. The boys were marching beside the +regiment, talking with one of the sergeants who had been previously +for two years in Spain, and spoke a little Spanish, when the colonel, +who had been riding alongside Madame Reynier, told them as he passed +on to the head of the regiment, that she wished to speak to them. + +The boys fell out, and allowed the troops and the line of baggage +animals and carts to pass them. As the latter came along, Tom observed +one of the Spanish drivers glance in their direction, and immediately +avert his head. + +"Peter, that fellow is one of Nunez's band; I will almost swear to his +face. No doubt he has joined the convoy for the purpose of stabbing us +on the first opportunity. I expected this. We must get rid of them at +once." + +The boys had both been furnished with heavy cavalry pistols by order +of the colonel, to defend themselves against any sudden attack, and, +placing his hand on the butt in readiness for instant use, Tom, +accompanied by his brother walked up to the Spaniard. + +"You and those with you are known," he said. "Unless you all fall out +at the next village we come to, I will denounce you, and you haven't +five minutes to live after I do so. Mind, if one goes on you all +suffer." + +The Spaniard uttered a deep execration, and put his hand on his knife, +but seeing that the boys were in readiness, and that the French +baggage guard marching alongside would certainly shoot him before he +could escape, he relinquished his design. + +"Mind," Tom said, "the first village; it is only a mile ahead, and +we shall probably halt there for five minutes; if one of you goes a +single foot beyond it, you will swing in a row." + +So saying, the boys dropped behind again until Madame Reynier's cart +came along. The sides were open, and the lady, who was sitting up, +supported by pillows, with her child beside her, saw them, and called +to them to climb up to her. They did so at once, and she then poured +forth her thanks in tones of the deepest gratitude. + +"My husband is not at Madrid," she said when she saw by the boys' +confusion that they would be really glad if she would say no more; +"but when he hears of it he will thank you for saving his wife and +child. Of course," she went on, "I can see that you are not what you +seem. Spanish boys would not have acted so. Spanish boys do not speak +English. That makes it impossible for me in any way to endeavor to +repay my obligation. Had you been even Spanish peasants, the matter +would have been comparatively easy; then my husband could have made +you rich and comfortable for life; as it is--" + +She paused, evidently hoping that they would indicate some way in +which she could serve them. + +"As it is, madam," Tom said, "you can, if you will, be of great +service to us by procuring for us fresh disguises in Madrid, for I +fear that after what happened with Nunez our lives will not be safe +from his vengeance anywhere in Spain. Already we have discovered that +some of his band are accompanying this convoy with the intention of +killing us at the first opportunity." + +"Why do you not denounce them instantly?" Madame Reynier said, rising +in her excitement and looking round. + +"We cannot well do that," Tom said, "at least not if it can be +avoided. They know already that we have recognized them, and will +leave at the next village; so we are safe at present, but in Madrid we +shall be no longer so. We cannot remain permanently under the guard of +the bayonets of the 63d Line; and indeed our position is as you may +guess, a false and unpleasant one, from which we would free ourselves +at the first opportunity. We shall therefore ask you, when you get to +Madrid, to provide us with fresh disguises and a pass to travel west +as far as the limits of the French lines." + +"You can consider that as done," Madame Reynier answered; "I only +regret that it is so slight a return. And now," she said lightly, to +change the conversation, "I must introduce you to this young lady. +Julie," she asked in French, "do you remember those boys?" + +"Yes," Julie said; "these are the boys who gave mamma and Julie water +when those wicked men would not give us anything to drink when we were +thirsty; and it was these boys that mamma said prevented the wicked +men from killing us. They are good boys, nice boys, but they are very +ragged and dirty." + +Madame Reynier smiled, and translated Julie's answer. + +"You know," she went on, hesitatingly, "that I know that--that you are +English officers. I heard you say so when you saved us. But how is it +that you can be officers so very young?" + +Tom explained that in England the officers entered for the most part +directly, and not, as in the French army, by promotion from the ranks, +and that, consequently, the junior officers were much younger than +those of equal rank in the French service. + +The convoy had now reached the village, and a halt was ordered, +and the boys alighting, walked forward to see that their unwelcome +attendants quitted them. As the soldiers fell out from their order of +march and sat down under the shade of the houses many of the Spaniards +with the baggage-train followed their example, and the boys saw the +man to whom they had spoken go up to four others, and in a short time +these separated themselves from the rest, went carelessly round a +corner, and when the order came to continue the march, failed to make +their appearance. Their absence passed unnoticed save by the boys, +for the natives frequently took advantage of the passage of troops +and convoys to travel from one part of the country to another, for +the guerillas were for the most part little better than brigands, +and would plunder their own countrymen without scruple whenever the +opportunity was favorable. + +The march to Madrid was accomplished without adventure, and the boys +improved the occasion by endeavoring to pick up as many French phrases +as they could, as they marched along by the side of the sergeant who +had specially taken them under his charge. He knew a little Spanish, +so they managed to keep up a conversation with him in a strange medley +of the two languages, which helped to pass the time away merrily. At +Madrid they took up their quarters in the barracks with the regiment; +they had already explained their plan of disguise to Madame Reynier, +and she had promised to provide all that was necessary and to obtain +the military pass for them. + +They had soon reason to congratulate themselves that their stay +in Madrid was under the protection of French bayonets. During the +day after their arrival they remained quietly in barracks, as the +appearance of two Spanish peasants walking about the street with +French soldiers would have excited comments. In the evening, however, +they agreed with their friend the sergeant, who was going into the +town with three or four of his comrades, that they should accompany +them, not, however, walking actually with them, but following a few +paces behind, so as to be within reach of their assistance should any +one molest them. + +They reached the Piazza del Sol, the great central square of Madrid, +without incident, and amused themselves with the sight of the constant +stream of people passing to and fro, the ladies in their graceful +black mantillas, the men in cloaks and Spanish sombreros, or round +felt hats. Presently the sergeant and his companions left the square, +and turning down one of the narrow streets which run into it, amused +themselves by looking into the shops, with their gay fans, bright +handkerchiefs, and other articles of Spanish manufacture. + +Tom and Peter followed their example, keeping some ten paces behind +them. It was now nearly dark, and the streets were but badly lighted +except by the lamps in the shop windows. + +"It may be all fancy, Tom," Peter said, "but I can't help thinking +that we are followed. There are three follows who have passed us +twice, and I am pretty sure they are particularly noticing us. Keep +your hand on your pistol." + +As the boys paused at another shop window, the three men again +approached, this time from ahead. + +"Look out, Tom," Peter said sharply. + +As the men came up to them, one of them exclaimed, + +"Now!" + +The boys faced round, pistol in hand, with a cry to their friends, +just as the three Spaniards, with drawn knives, were upon them. + +The sudden movement disconcerted them, and two sprang back from the +leveled tubes of the pistols, with fierce oaths of surprise, the +third, however, rushed in and struck at Tom; the latter instinctively +moved aside, and the knife inflicted a heavy gash on the shoulder, and +almost at the same moment Peter's bullet crashed through the fellow's +skull. + +His comrades, with a cry of rage, rushed in, but before they could +strike, the sergeant was up and ran one through the body with his +sword, whereon the other fled. The whole affair lasted only three +or four seconds. In less than a minute the street was absolutely +deserted, for rows and fights were so common between the soldiers and +the people, that all prudent people got out of the way the moment a +knife was drawn. + +"Well done, lad," the sergeant said to Peter, "I thought your brother +was done for. Luckily I had faced your way when the fellow attacked +you, and was on my way to help you before they began, but I feared I +should be too late. That was a wonderfully pretty snap shot of yours, +and you were as cool as old hands. Peste! I don't know what to make +of you boys. Now come along, we had better get away from this carrion +before any one comes up and asks questions. First, though, let me tie +up your shoulder." + +This was soon done, and while the sergeant was engaged upon it, his +comrades, old soldiers, turned over the dead Spaniards, searched their +pockets, and chuckled as they found several gold pieces. + +One or two French soldiers alone came near them before they left the +spot, attracted by the sound of the pistol. A word from the sergeant, +"These scoundrels attacked us, they have got their _coup_," satisfied +them, and the boys and their friend soon regained the crowded main +street, leaving the bodies for the watch to find and bury. + +Arrived at the barracks, Tom's arm was examined by the surgeon, and +the cut pronounced a deep flesh wound, but of no consequence; it was +soon strapped up, and with his arm in a sling Tom went down to the +sergeant's quarters, where they slept. Here they had to go through +much patting on the back, for their friend had described the readiness +and coolness with which they stood at bay, and popular as they were +before they were now more so than ever. For the rest of their stay in +Madrid the boys did not stir out of barracks. One at least of Nunez's +envoys they knew to be alive, and he could enlist any number of the +lower class against them, so they resolved not to go out until they +should finally start. + +After a fortnight's stay they were sent for to the colonel's quarters, +where they found Madame Reynier and her child. "I had a letter from my +husband this morning," she said, "from his camp near Cordova, thanking +you with all his heart for the inestimable service you rendered him, +and begging me to tell you that you can count on his gratitude to the +extent of his life at any and all times. You need no assurance of +mine. And now about your journey. All is prepared for you to leave +to-morrow morning. You are to come here to the colonel's quarters soon +after daybreak. Here are your two disguises, for the one as a young +bachelor of medicine, for the other as a young novice. Here is your +pass, signed by the minister, authorizing you both to pass on to your +relations at Ciudad Rodrigo, and to go unmolested thence where you +choose, also recommending you to the care of all French and Spanish +authorities. A regiment marches to-morrow morning for the frontier; +the colonel is a cousin of my husband. I have told him that some +friends of yours rendered me much kindness and service on my way down, +and that I particularly commend you to his care. He has promised to +allow you to follow the regiment, and to see that you get quarters at +each halting-place. He does not know you for anything but what you +appear to be. When you have put on these dresses to-morrow morning, +step out by the private door from these quarters, looking carefully +when you start to see that there is no one in the street. Then go +boldly to No. 15, Rue St. Geronimo; go into the courtyard, there you +will see two stout mules with all necessaries, under charge of a +soldier, who will have instructions to hand them over to you without +asking any questions; then go down to the Retiro and wait till the +16th come along. The Colonel will be on the look-out for you, and you +will ride up to him and hand him this note. And now farewell, dear +boys; never shall I forget you, or cease to pray for you, and may be +when this terrible war is over we may meet as friends again. Keep +these little tokens of remembrance of your grateful friends." So +saying, Madame Reynier pressed into the boys' hands two magnificent +gold watches and chains, held her child up for each of them to kiss, +threw her arms round their necks and kissed them herself, and then +drawing down her veil to conceal the tears which were standing in her +eyes, left them hastily. + +That night the boys said good-by to their friend the sergeant, and +to those soldiers with whom they had most companionship. "You have +guessed, no doubt, sergeant," Tom said, in his mixture of Spanish and +French, "that we are not exactly what we seem to be, but if we should +ever meet again, under different circumstances, I want you to remember +that our connection with the regiment has been in a way forced upon +us. I should not like you to think, that is that under the pretence +of friendship, we have been treacherously learning things. Do you +understand?" + +"I understand, mes braves," the sergeant said, "Jacques Pinteau is no +fool, and he saw from the first that you were not two ragged Spanish +peasant boys by birth. I daresay I can guess what you are, but there +need be no ill-will for that, and as you only came among us by +accident, as it were, there is no more to be said either way. There is +one thing certain, wherever or however we meet, we shall be friends." + +So well were Madame Reynier's plans arranged that the boys passed from +Madrid to the frontier without a single hitch or unpleasantness. Tom +was soberly attired as a student at the university, Peter was muffled +up to the eyes as a timid young novice, going from school to enter a +convent, of which his aunt was lady superior, at Ciudad Rodrigo. The +colonel, and, following his example, the officers of the regiment were +polite and civil. The marches were of easy length, the mules stout +and smooth-going, with well-filled traveling sacks. The weather was +delightful, and the boys enjoyed the fortnight's march exceedingly. +Upon the road they learned that Massena had laid siege to Ciudad +Rodrigo, and that the 16th was on its way to join the besieging army. + +It was the end of June, 1810, when the 16th joined Massena's force +before Ciudad Rodrigo. The siege had continued for some time, the +British light division, under General Craufurd, lay upon the other +side of the river Agueda, which separated them alike from the town and +the French army. The colonel of the 16th politely expressed to Tom his +regret that he could not, for the present, conduct them to their final +destination, but that he hoped that the gate would soon be open for +them. Tom thanked him for the civility which he had shown them upon +the road, and said that he would, with his sister, take up his abode +for the present a few miles from the beleaguered fortress. On leaving +the regiment the boys went higher up the Agueda to the little town of +Villar, where there was a bridge. This however, was watched by the +troops of both armies, and there was, at present, no chance of +affecting a passage. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +THE FIGHT ON THE COA. + + +All through the winter of 1809-1810, Wellington had remained quietly +on the frontier of Portugal, engaged in disciplining his troops, many +of whom were raw drafts from the militia, in urging upon the home +Government the necessity of fresh reinforcements, if the war was to be +carried on with the smallest hopes of success, and in controversies +and disputes with the Portuguese regency. This body of incapables +starved their own army, refused supplies and transport to the British, +and behaved with such arrogance and insolence that Wellington was +several times driven to use the threat that, unless measures were +taken to keep the Portuguese troops from starving, and to supply food +to the British, he would put his army on board the transports at +Lisbon, and give up the struggle altogether. + +Spring found the army still on the frontier, and when the French +advanced in force in May to lay siege to the Spanish frontier fortress +of Ciudad Rodrigo, Wellington to the intense disappointment of his own +troops, and the bitter anger of the Portuguese and Spaniards, refused +to fight a battle to save the fortress, which, under its gallant old +governor, Andrea Hernati, was defending itself nobly. + +Wellington's position was, however, a very difficult one, and his +responsibilities were immense. Allowing for the detachments which were +massing to check three other French columns advancing in different +directions, he had but 25,000 men with which to attempt to raise the +siege of Ciudad Rodrigo, or to draw off the besieged garrison. Massena +had under him 60,000 French veterans, and was desiring nothing more +than that Wellington should attack him. The chances of victory then +were by no means strong, and in any case victory could only have been +purchased by a loss of men which would have completely crippled the +British general, and would have rendered it absolutely necessary for +him to fall back again at once. A defeat or even a heavy loss of +men, would have so dispirited the faint-hearted Government at home +that they would undoubtedly have recalled the whole expedition, and +resigned Portugal to its fate. Thus Wellington decided not to risk the +whole fate of the British army and of Portugal for merely a temporary +advantage, and so stood firm against the murmurs of his own troops, +the furious reproaches of the Portuguese and Spaniards, and the moving +entreaties for aid of the gallant governor of the besieged town. + +At the same time that he refused to risk a general battle, he kept +Craufurd's division in advance of the Coa, and within two hours' march +of the enemy, thereby encouraging the garrison of Ciudad Rodrigo, and +preventing Massena from pushing forward a portion of his army while +the rest pursued the siege. + +Craufurd's front was guarded by the Agueda, a river only passable by +two or three bridges and fords in wet weather, but fordable in many +places in the dry season. At the commencement of June the Agueda +fell, and the French crossed in strength at various places. Craufurd, +however, still maintained his position in front of the Coa with great +skill and boldness. He had under his command only 4000 infantry, 1100 +cavalry, and six guns, and his maintenance of his position, almost +within gun-shot of an enemy's army, 60,000 strong, for three months, +is one of the finest feats of military audacity and ability ever +performed. + +Until the 11th of July the boys remained quietly at a cottage occupied +by peasants, who believed their story that they were only waiting +to proceed when the French army advanced. They were freed from +molestation or inquiry upon the part of the French by the pass with +which Madame Reynier had supplied them. + +Upon that day Ciudad Rodrigo surrendered, and Massena prepared at once +to enter Portugal. Upon the 21st the cavalry advanced in great force, +and upon the following day the boys resolved upon endeavoring to +rejoin the British army. The Agueda was now easily fordable in many +places, but the boys determined to swim across, at a distance from the +point at which the French army was now pouring forward. + +As evening came on they left the cottage, and walked two miles up +the stream, and, as soon as night fell, took off the costumes which +had proved of such service to them and left them on the bank; then +fastening their peasants' suits upon two bundles of rushes to keep +them dry, entered the little river, and were soon upon the opposite +shore. They knew, from what they had heard in the afternoon, that +Craufurd had fallen back upon Almeida, a fortified town, and that it +was probable he would at once cross the Coa, as resistance to the +force now approaching him seemed nothing short of madness. + +No good, indeed, could be gained by a fight in such a position, with a +deep river in the rear, crossed by only a narrow bridge, and commanded +by both banks, and Wellington's orders had been imperative "that, upon +no account whatever was Craufurd to fight beyond the Coa." + +Craufurd, however, a rash and obstinate, although a skilful general, +was determined upon having a brush with the enemy before he fell back. +He anticipated, no doubt, that only an advanced guard of the enemy +would come up at first, and his intention was to inflict a severe +check upon them with the magnificent little division under his +command, and then fall back triumphantly across the Coa. Massena, +however, was well aware of the fighting powers of the light division, +and was preparing to hurl suddenly upon him a force more than +sufficient to crush it. + +The Scudamores had but little fear of meeting with any large body of +the enemy, as the main French advance was direct from Ciudad Rodrigo; +their cavalry would, however, be scattered all over the country, and +were they to fall into the hands of any of these parties they would +have been shot instantly, upon suspicion of endeavoring to convey news +of the French movements to Craufurd. + +The point where they crossed the river was between Villar and Naves +Frias, and, after an hour's walking, they struck the little rivulet +called Duas Casas. This they crossed at once, as they knew that by +following its southern bank until they saw some high ground to their +left they would find themselves near Almeida, which they hoped to +reach before the English retreated. + +All night they tramped through the fields of stubble, where the corn +had been long since cut for the use of Craufurd's cavalry, but walking +at night through an unknown country is slow work, and when day began +to break they entered a small wood just beyond the point where the +Turones, as the southern arm of the Duas Casas is called, branches off +from the main stream. Several times in the course of the day bodies +of the enemy's cavalry came near their place of concealment, and the +Scudamores congratulated themselves that they had not given way to +their impatience, and tried to push on across the twenty miles that +alone separated them from their friends. + +At nightfall the wind rose, and a heavy rain began to fall. They had +no stars by which to steer their course, and were, therefore, forced +to follow the bank of the Turones, although they knew that it would +lead them some distance to the north of Almeida. It was slow work, +indeed, for they had to grope their way along in the storm, following +every turn and bend of the river, which formed their only guide. After +several hours' toil they came into a road running north and south. +This they knew was the road leading from Guarda to Almeida, and it +gave them a clue as to the distance they had come. Still following the +river, they continued their course until they approached San Pedro, +whence they knew that a road ran directly to the British position +in front of Almeida, that is if the British still maintained their +position there. + +As they approached the village, they heard a deep, hollow sound, +and stopping to listen, and laying their ears to the ground, could +distinguish the rumble of heavy carriages. + +"The French are advancing in force, Peter; we are just in time; +they are going to attack us in the morning at daybreak. We know the +direction now; let us turn to the left, and try to get on in advance +of them. They probably will not push on much farther until there +is light enough to permit them to form order of battle; they are +evidently, by the sound, going to the left, rather than straight on." + +The Scudamores now hurried on, and presently the rumbling of the +artillery died away, and they ventured to push to their left, and to +get on the road, which they found deserted. Half an hour's run, for +they knew that every minute was of importance, and they heard the +welcome challenge, "Who comes there?" "Two British officers," they +answered, and in a few minutes they were taken to the officer in +charge of the picket, and having once convinced him of their identity, +were heartily greeted and welcomed. + +"The French are advancing in great force to attack," Tom said; "please +forward us instantly to the general." + +The matter was too important for an instant's delay, and a sergeant +was at once told off to accompany them. + +The first faint blush of daylight was in the east when they arrived +at the cottage which served as General Craufurd's quarters, and, upon +their speaking to the sentinel at the door, a window was thrown open, +and a deep voice demanded "What is it?" + +"We have just arrived through the French lines," Tom said, "the enemy +are at hand in force." + +The casement closed, and an instant afterwards the general came out. +"Who are you?" + +"We belong to the Norfolk Rangers, general, and have been detached on +service in the interior; we have only just made our way back." + +"How am I to know your story is true?" the general asked sharply. + +"You may, perhaps, remember, sir, we landed from the 'Latona,' and you +kindly lent us horses to accompany you." + +"Aha! I remember," the general said. "Well, your news?" + +"The French have crossed the Turones in force, sir; at least they have +a good many guns with them." + +"Which way were they going?" + +"As far as we could judge by the sound, sir, they were taking up a +position between Villa Formosa and Fort Conception." + +"Good," the general said shortly; then turning to three or four of his +staff who had followed him from the cottage, "Get the troops under +arms at once. Come in here, gentlemen." + +The Scudamores entered, and as they came into the light of a candle +which stood on the table the general smiled grimly. + +"It is lucky you were able to recall yourselves to my memory, for +I should have needed some strong evidence to persuade me you were +British officers had I seen you before you spoke. You are wet to the +skin; there is a brandy bottle, and you will find some bread and cold +fowl in that cupboard." + +Five minutes later the boys followed General Craufurd from his hut. + +Short as was the time which had elapsed since their arrival, the +troops were already under arms, for three months of incessant alarm +and watchfulness had enabled this splendid division to act as one man, +and to fall in at any hour of the day or night in an incredibly short +time. Ten minutes later and the ramble of the baggage wagons was +heard along the road towards the bridge. The morning was clearing +fast, the clouds lifted, and the daylight seemed to break with unusual +suddenness. + +The dark masses of the French became visible forming up before the +Turones, and Craufurd hurried forward his cavalry and guns to check +their advance. + +"Hurry the infantry up, hurry them up," the general said urgently to +the officers by him. "Let them take post along the ridge, and then +fall back fighting towards the bridge. Major MacLeod," he said to an +officer of the 43d, "take these gentlemen with you; they are officers +of the Norfolk Rangers. They will join your regiment for the present. +When your regiment falls back, occupy that stone inclosure a little +way down the slope at the left of the road, and hold the enemy in +check while the troops file over the bridge." + +The officer addressed looked with surprise at the boys, and signing to +them to follow, hurried off to his regiment, which was on the left of +the British line. + +Next to them came a regiment of Portuguese riflemen, with a wing of +the 95th upon either flank, while the 52d formed the right of the +line. + +Upon reaching the regiment, Major MacLeod briefly introduced the boys +to the colonel, who said, "As you have no arms, gentlemen, I think you +had better make for the bridge at once." + +"Thank you, sir," Tom replied, "there will be some muskets disposable +before long, and directly they are so we will take our place in the +ranks." + +They had now leisure to look round and examine their position, and a +glance was sufficient to show how great was the peril in which General +Craufurd's obstinacy had placed his little force. In front of them +were 24,000 French infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 30 pieces of artillery. +An overwhelming force indeed, and one which could scarcely have been +withstood by the 4000 British infantry, even under the most favorable +conditions of position. The position, however, was here wholly against +the British. They stood at the edge of a plateau, and behind them the +ground fell away in a steep hillside to the Coa, a mile distant, and +across the Coa there was but a single bridge. + +The enemy was approaching fast. Ney's great brigade of cavalry swept +the British horse before them, and the infantry were following at a +run. + +Resistance on the edge of the plateau was hopeless, and Craufurd +ordered the infantry to fall back at once. The 43d filed into the +inclosure, rapidly cut loopholes in the wall, and as the enemy +appeared on the crest above opened a tremendous fire, under cover of +which the cavalry and artillery trotted briskly and in good order down +the road to the bridge. + +The Scudamores, having no duty, stood at the entrance to the inclosure +and watched the fight on their right. As the masses of French infantry +appeared on the edge of the plateau they made no pause, but opening +a heavy fire pressed forward on the retiring British troops, who +were falling back in open order, contesting every inch of ground. So +rapidly and hotly, however, did the French press after them that the +British were soon pushed back beyond the line of the inclosure, and as +the French followed closely, it was evident that the 43d would be cut +oft and surrounded. + +Their colonel saw their danger, and called upon them to fall in and +retreat, but the entrance was so narrow that it was clear at a glance +that ere one company could pass through it the French would be upon +them, and the regiment caught like rats in a trap. + +Officers and men alike saw the danger, and there was a pause of +consternation. + +Peter was standing next to the colonel, and said suddenly as the idea +flashed across him, "The wall is not very strong, sir, if the men mass +against it and push together I think it will go." + +The colonel caught at the idea. "Now, lads, steady, form against the +rear wall four deep, close together, shoulder to shoulder, as close +as you can pack; now get ready, one, two, three!" and at the word the +heavy mass of men swung themselves against the wall; it swayed with +the shock, and many stones were displaced; another effort and the +wall tottered and fell, and with a glad shout the 43d burst out, and +trotting on at the double soon joined the rifles and 95th. + +The ground was rough and broken with rocks, vineyards and inclosures, +and the troops, fighting with admirable coolness and judgment, took +advantage of every obstacle and fell back calmly and in good order +before the overwhelming force opposed to them. + +Fortunately the jealousies of the French generals, which throughout +the campaign contributed in no slight degree to the success of +the British, was now the cause of their safety, for Montbrun, who +commanded the French heavy cavalry, refused to obey Ney's order to +charge straight down to the bridge, in which case the whole English +infantry would have been cut off; the French hussars, however, being +on the British rear, charged among them whenever the ground permitted +them to do so. + +Upon the British right the ground was more open than upon the left, +and the 52d was therefore obliged to fall back more quickly than the +rest of the line, and were the first to arrive at the bridge head, +which was still choked with artillery and cavalry. This was the most +dangerous moment, the rest of the infantry could not retreat until the +bridge was clear, and the French with exulting shouts pressed hard +upon them to drive them back upon the river. + +Major MacLeod, seeing the urgent danger, rallied four companies of his +regiment upon the little hill on the right of the road, while Major +Rowan collected two companies on another to the left. Here they were +joined by many of the riflemen, and for a while the French advance was +checked. + +The Scudamores had remained throughout close to Major MacLeod, and had +long since armed themselves with the muskets and pouches of fallen +men, and with 43d shakoes on their heads, were fighting among the +ranks. + +The cloud of French skirmishers pressed hotly forward, and MacLeod, +seeing that the bridge was still blocked, resolved suddenly upon +a desperate measure. Taking off his cap, he pointed to the enemy, +and calling upon his men to follow him, rode boldly at them. Peter +Scudamore caught up a bugle which had fallen from a dead bugler by his +side, blew the charge, and the soldiers, cheering loudly, followed +MacLeod against the enemy. + +Astounded at this sudden and unexpected attack, the French skirmishers +paused, and then fell back before the furious charge of the 43d, who +pressed after them with loud and continuous cheering. Looking back, +MacLeod saw that the bridge was now clear, and recalled the troops, +who fell back rapidly again before the French infantry had recovered +sufficiently from their surprise to press them. + +The hussars were, however, again forward, and were galloping down the +road, which was here sunken between somewhat high banks. Tom and Peter +were with the last company, which turned and prepared to receive them, +when Tom, pointing to a coil of rope upon a cart which had broken +down, shouted, "Quick, tie it to these posts across the road." Two or +three men sprang to assist him, and in a minute the rope was stretched +across the road at a foot from the ground, and fastened round a stone +post on either side. They had scarcely seized their muskets and leapt +on the bank again, when the French cavalry came thundering down the +road. "Fire, a few of you," Tom said, "so as to call their attention +up here," and in accordance with his order a dropping fire was opened. +The French came along at a gallop; a few of the leading horses saw +the rope and leapt it, but those behind caught it and fell, the mass +behind pressed on, and in an instant the lane was choked with a +confused mass of men and horses. "Now a volley," Tom cried, "and then +to the bridge." + +Every musket was emptied in to the struggling mass, and then with a +cheer, the men ran briskly down to the bridge, and crossed--the last +of the British troops over the Coa. + +The rest of the infantry and artillery had already taken ground on the +heights behind the river, and these opened fire upon the French as +they approached the head of the bridge in pursuit. The British were +now, however, safe in the position which they ought to have taken up +before the advance of the French, and had General Craufurd obeyed his +orders not to fight beyond the Coa, the lives of 306 of his gallant +troops, including the officers, would have been saved. + +The battle, however, was not yet over. The artillery on both sides +played across the ravine, the French skirmishers swarmed down to the +river bank, and between them and the British infantry a rapid fire was +exchanged, while a heavy column marched down to the bridge. With a +deep-sounding cheer they advanced upon it, while with answering cheers +the British opened fire upon them. The depth of the ravine at first +deceived the British marksmen, and the column pressed on until its +head was three-quarters across the bridge. Then the shower smote it, +and beneath that terrible fire the head of the column melted away. +Still it pressed on until across the bridge the corpses lay piled in a +mass as high as the parapet, and beyond this heap, this terrible line, +there was no living. Then sullenly and slowly the French fell back, +while the British cheers rose exultingly along the hillside. + +Twice again did fresh columns pour on to the bridge, but only to melt +away under the British fire, neither of them reaching the dreadful +line which marked the point reached by the head of the first. The +artillery and musketry fire on both sides continued until four in the +afternoon, when a heavy rain set in, and the fire ceased altogether. + +As the Coa was fordable at several points lower down, and the French +could therefore have turned the position next day, the British troops +fell back during the night behind the Pinhel river, where Picton's +division was also encamped. + +Next morning the boys exchanged their Spanish suits for the uniform +of British officers, which they obtained from the effects of some of +those who had fallen upon the previous day, these being, as is usual +in a campaign, at once sold by auction, the amount realized being +received by the paymaster for the benefit of the dead men's relatives. +Major MacLeod had witnessed their ready presence of mind in throwing +the rope across the road, and so checking the French charge, and +giving time to the rear-guard to cross the bridge, and had made a very +favorable report upon the subject. + +Two days later and they joined the Rangers, who were stationed at +Guarda, and were received with the greatest heartiness by their +brother officers, with warm but respectful greetings by the men, and +with uproarious demonstrations of gladness on the part of Sambo. + +"The betting was two to one that you had gone down, boys," Captain +Manley said, after the first greetings; "but Carruthers and myself +have taken up all offers, and win I don't know how many dinners and +bottles of wine. I had the strongest faith you would get through +somehow. You will take up your quarters with me. I have two bedrooms +upstairs there, which Sam has taken possession of in your name. He +would have it that you were sure to be back in time for the first +fight. Dinner will be ready at six, and after that there will be a +general gathering round the fire in the open to hear your adventures. +No doubt you would be dining with the colonel, but I know he is +engaged to the general." + +"Yes, he told us so," Tom said, "and we are to dine with him +to-morrow." + +"All right, then; we'll make a night of it. Carruthers is coming to +dine, and Burke and Lethbridge; but the room won't hold more than six. +We are going to have a feast, for Sam has got hold of a sucking-pig; +where he got it from I dare not inquire, and Lethbridge said his +fellow had, somehow or other, found a turkey; as to wine, we shall +have it of the best, for Burke is quartered at the monastery, and the +monks are so delighted at finding him a good Catholic that they have +given him the run of their cellar." + +It was a jovial dinner, and no words can express the satisfaction and +delight which beamed on Sam's face as he stood behind his master, or +the grin of pride with which he placed the sucking-pig on the table. + +"Sam, Sam!" Captain Manley said reprovingly, "I fear that pig is not +honestly come by, and that one of these days we shall hear that you +have come to a bad end." + +"No, no, Massa Captain Manley, sar," Sam said, "dat pig come quite +honest, dat pig made present to Sam." + +"A likely story that, Sam. Come, out with it. I have no doubt it was +quite as honest as Lethbridge's turkey anyhow. Come, tell us how it +was." + +Thus invoked, Sam's face assumed the pompons air with which he always +related a story, and he began,-- + +"Well, sar, de affair happened in dis way. When de massas arribe, two +o'clock, and went in for long talk wid de colonel, dis chile said to +himself, 'Now what am I going to get them for dinner?' De rations +sarve out dis morning war all skin and bone, and war pretty nigh +finished at lunch. Sam say to himself, 'Captain Manley's sure to say, +'You dine wid me;' but as Captain Manley hadn't got no food himself, +de invitation was berry kind, berry kind indeed; but massa wasn't +likely to get fat on dat invitation." + +Sam's narrative was interrupted by a perfect shout of laughter upon +the part of all at table, Captain Manley joining heartily in the laugh +against himself. When they had a little recovered again, Sam went on +as gravely as ever. "Dis struck Sam berry serious, not to have nothing +for dinner after being away seben months; presently idea occur to dis +chile, and he stroll permiscuous up to big farm-house on hill. When +Sam got near house, kept out of sight of window; at last got quite +close, took off shako, and put head suddenly in at window. Sure +enough, just what Sam expected, dere sat missus of farm, fat ole +woman, wid fat ole servant opposite her. De door was open, and dis +little pig and several of his broders and sisters was a frisking in +and out. De old women look up bofe togeder, and dey give a awful +shriek when dey saw dis chile's head; dey fought it were de debil, +sure enough. Dey drop down on dere knees, and begin to pray as fast as +maybe. Den I give a loud 'Yah! yah!' and dey screams out fresh. 'Oh! +good massa debil!' says the ole woman, 'what you want? I been berry, +berry bad, but don't take me away.' You see, Massa Tom, I pick up +little Spanish, 'nuff to understand since you been gone. I not say +nuffin, and de ole woman den go on, 'If you want one soul Massa Debil, +take dis here,' pointing to her serbant;' she been much more wicked +nor me.' Den de serbant she set up awful shriek, and I says, 'Dis time +I hab pity on you, next time I come, if you not good I carry you bofe +away. But must take soul away to big debil 'else he neber forgibe me. +Dere, I will carry off soul of little pig. Gib it me.' De serbant she +gives cry ob joy, jump up, seize little pig, and berry much afraid, +bring him to window. Before I take him I say to old missus, 'Dis a +free gibt on your part?' and she say, 'Oh, yes, oh, yes, good Massa +Debil, you can take dem all if you like.' I say, 'No; only one--and +now me gib you bit advice. My Massa down below hear you very bad ole +women, never gib noting to de poor, berry hard, berry hard. Me advise +you change your conduct, or, as sure as eggs is eggs, he send me up +again for you no time.' Den I gave two great 'Yah! yah's!' again berry +loud, and showed de white ob my eyes, and dey went down on to knees +again, and I go quietly round corner ob house, and walk home wid de +pig which was giben to me. Noting like stealing about dat, Massa +Manley, sar!" + +Sam's story was received with roars of laughter, and when they had +recovered themselves a little, Captain Manley said, "It is lucky we +march to-morrow, Sam, for if the good woman were to catch a glimpse of +you in uniform, and were to find she had been tricked, she might lay +a complaint against you, and although, as you say, the pig was freely +given to you, I imagine the Provost Marshal might consider that it was +obtained under false pretences. But here are the other men outside, we +had better adjourn, for every one is longing to hear your adventures." + +It was a lovely evening, and as the officers of the Norfolk Rangers +sat or lay round the fire, which was lit for light and cheerfulness +rather than warmth, the boys, after their long wanderings among +strangers, felt how pleasant and bright life was among friends +and comrades. They had first to relate their adventures with the +guerillas, after which it was agreed that they had earned the right to +be silent for the rest of the evening, and song, and jest, and merry +story went round the ring. + +Sam was installed under the direction of the doctor, a jovial +Irishman, as concocter of punch, and his office was by no means a +sinecure. + +"Now, major, give us the song of the regiment," Captain Manley said, +and, as he spoke, there was a general cry round the circle of "The +Rangers, the Rangers." "I'm agreeable," the major said. "Give me +another tumbler of punch to get my pipes in order. Make it a little +sweeter than the last brew, Sam; yes, that's better. Well, here +goes--full chorus, and no shirking." + +THE RANGERS. + + "Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah! + Here's to the corps that we love so well; + Ever the first in the deadly fray, + Steady and firm amid shot and shell. + Scattered as skirmishers out in the front, + Contesting each foot of the ground we hold, + Nor yielding a step though we bear the brunt + Of the first attack of the foeman bold. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah! + Here's to the corps that we love so well; + Ever the first in the deadly fray, + Steady and firm amid shot and shell. + + "Steady boys, steady, the foe falls back, + Sullenly back to the beat of the drum, + Hark to the thunder that nears our flank + Rally in square, boys, their cavalry come. + Squadron on squadron, wave upon wave, + Dashing along with an ocean's force, + But they break into spray on our bayonets' points, + And we mock at the fury of rider and horse. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c. + + "The gunner may boast of the death he deals + As he shatters the foe with his iron hail, + And may laugh with pride as he checks the charge, + Or sees the dark column falter and quail. + But the gunner fights with the foe afar, + In the rear of the line is the battery's place, + The Ranger fights with a sterner joy + For he strives with his foemen face to face. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c. + + "The cavalry man is dashing and gay, + His steed is fast, and his blade is fine, + He blithely rides to the fiercest fray, + And cuts his way through the foeman's line, + But the wild, fierce joys of the deadly breach, + Or the patient pluck of the serried square + Are far away from the horseman's reach, + While the Norfolk Rangers are sure to be there. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c." + +Long, loud, and hearty was the cheering as the last chorus concluded. +"Very good song, very well sung, jolly companions every one," shouted +the doctor. "Now, Manley, keep the ball rolling, give us the 'The +Bivouac,'" Captain Manley emptied his glass, and, without hesitation, +began-- + +THE BIVOUAC. + + "The weary march is over, boys, the camp fire's burning bright, + So gather round the blazing logs, we'll keep high feast to-night, + For every heart is full of joy, and every cheek aglow, + That after months of waiting, at last we meet the foe. + To-morrow's sun will see the fight, and ere that sun goes down, + Our glorious flag another wreath of victory shall crown. + + Hurrah, hurrah for the bivouac, + With comrades tried and true, + With faces bright, and spirits light, + And the foemen's fires in view. + + "Then fill your cups with Spanish wine, and let the toast go round, + Here's a health to all who love us on dear old England's ground. + Be their tresses gold or auburn, or black as ebon's hue, + Be their eyes of witching hazel, loving gray, or heaven's blue, + Here's to them all, the girls we love, God bless them every one; + May we all be here to toast them when to-morrow's work is done. + + Hurrah, hurrah, &c. + + "But whate'er to-morrow bring us, it shall shed no gloom to-night, + For a British soldier does not flinch from thought of death in fight; + No better ending could we wish, no worthier do we know, + Than to fall for King and country, with our face towards the foe; + And if we go, our friends who stay will keep our memory bright, + And will drink to us in silence by many a camp-fire's light. + + Hurrah, hurrah, &c." + +When the last chorus had ceased, the boys, who had had a long march +that morning, and were thoroughly tired, stole quietly off to bed, +but it was not till long after they had gone to sleep that the jovial +party round the fire broke up, and that Sam was relieved from his +duties of concocter of punch. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +BUSACO AND TORRES VEDRAS. + + +Instead of pressing forward upon his invasion of Portugal, Massena +prepared to besiege Almeida, and for a month the British and +Portuguese army remained in their position within a few hours' march +of that town. Wellington expected that Almeida would be able to +resist for two months, and hoped to find some opportunity for falling +suddenly upon the besiegers; but even a resistance of two months would +have made it so late in the season that Massena must have postponed +his invasion until the next spring. + +Upon the morning of the 26th of August the French batteries opened +fire, and from Guarda the dull, heavy roar of artillery could be heard +all day. As darkness fell, the officers of the Rangers were, as usual, +assembling round their fire, when the earth seemed to shake beneath +their feet, and a flash like that of summer lightning lit the eastern +sky. "What can that be?" was the general exclamation. A minute later, +and a deep, heavy, prolonged roar sounded in their ears--then all was +quiet. + +"That is a big magazine," Captain Manley said, "and I'm afraid it's +the town, for it sounded too heavy for a mere field magazine. If it be +the town, you'll see it won't hold out much longer; even if the actual +damage is not very great, a great explosion always damages the morale +of a defense, and in that case we shall have Massena upon us, and +there will be wigs on the green ere many days are over." + +Captain Manley's conclusions were correct. The magazine of Almeida had +exploded with terrific effect. Only six houses were left standing in +the town, a considerable portion of the ramparts was thrown down, and +five hundred people killed on the spot. The stones were hurled in all +directions with such force that forty of the besiegers were hurt in +the trenches. + +Colonel Cox, who commanded, endeavored to rally the panic-stricken +garrison, and upon the following morning attempted to negotiate with +Massena, who sent an officer to demand instant surrender. + +Defense was, in fact, impossible, but Colonel Cox attempted to +negotiate, because he hoped that Wellington would at once advance to +his rescue. His intentions were frustrated, however, by the treachery +and mutiny of the principal Portuguese officers under him, and the +French at once took possession of the ruins. + +The British army fell back a short distance when the news of the +disaster arrived, and a fortnight of great anxiety and watchfulness +passed, as it was not certain by which road or roads Massena would +advance. + +It was not until the 18th of September that Massena fairly commenced +his march, having chosen the road from Visen through Martagoa, and the +next day the news reached the Rangers that the British army was to +concentrate on the heights of Busaco. + +"So we are going to have a fight for it," Carruthers said to the boys, +as the officers assembled in readiness to take their places when the +troops had fallen in. "What will be the end of it?" + +"We shall lick them," an old captain said, "though they are two to +one, and then they will march round us somehow, and then we shall have +to fall back in all haste on Lisbon, and embark there, and we shall +eat our Christmas dinner in England." + +There was a general murmur of assent, for at that time the belief was +almost universal in the British army that they would be forced to +abandon Portugal. + +"I do not know," Major Fanshawe said. "I heard last night, from a +man who has just returned from sick leave at Lisbon, that there are +thousands of peasants employed under our engineers in getting up some +tremendous works some fifteen miles this side of Lisbon. I should not +be surprised yet if Massena finds the chief a nut too hard to crack, +with all his force." + +"I have heard something about these works at Torres Vedras," Captain +Manley said, "a mere rumor; still I believe there must be something in +it. Wellington has only some twenty-five thousand British troops, and +as many Portuguese, while Massena has over a hundred thousand veterans +at his command. Our game would be hopeless unless we have something to +fall back on. No; I have every faith in our general. But there goes +the bugle." + +On the 24th the Rangers, with the rest of Picton's division, arrived +on the crest of Busaco, where Cole's and Craufurd's divisions arrived +on the same day. This position was one of immense strength, being a +long ridge, with a very deep valley in front. Upon the opposite side +of this ravine the slope was as steep and sharp as that of Busaco +itself, so that the opposite crest was within easy cannon shot. +The enemy, in order to attack the British position, would have to +descend into the bottom of this steep ravine, and then climb up the +precipitous ascent, to meet the British soldiers awaiting them, fresh +and unshaken, at the top. So strong, indeed, was the position that +the English generals were doubtful whether Massena would venture to +attack. + +Upon the 25th Craufurd moved his division forward, and would have +repeated his mistake of the Coa had not Wellington himself gone +forward and recalled the troops, bringing them off with difficulty +in the face of the advancing masses of the French. By three in the +afternoon, 40,000 French infantry were on the ridge opposite Busaco, +and it appeared probable that the battle would take place that +afternoon, in which case the British position would have been +precarious, for neither Spencer's, Hill's, nor Leith's divisions were +up. + +Massena, however, was miles behind, and Ney, who commanded the +advance, could not attack without orders; thus, the moment favorable +for the French passed by. When Massena arrived next day, the British +divisions were all up and in their places, and the long crest of +Busaco swarmed with troops. Hill occupied the right across the road to +Pena Cova, then came Leith's 5th division, then came Picton with the +3d division, with Spencer's division, the 1st, next to him. On a +plateau in front of a convent lay Craufurd and Pack, while Cole, with +the 4th division, was on the left. + +The 27th and 28th were passed in comparative tranquillity, the rival +armies surveying each other across the chasm. From the woods far below +came up the constant crack of the rifle, as the skirmishers on either +side pushed each other backwards; and on the evening of the 28th this +fighting increased so much in strength and intensity, that the British +troops were some time under arms in expectation of a night attack, for +the enemy's riflemen had pressed far up on the hill-side towards the +British lines. As the night went on, however, the fire ceased, and the +dark ravine between the two long lines of bright watch-fires became +hushed and still. + +The Rangers were with Picton's division, and were out as an advance +half way down the ravine, two companies being down in the bottom as +skirmishers. Morning was but just breaking when a heavy fire burst out +in front. The regiment sprang to its feet, and prepared for action. +It was not long in coming, for the fire rolled rapidly up the hill +towards them, and the skirmishing companies came running back, pressed +by a heavy column of the enemy. Reynier had formed in two divisions, +one of which was now pressing forward against Picton's right, while +the object of the other was to gain the crest still farther to the +right, and so place themselves between Picton and Leigh. The whole +regiment was at once engaged, but the French assault was too powerful +to be resisted, and the Rangers and the other regiments of the +advanced brigade gave way sullenly, while the French eagerly pressed +up the hill, although a battery opened upon them from the crest, while +they were unsupported by their own artillery. + +"Golly, Massa Peter, dese fellows fight berry hard; look as if dey +lick us dis time," the black, who was in Peter's company, said to him +as the regiment retreated. + +"The battle has only begun yet, Sam. We have plenty of fresh troops at +the top of the hill." + +"Good ting, dat, Massa Peter. Berry hard work, dis--climb hill, carry +kit, fire gun, dodge de bullets, all sam time." + +"You didn't dodge that bullet sharp enough, Sam," Peter said with a +laugh, as the negro's shako was carried off with a ball. + +"Him cum too fast. Dere, you frog-eating thief." he said angrily as he +fired his musket at an advancing foe. "Dat serve you right," he went +on to himself as the Frenchman fell. "You spoil Sam's hat. Dis colored +gentleman catch cold first time him come on to rain." + +The French continued their impetuous advance. Picton's right, as they +climbed the hill, fell back towards his center, and in half an hour +from the first shot being fired the head of the French column had won +the crest, and, being between Leigh and Picton's divisions, had cut +the British position. Then the column nearest to Picton's division +began to wheel to its right, so as to sweep the crest. + +"Lie down, the Rangers; every man down," shouted the colonel, and the +breathless men threw themselves panting on the ground. A wild Irish +shout was heard behind them as they did so, and a tremendous volley of +musketry rang over their heads, and then the 88th and a wing of the +45th dashed across them, and, with fierce cheers, charged that portion +of the column engaged in wheeling. Breathless and in disorder from +their prodigious efforts, the French were unable to resist this fresh +attack. In an instant the British were among them, and mixed up in +wild confusion, fighting hand to hand, the mass of combatants went +mingled together down the hill. Nor was the success of the French +column which had gained the crest of long duration, for Leith brought +up one of his brigades; Colonel Cameron, with the 9th Regiment, dashed +at the enemy with the bayonet, without firing a single shot, while +the 38th attacked their flank; and the French, unable to resist the +onslaught, relinquished their position and retreated down the hill. +Nor upon the French right had Ney's attack proved more successful. + +Napier thus describes the combat in this quarter of the field:--"When +the light broke, three heavy masses detached from the sixth corps were +seen to enter the woods below, and to throw forward a profusion of +skirmishers; one of them, under General Marchand, emerging from the +dark chasm and following the main road, seemed intent to turn the +right of the light division; a second, under Loison, made straight up +the mountain against the front; the third remained in reserve. Simon's +brigade, leading Loison's attack, ascended with a wonderful alacrity, +and though the light troops plied it incessantly with musketry, and +the artillery bullets swept through it from the first to the last +section, its order was never disturbed, nor its speed in the least +abated. Ross's guns were worked with incredible quickness, yet their +range was palpably contracted every round; the enemy's shots came +ringing up in a sharper key, the English skirmishers, breathless +and begrimed with powder, rushed over the edge of the ascent, the +artillery drew back, and the victorious cries of the French were heard +within a few yards of the summit. Craufurd, standing alone on one of +the rocks, had been intently watching the progress of their attack, +and now, with a shrill tone, ordered the two regiments in reserve to +charge. The next moment a horrid shout startled the French column, and +eighteen hundred British bayonets went sparkling over the hill. Yet so +brave, so hardy were the leading French, that each man of the first +section raised his musket, and two officers and ten men fell before +them. Not a Frenchman had missed his mark. They could do no more. The +head of their column was violently thrown back upon the rear, both +flanks were overlapped at the same time by the English wings, three +terrible discharges at five yards' distance shattered the wavering +mass, and a long line of broken arms and bleeding carcases marked the +line of flight." + +Ney did not renew the attack, and with some desultory skirmishing the +battle ended at two o'clock, and an hour's truce enabled both parties +to carry off their wounded. + +Small parties of the French came in contact with the English +skirmishers during the afternoon, but the battle of Busaco was over. + +"Don't call dat much of battle," Sam said discontentedly. "Just little +fierce fight, berry out of bref, and den, just as second wind came, +all ober." + +The battle of Busaco was indeed one of secondary importance. The +losses were not great on either side, although that of the French was +fully threefold greater than that of the British, as the former were +exposed during their attack to the grape and shell of the British +guns, while the French guns afforded no assistance to their infantry. +The French loss, in killed and wounded and prisoners, did not exceed +4000, of which only 800 were killed. Nor was any strategical advantage +gained by the battle, for the French, upon the following day, found +a road across the hills to the British left from Martagoa through +Bonzalva. + +Throughout the day they made feints of renewing the attack upon the +English position, and it was not until late in the afternoon that long +columns of men were seen crossing the hill to the left; and Wellington +discovered that Busaco had been won in vain, for that his flank was +turned, and there was nothing for it but to fall back upon Torres +Vedras. Before night the whole British army was in retreat. + +"What a horrible scene of confusion," Tom remarked, as they marched +into the town of Coimbra next day. + +"Confusion!" Captain Manley said; "it is enough to drive a +commander-in-chief out of his mind. Here Wellington has for weeks +been endeavoring to get the Portuguese Government to compel all the +population to retire upon Lisbon, carrying all they can, destroying +the mills, and burning all the corn they could not carry off. The +Government did issue the order, but it has taken no steps whatever to +carry it out, although they knew all along that we could never repel +the invasion in the open. As it is, the greater portion of these poor +wretches will lose all they possess, which they might have carried +off quietly enough during the last two months. Many of them will lose +their lives, and they will block the roads so that we shall have the +French down on us to a certainty." + +Nothing could be more sad than the scene. The streets of Coimbra were +crowded with fugitives from the country round, and these, as well as +the inhabitants, were all preparing to push onwards towards Lisbon. +Bullock carts and carriages, mules, donkeys, and horses were crowded +together, all laden with the aged, the children, the sick, and such +property as was most portable and valuable. Happily Massena had +a circuitous detour to make; the road in the mountain defile was +scarcely passable, and throughout the march he displayed but little +energy; consequently it was not until the morning of the first of +October that his cavalry engaged those of the light division which was +covering the retreat. The division fell back through the town, and the +inhabitants, who had lingered to the last in some vague hope that the +French would not come, now rushed out again. The bridge behind the +town was choked, and the troops had to halt for some time. In the rear +the pistol shots of the cavalry told of the approach of the French, +and the din made by the panic-stricken fugitives was increased by the +yells of the prisoners shut up and forgotten in the prison hard by. +Their cries and supplications were too painful to be resisted, and the +British forced the prison doors and let them free. Once across the +bridge, the troops found the defile of Condeixa so choked up that it +was impossible to effect a passage, and, had the French pressed them +the division must have been destroyed. + +The French infantry, however, had not arrived, and by night the road +was cleared, and the troops passed on. + +There was no pursuit, for Massena allowed his troops to halt and +plunder Coimbra, and the British by easy marches, fell back to +Torres Vedras; but though unpursued, the disorder and relaxation of +discipline which always marks a retreat, showed itself, and Wellington +was obliged to hang several plunderers, and to resort to other severe +measures to restore to discipline that army which, only a week before, +had repulsed the best troops of France. Towards the end of the march +the French pressed them again, and Craufurd, with his light division, +had a narrow escape of being cut off. + +Great was the satisfaction of the British troops when they took up the +position so carefully prepared for them; equally great the surprise of +Massena and the French army when they beheld the almost impregnable +line of redoubts and fortresses of whose very existence they had only +heard a confused rumor two or three days before. And yet formidable +as was the chain of forts occupied by the British, this was weak in +comparison to the second line, some five or six miles in the rear, +to which Wellington would have fallen back if driven from his first +position. This second position was indeed that which he had originally +intended to have taken up, the redoubts on the exterior range of hills +being intended as outposts; but, while Massena delayed his advance, +the outside line of fortifications had so grown and increased in +strength, that Wellington resolved to hold them in the first place. + +There were, therefore, as will be seen by the plan, three lines of +defense. The first from Alhandra on the Tagus to Zizandre on the +sea-coast. This, following the windings of the hills, was twenty-nine +miles long; the second and main line was from Quintella on the Tagus +to the mouth of the San Lorenza, twenty-four miles in length; the +third, intended to cover an embarkation, in case of necessity, +extended from Passo d'Arcos on the Tagus to the town of Junquera on +the coast. + +Massena spent some days in surveying the British position, and came to +the conclusion that it was too strong to be attacked. Had the order +of Wellington been carried out, and the whole country wasted of +provisions, the French army must have made a precipitate retreat to +avoid starvation, for they had no provisions or connection with Spain. +Wilson and Trant, with Portuguese levies, hung upon their rear, and +captured Coimbra, where Massena had left his sick and wounded, 5000 in +number, upon the very day after the main French army advanced from the +town. So vast were the supplies, however, left in the country that +Massena was able to take up his position, first immediately in front +of the British lines, and afterwards at Santarem, within a day's march +of them, and to maintain his army in food throughout the winter until +the beginning of March. + +"Have you seen the _Gazette_, Scudamore?" Carruthers asked, rushing +into the tent one morning about a week after the regiment had settled +down in its tents on the heights of Torres Vedras. + +"No; what's up?" Tom replied. + +"There you are; you have both got your steps. Thomas Scudamore, +ensign, Norfolk Rangers, to be lieutenant, for distinguished services +in the field. Peter Scudamore, ditto, ditto. I wondered the chief had +done nothing for you after your journey through Spain." + +"I am sure I did not expect anything," Tom answered, "and was quite +content when the colonel told us that Lord Wellington had said he was +pleased with the manner we had done our work. However, I am very glad; +but it is not pleasant going over five or six fellows' heads." + +"Fortune of war," Carruthers said laughing. "Besides, two of them are +at the depot, Sankey is away on sick leave, and none of the three who +are senior to you here will ever set the Thames on fire. No, no, you +have fairly earned your step and no one can say a word against it." + +The news soon spread, and the boys were heartily congratulated by all +the officers of the regiment on their promotion, which placed them +next on the list to Carruthers, who had previously been the junior +lieutenant. Promotion in those days was rapid, and after a severe +engagement an ensign only joined upon the previous week might find +himself a lieutenant, from the number of death vacancies caused in +the ranks above him. The Norfolk Rangers had not suffered heavily at +Talavera, or the boys might have had their lieutenant's rank before +this, without performing any exceptional services. + +"I wish we could get two months' leave, Tom," Peter said that night. +"Of course it is impossible, but it would be jolly to drop in upon +Rhoda. By her letter she seems well and happy, and aunt is very kind +to her. It would be nice; and now we are lieutenants, aunt wouldn't +tell us to rub our shoes." + +"No," Tom laughed, "or be afraid of our pelting her pigeons and +Minnie." + +"No," Peter said. "Evidently she is coming round. Rhoda said that +since she has heard that we have got our commissions she has given +up prophesying once or twice a day that we shall come to a bad +end--probably hanging." + +"Yes, and Rhoda said in her letter yesterday that aunt was quite +touched with those lace mantillas we got at Madrid, and sent off the +day after we rejoined, and actually remarked that, although we could +no longer be looked upon as boys, and seemed really as hair-brained +and fond of getting into scrapes as ever, yet it was evident that we +were good, kindly lads, and meant well at heart." + +"I wish," Tom said, with a sudden burst of laughter, "that we could +dress in our old disguises, I as a student of theology you as a mild +young novice; what a lark we would have with her!" and the boys went +off into such shouts of laughter, that their aunt would have thought +them more scatter-brained than ever if she had heard them, while from +the tent of Captain Manley on one side, and of Carruthers and another +young officer on the other, came indignant expostulations, and +entreaties that they would keep quiet, and let other people go to +sleep. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +ALBUERA. + + +Very heavily did five months in the lines of Torres Vedras pass to the +Norfolk Rangers. When, in the beginning of November, Massena fell back +to Sautarem, the greater portion of the army followed him in readiness +for attack should any openings be found. Massena, however, entrenched +himself in a very strong position, and Wellington could no more attack +him than he could attack the lines of Torres Vedras; so that both +armies faced each other in inactivity until the beginning of March, +when Massena broke up his camp and began to retreat. + +The Norfolk Rangers had been one of the regiments which had remained +in their quarters on Torres Vedras throughout the winter, and great +was the joy with which they received orders to strike their tents +and push on in pursuit. The retreat of Massena was masterly. Ney's +division covered the rear, and several sharp fights took place which +are known in history as the combats of Pombal, Redinha, Cazal Nova, +Foz d'Aronce, and Sabugal. + +In most of these the enemy were driven from their position by the +British outflanking them and threatening their line of retreat; but in +the last, by a mistake of General Erskine, a portion of his division +attacked the enemy in rear, and, although vastly outnumbered, drove +him off from the crest he held with desperate valor. Wellington +himself said, "This was one of the most glorious actions British +troops were ever engaged in." + +The next day the French crossed the Coa and Turones, and took up their +position under the guns of Ciudad Rodrigo, which they had left six +months before with the full assurance that they were going to conquer +Portugal, and drive the British into the sea. The invasion cost +Massena thirty thousand men, killed in battle, taken prisoners, or +dead from hardships, fatigues and fevers. + +The Scudamores were not present at the battle of Sabugal, for on the +afternoon after the combat of Foz d'Aronce an orderly rode up to the +regiment and handed a note to the colonel. He read it, and at once +summoned the Scudamores at his side. + +"An order from the commander-in-chief," he said, "for you to go to him +at once." + +Following the orderly, the boys soon arrived at the cottage at which +Lord Wellington had established his headquarters. + +"His lordship is with Lord Beresford," the aide-de-camp to whom they +gave their names said, "but the orders are that you are to be shown in +at once." + +The lads were ushered into a small room, where, seated at a table, +were the commanders-in-chief of the British and the Portuguese troops. + +"Young gentlemen," the former said, looking up with his keen piercing +eyes, "I have not seen you since your return from Spain. I am content +with what you did, and with the detailed report you sent me in. I +shall keep my eye upon you. Lord Beresford has asked me for two +officers as aides-de-camp, and he specially requires them to have a +perfect knowledge of Spanish. I have mentioned your names to him. It +is not often that I confidently recommend young officers, but from +what I know of you I have felt able to do so in the present case. You +will, with him, have opportunities of distinguishing yourselves +such as you could not have with your regiment. You accept the +appointments?" + +Tom and Peter would far rather have remained with their regiment, +but they felt that, after what Lord Wellington had said, they could +not refuse; they consequently expressed at once their willingness +to serve, and their thanks to the general for his kindness in +recommending them. + +"You can ride, I hope?" Lord Beresford, a powerfully-built, +pleasant-looking man, said. + +"Yes, sir, we can both ride, but at present--" + +"You have no horses, of course?" Lord Beresford put in. "I will +provide you with horses, and will assign servants to you from one of +the cavalry regiments with me. Will you join me at daybreak to-morrow? +we shall march at once." + +There was a general expression of regret when the Scudamores informed +their comrades that they were again ordered on detached duty. As +to Sam, when Tom told him that he could not accompany them, he was +uproarious in his lamentations, and threatened to desert from his +regiment in order to follow them. At this the boys laughed, and told +Sam that he would be arrested and sent back before he had gone six +hours. + +"I tink, Massa Tom, dat you might hab told de general dat you hab got +an fust-class serbent, and dat you bring him wid you." + +"But we shall be mounted now, Sam, and must have mounted men with us. +You can't ride, you know." + +"Yes, massa, dis child ride first-rate, he can." + +"Why, Sam, I heard you say not long ago you had never ridden on a +horse all your life." + +"Never hab, massa, dat's true 'nuff; but Sam sure he can ride. Berry +easy ting dat. Sit on saddle, one leg each side--not berry difficult +dat. Sam see tousand soldiers do dat ebery day; dey sit quite easy on +saddle; much more easy dat dan beat big drum." + +The boys laughed heartily at Sam's notion of riding without practice, +and assured him that it was not so easy as he imagined. + +"Look here, Sam," Peter said at last, "you practice riding a little, +and then next time we get away we will ask for you to go with us." And +with this Sam was obliged to be content. + +Half an hour later, when the boys were chatting with Captain Manley, +Carruthers, and two or three other officers, in the tent of the +first-named officer, they heard a commotion outside, with shouts of +laughter, in which they joined as soon as they went out and saw what +was going on. + +Sam, upon leaving the Scudamores, determined at once upon trying the +experiment of riding, in order that he might--for he had no doubt all +would be easy enough--ride triumphantly up to his masters' tent and +prove his ability to accompany them at once. He was not long before +he saw a muleteer coming along sitting carelessly on his mule, with +both legs on one side of the animal, side-saddle fashion, as is the +frequent custom of muleteers. It was evident, by the slowness of his +pace, that he was not pressed for time. + +Sam thought that this was a fine opportunity. + +"Let me have a ride?" he said to the muleteer in broken Portuguese. + +The man shook his head. Sam held out a quarter of a dollar. "There," +he said, "I'll give you that for a hour's ride." + +The muleteer hesitated, and then said, "The mule is very bad tempered +with strangers." + +"Oh, dat all nonsense," Sam thought, "he only pretend dat as excuse; +any one can see de creature as quiet as lamb; don't he let his master +sit on him sideways?" + +"All right," he said aloud, "I try him." + +The muleteer dismounted, and Sam prepared to take his place on the +saddle. By this time several of the Rangers had gathered round, and +these foreseeing, from the appearance of the mule and the look of sly +amusement in the face of the muleteer, that there was likely to be +some fun, at once proposed to assist, which they did by giving advice +to Sam of the most opposite nature. Sam was first going to mount on +the off side, but this irregularity was repressed, and one wag, taking +the stirrup of the near side in his hand, said, "Now, Sam, up you go, +never mind what these fellows say, you put your right foot in the +stirrup, and lift your left over the saddle." + +Sam acted according to these instructions, and found himself, to his +intense amazement and the delight of the bystanders, sitting with his +face to the mule's tail. + +"Hullo," he exclaimed in astonishment, "dis all wrong; you know noting +about de business, you Bill Atkins." + +And Sam prepared to descend, when, at his first movement, the mule put +down his head and flung his heels high in the air. Sam instinctively +threw himself forward, but not recovering his upright position before +the mule again flung up her hind quarters, he received a violent +blow on the nose. "Golly!" exclaimed the black in a tone of extreme +anguish, as, with water streaming from his eyes, he instinctively +clutched the first thing which came to hand, the root of the mule's +tail, and held on like grim death. The astonished mule lashed out +wildly and furiously, but Sam, with his body laid close on her back, +his hands grasping her tail, and his legs and feet pressing tight to +her flanks, held on with the clutch of despair. + +"Seize de debil!--seize him!--he gone mad!"--he shouted frantically, +but the soldiers were in such fits of laughter that they could do +nothing. + +Then the mule, finding that he could not get rid of this singular +burden by kicking, started suddenly off at full gallop. + +"Stop him--stop him," yelled Sam. "Gracious me, dis am drefful." + +This was the sight which met the eyes of the Scudamores and their +brother officers as they issued from their tents. The soldiers were +all out of their tents now, and the air rang with laughter mingled +with shouts of "Go it, moke!" "Hold on, Sam!" + +"Stop that mule," Captain Manley shouted, "or the man will be killed." + +Several soldiers ran to catch at the bridle, but the mule swerved and +dashed away out of camp along the road. + +"Look, look," Tom said, "there are the staff, and Lord Wellington +among them. The mule's going to charge them." + +The road was somewhat narrow, with a wall of four feet high on either +side, and the general, who was riding at the head of the party, drew +his rein when he saw the mule coming along at a furious gallop. The +staff did the same, and a general shout was raised to check or divert +her wild career. The obstinate brute, however, maddened by the shouts +which had greeted her from all sides, and the strange manner in which +she was being ridden, never swerved from her course. When she was +within five yards of the party, the general turned his horse, touched +him with his spur, and leaped him lightly over the wall; one or two +others followed his example, but the others had not time to do so +before the mule was among them. Two horses and riders were thrown +down, one on either side, with the impetus of the shock, and then, +kicking, striking and charging, the animal made its way past the +others and dashed on in despite of the attempts to stop her, and +the cries of "Shoot the brute," "Ride him down," and the angry +ejaculations of those injured in its passage. Thirty yards behind the +group of officers were the escort, and these prepared to catch the +mule, when turning to the left she leaped the wall, eliciting a scream +of terror from Sam, who was nearly shaken from his hold by the sudden +jerk. + +The anger of the officers was changed into a burst of amusement at +seeing Sam's dark face and staring eyes over the mule's crupper, and +even Lord Wellington smiled grimly. An order was hastily given, and +four troopers detached themselves from the escort and started off in +pursuit. The mule was, however, a fast one, and maddened by fright, +and it was some time before the foremost of the troopers was up to +her. As he came alongside, the mule suddenly swerved round and lashed +out viciously, one of her heels coming against the horse's ribs, and +the other against the leg of the rider, who, in spite of his thick +jack-boot, for some time thought that his leg was broken. + +He fell behind, and the others, rendered cautious by the lesson, came +up but slowly, and prepared to close upon the animal's head, one +from each side. Just as they were going to do so, however, they were +startled by a scattered fire of musketry, and by the sound of balls +whizzing about their ears, and discovered that in the ardor of the +chase they had passed over the space which separated the French from +the English lines, and that they were close to the former. At the same +moment they saw a party of cavalry stealing round to cut off their +retreat. Turning their horses, the dragoons rode off at full speed, +but the French cavalry, on fresher horses, would have caught them +before they reached the English lines had not a troop of British horse +dashed forward to meet them upon seeing their danger. As to the mule, +she continued her wild gallop into the French lines, where she was +soon surrounded and captured. + +The boys were greatly vexed at the loss of their faithful black, but +they had little time for grieving, for an hour after they rode off +with General Beresford's division. Three days' march brought them +to Campo Mayor, a town which had, two days before, surrendered to +the French, who, surprised by the sudden appearance of the British, +evacuated the place hastily and retreated, after suffering much from +a brilliant charge of the 13th Hussars, who, although unsupported, +charged right through the French cavalry, and Beresford then prepared +to lay siege to Badajos. Had he pushed forward at once, he would have +found the place unprepared for a siege, but, delaying a few days at +Elvas to give his tired troops repose, the French repaired the walls, +and were in a position to offer a respectable defense, when he made +his appearance under its walls. The army was very badly provided with +heavy guns, but the approaches were opened and the siege commenced in +regular form, when the news arrived that Soult was marching with a +powerful army to its relief. The guns were therefore withdrawn, the +siege raised, and Beresford marched to meet Soult at Albuera. + +On the 15th of May he took up his position on rising ground looking +down on Albuera, having the river in his front. Acting with him, and +nominally under his orders, was a Spanish force under Blake. This +was intended to occupy the right of the position, but with the usual +Spanish dilatoriness, instead of being upon the ground, as he had +promised, by noon, Blake did not arrive until past midnight; the +French accordingly crossed the river unmolested, and the British +general found his right turned. + +Beresford's position was now a very faulty one, as the woods +completely hid the movements of the enemy, and a high hill, which they +had at once seized, flanked the whole allied position and threatened +its line of retreat. + +When the morning of the 16th dawned the armies were numerically very +unequal. The British had 30,000 infantry, 2,000 cavalry, and 38 guns; +the French, 19,000 infantry, 4,000 cavalry, and 40 guns; but of these +the French were all veteran troops, while Beresford had but 6,000 +British troops, the remainder being Spanish and Portuguese, upon +whom no reliance whatever was to be placed. The British officers +present were all of opinion that their chances of success, under +the circumstances, were slight indeed. + +The battle commenced at nine in the morning by an attack by the French +general Godinot upon the bridge of Albuera. Their columns were, +however, so completely plowed by the guns of the Portuguese upon +the eminence behind it, that they made no progress, and Beresford +perceived at once that the main attack would be made on his right. He +despatched Tom Scudamore with orders to Blake to throw back his troops +at right angles to the main front. The pig-headed Spaniard refused to +obey, asserting that the main attack was in front. Colonel Hardinge +was sent to insist upon the order being carried out, but Blake still +refused, and Beresford himself rode furiously across and took the +command just as the French column debouched from the wood on the +right. + +Before the Spanish movement was completed the French were among them. +Their cavalry swept round to the right rear, and menaced the line of +retreat, the infantry charged the wavering Spanish battalions, and the +latter at once fell into confusion and began to fall back. William +Stewart now arrived with a brigade of the second division to endeavor +to retrieve the day; but as they were advancing into position, four +regiments of French cavalry, whose movements were hidden in the +driving rain until they were close at hand, fell upon them and rode +down two-thirds of the brigade, the 31st regiment alone having time +to form square and repulse the horsemen. + +Beresford himself, with his staff, was in the middle of the melee, and +the lads found themselves engaged in hand-to-hand combats with the +French troopers. All was confusion. Peter was unhorsed by the shock +of a French hussar, but Tom shot the trooper before he could cut Peter +down. Free for a moment, he looked round, and saw a French lancer +charging, lance at rest, at Lord Beresford. "Look out, sir!" he +shouted, and the general, turning round, swept aside the lance thrust +with his arm; and as the lancer, carried on by the impetus of his +charge, dashed against him, he seized him by the throat and waist, +lifted him bodily from his saddle, and hurled him insensible to +the ground. Just at this moment General Lumley arrived with some +Portuguese cavalry, and the French lancers galloped off. + +The Spanish cavalry, who had orders to charge the French cavalry in +flank, galloped up until within a few yards of them, and then turned +and fled shamefully. + +Beresford, now furious at the cowardice of the Spanish infantry, +seized one of their ensigns by the shoulder, and dragged him, with his +colors, to the front by main force, but the infantry would not even +then advance. + +The driving rain saved the allied army at this critical moment, for +Soult was unable to see the terrible confusion which reigned in their +ranks, and kept his heavy columns in hand when an attack would have +carried with it certain victory. + +In the pause which ensued, the British regiments began to make their +way to the front. Colbourn, with the 31st Regiment, was already there; +Stewart brought up Haughton's brigade; and the 29th burst its way +through the flying Spaniards and joined the 31st, these movements +being made under a storm of shot and shell from the French artillery. +Colonel Hartman brought up the British artillery, and the Spanish +generals Zayas and Ballesteros succeeded in checking and bringing +forward again some of the Spanish infantry. + +The French advanced in great force, the artillery on both sides poured +in grape at short distance, and the carnage was terrible. Still the +little band of British held their ground. Stewart was twice wounded, +Haughton and Colonels Duckworth and Inglis slain. Of the 57th Regiment +twenty-two officers and four hundred men fell out of the five hundred +that had mounted the hill, and the other regiments had suffered nearly +as severely. Not a third were standing unhurt, and fresh columns of +the French were advancing. + +The battle looked desperate, and Beresford made preparations for a +retreat. At this moment, however, Colonel Hardinge brought up General +Cole with the fourth division, and Colonel Abercrombie with the third +brigade of Colbourn's second division. Beresford recalled his order +for retreat, and the terrible fight continued. The fourth division was +composed of two brigades, the one, a Portuguese under General Harvey, +was pushed down to the right to keep off the French cavalry, while the +Fusilier brigade, composed of the 7th and 23rd fusilier regiments, +under Sir William Myers, climbed the desperately contested hill, which +Abercombie ascended also, more on the left. + +It was time, for the whole of the French reserves were now coming into +action; six guns were already in the enemy's possession, the remnant +of Haughton's brigade could no longer sustain its ground, and the +heavy French columns were advancing exultantly to assured victory. + +Suddenly, through the smoke, Cole's fusilier brigade appeared on +the right of Haughton's brigade, just as Abercrombie came up on its +left. Startled by the sight, and by the heavy fire, the French column +paused, and, to quote Napier's glowing words, "hesitated, and then, +vomiting forth a storm of fire, hastily endeavored to enlarge their +front, while a fearful discharge of grape from all their artillery +whistled through the British ranks. Myers was killed, Cole and the +three colonels, Ellis, Blakeney and Hawkshawe, fell wounded; and the +fusilier battalions, struck by the iron tempest, reeled and staggered +like sinking ships; but suddenly and sternly recovering, they closed +with their terrible enemies, and then was seen with what a strength +and majesty the British soldier fights. In vain did Soult with voice +and gesture animate his Frenchmen; in vain did the hardiest veterans +break from the crowded columns and sacrifice their lives to gain time +for the mass to open out on such a fair field; in vain did the mass +itself bear up, and, fiercely striving, fire indiscriminately upon +friends and foes, while the horsemen hovering on its flank threatened +to charge the advancing line. Nothing could stop that astonishing +infantry; no sudden burst of undisciplined valor, no nervous +enthusiasm weakened the stability of their order; their flashing eyes +were bent on the dark columns in their front, their measured tread +shook the ground, their dreadful volleys swept away the head of every +formation, their deafening shouts overpowered the dissonant cries that +broke from all parts of the tumultuous crowd, as, slowly and with +horrid carnage, it was pushed by the incessant vigor of the attack to +the farthest edge of the hill. In vain did the French reserves mix +with the struggling multitude to sustain the fight; their efforts only +increased the irremediable confusion, and the mighty mass breaking off +like a loosened cliff, went headlong down the steep; the rain flowed +after in streams discolored with blood, and eighteen hundred unwounded +men, the remnant of six thousand unconquerable British soldiers, stood +triumphant on the fatal hill." + +While this dreadful fight was going on, Hamilton's and Collier's +Portuguese divisions, ten thousand strong, marched to support the +British, but they did not reach the summit of the hill until the +battle was over; they suffered, however, a good deal of loss from the +French artillery, which, to cover the retreat, opened furiously upon +them. + +The French were in no position to renew the attack, the allies quite +incapable of pursuit, and when night fell the two armies were in the +same position they had occupied twenty-four hours before. + +Never was British valor more conspicuously displayed than at the +battle of Albuera. Out of 6,000 infantry they lost 4,200 killed and +wounded, while the Spanish and Portuguese had but 2,600 killed and +wounded out of a total of 34,000; the French loss was over 8,000. + +This desperate fight had lasted but four hours, but to all engaged +it seemed an age. The din, the whirl, the storm of shot, the fierce +charges of the cavalry, the swaying backwards and forwards of the +fight, the disastrous appearance of the battle from the first, all +combined to make up a perfectly bewildering confusion. + +The Scudamores, after its commencement, had seen but little of each +other. Whenever one or other of them found their way to the general, +who was ever in the thickest of the fray, it was but to remain there +for a moment or two before being despatched with fresh messages. + +Tom's horse was shot under him early in the day, but he obtained a +remount from an orderly and continued his duty until, just as the day +was won, he received a musket ball in the shoulder. He half fell, half +dismounted, and, giddy and faint, lay down and remained there until +the cessation of the fire told him that the battle was over. Then he +staggered to his feet and sought a surgeon. He presently found one +hard at work under a tree, but there was so large a number of wounded +men lying or sitting round, that Tom saw that it would be hours before +he could be attended to. As he turned to go he saw an officer of the +staff ride by. + +"Ah, Scudamore! Are you hit too?--not very badly, I hope? The chief +was asking after you just now." + +"My shoulder is smashed, I think," Tom said, "and the doctor has his +hands full at present; but if you will tie my arm tight across my +chest with my sash, I shall be able to get on." + +The officer at once leapt from his horse, and proceeded to bind Tom's +arm in the position he requested. + +"Have you seen my brother," Tom asked. + +"No, I have not; he was close to Beresford when the fusiliers dashed +up the hill; his horse fell dead, but he was not hit, for I saw him +jump up all right. I did not see him afterwards. As he could not have +got a fresh mount then, I expect he joined the fusiliers and went up +the hill." + +"Is the loss heavy?" Tom asked. + +"Awful--awful," the officer said. "If it had lasted another quarter of +an hour, there would have been nobody left alive; as it is, there are +not 2,000 men at the outside on their feet." + +"What, altogether?" Tom exclaimed. + +"Altogether," the officer answered sadly. "We have lose two men out of +every three who went into it." + +"Thank you," Tom said. "Now where shall I find the general?" + +"Up on the hill. I shall see you there in a few minutes. I hope you +will find your brother all right." + +Very slowly did Tom make his way up the steep slope, sitting down to +rest many times, for he was faint from loss of blood and sick with the +pain of his wound, and it was a long half hour before he joined the +group of officers clustered round the commander-in-chief. + +He was heartily greeted; but in answer to his question as to whether +any one had seen his brother, no one could give a satisfactory reply. +One, however, was able to confirm what had been before told to him, +for he had seen Peter on foot advancing with the fusilier brigade. +Tom's heart felt very heavy as he turned away towards the front, where +the fusiliers were standing on the ground they had so hardly won. +The distance he had to traverse was but short, but the journey was a +ghastly one. The ground was literally heaped with dead. Wounded men +were seen sitting up trying to stanch their wounds, others lay feebly +groaning, while soldiers were hurrying to and fro from the water +carts, with pannikins of water to relieve their agonizing thirst. + +"Do you know, sergeant, whether they have collected the wounded +officers, and, if so, where they are?" + +"Yes, sir, most of them are there at the right flank of the regiment." + +Tom made his way towards the spot indicated, where a small group of +officers were standing, while a surgeon was examining a long line of +wounded laid side by side upon the ground. Tom hardly breathed as +he ran his eye along their faces, and his heart seemed to stop as +he recognized in the very one the surgeon was then examining the +dead-white face of Peter. + +He staggered forward and said in a gasping voice, "He is my +brother--is he dead?" + +The surgeon looked up. "Sit down," he said sharply, and Tom, unable to +resist the order, sank rather than sat down, his eyes still riveted on +Peter's face. + +"No," the surgeon said, answering the question, "he has only fainted +from loss of blood, but he is hit hard, the bullet has gone in just +above the hip, and until I know its course I can't say whether he has +a chance or not." + +"Here, sergeant, give me the probe," and with this he proceeded +cautiously to examine the course of the ball. As he did so his anxious +face brightened a little. + +"He was struck slantingly," he said, "the ball has gone round by the +back; turn him over, sergeant. Ah, I thought so; it has gone out on +the other side. Well, I think it has missed any vital part, and in +that case I can give you hope. There," he said after he had finished +dressing the wound and fastening a bandage tightly round the body; +"now pour some brandy-and-water down his throat, sergeant, and +sprinkle his face with water. Now, sir, I will look at your shoulder." + +But he spoke to insensible ears, for Tom, upon hearing the more +favorable report as to Peter's state, had fainted dead off. + +The surgeon glanced at him. "He'll come round all right," he said. +"I will go on in the mean time," and set to work at the next in the +ghastly line. + +It was some time before Tom recovered his consciousness; when he did +so, it was with a feeling of intense agony in the shoulder. + +"Lie quiet," the surgeon said, "I shan't be long about it." + +It seemed to Tom, nevertheless, as if an interminable time passed +before the surgeon spoke again. + +"You'll do," he said. "It is an awkward shot, for it has broken the +shoulder bone and carried a portion away, but with quiet and care you +will get the use of your arm again. You are lucky, for if it had gone +two inches to the left it would have smashed the arm at the socket, +and two inches the other way and it would have been all up with you. +Now lie quiet for awhile; you can do nothing for your brother at +present. It may be hours before he recovers consciousness." + +Tom was too faint and weak to argue, and a minute later he dropped off +to sleep, from which he did not wake until it was dusk. Sitting up, he +saw that he had been aroused by the approach of an officer, whom he +recognized as one of General Beresford's staff. + +"How are you, Scudamore?" he asked. "The general has just sent me to +inquire." + +"He is very kind," Tom said. "I think that I am all right, only I am +horribly thirsty." + +The officer unslung a flask from his shoulder. "This is weak +brandy-and-water. I have brought it over for you. I am sorry to hear +your brother is so bad, but the doctor gives strong hopes of him in +his report." + +Tom bent down over Peter. "He is breathing quietly," he said. "I hope +it is a sort of sleep he has fallen into. What are we doing?" + +"Nothing," the officer answered; "there is nothing to do; every +unbounded man is under arms in case the French attack us in the night. +I expect, however, they will wait till morning, and if they come on +then, I fear our chance is a slight one indeed. We have only 1,800 of +our infantry; the German regiments and the Portuguese will do their +best; but the Spanish are utterly useless. Soult has lost more men +than we have, but we are like a body which has lost its back-bone; and +if the French, who are all good soldiers, renew the battle, I fear it +is all up with us." + +"Have you got all our wounded in?" Tom asked. + +"No," the officer said bitterly. "Our unwounded men must stand to +arms, and Lord Beresford sent over to Blake just now to ask for the +assistance of a battalion of Spaniards to collect our wounded, and the +brute sent back to say that it was the custom in allied armies for +each army to attend to its own wounded." + +"The brute!" Tom repeated with disgust. "How the poor fellows must be +suffering!" + +"The men who are but slightly wounded have been taking water to all +they can find, and the doctors are at work now, and will be all night +going about dressing wounds. The worst of it is, if the fight begins +again to-morrow, all the wounded who cannot crawl away must remain +under fire. However, the French wounded are all over the hill too, and +perhaps the French will avoid a cannonade as much as possible, for +their sake. It is a bad look-out altogether; and between ourselves, +Beresford has written to Lord Wellington to say that he anticipates a +crushing defeat." + +"Is there any chance of reinforcements?" Tom asked. + +"We hope that the third brigade of the fourth division will be up +to-morrow by midday; they are ordered to come on by forced marches. +If Soult does not attack till they arrive, it will make all the +difference, for 1,500 fresh men will nearly double our strength. But I +must be going now. Good-bye." + +The surgeon presently came round again to see how the wounded officers +were getting on. Tom asked him whether there was anything he could do +for Peter; but the surgeon, after feeling his pulse, said: "No, not as +long as he breathes quietly like this; but if he moves pour a little +brandy-and-water down his throat. Now gentlemen, all who can must look +after the others, for there is not an available man, and I must be at +work all night on the field." + +There were many of the officers who were not hit too severely to move +about, and these collected some wood and made a fire, so as to enable +them to see and attend to their more severely wounded comrades. +Tom took his place close to Peter, where he could watch his least +movement, and once or twice during the night poured a little +brandy-and-water between his lips. The other officers took it by turns +to attend to their comrades, to keep up the fire, and to sleep. Those +whose turn it was to be awake sat round the fire smoking, and talking +as to the chances of the morrow, getting up occasionally to give drink +to such of the badly wounded as were awake. + +Tom, faint with his wound, found it, towards morning, impossible to +keep awake, and dozed off, to wake with a start and find that it was +broad daylight. Soon afterwards, to his intense satisfaction, Peter +opened his eyes. Tom bent over him. "Don't try to move, Peter; lie +quiet, old boy." + +"What's the matter?" Peter asked with a puzzled look. + +"You have been hit in the body, Peter, but the doctor means to get you +round in no time. Yes," he continued, seeing Peter's eyes fixed on his +bandaged shoulder, "I have had a tap too, but there's no great harm +done. There, drink some brandy-and-water, and go off to sleep again, +if you can." + +The morning passed very slowly, the troops being all under arms, +expecting the renewed attack of Soult, but it came not; and when early +in the afternoon, the third brigade of the fourth division marched +into camp, they were received with general cheering. A heavy load +seemed taken off every one's heart, and they felt now that they could +fight, if fight they must, with a hope of success. + +The new-comers, wearied as they were with their long forced marches, +at once took the outpost duties, and those relieved set about the duty +of collecting and bringing in all the wounded. + +Next morning the joyful news came that Soult was retiring, and all +felt with a thrill of triumph that their sacrifices and efforts had +not been in vain, and that the hard-fought battle of Albuera was +forever to take its place among the great victories of the British +army. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +INVALIDED HOME. + + +Two days after the battle of Albuera, Lord Wellington himself arrived, +and from the officers of his staff Tom heard the details of the battle +of Fuentes d'Onoro, which had been fought a few days previously, and +which had been nearly as hardly contested as had Albuera itself, both +sides claiming the victory. + +The next day, the bulk of Beresford's army returned to the +neighborhood of Badajos, which they again invested, while a long +convoy of wounded started for Lisbon. The Scudamores accompanied it +as far as Campo Major, where a large hospital had been prepared for +those too ill to bear the journey. Peter was still unconscious. Fever +had set in upon the day after the battle, and for three weeks he lay +between life and death. Tom's arm was mending very slowly, and he +would have had hard work indeed in nursing Peter had it not been for +the arrival of unexpected assistance. A large villa had been taken +close to the main hospital for the use of officers, and one of the +rooms was allotted to the Scudamores. + +Upon the evening of the second day after their arrival, Tom was +sitting by Peter's bedside, when, after a preliminary tap, the door +opened, and to Tom's perfect amazement Sambo entered. The negro +hurried forward, threw himself on his knees, seized Tom's hand and +kissed it passionately, and then looking at the thin and fever-flushed +face of Peter, he hid his face in his hands and sobbed unrestrainedly. + +"Hush, Sam, hush," Tom said soothingly. "My poor fellow, why, where +have you come from? I thought you were a prisoner with the French." + +"I knew how it would be, Massa Tom," the black said, paying no +attention to the questions. "First thing Sam said to himself when he +got among French fellows, 'Dere, dose young gentlemen dey get into +all sorts of danger widout Sam, sartin sure dey get hurt widout Sam +to look after dem.' Dat idea troubled Sam berry much, took away Sam's +sleep altogether." + +"Well it turned out so, as you see, Sam," Tom said with a smile, "but +tell me how did you get away? But first give me some lemonade out of +that jug, then you can tell me all about it." + +"Why, Massa Tom," Sam said, when he had complied with the request, +"you didn't think dat dis chile was going to stop prisoner with dose +French chaps; Sam not such a fool as dat, nohow. When dat cussed +mule--I tell you fair, Massa Tom, dis chile conclude dat riding not +such a berry easy ting after all--when dat cussed mule ran into French +camp, de soldiers dey catch him, and dey take Sam off, and den dey +jabber and laugh for all de world like great lots of monkeys. Well, +for some time Sam he didn't say nothing, all de wind shook out of his +body. Besides which he couldn't understand what dey say. Den all of +a sudden, to Sam's surprise, up came a colored soldier, and he speak +to Sam in de English tongue. 'Holla, broder, how you come here?" I +ask. 'I been cook on board English merchant ship,' he say. 'Ship she +taken by French privateer. When dey come to port dey say to me, "You +not Englishman, you hab choice, you go to prison, or you be French +soldier." Natural, I not want go prison, so I conclude be French +soldier. I daresay dey gib you choice too.' Well, massa, a wink as +good as a nod to blind hoss. So dey take me to tent, put me under +guard, and next day a French officer come dat speak English. He ask +me all sorts ob questions, and at last he ask me why I list English +soldier. So you see I had got a little lie all ready, and me tell him, +me one poor Melican negro man, cook on board Melican ship. Ship taken +by English man-ob-war. Put Sam in prison and give him choice to go as +soldier. "Den you not care about English,' de officer say, and Sam +draw hisself up and pat his chest and say, 'Me Melican citizen, me no +Britisher's slave, some day me go back States, go on board Melican +man-ob-war, me pay out dese Britishers for make Sam slave.' Den de +officer laugh, and say dat if I like I could fight dem now; and if I +prefer French uniform to French prison, me could have him. Ob course +I accep' offer, and harp an hour after me in French uniform. French +officer try to make joke ob Sam, and ask whether I like cavalry or +foot soldier. Sam say he had enuff of quadruples at present. Me remain +French soldier three weeks, den cum great battle, dey call him Fuentes +donory. Sam's regiment fight. Sam not like fire at red coats, so break +bullet off catridge, neber put him in gun. We charge right into middle +of village full of English soldiers, de bullets fly all about. Sam not +see de point ob getting kill by mistake, so he tumble down, pretend to +be dead. Presently French beaten back; when English soldier wid doctor +cum look at wounded, dey turn Sam ober, and dey say, 'Hullo, here dead +nigger.' 'Nigger yourself, John Atkins,' I say for sure enuff it's de +ole regiment--'you say dat once again me knock your head off;' me jump +up, and all de world call out, 'Hullo, why it's Sam.' Den me splain +matter, and all berry glad, cept John Atkins, and next morning me gib +him licking he member all his life, me pound him most to a squash. +Four days ago colonel send for Sam, say, 'Sam, berry bad job, bofe +Massas wounded bad, send you to nurse dem;' so dis chile come. Dat +all, Massa Tom. Here letter for you from colonel, now you read dis +letter, den you get in bed, you sleep all night, Sam watch Massa +Peter." + +Greatly relieved to have his faithful servant again, and to know that +Peter would be well cared for, instead of being left in charge of the +Spanish hospital orderly, whenever weakness and pain obliged him to +lie down, Tom abandoned his place by the bedside, and prepared for a +tranquil night's rest, first reading the colonel's letter. + +"We are all grieved, my dear Scudamore, at hearing that you are both +wounded, and that your brother is at present in a serious state. We +trust, however, that he will pull through. I hear that Beresford has +praised you both most highly in despatches, and that your names are +sent home for companies. I heartily congratulate you. We have had some +tough work at Fuentes d'Onoro, although nothing to what yours must +have been at Albuera, still it was hot enough in all conscience, and +we had over a hundred casualties in the regiment. Carruthers and +Manley were both slightly wounded. Jones, Anstruther, Palmer, and +Chambers were killed, and several of the others hit more or less hard. +Sam has leave to remain with you until you rejoin, which will not, I +fear, be for some little time. Every one sends kind messages. Yours +truly, J. Tritton." + +Nothing could exceed the care and devotion with which Sam nursed his +two masters, and Tom had the greatest difficulty in persuading him to +lie down and get a short sleep each day while he sat by Peter's bed. +At the end of three weeks Peter took a favorable turn. His fever +abated, and he awoke to consciousness. Another fortnight and he was +sufficiently convalescent to be moved, and accordingly they started to +travel by very easy stages to Lisbon, there to take ship for England, +as the doctor ordered Tom as well as his brother to go home for a +while to recruit. Tom was the less reluctant to do so, as it was +evident that with the force at his command Wellington would not be +able to undertake any great operation, and that the siege and capture +of Badajoz was the utmost likely to be accomplished in that season's +campaign. The mails in due course had brought out the _Gazette_, +and in it Tom and Peter Scudamore were promoted to be captains, +unattached. + +Colonel Tritton, upon being applied to, readily gave leave for Sam +to accompany his masters. It was a long journey to Lisbon, but the +jolting of the country cart was made bearable by a layer of hay, +two feet deep, upon which the mattresses were laid, Sam seeing that +at each night's halt the hay was taken out, well shaken, and then +returned to the cart, so as to preserve it light and elastic. A thick +canopy of boughs kept off the heat of the sun, and under it, within +reach of the invalids hung a gourd of fresh water, and a basket of +fruit. Several other cart-loads of wounded officers accompanied them, +and at night they would draw up by a grove of trees where water was +handy, those who could walk would get out, the others would be lifted +out on their mattresses, a great fire made, and round it the beds laid +in a circle, and then the evening would be spent in pleasant chat, +with many an anecdote and an occasional song, until the fire burnt +low, the talk died away, and each, covered in his blankets to keep off +the night dew, fell asleep. Pleasant as was the journey, however, it +was with a thrill of delight that they caught their first sight of +Lisbon, with its broad river, and the blue line of the sea beyond. A +few days later, and they embarked on board a transport, which seven +days afterwards, after a calm passage, arrived at Spithead. + +Peter was by this time gaining strength fast, but his back was so +stiff and sore that he was unable to move it, and was obliged to swing +himself along on crutches. The next day the coach took them to London, +and they started the morning after for Marlborough. This time they had +to go inside the coach, two gentlemen, who had previously secured the +seats, kindly giving them up in favor of the wounded young officers, +while Sam took his place on the roof, and amused his fellow-passengers +with wonderful accounts of his adventures at the war. At the inn +at which they took dinner, they alighted, and Tom recognized in the +driver the same coachman who had driven them upon the memorable +occasion of their being stopped by highwaymen three years before. "You +don't remember us, coachman, do you?" + +"No, gentlemen, I can't say as how,--but eh! no, why you're the werry +boys as shot the highwaymen. Well, I am glad to see you again, though +you do look white and bad, both of you. I heard as how there were +two wounded officers inside, and that black soldier has been telling +all sorts of tales of the wonderful things as his masters had done, +but not knowing as how it was you, I didn't much believe all he was +telling. Now I quite see as how it was true; and how are you both?" + +"Getting on all right," Tom said, returning the warm shake of the +coachman's hand, "and do you know, those pistols have saved our lives +more than once." + +"Have they now," the coachman said, in high admiration, "but there, we +most be moving, we are three minutes after time as it is; I shall see +you again next time we stop, gentlemen." + +During the next stage the coachman and guard recounted to the outside +passengers the affair of the stopping the coach, and Sam's black face +shone with delight at the tale. Then he had his say, and related the +story of his falling overboard and being rescued, and in consequence +the lads were quite embarrassed when they next halted, by the +attention of their fellow-travelers, who could scarcely understand how +it was possible that two mere boys should have performed such feats of +bravery. + +Arrived at Marlborough they looked round in vain for the one-horsed +vehicle which had before met them. "I expect that aunt has not got +our letter, Peter," Tom said. "It would probably go up to town in the +coach with us, and is likely enough in the letter-bag in the boot. +Well, we must have a post-chaise. Won't aunt and Rhoda be surprised; +but they must be expecting us, because they will have had our letter +from Lisbon." + +The horses were soon in, Sam took his seat in the rumble, and in a few +minutes they were bounding over the road at a very different pace to +that at which they had before traversed it. "There's the house among +the trees," Peter said at last, "with aunt's pigeons on the roof as +usual, and there's Minnie asleep on the window-sill, and there! yes, +there's Rhoda." + +As he spoke a girl, who was sitting reading under a tree, leapt to her +feet, on hearing a carriage stop, and then, catching sight of Peter +waving his hat, while Tom made frantic efforts to open the door, gave +a scream of delight, and rushed towards them, threw her arms round +Tom's neck as he jumped out, and then leapt into the chaise and hugged +and cried over Peter. He was soon helped out, and as they turned to go +towards the house they saw their aunt coming out to meet them. + +Tom ran forward and throwing his arms round her neck kissed her +heartily, and before she could recover from her surprise, Peter was +alongside. "Please, aunt, you must kiss me," he said, "for I want my +arms for my crutches." His aunt leaned forward and kissed him, and +then wiped the tears from her eyes. + +"I am glad to see you back, my dear nephews," she said. "We did not +understand each other very well before, but we shan't make any more +mistakes. This is your black servant, I suppose," she said, as Sam +came along, with a trunk in each hand. "Dear! dear! what a dreadfully +ugly man." + +"How do you do, Sam?" Rhoda said, when he came up. "We have heard so +much of you, and how kindly you nursed my brothers." + +"Sam quite well, tank you, little missy," Sam said, grinning all over +his face and showing his white teeth. + +Miss Scudamore shrank towards Tom as Sam passed on, "Dear me, what +sharp-looking teeth he has, Tom. They don't eat curious things, these +black men, do they?" + +"What sort of curious things, aunt?" + +"Well, my dear, I know that these outlandish people do eat strange +things, and I have heard the Chinese eat dogs and cats. Now, if he has +a fancy for cats, I daresay I could buy him some in the village, only +he will have to cook them himself, I could never ask Hannah to cook +cats; but please ask him not to touch Minnie." + +Peter had to stop in his walk and grasp his crutches tightly, not +to burst into a scream of laughter, while Tom answered with great +gravity, "My dear aunt, do not alarm yourself, I will answer for the +safety of Minnie as far as Sam is concerned." + +When they reached the house, Miss Scudamore said-- + +"I think you young people will enjoy yourselves more if you go and sit +under the shade of the elm there, you will have a deal to say to each +other, and had better be alone." They were all glad at the suggestion, +as they were longing to be alone together. + +Sam, by Miss Scudamore's directions, carried out a great easy chair, +of which Peter took possession. Rhoda sat on the grass at his feet, +and Tom threw himself down at full length. They were all too happy +to speak much for a time, and could only look fondly at each other. +"You have grown a great deal, Rhoda, but I do not think that you are +altered a bit otherwise." + +"You are neither of you altered so much as I expected," Rhoda said. "I +had made up my mind that you would be changed a great deal. It sounds +so grand--Captains, indeed! I expected to have curtsey to you and +treat you with great respect; instead of that you look regular boys, +both of you. Of course you are big, and Peter looks very tall; how +tall are you, Peter?" + +"Just over six feet," Peter said. + +"Yes," Rhoda said, "you are tall enough, and Tom is broad enough for +men, but somehow you look regular boys still." + +"This is very disrespectful Rhoda, to two Captains in His Majesty's +service." + +"It seems ridiculous, doesn't it," Rhoda said. + +"It does," Tom said heartily, and the three went off into a shout of +laughter. + +"It isn't really ridiculous you know," Rhoda said, when they had +recovered their gravity. "To think of all the dangers you have gone +through. Aunt was as proud as could be when she saw your names over +and over again in despatches, and I have been like a little peacock. +Your doings have been the talk of every one round here, and I am sure +that if they had known you had been coming, the village would have put +up a triumphal arch, and presented you with an address." + +"Thank goodness, they did not know it then," Tom said, "for it would +have been a deal worse to stand than the fire of a French battery. +Well, Rhoda, and now as to yourself; so you have really been always +very happy with aunt?" + +"Very happy," Rhoda said; "she is most kind and indulgent, and so that +I attend to her little fancies, I can do just as I like. I have had +lessons regularly from the rector's eldest daughter, who has been +educated for a governess; and in every respect, aunt is all that is +kind. Fancy her being afraid of Sam eating Minnie." + +After chatting for upwards of an hour, they went into the house, and +the rest of the day was spent in talking over all that had happened +since they left. Sam was in the kitchen where he made himself very +much at home, and although Hannah and the cook were at first rather +awed by his size, his black face and rolling eyes, they were soon +pacified by his good humor and readiness to make himself useful, and +were wonderfully interested by his long stories about what "Massas" +had done in the war. + +Miss Scudamore, who was a little uneasy as to how things would go on +in the kitchen, made some excuse for going in once or twice in the +course of the evening. She found things going on much better that she +had expected, indeed so much better, that after Rhoda had gone up to +bed, where Peter had two hours before betaken himself, she said to Tom +as he was lighting his candle, "One minute, nephew; I could not speak +before Rhoda, but I wanted to say something to you about your negro. +I have heard that all soldiers are very much given to make love, and +we know from Shakespeare, that Othello, who was black too, you will +remember, nephew, made love to Desdemona, which shows that color does +not make so much difference as one would think. Now I do hope your +man will not make love to Hannah, I don't think she would like it, +my dear, and yet you know she might; one never knows what women will +do; they are always making fools of themselves," she added angrily, +thinking at the moment how a young girl she had trained up as a cook +had, after being with her three years, left a few weeks before to +marry the village blacksmith, "and I should be sorry to lose Hannah. +She has been with us more than twenty years. If he must fall in love +with one, my dear, let it be the cook." + +Tom had a great command of his countenance, but he had great +difficulty in steadying his muscles. After a moment or two he said, +"I will give Sam a hint, aunt, if it becomes necessary, but I do not +think you need fear. I do not fancy Sam is matrimonially inclined at +present, and he wouldn't leave us even to marry Desdemona herself. +Good night, aunt." + +So saying, Tom went upstairs, where he repeated to Peter, who was +still awake, his conversation with his aunt, and the two went into +shouts of laughter over the idea of Sam making love to the prim +Hannah. + +The next six months passed over quietly and happily. The boys +were made a great deal of by the whole county, and Miss Scudamore +was greatly gratified at the name and credit they had gained for +themselves. She no longer worried about them, but as Rhoda declared, +quite spoiled them, and as Sam made no attempt to win the love of +the faithful Hannah, there was no cloud to mar the pleasure of the +holiday. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +CIUDAD RODRIGO AND BADAJOS. + + +It was in the beginning of December, 1811, that the Scudamores again +sailed up the Tagus to Lisbon, after an absence of just six months. +When they had passed the medical board, they were transferred from the +unattached list to the 52d Regiment, which was, fortunately for them, +also in Spain. No events of great importance had taken place during +their absence. Wellington, after the battles of Fuentes d'Onoro and +Albuera, had been compelled to fall back again to the frontier in the +face of greatly superior forces, and had maintained his old position +on the Coa till the approach of winter compelled the French to retire +into the interior, where they had their magazines and depots. + +The Scudamores found that the 52d were encamped on the Agueda, +and they at once prepared to go up country to join them. Their +chargers--presents from their aunt on leaving--were fresh and +vigorous, and they purchased a strong country horse for Sambo, who, +thanks to some practice which he had had in England, was now able to +cut a respectable figure on horseback. A few hours were sufficient to +make their preparations, and at noon on the day after landing, they +mounted, and, followed by Sam, accompanied by a muleteer and two mules +carrying their baggage, they started from the hotel at which they had +put up. + +As they rode down the main street they saw several mounted +officers approaching, and at once recognized in the leader the +commander-in-chief, who had just arrived from the front to pay one +of his flying visits, to endeavor to allay the jealousies in the +Portuguese Council, and to insist upon the food which the British +Government was actually paying for, being supplied to the starving +Portuguese soldiers. Drawing their horses aside, they saluted Lord +Wellington as he rode past. He glanced at them keenly, as was his +custom, and evidently recognized them as he returned the salute. + +When he had passed, they turned their horses and continued their way. +They had not gone fifty yards, however, when an officer came up at +a gallop. Lord Wellington wished them to call at his quarters in an +hour's time. + +There are few things more annoying than, after having got through all +the trouble of packing and getting fairly on the road, to be stopped; +but there was no help for it, and the boys rode back to their hotel +again, where, putting up their horses, they told Sam not to let the +muleteer leave, for they should probably be on the road again in an +hour. + +At the appointed time they called at the head-quarters, and giving +their cards to two officers on duty, took their seats in the anteroom. +It now became evident to them that their chance of an early interview +was not great, and that they would in all probability be obliged to +pass another night in Madrid. Portuguese grandees passed in and out, +staff officers of rank entered and left, important business was being +transacted, and the chance of two Line captains having an interview +with the commander-in-chief appeared but slight. Two hours passed +wearily, and then an orderly sergeant came into the room and read out +from a slip of paper the names "Captain Thomas Scudamore; Captain +Peter Scudamore. This way, if you please," he added, as the boys rose +in answer to their names, and he led the way into a room where a +colonel on the staff was seated before a table covered with papers. + +"Gentlemen," he said, "I have news which I think will be pleasant to +you both. Lord Wellington has not forgotten the services you rendered +in carrying his communications to the guerilla chiefs. Your reports +were clear and concise, and your knowledge of Spanish especially +valuable. Lord Beresford, too, has reported most favorably of your +conduct while with him. There happen to be two vacancies on his staff, +and he has desired me to fill them up with your names." + +Although the Scudamores would in some respects rather have remained +with their regiment, yet they could not refuse an honor which was +generally coveted as being a post in which an active officer had +plenty of opportunities of distinguishing himself, and which was +certain to lead to speedy promotion. They accordingly expressed their +warm thanks for the honor which Lord Wellington had done them. + +"Are you well mounted?" Colonel Somerset asked. + +"We have one capital charger each," Tom said. + +"You will want another," Colonel Somerset remarked. "There are a lot +of remounts landed to-day. Here is an order to Captain Halket, the +officer in charge. Choose any two you like. The amount can be stopped +from your pay. How about servants; you are entitled to two each?" + +"We have one man of the Norfolk Rangers--a very faithful fellow, who +has returned with us from leave; if he could be transferred, he would +do for us both if we had a cavalry man each for our horses." + +The colonel at once wrote an order for Sam's transfer from his +regiment on detached service, and also one to the officer commanding a +cavalry regiment stationed in Madrid, to supply them with two troopers +as orderlies. + +"May I ask, sir, if we are likely to stay in Madrid long--as, if so, +we will look out for quarters?" Tom asked. + +"No; the general returns to-morrow, or next day at latest, to Almeida, +and of course you will accompany him. Oh, by-the-by, Lord Wellington +will be glad if you will dine with him to-day--sharp six. By-the-way, +you will want to get staff uniform. There is the address of a Spanish +tailor, who has fitted out most of the men who have been appointed +here. He works fast, and will get most of the things you want ready +by to-morrow night. Don't get more things than are absolutely +necessary--merely undress suits. Excuse my asking how are you off for +money? I will give you an order on the paymaster if you like." + +Tom replied that they had plenty of money, which indeed they had, +for their aunt had given them so handsome a present upon starting, +that they had tried to persuade her to be less generous, urging that +they really had no occasion for any money beyond their pay. She had +insisted, however, upon their accepting two checks, saying that one +never knew what was wanted, and it was always useful to have a sum to +fall back on in case of need. + +Two days later the Scudamores, in their new staff uniforms, were, +with some six or eight other officers, riding in the suite of Lord +Wellington on the road to the Coa. The lads thought they had never +had a more pleasant time, the weather was fine and the temperature +delightful, their companions, all older somewhat than themselves, were +yet all young men in high health and spirits. The pace was good, for +Lord Wellington was a hard rider, and time was always precious with +him. At the halting-places the senior officers of the staff kept +together, while the aides-de-camp made up a mess of their own, always +choosing a place as far away as possible from that of the chief, so +that they could laugh, joke, and even sing, without fear of disturbing +his lordship. + +Sam soon became a high favorite with the light-hearted young fellows, +and his services as forager for the mess were in high esteem. + +Three days of hard riding took them to Almeida, where the breaches +caused by the great explosion had been repaired, and the place put +into a defensible position. Tom and Peter had been afraid that +there would be at least four months of enforced inactivity before +the spring; but they soon found that the post of aide-de-camp to +Wellington was no sinecure. For the next month they almost lived in +the saddle. The greater portion of the English army was indeed lying +on the Agueda, but there were detached bodies of British and large +numbers of Portuguese troops at various points along the whole line +of the Portuguese frontier, and with the commanders of these Lord +Wellington was in constant communication. + +Towards the end of December some large convoys of heavy artillery +arrived at Almeida, but every one supposed that they were intended to +fortify this place, and none, even of those most in the confidence of +the commander-in-chief, had any idea that a winter campaign was about +to commence. The French were equally unsuspicious of the truth. Twice +as strong as the British, they dreamt not that the latter would take +the offensive, and the French marshals had scattered their troops at +considerable distances from the frontier in winter quarters. + +Upon the last day of the year the Scudamores both happened to have +returned to the front--Tom from Lisbon, and Peter from a long ride to +a distant Portuguese division. There was a merry party gathered round +a blazing fire in the yard of the house where they, with several other +aides-de-camp, were quartered. Some fifty officers of all ranks were +present, for a general invitation had been issued to all unattached +officers in honor of the occasion. Each brought in what liquor he +could get hold of, and any provisions which he had been able to +procure, and the evening was one of boisterous fun and jollity. In +the great kitchen blazed a fire, before which chickens and ducks +were roasting, turkeys and geese cut up in pieces for greater +rapidity of cooking, were grilling over the fire, and as they came +off the gridiron they were taken round by the soldier-servants to +their masters as they sat about on logs of wood, boxes, and other +substitutes for chairs. Most of the officers present had already +supped, and the late-comers were finishing their frugal meal, after +which the soldiers would take their turn. There was a brewing of punch +and an uncorking of many a bottle of generous wine; then the song and +laugh went round, and all prepared to usher in the new year joyously, +when a colonel of the staff, who had been dining with Lord Wellington, +entered. "Here's a seat, colonel," was shouted in a dozen places, but +he shook his head and held up his hand. + +"Gentlemen, I am sorry to disturb you, but orders must be obeyed. +Villiers, Hogan, Scudamores both, Esdaile, Cooper, and Johnson, here +are despatches which have to be taken off at once. Gentlemen, I +should recommend you all to look to your horses. All attached to the +transport had better go to their head-quarters for orders." + +"What is up, colonel?" was the general question. + +"The army moves forward at daybreak. We are going to take Ciudad." + +A cheer of surprise and delight burst from all. There was an emptying +of glasses, a pouring out of one more bumper to success, and in +five minutes the court was deserted save by some orderlies hastily +devouring the interrupted supper, and ere long the tramp of horses +could be heard, as the Scudamores and their comrades dashed off in +different directions with their despatches. + +The next morning a bridge was thrown over the Agueda at Marialva, +six miles below Ciudad, but the investment was delayed, owing to the +slowness and insufficiency of the transport. Ciudad Rodrigo was but +a third-class fortress, and could have been captured by the process +of a regular siege with comparatively slight loss to the besiegers. +Wellington knew, however, that he could not afford the time for a +regular siege. Long before the approaches could have been made, and +the breaches effected according to rule, the French marshals would +have been up with overwhelming forces. + +Beginning the investment on the 7th, Wellington determined that it +must be taken at all costs in twenty-four days, the last day of +the month being the very earliest date at which, according to his +calculations, any considerable body of French could come up to its +relief. + +Ciudad lies on rising ground on the bank of the Agueda. The +fortifications were fairly strong, and being protected by a very high +glacis, it was difficult to effect a breach in them. The glacis is the +smooth ground outside the ditch. In well-constructed works the walls +of the fortification rise but very little above the ground beyond, +from which they are separated by a broad and deep ditch. Thus the +ground beyond the ditch, that is, the glacis, covers the walls from +the shot of a besieger, and renders it extremely difficult to reach +them. In the case of Ciudad, however, there were outside the place +two elevated plateaux, called the great and small Teson: Guns placed +on these could look down upon Ciudad, and could therefore easily +breach the walls. These, then, were the spots from which Wellington +determined to make the attack. The French, however, were aware of the +importance of the position, and had erected on the higher Teson an +inclosed and palisadoed redoubt, mounting two guns and a howitzer. A +great difficulty attending the operation was that there were neither +fuel nor shelter to be obtained on the right bank of the river, and +the weather set in very cold, with frost and snow, at the beginning +of the siege. Hence the troops had to be encamped on the left bank, +and each division, as its turn came, to occupy the trenches for +twenty-four hours, took cooked provisions with it, and waded across +the Agueda. + +On the 8th, Pack's division of Portuguese and the light division waded +the river three miles above the fortress, and, making a circuit took +up a place near the great Teson. There they remained quiet all day. +The French seeing that the place was not yet entirely invested paid +but little heed to them. At nightfall, however, Colonel Colborne, +with two companies from each of the regiments of the light division, +attacked the redoubt of San Francisco with such a sudden rush that it +was carried with the loss of only twenty-four men, the defenders, few +and unprepared, being all taken prisoners. Scarcely, however, was the +place captured than every gun of Ciudad which could be brought to bear +upon it opened with fury. All night, under a hail of shot and shell, +the troops labored steadily, and by daybreak the first parallel, that +is to say, a trench protected by a bank of earth six hundred yards +in length was sunk three feet deep. The next day the first division, +relieved the light division. + +Tom and Peter, now that the army was stationary, had an easier time of +it, and obtained leave to cross the river to see the operations. The +troops had again to wade through the bitter cold water, and at any +other time would have grumbled rarely at the discomfort. When they +really engage in the work of war, however, the British soldier cares +for nothing, and holding up their rifles, pouches and haversacks, to +keep dry, the men crossed the river laughing and joking. There was but +little done all day, for the fire of the enemy was too fast and deadly +for men to work under it in daylight. At night the Scudamores left +their horses with those of the divisional officers, and accompanied +the troops into the trenches, to learn the work which had there to +be done. Directly it was dusk twelve hundred men fell to work to +construct their batteries. The night was dark, and it was strange to +the Scudamores to hear the thud of so many picks and shovels going, +to hear now and then a low spoken order, but to see nothing save when +the flash of the enemy's guns momentarily lit up the scene. Every half +minute or so the shot, shell, and grape came tearing through the air, +followed occasionally by a low cry or a deep moan. Exciting as it was +for a time, the boys having no duty, found it difficult long to keep +awake, and presently dozed off--at first to wake with a start whenever +a shell fell close, but presently to sleep soundly until dawn. By that +time the batteries, eighteen feet thick, were completed. + +On the 10th the fourth division, and on the 11th the third, carried +on the works, but were nightly disturbed, not only by the heavy fire +from the bastions, but from some guns which the French had mounted on +the convent of San Francisco in the suburb on the left. Little was +effected in the next two days, for the frost hardened the ground and +impeded the work. On the night of the 13th the Santa Cruz convent was +carried and the trenches pushed forward, and on the next afternoon the +breaching batteries opened fire with twenty-five guns upon the points +of the wall at which it had been determined to make the breaches, +while two cannons kept down the fire of the French guns at the convent +of San Francisco. The French replied with more than fifty pieces, +and all night the tremendous fire was kept up on both sides without +intermission. Just at daybreak the sound of musketry mingled with the +roar of cannon, as the 40th Regiment attacked and carried the convent +of San Francisco. Through the 16th, 17th, and 18th the artillery +duel continued, some times one side, sometimes the other obtaining +the advantage; but during each night the trenches of the besiegers +were pushed forward, and each day saw the breaches in the ramparts +grow larger and larger. On the 19th the breaches were reported as +practicable--that is, that it would be possible for men to scramble up +the fallen rubbish to the top, and orders were therefore given for the +assault for that night. + +The attack was to be made at four points simultaneously; the 5th, +94th, and 77th were to attack from the convent of Santa Cruz, to make +for the ditch, enter it, and work their way along to the great breach; +Mackinnon's brigade of the third division was to attack the great +breach from the front; the light division posted behind the convent +of San Francisco were to attack from the left, and make their way to +the small breach; while a false attack, to be converted into a real +one if the resistance was slight, was to be made by Pack's Portuguese +at the St. Jago gate at the opposite side of the town. As night fell +the troops moved into their position, and Lord Wellington went to +the convent of San Francisco, from whose roof he could survey the +operations. The Scudamores, with the rest of the staff, took up +their places behind him. Suddenly there was a shout on the far right, +followed by a sound of confused cheering and firing, while flashes of +flame leapt out along the walls, and the guns of the place opened fire +with a crash. Now the 5th, 94th, and 77th rushed with great swiftness +along the ditch, when, at the foot of the great breach, they were +met by the third division. Together they poured up the breach, and +the roar of musketry was tremendous. Once at the top of the breach, +however, they made no progress. From a trench which had been cut +beyond it, a ring of fire broke out, while muskets flashed from every +window in the houses near. It was evident that some serious obstacle +had been encountered, and that the main attack was arrested. + +"This is terrible," Peter said, as almost breathless they watched the +storm of fire on and around the breach. "This is a thousand times +worse than a battle. It is awful to think how the shot must be telling +on that dense mass. Can nothing be done?" + +"Hurrah! There go the light division at the small breach," Tom +exclaimed, as the French fire broke out along the ramparts in that +quarter. A violent cheer came up even above the din from the great +breach, but no answering fire lights the scene, for Major Napier, +who commanded, had forbidden his men to load, telling them to trust +entirely to the bayonet. There was no delay here; the firing of the +French ceased almost immediately, as with a fierce rush the men of the +light division bounded up the ruins and won the top of the breach. For +a moment or two there was a pause, for the French opened so fierce a +fire from either side, that the troops wavered. The officers sprang +to the front, the soldiers followed with the bayonet, and the French, +unable to stand the fierce onslaught, broke and fled into the town. +Then the men of the light division, rushing along the walls, took +the French who were defending the great breach in rear, and as these +gave way, the attacking party swept across the obstacles which, had +hitherto kept them, and the town was won. Pack's Portuguese had +effected an entrance at the St. Jago gate, which they found almost +deserted, for the garrison was weak, and every available man had been +taken for the defence of the breaches. + +Thus was Ciudad Rodrigo taken after twelve days' siege, with a loss +of twelve hundred men and ninety officers, of which six hundred and +fifty men and sixty officers fell in that short, bloody fight at the +breaches. Among the killed was General Craufurd, who had commanded at +the fight on the Coa. + +Upon entering the town three days afterwards, at the termination of +the disgraceful scene of riot and pillage with which the British +soldier, there as at other places, tarnished the laurels won by his +bravery in battle, the boys went to the scene of the struggle, and +then understood the cause of the delay upon the part of the stormers. +From the top of the breach there was a perpendicular fall of sixteen +feet, and the bottom of this was planted with sharp spikes, and strewn +with the fragments of shells which the French had rolled down into +it. Had it not been for the light division coming up, and taking the +defenders--who occupied the loopholed and fortified houses which +commanded this breach--in rear, the attack here could never have +succeeded. + +The next few days were employed in repairing the breaches, and putting +the place again in a state of defence, as it was probable that Marmont +might come up and besiege it. The French marshal, however, when +hurrying to the relief of the town, heard the news of its fall, and +as the weather was very bad for campaigning, and provisions short, +he fall back again to his winter quarters, believing that Wellington +would, content with his success, make no fresh movement until the +spring. The English general, however, was far too able a strategist +not to profit by the supineness of his adversary, and, immediately +Ciudad Rodrigo was taken, he began to make preparations for the siege +of Badajos, a far stronger fortress than Ciudad, and defended by +strong detached forts. Three days after the fall of Rodrigo General +Hill came up with his division; to this the Norfolk Rangers now +belonged, and the Scudamores had therefore the delight of meeting all +their old friends again. They saw but little of them, however, for +they were constantly on the road to Lisbon with despatches, every +branch of the service being now strained to get the battering-train +destined for the attack on Badajos to the front, while orders were +sent to Silviera, Trant, Wilson, Lecca, and the other partisan +leaders, to hold all the fords and defiles along the frontier, so as +to prevent the French from making a counter-invasion of Portugal. + +On the 11th of March the army arrived at Elvas, and on the 15th a +pontoon bridge was thrown across the Guadiana. The following day the +British troops crossed the river, and invested Badajos, with fifteen +thousand men, while Hill and Graham, with thirty thousand more moved +forward, so as to act as a covering army, in case the French should +advance to raise the siege. Badajos was defended by five thousand men, +under General Phillipson, a most able and energetic commander, who had +in every way strengthened the defences, and put them in a position to +offer an obstinate resistance. + +Before attacking the fortress it was necessary to capture one of the +outlying forts, and that known as the Picurina was selected, because +the bastion of the Trinidad, which lay behind it, was the weakest +portion of the fortress. The trenches were commenced against this on +the night of the 17th, and, although the French made some vigorous +sorties, the works progressed so rapidly that all was ready for an +assault on the forts on the 25th, a delay of two days having been +occasioned by the French taking guns across the river, which swept +the trenches, and rendered work impossible, until a division was sent +round to drive in the French guns and invest the fortress on that +side. The Picurina was strong, and desperately defended, but it was +captured after a furious assault, which lasted one hour, and cost +nineteen officers and three hundred men. It was not, however, until +next evening that the fort could be occupied, for the guns of the town +poured such a hail of shot and shell into it, that a permanent footing +could not be obtained in it. Gradually, day by day, the trenches were +driven nearer to the doomed city, and the cannon of the batteries +worked day and night to establish a breach. Soult was known to be +approaching, but he wanted to gather up all his available forces, as +he believed the town capable of holding out for another month, at +least. Still he was approaching, and, although the three breaches +were scarcely yet practicable, and the fire of the town by no means +overpowered, Wellington determined upon an instant assault, and on the +night of the 6th of April the troops prepared for what turned out to +be the most terrible and bloody assault in the annals of the British +army. There were no less than six columns of attack, comprising in all +eighteen thousand men. Picton, on the right with the third division +was to cross the Rivillas and storm the castle. Wilson, with the +troops in the trenches, was to attack San Roque. In the center the +fourth and light division, under Colville and Barnard, were to assault +the breaches; and on the left Leith, with the fifth division, was to +make a false attack upon the fort of Pardaleras, and a real attack +upon the bastion of San Vincente by the river side. Across the river +the Portugese division, under Power, was to attack the works at the +head of the bridge. The night was dark and clouded, and all was as +still as death outside the town, when a lighted carcass, that is a +large iron canister filled with tar and combustibles, fell close to +the third division, and, exposing their ranks, forced them to commence +the attack before the hour appointed. Crossing the Rivillas by a +narrow bridge, under a tremendous fire, the third division assaulted +the castle, and, although their scaling-ladders were over and over +again hurled down, the stormers at last obtained a footing, and the +rest of the troops poured in and the castle was won. A similar and +more rapid success attended the assault on San Roque, which was +attacked so suddenly and violently, that it was taken with scarce +any resistance. In the mean time the assaults upon the breaches had +commenced, and it is best to give the account of this terrible scene +in the words of its eloquent and graphic historian, as the picture is +one of the most vivid that was ever drawn. + +"All this time the tumult at the breaches was such as if the very +earth had been rent asunder, and its central fires bursting upwards +uncontrolled. The two divisions had reached the glacis just as the +firing at the castle commenced, and the flash of a single musket, +discharged from the covered-way as a signal, showed them that the +French were ready; yet no stir was heard and darkness covered the +breaches. Some hay-packs were thrown, some ladders placed, and the +forlorn hopes and storming parties of the light division, five hundred +in all, descended into the ditch without opposition; but then a bright +flame shooting upwards displayed all the terrors of the scene. The +ramparts, crowded with dark figures and glittering arms were on one +side, on the other the red columns of the British, deep and broad, +were coming on like streams of burning lava. It was the touch of the +magician's wand, for a crash of thunder followed, and with incredible +violence the storming parties were dashed to pieces by the explosion +of hundreds of shells and powder-barrels. For an instant the light +division stood on the brink of the ditch, amazed at the terrific +sight; but then, with a shout that matched even the sound of the +explosion, the men flew down the ladders, or, disdaining their aid, +leaped, reckless of the depth, into the gulf below--and at the same +moment, amidst a blaze of musketry that dazzled the eyes, the fourth +division came running in, and descended with a like fury. There were +only five ladders for the two columns, which were close together; +and a deep cut, made in the bottom of the ditch as far as the +counter-guard of the Trinidad, was filled with water from the +inundation. Into that watery snare the head of the fourth division +fell, and it is said above a hundred of the fusiliers, the men of +Albuera, were there smothered. Those who followed checked not, but, +as if such a disaster had been expected, turned to the left, and thus +came upon the face of the unfinished ravelin, which, being rough and +broken, was mistaken for the breach, and instantly covered with men; +yet a wide and deep chasm was still between them and the ramparts, +from whence came a deadly fire, wasting their ranks. Thus baffled, +they also commenced a rapid discharge of musketry and disorder ensued; +for the men of the light division, whose conducting engineer had been +disabled early and whose flank was confined by an unfinished ditch +intended to cut off the bastion of Santa Maria, rushed towards the +breaches of the curtain and the Trinidad, which were, indeed, before +them, but which the fourth division had been destined to storm. Great +was the confusion, for the ravelin was quite crowded with men of both +divisions; and while some continued to fire, others jumped down and +ran towards the breach; many also passed between the ravelin and +the counterguard of the Trinidad, the two divisions got mixed, the +reserves, which should have remained at the quarries, also came +pouring in, until the ditch was quite filled, the rear still crowding +forward, and all cheering vehemently. The enemy's shouts also were +loud and terrible, and the bursting of shells, and of grenades, and +the roaring of guns from the flanks, answered by the iron howitzers +from the battery of the parallel, the heavy roll, and horrid explosion +of the powder-barrels, the whizzing flight of the blazing splinters, +the loud exhortations of the officers, and the continual clatter +of the muskets, made a maddening din. Now a multitude bounded up +the great breach, as if driven by a whirlwind, but across the top +glittered a range of sword-blades, sharp-pointed, keen-edged on both +sides, and firmly fixed in ponderous beams chained together, and set +deep in the ruins; and for ten feet in front the ascent was covered +with loose planks, studded with sharp iron points, on which, feet +being set, the planks moved, and the unhappy soldiers, falling forward +on the spikes, rolled down upon the ranks behind. Then the Frenchmen, +shouting at the success of their stratagem, and, leaping forward, +plied their shot with terrible rapidity, for every man had several +muskets, and each musket, in addition to its ordinary charge, +contained a small cylinder of wood, stuck full of wooden slugs, +which scattered like hail when they were discharged. Once and again +the assailants rushed up the breaches, but always the sword-blades, +immovable and impassable, stopped their charge, and the hissing shells +and thundering powder-barrels exploded unceasingly. Hundreds of men +had fallen, hundreds more were dropping, still, the heroic officers +called aloud for new trials, and sometimes followed by many, sometimes +by a few, ascended the ruins; and so furious were the men themselves, +that, in one of these charges, the rear strove to push the foremost on +to the sword-blades, willing even to make a bridge of their writhing +bodies, but the others frustrated the attempt by dropping down; and +men fell so fast from the shot, it was hard to know who went down +voluntarily, who were stricken and many stooped unhurt that never rose +again. Vain also would it have been to break through the sword-blades, +for the trench and parapet behind the breach were finished, and the +assailants, crowded into even a narrower space than the ditch was, +would still have been separated from their enemies, and the slaughter +would have continued. At the beginning of this dreadful conflict +Andrew Barnard had, with prodigious efforts, separated his division +from the other, and preserved some degree of military array; but now +the tumult was such, no command would be heard distinctly except by +those close at hand, and the mutilated carcasses heaped on each other, +and the wounded struggling to avoid being trampled upon, broke the +formations; order was impossible! Officers of all ranks, followed more +or less numerously by the men, were seen to start out as if struck +by sudden madness, and rash into the breach, which, yawning and +glittering with steel, seemed like the mouth of a huge dragon belching +forth smoke and flame. In one of these attempts, Colonel Macleod, of +the 43rd, a young man whose feeble body would have been quite unfit +for war if it had not been sustained by an unconquerable spirit, was +killed; wherever his voice was heard his soldiers had gathered, and +with such a strong resolution did he lead them up the fatal ruins +that, when one behind him, in falling, plunged a bayonet into his +back, he complained, not; but, continuing his course, was shot dead +within a yard of the sword-blades. Yet there was no want of gallant +leaders, or desperate followers, until two hours passed in these +vain efforts had convinced the troops the breach of the Trinidad was +impregnable; and, as the opening in the curtain, although less strong, +was retired, and the approach to it impeded by deep holes and cuts +made in the ditch, the soldiers did not much notice it after the +partial failure of one attack which had been made early. Gathering in +dark groups, and leaning on their muskets, they looked up with sullen +desperation at the Trinidad, while the enemy, stepping out on the +ramparts, and aiming their shots by the light of the fire-balls which +they threw over, asked, as their victims fell, 'Why they did not come +into Badajos?' In this dreadful situation, while the dead were lying +in heaps, and others continually falling, the wounded crawling about +to get some shelter from the merciless shower above, and withal a +sickening stench from the burnt flesh of the slain, Captain Nicholas, +of the engineers, was observed by Lieutenant Shaw, of the 43rd, making +incredible efforts to force his way with a few men into the Santa +Maria Bastion. Shaw immediately collected fifty soldiers, of all +regiments, and joined him, and although there was a deep cut along +the foot of that breach also, it was instantly passed, and these two +young officers led their gallant band, with a rush, up the ruins; but +when they had gained two-thirds of the ascent, a concentrated fire +of musketry and grape dashed nearly the whole dead to the earth. +Nicholas was mortally wounded, and the intrepid Shaw stood alone! With +inexpressible coolness he looked at his watch, and saying it was too +late to carry the reaches, rejoined the masses at the other attack. +After this no further effort was made at any point, and the troops +remained passive but unflinching beneath the enemy's shot, which +streamed without intermission; for, of the riflemen on the glacis many +leaped early into the ditch and joined in the assault, and the rest, +raked by a cross-fire of grape from the distant bastions, baffled in +their aim by the smoke and flames from the explosions, and too few in +number, entirely failed to quell the French musketry. About midnight, +when two thousand brave men had fallen, Wellington, who was on a +height close to the quarries, ordered the remainder to retire and +re-form for a second assault; he had heard the castle was taken, +but thinking the enemy would still resist in the town, was resolved +to assail the breaches again. This retreat from the ditch was not +effected without further carnage and confusion. The French fire never +slackened. A cry arose that the enemy was making a sally from the +distant flanks, and there was a rush towards the ladders. Then the +groans and lamentations of the wounded, who could not move and +expected to be slain, increased, and many officers who had not heard +of the order, endeavored to stop the soldiers from going back; some +would even have removed the ladders but were unable to break the +crowd." + +While this terrible scene was passing, the victory had been decided +elsewhere. The capture of the castle by Picton would, in itself, have +caused the fall of the town upon the following day, but Leith, with +the fifth division, after hard fighting, scaled the St. Vincente +bastion, and came up through the town and took the defenders of the +breaches in the rear. Then the French gave way, the British poured in, +and the dreadful scenes which had marked the fall of Ciudad Rodrigo +were repeated, and even surpassed. Up to the present day the name of +an Englishman is coupled with a curse in the town of Badajos. At this +siege, as at the last, the Scudamores acted the part of lookers on, +and although they bitterly regretted it, it was well for them that it +was so. The capture of Badajos cost the allied army five thousand men, +of whom three thousand five hundred fell on the night of the assault. +Each of the divisions which attacked the breaches lost over twelve +hundred men, and the 52nd Regiment, who formed part of the light +division, lost their full share. Among the ranks of the officers the +slaughter was particularly great, and scarce one escaped without +a wound. The Scudamores would fain have volunteered to join their +regiment in the assault, but it was well known that Lord Wellington +would not allow staff officers to go outside their own work. Therefore +they had looked on with beating hearts and pale faces, and with +tears in their eyes, at that terrible fight at the Triudad, and had +determined that when morning came they would resign their staff +appointments and ask leave to join their regiment. But when morning +came, and the list of the killed and wounded was sent in, and they +went down with a party to the breach to collect the wounded, they +could not but feel that they had in all probability escaped death, or +what a soldier fears more, mutilation. "After all, Tom," Peter said, +"we have done some active service, and our promotion shows that we +are not cowards; there can be no reason why we should not do our duty +as the chief has marked it out for us, especially when it is quite +as likely to lead to rapid promotion as is such a murderous business +as this." After this no more was said about resigning the staff +appointment, which gave them plenty of hard work, and constant change +of scene, whereas had they remained with the regiment they would often +have been stationed for months in one place without a move. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +SALAMANCA. + + +The great triumphs of Ciudad Rodrigo and Badajos did not lead to the +rapid successes which Wellington had hoped. The French generals, +on hearing of the loss of the latter fortress, again fell back, +and Wellington was so much hampered by shortness of money, by the +inefficiency, obstinacy, and intrigues of the Portuguese Government, +and by want of transport, that it was nearly three months before he +could get everything in readiness for an advance into Spain. At last +all was prepared, and on the 13th of June the army once more crossed +the Agueda and marched towards the Tamar in four columns. On the 17th +it was within six miles of Salamanca, and Marshal Marmont, unable for +the moment to stem the tide of invasion, evacuated the city, which +that evening blazed with illuminations, the people being half wild +with joy at their approaching deliverance. The French, however, had +not entirely departed, for eight hundred men still held some very +strong forts overlooking and guarding the city. + +These forts held out desperately; the British battering train +was weak, and upon the 23d Marmont, having received considerable +reinforcements, advanced to raise the siege. Wellington, however, +refused to be tempted to leave his trenches to deliver a general +battle, but faced the enemy with a portion of his army while he +continued the siege. + +Marmont, upon his part, believing that the forts could hold out for +fifteen days, put off the attack, as he knew that large reinforcements +were coming up. His calculations were frustrated by one of the forts +taking fire on the 27th, when an assault was delivered, and the whole +of the forts surrendered; Marmont at once fell back across the Douro, +there to await the arrival of his reinforcements. + +Wellington, on his part, followed slowly, and his army took up a +position between Canizal and Castrejon, thereby covering the roads +from Toro and Tordesillas, the only points at which the French could +cross the river. The reports of the spies all agreed that the former +was the place at which the crossing would be made. + +On the 16th of July an officer rode into Canizal, at headlong pace, +with the news that a reconnoitering party had crossed the Douro that +morning near Tordesillas, and had found that place deserted, except by +a garrison; and an hour later the news came in that three divisions of +the enemy were already across the river at Toro. Five minutes later +the Scudamores were on horseback, carrying orders that the whole of +the army, with the exception of the fourth and light divisions, which +were on the Trabancos, under General Cotton, were to concentrate at +Canizal that night. By the morning the movement was accomplished. + +The day wore on in somewhat anxious expectation, and towards afternoon +Wellington, accompanied by Lord Beresford, and escorted by Alten's, +Bock's and Le Marchant's brigades of cavalry, started to make a +reconnaissance of the enemy's movements. Caution was needed for the +advance, as it was quite uncertain whether the French were pushing +on through the open country towards Canizal, or whether they were +following the direct road from Toro to Salamanca. Evening closed in, +but no signs of the French army were seen, and the party halted about +six miles from Toro, and small parties of cavalry were despatched +right and left to scour the country, and find out where the enemy had +gone. + +"It's very strange where the French can have got to," was the remark +made, for the fiftieth time among the staff. + +The detached parties returned, bringing no news whatever, and Lord +Wellington again advanced slowly and cautiously towards Toro. Small +parties were pushed on ahead, and presently an officer rode back +with the news that he had been as far as the river, and that not a +Frenchman was to be seen. It was too late to do any more, and they +remained in uncertainty whether the enemy had recrossed the river +after making a demonstration, or whether they had marched to their +right, so as to make a circuit, and throw themselves between Ciudad +Rodrigo and Salamanca, upon the line of communication of the British +army. + +Lord Wellington, with his staff, took possession of a deserted +farm-house, the cavalry picketed their horses round it, and the +Scudamores, who had been more than twenty-four hours in the saddle, +wrapped themselves in their cloaks, and stretching themselves on the +floor, were soon asleep. Just at midnight the sound of a horse's +footfall approaching at a gallop was heard, and an officer, who had +ridden, without drawing rein, from Canizal, dashed up to the farm. + +Five minutes later the whole party were in the saddle again. The news +was important, indeed. Marmont had drawn his whole army back across +the Toro on the night of the 16th, had marched to Tordesillas, crossed +there, and in the afternoon, after a march of fifty miles, had fallen +upon Cotton's outposts, and driven them across the Trabancos. + +Not a moment's time was lost by Wellington after he received the news; +but, unfortunately, six precious hours had already been wasted, owing +to the despatches not having reached him at Canizal. With the three +brigades of cavalry he set off at once towards Alaejos, while an +officer was despatched to Canizal, to order the fifth division to +march with all speed to Torrecilla de la Orden, six miles in the rear +of Cotton's position at Castrejon. + +Four hours' riding brought them to Alaejos, where a halt for two or +three hours was ordered, to rest the weary horses and men. Soon after +daybreak, however, all thought of sleep was banished by the roar of +artillery, which told that Marmont was pressing hard upon Cotton's +troops. "To horse!" was the cry, and Lords Wellington and Beresford, +with their staff, rode off at full speed towards the scene of action, +with the cavalry following hard upon their heels. An hour's ride +brought them to the ground. Not much could be seen, for the country +was undulating and bare, like the Brighton Downs, and each depression +was full of the white morning mist, which wreathed and tossed +fantastically from the effects of the discharges of firearms, the +movements of masses of men, and the charges of cavalry hidden within +it. Upon a crest near at hand were a couple of British guns, with a +small escort of horse. + +Suddenly, from the mist below, a party of some fifty French horsemen +dashed out and made for the guns. The supporting squadron, surprised +by the suddenness of the attack, broke and fled; the French followed +hard upon them, and just as Lord Wellington, with his staff, gained +the crest, pursuers and pursued came upon them, and in pell-mell +confusion the whole were borne down to the bottom of the hill. For +a few minutes it was a wild melee. Lords Wellington, Beresford, and +their staff, with their swords drawn, were in the midst of the fight, +and friends and foes were mingled together, when the leading squadrons +of the cavalry from Alaejos came thundering down, and very few of the +Frenchmen who had made that gallant charge escaped to tell the tale. + +The mists were now rapidly clearing up, and in a short time the whole +French army could be seen advancing. They moved towards the British +left, and Wellington ordered the troops at once to retire. The British +fell back in three columns, and marched for the Guarena, through +Torrecilla de la Orden. The French also marched straight for the +river, and now one of the most singular sights ever presented in +warfare was to be seen. + +The hostile armies were marching abreast, the columns being but a few +hundred yards apart, the officers on either side waving their hands to +each other. For ten miles the armies thus pressed forward the officers +urging the men, and these straining every nerve to get first to the +river. From time to time the artillery of either side, finding a +convenient elevation, would pour a few volleys of grape into the +opposing columns, but the position of the two armies, did not often +admit of this. Gradually Cotton's men, fresher than the French, who +had, in the two previous days, marched fifty miles, gained ground, +and, reaching the river, marched across by the ford, the winners of +the great race by so little that one division, which halted for a +moment to drink, was swept by forty pieces of French artillery, which +arrived on the spot almost simultaneously with it. + +On the Guarena the British found the remaining divisions of the army, +which had been brought up from Canizal. These checked Marmont in an +attempt to cross at Vallesa, while the 29th and 40th Regiments, with +a desperate bayonet charge, drove Carier's French division back as it +attempted to push forward beyond Castrillo. Thus the two armies faced +each other on the Guarena, and Marmont had gained absolutely nothing +by his false movement at Toro, and his long and skillful detour by +Tordesillas. + +Quickly the rest of the day passed, as did the one which followed, the +troops on both sides resting after their fatigues. Wellington expected +to be attacked on the next morning and his army was arranged in two +lines ready for the combat. At daybreak, however, Marmont moved his +army up the river, crossed at a ford there, and marched straight +for Salamanca, thus turning Wellington's right, and threatening his +communications. The British at once fell back, and the scene of the +previous day was repeated the armies marching along the crest of two +parallel hills within musket shot distance of each other. + +This time however, the French troops, although they had marched +considerably farther than the English proved themselves the best +marchers, and when night fell Wellington had the mortification of +seeing them in possession of the ford of Huerta on the Tormes, thus +securing for Marmont the junction with an army which was approaching +under King Joseph, and also the option of either fighting or refusing +battle. Wellington felt his position seriously threatened, and sent +off a despatch to the Spanish General Castanos, stating his inability +to hold his ground, and the probability that he should be obliged to +fall back upon Portugal. This letter proved the cause of the victory +of Salamanca for it was intercepted by the French, and Marmont, +fearing that Wellington would escape him, prepared at once to throw +himself upon the road to Ciudad Rodrigo, and thus cut the British line +of retreat, in spite of the positive order which he had received from +King Joseph not to fight until he himself arrived with his army. + +Upon the 21st both armies crossed the Tormes, the French at Alba and +Huerta, the British at Aldea Lengua, and San Marta. Upon that day the +news reached Wellington that General Chauvel, with 2000 cavalry, and +20 guns, would reach Marmont on the evening of the 22d, or the morning +of the 23d, and the English general therefore resolved to retreat, +unless Marmont should, by some mistake, give him a chance of fighting +to advantage. + +Close to the British right, and the French left, were two steep and +rugged hills, called the Hermanitos, or Brothers, and soon after +daybreak on the 22d, the French seized upon the one nearest to them, +while the British took possession of the other. Then, watching each +other, the two armies remained until noon, for Wellington could not +commence his retreat by daylight; but a long cloud of dust along the +road to Ciudad Rodrigo showed that the baggage of the army was already +_en route_ for Portugal. Marmont now determined to make a bold stroke +to cut off Wellington's retreat, and, although all his troops had not +yet arrived, he ordered Maucune, with two divisions, to march round by +the left and menace the Ciudad road. It was at three o'clock in the +afternoon, and Wellington, who had been up all night, thinking that +Marmont would make no move that day, had gone to lie down for an hour +or two, when Tom Scudamore who, from an elevated point, was watching +the movements of the enemy, hurried in with the news that the French +were pushing their left round towards the Ciudad Road. + +Wellington leaped to his feet, and hurried to the high ground, where +he beheld, with stern satisfaction, that Marmont, in his eagerness +to prevent the British escape, had committed the flagrant error of +detaching his wing from his main body. Instantly he issued orders +for an attack, and the great mass of men upon the British Hermanito +moved down upon the plain to attack Maucune in flank, while the third +division was ordered to throw itself across his line of march, and to +attack him in front. As the advance across the plain would be taken in +flank by the fire from the French Hermanito, General Pack was ordered +to assail that position directly the British line had passed it. + +Marmont, standing on the French Hermanito, was thunder-struck at +beholding the plain suddenly covered with enemies, and a tremendous +fire was at once opened upon the advancing British. Officer after +officer was despatched to hurry up the French troops still upon the +march, and when Marmont saw the third division dash across Maucune's +path, he was upon the point of hurrying himself to the spot, when a +shell burst close to him, and he was dashed to the earth with a broken +arm, and two deep wounds in his side. + +Thus, at the critical point of the battle, the French army was left +without a head. + +It was just five o'clock when Pakenham, with the third division, fell +like a thunderbolt upon the head of Maucune's troops. These, taken by +surprise by this attack, on the part of an enemy whom they had thought +to see in full flight, yet fought gallantly, and strove to gain time +to open out into order of battle. Bearing onwards, however, with +irresistible force, the third division broke the head of the column, +and drove it back upon its supports. Meanwhile, the battle raged all +along the line; in the plain the fourth division carried the village +of Arapiles, and drove back Bonnet's division with the bayonet, and +the fifth division attacked Maucune's command in flank, while Pakenham +was destroying its front. + +Marmont was succeeded in his command by Bonnet, who was also wounded, +and Clausel, an able general, took the command. He reinforced Maucune +with his own divisions, which had just arrived, and, for a while, +restored the battle. Then, past the right and left of Pakenham's +division, the British cavalry, under Le Marchant, Anson, and D'Urban, +burst through the smoke and dust, rode down twelve hundred of the +French infantry, and then dashed on at the line behind. Nobly the +charge was pressed, the third division following at a run, and the +charge ceased not until the French left was entirely broken and five +guns, and two thousand prisoners taken. + +But forty minutes had passed since the first gun was fired, and the +French defeat was already all but irretrievable, and the third, +fourth, and fifth divisions now in line, swept forward as to assured +victory. Clausel, however, proved equal to the emergency. He +reinforced Bonnet's division with that of Fereij, as yet fresh and +unbroken, and, at the same moment, Sarrut's and Brennier's divisions +issued from the forest, and formed in the line of battle. Behind them +the broken troops of Maucune's two divisions re-formed, and the battle +was renewed with terrible force. + +Pack, at the same moment, attempted unsuccessfully to carry the French +Hermanito by assault with his Portuguese division, and the fate of the +battle was again in the balance; the British divisions outnumbered, +and outflanked, began to fall back, Generals Cole, Leith, and Spry, +were all wounded, and the French cavalry threatened the flank of the +line. Wellington, however, had still plenty of reserves in hand, and +at this critical moment he launched them at the enemy. The sixth +division was brought up from the second line, and hurled at the center +of the enemy in a fierce and prolonged charge, while the light and +first divisions were directed against the French divisions which were +descending from the French Hermanito, and against that of Foy, while +the seventh division and the Spaniards were brought up behind the +first line. Against so tremendous an assault as this the French could +make no stand, and were pushed back in ever increasing disorder to the +edge of the forest, where Foy's and Maucune's divisions stood at bay, +and covered their retreat in the fast gathering darkness. + +Wellington believed that he should capture a great portion of the +beaten army, for he relied upon the Castle of Alba de Formes, +commanding the ford at that place, being held by the Spaniards, but +these had evacuated the place on the preceding day, and had not even +informed Wellington that they had done so. + +Thus, hidden by the night, the French retreated with but slight loss +from the pursuing columns. In the battle the French had forty-two +thousand men and seventy-four guns; the Allies forty-six thousand and +sixty guns, but of the infantry a division were composed of Spaniards, +and these could not be relied upon in any way. It was probably the +most rapidly fought action ever known, and a French officer described +it as the defeat of forty thousand men in forty minutes. The French +loss was over twelve thousand in killed, wounded, and prisoners, and +so completely were they dispersed that Clausel a week afterwards +could only collect twenty thousand to their standards. It was a great +victory, and celebrated as the first which Wellington had gained over +the French, for although at Talavera and Busaco he had repulsed the +French attack, he was not in either case in a position to do more than +hold his ground. + +Throughout this short and desperate fight the Scudamores had been +fully engaged in conveying orders from one part of the field to +another. Shot and shell flew around them in all directions, and yet +when they met at the end of the action they found that they had +escaped without a scratch. The day following the battle the pursuit +began. Had King Joseph's advancing army united with Clausel's broken +troops, he could have opposed Wellington's advance with a force far +superior in numbers to that defeated at Salamanca. But Joseph, after +hesitating, fell back in one direction, Clausel retreated in another, +the opportunity for concentration was lost, and Wellington found no +foe to bar his way on his triumphant march upon Madrid. + +Joseph fell back from the capital as the English approached, leaving +some thousands of men in the strong place known as the Retiro, +together with an immense amount of arms, ammunition, and military +stores of all kinds, all of which, including the troops, fell into the +hands of the English within a few days of their arrival at Madrid. + +It was a proud moment for the Scudamores, as riding behind Lord +Wellington they entered Madrid on the 14th August. + +The city was half mad with joy. Crowds lined the streets, while every +window and balcony along the route was filled with ladies, who waved +their scarves, clapped their hands, and showered flowers upon the +heads of their deliverers. Those below, haggard and half-starved, +for the distress in Madrid was intense, thronged round the general's +horse, a shouting, weeping throng, kissing his cloak, his horse, any +portion of his equipments which they could touch. Altogether it was +one of the most glorious, most moving, most enthusiastic welcomes ever +offered to a general. + +The next fortnight was spent in a round of fetes, bull fights, and +balls, succeeding each other rapidly, but these rejoicings were but a +thin veil over the distress which was general throughout the town. The +people were starving, and many deaths occurred daily from hunger. The +British could do but little to relieve the suffering which they saw +around them, for they themselves were--owing to the utter breakdown of +all the arrangements undertaken by the Portuguese government, and to +the indecision and incapacity of the Home Government--badly fed, and +much in arrears of their pay. Nevertheless, the officers did what they +could, got up soup kitchens, and fed daily many hundreds of starving +wretches. + +The heat was excessive and a very great deal of illness took place +among the troops. The French were gathering strength in the South, +and Wellington determined upon marching north and seizing Burgos, an +important place, but poorly fortified. Leaving General Hill with two +divisions at Madrid, he marched with the rest of the army upon Burgos. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +CAUGHT IN A TRAP. + + +So much had passed between the first visit of the Scudamores to Madrid +as Spanish peasant boys, and their second entry as captains upon Lord +Wellington's staff, that they had scarcely given a thought to the +dangers they had at that time run, or to the deadly hatred with which +they had inspired the guerilla chief Nunez. When they first rode +into the town, indeed, they had spoken of it one to the other, and +had agreed that it would be pleasant to be able to walk through the +streets without fear of assassination; for even, as Tom said, if the +scoundrel had any of his band there, they would not be likely to +recognize them in their uniforms. + +One evening, however, when they had been in Madrid about a fortnight, +an incident happened which caused them to doubt whether their security +from the hatred of the guerilla was as complete as they had fancied. +They were sitting with a number of other officers in a large cafe in +the Puerta del Sol, the principal square in Madrid, when a girl came +round begging; instead of holding out her hand silently with a murmur +for charity in the name of the holy Virgin, she began a long story, +poured out in rapid language. + +Several of the officers present knew more or less Spanish, but they +were unable to follow her quick utterances, and one of them said +laughingly, "Scudamore, this is a case for you, she is beyond us +altogether." + +The girl followed the direction of the speaker's eye, and moved across +to the brothers, who happened to be sitting next to each other, and +began her story again. It was a complicated tale of French oppression, +and the boys, interrupting her here and there to ask for details, +talked with her for some minutes. + +"I believe she is lying," Tom said, in English, "she tells her story +as if she had learned it by heart, and gets confused whenever we +cross-question her; there, give her a few coppers, I am out of +change." + +As Peter put his hand into his pocket for the money, Tom glanced +up sharply at the girl. She was not, as might have been expected, +watching Peter's movements with interest, but was looking inquiringly +at some one in the crowd of promenaders. Tom followed her glance, and +saw a peasant, standing half-hidden behind a group of passers, nod to +her, and motion her to come to him. She waited until Peter put the +coins into her hand; then, with a brief word of thanks, she moved away +into the crowd. + +"Peter, I believe those scoundrels are up to their old game, and +that we are watched. Once or twice since we have been sitting here I +have noticed a heavy-looking fellow glance at us very closely as he +passed, and I just saw the same fellow, who was evidently hiding from +observation, nod to that girl, and beckon her away." + +"Her story was a lie from beginning to end," Peter said, "and it is +quite possible that it was a got-up thing, on purpose to see whether +we could talk Spanish well. I don't think any one could swear to us +who only saw us then; but the fact of our speaking Spanish so well +would go a long way towards settling the point in the mind of any one +who suspected us!" + +"We must be careful in future, Peter, and avoid quiet streets after +dark, and keep a sharp look-out at all times, or we shall get a knife +between our ribs, as sure as fate." + +Time, however, passed on without anything occurring to give any +support to their suspicion, they could not discover that they were +being watched, or their footsteps dogged. They, nevertheless, +continued to be, to a certain extent, upon their guard after dark; in +the daytime the number of English soldiers about the streets was so +large that there was very little danger of any attack. + +On the evening before the army marched for Burgos, Tom, whose turn it +was for duty at head-quarters, received a despatch, to carry to one of +the generals of division encamped a mile or two out of the town. He +did not need to go round to his quarters, as his horse was standing +saddled in readiness in the courtyard. He was but an hour away, and, +as he knew that he would not be farther required, he rode round to the +house where he was quartered. His orderly came forward at his shout, +and took his horse, and he mounted the broad stairs of the house, +which was a very handsome one, and rang at the door on the second +floor; for in Spain, as indeed almost all over the Continent, each +floor is a separate dwelling. + +Sam opened it. + +"Nothing new, Sam?" + +"No, sar, nothing new." + +Tom passed through the sitting-room, and entered Peter's bedroom. It +was in darkness. + +"Asleep, old man?" he asked. + +There was no answer. He came back into the sitting room, where two +lamps were burning, and looked at his watch. "Half-past eleven. He is +off to bed early. Sam, bring me some supper if you have got anything, +I am hungry." + +Sam came in, in a minute, with a small tray. + +"How long has my brother been gone to bed?" + +"Me did not know he gone to bed at all," Sam said, in surprise. "Me +thought Massa Peter been reading book." + +Tom took up a light, and went into the bedroom, it was empty. "Sam, +there's something wrong here!" Tom said sharply, for a sudden +sensation of alarm seized him. "Peter is not here." + +Sam came into the bedroom, and looked round in astonishment. "What +become of him?" he said. "Where de debil he got to?" + +"That's what I want to know, Sam. Now, then, just give all your +attention. What time did he come in?" + +"He came in at about nine o'clock, sar, with three other officers, +Captain Farquharson, Major Heriot, and Captain Brown. Dey have bottle +wine, and sit here and smoke. Well, Massa Tom, Sam sit in his room, +and smoke him pipe, and he doze off a little; after a bit, may be +ten o'clock, Sam hear dem move, and go to door; they were saying +good-night, when Massa Peter said, 'I will just go down to see that +the horses are all right.' Den dey all go down togeder." + +"Did they shut the door?" Tom asked. + +"No, Massa Tom, dey did not shut de door, because, a little while +after, Sam, he wake up wid little start; he hear de door bang, and +'spose Massa Peter come back. Sam go off to sleep again till you ring +bell." + +Tom looked very grave. "What can Peter have gone off with Farquharson +at this time of night for?" + +Then he looked round the room, and said, almost with a cry, "Sam, +look there, there are his cap and sword. He has not gone out with the +others at all. What can have happened?" + +Tom first glanced into his own room, and then ran downstairs in haste, +followed by Sam, who was now also thoroughly alarmed. The orderly had +just made the horse comfortable for the night, and was leaving the +stable. + +"Johnstone, when did you see my brother?" + +"Well, it may be an hour, or an hour and a half back, sir. He came +down with some other officers; I did not see them, but I heard them +talking for a minute or two before he came in to look at the horses, +and he asked if they were all right, and said they must be saddled by +half-past five, and then he went up again--at least, I suppose he went +up, for he had not got his cap on. Is anything wrong, sir?" + +"I don't know, I am afraid to think," Tom said, in a dazed way. "He is +not upstairs; he has not gone out; what can have become of him?" + +He stood quiet for a minute or two, and then, with a great effort, +brought his thoughts within control again. "The first thing is to +assure ourselves whether he returned upstairs. Sam, fetch a lamp, the +stairs are not lighted, and I want to examine them." + +Sam soon returned with the lamp, and Tom, beginning at the street +door, examined every step carefully all the way up, Sam and the +soldier following him. + +"There has been no scuffle on the stairs," he said; then he went +through the little hall into the sitting-room again. Nothing appeared +to have been disturbed. Then he looked at the floor, which was of +polished oak, and knelt down to examine it more closely. "There have +been men with dirty shoes standing here," he cried. "Do you see the +marks on each side of the door, and there, do you see that scratch and +that? There has been a scuffle. Good heavens! what has taken place +here?" + +Sam's face was pale with apprehension that something had happened to +Peter; but, he said, "How dat be, Massa Tom, with Sam in the next room +all the time?" + +Tom made no reply; but was closely examining the floor--back across +the hall. "There is a mark; there is another," he said, "not made by +boots, but by their native sandals." Then he went out from the door, +and up the next flight of stairs. + +"There," he said, "just as I thought." Just round the angle of the +stairs two steps were dirty and stained, as if dirty feet had been +trampling upon them for some time. "I suppose they knew I was out, and +watched here, for hours, perhaps. Then, when Peter went down, they +slipped in through the open door, and then"--without completing the +sentence, Tom went back into the room, and threw himself into a chair +in tearless despair. + +Sam sobbed loudly. For some time there was silence. "There is no +blood, sir, that I can see, not a speck," the orderly said. "They +can't have killed Captain Scudamore, and, if they had, why should they +have carried his body away?" + +This was the question Tom had been asking himself. Assassinations +were, in Madrid, every-day occurrences, and that Peter and he were +especially liable to be murdered, owing to the hatred of Nunez and his +gang, was clear; but, so far as he could see, not a drop of blood had +been shed here. Presently Sam began to sob more loudly. "Dis break +my heart, Massa Tom, to tink dat Sam be next door all de time, and, +instead of watching, he sleep so sound dat Massa Peter carried +straight away." + +"You are not to blame, Sam, there was, probably, no noise whatever. +But, what can it all mean? Johnstone, you had better go to bed, you +can do no good now. Sam, give me my pistols; take that big stick of +yours, and come round with me to head-quarters, we will call in at +Captain Farquharson's on the way." + +That officer, on being roused, and made to understand what was the +matter, confirmed the account given by the orderly; he and his +companions had parted at the street door, and Peter had gone down the +yard to the stable. + +"It is clear that Peter has been carried off," Tom said, "and I have +not the least doubt that it has been done by some of the band of +Nunez. As you have heard me say, they owe us a grudge, and have, no +doubt, been on the look-out ever since we came here. We have been +on guard, and never gave them a chance, and, I suppose, they got +desperate when they found the army was moving again, and so carried +out this audacious plan." + +"If your brother had been found murdered I should understand it," +Captain Farquharson said; "but, what on earth did they carry him off +for?" + +Tom was silent for a minute. + +"That fiend, Nunez, would have had us stabbed if he could do nothing +else; but he would, if I judge him rightly, be really contented with +nothing short of putting us to death himself in some horrible manner. +My own idea is, that Peter is hidden away somewhere near, will be kept +in concealment until the road is clear, and will then be taken to +Nunez. I must go off and try and save him at all hazards." + +Captain Farquharson was silent, while Tom walked up and down the room +thoughtfully. + +"I don't suppose the chief would refuse me leave," Tom said. "If he +does, I must throw up my commission." + +"No, no; you are sure to get leave for such a thing as this, but the +difficulty of the affair will be to know how to proceed. The country +will swarm with French, the guerillas are sure to keep a sharp +look-out, and if you find him, how are you going to rescue him?" + +"I don't know," Tom said, "but it's got to be done; that's clear. I +can't set out as a Spanish peasant," he went on after a pause. "They +know me as that now. At least, if I do I must get up as an old man +and change my appearance. I might go as a woman, but I am too tall in +the first place, and then women don't go wandering over the country +in such times as this. But there, I have time to think it over before +morning. I suppose the general will be moving about five o'clock; +I will see him the first thing, and tell him the whole story. +Good-night." + +And so Tom went back to his quarters, and sat thinking deeply until +morning, while Sam sat gloomily in his little room, sometimes with +tears rolling down his cheeks, sometimes muttering terrible threats +against the guerillas, at other times cursing himself for having been +asleep instead of watching over his young master's safety. Tom had +briefly told him that he intended to get leave in order to search +for Peter. At daybreak, when he heard Tom moving, he went into the +sitting-room. + +"Look here, Massa Tom, Sam only one word to say. He going to look for +Massa Peter. Sam know dat him color berry spicuous, dat people look +at him and tink he de debil. Sam don't spect he going wid you. Dat +wouldn't do. Dese fellows watch him, know dat black fellow here. Only +Sam go somehow. He trabel night, hide up at day time. He join you de +last ting when you go to mash up dem guerillas like squash. Anyhow, +Sam must go. If can get leave, berry well, if not he desert. Anyhow he +go, dat sartin. Sam kill himself if he stay behind." + +Tom had already thought over this. He was sure that the faithful negro +would not remain behind, but he had seen that his companionship would +be fatal. He had, therefore, formed some plan in his head similar to +that which Sam proposed, and he knew that when the moment for action +came his courage, strength, and devotion would be invaluable. + +"You shall go, Sam," he said, holding out his hand to his attached +follower. "As you say, you can't go with me, but you shall go +somehow." + +"Thank you, Massa Tom," the negro said gratefully, "You berry sure if +Massa Peter die Sam die too." + +Tom now went to head-quarters, and found that Lord Wellington was +just up. Sending in to say that he wished to speak with him for a few +minutes on a matter of urgent personal importance, he was admitted, +and related as concisely as he could Peter's disappearance, and told +the story of the affair with the guerillas, which accounted for the +intense desire for vengeance on the part of Nunez. He ended by asking +for leave of absence. + +The general heard him to the end, asking a brief question here and +there. + +"You can have the leave certainly, Captain Scudamore, I know that it +is needless for me to point out the risks that you will run, both from +the French and guerillas. I think that it might be an advantage if I +give you a note which you can, in case of absolute necessity, show to +any French officer." + +So saying, the general sat down and wrote as follows:-- + +"To the French officer commanding.--The Earl of Wellington, +commander-in-chief of His Britannic Majesty's forces in Spain, gives +his assurance that the bearer of this, Captain Scudamore, although not +in English uniform, is not engaged upon any mission connected with the +army, or to obtain information respecting the strength and position of +the French forces. His business is entirely private, and he is engaged +in an attempt to discover and rescue a brother who has been carried +off by the guerilla chief Nunez in order to gratify private vengeance. +The Earl of Wellington, confiding in the natural courtesy of the +French nation, trusts that officers of that service will, if applied +to, assist Captain Scudamore in any way in their power, and he will +feel personally obliged to them by their so doing." + +Tom expressed his deep gratitude for this, which might, he foresaw, be +of inestimable advantage to him. + +"I am taking my servant with me, sir--the negro; he will not travel +with me by day, but will join me wherever I tell him; he is very +strong and brave, and is deeply attached to us." + +"Yes, I remember," the general said; "that is the man whose life you +saved. Do you leave at once?" + +"No, sir; I am thinking of riding with you to-morrow at any rate. The +route lies on the way I have to go, and I am sure to be watched here." + +"Very well," the general said; "I wish you good fortune; but you have +a difficult, almost a desperate, service before you." + +Upon leaving head-quarters, Tom again called on Captain Farquharson. + +"Farquharson, I hear that it will be eleven before the chief leaves. I +wish you would go to that little shop opposite the opera-house; they +have got wigs and all that sort of thing there. Please get me two +old men's wigs and beards, and one set of those mutton-chop shaped +whiskers, and a woman's wig. I haven't made up my mind yet what I am +going to wear, but I want these things to choose from. I am sure to be +watched, and if I were to go there they would find out, five minutes +afterwards, what I had bought. In the meantime I am going to the head +of the police to give notice of Peter's disappearance, and to ask him +to have the carts leaving the town for the next few days searched. +I have no doubt the fellows will outwit the police, but it's no use +throwing away a chance." + +It was six days after this that an old man, with long white hair +and gray beard, and with a box containing cheap trinkets, beads, +necklaces, earrings, knives, scissors, and other like articles, was +sitting at the junction of two roads near the lower slopes of the +Pyrenees, some twenty miles north of Vittoria. He had one of his +sandals off, and appeared to have just risen from a bed of leaves in +the forest behind him. The dawn had broken, but it was still twilight. +Presently he heard a footstep coming along the road, and at once +applied himself to wrapping the bandages, which serve for stockings +to the Spanish peasant, round his leg, looking eagerly from under his +wide sombrero to see who was approaching. As the new-comer came in +sight, the pedlar at once ceased his employment and rose to meet him. +He had recognized the figure, but the face was hidden, the Spanish +cloak, worn as is usual by peasant and noble alike, with one end +thrown over the shoulder, hiding the chin and lower part of the face, +while the wide felt hat, pressed well down in front, allowed scarcely +a glimpse even of the nose. That, however, would have been sufficient +in the present case, for the man was a negro. + +Upon seeing the pedlar rise, he ran forward to meet him. + +"Ah, Massa Tom, tank de Lord me find you safe and sound. I always +keep on tinking you taken prisoner or killed eider by de French or de +robbers--one as bad as de oder." + +"I have thought the same of you, Sam, for your risk has been far +greater than mine. Well, thank God, it is all right thus far. But come +back into the wood, I have got some food there, and here any one might +come along." + +They were soon deep in the wood, where, by a pile of grass and leaves +which had evidently been used as a bed, was an open wallet, with some +bread, cheese, cold meat and a small skin of wine. + +"Are you hungry, Sam?" + +"Downright starving, sar; dis chile eat noting for two days." + +"Why, how is that, Sam; you had six days' provision with you when you +started?" + +"Dat true enough, sar, but Sam's appetite bigger than usual, noting to +do all day sitting in de woods, waiting for night to come so as to go +on again; so had to eat, and de food all went before Sam thought dat +dere was two more days before he meet you." + +"Well, sit down now, Sam, and eat away; we have plenty of time." + +They had much to tell each other. They had traveled by the same road, +one by night, the other by day--Sam passing the days sleeping in the +woods, his master traveling by day and at night sleeping in wretched +village posadas. He, too, would far rather have slept in the woods, +for the insects and filth made sleep almost impossible in these +places, besides which he ran a good deal of risk as to the discovery +of his disguise. He had, however, chosen the inns in hopes of hearing +something which might give him a clue as to the object of his search. +The only information, which he had gained was to the effect that Nunez +still had his quarters at the old place. He had been driven out of it, +and the village had been burned by the French, but the position was +a convenient one, and the houses had been cleared and roughly roofed +with boughs of trees and straw, and the band was still there. This +much was satisfactory, and he could hardly have expected to learn +more, unless he had happened to meet some of the members of the band +itself. They had not traveled by the main road, as upon that large +forces of the French were collected; and even if Tom could have +passed through, boldly, Sam could not have made his way. Even by the +road they had chosen Tom had met several bodies of French, while at +Vittoria a very large force was assembling, destined for the relief of +Burgos. + +Sam had but few incidents to relate. He had been carefully instructed +by Tom before starting as to the road he should take, and the position +and distances apart of the towns and villages upon it. He had traveled +only at night, and had but once or twice exchanged a word with passers +by. People did not travel much at night in so disturbed a country, +and when Sam heard a foot-passenger approaching, or, as was more +frequently the case, a party of French cavalry, he left the road and +lay down, until they had passed. The one or two foot-passengers he had +met suddenly he had passed with the usual Spanish muttered salutation, +and the darkness and the disguise prevented any recognition of his +color. + +"Now, sar," Sam said, when they had finished breakfast, "what am to be +done next?" + +"I do not think, Sam, that the party who have got Peter have arrived +yet. They could only have started on the day that we did; they have as +long a road to go, and most likely they have got a bullock-cart, which +won't travel more than fifteen miles a day at the outside. They have +got Peter in a cart covered up with something, we may be sure. I don't +think they will be here for another day or so at the earliest. If we +knew what sort of cart it was, we could attack them on the way if +there are not too many of them; but unfortunately we don't know that; +and as there are three or four roads up to the village, and they are +sure to make a detour, we don't know which they will come by. I hope +to learn at the village. We will stay where we are till dark, then we +will push on; it is only a couple of miles or so from here. I will +steal into the place after dark, and try and overhear what is going +on. You shall remain at a point where you can see down into the +village and can hear a shout. I will give you this letter of Lord +Wellington, and if you hear a pistol shot and hear me shout 'Sam!' you +will know I am caught, and must make off as hard as you can to that +small town in the plain, where there is a French garrison; ask for the +commanding-officer, show this letter, and offer to guide them so as +to surprise Nunez and his band. That is our sole chance. But I don't +think there is much risk of being caught. I shall be very careful, you +may rely upon it; and as I know the position of the house, I shall be +able to make my way about. Once night has fallen they go off to bed; +and even if I walked boldly about the place I should likely enough +meet no one all night." + +That evening Tom entered the village as soon as it was fairly dark. He +knew, from his former experience, that sentries were always placed at +points whence they could get a view of the roads, and he made his way +so as to avoid any risk of observation by them; but when he reached a +place whence he could in turn view the posts of the watchers, he found +that they were deserted, and concluded that the brigands had become +careless, from the belief that, now the French had once destroyed the +village, they would not be likely to come up to search for them there +a second time; besides which, they might reckon that the French had +their hands much too full with the advance of the Allied Army to spare +either men or time in raids upon the guerillas. In this particular, +indeed, they would have argued wrongly, for the French during the +whole war, however much they were pressed by Wellington, always kept +sufficient forces in hand to scatter the guerillas as fast as they +become formidable. + +Tom had now taken off his beard and wig, and had put on the small +whisker, which is the general fashion of wearing the hair throughout +Spain. Thus he trusted, if surprised in the dark, to pass as one of +the band. So quiet was the village when he entered, that he at first +thought it was deserted; at last, however, he saw a light in one of +the houses in the center of the village. Approaching carefully and +noiselessly he saw a group of five men sitting and drinking round a +fire made on the ground, in the center of one of the windowless rooms, +the smoke finding its way out through the roof. + +"I tell you," one said, "I am getting sick of this life; I am ready to +go and kill the French, but to be left up here, where there is nothing +to do, no one to talk to, not a roof to cover one; bah! I am sick of +it. But Nunez will be back in three days, and we shall be merry enough +then." + +"Not we," another said, "this was a pleasant village in the old days, +what is it now? There are no women, not even old mother Morena, who +used to cook well, if she was free of her tongue. There is not even a +priest now to shrive us if one is brought in to die." + +"Nunez will come back in a good temper if it is true what Lope said +yesterday when he came through, that the lads at Madrid had got one +of those English boys who made a fool of him two years ago. That was +a go. Demonio! but it was a fine thing. If it is true that they have +got him and are bringing him here I would not be in his skin for all +the treasures of King Joseph. Yes, Nunez was always a devil, but he is +worse now. Somehow we always have bad luck, and the band gets smaller +and smaller, I don't suppose there's above fifty with him now. I +expect we shall have them pretty well all here this week." + +"No fear of a visit from the French?" + +"None; Reynier at Vittoria is busy now in sending every man he can +spare forward to the army that's gathering near Burgos." + +This was enough for Tom, who stole silently away to the spot where Sam +was anxiously awaiting him. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +JUST IN TIME. + + +"I shall go straight back to Vittoria, Sam. By what they say, General +Reynier is in command there, and as it was through his wife that all +this terrible business has come about, we have a right to expect him +to do his best to get us out of it. I will start at once. Now look +here, Sam. You must put yourself where you can keep watch over the +village. If you see any party come in, either to-night or to-morrow, +you must try and discover if Peter is among them. If he is, light a +fire down in that hollow where it can't be seen from above, but where +we can see it on that road. It's twenty miles to Vittoria; if I can +get to see General Reynier to-morrow, I may be back here with cavalry +by night; if he is out or anything prevents it, I will be here next +night, as soon after dusk as it will be safe. I will dismount the men +and take them over the hill, so as to avoid the sentinel who is sure +to be posted on the road when Nunez arrives. If they come in the +afternoon, Sam, and you find that anything is going to be done at +once, do everything you can to delay matters." + +"All right, Massa Tom, if, when you come back you find Massa Peter +dead, you be berry sure you find dis chile gone down too." + +It was seven o'clock next morning when Tom entered Vittoria, and +a few cautious inquiries proved the fact that General Reynier was +really in command of the French division there. He at once sought his +head-quarters, and after some talk with a woman selling fruit near the +house, heard that the general and his staff had started at daybreak, +but whither of course she knew not. Tom hesitated for some time, and +then, seeing an officer standing at the door, went up to him and asked +if the general would be back soon. + +"He will be back in an hour or two," the officer replied in Spanish, +"but it is no use your waiting to see him. He has his hands full and +can't be bothered with petitions as to cattle stolen or orchards +robbed. Wait till we have driven the English back, and then we shall +have time to talk to you." + +"Your pardon," Tom said humbly. "It is not a complaint that I have to +make, it is something of real importance which I have to communicate +to him." + +"You can tell me, I am Colonel Decamps; it will be all the same thing +if your news is really important." + +"Thank you very kindly, senor, it must be the general himself; I will +wait here." Thereupon Tom sat down with his back to the wall a short +distance off, pulled out some bread and fruit he had bought in the +town, and began quietly to eat his breakfast. An hour later a pretty +carriage with two fine horses drew up to the door. It was empty, +and was evidently intended for some one in the house. Suddenly, the +thought flashed across his mind, perhaps Madame Reynier and her child +were there. It was curious that the thought had not occurred to him +before, but it had not, and he drew near, when a sentry at the door +roughly ordered him to stand further back. Presently a lady came to +the door, accompanied by a little girl. There she stood for a minute +talking with the officer with whom Tom had spoken. At the moment a +young officer passed Tom on his way to the house. + +"Monsieur," Tom said, in French, "do me the favor to place that ring +in the hands of Madame Reynier. It is a matter of life and death. +She will recognize the ring, it is her own," he added, as the young +officer in surprise hesitated. He was a bright handsome young fellow, +and after a moment's, pause, he went up to the lady. "My dear aunt," +he said, "here is a mystery. An old Spanish beggar speaks French, not +very good French, but enough to make out, and he begs me to give you +this ring, which he says is yours, and which, by the way, looks a +valuable one." Madame Reynier, in some surprise, held out her hand +for the ring. "It is not mine," she began, when a sudden thought +struck her, and turning it round she saw "a Louise Reynier, tumors +reconnaissance," which she had had engraved on it, before giving it to +Tom. "Who gave it to you, Jules?" she asked eagerly. + +"That old pedler," Jules said. + +"Bring him in," Madame Reynier said, "the carriage must wait; I must +speak to him and alone." + +"My dear aunt," began her nephew. + +"Don't be afraid, Jules, I am not going to run away with him, and if +you are a good boy you shall know all about it afterwards, wait here, +Louise, with your cousin;" and beckoning to Tom to follow her, she +went into the house, the two officers looking astounded at each other +as the supposed Spanish pedler followed her into her sitting-room. + +"What is your message?" she asked. + +Tom's answer was to remove his wide hat, wig, and beard. + +"Himself!" Madame Reynier exclaimed, "my preserver," and she held out +both her hands to him. "How glad I am, but oh! how foolish to come +here again, and--and"--she hesitated at the thought that he, an +English spy, ought not to come to her, the wife of a French general. + +Tom guessed her thought. "Even General Reynier might succor us without +betraying the interests of his country. Read that, madame; it is an +open letter," and he handed her Lord Wellington's letter. + +She glanced through it and turned pale. "Your brother! is he in the +hands of the guerillas? Where? How?" + +"He is in the hands of that scoundrel Nunez; he swore he would be +revenged for that day's work, and he has had Peter carried off. No +doubt to kill him with torture." + +"Oh! and it is through me," Madame Reynier exclaimed, greatly +distressed. "What can we do! Please let me consult with my friends, +every soldier shall be at your service," and she opened the door. +"Colonel Deschamps, Jules, come here directly, and bring Louise with +you." These officers, on entering, were struck dumb with astonishment +on finding a young peasant instead of an old pedler, and at seeing +tears standing in Madame Reynier's eyes. "Louise," she said to her +daughter, "look at this gentleman, who is he?" + +The child looked hard at Tom; he was dressed nearly as when she first +saw him--and as he smiled she recognized him. "Oh, it is the good +boy!" she cried, and leaped into Tom's arms, and kissed him heartily. + +"Do you think we have gone mad, Jules, Louise and I? This is one of +the young English officers who saved our lives, as you have often +heard me tell you." + +Jules stepped forward, and shook Tom's hand heartily, but Colonel +Deschamps looked very serious. "But, madame," he began, "you are wrong +to tell me this." + +"No, Colonel;" Madame Reynier said, "here is a letter, of which this +gentleman is the bearer, from Lord Wellington himself, vouching for +him, and asking for the help of every Frenchman." + +Colonel Deschamps read it, and his brow cleared, and he held out his +hand to Tom. "Pardon my hesitation, sir," he said in Spanish; "but I +feared that I was placed in a painful position, between what I owe +to my country, and what all French soldiers owe to you, for what you +did for Madame Reynier. I am, indeed, glad to find that this letter +absolves me from the former duty, and leaves me free to do all I can +to discharge the latter debt. Where is your brother, and why has he +been carried off? I have known hundreds of our officers assassinated +by these Spanish wolves, but never one carried away. An English +officer, too, it makes it the more strange!" + +Tom now related the story of Peter's abduction; the previous attempts +of members of Nunez's band to assassinate them, and the reasons he +had for believing that Peter was close to, if not already at, the +headquarters of that desperado. + +"Is he still there?" Jules asked. "We routed him out directly the +general came up here. My aunt declared herself bound by a promise, and +would give us no clue as to the position of the village, but he had +made himself such a scourge, that there were plenty of others ready to +tell; if we had known the roads, we would have killed the whole band, +but unfortunately they took the alarm and made off. So he has gone +back there again. Ah! there is the general." + +Madame Reynier went out to meet her husband, and drawing him aside +into another room, explained the whole circumstance to him, with +difficulty detaining him long enough to tell her story, as the moment +he found that his wife and child's deliverer was in the next room, he +desired to rush off to see him. The story over, he rushed impetuously +into the room, where Tom was explaining his plans to his French +friends, seized him in his arms, and kissed him on both cheeks, as if +he had been his son. + +"I have longed for this day!" he said, wiping his eyes. "I have prayed +that I might some day meet you, to thank you for my wife and child, +who would have been lost to me, but for you. And now I hear your +gallant brother is paying with his life for that good deed. Tell me +what to do, and if necessary I will put the whole division at your +orders." + +"I do not think that he will have above fifty men with him, general; +say eighty, at the outside. Two squadrons of cavalry will be +sufficient. They must dismount at the bottom of the hill, and I will +lead them up. We must not get within sight of the hill till it is too +dark for their look-out to see us, or the alarm would be given, and we +should catch no one. We shall know if they have arrived, by a fire my +man is to light. If they have not come, then I would put sentries on +guard upon every road leading there, and search every cart that comes +up; they are sure to have got him hid under some hay, or something of +that sort, and there are not likely to be more than two or three men +actually with it, so as not to attract attention. It will be all right +if they do not arrive there to-day." + +"It is about five hours' ride for cavalry," the general said, "that +is at an easy pace; it will not be dark enough to approach the hill +without being seen till eight o'clock. Two squadrons shall be paraded +here at three o'clock. I will go with you myself; yes, and you shall +go too, Jules," he said, in answer to an anxious look from his nephew. +"In the mean time you can lend our friend some clothes; you are about +the same size." + +"Come along," Jules said laughing; "I think we can improve your +appearance," and, indeed, he did so, for in half an hour Tom returned +looking all over a dashing young French hussar, and little Louise +clapped her hands and said-- + +"He does look nice, mamma, don't he? Why can't he stay with us always, +and dress like that? and we know he's brave, and he would help papa +and Jules to kill the wicked English." + +There was a hearty laugh, and Jules was about to tell her that Tom was +himself one of the wicked English, but Madame Reynier shook her head, +for, as she told him afterwards, it was as well not to tell her, for +little mouths would talk, and there was no occasion to set everyone +wondering and talking about the visit of an English officer to General +Reynier. "There is no treason in it, Jules, still one does not want to +be suspected of treason, even by fools." + +Sam watched all night, without hearing any sound of vehicles, but in +the morning he saw that several more guerillas had come in during the +night. In the morning parties of twos and threes began to come in +from the direction of Vittoria, and it was evident from the shouting +and noise in the village that these brought satisfactory news of +some kind. In the afternoon most of them went out again in a body +to the wood at the foot of the hill, and soon afterwards Sam saw a +cart coming along across the plain. Two men walked beside it, and +Sam could see one, if not two more perched upon the top of the load. +Three others walked along at a distance of some fifty yards ahead, and +as many more at about the same distance behind. He could see others +making their way through the fields. "Dis berry bad job," Sam said +to himself; "me berry much afraid dat Massa Tom he not get back in +time. Der's too many for Sam to fight all by himself, but he must +do someting." Whereupon Sam set to to think with all his might, and +presently burst into a broad grin. "Sure enough dat do," he said; "now +let me arrange all about what dey call de pamerphernalia." First, he +emptied out the contents of a couple of dozen pistol cartridges; he +wetted the powder and rolled it up in six cartridges, like squibs, +three short ones and three much longer. Then he opened Tom's kit, +and took out a small box of paints, which Tom had carried with him +for making dark lines on his face, and in other ways to assist his +disguise. Taking some white paint, Sam painted his eyelids up to his +eyebrows, and a circle on his cheeks, giving the eyes at a short +distance the appearance of ghastly saucers. + +"Dat will do for de present," he said; "now for business. If dey wait +till it get dark, all right; if not, Sam do for Nunez and two or three +more, and den go down with Massa Peter!" + +Then carefully examining the priming of the pair of pistols, which +he carried--the very pistols given to Peter by the passengers of the +Marlborough coach--he prepared to set out. + +It was now six o'clock, and he calculated that the waggon would by +this time have mounted the hill, and reached the village; he had +already collected a large heap of dry sticks and some logs, at the +point Tom had pointed out, these he now lit, and then started for the +top of the hill. Looking back, just as he reached the crest, he could +see, knowing where it was, a very light smoke curling up over a clump +of trees which intervened between him and the fire, but it was so +slight that he was convinced that it would not be noticed by an +ordinary observer. Sam saw at once, on reaching the top of the hill, +that the guerillas were crowded round the waggon, which stood at the +edge of a small clump of trees in the middle of the village. The +moment was favourable, and he at once started forward, sometimes +making a detour, so as to have the shelter of a tree, sometimes +stooping behind a low stone wall, until he reached the first house +in the village. It was now comparatively easy work, for there were +enclosures and walls, the patches of garden-ground were breast-high +with weeds, and, stooping and crawling, Sam soon reached a house close +to the waggon. It was a mere hut, and had not been repaired. The roof +was gone, but the charred shutters and doors still hung on their +hinges. It was the very place from which to see without being seen. +Sam entered by a door from behind, and found that, through a slight +opening in the window-shutter, he could see all that was going on. +Some fifty guerillas were standing or sitting in groups at a distance +of twenty yards. + +In the centre of the groups, lying on the ground, was a figure which +he at once recognized as Peter. It was wound round and round with +ropes; beside it stood, or rather danced, Nunez pouring forth strings +of abuse, of threats, and of curses, and enforcing them with repeated +kicks at the motionless figure. + +"De debil!" muttered Sam, "me neber able to stand dis. If you not stop +dat, Massa Nunez, me put a bullet through dat ugly head of yours, as +sure as you stand dere. But me mustn't do it till last ting; for, +whether I kill him or not, it's all up with Massa Peter and me if I +once fire." + +Fortunately Nunez was tired, and in a short time he desisted, and +threw himself down on the ground. "Take off his ropes, one of you," he +said: "there would be no fear of his running away had he three or four +days to live, instead of as many hours. Take the gag out of his mouth, +throw some water over him to bring him round, and pour some wine down +his throat. I want him to be fresh, so as to be able to enjoy the +pleasure we have in store for him. And now let's have dinner." + +Sam felt that for another hour at least Peter was safe, and +therefore, with the same precaution as before, he crept away from his +hiding-place, through the village, and over the hill-crest, to the +place where he had made his fire. The logs were burning well, but gave +out but little smoke. Sam looked at the sky. "Dusk cum on berry fast," +he said; "another hour Massa Tom come on with soldiers. If he see +fire, he hurry up sharp." So saying, Sam heaped on a pile of wood, +and then made his way back. He knew that Tom would not approach until +it was too dark for the movements of the troops to be seen by the +look-outs, and that he could not be expected to reach the village +until fully an hour after dark. "Just another hour and a half," he +said to himself; "ebery thing depend upon what happen before dat +time." It was quite dusk before he regained the shelter of the +cottage. He had gone round by the wagon, and had taken from it a large +stable-fork, muttering as he did so. "Golly! dis de berry ting." +Close by he saw the carcase of a bullock which the guerillas had just +slaughtered, and from this he cut off the horns and tail. + +When Sam peeped out through the shutter he saw that something was +going to be done. Nunez was sitting smoking a cigarette, with a look +of savage pleasure in his face, while the men heaped up a large fire +in front of the trees. + +"I don't like dat gentleman's look," Sam said to himself. "It's time +dis chile begin to dress for de pantomime, dat quite plain. Massa Tom +get here too late." Thus saying, Sam began to deliberately undress. + +Peter, his arms and feet still bound, was sitting with his back +against a tree, watching what were, he was convinced, the preparations +for his death. For the last ten days he had lived in a sort of +confused and painful dream. From the moment, when, upon entering his +room two hands suddenly gripped his throat, others thrust a gag in the +mouth, and then blindfolded him, while some one from behind lashed his +arms to his side, and then altogether, lifting him like a log, carried +him downstairs and threw him into a cart, he had not till now seen +anything. The bandage had never been removed from his eyes, or the +cords from his limbs. Sometimes he had been made to sit up, and soup +and wine had been poured down his throat, or a piece of bread thrust +into his mouth; then he had been again gagged and thrown into a cart. +Over him brushwood and fagots had been piled, and there he had lain, +until at night a stop was made, when he was taken out, fed, and then +thrust back again and covered over. + +From the first he had never doubted who were his captors, or what was +his destination, and he therefore experienced no surprise whatever, +when, on his arrival at the village, on the bandage being taken off +his eyes, he saw where he was. That it was useless to beg for mercy of +the savages into whose power he had fallen he knew well enough, and he +looked as calm and indifferent, as if he did not hear a word of the +threats and imprecations which Nunez was heaping on him. + +"You see that fire," the enraged guerilla said, "there you shall be +roasted! English pig that you are! But not yet. That were too quick +a death! Here," he said to his followers, "make a little fire by the +side of the big one--there under the arm of that tree; and put on +plenty of green leaves: we will smoke our pig a bit before we roast +him!" + +Peter still eyed him unflinchingly. He was determined that no pain +should wring a complaint or prayer for mercy. Even now he did not +quite despair, for he thought that he had just one chance of life. He +was sure that Tom would move heaven and earth to save him. He reckoned +that he would at once guess who had carried him off, and with what +object; and he felt that Tom would be certain to set off to his +rescue. All this he had reflected over in his long days of weary +suffering, and from the moment that he was unbandaged, and propped +against the tree, he had listened attentively for any unusual sound. +How Tom could rescue him he did not see. He was so utterly crippled, +from his long confinement, that he knew that it would be hours, +perhaps days, before he could walk a step; yet, still he thought it +possible that Tom might try; and he feared more than he hoped, for he +trembled lest, if Tom were really there, that he would do some rash +thing, which would involve him in his fate. "Whether Tom is here or +not," Peter thought as he looked unflinchingly at Nunez, "one thing +is certain, if I know my brother, you will not have many days to live +after me, for Tom will follow you all over Spain, but he will avenge +me at last!" Such were Peter's thoughts, and so likely did he think it +that Tom was present, that he was scarcely surprised when he heard, as +from the ground behind him, a well-known voice. + +"Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam here, Massa Tom he be here +in another half hour with French soldiers. If dey go to kill you +before dat, Sam play dem trick. Can you run, Massa Peter, if I cut de +cord?" + +"No, Sam." + +"Dat bad job. Neber mind, Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam +keep quiet as long as he can, but when de worst come Sam do de trick +all right." + +"Don't show yourself, Sam. It would only cost you your life, and +couldn't help me; besides, it would put them on their guard. They +won't kill me yet. They will smoke me, and so on, but they will make +it last as long as they can." + +Peter was able to say this, for at the moment Nunez was occupied in +rolling and lighting a second cigarette. Peter received no answer, for +Sam, seeing some guerillas bringing sticks and leaves to make a fire, +as Nunez, had ordered, crept back again into the deep shadow behind. +The fire was now giving out volumes of smoke, a guerilla climbed up +the tree and slung a rope over it, and three others approached Peter. +His heart beat rapidly; but it was with hope, not fear. He knew, from +the words of Nunez, that at present he was not going to be burned, +but, as he guessed, to be hung over the smoke until he was insensible, +and then brought to life again with buckets of water, only to have the +suffocation repeated, until it pleased Nunez to try some fresh mode of +torture. + +It was as he imagined. The rope was attached to his legs, and amid +the cheers of the guerillas, two men hauled upon the other end until +Peter swung, head downwards, over the fire. There was no flame, but +dense volumes of pungent smoke rose in his face. For a moment his eyes +smarted with agony, then a choking sensation seized him, his blood +seemed to rush into his head, and his veins to be bursting: and there +was a confused din in his ears and a last throb of pain, and then he +was insensible. + +"That's enough for the present," Nunez said; "cut him down." + +The men advanced to do so, but paused, with astonishment, for from +behind the great fire was a loud yell--"Yah, yah, yah!"--each louder +than the last, and then, leaping through the flames appeared, as they +supposed, the devil. Sam's appearance was indeed amply sufficient to +strike horror in the minds of a band of intensely superstitious men. +He had entirely stripped himself, with the exception of his sandals, +which he had retained in order to be able to run freely; on his head +were two great horns; in one hand he held a fork, and in the other +what appeared to be his tail, but which really belonged to the +slaughtered bullock. From his month, his horns, and the end of his +tail poured volumes of fire, arising, it needs not to say, from the +squibs he had prepared. The great white circles round the eyes added +to the ghastliness of his appearance, and seeing the terrible figure +leap apparently from the flames, it is no wonder that a scream of +terror rose from the guerillas. Whatever a Spanish peasant may believe +about saints and angels, he believes yet more implicitly in a devil. +Black, with horns, and a tail--and here he was--with these appendages +tipped with fire! Those who were able turned and fled in terror, those +who were too frightened to run fell on their knees and screamed for +mercy, while one or two fell insensible from fear. Taking the squibs +from his mouth, and giving one more startling yell, to quicken the +fugitives, Sam made two strides to where Peter was hanging, cut the +rope, and lowered him down. + +Nunez had at first joined in the flight, but looking over his shoulder +he saw what Sam was doing. His rage and frenzy, at the thought of +being cheated of his victim, even by the evil one himself, overcame +his fear, and he rushed back, shouting, "He is mine! He is mine! I +won't give him to you!" and fired a pistol almost in Sam's face. The +ball carried away a portion of one of Sam's ears, and with a yell, +even more thrilling than those he had given before, he plunged his +pitchfork into the body of the guerilla, then, exerting all his +immense strength, he lifted him upon it, as if he had been a truss of +straw, took three steps to the great bonfire and cast the brigand into +it. + +There was a volume of sparks, a tumbling together of big logs, and the +most cruel of the Spanish guerillas had ceased to exist. + +This awful sight completed the discomfiture of the guerillas--some +hearing their chief's shouts and the sound o his pistol had looked +round, but the sight of the gigantic fiend casting him into the fire +was too much for them. With cries of horror and fear they continued +their flight; a few of them, who had fallen on their knees, gained +strength enough, from fear, to rise and fly; the rest lay on their +faces. Sam saw that for the present all was clear, and lifting up +Peter's still insensible body, as if it had no weight whatever, he +turned and went at a brisk trot out of the village, then over the +crest and down towards the fire. + +Then he heard a ring of metal in front of him, and a voice said, "_Qui +vive_!" while another voice said, "Is that you, Sam?" + +"Bress de Lord! Massa Tom, dis is me sure enough: and what is much +better, here is Massa Peter." + +"Thank God!" Tom said fervently. "Is he hurt? Why don't you speak, +Peter?" + +"He all right, Massa Tom. He talk in a minute or two. Now smoke choke +him, he better presently. Here, massa, you take him down to fire, pour +a little brandy down his throat. Now, massa officer, I lead de way +back to village." + +As Tom took Peter in his arms a sudden fire of musketry was heard down +on the road. + +"Our fellows have got them," Jules said. "I don't know what has +alarmed them, but they are running away!" + +"Push forward," General Reynier said, "and give no quarter! Jules, +keep by the negro, and see that he comes to no harm. The men might +mistake him for a guerilla." + +The night was pitch dark, and the extraordinary appearance of Sam +could not be perceived until after scouring the village and shooting +the few wretches whom they found there, they gathered round the +fire. Before reaching it, however, Sam had slipped away for a moment +into the hut where he had stripped; here he quickly dressed himself, +removed the paint from his face, and rejoined the group, who were not +a little surprised at seeing his black face. + +In a short time the parties who had been posted on all the various +roads came in, and it was found that they had between them killed +some thirty or forty of the brigands, and had brought in two or three +prisoners. + +"Have you killed or taken Nunez?" General Reynier asked. "Our work is +only half done if that scoundrel has escaped." + +"I have asked the prisoners," one of the officers said, "and they tell +an extraordinary story, that the devil has just thrown him into the +fire!" + +"What do they mean by such folly as that," the general asked angrily. +"Were they making fun of you?" + +"No, sir, they were certainly serious enough over it, and they were +all running for their lives when they fell into our hands; they had +been horribly frightened at something." + +"Ask that fellow there," the general said, pointing to a prisoner who +had been brought in by another detachment, "he cannot have spoken to +the others." + +The man was brought forward, and then Jules asked him in Spanish: +"What were you all running away for?" + +The man gave a glance of horror at the fire. "The devil came with his +pitchfork, fire came out of his mouth, his tail and his horns were +tipped with sparks, the captain fired at him, of course the bullet did +no good, and the devil put his fork into him, carried him to the fire, +and threw him in." + +Jules and some of the other young officers burst out laughing, but the +general said:-- + +"Humph! We can easily prove a portion of the story. See if there are +any human remains in that fire." + +The wind was blowing the other way, but as a sergeant went up to the +fire in obedience to the general's order, he said:-- + +"There is a great smell of burnt flesh here, and, sapristi, yes," as +he tossed over the logs with his foot "there is a body here, sir, +pretty well burnt up." + +"It's a curious story," the general said. "Where is that negro, +perhaps he can enlighten us?" + +But Sam had already left to look after Peter. + +"Jules, put these fellows against that wall and give them a volley, +then march the men down to the wood where their horses are. We will +bivouac here for the night." + +A party now brought up Peter, who had quite come round, but was unable +to stand, or indeed to move his arms, so injured was he by the ropes, +which had completely cut their way into his flesh. However, he was +cheerful and bright, and able really to enjoy the supper which was +soon prepared. That done, General Reynier said:-- + +"Captain Scudamore, will you call your black man when he has finished +his supper, which, no doubt, he needs? I want him to tell me what took +place before we arrived. The prisoners were full of some cock-and-bull +story, that the devil had stuck his fork into their captain and +pitched him into the fire, and the story is corroborated, at least to +the extent of the fact that, on turning the fire over, we found a body +there." + +Sam, called and questioned, told the whole story, which Tom translated +as he went on to the French officers, and it was received with a +chorus of laughter at the thought of the oddity of Sam's appearance, +and of the brigands' terror, and with warm admiration for the able +stratagem and courage shown by the black. + +Tom was delighted, and Peter, who had until now been entirely ignorant +of the manner in which he had been saved, feebly pressed Sam's hand +and said a few words of gratitude and thanks, which so delighted Sam +that he retired to cry quietly. + +The next day they moved down to Vittoria, where Peter was tenderly +nursed by Madame Reynier. A week later he was fit to sit on horseback, +and the next day, after a hearty and affectionate parting, they +started to rejoin their own army. Both were now dressed as Spanish +gentlemen, and Jules, with four troopers accompanied them as an +escort. + +They made a long detour to avoid the French army in the field under +Clausel, and at last came within sight of the British outposts. Here +Jules and his escort halted, and after a warm embrace with the merry +young Frenchman, they rode forward, and, after the usual parleying +with the pickets, were passed forward to the officer commanding the +post. He happened to be well known to them, and after the first +surprise, and a few words of explanation, they rode on towards the +head-quarters of the army besieging Burgos. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +VITTORIA. + + +General Clausel fell back as Wellington advanced to Burgos, and the +British laid siege to the castle of that place. Like all Wellington's +sieges this was commenced with a wholly insufficient train of +artillery, and without the time necessary to carry out regular siege +operations. A considerable portion of the army were posted so as to +watch Clausel. The place was badly fortified, but the French under +Governor Dubreton defended themselves with immense skill and courage, +the English assaults were repulsed, successful sorties were made by +the garrison, and at last, after the failure of the fourth assault, +the siege was given up, and the allied armies turned their faces once +more towards Portugal. + +It was time; the operations in the south upon which Wellington had +relied to keep at least a portion of the French forces engaged, had +failed signally, and the French generals were bringing up their +troops from all parts of Spain, and General Souham, having under him +Generals Clausel, Maucune, and Foy, with a force far superior to +that of the British, advanced to give battle. Then Wellington, whose +Anglo-Portuguese troops were much weakened by sickness, fell back +rapidly, sending orders to General Hill, who commanded the troops left +behind in Madrid, to evacuate that city, and to fall back and unite +with him on the Tormes. + +It was only by some masterly maneuvering and some stiff fighting at +Venta de Pozo, on the Carrion, and on the Huebra, that Wellington drew +off his army to Ciudad Rodrigo. + +During the retreat the British suffered very severely, and the +discipline of the army became greatly impaired, so much so that Lord +Wellington issued a general order rebuking the army, saying that +"discipline had deteriorated during the campaign in a greater degree +than he had ever witnessed or read of in any army, and this without +any unusual privation or hardship, or any long marches." + +The number of stragglers may be imagined by the fact that the loss of +the allied army was upwards of nine thousand, of whom not more than +two thousand were killed and wounded at Burgos, and in the combats +during the retreat. This number includes the Spanish as well as the +Anglo-Portuguese loss. + +It was the beginning of December when the allied army reached their +winter quarters around Ciudad Rodrigo. It was fortunate that the +season of the year, and the necessity which the French had to refill +their magazines, and collect food, gave breathing time and rest to +the British. Although strengthened by his junction with Hill, and by +the arrival of reinforcements from the coast, Wellington was not in a +position to have made a stand against such a force as the French could +have brought against him. + +Tom and Peter Scudamore had rejoined the army at the hottest part +of the siege of Burgos, and had taken up their work at once. Lord +Wellington heard from Tom a brief account of what had taken place, +and said a few kind words expressive of his pleasure at their both +having escaped from so great a peril, and, grave and preoccupied as +he was with the position of his army, he yet laughed at the account +of the scare Sam had given the guerillas. Among their friends nothing +was talked of for a day or two but their adventure. The times were +stirring, however, and one event rapidly drove out another. Sam +became a greater favorite than ever among the officers of the staff, +while the orderlies were never tired of hearing how he pretty nearly +frightened a band of guerillas to death by pretending to be the evil +one in person. + +The next four months were passed in preparations for the grand attack +with which Wellington confidently hoped to drive the French out of +Spain. The news of the defeat of Napoleon in Russia had cheered the +hearts of the enemies of France, and excited them to make a great +effort to strike a decisive blow. The French army was weakened by the +withdrawal of several corps to strengthen the armies which Napoleon +was raising for his campaign in Germany, and British gold had been so +freely spent, that the Portuguese army was now in a really efficient +state; a portion of the Spanish army had been handed over to +Wellington, and were now in a far more trustworthy condition than +they had been heretofore, while the whole of the north of Spain was +in a state of insurrection, which the French, in spite of all their +efforts, were unable to repress. + +The invasion was delayed until the end of May, in order that the crops +might be in a fit state for the subsistence of the cavalry and baggage +animals; but in the last week in that month all was ready, and, in +several columns, the allied army poured into Spain nearly a hundred +thousand strong. The French, ignorant alike of Wellington's intentions +and preparations, were in no position to stem effectually this mighty +wave of war, and were driven headlong before it, with many fierce +skirmishes, until their scattered forces were, for the most part, +united on the Ebro. + +Here Joseph occupied a strong position, which he thought to hold until +the whole of his troops could come up; but Wellington made a detour, +swept round his right, and the French fell back in haste, and took +up their position in the basin of Vittoria, where all the stores and +baggage which had been carried off as the army retreated from Madrid, +Valladolid, Burgos, and other towns, were collected. At Vittoria were +gathered the Court, and an enormous mass of fugitives, as all the +Spaniards who had adhered to the cause of Joseph had, with their +wives and families, accompanied the French in their retreat. Hence +the accumulation of baggage animals, and carts, of stores of all +descriptions, of magazines, of food and artillery, of helpless, +frightened people, was enormous, and, for the retreat of the army in +case of defeat, there was but one good road, already encumbered with +baggage and fugitives! + +This terrible accumulation arose partly from the fault of Joseph, who +was wholly unequal to the supreme command in an emergency like the +present. Confused and bewildered by the urgency of the danger, he had +hesitated, wavered, and lost precious time. By resistance at any of +the rivers, which Wellington had passed unopposed, he might easily +have gained a few days, and thus have allowed time for the great mass +of fugitives to reach the French frontier, and for Foy and Clausel, +each of whom were within a day's march upon the day of the battle, to +have arrived with a reinforcement of 20,000 good fighting men. Instead +of this, he had suffered himself to be outflanked day after day, and +his army forced into retreat, without an effort at resistance--a +course of action irritating and disheartening to all troops, but +especially to the French, who, admirable in attack, are easily +dispirited, and are ill suited to defensive warfare. + +The position which he had now chosen for the battle, on which his +kingdom was to be staked, was badly selected for the action. The front +was, indeed, covered by the river Zadora, but this was crossed by +seven available bridges, none of which had been broken down, while +there was but the one good line of retreat, and this, besides being +already encumbered with baggage-wagons, could be easily turned by the +allies. The French army, weakened by 5000 men, who had marched upon +the preceding days, in charge of convoys for France, were still about +70,000 strong, the allies--British, Portuguese, and Spanish--about +80,000. The French were the strongest in artillery. + +Wellington, seeing that Joseph had determined to stand at bay, made +his arrangements for the battle. On the left, Graham, with 20,000 men, +was to attempt to cross the Zadora at Gamara Mayor, when he would +find himself on the main road, behind Vittoria, and so cut the French +line of retreat. Hill, with a like force, was to attack on the right, +through the defile of Puebla, and so, entering the basin of Vittoria, +to threaten the French right, and obtain possession of the bridge of +Nanclares. In the center, Wellington himself, with 30,000 troops, +would force the four bridges in front of the French center, and attack +their main position. + +At daybreak on the 21st of June, 1813, the weather being rainy with +some mist, the troops moved from their quarters on the Bayas, passed +in columns over the bridges in front, and slowly approached the +Zadora. About ten o'clock, Hill seized the village of Puebla, and +commenced the passage of the defile, while one of the Portuguese +battalions scaled the heights above. Here the French met them, and a +fierce fight ensued; the French were reinforced on their side, while +the 71st Regiment and a battalion of light infantry joined the +Portuguese. + +Villette's division was sent from the French center to join the fray, +while Hill sent up reinforcements. While the fight on the heights +still raged, the troops in the defile made their way through, and, +driving the French back, won the village of Subijano de Alava, in +front of the French main position. + +Meanwhile, far to the left, Graham came into action with Reille's +division at Gamara Mayor. The French here, knowing the vital +importance of the position, fought desperately, and the village of +Gamara was taken and retaken several times, but no effort upon the +part of the allies sufficed to carry either the bridge at this place +or that by which the main road crossed the river higher up. A force, +however, was pushed still farther to the left, and there took up a +position on the road at Durana, drove back a Franco-Spanish force +which occupied it, and thus effectively cut the main line of retreat +to France for Joseph's army. The main force under Wellington himself +was later in coming into action, the various columns being delayed by +the difficulties of making their way through the defiles. + +While waiting, however, for the third and seventh divisions, which +were the last to arrive, a peasant informed Wellington that the bridge +of Tres Puentes was unbroken and unguarded. Kempt's brigade of the +light division were immediately ordered to cross, and, being concealed +by the inequalities of the ground, they reached it and passed over +unobserved, taking their place under shelter of a crest within a few +hundred yards of the French main line of battle, and actually in rear +of his advanced posts. + +Some French cavalry now advanced, but no attack was made upon this +isolated body of British troops, for the French were virtually without +a commander. + +Joseph, finding his flank menaced by the movements of Graham and Hill, +now ordered the army to fall back to a crest two miles in the rear, +but at this moment the third and seventh divisions advanced at a run +towards the bridge of Mendoza, the French artillery opened upon them, +the British guns replied, a heavy musketry fire broke out on both +sides, and the battle commenced in earnest. Now the advantage gained +by the passage of Kempt's brigade became manifest, for the riflemen +of his division advanced and took the French advanced cavalry and +artillery in flank. These, thus unexpectedly attacked, fell back +hastily, and a brigade of the third division took advantage of the +moment and crossed the bridge of Mendoza. The other brigade forded the +river a little higher up, the seventh division and Vandeleur's brigade +of the light division followed, Hill pushed the enemy farther back, +and the fourth division crossed by the bridge of Nanclares; other +troops forded the river, and the battle became general all along the +line. + +Seeing that the hill in front of Arinez was nearly denuded of troops +by the withdrawal of Villette's division earlier in the day to oppose +Hill, Wellington launched Picton with the third division and Kempt's +brigade against it, and the French, thus attacked with great strength +and fury, and dispirited by the order to retreat, began to fall back. +Fifty pieces of artillery and a cloud of skirmishers covered the +movement, and the British guns answering, the whole basin became +filled with a heavy smoke, under cover of which the French retired +to the heights in front of Gomecha, upon which their reserves were +posted. Picton and Kempt carried the village of Arinez with the +bayonet, Vandeleur captured the village of Margarita, and the 87th +Regiment won that of Hermandad. + +This advance turned the flank of the French troops near Subijana de +Alava, and of those on the Puebla mountain, and both fell back in +disorder for two miles, until they made a junction with the main body +of their army. Still the British troops pressed forward, the French +again fell back, and for six miles a running fight of musketry and +artillery was kept up, the ground being very broken, and preventing +the concerted action of large bodies of troops. At six o'clock in the +afternoon the French stood at bay on the last heights before Vittoria, +upon which stood the villages of Ali and Armentia. Behind them was +the plain upon which the city stood, and beyond the city thousands +of carriages, animals, and non-combatants, women, and children, were +crowded together in the extremity of terror as the British shots rang +menacingly over their heads. + +The French here defended themselves desperately, and for a while the +allied advance was checked by the terrible fire of shot and shell. +Then the fourth division with a rush carried a hill on the left, and +the French again commenced their retreat. Joseph, finding the great +road absolutely blocked up, gave orders for a retreat by the road to +Salvatierra, and the army, leaving the town of Vittoria on its left, +moved off in a compact mass towards the indicated road. This, however, +like the other, was choked with carriages. It led through a swamp, +and had deep ditches on each side; the artillery, therefore, had to +cut their traces and leave their guns behind them, the infantry and +cavalry thrust aside the encumbrances and continued their march. +Reille, who had defended the upper bridges nobly until the last +moment, now came up, and his division acting as a rear guard, covered +the retreat, and the French retired with little further loss. + +They had lost the battle solely and entirely from the utter incapacity +of their general, for their loss had been but little greater than +that of the allies, and they fell back in perfect order and full of +fighting. The French loss, including prisoners, was not more than +6000, and that of the allies exceeded 5000. The French loss, however, +in material was enormous. They carried off two guns only, and 143 +fell into the hands of the British. They lost all their parks of +ammunition, all their baggage, all their stores, all their treasures, +all their booty. Last of all, they lost Spain. + +The British pursued the French army for some days, and then invested +the two fortresses of San Sebastian and Pampeluna. + +Ten days after the battle of Vittoria, Napoleon despatched Soult, one +of the best of his generals, to displace Joseph and assume the supreme +command of the French troops. Traveling with great speed, he reached +the frontier upon the 11th of July and took command. He soon collected +together the divisions which had retired beaten but not routed from +Vittoria, drew together the troops from Bayonne and the surrounding +towns, and in a few days found himself at the head of an army, +including the garrisons, of 114,000 men. Besides these there were the +armies of Aragon and Catalonia, numbering 60,000 men. + +After spending a few days in organizing the army, Soult moved forward +to relieve Pampeluna, and then in the heart of the Pyrenees were +fought those desperate combats at Maya, Roncevalles, Buenza, Sauroren, +and Dona Maria, which are known in history as the battles of the +Pyrenees. In these terrible nine days' fighting there were ten serious +combats, in which the allies lost 7300 men, the French, including +prisoners, over 15,000, and Soult fell back baffled and beaten across +the frontier. + +Throughout this account of the short and sanguinary campaign by which +in two short months Wellington shattered the power of the French and +drove them headlong from the Peninsula, but little has been said +respecting the doings of the Scudamores. Their duties had been heavy, +but devoid of any personal achievements or events. Wellington, the +incarnation of activity himself, spared no one around him, and from +early dawn until late at night they were on horseback, carrying orders +and bringing back reports. At night their quarters were sometimes +in a village hut, sometimes in a straggling chateau, which afforded +accommodation to the commander-in-chief and his whole staff. + +Sam, a good horseman now, was in the highest of spirits at being able +to accompany his masters, and, although the Spanish women crossed +themselves in horror when they first saw his black face, the boys +would hear shouts of laughter arising before they had been a quarter +of an hour in fresh quarters. He was a capital cook, and a wonderful +hand at hunting up provisions. + +There might not be a sign of a feathered creature in a village when +the staff came in, but in half an hour Sam would be sure to return +from foraging with a couple of fowls and his handkerchief full of +eggs. These were, of course, paid for, as the orders against pillaging +were of the strictest character, and the army paid, and paid +handsomely for everything it ate. + +It was, however, difficult to persuade the peasants that payment was +intended, and they would hide everything away with vigilant care at +the approach of the troops. When by the display of money they were +really persuaded that payment was intended, they would produce all +that they had willingly enough, but the number of officers wanting +to purchase was so great and the amount of live stock so small in +the war-ravaged country, that few indeed could obtain even for money +anything beside the tough rations of freshly-killed beef issued by the +commissariat. + +Let the supply be ever so short, however, Sam never returned +empty-handed, and the fowls were quickly plucked and on the fire +before any one else had succeeded in discovering that there was a bird +in the village. + +Sam's foraging powers passed into a joke with the staff, and the +Scudamores became so curious to discover the reason of his success, +that after repeated questioning they persuaded him to tell them. + +"Well, massa, de matter berry simple--just easy as fallin' off log. +Sam go along, look into yard ob de cottages, presently see feather +here, feather there. Dat sign ob fowl. Den knock at door. Woman open +always, gib little squeak when she see dis gentleman's colored face. +Den she say, 'What you want? Dis house full. Quarter-master take him +up for three, four officer.' Den Sam say, 'Illustrious madam, me want +to buy two fowls and eggs for master,' and Sam show money in hand. Den +she hesitate a little, and not believe Sam mean to pay. Den she say, +'No fowls here.' Den Sam point to de feathers. Den she get in rage and +tell lie and say, 'Dem birds all stole yesterday.' Den Sam see it time +to talk to de birds--he know dem shut up somewhere in de dark, and Sam +he begin to crow berry loud; Sam berry good at dat. He crow for all +de world like de cock. Dis wake dem up, and a minute one, two, three, +half a dozen cock begin to answer eider from a loft ober house, or +from shed, or from somewhere. Den de woman in terrible fright, she +say, 'Me sell you two quick, if you will go away and swear you tell no +one.' Den Sam swear. Den she run away, come back wid de fowls and some +eggs, and always berry much astonished when Sam pay for dem. After dat +she lose her fear, she see me pay, and she sells de chickens to oders +when they come till all gone. Dat how dis chile manage de affairs, +Massa Tom." + +The Scudamores had a hearty laugh, and were well pleased to find that +Sam's method was one to which not even the strictest disciplinarian +could object, a matter concerning which they had previously had grave +doubts. + +While the battles of the Pyrenees were being fought, the siege of +St. Sebastian had continued, and once again the British troops had +suffered a terrible loss, from the attempt to carry a fortress with +an insufficient siege-train, and without the time necessary to drive +the trenches forward in regular form. St. Sebastian stood upon a +peninsula. In front of the neck of this peninsula was the hill of San +Bartholomeo, on which stood the convent of that name. At the narrowest +part of the neck stood a redoubt, which was called the Cask Redoubt, +because it was constructed of casks filled with stand. Behind this +came the horn-work and other fortifications. Then came the town, while +at the end of the peninsula rose a steep rock, called Mount Orgullo, +on which stood the citadel. Upon its left side this neck of land was +separated from the mainland by the River Urumea; and upon the heights +of Mount Olia and the Chofres, across the Urumea, were placed the +British batteries, which breached the fortifications facing the river. + +General Graham commanded the allied forces, which were detached to +undertake the siege, and on the 10th of July batteries were commenced +against the convent of San Bartholomeo, which had been fortified by +the French. On the 17th the convent was in ruins, and an assault was +made upon the position. The 9th Regiment took the place in gallant +style, but an attempt being made to carry the cask redoubt, with a +rush, the assault was repulsed, the British remaining possessors of +San Bartholomeo. + +On the 24th the batteries on Mount Olia, having effected what was +believed to be a practicable breach, 2000 men of the fifth division, +consisting of the 3d battalion of the Royals, the 38th, and the 9th, +made an assault at night. To arrive at the breach they had to make +their way along the slippery rocks on the bed of the Urumea, exposed +to a flank-fire from the river-wall of the town. The breachers had +been isolated from the town, and guns placed to take the stormers in +flank. The confusion and slaughter were terrible, and at daybreak the +survivors fell back, with a loss of forty-nine officers and 520 men. + +The whole arrangement of the siege was bad. The plan of Major Smith, +of the engineers, a most excellent officer, which had been approved +by Wellington, was not followed, and the assault, contrary to +Wellington's explicit order, took place at night, instead of by day, +the consequence being confusion, delay, and defeat. The total loss to +the allies of this first siege of St. Sebastian was 1300 men. + +Neither of the Scudamores were present at the first siege, but both +witnessed the second assault, of the 31st of August, as Wellington +himself was present on the 30th, to see to the execution of the +preparation for attack, and they obtained leave to remain for the next +day to witness the assault. The siege had been resumed on the 5th of +that month, and on the 23d the batteries had opened fire in earnest, +and immense damage was done to the defenses and garrison. But upon +this occasion, as upon the former one, the proper precautions were not +taken; no lodgment had been effected in the horn-work, and, worst of +all, the blockade had been so negligently conducted by the fleet, that +large bodies of fresh troops, guns, and ammunition had been passed +in, and the defense was even stronger than it had been when the first +assault was delivered. + +General Graham took up his position on the heights of the Chofres to +view the assault, and the Scudamores stationed themselves near him. +A dense mist hid the fortress from view, and it was not until eight +o'clock that the batteries were able to open. Then for three hours +they poured a storm of shot and shell upon the defences. The +Scudamores sat down in one of the trenches, where they were a little +sheltered from the blazing heat of the sun, and Sam took his place at +a short distance from them. + +As the clock struck eleven the fire slackened, and at that moment Sam +exclaimed, "Grolly, Massa Tom, dere dey go." As he spoke Robinson's +brigade poured out from the trenches, and, passing through the +openings in the sea-wall, began to form on the beach. + +It was known that the French had mined the angle of the wall +overhanging the beach, and a sergeant, followed by twelve men, dashed +gallantly forward to try to cut the train leading to the mine. He was +unsuccessful, but the suddenness of the rush startled the French, who +at once fired the mine, which exploded, destroying the brave sergeant +and his party, and thirty of the leading men of the column, but not +doing a tithe of the damage which it would have inflicted had the +column been fairly under it. + +"Hurrah! dere dey go," Sam exclaimed as the column clambered over +the ruins and pursued its way unchecked along the beach. They had, +however, to make their way under a storm of fire. + +The French, as before, lined the wall, and poured a tremendous +musketry fire into their flank, and the batteries of Mount Orgullo and +St. Elmo plied them with shot and shell, while two pieces of cannon on +the cavalier and one on the horn-work raked them with grape. + +Still the column neither halted nor faltered, but dashed, like a wave, +up the breach. When, however, they reached the top they could go no +farther. A deep gulf separated them from the town, while from every +loop-hole and wall behind, the French musketry swept the breach. The +troops could not advance and would not retreat, but sullenly stood +their ground, heaping the breach with their dead. Fresh bodies of men +came up, and each time a crowd of brave men mounted the breach, only +to sink down beneath the storm of fire. + +"This is awful, horrible, Tom!" Peter said in a choked voice. "Come +away, I can't look at this slaughter, it is a thousand times worse +than any battle." + +Tom made no reply, his own eyes were dim with tears, and he rose to +go, taking one more look at the deadly breach, at whose foot the +survivors of the last attempt had sunk down, and whence the mass of +soldiers were keeping up a musketry fire against the guns and unseen +foes who were sweeping them away, when an officer ran up from General +Graham's side, and in a minute fifty guns from the Chofres batteries +opened a storm of fire upon the curtain and the traverses behind the +breach. + +It was a terrible trial to the nerves of the assaulting columns when +this terrific fire was poured upon a spot only twenty feet above them; +but they were not men to shrink, and the men of the light division +seized the opportunity to pull up the broken masonry and make a +breastwork, known in military terms as a lodgment. + +For half an hour the iron storm poured overhead unchecked, smashing +the traverse, knocking down the loop-holed walls, and killing numbers +of the defenders. Then it ceased, and the troops leapt to their feet, +and again rushed up the breach, while the 13th Portuguese Regiment, +followed by a detachment of the 24th, waded across the Urumea under a +heavy fire from the castle, and attacked the third breach. + +But still no entry could be effected. The French fire was as heavy as +ever, and the stormers again sank baffled to the foot of the great +breach. The assault seemed hopeless, the tide was rising, the reserves +were all engaged, and the men had done all that the most desperate +courage could do. For five hours the battle had raged, when, just as +all appeared lost, one of those circumstances occurred which upset all +calculations and decide the fate of battles. + +Behind the traverses the French had accumulated a great store of +powder barrels, shells, and other combustibles. Just at this moment +these caught fire. A bright flame wrapped the whole wall, followed by +a succession of loud explosions; hundreds of French grenadiers were +destroyed, and before the smoke had cleared away, the British burst +like a flood through the first traverse. + +Although bewildered by this sudden disaster, the French rallied, and +fought desperately; but the British, desperate with the long agony +of the last five hours, would not be denied; the light division +penetrated on the left, the Portuguese on the right. The French, still +resisting obstinately, were driven through the town to the line of +defense at the foot of Mount Orgullo, and the town of St. Sebastian +was won. + +"Will you go across, Peter, and enter the town?" + +"No, no, Tom; the sight of that horrible breach is enough for me. +Let us mount, and ride off at once. I am quite sick after this awful +suspense." + +It was as well that the Scudamores did not enter the town, as, had +they done so, they might have shared the fate of several other +officers, who were shot down while trying to stop the troops in their +wild excesses. No more disgraceful atrocities were ever committed by +the most barbarous nations of antiquity than those which disgraced the +British name at the storming of St. Sebastian. Shameful, monstrous as +had been the conduct of the troops at the storming of Ciudad Rodrigo +and at Badajos, it was infinitely worse at St. Sebastian. As Rapin +says, hell seemed to have broken loose. + +The castle held out until the 9th, when it surrendered, and the +governor and his heroic garrison marched out with the honors of war. +The British loss in the second siege exceeded 2500 men and officers. + +There was a pause of two months after the fall of St. Sebastian, +and it was not until the 10th of November that Wellington hurled +his forces against the lines which, in imitation of those of Torres +Vedras, Soult had formed and fortified on the river Nivelle to +withstand the invasion of France. After a few hours' desperate +fighting the French were turned out of their position with a loss of +killed, wounded, and prisoners, of 4265 men and officers, the loss of +the allies being 2694. + +Now the army of invasion poured into France. The French people, +disheartened by Napoleon's misfortunes in Germany, and by the long and +mighty sacrifices which they had for years been compelled to make, in +order to enable Napoleon to carry out his gigantic wars, showed but +slight hostility to the invaders. + +Wellington enforced the severest discipline, paid for everything +required for the troops, hanging marauders without mercy, and, finding +that it was impossible to keep the Spanish troops in order, he sent +the whole Spanish contingent, 20,000 strong, back across the Pyrenees. + +He then with the Anglo-Portuguese army moved on towards Bayonne, and +took up a position on both sides of the river Nive, driving the French +from their position on the right bank on December 9th. On the 13th, +however, Soult attacked that portion of the army on the right of the +river, and one of the most desperate conflicts of the war took place, +known as the battle of St. Pierre. General Hill commanded at this +battle, and with 14,000 Anglo-Portuguese, with 14 guns, repulsed the +furious and repeated attacks of 16,000 French, with 22 guns. + +In five days' fighting on the river the French lost more than as many +thousand men. + +The weather now for a time interrupted operations, but Wellington was +preparing for the passage of the Adour. Soult guarded the passages +of the river above Bayonne, and never dreamed that an attempt would +be made to bridge so wide and rough a river as is the Adour below +the town. With the assistance of the sailors of the fleet the great +enterprise was accomplished on the 13th of February, and leaving +General Hope to contain the force in the entrenched camp at Bayonne, +Wellington marched the rest of the army to the Gave. + +Behind this river Soult had massed his army. The British crossed by +pontoon bridges, and before the operation was concluded, and the +troops united, Soult fell upon them near Orthes. + +At first the French had the best of the fight, driving back both +wings of the allied forces, but Wellington threw the third and sixth +divisions upon the left flank of the attacking column and sent the +52nd Regiment to make a detour through a marsh and fall upon their +other flank. Taken suddenly between two fires the French wavered, +the British pressed forward again, and the French fell back fighting +obstinately, and in good order. The allies lost 2300 men, and the +French 4000. Soult fell back towards Toulouse, laying Bordeaux open to +the British. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +TOULOUSE. + + +Promotion for those who have the good fortune to have a post upon the +commander-in-chief's staff is rapid. They run far less risk than do +the regimental officers, and they have a tenfold better chance of +having their names mentioned in despatches. The Scudamores were so +mentioned for their conduct at Vittoria, the Pyrenees, and Orthes, +and shortly after the last-named battle the _Gazette_ from England +announced their promotion to majorities. This put an end to +their service as aides-de-camp, and they were attached to the +quarter-master's branch of the staff of Lord Beresford, who was upon +the point of starting with a small force to Bordeaux, where the +authorities, thinking more of party than of patriotism, had invited +the English to enter and take possession, intending to proclaim their +adhesion to the Bourbon dynasty. + +The boys were sorry at the exchange, as they feared that they should +lose the crowning battle of the campaign. It was evident that the +resistance of France was nearly at an end, the allies were approaching +Paris in spite of the almost superhuman efforts of Napoleon; the +people, sick of the war, refused all assistance to the military +authorities, and were longing for peace, and the end of the struggle +was rapidly approaching. + +Lord Beresford, however, divining their thoughts, assured them that +his stay at Bordeaux would be but short, and that they might rely +upon being present at the great battle which would probably be fought +somewhere near Toulouse, towards which town Soult had retreated after +the battle of Orthes. + +Upon the 8th of March, Beresford marched with 12,000 men for Bordeaux, +and meeting with no opposition by the way, entered that city on the +12th. The mayor, a royalist, came out to meet them, and by the upper +classes of the town they were received as friends rather than foes. +Handsome quarters were assigned to Lord Beresford and his staff, and +the Scudamores for a day or two enjoyed the luxury of comfortable +apartments and of good food after their hard fare for nine months. + +The day after they entered Bordeaux Tom had occasion to call at +the office of a banker in order to get a government draft cashed, +to pay for a number of wagons which had been purchased for the +quarter-master's department. The banker's name was Weale, an American, +said to be the richest man in Bordeaux. His fortune had been made, it +was said, by large government contracts. + +When Tom returned, Peter was surprised to see him looking pale and +excited. + +"What is the matter, Tom?" + +"Do you know, Peter, I am convinced that that American banker I have +been to see to-day is neither more nor less than that scoundrel, +Walsh, who bolted with all the bank funds, and was the cause of our +father's death." + +"You don't say so, Tom." + +"It is a fact, Peter, I could swear to him." + +"What shall we do, Tom?" + +"I only cashed one of the two drafts I had with me this morning; +Peter, you go this afternoon with the other, and, if you are as +certain as I feel about it, we will speak to Beresford at dinner." + +Peter returned in the afternoon satisfied that his brother's surmises +were correct, and that in the supposed American Weale they had really +discovered the English swindler Walsh. + +After dinner they asked Lord Beresford to speak to them for a few +minutes alone. + +The general was greatly surprised and interested at their +communication. + +"Of how much did this fellow rob your father's bank?" he asked. + +"The total defalcation, including money borrowed on title-deeds +deposited in the bank, which had to be made good, was, I heard, from +75,000_l._ to 80,000_l._," Tom said. + +"Very well," said Lord Beresford, "we will make the scoundrel pay up +with interest. Order out thirty men of the 13th." + +While the men were mustering, the general returned to the dining-room +and begged the officers who were dining with him to excuse him for +half an hour, as he had some unexpected business to perform. Then he +walked across with the Scudamores to the banker's house, which was +only in the next street. + +Twenty of the men were then ordered to form a cordon round the house +and to watch the various entrances. The other ten, together with the +officer in command, the general told to follow him into the house. The +arrangements completed, he rang at the bell, and the porter at once +opened the gate. + +He started and would have tried to shut it again, on seeing the armed +party. But Lord Beresford said, "I am the general commanding the +British troops here. Make no noise, but show me directly to your +master." + +The man hesitated, but seeing that the force was too great to be +resisted, led the way through the courtyard into the house itself. + +Some servants in the hall started up with amazement, and would have +run off, but Lord Beresford cried, "Stay quiet for your lives. No one +will be hurt; but if any one moves from the hall, he will be shot." +Then, followed by Tom and Peter only, he opened the door which the +porter pointed out to him as that of the room where the banker was +sitting. + +He was alone, and started to his feet upon beholding three British +officers enter unannounced. "What means this?" he demanded angrily. +"I am a citizen of the United States, and for any outrage upon me +satisfaction will be demanded by my Government." + +"I am Lord Beresford," the general said quietly, "and quite know what +I am doing. I do not quite agree with you that the Government of the +United States will make any demand for satisfaction for any outrage +upon your person, nor, if they do so, will it benefit you greatly; +for I am about, in five minutes' time, to order you to be shot, Mr. +Walsh." + +As the name was uttered the banker, who had listened with increasing +pallor to the stern words of the general, started violently, and +turned ghastly white. For a minute or so he was too surprised and +confounded to speak. Then he said, in a husky tone, "It is false; I am +an American citizen. I know nothing whatever about James Walsh." + +"James Walsh!" the general said; "I said nothing about James. It is +you who have told us his Christian name, which is, I have no doubt, +the correct one." + +He looked to Tom, who nodded assent. + +"I know nothing about any Walsh," the banker said doggedly. "Who says +I do?" + +"We do, James Walsh," Tom said, stepping forward. "Tom and Peter +Scudamore, the sons of the man you robbed and ruined." + +The banker stared at them wildly, and then, with a hoarse cry, dropped +into his chair. + +"James Walsh," the general said sternly, "your life is doubly forfeit. +As a thief and a swindler, the courts of law will punish you with +death;" for in those days death was the penalty of a crime of this +kind. "In the second place, as a traitor. As a man who has given aid +and assistance to the enemies of your country, your life is forfeit, +and I, as the general in command here, doom you to death. In five +minutes you will be shot in your courtyard as a thief and a traitor." + +"Spare me!" the wretched man said, slipping off his chair on to his +knees. "Spare my life, and take all that I have. I am rich, and can +restore much of that which I took. I will pay 50,000_l._" + +"Fifty thousand pounds!" the general said; "you stole 80,000_l._, +which, with interest, comes up to 100,000_l._, besides which you must +pay for acting as a traitor. The military chest is empty, and we want +money. I will value your wretched life at 25,000_l._ If you make that +sum a present to our military chest, and pay Major Scudamore the +100,000_l._ of which you swindled his father, I will spare you." + +"One hundred and twenty-five thousand pounds!" the banker said +fiercely. "Never, I will die first." + +"Very well," Lord Beresford said quietly. "Major Scudamore, please +call in the officer and four men." Tom did as requested, and Lord +Beresford then addressed the officer. "You will take this man, who is +an Englishman, who has been acting as a traitor, and giving assistance +to the French army, you will take a firing party, place him against +the wall of the yard, give him five minutes to make his peace with +God, and when the five minutes are up, unless he tells you before that +that he wishes to see me, shoot him." + +Pale and desperate, the banker was led out. + +"He will give way, I hope," Tom said, as the door closed behind him. + +"He will give way before the time is up," Lord Beresford said. "He is +a coward; I saw it in his face." + +Four minutes passed on, the door opened again, and the officer +returned with his prisoner. "He says he agrees to your terms, sir" + +"Very well" Lord Beresford answered; "remain outside with your men; +they may be wanted yet." + +The prisoner, without a word, led the way into an adjoining room, +which communicated with the public office. This was his private +parlor, and in a corner stood a safe. He unlocked it, and, taking out +some books and papers, sat down to the table. + +His mood had evidently changed. "I was a fool to hold out," he said, +"for I had my name for wealth against me, and might have known you +would not give way. After all, I do not know that I am altogether +sorry, for I have always had an idea that some day or other the thing +would come out, and now I can go back and be comfortable for the rest +of my life. How will you have the money, gentlemen? I have 50,000_l._ +in cash, and can give you a draft on the Bank of England for the rest. +You look surprised, but I have always been prepared to cut and run +from this country at the shortest notice, and every penny I have +beyond the cash absolutely required is in England or America." + +"I will take 25,000_l._ in cash for the use of the army," Lord +Beresford said. "I will send an officer of the commissariat to-morrow +for it. The 100,000_l._ you may pay these gentlemen in drafts on +England. Until I hear that these drafts are honored, I shall keep you +under surveillance, and you will not be suffered to leave your house." + +"It will be all right," Walsh said. "There--is my Bank of England +pass-book; you will see that I have 120,000_l._ standing to the credit +of J. Weale there. I have as much in America. I should not tell you +this did I not know that you are a gentleman, and therefore will not +raise terms now that you see I can pay higher. There, Mr. Scudamore, +is the draft, and, believe me or not, I am glad to repay it, and to +feel, for the first time for many years, a free man. Please to give +me a receipt for the 80,000_l._ due by me to the Bank, and for +20,000_l._, five years' interest on the same." + +Tom did as he was desired without speaking. There was a tone of +effrontery mingled with the half-earnestness of this successful +swindler that disgusted him. + +"There," the general said, as the receipts were handed over; "come +along, lads, the business is over, and I do not think that we have any +more to say to Mr. Weale." + +So saying, without further word, the three went out. + +Upon rejoining the officer without, Lord Beresford directed that a +sergeant and ten men were to be quartered in the house, and that a +sentry was to be placed at each entrance night and day, and that the +banker was not to be permitted to stir out under any pretence whatever +until further orders. + +"There, lads, I congratulate you heartily," he said as they issued +from the gate, in answer to the warm thanks in which the boys +expressed their gratitude to him; "it is a stroke of luck indeed that +you came with me to Bordeaux. It was rough-and-ready justice, and I +don't suppose a court of law in England would approve of it; but we +are under martial law, so even were that fellow disposed to question +the matter, which you may be very sure he will not, we are safe +enough. They say 'ill-gotten gains fly fast' but the scamp has +prospered on the money he stole. He owned to having another hundred +thousand safe in the States, and no doubt he has at least as much more +in securities of one sort or other here. I daresay he was in earnest +when he said that he did not mind paying the money to get rid of the +chance of detection and punishment, which must have been ever in his +mind. The best thing you can do, Scudamore, is to write to James +Pearson--he's my solicitor in London--and give him authority to +present this draft, and invest the sum in your joint names in good +securities. Inclose the draft. I shall be sending off an orderly with +despatches and letters at daybreak, and if you give me your letter +to-night, I will inclose it in a note of my own to Pearson." + +Five days later an order arrived for Lord Beresford to leave the +seventh division under Lord Dalhousie, in Bordeaux, and to march with +the fourth division to join the Commander-in-Chief, who was gradually +drawing near to Toulouse, beneath whose walls Soult was reorganizing +his army. The position was a very strong one, and had been rendered +almost impregnable by fortifications thrown upon the heights. +Wellington had, too, the disadvantage of having to separate his army, +as the town lay upon both sides of the Garonne. + +On the 10th of April the allied army attacked. Hill attacked the +defences of the town on the left bank, while Freyre's Spaniards, +Picton, with the third and light divisions, and Beresford with the +fourth and the sixth divisions, assaulted a French position. The +entrenchments in front of Picton were too strong to be more than +menaced. Freyre's Spaniards were repulsed with great loss, and the +brunt of the battle fell upon Beresford's division, which nobly +sustained the character of the British soldier for stubborn valor +in this the last battle of the war. The French fought stubbornly +and well, but fort by fort the British drove them from their strong +positions, and at five in the afternoon Soult withdrew the last of his +troops in good order across the canal which separated the position +they had defended from the town itself. The French lost five generals +and 3000 killed and wounded; the allies four generals and 4659 killed +and wounded, of which 2000 were Spaniards, for they upon this occasion +fought bravely, though unsuccessfully. + +On the 11th all was quiet, Wellington preparing for an attack upon the +city on the following day. Soult, however, finding that the British +cavalry had been sent off so as to menace his line of retreat, +evacuated the city in the night, drew off his army with great order +and ability, and by a march of twenty-two miles placed it in safety. +Upon the morning of the 12th Wellington entered Toulouse, and the +same afternoon two officers, one British, the other French, arrived +together from Paris, with the news of the abdication of Napoleon, and +the termination of the war. + +These officers had been detained for two days at Blois by the +officials there, and this delay had cost the blood of 8000 men, among +whom was Tom Scudamore, who had his left arm carried away by a cannon +ball. Sam, in the act of carrying his master from the field, was also +severely wounded in the head with a musket ball. + +Before the battle was fought they had received news from England that +the draft had been paid at the Bank of England, and that their future +was in consequence secure. The war being over, officers unattached to +regiments had little difficulty in getting leave of absence, as the +troops were to be embarked for England as soon as possible. Peter's +application, therefore, to accompany his brother was acceded to +without hesitation, and ten days after the battle of Toulouse he was +on board ship with Tom and Sam, both of whom were doing well. Three +days afterwards they landed in England. + +Rhoda met them, with Miss Scudamore, at Portsmith, having received a +letter telling them of Tom's wound, and of their being upon the point +of sailing. There was a great reduction of the army at the end of the +war, and the Scudamores were both placed upon half pay. This was a +matter of delight to Rhoda, and of satisfaction to themselves. They +had had enough of adventure to last for a life-time; and with the +prospect of a long peace the army no longer offered them any strong +attraction. + +When they returned to Miss Scudamore's their old friend Dr. Jarvis +came to visit them, and a happier party could not have been found in +England. The will of Mr. Scudamore, made before he was aware of his +ruin, was now acted upon. He had left 20,000_l._ to Rhoda, and the +rest of his fortune in equal parts between his boys. Both Tom and +Peter were fond of a country life, and they bought two adjoining +estates near Oxford, Rhoda agreeing to stop with them and Miss +Scudamore alternately. + +For a brief time there was a break in their happiness, Napoleon +escaped from Elba, and Europe was in a flame again. All the officers +on half pay were ordered to present themselves for duty, and the +Scudamores crossed with the army to Belgium, and fought at Waterloo. +Neither were hurt, nor was Sam, who had of course accompanied them. +Waterloo gave them another step in rank, and the Scudamores returned +as colonels to England. + +It was their last war. A few years afterwards they married sisters, +and Rhoda having the year previous married a gentleman whose estate +was in the same county, they remained as united as ever. Sambo held +for many a year the important position of butler to Tom, then he found +that one of the housemaids did not regard his color as any insuperable +obstacle, and they were accordingly married. It was difficult to say +after this exactly the position which Sam held. He lived at a cottage +on the edge of the estate, where it joined that of Peter, and his time +was spent in generally looking after things at both houses, and as +years went on his great delight was, above all things, to relate to +numerous young Scudamores the adventures of their father and uncle +when he first knew them as the Young Buglers. + +THE END. + + + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS *** + +***** This file should be named 9613.txt or 9613.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/9/6/1/9613/ + +Produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis, and +PG Distributed Proofreaders + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/9613.zip b/9613.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..fdc1e26 --- /dev/null +++ b/9613.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b532481 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #9613 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/9613) diff --git a/old/7ybug10.txt b/old/7ybug10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5386537 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/7ybug10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11237 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: The Young Buglers + +Author: G.A. Henty + +Release Date: January, 2006 [EBook #9613] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on October 10, 2003] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS *** + + + + +Produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis, +and PG Distributed Proofreaders + + + + +THE YOUNG BUGLERS + +by G.A. Henty + + + + +PREFACE + + +To my Young Readers. + +I remember that, as a boy, I regarded any attempt to mix instruction +with amusement as being as objectionable a practice as the +administration of powder in jam; but I think that this feeling arose +from the fact that in those days books contained a very small share +of amusement and a very large share of instruction. I have endeavored +to avoid this, and I hope that the accounts of battles and sieges, +illustrated as they are by maps, will be found as interesting +as the lighter parts of the story. As in my tale, "_The Young +Franc-Tireurs_," I gave the outline of the Franco-German war, so +I have now endeavored to give the salient features of the great +Peninsular struggle. The military facts, with the names of generals +and regiments, the dates and places, are all strictly accurate, and +any one who has read with care the story of "The Young Buglers" could +pass an examination as to the leading events of the Peninsular war. + +Yours truly, + +THE AUTHOR. + + + + +CONTENTS + + + CHAPTER I. A Coaching Adventure + + CHAPTER II. The Young Pickles + + CHAPTER III. Enlisted + + CHAPTER IV. A Tough Customer + + CHAPTER V. Overboard + + CHAPTER VI. Portugal + + CHAPTER VII. The Passage of the Douro--Talavera + + CHAPTER VIII. A Pause in Operations + + CHAPTER IX. "With the Guerillas" + + CHAPTER X. Madrid + + CHAPTER XI. The Fight on the Coa + + CHAPTER XII. Busaco and Torres Vedras + + CHAPTER XIII. Albuera + + CHAPTER XIV. Invalided Home + + CHAPTER XV. Ciudad Rodrigo and Badajos + + CHAPTER XVI. Salamanca + + CHAPTER XVII. Caught in a Trap + + CHAPTER XVIII. Just in Time + + CHAPTER XIX. Vittoria + + CHAPTER XX. Toulouse + + + + +THE YOUNG BUGLERS. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +A COACHING ADVENTURE. + + +Had any of the boys in the lower forms of Eton in the year 1808, been +asked who were the most popular boys of their own age, they would have +been almost sure to have answered, without the slightest hesitation, +Tom and Peter Scudamore, and yet it is probable that no two boys +were more often in disgrace. It was not that they were idle, upon the +contrary, both were fairly up in their respective forms, but they were +constantly getting into mischief of one sort or another; yet even +with the masters they were favorites, there was never anything low, +disgraceful, or ungentlemanly in their escapades, and they could be +trusted never to attempt to screen themselves from the consequences +by prevarication, much less by lying. If the masters heard that a +party of youngsters had been seen far out of bounds, they were pretty +sure that the Scudamores were among them; a farmer came in from a +distance to complain that his favorite tree had been stripped of +its apples--for in those days apples were looked upon by boys as +fair objects of sport,--if the head-master's favorite white poodle +appeared dyed a deep blue, if Mr. Jones, the most unpopular master +in the school, upon coming out of his door trod upon a quantity of +tallow smeared all over the doorstep, and was laid up for a week in +consequence, there was generally a strong suspicion that Tom and Peter +Scudamore were concerned in the matter. One of their tricks actually +came to the ears of the Provost himself, and caused quite a sensation +in the place, but in this case, fortunately for them, they escaped +undetected. + +One fine summer afternoon they were out on the water with two or three +other boys of their own age, when a barge was seen ahead at some short +distance from the shore. She was apparently floating down with the +stream, and the fact that a horse was proceeding along the towing-path +a little way ahead was not noticed, as the rope was slack and was +trailing under water. The boys, therefore, as they were rowing against +stream, steered their boat to pass inside of her. Just as they came +abreast of the horse a man on the barge suddenly shouted to the rider +of the horse to go on. He did so, the rope tightened, rose from the +water just under the bow of the boat, and in another minute the boys +were struggling in the water. All were good swimmers, and would +have cared little for the ducking had it occurred accidentally, but +the roars of laughter of the bargeman, and the chaff with which he +assailed them as they scrambled up the bank, showed clearly enough +that they had been upset maliciously. The boys were furious, and one +or two proposed that they should report the case, but Tom Scudamore +pointed out that the bargeman would of course declare that it was +a pure accident, and that the boys were themselves in fault in not +looking out whether the barge was being towed, before going inside +her, and so nothing would come of reporting. + +The boat was dragged ashore and emptied, and in a few minutes they +were rowing back towards the town. The distance was but short, and +they did not repass the barge before they reached their boat-house. +The brothers had exchanged a few words in a low voice on the way, and +instead of following the example of the others, and starting at a run +for the house where they boarded to change their clothes, they walked +down by the river and saw that the barge had moored up against the +bank, at a short distance below the bridge. They watched for a time, +and saw the bargeman fasten up the hatch of the little cabin and go +ashore. + +That night two boys lowered themselves with a rope from the window +of one of the dames-houses, and walked rapidly down to the river. +There were a few flickering oil lamps burning, and the one or two +old watchmen were soundly asleep in their boxes. They did not meet a +soul moving upon their way to the object of the expedition, the barge +that had run them down. Very quietly they slipped on board, satisfied +themselves by listening at the half-open hatch to the snoring within +that their enemy was there, then loosened the moorings so that they +could be thrown off at a moment's notice. + +"Now, Peter," the elder brother said, "open our lantern. The night is +quite still. You hold your hand behind it, so that the light will not +fall on our faces, and I will look whether he is only wrapped up in a +blanket or has a regular bed; we must not risk setting the place on +fire. Get the crackers ready." + +A dark lantern was now taken out from under Tom's jacket, and was +found to be still alight, an important matter, for striking a light +with flint and steel was in those days a long and tedious business, +and then opening it Tom threw the light into the cabin. It was a +tiny place, and upon a bench, wrapped up in a blanket, the bargeman +was lying. As the light fell on his eyes, he moved, and a moment +afterwards started up with an oath, and demanded who was there. + +No answer came in words, but half a dozen lighted crackers were thrown +into the cabin, when they began to explode with a tremendous uproar. +In an instant the hatch was shut down and fastened outside. The rope +was cast off, and in another minute she was floating down stream with +the crackers still exploding inside her, but with their noise almost +deadened by the tremendous outcry of shouts and howls, and by a +continued and furious banging at the hatch. + +"There is no fear of his being choked, Tom, I hope?" + +"No, I expect he's all right," Tom said, "it will be pretty stifling +for a bit no doubt, but there's a chimney hole and the smoke will find +its way out presently. The barge will drift down to the weir before it +brings up, there is not enough stream out for there to be any risk of +her upsetting, else we daren't have turned her adrift." + +The next day the whole town was talking of the affair, and in the +afternoon the bargeman went up to the head-master and accused one of +the boys of an attempt to murder him. + +Greatly surprised, the Provost demanded what reason the man had for +suspecting the boys, and the bargeman acknowledged that he had that +afternoon upset a boat with four or five boys in her. "They would not +bear you malice on that account," the Provost said; "they don't think +much of a swim such weather as this, unless indeed you did it on +purpose." + +The man hesitated in his answer, and the Provost continued, "You +evidently did do it on purpose, and in that case, although it was +carried too far, for I hear you had a very narrow escape of being +stifled, still you brought it upon yourself, and I hope it will be a +lesson to you not to risk the lives of Eton boys for your amusement. I +know nothing about this affair, but if you can point out the boys you +suspect I will of course inquire into it." + +The bargeman departed, grumbling that he did not know one of the young +imps from another, but if he did find them, he'd wring their necks for +them to a certainty. The Provost had some inquiries made as to the +boys who had been upset, and whether they had all been in at lock-up +time; finding that they had all answered to their names, he made no +further investigation. + +This affair had taken place in the summer before this story begins, +on the 15th of October, 1808. On that day a holiday was granted in +consequence of the head-master's birthday, and the boys set off, some +to football, some for long walks in the country. + +The Scudamores, with several of their friends, strolled down the +towing-path for some miles, and walked back by the road. As they +entered their dames-house on their return, Tom Scudamore said for the +twentieth time, "Well, I would give anything to be a soldier, instead +of having to go in and settle down as a banker--it's disgusting!" + +As they entered a boy came up. "Oh, Scudamore, Jackson's been asking +for you both. It's something particular, for he has been out three or +four times, and he wanted to send after you, but no one knew where you +had gone." + +The boys at once went into the master's study, where they remained all +the afternoon. A short time after they went in, Mr. Jackson came out +and said a word or two to one of the senior boys, and the word was +quickly passed round, that there was to be no row, for the Scudamores +had just heard of the sudden death of their father. That evening, Mr. +Jackson had beds made up for them in his study, so that they might not +have the pain of having to talk with the other boys. The housekeeper +packed up their things, and next morning early they started by the +coach for London. + +Mr. Scudamore, the father of the young Etonians, was a banker. He was +the elder of two brothers, and had inherited his father's business, +while his brother had gone into the army. The banker had married the +daughter of a landowner in the neighborhood, and had lived happily and +prosperously until her death, seven years before this story begins. +She had borne him three children, the two boys, now fifteen and +fourteen years old respectively, and a girl, Rhoda, two years younger +than Peter. The loss of his wife afflicted him greatly, and he +received another shock five years later by the death of his brother, +Colonel Scudamore, to whom he was much attached. From the time of his +wife's death he had greatly relaxed in his attention to his business, +and after his brother's death he left the management almost entirely +in the hands of his cashier, in whom he had unlimited confidence. +This confidence was wholly misplaced. For years the cashier had +been carrying on speculation upon his own account with the monies +of the bank. Gradually and without exciting the least suspicion he +had realized the various securities held by the bank, and at last +gathering all the available cash he, one Saturday afternoon, locked up +the bank and fled. + +On Monday it was found that he was missing; Mr. Scudamore went down +to the bank, and had the books taken into his parlor for examination. +Some hours afterwards a clerk went in and found his master lying back +in his chair insensible. A doctor on arriving pronounced it to be +apoplexy. He never rallied, and a few hours afterwards the news spread +through the country that Scudamore, the banker, was dead, and that the +bank had stopped payment. + +People could believe the former item of news, but were incredulous as +to the latter. Scudamore's bank was looked upon in Lincolnshire as at +least as safe as the Bank of England itself. But the sad truth was +soon clear to all, and for awhile there was great distress of mind +among the people, for many miles round, for most of them had entrusted +all their savings of years to the Scudamores' bank. When affairs were +wound up, however, it was found that things were not quite so bad as +had been feared. Mr. Scudamore had a considerable capital employed +in the bank, and the sale of his handsome house and estate realized +a large sum, so that eventually every one received back the money +they had entrusted to the bank; but the whole of the capital and the +profits of years of successful enterprise had vanished, and it was +calculated by the executors that the swindler must have appropriated +at least 80,000_l._ + +For the first month after their father's death the boys stayed with +the doctor who had long attended the family and had treated all their +ailments since they were born. In the great loss of their father the +loss of their fortune affected them but little, except that they were +sorry to be obliged to leave Eton; for the interest of the little +fortune which their mother had brought at her marriage, and which was +all that now remained to them, would not have been sufficient to pay +for their expenses there, and indeed such an education would have been +out of place for two boys who had to make their own way in life. At +the end of this month it was arranged that they were to go to their +only existing relative, an elder sister of Mr. Scudamore. The boys had +never seen her, for she had not for many years been friends with her +brother. + +The letter which she had written to the doctor, announcing her +willingness to receive them, made the boys laugh, although it did not +hold out prospects of a very pleasant future. "I am, of course," she +said, "prepared to do my duty. No one can say that I have ever failed +in my duty. My poor brother quarreled with me. It was his duty to +apologize. He did not do so. Had it been my duty to apologize I should +have done so. As I was right, and he was wrong, it was clearly not my +duty. I shall now do my duty to my niece and nephews. Yet I may be +allowed to say that I regret much that they are not all nieces. I do +not like boys. They are always noisy, and not always clean. They do +not wipe their shoes, they are always breaking things, they go about +with all sorts of rubbish and dirt in their pockets, their hair is +always rough, they are fond of worrying cats, and other cruel games. +Altogether they are objectionable. Had my brother made up his mind to +leave his children in my charge, it was clearly his duty to have had +girls instead of boys. However, it is not because other people fail +in their duty that I should fail in mine. Therefore, let them come to +me this day fortnight. By that time I shall have got some strong and +suitable furniture in the room that my nephews will occupy, and shall +have time to make other arrangements. This letter will, if all goes +well, reach you, I believe, in three days after the date of posting, +and they will take the same time coming here. Assure them that I am +prepared to do my duty, and that I hope that they will make a serious +effort at doing theirs. Ask my nephews, upon the occasion of their +first arrival, to make as little noise as they can, because my cat, +Minnie, is very shy, and if she is scared at the first meeting, +she will take a very long time to get accustomed to them. I also +particularly beg that they do not, as they come up to the house, throw +stones at any of the pigeons who may be resting upon the roof, for the +slates were all set right a few weeks ago, and I am sure I do not wish +to have the slater here again; they were hanging about for ten days +the last time they came. I do not know that I have anything else to +say." + +The boys received the reading of this singular epistle with shouts of +laughter. + +"Poor aunt," Tom said. "What does she think of us that she can suppose +that, upon our very first arrival, we should come in like wild +Indians, throwing stones at her pigeons, and frightening her Minnie +into fits. Did you ever hear such an extraordinary idea, Doctor +Jarvis?" + +"At any rate, boys," the doctor said, when the laughter had ceased, +"you may find your aunt a little peculiar, but she is evidently +determined to do her duty to you, and you must do yours to her, and +not play more pranks than you can help. As to you, Rhoda, you will +evidently be in high favor, and as you are fortunately a quiet little +lady, you will, I have no doubt, get on with her very well." + +"I hope so," Rhoda said, smiling, "you see she means to be kind, +though she does write funny letters, and, at any rate, there are +Minnie and the pigeons; it sounds nice, you know. Do you know what +aunt's place is like, Dr. Jarvis, and how to get there from here." + +"No, my dear, I never was in that part of England. It is close to +Marlborough that she lives, a very pretty country, I believe. There +is, of course, no way to go across from here. You must go up to London +by coach from here, and then to Marlborough by the western coach. I +will write to my brother James in town, where you stopped at night as +you came through, boys, and I know that he will take you all in for +the night, and see that you go off right in the morning." + +"You're very kind, indeed, Doctor Jarvis. I do not know how to thank +you for all you have done for us," Tom said earnestly, and the others +cordially echoed the sentiment. + +The day before starting the doctor had a long talk with the boys. He +pointed out to them that their future now depended upon themselves +alone. They must expect to find many unpleasantnesses in their way, +but they must take their little trials pleasantly, and make the best +of everything. "I have no fear as to Rhoda," their kind friend said. +"She has that happy, amiable, and quiet disposition that is sure to +adapt itself to all circumstances. I have no doubt she will become a +favorite with your aunt. Try to keep out of scrapes, boys. You know +you are rather fond of mischief, and your aunt will not be able to +understand it. If you get into any serious difficulty write to me, you +can rely upon always finding a friend in me." + +The journey to London was no novelty to the boys, but Rhoda enjoyed it +immensely. Her place had been taken inside, but most of the journey +she rode outside with her brothers. She was greatly amazed at the +bustle and noise of London, and was quite confused at the shouting and +crowd at the place where the coach drew up, for two or three other +coaches had just arrived from other directions. Mr. Jarvis had sent +his man-servant to meet them, their luggage was sent direct to the +booking-office from which the coach started for Marlborough, and the +servant carried a small bag containing their night things. It was +evening when they got in, and Rhoda could scarcely keep her eyes open +long enough to have tea, for the coach had been two days and nights +upon the road. The next day they stayed in town, and Mrs. Jarvis took +them out to see the sights of London--the Tower and St. Paul's, and +Westminster Abbey, and the beasts at Exeter Change. The boys had twice +before spent a whole day in London, their father having, upon two +occasions, made his visits to town to fit in with their going up to +school, but to Rhoda it was all new, and very, very wonderful. + +The next day the coach started early for Marlborough. It was to +take rather over twenty-four hours on the way. As before, Rhoda rode +outside with her brothers until the evening, but then, instead of +going inside, where there were five passengers already, she said, as +the night was so fine and warm, she would rather remain with them. +They were sitting behind the coachman, there were two male passengers +upon the same seat with them, and another in the box seat by the +coachman. The conversation turned, as in those days it was pretty sure +to turn, upon highwaymen. Several coaches had been lately stopped by +three highwaymen, who worked together, and were reported to be more +reckless than the generality of their sort. They had shot a coachman +who refused to stop, the week before on Hounslow Heath, they had +killed a guard on the great north road, and they had shot two +passengers who resisted, near Exeter. + +Tom and Peter were greatly amused by observing that the passenger who +sat next to them, and who, at the commencement of the conversation, +showed a brace of heavy pistols with which he was provided, with much +boasting as to what he should do if the coach were attacked, when he +heard of the fate of the passengers who had resisted, became very +quiet indeed, and presently took an opportunity, when he thought that +he was not observed, of slipping his pistols under the tarpaulin +behind him. + +"I hope those dreadful men won't stop our coach," Rhoda said. + +"They won't hurt you if they do, Rhoda," Tom said assuringly. "I think +it would be rather a lark. I say, Peter," he went on in a whisper, "I +think we might astonish them with those pistols that coward next to +you has hid behind him." + +"I should just think so," Peter said; "the bargee at Eton would be +nothing to it." + +The hours went slowly on. Rhoda and the boys dozed uncomfortably +against each other and the baggage behind them, until they were +suddenly roused by a shout in the road beside them: "Stand for your +lives!" + +The moon was up, and they could see that there were three horsemen. +One galloped to the horses' heads, and seized the rein of one of the +leaders, the others rode by the coach. + +The first answer to the challenge was a discharge from the blunderbuss +of the guard, which brought one of the highwaymen from his horse. + +The other, riding up to the side of the coach, fired at the guard, and +a loud cry told that the shot had taken effect. In another moment the +fellow was by the side of the coachman. + +"Hold up!" he said, "or I will blow your brains out!" + +The coachman did as he was ordered, and indeed the man at the leader's +head had almost succeeded in stopping them. The passenger next to the +boys had, at the first challenge, again seized his pistols, and the +boys thought that he was going to fire after all. + +"Lie down at our feet, Rhoda, quick!" Tom said, "and don't move +till I tell you." The fate of the guard evidently frightened away +the short-lived courage of the passenger, for, as the coachman again +pulled up, he hastily thrust the pistols in behind him. + +"Get down, every one of you," the highwayman shouted. + +"Lie still, Rhoda," Tom whispered. "Now, Peter, get in underneath the +tarpaulin." + +This was done as the passengers descended. The luggage was not so +heavily piled as usual, and the boys found plenty of room beneath the +tarpaulin. + +"Now, Peter, you take one of these pistols and give me the other. Now +peep out. The moon is hidden, which is a good thing; now, look here, +you shall shoot that fellow standing down below, who is swearing at +the ladies inside for not getting out quicker. I'll take a shot at +that fellow standing in front of the horse's heads." + +"Do you think you can hit him, Tom?" + +"I have not the least idea, but I can try; and if you hit the other +one, the chances are he'll bolt, whether I hit him or not. Open the +tarpaulin at the side so as to see well, and rest the pistol upon +something. You must take a good shot, Peter, for if you miss him we +shall be in a mess." + +"All right," Peter said, in a whisper, "I can almost touch him with +the pistol." + +In loud and brutal tones the highwayman now began to order the +frightened ladies to give up their watches and rings, enforcing his +commands with terrible curses. When suddenly a pistol flashed out +just behind him, and he fell off his horse with a ball through his +shoulder. + +Tom's shot, though equally well intended, was not so truly aimed. +The highwayman had dismounted, and was standing just in front of the +leaders, so that Tom had a fair view of him between them. The boys had +both occasionally fired their father's pistols, for, in those days, +each householder in the country always kept loaded pistols in his +room, but his skill was not sufficient to make sure of a man at that +distance. The bullet flew past at two feet to the left of his head. +But its effect was scarcely less startling than if it had actually hit +him, for, in its passage, it passed through the ear of the off leader. +The horse made a start at the sudden pain, and then dashed forward. +The rest of the team, already alarmed by the shot, followed her lead; +before the startled highwayman could get out of the way they were upon +him, in another instant he was under their heels, and the coach gave a +sudden lurch as it passed over his body. + +"Lie still, Rhoda, a little longer; it's all right, but the horses +have run away," Tom exclaimed, as he scrambled forward, and caught +hold of the reins, which the coachman had tied to the rail of the seat +as he got down. "Catch hold of the reins, Peter, and help me pull." + +Peter did so; but the united strength of the boys was wholly unequal +to arresting the headlong flight of the horses. + +Fortunately the highwaymen had chosen a low bottom between two hills, +to arrest the coach, consequently the road was up a hill of moderate +steepness. The boys hoped that the horses would stop when they got to +the top; but they went on with redoubled speed. + +"This is something like going it," Peter said. + +"Isn't it, Peter? They know their way, and we ain't lively to meet +anything in the road. They will stop at their stable. At any rate, +it's no use trying to steer them. Here, Rhoda dear, get up; are you +very much frightened?" + +Rhoda still lay quite still, and Peter, holding on with difficulty, +for the coach quite rocked with the speed at which they were going, +climbed over to her, and stooped, down. "Shall I help you up, Rhoda?" + +"No, please, I would rather stop here till it's all over." + +Fortunately the hill, up to the Tillage where they made the change, +was a steep one, and the horses broke into a trot before they reached +the top, and, in another minute drew up at the door of the inn. +The astonishment of the ostlers at seeing the horses covered with +lather, and coachbox tenanted only by two boys, behind whom a little +white face now peered out, was extreme, and they were unable to get +beyond an ejaculation of hallo! expressive of a depth of incredulous +astonishment impossible to be rendered by words. + +"Look here," Tom said, with all the composure, and much of the +impudence, which then, as now, characterized the young Etonian, "don't +be staring like a pack of stuck pigs. You had better get the fresh +horses in, and drive back to the bottom, about four miles from here. +There has been regular row with some fellows, and I expect two or +three are killed. Now, just put up the ladder; I want to get my sister +down." + +Almost mechanically the men put the ladder up to the coach, and the +boys and Rhoda got down. + +"Do you say the coach has been attacked by highwaymen in Burnet +bottom?" + +"I don't know anything about Burnet bottom," Tom said. "It was a +bottom about four miles off. There were three of them. The guard shot +one of them, and the others shot the guard. Then we were stopped by +them, and every one had to get down. Then the horses ran away, and +here we are." + +"Then there are two of those highwayman chaps with the passengers," +one of the men said. + +"You need not be afraid of them," Tom said carelessly; "one got shot, +and I don't know about the other, but the wheel of the coach went over +him, so I do not suppose he will be much trouble. Now, if I were you, +I should not stand staring any more, but should make haste and take +the coach back." + +"Hullo, look at this grey," one of the men exclaimed, as, at last +understanding what had taken place, they began to bustle about to +change horses. "He's got blood all over the side of his head. One of +those scoundrels has shot him through the ear." + +Tom burst out laughing. "I am the scoundrel!" he said. "Peter, that +explains why we went off so suddenly. I missed the fellow, and hit the +leader in the ear. However, it comes to the same thing. By the way, we +may as well take the pistols." + +So saying, he ran up the ladder and brought down the pistols. By this +time the fresh horses were in. + +"I can't make nought of it," one of the ostlers said, climbing up into +the coachman's seat. "Jump up, Bill and Harry. It's the rummiest go I +ever heard of in coaching." + +"Landlady, can you get us some tea at once, please," Tom said, going +up to the landlady, who was looking on from the door of the house +with an astonishment equal to that of the men at the whole affair; +"as quickly as you can, for my sister looks regularly done up with +fatigue, and then, please let her lie down till the coach is ready to +start again. It will be three quarters of an hour before it is back, +and then, I daresay, there will be a lot of talking before they go on. +I should think they will be wanting breakfast. At any rate, an hour's +rest will do you good, Rhoda." + +Rhoda was too worn out with the over-excitement even to answer. +Fortunately there was hot water in order to make hot grog for the +outriders of the coach, some tea was quickly made, and in ten minutes +Rhoda was fast asleep on the landlady's bed. + +Tom and Peter expressed their desire for something substantial in the +way of eating, for the morning had now fairly broken. The landlady +brought in some cold meat, upon which the boys made a vigorous attack, +and then, taking possession of two benches, they dozed off until the +coach arrived. + +It had but three horses, for one had been sent off to carry Bill, +the ostler, at full speed to the town at which they had last changed +horses, to fetch a doctor and the constable. The other two men had +remained with the guard, who was shot in the hip, and the highwayman, +whose collar-bone was broken by Peter's shot. The fellow shot by the +guard, and the other one, whom the coach wheels had passed over, were +both dead. + +"There's the coach, Tom." + +"What a nuisance, Peter, they'll all be wanting to talk now, and I am +just so comfortably off. Well, I suppose it's no use trying to get any +more sleep." + +So saying, they roused themselves, and went out to the door just as +the coach drew up. + +There was a general shout of greeting from the passengers, which was +stopped, however, by a peremptory order from the coachman. + +He was a large, stout man, with a face red from the effects of wind +and exposure. "Jack," he said, to a man who was standing near, for +the news of the attack upon the coach had quickly spread, and all +the villagers were astir to see it come in. "Jack, hold the leader's +head. Thomas, open the door, and let the insides out. Gents," he said +solemnly, when this was done, "I'm going to do what isn't a usual +thing by no means, in fact, I ain't no precedence for doing it; but +then, I do not know any precedence for this here business altogether. +I never did hear of a coachman standing up on his box to give a cheer, +no, not to King George himself; but, then, King George never polished +off two highwaymen all to himself, leastway, not as I've heard tell +of. Now, these two young gents have done this. They have saved my +coach and my passengers from getting robbed, and so I'm going to give +'em three cheers. I'll trouble you to help me up into the box seat, +gentlemen." + +Assisted by the other passengers, the driver now gravely climbed up +into the box seat, steadied himself there by placing one hand upon +the shoulder of the passenger next him, took off his low-crowned hat, +and said. "Follow me, gents, with three cheers for those young gents +standing there; better plucked ones I never came across, and I've +traveled a good many miles in my day." + +So saying, he gave three stentorian cheers, which were echoed by all +the passengers and villagers. + +Then there was a momentary silence, and Tom, who, with his brother, +had been feeling very uncomfortable, although rather inclined to +laugh, seeing that he was expected to say something, said, "Thank you +all very much; but we'd much rather you hadn't done it." + +Then there was a general laugh and movement, and a general pressing +forward of the passengers to shake the boys by the hand. The driver +was assisted down from his elevated position, and got off the coach +and came up to them. "That's the first speech I ever made, young +gentlemen, and, if I know myself, it will be the last; but, you see, +I was druv to it. You're a good sort, that's certain. What will you +drink?" + +The boys declared for beer, and drank solemnly with the driver, +imitating him in finishing their mugs at a draught, and turning them +topsy-turvy. There was now a great deal of talking, and many questions +were asked. Tom and Peter modestly said that there was really nothing +to tell. They saw that the gentleman next to them intended to use his +pistols; but, not seeing a good opportunity, put them down behind the +tarpaulin, and the thought occurred to them that, by slipping behind +it, they would get a good chance of a certain shot. Accordingly, they +had fired, and then the horse had run away; and there was an end of +it. There was nothing extraordinary in the whole matter. + +"At any rate, my boys, you have saved me from a loss of a couple +of hundred pounds which I had got hid in my boots, but which those +fellows would have been sure to have have discovered," one of the +passengers said. + +There was a general chorus of satisfaction at many watches and +trinkets saved, and then the first passenger went on,-- + +"I propose, gentlemen and ladies, that when we get to the end of our +journey we make a subscription, according to the amount we have saved, +and that we get each of these young gentlemen a brace of the very best +pistols that can be bought. If they go on as they have begun, they +will find them useful." + +There was a general exclamation of approval, and one of the ladies, +who had been an inside passenger, said, "And I think we ought to give +a handsome ring to their sister as a memorial through life. Of course, +she had not so much to do as her brothers, but she had the courage to +keep still, and she had to run the risk, both of being shot, and of +being upset by the coach just as they did." + +This also was unanimously approved, and, after doing full justice to +the breakfast set before them, the party again took their places. +Rhoda being carried down asleep, by the landlady, and placed in the +coach, one of the inside passengers getting out to make room for her, +and she was laid, curled up, on the seat, with her head in a lady's +lap, and slept quietly, until, to her astonishment, she was woke up, +and told that she was in Marlborough. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +TWO YOUNG PICKLES. + + +An old-fashioned open carriage, drawn by a stiff, old-fashioned horse, +and driven by a stiff, old-fashioned man, was in waiting at the inn at +which the coach drew up at Marlborough. Into this the young Scudamores +were soon transferred, and, after a hearty good-bye from their +fellow-passengers, and an impressive one from the coachman, they +started upon the concluding part of their journey. + +"How far is it to aunt's?" Tom asked. + +"About six miles, young sir," the driver said gravely. + +The young Scudamores had great difficulty to restrain their laughter +at Tom's new title; in fact, Peter nearly choked himself in his +desperate efforts to do so, and no further questions were asked for +some time. + +The ride was a pleasant one, and Rhoda, who had never been out of +Lincolnshire before, was delighted with the beautiful country through +which they were passing. The journey, long as it was--for the road +was a very bad one, and the horse had no idea of going beyond a slow +trot--passed quickly to them all; but they were glad when the driver +pointed to a quaint old-fashioned house standing back from the road, +and said that they were home. + +"There are the pigeons, Rhoda, and there is Minnie asleep on that open +window-sill." + +Very many times had the young Scudamores talked about their aunt, and +had pictured to themselves what she would be like; and their ideas of +her so nearly approached the truth, that she almost seemed to be an +old acquaintance as she came to the door as the carriage stopped. She +was a tall, upright, elderly lady, with a kind, but very decided face, +and a certain prim look about her manner and dress. + +"Well, niece Rhoda and nephews, I am glad to see that you have arrived +safely," she said in a clear, distinct voice. "Welcome to the Yews. I +hope that we shall get on very well together. Joseph, I hope that you +have not driven Daisy too fast, and that you did not allow my nephews +to use the whip. You know I gave you very distinct instructions not to +let them do so." + +"No, my lady, they never so much as asked." + +"That is right," Miss Scudamore said, turning round and shaking hands +with the boys, who had now got out of the carriage and had helped +Rhoda down. "I am glad to hear what Joseph tells me, for I know that +boys are generally fond of furious driving and like lashing horses +until they put them into a gallop. And now, how are you, niece Rhoda! +Give me a kiss. That is right. You look pale and tired, child; you +must have something to eat, and then go to bed. Girls can't stand +racketing about as boys can. You look quiet and nice, child, and I +have no doubt we shall suit very well. It is very creditable to you +that you have not been spoilt by your brothers. Boys generally make +their sisters almost as noisy and rude as they are themselves." + +"I don't think we are noisy and rude, aunt," Tom said, with a smile. + +"Oh, you don't, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said, looking at him sharply, +and then shaking her head decidedly two or three times. "If your looks +do not belie you both sadly, you are about as hair-brained a couple of +lads as my worst enemies could wish to see sent to plague me; but," +she added to herself, as she turned to lead the way indoors, "I must +do my duty, and must make allowances; boys will be boys, boys will be +boys, so they say at least, though why they should be is more than I +can make out. Now, Rhoda, I will take you up with me. Your bedroom +leads out of mine, dear. Hester," she said to a prim-looking servant +who had come out after her to the door; "will you show my nephews to +their room? Dinner will be ready at two; it is just a quarter to the +hour now. I see that you have got watches, so that you will be able +to be punctual; and I must request you, when you have done washing, +not to throw the water out of the window, because my flower-beds are +underneath." + +Tom had great difficulty in keeping his countenance, while he assured +his aunt that his brother and himself never did empty their basins out +of the window. + +"That is right," Miss Scudamore said doubtfully; "but I have heard +that boys do such things." + +Once fairly in their room and the door shut, the boys had a great +laugh over their aunt's ideas as to boys. + +"There is one comfort," Tom said at last; "whatever we do we shall +never surprise her." + +"I think we shall get on very well with her," Peter said. "She means +to be kind, I am sure. This is a jolly room, Tom." + +It was a low wainscoted room, with a very wide window divided into +three by mullions, and fitted with latticed panes. They were open, and +a delicious scent of flowers came in from the garden. The furniture +was all new and very strong, of dark stained wood, which harmonized +well with the paneling. There were no window curtains, but a valance +of white dimity hung above the window. There was a piece of carpet +between the beds; the rest of the floor was bare, but the boards were +of old oak, and looked as well without it. Several rows of pegs had +been put upon the walls, and there was a small chest of drawers by +each bed. + +"This is very jolly, Peter; but it is a pity that there are bars to +the window." + +When they came down to dinner they found that Rhoda, quite done up +with her journey, had gone to bed. + +"You like your room, I hope, nephews," Miss Scudamore said, after they +had taken their seats. + +"Yes, aunt, very much. There is only one drawback to it." + +"What is that, Thomas?" + +"Oh, please, aunt, don't call me Thomas; it is a dreadful name; it is +almost as bad as Tommy. Please call me Tom. I am always called Tom by +every one." + +"I am not fond of these nicknames," Miss Scudamore said. "There is a +flippancy about them of which I do not approve." + +"Yes, aunt, in nicknames; but Tom is not a nickname; it is only a +short way of speaking. We never hear of a man being called Thomas, +unless he is a footman or an archbishop, or something of that sort." + +"What do you mean by archbishop?" Miss Scudamore asked severely. + +"Well, aunt, I was going to say footman, and then I thought of Thomas +a Becket; and there was Thomas the Rhymer. I have heard of him, but +I never read any of his rhymes. I wonder why they did not call them +poems. But I expect even Thomas a Becket was called Tom in his own +family." + +Miss Scudamore looked sharply at Tom, but he had a perfect command of +his face, and could talk the greatest nonsense with the most serious +face. He went on unmoved with her scrutiny. + +"I have often wondered why I was not christened Tom, It would have +been much more sensible. For instance, Rhoda is christened Rhoda and +not Rhododendron." + +"Rhododendron?" Miss Scudamore said, mystified. + +"Yes, aunt, it is an American plant, I believe. We had one in the +green-house at home; it was sent poor papa by some friend who went out +there, I don't see anything else Rhoda could come from." + +"You are speaking very ignorantly, nephew," Miss Scudamore said +severely. "I don't know anything about the plant you speak of, but the +name of Rhoda existed before America was ever heard of. It is a very +old name." + +"I expect," Peter said, "it must have meant originally a woman of +Rhodes. You see Crusaders and Templars were always having to do with +Rhodes, and they no doubt brought the name home, and so it got settled +here." + +"The name is mentioned in Scripture," Miss Scudamore said severely. + +"Yes, aunt, and that makes it still more likely that it meant a woman +of Rhodes; you see Rhodes was a great place then." + +Miss Scudamore was silent for some time. Then she went back to the +subject with which the conversation had commenced. "What is the +objection you spoke of to the room?" + +"Oh! it is the bars to the window, aunt." + +"I have just had them put up," Miss Scudamore said calmly. + +"Just put up, aunt!" Tom repeated in surprise, "what for?" + +"To prevent you getting out at night." + +The boys could not help laughing this time, and then Peter said, "But +why should we want to get out at night, aunt?" + +"Why should boys always want to do the things they ought not?" Miss +Scudamore said. "I've heard of boys being let down by ropes to go and +buy things. I dare say you have both done it yourselves." + +"Well, aunt," Tom said, "perhaps we have; but then, you see, that was +at school." + +"I do not see any difference, nephew. If you will get out at one +window, you will get out at another. There is mischief to be done in +the country as well as in towns; and so long as there is mischief to +do, so long will boys go out of their way to do it. And now I will +tell you the rules of this house, to which you will be expected to +adhere. It is well to understand things at once, as it prevents +mistakes. We breakfast at eight, dine at two, have tea at half-past +six, and you will go to bed at half-past eight. These hours will be +strictly observed. I shall expect your hands and faces to be washed, +and your hairs brushed previous to each meal. When you come indoors +you will always take off your boots and put on your shoes in the +little room behind this. And now, if you have done dinner I think +that you had better go and lie down on your bed, and get two or three +hours' sleep. Take your boots off before you get into the bed." + +"She means well, Peter," the elder brother said, as they went +upstairs, "but I am afraid she will fidget our lives out." + +For two or three days the boys wandered about enjoying the beautiful +walks, and surprising and pleasing their aunt by the punctuality +with which they were in to their meals. Then she told them that she +had arranged for them to go to a tutor, who lived at Warley, a large +village a mile distant, and who had some eight or ten pupils. The very +first day's experience at the school disgusted them. The boys were +of an entirely different class to those with whom they had hitherto +associated, and the master was violent and passionate. + +"How do you like Mr. Jones, nephews?" Miss Scudamore asked upon their +return after their first day at school. + +"We do not like him at all, aunt. In the first place, he is a good +deal too handy with that cane of his." + +"'He who spares the rod--'" + +"Yes, we know that, aunt, 'spoils the child,'" broke in Tom, "but we +would not mind so much if the fellow were a gentleman." + +"I don't know what you may call a gentleman," Miss Scudamore said +severely. "He stands very high here a schoolmaster, while he visits +the vicar, and is well looked up to everywhere." + +"He's not a gentleman for all that," Tom muttered; "he wouldn't be if +he visited the Queen. One does not mind being trashed by a gentleman; +one is used to that at Eton; but to be knocked about by a fellow like +that! Well, we shall see." + +For a week the boys put up with the cruelty of their tutor, who at +once took an immense dislike to them on finding that they did not, +like the other boys, cringe before him, and that no trashing could +extract a cry from them. + +It must not be supposed that they did not meditate vengeance, but they +could hit upon no plan which could be carried out without causing +suspicion that it was the act of one of the boys; and in that case +they knew that he would question them all round, and they would not +tell a lie to screen themselves. + +Twice they appealed to their aunt, but she would not listen to them, +saying that the other boys did not complain, and that if their master +was more severe with them than with others, it could only be because +they behaved worse. It was too evident that they were boys of very +violent dispositions, and although she was sorry that their master +found it necessary to punish them, it was clearly her duty not to +interfere. + +The remark about violence arose from Miss Scudamore having read in the +little paper which was published once a week at Marlborough an account +of the incident of the stopping of the coach, about which the boys +had agreed to say nothing to her. The paper had described the conduct +of her nephews in the highest terms, but Miss Scudamore was terribly +shocked. "The idea", she said, "that she should have to associate with +boys who had take a fellow-creature's life was terrible to her, and +their conduct in resisting, when grown-up men had given up the idea +as hopeless, showed a violent spirit, which, in boys so young, was +shocking." + +A few days after this, as the boys were coming from school, they +passed the carrier's cart, coming in from Marlborough. + +"Be you the young gentlemen at Miss Scudamore's?" the man asked. +"Because, if you be, I have got a parcel for you." + +Tom answered him that they were, and he then handed them over a heavy +square parcel. Opening it after the cart had gone on, the boys, to +their great delight, found that it consisted of two cases, each +containing a brace of very handsome pistols. + +"This is luck, Peter," Tom said. "If the parcel had been sent to the +house, aunt would never have let us have them; now we can take them in +quietly, get some powder and balls, and practice shooting every day in +some quiet place. That will be capital. Do you know I have thought of +a plan which will enrage old Jones horribly, and he will never suspect +us?" + +"No; have you, Tom? What is that?" + +"Look here, Peter. I can carry you easily standing on my shoulders. If +you get a very long cloak, so as to fall well down on me, no one would +suspect in the dark that there were two of us; we should look like +one tremendously tall man. Well, you know, he goes every evening to +Dunstable's to sing with Miss Dunstable. They say he's making love to +her. We can waylay him in the narrow lane, and make him give up that +new watch he has just bought, that he's so proud of. I heard him say +he had given thirty guineas for it. Of course, we don't want to keep +it, but we would smash it up between a couple of big stones, and send +him all the pieces." + +"Capital, Tom; but where should we get the cloak?" + +"There is that long wadded silk cloak of aunt's that she uses when she +goes out driving. It always hangs up in the closet in the hall." + +"But how are we to get in again, Tom? I expect that he does not come +back till half-past nine or ten. We can slip out easily enough after +we are supposed to have gone to bed; but how are we to get back?" + +"The only plan, Peter, is to get in through Rhoda's window. She is +very angry at that brute Jones treating us so badly, and if I take her +into the secret I feel sure she will agree." + +Rhoda was appealed to, and although at first she said it was quite, +quite impossible, she finally agreed, although with much fear and +trembling, to assist them. First, the boys were to buy some rope and +make a rope ladder, which Rhoda was to take up to her room; she was to +open the window wide when she went to bed, but to pull the blind down +as usual, so that if her aunt came in she would not notice it. Then, +when she heard her aunt come tip to bed at half-past nine, she was to +get up very quietly, drop the rope ladder out, fastening it as they +instructed her, and then get into bed again, and go to sleep if she +could, as the boys would not try to come in until after Miss Scudamore +was asleep. + +Two nights after this the schoolmaster was returning from his usual +visit to Mr. Dunstable, when, to his horror, he saw a gigantic figure +advance from under a tree which overshadowed the lawn, and heard a +deep voice say, "Your money or your life!" + +Like all bullies, the schoolmaster was a coward, and no sooner did he +see this terrible figure, and his ears caught the ominous click of +a pistol which accompanied the words, than his teeth chattered, his +whole figure trembled with fear, and he fell on his knees, crying, +"Spare my life!--take all that I have, but spare my life!" + +"You miserable coward!" the giant said, "I do not want to take your +wretched life. What money have you?" + +"I have only two shillings," he exclaimed; "I swear to you that I have +only two shillings." + +"What is the use of two shillings to me?--give them to the first +beggar you see." + +"Yes, sir," the schoolmaster said; "I swear to you that I will." + +"Give me your watch." + +The schoolmaster took out his watch, and, getting upon his feet, +handed it to the giant. + +"There now, you can go; but see," he added, as the schoolmaster turned +with great alacrity to leave--"look here." + +"Yes, sir." + +"Look here, and mark my words well. Don't you go to that house where +you have been to-night, or it will be the worse for you. You are a +wretch, and I won't see that poor little girl marry you and be made +miserable. Swear to me you will give her up." + +The schoolmaster hesitated, but there was again the ominous click of +the pistol. + +"Yes, yes, I swear it," he said hastily. "I will give her up +altogether." + +"You had better keep your oath," the giant said, "for if you break it, +if I hear you go there any more--I shall be sure to hear of it--I will +put an ounce of lead in you, if I have to do it in the middle of your +school. Do you hear me? Now you may go." + +Only too glad to escape, the schoolmaster walked quickly off, and in a +moment his steps could be heard as he ran at the top of his speed down +the lane. + +In a moment the giant appeared to break in two, and two small figures +stood where the large one had been. + +"Capital, Peter. Now, I'll take the cloak, and you keep the pistol, +and now for a run home--not that I'm afraid of that coward getting +up a pursuit. He'll be only too glad to get his head under the +bedclothes." + +Rhoda had carried out her brother's instructions with great exactness, +and was in a great fright when her aunt came in to see her in bed, +lest she should notice that the window was open. However, the night +was a quiet one, and the curtains fell partly across the blind, so +that Miss Scudamore suspected nothing, but Rhoda felt great relief +when she said good-night, took the candle, and left the room. She had +had hard work to keep herself awake until she heard her aunt come up +to bed; and then, finding that she did not again come into the room, +she got up, fastened one end of the rope ladder to a thick stick long +enough to cross two of the mullions, let the other end down very +quietly, and then slipped into bed again. She did not awake until +Hester knocked at her door and told her it was time to get up. She +awoke with a great start, and in a, fright at once ran to the window. +Everything looked as usual. The rope ladder was gone, the window was +closed, and Rhoda knew that her brothers must have come in safely. + +Great was the excitement in Warley next day, when it became known that +the schoolmaster had been robbed of his watch by a giant fully eight +feet high. This height of the robber was, indeed, received with much +doubt, as people thought that he might have been a tall man, but +that the eight feet must have been exaggerated by the fear of the +schoolmaster. + +Two or three days afterwards the surprise rose even higher, when a +party of friends who had assembled at Mr. Jones' to condole with him +upon his misfortune, were startled by the smashing of one of the +windows by a small packet, which fell upon the floor in their midst. + +There was a rush to the door, but the night was a dark one, and no one +was to be seen; then they returned to the sitting-room, and the little +packet was opened, and found to contain some watchworks bent and +broken, some pulverized glass, and a battered piece of metal, which, +after some trouble, the schoolmaster recognized as the case of his +watch. The head-constable was sent for, and after examining the relics +of the case, he came to the same conclusion at which the rest had +already arrived, namely, that the watch could not have been stolen by +an ordinary footpad, but by some personal enemy of the schoolmaster's, +whose object was not plunder, but annoyance and injury. + +To the population of Warley this solution was a very agreeable one. +The fact of a gigantic footpad being in the neighborhood was alarming +for all, and nervous people were already having great bolts and bars +placed upon their shutters and doors. The discovery, therefore, that +the object of this giant was not plunder, but only to gratify a spite +against the master, was a relief to the whole place. Every one was, of +course, anxious to know who this secret foe could be, and what crime +Mr. Jones could have committed to bring such a tremendous enemy upon +him. The boys at the school assumed a fresh importance in the eyes of +the whole place, and being encouraged now to tell all they knew of +him, they gave such a picture of the life that they had led at school, +that a general feeling of disgust was aroused against him. + +The parents of one or two of the boys gave notice to take their sons +away, but the rest of the boys were boarders, and were no better off +than before. + +Miss Scudamore was unshaken in her faith in Mr. Jones and considered +the rumor current about him to be due simply to the vindictive nature +of boys. + +"Well, aunt," Tom said one day, after a lecture of this sort from her, +"I know you mean to be kind to us, but Peter and I have stood it on +that account, but we can't stand it much longer, and we shall run away +before long." + +"And where would you run to, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said calmly. + +"That is our affair," Tom said quite as coolly, "only I don't like to +do it without giving you warning. You mean kindly, I know, aunt, but +the way you are always going on at us from morning to night whenever +we are at home, and the way in which you allow us to be treated by +that tyrannical brute, is too much altogether." + +Miss Scudamore looked steadily at them. + +"I am doing, nephew, what I consider to be for your good. You are +willful, and violent, and headstrong. It is my duty to cure you, and +although it is all very painful to me, at my time of life, to have +such a charge thrust upon me, still, whatever it costs, it must be +done." + +For the next month Mr. Jones' life was rendered a burden to him. The +chimney-pots were shut up with sods placed on them, and the fireplaces +poured volumes of smoke into the rooms and nearly choked him. Night +after night the windows of his bedroom were smashed; cats were let +down the chimney; his water-butts were found filled with mud, and the +cord of the bucket of his well was cut time after time; the flowers +in his garden were dug up and put in topsy-turvy. He himself could not +stir out after dark without being tripped up by strings fastened a +few inches above the path; and once, coming out of his door, a string +fastened from scraper to scraper brought him down the steps with such +violence that the bridge of his nose, which came on the edge of a +step, was broken, and he was confined to his bed for three or four +days. In vain he tried every means to discover and punish the authors +of these provocations. A savage dog, the terror of the neighborhood, +was borrowed and chained up in the garden, but was found poisoned next +morning. + +Watchmen were hired, but refused to stay for more than one night, for +they were so harassed and wearied out that they came to the conclusion +that they were haunted. If they were on one side of the house a voice +would be heard on the other. After the first few attempts, they no +longer dared venture to run, for between each round strings were tied +in every direction, and they had several heavy falls, while as they +were carefully picking their way with their lanterns, stones struck +them from all quarters. If one ventured for a moment from the other's +side his lantern was knocked out, and his feet were struck from under +him with a sharp and unexpected blow from a heavy cudgel; and they +were once appalled by seeing a gigantic figure stalk across the grass, +and vanish in a little bush. + +At the commencement of these trials the schoolmaster had questioned +the boys, one by one, if they had any hand in the proceeding. + +All denied it. When it came to Tom Scudamore's turn, he said. "You +never do believe me, Mr. Jones, so it is of no use my saying that I +didn't do it; but if you ask Miss Scudamore, she will bear witness +that we were in bed hours before, and that there are bars on our +windows through which a cat could hardly get." + +The boys had never used Rhoda's room after the first night's +expedition, making their escape now by waiting until the house was +quiet, and then slipping along the passage to the spare room, and +thence by the window, returning in the same way. + +Under this continued worry, annoyance, and alarm, the schoolmaster +grew thin and worn, his school fell off more and more; for many of +the boys, whose rest was disturbed by all this racket, encouraged by +the example of the boys of the place who had already been taken away, +wrote privately to their friends. + +The result was that the parents of two or three more wrote to say +that their boys would not return after the holidays, and no one was +surprised when it became known that Mr. Jones was about to close his +school and leave the neighborhood. + +The excitement of the pranks that they had been playing had enabled +the boys to support the almost perpetual scoldings and complaints of +their aunt; but school once over, and their enemy driven from the +place, they made up their minds that they could no longer stand it. + +One day, therefore, when Rhoda had, as an extraordinary concession, +been allowed to go for a walk with them, they told her that they +intended to run away. + +Poor Rhoda was greatly distressed. + +"You see, Rhoda dear," Tom said, "although we don't like leaving you, +you will really be happier when we are gone. It is a perpetual worry +to you to hear aunt going on, on, on--nagging, nagging, nagging for +ever and ever at us. She is fond of you and kind to you, and you +would get on quietly enough without us, while now she is in a fidget +whenever you are with us, and is constantly at you not to learn +mischief and bad ways from us. Besides you are always in a fright now, +lest we should get into some awful scrape, as I expect we should if +we stopped here. If it weren't for you, we should not let her off as +easily as we do. No, no, Rhoda, it is better for us all that we should +go." + +Poor Rhoda, though she cried bitterly at the thought of losing her +brothers, yet could not but allow to herself that in many respects she +should be more happy when she was freed from anxiety, lest they should +get into some scrape, and when her aunt would not be kept in a state +of continued irritation and scolding. She felt too that, although she +herself could get on well enough in her changed life, that it was very +hard indeed for the boys, accustomed as they had been to the jolly and +independent life of a public school, and to be their own master during +the holidays, with their ponies, amusements, and their freedom to come +and go when they chose. Rhoda was a thoughtful child, and felt that +nothing that they could go through could do them more harm or make +them more unhappy than they now were. She had thought it all over day +after day, for she was sure that the boys would, sooner or later come +to it, and she had convinced herself that it was better for them. +Still it was with a very sad heart that she found that the time had +come. + +For some time she cried in silence, and then, drying her eyes, she +said, trying to speak bravely, though her lips quivered. + +"I shall miss you dreadfully, boys; but I will not say a word to keep +you here, for I am sure it is very, very bad for you. What do you mean +to do? Do you mean to go to sea?" + +"No, Rhoda; you see uncle was in the army, and used to talk to us +about that; and, as we have never seen the sea, we don't care for it +as some boys do. No, we shall try and go as soldiers." + +"But my dear Tom, they will never take you as soldiers; you are too +little." + +"Yes, we are not old enough to enlist at present," Tom said; "but we +might go in as buglers. We have thought it all over, and have been +paying old Wetherley, who was once in the band of a regiment, to teach +us the bugle, and he says we can sound all the calls now as well as +any bugler going. We did not like to tell you till we had made up our +minds to go; but we have gone regularly to him every day since the +first week we came here." + +"Then you won't have to fight, Tom," Rhoda said joyfully. + +"No," Tom said, in a rather dejected tone; "I am afraid they won't let +us fight; still we shall see fighting, which is the next best thing." + +"I heard in Warley yesterday that there will be a movement of the +army in Spain soon, and that some more troops will be sent out, and +we shall try and get into a regiment that is going." + +They talked very long and earnestly on their plans, and were so +engrossed that they quite forgot how time went, and got in late for +tea, and were terribly scolded in consequence. For once none of +them cared for the storm; the boys exulted over the thought that it +would be the last scolding they would have to suffer; and Rhoda had +difficulty in gasping down her tears at the thought that it was the +last meal that she would take with them, for they had settled that +they would start that very night. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +ENLISTED. + + +It was a bright moonlight night when the boys, after a sad farewell +from Rhoda, let themselves down from the window, and started upon +their journey. Each carried a bundle on a stick; each bundle contained +a suit of clothes, a few shirts and stockings, a pair of shoes, and a +pistol. The other pistols were carried loaded inside their jackets, +for there was no saying whom they might meet upon the road. They had +put on the oldest suit of clothes they possessed, so as to attract as +little attention as possible by the way. After they had once recovered +from their parting with Rhoda their spirits rose, and they tramped +along lightly and cheerfully. It was eleven o'clock when they started, +and through the night they did not meet a single person. Towards +morning they got under a haystack near the road, and slept for some +hours; then they walked steadily on until they had done twenty miles +since their start. They went into a small inn, and had some breakfast, +and then purchasing some bread and cold ham, went on through the town, +and leaving the London road, followed that leading to Portsmouth, and +after a mile or two again took up their quarters until evening, in a +haystack. + +It is not necessary to give the details of the journey to Portsmouth. +After the first two days' tramp, having no longer any fear of the +pursuit, which, no doubt, had been made for them when first missed, +they walked by day, and slept at night in sheds, or under haystacks, +as they were afraid of being questioned and perhaps stopped at inns. +They walked only short distances now, for the first night's long +journey had galled their feet, and, as Tom said, they were not pressed +for time, and did not want to arrive at Portsmouth like two limping +tramps. Walking, therefore, only twelve miles a day after the first +two days, they arrived at Portsmouth fresh and in high spirits. +They had met with no adventures upon the road, except that upon one +occasion two tramps had attempted to seize their bundles, but the +production of the pistols, and the evident determination of the boys +to use them if necessary, made the men abandon their intention and +make off, with much bad language and many threats, at which the boys +laughed disdainfully. + +Arrived at Portsmouth, their first care was to find a quiet little +inn, where they could put up. This they had little difficulty in +doing, for Portsmouth abounded with public-houses, and people were so +much accustomed to young fellows tramping in with their bundles, to +join their ships, that their appearance excited no curiosity whatever. +Tom looked older than he really was, although not tall for his age, +while Peter, if anything, overtopped his brother, but was slighter, +and looked fully two years younger. Refreshed by a long night's sleep +between sheets, they started out after breakfast to see the town, and +were greatly impressed and delighted by the bustle of the streets, +full of soldiers and sailors, and still more by the fortifications and +the numerous ships of war lying in the harbor, or out at Spithead. +A large fleet of merchantmen was lying off at anchor, waiting for a +convoy, and a perfect fleet of little wherries was plying backwards +and forwards between the vessels and the shore. + +"It makes one almost wish to be a sailor," Peter said, as they sat +upon the Southsea beach, and looked out at the animated ocean. + +"It does, Peter; and if it had been ten years back, instead of at +present, I should have been ready enough to change our plans. But what +is the use of going to sea now? The French and Spanish navies skulk in +harbor, and the first time our fellows get them out they will he sure +to smash them altogether, and then there is an end to all fighting. +No, Peter, it looks tempting, I grant, but we shall see ten times as +much with the army. We must go and settle the thing to-morrow. There +is no time to be lost if the expedition starts in a fortnight or three +weeks." + +Returning into the town, the boys were greatly amused at seeing a +sailor's wedding. Four carriages and pair drove along; inside were +women, while four sailors sat on each roof, waving their hats to the +passers-by, and refreshing themselves by repeated pulls at some black +bottles, with which they were well supplied. Making inquiries, the +boys found that the men belonged to a fine frigate which had come in a +day or two before, with several prizes. + +The next morning they went down to the barracks. Several +non-commissioned officers, with bunches of gay ribbons in their caps, +were standing about. Outside the gates were some boards, with notices, +"Active young fellows required. Good pay, plenty of prize-money, and +chances, of promotion!" + +The boys read several of these notices, which differed only from each +other in the name of the regiment; and then Tom gave an exclamation of +satisfaction as he glanced at a note at the foot of one of them, "Two +or three active lads wanted as buglers." + +"There we are, Peter; and, oh, what luck! it is Uncle Peter's +regiment! Look here, Peter," he said, after a pause, "we won't say +anything about being his nephews, unless there is no other way of +getting taken; for if we do it won't be nice. We shall be taken notice +of, and not treated like other fellows, and that will cause all sorts +of ill-feeling and jealousy, and rows. It will be quite time to say +who we are when we have done something to show that we shan't do +discredit to him. You see it isn't much in our favor that we are here +as two runaway boys. If we were older we could go as volunteers, but +of course we are too young for that." + +It should be mentioned that in those days it was by no means unusual +for young men who had not sufficient interest to get commissions to +obtain permission to accompany a regiment as volunteers. They paid +their own expenses, and lived with the officers, but did duty as +private soldiers. If they distinguished themselves, they obtained +commissions to fill up vacancies caused in action. + +"There is our sergeant, Tom; let's get it over at once." + +"If you please," Tom said, as they went up to the sergeant, "are you +the recruiting sergeant of the Norfolk Rangers?" + +"By Jove, Summers, you are in luck to-day," laughed one of the other +sergeants; "here are two valuable recruits for the Rangers. The +Mounseers will have no chance with the regiment with such giants as +those in it. Come, my fine fellows, let me persuade you to join the +15th. Such little bantams as you are would be thrown away upon the +Rangers." + +There was a shout of laughter from the other non-commissioned +officers. + +Tom was too much accustomed to chaffing bargees at Eton to be put out +of countenance. + +"We may be bantams," he said, "but I have seen a bantam lick a big +dunghill cock many a time. Fine feathers don't always make fine birds, +my man." + +"Well answered, young one," the sergeant of the Rangers said, while +there was a general laugh among the others, for the sergeant of the +15th was not a favorite. + +"You think yourself sharp, youngster," he said angrily. "You want a +licking, you do; and if you were in the 15th, you'd get it pretty +quickly." + +"Oh! I beg your pardon," Tom said gravely; "I did not know that the +15th were famous for thrashing boys. Thank you; when I enlist it shall +be in a regiment where men hit fellows their own size." + +There was a shout of laughter, and the sergeant, enraged, stepped +forward, and gave Tom a swinging box on the ear. + +There was a cry of "shame" from the others; but before any of them +could interfere, Tom suddenly stooped, caught the sergeant by the +bottom of the trousers, and in an instant he fell on his back with a +crash. + +For a moment he was slightly stunned, and then, regaining his feet, he +was about to rush at Tom, when the others threw themselves in between +them, and said he should not touch the boy. He struck him first, and +the boy had only given him what served him right. + +The sergeant was furious, and an angry quarrel was going on, when an +officer of the Rangers came suddenly out of barrack. + +"Hullo, Summers, what is all this about? I am surprised at you. A lot +of non-commissioned officers, just in front of the barrack gates, +quarreling like drunken sailors in a pothouse. What does it all mean?" + +"The fact is this, Captain Manley," the sergeant said, saluting, +"these two lads came up to speak to me, when Sergeant Billow chaffed +them. The lad gave the sergeant as good as he got, and the sergeant +lost his temper, and hit him a box on the ear, and in a moment the +young one tripped him up, and pretty nigh stunned him; when he got up +he was going at the boy, and, of course, we wouldn't have it." + +"Quite right," Captain Manley said. "Sergeant Billow, I shall forward +a report to your regiment. Chaffing people in the street, and then +losing your temper, striking a boy, and causing a disturbance. Now, +sergeant," he went on, as the others moved away, "do you know those +boys?" + +"No, sir; they are strangers to me." + +"Do you want to see the sergeant privately, lads, or on something +connected with the regiment?" + +"I see that you have vacancies for buglers, sir," Tom said, "and my +brother and myself want to enlist if you will take us." + +Captain Manley smiled. "You young scamps, you have got 'runaway from +home' as plainly on your faces as if it was printed there. If we +were to enlist you, we should be having your friends here after you +to-morrow, and get into a scrape for taking you." + +"We have no friends who will interfere with us, sir, I can give you my +word of honor as a gentleman." Captain Manley laughed. "I mean," Tom +said confused, "my word of honor, as--as an intending bugler." + +"Indeed we have no one to interfere with us in any way, sir," Peter +put in earnestly. "We wouldn't tell a lie even to enlist in the +Rangers." + +Captain Manley was struck by the earnestness of the boys' faces, and +after a pause he said to the sergeant,-- + +"That will do, Summers; I will take these lads up to my quarters and +speak to them." + +Then, motioning to the boys to follow him, he re-entered the barracks, +and led the way up to his quarters. + +"Sit down," he said, when they had entered his room. "Now, boys, this +is a foolish freak upon your part, which you will regret some day. Of +course you have run away from school." + +"No, sir, we have run away from home," Tom said. + +"So much the worse," Captain Manley said gravely. "Tell me frankly, +why did you do so? No unkindness at home can excuse boys from running +away from their parents." + +"We have none, sir," Tom said. "We have lost them both--our mother +many years ago, our father six months. Our only living relation, +except a younger sister, is an aunt, who considers us as nuisances, +and who, although meaning to do her duty, simply drives us out of our +minds." + +Captain Manley could not resist a smile. "Do you not go to school?" + +"We did go to a school near, but unfortunately it is broken up." + +Captain Manley caught a little look of amusement between the boys. "I +should not be surprised if you had something to do with its breaking +up," he said with a laugh. "But to return to your coming here. There +is certainly less reason against your joining than I thought at first, +but you are too young." + +"We are both strong, and are good walkers," Tom said. + +"But you cannot be much over fifteen," Captain Manley said, "and your +brother is younger." + +"We are accustomed to strong exercise, sir, and can thrash most +fellows of our own size." + +"Very likely," Captain Manley said, "but we can't take that into +consideration. You are certainly young for buglers for service work; +however, I will go across with you to the orderly-room, and hear what +the colonel says." + +Crossing the barrack-yard, they found the colonel was in and +disengaged. + +"Colonel Tritton," Captain Manley said, "these lads want to enlist as +buglers." + +The colonel looked up and smiled. "They look regular young pickles," +he said. "I suppose they have run away from school." + +"Not from school, colonel. They have lost both parents, and live with +an aunt, with whom they don't get on well. There does not seem to be +much chance of their being claimed." + +"You are full young," the colonel said, "and I think you will be +sorry, boys, for the step you want to take." + +"I don't think so, sir," Tom said. + +"Of course, you don't at present," the colonel said. "However, that is +your business. Mind, you will have a rough time of it; you will have +to fight your way, you know." + +"I'll back them to hold their own," Captain Manley said, laughing. +"When I went out at the barrack-gate just now there was a row among a +lot of recruiting sergeants, and when I went up to put a stop to it, I +found that a fellow of the 15th had chaffed these boys when they went +up to speak to Summers, and that they had got the best of it in that +line; and the fellow having lost his temper and struck one of them, he +found himself on his back on the pavement. The boy had tripped him up +in an instant." + +The colonel laughed, and then said suddenly and sharply to Peter, +"Where did you learn that trick, youngster?" + +"At Eton," Peter answered promptly, and then colored up hotly at his +brother's reproachful glance. + +"Oh, ho! At Eton, young gentlemen, eh!" the colonel said. "That +alters the matter. If you were at Eton your family must be people of +property, and I can't let you do such a foolish thing as enlist as +buglers." + +"Our father lost all his money suddenly, owing to a blackguard he +trusted cheating him. He found it out, and it killed him," Tom said +quietly. + +The colonel saw he was speaking the truth. "Well, well," he said +kindly, "we must see what we can do for you, boys. They are young, +Manley, but that will improve, and by the time that they have been a +year at the depot--" + +"Oh, if you please, colonel," Tom said, "we want to go on foreign +service, and it's knowing that your regiment was under orders for +foreign service we came to it." + +"Impossible!" the colonel said shortly. + +"I am very sorry for that, sir," Tom said respectfully, "for we would +rather belong to this regiment than any in the service; but if you +will not let us go with it we must try another." + +"Why would you rather belong to us than to any other?" the colonel +asked, as the boys turned to leave the room. + +"I had rather not say, sir," Tom said. "We have a reason, and a very +good one, but it is not one we should like to tell." + +The colonel was silent for a minute. He was struck with the boys' +appearance and manner, and was sorry at the thought of losing them, +partly from interest in themselves, partly because the sea service was +generally so much more attractive to boys, that it was not easy to get +them to enlist as buglers and drummers. + +"You see, lads, I should really like to take you, but we shall be +starting in a fortnight, and it would be altogether impossible for you +to learn to sound the bugle, to say nothing of learning the calls, by +that time." + +"We can't play well, sir," Tom answered, his spirits rising again, +"but we have practiced for some time, and know a good many of the +calls." + +"Oh, indeed!" the colonel said, pleased; "that alters the case. Well, +lads, I should like to take you with the regiment, for you look +straightforward, sharp young fellows. So I will enlist you. Work hard +for the next fortnight, and if I hear a favorable report of you by +that time, you shall go." + +"Thank you very much," the boys said warmly, delighted to find their +hopes realized. + +"What are your names?" the colonel asked. + +"Tom and Peter," Tom answered. + +"Tom and Peter what?" the colonel said. + +The boys looked at each other. The fact that they would of course +be asked their names had never occurred to them, and they not had +therefore consulted whether to give their own or another name. + +"Come, boys," Colonel Tritton said good-temperedly, "never be ashamed +of your names; don't sail under false colors, lads. I am sure you will +do nothing to disgrace your names." + +Tom looked at Peter, and saw that he agreed to give their real names, +so he said, "Tom and Peter Scudamore." + +"Peter Scudamore! Why, Manley, these boys must be relations of the +dear old colonel. That explains why they chose the regiment. Now, +boys, what relation was he of yours?" + +"I do not admit that he was a relation at all, colonel," Tom said +gravely, "and I hope that you will not ask the question. Supposing +that he had been a relation of ours, we should not wish it to be +known. In the first place, it would not be altogether creditable to +his memory that relations of his should be serving as buglers in +his old regiment; and in the second place, it might be that, from +a kindness towards him, some of the officers might, perhaps, treat +us differently to other boys, which would make our position more +difficult by exciting jealousy among others. Should there be any +relation between him and us, it will be time enough for us to claim +it when we have shown ourselves worthy of it." + +"Well said, boys," the officers both exclaimed. "You are quite right," +the colonel went on, "and I respect your motive for keeping silence. +What you say about jealousy which might arise is very sensible and +true. At the same time, I will promise you that I will keep my eye +upon you, and that if an opportunity should occur in which I can give +you a chance of showing that there is more in you than in other boys, +be sure you shall have the chance." + +"Thank you very much indeed, colonel," both boys exclaimed. + +"Now, Manley, I shall be obliged if you will take them to the +adjutant, and tell him to swear them in and attest them in regular +form; the surgeon will, of course, examine them. Please tell the +quartermaster to get their uniforms made without loss of time; and +give a hint to the bugle-major that I should be pleased if he will pay +extra attention to them, and push them on as fast as possible." + +Captain Manley carried out these instructions, the boys were duly +examined by the surgeon and passed, and in half an hour became His +Majesty's servants. + +"Now, boys," Captain Manley said as he crossed with them to the +quarters of the bandmaster, "you will have rather a difficult course +to steer, but I have no doubt you will get through it with credit. +This is something like a school, and you will have to fight before you +find your place. Don't be in a hurry to begin; take all good-natured +chaff good-naturedly; resent any attempt at bullying. I have no doubt +you will be popular, and it is well that you should be so, for then +there will be no jealousy if your luck seems better than that of +others. They will, of course, know that you are differently born and +educated to themselves, but they will not like you any the worse for +that, if they find that you do not try to keep aloof from them or give +yourselves airs. And look here, boys, play any tricks you like with +the men, but don't do it with the non-commissioned officers. There is +nothing they hate so much as impudence from the boys, and they have +it in their power to do you a great deal of good or of harm. You will +not have much to do with the bandmaster. Only a portion of the band +accompanies us, and even that will be broken up when we once enter +upon active campaigning. Several of the company buglers have either +left lately, or have got their stripes and given up their bugles, and +I do not fancy that their places will be filled up before we get out +there. Now, your great object will be to get two of these vacancies. I +am afraid you are too young, still there will be plenty more vacancies +after we are once in the field, for a bullet has no respect for +buglers; and you see the better you behave the better your chance of +being chosen." + +"What is the difference exactly, sir?" Tom asked. + +"The company bugler ranks on the strength of the company, messes, +marches, and goes into action with them; the other buglers merely form +part of the band, are under the bandmaster, play at the head of the +regiment on its march, and help in the hospitals during a battle." + +"Macpherson," he said as he entered the bandmaster's quarters, where a +number of men and a few lads were practicing, "I have brought you two +lads who have entered as buglers." + +The bandmaster was a Scotchman--a stiff-looking, elderly man. + +"Weel, Captain Manley, I'm wanting boys, but they look vera young, and +I misdoubt they had better have been at school than here. However, +I'll do my best with them; they look smart lads, and we shall have +plenty of time at the depot to get them into shape." + +"Lots of time, Macpherson, lots of time. They say they know a few +calls on the bugle, so perhaps they had better stick to the calls at +present; you will have plenty of time to begin with them regularly +with the notes when all the bustle is over." + +"Eh, ye know the calls, boys? Hardy and Graves, give them your bugles, +and let us hear them. Now for the advance." + +Tom and Peter felt very nervous, but they had really practiced hard +for an hour a day for the last four months, and could play all the +calls they knew steadily and well. The bandmaster made no remark until +they had sounded some half a dozen calls as he named them, and then +he said, "The lads have a vera gude idea of it, Captain Manley. They +are steadier and clearer than mony a one of the boys already. Will ye +begin at once, lads, or will ye wait till ye get your uniform?" + +"We had rather begin at once," the boys answered together. + +"Vera gude. Hardy, take two bugles out of the chest, and then take +these lads--What's your name, boys? Eh? Scudamore? A vera gude +name--take them over to Corporal Skinner, he will be practicing with +the others on the ramp." + +With a word of grateful thanks to Captain Manley as he went out before +them, the boys followed their new guide out to the ramparts. A guide +was hardly necessary, for an incessant bugling betokened the place, +where, in one of the bastions behind the barracks, seven or eight +buglers were sounding the various calls under the direction of +Corporal Skinner. + +The corporal was a man of few words, for he merely nodded when the +boy--who had not opened his lips on the way, indeed, he was too busy +wondering who these young swells were, and what they had run away for, +to say a word--gave the bandmaster's message to the effect that the +new-comers knew some of the calls and were to be under his tuition for +the present, pointed to them where to stand, and in another minute Tom +and Peter were hard at work adding to the deafening din. After half +an hour's practice they were pleased at seeing Captain Manley stroll +up and call their instructor aside, and they felt sure that he was +speaking to him of them. This was so, for the officer was carrying out +the instructions he had received from Colonel Tritton. + +"Corporal," he said, "I want to say a word to you about those boys who +have just joined. They seem to have a fair idea of the calls." + +"Yes, sir, they only know a few, but those they do know they can sound +as well as any of them." + +"That is right, corporal. Now look here, what I am going to say is not +to go farther, you understand." + +"Yes, sir, I will keep my mouth shut." + +"Very well. You can see the lads are not like most of our band boys. +They are a gentleman's sons who have got into some scrape or other and +run away from school." + +"I was thinking as much, sir." + +"The colonel believes that he knows their family, Skinner; but of +course, that will not make any difference in regard to them. Still he +would be pleased, I know, if they could sound the calls well enough to +go with the regiment. They are most anxious to learn. Now I shall be +glad if you can get them up to the mark. It will, of course, entail a +lot of extra trouble upon you, but if you can get them fit in time, I +will pay you a couple of guineas for your extra time." + +"Thank you, sir," the corporal saluted. "I think I can manage it--at +any rate if I don't it won't be for want of trying." + +"Who are those nice-looking lads I saw with you, Manley?" Major James +asked as the captain came into the messroom to lunch. + +"Those are two buglers in his Majesty's Norfolk Rangers." + +There was a general laugh. + +"No, but really, Manley, who are they? I was quite struck with them; +good style of boys." + +"It is a fact, major. Harding will tell you so," and he nodded to the +adjutant. + +"Yes, Manley is saying the thing that's right," the adjutant answered. +"The doctor passed them, and I swore them in." + +"I am sorry for it," the major said. "There were three or four of us +standing on the mess-room steps and we all noticed them. They were +gentlemen, if I ever saw one, and a hard life they will have of it +with the band boys. However, they are not likely to stay there. They +have run away from school, of course, and will be claimed. I wonder +you enlisted them." + +"The colonel's orders, major," the adjutant said. "Manley took them to +him, I believe, and then brought them to me." + +"I don't think you need feel anxious about them among the boys, +major," Captain Manley said. "I fancy they can hold their own. I +found them outside the gate where a row was going on among some of +the recruiting sergeants, and one of those boys had just tripped up +a sergeant of the 15th and nearly broken his head." + +There was a general laugh. + +"They are quite interesting, these prodigies of yours, Manley. How did +the boy do it? I should not have thought him strong enough to have +thrown a man off his balance." + +"I asked Summers about it afterwards," Captain Manley said, "the +fellow gave one of the boys a box on the ear, and in an instant the +boy stooped, caught his foot and pulled it forward and up. The thing +was done in a moment, and the sergeant was on his back before he knew +what's what." + +"By Jove," a young ensign said, "I have seen that trick done at Eton." + +"That is just where the boy said he learnt it," Captain Manley said. +"The colonel asked him suddenly, and it slipped out." + +"If they're Etonians, I ought to know them," the ensign said. "I only +left six months ago. What are their names?" + +"Their name is Scudamore." + +"By Jove, they were in the same house with me. Uncommonly sharp little +fellows, and up to no end of mischief. It was always believed, though +no one could prove it, that they were the boys who nearly suffocated +the bargee." + +There was a roar of laughter. + +"Tell us all about, Carruthers." + +"Well, there was not very much known about it. It seems the fellow +purposely upset a boat with four or five of our fellows in it, and +that night a dozen lighted crackers were thrown down into the little +cabin where the fellow was asleep; the hatch was fastened and he +was sent drifting down stream with the crackers exploding all about +him. The smoke nearly suffocated the fellow, I believe There was a +tremendous row about it, but they could not bring it home to any one. +We always put it down to the Scudamores, though they never would own +to it; but they were the only fellows in the boat who would have done +it, and they were always up to mischief." + +"But what makes them come here as buglers?" the major asked. + +"Their father was a banker, I believe, down in the Eastern Counties +somewhere. He died suddenly in the middle of the half before I left, +and they went away to the funeral and never came back again." + +"The fact is," Captain Manley said, "I fancy by what they say, though +they did not mention their father was a banker, that he lost all his +money suddenly and died of the shock. At any rate they are alone +in the world, and the colonel has no doubt that they are some +relation--nephews, I should imagine--of Peter Scudamore, who was our +colonel when I joined. One of them is called Peter. They acknowledged +that they had a particular reason for choosing this regiment; but +they would neither acknowledge or deny that he was a relation. Now +that we know their father was a banker, we shall find out without +difficulty--indeed I have no doubt the colonel will know whether Peter +Scudamore had a brother a banker." + +"What's to be done, Manley?" Major James said. "I don't like the +thought of poor old Peter's nephews turning buglers. All of us field +officers, and the best part of you captains, served under him, and +a better fellow never stepped. I think between us we might do +something." + +"I would do anything I could," Carruthers said, "and there are Watson +and Talbot who were at Eton too. Dash it, I don't like to think of two +Etonians in a band," "You are all very good," Captain Manley said, +"but from what I see of the boys they will go their own way. They have +plenty of pride, and they acknowledge that their reason for refusing +to say whether they are any relation of the colonel was that they +did not want to be taken notice of or treated differently from other +boys, because it would cause jealousy, and make their position more +difficult. All they asked was that they might accompany the regiment, +and not remain behind at the depot; and as, fortunately, they have +both been practising with the bugle, and can sound most of the calls +as well as the others, the colonel was able to grant their request. +Had they been older, of course, we could have arranged for them to go +with us as volunteers, we who knew the colonel, paying their expenses +between us: as it is, the only thing we can do for them--and that is +what they would like best is to treat them just like the other boys, +but to give them every chance of distinguishing themselves. If they +don't get knocked over, they ought to win a commission before the +campaign is over." + +In the meantime Tom and Peter had been introducing themselves to the +regiment. The exercise over, they had returned to dinner. It was a +rough meal, but the boys enjoyed it, and after it was over a number +of the men of the band, with whom they messed, crowded round to ask +the usual questions of new-comers--their curiosity heightened in the +present instance by the fact that the boys differed so widely from +ordinary recruits. + +"Look here," Tom said, laughing, "I can't answer you all at once, but +if you put me on the table I will tell you all about us." + +There was a general laugh, and many of the soldiers other than the +band sauntered up to see what was going on. + +"The first thing to tell you," Tom said, "is our names. We go by the +names of Tom and Peter Scudamore, but I need scarcely tell you that +these are not our real names. The fact is--but this is quite a +secret--we are the eldest sons of Sir Arthur Wellesley--" + +Here Tom was interrupted by a shout of laughter. + +"Sir Arthur," Tom went on calmly, "wished to make us colonels of two +of the Life Guard regiments, but as they were not going on foreign +service we did not see it, and have accordingly entered the regiment +which Sir Arthur, our father, in speaking to a friend, said was the +finest in the service--namely, the Norfolk Rangers. We believe that +it is the custom, upon entering a regiment, to pay our footing, and I +have given a guinea to Corporal Skinner, and asked him to make it go +as far as he could." + +There was great laughter over Tom's speech, which was just suited to +soldiers, and the boys from that moment were considered part of the +regiment. + +"There's good stuff in those boys," an old sergeant said to another, +"plucky and cool. I shouldn't be surprised if what Tom Dillon said +was about right; he was waiting at mess just now, and though he didn't +hear all that was said, he picked up that there was an idea that +these boys are related to the old colonel. He was a good fellow, he +was, and, though I say nothing against Colonel Tritton, yet we missed +Colonel Scudamore terribly. Strict, and yet kind, just the sort of +fellow to serve under. If the boys take after him they will be a +credit to the regiment, and mark my words, we shan't see them in the +band many years." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +A TOUGH CUSTOMER. + + +Like most boys who are fond of play, Tom and Peter Scudamore were +capable of hard work at a pinch, and during the three weeks that +they spent at Portsmouth they certainly worked with a will. They had +nothing to do in the way of duty, except to practice the bugle, and +this they did with a zeal and perseverance that quite won the heart +of Corporal Skinner, and enabled him to look upon Captain Manley's +two guineas as good as earned. But even with the best will and the +strongest lungs possible, boys can only blow a bugle a certain number +of hours a day. For an hour before breakfast, for two hours before +dinner, and for an hour and a half in the evening they practiced, the +evening work being extra, alone with their instructor. There remained +the whole afternoon to themselves. Their employment of those hours had +been undertaken at Peter's suggestion. + +"Look here, Tom," he said, at the end of the first day's work, "from +what the corporal says, we shall have from one till about five to +ourselves. Now, we are going to Spain, and it seems to me that it +would be of great use to us, and might do us a great deal of good, to +know something of Spanish. We have got four pounds each left, and I +don't think that we could lay it out better than in getting a Spanish +master and some books, and in setting to in earnest at it. If we work +with all our might for four hours a day with a master, we shall have +made some progress, and shall pick up the pronunciation a little. I +dare say we shall be another ten days or a fortnight on the voyage, +and shall have lots of time on our hands. It will make it so much +easier to pick it up when we get there if we know a little to start +with." + +"I think it is a capital idea, Peter; I should think we are pretty +sure to find a master here." + +There was no difficulty upon that score, for there were a large number +of Spanish in England at the time; men who had left the country rather +than remain under the French yoke, and among them were many who were +glad to get their living by teaching their native language. There were +two or three in this condition in Portsmouth, and to one of these the +boys applied. He was rather surprised at the application from the two +young buglers--for the uniforms were finished twenty-four hours after +their arrival--but at once agreed to devote his whole afternoons to +them. Having a strong motive for their work, and a determination +to succeed in it, the boys made a progress that astonished both +themselves and their teacher, and they now found the advantage of +their grounding in Latin at Eton. Absorbed in their work, they saw +little of the other boys, except at meals and when at practice. + +One evening when at supper, one of the buglers, named Mitcham, a lad +of nearly eighteen, made some sneering remark about boys who thought +themselves above others, and gave themselves airs. Tom saw at once +that this allusion was meant for them, and took the matter up. + +"I suppose you mean us, Mitcham. You are quite mistaken; neither my +brother nor myself think ourselves better than any one, nor have we +any idea of giving ourselves airs. The fact is--and I am not surprised +that you should think us unsociable--we are taking lessons in Spanish. +If we go with the regiment it will be very useful, and I have heard +it said that any one who lands in a foreign country, and who knows a +little of the grammar and pronunciation, will learn it in half the +time that he would were he altogether ignorant of both. I am sorry +that I did not mention it before, because I can understand that it +must seem as if we did not want to be sociable. I can assure you that +we do; and that after this fortnight is over we shall be ready to be +as jolly as any one. You see we are altogether behindhand with our +work now, and have got to work hard to put ourselves on your level." + +Tom spoke so good-temperedly that there was a general feeling in his +favor, and several of them who had before thought with Mitcham, that +the new-comers were not inclined to be sociable, felt that they had +been mistaken. There was, however, a general feeling of surprise +and amusement at the idea of two boys voluntarily taking lessons in +Spanish. Mitcham, however, who was a surly-tempered young fellow, and +who was jealous of the progress which the boys were making, and of the +general liking with which they seemed to be regarded, said,-- + +"I believe that's only an excuse for getting away from us." + +"Do you mean to say that you think that I am telling a lie?" Tom asked +quietly. + +"Yes, if you put it in that way, young 'un," Mitcham said. + +"Hold your tongue, Mitcham, or I'll pull your ears for you," Corporal +Skinner said: but his speech was cut short by Tom's putting one hand +on the barrack table, vaulting across it, and striking Mitcham a heavy +blow between the eyes. + +There was a cry of "a fight!" among the boys, but the men interfered +at once. + +"You don't know what you are doing, young 'un," one said to Tom; +"when you hit a fellow here, you must fight him. That's the rule, and +you can't fight Mitcham; he's two years older, at least, and a head +taller." + +"Of course I will fight him," Tom said. "I would fight him if he were +twice as big, if he called me a liar." + +"Nonsense, young 'un!" another said, "it's not possible. He was wrong, +and if you had not struck him I would have licked him myself; but as +you have done so, you had better put up with a thrashing, and have +done with it." + +"I should think so, indeed!" Tom said disdainfully. "I may get a +licking; I dare say I shall; but it won't be all on one side. Look +here, Mitcham, we will have it out to-morrow, on the ramparts behind +the barracks. But, if you will apologize to me for calling me a liar, +I'll say I am sorry I hit you." + +"Oh, blow your sorrow!" the lad said. "I'll give you the heartiest +licking you ever had in your life, my young cock." + +"Oh, all right," Tom said cheerfully. "We will see all about it when +the time comes." + +As it was evident now that there was no way out of it, no one +interfered further in the matter. Quarrels in the army are always +settled by a fair fight, as at school; but several of the older men +questioned among themselves whether they ought to let this go on, +considering that Tom Scudamore was only between fifteen and sixteen, +while his opponent was two years older, and was so much heavier and +stronger. However, as it was plain that Tom would not take a thrashing +for the blow he had struck, and there did not seem any satisfactory +way out of it, nothing was done, except that two or three of them went +up to Mitcham, and strongly urged him to shake hands with Tom, and +confess that he had done wrong in giving him the lie. This Mitcham +would not hear of, and there was nothing further to be done. + +"I am afraid, Tom, you have no chance with that fellow." Peter said, +as they were undressing. + +"No chance in the world, Peter; but I can box fairly, you know, and am +pretty hard. I shall be able to punish him a bit, and you may be sure +I shall never give in. It's no great odds getting a licking, and I +suppose that they will stop it before I am killed. Don't bother about +it. I had rather get knocked about in a fight than get flogged at Eton +any day. I would rather you did not come to see it, Peter, if you +don't mind. When you fought Evans it hurt me ten times as much as if I +had been fighting, and, although you licked him, it made me feel like +a girl. I can stand twice the punishment if I don't feel that any blow +is hitting you as well as myself." + +Tom's prediction about the fight turned out to be nearly correct. He +was more active, and a vastly better boxer than his antagonist, and +although he was constantly knocked down, he punished him very heavily +about the face. In fact, the fight was exactly similar to that great +battle, fifty years afterwards, between Sayers and Heenan. Time after +time Tom was knocked down, and even his second begged him to give in, +but he would not hear of it. Breathless and exhausted, but always +cool and smiling, he faced his heavy antagonist, eluding his furious +rushes, and managing to strike a few straight blows at his eyes before +being knocked down. By the time that they had fought a quarter of +an hour half the regiment was assembled, and loud were the cheers +which greeted Tom each time he came up, very pale and bleeding, but +confident, against his antagonist. + +At last an old sergeant came forward. "Come," he said, "there has been +enough of this. You had better stop." + +"Will he say he was sorry he called me a liar?" Tom asked. + +"No, I won't," Mitcham answered. + +The sergeant was about to use his authority to stop it, when Tom said +to him, in a low voice: + +"Look, sergeant! please let us go on another five minutes. I think I +can stand that, and he can hardly see out of his eyes now. He won't +see a bit by that time." + +The sergeant hesitated, but a glance at Tom's antagonist convinced him +that what he said was correct. Mitcham had at all times a round and +rather puffy face, and his cheeks were now so swollen with the effect +of Tom's straight, steady hitting, that he could with difficulty see. + +It was a hard five minutes for Tom, for his antagonist, finding that +he was rapidly getting blind, rushed with fury upon him, trying to end +the fight. Tom had less difficulty in guarding the blows, given wildly +and almost at random, but he was knocked down time after time by the +mere force and weight of the rush. He felt himself getting weak, and +could hardly get up from his second's knee upon the call of time. +He was not afraid of being made to give in, but he was afraid of +fainting, and of so being unable to come up to time. + +"Stick a knife into me; do anything!" he said to his second, "if I go +off, only bring me up to time. He can't hold out much longer." + +Nor could he. His hitting became more and more at random, until at +last, on getting up from his second's knee, Mitcham cried in a hoarse +voice, "Where is he? I can't see him!" + +Then Tom went forward with his hands down. "Look here, Mitcham, you +can't see, and I can hardly stand. I think we have both done enough. +We neither of us can give in, well because--because I am a gentleman, +you because you are bigger than I am; so let's shake hands, and say no +more about it." + +Mitcham hesitated an instant, and then held out his hand. "You are a +good fellow, Scudamore, and there's my hand; but you have licked me +fairly. I can't come up to time, and you can. There, I am sorry I +called you a liar." + +Tom took the hand, and shook it, and then a mist came over his eyes, +and his knees tottered, as, with the ringing cheers of the men in his +ears, he fainted into his second's arms. + +"What a row the men are making!" the major said, as the sound of +cheering came through the open window of the mess-room, at which the +officers were sitting at lunch. "It's a fight of course, and a good +one, judging by the cheering. Does any one know who it is between?" + +No one had heard. + +"It's over now," the adjutant said, looking out of the window, "Here +are the men coming down in a stream. They look very excited over it. I +wonder who it has been. Stokes," he said, turning to one of the mess +servants, "go out, and find out who has been fighting, and all about +it." + +In a minute or two the man returned. "It's two of the band boys, sir." + +"Oh, only two boys! I wonder they made such a fuss over that. Who are +they?" + +"One was one of the boys who have just joined, sir. Tom Scudamore, +they call him." + +"I guessed as much," Captain Manley laughed; "I knew they would not be +long here without a fight. Who was the other?" + +"Well, sir, I almost thought it must be a mistake when they told me, +seeing they are so unequally matched, but they all say so, so in +course it's true--the other was Mitcham, the bugler of No. 3 Company." + +"What a shame!" was the general exclamation, while Captain Manley got +up and called for his cap. + +"A brutal shame, I call it," he said hotly. "Mitcham's nearly a man. +It ought not to have been allowed. I will go and inquire after the +boy. I will bet five pounds he was pretty nearly killed before he gave +in." + +"He didn't give in, Captain Manley," the servant said. "He won the +fight. They fought till Mitcham couldn't see, and then young Scudamore +went up and offered to draw it, but Mitcham acknowledged he was fairly +licked. It was a close thing, for the boy fainted right off; but he's +come round now, and says he's all right." + +"Hurrah for Eton!" Carruthers shouted enthusiastically. "Hurrah! By +Jove, he is game, and no mistake. He won a hard fight or two at Eton, +but nothing like this. I call it splendid." + +"The boy might have been killed," the major said gravely; while the +younger officers joined in Carruthers's exclamation at Tom's pluck. +"It is shameful that it was allowed. I suppose the quarrel began in +their quarters. Sergeant Howden is in charge of the room, and ought to +have stopped it at once. Every non-commissioned officer ought to have +stopped it. I will have Howden up before the colonel to-morrow." + +"I think, major," Captain Manley said, "if you will excuse me, the +best plan, as far as the boy is concerned, is to take no notice of +it. As it is, he must have won the hearts of all the regiment by his +pluck, and if he is not seriously hurt, it is the very best thing, as +it has turned out, that could have happened. If any one gets into a +scrape about it, it might lessen the effect of the victory. I think if +you call Howden up, and give him a quiet wigging, it will do as well, +and won't injure the boys. What do you think?" + +"Yes, you are right, Manley, as it has turned out; but the boy might +have been killed. However, I won't do more than give Howden a hearty +wigging, and will then learn how the affair begun. I think, Dr. +Stathers, that it would be as well if you went round and saw both of +them. You had better, I think, order them into hospital for the night, +and then the boy can go to bed at once, and come out again to-morrow, +if he has, as I hope, nothing worse than a few bruises. Please come +back, and tell us how you find them." + +The report was favorable, and the next morning Tom came out of +hospital, and took his place as usual, with the party upon the +ramparts--pale, and a good deal marked, but not much the worse for his +battle; but it was some days before the swelling of his adversary's +face subsided sufficiently for him to return to duty. + +Tom's victory--as Captain Manley had predicted--quite won the hearts +of the whole regiment, and the nicknames of "Sir Tom," and "Sir +Peter"--which had been given to them in jest after Tom's speech +about Sir Arthur Wellesley--were now generally applied to them. The +conversation in the mess-room had got about, and the old soldiers who +had served under Colonel Scudamore would have done anything for the +lads, although, as yet, they were hardly known personally except to +the band, as their devotion to work kept them quite apart from the +men. + +It was just three weeks after they had joined before the order came +for embarkation, and a thrill of pleasure and excitement ran through +the regiment when it was known that they were to go on board in four +days. Not the least delighted were Tom and Peter. It had already been +formally settled that they were to accompany the regiment, and it +was a proof of the popularity that they had gained, that every one +looked upon their going as a matter of course, and that no comment +was excited even among those who were left behind. Three days before +starting they had met Captain Manley in the barrack-yard, and after +saluting, Tom said, "If you please, sir, we wanted to ask you a +question." + +"What is that, lads?" + +"If you please, sir, we understand that the boys of the band have +their bags carried for them, but the company buglers carry knapsacks, +like the men?" + +"Yes, boys; the company buglers carry knapsacks and muskets." + +"I am afraid we could not carry muskets and do much marching, sir, but +we have each a brace of pistols." + +Captain Manley smiled. "Pistols would not look the thing on a +parade-ground, boys; but in a campaign people are not very particular, +and I have no doubt the colonel will overlook any little breach of +strict uniformity in your cases, as it is evident you can't carry +muskets. You can use your pistols, I hope," he said with a smile. "Hit +a penny every time at twenty paces!" + +"No, sir, we can't do that," Tom said seriously. "We can hit a +good-sized apple nineteen times out of twenty." + +"The deuce you can!" Captain Manley said. "How did you learn to do +that?" + +"We have practiced twelve shots a day for the last six months, sir. We +were thinking of asking you, sir, if you would like to carry a brace +of them through the campaign. They are splendid weapons; and we shall +only carry one each. They would get rusty and spoil, if we left them +behind, and we should be very pleased to think they might be useful to +you, after your great kindness to us." + +"It is not a very regular thing, boys," Captain Manley said, "for a +captain to be borrowing a brace of pistols from two of his buglers; +but you are exceptional buglers, and there is something in what you +say about rusting. Besides, it is possible you may lose yours, so I +will accept your offer with thanks, with the understanding that I will +carry the pistols, and you shall have them again if anything happens +to yours. But how about the knapsacks?" + +"We were thinking of having two made of the regimental pattern, sir, +but smaller and lighter, if you think that it would be allowed." + +"Well, I think, boys, if you are allowed to carry pistols instead of +muskets, no great objection will be made as to the exact size of the +knapsacks. Yes, you can get them made, and I will speak to the colonel +about it." + +"Perhaps," he hesitated, "you may be in want of a little money; do +not hesitate if you do. I can let you have five pounds, and you +can pay me," he said with a laugh, "out of your share of our first +prize-money." + +The boys colored hotly. + +"No, thank you, Captain Manley; we have plenty of money. Shall we +bring the pistols to your quarters?" + +"Do, lads, I am going in to lunch now, and will be in in half an +hour." + +The boys at once went out and ordered their knapsacks. They had just +sold their watches, which were large, handsome, and of gold, and had +been given to them by their father when they went to Eton. They were +very sorry to part with them, but they agreed that it would be folly +to keep gold watches when the twenty pounds which they obtained for +them would buy two stout and useful silver watches and would leave +them twelve pounds in money. They then returned to barracks, took out +a brace of their pistols, carefully cleaned them, and removed the +silver plates upon the handles, and then walked across to Captain +Manley's quarters. + +Rather to their surprise and confusion they found five or six other +officers there, for Captain Manley had mentioned at lunch to the +amusement of his friends that he was going to be unexpectedly provided +with a brace of pistols, and several of them at once said that they +would go up with him to his quarters, as they wanted to see the boys +of whom they had spoken so much during the last fortnight. Tom and +Peter drew themselves up and saluted stiffly. + +"You need not be buglers here, boys," Captain Manley said. "This is +my room, we are all gentlemen, and though I could not, according +to the regulations, walk down the street with you, the strictest +disciplinarian would excuse my doing as I like here." + +The boys flushed with pleasure at Captain Manley's kind address, and +as he finished Carruthers stepped forward and shook them warmly by the +hand. + +"How are you both?" he said. "You have not forgotten me, I hope." + +"I had not seen you before. I did not know you were in the regiment, +Carruthers," the boys said warmly, pleased to find a face they +had known before; and then breaking off:--"I beg your pardon--Mr. +Carruthers." + +"There are no misters here as far as I am concerned, Scudamore. There +were no misters at Eton. This is a change, isn't it? Better than +grinding away at Greek by a long way. Well, I congratulate you on your +fight. You showed there was some good in dear old Eton still. I wish +you had let me know it was coming off. I would have given anything +to have seen it--from a distance, you know. If it had been the right +thing, I would have come and been your backer." + +There was a general laugh, and then the officers all began to talk to +the boys. They were quiet and respectful in their manners, and fully +confirmed the favorable report which Captain Manley had given of them. + +"Where are the pistols, boys?" their friend asked presently. + +"Here, sir," and the boys produced them from under their jackets. "We +have no case, sir; we were obliged to leave it behind us when we--" + +"Ran away," one of the officers said, laughing. + +"They are a splendid pair of pistols," Captain Manley said, examining +them; "beautifully finished, and rifled. They look quite new, too, +though, of course, they are not." + +"They are new, sir," Tom said; "we have only had them six months, and +they were new then." + +"Indeed," Captain Manley said surprised; "I thought, of course, they +were family pistols. Why, how on earth, if it is not an impertinent +question, did you boys get hold of two brace of such pistols as these? +I have no right to ask the question, boys. I see there has been a +plate on the handles. But you said you had no relations, and I was +surprised into asking." + +The boys colored. + +"The question was quite natural, sir; the pistols were presented to us +by some people we traveled with once; we took the plates off because +they made a great fuss about nothing, and we thought that it would +look cockey." + +There was a laugh among the officers at the boys' confusion. + +"No one would suspect you of being cockey, Scudamore," Captain Manley +said kindly; "come, let me see the plates." + +The boys took the little silver plates from their pockets and handed +them silently to Captain Manley, who read aloud, to the surprise of +those around him,--"'To Tom' and 'Peter,' they are alike except the +names. 'To Tom Scudamore, presented by the passengers in the Highflyer +coach on the 4th of August, 1808, as a testimony of their appreciation +of his gallant conduct, by which their property was saved from +plunder.' Why, what is this, you young pickles, what were you up to on +the 4th of August last year?" + +"There was nothing in it at all, sir," Tom said; "we were on the coach +and were stopped by highwaymen. One of the passengers had pistols, +but was afraid to use them, and hid them among the boxes. So when the +passengers were ordered to get down to be searched, we hid ourselves, +and when the highwaymen were collecting their watches, Peter shot one, +and I drove the coach over another. The matter was very simple indeed; +but the passengers saved their money, so made a great fuss about it." + +There was much laughter over Tom's statement, and then he had to +give a detailed account of the whole affair, which elicited many +expressions of approval. + +"It does you credit, boys," Captain Manley said, "and shows that you +are cool as well as plucky. One quality is as valuable as the other. +There is every hope that you will do the regiment credit, boys, and +you may be sure that we shall give you every chance. And now good-bye +for the present." + +"Good-bye, sir," Tom and Peter again drew themselves up, gave the +military salute, and went off to their comrades. + +For when the order came to prepare for the embarkation, both Spanish +and bugling were given up, and the boys entered into the pleasure +of the holiday with immense zest. They had no regimental duties to +perform beyond being present at parade. They had no packing to do, and +fewer purchases to make. A ball or two of stout string, for, as Peter +said, string is always handy, and a large pocket-knife, each with +a variety of blades, were the principal items. They had a ring put +to the knives, so that they could sling them round the waist. They +had, therefore, nothing to do but to amuse themselves, and this they +did with a heartiness which astonished the other boys, and proved +conclusively that they did not want to be unsociable. They hired a +boat for a sail and took five or six other boys across to Ryde, only +just returning in time for tattoo, and they played such a number of +small practical jokes, such as putting a handful of peas into the +bugles and other wind instruments, that the band-master declared that +he thought that they were all bewitched, and he threatened to thrash +the boys all round, because he could not find out who had done it. + +Especially angry was the man who played the big drum. This was a +gigantic negro, named Sam, a kind-hearted fellow, constantly smiling, +except when the thought of his own importance made him assume a +particularly grave appearance. He was a general favorite, although the +boys were rather afraid of him, for he was apt to get into a passion +if any jokes were attempted upon him, and of all offences the greatest +was to call him Sambo. Now none of the men ventured upon this, for +when he first joined, Sam had fought two or three desperate battles on +this ground, and his great strength and the insensibility of his head +to blows had invariably given him the victory. But, treated with what +he conceived proper respect, Sam was one of the best-tempered and +best-natured fellows in the regiment; and he himself, when he once +cooled down, was perfectly ready to join in the laugh against himself, +even after he had been most put out by a joke. + +The day before the regiment was to embark, the officers gave a lawn +party; a large number of ladies were present, and the band was, of +course, to play. The piece which the bandmaster had selected for the +commencement began with four distinct beats of the big drum. Just +before it began, Captain Manley saw Tom and Peter, who with some of +the other boys had brought the music-stands into the ground, with +their faces bright with anticipated fun. + +"What is the joke, boys?" he asked good-humoredly, as he passed them. + +"I can't tell you, sir," Tom said; "but if you walk up close to the +band, and watch Sam's face when he begins, you will be amused, I +think." + +"Those are regular young pickles," Captain Manley said to the lady +he was walking with; "they are Etonians who have run away from home, +and are up to all kinds of mischief, but are the pluckiest and most +straightforward youngsters imaginable. I have no doubt that they are +up to some trick with our black drummer." + +On their way to where the band was preparing to play, Captain Manley +said a word or two to several of the other officers, consequently +there was quite a little party standing watching the band when their +leader lifted his baton for the overture to begin. + +There was nothing that Sam liked better than for the big drum to +commence, and with his head thrown well back and an air of extreme +importance, he lifted his arm and brought it down with what should +have been a sounding blow upon the drum. To his astonishment and to +the surprise of all the band, no deep boom was heard, only a low +muffled sound. Mechanically Sam raised his other arm and let it fall +with a similar result. Sam looked a picture of utter astonishment and +dismay, with his eyes opened to their fullest, and he gave vent to a +loud cry, which completed the effect produced by his face, and set +most of those looking on, and even the band themselves, into a roar of +laughter. Sam now examined his sticks, they appeared all right to the +eye, but directly he felt them his astonishment was turned into rage. +They were perfectly soft. Taking out his knife he cut them open, and +found that the balls were merely filled with a wad of soft cotton, the +necessary weight being given by pieces of lead fastened round the end +of the stick inside the ball with waxed thread. + +Sam was too enraged to say more than his usual exclamation of +astonishment, "Golly!" and he held out his drumsticks to be examined +with the face of a black statue of surprise. + +Even the band-master was obliged to laugh as he took the sticks from +Sam's hand to examine them. + +"These are not your sticks at all, Sam," he said, looking closely at +them. "Here, boy," he called to Tom, who might have been detected from +the fact of his being the only person present with a serious face, +"run to the band-room and see if you can find the sticks." + +In a few minutes Tom returned with the real drumsticks, which, he +said truly, he had found on the shelf where they were usually kept. +After that things went on as usual; Sam played with a sulky fury. His +dignity was injured, and he declared over and over again that if he +could "find de rascal who did it, by jingo, I pound him to squash!" +and there was no doubt from his look that he thoroughly meant what he +said. However, no inquiries could bring to light the author of the +trick. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +OVERBOARD. + + +There were no lighter hearts than those of Tom and Peter Scudamore +on board the transport "Nancy," as, among the hearty cheers of the +troops on board, and the waving of hats and handkerchiefs from friends +who had come out in small boats to say good-bye for the last time, +she weighed anchor, and set sail in company with some ten or twelve +other transports, and under convoy of two ships of war. It would be +difficult to imagine a prettier scene. The guns fired, the bands of +the various regiments played, and the white sails opened out bright +in the sun as the sailors swarmed into the rigging, anxious to outvie +each other. Even the soldiers pulled and hauled at the ropes, and ran +round with the capstan bars to get the anchors apeak. Tom and Peter, +of course, had, like the other boys, got very much in the way in their +desire to assist, and, having been once or twice knocked over by the +rush of men coming along with ropes, they wisely gave it up, and +leaned over the side to enjoy the scene. + +"This is splendid, Tom, isn't it?" + +"Glorious, Peter; but it's blowing pretty strong. I am afraid that we +sha'n't find it quite so glorious when we get out of the shelter of +the island." + +Peter laughed. "No; I suppose we sha'n't all look as jolly as we do +now by night-time. However, the wind is nor'-westerly, which will help +us along nicely, if, as I heard one of the sailors say just now, it +does not go round to the south." + +"Bugler, sound companies one, two, and three to breakfast." + +The order interrupted the conversation, and, for the next hour, +the boys had little time for talk. Half the regiment was on board +the "Nancy," and, after breakfast, the men were divided into three +watches, of which one was always to be on deck, for the ship was very +crowded, and there was scarcely room for all the men to be below +together. The boys were in the same watch, for the day previous to +starting Tom had been appointed bugler to the 2d Company, Peter to the +3d. The 1st Company, or Grenadiers, were in the watch with the band, +the 2d and 3d Companies were together, and the 4th and 5th. + +Tom was very ill for the first two days of the voyage, while Peter did +not feel the slightest effects from the motion. Upon the third day the +wind dropped suddenly, and the vessels rolled heavily in the swell, +with their sails flapping against the masts. Tom came up that morning +upon deck feeling quite well again, and the boys were immensely amused +at seeing the attempts of the soldiers to move about, the sudden +rushes, and the heavy falls. A parade had been ordered to take place; +but as no one could have stood steady without holding on, it was +abandoned as impossible. The men sat about under the bulwarks, and a +few amused themselves and the rest by trying to play various games, +such as laying a penny on the deck, and seeing which would pitch +another to lay nearest to it, from a distance of five yards. The +difficulty of balancing oneself in a heavily rolling vessel, and of +pitching a penny with any degree of accuracy, is great, and the manner +in which the coins, instead of coming down flat and remaining there, +rolled away into the scuppers, the throwers not unfrequently following +them, produced fits of laughter. + +Tom was still feeling weak from his two days' illness, and was not +disposed actively to enter into the fun; but Peter enjoyed the heavy +rolling, and was all over the ship. Presently he saw Sam, the black +drummer, sitting in a dark corner below quietly asleep; his cap was +beside him, and the idea at once occurred to Peter that here was a +great opportunity for a joke. He made his way to the caboose, and +begged the cook to give him a handful of flour. The cook at first +refused, but was presently coaxed into doing so, and Peter stole to +where Sam was asleep, and put the flour into his cap, relying that, in +the darkness, Sam would put it on without noticing it. Then, going up +to the deck above, Peter put his head down the hatchway, and shouted +loudly, "Sam!" + +The negro woke at the sound of his name. "What is it?" he asked. +Receiving no reply, he got on to his feet, muttering, "Some one call +Sam, that for certain, can't do without Sam, always want here, want +there. I go up and see." + +So saying, he put on his cap, and made his way up to the upper deck. +As he stood at the hatchway and looked round, there was, first a +titter, and then a roar of laughter from the men sitting or standing +along by the bulwarks. In putting on his cap some of the flour had +fallen out, and had streaked his face with white. Sam was utterly +unconscious that he was the object of the laughter, and said to one of +the men nearest to him, "Who call Sam?" + +The man could not reply, but Tom, who was sitting close by, said, "It +was no one here, Sam, it must have been the bandmaster; there he is, +close to the quarter-deck." + +Sam made his way along towards the point indicated, and as he did so +some of the officers upon the quarter-deck caught sight of him. "Just +look at Sambo," Carruthers exclaimed, "somebody has been larking with +him again. Look how all the men are laughing, and he evidently has no +suspicion of the figure he is." + +The sergeant, who, the bandmaster having remained at the depot, was +now acting as chief of the band, did not see Sam until the latter was +close to him. "You want me, sergeant?" + +Sergeant Wilson looked up, and was astonished. + +"What on earth have you been doing to yourself, Sam?" he asked. + +"Me been having little nap down below," Sam said. + +"Yes; but your face, man. What have you been doing to your face?" + +Sam, in his turn, looked astonished. "Nothing whatsomeber, sargeant." + +"Take off your cap, man, and look inside it." Sam did as ordered; and +as he removed the cap, and the powder fell from it all over his face +and shoulders, there was a perfect shout of laughter from the soldiers +and crew, who had been looking on, and the officers, looking down from +the rail of the quarter-deck, retired to laugh unnoticed. + +The astonishment and rage of Sam were unbounded, and he gave a perfect +yell of surprise and fury. He stamped wildly for a minute or two, and +then, with a sudden movement rushed up on to the quarter-deck with +his cap in his hand. The colonel, who was holding on by the shrouds, +and talking with the major, in ignorance of what was going on, was +perfectly astounded at this sudden vision of the irate negro, and +neither he nor the major could restrain their laughter. + +"Scuse me, colonel, sah, for de liberty," Sam burst out; "but look at +me, sah; is dis right, sah, is it right to make joke like dis on de +man dat play de big drum of de regiment?" + +"No, no, Sam; not at all right," the colonel said, with difficulty. +"If you report who has played the trick upon you, I shall speak to him +very seriously; but, Sam, I should have thought that you were quite +big enough to take the matter in your own hands." + +"Me big enough, Massah Colonel, me plenty big; but me not able to find +him." + +"Well, Sam, it is carrying a joke too far; still, it is only a trick +off duty, and I am afraid that it is beyond my power to interfere." + +Sam thought for a moment, and, having by this time cooled down from +his first paroxysm of rage, he said, "Beg pardon, massa, you quite +right, no business of any one but Sam; but Sam too angry to 'top to +think. Scuse liberty, colonel," and Sam retired from the quarter-deck, +and made a bolt below down the nearest hatchway, when he plunged his +head into a bucket of water, and soon restored it to its usual ebony +hue. + +Then he went to the cook and tried to find out to whom he had given +flour, but the cook replied at once, "Lor, I've given flour to the men +of each mess to make puddings of, about thirty of them," and Sam felt +as far off as ever. + +Presently, however, a big sailor began to make fun of him, and Sam +retorted by knocking him down, after which there was a regular fight, +which was carried on under the greatest difficulty, owing to the +rolling of the ship. At last Sambo got the best of it, and this +restored him so thoroughly to a good temper that he was able to join +in the laugh at himself, reserving, however, his right to "knock de +rascal who did it into a squash." + +The following day the weather changed, a wind sprang up nearly from +the north, which increased rapidly, until toward afternoon it was +blowing half a gale, before which the whole fleet, with their main +and topsails set, ran southward at great speed. A heavy cross sea was +running, the wares raised by the gale clashing with the heavy swell +previously rolling in from the westward, and so violent and sudden +were the lurches and rolls of the "Nancy" that the master feared that +her masts would go. + +"How tremendously she rolls, Tom." + +"Tremendously; the deck seems almost upright, and the water right +under our feet each time she goes over. She feels as if she were going +to turn topsy-turvy each roll. It's bad enough on deck; but it will be +worse down below." + +"A great deal worse, Peter, it's nearly dark already; it will strike +eight bells in a minute or two, and then we shall have to go down. +There's no danger, of course, of the ship turning over, but it won't +be pleasant down below. Look out, Peter!" + +The exclamation was caused by an awful crash. The ship had given a +tremendous lurch, when the long-boat, which was stowed amidships, +suddenly tore away from its fastenings and came crashing down. +It passed within three feet of where the boys were sitting, and +completely tore away the bulwark, leaving a great gap in the side, +where it had passed through. "Look, Tom, Sam's overboard!" Peter +exclaimed. + +Sam had been sitting on the bulwark, a few feet from them, holding on +by a shroud, when the boat came down upon him; with a cry he had let +go of the shroud and started back, falling into the water just as the +boat struck the bulwark. "There he is, Tom," Peter said, as he saw the +black only a few yards from the side. "He is hurt, come on," catching +up the end of a long rope coiled up on the deck close to their feet, +the boys jumped overboard together. A dozen strokes took them up to +Sam; but the black hull of the ship had already glanced past them. +They could hear loud shouts, but could not distinguish a word. + +"Quick, round him, Peter!" and, in a moment, the boys twisted the rope +round the body of the black, and knotted it just as the drag of the +ship tightened it. Thus Sam's safety was secured, but the strain was +so tremendous as they tore through the water, that it was impossible +for the boys to hold on, and, in a moment, they were torn from their +hold. + +"All right, Peter," Tom said cheerily, as they dashed the water from +their eyes, "there is the boat." + +The remains of the boat were not ten yards distant, and in a few +strokes they had gained it. It was stove in and broken, but still held +together, floating on a level with the water's edge. With some trouble +the boys got inside her, and sat down on the bottom, so that their +heads were just out of water. + +Then they had time to look round. The ship was already disappearing in +the gathering darkness. + +"This boat will soon go to pieces, Tom," was Peter's first remark. + +"I expect it will, Peter; but we must stick to its pieces. We had +better get off our boots. The water is pretty warm, that's one +comfort." + +"Do you think the ship will come back for us, Tom?" + +"I don't think she can, Peter; at any rate, it is certain she can't +find us, it would take a long time to bring her round, and then, you +see, she could not sail straight back against the wind." + +"Look here, Tom, I remember when I climbed up to look into the boats +yesterday that there were some little casks lashed under the seats, +and a sailor told me they were always kept full of water in case the +boats were wanted suddenly. If they are still there we might empty +them out, and they could keep us afloat any time." + +"Hurrah! Peter, capital, let's see." + +To their great delight the boys found four small water-kegs fastened +under the seats. Three of these they emptied, and fastening one of +them to that which they had left full, and then each taking hold of +one of the slings which were fastened to the kegs for convenience of +carriage, they waited quietly. In less than ten minutes from the time +when they first gained their frail refuge, a great wave broke just +upon them, and completely smashed up the remains of the boat. They had +cut off some rope from the mast, which they found with its sail furled +ready for use in the boat, and now roughly lashed themselves together, +face to face, so that they had a keg on each side. They had also +fastened a long piece of rope to the other kegs, so that they would +float near them. + +It was a long and terrible night for them, generally their heads and +chests were well above the water, but at times a wave would break with +its white crest, and, for a time, the foam would be over their heads. +Fortunately the water was warm, and the wind fell a good deal. The +boys talked occasionally to each other, and kept up each other's +courage. Once or twice, in spite of the heavy sea, they were so much +overcome with exhaustion that they dozed uneasily for a while, with +their heads upon each other's shoulders, and great was their feeling +of relief and pleasure when morning began to break. + +"It is going to be a splendid day, Peter, and the wind is dropping +fast." + +"Look, Tom," Peter said, "there are some of the planks of the boat +jammed in with the kegs." + +It was as Peter said; the two kegs, one empty and the other full, were +floating about ten yards off, at the length of the rope by which they +were attached to the boys, while with them was a confused mass of +wreckage of the boat. + +"That is capital, Peter, we will see if we can't make a raft +presently." + +As the sun rose and warmed the air, the boys strength and spirits +revived, and in a few hours they were so refreshed that they +determined to set about their raft. The wind had now entirely dropped, +the waves were still very high, but they came in long, smooth, regular +swells, over which they rose and fell almost imperceptibly. + +"They must be rolling a good deal more in the 'Nancy' than we are +here, Peter. Now, the first thing is to have a drink. What a blessing +it is we have water." With their knives they soon got the bung out of +the water-keg, and each took a long drink, and then carefully closed +it up again. + +"There, Peter, we have drunk as much as we wanted this time; but we +must be careful, there is no saying how long we may be before we are +picked up. Hurrah, Peter, here are the masts and sails, so we shall +have plenty of cord." + +It took the boys nearly three hours to complete their task to their +satisfaction. When it was concluded they had the three empty kegs +lashed in a triangle about five feet apart, while two planks crossing +the triangle, assisted to keep all firm and tight; floating in the +center of the triangle was the keg of water. "There, I don't think +we can improve that, Peter," Tom said at last, "now, let us get on +and try it." They did so, and, to their great delight, found that +it floated a few inches above water. "We may as well get the masts +on board, Peter, and let the sails tow alongside. They may come in +useful; and now the first thing is to dry ourselves and our clothes." + +The clothes were soon spread out to dry, and the boys luxuriated in +the warmth of the sun. + +"What great, smooth waves these are, Tom, sometimes we are down in a +valley which runs miles long, and then we are up on a hill." + +"Here we lay, all the day, in the bay of Biscay, oh!" Tom laughed. +"I only hope that the wished-for morrow may bring the sail in sight, +Peter. However, we can hold on for a few days, I suppose. That is a +four-gallon keg, so that we have got a quart of water each for eight +days, and hunger isn't so bad to bear as thirst. We have pretty well +done for our uniforms, our bugles are the only things that have not +suffered." + +For the boys' companies being on deck at the time of the accident, +they both had their bugles on when they jumped overboard. + +"Our last upset was when that bargee canted us over at Eton, rather a +different business that, Peter." + +"My shirt is not dry yet, Tom; but I shall put it on again, for the +sun is too hot to be pleasant." + +Tom followed Peter's example. + +"Do you think, Tom, that we had better try to get up a sort of sail +and make for land, or remain where we are?" + +"Remain where we are, Peter, I should say. I suppose we must be a +hundred miles from the French coast, and even if the wind blew fair +we should be a long time getting there, and with the certainty of a +prison when we arrived. Still, if there were a strong west wind, I +suppose it would be our best way; as it is we have nothing to do but +to wait quietly, and hope for a ship. We are in the right line, and +there must be lots of vessels on their way, besides those which sailed +with us, for Portsmouth. So we must keep watch and watch. Now, Peter, +you lie down on that plank, it is just about long enough, you shall +have two hours' sleep, and then I'll have two, after that we will have +four hours each." + +"How are we to count time?" Peter said laughing. + +"I never thought of that," Tom said, looking at his watch. "Of course +it has stopped. We must guess as near as we can; at any rate, you go +to sleep first, and, when I am too sleepy to keep watch any longer, I +will wake you up." + +So passed that day and the next night. A light breeze sprung up from +the southwest, and the sun again shone out brightly. + +"I feel as if I wanted breakfast horribly," Peter said, with an +attempt at a smile. "Do you think that there is any possibility of +catching anything?" + +"We have nothing to make hooks with, Peter, and nothing to bait them +with if we had." + +"There are lots of tiny fish swimming all about, Tom, if we could but +catch them." + +Tom was silent for awhile; then he said, "Look here, Peter. Let us cut +a piece off the sail about five feet long, and say three feet wide, +double it longways, and sew up the ends so as to make a bag; we can +unravel some string, and make holes with our knives. Then we can sink +it down two or three feet, and watch it; and when we see that some +little fish have got in it, we can draw it up very gently, and, by +raising it gradually from the sea, the water will run out, and we +shall catch the fish." + +Peter agreed that at any rate it was worth trying; for, even if it did +not succeed, it was better for them to be doing something than sitting +idle. The sail and the floating wreckage were pulled alongside, and +the boys set to work. In three hours a large and shallow bag was made, +with some improvements upon Tom's original plan. The mouth was kept +open by two crossed pieces of wood, and four cords from the corners +were attached to the end of the oar which formed their fishing-rod. At +last it was finished, and the bag lowered. + +To the horror of the boys, it was discovered that it would not sink. +They were ready to cry with vexation, for the want of food had made +them feel faint and weak. + +"What have we got that is heavy?" Tom asked in despair. + +"I have got fourpence in halfpence, Tom, and there are our knives and +watches." + +Their pockets were ransacked, and the halfpence, knives, and watches +were placed in the bottom of the bag and lowered. Still the wood-work +kept afloat. + +"There are the bugles, Tom," Peter cried in delight. These had been +fastened to the raft, and were now hastily untied and placed in the +canvas bag. + +It sank now, and the boys lowered it five or six feet, so that they +could partly see into it. "There are lots of little fish swimming +about, Tom," Peter said in a whisper. "Some are almost as long as +one's hand. Do you think that they will go in, Tom?" + +"I hope the glitter of the bugles and watches will attract them, +Peter." + +"There, Tom, there--I saw a whole swarm of little ones go in." + +"Wait a minute or two, Peter, to let them get well down, and then draw +up as quietly as possible." + +Very cautiously the boys raised the point of their rod until the +top of the square-mouthed bag was level with the surface; then they +brought it close to them and looked in, and as they did so gave a +simultaneous cheer. There, in the bottom of the canvas, two feet below +them, were a number of little fish moving about. Raising the rod +still higher, they gradually lifted the net out of the sea, the water +running quickly off as they did so, and then they proceeded to examine +their prize. + +"We will take out one and one, Peter; give them a nip as you take them +up, that will kill them." There were two fish of about three inches +long, another three or four of two inches, and some thirty or forty +the size of minnows. It was scarcely more than a mouthful each, but +it was a stay for a moment to their stomachs, and no one ever said a +thanksgiving with deeper feeling and heartiness than did the boys when +they had emptied their canvas net. + +"We need not be anxious about food now, Peter; if we can catch these +in five minutes, we can get enough each day to satisfy us. They quench +the thirst too. We must limit ourselves to half a pint of water a day, +and we can hold on for a fortnight. We are safe to be picked up before +that." + +All the afternoon and evening the boys continued to let down and draw +up their net, sometimes bringing in only a few tiny fish, sometimes +getting half a dozen of the larger kind. By nightfall they had +satisfied the cravings of hunger, and felt stronger and better. One or +two sails had been seen during the day, but always at such distances +that it was evident at once that they could not pass within hail. That +night, fatigued with their exertions, both laid down and went to sleep +until morning, and slept more comfortably than before; for they had +fastened a piece of the sail tightly on the top of the raft, and lay +softly suspended in that, instead of being balanced upon a narrow and +uncomfortable plank. They felt new creatures when they woke, pulled +up their net, had a mouthful of raw fish, took off their clothes, and +had a swim, and then set to earnestly to fish. The sun was brighter, +and the fish in consequence kept deeper than upon the preceding day; +still by evening they had caught enough to take the edge off, if not +to satisfy, their hunger. The fishing, however, during the last hours +of daylight was altogether neglected, for behind them they could see +a sail, which appeared as if it might possibly come close enough to +observe them. There was still the long, steady swell coming in from +the Atlantic, and a light breeze was blowing from the north. The boys +had been so intent upon their fishing, that they had not noticed her +until she was within nine or ten miles of them. "She will not be up +for an hour and a half, Peter," Tom said, "and the sun will be down +long before that. I fear that the chance of their seeing us is very +small indeed. However, we will try. Let us get the net out of the +water, and hold it and the oar up. It is possible that some one may +see the canvas with a telescope before the sun goes down. Take the +things out of the net." + +The oar with the canvas bag was elevated, and the boys anxiously +watched the course of the vessel. She was a large ship, but they could +only see her when they rose upon the top of the long smooth waves. "I +should think that she will pass within a mile of us, Peter," Tom said, +after half an hour's watching, "but I fear that she will not be much +closer. How unfortunate she had not come along an hour earlier. She +would have been sure to see us if it had been daylight. I don't think +that there is much chance now, for there is no moon. However, thank +God, we can hold on very well now, and next time we may have better +luck." + +The sun had set more than half an hour before the ship came abreast of +them. They had evidently not been seen. + +"Now, Peter," Tom said, "let us both hallo together; the wind is very +light, and it is just possible they may hear us." + +Again and again the boys shouted, but the ship sailed steadily on. +Peter dashed the tears aside, and Tom said, with a quiver in his +voice, "Never mind, Peter; better luck next time, old boy. God has +been so good to us, that I feel quite confident we shall be saved." + +"So do I, Tom," Peter said. "It was only a disappointment for a +minute. We may as well put the oar down, for my arm and back ache +holding it." + +"Mind how you do it, Peter. If we let the end go through the canvas, +we shall lose our watches and bugles, and then we shall not be able to +fish." + +"Oh, Tom, the bugles!" + +"What, Peter?" Tom said, astonished. + +"We can make them hear, Tom, don't you see?" + +"Hurrah, Peter! so we can. What a fool I was to forget it!" + +In a moment the bugles rang out the assembly across the water. Again +and again the sharp, clear sound rose on the quiet evening air. + +"Look, Peter, there are men going up the rigging to look round. Sound +again!" + +Again and again they sounded the call, and then they saw the ship's +head come round, and her bow put towards them, and then they fell on +their knees and thanked God that they were saved. + +In ten minutes the ship was close to them, thrown up into the wind, a +boat was lowered, and in another minute or two was alongside. + +"Hallo!" the officer in charge exclaimed, "two boys, all alone. Here, +help them in, lads--that's it; now pull for the ship. Here, boys, take +a little brandy from this flask. How long have you been on that raft?" + +"It is three days since we went overboard, sir; but we were in the +water for about eighteen hours before we made the raft." + +Tom and Peter drank a little brandy, and felt better for it; but they +were weaker than they thought, for they had to be helped up the side +of the ship. A number of officers were grouped round the gangway, and +the boys saw that they were on board a vessel of war. + +"Only these boys?" asked the captain in surprise of the officer who +had brought them on board. + +"That is all, sir." + +"Doctor, you had better see to them," the captain said. "If they are +strong enough to talk, after they have had some soup, let them come +to my cabin; if not, let them turn in in the sick bay, and I will see +them in the morning. One question though, boys. Are there any others +about--any one for me to look for or pick up?" + +"No one else, sir," Tom said, and then followed the doctor aft. A +basin of soup and a glass of sherry did wonders for the boys, and in +an hour they proceeded to the captain's cabin, dressed in clothes +which the doctor had borrowed from two of the midshipmen for them, +for their own could never be worn again; indeed, they had not brought +their jackets from the raft, those garments having shrunk so from the +water, that the boys had not been able to put them on again, after +first taking them off to dry. + +The doctor accompanied them, and in the captain's cabin they found the +first lieutenant, who had been in charge of the boat which picked them +up. + +"I am glad to see you looking so much better," the captain said as +they entered. "Sit down. Do you know," he went on with a smile, "I +do not think that any of us would have slept had you not recovered +sufficiently to tell your story to-night. We have been puzzling over +it in vain. How you two boys came to be adrift alone on a raft, made +up of three water-kegs, as Mr. Armstrong tells me, and how you came to +have two bugles with you on the raft, is altogether beyond us." + +"The last matter is easily explained, sir," Tom said. "My brother and +myself are buglers in H.M.'s Regiment of Norfolk Rangers, and as we +were on duty when we went overboard, we had our bugles slung over our +shoulders." + +"Buglers!" the captain said in surprise. "Why from your appearance and +mode of expressing yourselves, I take you to be gentlemen's sons." + +"So we are, sir," Tom said quietly, "and I hope gentlemen--at any +rate we have been Etonians. But we have lost our father, and are now +buglers in the Rangers." + +"Well, lads," the captain said after a pause, "and now tell us how you +came upon this little raft?" + +Tom related modestly the story of their going overboard from the +"Nancy," of the formation of the raft, and of their after proceedings. +Their hearers were greatly astonished at the story; and the captain +said, "Young gentlemen, you have done a very gallant action, and have +behaved with a coolness and bravery which would have done credit to +old sailors. Had your father been alive he might have been proud +indeed of you. I should be proud had you been my sons. If you are +disposed to change services I will write directly we reach the Tagus +to obtain your discharge, and will give you midshipmen's berths on +board this ship. Don't answer now; you can think it over by the time +we reach Portugal. I will not detain you now; a night's rest will set +you up. Mr. Armstrong will introduce you to the midshipmen to-morrow; +you are passengers here now, and will mess with them. Good-night." + +It was not many minutes before the boys were asleep in their hammocks. +If people's ears really tingle when they are being spoken about, +Tom and Peter would have had but little sleep that night. The first +lieutenant related the circumstances to the other lieutenants; the +second lieutenant, whose watch it was, told the gunner, who related +it to the petty officers; the doctor told his mates, who retailed the +story to the midshipmen; and so gradually it went over the whole ship, +and officers and men agreed that it was one of the pluckiest and +coolest things ever done. + +The boys slept until nearly breakfast time, and were just dressed when +Mr. Armstrong came for them and took them to the midshipmen's berth, +where they were received with a warmth and heartiness which quite +surprised them. The midshipmen and mates pressed forward to shake +hands with them, and the stiflingly close little cock-pit was the +scene of an ovation. The boys were quite glad when the handshaking was +over, and they sat down to the rough meal which was then usual among +midshipmen. As the vessel had only left England four days before, +the fare was better than it would have been a week later, for there +was butter, cold ham and tongue upon the table. After breakfast they +were asked to tell the story over again, and this they did with great +modesty. Many questions were asked, and it was generally regretted +that they were not sailors. Upon going up on deck there was quite an +excitement among the sailors to get a look at them, and the gunner and +other petty officers came up and shook hands with them heartily, and +the boys wished from the depths of their hearts that people would not +make such a fuss about nothing; for, as Tom said to Peter, "Of course +we should not have jumped overboard if we had thought that we could +not have kept hold of the rope." + +That day they dined in the cabin with the captain, who, after the +officers present had withdrawn, asked them if they would tell him +about their past lives. This the boys did frankly, and took the +opportunity of explaining that they had chosen the army because the +enemies' fleet having been destroyed, there was less chance of active +service in the navy than with the army just starting for Lisbon, and +that their uncle having commanded the regiment that they were in, they +had entered it, and had received so much kindness that they had fair +reason to hope that they would eventually obtain commissions. Hence, +while thanking him most warmly for his offer, they had decided to go +on in the path that they had chosen. + +The captain remarked that, after what they had said, although he +should have been glad to have them with him, he thought that they had +decided rightly. + +The next morning, when the boys woke, they were surprised at the +absence of any motion of the vessel, and upon going on deck they found +that they were running up the Tagus, and that Lisbon was in sight. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +PORTUGAL. + + +The boys were delighted with the appearance of the Tagus, covered as +it now was with a fleet of transports and merchantmen. As they were +looking at it, the officer commanding the marines on board, who had +talked a good deal to them upon the preceding day, came up to them. "I +thought that you would be in a fix about clothes, my lads," he said. +"You could not very well join in these midshipman's uniforms, so I set +the tailor yesterday to cut down a couple of spare suits of my corps. +The buttons will not be right, but you can easily alter that when you +join. You had better go below at once and see if the things fit pretty +well. I have told the tailor to take them to the cock-pit and if they +do not fit they can alter them at once." + +Thanking the officer very much for his thoughtful kindness, and much +relieved in mind--for they had already been wondering what they should +do--the boys ran below, and found that the tailor had guessed their +sizes pretty correctly, aided as he had been by the trousers they +had worn when they came on board. A few alterations were necessary, +and these he promised to get finished in a couple of hours. They had +scarcely gone on deck again when the anchor was let fall, and a boat +was lowered, in order that the captain might proceed to shore with the +despatches of which he was the bearer. + +Just as he was upon the point of leaving the deck, his eye fell upon +the boys. "I shall be back again in an hour or two," he said; "do not +leave until I return. I will find out where your regiment is, and if +it has marched I will give you a certificate of how I picked you up, +otherwise you may be stopped on the way, and get into a scrape as two +boys who have strayed away from their regiment." + +So saying, the captain got into his boat and rowed to shore. It was +one o'clock before he returned. The boys had dinner with the gunroom +officers, then changed their dress, and had now the appearance of +buglers in the marines. + +The captain at once sent for them. "Your regiment went on yesterday +with the rest of the division. It halts to-day ten miles out of the +town. There is the certificate I spoke of. Mr. Armstrong is just going +off with two boats' crew to assist in unloading stores; I have asked +him to hand you over to the charge of some officer going up with a +convoy. And now good-bye, lads. I wish you every luck, and hope that +some day or other you may win your epaulets." + +With renewed thanks for his kindness, the boys went up on deck. There +they shook hands and said good-bye to all the officers and midshipmen. +As they were waiting while the boats were being lowered, two of the +sailors went aft to the captain, who had come up from below and was +walking alone on the quarter-deck, and, with a touch of the hat, the +spokesman said, "Your honor, we're come to ax as how, if your honor +has no objection, we might just give a parting cheer to those 'ere +youngsters." + +"Well, Jones," the captain said, smiling, "it's rather an unusual +thing for the crew of one of His Majesty's ships to cheer two young +soldiers." + +"It is unusual, your honor, mighty unusual, because soldiers ain't in +general of much account at sea; but you see, your honor, this ain't a +usual circumstance, nohow. These here boys, which ain't much more than +babbies, have done what there ain't many men, not even of those who +are born and bred to the sea, would have done; and we should just like +to give them a bit of a cheer for good luck." + +"Very well, Jones, tell the men they can do as they like." + +Accordingly, as the boys took their seats in the boat they were +surprised at seeing the crew clustering to the side of the ship, while +some of the men ran up the rigging. + +"What can the men be up to?" Tom asked Mr. Armstrong in surprise. + +The lieutenant smiled, for he knew what was coming. + +"Sheer off, men," he said, and as he did so the boatswain of the ship +gave the word, "Now, lads, three cheers for them boys; may they have +the luck they deserve." + +Three thundering cheers burst from the whole crew, the men in the +boats tossing their oars in the naval fashion of acknowledgment of +the salute. Tom and Peter, astonished and affected, stood up, took +off their caps, and waved their hands in thanks to the crowd of faces +looking down upon them, and then sat down again and wiped their eyes. + +"Row on," the lieutenant said, and the oars fell in the water with +a splash; one more cheer arose, and then the boats rowed for the +landing-place. The boys were too much affected to look up or speak, +until they reached the shore, nor did they notice a boat which rowed +past them upon its way to the vessel they had left, just after they +had started. It contained an officer in a general's uniform. The boat +steered to the ship's side, and the officer ascended the ladder. The +captain was on deck. "Ah, Craufurd," he said, "this is an unexpected +pleasure." + +"I have just come back from my division for a few hours, Merivale; +there are a lot of stores which are essential, and some of my +artillery is not landed, so I thought I could hurry things up a bit. +My spare charger, and most of the chargers of my staff, are being +landed, too; the ship they came in was a day or two late; and as I had +to confer with the Portuguese Minister of War, I am killing a good +many birds with one stone. I heard you had just come in, and as I was +on board the "Clio" about my charger, I thought it would not be much +out of my way to run round and shake hands with you." + +"I am very glad you did. Come into my cabin; you can spare time to +take some lunch, I hope." + +While they were at lunch General Craufurd remarked, "So you have just +lost one of your officers, I see; promoted to another ship, eh?" + +"Lost an officer!" Captain Merivale said in surprise. "No, not that I +have heard of. What makes you think so?" + +"I thought so by the cheering the ship's crew gave that boat that left +the ship just before I came up. There was only a naval lieutenant in +her, and I supposed that he had just got his ship, and I thought by +the heartiness of the cheering what a good fellow he must be." + +"But it was not the lieutenant the men were cheering," Captain +Merivale said with a smile. + +"No!" General Craufurd said, surprised. "Why, there was no one else +in the boat. I looked attentively as I passed. There was only a +lieutenant, a midshipman who was steering, the men rowing, and two +little marine buglers, who had their handkerchiefs up to their faces. +So you see I took a very minute survey." + +"You did indeed," Captain Merivale said, laughing. "Well, it was just +these little buglers that the crew of the ship were cheering." + +General Craufurd looked up incredulously. "You're joking, Merivale. +The crew of His Majesty's frigate 'Latona' cheer two buglers of +marines! No, no, that won't do." + +"It is a fact, though, Craufurd, unlikely as it seems, except that the +buglers belong to the Norfolk Rangers, and not to the Marines." + +"The Rangers! They are in Hill's division. What is it all about? There +must be something very strange about it." + +"There is indeed," Captain Merivale said, "very strange." And he then +related the whole story to his visitor. + +"They are trumps indeed," the general said when the narrative was +ended, "and I am very glad that I happened to hear it. I will speak to +Hill about it, and will keep my eye upon them. Be assured they shall +have their epaulets as soon as possible--that is, if their conduct is +at all equal to their pluck. It is the least we can do when, as you +say, they have refused midshipmen's berths to stick to us. And now I +must be off." + +The boat landed General Craufurd at the same landing-place at which +Tom and Peter had disembarked half an hour before. Lieutenant +Armstrong had spoken a few words to the officer who was superintending +the landing of stores and horses, and he, being far too busy to stop +to talk, briefly said that the boys could go up to join their regiment +with a convoy of stores which would start that night. + +After saying good-bye to their friend the lieutenant, the boys sat +down upon some bales, and were watching with much amusement and +interest the busy scene before them. As General Craufurd passed they +rose and saluted. + +"You are the boys from the 'Latona,' are you not?" + +"Yes, sir," the boys answered in surprise. + +"Can you ride?" + +"Yes, sir." + +"Follow me, then." + +Much surprised, the boys followed the general until he made his way +through the confusion to a group of newly landed horses. Near them +were a couple of mounted Hussars, who, at the sight of the general, +rode forward with his charger. He made a sign to them to wait a +moment, and walked up to the men who were holding the newly landed +horses. + +"Which of you have got charge of two horses?" + +Several of the men answered at once. + +"Which of you are servants of officers on my staff?" + +Three of those who had answered before replied now. + +"Very well; just put saddles on to two of them. These lads will ride +them; they are going out with me at once; they will hand them over to +your masters." + +In another five minutes Tom and Peter, to their surprise and +delight, were clattering along through the streets of Lisbon upon +two first-rate horses in company with the two Hussars, while, twenty +lengths ahead, trotted General Craufurd with two officers who had been +down to Lisbon upon duty similar to his own. Once outside the town, +the general put his horse into a gallop, and his followers of course +did the same. Once or twice General Craufurd glanced back to see how +the boys rode, for a doubt had crossed his mind as to whether he had +been wise in putting them upon such valuable horses, but when he saw +that they were evidently accustomed to the work, he paid no further +attention to them. + +The officers riding beside him, however, looked back several times. + +"What luck we have, to be sure, Tom," Peter said, "and I can't +understand this a bit. How could the general know that we came from +the 'Latona'; as he evidently did, and by the way these officers have +looked back twice, I can't help thinking that he is talking about us." + +Tom was as puzzled as Peter, but they soon forgot the subject, and +engaged in an animated conversation with the Hussars as to the +situation and position of the army, and the supposed strength and +locality of the French, concerning which they were, of course, in +complete ignorance. An hour and a half's sharp riding took them to +Torres Vedras, a small town which afterwards became celebrated for +the tremendous lines which Wellington erected there. The troops were +encamped in its vicinity, the general having his quarters at the house +of the Alcalde, or Mayor. + +"Your regiment is a mile and a half distant, lads," General Craufurd +said as they drew up at his quarters; "you will have difficulty in +finding it this evening. Sergeant, take these lads round to the house +where my orderlies are quartered, and give them some supper. They can +join their regiment in the morning. I have heard of you, lads, from +Captain Merivale, and shall mention your conduct to General Hill, and +be assured I will keep my eye upon you." + +The boys were soon asleep upon a heap of straw, and at six next +morning were upon the road, having already had some coffee and bread +for breakfast. They had no difficulty in finding their way, for +orderlies were already galloping about, and the bugle calls came sharp +upon their ears. The division was to march at seven. The Rangers +happened to be the first in advance, so that they passed through the +other regiments to arrive at theirs. + +The tents were down when they arrived, and packed in readiness for the +bullock carts which stood by. The boys paused a little distance off, +and looked on with delight at the busy scene. At a note on the bugle +the tents and other baggage were stowed in the carts, and then the men +hitched on their knapsacks, unpiled arms, and began to fall into rank. + +No one noticed the boys as they passed between the groups and +approached the band, who were mustering by the colors, which were as +usual placed in front of the guard tent. + +"There's Sambo," Tom said; "I am glad they got him safe on board." + +The negro was the first to perceive the boys as they came close up +to him. As he saw them he gave a sudden start, his eyes opened wider +and wider until the whites showed all round, his teeth chattered, the +shiny black of his face turned to a sort of dirty gray, and he threw +up his hands with a loud cry, "oh, golly, here's dose boys' spirits!" + +He stepped back, heedless that the big drum was behind him, and the +next moment went back with a crash into it, and remained there with +his knees doubled up and his face looking out between them, too +frightened and horror-struck to make the least movement to extricate +himself. + +For a moment no one noticed him, for at his cry they had all turned to +the boys, and stood as if petrified at seeing those whom they believed +had been drowned before their eyes a week before. The silence did +not last long, the boys bursting into a shout of laughter at Sam's +appearance. + +"Spirits! Sam," Tom said; "not by a long way yet, man. How are you +all? Come, get out of that, Sam and shake hands." And as the band with +a shout crowded round them, the boys helped Sam, who was trembling all +over from the shock and fright, from the drum. + +For a moment the boys were quite confused and bewildered, for as they +hauled Sam to his feet their comrades of the band pressed round them +cheering, every one trying to shake them by the hand. + +The news spread like wildfire among the troops, and there was at once +a general rush to the spot. The boys were seized in an instant, and +each raised on the shoulders of two of the grenadiers, and as they +made their appearance above the heads of the crowd a tremendous cheer +broke from the whole regiment. + +"What can be the matter?" was the general exclamation of the colonel +and officers, who were just finishing their breakfasts in a cottage +which stood close behind the spot where their tents had been pitched +in the rear of the regiment. "What can be the matter?"--and as the +cheering continued there was a general rush to the door. There they +stood astonished at seeing the whole of the men clustered in one spot, +shouting and waving their caps. + +"What can be the matter?" the colonel said again; "the whole regiment +seems to have gone mad." + +"We shall know in a minute," Captain Manley said; "they are coming in +this direction." + +"Look at that fellow Sambo," exclaimed Carruthers; "he looks madder +than all the rest." + +In spite of the intense surprise which all were feeling, there was a +general laugh, for the black was performing antics like one possessed; +his cap was gone, he jumped, he yelled, he waved his arms, with a +drumstick in each hand, wildly over his head, he twisted round and +round; he seemed really out of his mind. Suddenly he left the crowd, +and rushed on ahead at full speed towards the group of officers, still +leaping and yelling and waving his drumsticks. + +The officers instinctively drew together as he approached, for they +thought that the gigantic negro was really out of his mind. He stopped +suddenly as he came up to them, and tried to fall into his usual +attitude of attention. + +"Oh, Massa Colonel," he said in hoarse, sobbing tones, "only to +think, only to think. Scuse Sam, sar, but Sam feel he's going to bust +right up wid joy, massa. Dat no matter, but only to think. Bress de +Almighty, sar! only to think!" + +None of the officers spoke for a minute in answer to these disjointed +exclamations. They were affected at the man's great emotion. His black +skin was still strangely pale, his eyes were distended, his lips +quivered, tears were rolling down his cheeks, and his huge frame was +shaken with sobs. + +"Calm yourself, Sam--be calm, my man," the colonel said kindly. "Try +and tell us what has happened. What are the men so excited about? What +is the matter with them?" + +"Oh, Massa Colonel," Sam said, "me try tell you all 'boat it. Only to +think, sar, dose boys cum back again; dose boys, sar, bress dem, dat +jumped into de water and got drowned just to save dis poor niggar, +sar. Dey cum back again; only tink ob dat!" + +The officers looked at one another in surprise. + +"I do believe he means the Scudamores! colonel," Captain Manley +exclaimed; "but no, it is impossible, no one could have lived five +minutes in that sea, and we know that they could not have been picked +up, for we were the last ship in the fleet." + +"Yes, yes, sar, dat's dem, dey cum back sure enuff," Sam said. + +Then Carruthers exclaimed, "I do believe it is so; there are a couple +of boys on the shoulders of the men in the middle of the crowd. Yes, +and, by Jove, it is the Scudamores. Hurrah! I am glad." + +There was a general exclamation of pleasure from the whole group, for +the regret for the boys, who had, as was believed, perished in the +performance of such a gallant action, had been general and sincere, +and Captain Manley lifted his cap and said reverently, "Thank God, +these gallant lads are saved;" and those around, although some of them +were but little addicted to prayer, repeated the words and imitated +the action. + +Carruthers would have stepped forward in his eagerness to greet his +former school-fellows, but Captain Manley laid his hand quietly on his +shoulder and said in a low tone, "Wait, Carruthers, let the colonel +welcome them." + +And now the crowd came up to the cottage, those in front falling back +as they approached, so as to let the grenadiers come forward with +their burden. The boys were lowered to the ground, and stood at once +at attention; their faces were both flushed with excitement, and their +eyes swollen with tears, so much were they both moved by the welcome +which had greeted them. + +There was a dead silence for a moment, and then Colonel Tritton said +in a loud, clear voice, which was heard all over the throng of men, "I +am glad, lads, to see you back again. I never expected to have seen +you again after we caught a glimpse of you as the sea washed you away. +You have seen how the men have welcomed you, and I can assure you +that the pleasure of the officers that two such gallant young fellows +should have been saved is no less than that of your comrades. A braver +act than that which you performed was never done. I shake hands with +you, and congratulate you in the name of the whole regiment." And, +suiting the action to the words, Colonel Tritton stepped forward and +shook the boys warmly by the hand, amidst a great cheer upon the part +of the whole regiment. Then he held up his hand for silence again. +"Bugler, sound the assembly; fall in, my lads, or we shall be late. +Come in here, boys; you can get something to eat, and tell us in a few +words how you were saved, for, even now that I see you it seems almost +impossible." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +THE PASSAGE OF THE DUORO--TALAVERA. + + +Very severe was the drill and discipline, and not very abundant was +the food, and there was a general feeling of pleasure when, by the +general concentration of the army at Coimbra, it was evident that +active operations were about to commence. On the 5th of May 9000 +Portuguese, 3000 Germans, and 13,000 British troops were assembled. +Sir Arthur was already there, and upon the 6th General Beresford +marched with 10,000 men, and orders were issued for the rest of the +army to march out early the next day. + +The Norfolk Rangers were in high glee that night, and many were the +tales told by the old soldiers of former engagements in which they +had taken part. Next morning, at daybreak, the tents were struck, the +baggage packed, and the wagons loaded. The people of Coimbra came out +in crowds to see the troops march, and many were the blessings and +good wishes poured out as the long line wound through the streets of +the city. + +Hill's division was the last, and the rain was pouring down with great +force by the time they started. The march, however, was not a very +long one, for Beresford's division, which was to operate upon the +Upper Duoro, had a long distance to make, and it was necessary that +all should be ready for simultaneous action. For this purpose the army +halted the next day, and upon the 9th marched to Aveiro on the River +Vonga. Here a large flotilla of boats was found, and the Norfolk +Rangers with two other regiments were ordered to embark at once. The +Portuguese fishermen entered heart and soul into the business, and in +perfect silence the little flats were rowed up the lake of Ovar. + +The soldiers were greatly crowded in the boats, and were glad, indeed, +when just as morning dawned they landed at the town of Ovar. + +By this movement they were placed upon the right flank of Francheschi, +the general who commanded the advanced division of the French army. +Soon after they had landed the French were attacked in front, and +finding their flank turned, and the whole British force, which they +had believed to be seven days' march away, in their front, they fell +back hastily. + +To their great disappointment, the Rangers took no share in this the +first skirmish of the war. But Hill's orders were not to press on the +enemy's rear. Three days more of marching and skirmishing brought them +close to the Duoro on the evening of the 11th. The enemy crossed that +evening and destroyed the bridge, and during the night the British +troops were all brought up, and massed behind the hill called the +Serra. This hill stood upon a sharp elbow which the river makes just +above the town of Oporto, and the British were here completely hidden +from Marshal Soult, who had no idea that they were so close at hand. +Indeed, knowing that the bridge was broken and that all the boats +had been carefully taken over to that side of the river, the Marshal +dreamt not that Sir Arthur would attempt to cross, but imagined that +he would take boats lower down near the mouth of the river and there +endeavor to cross. To prevent such an attempt Soult had massed his +army below Oporto. + +The troops were ordered to pile arms, and eat their breakfast, but to +keep in position. "I wonder how we are to cross the river, Tom?" Peter +said. "It is three hundred yards across, with a rapid current, no man +in the world could swim that, and carry his musket and ammunition +across." + +"I expect Sir Arthur is reconnoitering, Peter; I saw him go up the +hill to that convent there; he must be able to see from there right +over Oporto." + +An hour passed, and then two or three officers were seen coming down +from the hill; one went up to General Hill, who happened at that +moment to be talking to Colonel Tritton. "You are to prepare to cross, +sir, Colonel Waters has discovered a small boat brought across by a +Portuguese in the night. They are going to cross to that great convent +you see upon the other side. They will bring back boats with them, and +you will cross at once, take possession of the convent, and hold it +against any force that may be brought against you until reinforcements +arrive." + +Very quickly were the orders passed, and with a smile of satisfaction +the men took their arms and fell in. They were moved near the river, +and kept under shelter of some houses. + +"Keep near me," Colonel Tritton said to Tom and Peter, "I may want you +to carry messages, there will be no sounding of bugles to-day." + +Keeping under the shade of some trees so that they could command a +view of the river without being seen from the opposite side, Colonel +Tritton with two of his officers and his two buglers, watched what +was going on. A few paces ahead of them were Generals Paget and Hill, +like themselves, watching the daring experiment. Behind, under shelter +of the houses, were the troops in dense masses. The Rangers, as the +first regiment in General Hill's division, were in front, and would +naturally be the first to cross. It was a most anxious moment, as +Colonel Waters and two Portuguese pushed the tiny boat from shore and +pulled across stream. The bulk of the Serra Hill hid the river at this +point, and even the convent opposite, from the sight of the French +army formed up below the town, but there were no doubt stragglers all +over the city, and the whole baggage of the French army was in retreat +by the road to Valarga which ran at a short distance behind the +convent. + +Most anxiously their eyes were strained upon the opposite bank, from +which they expected to see the flash of musketry, as the little boat +neared the convent. All, however, was as still as death. Behind them +they heard a rumble, and looking round saw eighteen guns on their way +up the hill. From this eminence they could command the ground around +the Seminary, as the convent across the water was called, and thus +afford some aid to the troops as they crossed. + +There was a murmur of satisfaction as the boat neared the opposite +shore, and after lying still for a moment to reconnoiter the convent, +pulled boldly up to the landing-place, where its occupants disembarked +and entered the Seminary. Their absence was not long. In a few minutes +they reappeared with eight or ten men, and then at once entered and +cast off three large boats moored along side. + +The boys could hardly repress a cheer as they saw them fairly under +weigh. An officer now left the side of the General, and came to +Colonel Tritton, "You will get your first company in readiness to +embark, sir; do not let them show themselves until the last moment." + +Colonel Tritton joined his men. "Captain Manley, take your company +forward, when the first boat touches the shore embark. Let there be no +noise or confusion." + +"God bless you, Peter," Tom said, as they separated; "your company +won't be many minutes after us;" for the bugler of the first company +was ill, and Tom was ordered to take his place. + +As the boat touched the shore Captain Manley ordered the leading files +of his company to come from under cover and take their place in the +boat. Twenty-four men entered, and when the other boats were also full +Captain Manley took his place, followed by his bugler, and the boats +pushed off again. + +There was a dead silence in the boat, broken only by the sound of +the oars as the Portuguese tugged manfully at them, each oar being +double-banked by a soldier. The rest sat with their muskets in their +hands, their pouches open ready for use, and their eyes fixed upon the +shore. All was quiet, and with a sigh of relief, and a hearty hurrah +muttered under their breath, the men leapt from the boat and ran up to +the Seminary. + +It was a large building with a flat roof, and the enclosure around it +was surrounded by a high wall which swept round to the water's edge +on either side. The only entrance was through a stout gate studded +with iron. This was already closed and barred; the captain at once +distributed his men at the upper windows of the Seminary, with orders +not to show themselves until the alarm was given. + +They had scarcely taken their places when they were joined by the +occupants of the second boat, while those of the third, in which +General Paget himself crossed, were but a minute or two later. Just as +they touched the shore, however, there was a sudden shout heard, this +was followed by others, and in five minutes a wild hubbub was heard in +the town. Drums beat to arms, and it was evident that the enemy were +at last awake to the fact that the British had effected a lodgment +upon their side of the stream. + +"We shall have it hot presently," Captain Manley said to Tom. "They +will be a quarter of an hour before they can get round here, and we +shall have the three boats back by that time. The one we came in is +half-way across already." + +Seven or eight minutes later a heavy column of men was seen pouring +out of the upper gate of the town. As they got into the open ground, +they threw out clouds of skirmishers, and pushed down towards the +convent. A heavy fire was at once opened upon them by the English guns +upon the Serra Hill. There was no longer any need for concealment. The +soldiers in the convent took their places at the windows, and as they +did so could hear the loud hurrahs of their comrades as they crowded +down to the bank upon the other side of the river to await their turn +to embark. Before the enemy were within musket-shot, three boat loads +more had been landed, and there were, therefore, 150 men now in the +convent. From the gates of the city the French artillery came pouring +out, and, taking up a position upon an eminence, opened fire upon the +convent just as the infantry had got within musket-range. + +So suddenly did the noise of the enemy's cannonade, the crashing of +the balls against the thick walls of the Seminary, the rattle of the +enemy's musketry, and the louder roar of the muskets of the defenders, +blended on both sides with shouts and cheers, break out, that for a +minute or two Tom felt almost bewildered. He had no time, however, to +think, for an officer came up to Captain Manley. "The general is up on +the roof; he wants a bugler sent up to him." + +Captain Manley nodded to Tom, who followed the aide-de-camp on to the +roof. Here he could see all that was passing, and an exciting sight +it was. Crowds of French soldiers were approaching the wall, keeping +up a tremendous musketry fire, whilst behind them three batteries of +field-guns were sending their messengers of death. From every upper +window of the convent the answering flashes came thick and fast, while +overhead hummed the shot from the British guns, on the Serra Hill. +Oporto itself was in a state of uproar. Drums were beating, trumpets +sounding, bells clanging, while from the house-tops the population, +men and women, were waving their handkerchiefs to the English, +gesticulating and making all sorts of pantomimic expression of joy. + +Looking at the river behind, Tom saw with pleasure that some more +boats had been obtained, and that strong reinforcements would soon be +across. The whistling of the bullets and the hum of the round shot +were incessant, and Tom acknowledged to himself that he felt horribly +uncomfortable--much more uncomfortable than he had any idea that he +should feel under fire. Had he been actively engaged, he would have +hardly experienced this feeling; but to stand impassive under a heavy +fire is trying to the nerves of the oldest soldier. He was angry with +himself that he was not more indifferent to the whizzing of the balls; +but the sensation of discomfort under fire is beyond the control of +the will, and it is no unusual thing to see a young soldier who, later +in the day, may display an almost reckless courage, yet at first +flinch whenever balls hiss close by him, in spite of all his efforts +to the contrary. Tom was able, however, to control any outward +manifestation of his feelings, and took his place a few paces behind +General Paget, who was standing with one of his officers by his side, +watching the force which, momentarily increasing, was, in spite of the +British fire, making its way onward towards the gate. + +It was evident that the general considered the danger to be pressing, +as he once or twice looked back to see how quickly the reinforcements +were crossing the river. The first time that he did so, his eye fell +on Tom. "Get behind those big chimneys, lad. There is no use in +exposing yourself unnecessarily." + +Tom obeyed the order with alacrity, and, once in shelter, was soon +able to bring his nerves under control, and to look round the corner +of his shelter without flinching when the bullets sang past. In five +minutes General Hill joined Paget on the roof, and just as he did so +the latter was severely wounded and fell. + +Tom ran forward to assist him, and, kneeling beside him, partially +supported him until four men came up and carried him below. The +position of the little garrison was now very precarious, the artillery +fire concentrated upon them was heavy, and the French swarmed up +to the wall, which they in vain endeavored to climb. The English +kept up a tremendous fire upon them, cheering constantly as fresh +reinforcements arrived, or as the enemy was momentarily repulsed. + +Tom had now lost all nervousness, and was standing eagerly watching +the fight, when a ball knocked his shako off. The general happened to +turn around at the moment. "That was a narrow escape," he said with a +smile. "What is your name, lad?" + +"Scudamore, sir," Tom answered. + +"Scudamore--Scudamore. Yes, I remember the name now. You are one of +the lads General Craufurd spoke to me about. I want to see you. Come +to me to-morrow with your brother. Go down now and join your company; +I do not want you here." + +Tom gladly went down, for he longed to be doing something. He soon +found his company, and, taking up a firelock of one of the men who had +fallen, was soon hard at work loading and firing into the assailants. +For an hour the strife continued. Fortunately General Murray had +found some boats three miles higher up the stream, and had crossed, +thus menacing the enemy's line of retreat. Suddenly a great pealing +of bells were heard in Oporto, with shouting and cheering, and the +house-tops were covered with people waving their handkerchiefs. The +French were evacuating the town. The inhabitants at once took across +some large barges to Villa Neva, a suburb lying across the river and +just below the Serra Hill. Here Sherbrooke began to cross. + +It was now the time for the English to take the offensive. There were +now three battalions in the seminary, and as the French drew sullenly +off to join the column now flowing steadily out from Oporto along the +Valonga road, the gates were thrown open, and the English passing out +formed outside the walls, and poured volley after volley into the +retreating foe. Had Murray fallen upon their flank, the disaster of +the French would have been complete; but this general feared that the +enemy would turn upon him, and destroy his division before assistance +could arrive, and he therefore remained inactive, and allowed the long +column of fugitives to pass unmolested. + +For the next eight days the English army followed hotly in pursuit, +and several skirmishes occurred; but Soult effected a most masterly +retreat, saving his army, when it seemed upon the brink of +destruction, by leaving his guns and baggage behind him, and leading +his men by paths over mountains supposed to be impassable for any +large body of men. He lost altogether 6000 men in this short campaign. +This included 3600 prisoners either captured in action or left behind +in the hospitals, and 1400 killed. The number of guns left behind was +fifty-eight. The English had only 300 killed and wounded. + +Sir Arthur's plans for the invasion of Spain were not yet +complete, and he accordingly halted his army to await supplies and +reinforcements. During this time the young buglers had no opportunity +of calling upon Major-General Hill. The transport supplied by the +Spanish Government had failed grossly, and the troops were badly fed +at a time when, taking long marches, they most required support. The +first day after they halted the boys determined that they would, as +soon as they were off duty, call upon General Hill. While parade was +going on, however, they saw the general ride up to Colonel Tritton, +and enter into conversation with him. The bugler, who was standing +near, was ordered to sound the call for the officers to assemble in +front; and when they did so, Colonel Tritton left the general's side +and spoke a few words with them. There was a short conversation, +and then the colonel rejoined the general's side, and the officers +returned to their places. The colonel now rode forward to the center +of the line, and said in loud tones, "Men, I have a piece of news to +tell you which I think that you will be glad to hear. Upon my arrival +at Lisbon I reported the gallant conduct of Tom and Peter Scudamore +in rescuing one of their comrades when washed overboard in the Bay +of Biscay. Captain Merivale, of the "Latona," also reported it, and +General Hill, when he heard the circumstances, was also good enough to +send home a report recommending them for promotion. He has received +an answer from the Commander-in-Chief announcing that they are both +granted commissions in this regiment as a reward for their act of +distinguished gallantry. The regiment is dismissed." + +As the men fell out they gave a loud and general cheer, and Tom and +Peter were surrounded by their comrades, who shook them by the hand, +and congratulated them upon their promotion. The boys were too much +surprised and affected to speak, and they had scarcely recovered from +their bewilderment, when Carruthers came up to them, and led them +to the colonel. Here General Hill first, and then all the officers, +warmly shook hands with them. The boys were much touched by the warmth +with which they were received, and were soon hurried off to the tents +of the officers. Several of the ensigns were slight young men, and +they insisted upon rigging the boys out in uniform, and the boys +had the less scruple in accepting the kind offer, inasmuch as they +expected every day to enter Spain, when the baggage would be cut down +to the smallest possible proportion, and the officers as well as +the men be obliged to leave almost everything behind them. Sam was +delighted at the promotion of his friends, and asked to be appointed +their servant, a request which was at once acceded to. The regiment +had now been three months in Spain, and the boys had continued to +work hard at Spanish, devoting several hours a day to its study, and +talking it whenever they could find an opportunity--no difficult +matter, as Portugal was full of Spanish who had crossed the frontier +to avoid the hated yoke of the French. + +The delay in invading Spain was caused partly from want of +transport, but more by the utter incapacity of the Spanish Junta or +government, and by the arrogance and folly of Cuesta, the Spanish +Commander-in-Chief, who was always proposing impracticable schemes to +Wellington, and, inflated with Spanish pride and obstinacy, believed +that his own worthless troops were fully a match for the French, and +was jealous in the highest degree of the British general. + +At last, on the 27th of June, the British army advanced. Scarcely had +they made a day's march, however, when the utter faithlessness of the +Spaniards became manifest. The provisions and transport promised were +not forthcoming, and from the very day of their advance the British +were badly fed, and indeed often not fed at all; and so great were +their sufferings during the campaign--sufferings caused by the +heartlessness of the people whom they had come to deliver from a +foreign yoke, that the British soldiers came to cherish a deep and +bitter hatred against the Spanish; and it was this intense feeling of +animosity which had no little to do with the cruel excesses of the +English soldiery upon the capture of Burgos and San Sebastian. + +After many delays from these causes, the British army reached Oropesa +upon the 20th July, and there formed a junction with Cuesta's army. +Upon the 22d the allied armies moved forward, and upon the same +day the Spaniards came in contact with the French, and should have +inflicted a severe blow upon them, but the ignorance and timidity of +the Spanish generals enabled the enemy to draw off and concentrate +without loss. + +The British troops had now been for many days upon half rations, and +Sir Arthur gave notice to the Junta, that unless his requisitions were +complied with, he should retire from Spain. Cuesta, however, believing +that the French were retreating in haste, pushed his army across the +river Alberche, with the vain idea of defeating them, and entering +Madrid in triumph. Sir Arthur, seeing the fatal consequences which +would ensue, were the Spaniards attacked alone, laid aside his +previously-formed resolution, and put his army in motion across +the Alberche. The position of the allied armies was now most +dangerous--far more so, indeed, than the English general supposed. +Badly informed by the Spanish, he greatly underrated the enemy's +forces. Taking advantage of the delay caused by the want of provisions +and carriage, Soult, Victor, and Ney were marching their forces from +various points, and concentrating to crush the invading army. Upon the +26th the French met the Spanish army. General Zayas, who commanded +the Spanish advance of 4000 infantry and 2000 cavalry, scarcely +offered any resistance, his men broke and fled in disorder, and the +panic would have spread to the whole Spanish army, had not General +Albuquerque brought up 3000 more cavalry and held the French at +bay, while Cuesta retreated in great disorder. The Spanish loss by +dispersion and flight was no less than 4000 men, and the whole army +would have been broken up had not General Sherbrooke advanced with his +division, and placed it between the French and the flying Spaniards. + +The allies now recrossed the Alberche and took up a position to cover +Talavera. Sir Arthur chose a strong defensive position, as it was +evident that the Spanish were worse than useless in the open field. +The Spaniards were placed with their right resting upon Talavera, +their left upon a mound whereon a large field-redoubt was constructed. +Their front was covered by a convent, by ditches, stone walls, +breastworks, and felled trees; and thus, worthless as were the troops, +they could scarcely be driven from a position almost impregnable. + +The line beyond the Spanish was continued by Campbell's division, next +to which came that of Sherbrooke, its left extending to a steep hill. +Mackenzie and Donkin had not yet fallen hack from the Alberche. Hill +was in rear. The British troops, including the German legion, were +19,000 strong, with thirty guns. The Spaniards had 33,000 men and +seventy guns. The Spanish contingent could, however, be in no way +relied upon, and were, indeed, never seriously engaged. The real +battle was between the 19,000 British troops and 50,000 French. +The French attacked the British outposts with great impetuosity, +and Mackenzie and Donkin were driven in with a loss of 4000 men. +The latter took up his position with his brigade on the hill on +Sherbrooke's left; the former took post with Campbell's division, to +which he belonged. The French cavalry now galloped up towards the +portion of the line held by the Spanish, and discharged their pistols +at them, whereupon 10,000 Spanish infantry and the whole of their +artillery broke and fled in wild confusion. For miles they continued +their flight, but in the evening the Spanish cavalry were sent round +in pursuit, and drove some 4000 of these cowards back to their lines. +Seeing the wild confusion which was raging on the allies' right, +Victor resolved, although evening was at hand, to make a sudden dash +upon the hill upon their left, which, held only by Donkin's brigade, +was the key of the position. The hill was very steep upon the front, +or French side, while towards the rear it sloped gradually. Ruffin's +division was ordered to the attack, followed by Villette in support, +while Lapisse was ordered to engage the German legion, which was on +the left of Sherbrooke's division. + +Hill's division was lying down behind the hill when Ruffin's troops +advanced to the attack. There was no expectation of an attack that +evening, and the woods and increasing darkness covered the movements +of the French troops. Weary and hungry, the English soldiers, +disgusted at the inhuman neglect of the Spaniards, and furious +at their cowardice, were chatting over the events of the day and +discussing the chances, by no means bright, of the expected battle +to-morrow. All that day they had had no food whatever save a small +portion of grain, served out raw and unground. Tom and Peter had been +chatting with the officers, who were grouped under a tree, when Sambo +came up to them and beckoned them aside. + +"Look here, Massa Tom, here six eggs; tree for you, tree for Massa +Peter." + +"Thank you, Sam, that is capital; but you know you will get into a row +if you get caught taking things." + +"Me no take 'em, massa. Old hen give them to me." + +Tom laughed. + +"How was that, Sam?" + +"Well, Massa, me saw her sitting on nest. Me went up and said to her, +'Give me some eggs, old girl.' She say 'Cluck.' I says, 'Cluck means +yes, I suppose?' She say 'Cluck' again. Clear 'nuff that, so me take +eggs, eat tree, bring six, young massa." + +"I am afraid, Sam," Tom said, laughing, "your story would hardly save +you from the triangles, if you had been caught. However, as it is rude +to return a present, of course you cannot take them back to the hen. I +suppose they are raw?" + +"Yes, massa; no good make fire; make hole bofe ends, suck 'em." + +"All right, Sam; it is not the nicest way, but, under the +circumstances, perhaps it is the best; at any rate, I am too hungry to +wait till we can get a fire lighted." + +So saying, the boys sucked the raw eggs, and then joined the men, +when, just as they did so, first a dropping rifle shot, and then a +perfect roar of musketry broke out upon the hill above them. It needed +no order to be given. The men fell into their places and prepared to +climb the hill and assist Donkin's brigade, which was evidently unable +alone to resist the attack. Knapsacks were thrown off, firelocks +tightly grasped, and the regiment impatiently awaited orders to +advance. None were more impatient than the colonel, who after a few +minutes, seeing by the fire that the English were falling back, and +that the French had gained the crest of the hill, waited no longer for +orders, but gave the word for the regiment to advance. They were but +half way up the hill when General Hill himself galloped down to meet +them, and then turning, led the way beside Colonel Tritton. + +General Hill had had a narrow escape. Donkin had repulsed the French +who attacked him in front, but his force was insufficient to guard the +whole crest of the hill. Consequently, the enemy had come up round +his flank, and were now in actual possession of the crest. General +Hill, ignorant of this, had ridden with his brigade-major right +into the midst of the French before he found out his mistake. His +brigade-major, Fordyce, was killed, his own horse wounded, and his +bridle seized by a French grenadier. He had, however, broken away, and +had ridden off under a storm of bullets. + +With a cheer the Norfolk Rangers followed their gallant leader. They +reached the crest, poured a tremendous volley into the enemy, and +charged with the bayonet. The French, of whom but a small portion +had as yet gained the crest, were unable to resist the impetuous +onslaught, and at once gave way. + +The Rangers were now joined by the 48th and the 29th, so that these, +with Donkin's brigade, formed a strong body of troops. The French, +who had fallen back, now united with their main body, and the attack +was renewed with all the force of Ruffin's division. The heavy mass +pressed upwards, in spite of the destructive fire of the British, and +were within twenty yards of the crest, when, with a hearty cheer, the +English troops burst upon them with the bayonet, and the French again +fell back, broken and disheartened. + +This ended the fighting on the 27th of July. Long lines of bivouac +fires soon blazed upon either side. The wounded were carried down the +hill to the field-hospital, which had been erected under its cover, +and the men, eating their scanty supper, wrapped themselves in their +great coats, and were soon asleep. The officers chatted for a short +time longer, but as all were tired, and the next day was sure to be a +severe one, they, too, soon lay down by their fire. + +When morning broke, it was seen that the enemy had massed a large +force of artillery upon a hill just opposite to the one held by the +English. Soon afterwards Ruffin's division, as before supported by +Villette, advanced to the attack, covered by the tremendous fire from +his artillery. The British had no adequate force of artillery to reply +to the iron storm, and the balls swept through their lines, mowing +down their ranks, and causing great loss. The regiments in reserve lay +down to avoid the iron shower, while the Rangers and 48th prepared to +resist the French when they came within fighting distance. + +As their men approached the summit of the hill, the French artillery +was obliged to cease playing in that direction, and turned its +attention to the British center, while a fierce musketry contest took +place between the French and Hill and Donkin's men. + +The ground was rough, and the troops on both sides, broken up into +small bodies, fought desperately. General Hill was wounded, and the +British troops fell fast. The French, however, suffered even more, +and, as Hill brought up his reserve, the English gained ground foot by +foot, until they drove them again down the steep side of the hill. As +the French retired, their artillery once more opened fire to cover +their retreat. + +A pause now ensued; the French in this brief contest had lost 1400 +men, and the British had suffered severely. The French then held a +council of war, and determined to attack along the whole line in +force. Hours passed away; the English munched their corn, smoked their +pipes, and watched the enemy scattered over the plain. The weather +was very hot, and the men of both sides went down to a little stream +which divided their positions, drank, and filled their water-bottles +in perfect amity. Some of the officers, who spoke French conversed +with the French officers, exchanged cigars for brandy, and joked and +laughed as if they had been the best of friends. + +At one o'clock the French drums were heard to beat, and the men were +soon formed in order. Tom and Peter stood with a group of officers on +the brow of the hill. Nothing could be finer than the sight. Far away +the view stretched over the country, thickly wooded, and with chateau +and farm-houses scatted here and there. Through the trees the dense +masses of the French could be seen, as they moved in columns towards +the positions from which they were to attack. Upon an eminence, +nearly opposite to their position, the boys could see a long line of +the French artillery. Far away, to the right, rose the churches of +Talavera, while behind the hill were the British and Spanish cavalry, +ready to charge should the French endeavor to turn the British left by +pushing round its foot. Fifty paces from the officers of the Norfolk +Rangers sat Sir Arthur Wellesley, on horseback, watching attentively +through a field-glass the movements of the enemy, and at a short +distance behind him were his staff. The British troops were standing +in easy order, a little behind the crest of the hill, so as to be +sheltered from the artillery fire with which the French were sure to +cover the advance of their column of attack. + +"This is a grand sight, Peter," Tom said, "but I wish they would +begin; it makes one fidgety waiting for it." + +Scarcely had Tom spoken when, as if in answer to his wish, a series +of jets of white smoke puffed out from the opposite hill, and two or +three seconds later came the thunder of eighty guns, and the whizzing +sound of as many balls. Instinctively the group drew back a pace, but +it was not upon them that this tremendous fire was opened. It was +directed against the right of the British line, and almost at the same +moment a cloud of skirmishers appeared among the trees, followed by +the dark columns of Sebastiani's division. + +Upon these the English guns at once opened fire; but rushing forward +with their usual impetuosity, they cleared away the obstacles which +had been raised across the British front, and charged with fury +against the British position. Campbell's division, however, assisted +by Mackenzie's brigade and two Spanish battalions, stood firm, and +driving back the skirmishers, advanced in line, cheering loudly. The +head of the French column withered away under their tremendous fire, +and, pushing forward, they overlapped it, and drove them back with +terrible loss, capturing ten guns. Then Campbell prudently recalled +his men to their first position, and the British artillery, which had +necessarily been silent while friend and foe were mingled together, +opened furiously upon the French as they tried to re-form upon their +supports. A Spanish cavalry regiment dashed down upon their flank, and +they retired again in great disorder. + +Every incident of the fight could be seen from the British position on +the hill, and the troops almost held their breath with excitement as +the British lines clashed against the head of the French column, and a +loud shout of triumph burst out spontaneously as the French broke and +fled. + +But it was now the turn of the left. Already Villette's division, +preceded by the Grenadiers and supported by Ruffin's division, was +advancing, and the British cavalry were ordered to charge them. The +ground was, however, quite unfit for cavalry. Colonel Arentschild, a +very experienced officer, who commanded the German Hussars, drew up +his regiment at the edge of a deep cleft which crossed their front, +and refused to take his men to certain destruction. The 23d Dragoons, +however, dashed into the ravine. Men and horses rolled over in all +directions; still, they got across, and, charging furiously between +the French infantry regiments, which poured in a terrible fire, +fell upon a brigade of Chasseurs in their rear. Victor sent up his +Polish lancers and Westphalian light horse to the assistance of the +Chasseurs, who already outnumbered the 23d, and this gallant regiment +was completely broken, the survivors escaping to the shelter of +Bassecourt's Spanish division, which lay beyond the hill, having lost +257 men and officers. + +Tom and Peter did not see this disastrous affair, for on the approach +of the enemy's column they fell into their places in the ranks. It +was, however, in vain that the French tried to gain the crest of the +hill, their efforts at this point being indeed far more feeble than +they had been either in the morning or upon the previous night. It was +in the center that their great effort was made. Here Lapisse threw his +division against that of Sherbrooke, and, covered by his own artillery +and by the guns upon the hill, charged right up to the position. The +British, however, repulsed them, and the guards, carried away by the +excitement of the moment, followed them with reckless ardor. The +French reserves of infantry and cavalry came up, the artillery plied +the British with shot and shell, the fugitives rallied and again came +to the attack, and the Guards fell back in confusion. The Germans next +to them, severely pressed, began to waver, and for a time it seemed +that the British, victorious upon both flanks, were yet to lose the +battle by being broken in the center. + +Now, however, the 48th, which Sir Arthur had ordered down from the +hill when he saw the rash advance of the Guards, was seen advancing +in line through the disordered masses. Wheeling back, it allowed the +retreating regiments to pass through it and then again formed and fell +upon the flank of the victorious French column. The French paused in +their advance, the Guards and Germans rallied and came back again to +the fight, the shots of the British guns plowed lines in the column, +the French wavered, and, as the British light cavalry trotted up with +the intention of charging them, fell back, and drew off to their +first position amidst shouts of victory along the whole length of the +British line. + +Thus the battle ceased, each party occupying the ground it had held in +the morning. The British loss in killed, wounded, and missing, in the +two days' fighting, was 6200; that of the French 7400. Had the British +been in a condition to have sallied from their position and pursued +the retiring enemy, the victory would have had far greater results; +but, exhausted and half-starved, the British were incapable of +following up their advantage. + +The next morning at daybreak, the French army quitted its position, +and, retiring across the Alberche, formed line of battle there, and +awaited the attack, should the English take the offensive. This they +were in no position to do, although in the course of the day Craufurd +had come up with the 43d, 52d, and 95th Regiments. These three +regiments had heard of the first day's fighting from the Spanish +fugitives, and had marched with all speed to the assistance of their +friends. They had, carrying their kit and ammunition, weighing from 50 +lb. to 60 lb., actually marched sixty-two miles in twenty-six hours in +the hottest season of the year, one of the greatest feats recorded in +military history. + +The Rangers had suffered heavily, and in the two days' fighting had +lost thirty-eight killed and 109 wounded. Among the former were two +officers, while several others were wounded. The Scudamores had, +fortunately, both escaped without a scratch. The inhumanity of the +Spaniards was now more markedly shown than ever. Although both in +Cuesta's army, and in the town of Talavera provisions were abundant, +yet the inhabitants carefully concealed them, while both the wounded +and fighting men of the British army were in want. So great was the +misery and indignation of the soldiers at this shameful treatment, +from those for whom they were doing so much, that they would willingly +have attacked the Spanish army and plundered the town; and from this +period to the end of the war the British hated the Spanish with a deep +and bitter hatred. + +Wellesley now received news that Soult had crossed the mountains +through the pass of Banos, which had been left undefended by the +Spanish, and was marching upon his rear. Believing that Soult had only +13,000 men with him--whereas in fact, he had 50,000--Sir Arthur left +the Spanish army at Talavera in charge of the hospitals, with 6000 +sick and wounded, and retraced his steps, with the intention of giving +battle to this new enemy. + +Upon the 3d, however, he learned the real strength of Soult's army, +and upon the same day heard that General Cuesta had basely retreated +from Talavera, without having provided any transport whatever, +according to his promise, for the British sick and wounded. All of +these who had strength to crawl rejoined the British army, but 1500, +who were unable to walk, were left behind, and fell into the hands +of the French, by whom they were treated with far greater kindness +and attention than they had been by the Spanish. Upon the 4th Cuesta +joined Sir Arthur, and at six o'clock next morning the only possible +course for safety was adopted. Victor was advancing from Talavera, +Soult was hurrying from Placentia to cut off the retreat of the +British, and accordingly Sir Arthur fell back upon Arzobispo, on the +Tagus. + +The artillery, the baggage and wounded, first crossed the bridge, and +at two o'clock the entire army was across. So great was the hunger of +the men that a herd of swine happening to be seen close to the line +of march, the soldiers ran upon them, shot and bayoneted them, and +devoured them raw. Taking up a strong position, guarding the bridges +of the Tagus, the British army remained quiet until the end of August. +During this time they became so weakened by starvation that they could +scarcely walk; a great portion of the cavalry horses, and nearly all +the baggage animals died of hunger, and at last, Sir Arthur, finding +that no remonstrances availed with the Junta, fell back again to the +Portuguese frontier by slow marches, for the army was so utterly +enfeebled that it resembled a vast body of invalids, rather than an +army of unbeaten soldiers. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +A PAUSE IN OPERATIONS. + + +Talavera was fought in July, 1809, and for four months longer Sir +Arthur Wellesley kept his troops on the Spanish frontier, where his +presence served as a check against any invasion, even by a very +formidable army, of Portugal. After the utter bad faith and cowardice +shown by the Spanish, the great commander was determined never again +to trust in their promises, or to undertake any movement dependent +for success upon their co-operation. The Junta then declared that +the Spaniards would alone and unaided sweep the French beyond the +Pyrenees, and a Spanish army of 45,000 infantry, 7000 cavalry, and 60 +guns advanced in November against Madrid. It was met by a French army +of 24,000 infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 50 guns. The battle began at +eleven in the morning, and by three the French, with a loss of only +1700 killed and wounded, had utterly routed the Spanish, with a loss +of 5000 killed and wounded, 45 guns, and 26,000 prisoners! After this +signal and disgraceful defeat, Lord Wellington--for he had now been +raised to the peerage--felt that nothing whatever could be done at +present in Spain, and so fell back into Portugal, where for many +months he occupied himself in preparing to meet the storm which would, +he knew, fall ere long upon that country. The Portuguese authorities +were as incapable, as untrustworthy, and as intractable as were those +of Spain; but here, happily, Lord Wellington had more power. England +was paying large subsidies towards keeping up the Portuguese army, +which was commanded by Lord Beresford, having under him many British +officers. The Portuguese troops were hardy, obedient, and far braver +than the Spaniards; but difficulties often arose in keeping the army +together, because the Portuguese Government, although England was +paying the principal expenses of the army, yet starved their soldiers, +and often kept them for months without pay. It was only by the +strongest remonstrances, and by the oft-repeated threat that he would +embark the British troops, and abandon Portugal altogether, unless +these and other abuses were done away with, that Lord Wellington +succeeded in reducing this incapable and insolent Government to +reason. + +Reinforcements arrived but slowly from England, for a considerable +portion of the available troops of England were frittered away in +holding Cadiz and in an expedition to Sicily. In these two places some +25,000 English troops were wasted--a force, which, had it been added +to Wellington's army, would have enabled him to take the field against +the French, instead of being forced to remain in Portugal for upwards +of a year without discharging a single shot against the enemy. Tom and +Peter Scudamore, however, were not destined to remain inactive all +these weary months. One day in November, just before the army fell +back from the Spanish frontier, General Hill was dining at mess with +the regiment; for, rough as was the accommodation, the officers had +succeeded in establishing a general mess. The conversation turned upon +the difficulty of discovering what force the various French generals +had at their disposal, the reports received by the Commander-in-Chief +being often ridiculously incorrect. There was also an immense +difficulty in communicating with the guerilla chiefs who, almost +always beaten when they came to blows with any considerable bodies +of the French, yet managed to harass them terribly by cutting off +convoys, falling upon small parties, and attacking outposts and bands +of foragers. Knowing every mountain pass and road, these men could, +if they would, keep Lord Wellington informed of every considerable +movement of the enemy, and might in return receive instruction for +acting, when required, in concert before the communication of an +advancing army, or might create a diversion by uniting their bands, +and threatening some important post. + +The next day the boys went to Colonel Tritton's quarters, and, +referring to the conversation of the day before, said that they were +willing to carry any messages that the general might require sent, and +to obtain any information wanted. + +"Nonsense, boys, you would be hung as spies before you had been gone a +week." + +"I don't think so, sir," Tom said; "we have had very little to do +during the six months we have been out here except to learn the +language of the country, and I think now we could pass very well as +Spanish boys. Besides, who would suspect boys? We are quite ready to +chance detection if we can be allowed to go." + +"I don't like it, boys; you are too young. Well, if not too young," he +said, in answer to a movement of Tom's to speak, "we all like you too +well to run the risk of hearing you have been hung like a couple of +young puppies." + +"You are very kind, colonel; but you know you promised to give us a +chance if you could, and having a chance of course means having extra +danger; but I really don't think that there would be any great danger +in it." + +"Well, boys," Colonel Tritton said, after a few moments' thought, "I +do not feel justified in refusing your application, and will mention +it to General Hill. There are very few officers in the army who +speak Spanish fluently, and you being boys would, as you say, avert +suspicion. But I tell you fairly that I hope General Hill will at once +refuse to entertain the idea." + +"Thank you, sir," the boys said. "Of course that is all we could ask +you to do." + +The next day, after parade was over, Colonel Tritton walked on +to General Hill's quarters at a sort of half farm-house, half +country-seat, a short distance from the village, round which the +Rangers were encamped. As he came up to the house, General Hill came +out from his door talking to a Spanish officer, who had the day before +brought some despatches from one of the Spanish generals to Lord +Wellington. + +Colonel Tritton joined them, and they stood talking together upon the +state of affairs in Spain, and of the advance of the Spanish army on +Madrid, which was then just taking place. As they did so two very +ragged, unkempt Spanish boys, shoeless and wretched-looking, limped +up, and began to beg. General Hill shook his head, and the Spaniard +impatiently motioned them away. + +"Por Dios," one whined; "give us something; we are starving. The +French have burnt down our houses, and killed our fathers and +mothers--we are starving. 'Por l'amor de Dios!'" + +"What's the poor little beggar say?" General Hill asked the Spaniard. + +"The usual story--house burnt, father and mother killed, starving. I +dare say it's all a lie." + +"Where did you live?" he asked in Spanish. + +"In the village of Oros, near Valencia." + +"And how did you come here?" + +"The French burnt the village because the guerillas had killed a party +of theirs in it, and they killed all the people, and then carried off +the mules and horses, and took us to drive some of them. That was four +months ago. We had to drive till the other day at Tamanes, when our +men beat the French; our mules were taken, and, as they did not want +us as drivers we had nothing to do but to come on in hopes that the +kind English would give us food." + +The Spanish officer translated what the boy said, and General Hill +remarked, "Yes, that was a brilliant affair of the Duke del Pasque's. +Here," he called to an orderly, "give these boys some bread. I will +see what can be done for them afterwards. I am afraid nothing. Poor +little wretches! their story is a very common one." + +The boys received the bread with a great show of thankfulness, and, +sitting down by the roadside, began to munch it with great appetite. +The Spanish officer now mounted his horse and rode off, while General +Hill and Colonel Tritton remained standing where he had left them. +Colonel Tritton then told General Hill of the Scudamores' request to +be allowed to penetrate into Spain as spies or with dispatches. + +"The young pickles!" General Hill laughed. "What will they be wanting +to do next? Pooh, pooh! it would be out of the question." + +"I believe they do really speak Spanish exceedingly well." Colonel +Tritton said. "They generally act as interpreters for us, and none of +the officers speak Spanish with anything like the same fluency." + +"As far as the language goes, they might get on, perhaps," General +Hill said; "but they look as thorough English boys as you could see. +They would be detected at once." + +"Yes," Colonel Tritton said, "they are both thorough English boys; I +should know them anywhere. What a contrast to the miserable, limping, +hang-dog lads there! Poor little chaps! Why, upon my word, I believe +the fellows are laughing." + +General Hill looked sharply at them, and, as he looked from one to the +other, he said sarcastically, "Poor little chaps indeed! You said that +very naturally, Tritton. It really does you credit as an actor." + +Colonel Tritton looked at the general with an expression of blank +astonishment. + +"What," said the general, "were you really taken in too" + +"Taken in?" repeated Colonel Tritton vaguely. + +"Don't you see, Tritton, those poor little chaps you are pitying so +are those two young scamps we were talking about." + +Colonel Tritton stared in astonishment at the boys, and then, as he +recognized them, he joined the general in a shout of laughter, while +the two boys stood up and saluted with an attempt at gravity which was +only partially successful, so amused were they at the astonishment of +their colonel, as well as pleased at the success of their disguise. + +Just at this moment there was a sound of tramping horses, and directly +afterwards an officer rode up, followed by four or five others, and +at a short distance in the rear by an escort of orderlies. The boys +needed not the exclamation of General Hill, "Here is Wellington." They +knew who the rider was, who checked his horse as he reached the gate, +for they had often seen him as he rode through the camp. A slight man, +very careful and neat in his dress, with an aquiline nose and piercing +eyes. Peter was rising as he drew up his horse, when Tom said, "Don't +get up, Peter; go on with your bread. It would look absurd for us +to salute now, and would draw attention to us," he went on, as Lord +Wellington dismounted, threw the bridle off his horse to an orderly, +and saying to General Hill, "I wanted to see you; come in." Colonel +Tritton went into the house, followed by the two officers. "We'll +stop here till they come out again, Peter. Perhaps General Hill may +speak to him about us. At any rate, we will keep up our disguise till +they've gone. Let us play at odd and even." It was a game of which +Spanish boys are very fond, and they may be seen in any of the Spanish +towns sitting by the houses on door-steps in the sun playing. It was +half an hour before the general came out again. He was about to mount +his horse, when he glanced at the boys, who were sitting against the +wall a few paces off, seemingly absorbed in their play, and paying no +attention whatever to him. Suddenly he changed his mind, dropped his +rein, and walked up to them. + +"What are you playing for?" he asked abruptly in Spanish. + +"Reals, senor," Tom said looking up, but not moving. + +"You are poor; how can you pay?" asked the general. + +"Oh! we don't pay," Tom laughed. "We keep count. I owe him twelve +thousand now. I will pay him when I get rich. He can wait." And he +held out his closed hand again for Peter to guess the number of stones +it contained. + +"Come inside," Lord Wellington said abruptly, and, turning led the way +into the house again, followed by General Hill, Colonel Tritton, and +the two boys. + +"It is not often I change my mind," he said to General Hill; "but for +once I do so now. When you told me about these lads, I refused to +employ them on such dangerous service, even when you told me of the +courage and coolness which they exhibited on the voyage. Now I have +tried them myself, I see that they will do. If they could keep up +their disguise when I spoke to them suddenly, and answer without +hesitation or any excitement which could have shown that they were +not what they pretended to be, they can do so with a French general. +I am no judge of the purity of their Spanish; but as you tell me they +deceived a Spanish officer just now, they will be able to pass with +Frenchmen. Now, lads," he went on turning to them, "you have thought +over, of course, the risks you are going to run, and are prepared, if +detected, to be hung like dogs." The boys bowed. + +"You will receive detailed instructions through Colonel Tritton, +together with such despatches as I may wish sent. They will be written +as small as possible. You will not go for a week; devote all your time +to studying the map. The largest size we have shall be sent to your +colonel this afternoon. Of course you will be supplied with money, and +for anything you can think of likely to assist you, speak to Colonel +Tritton. You are beginning well, young sirs. If you like, you ought to +made a noise in the world. Now, Hill, I must be off." + +And the general left the room with the officers, while the boys were +stammering out their thanks. + +"Where did you dress up, boys?" Colonel Tritton asked them after the +general had ridden off. "You did not come out from camp like this I +hope?" + +"No, colonel; we changed in that little wood there." + +"What have you colored your skins with?" + +"We got some iodine from the doctor, sir, and mixed it with water till +it was just thick enough to tinge our skin. It will wash pretty well +off with plenty of scrubbing, but we mean to use walnut juice when we +start; it lasts much longer, and is a better brown." + +"I am not sure, boys, that you had not better leave your faces alone, +they and your hands are so sunburnt that you would pass well enough, +though you must dye your arms and legs. Fortunately, your hair is +pretty dark, for you can't well carry dye. Think well over all these +things, for your lives may depend on some trifle of this kind. I shall +see you at mess." + +So saying, Colonel Tritton walked on, leaving the boys to follow at +their leisure. Just as they were about to turn off to make for the +woods they saw a soldier coming along the road. + +"That's Sam, if I am not mistaken, Peter, we will have some fun with +him. We can trust him to say nothing in the regiment about meeting us +like this." + +The two boys accordingly sat down by a low wall by the roadside, and +as Sam came up talked away to each other in Spanish. He passed without +paying any attention to them. After he had gone a few yards, Tom said +in a deep, loud voice, "Sambo." The black halted suddenly, and turned +round. First he looked angrily at the boys, then he went to the side +of the road and looked over the wall. Then with a very perplexed air +he looked up and down the road. + +"Who dat have impudence to call dis colored gentleman Sambo," he said +to himself. "Some fellow did, dat for sartin, not dose little Spanish +trash, dey not know Sam's name, some rascal in regiment; he's hid +somewhere. I pound him to squash when I find him." + +Muttering thus he turned to proceed on his way, but before he had gone +twenty yards, he again heard a deep shout. "Here, you, Sambo." + +The black jumped as if he was shot, "My golly," he exclaimed, and then +walked back to the boys, who were talking together, shook his head +and again looked over the wall. Then he stooped down to the boys, and +shook his fist in their faces, "You little debils, you call Sambo, I +pound you to squash." The boys both leapt to their feet with an air of +intense surprise and alarm, and began to cry out in Spanish. + +"No, can't be you," Sam said, "dis chile must be witched, no place for +men to hide, sartin not dem boys. Stone wall can't call Sambo all by +self, Sam's going out of mind. Oh! Lor, dis berry bad affair," and Sam +sat down by the roadside with a face of such perfect bewilderment and +dismay that the boys could stand it no longer, but went off together +into a scream of laughter, which caused Sam to jump to his feet again. +"What you larf for, what you larf for, you little rascals, you play +trick, eh? you call Sambo, who taught you dat name?" and he seized the +two boys and shook them furiously. + +"Oh! Sam, Sam, you will kill us with laughing," Tom got out at last. +"Do leave go, man, or we shall choke," and as Sam, astonished, loosed +his hold, the boys sat down and laughed till their sides ached. + +"Golly," exclaimed the negro, as he looked at them, "Dose boys again. +What on earth you do, Massa Tom, Massa Peter, in dose ragged close, +what you dress up like two beggars for? Lor! how you take in dis +chile, me tink you little Spanish trash, sure enuff." It was some time +before the boys could compose themselves, and then Tom made Sam sit +close by his side. + +"Look here, Sam, this isn't a joke, this is a serious business and +before I tell you anything about it, you must promise to keep the +secret strictly, as it would do us a great deal of harm if it was +known." Sam declared at once that if they tore him to pieces with wild +horses he would say nothing. Tom then explained the whole thing to him +and Sam at once declared that he would go too. + +"Quite impossible, Sam. You do not speak a word of Spanish and +although at any of the seaport towns you could pass as a runaway +sailor, there could be no possible reason for your wandering about the +country with two Spanish boys." + +Sam thought for some time. "Now dat berry unlucky Massa Tom, dat Sam +play big drum. Big drum fine music, but big drum not go well by self. +If Sam had played fiddle, Sam could go, but Sam couldn't go nohow with +big drum." + +"I should think not, Sam, with the name of the regiment painted on it. +No, no, you must stay behind. There won't be any fighting now till the +spring, and by that time we shall be back with the regiment." + +"But what you do without Sam? who black Massa's boots? who brush his +clothes?" + +Tom laughed. "These clothes would fall all to pieces, if they were +brushed much, Sam, and at present we have no boots to be blacked." + +"Where you get dose clothes, Massa Tom," Sam asked, examining with +great disgust the rags the boys had on. + +"We bought some peasant's clothes about our size, and the first beggar +boys we saw we offered to exchange. You should have seen their faces +of astonishment. When we got the clothes we made them into a bundle, +and took them to the bakehouse, and got the baker to put them into +the oven for a few hours to kill anything there might be in them. +Now, Sam, it is time for us to be going. It will take us an hour's +scrubbing to get the color off us. Be sure you keep our secret." + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +WITH THE GUERILLAS. + + +It was on a fine morning at the end of March that a cortege of +muleteers and mules left the little town of Alonqua. It was now four +months since the Scudamores left the army, and in the intervening time +they had tramped through a large portion of Spain. They had carried +with them only a dozen or so little despatches done up in tiny rolls +of the length and about the thickness of a bodkin, These were sewn +inside the lining of their coats, in the middle of the cloth where +it was doubled in at the seams, so that, even were the clothes to be +examined carefully and felt all over, the chances of detection were +slight indeed. They had each, on starting, half a dozen pieces of +Spanish gold coin sewn between the thicknesses of leather of the soles +of each of their shoes, for they did not start in the beggar clothes +in which they had first disguised themselves. Their clothes were, +indeed, worn and somewhat patched, but were of stout material, and +they wore shoes, but no stockings. They had, indeed, the appearance of +Spanish boys of the peasant class. The weather in the north of Spain +is often very cold in winter, and the boys felt that, with rags and +bare feet, they should suffer severely. All that they had to say and +do had been learned by heart. The names and addresses of the agents +of the British Government at every town had been laboriously learned +before starting, and, as Peter said ruefully, it was worse than a +dozen Greek impositions. + +At each place of any importance they would find the person to whom +they were instructed to apply, would accost him with some password, +and would be put up by him while they remained there. When they had +gained the intelligence they required--of the number of French troops +in the place and its neighborhood, a knowledge always obtained by +going round, counting the men on parade, or, in the case of small +villages, finding out easily enough from a peasant the number, +quartered there, they would write a report on the number the +intentions as far as they could learn them, the amount of food +in store, and the sentiments of the population, would enclose +the despatch in a goose-quill and give it to their host, who was +responsible for forwarding it. + +In a great number of cases, indeed, the man to whom they were +accredited was a muleteer. These men hated the French with a hatred +even more deep and deadly than that of other Spaniards, for, in +addition to the national causes of hatred, their mules were constantly +being requisitioned or seized by the troops and they themselves forced +to accompany the army for long distances at a nominal rate of pay for +themselves and their animals. Then, too, they were in close connection +with the guerillas, for whom they carried goods up into the mountains +from the towns, and when the chance came would leave their animals in +the mountains and join in cutting off an enemy's convoy. They acted as +messengers and spies too, and took their friends in the hills early +news of intended movements of the enemy. Many a day had the boys +traveled in the company of these muleteers, merry, careless fellows, +singing and talking to their mules, apparently the best-natured of +men, until something would be said which would recall the hated foe, +and then their black eyes would flash, their fingers clutch their +knife-handles, and they would pour out long strings of deep Spanish +oaths. Great was the surprise of these men on receiving the password +from two boys, but they never hesitated an instant in taking them in, +in giving them hospitality as long as they remained, and in either +accompanying them to the next town, or handing them over to the charge +of some comrade going in that direction. Not even to them did the +Scudamores ever betray that they were not what they were taken to be, +two Spanish boys employed by the English commander as messengers. +Often they were questioned how the English had come to entrust +important communications to two boys, and their reply always was that +their father and mother had fled to Portugal from the French, and were +living there near the English lines, and that they had offered their +lives in case of their sons' treachery. + +This system of hostages seemed probable enough to their questioners, +and if the boys' fare was rather harder, and their treatment more +unceremonious than it would have been had they said that they were +British officers in disguise, they ran far less risk of detection +from an accidental word or sign. Indeed it would have been next to +impossible for them, had they desired it, to convince any one of their +identity. There was no fear now of their accent betraying them. Since +they had left the army they had never, even when alone together, +spoken in English. They made the rule and kept to it for two reasons, +the one being that they found that if they did not get into this habit +of always speaking Spanish, they might inadvertently address each +other in English, and thus betray themselves; the second, that they +wanted to learn to speak absolutely like natives. This they had in the +four months thoroughly learned to do. At first their pronunciation +and occasional mistakes excited curiosity when asked questions as +to the part of Spain from which they had come, but their constant +communication with their muleteer friends had quite removed this, and +for the last two months not one person had doubted that they were not +only Spanish, but that they came from the northern provinces. + +Hitherto they had journeyed principally between large towns and over +country held by the French, but that part of their work was finished; +they had accurately computed the number of the army with which Massena +was to advance shortly to besiege Ciudad Rodrigo, and they had now to +carry the despatches to the guerilla leaders. Hitherto they had not in +a single instance excited suspicion. Not a Frenchman had asked them +a question, and no adventure of anything like an exciting nature had +taken place. They were now, however, entering into a country entirely +different from that which they had hitherto traversed. The northeast +of Spain is wild and mountainous, and offers immense natural +facilities for irregular warfare. Through the various passes of the +Pyrenees lead all the roads from France, whether to Vittoria on the +great road to Madrid, or through Navarre to Catalonia. Here and there +fortified towns still held out against the French, and the town of +Gerona, in Catalonia, had only fallen after a six months' regular +siege, and a desperate defense which fully rivals that of Saragossa. +Is it not a little singular that the Spaniards, who in the open field +were, with a few remarkable exceptions, absolutely contemptible, yet +frequently defended towns with wonderful fortitude, courage, and +desperation. It may, indeed, be said that in every siege where the +Spaniards were commanded by brave and resolute chiefs they behaved +admirably. This great range of hill country was the stronghold of the +guerillas, and every convoy from France had to be protected by a large +force, and even then often suffered greatly from the harassing attacks +of their active enemies. + +The bands of the guerilla chiefs differed greatly in strength, varying +from merely ten or a dozen men to three or four thousand, and indeed +each band varied continually. The men, when not required, would +scatter to their homes, cultivate their little patches of ground, and +throw down the spade and take up the rifle again when they heard of a +convoy to cut off, or an invading column to beat back. The bands, too, +would vary in proportion to the renown of their chiefs. An energetic +man, who, at the head of a handful, had performed some daring feats, +would find himself a week afterwards the leader of many hundreds, +while a chief who was slow and dilatory would find his band melt away +like snow in summer. + +The character of the warfare depended much upon the character of the +French generals. A few of these kept the troops under their command +sternly in hand, would permit no plundering, and insisted upon their +fair treatment of the Spaniards. These in turn wanted nothing better +than to remain quietly in their homes, and the guerilla bands would +melt away to nothing. Other generals, furious at the savage nature +of the warfare, and the incessant toil and loss entailed upon their +troops, allowed the latter to do as they pleased, and burning houses +and dead bodies marked their course. Then the peasantry, now turned +guerillas, retaliated as savagely, giving no quarter, sacrificing all +prisoners, and putting the wounded to death, sometimes with torture. +On both sides horrible atrocities were committed. + +The guerillas were armed partly with rifles and carbines, partly with +muskets landed on the coast by the British Government, who also, from +time to time, sent powder and money to assist them to continue their +resistance to the French. Although nowhere really formidable, yet, +being scattered over a great extent of country, these bands occupied +very large bodies of French troops, who would otherwise have +been disposable for general operations in the field. The English +commander-in-chief had, of course, no shadow of authority over the +guerillas, or, indeed, over any of the Spanish troops, and his +communication to them simply asked what arms and ammunition they +required, and begged them to send him a list of the number of men they +could each throw on the French communications and lines of retreat in +case he should find himself in a position to make a general advance +against them. He also recommended most strongly the bearers of the +despatch to their care. It was to the chief known as Nunez that they +were now bound. The mule train was nominally destined for Vittoria, to +which town the leader had got a pass, specifying the number of mules +and the nature of the goods they carried, from the French commandant +at Alonqua, for no one was allowed to take the goods about the country +without a pass, in order to prevent supplies being forwarded to the +mountains. This pass, however, only mentioned twelve mules with four +drivers, and this was the number which started from Alonqua. Another +score of mules, however, joined them at a short distance from the town +where a by-road turned off. Some of these had gone out from the town +unloaded, as if taken out to graze, others had not entered the town, +but had come direct from the sea-coast by by-paths with powder, and +had been awaiting the departure of Garcias, the name of the leader of +the party. They had eight men with them, all armed to the teeth. + +"Is it all right, Garcias?" + +"All right," the leader said; "they have sent out their squadrons on +the other road, so I think we are safe for to-day." + +"What boys have you got there with you?" + +"They have business with Nunez; letter from the coast." + +The cavalcade was now in motion again, and wound gradually up into the +hills. Presently they came to a point where four roads met. A clump of +trees grew hard by, and the boys gave a start of horror at seeing the +bodies of six French soldiers swinging from them. "Ay, that's Nunez's +work, I expect," Garcias said coolly. "There were three of his men +swinging there last week, so as a lesson he has hung up six of the +French. He is a rough boy to play with, is Nunez." + +At sunset the party slept in a small farm, and at daybreak continued +their journey. They were now in the heart of the mountains, and their +path lay sometimes up deep ravines, sometimes along rocky ledges. +At last, about midday, they entered a valley in which stood a small +village. "That's Nunez's head-quarters to-day," Garcias said; +"to-morrow he may be no one knows where." + +"But does he have to sally out by the wretched road by which we have +come?" Tom asked. + +"No, no," Garcias replied; "he would not catch much prey that way. +There are three other ways out of the valley. That winding path you +see there leads up to Santona. That road on the other side leads out +on to the plain, and thence to Vittoria; while the footpath over the +brow opposite leads right down into the wide valley through which the +main north road runs. So you see this is a handy spot. From that brow +we can see the convoys going to and from France, and can pour down +upon them if they are weak; while, if a column is sent in search of +us, we can vanish away long before they can catch us. Nunez does not +use the direct road over the brow for his attack, but follows the +Santona or Vittoria road for a while, and then makes a swoop round. He +does not want to bring the French up to this village, for his family +and the families of many of the men live here." + +As they approached the village, they found that there was a good deal +of bustle going on. Armed men were coming out of the cottages, and +gathering in a group round a rough stone cross, which stood in the +center of a sort of green. "We are just in time," Garcias said; "Nunez +is starting on some expedition or other." + +When they reached the spot there were nearly two hundred men +assembled. They greeted Garcias with shouts of welcome as he arrived. +"Ah, ah! Garcias, just in time. Our last skin of wine was emptied last +night; we will bring some more up to-morrow; but if you had not come +we should have had to start thirsty, and that's unlucky besides being +unpleasant." + +"Where is Nunez!" Garcias asked. + +"Here he comes," was the reply; and the boys turning saw a figure +approaching, which by no means answered to the expectation of the +celebrated guerilla chief. He was small and almost humpbodied, but +very broad. His head seemed too large for his body, and a pair of +fierce eyes gleamed out from beneath his shaggy eyebrows. His mustache +was thin and bristly and his month wide, but with thin lips. The boys +could understand the reputation for cruelty and mercilessness which +attached to this sinister-looking figure, but there was none of the +savage power which they had expected to see in so celebrated a leader. + +"Any news, Garcias?" he asked shortly, as he came up. + +"None, captain, except that these boys have brought some despatches +for you from the English Lord." + +Nunez looked sharply at them, and held out his hand without speaking. +Tom gave him the little quill. + +The guerilla opened it, read the contents, and, saying briefly, "An +answer to-morrow," strode on to his men, and in a few minutes they +were defiling out at the end of the valley. + +"That hardly seems a strong enough body to attack a French convoy, +Garcias," Tom remarked. + +"No, it would not be, but there is only a part of his band here; the +rest will join him at some place agreed on--perhaps ten miles from +here. I believe he has about thousand men under his orders. Now come +along; we shall be none the worse for dinner," and, leaving his men to +unload the mules, he led the way into the little posada, or inn. + +"Ah! Mother Morena," he said to an old woman who was crouching near a +blazing wood fire, "warming yourself as usual; it's well you've a good +fire, for you will be able to get us some dinner all the more quickly. +Twelve of us altogether, and all as hungry as wolves." + +"Ah!" exclaimed the old woman crossly; "it seems as if I were never to +have an hour's quiet, just as all that roaring, greedy lot, with their +Mother Morena here and Mother Morena there, and their grumbling at +the olla, and their curses and their quarrels, are off, and I think I +am going to have a quiet afternoon, then you come in with your twelve +hungry wolves." + +"Ah! mother, but wolves don't pay, and we do, you see." + +The frugal supper over, the boys laid down on the benches, and were +soon asleep. The next day passed slowly, for the band were not +expected to return until late at night--perhaps not until the next +morning, as the pass where the attack would be made was some fifteen +miles off, and the convoy might not pass there until late in the +afternoon. The boys soon made friends with some of the women and +children of the place, to whom they told stories of the great cities +of the plain, and of the great water which washed the shores of Spain. +The greater portion of the Spanish peasantry are incredibly ignorant, +and very few of the inhabitants of this village had ever gone beyond +the mountains. Walking about in the village, but apparently mixing but +very little in the games of the other children, were two little girls, +whose gay dress of rich silk seemed strangely out of place in such a +spot. + +Tom asked one of the women who they were, and she replied, with a toss +of the head, "They are the captain's children. The last time the band +went out they found among the baggage and brought up here, the dresses +of the children of some fine lady, and the captain kept them all as +part of his share, just as if there were no children in the village +whom it would become a great deal better than those stuck-up little +things. Not," she said, softening a little, "that they were not nice +enough before they got these things; but since they came their heads +have been quite turned by the finery and they are almost too grand to +speak to their old playfellows." + +"Is their mother alive?" + +"No, poor thing, she was killed by the French when the village she +lived in was burned by them, because some of them were found hung in +the neighborhood. The captain was away at the time and the children +were out in the woods. When he came back he found them crying by the +side of their mother's body, in the middle of the burning village. So +then he took to the mountains, and he never spares a Frenchman who +falls into his hands. He has suffered, of course, but he brought it +upon himself, for he had a hand in hanging the French soldiers, and +now he is a devil. It will be bad for us all; for some day, when the +French are not busy with other things, they will rout us out here, and +then who can blame them if they pay us for all the captain's deeds? +Ah! me, they are terrible times, and Father Predo says he thinks the +end of the world must be very near. I hope it will come before the +French have time to hunt us down." + +The boys had a hard struggle not to smile, but the woman spoke so +earnestly and seriously, that they could only shake their heads in +grave commiseration for her trouble; and then Tom asked, "Is the +captain very fond of the children?" + +"He worships them," the woman said; "he has no heart and no pity for +others. He thinks no more of blood than I do of water; but he is as +tender as a woman with them. One of them was ill the other day--a mere +nothing, a little fever--and he sat by her bedside for eight days +without ever lying down." + +"I suppose," Tom said, "they never bring prisoners up here?" + +"Yes, they do," the woman said; "not common soldiers; they kill them +at once; but sometimes officers, if they want to exchange them for +some of ours who may have been taken, or if they think they are likely +to get a high ransom for them. But there, it always comes to the same +thing; there, where you see that mound on the hillside, that's where +they are. They blindfold them on their way up here, lest they might +find their way back after all. Only one or two have ever gone down +again. I wish they would finish with them all down below; they are +devils and heretics these French; but I don't care about seeing them +killed. Many of us do, though, and we have not many diversions up +here, so I suppose it's all for the best." + +"I wish that fellow had given us our answer before he went away," +Tom said to Peter when they were alone. "I hope he won't bring any +prisoners up here; these massacres are frightful, and one side seems +as bad as the other. Well, in another month we shall have finished +with all this work, and be making for the frontier again. Shan't I be +glad when we catch sight of the first red-coats!" + +In the middle of the night the boys were roused by a general bustle, +and found that a messenger had just arrived, saying that the +expedition had been successful, that a portion of the enemy had been +cut off, their rear-guard destroyed, and that the whole band would be +up soon after daylight. The village was astir early, but it was not +until nine o'clock that the guerilla band arrived. The boys saw at a +glance that they were stronger in numbers than when they started, and +that with them were some twenty or thirty baggage animals. + +The women flocked out to meet them with shrill cries of welcome. The +booty taken was not of any great value in money, but was more valuable +than gold to the guerillas. + +Each one of the band carried, in addition to his own piece, a new +French musket, while in the barrels on the mules were powder and ball; +there were bales of cloth, and some cases of brandy and champagne, and +a few boxes and portmanteaus of officers' baggage. In the rear of all, +under a strong guard, were two French officers, both wounded, a lady +and a child of some seven or eight years old. + +After a boisterous greeting to their wives, the band broke up, and +scattered over the village, three or four men remaining to guard the +captives, who were told to sit down against a wall. + +The whole band were soon engaged in feasting, but no one paid the +least attention to the prisoners. The lady had sunk down exhausted, +with the little girl nestled close to her, the officers faint and pale +from loss of blood, leaned against the wall. One of them asked the +guards for some water, but the men paid no attention to the request, +answering only with a savage curse. Tom and Peter, who were standing +by, immediately went to the inn, filled a jug with water, and, taking +a drinking horn and some bread, went back. One of the guards angrily +ordered them back as they approached. + +"I am not going to free them," Tom said, soothingly; "there can be no +reason why they should die of thirst, if they are enemies." + +"I am thirsty myself," one of the guard said, "and it does us good to +see them thirst." + +"What, has no one brought you anything to drink?" Tom said, in a tone +of surprise. "Here, Peter, you give this bread and water to these +prisoners; I will run to Mother Morena's and bring some wine for the +guard." + +The guard would not allow Peter to approach the captives until Tom +arrived with a large jug of wine, and a cold fowl, which he had +obtained at the inn. These the Spaniards accepted, and allowed the +boys to give the water to the prisoners. All drank eagerly, with every +expression of thankfulness, the lady seizing Peter's hand and kissing +it as he handed the horn to the child. The lady was a very bright, +pretty woman, though now pale and worn with fatigue and emotion, and +the child was a lovely little creature. + +The boys, on leaving the prisoners, hurried to Garcias. + +"What are they going to do with the prisoners, Garcias?" + +"They have brought them up here to exchange for Nunez's lieutenant, +who was taken last week. One of the men went off last night to +Vittoria with a letter to offer to exchange. One of the officers is a +colonel, and the young one a captain. The lady is, they say, the wife +of General Reynier." + +"Then they are safe," Tom said joyfully, "for, of course the French +would exchange a guerilla against three such prisoners." + +"Yes," Garcias said, "they are safe if Vagas has not been shot before +the messenger gets to Vittoria. The messenger will hear directly he +gets there, and if they have finished Vagas, he will come straight +back, for his letter will be of no use then." + +"But the French would pay a ransom for them." + +"Yes; but the captain is never fond of ransoming, and if the news +comes that Vagas is shot it is all up with them." + +"But they will never murder a woman and child in cold blood!" Tom +said, in tones of indignant horror. + +"Women are killed on both sides," the muleteer said, placidly. "I +don't hold to it myself, but I don't know, after all, why a woman's +life is a bit more precious than a man's. Vagas's wife and children +are here, too, and if the news comes of his death, she would stir the +band up to kill the prisoners, even if the captain wanted to save +them, which he certainly will not do." + +"When is the messenger expected back?" + +"If he goes to Vittoria and finds Vagas is alive, and arranges for +the exchange, he won't be back till late to-night, perhaps not till +to-morrow; but, if he hears, either on the way or directly he gets +there, that he is dead, he may be back this afternoon." Soon after +this conversation Garcias was sent for to the chief, and returned +with a small note, which he handed to the boys as the answer to the +despatch, and urged them to go at once. The boys said that they could +not leave until they saw the end of this terrible drama which was +passing before their eyes. It was early in the afternoon when a man +was seen coming along the path from Vittoria. A hundred eager eyes +examined him, and ere long it was declared as certain that it was the +messenger. The boys' heart sank within them as they saw the fierce +look cast by the Spaniards in the direction of the prisoners, for +every one in the village was well aware of the meaning of this early +return. The boys had arranged upon the course they would pursue, and +they at once hurried to Garcias. + +"Please come with us at once to Nunez. We want to see him before the +messenger arrives." + +"I will come with you," Garcias said; "but if you think that any +talking of yours will persuade Nunez to move out of his way, you are +mistaken. It is more likely to cost you your own lives, I can tell +you; however, I gave you the promise I would do my best for you when +you started with me, and I will go with you now, though what you want +to interfere for here is more than I can make out. Pshaw! what matters +two or three of these accursed French, more or less?" + +As they neared the chief's house they saw him coming towards them. His +brow was as black as thunder; he was evidently prepared for the news +of his lieutenant's death. + +"These messengers want to speak to you for a moment," Garcias said. + +The chief stopped with an impatient gesture. + +"Senor," Tom said, with a dignity which surprised the chief; "we are +not what we seem. We are two English officers, and we have come to beg +of you, to implore you, not to tarnish the cause for which you fight +by shedding the blood of women and children." + +The boys had agreed that it would be altogether hopeless to try to +save the French officers. + +"British officers, indeed," exclaimed Nunez, "a likely story. Do you +know them as such, Garcias?" + +"No," Garcias said bluntly, "I never guessed at it; but now they say +so, I think it's likely enough, for they don't seem to see things in +the same way as other people." + +"I can give you proof of it," Tom said, calmly, pulling up the sleeve +of his coat, and showing a cicatrix in his forearm. Taking a knife +from his pocket, he cut into the skin, and drew forth a tiny silver +tube. This he opened, and handed to Nunez a paper signed by Lord +Wellington, declaring the bearers to be British officers, and +requesting all loyal Spaniards to give them every assistance. + +The captain read it through, and flung it down. "You may be officers," +he said contemptuously; "but if you were Lord Wellington himself, I +would not spare these accursed French. Listen!" and as he spoke a howl +of rage ran from the other end of the village, and told too plainly +the nature of the tidings the messenger had brought. + +"I again protest," Tom said firmly. "I protest, as a British officer, +and in the name of humanity, against this cold-blooded murder of a +woman and child. It is a disgrace to Spain, a disgrace to the cause, +it is a brutal and cowardly act." + +The guerilla furiously drew a pistol; but Garcias placed himself +between him and Tom. "I have promised him a safe conduct," he said, +"and have given my word for his safety. He is only a boy, and a young +fool; don't trouble with him." + +Fortunately at this moment, for the guerilla was still irresolutely +handling his pistol, a crowd was seen coming towards them, headed by +a woman who seemed frantic with rage and grief. All were shouting, +"Death to the assassins! death to the French!" The chief at once moved +forward to meet them. + +Tom and Peter gave a significant glance towards each other, and then +Tom turned to go back towards the house which Nunez inhabited, while +Peter hurried towards the spot where the prisoners were kept. Already +a crowd was assembling who were talking threateningly at the French +officers. Peter made his way through them until he stood by the lady, +who, with her child clinging to her neck, looked in terror at the +angry crowd, whose attention, however, was directed to the officers, +who stood looking calmly indifferent to their threats and insults. + +"Do you speak Spanish, madam?" Peter asked, leaning over her. + +She shook her head. + +"Do you speak English?" he asked, in that tongue. + +"Yes, yes, a little." the lady said, eagerly; "who are you? What is +this fierce crowd about?" + +"Hush!" Peter said. "I am a friend. Listen. In a few minutes they are +going to shoot you all." The lady gave a stifled cry, and pressed +her child close to her. "Remember, when they come to you, ask for a +priest; gain a few minutes, and I hope to save you and the child." + +So saying, he slipped away into the crowd again. He had scarcely done +so when Nunez arrived, accompanied by many of his men. The crowd fell +back, and he strode up to the French officers. "French dogs," he said, +"you are to die. I spared you to exchange, but your compatriots have +murdered my lieutenant, and so now it's your turn. You may think +yourselves lucky that I shoot you, instead of hanging you. Take them +to that wall," he said, pointing to one some twenty yards off. + +The Frenchmen understood enough Spanish to know that their fate was +sealed. Without a word they took each other's hands, and marched +proudly to the spot pointed out. Here, turning round, they looked with +calm courage at the Spaniards, who formed up with leveled muskets at +a few paces distance. "Vive la France! Tirez," said the elder, in a +firm, voice, and in a moment they fell back dead, pierced with a dozen +balls. + +Peter had turned away when Nunez appeared on the scene, to avoid +seeing the murder, and with his eyes fixed in the direction in which +Tom had gone, he listened almost breathlessly to what should come. +The French lady had sat immovable, cowering over her child, while her +countrymen were taken away and murdered. As Nunez passed where she +crouched, he said to two of his men, "Put your muskets to their heads, +and finish them!" As the men approached, she lifted up her face, pale +as death, and said,-- + +"Un pretre, uno padre!" + +"She wants a priest," the men said, drawing back; "she has a right to +absolution." + +There was a murmur of assent from those around, and two or three +started to the priest's house, situated only a few yards away, being +one of the end houses of the village. The priest soon appeared, came +up to the spot, and received orders to shrive the Frenchwoman. He +attempted a remonstrance, but was silenced by a threat from Nunez, +and knowing from experience of such scenes that his influence went +for nothing with Nunez and his fierce band, he bent over her, and the +crowd drew back, to let them speak unheard. At this moment, to Peter's +intense relief, he saw Tom approaching with the captain's two children +walking beside him. Absorbed in what was passing before them, no one +else looked round, and Peter slipped away and joined his brother. They +came within twenty yards of the crowd, and then paused. + +"Wait a minute," Tom said to the children, "your father is busy." + +In another minute Nunez shouted roughly, "There that will do; finish +with it and have done! I want to be off to my dinner." + +Tom and Peter simultaneously drew out a large Spanish knife, and each +took one of the children firmly by the shoulder. + +"Stop! Senor Nunez!" Tom shouted in a loud, clear tone. "Stop! or by +heaven there will be four victims instead of two! Let one of you lift +a finger against these captives--let one of you come one step nearer +to us--and, by the Holy Virgin, we will drive our knives into these +children's hearts!" + +A cry of astonishment broke from the crowd, and one of agony and rage +from Nunez, who tottered against a wall in horror at the danger in +which his daughters were placed. + +"Listen! all of you," Tom said, "we are English officers, we have +shown our papers to Nunez, and he knows it is so. We will not suffer +this murder of a mother and her child. If they are to die, we will die +with them; but these two children shall die too! Now, what is it to +be?" + +A dozen of the guerillas leveled their guns at the two daring boys. + +"No! no!" Nunez shrieked; "lower your guns. Don't hurt the children, +senors. The captives shall not be hurt; I swear it! They shall go +free. Give me my children." + +"Not if I know it," Tom said; "Do you think I could trust the word of +a man who would murder women and children in cold blood? No; these +girls shall go with us as hostages, till we are safe under French +guard." + +"They will tell them the way up here," said one of the woman in the +group, "and then we shall be all killed." + +"No," Tom said; "the lady shall swear not to tell the way up here. She +shall swear on your priest's crucifix. We will give you our words as +British officers." + +"But how are the children to get back here again?" another asked, for +Nunez was so paralyzed that he could only gaze on the children, who +were crying bitterly, and implore them to stand quiet, and not try to +get away. After more parleying the arrangements were completed. The +crowd fell back on either side, so as to leave a large space round the +French lady. Tom and Peter then went up to them with the little girls. +The lady was sobbing with joy and excitement at this unexpected +relief. + +"Can you walk?" Tom asked her in English. + +"Yes," she said, getting up hastily, but almost falling again. + +"Garcias will go first, as guide. The priest will give you his arm," +Tom went on, "these two young women will go with you and carry your +child if necessary. You will walk on, twenty yards ahead of us. We +follow with these girls. No one is to follow us, or accompany us. We +are to go on like that till we come upon your outposts, and then the +priest and the two women will bring back Nunez's children." + +"You will send them safe back, you swear?" asked Nunez, in tremulous +tones. + +"Psha!" Tom said contemptuously, "you don't suppose we are +child-murderers, like yourself." + +"Remember!" the guerilla said, in a sudden burst of passion, "if you +ever cross my path again, I will--" + +"Do terrible things no doubt," Tom said scornfully; "and do you +beware, too. It is wild beasts like yourself who have brought disgrace +and ruin on Spain. No defeat could dishonor and disgrace her as much +as your fiendish cruelty. It is in revenge for the deeds that you and +those like you do, that the French carry the sword and fire to your +villages. We may drive the French out, but never will a country which +fights by murder and treachery become a great nation. Are you ready, +Garcias!" + +"I am ready," the muleteer said, stepping forward from the silent and +scowling throng. + +"We can trust you," Tom said heartily; "take us the short way straight +down into the valley; we may have the luck to come upon a passing +French troop in an hour. Think of that, madam," he said to the French +lady, "let that give you strength and courage." + +So saying, the procession set out in the order Tom had indicated, +amidst the curses of the guerillas, who were furious at seeing +themselves thus bearded. At the brow of the hill Tom looked back, and +saw that the guerillas were still standing in a group, in front of +which he could distinguish the figure of Nunez. Taking off his hat, +he waved an ironical farewell, and then followed the party down +the hillside into the broad valley below. They could see the road +stretching like a thread along it, but to their disappointment, not +a figure was visible upon it. Now that there was no longer danger of +treachery, the party closed up together. + +"How far is it to Vittoria, Garcias?" + +"Twenty good miles, senor." + +"But we shall never get there," Tom said in dismay. "I am sure the +lady could not walk another five miles; she is quite exhausted now." + +"You will not have to go five miles, senor. There is a body of four +or five hundred French in that large village you see there; it is not +more than three miles at most." + +It was a weary journey, for the French lady, exhausted by fatigue +and excitement, was often obliged to stop and sit down to rest, and, +indeed, could not have got on at all had not Garcias on one side and +the padre on the other helped her on. At last, just as the sun was +setting, they approached the village, and could see the French +sentries at its entrance. When within a hundred yards they paused. + +"We are safe now," Tom said; "it is not necessary for you to go +farther. Good-by, little ones; I am sorry we have given you such a +fright, but it was not our fault. Good-by, padre; I know that you will +not grudge your walk, for the sake of its saving the lives of these +unfortunates. Good-by, Garcias; thanks for your kindness and fidelity. +I will report them when I return, and will, if I get a chance, send +you a remembrance of our journey together." + +"Good-by, senors," Garcias said, shaking them by the hand; "you +English are different to us, and I am not surprised now at your +General holding Portugal against all the French armies." Then he +lowered his voice, so that the Spanish women standing by could not +hear him. "Be on your guard, senors; don't move on from the village +without a strong convoy is going on; change your disguise, if +possible; distrust every one you come across, and, in heaven's name, +get back to your lines as soon as possible, for you may be assured +that your steps will be dogged, and that you will be safe nowhere in +Spain from Nunez's vengeance. The guerillas communicate with each +other, and you are doomed if you fall into the hands of any, except, +perhaps, one or two of the greater chiefs. Be always on your guard; +sleep with your eyes open. Remember, except in the middle of a French +regiment, you will never be really safe." + +"Thanks, Garcias!" the boys said earnestly, "we will do our best to +keep our throats safe. At any rate, if we go down, it shall not be for +want of watchfulness!" + +Another shake of the hands, and the party separated. The Spanish woman +who was carrying the sleeping French child handed her over to Tom, who +took her without waking her while Peter lent his arm to the French +lady. + +"Madam," Tom said in English, "you will soon be among your friends. I +know that you will keep your promise not to divulge the situation of +the village you have left. I must ask you, also, to promise me not +to say that we speak English, or to say anything which may create a +suspicion that we are not what we seem. You will, of course, relate +your adventures, and speak of us merely as Spanish boys, who acted as +they did being moved by pity for you. We must accompany you for some +time, for Nunez will move heaven and earth to get us assassinated, and +all we want is that you shall obtain permission for us to sleep in the +guard-room, so as to be under shelter of French bayonets until we can +decide upon our course of action." + +The lady assented with a gesture, for she was too exhausted to speak, +and as they reached the French sentries she tottered and sank down on +the ground insensible. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +MADRID. + + +The French sentries, who had been watching with surprise the slow +approach of two peasant boys, the one carrying a child, the other +assisting a woman clad in handsome, but torn and disheveled clothes, +on seeing the latter fall, called to their comrades, and a sergeant +and some soldiers came out from a guard-room close by. + +"Hallo!" said the sergeant. "What's all this? Who is this woman? And +where do you come from?" + +The boys shook their heads. + +"Of course," the sergeant said, lifting the lady, "they don't +understand French; how should they? She looks a lady, poor thing. Who +can she be, I wonder?" + +"General Reynier," Tom said, touching her. + +"General Reynier!" exclaimed the sergeant to his comrades. "It must be +the general's wife. I heard she was among those killed or carried off +from that convoy that came through last night. Jacques, fetch out +Captain Thibault, and you, Noel, run for Dr. Pasques." + +The officer on guard came out, and, upon hearing the sergeant's +report, had Madame Reynier at once carried into a house hard by, and +sent a message to the colonel of the regiment. The little girl, still +asleep, was also carried in and laid down, and the regimental doctor +and the colonel soon arrived. The former went into the house, the +latter endeavored in vain to question the boys in French. Finding it +useless, he walked up and down impatiently until a message came down +from the doctor that the lady had recovered from her fainting fit, and +wished to see him at once. + +Tom and Peter, finding that no one paid any attention to them, sat, +quietly down by the guard-house. + +In a few minutes the French colonel came down. "Where are those boys?" +he exclaimed hastily. There was quite a crowd of soldiers round the +house, for the news of the return of General Reynier's wife and child +had circulated rapidly and created quite an excitement. "Where are +those boys?" he shouted again. + +The sergeant of the guard came forward. + +"I had no orders to keep them prisoners, sir," he said in an +apologetic tone, for he had not noticed the boys, and thought that +he was going to get into a scrape for not detaining them; but he +was interrupted by one of the soldiers who had heard the question, +bringing them forward. + +To the astonishment of the soldiers, the colonel rushed forward, and, +with a Frenchman's enthusiasm, actually kissed them. "Mes braves +garcons!" he exclaimed. "Mes braves garcons! Look you, all of you," +he exclaimed to the soldiers, "you see these boys, they are heroes, +they have saved, at the risk of their own lives, mark you, General +Reynier's wife and daughter; they have braved the fury of that +accursed Nunez and his band, and have brought them out from that den +of wolves." And then, in excited tones, he described the scene as he +had heard it from Madame Reynier. + +At this relation the enthusiasm of the French soldiers broke out in +a chorus of cheers and excited exclamations. The men crowded round +the boys, shook them by the hands, patted them on the back, and in a +hundred strange oaths vowed an eternal friendship for them. + +After a minute or two, the colonel raised his hand for silence. "Look +you," he said to the men. "You can imagine that, after what these boys +have done, their life is not safe for a moment. This accursed Nunez +will dog them and have them assassinated if he can. So I leave them to +you; you will take care of them, my children, will you not?" + +A chorus of assurances was the reply, and the boys found themselves as +it were adopted into the regiment. The soldiers could not do enough +for them, but, as neither party understood the other's language, +the intercourse did not make much progress. They had, however, real +difficulty in refusing the innumerable offers of a glass of wine or +brandy made to them by every group of soldiers as they moved about +through the village. + +The boys felt that their position was a false one; and although, in +point of fact, they had no report to make upon the regiment, still +the possibility that if discovered they might be thought to have been +acting as spies on men who treated them with so much friendliness was +repugnant to them. However, their stay was not to be prolonged, for +the regiment had already been stationed for a month at the village, +and was to be relieved by another expected hourly from France, and was +then to go on to Madrid. This they learned from one of the soldiers +who could speak a few words of Spanish. + +It was upon the third day after their arrival that the expected +regiment came in, and next morning the boys started soon after +daybreak with their friends. They had not seen Madame Reynier during +their stay in the village, for she was laid up with a sharp attack of +illness after the excitement she had gone through. She was still far +from fit to travel, but she insisted on going on, and a quantity of +straw was accordingly laid in a cart, pillows and cushions were heaped +on this, and an awning was arranged above to keep off the sun. The +regiment had taken on the transport animals which had come in with the +baggage of the troops the night before; hence the mule drivers and +other followers were all strangers. The boys were marching beside the +regiment, talking with one of the sergeants who had been previously +for two years in Spain, and spoke a little Spanish, when the colonel, +who had been riding alongside Madame Reynier, told them as he passed +on to the head of the regiment, that she wished to speak to them. + +The boys fell out, and allowed the troops and the line of baggage +animals and carts to pass them. As the latter came along, Tom observed +one of the Spanish drivers glance in their direction, and immediately +avert his head. + +"Peter, that fellow is one of Nunez's band; I will almost swear to his +face. No doubt he has joined the convoy for the purpose of stabbing us +on the first opportunity. I expected this. We must get rid of them at +once." + +The boys had both been furnished with heavy cavalry pistols by order +of the colonel, to defend themselves against any sudden attack, and, +placing his hand on the butt in readiness for instant use, Tom, +accompanied by his brother walked up to the Spaniard. + +"You and those with you are known," he said. "Unless you all fall out +at the next village we come to, I will denounce you, and you haven't +five minutes to live after I do so. Mind, if one goes on you all +suffer." + +The Spaniard uttered a deep execration, and put his hand on his knife, +but seeing that the boys were in readiness, and that the French +baggage guard marching alongside would certainly shoot him before he +could escape, he relinquished his design. + +"Mind," Tom said, "the first village; it is only a mile ahead, and +we shall probably halt there for five minutes; if one of you goes a +single foot beyond it, you will swing in a row." + +So saying, the boys dropped behind again until Madame Reynier's cart +came along. The sides were open, and the lady, who was sitting up, +supported by pillows, with her child beside her, saw them, and called +to them to climb up to her. They did so at once, and she then poured +forth her thanks in tones of the deepest gratitude. + +"My husband is not at Madrid," she said when she saw by the boys' +confusion that they would be really glad if she would say no more; +"but when he hears of it he will thank you for saving his wife and +child. Of course," she went on, "I can see that you are not what you +seem. Spanish boys would not have acted so. Spanish boys do not speak +English. That makes it impossible for me in any way to endeavor to +repay my obligation. Had you been even Spanish peasants, the matter +would have been comparatively easy; then my husband could have made +you rich and comfortable for life; as it is--" + +She paused, evidently hoping that they would indicate some way in +which she could serve them. + +"As it is, madam," Tom said, "you can, if you will, be of great +service to us by procuring for us fresh disguises in Madrid, for I +fear that after what happened with Nunez our lives will not be safe +from his vengeance anywhere in Spain. Already we have discovered that +some of his band are accompanying this convoy with the intention of +killing us at the first opportunity." + +"Why do you not denounce them instantly?" Madame Reynier said, rising +in her excitement and looking round. + +"We cannot well do that," Tom said, "at least not if it can be +avoided. They know already that we have recognized them, and will +leave at the next village; so we are safe at present, but in Madrid we +shall be no longer so. We cannot remain permanently under the guard of +the bayonets of the 63d Line; and indeed our position is as you may +guess, a false and unpleasant one, from which we would free ourselves +at the first opportunity. We shall therefore ask you, when you get to +Madrid, to provide us with fresh disguises and a pass to travel west +as far as the limits of the French lines." + +"You can consider that as done," Madame Reynier answered; "I only +regret that it is so slight a return. And now," she said lightly, to +change the conversation, "I must introduce you to this young lady. +Julie," she asked in French, "do you remember those boys?" + +"Yes," Julie said; "these are the boys who gave mamma and Julie water +when those wicked men would not give us anything to drink when we were +thirsty; and it was these boys that mamma said prevented the wicked +men from killing us. They are good boys, nice boys, but they are very +ragged and dirty." + +Madame Reynier smiled, and translated Julie's answer. + +"You know," she went on, hesitatingly, "that I know that--that you are +English officers. I heard you say so when you saved us. But how is it +that you can be officers so very young?" + +Tom explained that in England the officers entered for the most part +directly, and not, as in the French army, by promotion from the ranks, +and that, consequently, the junior officers were much younger than +those of equal rank in the French service. + +The convoy had now reached the village, and a halt was ordered, +and the boys alighting, walked forward to see that their unwelcome +attendants quitted them. As the soldiers fell out from their order of +march and sat down under the shade of the houses many of the Spaniards +with the baggage-train followed their example, and the boys saw the +man to whom they had spoken go up to four others, and in a short time +these separated themselves from the rest, went carelessly round a +corner, and when the order came to continue the march, failed to make +their appearance. Their absence passed unnoticed save by the boys, +for the natives frequently took advantage of the passage of troops +and convoys to travel from one part of the country to another, for +the guerillas were for the most part little better than brigands, +and would plunder their own countrymen without scruple whenever the +opportunity was favorable. + +The march to Madrid was accomplished without adventure, and the boys +improved the occasion by endeavoring to pick up as many French phrases +as they could, as they marched along by the side of the sergeant who +had specially taken them under his charge. He knew a little Spanish, +so they managed to keep up a conversation with him in a strange medley +of the two languages, which helped to pass the time away merrily. At +Madrid they took up their quarters in the barracks with the regiment; +they had already explained their plan of disguise to Madame Reynier, +and she had promised to provide all that was necessary and to obtain +the military pass for them. + +They had soon reason to congratulate themselves that their stay +in Madrid was under the protection of French bayonets. During the +day after their arrival they remained quietly in barracks, as the +appearance of two Spanish peasants walking about the street with +French soldiers would have excited comments. In the evening, however, +they agreed with their friend the sergeant, who was going into the +town with three or four of his comrades, that they should accompany +them, not, however, walking actually with them, but following a few +paces behind, so as to be within reach of their assistance should any +one molest them. + +They reached the Piazza del Sol, the great central square of Madrid, +without incident, and amused themselves with the sight of the constant +stream of people passing to and fro, the ladies in their graceful +black mantillas, the men in cloaks and Spanish sombreros, or round +felt hats. Presently the sergeant and his companions left the square, +and turning down one of the narrow streets which run into it, amused +themselves by looking into the shops, with their gay fans, bright +handkerchiefs, and other articles of Spanish manufacture. + +Tom and Peter followed their example, keeping some ten paces behind +them. It was now nearly dark, and the streets were but badly lighted +except by the lamps in the shop windows. + +"It may be all fancy, Tom," Peter said, "but I can't help thinking +that we are followed. There are three follows who have passed us +twice, and I am pretty sure they are particularly noticing us. Keep +your hand on your pistol." + +As the boys paused at another shop window, the three men again +approached, this time from ahead. + +"Look out, Tom," Peter said sharply. + +As the men came up to them, one of them exclaimed, + +"Now!" + +The boys faced round, pistol in hand, with a cry to their friends, +just as the three Spaniards, with drawn knives, were upon them. + +The sudden movement disconcerted them, and two sprang back from the +leveled tubes of the pistols, with fierce oaths of surprise, the +third, however, rushed in and struck at Tom; the latter instinctively +moved aside, and the knife inflicted a heavy gash on the shoulder, and +almost at the same moment Peter's bullet crashed through the fellow's +skull. + +His comrades, with a cry of rage, rushed in, but before they could +strike, the sergeant was up and ran one through the body with his +sword, whereon the other fled. The whole affair lasted only three +or four seconds. In less than a minute the street was absolutely +deserted, for rows and fights were so common between the soldiers and +the people, that all prudent people got out of the way the moment a +knife was drawn. + +"Well done, lad," the sergeant said to Peter, "I thought your brother +was done for. Luckily I had faced your way when the fellow attacked +you, and was on my way to help you before they began, but I feared I +should be too late. That was a wonderfully pretty snap shot of yours, +and you were as cool as old hands. Peste! I don't know what to make +of you boys. Now come along, we had better get away from this carrion +before any one comes up and asks questions. First, though, let me tie +up your shoulder." + +This was soon done, and while the sergeant was engaged upon it, his +comrades, old soldiers, turned over the dead Spaniards, searched their +pockets, and chuckled as they found several gold pieces. + +One or two French soldiers alone came near them before they left the +spot, attracted by the sound of the pistol. A word from the sergeant, +"These scoundrels attacked us, they have got their _coup_," satisfied +them, and the boys and their friend soon regained the crowded main +street, leaving the bodies for the watch to find and bury. + +Arrived at the barracks, Tom's arm was examined by the surgeon, and +the cut pronounced a deep flesh wound, but of no consequence; it was +soon strapped up, and with his arm in a sling Tom went down to the +sergeant's quarters, where they slept. Here they had to go through +much patting on the back, for their friend had described the readiness +and coolness with which they stood at bay, and popular as they were +before they were now more so than ever. For the rest of their stay in +Madrid the boys did not stir out of barracks. One at least of Nunez's +envoys they knew to be alive, and he could enlist any number of the +lower class against them, so they resolved not to go out until they +should finally start. + +After a fortnight's stay they were sent for to the colonel's quarters, +where they found Madame Reynier and her child. "I had a letter from my +husband this morning," she said, "from his camp near Cordova, thanking +you with all his heart for the inestimable service you rendered him, +and begging me to tell you that you can count on his gratitude to the +extent of his life at any and all times. You need no assurance of +mine. And now about your journey. All is prepared for you to leave +to-morrow morning. You are to come here to the colonel's quarters soon +after daybreak. Here are your two disguises, for the one as a young +bachelor of medicine, for the other as a young novice. Here is your +pass, signed by the minister, authorizing you both to pass on to your +relations at Ciudad Rodrigo, and to go unmolested thence where you +choose, also recommending you to the care of all French and Spanish +authorities. A regiment marches to-morrow morning for the frontier; +the colonel is a cousin of my husband. I have told him that some +friends of yours rendered me much kindness and service on my way down, +and that I particularly commend you to his care. He has promised to +allow you to follow the regiment, and to see that you get quarters at +each halting-place. He does not know you for anything but what you +appear to be. When you have put on these dresses to-morrow morning, +step out by the private door from these quarters, looking carefully +when you start to see that there is no one in the street. Then go +boldly to No. 15, Rue St. Geronimo; go into the courtyard, there you +will see two stout mules with all necessaries, under charge of a +soldier, who will have instructions to hand them over to you without +asking any questions; then go down to the Retiro and wait till the +16th come along. The Colonel will be on the look-out for you, and you +will ride up to him and hand him this note. And now farewell, dear +boys; never shall I forget you, or cease to pray for you, and may be +when this terrible war is over we may meet as friends again. Keep +these little tokens of remembrance of your grateful friends." So +saying, Madame Reynier pressed into the boys' hands two magnificent +gold watches and chains, held her child up for each of them to kiss, +threw her arms round their necks and kissed them herself, and then +drawing down her veil to conceal the tears which were standing in her +eyes, left them hastily. + +That night the boys said good-by to their friend the sergeant, and +to those soldiers with whom they had most companionship. "You have +guessed, no doubt, sergeant," Tom said, in his mixture of Spanish and +French, "that we are not exactly what we seem to be, but if we should +ever meet again, under different circumstances, I want you to remember +that our connection with the regiment has been in a way forced upon +us. I should not like you to think, that is that under the pretence +of friendship, we have been treacherously learning things. Do you +understand?" + +"I understand, mes braves," the sergeant said, "Jacques Pinteau is no +fool, and he saw from the first that you were not two ragged Spanish +peasant boys by birth. I daresay I can guess what you are, but there +need be no ill-will for that, and as you only came among us by +accident, as it were, there is no more to be said either way. There is +one thing certain, wherever or however we meet, we shall be friends." + +So well were Madame Reynier's plans arranged that the boys passed from +Madrid to the frontier without a single hitch or unpleasantness. Tom +was soberly attired as a student at the university, Peter was muffled +up to the eyes as a timid young novice, going from school to enter a +convent, of which his aunt was lady superior, at Ciudad Rodrigo. The +colonel, and, following his example, the officers of the regiment were +polite and civil. The marches were of easy length, the mules stout +and smooth-going, with well-filled traveling sacks. The weather was +delightful, and the boys enjoyed the fortnight's march exceedingly. +Upon the road they learned that Massena had laid siege to Ciudad +Rodrigo, and that the 16th was on its way to join the besieging army. + +It was the end of June, 1810, when the 16th joined Massena's force +before Ciudad Rodrigo. The siege had continued for some time, the +British light division, under General Craufurd, lay upon the other +side of the river Agueda, which separated them alike from the town and +the French army. The colonel of the 16th politely expressed to Tom his +regret that he could not, for the present, conduct them to their final +destination, but that he hoped that the gate would soon be open for +them. Tom thanked him for the civility which he had shown them upon +the road, and said that he would, with his sister, take up his abode +for the present a few miles from the beleaguered fortress. On leaving +the regiment the boys went higher up the Agueda to the little town of +Villar, where there was a bridge. This however, was watched by the +troops of both armies, and there was, at present, no chance of +affecting a passage. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +THE FIGHT ON THE COA. + + +All through the winter of 1809-1810, Wellington had remained quietly +on the frontier of Portugal, engaged in disciplining his troops, many +of whom were raw drafts from the militia, in urging upon the home +Government the necessity of fresh reinforcements, if the war was to be +carried on with the smallest hopes of success, and in controversies +and disputes with the Portuguese regency. This body of incapables +starved their own army, refused supplies and transport to the British, +and behaved with such arrogance and insolence that Wellington was +several times driven to use the threat that, unless measures were +taken to keep the Portuguese troops from starving, and to supply food +to the British, he would put his army on board the transports at +Lisbon, and give up the struggle altogether. + +Spring found the army still on the frontier, and when the French +advanced in force in May to lay siege to the Spanish frontier fortress +of Ciudad Rodrigo, Wellington to the intense disappointment of his own +troops, and the bitter anger of the Portuguese and Spaniards, refused +to fight a battle to save the fortress, which, under its gallant old +governor, Andrea Hernati, was defending itself nobly. + +Wellington's position was, however, a very difficult one, and his +responsibilities were immense. Allowing for the detachments which were +massing to check three other French columns advancing in different +directions, he had but 25,000 men with which to attempt to raise the +siege of Ciudad Rodrigo, or to draw off the besieged garrison. Massena +had under him 60,000 French veterans, and was desiring nothing more +than that Wellington should attack him. The chances of victory then +were by no means strong, and in any case victory could only have been +purchased by a loss of men which would have completely crippled the +British general, and would have rendered it absolutely necessary for +him to fall back again at once. A defeat or even a heavy loss of +men, would have so dispirited the faint-hearted Government at home +that they would undoubtedly have recalled the whole expedition, and +resigned Portugal to its fate. Thus Wellington decided not to risk the +whole fate of the British army and of Portugal for merely a temporary +advantage, and so stood firm against the murmurs of his own troops, +the furious reproaches of the Portuguese and Spaniards, and the moving +entreaties for aid of the gallant governor of the besieged town. + +At the same time that he refused to risk a general battle, he kept +Craufurd's division in advance of the Coa, and within two hours' march +of the enemy, thereby encouraging the garrison of Ciudad Rodrigo, and +preventing Massena from pushing forward a portion of his army while +the rest pursued the siege. + +Craufurd's front was guarded by the Agueda, a river only passable by +two or three bridges and fords in wet weather, but fordable in many +places in the dry season. At the commencement of June the Agueda +fell, and the French crossed in strength at various places. Craufurd, +however, still maintained his position in front of the Coa with great +skill and boldness. He had under his command only 4000 infantry, 1100 +cavalry, and six guns, and his maintenance of his position, almost +within gun-shot of an enemy's army, 60,000 strong, for three months, +is one of the finest feats of military audacity and ability ever +performed. + +Until the 11th of July the boys remained quietly at a cottage occupied +by peasants, who believed their story that they were only waiting +to proceed when the French army advanced. They were freed from +molestation or inquiry upon the part of the French by the pass with +which Madame Reynier had supplied them. + +Upon that day Ciudad Rodrigo surrendered, and Massena prepared at once +to enter Portugal. Upon the 21st the cavalry advanced in great force, +and upon the following day the boys resolved upon endeavoring to +rejoin the British army. The Agueda was now easily fordable in many +places, but the boys determined to swim across, at a distance from the +point at which the French army was now pouring forward. + +As evening came on they left the cottage, and walked two miles up +the stream, and, as soon as night fell, took off the costumes which +had proved of such service to them and left them on the bank; then +fastening their peasants' suits upon two bundles of rushes to keep +them dry, entered the little river, and were soon upon the opposite +shore. They knew, from what they had heard in the afternoon, that +Craufurd had fallen back upon Almeida, a fortified town, and that it +was probable he would at once cross the Coa, as resistance to the +force now approaching him seemed nothing short of madness. + +No good, indeed, could be gained by a fight in such a position, with a +deep river in the rear, crossed by only a narrow bridge, and commanded +by both banks, and Wellington's orders had been imperative "that, upon +no account whatever was Craufurd to fight beyond the Coa." + +Craufurd, however, a rash and obstinate, although a skilful general, +was determined upon having a brush with the enemy before he fell back. +He anticipated, no doubt, that only an advanced guard of the enemy +would come up at first, and his intention was to inflict a severe +check upon them with the magnificent little division under his +command, and then fall back triumphantly across the Coa. Massena, +however, was well aware of the fighting powers of the light division, +and was preparing to hurl suddenly upon him a force more than +sufficient to crush it. + +The Scudamores had but little fear of meeting with any large body of +the enemy, as the main French advance was direct from Ciudad Rodrigo; +their cavalry would, however, be scattered all over the country, and +were they to fall into the hands of any of these parties they would +have been shot instantly, upon suspicion of endeavoring to convey news +of the French movements to Craufurd. + +The point where they crossed the river was between Villar and Naves +Frias, and, after an hour's walking, they struck the little rivulet +called Duas Casas. This they crossed at once, as they knew that by +following its southern bank until they saw some high ground to their +left they would find themselves near Almeida, which they hoped to +reach before the English retreated. + +All night they tramped through the fields of stubble, where the corn +had been long since cut for the use of Craufurd's cavalry, but walking +at night through an unknown country is slow work, and when day began +to break they entered a small wood just beyond the point where the +Turones, as the southern arm of the Duas Casas is called, branches off +from the main stream. Several times in the course of the day bodies +of the enemy's cavalry came near their place of concealment, and the +Scudamores congratulated themselves that they had not given way to +their impatience, and tried to push on across the twenty miles that +alone separated them from their friends. + +At nightfall the wind rose, and a heavy rain began to fall. They had +no stars by which to steer their course, and were, therefore, forced +to follow the bank of the Turones, although they knew that it would +lead them some distance to the north of Almeida. It was slow work, +indeed, for they had to grope their way along in the storm, following +every turn and bend of the river, which formed their only guide. After +several hours' toil they came into a road running north and south. +This they knew was the road leading from Guarda to Almeida, and it +gave them a clue as to the distance they had come. Still following the +river, they continued their course until they approached San Pedro, +whence they knew that a road ran directly to the British position +in front of Almeida, that is if the British still maintained their +position there. + +As they approached the village, they heard a deep, hollow sound, +and stopping to listen, and laying their ears to the ground, could +distinguish the rumble of heavy carriages. + +"The French are advancing in force, Peter; we are just in time; +they are going to attack us in the morning at daybreak. We know the +direction now; let us turn to the left, and try to get on in advance +of them. They probably will not push on much farther until there +is light enough to permit them to form order of battle; they are +evidently, by the sound, going to the left, rather than straight on." + +The Scudamores now hurried on, and presently the rumbling of the +artillery died away, and they ventured to push to their left, and to +get on the road, which they found deserted. Half an hour's run, for +they knew that every minute was of importance, and they heard the +welcome challenge, "Who comes there?" "Two British officers," they +answered, and in a few minutes they were taken to the officer in +charge of the picket, and having once convinced him of their identity, +were heartily greeted and welcomed. + +"The French are advancing in great force to attack," Tom said; "please +forward us instantly to the general." + +The matter was too important for an instant's delay, and a sergeant +was at once told off to accompany them. + +The first faint blush of daylight was in the east when they arrived +at the cottage which served as General Craufurd's quarters, and, upon +their speaking to the sentinel at the door, a window was thrown open, +and a deep voice demanded "What is it?" + +"We have just arrived through the French lines," Tom said, "the enemy +are at hand in force." + +The casement closed, and an instant afterwards the general came out. +"Who are you?" + +"We belong to the Norfolk Rangers, general, and have been detached on +service in the interior; we have only just made our way back." + +"How am I to know your story is true?" the general asked sharply. + +"You may, perhaps, remember, sir, we landed from the 'Latona,' and you +kindly lent us horses to accompany you." + +"Aha! I remember," the general said. "Well, your news?" + +"The French have crossed the Turones in force, sir; at least they have +a good many guns with them." + +"Which way were they going?" + +"As far as we could judge by the sound, sir, they were taking up a +position between Villa Formosa and Fort Conception." + +"Good," the general said shortly; then turning to three or four of his +staff who had followed him from the cottage, "Get the troops under +arms at once. Come in here, gentlemen." + +The Scudamores entered, and as they came into the light of a candle +which stood on the table the general smiled grimly. + +"It is lucky you were able to recall yourselves to my memory, for +I should have needed some strong evidence to persuade me you were +British officers had I seen you before you spoke. You are wet to the +skin; there is a brandy bottle, and you will find some bread and cold +fowl in that cupboard." + +Five minutes later the boys followed General Craufurd from his hut. + +Short as was the time which had elapsed since their arrival, the +troops were already under arms, for three months of incessant alarm +and watchfulness had enabled this splendid division to act as one man, +and to fall in at any hour of the day or night in an incredibly short +time. Ten minutes later and the ramble of the baggage wagons was +heard along the road towards the bridge. The morning was clearing +fast, the clouds lifted, and the daylight seemed to break with unusual +suddenness. + +The dark masses of the French became visible forming up before the +Turones, and Craufurd hurried forward his cavalry and guns to check +their advance. + +"Hurry the infantry up, hurry them up," the general said urgently to +the officers by him. "Let them take post along the ridge, and then +fall back fighting towards the bridge. Major MacLeod," he said to an +officer of the 43d, "take these gentlemen with you; they are officers +of the Norfolk Rangers. They will join your regiment for the present. +When your regiment falls back, occupy that stone inclosure a little +way down the slope at the left of the road, and hold the enemy in +check while the troops file over the bridge." + +The officer addressed looked with surprise at the boys, and signing to +them to follow, hurried off to his regiment, which was on the left of +the British line. + +Next to them came a regiment of Portuguese riflemen, with a wing of +the 95th upon either flank, while the 52d formed the right of the +line. + +Upon reaching the regiment, Major MacLeod briefly introduced the boys +to the colonel, who said, "As you have no arms, gentlemen, I think you +had better make for the bridge at once." + +"Thank you, sir," Tom replied, "there will be some muskets disposable +before long, and directly they are so we will take our place in the +ranks." + +They had now leisure to look round and examine their position, and a +glance was sufficient to show how great was the peril in which General +Craufurd's obstinacy had placed his little force. In front of them +were 24,000 French infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 30 pieces of artillery. +An overwhelming force indeed, and one which could scarcely have been +withstood by the 4000 British infantry, even under the most favorable +conditions of position. The position, however, was here wholly against +the British. They stood at the edge of a plateau, and behind them the +ground fell away in a steep hillside to the Coa, a mile distant, and +across the Coa there was but a single bridge. + +The enemy was approaching fast. Ney's great brigade of cavalry swept +the British horse before them, and the infantry were following at a +run. + +Resistance on the edge of the plateau was hopeless, and Craufurd +ordered the infantry to fall back at once. The 43d filed into the +inclosure, rapidly cut loopholes in the wall, and as the enemy +appeared on the crest above opened a tremendous fire, under cover of +which the cavalry and artillery trotted briskly and in good order down +the road to the bridge. + +The Scudamores, having no duty, stood at the entrance to the inclosure +and watched the fight on their right. As the masses of French infantry +appeared on the edge of the plateau they made no pause, but opening +a heavy fire pressed forward on the retiring British troops, who +were falling back in open order, contesting every inch of ground. So +rapidly and hotly, however, did the French press after them that the +British were soon pushed back beyond the line of the inclosure, and as +the French followed closely, it was evident that the 43d would be cut +oft and surrounded. + +Their colonel saw their danger, and called upon them to fall in and +retreat, but the entrance was so narrow that it was clear at a glance +that ere one company could pass through it the French would be upon +them, and the regiment caught like rats in a trap. + +Officers and men alike saw the danger, and there was a pause of +consternation. + +Peter was standing next to the colonel, and said suddenly as the idea +flashed across him, "The wall is not very strong, sir, if the men mass +against it and push together I think it will go." + +The colonel caught at the idea. "Now, lads, steady, form against the +rear wall four deep, close together, shoulder to shoulder, as close +as you can pack; now get ready, one, two, three!" and at the word the +heavy mass of men swung themselves against the wall; it swayed with +the shock, and many stones were displaced; another effort and the +wall tottered and fell, and with a glad shout the 43d burst out, and +trotting on at the double soon joined the rifles and 95th. + +The ground was rough and broken with rocks, vineyards and inclosures, +and the troops, fighting with admirable coolness and judgment, took +advantage of every obstacle and fell back calmly and in good order +before the overwhelming force opposed to them. + +Fortunately the jealousies of the French generals, which throughout +the campaign contributed in no slight degree to the success of +the British, was now the cause of their safety, for Montbrun, who +commanded the French heavy cavalry, refused to obey Ney's order to +charge straight down to the bridge, in which case the whole English +infantry would have been cut off; the French hussars, however, being +on the British rear, charged among them whenever the ground permitted +them to do so. + +Upon the British right the ground was more open than upon the left, +and the 52d was therefore obliged to fall back more quickly than the +rest of the line, and were the first to arrive at the bridge head, +which was still choked with artillery and cavalry. This was the most +dangerous moment, the rest of the infantry could not retreat until the +bridge was clear, and the French with exulting shouts pressed hard +upon them to drive them back upon the river. + +Major MacLeod, seeing the urgent danger, rallied four companies of his +regiment upon the little hill on the right of the road, while Major +Rowan collected two companies on another to the left. Here they were +joined by many of the riflemen, and for a while the French advance was +checked. + +The Scudamores had remained throughout close to Major MacLeod, and had +long since armed themselves with the muskets and pouches of fallen +men, and with 43d shakoes on their heads, were fighting among the +ranks. + +The cloud of French skirmishers pressed hotly forward, and MacLeod, +seeing that the bridge was still blocked, resolved suddenly upon +a desperate measure. Taking off his cap, he pointed to the enemy, +and calling upon his men to follow him, rode boldly at them. Peter +Scudamore caught up a bugle which had fallen from a dead bugler by his +side, blew the charge, and the soldiers, cheering loudly, followed +MacLeod against the enemy. + +Astounded at this sudden and unexpected attack, the French skirmishers +paused, and then fell back before the furious charge of the 43d, who +pressed after them with loud and continuous cheering. Looking back, +MacLeod saw that the bridge was now clear, and recalled the troops, +who fell back rapidly again before the French infantry had recovered +sufficiently from their surprise to press them. + +The hussars were, however, again forward, and were galloping down the +road, which was here sunken between somewhat high banks. Tom and Peter +were with the last company, which turned and prepared to receive them, +when Tom, pointing to a coil of rope upon a cart which had broken +down, shouted, "Quick, tie it to these posts across the road." Two or +three men sprang to assist him, and in a minute the rope was stretched +across the road at a foot from the ground, and fastened round a stone +post on either side. They had scarcely seized their muskets and leapt +on the bank again, when the French cavalry came thundering down the +road. "Fire, a few of you," Tom said, "so as to call their attention +up here," and in accordance with his order a dropping fire was opened. +The French came along at a gallop; a few of the leading horses saw +the rope and leapt it, but those behind caught it and fell, the mass +behind pressed on, and in an instant the lane was choked with a +confused mass of men and horses. "Now a volley," Tom cried, "and then +to the bridge." + +Every musket was emptied in to the struggling mass, and then with a +cheer, the men ran briskly down to the bridge, and crossed--the last +of the British troops over the Coa. + +The rest of the infantry and artillery had already taken ground on the +heights behind the river, and these opened fire upon the French as +they approached the head of the bridge in pursuit. The British were +now, however, safe in the position which they ought to have taken up +before the advance of the French, and had General Craufurd obeyed his +orders not to fight beyond the Coa, the lives of 306 of his gallant +troops, including the officers, would have been saved. + +The battle, however, was not yet over. The artillery on both sides +played across the ravine, the French skirmishers swarmed down to the +river bank, and between them and the British infantry a rapid fire was +exchanged, while a heavy column marched down to the bridge. With a +deep-sounding cheer they advanced upon it, while with answering cheers +the British opened fire upon them. The depth of the ravine at first +deceived the British marksmen, and the column pressed on until its +head was three-quarters across the bridge. Then the shower smote it, +and beneath that terrible fire the head of the column melted away. +Still it pressed on until across the bridge the corpses lay piled in a +mass as high as the parapet, and beyond this heap, this terrible line, +there was no living. Then sullenly and slowly the French fell back, +while the British cheers rose exultingly along the hillside. + +Twice again did fresh columns pour on to the bridge, but only to melt +away under the British fire, neither of them reaching the dreadful +line which marked the point reached by the head of the first. The +artillery and musketry fire on both sides continued until four in the +afternoon, when a heavy rain set in, and the fire ceased altogether. + +As the Coa was fordable at several points lower down, and the French +could therefore have turned the position next day, the British troops +fell back during the night behind the Pinhel river, where Picton's +division was also encamped. + +Next morning the boys exchanged their Spanish suits for the uniform +of British officers, which they obtained from the effects of some of +those who had fallen upon the previous day, these being, as is usual +in a campaign, at once sold by auction, the amount realized being +received by the paymaster for the benefit of the dead men's relatives. +Major MacLeod had witnessed their ready presence of mind in throwing +the rope across the road, and so checking the French charge, and +giving time to the rear-guard to cross the bridge, and had made a very +favorable report upon the subject. + +Two days later and they joined the Rangers, who were stationed at +Guarda, and were received with the greatest heartiness by their +brother officers, with warm but respectful greetings by the men, and +with uproarious demonstrations of gladness on the part of Sambo. + +"The betting was two to one that you had gone down, boys," Captain +Manley said, after the first greetings; "but Carruthers and myself +have taken up all offers, and win I don't know how many dinners and +bottles of wine. I had the strongest faith you would get through +somehow. You will take up your quarters with me. I have two bedrooms +upstairs there, which Sam has taken possession of in your name. He +would have it that you were sure to be back in time for the first +fight. Dinner will be ready at six, and after that there will be a +general gathering round the fire in the open to hear your adventures. +No doubt you would be dining with the colonel, but I know he is +engaged to the general." + +"Yes, he told us so," Tom said, "and we are to dine with him +to-morrow." + +"All right, then; we'll make a night of it. Carruthers is coming to +dine, and Burke and Lethbridge; but the room won't hold more than six. +We are going to have a feast, for Sam has got hold of a sucking-pig; +where he got it from I dare not inquire, and Lethbridge said his +fellow had, somehow or other, found a turkey; as to wine, we shall +have it of the best, for Burke is quartered at the monastery, and the +monks are so delighted at finding him a good Catholic that they have +given him the run of their cellar." + +It was a jovial dinner, and no words can express the satisfaction and +delight which beamed on Sam's face as he stood behind his master, or +the grin of pride with which he placed the sucking-pig on the table. + +"Sam, Sam!" Captain Manley said reprovingly, "I fear that pig is not +honestly come by, and that one of these days we shall hear that you +have come to a bad end." + +"No, no, Massa Captain Manley, sar," Sam said, "dat pig come quite +honest, dat pig made present to Sam." + +"A likely story that, Sam. Come, out with it. I have no doubt it was +quite as honest as Lethbridge's turkey anyhow. Come, tell us how it +was." + +Thus invoked, Sam's face assumed the pompons air with which he always +related a story, and he began,-- + +"Well, sar, de affair happened in dis way. When de massas arribe, two +o'clock, and went in for long talk wid de colonel, dis chile said to +himself, 'Now what am I going to get them for dinner?' De rations +sarve out dis morning war all skin and bone, and war pretty nigh +finished at lunch. Sam say to himself, 'Captain Manley's sure to say, +'You dine wid me;' but as Captain Manley hadn't got no food himself, +de invitation was berry kind, berry kind indeed; but massa wasn't +likely to get fat on dat invitation." + +Sam's narrative was interrupted by a perfect shout of laughter upon +the part of all at table, Captain Manley joining heartily in the laugh +against himself. When they had a little recovered again, Sam went on +as gravely as ever. "Dis struck Sam berry serious, not to have nothing +for dinner after being away seben months; presently idea occur to dis +chile, and he stroll permiscuous up to big farm-house on hill. When +Sam got near house, kept out of sight of window; at last got quite +close, took off shako, and put head suddenly in at window. Sure +enough, just what Sam expected, dere sat missus of farm, fat ole +woman, wid fat ole servant opposite her. De door was open, and dis +little pig and several of his broders and sisters was a frisking in +and out. De old women look up bofe togeder, and dey give a awful +shriek when dey saw dis chile's head; dey fought it were de debil, +sure enough. Dey drop down on dere knees, and begin to pray as fast as +maybe. Den I give a loud 'Yah! yah!' and dey screams out fresh. 'Oh! +good massa debil!' says the ole woman, 'what you want? I been berry, +berry bad, but don't take me away.' You see, Massa Tom, I pick up +little Spanish, 'nuff to understand since you been gone. I not say +nuffin, and de ole woman den go on, 'If you want one soul Massa Debil, +take dis here,' pointing to her serbant;' she been much more wicked +nor me.' Den de serbant she set up awful shriek, and I says, 'Dis time +I hab pity on you, next time I come, if you not good I carry you bofe +away. But must take soul away to big debil 'else he neber forgibe me. +Dere, I will carry off soul of little pig. Gib it me.' De serbant she +gives cry ob joy, jump up, seize little pig, and berry much afraid, +bring him to window. Before I take him I say to old missus, 'Dis a +free gibt on your part?' and she say, 'Oh, yes, oh, yes, good Massa +Debil, you can take dem all if you like.' I say, 'No; only one--and +now me gib you bit advice. My Massa down below hear you very bad ole +women, never gib noting to de poor, berry hard, berry hard. Me advise +you change your conduct, or, as sure as eggs is eggs, he send me up +again for you no time.' Den I gave two great 'Yah! yah's!' again berry +loud, and showed de white ob my eyes, and dey went down on to knees +again, and I go quietly round corner ob house, and walk home wid de +pig which was giben to me. Noting like stealing about dat, Massa +Manley, sar!" + +Sam's story was received with roars of laughter, and when they had +recovered themselves a little, Captain Manley said, "It is lucky we +march to-morrow, Sam, for if the good woman were to catch a glimpse of +you in uniform, and were to find she had been tricked, she might lay +a complaint against you, and although, as you say, the pig was freely +given to you, I imagine the Provost Marshal might consider that it was +obtained under false pretences. But here are the other men outside, we +had better adjourn, for every one is longing to hear your adventures." + +It was a lovely evening, and as the officers of the Norfolk Rangers +sat or lay round the fire, which was lit for light and cheerfulness +rather than warmth, the boys, after their long wanderings among +strangers, felt how pleasant and bright life was among friends +and comrades. They had first to relate their adventures with the +guerillas, after which it was agreed that they had earned the right to +be silent for the rest of the evening, and song, and jest, and merry +story went round the ring. + +Sam was installed under the direction of the doctor, a jovial +Irishman, as concocter of punch, and his office was by no means a +sinecure. + +"Now, major, give us the song of the regiment," Captain Manley said, +and, as he spoke, there was a general cry round the circle of "The +Rangers, the Rangers." "I'm agreeable," the major said. "Give me +another tumbler of punch to get my pipes in order. Make it a little +sweeter than the last brew, Sam; yes, that's better. Well, here +goes--full chorus, and no shirking." + +THE RANGERS. + + "Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah! + Here's to the corps that we love so well; + Ever the first in the deadly fray, + Steady and firm amid shot and shell. + Scattered as skirmishers out in the front, + Contesting each foot of the ground we hold, + Nor yielding a step though we bear the brunt + Of the first attack of the foeman bold. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah! + Here's to the corps that we love so well; + Ever the first in the deadly fray, + Steady and firm amid shot and shell. + + "Steady boys, steady, the foe falls back, + Sullenly back to the beat of the drum, + Hark to the thunder that nears our flank + Rally in square, boys, their cavalry come. + Squadron on squadron, wave upon wave, + Dashing along with an ocean's force, + But they break into spray on our bayonets' points, + And we mock at the fury of rider and horse. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c. + + "The gunner may boast of the death he deals + As he shatters the foe with his iron hail, + And may laugh with pride as he checks the charge, + Or sees the dark column falter and quail. + But the gunner fights with the foe afar, + In the rear of the line is the battery's place, + The Ranger fights with a sterner joy + For he strives with his foemen face to face. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c. + + "The cavalry man is dashing and gay, + His steed is fast, and his blade is fine, + He blithely rides to the fiercest fray, + And cuts his way through the foeman's line, + But the wild, fierce joys of the deadly breach, + Or the patient pluck of the serried square + Are far away from the horseman's reach, + While the Norfolk Rangers are sure to be there. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c." + +Long, loud, and hearty was the cheering as the last chorus concluded. +"Very good song, very well sung, jolly companions every one," shouted +the doctor. "Now, Manley, keep the ball rolling, give us the 'The +Bivouac,'" Captain Manley emptied his glass, and, without hesitation, +began-- + +THE BIVOUAC. + + "The weary march is over, boys, the camp fire's burning bright, + So gather round the blazing logs, we'll keep high feast to-night, + For every heart is full of joy, and every cheek aglow, + That after months of waiting, at last we meet the foe. + To-morrow's sun will see the fight, and ere that sun goes down, + Our glorious flag another wreath of victory shall crown. + + Hurrah, hurrah for the bivouac, + With comrades tried and true, + With faces bright, and spirits light, + And the foemen's fires in view. + + "Then fill your cups with Spanish wine, and let the toast go round, + Here's a health to all who love us on dear old England's ground. + Be their tresses gold or auburn, or black as ebon's hue, + Be their eyes of witching hazel, loving gray, or heaven's blue, + Here's to them all, the girls we love, God bless them every one; + May we all be here to toast them when to-morrow's work is done. + + Hurrah, hurrah, &c. + + "But whate'er to-morrow bring us, it shall shed no gloom to-night, + For a British soldier does not flinch from thought of death in fight; + No better ending could we wish, no worthier do we know, + Than to fall for King and country, with our face towards the foe; + And if we go, our friends who stay will keep our memory bright, + And will drink to us in silence by many a camp-fire's light. + + Hurrah, hurrah, &c." + +When the last chorus had ceased, the boys, who had had a long march +that morning, and were thoroughly tired, stole quietly off to bed, +but it was not till long after they had gone to sleep that the jovial +party round the fire broke up, and that Sam was relieved from his +duties of concocter of punch. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +BUSACO AND TORRES VEDRAS. + + +Instead of pressing forward upon his invasion of Portugal, Massena +prepared to besiege Almeida, and for a month the British and +Portuguese army remained in their position within a few hours' march +of that town. Wellington expected that Almeida would be able to +resist for two months, and hoped to find some opportunity for falling +suddenly upon the besiegers; but even a resistance of two months would +have made it so late in the season that Massena must have postponed +his invasion until the next spring. + +Upon the morning of the 26th of August the French batteries opened +fire, and from Guarda the dull, heavy roar of artillery could be heard +all day. As darkness fell, the officers of the Rangers were, as usual, +assembling round their fire, when the earth seemed to shake beneath +their feet, and a flash like that of summer lightning lit the eastern +sky. "What can that be?" was the general exclamation. A minute later, +and a deep, heavy, prolonged roar sounded in their ears--then all was +quiet. + +"That is a big magazine," Captain Manley said, "and I'm afraid it's +the town, for it sounded too heavy for a mere field magazine. If it be +the town, you'll see it won't hold out much longer; even if the actual +damage is not very great, a great explosion always damages the morale +of a defense, and in that case we shall have Massena upon us, and +there will be wigs on the green ere many days are over." + +Captain Manley's conclusions were correct. The magazine of Almeida had +exploded with terrific effect. Only six houses were left standing in +the town, a considerable portion of the ramparts was thrown down, and +five hundred people killed on the spot. The stones were hurled in all +directions with such force that forty of the besiegers were hurt in +the trenches. + +Colonel Cox, who commanded, endeavored to rally the panic-stricken +garrison, and upon the following morning attempted to negotiate with +Massena, who sent an officer to demand instant surrender. + +Defense was, in fact, impossible, but Colonel Cox attempted to +negotiate, because he hoped that Wellington would at once advance to +his rescue. His intentions were frustrated, however, by the treachery +and mutiny of the principal Portuguese officers under him, and the +French at once took possession of the ruins. + +The British army fell back a short distance when the news of the +disaster arrived, and a fortnight of great anxiety and watchfulness +passed, as it was not certain by which road or roads Massena would +advance. + +It was not until the 18th of September that Massena fairly commenced +his march, having chosen the road from Visen through Martagoa, and the +next day the news reached the Rangers that the British army was to +concentrate on the heights of Busaco. + +"So we are going to have a fight for it," Carruthers said to the boys, +as the officers assembled in readiness to take their places when the +troops had fallen in. "What will be the end of it?" + +"We shall lick them," an old captain said, "though they are two to +one, and then they will march round us somehow, and then we shall have +to fall back in all haste on Lisbon, and embark there, and we shall +eat our Christmas dinner in England." + +There was a general murmur of assent, for at that time the belief was +almost universal in the British army that they would be forced to +abandon Portugal. + +"I do not know," Major Fanshawe said. "I heard last night, from a +man who has just returned from sick leave at Lisbon, that there are +thousands of peasants employed under our engineers in getting up some +tremendous works some fifteen miles this side of Lisbon. I should not +be surprised yet if Massena finds the chief a nut too hard to crack, +with all his force." + +"I have heard something about these works at Torres Vedras," Captain +Manley said, "a mere rumor; still I believe there must be something in +it. Wellington has only some twenty-five thousand British troops, and +as many Portuguese, while Massena has over a hundred thousand veterans +at his command. Our game would be hopeless unless we have something to +fall back on. No; I have every faith in our general. But there goes +the bugle." + +On the 24th the Rangers, with the rest of Picton's division, arrived +on the crest of Busaco, where Cole's and Craufurd's divisions arrived +on the same day. This position was one of immense strength, being a +long ridge, with a very deep valley in front. Upon the opposite side +of this ravine the slope was as steep and sharp as that of Busaco +itself, so that the opposite crest was within easy cannon shot. +The enemy, in order to attack the British position, would have to +descend into the bottom of this steep ravine, and then climb up the +precipitous ascent, to meet the British soldiers awaiting them, fresh +and unshaken, at the top. So strong, indeed, was the position that +the English generals were doubtful whether Massena would venture to +attack. + +Upon the 25th Craufurd moved his division forward, and would have +repeated his mistake of the Coa had not Wellington himself gone +forward and recalled the troops, bringing them off with difficulty +in the face of the advancing masses of the French. By three in the +afternoon, 40,000 French infantry were on the ridge opposite Busaco, +and it appeared probable that the battle would take place that +afternoon, in which case the British position would have been +precarious, for neither Spencer's, Hill's, nor Leith's divisions were +up. + +Massena, however, was miles behind, and Ney, who commanded the +advance, could not attack without orders; thus, the moment favorable +for the French passed by. When Massena arrived next day, the British +divisions were all up and in their places, and the long crest of +Busaco swarmed with troops. Hill occupied the right across the road to +Pena Cova, then came Leith's 5th division, then came Picton with the +3d division, with Spencer's division, the 1st, next to him. On a +plateau in front of a convent lay Craufurd and Pack, while Cole, with +the 4th division, was on the left. + +The 27th and 28th were passed in comparative tranquillity, the rival +armies surveying each other across the chasm. From the woods far below +came up the constant crack of the rifle, as the skirmishers on either +side pushed each other backwards; and on the evening of the 28th this +fighting increased so much in strength and intensity, that the British +troops were some time under arms in expectation of a night attack, for +the enemy's riflemen had pressed far up on the hill-side towards the +British lines. As the night went on, however, the fire ceased, and the +dark ravine between the two long lines of bright watch-fires became +hushed and still. + +The Rangers were with Picton's division, and were out as an advance +half way down the ravine, two companies being down in the bottom as +skirmishers. Morning was but just breaking when a heavy fire burst out +in front. The regiment sprang to its feet, and prepared for action. +It was not long in coming, for the fire rolled rapidly up the hill +towards them, and the skirmishing companies came running back, pressed +by a heavy column of the enemy. Reynier had formed in two divisions, +one of which was now pressing forward against Picton's right, while +the object of the other was to gain the crest still farther to the +right, and so place themselves between Picton and Leigh. The whole +regiment was at once engaged, but the French assault was too powerful +to be resisted, and the Rangers and the other regiments of the +advanced brigade gave way sullenly, while the French eagerly pressed +up the hill, although a battery opened upon them from the crest, while +they were unsupported by their own artillery. + +"Golly, Massa Peter, dese fellows fight berry hard; look as if dey +lick us dis time," the black, who was in Peter's company, said to him +as the regiment retreated. + +"The battle has only begun yet, Sam. We have plenty of fresh troops at +the top of the hill." + +"Good ting, dat, Massa Peter. Berry hard work, dis--climb hill, carry +kit, fire gun, dodge de bullets, all sam time." + +"You didn't dodge that bullet sharp enough, Sam," Peter said with a +laugh, as the negro's shako was carried off with a ball. + +"Him cum too fast. Dere, you frog-eating thief." he said angrily as he +fired his musket at an advancing foe. "Dat serve you right," he went +on to himself as the Frenchman fell. "You spoil Sam's hat. Dis colored +gentleman catch cold first time him come on to rain." + +The French continued their impetuous advance. Picton's right, as they +climbed the hill, fell back towards his center, and in half an hour +from the first shot being fired the head of the French column had won +the crest, and, being between Leigh and Picton's divisions, had cut +the British position. Then the column nearest to Picton's division +began to wheel to its right, so as to sweep the crest. + +"Lie down, the Rangers; every man down," shouted the colonel, and the +breathless men threw themselves panting on the ground. A wild Irish +shout was heard behind them as they did so, and a tremendous volley of +musketry rang over their heads, and then the 88th and a wing of the +45th dashed across them, and, with fierce cheers, charged that portion +of the column engaged in wheeling. Breathless and in disorder from +their prodigious efforts, the French were unable to resist this fresh +attack. In an instant the British were among them, and mixed up in +wild confusion, fighting hand to hand, the mass of combatants went +mingled together down the hill. Nor was the success of the French +column which had gained the crest of long duration, for Leith brought +up one of his brigades; Colonel Cameron, with the 9th Regiment, dashed +at the enemy with the bayonet, without firing a single shot, while +the 38th attacked their flank; and the French, unable to resist the +onslaught, relinquished their position and retreated down the hill. +Nor upon the French right had Ney's attack proved more successful. + +Napier thus describes the combat in this quarter of the field:--"When +the light broke, three heavy masses detached from the sixth corps were +seen to enter the woods below, and to throw forward a profusion of +skirmishers; one of them, under General Marchand, emerging from the +dark chasm and following the main road, seemed intent to turn the +right of the light division; a second, under Loison, made straight up +the mountain against the front; the third remained in reserve. Simon's +brigade, leading Loison's attack, ascended with a wonderful alacrity, +and though the light troops plied it incessantly with musketry, and +the artillery bullets swept through it from the first to the last +section, its order was never disturbed, nor its speed in the least +abated. Ross's guns were worked with incredible quickness, yet their +range was palpably contracted every round; the enemy's shots came +ringing up in a sharper key, the English skirmishers, breathless +and begrimed with powder, rushed over the edge of the ascent, the +artillery drew back, and the victorious cries of the French were heard +within a few yards of the summit. Craufurd, standing alone on one of +the rocks, had been intently watching the progress of their attack, +and now, with a shrill tone, ordered the two regiments in reserve to +charge. The next moment a horrid shout startled the French column, and +eighteen hundred British bayonets went sparkling over the hill. Yet so +brave, so hardy were the leading French, that each man of the first +section raised his musket, and two officers and ten men fell before +them. Not a Frenchman had missed his mark. They could do no more. The +head of their column was violently thrown back upon the rear, both +flanks were overlapped at the same time by the English wings, three +terrible discharges at five yards' distance shattered the wavering +mass, and a long line of broken arms and bleeding carcases marked the +line of flight." + +Ney did not renew the attack, and with some desultory skirmishing the +battle ended at two o'clock, and an hour's truce enabled both parties +to carry off their wounded. + +Small parties of the French came in contact with the English +skirmishers during the afternoon, but the battle of Busaco was over. + +"Don't call dat much of battle," Sam said discontentedly. "Just little +fierce fight, berry out of bref, and den, just as second wind came, +all ober." + +The battle of Busaco was indeed one of secondary importance. The +losses were not great on either side, although that of the French was +fully threefold greater than that of the British, as the former were +exposed during their attack to the grape and shell of the British +guns, while the French guns afforded no assistance to their infantry. +The French loss, in killed and wounded and prisoners, did not exceed +4000, of which only 800 were killed. Nor was any strategical advantage +gained by the battle, for the French, upon the following day, found +a road across the hills to the British left from Martagoa through +Bonzalva. + +Throughout the day they made feints of renewing the attack upon the +English position, and it was not until late in the afternoon that long +columns of men were seen crossing the hill to the left; and Wellington +discovered that Busaco had been won in vain, for that his flank was +turned, and there was nothing for it but to fall back upon Torres +Vedras. Before night the whole British army was in retreat. + +"What a horrible scene of confusion," Tom remarked, as they marched +into the town of Coimbra next day. + +"Confusion!" Captain Manley said; "it is enough to drive a +commander-in-chief out of his mind. Here Wellington has for weeks +been endeavoring to get the Portuguese Government to compel all the +population to retire upon Lisbon, carrying all they can, destroying +the mills, and burning all the corn they could not carry off. The +Government did issue the order, but it has taken no steps whatever to +carry it out, although they knew all along that we could never repel +the invasion in the open. As it is, the greater portion of these poor +wretches will lose all they possess, which they might have carried +off quietly enough during the last two months. Many of them will lose +their lives, and they will block the roads so that we shall have the +French down on us to a certainty." + +Nothing could be more sad than the scene. The streets of Coimbra were +crowded with fugitives from the country round, and these, as well as +the inhabitants, were all preparing to push onwards towards Lisbon. +Bullock carts and carriages, mules, donkeys, and horses were crowded +together, all laden with the aged, the children, the sick, and such +property as was most portable and valuable. Happily Massena had +a circuitous detour to make; the road in the mountain defile was +scarcely passable, and throughout the march he displayed but little +energy; consequently it was not until the morning of the first of +October that his cavalry engaged those of the light division which was +covering the retreat. The division fell back through the town, and the +inhabitants, who had lingered to the last in some vague hope that the +French would not come, now rushed out again. The bridge behind the +town was choked, and the troops had to halt for some time. In the rear +the pistol shots of the cavalry told of the approach of the French, +and the din made by the panic-stricken fugitives was increased by the +yells of the prisoners shut up and forgotten in the prison hard by. +Their cries and supplications were too painful to be resisted, and the +British forced the prison doors and let them free. Once across the +bridge, the troops found the defile of Condeixa so choked up that it +was impossible to effect a passage, and, had the French pressed them +the division must have been destroyed. + +The French infantry, however, had not arrived, and by night the road +was cleared, and the troops passed on. + +There was no pursuit, for Massena allowed his troops to halt and +plunder Coimbra, and the British by easy marches, fell back to +Torres Vedras; but though unpursued, the disorder and relaxation of +discipline which always marks a retreat, showed itself, and Wellington +was obliged to hang several plunderers, and to resort to other severe +measures to restore to discipline that army which, only a week before, +had repulsed the best troops of France. Towards the end of the march +the French pressed them again, and Craufurd, with his light division, +had a narrow escape of being cut off. + +Great was the satisfaction of the British troops when they took up the +position so carefully prepared for them; equally great the surprise of +Massena and the French army when they beheld the almost impregnable +line of redoubts and fortresses of whose very existence they had only +heard a confused rumor two or three days before. And yet formidable +as was the chain of forts occupied by the British, this was weak in +comparison to the second line, some five or six miles in the rear, +to which Wellington would have fallen back if driven from his first +position. This second position was indeed that which he had originally +intended to have taken up, the redoubts on the exterior range of hills +being intended as outposts; but, while Massena delayed his advance, +the outside line of fortifications had so grown and increased in +strength, that Wellington resolved to hold them in the first place. + +There were, therefore, as will be seen by the plan, three lines of +defense. The first from Alhandra on the Tagus to Zizandre on the +sea-coast. This, following the windings of the hills, was twenty-nine +miles long; the second and main line was from Quintella on the Tagus +to the mouth of the San Lorenza, twenty-four miles in length; the +third, intended to cover an embarkation, in case of necessity, +extended from Passo d'Arcos on the Tagus to the town of Junquera on +the coast. + +Massena spent some days in surveying the British position, and came to +the conclusion that it was too strong to be attacked. Had the order +of Wellington been carried out, and the whole country wasted of +provisions, the French army must have made a precipitate retreat to +avoid starvation, for they had no provisions or connection with Spain. +Wilson and Trant, with Portuguese levies, hung upon their rear, and +captured Coimbra, where Massena had left his sick and wounded, 5000 in +number, upon the very day after the main French army advanced from the +town. So vast were the supplies, however, left in the country that +Massena was able to take up his position, first immediately in front +of the British lines, and afterwards at Santarem, within a day's march +of them, and to maintain his army in food throughout the winter until +the beginning of March. + +"Have you seen the _Gazette_, Scudamore?" Carruthers asked, rushing +into the tent one morning about a week after the regiment had settled +down in its tents on the heights of Torres Vedras. + +"No; what's up?" Tom replied. + +"There you are; you have both got your steps. Thomas Scudamore, +ensign, Norfolk Rangers, to be lieutenant, for distinguished services +in the field. Peter Scudamore, ditto, ditto. I wondered the chief had +done nothing for you after your journey through Spain." + +"I am sure I did not expect anything," Tom answered, "and was quite +content when the colonel told us that Lord Wellington had said he was +pleased with the manner we had done our work. However, I am very glad; +but it is not pleasant going over five or six fellows' heads." + +"Fortune of war," Carruthers said laughing. "Besides, two of them are +at the depot, Sankey is away on sick leave, and none of the three who +are senior to you here will ever set the Thames on fire. No, no, you +have fairly earned your step and no one can say a word against it." + +The news soon spread, and the boys were heartily congratulated by all +the officers of the regiment on their promotion, which placed them +next on the list to Carruthers, who had previously been the junior +lieutenant. Promotion in those days was rapid, and after a severe +engagement an ensign only joined upon the previous week might find +himself a lieutenant, from the number of death vacancies caused in +the ranks above him. The Norfolk Rangers had not suffered heavily at +Talavera, or the boys might have had their lieutenant's rank before +this, without performing any exceptional services. + +"I wish we could get two months' leave, Tom," Peter said that night. +"Of course it is impossible, but it would be jolly to drop in upon +Rhoda. By her letter she seems well and happy, and aunt is very kind +to her. It would be nice; and now we are lieutenants, aunt wouldn't +tell us to rub our shoes." + +"No," Tom laughed, "or be afraid of our pelting her pigeons and +Minnie." + +"No," Peter said. "Evidently she is coming round. Rhoda said that +since she has heard that we have got our commissions she has given +up prophesying once or twice a day that we shall come to a bad +end--probably hanging." + +"Yes, and Rhoda said in her letter yesterday that aunt was quite +touched with those lace mantillas we got at Madrid, and sent off the +day after we rejoined, and actually remarked that, although we could +no longer be looked upon as boys, and seemed really as hair-brained +and fond of getting into scrapes as ever, yet it was evident that we +were good, kindly lads, and meant well at heart." + +"I wish," Tom said, with a sudden burst of laughter, "that we could +dress in our old disguises, I as a student of theology you as a mild +young novice; what a lark we would have with her!" and the boys went +off into such shouts of laughter, that their aunt would have thought +them more scatter-brained than ever if she had heard them, while from +the tent of Captain Manley on one side, and of Carruthers and another +young officer on the other, came indignant expostulations, and +entreaties that they would keep quiet, and let other people go to +sleep. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +ALBUERA. + + +Very heavily did five months in the lines of Torres Vedras pass to the +Norfolk Rangers. When, in the beginning of November, Massena fell back +to Sautarem, the greater portion of the army followed him in readiness +for attack should any openings be found. Massena, however, entrenched +himself in a very strong position, and Wellington could no more attack +him than he could attack the lines of Torres Vedras; so that both +armies faced each other in inactivity until the beginning of March, +when Massena broke up his camp and began to retreat. + +The Norfolk Rangers had been one of the regiments which had remained +in their quarters on Torres Vedras throughout the winter, and great +was the joy with which they received orders to strike their tents +and push on in pursuit. The retreat of Massena was masterly. Ney's +division covered the rear, and several sharp fights took place which +are known in history as the combats of Pombal, Redinha, Cazal Nova, +Foz d'Aronce, and Sabugal. + +In most of these the enemy were driven from their position by the +British outflanking them and threatening their line of retreat; but in +the last, by a mistake of General Erskine, a portion of his division +attacked the enemy in rear, and, although vastly outnumbered, drove +him off from the crest he held with desperate valor. Wellington +himself said, "This was one of the most glorious actions British +troops were ever engaged in." + +The next day the French crossed the Coa and Turones, and took up their +position under the guns of Ciudad Rodrigo, which they had left six +months before with the full assurance that they were going to conquer +Portugal, and drive the British into the sea. The invasion cost +Massena thirty thousand men, killed in battle, taken prisoners, or +dead from hardships, fatigues and fevers. + +The Scudamores were not present at the battle of Sabugal, for on the +afternoon after the combat of Foz d'Aronce an orderly rode up to the +regiment and handed a note to the colonel. He read it, and at once +summoned the Scudamores at his side. + +"An order from the commander-in-chief," he said, "for you to go to him +at once." + +Following the orderly, the boys soon arrived at the cottage at which +Lord Wellington had established his headquarters. + +"His lordship is with Lord Beresford," the aide-de-camp to whom they +gave their names said, "but the orders are that you are to be shown in +at once." + +The lads were ushered into a small room, where, seated at a table, +were the commanders-in-chief of the British and the Portuguese troops. + +"Young gentlemen," the former said, looking up with his keen piercing +eyes, "I have not seen you since your return from Spain. I am content +with what you did, and with the detailed report you sent me in. I +shall keep my eye upon you. Lord Beresford has asked me for two +officers as aides-de-camp, and he specially requires them to have a +perfect knowledge of Spanish. I have mentioned your names to him. It +is not often that I confidently recommend young officers, but from +what I know of you I have felt able to do so in the present case. You +will, with him, have opportunities of distinguishing yourselves +such as you could not have with your regiment. You accept the +appointments?" + +Tom and Peter would far rather have remained with their regiment, +but they felt that, after what Lord Wellington had said, they could +not refuse; they consequently expressed at once their willingness +to serve, and their thanks to the general for his kindness in +recommending them. + +"You can ride, I hope?" Lord Beresford, a powerfully-built, +pleasant-looking man, said. + +"Yes, sir, we can both ride, but at present--" + +"You have no horses, of course?" Lord Beresford put in. "I will +provide you with horses, and will assign servants to you from one of +the cavalry regiments with me. Will you join me at daybreak to-morrow? +we shall march at once." + +There was a general expression of regret when the Scudamores informed +their comrades that they were again ordered on detached duty. As +to Sam, when Tom told him that he could not accompany them, he was +uproarious in his lamentations, and threatened to desert from his +regiment in order to follow them. At this the boys laughed, and told +Sam that he would be arrested and sent back before he had gone six +hours. + +"I tink, Massa Tom, dat you might hab told de general dat you hab got +an fust-class serbent, and dat you bring him wid you." + +"But we shall be mounted now, Sam, and must have mounted men with us. +You can't ride, you know." + +"Yes, massa, dis child ride first-rate, he can." + +"Why, Sam, I heard you say not long ago you had never ridden on a +horse all your life." + +"Never hab, massa, dat's true 'nuff; but Sam sure he can ride. Berry +easy ting dat. Sit on saddle, one leg each side--not berry difficult +dat. Sam see tousand soldiers do dat ebery day; dey sit quite easy on +saddle; much more easy dat dan beat big drum." + +The boys laughed heartily at Sam's notion of riding without practice, +and assured him that it was not so easy as he imagined. + +"Look here, Sam," Peter said at last, "you practice riding a little, +and then next time we get away we will ask for you to go with us." And +with this Sam was obliged to be content. + +Half an hour later, when the boys were chatting with Captain Manley, +Carruthers, and two or three other officers, in the tent of the +first-named officer, they heard a commotion outside, with shouts of +laughter, in which they joined as soon as they went out and saw what +was going on. + +Sam, upon leaving the Scudamores, determined at once upon trying the +experiment of riding, in order that he might--for he had no doubt all +would be easy enough--ride triumphantly up to his masters' tent and +prove his ability to accompany them at once. He was not long before +he saw a muleteer coming along sitting carelessly on his mule, with +both legs on one side of the animal, side-saddle fashion, as is the +frequent custom of muleteers. It was evident, by the slowness of his +pace, that he was not pressed for time. + +Sam thought that this was a fine opportunity. + +"Let me have a ride?" he said to the muleteer in broken Portuguese. + +The man shook his head. Sam held out a quarter of a dollar. "There," +he said, "I'll give you that for a hour's ride." + +The muleteer hesitated, and then said, "The mule is very bad tempered +with strangers." + +"Oh, dat all nonsense," Sam thought, "he only pretend dat as excuse; +any one can see de creature as quiet as lamb; don't he let his master +sit on him sideways?" + +"All right," he said aloud, "I try him." + +The muleteer dismounted, and Sam prepared to take his place on the +saddle. By this time several of the Rangers had gathered round, and +these foreseeing, from the appearance of the mule and the look of sly +amusement in the face of the muleteer, that there was likely to be +some fun, at once proposed to assist, which they did by giving advice +to Sam of the most opposite nature. Sam was first going to mount on +the off side, but this irregularity was repressed, and one wag, taking +the stirrup of the near side in his hand, said, "Now, Sam, up you go, +never mind what these fellows say, you put your right foot in the +stirrup, and lift your left over the saddle." + +Sam acted according to these instructions, and found himself, to his +intense amazement and the delight of the bystanders, sitting with his +face to the mule's tail. + +"Hullo," he exclaimed in astonishment, "dis all wrong; you know noting +about de business, you Bill Atkins." + +And Sam prepared to descend, when, at his first movement, the mule put +down his head and flung his heels high in the air. Sam instinctively +threw himself forward, but not recovering his upright position before +the mule again flung up her hind quarters, he received a violent +blow on the nose. "Golly!" exclaimed the black in a tone of extreme +anguish, as, with water streaming from his eyes, he instinctively +clutched the first thing which came to hand, the root of the mule's +tail, and held on like grim death. The astonished mule lashed out +wildly and furiously, but Sam, with his body laid close on her back, +his hands grasping her tail, and his legs and feet pressing tight to +her flanks, held on with the clutch of despair. + +"Seize de debil!--seize him!--he gone mad!"--he shouted frantically, +but the soldiers were in such fits of laughter that they could do +nothing. + +Then the mule, finding that he could not get rid of this singular +burden by kicking, started suddenly off at full gallop. + +"Stop him--stop him," yelled Sam. "Gracious me, dis am drefful." + +This was the sight which met the eyes of the Scudamores and their +brother officers as they issued from their tents. The soldiers were +all out of their tents now, and the air rang with laughter mingled +with shouts of "Go it, moke!" "Hold on, Sam!" + +"Stop that mule," Captain Manley shouted, "or the man will be killed." + +Several soldiers ran to catch at the bridle, but the mule swerved and +dashed away out of camp along the road. + +"Look, look," Tom said, "there are the staff, and Lord Wellington +among them. The mule's going to charge them." + +The road was somewhat narrow, with a wall of four feet high on either +side, and the general, who was riding at the head of the party, drew +his rein when he saw the mule coming along at a furious gallop. The +staff did the same, and a general shout was raised to check or divert +her wild career. The obstinate brute, however, maddened by the shouts +which had greeted her from all sides, and the strange manner in which +she was being ridden, never swerved from her course. When she was +within five yards of the party, the general turned his horse, touched +him with his spur, and leaped him lightly over the wall; one or two +others followed his example, but the others had not time to do so +before the mule was among them. Two horses and riders were thrown +down, one on either side, with the impetus of the shock, and then, +kicking, striking and charging, the animal made its way past the +others and dashed on in despite of the attempts to stop her, and +the cries of "Shoot the brute," "Ride him down," and the angry +ejaculations of those injured in its passage. Thirty yards behind the +group of officers were the escort, and these prepared to catch the +mule, when turning to the left she leaped the wall, eliciting a scream +of terror from Sam, who was nearly shaken from his hold by the sudden +jerk. + +The anger of the officers was changed into a burst of amusement at +seeing Sam's dark face and staring eyes over the mule's crupper, and +even Lord Wellington smiled grimly. An order was hastily given, and +four troopers detached themselves from the escort and started off in +pursuit. The mule was, however, a fast one, and maddened by fright, +and it was some time before the foremost of the troopers was up to +her. As he came alongside, the mule suddenly swerved round and lashed +out viciously, one of her heels coming against the horse's ribs, and +the other against the leg of the rider, who, in spite of his thick +jack-boot, for some time thought that his leg was broken. + +He fell behind, and the others, rendered cautious by the lesson, came +up but slowly, and prepared to close upon the animal's head, one +from each side. Just as they were going to do so, however, they were +startled by a scattered fire of musketry, and by the sound of balls +whizzing about their ears, and discovered that in the ardor of the +chase they had passed over the space which separated the French from +the English lines, and that they were close to the former. At the same +moment they saw a party of cavalry stealing round to cut off their +retreat. Turning their horses, the dragoons rode off at full speed, +but the French cavalry, on fresher horses, would have caught them +before they reached the English lines had not a troop of British horse +dashed forward to meet them upon seeing their danger. As to the mule, +she continued her wild gallop into the French lines, where she was +soon surrounded and captured. + +The boys were greatly vexed at the loss of their faithful black, but +they had little time for grieving, for an hour after they rode off +with General Beresford's division. Three days' march brought them +to Campo Mayor, a town which had, two days before, surrendered to +the French, who, surprised by the sudden appearance of the British, +evacuated the place hastily and retreated, after suffering much from +a brilliant charge of the 13th Hussars, who, although unsupported, +charged right through the French cavalry, and Beresford then prepared +to lay siege to Badajos. Had he pushed forward at once, he would have +found the place unprepared for a siege, but, delaying a few days at +Elvas to give his tired troops repose, the French repaired the walls, +and were in a position to offer a respectable defense, when he made +his appearance under its walls. The army was very badly provided with +heavy guns, but the approaches were opened and the siege commenced in +regular form, when the news arrived that Soult was marching with a +powerful army to its relief. The guns were therefore withdrawn, the +siege raised, and Beresford marched to meet Soult at Albuera. + +On the 15th of May he took up his position on rising ground looking +down on Albuera, having the river in his front. Acting with him, and +nominally under his orders, was a Spanish force under Blake. This +was intended to occupy the right of the position, but with the usual +Spanish dilatoriness, instead of being upon the ground, as he had +promised, by noon, Blake did not arrive until past midnight; the +French accordingly crossed the river unmolested, and the British +general found his right turned. + +Beresford's position was now a very faulty one, as the woods +completely hid the movements of the enemy, and a high hill, which they +had at once seized, flanked the whole allied position and threatened +its line of retreat. + +When the morning of the 16th dawned the armies were numerically very +unequal. The British had 30,000 infantry, 2,000 cavalry, and 38 guns; +the French, 19,000 infantry, 4,000 cavalry, and 40 guns; but of these +the French were all veteran troops, while Beresford had but 6,000 +British troops, the remainder being Spanish and Portuguese, upon +whom no reliance whatever was to be placed. The British officers +present were all of opinion that their chances of success, under +the circumstances, were slight indeed. + +The battle commenced at nine in the morning by an attack by the French +general Godinot upon the bridge of Albuera. Their columns were, +however, so completely plowed by the guns of the Portuguese upon +the eminence behind it, that they made no progress, and Beresford +perceived at once that the main attack would be made on his right. He +despatched Tom Scudamore with orders to Blake to throw back his troops +at right angles to the main front. The pig-headed Spaniard refused to +obey, asserting that the main attack was in front. Colonel Hardinge +was sent to insist upon the order being carried out, but Blake still +refused, and Beresford himself rode furiously across and took the +command just as the French column debouched from the wood on the +right. + +Before the Spanish movement was completed the French were among them. +Their cavalry swept round to the right rear, and menaced the line of +retreat, the infantry charged the wavering Spanish battalions, and the +latter at once fell into confusion and began to fall back. William +Stewart now arrived with a brigade of the second division to endeavor +to retrieve the day; but as they were advancing into position, four +regiments of French cavalry, whose movements were hidden in the +driving rain until they were close at hand, fell upon them and rode +down two-thirds of the brigade, the 31st regiment alone having time +to form square and repulse the horsemen. + +Beresford himself, with his staff, was in the middle of the melee, and +the lads found themselves engaged in hand-to-hand combats with the +French troopers. All was confusion. Peter was unhorsed by the shock +of a French hussar, but Tom shot the trooper before he could cut Peter +down. Free for a moment, he looked round, and saw a French lancer +charging, lance at rest, at Lord Beresford. "Look out, sir!" he +shouted, and the general, turning round, swept aside the lance thrust +with his arm; and as the lancer, carried on by the impetus of his +charge, dashed against him, he seized him by the throat and waist, +lifted him bodily from his saddle, and hurled him insensible to +the ground. Just at this moment General Lumley arrived with some +Portuguese cavalry, and the French lancers galloped off. + +The Spanish cavalry, who had orders to charge the French cavalry in +flank, galloped up until within a few yards of them, and then turned +and fled shamefully. + +Beresford, now furious at the cowardice of the Spanish infantry, +seized one of their ensigns by the shoulder, and dragged him, with his +colors, to the front by main force, but the infantry would not even +then advance. + +The driving rain saved the allied army at this critical moment, for +Soult was unable to see the terrible confusion which reigned in their +ranks, and kept his heavy columns in hand when an attack would have +carried with it certain victory. + +In the pause which ensued, the British regiments began to make their +way to the front. Colbourn, with the 31st Regiment, was already there; +Stewart brought up Haughton's brigade; and the 29th burst its way +through the flying Spaniards and joined the 31st, these movements +being made under a storm of shot and shell from the French artillery. +Colonel Hartman brought up the British artillery, and the Spanish +generals Zayas and Ballesteros succeeded in checking and bringing +forward again some of the Spanish infantry. + +The French advanced in great force, the artillery on both sides poured +in grape at short distance, and the carnage was terrible. Still the +little band of British held their ground. Stewart was twice wounded, +Haughton and Colonels Duckworth and Inglis slain. Of the 57th Regiment +twenty-two officers and four hundred men fell out of the five hundred +that had mounted the hill, and the other regiments had suffered nearly +as severely. Not a third were standing unhurt, and fresh columns of +the French were advancing. + +The battle looked desperate, and Beresford made preparations for a +retreat. At this moment, however, Colonel Hardinge brought up General +Cole with the fourth division, and Colonel Abercrombie with the third +brigade of Colbourn's second division. Beresford recalled his order +for retreat, and the terrible fight continued. The fourth division was +composed of two brigades, the one, a Portuguese under General Harvey, +was pushed down to the right to keep off the French cavalry, while the +Fusilier brigade, composed of the 7th and 23rd fusilier regiments, +under Sir William Myers, climbed the desperately contested hill, which +Abercombie ascended also, more on the left. + +It was time, for the whole of the French reserves were now coming into +action; six guns were already in the enemy's possession, the remnant +of Haughton's brigade could no longer sustain its ground, and the +heavy French columns were advancing exultantly to assured victory. + +Suddenly, through the smoke, Cole's fusilier brigade appeared on +the right of Haughton's brigade, just as Abercrombie came up on its +left. Startled by the sight, and by the heavy fire, the French column +paused, and, to quote Napier's glowing words, "hesitated, and then, +vomiting forth a storm of fire, hastily endeavored to enlarge their +front, while a fearful discharge of grape from all their artillery +whistled through the British ranks. Myers was killed, Cole and the +three colonels, Ellis, Blakeney and Hawkshawe, fell wounded; and the +fusilier battalions, struck by the iron tempest, reeled and staggered +like sinking ships; but suddenly and sternly recovering, they closed +with their terrible enemies, and then was seen with what a strength +and majesty the British soldier fights. In vain did Soult with voice +and gesture animate his Frenchmen; in vain did the hardiest veterans +break from the crowded columns and sacrifice their lives to gain time +for the mass to open out on such a fair field; in vain did the mass +itself bear up, and, fiercely striving, fire indiscriminately upon +friends and foes, while the horsemen hovering on its flank threatened +to charge the advancing line. Nothing could stop that astonishing +infantry; no sudden burst of undisciplined valor, no nervous +enthusiasm weakened the stability of their order; their flashing eyes +were bent on the dark columns in their front, their measured tread +shook the ground, their dreadful volleys swept away the head of every +formation, their deafening shouts overpowered the dissonant cries that +broke from all parts of the tumultuous crowd, as, slowly and with +horrid carnage, it was pushed by the incessant vigor of the attack to +the farthest edge of the hill. In vain did the French reserves mix +with the struggling multitude to sustain the fight; their efforts only +increased the irremediable confusion, and the mighty mass breaking off +like a loosened cliff, went headlong down the steep; the rain flowed +after in streams discolored with blood, and eighteen hundred unwounded +men, the remnant of six thousand unconquerable British soldiers, stood +triumphant on the fatal hill." + +While this dreadful fight was going on, Hamilton's and Collier's +Portuguese divisions, ten thousand strong, marched to support the +British, but they did not reach the summit of the hill until the +battle was over; they suffered, however, a good deal of loss from the +French artillery, which, to cover the retreat, opened furiously upon +them. + +The French were in no position to renew the attack, the allies quite +incapable of pursuit, and when night fell the two armies were in the +same position they had occupied twenty-four hours before. + +Never was British valor more conspicuously displayed than at the +battle of Albuera. Out of 6,000 infantry they lost 4,200 killed and +wounded, while the Spanish and Portuguese had but 2,600 killed and +wounded out of a total of 34,000; the French loss was over 8,000. + +This desperate fight had lasted but four hours, but to all engaged +it seemed an age. The din, the whirl, the storm of shot, the fierce +charges of the cavalry, the swaying backwards and forwards of the +fight, the disastrous appearance of the battle from the first, all +combined to make up a perfectly bewildering confusion. + +The Scudamores, after its commencement, had seen but little of each +other. Whenever one or other of them found their way to the general, +who was ever in the thickest of the fray, it was but to remain there +for a moment or two before being despatched with fresh messages. + +Tom's horse was shot under him early in the day, but he obtained a +remount from an orderly and continued his duty until, just as the day +was won, he received a musket ball in the shoulder. He half fell, half +dismounted, and, giddy and faint, lay down and remained there until +the cessation of the fire told him that the battle was over. Then he +staggered to his feet and sought a surgeon. He presently found one +hard at work under a tree, but there was so large a number of wounded +men lying or sitting round, that Tom saw that it would be hours before +he could be attended to. As he turned to go he saw an officer of the +staff ride by. + +"Ah, Scudamore! Are you hit too?--not very badly, I hope? The chief +was asking after you just now." + +"My shoulder is smashed, I think," Tom said, "and the doctor has his +hands full at present; but if you will tie my arm tight across my +chest with my sash, I shall be able to get on." + +The officer at once leapt from his horse, and proceeded to bind Tom's +arm in the position he requested. + +"Have you seen my brother," Tom asked. + +"No, I have not; he was close to Beresford when the fusiliers dashed +up the hill; his horse fell dead, but he was not hit, for I saw him +jump up all right. I did not see him afterwards. As he could not have +got a fresh mount then, I expect he joined the fusiliers and went up +the hill." + +"Is the loss heavy?" Tom asked. + +"Awful--awful," the officer said. "If it had lasted another quarter of +an hour, there would have been nobody left alive; as it is, there are +not 2,000 men at the outside on their feet." + +"What, altogether?" Tom exclaimed. + +"Altogether," the officer answered sadly. "We have lose two men out of +every three who went into it." + +"Thank you," Tom said. "Now where shall I find the general?" + +"Up on the hill. I shall see you there in a few minutes. I hope you +will find your brother all right." + +Very slowly did Tom make his way up the steep slope, sitting down to +rest many times, for he was faint from loss of blood and sick with the +pain of his wound, and it was a long half hour before he joined the +group of officers clustered round the commander-in-chief. + +He was heartily greeted; but in answer to his question as to whether +any one had seen his brother, no one could give a satisfactory reply. +One, however, was able to confirm what had been before told to him, +for he had seen Peter on foot advancing with the fusilier brigade. +Tom's heart felt very heavy as he turned away towards the front, where +the fusiliers were standing on the ground they had so hardly won. +The distance he had to traverse was but short, but the journey was a +ghastly one. The ground was literally heaped with dead. Wounded men +were seen sitting up trying to stanch their wounds, others lay feebly +groaning, while soldiers were hurrying to and fro from the water +carts, with pannikins of water to relieve their agonizing thirst. + +"Do you know, sergeant, whether they have collected the wounded +officers, and, if so, where they are?" + +"Yes, sir, most of them are there at the right flank of the regiment." + +Tom made his way towards the spot indicated, where a small group of +officers were standing, while a surgeon was examining a long line of +wounded laid side by side upon the ground. Tom hardly breathed as +he ran his eye along their faces, and his heart seemed to stop as +he recognized in the very one the surgeon was then examining the +dead-white face of Peter. + +He staggered forward and said in a gasping voice, "He is my +brother--is he dead?" + +The surgeon looked up. "Sit down," he said sharply, and Tom, unable to +resist the order, sank rather than sat down, his eyes still riveted on +Peter's face. + +"No," the surgeon said, answering the question, "he has only fainted +from loss of blood, but he is hit hard, the bullet has gone in just +above the hip, and until I know its course I can't say whether he has +a chance or not." + +"Here, sergeant, give me the probe," and with this he proceeded +cautiously to examine the course of the ball. As he did so his anxious +face brightened a little. + +"He was struck slantingly," he said, "the ball has gone round by the +back; turn him over, sergeant. Ah, I thought so; it has gone out on +the other side. Well, I think it has missed any vital part, and in +that case I can give you hope. There," he said after he had finished +dressing the wound and fastening a bandage tightly round the body; +"now pour some brandy-and-water down his throat, sergeant, and +sprinkle his face with water. Now, sir, I will look at your shoulder." + +But he spoke to insensible ears, for Tom, upon hearing the more +favorable report as to Peter's state, had fainted dead off. + +The surgeon glanced at him. "He'll come round all right," he said. +"I will go on in the mean time," and set to work at the next in the +ghastly line. + +It was some time before Tom recovered his consciousness; when he did +so, it was with a feeling of intense agony in the shoulder. + +"Lie quiet," the surgeon said, "I shan't be long about it." + +It seemed to Tom, nevertheless, as if an interminable time passed +before the surgeon spoke again. + +"You'll do," he said. "It is an awkward shot, for it has broken the +shoulder bone and carried a portion away, but with quiet and care you +will get the use of your arm again. You are lucky, for if it had gone +two inches to the left it would have smashed the arm at the socket, +and two inches the other way and it would have been all up with you. +Now lie quiet for awhile; you can do nothing for your brother at +present. It may be hours before he recovers consciousness." + +Tom was too faint and weak to argue, and a minute later he dropped off +to sleep, from which he did not wake until it was dusk. Sitting up, he +saw that he had been aroused by the approach of an officer, whom he +recognized as one of General Beresford's staff. + +"How are you, Scudamore?" he asked. "The general has just sent me to +inquire." + +"He is very kind," Tom said. "I think that I am all right, only I am +horribly thirsty." + +The officer unslung a flask from his shoulder. "This is weak +brandy-and-water. I have brought it over for you. I am sorry to hear +your brother is so bad, but the doctor gives strong hopes of him in +his report." + +Tom bent down over Peter. "He is breathing quietly," he said. "I hope +it is a sort of sleep he has fallen into. What are we doing?" + +"Nothing," the officer answered; "there is nothing to do; every +unbounded man is under arms in case the French attack us in the night. +I expect, however, they will wait till morning, and if they come on +then, I fear our chance is a slight one indeed. We have only 1,800 of +our infantry; the German regiments and the Portuguese will do their +best; but the Spanish are utterly useless. Soult has lost more men +than we have, but we are like a body which has lost its back-bone; and +if the French, who are all good soldiers, renew the battle, I fear it +is all up with us." + +"Have you got all our wounded in?" Tom asked. + +"No," the officer said bitterly. "Our unwounded men must stand to +arms, and Lord Beresford sent over to Blake just now to ask for the +assistance of a battalion of Spaniards to collect our wounded, and the +brute sent back to say that it was the custom in allied armies for +each army to attend to its own wounded." + +"The brute!" Tom repeated with disgust. "How the poor fellows must be +suffering!" + +"The men who are but slightly wounded have been taking water to all +they can find, and the doctors are at work now, and will be all night +going about dressing wounds. The worst of it is, if the fight begins +again to-morrow, all the wounded who cannot crawl away must remain +under fire. However, the French wounded are all over the hill too, and +perhaps the French will avoid a cannonade as much as possible, for +their sake. It is a bad look-out altogether; and between ourselves, +Beresford has written to Lord Wellington to say that he anticipates a +crushing defeat." + +"Is there any chance of reinforcements?" Tom asked. + +"We hope that the third brigade of the fourth division will be up +to-morrow by midday; they are ordered to come on by forced marches. +If Soult does not attack till they arrive, it will make all the +difference, for 1,500 fresh men will nearly double our strength. But I +must be going now. Good-bye." + +The surgeon presently came round again to see how the wounded officers +were getting on. Tom asked him whether there was anything he could do +for Peter; but the surgeon, after feeling his pulse, said: "No, not as +long as he breathes quietly like this; but if he moves pour a little +brandy-and-water down his throat. Now gentlemen, all who can must look +after the others, for there is not an available man, and I must be at +work all night on the field." + +There were many of the officers who were not hit too severely to move +about, and these collected some wood and made a fire, so as to enable +them to see and attend to their more severely wounded comrades. +Tom took his place close to Peter, where he could watch his least +movement, and once or twice during the night poured a little +brandy-and-water between his lips. The other officers took it by turns +to attend to their comrades, to keep up the fire, and to sleep. Those +whose turn it was to be awake sat round the fire smoking, and talking +as to the chances of the morrow, getting up occasionally to give drink +to such of the badly wounded as were awake. + +Tom, faint with his wound, found it, towards morning, impossible to +keep awake, and dozed off, to wake with a start and find that it was +broad daylight. Soon afterwards, to his intense satisfaction, Peter +opened his eyes. Tom bent over him. "Don't try to move, Peter; lie +quiet, old boy." + +"What's the matter?" Peter asked with a puzzled look. + +"You have been hit in the body, Peter, but the doctor means to get you +round in no time. Yes," he continued, seeing Peter's eyes fixed on his +bandaged shoulder, "I have had a tap too, but there's no great harm +done. There, drink some brandy-and-water, and go off to sleep again, +if you can." + +The morning passed very slowly, the troops being all under arms, +expecting the renewed attack of Soult, but it came not; and when early +in the afternoon, the third brigade of the fourth division marched +into camp, they were received with general cheering. A heavy load +seemed taken off every one's heart, and they felt now that they could +fight, if fight they must, with a hope of success. + +The new-comers, wearied as they were with their long forced marches, +at once took the outpost duties, and those relieved set about the duty +of collecting and bringing in all the wounded. + +Next morning the joyful news came that Soult was retiring, and all +felt with a thrill of triumph that their sacrifices and efforts had +not been in vain, and that the hard-fought battle of Albuera was +forever to take its place among the great victories of the British +army. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +INVALIDED HOME. + + +Two days after the battle of Albuera, Lord Wellington himself arrived, +and from the officers of his staff Tom heard the details of the battle +of Fuentes d'Onoro, which had been fought a few days previously, and +which had been nearly as hardly contested as had Albuera itself, both +sides claiming the victory. + +The next day, the bulk of Beresford's army returned to the +neighborhood of Badajos, which they again invested, while a long +convoy of wounded started for Lisbon. The Scudamores accompanied it +as far as Campo Major, where a large hospital had been prepared for +those too ill to bear the journey. Peter was still unconscious. Fever +had set in upon the day after the battle, and for three weeks he lay +between life and death. Tom's arm was mending very slowly, and he +would have had hard work indeed in nursing Peter had it not been for +the arrival of unexpected assistance. A large villa had been taken +close to the main hospital for the use of officers, and one of the +rooms was allotted to the Scudamores. + +Upon the evening of the second day after their arrival, Tom was +sitting by Peter's bedside, when, after a preliminary tap, the door +opened, and to Tom's perfect amazement Sambo entered. The negro +hurried forward, threw himself on his knees, seized Tom's hand and +kissed it passionately, and then looking at the thin and fever-flushed +face of Peter, he hid his face in his hands and sobbed unrestrainedly. + +"Hush, Sam, hush," Tom said soothingly. "My poor fellow, why, where +have you come from? I thought you were a prisoner with the French." + +"I knew how it would be, Massa Tom," the black said, paying no +attention to the questions. "First thing Sam said to himself when he +got among French fellows, 'Dere, dose young gentlemen dey get into +all sorts of danger widout Sam, sartin sure dey get hurt widout Sam +to look after dem.' Dat idea troubled Sam berry much, took away Sam's +sleep altogether." + +"Well it turned out so, as you see, Sam," Tom said with a smile, "but +tell me how did you get away? But first give me some lemonade out of +that jug, then you can tell me all about it." + +"Why, Massa Tom," Sam said, when he had complied with the request, +"you didn't think dat dis chile was going to stop prisoner with dose +French chaps; Sam not such a fool as dat, nohow. When dat cussed +mule--I tell you fair, Massa Tom, dis chile conclude dat riding not +such a berry easy ting after all--when dat cussed mule ran into French +camp, de soldiers dey catch him, and dey take Sam off, and den dey +jabber and laugh for all de world like great lots of monkeys. Well, +for some time Sam he didn't say nothing, all de wind shook out of his +body. Besides which he couldn't understand what dey say. Den all of +a sudden, to Sam's surprise, up came a colored soldier, and he speak +to Sam in de English tongue. 'Holla, broder, how you come here?" I +ask. 'I been cook on board English merchant ship,' he say. 'Ship she +taken by French privateer. When dey come to port dey say to me, "You +not Englishman, you hab choice, you go to prison, or you be French +soldier." Natural, I not want go prison, so I conclude be French +soldier. I daresay dey gib you choice too.' Well, massa, a wink as +good as a nod to blind hoss. So dey take me to tent, put me under +guard, and next day a French officer come dat speak English. He ask +me all sorts ob questions, and at last he ask me why I list English +soldier. So you see I had got a little lie all ready, and me tell him, +me one poor Melican negro man, cook on board Melican ship. Ship taken +by English man-ob-war. Put Sam in prison and give him choice to go as +soldier. "Den you not care about English,' de officer say, and Sam +draw hisself up and pat his chest and say, 'Me Melican citizen, me no +Britisher's slave, some day me go back States, go on board Melican +man-ob-war, me pay out dese Britishers for make Sam slave.' Den de +officer laugh, and say dat if I like I could fight dem now; and if I +prefer French uniform to French prison, me could have him. Ob course +I accep' offer, and harp an hour after me in French uniform. French +officer try to make joke ob Sam, and ask whether I like cavalry or +foot soldier. Sam say he had enuff of quadruples at present. Me remain +French soldier three weeks, den cum great battle, dey call him Fuentes +donory. Sam's regiment fight. Sam not like fire at red coats, so break +bullet off catridge, neber put him in gun. We charge right into middle +of village full of English soldiers, de bullets fly all about. Sam not +see de point ob getting kill by mistake, so he tumble down, pretend to +be dead. Presently French beaten back; when English soldier wid doctor +cum look at wounded, dey turn Sam ober, and dey say, 'Hullo, here dead +nigger.' 'Nigger yourself, John Atkins,' I say for sure enuff it's de +ole regiment--'you say dat once again me knock your head off;' me jump +up, and all de world call out, 'Hullo, why it's Sam.' Den me splain +matter, and all berry glad, cept John Atkins, and next morning me gib +him licking he member all his life, me pound him most to a squash. +Four days ago colonel send for Sam, say, 'Sam, berry bad job, bofe +Massas wounded bad, send you to nurse dem;' so dis chile come. Dat +all, Massa Tom. Here letter for you from colonel, now you read dis +letter, den you get in bed, you sleep all night, Sam watch Massa +Peter." + +Greatly relieved to have his faithful servant again, and to know that +Peter would be well cared for, instead of being left in charge of the +Spanish hospital orderly, whenever weakness and pain obliged him to +lie down, Tom abandoned his place by the bedside, and prepared for a +tranquil night's rest, first reading the colonel's letter. + +"We are all grieved, my dear Scudamore, at hearing that you are both +wounded, and that your brother is at present in a serious state. We +trust, however, that he will pull through. I hear that Beresford has +praised you both most highly in despatches, and that your names are +sent home for companies. I heartily congratulate you. We have had some +tough work at Fuentes d'Onoro, although nothing to what yours must +have been at Albuera, still it was hot enough in all conscience, and +we had over a hundred casualties in the regiment. Carruthers and +Manley were both slightly wounded. Jones, Anstruther, Palmer, and +Chambers were killed, and several of the others hit more or less hard. +Sam has leave to remain with you until you rejoin, which will not, I +fear, be for some little time. Every one sends kind messages. Yours +truly, J. Tritton." + +Nothing could exceed the care and devotion with which Sam nursed his +two masters, and Tom had the greatest difficulty in persuading him to +lie down and get a short sleep each day while he sat by Peter's bed. +At the end of three weeks Peter took a favorable turn. His fever +abated, and he awoke to consciousness. Another fortnight and he was +sufficiently convalescent to be moved, and accordingly they started to +travel by very easy stages to Lisbon, there to take ship for England, +as the doctor ordered Tom as well as his brother to go home for a +while to recruit. Tom was the less reluctant to do so, as it was +evident that with the force at his command Wellington would not be +able to undertake any great operation, and that the siege and capture +of Badajoz was the utmost likely to be accomplished in that season's +campaign. The mails in due course had brought out the _Gazette_, +and in it Tom and Peter Scudamore were promoted to be captains, +unattached. + +Colonel Tritton, upon being applied to, readily gave leave for Sam +to accompany his masters. It was a long journey to Lisbon, but the +jolting of the country cart was made bearable by a layer of hay, +two feet deep, upon which the mattresses were laid, Sam seeing that +at each night's halt the hay was taken out, well shaken, and then +returned to the cart, so as to preserve it light and elastic. A thick +canopy of boughs kept off the heat of the sun, and under it, within +reach of the invalids hung a gourd of fresh water, and a basket of +fruit. Several other cart-loads of wounded officers accompanied them, +and at night they would draw up by a grove of trees where water was +handy, those who could walk would get out, the others would be lifted +out on their mattresses, a great fire made, and round it the beds laid +in a circle, and then the evening would be spent in pleasant chat, +with many an anecdote and an occasional song, until the fire burnt +low, the talk died away, and each, covered in his blankets to keep off +the night dew, fell asleep. Pleasant as was the journey, however, it +was with a thrill of delight that they caught their first sight of +Lisbon, with its broad river, and the blue line of the sea beyond. A +few days later, and they embarked on board a transport, which seven +days afterwards, after a calm passage, arrived at Spithead. + +Peter was by this time gaining strength fast, but his back was so +stiff and sore that he was unable to move it, and was obliged to swing +himself along on crutches. The next day the coach took them to London, +and they started the morning after for Marlborough. This time they had +to go inside the coach, two gentlemen, who had previously secured the +seats, kindly giving them up in favor of the wounded young officers, +while Sam took his place on the roof, and amused his fellow-passengers +with wonderful accounts of his adventures at the war. At the inn +at which they took dinner, they alighted, and Tom recognized in the +driver the same coachman who had driven them upon the memorable +occasion of their being stopped by highwaymen three years before. "You +don't remember us, coachman, do you?" + +"No, gentlemen, I can't say as how,--but eh! no, why you're the werry +boys as shot the highwaymen. Well, I am glad to see you again, though +you do look white and bad, both of you. I heard as how there were +two wounded officers inside, and that black soldier has been telling +all sorts of tales of the wonderful things as his masters had done, +but not knowing as how it was you, I didn't much believe all he was +telling. Now I quite see as how it was true; and how are you both?" + +"Getting on all right," Tom said, returning the warm shake of the +coachman's hand, "and do you know, those pistols have saved our lives +more than once." + +"Have they now," the coachman said, in high admiration, "but there, we +most be moving, we are three minutes after time as it is; I shall see +you again next time we stop, gentlemen." + +During the next stage the coachman and guard recounted to the outside +passengers the affair of the stopping the coach, and Sam's black face +shone with delight at the tale. Then he had his say, and related the +story of his falling overboard and being rescued, and in consequence +the lads were quite embarrassed when they next halted, by the +attention of their fellow-travelers, who could scarcely understand how +it was possible that two mere boys should have performed such feats of +bravery. + +Arrived at Marlborough they looked round in vain for the one-horsed +vehicle which had before met them. "I expect that aunt has not got +our letter, Peter," Tom said. "It would probably go up to town in the +coach with us, and is likely enough in the letter-bag in the boot. +Well, we must have a post-chaise. Won't aunt and Rhoda be surprised; +but they must be expecting us, because they will have had our letter +from Lisbon." + +The horses were soon in, Sam took his seat in the rumble, and in a few +minutes they were bounding over the road at a very different pace to +that at which they had before traversed it. "There's the house among +the trees," Peter said at last, "with aunt's pigeons on the roof as +usual, and there's Minnie asleep on the window-sill, and there! yes, +there's Rhoda." + +As he spoke a girl, who was sitting reading under a tree, leapt to her +feet, on hearing a carriage stop, and then, catching sight of Peter +waving his hat, while Tom made frantic efforts to open the door, gave +a scream of delight, and rushed towards them, threw her arms round +Tom's neck as he jumped out, and then leapt into the chaise and hugged +and cried over Peter. He was soon helped out, and as they turned to go +towards the house they saw their aunt coming out to meet them. + +Tom ran forward and throwing his arms round her neck kissed her +heartily, and before she could recover from her surprise, Peter was +alongside. "Please, aunt, you must kiss me," he said, "for I want my +arms for my crutches." His aunt leaned forward and kissed him, and +then wiped the tears from her eyes. + +"I am glad to see you back, my dear nephews," she said. "We did not +understand each other very well before, but we shan't make any more +mistakes. This is your black servant, I suppose," she said, as Sam +came along, with a trunk in each hand. "Dear! dear! what a dreadfully +ugly man." + +"How do you do, Sam?" Rhoda said, when he came up. "We have heard so +much of you, and how kindly you nursed my brothers." + +"Sam quite well, tank you, little missy," Sam said, grinning all over +his face and showing his white teeth. + +Miss Scudamore shrank towards Tom as Sam passed on, "Dear me, what +sharp-looking teeth he has, Tom. They don't eat curious things, these +black men, do they?" + +"What sort of curious things, aunt?" + +"Well, my dear, I know that these outlandish people do eat strange +things, and I have heard the Chinese eat dogs and cats. Now, if he has +a fancy for cats, I daresay I could buy him some in the village, only +he will have to cook them himself, I could never ask Hannah to cook +cats; but please ask him not to touch Minnie." + +Peter had to stop in his walk and grasp his crutches tightly, not +to burst into a scream of laughter, while Tom answered with great +gravity, "My dear aunt, do not alarm yourself, I will answer for the +safety of Minnie as far as Sam is concerned." + +When they reached the house, Miss Scudamore said-- + +"I think you young people will enjoy yourselves more if you go and sit +under the shade of the elm there, you will have a deal to say to each +other, and had better be alone." They were all glad at the suggestion, +as they were longing to be alone together. + +Sam, by Miss Scudamore's directions, carried out a great easy chair, +of which Peter took possession. Rhoda sat on the grass at his feet, +and Tom threw himself down at full length. They were all too happy +to speak much for a time, and could only look fondly at each other. +"You have grown a great deal, Rhoda, but I do not think that you are +altered a bit otherwise." + +"You are neither of you altered so much as I expected," Rhoda said. "I +had made up my mind that you would be changed a great deal. It sounds +so grand--Captains, indeed! I expected to have curtsey to you and +treat you with great respect; instead of that you look regular boys, +both of you. Of course you are big, and Peter looks very tall; how +tall are you, Peter?" + +"Just over six feet," Peter said. + +"Yes," Rhoda said, "you are tall enough, and Tom is broad enough for +men, but somehow you look regular boys still." + +"This is very disrespectful Rhoda, to two Captains in His Majesty's +service." + +"It seems ridiculous, doesn't it," Rhoda said. + +"It does," Tom said heartily, and the three went off into a shout of +laughter. + +"It isn't really ridiculous you know," Rhoda said, when they had +recovered their gravity. "To think of all the dangers you have gone +through. Aunt was as proud as could be when she saw your names over +and over again in despatches, and I have been like a little peacock. +Your doings have been the talk of every one round here, and I am sure +that if they had known you had been coming, the village would have put +up a triumphal arch, and presented you with an address." + +"Thank goodness, they did not know it then," Tom said, "for it would +have been a deal worse to stand than the fire of a French battery. +Well, Rhoda, and now as to yourself; so you have really been always +very happy with aunt?" + +"Very happy," Rhoda said; "she is most kind and indulgent, and so that +I attend to her little fancies, I can do just as I like. I have had +lessons regularly from the rector's eldest daughter, who has been +educated for a governess; and in every respect, aunt is all that is +kind. Fancy her being afraid of Sam eating Minnie." + +After chatting for upwards of an hour, they went into the house, and +the rest of the day was spent in talking over all that had happened +since they left. Sam was in the kitchen where he made himself very +much at home, and although Hannah and the cook were at first rather +awed by his size, his black face and rolling eyes, they were soon +pacified by his good humor and readiness to make himself useful, and +were wonderfully interested by his long stories about what "Massas" +had done in the war. + +Miss Scudamore, who was a little uneasy as to how things would go on +in the kitchen, made some excuse for going in once or twice in the +course of the evening. She found things going on much better that she +had expected, indeed so much better, that after Rhoda had gone up to +bed, where Peter had two hours before betaken himself, she said to Tom +as he was lighting his candle, "One minute, nephew; I could not speak +before Rhoda, but I wanted to say something to you about your negro. +I have heard that all soldiers are very much given to make love, and +we know from Shakespeare, that Othello, who was black too, you will +remember, nephew, made love to Desdemona, which shows that color does +not make so much difference as one would think. Now I do hope your +man will not make love to Hannah, I don't think she would like it, +my dear, and yet you know she might; one never knows what women will +do; they are always making fools of themselves," she added angrily, +thinking at the moment how a young girl she had trained up as a cook +had, after being with her three years, left a few weeks before to +marry the village blacksmith, "and I should be sorry to lose Hannah. +She has been with us more than twenty years. If he must fall in love +with one, my dear, let it be the cook." + +Tom had a great command of his countenance, but he had great +difficulty in steadying his muscles. After a moment or two he said, +"I will give Sam a hint, aunt, if it becomes necessary, but I do not +think you need fear. I do not fancy Sam is matrimonially inclined at +present, and he wouldn't leave us even to marry Desdemona herself. +Good night, aunt." + +So saying, Tom went upstairs, where he repeated to Peter, who was +still awake, his conversation with his aunt, and the two went into +shouts of laughter over the idea of Sam making love to the prim +Hannah. + +The next six months passed over quietly and happily. The boys +were made a great deal of by the whole county, and Miss Scudamore +was greatly gratified at the name and credit they had gained for +themselves. She no longer worried about them, but as Rhoda declared, +quite spoiled them, and as Sam made no attempt to win the love of +the faithful Hannah, there was no cloud to mar the pleasure of the +holiday. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +CIUDAD RODRIGO AND BADAJOS. + + +It was in the beginning of December, 1811, that the Scudamores again +sailed up the Tagus to Lisbon, after an absence of just six months. +When they had passed the medical board, they were transferred from the +unattached list to the 52d Regiment, which was, fortunately for them, +also in Spain. No events of great importance had taken place during +their absence. Wellington, after the battles of Fuentes d'Onoro and +Albuera, had been compelled to fall back again to the frontier in the +face of greatly superior forces, and had maintained his old position +on the Coa till the approach of winter compelled the French to retire +into the interior, where they had their magazines and depots. + +The Scudamores found that the 52d were encamped on the Agueda, +and they at once prepared to go up country to join them. Their +chargers--presents from their aunt on leaving--were fresh and +vigorous, and they purchased a strong country horse for Sambo, who, +thanks to some practice which he had had in England, was now able to +cut a respectable figure on horseback. A few hours were sufficient to +make their preparations, and at noon on the day after landing, they +mounted, and, followed by Sam, accompanied by a muleteer and two mules +carrying their baggage, they started from the hotel at which they had +put up. + +As they rode down the main street they saw several mounted +officers approaching, and at once recognized in the leader the +commander-in-chief, who had just arrived from the front to pay one +of his flying visits, to endeavor to allay the jealousies in the +Portuguese Council, and to insist upon the food which the British +Government was actually paying for, being supplied to the starving +Portuguese soldiers. Drawing their horses aside, they saluted Lord +Wellington as he rode past. He glanced at them keenly, as was his +custom, and evidently recognized them as he returned the salute. + +When he had passed, they turned their horses and continued their way. +They had not gone fifty yards, however, when an officer came up at +a gallop. Lord Wellington wished them to call at his quarters in an +hour's time. + +There are few things more annoying than, after having got through all +the trouble of packing and getting fairly on the road, to be stopped; +but there was no help for it, and the boys rode back to their hotel +again, where, putting up their horses, they told Sam not to let the +muleteer leave, for they should probably be on the road again in an +hour. + +At the appointed time they called at the head-quarters, and giving +their cards to two officers on duty, took their seats in the anteroom. +It now became evident to them that their chance of an early interview +was not great, and that they would in all probability be obliged to +pass another night in Madrid. Portuguese grandees passed in and out, +staff officers of rank entered and left, important business was being +transacted, and the chance of two Line captains having an interview +with the commander-in-chief appeared but slight. Two hours passed +wearily, and then an orderly sergeant came into the room and read out +from a slip of paper the names "Captain Thomas Scudamore; Captain +Peter Scudamore. This way, if you please," he added, as the boys rose +in answer to their names, and he led the way into a room where a +colonel on the staff was seated before a table covered with papers. + +"Gentlemen," he said, "I have news which I think will be pleasant to +you both. Lord Wellington has not forgotten the services you rendered +in carrying his communications to the guerilla chiefs. Your reports +were clear and concise, and your knowledge of Spanish especially +valuable. Lord Beresford, too, has reported most favorably of your +conduct while with him. There happen to be two vacancies on his staff, +and he has desired me to fill them up with your names." + +Although the Scudamores would in some respects rather have remained +with their regiment, yet they could not refuse an honor which was +generally coveted as being a post in which an active officer had +plenty of opportunities of distinguishing himself, and which was +certain to lead to speedy promotion. They accordingly expressed their +warm thanks for the honor which Lord Wellington had done them. + +"Are you well mounted?" Colonel Somerset asked. + +"We have one capital charger each," Tom said. + +"You will want another," Colonel Somerset remarked. "There are a lot +of remounts landed to-day. Here is an order to Captain Halket, the +officer in charge. Choose any two you like. The amount can be stopped +from your pay. How about servants; you are entitled to two each?" + +"We have one man of the Norfolk Rangers--a very faithful fellow, who +has returned with us from leave; if he could be transferred, he would +do for us both if we had a cavalry man each for our horses." + +The colonel at once wrote an order for Sam's transfer from his +regiment on detached service, and also one to the officer commanding a +cavalry regiment stationed in Madrid, to supply them with two troopers +as orderlies. + +"May I ask, sir, if we are likely to stay in Madrid long--as, if so, +we will look out for quarters?" Tom asked. + +"No; the general returns to-morrow, or next day at latest, to Almeida, +and of course you will accompany him. Oh, by-the-by, Lord Wellington +will be glad if you will dine with him to-day--sharp six. By-the-way, +you will want to get staff uniform. There is the address of a Spanish +tailor, who has fitted out most of the men who have been appointed +here. He works fast, and will get most of the things you want ready +by to-morrow night. Don't get more things than are absolutely +necessary--merely undress suits. Excuse my asking how are you off for +money? I will give you an order on the paymaster if you like." + +Tom replied that they had plenty of money, which indeed they had, +for their aunt had given them so handsome a present upon starting, +that they had tried to persuade her to be less generous, urging that +they really had no occasion for any money beyond their pay. She had +insisted, however, upon their accepting two checks, saying that one +never knew what was wanted, and it was always useful to have a sum to +fall back on in case of need. + +Two days later the Scudamores, in their new staff uniforms, were, +with some six or eight other officers, riding in the suite of Lord +Wellington on the road to the Coa. The lads thought they had never +had a more pleasant time, the weather was fine and the temperature +delightful, their companions, all older somewhat than themselves, were +yet all young men in high health and spirits. The pace was good, for +Lord Wellington was a hard rider, and time was always precious with +him. At the halting-places the senior officers of the staff kept +together, while the aides-de-camp made up a mess of their own, always +choosing a place as far away as possible from that of the chief, so +that they could laugh, joke, and even sing, without fear of disturbing +his lordship. + +Sam soon became a high favorite with the light-hearted young fellows, +and his services as forager for the mess were in high esteem. + +Three days of hard riding took them to Almeida, where the breaches +caused by the great explosion had been repaired, and the place put +into a defensible position. Tom and Peter had been afraid that +there would be at least four months of enforced inactivity before +the spring; but they soon found that the post of aide-de-camp to +Wellington was no sinecure. For the next month they almost lived in +the saddle. The greater portion of the English army was indeed lying +on the Agueda, but there were detached bodies of British and large +numbers of Portuguese troops at various points along the whole line +of the Portuguese frontier, and with the commanders of these Lord +Wellington was in constant communication. + +Towards the end of December some large convoys of heavy artillery +arrived at Almeida, but every one supposed that they were intended to +fortify this place, and none, even of those most in the confidence of +the commander-in-chief, had any idea that a winter campaign was about +to commence. The French were equally unsuspicious of the truth. Twice +as strong as the British, they dreamt not that the latter would take +the offensive, and the French marshals had scattered their troops at +considerable distances from the frontier in winter quarters. + +Upon the last day of the year the Scudamores both happened to have +returned to the front--Tom from Lisbon, and Peter from a long ride to +a distant Portuguese division. There was a merry party gathered round +a blazing fire in the yard of the house where they, with several other +aides-de-camp, were quartered. Some fifty officers of all ranks were +present, for a general invitation had been issued to all unattached +officers in honor of the occasion. Each brought in what liquor he +could get hold of, and any provisions which he had been able to +procure, and the evening was one of boisterous fun and jollity. In +the great kitchen blazed a fire, before which chickens and ducks +were roasting, turkeys and geese cut up in pieces for greater +rapidity of cooking, were grilling over the fire, and as they came +off the gridiron they were taken round by the soldier-servants to +their masters as they sat about on logs of wood, boxes, and other +substitutes for chairs. Most of the officers present had already +supped, and the late-comers were finishing their frugal meal, after +which the soldiers would take their turn. There was a brewing of punch +and an uncorking of many a bottle of generous wine; then the song and +laugh went round, and all prepared to usher in the new year joyously, +when a colonel of the staff, who had been dining with Lord Wellington, +entered. "Here's a seat, colonel," was shouted in a dozen places, but +he shook his head and held up his hand. + +"Gentlemen, I am sorry to disturb you, but orders must be obeyed. +Villiers, Hogan, Scudamores both, Esdaile, Cooper, and Johnson, here +are despatches which have to be taken off at once. Gentlemen, I +should recommend you all to look to your horses. All attached to the +transport had better go to their head-quarters for orders." + +"What is up, colonel?" was the general question. + +"The army moves forward at daybreak. We are going to take Ciudad." + +A cheer of surprise and delight burst from all. There was an emptying +of glasses, a pouring out of one more bumper to success, and in +five minutes the court was deserted save by some orderlies hastily +devouring the interrupted supper, and ere long the tramp of horses +could be heard, as the Scudamores and their comrades dashed off in +different directions with their despatches. + +The next morning a bridge was thrown over the Agueda at Marialva, +six miles below Ciudad, but the investment was delayed, owing to the +slowness and insufficiency of the transport. Ciudad Rodrigo was but +a third-class fortress, and could have been captured by the process +of a regular siege with comparatively slight loss to the besiegers. +Wellington knew, however, that he could not afford the time for a +regular siege. Long before the approaches could have been made, and +the breaches effected according to rule, the French marshals would +have been up with overwhelming forces. + +Beginning the investment on the 7th, Wellington determined that it +must be taken at all costs in twenty-four days, the last day of +the month being the very earliest date at which, according to his +calculations, any considerable body of French could come up to its +relief. + +Ciudad lies on rising ground on the bank of the Agueda. The +fortifications were fairly strong, and being protected by a very high +glacis, it was difficult to effect a breach in them. The glacis is the +smooth ground outside the ditch. In well-constructed works the walls +of the fortification rise but very little above the ground beyond, +from which they are separated by a broad and deep ditch. Thus the +ground beyond the ditch, that is, the glacis, covers the walls from +the shot of a besieger, and renders it extremely difficult to reach +them. In the case of Ciudad, however, there were outside the place +two elevated plateaux, called the great and small Teson: Guns placed +on these could look down upon Ciudad, and could therefore easily +breach the walls. These, then, were the spots from which Wellington +determined to make the attack. The French, however, were aware of the +importance of the position, and had erected on the higher Teson an +inclosed and palisadoed redoubt, mounting two guns and a howitzer. A +great difficulty attending the operation was that there were neither +fuel nor shelter to be obtained on the right bank of the river, and +the weather set in very cold, with frost and snow, at the beginning +of the siege. Hence the troops had to be encamped on the left bank, +and each division, as its turn came, to occupy the trenches for +twenty-four hours, took cooked provisions with it, and waded across +the Agueda. + +On the 8th, Pack's division of Portuguese and the light division waded +the river three miles above the fortress, and, making a circuit took +up a place near the great Teson. There they remained quiet all day. +The French seeing that the place was not yet entirely invested paid +but little heed to them. At nightfall, however, Colonel Colborne, +with two companies from each of the regiments of the light division, +attacked the redoubt of San Francisco with such a sudden rush that it +was carried with the loss of only twenty-four men, the defenders, few +and unprepared, being all taken prisoners. Scarcely, however, was the +place captured than every gun of Ciudad which could be brought to bear +upon it opened with fury. All night, under a hail of shot and shell, +the troops labored steadily, and by daybreak the first parallel, that +is to say, a trench protected by a bank of earth six hundred yards +in length was sunk three feet deep. The next day the first division, +relieved the light division. + +Tom and Peter, now that the army was stationary, had an easier time of +it, and obtained leave to cross the river to see the operations. The +troops had again to wade through the bitter cold water, and at any +other time would have grumbled rarely at the discomfort. When they +really engage in the work of war, however, the British soldier cares +for nothing, and holding up their rifles, pouches and haversacks, to +keep dry, the men crossed the river laughing and joking. There was but +little done all day, for the fire of the enemy was too fast and deadly +for men to work under it in daylight. At night the Scudamores left +their horses with those of the divisional officers, and accompanied +the troops into the trenches, to learn the work which had there to +be done. Directly it was dusk twelve hundred men fell to work to +construct their batteries. The night was dark, and it was strange to +the Scudamores to hear the thud of so many picks and shovels going, +to hear now and then a low spoken order, but to see nothing save when +the flash of the enemy's guns momentarily lit up the scene. Every half +minute or so the shot, shell, and grape came tearing through the air, +followed occasionally by a low cry or a deep moan. Exciting as it was +for a time, the boys having no duty, found it difficult long to keep +awake, and presently dozed off--at first to wake with a start whenever +a shell fell close, but presently to sleep soundly until dawn. By that +time the batteries, eighteen feet thick, were completed. + +On the 10th the fourth division, and on the 11th the third, carried +on the works, but were nightly disturbed, not only by the heavy fire +from the bastions, but from some guns which the French had mounted on +the convent of San Francisco in the suburb on the left. Little was +effected in the next two days, for the frost hardened the ground and +impeded the work. On the night of the 13th the Santa Cruz convent was +carried and the trenches pushed forward, and on the next afternoon the +breaching batteries opened fire with twenty-five guns upon the points +of the wall at which it had been determined to make the breaches, +while two cannons kept down the fire of the French guns at the convent +of San Francisco. The French replied with more than fifty pieces, +and all night the tremendous fire was kept up on both sides without +intermission. Just at daybreak the sound of musketry mingled with the +roar of cannon, as the 40th Regiment attacked and carried the convent +of San Francisco. Through the 16th, 17th, and 18th the artillery +duel continued, some times one side, sometimes the other obtaining +the advantage; but during each night the trenches of the besiegers +were pushed forward, and each day saw the breaches in the ramparts +grow larger and larger. On the 19th the breaches were reported as +practicable--that is, that it would be possible for men to scramble up +the fallen rubbish to the top, and orders were therefore given for the +assault for that night. + +The attack was to be made at four points simultaneously; the 5th, +94th, and 77th were to attack from the convent of Santa Cruz, to make +for the ditch, enter it, and work their way along to the great breach; +Mackinnon's brigade of the third division was to attack the great +breach from the front; the light division posted behind the convent +of San Francisco were to attack from the left, and make their way to +the small breach; while a false attack, to be converted into a real +one if the resistance was slight, was to be made by Pack's Portuguese +at the St. Jago gate at the opposite side of the town. As night fell +the troops moved into their position, and Lord Wellington went to +the convent of San Francisco, from whose roof he could survey the +operations. The Scudamores, with the rest of the staff, took up +their places behind him. Suddenly there was a shout on the far right, +followed by a sound of confused cheering and firing, while flashes of +flame leapt out along the walls, and the guns of the place opened fire +with a crash. Now the 5th, 94th, and 77th rushed with great swiftness +along the ditch, when, at the foot of the great breach, they were +met by the third division. Together they poured up the breach, and +the roar of musketry was tremendous. Once at the top of the breach, +however, they made no progress. From a trench which had been cut +beyond it, a ring of fire broke out, while muskets flashed from every +window in the houses near. It was evident that some serious obstacle +had been encountered, and that the main attack was arrested. + +"This is terrible," Peter said, as almost breathless they watched the +storm of fire on and around the breach. "This is a thousand times +worse than a battle. It is awful to think how the shot must be telling +on that dense mass. Can nothing be done?" + +"Hurrah! There go the light division at the small breach," Tom +exclaimed, as the French fire broke out along the ramparts in that +quarter. A violent cheer came up even above the din from the great +breach, but no answering fire lights the scene, for Major Napier, +who commanded, had forbidden his men to load, telling them to trust +entirely to the bayonet. There was no delay here; the firing of the +French ceased almost immediately, as with a fierce rush the men of the +light division bounded up the ruins and won the top of the breach. For +a moment or two there was a pause, for the French opened so fierce a +fire from either side, that the troops wavered. The officers sprang +to the front, the soldiers followed with the bayonet, and the French, +unable to stand the fierce onslaught, broke and fled into the town. +Then the men of the light division, rushing along the walls, took +the French who were defending the great breach in rear, and as these +gave way, the attacking party swept across the obstacles which, had +hitherto kept them, and the town was won. Pack's Portuguese had +effected an entrance at the St. Jago gate, which they found almost +deserted, for the garrison was weak, and every available man had been +taken for the defence of the breaches. + +Thus was Ciudad Rodrigo taken after twelve days' siege, with a loss +of twelve hundred men and ninety officers, of which six hundred and +fifty men and sixty officers fell in that short, bloody fight at the +breaches. Among the killed was General Craufurd, who had commanded at +the fight on the Coa. + +Upon entering the town three days afterwards, at the termination of +the disgraceful scene of riot and pillage with which the British +soldier, there as at other places, tarnished the laurels won by his +bravery in battle, the boys went to the scene of the struggle, and +then understood the cause of the delay upon the part of the stormers. +From the top of the breach there was a perpendicular fall of sixteen +feet, and the bottom of this was planted with sharp spikes, and strewn +with the fragments of shells which the French had rolled down into +it. Had it not been for the light division coming up, and taking the +defenders--who occupied the loopholed and fortified houses which +commanded this breach--in rear, the attack here could never have +succeeded. + +The next few days were employed in repairing the breaches, and putting +the place again in a state of defence, as it was probable that Marmont +might come up and besiege it. The French marshal, however, when +hurrying to the relief of the town, heard the news of its fall, and +as the weather was very bad for campaigning, and provisions short, +he fall back again to his winter quarters, believing that Wellington +would, content with his success, make no fresh movement until the +spring. The English general, however, was far too able a strategist +not to profit by the supineness of his adversary, and, immediately +Ciudad Rodrigo was taken, he began to make preparations for the siege +of Badajos, a far stronger fortress than Ciudad, and defended by +strong detached forts. Three days after the fall of Rodrigo General +Hill came up with his division; to this the Norfolk Rangers now +belonged, and the Scudamores had therefore the delight of meeting all +their old friends again. They saw but little of them, however, for +they were constantly on the road to Lisbon with despatches, every +branch of the service being now strained to get the battering-train +destined for the attack on Badajos to the front, while orders were +sent to Silviera, Trant, Wilson, Lecca, and the other partisan +leaders, to hold all the fords and defiles along the frontier, so as +to prevent the French from making a counter-invasion of Portugal. + +On the 11th of March the army arrived at Elvas, and on the 15th a +pontoon bridge was thrown across the Guadiana. The following day the +British troops crossed the river, and invested Badajos, with fifteen +thousand men, while Hill and Graham, with thirty thousand more moved +forward, so as to act as a covering army, in case the French should +advance to raise the siege. Badajos was defended by five thousand men, +under General Phillipson, a most able and energetic commander, who had +in every way strengthened the defences, and put them in a position to +offer an obstinate resistance. + +Before attacking the fortress it was necessary to capture one of the +outlying forts, and that known as the Picurina was selected, because +the bastion of the Trinidad, which lay behind it, was the weakest +portion of the fortress. The trenches were commenced against this on +the night of the 17th, and, although the French made some vigorous +sorties, the works progressed so rapidly that all was ready for an +assault on the forts on the 25th, a delay of two days having been +occasioned by the French taking guns across the river, which swept +the trenches, and rendered work impossible, until a division was sent +round to drive in the French guns and invest the fortress on that +side. The Picurina was strong, and desperately defended, but it was +captured after a furious assault, which lasted one hour, and cost +nineteen officers and three hundred men. It was not, however, until +next evening that the fort could be occupied, for the guns of the town +poured such a hail of shot and shell into it, that a permanent footing +could not be obtained in it. Gradually, day by day, the trenches were +driven nearer to the doomed city, and the cannon of the batteries +worked day and night to establish a breach. Soult was known to be +approaching, but he wanted to gather up all his available forces, as +he believed the town capable of holding out for another month, at +least. Still he was approaching, and, although the three breaches +were scarcely yet practicable, and the fire of the town by no means +overpowered, Wellington determined upon an instant assault, and on the +night of the 6th of April the troops prepared for what turned out to +be the most terrible and bloody assault in the annals of the British +army. There were no less than six columns of attack, comprising in all +eighteen thousand men. Picton, on the right with the third division +was to cross the Rivillas and storm the castle. Wilson, with the +troops in the trenches, was to attack San Roque. In the center the +fourth and light division, under Colville and Barnard, were to assault +the breaches; and on the left Leith, with the fifth division, was to +make a false attack upon the fort of Pardaleras, and a real attack +upon the bastion of San Vincente by the river side. Across the river +the Portugese division, under Power, was to attack the works at the +head of the bridge. The night was dark and clouded, and all was as +still as death outside the town, when a lighted carcass, that is a +large iron canister filled with tar and combustibles, fell close to +the third division, and, exposing their ranks, forced them to commence +the attack before the hour appointed. Crossing the Rivillas by a +narrow bridge, under a tremendous fire, the third division assaulted +the castle, and, although their scaling-ladders were over and over +again hurled down, the stormers at last obtained a footing, and the +rest of the troops poured in and the castle was won. A similar and +more rapid success attended the assault on San Roque, which was +attacked so suddenly and violently, that it was taken with scarce +any resistance. In the mean time the assaults upon the breaches had +commenced, and it is best to give the account of this terrible scene +in the words of its eloquent and graphic historian, as the picture is +one of the most vivid that was ever drawn. + +"All this time the tumult at the breaches was such as if the very +earth had been rent asunder, and its central fires bursting upwards +uncontrolled. The two divisions had reached the glacis just as the +firing at the castle commenced, and the flash of a single musket, +discharged from the covered-way as a signal, showed them that the +French were ready; yet no stir was heard and darkness covered the +breaches. Some hay-packs were thrown, some ladders placed, and the +forlorn hopes and storming parties of the light division, five hundred +in all, descended into the ditch without opposition; but then a bright +flame shooting upwards displayed all the terrors of the scene. The +ramparts, crowded with dark figures and glittering arms were on one +side, on the other the red columns of the British, deep and broad, +were coming on like streams of burning lava. It was the touch of the +magician's wand, for a crash of thunder followed, and with incredible +violence the storming parties were dashed to pieces by the explosion +of hundreds of shells and powder-barrels. For an instant the light +division stood on the brink of the ditch, amazed at the terrific +sight; but then, with a shout that matched even the sound of the +explosion, the men flew down the ladders, or, disdaining their aid, +leaped, reckless of the depth, into the gulf below--and at the same +moment, amidst a blaze of musketry that dazzled the eyes, the fourth +division came running in, and descended with a like fury. There were +only five ladders for the two columns, which were close together; +and a deep cut, made in the bottom of the ditch as far as the +counter-guard of the Trinidad, was filled with water from the +inundation. Into that watery snare the head of the fourth division +fell, and it is said above a hundred of the fusiliers, the men of +Albuera, were there smothered. Those who followed checked not, but, +as if such a disaster had been expected, turned to the left, and thus +came upon the face of the unfinished ravelin, which, being rough and +broken, was mistaken for the breach, and instantly covered with men; +yet a wide and deep chasm was still between them and the ramparts, +from whence came a deadly fire, wasting their ranks. Thus baffled, +they also commenced a rapid discharge of musketry and disorder ensued; +for the men of the light division, whose conducting engineer had been +disabled early and whose flank was confined by an unfinished ditch +intended to cut off the bastion of Santa Maria, rushed towards the +breaches of the curtain and the Trinidad, which were, indeed, before +them, but which the fourth division had been destined to storm. Great +was the confusion, for the ravelin was quite crowded with men of both +divisions; and while some continued to fire, others jumped down and +ran towards the breach; many also passed between the ravelin and +the counterguard of the Trinidad, the two divisions got mixed, the +reserves, which should have remained at the quarries, also came +pouring in, until the ditch was quite filled, the rear still crowding +forward, and all cheering vehemently. The enemy's shouts also were +loud and terrible, and the bursting of shells, and of grenades, and +the roaring of guns from the flanks, answered by the iron howitzers +from the battery of the parallel, the heavy roll, and horrid explosion +of the powder-barrels, the whizzing flight of the blazing splinters, +the loud exhortations of the officers, and the continual clatter +of the muskets, made a maddening din. Now a multitude bounded up +the great breach, as if driven by a whirlwind, but across the top +glittered a range of sword-blades, sharp-pointed, keen-edged on both +sides, and firmly fixed in ponderous beams chained together, and set +deep in the ruins; and for ten feet in front the ascent was covered +with loose planks, studded with sharp iron points, on which, feet +being set, the planks moved, and the unhappy soldiers, falling forward +on the spikes, rolled down upon the ranks behind. Then the Frenchmen, +shouting at the success of their stratagem, and, leaping forward, +plied their shot with terrible rapidity, for every man had several +muskets, and each musket, in addition to its ordinary charge, +contained a small cylinder of wood, stuck full of wooden slugs, +which scattered like hail when they were discharged. Once and again +the assailants rushed up the breaches, but always the sword-blades, +immovable and impassable, stopped their charge, and the hissing shells +and thundering powder-barrels exploded unceasingly. Hundreds of men +had fallen, hundreds more were dropping, still, the heroic officers +called aloud for new trials, and sometimes followed by many, sometimes +by a few, ascended the ruins; and so furious were the men themselves, +that, in one of these charges, the rear strove to push the foremost on +to the sword-blades, willing even to make a bridge of their writhing +bodies, but the others frustrated the attempt by dropping down; and +men fell so fast from the shot, it was hard to know who went down +voluntarily, who were stricken and many stooped unhurt that never rose +again. Vain also would it have been to break through the sword-blades, +for the trench and parapet behind the breach were finished, and the +assailants, crowded into even a narrower space than the ditch was, +would still have been separated from their enemies, and the slaughter +would have continued. At the beginning of this dreadful conflict +Andrew Barnard had, with prodigious efforts, separated his division +from the other, and preserved some degree of military array; but now +the tumult was such, no command would be heard distinctly except by +those close at hand, and the mutilated carcasses heaped on each other, +and the wounded struggling to avoid being trampled upon, broke the +formations; order was impossible! Officers of all ranks, followed more +or less numerously by the men, were seen to start out as if struck +by sudden madness, and rash into the breach, which, yawning and +glittering with steel, seemed like the mouth of a huge dragon belching +forth smoke and flame. In one of these attempts, Colonel Macleod, of +the 43rd, a young man whose feeble body would have been quite unfit +for war if it had not been sustained by an unconquerable spirit, was +killed; wherever his voice was heard his soldiers had gathered, and +with such a strong resolution did he lead them up the fatal ruins +that, when one behind him, in falling, plunged a bayonet into his +back, he complained, not; but, continuing his course, was shot dead +within a yard of the sword-blades. Yet there was no want of gallant +leaders, or desperate followers, until two hours passed in these +vain efforts had convinced the troops the breach of the Trinidad was +impregnable; and, as the opening in the curtain, although less strong, +was retired, and the approach to it impeded by deep holes and cuts +made in the ditch, the soldiers did not much notice it after the +partial failure of one attack which had been made early. Gathering in +dark groups, and leaning on their muskets, they looked up with sullen +desperation at the Trinidad, while the enemy, stepping out on the +ramparts, and aiming their shots by the light of the fire-balls which +they threw over, asked, as their victims fell, 'Why they did not come +into Badajos?' In this dreadful situation, while the dead were lying +in heaps, and others continually falling, the wounded crawling about +to get some shelter from the merciless shower above, and withal a +sickening stench from the burnt flesh of the slain, Captain Nicholas, +of the engineers, was observed by Lieutenant Shaw, of the 43rd, making +incredible efforts to force his way with a few men into the Santa +Maria Bastion. Shaw immediately collected fifty soldiers, of all +regiments, and joined him, and although there was a deep cut along +the foot of that breach also, it was instantly passed, and these two +young officers led their gallant band, with a rush, up the ruins; but +when they had gained two-thirds of the ascent, a concentrated fire +of musketry and grape dashed nearly the whole dead to the earth. +Nicholas was mortally wounded, and the intrepid Shaw stood alone! With +inexpressible coolness he looked at his watch, and saying it was too +late to carry the reaches, rejoined the masses at the other attack. +After this no further effort was made at any point, and the troops +remained passive but unflinching beneath the enemy's shot, which +streamed without intermission; for, of the riflemen on the glacis many +leaped early into the ditch and joined in the assault, and the rest, +raked by a cross-fire of grape from the distant bastions, baffled in +their aim by the smoke and flames from the explosions, and too few in +number, entirely failed to quell the French musketry. About midnight, +when two thousand brave men had fallen, Wellington, who was on a +height close to the quarries, ordered the remainder to retire and +re-form for a second assault; he had heard the castle was taken, +but thinking the enemy would still resist in the town, was resolved +to assail the breaches again. This retreat from the ditch was not +effected without further carnage and confusion. The French fire never +slackened. A cry arose that the enemy was making a sally from the +distant flanks, and there was a rush towards the ladders. Then the +groans and lamentations of the wounded, who could not move and +expected to be slain, increased, and many officers who had not heard +of the order, endeavored to stop the soldiers from going back; some +would even have removed the ladders but were unable to break the +crowd." + +While this terrible scene was passing, the victory had been decided +elsewhere. The capture of the castle by Picton would, in itself, have +caused the fall of the town upon the following day, but Leith, with +the fifth division, after hard fighting, scaled the St. Vincente +bastion, and came up through the town and took the defenders of the +breaches in the rear. Then the French gave way, the British poured in, +and the dreadful scenes which had marked the fall of Ciudad Rodrigo +were repeated, and even surpassed. Up to the present day the name of +an Englishman is coupled with a curse in the town of Badajos. At this +siege, as at the last, the Scudamores acted the part of lookers on, +and although they bitterly regretted it, it was well for them that it +was so. The capture of Badajos cost the allied army five thousand men, +of whom three thousand five hundred fell on the night of the assault. +Each of the divisions which attacked the breaches lost over twelve +hundred men, and the 52nd Regiment, who formed part of the light +division, lost their full share. Among the ranks of the officers the +slaughter was particularly great, and scarce one escaped without +a wound. The Scudamores would fain have volunteered to join their +regiment in the assault, but it was well known that Lord Wellington +would not allow staff officers to go outside their own work. Therefore +they had looked on with beating hearts and pale faces, and with +tears in their eyes, at that terrible fight at the Triudad, and had +determined that when morning came they would resign their staff +appointments and ask leave to join their regiment. But when morning +came, and the list of the killed and wounded was sent in, and they +went down with a party to the breach to collect the wounded, they +could not but feel that they had in all probability escaped death, or +what a soldier fears more, mutilation. "After all, Tom," Peter said, +"we have done some active service, and our promotion shows that we +are not cowards; there can be no reason why we should not do our duty +as the chief has marked it out for us, especially when it is quite +as likely to lead to rapid promotion as is such a murderous business +as this." After this no more was said about resigning the staff +appointment, which gave them plenty of hard work, and constant change +of scene, whereas had they remained with the regiment they would often +have been stationed for months in one place without a move. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +SALAMANCA. + + +The great triumphs of Ciudad Rodrigo and Badajos did not lead to the +rapid successes which Wellington had hoped. The French generals, +on hearing of the loss of the latter fortress, again fell back, +and Wellington was so much hampered by shortness of money, by the +inefficiency, obstinacy, and intrigues of the Portuguese Government, +and by want of transport, that it was nearly three months before he +could get everything in readiness for an advance into Spain. At last +all was prepared, and on the 13th of June the army once more crossed +the Agueda and marched towards the Tamar in four columns. On the 17th +it was within six miles of Salamanca, and Marshal Marmont, unable for +the moment to stem the tide of invasion, evacuated the city, which +that evening blazed with illuminations, the people being half wild +with joy at their approaching deliverance. The French, however, had +not entirely departed, for eight hundred men still held some very +strong forts overlooking and guarding the city. + +These forts held out desperately; the British battering train +was weak, and upon the 23d Marmont, having received considerable +reinforcements, advanced to raise the siege. Wellington, however, +refused to be tempted to leave his trenches to deliver a general +battle, but faced the enemy with a portion of his army while he +continued the siege. + +Marmont, upon his part, believing that the forts could hold out for +fifteen days, put off the attack, as he knew that large reinforcements +were coming up. His calculations were frustrated by one of the forts +taking fire on the 27th, when an assault was delivered, and the whole +of the forts surrendered; Marmont at once fell back across the Douro, +there to await the arrival of his reinforcements. + +Wellington, on his part, followed slowly, and his army took up a +position between Canizal and Castrejon, thereby covering the roads +from Toro and Tordesillas, the only points at which the French could +cross the river. The reports of the spies all agreed that the former +was the place at which the crossing would be made. + +On the 16th of July an officer rode into Canizal, at headlong pace, +with the news that a reconnoitering party had crossed the Douro that +morning near Tordesillas, and had found that place deserted, except by +a garrison; and an hour later the news came in that three divisions of +the enemy were already across the river at Toro. Five minutes later +the Scudamores were on horseback, carrying orders that the whole of +the army, with the exception of the fourth and light divisions, which +were on the Trabancos, under General Cotton, were to concentrate at +Canizal that night. By the morning the movement was accomplished. + +The day wore on in somewhat anxious expectation, and towards afternoon +Wellington, accompanied by Lord Beresford, and escorted by Alten's, +Bock's and Le Marchant's brigades of cavalry, started to make a +reconnaissance of the enemy's movements. Caution was needed for the +advance, as it was quite uncertain whether the French were pushing +on through the open country towards Canizal, or whether they were +following the direct road from Toro to Salamanca. Evening closed in, +but no signs of the French army were seen, and the party halted about +six miles from Toro, and small parties of cavalry were despatched +right and left to scour the country, and find out where the enemy had +gone. + +"It's very strange where the French can have got to," was the remark +made, for the fiftieth time among the staff. + +The detached parties returned, bringing no news whatever, and Lord +Wellington again advanced slowly and cautiously towards Toro. Small +parties were pushed on ahead, and presently an officer rode back +with the news that he had been as far as the river, and that not a +Frenchman was to be seen. It was too late to do any more, and they +remained in uncertainty whether the enemy had recrossed the river +after making a demonstration, or whether they had marched to their +right, so as to make a circuit, and throw themselves between Ciudad +Rodrigo and Salamanca, upon the line of communication of the British +army. + +Lord Wellington, with his staff, took possession of a deserted +farm-house, the cavalry picketed their horses round it, and the +Scudamores, who had been more than twenty-four hours in the saddle, +wrapped themselves in their cloaks, and stretching themselves on the +floor, were soon asleep. Just at midnight the sound of a horse's +footfall approaching at a gallop was heard, and an officer, who had +ridden, without drawing rein, from Canizal, dashed up to the farm. + +Five minutes later the whole party were in the saddle again. The news +was important, indeed. Marmont had drawn his whole army back across +the Toro on the night of the 16th, had marched to Tordesillas, crossed +there, and in the afternoon, after a march of fifty miles, had fallen +upon Cotton's outposts, and driven them across the Trabancos. + +Not a moment's time was lost by Wellington after he received the news; +but, unfortunately, six precious hours had already been wasted, owing +to the despatches not having reached him at Canizal. With the three +brigades of cavalry he set off at once towards Alaejos, while an +officer was despatched to Canizal, to order the fifth division to +march with all speed to Torrecilla de la Orden, six miles in the rear +of Cotton's position at Castrejon. + +Four hours' riding brought them to Alaejos, where a halt for two or +three hours was ordered, to rest the weary horses and men. Soon after +daybreak, however, all thought of sleep was banished by the roar of +artillery, which told that Marmont was pressing hard upon Cotton's +troops. "To horse!" was the cry, and Lords Wellington and Beresford, +with their staff, rode off at full speed towards the scene of action, +with the cavalry following hard upon their heels. An hour's ride +brought them to the ground. Not much could be seen, for the country +was undulating and bare, like the Brighton Downs, and each depression +was full of the white morning mist, which wreathed and tossed +fantastically from the effects of the discharges of firearms, the +movements of masses of men, and the charges of cavalry hidden within +it. Upon a crest near at hand were a couple of British guns, with a +small escort of horse. + +Suddenly, from the mist below, a party of some fifty French horsemen +dashed out and made for the guns. The supporting squadron, surprised +by the suddenness of the attack, broke and fled; the French followed +hard upon them, and just as Lord Wellington, with his staff, gained +the crest, pursuers and pursued came upon them, and in pell-mell +confusion the whole were borne down to the bottom of the hill. For +a few minutes it was a wild melee. Lords Wellington, Beresford, and +their staff, with their swords drawn, were in the midst of the fight, +and friends and foes were mingled together, when the leading squadrons +of the cavalry from Alaejos came thundering down, and very few of the +Frenchmen who had made that gallant charge escaped to tell the tale. + +The mists were now rapidly clearing up, and in a short time the whole +French army could be seen advancing. They moved towards the British +left, and Wellington ordered the troops at once to retire. The British +fell back in three columns, and marched for the Guarena, through +Torrecilla de la Orden. The French also marched straight for the +river, and now one of the most singular sights ever presented in +warfare was to be seen. + +The hostile armies were marching abreast, the columns being but a few +hundred yards apart, the officers on either side waving their hands to +each other. For ten miles the armies thus pressed forward the officers +urging the men, and these straining every nerve to get first to the +river. From time to time the artillery of either side, finding a +convenient elevation, would pour a few volleys of grape into the +opposing columns, but the position of the two armies, did not often +admit of this. Gradually Cotton's men, fresher than the French, who +had, in the two previous days, marched fifty miles, gained ground, +and, reaching the river, marched across by the ford, the winners of +the great race by so little that one division, which halted for a +moment to drink, was swept by forty pieces of French artillery, which +arrived on the spot almost simultaneously with it. + +On the Guarena the British found the remaining divisions of the army, +which had been brought up from Canizal. These checked Marmont in an +attempt to cross at Vallesa, while the 29th and 40th Regiments, with +a desperate bayonet charge, drove Carier's French division back as it +attempted to push forward beyond Castrillo. Thus the two armies faced +each other on the Guarena, and Marmont had gained absolutely nothing +by his false movement at Toro, and his long and skillful detour by +Tordesillas. + +Quickly the rest of the day passed, as did the one which followed, the +troops on both sides resting after their fatigues. Wellington expected +to be attacked on the next morning and his army was arranged in two +lines ready for the combat. At daybreak, however, Marmont moved his +army up the river, crossed at a ford there, and marched straight +for Salamanca, thus turning Wellington's right, and threatening his +communications. The British at once fell back, and the scene of the +previous day was repeated the armies marching along the crest of two +parallel hills within musket shot distance of each other. + +This time however, the French troops, although they had marched +considerably farther than the English proved themselves the best +marchers, and when night fell Wellington had the mortification of +seeing them in possession of the ford of Huerta on the Tormes, thus +securing for Marmont the junction with an army which was approaching +under King Joseph, and also the option of either fighting or refusing +battle. Wellington felt his position seriously threatened, and sent +off a despatch to the Spanish General Castanos, stating his inability +to hold his ground, and the probability that he should be obliged to +fall back upon Portugal. This letter proved the cause of the victory +of Salamanca for it was intercepted by the French, and Marmont, +fearing that Wellington would escape him, prepared at once to throw +himself upon the road to Ciudad Rodrigo, and thus cut the British line +of retreat, in spite of the positive order which he had received from +King Joseph not to fight until he himself arrived with his army. + +Upon the 21st both armies crossed the Tormes, the French at Alba and +Huerta, the British at Aldea Lengua, and San Marta. Upon that day the +news reached Wellington that General Chauvel, with 2000 cavalry, and +20 guns, would reach Marmont on the evening of the 22d, or the morning +of the 23d, and the English general therefore resolved to retreat, +unless Marmont should, by some mistake, give him a chance of fighting +to advantage. + +Close to the British right, and the French left, were two steep and +rugged hills, called the Hermanitos, or Brothers, and soon after +daybreak on the 22d, the French seized upon the one nearest to them, +while the British took possession of the other. Then, watching each +other, the two armies remained until noon, for Wellington could not +commence his retreat by daylight; but a long cloud of dust along the +road to Ciudad Rodrigo showed that the baggage of the army was already +_en route_ for Portugal. Marmont now determined to make a bold stroke +to cut off Wellington's retreat, and, although all his troops had not +yet arrived, he ordered Maucune, with two divisions, to march round by +the left and menace the Ciudad road. It was at three o'clock in the +afternoon, and Wellington, who had been up all night, thinking that +Marmont would make no move that day, had gone to lie down for an hour +or two, when Tom Scudamore who, from an elevated point, was watching +the movements of the enemy, hurried in with the news that the French +were pushing their left round towards the Ciudad Road. + +Wellington leaped to his feet, and hurried to the high ground, where +he beheld, with stern satisfaction, that Marmont, in his eagerness +to prevent the British escape, had committed the flagrant error of +detaching his wing from his main body. Instantly he issued orders +for an attack, and the great mass of men upon the British Hermanito +moved down upon the plain to attack Maucune in flank, while the third +division was ordered to throw itself across his line of march, and to +attack him in front. As the advance across the plain would be taken in +flank by the fire from the French Hermanito, General Pack was ordered +to assail that position directly the British line had passed it. + +Marmont, standing on the French Hermanito, was thunder-struck at +beholding the plain suddenly covered with enemies, and a tremendous +fire was at once opened upon the advancing British. Officer after +officer was despatched to hurry up the French troops still upon the +march, and when Marmont saw the third division dash across Maucune's +path, he was upon the point of hurrying himself to the spot, when a +shell burst close to him, and he was dashed to the earth with a broken +arm, and two deep wounds in his side. + +Thus, at the critical point of the battle, the French army was left +without a head. + +It was just five o'clock when Pakenham, with the third division, fell +like a thunderbolt upon the head of Maucune's troops. These, taken by +surprise by this attack, on the part of an enemy whom they had thought +to see in full flight, yet fought gallantly, and strove to gain time +to open out into order of battle. Bearing onwards, however, with +irresistible force, the third division broke the head of the column, +and drove it back upon its supports. Meanwhile, the battle raged all +along the line; in the plain the fourth division carried the village +of Arapiles, and drove back Bonnet's division with the bayonet, and +the fifth division attacked Maucune's command in flank, while Pakenham +was destroying its front. + +Marmont was succeeded in his command by Bonnet, who was also wounded, +and Clausel, an able general, took the command. He reinforced Maucune +with his own divisions, which had just arrived, and, for a while, +restored the battle. Then, past the right and left of Pakenham's +division, the British cavalry, under Le Marchant, Anson, and D'Urban, +burst through the smoke and dust, rode down twelve hundred of the +French infantry, and then dashed on at the line behind. Nobly the +charge was pressed, the third division following at a run, and the +charge ceased not until the French left was entirely broken and five +guns, and two thousand prisoners taken. + +But forty minutes had passed since the first gun was fired, and the +French defeat was already all but irretrievable, and the third, +fourth, and fifth divisions now in line, swept forward as to assured +victory. Clausel, however, proved equal to the emergency. He +reinforced Bonnet's division with that of Fereij, as yet fresh and +unbroken, and, at the same moment, Sarrut's and Brennier's divisions +issued from the forest, and formed in the line of battle. Behind them +the broken troops of Maucune's two divisions re-formed, and the battle +was renewed with terrible force. + +Pack, at the same moment, attempted unsuccessfully to carry the French +Hermanito by assault with his Portuguese division, and the fate of the +battle was again in the balance; the British divisions outnumbered, +and outflanked, began to fall back, Generals Cole, Leith, and Spry, +were all wounded, and the French cavalry threatened the flank of the +line. Wellington, however, had still plenty of reserves in hand, and +at this critical moment he launched them at the enemy. The sixth +division was brought up from the second line, and hurled at the center +of the enemy in a fierce and prolonged charge, while the light and +first divisions were directed against the French divisions which were +descending from the French Hermanito, and against that of Foy, while +the seventh division and the Spaniards were brought up behind the +first line. Against so tremendous an assault as this the French could +make no stand, and were pushed back in ever increasing disorder to the +edge of the forest, where Foy's and Maucune's divisions stood at bay, +and covered their retreat in the fast gathering darkness. + +Wellington believed that he should capture a great portion of the +beaten army, for he relied upon the Castle of Alba de Formes, +commanding the ford at that place, being held by the Spaniards, but +these had evacuated the place on the preceding day, and had not even +informed Wellington that they had done so. + +Thus, hidden by the night, the French retreated with but slight loss +from the pursuing columns. In the battle the French had forty-two +thousand men and seventy-four guns; the Allies forty-six thousand and +sixty guns, but of the infantry a division were composed of Spaniards, +and these could not be relied upon in any way. It was probably the +most rapidly fought action ever known, and a French officer described +it as the defeat of forty thousand men in forty minutes. The French +loss was over twelve thousand in killed, wounded, and prisoners, and +so completely were they dispersed that Clausel a week afterwards +could only collect twenty thousand to their standards. It was a great +victory, and celebrated as the first which Wellington had gained over +the French, for although at Talavera and Busaco he had repulsed the +French attack, he was not in either case in a position to do more than +hold his ground. + +Throughout this short and desperate fight the Scudamores had been +fully engaged in conveying orders from one part of the field to +another. Shot and shell flew around them in all directions, and yet +when they met at the end of the action they found that they had +escaped without a scratch. The day following the battle the pursuit +began. Had King Joseph's advancing army united with Clausel's broken +troops, he could have opposed Wellington's advance with a force far +superior in numbers to that defeated at Salamanca. But Joseph, after +hesitating, fell back in one direction, Clausel retreated in another, +the opportunity for concentration was lost, and Wellington found no +foe to bar his way on his triumphant march upon Madrid. + +Joseph fell back from the capital as the English approached, leaving +some thousands of men in the strong place known as the Retiro, +together with an immense amount of arms, ammunition, and military +stores of all kinds, all of which, including the troops, fell into the +hands of the English within a few days of their arrival at Madrid. + +It was a proud moment for the Scudamores, as riding behind Lord +Wellington they entered Madrid on the 14th August. + +The city was half mad with joy. Crowds lined the streets, while every +window and balcony along the route was filled with ladies, who waved +their scarves, clapped their hands, and showered flowers upon the +heads of their deliverers. Those below, haggard and half-starved, +for the distress in Madrid was intense, thronged round the general's +horse, a shouting, weeping throng, kissing his cloak, his horse, any +portion of his equipments which they could touch. Altogether it was +one of the most glorious, most moving, most enthusiastic welcomes ever +offered to a general. + +The next fortnight was spent in a round of fetes, bull fights, and +balls, succeeding each other rapidly, but these rejoicings were but a +thin veil over the distress which was general throughout the town. The +people were starving, and many deaths occurred daily from hunger. The +British could do but little to relieve the suffering which they saw +around them, for they themselves were--owing to the utter breakdown of +all the arrangements undertaken by the Portuguese government, and to +the indecision and incapacity of the Home Government--badly fed, and +much in arrears of their pay. Nevertheless, the officers did what they +could, got up soup kitchens, and fed daily many hundreds of starving +wretches. + +The heat was excessive and a very great deal of illness took place +among the troops. The French were gathering strength in the South, +and Wellington determined upon marching north and seizing Burgos, an +important place, but poorly fortified. Leaving General Hill with two +divisions at Madrid, he marched with the rest of the army upon Burgos. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +CAUGHT IN A TRAP. + + +So much had passed between the first visit of the Scudamores to Madrid +as Spanish peasant boys, and their second entry as captains upon Lord +Wellington's staff, that they had scarcely given a thought to the +dangers they had at that time run, or to the deadly hatred with which +they had inspired the guerilla chief Nunez. When they first rode +into the town, indeed, they had spoken of it one to the other, and +had agreed that it would be pleasant to be able to walk through the +streets without fear of assassination; for even, as Tom said, if the +scoundrel had any of his band there, they would not be likely to +recognize them in their uniforms. + +One evening, however, when they had been in Madrid about a fortnight, +an incident happened which caused them to doubt whether their security +from the hatred of the guerilla was as complete as they had fancied. +They were sitting with a number of other officers in a large cafe in +the Puerta del Sol, the principal square in Madrid, when a girl came +round begging; instead of holding out her hand silently with a murmur +for charity in the name of the holy Virgin, she began a long story, +poured out in rapid language. + +Several of the officers present knew more or less Spanish, but they +were unable to follow her quick utterances, and one of them said +laughingly, "Scudamore, this is a case for you, she is beyond us +altogether." + +The girl followed the direction of the speaker's eye, and moved across +to the brothers, who happened to be sitting next to each other, and +began her story again. It was a complicated tale of French oppression, +and the boys, interrupting her here and there to ask for details, +talked with her for some minutes. + +"I believe she is lying," Tom said, in English, "she tells her story +as if she had learned it by heart, and gets confused whenever we +cross-question her; there, give her a few coppers, I am out of +change." + +As Peter put his hand into his pocket for the money, Tom glanced +up sharply at the girl. She was not, as might have been expected, +watching Peter's movements with interest, but was looking inquiringly +at some one in the crowd of promenaders. Tom followed her glance, and +saw a peasant, standing half-hidden behind a group of passers, nod to +her, and motion her to come to him. She waited until Peter put the +coins into her hand; then, with a brief word of thanks, she moved away +into the crowd. + +"Peter, I believe those scoundrels are up to their old game, and +that we are watched. Once or twice since we have been sitting here I +have noticed a heavy-looking fellow glance at us very closely as he +passed, and I just saw the same fellow, who was evidently hiding from +observation, nod to that girl, and beckon her away." + +"Her story was a lie from beginning to end," Peter said, "and it is +quite possible that it was a got-up thing, on purpose to see whether +we could talk Spanish well. I don't think any one could swear to us +who only saw us then; but the fact of our speaking Spanish so well +would go a long way towards settling the point in the mind of any one +who suspected us!" + +"We must be careful in future, Peter, and avoid quiet streets after +dark, and keep a sharp look-out at all times, or we shall get a knife +between our ribs, as sure as fate." + +Time, however, passed on without anything occurring to give any +support to their suspicion, they could not discover that they were +being watched, or their footsteps dogged. They, nevertheless, +continued to be, to a certain extent, upon their guard after dark; in +the daytime the number of English soldiers about the streets was so +large that there was very little danger of any attack. + +On the evening before the army marched for Burgos, Tom, whose turn it +was for duty at head-quarters, received a despatch, to carry to one of +the generals of division encamped a mile or two out of the town. He +did not need to go round to his quarters, as his horse was standing +saddled in readiness in the courtyard. He was but an hour away, and, +as he knew that he would not be farther required, he rode round to the +house where he was quartered. His orderly came forward at his shout, +and took his horse, and he mounted the broad stairs of the house, +which was a very handsome one, and rang at the door on the second +floor; for in Spain, as indeed almost all over the Continent, each +floor is a separate dwelling. + +Sam opened it. + +"Nothing new, Sam?" + +"No, sar, nothing new." + +Tom passed through the sitting-room, and entered Peter's bedroom. It +was in darkness. + +"Asleep, old man?" he asked. + +There was no answer. He came back into the sitting room, where two +lamps were burning, and looked at his watch. "Half-past eleven. He is +off to bed early. Sam, bring me some supper if you have got anything, +I am hungry." + +Sam came in, in a minute, with a small tray. + +"How long has my brother been gone to bed?" + +"Me did not know he gone to bed at all," Sam said, in surprise. "Me +thought Massa Peter been reading book." + +Tom took up a light, and went into the bedroom, it was empty. "Sam, +there's something wrong here!" Tom said sharply, for a sudden +sensation of alarm seized him. "Peter is not here." + +Sam came into the bedroom, and looked round in astonishment. "What +become of him?" he said. "Where de debil he got to?" + +"That's what I want to know, Sam. Now, then, just give all your +attention. What time did he come in?" + +"He came in at about nine o'clock, sar, with three other officers, +Captain Farquharson, Major Heriot, and Captain Brown. Dey have bottle +wine, and sit here and smoke. Well, Massa Tom, Sam sit in his room, +and smoke him pipe, and he doze off a little; after a bit, may be +ten o'clock, Sam hear dem move, and go to door; they were saying +good-night, when Massa Peter said, 'I will just go down to see that +the horses are all right.' Den dey all go down togeder." + +"Did they shut the door?" Tom asked. + +"No, Massa Tom, dey did not shut de door, because, a little while +after, Sam, he wake up wid little start; he hear de door bang, and +'spose Massa Peter come back. Sam go off to sleep again till you ring +bell." + +Tom looked very grave. "What can Peter have gone off with Farquharson +at this time of night for?" + +Then he looked round the room, and said, almost with a cry, "Sam, +look there, there are his cap and sword. He has not gone out with the +others at all. What can have happened?" + +Tom first glanced into his own room, and then ran downstairs in haste, +followed by Sam, who was now also thoroughly alarmed. The orderly had +just made the horse comfortable for the night, and was leaving the +stable. + +"Johnstone, when did you see my brother?" + +"Well, it may be an hour, or an hour and a half back, sir. He came +down with some other officers; I did not see them, but I heard them +talking for a minute or two before he came in to look at the horses, +and he asked if they were all right, and said they must be saddled by +half-past five, and then he went up again--at least, I suppose he went +up, for he had not got his cap on. Is anything wrong, sir?" + +"I don't know, I am afraid to think," Tom said, in a dazed way. "He is +not upstairs; he has not gone out; what can have become of him?" + +He stood quiet for a minute or two, and then, with a great effort, +brought his thoughts within control again. "The first thing is to +assure ourselves whether he returned upstairs. Sam, fetch a lamp, the +stairs are not lighted, and I want to examine them." + +Sam soon returned with the lamp, and Tom, beginning at the street +door, examined every step carefully all the way up, Sam and the +soldier following him. + +"There has been no scuffle on the stairs," he said; then he went +through the little hall into the sitting-room again. Nothing appeared +to have been disturbed. Then he looked at the floor, which was of +polished oak, and knelt down to examine it more closely. "There have +been men with dirty shoes standing here," he cried. "Do you see the +marks on each side of the door, and there, do you see that scratch and +that? There has been a scuffle. Good heavens! what has taken place +here?" + +Sam's face was pale with apprehension that something had happened to +Peter; but, he said, "How dat be, Massa Tom, with Sam in the next room +all the time?" + +Tom made no reply; but was closely examining the floor--back across +the hall. "There is a mark; there is another," he said, "not made by +boots, but by their native sandals." Then he went out from the door, +and up the next flight of stairs. + +"There," he said, "just as I thought." Just round the angle of the +stairs two steps were dirty and stained, as if dirty feet had been +trampling upon them for some time. "I suppose they knew I was out, and +watched here, for hours, perhaps. Then, when Peter went down, they +slipped in through the open door, and then"--without completing the +sentence, Tom went back into the room, and threw himself into a chair +in tearless despair. + +Sam sobbed loudly. For some time there was silence. "There is no +blood, sir, that I can see, not a speck," the orderly said. "They +can't have killed Captain Scudamore, and, if they had, why should they +have carried his body away?" + +This was the question Tom had been asking himself. Assassinations +were, in Madrid, every-day occurrences, and that Peter and he were +especially liable to be murdered, owing to the hatred of Nunez and his +gang, was clear; but, so far as he could see, not a drop of blood had +been shed here. Presently Sam began to sob more loudly. "Dis break +my heart, Massa Tom, to tink dat Sam be next door all de time, and, +instead of watching, he sleep so sound dat Massa Peter carried +straight away." + +"You are not to blame, Sam, there was, probably, no noise whatever. +But, what can it all mean? Johnstone, you had better go to bed, you +can do no good now. Sam, give me my pistols; take that big stick of +yours, and come round with me to head-quarters, we will call in at +Captain Farquharson's on the way." + +That officer, on being roused, and made to understand what was the +matter, confirmed the account given by the orderly; he and his +companions had parted at the street door, and Peter had gone down the +yard to the stable. + +"It is clear that Peter has been carried off," Tom said, "and I have +not the least doubt that it has been done by some of the band of +Nunez. As you have heard me say, they owe us a grudge, and have, no +doubt, been on the look-out ever since we came here. We have been +on guard, and never gave them a chance, and, I suppose, they got +desperate when they found the army was moving again, and so carried +out this audacious plan." + +"If your brother had been found murdered I should understand it," +Captain Farquharson said; "but, what on earth did they carry him off +for?" + +Tom was silent for a minute. + +"That fiend, Nunez, would have had us stabbed if he could do nothing +else; but he would, if I judge him rightly, be really contented with +nothing short of putting us to death himself in some horrible manner. +My own idea is, that Peter is hidden away somewhere near, will be kept +in concealment until the road is clear, and will then be taken to +Nunez. I must go off and try and save him at all hazards." + +Captain Farquharson was silent, while Tom walked up and down the room +thoughtfully. + +"I don't suppose the chief would refuse me leave," Tom said. "If he +does, I must throw up my commission." + +"No, no; you are sure to get leave for such a thing as this, but the +difficulty of the affair will be to know how to proceed. The country +will swarm with French, the guerillas are sure to keep a sharp +look-out, and if you find him, how are you going to rescue him?" + +"I don't know," Tom said, "but it's got to be done; that's clear. I +can't set out as a Spanish peasant," he went on after a pause. "They +know me as that now. At least, if I do I must get up as an old man +and change my appearance. I might go as a woman, but I am too tall in +the first place, and then women don't go wandering over the country +in such times as this. But there, I have time to think it over before +morning. I suppose the general will be moving about five o'clock; +I will see him the first thing, and tell him the whole story. +Good-night." + +And so Tom went back to his quarters, and sat thinking deeply until +morning, while Sam sat gloomily in his little room, sometimes with +tears rolling down his cheeks, sometimes muttering terrible threats +against the guerillas, at other times cursing himself for having been +asleep instead of watching over his young master's safety. Tom had +briefly told him that he intended to get leave in order to search +for Peter. At daybreak, when he heard Tom moving, he went into the +sitting-room. + +"Look here, Massa Tom, Sam only one word to say. He going to look for +Massa Peter. Sam know dat him color berry spicuous, dat people look +at him and tink he de debil. Sam don't spect he going wid you. Dat +wouldn't do. Dese fellows watch him, know dat black fellow here. Only +Sam go somehow. He trabel night, hide up at day time. He join you de +last ting when you go to mash up dem guerillas like squash. Anyhow, +Sam must go. If can get leave, berry well, if not he desert. Anyhow he +go, dat sartin. Sam kill himself if he stay behind." + +Tom had already thought over this. He was sure that the faithful negro +would not remain behind, but he had seen that his companionship would +be fatal. He had, therefore, formed some plan in his head similar to +that which Sam proposed, and he knew that when the moment for action +came his courage, strength, and devotion would be invaluable. + +"You shall go, Sam," he said, holding out his hand to his attached +follower. "As you say, you can't go with me, but you shall go +somehow." + +"Thank you, Massa Tom," the negro said gratefully, "You berry sure if +Massa Peter die Sam die too." + +Tom now went to head-quarters, and found that Lord Wellington was +just up. Sending in to say that he wished to speak with him for a few +minutes on a matter of urgent personal importance, he was admitted, +and related as concisely as he could Peter's disappearance, and told +the story of the affair with the guerillas, which accounted for the +intense desire for vengeance on the part of Nunez. He ended by asking +for leave of absence. + +The general heard him to the end, asking a brief question here and +there. + +"You can have the leave certainly, Captain Scudamore, I know that it +is needless for me to point out the risks that you will run, both from +the French and guerillas. I think that it might be an advantage if I +give you a note which you can, in case of absolute necessity, show to +any French officer." + +So saying, the general sat down and wrote as follows:-- + +"To the French officer commanding.--The Earl of Wellington, +commander-in-chief of His Britannic Majesty's forces in Spain, gives +his assurance that the bearer of this, Captain Scudamore, although not +in English uniform, is not engaged upon any mission connected with the +army, or to obtain information respecting the strength and position of +the French forces. His business is entirely private, and he is engaged +in an attempt to discover and rescue a brother who has been carried +off by the guerilla chief Nunez in order to gratify private vengeance. +The Earl of Wellington, confiding in the natural courtesy of the +French nation, trusts that officers of that service will, if applied +to, assist Captain Scudamore in any way in their power, and he will +feel personally obliged to them by their so doing." + +Tom expressed his deep gratitude for this, which might, he foresaw, be +of inestimable advantage to him. + +"I am taking my servant with me, sir--the negro; he will not travel +with me by day, but will join me wherever I tell him; he is very +strong and brave, and is deeply attached to us." + +"Yes, I remember," the general said; "that is the man whose life you +saved. Do you leave at once?" + +"No, sir; I am thinking of riding with you to-morrow at any rate. The +route lies on the way I have to go, and I am sure to be watched here." + +"Very well," the general said; "I wish you good fortune; but you have +a difficult, almost a desperate, service before you." + +Upon leaving head-quarters, Tom again called on Captain Farquharson. + +"Farquharson, I hear that it will be eleven before the chief leaves. I +wish you would go to that little shop opposite the opera-house; they +have got wigs and all that sort of thing there. Please get me two +old men's wigs and beards, and one set of those mutton-chop shaped +whiskers, and a woman's wig. I haven't made up my mind yet what I am +going to wear, but I want these things to choose from. I am sure to be +watched, and if I were to go there they would find out, five minutes +afterwards, what I had bought. In the meantime I am going to the head +of the police to give notice of Peter's disappearance, and to ask him +to have the carts leaving the town for the next few days searched. +I have no doubt the fellows will outwit the police, but it's no use +throwing away a chance." + +It was six days after this that an old man, with long white hair +and gray beard, and with a box containing cheap trinkets, beads, +necklaces, earrings, knives, scissors, and other like articles, was +sitting at the junction of two roads near the lower slopes of the +Pyrenees, some twenty miles north of Vittoria. He had one of his +sandals off, and appeared to have just risen from a bed of leaves in +the forest behind him. The dawn had broken, but it was still twilight. +Presently he heard a footstep coming along the road, and at once +applied himself to wrapping the bandages, which serve for stockings +to the Spanish peasant, round his leg, looking eagerly from under his +wide sombrero to see who was approaching. As the new-comer came in +sight, the pedlar at once ceased his employment and rose to meet him. +He had recognized the figure, but the face was hidden, the Spanish +cloak, worn as is usual by peasant and noble alike, with one end +thrown over the shoulder, hiding the chin and lower part of the face, +while the wide felt hat, pressed well down in front, allowed scarcely +a glimpse even of the nose. That, however, would have been sufficient +in the present case, for the man was a negro. + +Upon seeing the pedlar rise, he ran forward to meet him. + +"Ah, Massa Tom, tank de Lord me find you safe and sound. I always +keep on tinking you taken prisoner or killed eider by de French or de +robbers--one as bad as de oder." + +"I have thought the same of you, Sam, for your risk has been far +greater than mine. Well, thank God, it is all right thus far. But come +back into the wood, I have got some food there, and here any one might +come along." + +They were soon deep in the wood, where, by a pile of grass and leaves +which had evidently been used as a bed, was an open wallet, with some +bread, cheese, cold meat and a small skin of wine. + +"Are you hungry, Sam?" + +"Downright starving, sar; dis chile eat noting for two days." + +"Why, how is that, Sam; you had six days' provision with you when you +started?" + +"Dat true enough, sar, but Sam's appetite bigger than usual, noting to +do all day sitting in de woods, waiting for night to come so as to go +on again; so had to eat, and de food all went before Sam thought dat +dere was two more days before he meet you." + +"Well, sit down now, Sam, and eat away; we have plenty of time." + +They had much to tell each other. They had traveled by the same road, +one by night, the other by day--Sam passing the days sleeping in the +woods, his master traveling by day and at night sleeping in wretched +village posadas. He, too, would far rather have slept in the woods, +for the insects and filth made sleep almost impossible in these +places, besides which he ran a good deal of risk as to the discovery +of his disguise. He had, however, chosen the inns in hopes of hearing +something which might give him a clue as to the object of his search. +The only information, which he had gained was to the effect that Nunez +still had his quarters at the old place. He had been driven out of it, +and the village had been burned by the French, but the position was +a convenient one, and the houses had been cleared and roughly roofed +with boughs of trees and straw, and the band was still there. This +much was satisfactory, and he could hardly have expected to learn +more, unless he had happened to meet some of the members of the band +itself. They had not traveled by the main road, as upon that large +forces of the French were collected; and even if Tom could have +passed through, boldly, Sam could not have made his way. Even by the +road they had chosen Tom had met several bodies of French, while at +Vittoria a very large force was assembling, destined for the relief of +Burgos. + +Sam had but few incidents to relate. He had been carefully instructed +by Tom before starting as to the road he should take, and the position +and distances apart of the towns and villages upon it. He had traveled +only at night, and had but once or twice exchanged a word with passers +by. People did not travel much at night in so disturbed a country, +and when Sam heard a foot-passenger approaching, or, as was more +frequently the case, a party of French cavalry, he left the road and +lay down, until they had passed. The one or two foot-passengers he had +met suddenly he had passed with the usual Spanish muttered salutation, +and the darkness and the disguise prevented any recognition of his +color. + +"Now, sar," Sam said, when they had finished breakfast, "what am to be +done next?" + +"I do not think, Sam, that the party who have got Peter have arrived +yet. They could only have started on the day that we did; they have as +long a road to go, and most likely they have got a bullock-cart, which +won't travel more than fifteen miles a day at the outside. They have +got Peter in a cart covered up with something, we may be sure. I don't +think they will be here for another day or so at the earliest. If we +knew what sort of cart it was, we could attack them on the way if +there are not too many of them; but unfortunately we don't know that; +and as there are three or four roads up to the village, and they are +sure to make a detour, we don't know which they will come by. I hope +to learn at the village. We will stay where we are till dark, then we +will push on; it is only a couple of miles or so from here. I will +steal into the place after dark, and try and overhear what is going +on. You shall remain at a point where you can see down into the +village and can hear a shout. I will give you this letter of Lord +Wellington, and if you hear a pistol shot and hear me shout 'Sam!' you +will know I am caught, and must make off as hard as you can to that +small town in the plain, where there is a French garrison; ask for the +commanding-officer, show this letter, and offer to guide them so as +to surprise Nunez and his band. That is our sole chance. But I don't +think there is much risk of being caught. I shall be very careful, you +may rely upon it; and as I know the position of the house, I shall be +able to make my way about. Once night has fallen they go off to bed; +and even if I walked boldly about the place I should likely enough +meet no one all night." + +That evening Tom entered the village as soon as it was fairly dark. He +knew, from his former experience, that sentries were always placed at +points whence they could get a view of the roads, and he made his way +so as to avoid any risk of observation by them; but when he reached a +place whence he could in turn view the posts of the watchers, he found +that they were deserted, and concluded that the brigands had become +careless, from the belief that, now the French had once destroyed the +village, they would not be likely to come up to search for them there +a second time; besides which, they might reckon that the French had +their hands much too full with the advance of the Allied Army to spare +either men or time in raids upon the guerillas. In this particular, +indeed, they would have argued wrongly, for the French during the +whole war, however much they were pressed by Wellington, always kept +sufficient forces in hand to scatter the guerillas as fast as they +become formidable. + +Tom had now taken off his beard and wig, and had put on the small +whisker, which is the general fashion of wearing the hair throughout +Spain. Thus he trusted, if surprised in the dark, to pass as one of +the band. So quiet was the village when he entered, that he at first +thought it was deserted; at last, however, he saw a light in one of +the houses in the center of the village. Approaching carefully and +noiselessly he saw a group of five men sitting and drinking round a +fire made on the ground, in the center of one of the windowless rooms, +the smoke finding its way out through the roof. + +"I tell you," one said, "I am getting sick of this life; I am ready to +go and kill the French, but to be left up here, where there is nothing +to do, no one to talk to, not a roof to cover one; bah! I am sick of +it. But Nunez will be back in three days, and we shall be merry enough +then." + +"Not we," another said, "this was a pleasant village in the old days, +what is it now? There are no women, not even old mother Morena, who +used to cook well, if she was free of her tongue. There is not even a +priest now to shrive us if one is brought in to die." + +"Nunez will come back in a good temper if it is true what Lope said +yesterday when he came through, that the lads at Madrid had got one +of those English boys who made a fool of him two years ago. That was +a go. Demonio! but it was a fine thing. If it is true that they have +got him and are bringing him here I would not be in his skin for all +the treasures of King Joseph. Yes, Nunez was always a devil, but he is +worse now. Somehow we always have bad luck, and the band gets smaller +and smaller, I don't suppose there's above fifty with him now. I +expect we shall have them pretty well all here this week." + +"No fear of a visit from the French?" + +"None; Reynier at Vittoria is busy now in sending every man he can +spare forward to the army that's gathering near Burgos." + +This was enough for Tom, who stole silently away to the spot where Sam +was anxiously awaiting him. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +JUST IN TIME. + + +"I shall go straight back to Vittoria, Sam. By what they say, General +Reynier is in command there, and as it was through his wife that all +this terrible business has come about, we have a right to expect him +to do his best to get us out of it. I will start at once. Now look +here, Sam. You must put yourself where you can keep watch over the +village. If you see any party come in, either to-night or to-morrow, +you must try and discover if Peter is among them. If he is, light a +fire down in that hollow where it can't be seen from above, but where +we can see it on that road. It's twenty miles to Vittoria; if I can +get to see General Reynier to-morrow, I may be back here with cavalry +by night; if he is out or anything prevents it, I will be here next +night, as soon after dusk as it will be safe. I will dismount the men +and take them over the hill, so as to avoid the sentinel who is sure +to be posted on the road when Nunez arrives. If they come in the +afternoon, Sam, and you find that anything is going to be done at +once, do everything you can to delay matters." + +"All right, Massa Tom, if, when you come back you find Massa Peter +dead, you be berry sure you find dis chile gone down too." + +It was seven o'clock next morning when Tom entered Vittoria, and +a few cautious inquiries proved the fact that General Reynier was +really in command of the French division there. He at once sought his +head-quarters, and after some talk with a woman selling fruit near the +house, heard that the general and his staff had started at daybreak, +but whither of course she knew not. Tom hesitated for some time, and +then, seeing an officer standing at the door, went up to him and asked +if the general would be back soon. + +"He will be back in an hour or two," the officer replied in Spanish, +"but it is no use your waiting to see him. He has his hands full and +can't be bothered with petitions as to cattle stolen or orchards +robbed. Wait till we have driven the English back, and then we shall +have time to talk to you." + +"Your pardon," Tom said humbly. "It is not a complaint that I have to +make, it is something of real importance which I have to communicate +to him." + +"You can tell me, I am Colonel Decamps; it will be all the same thing +if your news is really important." + +"Thank you very kindly, senor, it must be the general himself; I will +wait here." Thereupon Tom sat down with his back to the wall a short +distance off, pulled out some bread and fruit he had bought in the +town, and began quietly to eat his breakfast. An hour later a pretty +carriage with two fine horses drew up to the door. It was empty, +and was evidently intended for some one in the house. Suddenly, the +thought flashed across his mind, perhaps Madame Reynier and her child +were there. It was curious that the thought had not occurred to him +before, but it had not, and he drew near, when a sentry at the door +roughly ordered him to stand further back. Presently a lady came to +the door, accompanied by a little girl. There she stood for a minute +talking with the officer with whom Tom had spoken. At the moment a +young officer passed Tom on his way to the house. + +"Monsieur," Tom said, in French, "do me the favor to place that ring +in the hands of Madame Reynier. It is a matter of life and death. +She will recognize the ring, it is her own," he added, as the young +officer in surprise hesitated. He was a bright handsome young fellow, +and after a moment's, pause, he went up to the lady. "My dear aunt," +he said, "here is a mystery. An old Spanish beggar speaks French, not +very good French, but enough to make out, and he begs me to give you +this ring, which he says is yours, and which, by the way, looks a +valuable one." Madame Reynier, in some surprise, held out her hand +for the ring. "It is not mine," she began, when a sudden thought +struck her, and turning it round she saw "a Louise Reynier, tumors +reconnaissance," which she had had engraved on it, before giving it to +Tom. "Who gave it to you, Jules?" she asked eagerly. + +"That old pedler," Jules said. + +"Bring him in," Madame Reynier said, "the carriage must wait; I must +speak to him and alone." + +"My dear aunt," began her nephew. + +"Don't be afraid, Jules, I am not going to run away with him, and if +you are a good boy you shall know all about it afterwards, wait here, +Louise, with your cousin;" and beckoning to Tom to follow her, she +went into the house, the two officers looking astounded at each other +as the supposed Spanish pedler followed her into her sitting-room. + +"What is your message?" she asked. + +Tom's answer was to remove his wide hat, wig, and beard. + +"Himself!" Madame Reynier exclaimed, "my preserver," and she held out +both her hands to him. "How glad I am, but oh! how foolish to come +here again, and--and"--she hesitated at the thought that he, an +English spy, ought not to come to her, the wife of a French general. + +Tom guessed her thought. "Even General Reynier might succor us without +betraying the interests of his country. Read that, madame; it is an +open letter," and he handed her Lord Wellington's letter. + +She glanced through it and turned pale. "Your brother! is he in the +hands of the guerillas? Where? How?" + +"He is in the hands of that scoundrel Nunez; he swore he would be +revenged for that day's work, and he has had Peter carried off. No +doubt to kill him with torture." + +"Oh! and it is through me," Madame Reynier exclaimed, greatly +distressed. "What can we do! Please let me consult with my friends, +every soldier shall be at your service," and she opened the door. +"Colonel Deschamps, Jules, come here directly, and bring Louise with +you." These officers, on entering, were struck dumb with astonishment +on finding a young peasant instead of an old pedler, and at seeing +tears standing in Madame Reynier's eyes. "Louise," she said to her +daughter, "look at this gentleman, who is he?" + +The child looked hard at Tom; he was dressed nearly as when she first +saw him--and as he smiled she recognized him. "Oh, it is the good +boy!" she cried, and leaped into Tom's arms, and kissed him heartily. + +"Do you think we have gone mad, Jules, Louise and I? This is one of +the young English officers who saved our lives, as you have often +heard me tell you." + +Jules stepped forward, and shook Tom's hand heartily, but Colonel +Deschamps looked very serious. "But, madame," he began, "you are wrong +to tell me this." + +"No, Colonel;" Madame Reynier said, "here is a letter, of which this +gentleman is the bearer, from Lord Wellington himself, vouching for +him, and asking for the help of every Frenchman." + +Colonel Deschamps read it, and his brow cleared, and he held out his +hand to Tom. "Pardon my hesitation, sir," he said in Spanish; "but I +feared that I was placed in a painful position, between what I owe +to my country, and what all French soldiers owe to you, for what you +did for Madame Reynier. I am, indeed, glad to find that this letter +absolves me from the former duty, and leaves me free to do all I can +to discharge the latter debt. Where is your brother, and why has he +been carried off? I have known hundreds of our officers assassinated +by these Spanish wolves, but never one carried away. An English +officer, too, it makes it the more strange!" + +Tom now related the story of Peter's abduction; the previous attempts +of members of Nunez's band to assassinate them, and the reasons he +had for believing that Peter was close to, if not already at, the +headquarters of that desperado. + +"Is he still there?" Jules asked. "We routed him out directly the +general came up here. My aunt declared herself bound by a promise, and +would give us no clue as to the position of the village, but he had +made himself such a scourge, that there were plenty of others ready to +tell; if we had known the roads, we would have killed the whole band, +but unfortunately they took the alarm and made off. So he has gone +back there again. Ah! there is the general." + +Madame Reynier went out to meet her husband, and drawing him aside +into another room, explained the whole circumstance to him, with +difficulty detaining him long enough to tell her story, as the moment +he found that his wife and child's deliverer was in the next room, he +desired to rush off to see him. The story over, he rushed impetuously +into the room, where Tom was explaining his plans to his French +friends, seized him in his arms, and kissed him on both cheeks, as if +he had been his son. + +"I have longed for this day!" he said, wiping his eyes. "I have prayed +that I might some day meet you, to thank you for my wife and child, +who would have been lost to me, but for you. And now I hear your +gallant brother is paying with his life for that good deed. Tell me +what to do, and if necessary I will put the whole division at your +orders." + +"I do not think that he will have above fifty men with him, general; +say eighty, at the outside. Two squadrons of cavalry will be +sufficient. They must dismount at the bottom of the hill, and I will +lead them up. We must not get within sight of the hill till it is too +dark for their look-out to see us, or the alarm would be given, and we +should catch no one. We shall know if they have arrived, by a fire my +man is to light. If they have not come, then I would put sentries on +guard upon every road leading there, and search every cart that comes +up; they are sure to have got him hid under some hay, or something of +that sort, and there are not likely to be more than two or three men +actually with it, so as not to attract attention. It will be all right +if they do not arrive there to-day." + +"It is about five hours' ride for cavalry," the general said, "that +is at an easy pace; it will not be dark enough to approach the hill +without being seen till eight o'clock. Two squadrons shall be paraded +here at three o'clock. I will go with you myself; yes, and you shall +go too, Jules," he said, in answer to an anxious look from his nephew. +"In the mean time you can lend our friend some clothes; you are about +the same size." + +"Come along," Jules said laughing; "I think we can improve your +appearance," and, indeed, he did so, for in half an hour Tom returned +looking all over a dashing young French hussar, and little Louise +clapped her hands and said-- + +"He does look nice, mamma, don't he? Why can't he stay with us always, +and dress like that? and we know he's brave, and he would help papa +and Jules to kill the wicked English." + +There was a hearty laugh, and Jules was about to tell her that Tom was +himself one of the wicked English, but Madame Reynier shook her head, +for, as she told him afterwards, it was as well not to tell her, for +little mouths would talk, and there was no occasion to set everyone +wondering and talking about the visit of an English officer to General +Reynier. "There is no treason in it, Jules, still one does not want to +be suspected of treason, even by fools." + +Sam watched all night, without hearing any sound of vehicles, but in +the morning he saw that several more guerillas had come in during the +night. In the morning parties of twos and threes began to come in +from the direction of Vittoria, and it was evident from the shouting +and noise in the village that these brought satisfactory news of +some kind. In the afternoon most of them went out again in a body +to the wood at the foot of the hill, and soon afterwards Sam saw a +cart coming along across the plain. Two men walked beside it, and +Sam could see one, if not two more perched upon the top of the load. +Three others walked along at a distance of some fifty yards ahead, and +as many more at about the same distance behind. He could see others +making their way through the fields. "Dis berry bad job," Sam said +to himself; "me berry much afraid dat Massa Tom he not get back in +time. Der's too many for Sam to fight all by himself, but he must +do someting." Whereupon Sam set to to think with all his might, and +presently burst into a broad grin. "Sure enough dat do," he said; "now +let me arrange all about what dey call de pamerphernalia." First, he +emptied out the contents of a couple of dozen pistol cartridges; he +wetted the powder and rolled it up in six cartridges, like squibs, +three short ones and three much longer. Then he opened Tom's kit, +and took out a small box of paints, which Tom had carried with him +for making dark lines on his face, and in other ways to assist his +disguise. Taking some white paint, Sam painted his eyelids up to his +eyebrows, and a circle on his cheeks, giving the eyes at a short +distance the appearance of ghastly saucers. + +"Dat will do for de present," he said; "now for business. If dey wait +till it get dark, all right; if not, Sam do for Nunez and two or three +more, and den go down with Massa Peter!" + +Then carefully examining the priming of the pair of pistols, which +he carried--the very pistols given to Peter by the passengers of the +Marlborough coach--he prepared to set out. + +It was now six o'clock, and he calculated that the waggon would by +this time have mounted the hill, and reached the village; he had +already collected a large heap of dry sticks and some logs, at the +point Tom had pointed out, these he now lit, and then started for the +top of the hill. Looking back, just as he reached the crest, he could +see, knowing where it was, a very light smoke curling up over a clump +of trees which intervened between him and the fire, but it was so +slight that he was convinced that it would not be noticed by an +ordinary observer. Sam saw at once, on reaching the top of the hill, +that the guerillas were crowded round the waggon, which stood at the +edge of a small clump of trees in the middle of the village. The +moment was favourable, and he at once started forward, sometimes +making a detour, so as to have the shelter of a tree, sometimes +stooping behind a low stone wall, until he reached the first house +in the village. It was now comparatively easy work, for there were +enclosures and walls, the patches of garden-ground were breast-high +with weeds, and, stooping and crawling, Sam soon reached a house close +to the waggon. It was a mere hut, and had not been repaired. The roof +was gone, but the charred shutters and doors still hung on their +hinges. It was the very place from which to see without being seen. +Sam entered by a door from behind, and found that, through a slight +opening in the window-shutter, he could see all that was going on. +Some fifty guerillas were standing or sitting in groups at a distance +of twenty yards. + +In the centre of the groups, lying on the ground, was a figure which +he at once recognized as Peter. It was wound round and round with +ropes; beside it stood, or rather danced, Nunez pouring forth strings +of abuse, of threats, and of curses, and enforcing them with repeated +kicks at the motionless figure. + +"De debil!" muttered Sam, "me neber able to stand dis. If you not stop +dat, Massa Nunez, me put a bullet through dat ugly head of yours, as +sure as you stand dere. But me mustn't do it till last ting; for, +whether I kill him or not, it's all up with Massa Peter and me if I +once fire." + +Fortunately Nunez was tired, and in a short time he desisted, and +threw himself down on the ground. "Take off his ropes, one of you," he +said: "there would be no fear of his running away had he three or four +days to live, instead of as many hours. Take the gag out of his mouth, +throw some water over him to bring him round, and pour some wine down +his throat. I want him to be fresh, so as to be able to enjoy the +pleasure we have in store for him. And now let's have dinner." + +Sam felt that for another hour at least Peter was safe, and +therefore, with the same precaution as before, he crept away from his +hiding-place, through the village, and over the hill-crest, to the +place where he had made his fire. The logs were burning well, but gave +out but little smoke. Sam looked at the sky. "Dusk cum on berry fast," +he said; "another hour Massa Tom come on with soldiers. If he see +fire, he hurry up sharp." So saying, Sam heaped on a pile of wood, +and then made his way back. He knew that Tom would not approach until +it was too dark for the movements of the troops to be seen by the +look-outs, and that he could not be expected to reach the village +until fully an hour after dark. "Just another hour and a half," he +said to himself; "ebery thing depend upon what happen before dat +time." It was quite dusk before he regained the shelter of the +cottage. He had gone round by the wagon, and had taken from it a large +stable-fork, muttering as he did so. "Golly! dis de berry ting." +Close by he saw the carcase of a bullock which the guerillas had just +slaughtered, and from this he cut off the horns and tail. + +When Sam peeped out through the shutter he saw that something was +going to be done. Nunez was sitting smoking a cigarette, with a look +of savage pleasure in his face, while the men heaped up a large fire +in front of the trees. + +"I don't like dat gentleman's look," Sam said to himself. "It's time +dis chile begin to dress for de pantomime, dat quite plain. Massa Tom +get here too late." Thus saying, Sam began to deliberately undress. + +Peter, his arms and feet still bound, was sitting with his back +against a tree, watching what were, he was convinced, the preparations +for his death. For the last ten days he had lived in a sort of +confused and painful dream. From the moment, when, upon entering his +room two hands suddenly gripped his throat, others thrust a gag in the +mouth, and then blindfolded him, while some one from behind lashed his +arms to his side, and then altogether, lifting him like a log, carried +him downstairs and threw him into a cart, he had not till now seen +anything. The bandage had never been removed from his eyes, or the +cords from his limbs. Sometimes he had been made to sit up, and soup +and wine had been poured down his throat, or a piece of bread thrust +into his mouth; then he had been again gagged and thrown into a cart. +Over him brushwood and fagots had been piled, and there he had lain, +until at night a stop was made, when he was taken out, fed, and then +thrust back again and covered over. + +From the first he had never doubted who were his captors, or what was +his destination, and he therefore experienced no surprise whatever, +when, on his arrival at the village, on the bandage being taken off +his eyes, he saw where he was. That it was useless to beg for mercy of +the savages into whose power he had fallen he knew well enough, and he +looked as calm and indifferent, as if he did not hear a word of the +threats and imprecations which Nunez was heaping on him. + +"You see that fire," the enraged guerilla said, "there you shall be +roasted! English pig that you are! But not yet. That were too quick +a death! Here," he said to his followers, "make a little fire by the +side of the big one--there under the arm of that tree; and put on +plenty of green leaves: we will smoke our pig a bit before we roast +him!" + +Peter still eyed him unflinchingly. He was determined that no pain +should wring a complaint or prayer for mercy. Even now he did not +quite despair, for he thought that he had just one chance of life. He +was sure that Tom would move heaven and earth to save him. He reckoned +that he would at once guess who had carried him off, and with what +object; and he felt that Tom would be certain to set off to his +rescue. All this he had reflected over in his long days of weary +suffering, and from the moment that he was unbandaged, and propped +against the tree, he had listened attentively for any unusual sound. +How Tom could rescue him he did not see. He was so utterly crippled, +from his long confinement, that he knew that it would be hours, +perhaps days, before he could walk a step; yet, still he thought it +possible that Tom might try; and he feared more than he hoped, for he +trembled lest, if Tom were really there, that he would do some rash +thing, which would involve him in his fate. "Whether Tom is here or +not," Peter thought as he looked unflinchingly at Nunez, "one thing +is certain, if I know my brother, you will not have many days to live +after me, for Tom will follow you all over Spain, but he will avenge +me at last!" Such were Peter's thoughts, and so likely did he think it +that Tom was present, that he was scarcely surprised when he heard, as +from the ground behind him, a well-known voice. + +"Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam here, Massa Tom he be here +in another half hour with French soldiers. If dey go to kill you +before dat, Sam play dem trick. Can you run, Massa Peter, if I cut de +cord?" + +"No, Sam." + +"Dat bad job. Neber mind, Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam +keep quiet as long as he can, but when de worst come Sam do de trick +all right." + +"Don't show yourself, Sam. It would only cost you your life, and +couldn't help me; besides, it would put them on their guard. They +won't kill me yet. They will smoke me, and so on, but they will make +it last as long as they can." + +Peter was able to say this, for at the moment Nunez was occupied in +rolling and lighting a second cigarette. Peter received no answer, for +Sam, seeing some guerillas bringing sticks and leaves to make a fire, +as Nunez, had ordered, crept back again into the deep shadow behind. +The fire was now giving out volumes of smoke, a guerilla climbed up +the tree and slung a rope over it, and three others approached Peter. +His heart beat rapidly; but it was with hope, not fear. He knew, from +the words of Nunez, that at present he was not going to be burned, +but, as he guessed, to be hung over the smoke until he was insensible, +and then brought to life again with buckets of water, only to have the +suffocation repeated, until it pleased Nunez to try some fresh mode of +torture. + +It was as he imagined. The rope was attached to his legs, and amid +the cheers of the guerillas, two men hauled upon the other end until +Peter swung, head downwards, over the fire. There was no flame, but +dense volumes of pungent smoke rose in his face. For a moment his eyes +smarted with agony, then a choking sensation seized him, his blood +seemed to rush into his head, and his veins to be bursting: and there +was a confused din in his ears and a last throb of pain, and then he +was insensible. + +"That's enough for the present," Nunez said; "cut him down." + +The men advanced to do so, but paused, with astonishment, for from +behind the great fire was a loud yell--"Yah, yah, yah!"--each louder +than the last, and then, leaping through the flames appeared, as they +supposed, the devil. Sam's appearance was indeed amply sufficient to +strike horror in the minds of a band of intensely superstitious men. +He had entirely stripped himself, with the exception of his sandals, +which he had retained in order to be able to run freely; on his head +were two great horns; in one hand he held a fork, and in the other +what appeared to be his tail, but which really belonged to the +slaughtered bullock. From his month, his horns, and the end of his +tail poured volumes of fire, arising, it needs not to say, from the +squibs he had prepared. The great white circles round the eyes added +to the ghastliness of his appearance, and seeing the terrible figure +leap apparently from the flames, it is no wonder that a scream of +terror rose from the guerillas. Whatever a Spanish peasant may believe +about saints and angels, he believes yet more implicitly in a devil. +Black, with horns, and a tail--and here he was--with these appendages +tipped with fire! Those who were able turned and fled in terror, those +who were too frightened to run fell on their knees and screamed for +mercy, while one or two fell insensible from fear. Taking the squibs +from his mouth, and giving one more startling yell, to quicken the +fugitives, Sam made two strides to where Peter was hanging, cut the +rope, and lowered him down. + +Nunez had at first joined in the flight, but looking over his shoulder +he saw what Sam was doing. His rage and frenzy, at the thought of +being cheated of his victim, even by the evil one himself, overcame +his fear, and he rushed back, shouting, "He is mine! He is mine! I +won't give him to you!" and fired a pistol almost in Sam's face. The +ball carried away a portion of one of Sam's ears, and with a yell, +even more thrilling than those he had given before, he plunged his +pitchfork into the body of the guerilla, then, exerting all his +immense strength, he lifted him upon it, as if he had been a truss of +straw, took three steps to the great bonfire and cast the brigand into +it. + +There was a volume of sparks, a tumbling together of big logs, and the +most cruel of the Spanish guerillas had ceased to exist. + +This awful sight completed the discomfiture of the guerillas--some +hearing their chief's shouts and the sound o his pistol had looked +round, but the sight of the gigantic fiend casting him into the fire +was too much for them. With cries of horror and fear they continued +their flight; a few of them, who had fallen on their knees, gained +strength enough, from fear, to rise and fly; the rest lay on their +faces. Sam saw that for the present all was clear, and lifting up +Peter's still insensible body, as if it had no weight whatever, he +turned and went at a brisk trot out of the village, then over the +crest and down towards the fire. + +Then he heard a ring of metal in front of him, and a voice said, "_Qui +vive_!" while another voice said, "Is that you, Sam?" + +"Bress de Lord! Massa Tom, dis is me sure enough: and what is much +better, here is Massa Peter." + +"Thank God!" Tom said fervently. "Is he hurt? Why don't you speak, +Peter?" + +"He all right, Massa Tom. He talk in a minute or two. Now smoke choke +him, he better presently. Here, massa, you take him down to fire, pour +a little brandy down his throat. Now, massa officer, I lead de way +back to village." + +As Tom took Peter in his arms a sudden fire of musketry was heard down +on the road. + +"Our fellows have got them," Jules said. "I don't know what has +alarmed them, but they are running away!" + +"Push forward," General Reynier said, "and give no quarter! Jules, +keep by the negro, and see that he comes to no harm. The men might +mistake him for a guerilla." + +The night was pitch dark, and the extraordinary appearance of Sam +could not be perceived until after scouring the village and shooting +the few wretches whom they found there, they gathered round the +fire. Before reaching it, however, Sam had slipped away for a moment +into the hut where he had stripped; here he quickly dressed himself, +removed the paint from his face, and rejoined the group, who were not +a little surprised at seeing his black face. + +In a short time the parties who had been posted on all the various +roads came in, and it was found that they had between them killed +some thirty or forty of the brigands, and had brought in two or three +prisoners. + +"Have you killed or taken Nunez?" General Reynier asked. "Our work is +only half done if that scoundrel has escaped." + +"I have asked the prisoners," one of the officers said, "and they tell +an extraordinary story, that the devil has just thrown him into the +fire!" + +"What do they mean by such folly as that," the general asked angrily. +"Were they making fun of you?" + +"No, sir, they were certainly serious enough over it, and they were +all running for their lives when they fell into our hands; they had +been horribly frightened at something." + +"Ask that fellow there," the general said, pointing to a prisoner who +had been brought in by another detachment, "he cannot have spoken to +the others." + +The man was brought forward, and then Jules asked him in Spanish: +"What were you all running away for?" + +The man gave a glance of horror at the fire. "The devil came with his +pitchfork, fire came out of his mouth, his tail and his horns were +tipped with sparks, the captain fired at him, of course the bullet did +no good, and the devil put his fork into him, carried him to the fire, +and threw him in." + +Jules and some of the other young officers burst out laughing, but the +general said:-- + +"Humph! We can easily prove a portion of the story. See if there are +any human remains in that fire." + +The wind was blowing the other way, but as a sergeant went up to the +fire in obedience to the general's order, he said:-- + +"There is a great smell of burnt flesh here, and, sapristi, yes," as +he tossed over the logs with his foot "there is a body here, sir, +pretty well burnt up." + +"It's a curious story," the general said. "Where is that negro, +perhaps he can enlighten us?" + +But Sam had already left to look after Peter. + +"Jules, put these fellows against that wall and give them a volley, +then march the men down to the wood where their horses are. We will +bivouac here for the night." + +A party now brought up Peter, who had quite come round, but was unable +to stand, or indeed to move his arms, so injured was he by the ropes, +which had completely cut their way into his flesh. However, he was +cheerful and bright, and able really to enjoy the supper which was +soon prepared. That done, General Reynier said:-- + +"Captain Scudamore, will you call your black man when he has finished +his supper, which, no doubt, he needs? I want him to tell me what took +place before we arrived. The prisoners were full of some cock-and-bull +story, that the devil had stuck his fork into their captain and +pitched him into the fire, and the story is corroborated, at least to +the extent of the fact that, on turning the fire over, we found a body +there." + +Sam, called and questioned, told the whole story, which Tom translated +as he went on to the French officers, and it was received with a +chorus of laughter at the thought of the oddity of Sam's appearance, +and of the brigands' terror, and with warm admiration for the able +stratagem and courage shown by the black. + +Tom was delighted, and Peter, who had until now been entirely ignorant +of the manner in which he had been saved, feebly pressed Sam's hand +and said a few words of gratitude and thanks, which so delighted Sam +that he retired to cry quietly. + +The next day they moved down to Vittoria, where Peter was tenderly +nursed by Madame Reynier. A week later he was fit to sit on horseback, +and the next day, after a hearty and affectionate parting, they +started to rejoin their own army. Both were now dressed as Spanish +gentlemen, and Jules, with four troopers accompanied them as an +escort. + +They made a long detour to avoid the French army in the field under +Clausel, and at last came within sight of the British outposts. Here +Jules and his escort halted, and after a warm embrace with the merry +young Frenchman, they rode forward, and, after the usual parleying +with the pickets, were passed forward to the officer commanding the +post. He happened to be well known to them, and after the first +surprise, and a few words of explanation, they rode on towards the +head-quarters of the army besieging Burgos. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +VITTORIA. + + +General Clausel fell back as Wellington advanced to Burgos, and the +British laid siege to the castle of that place. Like all Wellington's +sieges this was commenced with a wholly insufficient train of +artillery, and without the time necessary to carry out regular siege +operations. A considerable portion of the army were posted so as to +watch Clausel. The place was badly fortified, but the French under +Governor Dubreton defended themselves with immense skill and courage, +the English assaults were repulsed, successful sorties were made by +the garrison, and at last, after the failure of the fourth assault, +the siege was given up, and the allied armies turned their faces once +more towards Portugal. + +It was time; the operations in the south upon which Wellington had +relied to keep at least a portion of the French forces engaged, had +failed signally, and the French generals were bringing up their +troops from all parts of Spain, and General Souham, having under him +Generals Clausel, Maucune, and Foy, with a force far superior to +that of the British, advanced to give battle. Then Wellington, whose +Anglo-Portuguese troops were much weakened by sickness, fell back +rapidly, sending orders to General Hill, who commanded the troops left +behind in Madrid, to evacuate that city, and to fall back and unite +with him on the Tormes. + +It was only by some masterly maneuvering and some stiff fighting at +Venta de Pozo, on the Carrion, and on the Huebra, that Wellington drew +off his army to Ciudad Rodrigo. + +During the retreat the British suffered very severely, and the +discipline of the army became greatly impaired, so much so that Lord +Wellington issued a general order rebuking the army, saying that +"discipline had deteriorated during the campaign in a greater degree +than he had ever witnessed or read of in any army, and this without +any unusual privation or hardship, or any long marches." + +The number of stragglers may be imagined by the fact that the loss of +the allied army was upwards of nine thousand, of whom not more than +two thousand were killed and wounded at Burgos, and in the combats +during the retreat. This number includes the Spanish as well as the +Anglo-Portuguese loss. + +It was the beginning of December when the allied army reached their +winter quarters around Ciudad Rodrigo. It was fortunate that the +season of the year, and the necessity which the French had to refill +their magazines, and collect food, gave breathing time and rest to +the British. Although strengthened by his junction with Hill, and by +the arrival of reinforcements from the coast, Wellington was not in a +position to have made a stand against such a force as the French could +have brought against him. + +Tom and Peter Scudamore had rejoined the army at the hottest part +of the siege of Burgos, and had taken up their work at once. Lord +Wellington heard from Tom a brief account of what had taken place, +and said a few kind words expressive of his pleasure at their both +having escaped from so great a peril, and, grave and preoccupied as +he was with the position of his army, he yet laughed at the account +of the scare Sam had given the guerillas. Among their friends nothing +was talked of for a day or two but their adventure. The times were +stirring, however, and one event rapidly drove out another. Sam +became a greater favorite than ever among the officers of the staff, +while the orderlies were never tired of hearing how he pretty nearly +frightened a band of guerillas to death by pretending to be the evil +one in person. + +The next four months were passed in preparations for the grand attack +with which Wellington confidently hoped to drive the French out of +Spain. The news of the defeat of Napoleon in Russia had cheered the +hearts of the enemies of France, and excited them to make a great +effort to strike a decisive blow. The French army was weakened by the +withdrawal of several corps to strengthen the armies which Napoleon +was raising for his campaign in Germany, and British gold had been so +freely spent, that the Portuguese army was now in a really efficient +state; a portion of the Spanish army had been handed over to +Wellington, and were now in a far more trustworthy condition than +they had been heretofore, while the whole of the north of Spain was +in a state of insurrection, which the French, in spite of all their +efforts, were unable to repress. + +The invasion was delayed until the end of May, in order that the crops +might be in a fit state for the subsistence of the cavalry and baggage +animals; but in the last week in that month all was ready, and, in +several columns, the allied army poured into Spain nearly a hundred +thousand strong. The French, ignorant alike of Wellington's intentions +and preparations, were in no position to stem effectually this mighty +wave of war, and were driven headlong before it, with many fierce +skirmishes, until their scattered forces were, for the most part, +united on the Ebro. + +Here Joseph occupied a strong position, which he thought to hold until +the whole of his troops could come up; but Wellington made a detour, +swept round his right, and the French fell back in haste, and took +up their position in the basin of Vittoria, where all the stores and +baggage which had been carried off as the army retreated from Madrid, +Valladolid, Burgos, and other towns, were collected. At Vittoria were +gathered the Court, and an enormous mass of fugitives, as all the +Spaniards who had adhered to the cause of Joseph had, with their +wives and families, accompanied the French in their retreat. Hence +the accumulation of baggage animals, and carts, of stores of all +descriptions, of magazines, of food and artillery, of helpless, +frightened people, was enormous, and, for the retreat of the army in +case of defeat, there was but one good road, already encumbered with +baggage and fugitives! + +This terrible accumulation arose partly from the fault of Joseph, who +was wholly unequal to the supreme command in an emergency like the +present. Confused and bewildered by the urgency of the danger, he had +hesitated, wavered, and lost precious time. By resistance at any of +the rivers, which Wellington had passed unopposed, he might easily +have gained a few days, and thus have allowed time for the great mass +of fugitives to reach the French frontier, and for Foy and Clausel, +each of whom were within a day's march upon the day of the battle, to +have arrived with a reinforcement of 20,000 good fighting men. Instead +of this, he had suffered himself to be outflanked day after day, and +his army forced into retreat, without an effort at resistance--a +course of action irritating and disheartening to all troops, but +especially to the French, who, admirable in attack, are easily +dispirited, and are ill suited to defensive warfare. + +The position which he had now chosen for the battle, on which his +kingdom was to be staked, was badly selected for the action. The front +was, indeed, covered by the river Zadora, but this was crossed by +seven available bridges, none of which had been broken down, while +there was but the one good line of retreat, and this, besides being +already encumbered with baggage-wagons, could be easily turned by the +allies. The French army, weakened by 5000 men, who had marched upon +the preceding days, in charge of convoys for France, were still about +70,000 strong, the allies--British, Portuguese, and Spanish--about +80,000. The French were the strongest in artillery. + +Wellington, seeing that Joseph had determined to stand at bay, made +his arrangements for the battle. On the left, Graham, with 20,000 men, +was to attempt to cross the Zadora at Gamara Mayor, when he would +find himself on the main road, behind Vittoria, and so cut the French +line of retreat. Hill, with a like force, was to attack on the right, +through the defile of Puebla, and so, entering the basin of Vittoria, +to threaten the French right, and obtain possession of the bridge of +Nanclares. In the center, Wellington himself, with 30,000 troops, +would force the four bridges in front of the French center, and attack +their main position. + +At daybreak on the 21st of June, 1813, the weather being rainy with +some mist, the troops moved from their quarters on the Bayas, passed +in columns over the bridges in front, and slowly approached the +Zadora. About ten o'clock, Hill seized the village of Puebla, and +commenced the passage of the defile, while one of the Portuguese +battalions scaled the heights above. Here the French met them, and a +fierce fight ensued; the French were reinforced on their side, while +the 71st Regiment and a battalion of light infantry joined the +Portuguese. + +Villette's division was sent from the French center to join the fray, +while Hill sent up reinforcements. While the fight on the heights +still raged, the troops in the defile made their way through, and, +driving the French back, won the village of Subijano de Alava, in +front of the French main position. + +Meanwhile, far to the left, Graham came into action with Reille's +division at Gamara Mayor. The French here, knowing the vital +importance of the position, fought desperately, and the village of +Gamara was taken and retaken several times, but no effort upon the +part of the allies sufficed to carry either the bridge at this place +or that by which the main road crossed the river higher up. A force, +however, was pushed still farther to the left, and there took up a +position on the road at Durana, drove back a Franco-Spanish force +which occupied it, and thus effectively cut the main line of retreat +to France for Joseph's army. The main force under Wellington himself +was later in coming into action, the various columns being delayed by +the difficulties of making their way through the defiles. + +While waiting, however, for the third and seventh divisions, which +were the last to arrive, a peasant informed Wellington that the bridge +of Tres Puentes was unbroken and unguarded. Kempt's brigade of the +light division were immediately ordered to cross, and, being concealed +by the inequalities of the ground, they reached it and passed over +unobserved, taking their place under shelter of a crest within a few +hundred yards of the French main line of battle, and actually in rear +of his advanced posts. + +Some French cavalry now advanced, but no attack was made upon this +isolated body of British troops, for the French were virtually without +a commander. + +Joseph, finding his flank menaced by the movements of Graham and Hill, +now ordered the army to fall back to a crest two miles in the rear, +but at this moment the third and seventh divisions advanced at a run +towards the bridge of Mendoza, the French artillery opened upon them, +the British guns replied, a heavy musketry fire broke out on both +sides, and the battle commenced in earnest. Now the advantage gained +by the passage of Kempt's brigade became manifest, for the riflemen +of his division advanced and took the French advanced cavalry and +artillery in flank. These, thus unexpectedly attacked, fell back +hastily, and a brigade of the third division took advantage of the +moment and crossed the bridge of Mendoza. The other brigade forded the +river a little higher up, the seventh division and Vandeleur's brigade +of the light division followed, Hill pushed the enemy farther back, +and the fourth division crossed by the bridge of Nanclares; other +troops forded the river, and the battle became general all along the +line. + +Seeing that the hill in front of Arinez was nearly denuded of troops +by the withdrawal of Villette's division earlier in the day to oppose +Hill, Wellington launched Picton with the third division and Kempt's +brigade against it, and the French, thus attacked with great strength +and fury, and dispirited by the order to retreat, began to fall back. +Fifty pieces of artillery and a cloud of skirmishers covered the +movement, and the British guns answering, the whole basin became +filled with a heavy smoke, under cover of which the French retired +to the heights in front of Gomecha, upon which their reserves were +posted. Picton and Kempt carried the village of Arinez with the +bayonet, Vandeleur captured the village of Margarita, and the 87th +Regiment won that of Hermandad. + +This advance turned the flank of the French troops near Subijana de +Alava, and of those on the Puebla mountain, and both fell back in +disorder for two miles, until they made a junction with the main body +of their army. Still the British troops pressed forward, the French +again fell back, and for six miles a running fight of musketry and +artillery was kept up, the ground being very broken, and preventing +the concerted action of large bodies of troops. At six o'clock in the +afternoon the French stood at bay on the last heights before Vittoria, +upon which stood the villages of Ali and Armentia. Behind them was +the plain upon which the city stood, and beyond the city thousands +of carriages, animals, and non-combatants, women, and children, were +crowded together in the extremity of terror as the British shots rang +menacingly over their heads. + +The French here defended themselves desperately, and for a while the +allied advance was checked by the terrible fire of shot and shell. +Then the fourth division with a rush carried a hill on the left, and +the French again commenced their retreat. Joseph, finding the great +road absolutely blocked up, gave orders for a retreat by the road to +Salvatierra, and the army, leaving the town of Vittoria on its left, +moved off in a compact mass towards the indicated road. This, however, +like the other, was choked with carriages. It led through a swamp, +and had deep ditches on each side; the artillery, therefore, had to +cut their traces and leave their guns behind them, the infantry and +cavalry thrust aside the encumbrances and continued their march. +Reille, who had defended the upper bridges nobly until the last +moment, now came up, and his division acting as a rear guard, covered +the retreat, and the French retired with little further loss. + +They had lost the battle solely and entirely from the utter incapacity +of their general, for their loss had been but little greater than +that of the allies, and they fell back in perfect order and full of +fighting. The French loss, including prisoners, was not more than +6000, and that of the allies exceeded 5000. The French loss, however, +in material was enormous. They carried off two guns only, and 143 +fell into the hands of the British. They lost all their parks of +ammunition, all their baggage, all their stores, all their treasures, +all their booty. Last of all, they lost Spain. + +The British pursued the French army for some days, and then invested +the two fortresses of San Sebastian and Pampeluna. + +Ten days after the battle of Vittoria, Napoleon despatched Soult, one +of the best of his generals, to displace Joseph and assume the supreme +command of the French troops. Traveling with great speed, he reached +the frontier upon the 11th of July and took command. He soon collected +together the divisions which had retired beaten but not routed from +Vittoria, drew together the troops from Bayonne and the surrounding +towns, and in a few days found himself at the head of an army, +including the garrisons, of 114,000 men. Besides these there were the +armies of Aragon and Catalonia, numbering 60,000 men. + +After spending a few days in organizing the army, Soult moved forward +to relieve Pampeluna, and then in the heart of the Pyrenees were +fought those desperate combats at Maya, Roncevalles, Buenza, Sauroren, +and Dona Maria, which are known in history as the battles of the +Pyrenees. In these terrible nine days' fighting there were ten serious +combats, in which the allies lost 7300 men, the French, including +prisoners, over 15,000, and Soult fell back baffled and beaten across +the frontier. + +Throughout this account of the short and sanguinary campaign by which +in two short months Wellington shattered the power of the French and +drove them headlong from the Peninsula, but little has been said +respecting the doings of the Scudamores. Their duties had been heavy, +but devoid of any personal achievements or events. Wellington, the +incarnation of activity himself, spared no one around him, and from +early dawn until late at night they were on horseback, carrying orders +and bringing back reports. At night their quarters were sometimes +in a village hut, sometimes in a straggling chateau, which afforded +accommodation to the commander-in-chief and his whole staff. + +Sam, a good horseman now, was in the highest of spirits at being able +to accompany his masters, and, although the Spanish women crossed +themselves in horror when they first saw his black face, the boys +would hear shouts of laughter arising before they had been a quarter +of an hour in fresh quarters. He was a capital cook, and a wonderful +hand at hunting up provisions. + +There might not be a sign of a feathered creature in a village when +the staff came in, but in half an hour Sam would be sure to return +from foraging with a couple of fowls and his handkerchief full of +eggs. These were, of course, paid for, as the orders against pillaging +were of the strictest character, and the army paid, and paid +handsomely for everything it ate. + +It was, however, difficult to persuade the peasants that payment was +intended, and they would hide everything away with vigilant care at +the approach of the troops. When by the display of money they were +really persuaded that payment was intended, they would produce all +that they had willingly enough, but the number of officers wanting +to purchase was so great and the amount of live stock so small in +the war-ravaged country, that few indeed could obtain even for money +anything beside the tough rations of freshly-killed beef issued by the +commissariat. + +Let the supply be ever so short, however, Sam never returned +empty-handed, and the fowls were quickly plucked and on the fire +before any one else had succeeded in discovering that there was a bird +in the village. + +Sam's foraging powers passed into a joke with the staff, and the +Scudamores became so curious to discover the reason of his success, +that after repeated questioning they persuaded him to tell them. + +"Well, massa, de matter berry simple--just easy as fallin' off log. +Sam go along, look into yard ob de cottages, presently see feather +here, feather there. Dat sign ob fowl. Den knock at door. Woman open +always, gib little squeak when she see dis gentleman's colored face. +Den she say, 'What you want? Dis house full. Quarter-master take him +up for three, four officer.' Den Sam say, 'Illustrious madam, me want +to buy two fowls and eggs for master,' and Sam show money in hand. Den +she hesitate a little, and not believe Sam mean to pay. Den she say, +'No fowls here.' Den Sam point to de feathers. Den she get in rage and +tell lie and say, 'Dem birds all stole yesterday.' Den Sam see it time +to talk to de birds--he know dem shut up somewhere in de dark, and Sam +he begin to crow berry loud; Sam berry good at dat. He crow for all +de world like de cock. Dis wake dem up, and a minute one, two, three, +half a dozen cock begin to answer eider from a loft ober house, or +from shed, or from somewhere. Den de woman in terrible fright, she +say, 'Me sell you two quick, if you will go away and swear you tell no +one.' Den Sam swear. Den she run away, come back wid de fowls and some +eggs, and always berry much astonished when Sam pay for dem. After dat +she lose her fear, she see me pay, and she sells de chickens to oders +when they come till all gone. Dat how dis chile manage de affairs, +Massa Tom." + +The Scudamores had a hearty laugh, and were well pleased to find that +Sam's method was one to which not even the strictest disciplinarian +could object, a matter concerning which they had previously had grave +doubts. + +While the battles of the Pyrenees were being fought, the siege of +St. Sebastian had continued, and once again the British troops had +suffered a terrible loss, from the attempt to carry a fortress with +an insufficient siege-train, and without the time necessary to drive +the trenches forward in regular form. St. Sebastian stood upon a +peninsula. In front of the neck of this peninsula was the hill of San +Bartholomeo, on which stood the convent of that name. At the narrowest +part of the neck stood a redoubt, which was called the Cask Redoubt, +because it was constructed of casks filled with stand. Behind this +came the horn-work and other fortifications. Then came the town, while +at the end of the peninsula rose a steep rock, called Mount Orgullo, +on which stood the citadel. Upon its left side this neck of land was +separated from the mainland by the River Urumea; and upon the heights +of Mount Olia and the Chofres, across the Urumea, were placed the +British batteries, which breached the fortifications facing the river. + +General Graham commanded the allied forces, which were detached to +undertake the siege, and on the 10th of July batteries were commenced +against the convent of San Bartholomeo, which had been fortified by +the French. On the 17th the convent was in ruins, and an assault was +made upon the position. The 9th Regiment took the place in gallant +style, but an attempt being made to carry the cask redoubt, with a +rush, the assault was repulsed, the British remaining possessors of +San Bartholomeo. + +On the 24th the batteries on Mount Olia, having effected what was +believed to be a practicable breach, 2000 men of the fifth division, +consisting of the 3d battalion of the Royals, the 38th, and the 9th, +made an assault at night. To arrive at the breach they had to make +their way along the slippery rocks on the bed of the Urumea, exposed +to a flank-fire from the river-wall of the town. The breachers had +been isolated from the town, and guns placed to take the stormers in +flank. The confusion and slaughter were terrible, and at daybreak the +survivors fell back, with a loss of forty-nine officers and 520 men. + +The whole arrangement of the siege was bad. The plan of Major Smith, +of the engineers, a most excellent officer, which had been approved +by Wellington, was not followed, and the assault, contrary to +Wellington's explicit order, took place at night, instead of by day, +the consequence being confusion, delay, and defeat. The total loss to +the allies of this first siege of St. Sebastian was 1300 men. + +Neither of the Scudamores were present at the first siege, but both +witnessed the second assault, of the 31st of August, as Wellington +himself was present on the 30th, to see to the execution of the +preparation for attack, and they obtained leave to remain for the next +day to witness the assault. The siege had been resumed on the 5th of +that month, and on the 23d the batteries had opened fire in earnest, +and immense damage was done to the defenses and garrison. But upon +this occasion, as upon the former one, the proper precautions were not +taken; no lodgment had been effected in the horn-work, and, worst of +all, the blockade had been so negligently conducted by the fleet, that +large bodies of fresh troops, guns, and ammunition had been passed +in, and the defense was even stronger than it had been when the first +assault was delivered. + +General Graham took up his position on the heights of the Chofres to +view the assault, and the Scudamores stationed themselves near him. +A dense mist hid the fortress from view, and it was not until eight +o'clock that the batteries were able to open. Then for three hours +they poured a storm of shot and shell upon the defences. The +Scudamores sat down in one of the trenches, where they were a little +sheltered from the blazing heat of the sun, and Sam took his place at +a short distance from them. + +As the clock struck eleven the fire slackened, and at that moment Sam +exclaimed, "Grolly, Massa Tom, dere dey go." As he spoke Robinson's +brigade poured out from the trenches, and, passing through the +openings in the sea-wall, began to form on the beach. + +It was known that the French had mined the angle of the wall +overhanging the beach, and a sergeant, followed by twelve men, dashed +gallantly forward to try to cut the train leading to the mine. He was +unsuccessful, but the suddenness of the rush startled the French, who +at once fired the mine, which exploded, destroying the brave sergeant +and his party, and thirty of the leading men of the column, but not +doing a tithe of the damage which it would have inflicted had the +column been fairly under it. + +"Hurrah! dere dey go," Sam exclaimed as the column clambered over +the ruins and pursued its way unchecked along the beach. They had, +however, to make their way under a storm of fire. + +The French, as before, lined the wall, and poured a tremendous +musketry fire into their flank, and the batteries of Mount Orgullo and +St. Elmo plied them with shot and shell, while two pieces of cannon on +the cavalier and one on the horn-work raked them with grape. + +Still the column neither halted nor faltered, but dashed, like a wave, +up the breach. When, however, they reached the top they could go no +farther. A deep gulf separated them from the town, while from every +loop-hole and wall behind, the French musketry swept the breach. The +troops could not advance and would not retreat, but sullenly stood +their ground, heaping the breach with their dead. Fresh bodies of men +came up, and each time a crowd of brave men mounted the breach, only +to sink down beneath the storm of fire. + +"This is awful, horrible, Tom!" Peter said in a choked voice. "Come +away, I can't look at this slaughter, it is a thousand times worse +than any battle." + +Tom made no reply, his own eyes were dim with tears, and he rose to +go, taking one more look at the deadly breach, at whose foot the +survivors of the last attempt had sunk down, and whence the mass of +soldiers were keeping up a musketry fire against the guns and unseen +foes who were sweeping them away, when an officer ran up from General +Graham's side, and in a minute fifty guns from the Chofres batteries +opened a storm of fire upon the curtain and the traverses behind the +breach. + +It was a terrible trial to the nerves of the assaulting columns when +this terrific fire was poured upon a spot only twenty feet above them; +but they were not men to shrink, and the men of the light division +seized the opportunity to pull up the broken masonry and make a +breastwork, known in military terms as a lodgment. + +For half an hour the iron storm poured overhead unchecked, smashing +the traverse, knocking down the loop-holed walls, and killing numbers +of the defenders. Then it ceased, and the troops leapt to their feet, +and again rushed up the breach, while the 13th Portuguese Regiment, +followed by a detachment of the 24th, waded across the Urumea under a +heavy fire from the castle, and attacked the third breach. + +But still no entry could be effected. The French fire was as heavy as +ever, and the stormers again sank baffled to the foot of the great +breach. The assault seemed hopeless, the tide was rising, the reserves +were all engaged, and the men had done all that the most desperate +courage could do. For five hours the battle had raged, when, just as +all appeared lost, one of those circumstances occurred which upset all +calculations and decide the fate of battles. + +Behind the traverses the French had accumulated a great store of +powder barrels, shells, and other combustibles. Just at this moment +these caught fire. A bright flame wrapped the whole wall, followed by +a succession of loud explosions; hundreds of French grenadiers were +destroyed, and before the smoke had cleared away, the British burst +like a flood through the first traverse. + +Although bewildered by this sudden disaster, the French rallied, and +fought desperately; but the British, desperate with the long agony +of the last five hours, would not be denied; the light division +penetrated on the left, the Portuguese on the right. The French, still +resisting obstinately, were driven through the town to the line of +defense at the foot of Mount Orgullo, and the town of St. Sebastian +was won. + +"Will you go across, Peter, and enter the town?" + +"No, no, Tom; the sight of that horrible breach is enough for me. +Let us mount, and ride off at once. I am quite sick after this awful +suspense." + +It was as well that the Scudamores did not enter the town, as, had +they done so, they might have shared the fate of several other +officers, who were shot down while trying to stop the troops in their +wild excesses. No more disgraceful atrocities were ever committed by +the most barbarous nations of antiquity than those which disgraced the +British name at the storming of St. Sebastian. Shameful, monstrous as +had been the conduct of the troops at the storming of Ciudad Rodrigo +and at Badajos, it was infinitely worse at St. Sebastian. As Rapin +says, hell seemed to have broken loose. + +The castle held out until the 9th, when it surrendered, and the +governor and his heroic garrison marched out with the honors of war. +The British loss in the second siege exceeded 2500 men and officers. + +There was a pause of two months after the fall of St. Sebastian, +and it was not until the 10th of November that Wellington hurled +his forces against the lines which, in imitation of those of Torres +Vedras, Soult had formed and fortified on the river Nivelle to +withstand the invasion of France. After a few hours' desperate +fighting the French were turned out of their position with a loss of +killed, wounded, and prisoners, of 4265 men and officers, the loss of +the allies being 2694. + +Now the army of invasion poured into France. The French people, +disheartened by Napoleon's misfortunes in Germany, and by the long and +mighty sacrifices which they had for years been compelled to make, in +order to enable Napoleon to carry out his gigantic wars, showed but +slight hostility to the invaders. + +Wellington enforced the severest discipline, paid for everything +required for the troops, hanging marauders without mercy, and, finding +that it was impossible to keep the Spanish troops in order, he sent +the whole Spanish contingent, 20,000 strong, back across the Pyrenees. + +He then with the Anglo-Portuguese army moved on towards Bayonne, and +took up a position on both sides of the river Nive, driving the French +from their position on the right bank on December 9th. On the 13th, +however, Soult attacked that portion of the army on the right of the +river, and one of the most desperate conflicts of the war took place, +known as the battle of St. Pierre. General Hill commanded at this +battle, and with 14,000 Anglo-Portuguese, with 14 guns, repulsed the +furious and repeated attacks of 16,000 French, with 22 guns. + +In five days' fighting on the river the French lost more than as many +thousand men. + +The weather now for a time interrupted operations, but Wellington was +preparing for the passage of the Adour. Soult guarded the passages +of the river above Bayonne, and never dreamed that an attempt would +be made to bridge so wide and rough a river as is the Adour below +the town. With the assistance of the sailors of the fleet the great +enterprise was accomplished on the 13th of February, and leaving +General Hope to contain the force in the entrenched camp at Bayonne, +Wellington marched the rest of the army to the Gave. + +Behind this river Soult had massed his army. The British crossed by +pontoon bridges, and before the operation was concluded, and the +troops united, Soult fell upon them near Orthes. + +At first the French had the best of the fight, driving back both +wings of the allied forces, but Wellington threw the third and sixth +divisions upon the left flank of the attacking column and sent the +52nd Regiment to make a detour through a marsh and fall upon their +other flank. Taken suddenly between two fires the French wavered, +the British pressed forward again, and the French fell back fighting +obstinately, and in good order. The allies lost 2300 men, and the +French 4000. Soult fell back towards Toulouse, laying Bordeaux open to +the British. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +TOULOUSE. + + +Promotion for those who have the good fortune to have a post upon the +commander-in-chief's staff is rapid. They run far less risk than do +the regimental officers, and they have a tenfold better chance of +having their names mentioned in despatches. The Scudamores were so +mentioned for their conduct at Vittoria, the Pyrenees, and Orthes, +and shortly after the last-named battle the _Gazette_ from England +announced their promotion to majorities. This put an end to +their service as aides-de-camp, and they were attached to the +quarter-master's branch of the staff of Lord Beresford, who was upon +the point of starting with a small force to Bordeaux, where the +authorities, thinking more of party than of patriotism, had invited +the English to enter and take possession, intending to proclaim their +adhesion to the Bourbon dynasty. + +The boys were sorry at the exchange, as they feared that they should +lose the crowning battle of the campaign. It was evident that the +resistance of France was nearly at an end, the allies were approaching +Paris in spite of the almost superhuman efforts of Napoleon; the +people, sick of the war, refused all assistance to the military +authorities, and were longing for peace, and the end of the struggle +was rapidly approaching. + +Lord Beresford, however, divining their thoughts, assured them that +his stay at Bordeaux would be but short, and that they might rely +upon being present at the great battle which would probably be fought +somewhere near Toulouse, towards which town Soult had retreated after +the battle of Orthes. + +Upon the 8th of March, Beresford marched with 12,000 men for Bordeaux, +and meeting with no opposition by the way, entered that city on the +12th. The mayor, a royalist, came out to meet them, and by the upper +classes of the town they were received as friends rather than foes. +Handsome quarters were assigned to Lord Beresford and his staff, and +the Scudamores for a day or two enjoyed the luxury of comfortable +apartments and of good food after their hard fare for nine months. + +The day after they entered Bordeaux Tom had occasion to call at +the office of a banker in order to get a government draft cashed, +to pay for a number of wagons which had been purchased for the +quarter-master's department. The banker's name was Weale, an American, +said to be the richest man in Bordeaux. His fortune had been made, it +was said, by large government contracts. + +When Tom returned, Peter was surprised to see him looking pale and +excited. + +"What is the matter, Tom?" + +"Do you know, Peter, I am convinced that that American banker I have +been to see to-day is neither more nor less than that scoundrel, +Walsh, who bolted with all the bank funds, and was the cause of our +father's death." + +"You don't say so, Tom." + +"It is a fact, Peter, I could swear to him." + +"What shall we do, Tom?" + +"I only cashed one of the two drafts I had with me this morning; +Peter, you go this afternoon with the other, and, if you are as +certain as I feel about it, we will speak to Beresford at dinner." + +Peter returned in the afternoon satisfied that his brother's surmises +were correct, and that in the supposed American Weale they had really +discovered the English swindler Walsh. + +After dinner they asked Lord Beresford to speak to them for a few +minutes alone. + +The general was greatly surprised and interested at their +communication. + +"Of how much did this fellow rob your father's bank?" he asked. + +"The total defalcation, including money borrowed on title-deeds +deposited in the bank, which had to be made good, was, I heard, from +75,000_l._ to 80,000_l._," Tom said. + +"Very well," said Lord Beresford, "we will make the scoundrel pay up +with interest. Order out thirty men of the 13th." + +While the men were mustering, the general returned to the dining-room +and begged the officers who were dining with him to excuse him for +half an hour, as he had some unexpected business to perform. Then he +walked across with the Scudamores to the banker's house, which was +only in the next street. + +Twenty of the men were then ordered to form a cordon round the house +and to watch the various entrances. The other ten, together with the +officer in command, the general told to follow him into the house. The +arrangements completed, he rang at the bell, and the porter at once +opened the gate. + +He started and would have tried to shut it again, on seeing the armed +party. But Lord Beresford said, "I am the general commanding the +British troops here. Make no noise, but show me directly to your +master." + +The man hesitated, but seeing that the force was too great to be +resisted, led the way through the courtyard into the house itself. + +Some servants in the hall started up with amazement, and would have +run off, but Lord Beresford cried, "Stay quiet for your lives. No one +will be hurt; but if any one moves from the hall, he will be shot." +Then, followed by Tom and Peter only, he opened the door which the +porter pointed out to him as that of the room where the banker was +sitting. + +He was alone, and started to his feet upon beholding three British +officers enter unannounced. "What means this?" he demanded angrily. +"I am a citizen of the United States, and for any outrage upon me +satisfaction will be demanded by my Government." + +"I am Lord Beresford," the general said quietly, "and quite know what +I am doing. I do not quite agree with you that the Government of the +United States will make any demand for satisfaction for any outrage +upon your person, nor, if they do so, will it benefit you greatly; +for I am about, in five minutes' time, to order you to be shot, Mr. +Walsh." + +As the name was uttered the banker, who had listened with increasing +pallor to the stern words of the general, started violently, and +turned ghastly white. For a minute or so he was too surprised and +confounded to speak. Then he said, in a husky tone, "It is false; I am +an American citizen. I know nothing whatever about James Walsh." + +"James Walsh!" the general said; "I said nothing about James. It is +you who have told us his Christian name, which is, I have no doubt, +the correct one." + +He looked to Tom, who nodded assent. + +"I know nothing about any Walsh," the banker said doggedly. "Who says +I do?" + +"We do, James Walsh," Tom said, stepping forward. "Tom and Peter +Scudamore, the sons of the man you robbed and ruined." + +The banker stared at them wildly, and then, with a hoarse cry, dropped +into his chair. + +"James Walsh," the general said sternly, "your life is doubly forfeit. +As a thief and a swindler, the courts of law will punish you with +death;" for in those days death was the penalty of a crime of this +kind. "In the second place, as a traitor. As a man who has given aid +and assistance to the enemies of your country, your life is forfeit, +and I, as the general in command here, doom you to death. In five +minutes you will be shot in your courtyard as a thief and a traitor." + +"Spare me!" the wretched man said, slipping off his chair on to his +knees. "Spare my life, and take all that I have. I am rich, and can +restore much of that which I took. I will pay 50,000_l._" + +"Fifty thousand pounds!" the general said; "you stole 80,000_l._, +which, with interest, comes up to 100,000_l._, besides which you must +pay for acting as a traitor. The military chest is empty, and we want +money. I will value your wretched life at 25,000_l._ If you make that +sum a present to our military chest, and pay Major Scudamore the +100,000_l._ of which you swindled his father, I will spare you." + +"One hundred and twenty-five thousand pounds!" the banker said +fiercely. "Never, I will die first." + +"Very well," Lord Beresford said quietly. "Major Scudamore, please +call in the officer and four men." Tom did as requested, and Lord +Beresford then addressed the officer. "You will take this man, who is +an Englishman, who has been acting as a traitor, and giving assistance +to the French army, you will take a firing party, place him against +the wall of the yard, give him five minutes to make his peace with +God, and when the five minutes are up, unless he tells you before that +that he wishes to see me, shoot him." + +Pale and desperate, the banker was led out. + +"He will give way, I hope," Tom said, as the door closed behind him. + +"He will give way before the time is up," Lord Beresford said. "He is +a coward; I saw it in his face." + +Four minutes passed on, the door opened again, and the officer +returned with his prisoner. "He says he agrees to your terms, sir" + +"Very well" Lord Beresford answered; "remain outside with your men; +they may be wanted yet." + +The prisoner, without a word, led the way into an adjoining room, +which communicated with the public office. This was his private +parlor, and in a corner stood a safe. He unlocked it, and, taking out +some books and papers, sat down to the table. + +His mood had evidently changed. "I was a fool to hold out," he said, +"for I had my name for wealth against me, and might have known you +would not give way. After all, I do not know that I am altogether +sorry, for I have always had an idea that some day or other the thing +would come out, and now I can go back and be comfortable for the rest +of my life. How will you have the money, gentlemen? I have 50,000_l._ +in cash, and can give you a draft on the Bank of England for the rest. +You look surprised, but I have always been prepared to cut and run +from this country at the shortest notice, and every penny I have +beyond the cash absolutely required is in England or America." + +"I will take 25,000_l._ in cash for the use of the army," Lord +Beresford said. "I will send an officer of the commissariat to-morrow +for it. The 100,000_l._ you may pay these gentlemen in drafts on +England. Until I hear that these drafts are honored, I shall keep you +under surveillance, and you will not be suffered to leave your house." + +"It will be all right," Walsh said. "There--is my Bank of England +pass-book; you will see that I have 120,000_l._ standing to the credit +of J. Weale there. I have as much in America. I should not tell you +this did I not know that you are a gentleman, and therefore will not +raise terms now that you see I can pay higher. There, Mr. Scudamore, +is the draft, and, believe me or not, I am glad to repay it, and to +feel, for the first time for many years, a free man. Please to give +me a receipt for the 80,000_l._ due by me to the Bank, and for +20,000_l._, five years' interest on the same." + +Tom did as he was desired without speaking. There was a tone of +effrontery mingled with the half-earnestness of this successful +swindler that disgusted him. + +"There," the general said, as the receipts were handed over; "come +along, lads, the business is over, and I do not think that we have any +more to say to Mr. Weale." + +So saying, without further word, the three went out. + +Upon rejoining the officer without, Lord Beresford directed that a +sergeant and ten men were to be quartered in the house, and that a +sentry was to be placed at each entrance night and day, and that the +banker was not to be permitted to stir out under any pretence whatever +until further orders. + +"There, lads, I congratulate you heartily," he said as they issued +from the gate, in answer to the warm thanks in which the boys +expressed their gratitude to him; "it is a stroke of luck indeed that +you came with me to Bordeaux. It was rough-and-ready justice, and I +don't suppose a court of law in England would approve of it; but we +are under martial law, so even were that fellow disposed to question +the matter, which you may be very sure he will not, we are safe +enough. They say 'ill-gotten gains fly fast' but the scamp has +prospered on the money he stole. He owned to having another hundred +thousand safe in the States, and no doubt he has at least as much more +in securities of one sort or other here. I daresay he was in earnest +when he said that he did not mind paying the money to get rid of the +chance of detection and punishment, which must have been ever in his +mind. The best thing you can do, Scudamore, is to write to James +Pearson--he's my solicitor in London--and give him authority to +present this draft, and invest the sum in your joint names in good +securities. Inclose the draft. I shall be sending off an orderly with +despatches and letters at daybreak, and if you give me your letter +to-night, I will inclose it in a note of my own to Pearson." + +Five days later an order arrived for Lord Beresford to leave the +seventh division under Lord Dalhousie, in Bordeaux, and to march with +the fourth division to join the Commander-in-Chief, who was gradually +drawing near to Toulouse, beneath whose walls Soult was reorganizing +his army. The position was a very strong one, and had been rendered +almost impregnable by fortifications thrown upon the heights. +Wellington had, too, the disadvantage of having to separate his army, +as the town lay upon both sides of the Garonne. + +On the 10th of April the allied army attacked. Hill attacked the +defences of the town on the left bank, while Freyre's Spaniards, +Picton, with the third and light divisions, and Beresford with the +fourth and the sixth divisions, assaulted a French position. The +entrenchments in front of Picton were too strong to be more than +menaced. Freyre's Spaniards were repulsed with great loss, and the +brunt of the battle fell upon Beresford's division, which nobly +sustained the character of the British soldier for stubborn valor +in this the last battle of the war. The French fought stubbornly +and well, but fort by fort the British drove them from their strong +positions, and at five in the afternoon Soult withdrew the last of his +troops in good order across the canal which separated the position +they had defended from the town itself. The French lost five generals +and 3000 killed and wounded; the allies four generals and 4659 killed +and wounded, of which 2000 were Spaniards, for they upon this occasion +fought bravely, though unsuccessfully. + +On the 11th all was quiet, Wellington preparing for an attack upon the +city on the following day. Soult, however, finding that the British +cavalry had been sent off so as to menace his line of retreat, +evacuated the city in the night, drew off his army with great order +and ability, and by a march of twenty-two miles placed it in safety. +Upon the morning of the 12th Wellington entered Toulouse, and the +same afternoon two officers, one British, the other French, arrived +together from Paris, with the news of the abdication of Napoleon, and +the termination of the war. + +These officers had been detained for two days at Blois by the +officials there, and this delay had cost the blood of 8000 men, among +whom was Tom Scudamore, who had his left arm carried away by a cannon +ball. Sam, in the act of carrying his master from the field, was also +severely wounded in the head with a musket ball. + +Before the battle was fought they had received news from England that +the draft had been paid at the Bank of England, and that their future +was in consequence secure. The war being over, officers unattached to +regiments had little difficulty in getting leave of absence, as the +troops were to be embarked for England as soon as possible. Peter's +application, therefore, to accompany his brother was acceded to +without hesitation, and ten days after the battle of Toulouse he was +on board ship with Tom and Sam, both of whom were doing well. Three +days afterwards they landed in England. + +Rhoda met them, with Miss Scudamore, at Portsmith, having received a +letter telling them of Tom's wound, and of their being upon the point +of sailing. There was a great reduction of the army at the end of the +war, and the Scudamores were both placed upon half pay. This was a +matter of delight to Rhoda, and of satisfaction to themselves. They +had had enough of adventure to last for a life-time; and with the +prospect of a long peace the army no longer offered them any strong +attraction. + +When they returned to Miss Scudamore's their old friend Dr. Jarvis +came to visit them, and a happier party could not have been found in +England. The will of Mr. Scudamore, made before he was aware of his +ruin, was now acted upon. He had left 20,000_l._ to Rhoda, and the +rest of his fortune in equal parts between his boys. Both Tom and +Peter were fond of a country life, and they bought two adjoining +estates near Oxford, Rhoda agreeing to stop with them and Miss +Scudamore alternately. + +For a brief time there was a break in their happiness, Napoleon +escaped from Elba, and Europe was in a flame again. All the officers +on half pay were ordered to present themselves for duty, and the +Scudamores crossed with the army to Belgium, and fought at Waterloo. +Neither were hurt, nor was Sam, who had of course accompanied them. +Waterloo gave them another step in rank, and the Scudamores returned +as colonels to England. + +It was their last war. A few years afterwards they married sisters, +and Rhoda having the year previous married a gentleman whose estate +was in the same county, they remained as united as ever. Sambo held +for many a year the important position of butler to Tom, then he found +that one of the housemaids did not regard his color as any insuperable +obstacle, and they were accordingly married. It was difficult to say +after this exactly the position which Sam held. He lived at a cottage +on the edge of the estate, where it joined that of Peter, and his time +was spent in generally looking after things at both houses, and as +years went on his great delight was, above all things, to relate to +numerous young Scudamores the adventures of their father and uncle +when he first knew them as the Young Buglers. + +THE END. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS *** + +This file should be named 7ybug10.txt or 7ybug10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, 7ybug11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 7ybug10a.txt + +Produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis, +and PG Distributed Proofreaders + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03 + +Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/old/7ybug10.zip b/old/7ybug10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a54dc17 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/7ybug10.zip diff --git a/old/8ybug10.txt b/old/8ybug10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..462dd3a --- /dev/null +++ b/old/8ybug10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11237 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: The Young Buglers + +Author: G.A. Henty + +Release Date: January, 2006 [EBook #9613] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on October 10, 2003] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS *** + + + + +Produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis, +and PG Distributed Proofreaders + + + + +THE YOUNG BUGLERS + +by G.A. Henty + + + + +PREFACE + + +To my Young Readers. + +I remember that, as a boy, I regarded any attempt to mix instruction +with amusement as being as objectionable a practice as the +administration of powder in jam; but I think that this feeling arose +from the fact that in those days books contained a very small share +of amusement and a very large share of instruction. I have endeavored +to avoid this, and I hope that the accounts of battles and sieges, +illustrated as they are by maps, will be found as interesting +as the lighter parts of the story. As in my tale, "_The Young +Franc-Tireurs_," I gave the outline of the Franco-German war, so +I have now endeavored to give the salient features of the great +Peninsular struggle. The military facts, with the names of generals +and regiments, the dates and places, are all strictly accurate, and +any one who has read with care the story of "The Young Buglers" could +pass an examination as to the leading events of the Peninsular war. + +Yours truly, + +THE AUTHOR. + + + + +CONTENTS + + + CHAPTER I. A Coaching Adventure + + CHAPTER II. The Young Pickles + + CHAPTER III. Enlisted + + CHAPTER IV. A Tough Customer + + CHAPTER V. Overboard + + CHAPTER VI. Portugal + + CHAPTER VII. The Passage of the Douro--Talavera + + CHAPTER VIII. A Pause in Operations + + CHAPTER IX. "With the Guerillas" + + CHAPTER X. Madrid + + CHAPTER XI. The Fight on the Coa + + CHAPTER XII. Busaco and Torres Vedras + + CHAPTER XIII. Albuera + + CHAPTER XIV. Invalided Home + + CHAPTER XV. Ciudad Rodrigo and Badajos + + CHAPTER XVI. Salamanca + + CHAPTER XVII. Caught in a Trap + + CHAPTER XVIII. Just in Time + + CHAPTER XIX. Vittoria + + CHAPTER XX. Toulouse + + + + +THE YOUNG BUGLERS. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +A COACHING ADVENTURE. + + +Had any of the boys in the lower forms of Eton in the year 1808, been +asked who were the most popular boys of their own age, they would have +been almost sure to have answered, without the slightest hesitation, +Tom and Peter Scudamore, and yet it is probable that no two boys +were more often in disgrace. It was not that they were idle, upon the +contrary, both were fairly up in their respective forms, but they were +constantly getting into mischief of one sort or another; yet even +with the masters they were favorites, there was never anything low, +disgraceful, or ungentlemanly in their escapades, and they could be +trusted never to attempt to screen themselves from the consequences +by prevarication, much less by lying. If the masters heard that a +party of youngsters had been seen far out of bounds, they were pretty +sure that the Scudamores were among them; a farmer came in from a +distance to complain that his favorite tree had been stripped of +its apples--for in those days apples were looked upon by boys as +fair objects of sport,--if the head-master's favorite white poodle +appeared dyed a deep blue, if Mr. Jones, the most unpopular master +in the school, upon coming out of his door trod upon a quantity of +tallow smeared all over the doorstep, and was laid up for a week in +consequence, there was generally a strong suspicion that Tom and Peter +Scudamore were concerned in the matter. One of their tricks actually +came to the ears of the Provost himself, and caused quite a sensation +in the place, but in this case, fortunately for them, they escaped +undetected. + +One fine summer afternoon they were out on the water with two or three +other boys of their own age, when a barge was seen ahead at some short +distance from the shore. She was apparently floating down with the +stream, and the fact that a horse was proceeding along the towing-path +a little way ahead was not noticed, as the rope was slack and was +trailing under water. The boys, therefore, as they were rowing against +stream, steered their boat to pass inside of her. Just as they came +abreast of the horse a man on the barge suddenly shouted to the rider +of the horse to go on. He did so, the rope tightened, rose from the +water just under the bow of the boat, and in another minute the boys +were struggling in the water. All were good swimmers, and would +have cared little for the ducking had it occurred accidentally, but +the roars of laughter of the bargeman, and the chaff with which he +assailed them as they scrambled up the bank, showed clearly enough +that they had been upset maliciously. The boys were furious, and one +or two proposed that they should report the case, but Tom Scudamore +pointed out that the bargeman would of course declare that it was +a pure accident, and that the boys were themselves in fault in not +looking out whether the barge was being towed, before going inside +her, and so nothing would come of reporting. + +The boat was dragged ashore and emptied, and in a few minutes they +were rowing back towards the town. The distance was but short, and +they did not repass the barge before they reached their boat-house. +The brothers had exchanged a few words in a low voice on the way, and +instead of following the example of the others, and starting at a run +for the house where they boarded to change their clothes, they walked +down by the river and saw that the barge had moored up against the +bank, at a short distance below the bridge. They watched for a time, +and saw the bargeman fasten up the hatch of the little cabin and go +ashore. + +That night two boys lowered themselves with a rope from the window +of one of the dames-houses, and walked rapidly down to the river. +There were a few flickering oil lamps burning, and the one or two +old watchmen were soundly asleep in their boxes. They did not meet a +soul moving upon their way to the object of the expedition, the barge +that had run them down. Very quietly they slipped on board, satisfied +themselves by listening at the half-open hatch to the snoring within +that their enemy was there, then loosened the moorings so that they +could be thrown off at a moment's notice. + +"Now, Peter," the elder brother said, "open our lantern. The night is +quite still. You hold your hand behind it, so that the light will not +fall on our faces, and I will look whether he is only wrapped up in a +blanket or has a regular bed; we must not risk setting the place on +fire. Get the crackers ready." + +A dark lantern was now taken out from under Tom's jacket, and was +found to be still alight, an important matter, for striking a light +with flint and steel was in those days a long and tedious business, +and then opening it Tom threw the light into the cabin. It was a +tiny place, and upon a bench, wrapped up in a blanket, the bargeman +was lying. As the light fell on his eyes, he moved, and a moment +afterwards started up with an oath, and demanded who was there. + +No answer came in words, but half a dozen lighted crackers were thrown +into the cabin, when they began to explode with a tremendous uproar. +In an instant the hatch was shut down and fastened outside. The rope +was cast off, and in another minute she was floating down stream with +the crackers still exploding inside her, but with their noise almost +deadened by the tremendous outcry of shouts and howls, and by a +continued and furious banging at the hatch. + +"There is no fear of his being choked, Tom, I hope?" + +"No, I expect he's all right," Tom said, "it will be pretty stifling +for a bit no doubt, but there's a chimney hole and the smoke will find +its way out presently. The barge will drift down to the weir before it +brings up, there is not enough stream out for there to be any risk of +her upsetting, else we daren't have turned her adrift." + +The next day the whole town was talking of the affair, and in the +afternoon the bargeman went up to the head-master and accused one of +the boys of an attempt to murder him. + +Greatly surprised, the Provost demanded what reason the man had for +suspecting the boys, and the bargeman acknowledged that he had that +afternoon upset a boat with four or five boys in her. "They would not +bear you malice on that account," the Provost said; "they don't think +much of a swim such weather as this, unless indeed you did it on +purpose." + +The man hesitated in his answer, and the Provost continued, "You +evidently did do it on purpose, and in that case, although it was +carried too far, for I hear you had a very narrow escape of being +stifled, still you brought it upon yourself, and I hope it will be a +lesson to you not to risk the lives of Eton boys for your amusement. I +know nothing about this affair, but if you can point out the boys you +suspect I will of course inquire into it." + +The bargeman departed, grumbling that he did not know one of the young +imps from another, but if he did find them, he'd wring their necks for +them to a certainty. The Provost had some inquiries made as to the +boys who had been upset, and whether they had all been in at lock-up +time; finding that they had all answered to their names, he made no +further investigation. + +This affair had taken place in the summer before this story begins, +on the 15th of October, 1808. On that day a holiday was granted in +consequence of the head-master's birthday, and the boys set off, some +to football, some for long walks in the country. + +The Scudamores, with several of their friends, strolled down the +towing-path for some miles, and walked back by the road. As they +entered their dames-house on their return, Tom Scudamore said for the +twentieth time, "Well, I would give anything to be a soldier, instead +of having to go in and settle down as a banker--it's disgusting!" + +As they entered a boy came up. "Oh, Scudamore, Jackson's been asking +for you both. It's something particular, for he has been out three or +four times, and he wanted to send after you, but no one knew where you +had gone." + +The boys at once went into the master's study, where they remained all +the afternoon. A short time after they went in, Mr. Jackson came out +and said a word or two to one of the senior boys, and the word was +quickly passed round, that there was to be no row, for the Scudamores +had just heard of the sudden death of their father. That evening, Mr. +Jackson had beds made up for them in his study, so that they might not +have the pain of having to talk with the other boys. The housekeeper +packed up their things, and next morning early they started by the +coach for London. + +Mr. Scudamore, the father of the young Etonians, was a banker. He was +the elder of two brothers, and had inherited his father's business, +while his brother had gone into the army. The banker had married the +daughter of a landowner in the neighborhood, and had lived happily and +prosperously until her death, seven years before this story begins. +She had borne him three children, the two boys, now fifteen and +fourteen years old respectively, and a girl, Rhoda, two years younger +than Peter. The loss of his wife afflicted him greatly, and he +received another shock five years later by the death of his brother, +Colonel Scudamore, to whom he was much attached. From the time of his +wife's death he had greatly relaxed in his attention to his business, +and after his brother's death he left the management almost entirely +in the hands of his cashier, in whom he had unlimited confidence. +This confidence was wholly misplaced. For years the cashier had +been carrying on speculation upon his own account with the monies +of the bank. Gradually and without exciting the least suspicion he +had realized the various securities held by the bank, and at last +gathering all the available cash he, one Saturday afternoon, locked up +the bank and fled. + +On Monday it was found that he was missing; Mr. Scudamore went down +to the bank, and had the books taken into his parlor for examination. +Some hours afterwards a clerk went in and found his master lying back +in his chair insensible. A doctor on arriving pronounced it to be +apoplexy. He never rallied, and a few hours afterwards the news spread +through the country that Scudamore, the banker, was dead, and that the +bank had stopped payment. + +People could believe the former item of news, but were incredulous as +to the latter. Scudamore's bank was looked upon in Lincolnshire as at +least as safe as the Bank of England itself. But the sad truth was +soon clear to all, and for awhile there was great distress of mind +among the people, for many miles round, for most of them had entrusted +all their savings of years to the Scudamores' bank. When affairs were +wound up, however, it was found that things were not quite so bad as +had been feared. Mr. Scudamore had a considerable capital employed +in the bank, and the sale of his handsome house and estate realized +a large sum, so that eventually every one received back the money +they had entrusted to the bank; but the whole of the capital and the +profits of years of successful enterprise had vanished, and it was +calculated by the executors that the swindler must have appropriated +at least 80,000_l._ + +For the first month after their father's death the boys stayed with +the doctor who had long attended the family and had treated all their +ailments since they were born. In the great loss of their father the +loss of their fortune affected them but little, except that they were +sorry to be obliged to leave Eton; for the interest of the little +fortune which their mother had brought at her marriage, and which was +all that now remained to them, would not have been sufficient to pay +for their expenses there, and indeed such an education would have been +out of place for two boys who had to make their own way in life. At +the end of this month it was arranged that they were to go to their +only existing relative, an elder sister of Mr. Scudamore. The boys had +never seen her, for she had not for many years been friends with her +brother. + +The letter which she had written to the doctor, announcing her +willingness to receive them, made the boys laugh, although it did not +hold out prospects of a very pleasant future. "I am, of course," she +said, "prepared to do my duty. No one can say that I have ever failed +in my duty. My poor brother quarreled with me. It was his duty to +apologize. He did not do so. Had it been my duty to apologize I should +have done so. As I was right, and he was wrong, it was clearly not my +duty. I shall now do my duty to my niece and nephews. Yet I may be +allowed to say that I regret much that they are not all nieces. I do +not like boys. They are always noisy, and not always clean. They do +not wipe their shoes, they are always breaking things, they go about +with all sorts of rubbish and dirt in their pockets, their hair is +always rough, they are fond of worrying cats, and other cruel games. +Altogether they are objectionable. Had my brother made up his mind to +leave his children in my charge, it was clearly his duty to have had +girls instead of boys. However, it is not because other people fail +in their duty that I should fail in mine. Therefore, let them come to +me this day fortnight. By that time I shall have got some strong and +suitable furniture in the room that my nephews will occupy, and shall +have time to make other arrangements. This letter will, if all goes +well, reach you, I believe, in three days after the date of posting, +and they will take the same time coming here. Assure them that I am +prepared to do my duty, and that I hope that they will make a serious +effort at doing theirs. Ask my nephews, upon the occasion of their +first arrival, to make as little noise as they can, because my cat, +Minnie, is very shy, and if she is scared at the first meeting, +she will take a very long time to get accustomed to them. I also +particularly beg that they do not, as they come up to the house, throw +stones at any of the pigeons who may be resting upon the roof, for the +slates were all set right a few weeks ago, and I am sure I do not wish +to have the slater here again; they were hanging about for ten days +the last time they came. I do not know that I have anything else to +say." + +The boys received the reading of this singular epistle with shouts of +laughter. + +"Poor aunt," Tom said. "What does she think of us that she can suppose +that, upon our very first arrival, we should come in like wild +Indians, throwing stones at her pigeons, and frightening her Minnie +into fits. Did you ever hear such an extraordinary idea, Doctor +Jarvis?" + +"At any rate, boys," the doctor said, when the laughter had ceased, +"you may find your aunt a little peculiar, but she is evidently +determined to do her duty to you, and you must do yours to her, and +not play more pranks than you can help. As to you, Rhoda, you will +evidently be in high favor, and as you are fortunately a quiet little +lady, you will, I have no doubt, get on with her very well." + +"I hope so," Rhoda said, smiling, "you see she means to be kind, +though she does write funny letters, and, at any rate, there are +Minnie and the pigeons; it sounds nice, you know. Do you know what +aunt's place is like, Dr. Jarvis, and how to get there from here." + +"No, my dear, I never was in that part of England. It is close to +Marlborough that she lives, a very pretty country, I believe. There +is, of course, no way to go across from here. You must go up to London +by coach from here, and then to Marlborough by the western coach. I +will write to my brother James in town, where you stopped at night as +you came through, boys, and I know that he will take you all in for +the night, and see that you go off right in the morning." + +"You're very kind, indeed, Doctor Jarvis. I do not know how to thank +you for all you have done for us," Tom said earnestly, and the others +cordially echoed the sentiment. + +The day before starting the doctor had a long talk with the boys. He +pointed out to them that their future now depended upon themselves +alone. They must expect to find many unpleasantnesses in their way, +but they must take their little trials pleasantly, and make the best +of everything. "I have no fear as to Rhoda," their kind friend said. +"She has that happy, amiable, and quiet disposition that is sure to +adapt itself to all circumstances. I have no doubt she will become a +favorite with your aunt. Try to keep out of scrapes, boys. You know +you are rather fond of mischief, and your aunt will not be able to +understand it. If you get into any serious difficulty write to me, you +can rely upon always finding a friend in me." + +The journey to London was no novelty to the boys, but Rhoda enjoyed it +immensely. Her place had been taken inside, but most of the journey +she rode outside with her brothers. She was greatly amazed at the +bustle and noise of London, and was quite confused at the shouting and +crowd at the place where the coach drew up, for two or three other +coaches had just arrived from other directions. Mr. Jarvis had sent +his man-servant to meet them, their luggage was sent direct to the +booking-office from which the coach started for Marlborough, and the +servant carried a small bag containing their night things. It was +evening when they got in, and Rhoda could scarcely keep her eyes open +long enough to have tea, for the coach had been two days and nights +upon the road. The next day they stayed in town, and Mrs. Jarvis took +them out to see the sights of London--the Tower and St. Paul's, and +Westminster Abbey, and the beasts at Exeter Change. The boys had twice +before spent a whole day in London, their father having, upon two +occasions, made his visits to town to fit in with their going up to +school, but to Rhoda it was all new, and very, very wonderful. + +The next day the coach started early for Marlborough. It was to +take rather over twenty-four hours on the way. As before, Rhoda rode +outside with her brothers until the evening, but then, instead of +going inside, where there were five passengers already, she said, as +the night was so fine and warm, she would rather remain with them. +They were sitting behind the coachman, there were two male passengers +upon the same seat with them, and another in the box seat by the +coachman. The conversation turned, as in those days it was pretty sure +to turn, upon highwaymen. Several coaches had been lately stopped by +three highwaymen, who worked together, and were reported to be more +reckless than the generality of their sort. They had shot a coachman +who refused to stop, the week before on Hounslow Heath, they had +killed a guard on the great north road, and they had shot two +passengers who resisted, near Exeter. + +Tom and Peter were greatly amused by observing that the passenger who +sat next to them, and who, at the commencement of the conversation, +showed a brace of heavy pistols with which he was provided, with much +boasting as to what he should do if the coach were attacked, when he +heard of the fate of the passengers who had resisted, became very +quiet indeed, and presently took an opportunity, when he thought that +he was not observed, of slipping his pistols under the tarpaulin +behind him. + +"I hope those dreadful men won't stop our coach," Rhoda said. + +"They won't hurt you if they do, Rhoda," Tom said assuringly. "I think +it would be rather a lark. I say, Peter," he went on in a whisper, "I +think we might astonish them with those pistols that coward next to +you has hid behind him." + +"I should just think so," Peter said; "the bargee at Eton would be +nothing to it." + +The hours went slowly on. Rhoda and the boys dozed uncomfortably +against each other and the baggage behind them, until they were +suddenly roused by a shout in the road beside them: "Stand for your +lives!" + +The moon was up, and they could see that there were three horsemen. +One galloped to the horses' heads, and seized the rein of one of the +leaders, the others rode by the coach. + +The first answer to the challenge was a discharge from the blunderbuss +of the guard, which brought one of the highwaymen from his horse. + +The other, riding up to the side of the coach, fired at the guard, and +a loud cry told that the shot had taken effect. In another moment the +fellow was by the side of the coachman. + +"Hold up!" he said, "or I will blow your brains out!" + +The coachman did as he was ordered, and indeed the man at the leader's +head had almost succeeded in stopping them. The passenger next to the +boys had, at the first challenge, again seized his pistols, and the +boys thought that he was going to fire after all. + +"Lie down at our feet, Rhoda, quick!" Tom said, "and don't move +till I tell you." The fate of the guard evidently frightened away +the short-lived courage of the passenger, for, as the coachman again +pulled up, he hastily thrust the pistols in behind him. + +"Get down, every one of you," the highwayman shouted. + +"Lie still, Rhoda," Tom whispered. "Now, Peter, get in underneath the +tarpaulin." + +This was done as the passengers descended. The luggage was not so +heavily piled as usual, and the boys found plenty of room beneath the +tarpaulin. + +"Now, Peter, you take one of these pistols and give me the other. Now +peep out. The moon is hidden, which is a good thing; now, look here, +you shall shoot that fellow standing down below, who is swearing at +the ladies inside for not getting out quicker. I'll take a shot at +that fellow standing in front of the horse's heads." + +"Do you think you can hit him, Tom?" + +"I have not the least idea, but I can try; and if you hit the other +one, the chances are he'll bolt, whether I hit him or not. Open the +tarpaulin at the side so as to see well, and rest the pistol upon +something. You must take a good shot, Peter, for if you miss him we +shall be in a mess." + +"All right," Peter said, in a whisper, "I can almost touch him with +the pistol." + +In loud and brutal tones the highwayman now began to order the +frightened ladies to give up their watches and rings, enforcing his +commands with terrible curses. When suddenly a pistol flashed out +just behind him, and he fell off his horse with a ball through his +shoulder. + +Tom's shot, though equally well intended, was not so truly aimed. +The highwayman had dismounted, and was standing just in front of the +leaders, so that Tom had a fair view of him between them. The boys had +both occasionally fired their father's pistols, for, in those days, +each householder in the country always kept loaded pistols in his +room, but his skill was not sufficient to make sure of a man at that +distance. The bullet flew past at two feet to the left of his head. +But its effect was scarcely less startling than if it had actually hit +him, for, in its passage, it passed through the ear of the off leader. +The horse made a start at the sudden pain, and then dashed forward. +The rest of the team, already alarmed by the shot, followed her lead; +before the startled highwayman could get out of the way they were upon +him, in another instant he was under their heels, and the coach gave a +sudden lurch as it passed over his body. + +"Lie still, Rhoda, a little longer; it's all right, but the horses +have run away," Tom exclaimed, as he scrambled forward, and caught +hold of the reins, which the coachman had tied to the rail of the seat +as he got down. "Catch hold of the reins, Peter, and help me pull." + +Peter did so; but the united strength of the boys was wholly unequal +to arresting the headlong flight of the horses. + +Fortunately the highwaymen had chosen a low bottom between two hills, +to arrest the coach, consequently the road was up a hill of moderate +steepness. The boys hoped that the horses would stop when they got to +the top; but they went on with redoubled speed. + +"This is something like going it," Peter said. + +"Isn't it, Peter? They know their way, and we ain't lively to meet +anything in the road. They will stop at their stable. At any rate, +it's no use trying to steer them. Here, Rhoda dear, get up; are you +very much frightened?" + +Rhoda still lay quite still, and Peter, holding on with difficulty, +for the coach quite rocked with the speed at which they were going, +climbed over to her, and stooped, down. "Shall I help you up, Rhoda?" + +"No, please, I would rather stop here till it's all over." + +Fortunately the hill, up to the Tillage where they made the change, +was a steep one, and the horses broke into a trot before they reached +the top, and, in another minute drew up at the door of the inn. +The astonishment of the ostlers at seeing the horses covered with +lather, and coachbox tenanted only by two boys, behind whom a little +white face now peered out, was extreme, and they were unable to get +beyond an ejaculation of hallo! expressive of a depth of incredulous +astonishment impossible to be rendered by words. + +"Look here," Tom said, with all the composure, and much of the +impudence, which then, as now, characterized the young Etonian, "don't +be staring like a pack of stuck pigs. You had better get the fresh +horses in, and drive back to the bottom, about four miles from here. +There has been regular row with some fellows, and I expect two or +three are killed. Now, just put up the ladder; I want to get my sister +down." + +Almost mechanically the men put the ladder up to the coach, and the +boys and Rhoda got down. + +"Do you say the coach has been attacked by highwaymen in Burnet +bottom?" + +"I don't know anything about Burnet bottom," Tom said. "It was a +bottom about four miles off. There were three of them. The guard shot +one of them, and the others shot the guard. Then we were stopped by +them, and every one had to get down. Then the horses ran away, and +here we are." + +"Then there are two of those highwayman chaps with the passengers," +one of the men said. + +"You need not be afraid of them," Tom said carelessly; "one got shot, +and I don't know about the other, but the wheel of the coach went over +him, so I do not suppose he will be much trouble. Now, if I were you, +I should not stand staring any more, but should make haste and take +the coach back." + +"Hullo, look at this grey," one of the men exclaimed, as, at last +understanding what had taken place, they began to bustle about to +change horses. "He's got blood all over the side of his head. One of +those scoundrels has shot him through the ear." + +Tom burst out laughing. "I am the scoundrel!" he said. "Peter, that +explains why we went off so suddenly. I missed the fellow, and hit the +leader in the ear. However, it comes to the same thing. By the way, we +may as well take the pistols." + +So saying, he ran up the ladder and brought down the pistols. By this +time the fresh horses were in. + +"I can't make nought of it," one of the ostlers said, climbing up into +the coachman's seat. "Jump up, Bill and Harry. It's the rummiest go I +ever heard of in coaching." + +"Landlady, can you get us some tea at once, please," Tom said, going +up to the landlady, who was looking on from the door of the house +with an astonishment equal to that of the men at the whole affair; +"as quickly as you can, for my sister looks regularly done up with +fatigue, and then, please let her lie down till the coach is ready to +start again. It will be three quarters of an hour before it is back, +and then, I daresay, there will be a lot of talking before they go on. +I should think they will be wanting breakfast. At any rate, an hour's +rest will do you good, Rhoda." + +Rhoda was too worn out with the over-excitement even to answer. +Fortunately there was hot water in order to make hot grog for the +outriders of the coach, some tea was quickly made, and in ten minutes +Rhoda was fast asleep on the landlady's bed. + +Tom and Peter expressed their desire for something substantial in the +way of eating, for the morning had now fairly broken. The landlady +brought in some cold meat, upon which the boys made a vigorous attack, +and then, taking possession of two benches, they dozed off until the +coach arrived. + +It had but three horses, for one had been sent off to carry Bill, +the ostler, at full speed to the town at which they had last changed +horses, to fetch a doctor and the constable. The other two men had +remained with the guard, who was shot in the hip, and the highwayman, +whose collar-bone was broken by Peter's shot. The fellow shot by the +guard, and the other one, whom the coach wheels had passed over, were +both dead. + +"There's the coach, Tom." + +"What a nuisance, Peter, they'll all be wanting to talk now, and I am +just so comfortably off. Well, I suppose it's no use trying to get any +more sleep." + +So saying, they roused themselves, and went out to the door just as +the coach drew up. + +There was a general shout of greeting from the passengers, which was +stopped, however, by a peremptory order from the coachman. + +He was a large, stout man, with a face red from the effects of wind +and exposure. "Jack," he said, to a man who was standing near, for +the news of the attack upon the coach had quickly spread, and all +the villagers were astir to see it come in. "Jack, hold the leader's +head. Thomas, open the door, and let the insides out. Gents," he said +solemnly, when this was done, "I'm going to do what isn't a usual +thing by no means, in fact, I ain't no precedence for doing it; but +then, I do not know any precedence for this here business altogether. +I never did hear of a coachman standing up on his box to give a cheer, +no, not to King George himself; but, then, King George never polished +off two highwaymen all to himself, leastway, not as I've heard tell +of. Now, these two young gents have done this. They have saved my +coach and my passengers from getting robbed, and so I'm going to give +'em three cheers. I'll trouble you to help me up into the box seat, +gentlemen." + +Assisted by the other passengers, the driver now gravely climbed up +into the box seat, steadied himself there by placing one hand upon +the shoulder of the passenger next him, took off his low-crowned hat, +and said. "Follow me, gents, with three cheers for those young gents +standing there; better plucked ones I never came across, and I've +traveled a good many miles in my day." + +So saying, he gave three stentorian cheers, which were echoed by all +the passengers and villagers. + +Then there was a momentary silence, and Tom, who, with his brother, +had been feeling very uncomfortable, although rather inclined to +laugh, seeing that he was expected to say something, said, "Thank you +all very much; but we'd much rather you hadn't done it." + +Then there was a general laugh and movement, and a general pressing +forward of the passengers to shake the boys by the hand. The driver +was assisted down from his elevated position, and got off the coach +and came up to them. "That's the first speech I ever made, young +gentlemen, and, if I know myself, it will be the last; but, you see, +I was druv to it. You're a good sort, that's certain. What will you +drink?" + +The boys declared for beer, and drank solemnly with the driver, +imitating him in finishing their mugs at a draught, and turning them +topsy-turvy. There was now a great deal of talking, and many questions +were asked. Tom and Peter modestly said that there was really nothing +to tell. They saw that the gentleman next to them intended to use his +pistols; but, not seeing a good opportunity, put them down behind the +tarpaulin, and the thought occurred to them that, by slipping behind +it, they would get a good chance of a certain shot. Accordingly, they +had fired, and then the horse had run away; and there was an end of +it. There was nothing extraordinary in the whole matter. + +"At any rate, my boys, you have saved me from a loss of a couple +of hundred pounds which I had got hid in my boots, but which those +fellows would have been sure to have have discovered," one of the +passengers said. + +There was a general chorus of satisfaction at many watches and +trinkets saved, and then the first passenger went on,-- + +"I propose, gentlemen and ladies, that when we get to the end of our +journey we make a subscription, according to the amount we have saved, +and that we get each of these young gentlemen a brace of the very best +pistols that can be bought. If they go on as they have begun, they +will find them useful." + +There was a general exclamation of approval, and one of the ladies, +who had been an inside passenger, said, "And I think we ought to give +a handsome ring to their sister as a memorial through life. Of course, +she had not so much to do as her brothers, but she had the courage to +keep still, and she had to run the risk, both of being shot, and of +being upset by the coach just as they did." + +This also was unanimously approved, and, after doing full justice to +the breakfast set before them, the party again took their places. +Rhoda being carried down asleep, by the landlady, and placed in the +coach, one of the inside passengers getting out to make room for her, +and she was laid, curled up, on the seat, with her head in a lady's +lap, and slept quietly, until, to her astonishment, she was woke up, +and told that she was in Marlborough. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +TWO YOUNG PICKLES. + + +An old-fashioned open carriage, drawn by a stiff, old-fashioned horse, +and driven by a stiff, old-fashioned man, was in waiting at the inn at +which the coach drew up at Marlborough. Into this the young Scudamores +were soon transferred, and, after a hearty good-bye from their +fellow-passengers, and an impressive one from the coachman, they +started upon the concluding part of their journey. + +"How far is it to aunt's?" Tom asked. + +"About six miles, young sir," the driver said gravely. + +The young Scudamores had great difficulty to restrain their laughter +at Tom's new title; in fact, Peter nearly choked himself in his +desperate efforts to do so, and no further questions were asked for +some time. + +The ride was a pleasant one, and Rhoda, who had never been out of +Lincolnshire before, was delighted with the beautiful country through +which they were passing. The journey, long as it was--for the road +was a very bad one, and the horse had no idea of going beyond a slow +trot--passed quickly to them all; but they were glad when the driver +pointed to a quaint old-fashioned house standing back from the road, +and said that they were home. + +"There are the pigeons, Rhoda, and there is Minnie asleep on that open +window-sill." + +Very many times had the young Scudamores talked about their aunt, and +had pictured to themselves what she would be like; and their ideas of +her so nearly approached the truth, that she almost seemed to be an +old acquaintance as she came to the door as the carriage stopped. She +was a tall, upright, elderly lady, with a kind, but very decided face, +and a certain prim look about her manner and dress. + +"Well, niece Rhoda and nephews, I am glad to see that you have arrived +safely," she said in a clear, distinct voice. "Welcome to the Yews. I +hope that we shall get on very well together. Joseph, I hope that you +have not driven Daisy too fast, and that you did not allow my nephews +to use the whip. You know I gave you very distinct instructions not to +let them do so." + +"No, my lady, they never so much as asked." + +"That is right," Miss Scudamore said, turning round and shaking hands +with the boys, who had now got out of the carriage and had helped +Rhoda down. "I am glad to hear what Joseph tells me, for I know that +boys are generally fond of furious driving and like lashing horses +until they put them into a gallop. And now, how are you, niece Rhoda! +Give me a kiss. That is right. You look pale and tired, child; you +must have something to eat, and then go to bed. Girls can't stand +racketing about as boys can. You look quiet and nice, child, and I +have no doubt we shall suit very well. It is very creditable to you +that you have not been spoilt by your brothers. Boys generally make +their sisters almost as noisy and rude as they are themselves." + +"I don't think we are noisy and rude, aunt," Tom said, with a smile. + +"Oh, you don't, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said, looking at him sharply, +and then shaking her head decidedly two or three times. "If your looks +do not belie you both sadly, you are about as hair-brained a couple of +lads as my worst enemies could wish to see sent to plague me; but," +she added to herself, as she turned to lead the way indoors, "I must +do my duty, and must make allowances; boys will be boys, boys will be +boys, so they say at least, though why they should be is more than I +can make out. Now, Rhoda, I will take you up with me. Your bedroom +leads out of mine, dear. Hester," she said to a prim-looking servant +who had come out after her to the door; "will you show my nephews to +their room? Dinner will be ready at two; it is just a quarter to the +hour now. I see that you have got watches, so that you will be able +to be punctual; and I must request you, when you have done washing, +not to throw the water out of the window, because my flower-beds are +underneath." + +Tom had great difficulty in keeping his countenance, while he assured +his aunt that his brother and himself never did empty their basins out +of the window. + +"That is right," Miss Scudamore said doubtfully; "but I have heard +that boys do such things." + +Once fairly in their room and the door shut, the boys had a great +laugh over their aunt's ideas as to boys. + +"There is one comfort," Tom said at last; "whatever we do we shall +never surprise her." + +"I think we shall get on very well with her," Peter said. "She means +to be kind, I am sure. This is a jolly room, Tom." + +It was a low wainscoted room, with a very wide window divided into +three by mullions, and fitted with latticed panes. They were open, and +a delicious scent of flowers came in from the garden. The furniture +was all new and very strong, of dark stained wood, which harmonized +well with the paneling. There were no window curtains, but a valance +of white dimity hung above the window. There was a piece of carpet +between the beds; the rest of the floor was bare, but the boards were +of old oak, and looked as well without it. Several rows of pegs had +been put upon the walls, and there was a small chest of drawers by +each bed. + +"This is very jolly, Peter; but it is a pity that there are bars to +the window." + +When they came down to dinner they found that Rhoda, quite done up +with her journey, had gone to bed. + +"You like your room, I hope, nephews," Miss Scudamore said, after they +had taken their seats. + +"Yes, aunt, very much. There is only one drawback to it." + +"What is that, Thomas?" + +"Oh, please, aunt, don't call me Thomas; it is a dreadful name; it is +almost as bad as Tommy. Please call me Tom. I am always called Tom by +every one." + +"I am not fond of these nicknames," Miss Scudamore said. "There is a +flippancy about them of which I do not approve." + +"Yes, aunt, in nicknames; but Tom is not a nickname; it is only a +short way of speaking. We never hear of a man being called Thomas, +unless he is a footman or an archbishop, or something of that sort." + +"What do you mean by archbishop?" Miss Scudamore asked severely. + +"Well, aunt, I was going to say footman, and then I thought of Thomas +à Becket; and there was Thomas the Rhymer. I have heard of him, but +I never read any of his rhymes. I wonder why they did not call them +poems. But I expect even Thomas à Becket was called Tom in his own +family." + +Miss Scudamore looked sharply at Tom, but he had a perfect command of +his face, and could talk the greatest nonsense with the most serious +face. He went on unmoved with her scrutiny. + +"I have often wondered why I was not christened Tom, It would have +been much more sensible. For instance, Rhoda is christened Rhoda and +not Rhododendron." + +"Rhododendron?" Miss Scudamore said, mystified. + +"Yes, aunt, it is an American plant, I believe. We had one in the +green-house at home; it was sent poor papa by some friend who went out +there, I don't see anything else Rhoda could come from." + +"You are speaking very ignorantly, nephew," Miss Scudamore said +severely. "I don't know anything about the plant you speak of, but the +name of Rhoda existed before America was ever heard of. It is a very +old name." + +"I expect," Peter said, "it must have meant originally a woman of +Rhodes. You see Crusaders and Templars were always having to do with +Rhodes, and they no doubt brought the name home, and so it got settled +here." + +"The name is mentioned in Scripture," Miss Scudamore said severely. + +"Yes, aunt, and that makes it still more likely that it meant a woman +of Rhodes; you see Rhodes was a great place then." + +Miss Scudamore was silent for some time. Then she went back to the +subject with which the conversation had commenced. "What is the +objection you spoke of to the room?" + +"Oh! it is the bars to the window, aunt." + +"I have just had them put up," Miss Scudamore said calmly. + +"Just put up, aunt!" Tom repeated in surprise, "what for?" + +"To prevent you getting out at night." + +The boys could not help laughing this time, and then Peter said, "But +why should we want to get out at night, aunt?" + +"Why should boys always want to do the things they ought not?" Miss +Scudamore said. "I've heard of boys being let down by ropes to go and +buy things. I dare say you have both done it yourselves." + +"Well, aunt," Tom said, "perhaps we have; but then, you see, that was +at school." + +"I do not see any difference, nephew. If you will get out at one +window, you will get out at another. There is mischief to be done in +the country as well as in towns; and so long as there is mischief to +do, so long will boys go out of their way to do it. And now I will +tell you the rules of this house, to which you will be expected to +adhere. It is well to understand things at once, as it prevents +mistakes. We breakfast at eight, dine at two, have tea at half-past +six, and you will go to bed at half-past eight. These hours will be +strictly observed. I shall expect your hands and faces to be washed, +and your hairs brushed previous to each meal. When you come indoors +you will always take off your boots and put on your shoes in the +little room behind this. And now, if you have done dinner I think +that you had better go and lie down on your bed, and get two or three +hours' sleep. Take your boots off before you get into the bed." + +"She means well, Peter," the elder brother said, as they went +upstairs, "but I am afraid she will fidget our lives out." + +For two or three days the boys wandered about enjoying the beautiful +walks, and surprising and pleasing their aunt by the punctuality +with which they were in to their meals. Then she told them that she +had arranged for them to go to a tutor, who lived at Warley, a large +village a mile distant, and who had some eight or ten pupils. The very +first day's experience at the school disgusted them. The boys were +of an entirely different class to those with whom they had hitherto +associated, and the master was violent and passionate. + +"How do you like Mr. Jones, nephews?" Miss Scudamore asked upon their +return after their first day at school. + +"We do not like him at all, aunt. In the first place, he is a good +deal too handy with that cane of his." + +"'He who spares the rod--'" + +"Yes, we know that, aunt, 'spoils the child,'" broke in Tom, "but we +would not mind so much if the fellow were a gentleman." + +"I don't know what you may call a gentleman," Miss Scudamore said +severely. "He stands very high here a schoolmaster, while he visits +the vicar, and is well looked up to everywhere." + +"He's not a gentleman for all that," Tom muttered; "he wouldn't be if +he visited the Queen. One does not mind being trashed by a gentleman; +one is used to that at Eton; but to be knocked about by a fellow like +that! Well, we shall see." + +For a week the boys put up with the cruelty of their tutor, who at +once took an immense dislike to them on finding that they did not, +like the other boys, cringe before him, and that no trashing could +extract a cry from them. + +It must not be supposed that they did not meditate vengeance, but they +could hit upon no plan which could be carried out without causing +suspicion that it was the act of one of the boys; and in that case +they knew that he would question them all round, and they would not +tell a lie to screen themselves. + +Twice they appealed to their aunt, but she would not listen to them, +saying that the other boys did not complain, and that if their master +was more severe with them than with others, it could only be because +they behaved worse. It was too evident that they were boys of very +violent dispositions, and although she was sorry that their master +found it necessary to punish them, it was clearly her duty not to +interfere. + +The remark about violence arose from Miss Scudamore having read in the +little paper which was published once a week at Marlborough an account +of the incident of the stopping of the coach, about which the boys +had agreed to say nothing to her. The paper had described the conduct +of her nephews in the highest terms, but Miss Scudamore was terribly +shocked. "The idea", she said, "that she should have to associate with +boys who had take a fellow-creature's life was terrible to her, and +their conduct in resisting, when grown-up men had given up the idea +as hopeless, showed a violent spirit, which, in boys so young, was +shocking." + +A few days after this, as the boys were coming from school, they +passed the carrier's cart, coming in from Marlborough. + +"Be you the young gentlemen at Miss Scudamore's?" the man asked. +"Because, if you be, I have got a parcel for you." + +Tom answered him that they were, and he then handed them over a heavy +square parcel. Opening it after the cart had gone on, the boys, to +their great delight, found that it consisted of two cases, each +containing a brace of very handsome pistols. + +"This is luck, Peter," Tom said. "If the parcel had been sent to the +house, aunt would never have let us have them; now we can take them in +quietly, get some powder and balls, and practice shooting every day in +some quiet place. That will be capital. Do you know I have thought of +a plan which will enrage old Jones horribly, and he will never suspect +us?" + +"No; have you, Tom? What is that?" + +"Look here, Peter. I can carry you easily standing on my shoulders. If +you get a very long cloak, so as to fall well down on me, no one would +suspect in the dark that there were two of us; we should look like +one tremendously tall man. Well, you know, he goes every evening to +Dunstable's to sing with Miss Dunstable. They say he's making love to +her. We can waylay him in the narrow lane, and make him give up that +new watch he has just bought, that he's so proud of. I heard him say +he had given thirty guineas for it. Of course, we don't want to keep +it, but we would smash it up between a couple of big stones, and send +him all the pieces." + +"Capital, Tom; but where should we get the cloak?" + +"There is that long wadded silk cloak of aunt's that she uses when she +goes out driving. It always hangs up in the closet in the hall." + +"But how are we to get in again, Tom? I expect that he does not come +back till half-past nine or ten. We can slip out easily enough after +we are supposed to have gone to bed; but how are we to get back?" + +"The only plan, Peter, is to get in through Rhoda's window. She is +very angry at that brute Jones treating us so badly, and if I take her +into the secret I feel sure she will agree." + +Rhoda was appealed to, and although at first she said it was quite, +quite impossible, she finally agreed, although with much fear and +trembling, to assist them. First, the boys were to buy some rope and +make a rope ladder, which Rhoda was to take up to her room; she was to +open the window wide when she went to bed, but to pull the blind down +as usual, so that if her aunt came in she would not notice it. Then, +when she heard her aunt come tip to bed at half-past nine, she was to +get up very quietly, drop the rope ladder out, fastening it as they +instructed her, and then get into bed again, and go to sleep if she +could, as the boys would not try to come in until after Miss Scudamore +was asleep. + +Two nights after this the schoolmaster was returning from his usual +visit to Mr. Dunstable, when, to his horror, he saw a gigantic figure +advance from under a tree which overshadowed the lawn, and heard a +deep voice say, "Your money or your life!" + +Like all bullies, the schoolmaster was a coward, and no sooner did he +see this terrible figure, and his ears caught the ominous click of +a pistol which accompanied the words, than his teeth chattered, his +whole figure trembled with fear, and he fell on his knees, crying, +"Spare my life!--take all that I have, but spare my life!" + +"You miserable coward!" the giant said, "I do not want to take your +wretched life. What money have you?" + +"I have only two shillings," he exclaimed; "I swear to you that I have +only two shillings." + +"What is the use of two shillings to me?--give them to the first +beggar you see." + +"Yes, sir," the schoolmaster said; "I swear to you that I will." + +"Give me your watch." + +The schoolmaster took out his watch, and, getting upon his feet, +handed it to the giant. + +"There now, you can go; but see," he added, as the schoolmaster turned +with great alacrity to leave--"look here." + +"Yes, sir." + +"Look here, and mark my words well. Don't you go to that house where +you have been to-night, or it will be the worse for you. You are a +wretch, and I won't see that poor little girl marry you and be made +miserable. Swear to me you will give her up." + +The schoolmaster hesitated, but there was again the ominous click of +the pistol. + +"Yes, yes, I swear it," he said hastily. "I will give her up +altogether." + +"You had better keep your oath," the giant said, "for if you break it, +if I hear you go there any more--I shall be sure to hear of it--I will +put an ounce of lead in you, if I have to do it in the middle of your +school. Do you hear me? Now you may go." + +Only too glad to escape, the schoolmaster walked quickly off, and in a +moment his steps could be heard as he ran at the top of his speed down +the lane. + +In a moment the giant appeared to break in two, and two small figures +stood where the large one had been. + +"Capital, Peter. Now, I'll take the cloak, and you keep the pistol, +and now for a run home--not that I'm afraid of that coward getting +up a pursuit. He'll be only too glad to get his head under the +bedclothes." + +Rhoda had carried out her brother's instructions with great exactness, +and was in a great fright when her aunt came in to see her in bed, +lest she should notice that the window was open. However, the night +was a quiet one, and the curtains fell partly across the blind, so +that Miss Scudamore suspected nothing, but Rhoda felt great relief +when she said good-night, took the candle, and left the room. She had +had hard work to keep herself awake until she heard her aunt come up +to bed; and then, finding that she did not again come into the room, +she got up, fastened one end of the rope ladder to a thick stick long +enough to cross two of the mullions, let the other end down very +quietly, and then slipped into bed again. She did not awake until +Hester knocked at her door and told her it was time to get up. She +awoke with a great start, and in a, fright at once ran to the window. +Everything looked as usual. The rope ladder was gone, the window was +closed, and Rhoda knew that her brothers must have come in safely. + +Great was the excitement in Warley next day, when it became known that +the schoolmaster had been robbed of his watch by a giant fully eight +feet high. This height of the robber was, indeed, received with much +doubt, as people thought that he might have been a tall man, but +that the eight feet must have been exaggerated by the fear of the +schoolmaster. + +Two or three days afterwards the surprise rose even higher, when a +party of friends who had assembled at Mr. Jones' to condole with him +upon his misfortune, were startled by the smashing of one of the +windows by a small packet, which fell upon the floor in their midst. + +There was a rush to the door, but the night was a dark one, and no one +was to be seen; then they returned to the sitting-room, and the little +packet was opened, and found to contain some watchworks bent and +broken, some pulverized glass, and a battered piece of metal, which, +after some trouble, the schoolmaster recognized as the case of his +watch. The head-constable was sent for, and after examining the relics +of the case, he came to the same conclusion at which the rest had +already arrived, namely, that the watch could not have been stolen by +an ordinary footpad, but by some personal enemy of the schoolmaster's, +whose object was not plunder, but annoyance and injury. + +To the population of Warley this solution was a very agreeable one. +The fact of a gigantic footpad being in the neighborhood was alarming +for all, and nervous people were already having great bolts and bars +placed upon their shutters and doors. The discovery, therefore, that +the object of this giant was not plunder, but only to gratify a spite +against the master, was a relief to the whole place. Every one was, of +course, anxious to know who this secret foe could be, and what crime +Mr. Jones could have committed to bring such a tremendous enemy upon +him. The boys at the school assumed a fresh importance in the eyes of +the whole place, and being encouraged now to tell all they knew of +him, they gave such a picture of the life that they had led at school, +that a general feeling of disgust was aroused against him. + +The parents of one or two of the boys gave notice to take their sons +away, but the rest of the boys were boarders, and were no better off +than before. + +Miss Scudamore was unshaken in her faith in Mr. Jones and considered +the rumor current about him to be due simply to the vindictive nature +of boys. + +"Well, aunt," Tom said one day, after a lecture of this sort from her, +"I know you mean to be kind to us, but Peter and I have stood it on +that account, but we can't stand it much longer, and we shall run away +before long." + +"And where would you run to, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said calmly. + +"That is our affair," Tom said quite as coolly, "only I don't like to +do it without giving you warning. You mean kindly, I know, aunt, but +the way you are always going on at us from morning to night whenever +we are at home, and the way in which you allow us to be treated by +that tyrannical brute, is too much altogether." + +Miss Scudamore looked steadily at them. + +"I am doing, nephew, what I consider to be for your good. You are +willful, and violent, and headstrong. It is my duty to cure you, and +although it is all very painful to me, at my time of life, to have +such a charge thrust upon me, still, whatever it costs, it must be +done." + +For the next month Mr. Jones' life was rendered a burden to him. The +chimney-pots were shut up with sods placed on them, and the fireplaces +poured volumes of smoke into the rooms and nearly choked him. Night +after night the windows of his bedroom were smashed; cats were let +down the chimney; his water-butts were found filled with mud, and the +cord of the bucket of his well was cut time after time; the flowers +in his garden were dug up and put in topsy-turvy. He himself could not +stir out after dark without being tripped up by strings fastened a +few inches above the path; and once, coming out of his door, a string +fastened from scraper to scraper brought him down the steps with such +violence that the bridge of his nose, which came on the edge of a +step, was broken, and he was confined to his bed for three or four +days. In vain he tried every means to discover and punish the authors +of these provocations. A savage dog, the terror of the neighborhood, +was borrowed and chained up in the garden, but was found poisoned next +morning. + +Watchmen were hired, but refused to stay for more than one night, for +they were so harassed and wearied out that they came to the conclusion +that they were haunted. If they were on one side of the house a voice +would be heard on the other. After the first few attempts, they no +longer dared venture to run, for between each round strings were tied +in every direction, and they had several heavy falls, while as they +were carefully picking their way with their lanterns, stones struck +them from all quarters. If one ventured for a moment from the other's +side his lantern was knocked out, and his feet were struck from under +him with a sharp and unexpected blow from a heavy cudgel; and they +were once appalled by seeing a gigantic figure stalk across the grass, +and vanish in a little bush. + +At the commencement of these trials the schoolmaster had questioned +the boys, one by one, if they had any hand in the proceeding. + +All denied it. When it came to Tom Scudamore's turn, he said. "You +never do believe me, Mr. Jones, so it is of no use my saying that I +didn't do it; but if you ask Miss Scudamore, she will bear witness +that we were in bed hours before, and that there are bars on our +windows through which a cat could hardly get." + +The boys had never used Rhoda's room after the first night's +expedition, making their escape now by waiting until the house was +quiet, and then slipping along the passage to the spare room, and +thence by the window, returning in the same way. + +Under this continued worry, annoyance, and alarm, the schoolmaster +grew thin and worn, his school fell off more and more; for many of +the boys, whose rest was disturbed by all this racket, encouraged by +the example of the boys of the place who had already been taken away, +wrote privately to their friends. + +The result was that the parents of two or three more wrote to say +that their boys would not return after the holidays, and no one was +surprised when it became known that Mr. Jones was about to close his +school and leave the neighborhood. + +The excitement of the pranks that they had been playing had enabled +the boys to support the almost perpetual scoldings and complaints of +their aunt; but school once over, and their enemy driven from the +place, they made up their minds that they could no longer stand it. + +One day, therefore, when Rhoda had, as an extraordinary concession, +been allowed to go for a walk with them, they told her that they +intended to run away. + +Poor Rhoda was greatly distressed. + +"You see, Rhoda dear," Tom said, "although we don't like leaving you, +you will really be happier when we are gone. It is a perpetual worry +to you to hear aunt going on, on, on--nagging, nagging, nagging for +ever and ever at us. She is fond of you and kind to you, and you +would get on quietly enough without us, while now she is in a fidget +whenever you are with us, and is constantly at you not to learn +mischief and bad ways from us. Besides you are always in a fright now, +lest we should get into some awful scrape, as I expect we should if +we stopped here. If it weren't for you, we should not let her off as +easily as we do. No, no, Rhoda, it is better for us all that we should +go." + +Poor Rhoda, though she cried bitterly at the thought of losing her +brothers, yet could not but allow to herself that in many respects she +should be more happy when she was freed from anxiety, lest they should +get into some scrape, and when her aunt would not be kept in a state +of continued irritation and scolding. She felt too that, although she +herself could get on well enough in her changed life, that it was very +hard indeed for the boys, accustomed as they had been to the jolly and +independent life of a public school, and to be their own master during +the holidays, with their ponies, amusements, and their freedom to come +and go when they chose. Rhoda was a thoughtful child, and felt that +nothing that they could go through could do them more harm or make +them more unhappy than they now were. She had thought it all over day +after day, for she was sure that the boys would, sooner or later come +to it, and she had convinced herself that it was better for them. +Still it was with a very sad heart that she found that the time had +come. + +For some time she cried in silence, and then, drying her eyes, she +said, trying to speak bravely, though her lips quivered. + +"I shall miss you dreadfully, boys; but I will not say a word to keep +you here, for I am sure it is very, very bad for you. What do you mean +to do? Do you mean to go to sea?" + +"No, Rhoda; you see uncle was in the army, and used to talk to us +about that; and, as we have never seen the sea, we don't care for it +as some boys do. No, we shall try and go as soldiers." + +"But my dear Tom, they will never take you as soldiers; you are too +little." + +"Yes, we are not old enough to enlist at present," Tom said; "but we +might go in as buglers. We have thought it all over, and have been +paying old Wetherley, who was once in the band of a regiment, to teach +us the bugle, and he says we can sound all the calls now as well as +any bugler going. We did not like to tell you till we had made up our +minds to go; but we have gone regularly to him every day since the +first week we came here." + +"Then you won't have to fight, Tom," Rhoda said joyfully. + +"No," Tom said, in a rather dejected tone; "I am afraid they won't let +us fight; still we shall see fighting, which is the next best thing." + +"I heard in Warley yesterday that there will be a movement of the +army in Spain soon, and that some more troops will be sent out, and +we shall try and get into a regiment that is going." + +They talked very long and earnestly on their plans, and were so +engrossed that they quite forgot how time went, and got in late for +tea, and were terribly scolded in consequence. For once none of +them cared for the storm; the boys exulted over the thought that it +would be the last scolding they would have to suffer; and Rhoda had +difficulty in gasping down her tears at the thought that it was the +last meal that she would take with them, for they had settled that +they would start that very night. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +ENLISTED. + + +It was a bright moonlight night when the boys, after a sad farewell +from Rhoda, let themselves down from the window, and started upon +their journey. Each carried a bundle on a stick; each bundle contained +a suit of clothes, a few shirts and stockings, a pair of shoes, and a +pistol. The other pistols were carried loaded inside their jackets, +for there was no saying whom they might meet upon the road. They had +put on the oldest suit of clothes they possessed, so as to attract as +little attention as possible by the way. After they had once recovered +from their parting with Rhoda their spirits rose, and they tramped +along lightly and cheerfully. It was eleven o'clock when they started, +and through the night they did not meet a single person. Towards +morning they got under a haystack near the road, and slept for some +hours; then they walked steadily on until they had done twenty miles +since their start. They went into a small inn, and had some breakfast, +and then purchasing some bread and cold ham, went on through the town, +and leaving the London road, followed that leading to Portsmouth, and +after a mile or two again took up their quarters until evening, in a +haystack. + +It is not necessary to give the details of the journey to Portsmouth. +After the first two days' tramp, having no longer any fear of the +pursuit, which, no doubt, had been made for them when first missed, +they walked by day, and slept at night in sheds, or under haystacks, +as they were afraid of being questioned and perhaps stopped at inns. +They walked only short distances now, for the first night's long +journey had galled their feet, and, as Tom said, they were not pressed +for time, and did not want to arrive at Portsmouth like two limping +tramps. Walking, therefore, only twelve miles a day after the first +two days, they arrived at Portsmouth fresh and in high spirits. +They had met with no adventures upon the road, except that upon one +occasion two tramps had attempted to seize their bundles, but the +production of the pistols, and the evident determination of the boys +to use them if necessary, made the men abandon their intention and +make off, with much bad language and many threats, at which the boys +laughed disdainfully. + +Arrived at Portsmouth, their first care was to find a quiet little +inn, where they could put up. This they had little difficulty in +doing, for Portsmouth abounded with public-houses, and people were so +much accustomed to young fellows tramping in with their bundles, to +join their ships, that their appearance excited no curiosity whatever. +Tom looked older than he really was, although not tall for his age, +while Peter, if anything, overtopped his brother, but was slighter, +and looked fully two years younger. Refreshed by a long night's sleep +between sheets, they started out after breakfast to see the town, and +were greatly impressed and delighted by the bustle of the streets, +full of soldiers and sailors, and still more by the fortifications and +the numerous ships of war lying in the harbor, or out at Spithead. +A large fleet of merchantmen was lying off at anchor, waiting for a +convoy, and a perfect fleet of little wherries was plying backwards +and forwards between the vessels and the shore. + +"It makes one almost wish to be a sailor," Peter said, as they sat +upon the Southsea beach, and looked out at the animated ocean. + +"It does, Peter; and if it had been ten years back, instead of at +present, I should have been ready enough to change our plans. But what +is the use of going to sea now? The French and Spanish navies skulk in +harbor, and the first time our fellows get them out they will he sure +to smash them altogether, and then there is an end to all fighting. +No, Peter, it looks tempting, I grant, but we shall see ten times as +much with the army. We must go and settle the thing to-morrow. There +is no time to be lost if the expedition starts in a fortnight or three +weeks." + +Returning into the town, the boys were greatly amused at seeing a +sailor's wedding. Four carriages and pair drove along; inside were +women, while four sailors sat on each roof, waving their hats to the +passers-by, and refreshing themselves by repeated pulls at some black +bottles, with which they were well supplied. Making inquiries, the +boys found that the men belonged to a fine frigate which had come in a +day or two before, with several prizes. + +The next morning they went down to the barracks. Several +non-commissioned officers, with bunches of gay ribbons in their caps, +were standing about. Outside the gates were some boards, with notices, +"Active young fellows required. Good pay, plenty of prize-money, and +chances, of promotion!" + +The boys read several of these notices, which differed only from each +other in the name of the regiment; and then Tom gave an exclamation of +satisfaction as he glanced at a note at the foot of one of them, "Two +or three active lads wanted as buglers." + +"There we are, Peter; and, oh, what luck! it is Uncle Peter's +regiment! Look here, Peter," he said, after a pause, "we won't say +anything about being his nephews, unless there is no other way of +getting taken; for if we do it won't be nice. We shall be taken notice +of, and not treated like other fellows, and that will cause all sorts +of ill-feeling and jealousy, and rows. It will be quite time to say +who we are when we have done something to show that we shan't do +discredit to him. You see it isn't much in our favor that we are here +as two runaway boys. If we were older we could go as volunteers, but +of course we are too young for that." + +It should be mentioned that in those days it was by no means unusual +for young men who had not sufficient interest to get commissions to +obtain permission to accompany a regiment as volunteers. They paid +their own expenses, and lived with the officers, but did duty as +private soldiers. If they distinguished themselves, they obtained +commissions to fill up vacancies caused in action. + +"There is our sergeant, Tom; let's get it over at once." + +"If you please," Tom said, as they went up to the sergeant, "are you +the recruiting sergeant of the Norfolk Rangers?" + +"By Jove, Summers, you are in luck to-day," laughed one of the other +sergeants; "here are two valuable recruits for the Rangers. The +Mounseers will have no chance with the regiment with such giants as +those in it. Come, my fine fellows, let me persuade you to join the +15th. Such little bantams as you are would be thrown away upon the +Rangers." + +There was a shout of laughter from the other non-commissioned +officers. + +Tom was too much accustomed to chaffing bargees at Eton to be put out +of countenance. + +"We may be bantams," he said, "but I have seen a bantam lick a big +dunghill cock many a time. Fine feathers don't always make fine birds, +my man." + +"Well answered, young one," the sergeant of the Rangers said, while +there was a general laugh among the others, for the sergeant of the +15th was not a favorite. + +"You think yourself sharp, youngster," he said angrily. "You want a +licking, you do; and if you were in the 15th, you'd get it pretty +quickly." + +"Oh! I beg your pardon," Tom said gravely; "I did not know that the +15th were famous for thrashing boys. Thank you; when I enlist it shall +be in a regiment where men hit fellows their own size." + +There was a shout of laughter, and the sergeant, enraged, stepped +forward, and gave Tom a swinging box on the ear. + +There was a cry of "shame" from the others; but before any of them +could interfere, Tom suddenly stooped, caught the sergeant by the +bottom of the trousers, and in an instant he fell on his back with a +crash. + +For a moment he was slightly stunned, and then, regaining his feet, he +was about to rush at Tom, when the others threw themselves in between +them, and said he should not touch the boy. He struck him first, and +the boy had only given him what served him right. + +The sergeant was furious, and an angry quarrel was going on, when an +officer of the Rangers came suddenly out of barrack. + +"Hullo, Summers, what is all this about? I am surprised at you. A lot +of non-commissioned officers, just in front of the barrack gates, +quarreling like drunken sailors in a pothouse. What does it all mean?" + +"The fact is this, Captain Manley," the sergeant said, saluting, +"these two lads came up to speak to me, when Sergeant Billow chaffed +them. The lad gave the sergeant as good as he got, and the sergeant +lost his temper, and hit him a box on the ear, and in a moment the +young one tripped him up, and pretty nigh stunned him; when he got up +he was going at the boy, and, of course, we wouldn't have it." + +"Quite right," Captain Manley said. "Sergeant Billow, I shall forward +a report to your regiment. Chaffing people in the street, and then +losing your temper, striking a boy, and causing a disturbance. Now, +sergeant," he went on, as the others moved away, "do you know those +boys?" + +"No, sir; they are strangers to me." + +"Do you want to see the sergeant privately, lads, or on something +connected with the regiment?" + +"I see that you have vacancies for buglers, sir," Tom said, "and my +brother and myself want to enlist if you will take us." + +Captain Manley smiled. "You young scamps, you have got 'runaway from +home' as plainly on your faces as if it was printed there. If we +were to enlist you, we should be having your friends here after you +to-morrow, and get into a scrape for taking you." + +"We have no friends who will interfere with us, sir, I can give you my +word of honor as a gentleman." Captain Manley laughed. "I mean," Tom +said confused, "my word of honor, as--as an intending bugler." + +"Indeed we have no one to interfere with us in any way, sir," Peter +put in earnestly. "We wouldn't tell a lie even to enlist in the +Rangers." + +Captain Manley was struck by the earnestness of the boys' faces, and +after a pause he said to the sergeant,-- + +"That will do, Summers; I will take these lads up to my quarters and +speak to them." + +Then, motioning to the boys to follow him, he re-entered the barracks, +and led the way up to his quarters. + +"Sit down," he said, when they had entered his room. "Now, boys, this +is a foolish freak upon your part, which you will regret some day. Of +course you have run away from school." + +"No, sir, we have run away from home," Tom said. + +"So much the worse," Captain Manley said gravely. "Tell me frankly, +why did you do so? No unkindness at home can excuse boys from running +away from their parents." + +"We have none, sir," Tom said. "We have lost them both--our mother +many years ago, our father six months. Our only living relation, +except a younger sister, is an aunt, who considers us as nuisances, +and who, although meaning to do her duty, simply drives us out of our +minds." + +Captain Manley could not resist a smile. "Do you not go to school?" + +"We did go to a school near, but unfortunately it is broken up." + +Captain Manley caught a little look of amusement between the boys. "I +should not be surprised if you had something to do with its breaking +up," he said with a laugh. "But to return to your coming here. There +is certainly less reason against your joining than I thought at first, +but you are too young." + +"We are both strong, and are good walkers," Tom said. + +"But you cannot be much over fifteen," Captain Manley said, "and your +brother is younger." + +"We are accustomed to strong exercise, sir, and can thrash most +fellows of our own size." + +"Very likely," Captain Manley said, "but we can't take that into +consideration. You are certainly young for buglers for service work; +however, I will go across with you to the orderly-room, and hear what +the colonel says." + +Crossing the barrack-yard, they found the colonel was in and +disengaged. + +"Colonel Tritton," Captain Manley said, "these lads want to enlist as +buglers." + +The colonel looked up and smiled. "They look regular young pickles," +he said. "I suppose they have run away from school." + +"Not from school, colonel. They have lost both parents, and live with +an aunt, with whom they don't get on well. There does not seem to be +much chance of their being claimed." + +"You are full young," the colonel said, "and I think you will be +sorry, boys, for the step you want to take." + +"I don't think so, sir," Tom said. + +"Of course, you don't at present," the colonel said. "However, that is +your business. Mind, you will have a rough time of it; you will have +to fight your way, you know." + +"I'll back them to hold their own," Captain Manley said, laughing. +"When I went out at the barrack-gate just now there was a row among a +lot of recruiting sergeants, and when I went up to put a stop to it, I +found that a fellow of the 15th had chaffed these boys when they went +up to speak to Summers, and that they had got the best of it in that +line; and the fellow having lost his temper and struck one of them, he +found himself on his back on the pavement. The boy had tripped him up +in an instant." + +The colonel laughed, and then said suddenly and sharply to Peter, +"Where did you learn that trick, youngster?" + +"At Eton," Peter answered promptly, and then colored up hotly at his +brother's reproachful glance. + +"Oh, ho! At Eton, young gentlemen, eh!" the colonel said. "That +alters the matter. If you were at Eton your family must be people of +property, and I can't let you do such a foolish thing as enlist as +buglers." + +"Our father lost all his money suddenly, owing to a blackguard he +trusted cheating him. He found it out, and it killed him," Tom said +quietly. + +The colonel saw he was speaking the truth. "Well, well," he said +kindly, "we must see what we can do for you, boys. They are young, +Manley, but that will improve, and by the time that they have been a +year at the depôt--" + +"Oh, if you please, colonel," Tom said, "we want to go on foreign +service, and it's knowing that your regiment was under orders for +foreign service we came to it." + +"Impossible!" the colonel said shortly. + +"I am very sorry for that, sir," Tom said respectfully, "for we would +rather belong to this regiment than any in the service; but if you +will not let us go with it we must try another." + +"Why would you rather belong to us than to any other?" the colonel +asked, as the boys turned to leave the room. + +"I had rather not say, sir," Tom said. "We have a reason, and a very +good one, but it is not one we should like to tell." + +The colonel was silent for a minute. He was struck with the boys' +appearance and manner, and was sorry at the thought of losing them, +partly from interest in themselves, partly because the sea service was +generally so much more attractive to boys, that it was not easy to get +them to enlist as buglers and drummers. + +"You see, lads, I should really like to take you, but we shall be +starting in a fortnight, and it would be altogether impossible for you +to learn to sound the bugle, to say nothing of learning the calls, by +that time." + +"We can't play well, sir," Tom answered, his spirits rising again, +"but we have practiced for some time, and know a good many of the +calls." + +"Oh, indeed!" the colonel said, pleased; "that alters the case. Well, +lads, I should like to take you with the regiment, for you look +straightforward, sharp young fellows. So I will enlist you. Work hard +for the next fortnight, and if I hear a favorable report of you by +that time, you shall go." + +"Thank you very much," the boys said warmly, delighted to find their +hopes realized. + +"What are your names?" the colonel asked. + +"Tom and Peter," Tom answered. + +"Tom and Peter what?" the colonel said. + +The boys looked at each other. The fact that they would of course +be asked their names had never occurred to them, and they not had +therefore consulted whether to give their own or another name. + +"Come, boys," Colonel Tritton said good-temperedly, "never be ashamed +of your names; don't sail under false colors, lads. I am sure you will +do nothing to disgrace your names." + +Tom looked at Peter, and saw that he agreed to give their real names, +so he said, "Tom and Peter Scudamore." + +"Peter Scudamore! Why, Manley, these boys must be relations of the +dear old colonel. That explains why they chose the regiment. Now, +boys, what relation was he of yours?" + +"I do not admit that he was a relation at all, colonel," Tom said +gravely, "and I hope that you will not ask the question. Supposing +that he had been a relation of ours, we should not wish it to be +known. In the first place, it would not be altogether creditable to +his memory that relations of his should be serving as buglers in +his old regiment; and in the second place, it might be that, from +a kindness towards him, some of the officers might, perhaps, treat +us differently to other boys, which would make our position more +difficult by exciting jealousy among others. Should there be any +relation between him and us, it will be time enough for us to claim +it when we have shown ourselves worthy of it." + +"Well said, boys," the officers both exclaimed. "You are quite right," +the colonel went on, "and I respect your motive for keeping silence. +What you say about jealousy which might arise is very sensible and +true. At the same time, I will promise you that I will keep my eye +upon you, and that if an opportunity should occur in which I can give +you a chance of showing that there is more in you than in other boys, +be sure you shall have the chance." + +"Thank you very much indeed, colonel," both boys exclaimed. + +"Now, Manley, I shall be obliged if you will take them to the +adjutant, and tell him to swear them in and attest them in regular +form; the surgeon will, of course, examine them. Please tell the +quartermaster to get their uniforms made without loss of time; and +give a hint to the bugle-major that I should be pleased if he will pay +extra attention to them, and push them on as fast as possible." + +Captain Manley carried out these instructions, the boys were duly +examined by the surgeon and passed, and in half an hour became His +Majesty's servants. + +"Now, boys," Captain Manley said as he crossed with them to the +quarters of the bandmaster, "you will have rather a difficult course +to steer, but I have no doubt you will get through it with credit. +This is something like a school, and you will have to fight before you +find your place. Don't be in a hurry to begin; take all good-natured +chaff good-naturedly; resent any attempt at bullying. I have no doubt +you will be popular, and it is well that you should be so, for then +there will be no jealousy if your luck seems better than that of +others. They will, of course, know that you are differently born and +educated to themselves, but they will not like you any the worse for +that, if they find that you do not try to keep aloof from them or give +yourselves airs. And look here, boys, play any tricks you like with +the men, but don't do it with the non-commissioned officers. There is +nothing they hate so much as impudence from the boys, and they have +it in their power to do you a great deal of good or of harm. You will +not have much to do with the bandmaster. Only a portion of the band +accompanies us, and even that will be broken up when we once enter +upon active campaigning. Several of the company buglers have either +left lately, or have got their stripes and given up their bugles, and +I do not fancy that their places will be filled up before we get out +there. Now, your great object will be to get two of these vacancies. I +am afraid you are too young, still there will be plenty more vacancies +after we are once in the field, for a bullet has no respect for +buglers; and you see the better you behave the better your chance of +being chosen." + +"What is the difference exactly, sir?" Tom asked. + +"The company bugler ranks on the strength of the company, messes, +marches, and goes into action with them; the other buglers merely form +part of the band, are under the bandmaster, play at the head of the +regiment on its march, and help in the hospitals during a battle." + +"Macpherson," he said as he entered the bandmaster's quarters, where a +number of men and a few lads were practicing, "I have brought you two +lads who have entered as buglers." + +The bandmaster was a Scotchman--a stiff-looking, elderly man. + +"Weel, Captain Manley, I'm wanting boys, but they look vera young, and +I misdoubt they had better have been at school than here. However, +I'll do my best with them; they look smart lads, and we shall have +plenty of time at the depôt to get them into shape." + +"Lots of time, Macpherson, lots of time. They say they know a few +calls on the bugle, so perhaps they had better stick to the calls at +present; you will have plenty of time to begin with them regularly +with the notes when all the bustle is over." + +"Eh, ye know the calls, boys? Hardy and Graves, give them your bugles, +and let us hear them. Now for the advance." + +Tom and Peter felt very nervous, but they had really practiced hard +for an hour a day for the last four months, and could play all the +calls they knew steadily and well. The bandmaster made no remark until +they had sounded some half a dozen calls as he named them, and then +he said, "The lads have a vera gude idea of it, Captain Manley. They +are steadier and clearer than mony a one of the boys already. Will ye +begin at once, lads, or will ye wait till ye get your uniform?" + +"We had rather begin at once," the boys answered together. + +"Vera gude. Hardy, take two bugles out of the chest, and then take +these lads--What's your name, boys? Eh? Scudamore? A vera gude +name--take them over to Corporal Skinner, he will be practicing with +the others on the ramp." + +With a word of grateful thanks to Captain Manley as he went out before +them, the boys followed their new guide out to the ramparts. A guide +was hardly necessary, for an incessant bugling betokened the place, +where, in one of the bastions behind the barracks, seven or eight +buglers were sounding the various calls under the direction of +Corporal Skinner. + +The corporal was a man of few words, for he merely nodded when the +boy--who had not opened his lips on the way, indeed, he was too busy +wondering who these young swells were, and what they had run away for, +to say a word--gave the bandmaster's message to the effect that the +new-comers knew some of the calls and were to be under his tuition for +the present, pointed to them where to stand, and in another minute Tom +and Peter were hard at work adding to the deafening din. After half +an hour's practice they were pleased at seeing Captain Manley stroll +up and call their instructor aside, and they felt sure that he was +speaking to him of them. This was so, for the officer was carrying out +the instructions he had received from Colonel Tritton. + +"Corporal," he said, "I want to say a word to you about those boys who +have just joined. They seem to have a fair idea of the calls." + +"Yes, sir, they only know a few, but those they do know they can sound +as well as any of them." + +"That is right, corporal. Now look here, what I am going to say is not +to go farther, you understand." + +"Yes, sir, I will keep my mouth shut." + +"Very well. You can see the lads are not like most of our band boys. +They are a gentleman's sons who have got into some scrape or other and +run away from school." + +"I was thinking as much, sir." + +"The colonel believes that he knows their family, Skinner; but of +course, that will not make any difference in regard to them. Still he +would be pleased, I know, if they could sound the calls well enough to +go with the regiment. They are most anxious to learn. Now I shall be +glad if you can get them up to the mark. It will, of course, entail a +lot of extra trouble upon you, but if you can get them fit in time, I +will pay you a couple of guineas for your extra time." + +"Thank you, sir," the corporal saluted. "I think I can manage it--at +any rate if I don't it won't be for want of trying." + +"Who are those nice-looking lads I saw with you, Manley?" Major James +asked as the captain came into the messroom to lunch. + +"Those are two buglers in his Majesty's Norfolk Rangers." + +There was a general laugh. + +"No, but really, Manley, who are they? I was quite struck with them; +good style of boys." + +"It is a fact, major. Harding will tell you so," and he nodded to the +adjutant. + +"Yes, Manley is saying the thing that's right," the adjutant answered. +"The doctor passed them, and I swore them in." + +"I am sorry for it," the major said. "There were three or four of us +standing on the mess-room steps and we all noticed them. They were +gentlemen, if I ever saw one, and a hard life they will have of it +with the band boys. However, they are not likely to stay there. They +have run away from school, of course, and will be claimed. I wonder +you enlisted them." + +"The colonel's orders, major," the adjutant said. "Manley took them to +him, I believe, and then brought them to me." + +"I don't think you need feel anxious about them among the boys, +major," Captain Manley said. "I fancy they can hold their own. I +found them outside the gate where a row was going on among some of +the recruiting sergeants, and one of those boys had just tripped up +a sergeant of the 15th and nearly broken his head." + +There was a general laugh. + +"They are quite interesting, these prodigies of yours, Manley. How did +the boy do it? I should not have thought him strong enough to have +thrown a man off his balance." + +"I asked Summers about it afterwards," Captain Manley said, "the +fellow gave one of the boys a box on the ear, and in an instant the +boy stooped, caught his foot and pulled it forward and up. The thing +was done in a moment, and the sergeant was on his back before he knew +what's what." + +"By Jove," a young ensign said, "I have seen that trick done at Eton." + +"That is just where the boy said he learnt it," Captain Manley said. +"The colonel asked him suddenly, and it slipped out." + +"If they're Etonians, I ought to know them," the ensign said. "I only +left six months ago. What are their names?" + +"Their name is Scudamore." + +"By Jove, they were in the same house with me. Uncommonly sharp little +fellows, and up to no end of mischief. It was always believed, though +no one could prove it, that they were the boys who nearly suffocated +the bargee." + +There was a roar of laughter. + +"Tell us all about, Carruthers." + +"Well, there was not very much known about it. It seems the fellow +purposely upset a boat with four or five of our fellows in it, and +that night a dozen lighted crackers were thrown down into the little +cabin where the fellow was asleep; the hatch was fastened and he +was sent drifting down stream with the crackers exploding all about +him. The smoke nearly suffocated the fellow, I believe There was a +tremendous row about it, but they could not bring it home to any one. +We always put it down to the Scudamores, though they never would own +to it; but they were the only fellows in the boat who would have done +it, and they were always up to mischief." + +"But what makes them come here as buglers?" the major asked. + +"Their father was a banker, I believe, down in the Eastern Counties +somewhere. He died suddenly in the middle of the half before I left, +and they went away to the funeral and never came back again." + +"The fact is," Captain Manley said, "I fancy by what they say, though +they did not mention their father was a banker, that he lost all his +money suddenly and died of the shock. At any rate they are alone +in the world, and the colonel has no doubt that they are some +relation--nephews, I should imagine--of Peter Scudamore, who was our +colonel when I joined. One of them is called Peter. They acknowledged +that they had a particular reason for choosing this regiment; but +they would neither acknowledge or deny that he was a relation. Now +that we know their father was a banker, we shall find out without +difficulty--indeed I have no doubt the colonel will know whether Peter +Scudamore had a brother a banker." + +"What's to be done, Manley?" Major James said. "I don't like the +thought of poor old Peter's nephews turning buglers. All of us field +officers, and the best part of you captains, served under him, and +a better fellow never stepped. I think between us we might do +something." + +"I would do anything I could," Carruthers said, "and there are Watson +and Talbot who were at Eton too. Dash it, I don't like to think of two +Etonians in a band," "You are all very good," Captain Manley said, +"but from what I see of the boys they will go their own way. They have +plenty of pride, and they acknowledge that their reason for refusing +to say whether they are any relation of the colonel was that they +did not want to be taken notice of or treated differently from other +boys, because it would cause jealousy, and make their position more +difficult. All they asked was that they might accompany the regiment, +and not remain behind at the depôt; and as, fortunately, they have +both been practising with the bugle, and can sound most of the calls +as well as the others, the colonel was able to grant their request. +Had they been older, of course, we could have arranged for them to go +with us as volunteers, we who knew the colonel, paying their expenses +between us: as it is, the only thing we can do for them--and that is +what they would like best is to treat them just like the other boys, +but to give them every chance of distinguishing themselves. If they +don't get knocked over, they ought to win a commission before the +campaign is over." + +In the meantime Tom and Peter had been introducing themselves to the +regiment. The exercise over, they had returned to dinner. It was a +rough meal, but the boys enjoyed it, and after it was over a number +of the men of the band, with whom they messed, crowded round to ask +the usual questions of new-comers--their curiosity heightened in the +present instance by the fact that the boys differed so widely from +ordinary recruits. + +"Look here," Tom said, laughing, "I can't answer you all at once, but +if you put me on the table I will tell you all about us." + +There was a general laugh, and many of the soldiers other than the +band sauntered up to see what was going on. + +"The first thing to tell you," Tom said, "is our names. We go by the +names of Tom and Peter Scudamore, but I need scarcely tell you that +these are not our real names. The fact is--but this is quite a +secret--we are the eldest sons of Sir Arthur Wellesley--" + +Here Tom was interrupted by a shout of laughter. + +"Sir Arthur," Tom went on calmly, "wished to make us colonels of two +of the Life Guard regiments, but as they were not going on foreign +service we did not see it, and have accordingly entered the regiment +which Sir Arthur, our father, in speaking to a friend, said was the +finest in the service--namely, the Norfolk Rangers. We believe that +it is the custom, upon entering a regiment, to pay our footing, and I +have given a guinea to Corporal Skinner, and asked him to make it go +as far as he could." + +There was great laughter over Tom's speech, which was just suited to +soldiers, and the boys from that moment were considered part of the +regiment. + +"There's good stuff in those boys," an old sergeant said to another, +"plucky and cool. I shouldn't be surprised if what Tom Dillon said +was about right; he was waiting at mess just now, and though he didn't +hear all that was said, he picked up that there was an idea that +these boys are related to the old colonel. He was a good fellow, he +was, and, though I say nothing against Colonel Tritton, yet we missed +Colonel Scudamore terribly. Strict, and yet kind, just the sort of +fellow to serve under. If the boys take after him they will be a +credit to the regiment, and mark my words, we shan't see them in the +band many years." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +A TOUGH CUSTOMER. + + +Like most boys who are fond of play, Tom and Peter Scudamore were +capable of hard work at a pinch, and during the three weeks that +they spent at Portsmouth they certainly worked with a will. They had +nothing to do in the way of duty, except to practice the bugle, and +this they did with a zeal and perseverance that quite won the heart +of Corporal Skinner, and enabled him to look upon Captain Manley's +two guineas as good as earned. But even with the best will and the +strongest lungs possible, boys can only blow a bugle a certain number +of hours a day. For an hour before breakfast, for two hours before +dinner, and for an hour and a half in the evening they practiced, the +evening work being extra, alone with their instructor. There remained +the whole afternoon to themselves. Their employment of those hours had +been undertaken at Peter's suggestion. + +"Look here, Tom," he said, at the end of the first day's work, "from +what the corporal says, we shall have from one till about five to +ourselves. Now, we are going to Spain, and it seems to me that it +would be of great use to us, and might do us a great deal of good, to +know something of Spanish. We have got four pounds each left, and I +don't think that we could lay it out better than in getting a Spanish +master and some books, and in setting to in earnest at it. If we work +with all our might for four hours a day with a master, we shall have +made some progress, and shall pick up the pronunciation a little. I +dare say we shall be another ten days or a fortnight on the voyage, +and shall have lots of time on our hands. It will make it so much +easier to pick it up when we get there if we know a little to start +with." + +"I think it is a capital idea, Peter; I should think we are pretty +sure to find a master here." + +There was no difficulty upon that score, for there were a large number +of Spanish in England at the time; men who had left the country rather +than remain under the French yoke, and among them were many who were +glad to get their living by teaching their native language. There were +two or three in this condition in Portsmouth, and to one of these the +boys applied. He was rather surprised at the application from the two +young buglers--for the uniforms were finished twenty-four hours after +their arrival--but at once agreed to devote his whole afternoons to +them. Having a strong motive for their work, and a determination +to succeed in it, the boys made a progress that astonished both +themselves and their teacher, and they now found the advantage of +their grounding in Latin at Eton. Absorbed in their work, they saw +little of the other boys, except at meals and when at practice. + +One evening when at supper, one of the buglers, named Mitcham, a lad +of nearly eighteen, made some sneering remark about boys who thought +themselves above others, and gave themselves airs. Tom saw at once +that this allusion was meant for them, and took the matter up. + +"I suppose you mean us, Mitcham. You are quite mistaken; neither my +brother nor myself think ourselves better than any one, nor have we +any idea of giving ourselves airs. The fact is--and I am not surprised +that you should think us unsociable--we are taking lessons in Spanish. +If we go with the regiment it will be very useful, and I have heard +it said that any one who lands in a foreign country, and who knows a +little of the grammar and pronunciation, will learn it in half the +time that he would were he altogether ignorant of both. I am sorry +that I did not mention it before, because I can understand that it +must seem as if we did not want to be sociable. I can assure you that +we do; and that after this fortnight is over we shall be ready to be +as jolly as any one. You see we are altogether behindhand with our +work now, and have got to work hard to put ourselves on your level." + +Tom spoke so good-temperedly that there was a general feeling in his +favor, and several of them who had before thought with Mitcham, that +the new-comers were not inclined to be sociable, felt that they had +been mistaken. There was, however, a general feeling of surprise +and amusement at the idea of two boys voluntarily taking lessons in +Spanish. Mitcham, however, who was a surly-tempered young fellow, and +who was jealous of the progress which the boys were making, and of the +general liking with which they seemed to be regarded, said,-- + +"I believe that's only an excuse for getting away from us." + +"Do you mean to say that you think that I am telling a lie?" Tom asked +quietly. + +"Yes, if you put it in that way, young 'un," Mitcham said. + +"Hold your tongue, Mitcham, or I'll pull your ears for you," Corporal +Skinner said: but his speech was cut short by Tom's putting one hand +on the barrack table, vaulting across it, and striking Mitcham a heavy +blow between the eyes. + +There was a cry of "a fight!" among the boys, but the men interfered +at once. + +"You don't know what you are doing, young 'un," one said to Tom; +"when you hit a fellow here, you must fight him. That's the rule, and +you can't fight Mitcham; he's two years older, at least, and a head +taller." + +"Of course I will fight him," Tom said. "I would fight him if he were +twice as big, if he called me a liar." + +"Nonsense, young 'un!" another said, "it's not possible. He was wrong, +and if you had not struck him I would have licked him myself; but as +you have done so, you had better put up with a thrashing, and have +done with it." + +"I should think so, indeed!" Tom said disdainfully. "I may get a +licking; I dare say I shall; but it won't be all on one side. Look +here, Mitcham, we will have it out to-morrow, on the ramparts behind +the barracks. But, if you will apologize to me for calling me a liar, +I'll say I am sorry I hit you." + +"Oh, blow your sorrow!" the lad said. "I'll give you the heartiest +licking you ever had in your life, my young cock." + +"Oh, all right," Tom said cheerfully. "We will see all about it when +the time comes." + +As it was evident now that there was no way out of it, no one +interfered further in the matter. Quarrels in the army are always +settled by a fair fight, as at school; but several of the older men +questioned among themselves whether they ought to let this go on, +considering that Tom Scudamore was only between fifteen and sixteen, +while his opponent was two years older, and was so much heavier and +stronger. However, as it was plain that Tom would not take a thrashing +for the blow he had struck, and there did not seem any satisfactory +way out of it, nothing was done, except that two or three of them went +up to Mitcham, and strongly urged him to shake hands with Tom, and +confess that he had done wrong in giving him the lie. This Mitcham +would not hear of, and there was nothing further to be done. + +"I am afraid, Tom, you have no chance with that fellow." Peter said, +as they were undressing. + +"No chance in the world, Peter; but I can box fairly, you know, and am +pretty hard. I shall be able to punish him a bit, and you may be sure +I shall never give in. It's no great odds getting a licking, and I +suppose that they will stop it before I am killed. Don't bother about +it. I had rather get knocked about in a fight than get flogged at Eton +any day. I would rather you did not come to see it, Peter, if you +don't mind. When you fought Evans it hurt me ten times as much as if I +had been fighting, and, although you licked him, it made me feel like +a girl. I can stand twice the punishment if I don't feel that any blow +is hitting you as well as myself." + +Tom's prediction about the fight turned out to be nearly correct. He +was more active, and a vastly better boxer than his antagonist, and +although he was constantly knocked down, he punished him very heavily +about the face. In fact, the fight was exactly similar to that great +battle, fifty years afterwards, between Sayers and Heenan. Time after +time Tom was knocked down, and even his second begged him to give in, +but he would not hear of it. Breathless and exhausted, but always +cool and smiling, he faced his heavy antagonist, eluding his furious +rushes, and managing to strike a few straight blows at his eyes before +being knocked down. By the time that they had fought a quarter of +an hour half the regiment was assembled, and loud were the cheers +which greeted Tom each time he came up, very pale and bleeding, but +confident, against his antagonist. + +At last an old sergeant came forward. "Come," he said, "there has been +enough of this. You had better stop." + +"Will he say he was sorry he called me a liar?" Tom asked. + +"No, I won't," Mitcham answered. + +The sergeant was about to use his authority to stop it, when Tom said +to him, in a low voice: + +"Look, sergeant! please let us go on another five minutes. I think I +can stand that, and he can hardly see out of his eyes now. He won't +see a bit by that time." + +The sergeant hesitated, but a glance at Tom's antagonist convinced him +that what he said was correct. Mitcham had at all times a round and +rather puffy face, and his cheeks were now so swollen with the effect +of Tom's straight, steady hitting, that he could with difficulty see. + +It was a hard five minutes for Tom, for his antagonist, finding that +he was rapidly getting blind, rushed with fury upon him, trying to end +the fight. Tom had less difficulty in guarding the blows, given wildly +and almost at random, but he was knocked down time after time by the +mere force and weight of the rush. He felt himself getting weak, and +could hardly get up from his second's knee upon the call of time. +He was not afraid of being made to give in, but he was afraid of +fainting, and of so being unable to come up to time. + +"Stick a knife into me; do anything!" he said to his second, "if I go +off, only bring me up to time. He can't hold out much longer." + +Nor could he. His hitting became more and more at random, until at +last, on getting up from his second's knee, Mitcham cried in a hoarse +voice, "Where is he? I can't see him!" + +Then Tom went forward with his hands down. "Look here, Mitcham, you +can't see, and I can hardly stand. I think we have both done enough. +We neither of us can give in, well because--because I am a gentleman, +you because you are bigger than I am; so let's shake hands, and say no +more about it." + +Mitcham hesitated an instant, and then held out his hand. "You are a +good fellow, Scudamore, and there's my hand; but you have licked me +fairly. I can't come up to time, and you can. There, I am sorry I +called you a liar." + +Tom took the hand, and shook it, and then a mist came over his eyes, +and his knees tottered, as, with the ringing cheers of the men in his +ears, he fainted into his second's arms. + +"What a row the men are making!" the major said, as the sound of +cheering came through the open window of the mess-room, at which the +officers were sitting at lunch. "It's a fight of course, and a good +one, judging by the cheering. Does any one know who it is between?" + +No one had heard. + +"It's over now," the adjutant said, looking out of the window, "Here +are the men coming down in a stream. They look very excited over it. I +wonder who it has been. Stokes," he said, turning to one of the mess +servants, "go out, and find out who has been fighting, and all about +it." + +In a minute or two the man returned. "It's two of the band boys, sir." + +"Oh, only two boys! I wonder they made such a fuss over that. Who are +they?" + +"One was one of the boys who have just joined, sir. Tom Scudamore, +they call him." + +"I guessed as much," Captain Manley laughed; "I knew they would not be +long here without a fight. Who was the other?" + +"Well, sir, I almost thought it must be a mistake when they told me, +seeing they are so unequally matched, but they all say so, so in +course it's true--the other was Mitcham, the bugler of No. 3 Company." + +"What a shame!" was the general exclamation, while Captain Manley got +up and called for his cap. + +"A brutal shame, I call it," he said hotly. "Mitcham's nearly a man. +It ought not to have been allowed. I will go and inquire after the +boy. I will bet five pounds he was pretty nearly killed before he gave +in." + +"He didn't give in, Captain Manley," the servant said. "He won the +fight. They fought till Mitcham couldn't see, and then young Scudamore +went up and offered to draw it, but Mitcham acknowledged he was fairly +licked. It was a close thing, for the boy fainted right off; but he's +come round now, and says he's all right." + +"Hurrah for Eton!" Carruthers shouted enthusiastically. "Hurrah! By +Jove, he is game, and no mistake. He won a hard fight or two at Eton, +but nothing like this. I call it splendid." + +"The boy might have been killed," the major said gravely; while the +younger officers joined in Carruthers's exclamation at Tom's pluck. +"It is shameful that it was allowed. I suppose the quarrel began in +their quarters. Sergeant Howden is in charge of the room, and ought to +have stopped it at once. Every non-commissioned officer ought to have +stopped it. I will have Howden up before the colonel to-morrow." + +"I think, major," Captain Manley said, "if you will excuse me, the +best plan, as far as the boy is concerned, is to take no notice of +it. As it is, he must have won the hearts of all the regiment by his +pluck, and if he is not seriously hurt, it is the very best thing, as +it has turned out, that could have happened. If any one gets into a +scrape about it, it might lessen the effect of the victory. I think if +you call Howden up, and give him a quiet wigging, it will do as well, +and won't injure the boys. What do you think?" + +"Yes, you are right, Manley, as it has turned out; but the boy might +have been killed. However, I won't do more than give Howden a hearty +wigging, and will then learn how the affair begun. I think, Dr. +Stathers, that it would be as well if you went round and saw both of +them. You had better, I think, order them into hospital for the night, +and then the boy can go to bed at once, and come out again to-morrow, +if he has, as I hope, nothing worse than a few bruises. Please come +back, and tell us how you find them." + +The report was favorable, and the next morning Tom came out of +hospital, and took his place as usual, with the party upon the +ramparts--pale, and a good deal marked, but not much the worse for his +battle; but it was some days before the swelling of his adversary's +face subsided sufficiently for him to return to duty. + +Tom's victory--as Captain Manley had predicted--quite won the hearts +of the whole regiment, and the nicknames of "Sir Tom," and "Sir +Peter"--which had been given to them in jest after Tom's speech +about Sir Arthur Wellesley--were now generally applied to them. The +conversation in the mess-room had got about, and the old soldiers who +had served under Colonel Scudamore would have done anything for the +lads, although, as yet, they were hardly known personally except to +the band, as their devotion to work kept them quite apart from the +men. + +It was just three weeks after they had joined before the order came +for embarkation, and a thrill of pleasure and excitement ran through +the regiment when it was known that they were to go on board in four +days. Not the least delighted were Tom and Peter. It had already been +formally settled that they were to accompany the regiment, and it +was a proof of the popularity that they had gained, that every one +looked upon their going as a matter of course, and that no comment +was excited even among those who were left behind. Three days before +starting they had met Captain Manley in the barrack-yard, and after +saluting, Tom said, "If you please, sir, we wanted to ask you a +question." + +"What is that, lads?" + +"If you please, sir, we understand that the boys of the band have +their bags carried for them, but the company buglers carry knapsacks, +like the men?" + +"Yes, boys; the company buglers carry knapsacks and muskets." + +"I am afraid we could not carry muskets and do much marching, sir, but +we have each a brace of pistols." + +Captain Manley smiled. "Pistols would not look the thing on a +parade-ground, boys; but in a campaign people are not very particular, +and I have no doubt the colonel will overlook any little breach of +strict uniformity in your cases, as it is evident you can't carry +muskets. You can use your pistols, I hope," he said with a smile. "Hit +a penny every time at twenty paces!" + +"No, sir, we can't do that," Tom said seriously. "We can hit a +good-sized apple nineteen times out of twenty." + +"The deuce you can!" Captain Manley said. "How did you learn to do +that?" + +"We have practiced twelve shots a day for the last six months, sir. We +were thinking of asking you, sir, if you would like to carry a brace +of them through the campaign. They are splendid weapons; and we shall +only carry one each. They would get rusty and spoil, if we left them +behind, and we should be very pleased to think they might be useful to +you, after your great kindness to us." + +"It is not a very regular thing, boys," Captain Manley said, "for a +captain to be borrowing a brace of pistols from two of his buglers; +but you are exceptional buglers, and there is something in what you +say about rusting. Besides, it is possible you may lose yours, so I +will accept your offer with thanks, with the understanding that I will +carry the pistols, and you shall have them again if anything happens +to yours. But how about the knapsacks?" + +"We were thinking of having two made of the regimental pattern, sir, +but smaller and lighter, if you think that it would be allowed." + +"Well, I think, boys, if you are allowed to carry pistols instead of +muskets, no great objection will be made as to the exact size of the +knapsacks. Yes, you can get them made, and I will speak to the colonel +about it." + +"Perhaps," he hesitated, "you may be in want of a little money; do +not hesitate if you do. I can let you have five pounds, and you +can pay me," he said with a laugh, "out of your share of our first +prize-money." + +The boys colored hotly. + +"No, thank you, Captain Manley; we have plenty of money. Shall we +bring the pistols to your quarters?" + +"Do, lads, I am going in to lunch now, and will be in in half an +hour." + +The boys at once went out and ordered their knapsacks. They had just +sold their watches, which were large, handsome, and of gold, and had +been given to them by their father when they went to Eton. They were +very sorry to part with them, but they agreed that it would be folly +to keep gold watches when the twenty pounds which they obtained for +them would buy two stout and useful silver watches and would leave +them twelve pounds in money. They then returned to barracks, took out +a brace of their pistols, carefully cleaned them, and removed the +silver plates upon the handles, and then walked across to Captain +Manley's quarters. + +Rather to their surprise and confusion they found five or six other +officers there, for Captain Manley had mentioned at lunch to the +amusement of his friends that he was going to be unexpectedly provided +with a brace of pistols, and several of them at once said that they +would go up with him to his quarters, as they wanted to see the boys +of whom they had spoken so much during the last fortnight. Tom and +Peter drew themselves up and saluted stiffly. + +"You need not be buglers here, boys," Captain Manley said. "This is +my room, we are all gentlemen, and though I could not, according +to the regulations, walk down the street with you, the strictest +disciplinarian would excuse my doing as I like here." + +The boys flushed with pleasure at Captain Manley's kind address, and +as he finished Carruthers stepped forward and shook them warmly by the +hand. + +"How are you both?" he said. "You have not forgotten me, I hope." + +"I had not seen you before. I did not know you were in the regiment, +Carruthers," the boys said warmly, pleased to find a face they +had known before; and then breaking off:--"I beg your pardon--Mr. +Carruthers." + +"There are no misters here as far as I am concerned, Scudamore. There +were no misters at Eton. This is a change, isn't it? Better than +grinding away at Greek by a long way. Well, I congratulate you on your +fight. You showed there was some good in dear old Eton still. I wish +you had let me know it was coming off. I would have given anything +to have seen it--from a distance, you know. If it had been the right +thing, I would have come and been your backer." + +There was a general laugh, and then the officers all began to talk to +the boys. They were quiet and respectful in their manners, and fully +confirmed the favorable report which Captain Manley had given of them. + +"Where are the pistols, boys?" their friend asked presently. + +"Here, sir," and the boys produced them from under their jackets. "We +have no case, sir; we were obliged to leave it behind us when we--" + +"Ran away," one of the officers said, laughing. + +"They are a splendid pair of pistols," Captain Manley said, examining +them; "beautifully finished, and rifled. They look quite new, too, +though, of course, they are not." + +"They are new, sir," Tom said; "we have only had them six months, and +they were new then." + +"Indeed," Captain Manley said surprised; "I thought, of course, they +were family pistols. Why, how on earth, if it is not an impertinent +question, did you boys get hold of two brace of such pistols as these? +I have no right to ask the question, boys. I see there has been a +plate on the handles. But you said you had no relations, and I was +surprised into asking." + +The boys colored. + +"The question was quite natural, sir; the pistols were presented to us +by some people we traveled with once; we took the plates off because +they made a great fuss about nothing, and we thought that it would +look cockey." + +There was a laugh among the officers at the boys' confusion. + +"No one would suspect you of being cockey, Scudamore," Captain Manley +said kindly; "come, let me see the plates." + +The boys took the little silver plates from their pockets and handed +them silently to Captain Manley, who read aloud, to the surprise of +those around him,--"'To Tom' and 'Peter,' they are alike except the +names. 'To Tom Scudamore, presented by the passengers in the Highflyer +coach on the 4th of August, 1808, as a testimony of their appreciation +of his gallant conduct, by which their property was saved from +plunder.' Why, what is this, you young pickles, what were you up to on +the 4th of August last year?" + +"There was nothing in it at all, sir," Tom said; "we were on the coach +and were stopped by highwaymen. One of the passengers had pistols, +but was afraid to use them, and hid them among the boxes. So when the +passengers were ordered to get down to be searched, we hid ourselves, +and when the highwaymen were collecting their watches, Peter shot one, +and I drove the coach over another. The matter was very simple indeed; +but the passengers saved their money, so made a great fuss about it." + +There was much laughter over Tom's statement, and then he had to +give a detailed account of the whole affair, which elicited many +expressions of approval. + +"It does you credit, boys," Captain Manley said, "and shows that you +are cool as well as plucky. One quality is as valuable as the other. +There is every hope that you will do the regiment credit, boys, and +you may be sure that we shall give you every chance. And now good-bye +for the present." + +"Good-bye, sir," Tom and Peter again drew themselves up, gave the +military salute, and went off to their comrades. + +For when the order came to prepare for the embarkation, both Spanish +and bugling were given up, and the boys entered into the pleasure +of the holiday with immense zest. They had no regimental duties to +perform beyond being present at parade. They had no packing to do, and +fewer purchases to make. A ball or two of stout string, for, as Peter +said, string is always handy, and a large pocket-knife, each with +a variety of blades, were the principal items. They had a ring put +to the knives, so that they could sling them round the waist. They +had, therefore, nothing to do but to amuse themselves, and this they +did with a heartiness which astonished the other boys, and proved +conclusively that they did not want to be unsociable. They hired a +boat for a sail and took five or six other boys across to Ryde, only +just returning in time for tattoo, and they played such a number of +small practical jokes, such as putting a handful of peas into the +bugles and other wind instruments, that the band-master declared that +he thought that they were all bewitched, and he threatened to thrash +the boys all round, because he could not find out who had done it. + +Especially angry was the man who played the big drum. This was a +gigantic negro, named Sam, a kind-hearted fellow, constantly smiling, +except when the thought of his own importance made him assume a +particularly grave appearance. He was a general favorite, although the +boys were rather afraid of him, for he was apt to get into a passion +if any jokes were attempted upon him, and of all offences the greatest +was to call him Sambo. Now none of the men ventured upon this, for +when he first joined, Sam had fought two or three desperate battles on +this ground, and his great strength and the insensibility of his head +to blows had invariably given him the victory. But, treated with what +he conceived proper respect, Sam was one of the best-tempered and +best-natured fellows in the regiment; and he himself, when he once +cooled down, was perfectly ready to join in the laugh against himself, +even after he had been most put out by a joke. + +The day before the regiment was to embark, the officers gave a lawn +party; a large number of ladies were present, and the band was, of +course, to play. The piece which the bandmaster had selected for the +commencement began with four distinct beats of the big drum. Just +before it began, Captain Manley saw Tom and Peter, who with some of +the other boys had brought the music-stands into the ground, with +their faces bright with anticipated fun. + +"What is the joke, boys?" he asked good-humoredly, as he passed them. + +"I can't tell you, sir," Tom said; "but if you walk up close to the +band, and watch Sam's face when he begins, you will be amused, I +think." + +"Those are regular young pickles," Captain Manley said to the lady +he was walking with; "they are Etonians who have run away from home, +and are up to all kinds of mischief, but are the pluckiest and most +straightforward youngsters imaginable. I have no doubt that they are +up to some trick with our black drummer." + +On their way to where the band was preparing to play, Captain Manley +said a word or two to several of the other officers, consequently +there was quite a little party standing watching the band when their +leader lifted his baton for the overture to begin. + +There was nothing that Sam liked better than for the big drum to +commence, and with his head thrown well back and an air of extreme +importance, he lifted his arm and brought it down with what should +have been a sounding blow upon the drum. To his astonishment and to +the surprise of all the band, no deep boom was heard, only a low +muffled sound. Mechanically Sam raised his other arm and let it fall +with a similar result. Sam looked a picture of utter astonishment and +dismay, with his eyes opened to their fullest, and he gave vent to a +loud cry, which completed the effect produced by his face, and set +most of those looking on, and even the band themselves, into a roar of +laughter. Sam now examined his sticks, they appeared all right to the +eye, but directly he felt them his astonishment was turned into rage. +They were perfectly soft. Taking out his knife he cut them open, and +found that the balls were merely filled with a wad of soft cotton, the +necessary weight being given by pieces of lead fastened round the end +of the stick inside the ball with waxed thread. + +Sam was too enraged to say more than his usual exclamation of +astonishment, "Golly!" and he held out his drumsticks to be examined +with the face of a black statue of surprise. + +Even the band-master was obliged to laugh as he took the sticks from +Sam's hand to examine them. + +"These are not your sticks at all, Sam," he said, looking closely at +them. "Here, boy," he called to Tom, who might have been detected from +the fact of his being the only person present with a serious face, +"run to the band-room and see if you can find the sticks." + +In a few minutes Tom returned with the real drumsticks, which, he +said truly, he had found on the shelf where they were usually kept. +After that things went on as usual; Sam played with a sulky fury. His +dignity was injured, and he declared over and over again that if he +could "find de rascal who did it, by jingo, I pound him to squash!" +and there was no doubt from his look that he thoroughly meant what he +said. However, no inquiries could bring to light the author of the +trick. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +OVERBOARD. + + +There were no lighter hearts than those of Tom and Peter Scudamore +on board the transport "Nancy," as, among the hearty cheers of the +troops on board, and the waving of hats and handkerchiefs from friends +who had come out in small boats to say good-bye for the last time, +she weighed anchor, and set sail in company with some ten or twelve +other transports, and under convoy of two ships of war. It would be +difficult to imagine a prettier scene. The guns fired, the bands of +the various regiments played, and the white sails opened out bright +in the sun as the sailors swarmed into the rigging, anxious to outvie +each other. Even the soldiers pulled and hauled at the ropes, and ran +round with the capstan bars to get the anchors apeak. Tom and Peter, +of course, had, like the other boys, got very much in the way in their +desire to assist, and, having been once or twice knocked over by the +rush of men coming along with ropes, they wisely gave it up, and +leaned over the side to enjoy the scene. + +"This is splendid, Tom, isn't it?" + +"Glorious, Peter; but it's blowing pretty strong. I am afraid that we +sha'n't find it quite so glorious when we get out of the shelter of +the island." + +Peter laughed. "No; I suppose we sha'n't all look as jolly as we do +now by night-time. However, the wind is nor'-westerly, which will help +us along nicely, if, as I heard one of the sailors say just now, it +does not go round to the south." + +"Bugler, sound companies one, two, and three to breakfast." + +The order interrupted the conversation, and, for the next hour, +the boys had little time for talk. Half the regiment was on board +the "Nancy," and, after breakfast, the men were divided into three +watches, of which one was always to be on deck, for the ship was very +crowded, and there was scarcely room for all the men to be below +together. The boys were in the same watch, for the day previous to +starting Tom had been appointed bugler to the 2d Company, Peter to the +3d. The 1st Company, or Grenadiers, were in the watch with the band, +the 2d and 3d Companies were together, and the 4th and 5th. + +Tom was very ill for the first two days of the voyage, while Peter did +not feel the slightest effects from the motion. Upon the third day the +wind dropped suddenly, and the vessels rolled heavily in the swell, +with their sails flapping against the masts. Tom came up that morning +upon deck feeling quite well again, and the boys were immensely amused +at seeing the attempts of the soldiers to move about, the sudden +rushes, and the heavy falls. A parade had been ordered to take place; +but as no one could have stood steady without holding on, it was +abandoned as impossible. The men sat about under the bulwarks, and a +few amused themselves and the rest by trying to play various games, +such as laying a penny on the deck, and seeing which would pitch +another to lay nearest to it, from a distance of five yards. The +difficulty of balancing oneself in a heavily rolling vessel, and of +pitching a penny with any degree of accuracy, is great, and the manner +in which the coins, instead of coming down flat and remaining there, +rolled away into the scuppers, the throwers not unfrequently following +them, produced fits of laughter. + +Tom was still feeling weak from his two days' illness, and was not +disposed actively to enter into the fun; but Peter enjoyed the heavy +rolling, and was all over the ship. Presently he saw Sam, the black +drummer, sitting in a dark corner below quietly asleep; his cap was +beside him, and the idea at once occurred to Peter that here was a +great opportunity for a joke. He made his way to the caboose, and +begged the cook to give him a handful of flour. The cook at first +refused, but was presently coaxed into doing so, and Peter stole to +where Sam was asleep, and put the flour into his cap, relying that, in +the darkness, Sam would put it on without noticing it. Then, going up +to the deck above, Peter put his head down the hatchway, and shouted +loudly, "Sam!" + +The negro woke at the sound of his name. "What is it?" he asked. +Receiving no reply, he got on to his feet, muttering, "Some one call +Sam, that for certain, can't do without Sam, always want here, want +there. I go up and see." + +So saying, he put on his cap, and made his way up to the upper deck. +As he stood at the hatchway and looked round, there was, first a +titter, and then a roar of laughter from the men sitting or standing +along by the bulwarks. In putting on his cap some of the flour had +fallen out, and had streaked his face with white. Sam was utterly +unconscious that he was the object of the laughter, and said to one of +the men nearest to him, "Who call Sam?" + +The man could not reply, but Tom, who was sitting close by, said, "It +was no one here, Sam, it must have been the bandmaster; there he is, +close to the quarter-deck." + +Sam made his way along towards the point indicated, and as he did so +some of the officers upon the quarter-deck caught sight of him. "Just +look at Sambo," Carruthers exclaimed, "somebody has been larking with +him again. Look how all the men are laughing, and he evidently has no +suspicion of the figure he is." + +The sergeant, who, the bandmaster having remained at the depôt, was +now acting as chief of the band, did not see Sam until the latter was +close to him. "You want me, sergeant?" + +Sergeant Wilson looked up, and was astonished. + +"What on earth have you been doing to yourself, Sam?" he asked. + +"Me been having little nap down below," Sam said. + +"Yes; but your face, man. What have you been doing to your face?" + +Sam, in his turn, looked astonished. "Nothing whatsomeber, sargeant." + +"Take off your cap, man, and look inside it." Sam did as ordered; and +as he removed the cap, and the powder fell from it all over his face +and shoulders, there was a perfect shout of laughter from the soldiers +and crew, who had been looking on, and the officers, looking down from +the rail of the quarter-deck, retired to laugh unnoticed. + +The astonishment and rage of Sam were unbounded, and he gave a perfect +yell of surprise and fury. He stamped wildly for a minute or two, and +then, with a sudden movement rushed up on to the quarter-deck with +his cap in his hand. The colonel, who was holding on by the shrouds, +and talking with the major, in ignorance of what was going on, was +perfectly astounded at this sudden vision of the irate negro, and +neither he nor the major could restrain their laughter. + +"Scuse me, colonel, sah, for de liberty," Sam burst out; "but look at +me, sah; is dis right, sah, is it right to make joke like dis on de +man dat play de big drum of de regiment?" + +"No, no, Sam; not at all right," the colonel said, with difficulty. +"If you report who has played the trick upon you, I shall speak to him +very seriously; but, Sam, I should have thought that you were quite +big enough to take the matter in your own hands." + +"Me big enough, Massah Colonel, me plenty big; but me not able to find +him." + +"Well, Sam, it is carrying a joke too far; still, it is only a trick +off duty, and I am afraid that it is beyond my power to interfere." + +Sam thought for a moment, and, having by this time cooled down from +his first paroxysm of rage, he said, "Beg pardon, massa, you quite +right, no business of any one but Sam; but Sam too angry to 'top to +think. Scuse liberty, colonel," and Sam retired from the quarter-deck, +and made a bolt below down the nearest hatchway, when he plunged his +head into a bucket of water, and soon restored it to its usual ebony +hue. + +Then he went to the cook and tried to find out to whom he had given +flour, but the cook replied at once, "Lor, I've given flour to the men +of each mess to make puddings of, about thirty of them," and Sam felt +as far off as ever. + +Presently, however, a big sailor began to make fun of him, and Sam +retorted by knocking him down, after which there was a regular fight, +which was carried on under the greatest difficulty, owing to the +rolling of the ship. At last Sambo got the best of it, and this +restored him so thoroughly to a good temper that he was able to join +in the laugh at himself, reserving, however, his right to "knock de +rascal who did it into a squash." + +The following day the weather changed, a wind sprang up nearly from +the north, which increased rapidly, until toward afternoon it was +blowing half a gale, before which the whole fleet, with their main +and topsails set, ran southward at great speed. A heavy cross sea was +running, the wares raised by the gale clashing with the heavy swell +previously rolling in from the westward, and so violent and sudden +were the lurches and rolls of the "Nancy" that the master feared that +her masts would go. + +"How tremendously she rolls, Tom." + +"Tremendously; the deck seems almost upright, and the water right +under our feet each time she goes over. She feels as if she were going +to turn topsy-turvy each roll. It's bad enough on deck; but it will be +worse down below." + +"A great deal worse, Peter, it's nearly dark already; it will strike +eight bells in a minute or two, and then we shall have to go down. +There's no danger, of course, of the ship turning over, but it won't +be pleasant down below. Look out, Peter!" + +The exclamation was caused by an awful crash. The ship had given a +tremendous lurch, when the long-boat, which was stowed amidships, +suddenly tore away from its fastenings and came crashing down. +It passed within three feet of where the boys were sitting, and +completely tore away the bulwark, leaving a great gap in the side, +where it had passed through. "Look, Tom, Sam's overboard!" Peter +exclaimed. + +Sam had been sitting on the bulwark, a few feet from them, holding on +by a shroud, when the boat came down upon him; with a cry he had let +go of the shroud and started back, falling into the water just as the +boat struck the bulwark. "There he is, Tom," Peter said, as he saw the +black only a few yards from the side. "He is hurt, come on," catching +up the end of a long rope coiled up on the deck close to their feet, +the boys jumped overboard together. A dozen strokes took them up to +Sam; but the black hull of the ship had already glanced past them. +They could hear loud shouts, but could not distinguish a word. + +"Quick, round him, Peter!" and, in a moment, the boys twisted the rope +round the body of the black, and knotted it just as the drag of the +ship tightened it. Thus Sam's safety was secured, but the strain was +so tremendous as they tore through the water, that it was impossible +for the boys to hold on, and, in a moment, they were torn from their +hold. + +"All right, Peter," Tom said cheerily, as they dashed the water from +their eyes, "there is the boat." + +The remains of the boat were not ten yards distant, and in a few +strokes they had gained it. It was stove in and broken, but still held +together, floating on a level with the water's edge. With some trouble +the boys got inside her, and sat down on the bottom, so that their +heads were just out of water. + +Then they had time to look round. The ship was already disappearing in +the gathering darkness. + +"This boat will soon go to pieces, Tom," was Peter's first remark. + +"I expect it will, Peter; but we must stick to its pieces. We had +better get off our boots. The water is pretty warm, that's one +comfort." + +"Do you think the ship will come back for us, Tom?" + +"I don't think she can, Peter; at any rate, it is certain she can't +find us, it would take a long time to bring her round, and then, you +see, she could not sail straight back against the wind." + +"Look here, Tom, I remember when I climbed up to look into the boats +yesterday that there were some little casks lashed under the seats, +and a sailor told me they were always kept full of water in case the +boats were wanted suddenly. If they are still there we might empty +them out, and they could keep us afloat any time." + +"Hurrah! Peter, capital, let's see." + +To their great delight the boys found four small water-kegs fastened +under the seats. Three of these they emptied, and fastening one of +them to that which they had left full, and then each taking hold of +one of the slings which were fastened to the kegs for convenience of +carriage, they waited quietly. In less than ten minutes from the time +when they first gained their frail refuge, a great wave broke just +upon them, and completely smashed up the remains of the boat. They had +cut off some rope from the mast, which they found with its sail furled +ready for use in the boat, and now roughly lashed themselves together, +face to face, so that they had a keg on each side. They had also +fastened a long piece of rope to the other kegs, so that they would +float near them. + +It was a long and terrible night for them, generally their heads and +chests were well above the water, but at times a wave would break with +its white crest, and, for a time, the foam would be over their heads. +Fortunately the water was warm, and the wind fell a good deal. The +boys talked occasionally to each other, and kept up each other's +courage. Once or twice, in spite of the heavy sea, they were so much +overcome with exhaustion that they dozed uneasily for a while, with +their heads upon each other's shoulders, and great was their feeling +of relief and pleasure when morning began to break. + +"It is going to be a splendid day, Peter, and the wind is dropping +fast." + +"Look, Tom," Peter said, "there are some of the planks of the boat +jammed in with the kegs." + +It was as Peter said; the two kegs, one empty and the other full, were +floating about ten yards off, at the length of the rope by which they +were attached to the boys, while with them was a confused mass of +wreckage of the boat. + +"That is capital, Peter, we will see if we can't make a raft +presently." + +As the sun rose and warmed the air, the boys strength and spirits +revived, and in a few hours they were so refreshed that they +determined to set about their raft. The wind had now entirely dropped, +the waves were still very high, but they came in long, smooth, regular +swells, over which they rose and fell almost imperceptibly. + +"They must be rolling a good deal more in the 'Nancy' than we are +here, Peter. Now, the first thing is to have a drink. What a blessing +it is we have water." With their knives they soon got the bung out of +the water-keg, and each took a long drink, and then carefully closed +it up again. + +"There, Peter, we have drunk as much as we wanted this time; but we +must be careful, there is no saying how long we may be before we are +picked up. Hurrah, Peter, here are the masts and sails, so we shall +have plenty of cord." + +It took the boys nearly three hours to complete their task to their +satisfaction. When it was concluded they had the three empty kegs +lashed in a triangle about five feet apart, while two planks crossing +the triangle, assisted to keep all firm and tight; floating in the +center of the triangle was the keg of water. "There, I don't think +we can improve that, Peter," Tom said at last, "now, let us get on +and try it." They did so, and, to their great delight, found that +it floated a few inches above water. "We may as well get the masts +on board, Peter, and let the sails tow alongside. They may come in +useful; and now the first thing is to dry ourselves and our clothes." + +The clothes were soon spread out to dry, and the boys luxuriated in +the warmth of the sun. + +"What great, smooth waves these are, Tom, sometimes we are down in a +valley which runs miles long, and then we are up on a hill." + +"Here we lay, all the day, in the bay of Biscay, oh!" Tom laughed. +"I only hope that the wished-for morrow may bring the sail in sight, +Peter. However, we can hold on for a few days, I suppose. That is a +four-gallon keg, so that we have got a quart of water each for eight +days, and hunger isn't so bad to bear as thirst. We have pretty well +done for our uniforms, our bugles are the only things that have not +suffered." + +For the boys' companies being on deck at the time of the accident, +they both had their bugles on when they jumped overboard. + +"Our last upset was when that bargee canted us over at Eton, rather a +different business that, Peter." + +"My shirt is not dry yet, Tom; but I shall put it on again, for the +sun is too hot to be pleasant." + +Tom followed Peter's example. + +"Do you think, Tom, that we had better try to get up a sort of sail +and make for land, or remain where we are?" + +"Remain where we are, Peter, I should say. I suppose we must be a +hundred miles from the French coast, and even if the wind blew fair +we should be a long time getting there, and with the certainty of a +prison when we arrived. Still, if there were a strong west wind, I +suppose it would be our best way; as it is we have nothing to do but +to wait quietly, and hope for a ship. We are in the right line, and +there must be lots of vessels on their way, besides those which sailed +with us, for Portsmouth. So we must keep watch and watch. Now, Peter, +you lie down on that plank, it is just about long enough, you shall +have two hours' sleep, and then I'll have two, after that we will have +four hours each." + +"How are we to count time?" Peter said laughing. + +"I never thought of that," Tom said, looking at his watch. "Of course +it has stopped. We must guess as near as we can; at any rate, you go +to sleep first, and, when I am too sleepy to keep watch any longer, I +will wake you up." + +So passed that day and the next night. A light breeze sprung up from +the southwest, and the sun again shone out brightly. + +"I feel as if I wanted breakfast horribly," Peter said, with an +attempt at a smile. "Do you think that there is any possibility of +catching anything?" + +"We have nothing to make hooks with, Peter, and nothing to bait them +with if we had." + +"There are lots of tiny fish swimming all about, Tom, if we could but +catch them." + +Tom was silent for awhile; then he said, "Look here, Peter. Let us cut +a piece off the sail about five feet long, and say three feet wide, +double it longways, and sew up the ends so as to make a bag; we can +unravel some string, and make holes with our knives. Then we can sink +it down two or three feet, and watch it; and when we see that some +little fish have got in it, we can draw it up very gently, and, by +raising it gradually from the sea, the water will run out, and we +shall catch the fish." + +Peter agreed that at any rate it was worth trying; for, even if it did +not succeed, it was better for them to be doing something than sitting +idle. The sail and the floating wreckage were pulled alongside, and +the boys set to work. In three hours a large and shallow bag was made, +with some improvements upon Tom's original plan. The mouth was kept +open by two crossed pieces of wood, and four cords from the corners +were attached to the end of the oar which formed their fishing-rod. At +last it was finished, and the bag lowered. + +To the horror of the boys, it was discovered that it would not sink. +They were ready to cry with vexation, for the want of food had made +them feel faint and weak. + +"What have we got that is heavy?" Tom asked in despair. + +"I have got fourpence in halfpence, Tom, and there are our knives and +watches." + +Their pockets were ransacked, and the halfpence, knives, and watches +were placed in the bottom of the bag and lowered. Still the wood-work +kept afloat. + +"There are the bugles, Tom," Peter cried in delight. These had been +fastened to the raft, and were now hastily untied and placed in the +canvas bag. + +It sank now, and the boys lowered it five or six feet, so that they +could partly see into it. "There are lots of little fish swimming +about, Tom," Peter said in a whisper. "Some are almost as long as +one's hand. Do you think that they will go in, Tom?" + +"I hope the glitter of the bugles and watches will attract them, +Peter." + +"There, Tom, there--I saw a whole swarm of little ones go in." + +"Wait a minute or two, Peter, to let them get well down, and then draw +up as quietly as possible." + +Very cautiously the boys raised the point of their rod until the +top of the square-mouthed bag was level with the surface; then they +brought it close to them and looked in, and as they did so gave a +simultaneous cheer. There, in the bottom of the canvas, two feet below +them, were a number of little fish moving about. Raising the rod +still higher, they gradually lifted the net out of the sea, the water +running quickly off as they did so, and then they proceeded to examine +their prize. + +"We will take out one and one, Peter; give them a nip as you take them +up, that will kill them." There were two fish of about three inches +long, another three or four of two inches, and some thirty or forty +the size of minnows. It was scarcely more than a mouthful each, but +it was a stay for a moment to their stomachs, and no one ever said a +thanksgiving with deeper feeling and heartiness than did the boys when +they had emptied their canvas net. + +"We need not be anxious about food now, Peter; if we can catch these +in five minutes, we can get enough each day to satisfy us. They quench +the thirst too. We must limit ourselves to half a pint of water a day, +and we can hold on for a fortnight. We are safe to be picked up before +that." + +All the afternoon and evening the boys continued to let down and draw +up their net, sometimes bringing in only a few tiny fish, sometimes +getting half a dozen of the larger kind. By nightfall they had +satisfied the cravings of hunger, and felt stronger and better. One or +two sails had been seen during the day, but always at such distances +that it was evident at once that they could not pass within hail. That +night, fatigued with their exertions, both laid down and went to sleep +until morning, and slept more comfortably than before; for they had +fastened a piece of the sail tightly on the top of the raft, and lay +softly suspended in that, instead of being balanced upon a narrow and +uncomfortable plank. They felt new creatures when they woke, pulled +up their net, had a mouthful of raw fish, took off their clothes, and +had a swim, and then set to earnestly to fish. The sun was brighter, +and the fish in consequence kept deeper than upon the preceding day; +still by evening they had caught enough to take the edge off, if not +to satisfy, their hunger. The fishing, however, during the last hours +of daylight was altogether neglected, for behind them they could see +a sail, which appeared as if it might possibly come close enough to +observe them. There was still the long, steady swell coming in from +the Atlantic, and a light breeze was blowing from the north. The boys +had been so intent upon their fishing, that they had not noticed her +until she was within nine or ten miles of them. "She will not be up +for an hour and a half, Peter," Tom said, "and the sun will be down +long before that. I fear that the chance of their seeing us is very +small indeed. However, we will try. Let us get the net out of the +water, and hold it and the oar up. It is possible that some one may +see the canvas with a telescope before the sun goes down. Take the +things out of the net." + +The oar with the canvas bag was elevated, and the boys anxiously +watched the course of the vessel. She was a large ship, but they could +only see her when they rose upon the top of the long smooth waves. "I +should think that she will pass within a mile of us, Peter," Tom said, +after half an hour's watching, "but I fear that she will not be much +closer. How unfortunate she had not come along an hour earlier. She +would have been sure to see us if it had been daylight. I don't think +that there is much chance now, for there is no moon. However, thank +God, we can hold on very well now, and next time we may have better +luck." + +The sun had set more than half an hour before the ship came abreast of +them. They had evidently not been seen. + +"Now, Peter," Tom said, "let us both hallo together; the wind is very +light, and it is just possible they may hear us." + +Again and again the boys shouted, but the ship sailed steadily on. +Peter dashed the tears aside, and Tom said, with a quiver in his +voice, "Never mind, Peter; better luck next time, old boy. God has +been so good to us, that I feel quite confident we shall be saved." + +"So do I, Tom," Peter said. "It was only a disappointment for a +minute. We may as well put the oar down, for my arm and back ache +holding it." + +"Mind how you do it, Peter. If we let the end go through the canvas, +we shall lose our watches and bugles, and then we shall not be able to +fish." + +"Oh, Tom, the bugles!" + +"What, Peter?" Tom said, astonished. + +"We can make them hear, Tom, don't you see?" + +"Hurrah, Peter! so we can. What a fool I was to forget it!" + +In a moment the bugles rang out the assembly across the water. Again +and again the sharp, clear sound rose on the quiet evening air. + +"Look, Peter, there are men going up the rigging to look round. Sound +again!" + +Again and again they sounded the call, and then they saw the ship's +head come round, and her bow put towards them, and then they fell on +their knees and thanked God that they were saved. + +In ten minutes the ship was close to them, thrown up into the wind, a +boat was lowered, and in another minute or two was alongside. + +"Hallo!" the officer in charge exclaimed, "two boys, all alone. Here, +help them in, lads--that's it; now pull for the ship. Here, boys, take +a little brandy from this flask. How long have you been on that raft?" + +"It is three days since we went overboard, sir; but we were in the +water for about eighteen hours before we made the raft." + +Tom and Peter drank a little brandy, and felt better for it; but they +were weaker than they thought, for they had to be helped up the side +of the ship. A number of officers were grouped round the gangway, and +the boys saw that they were on board a vessel of war. + +"Only these boys?" asked the captain in surprise of the officer who +had brought them on board. + +"That is all, sir." + +"Doctor, you had better see to them," the captain said. "If they are +strong enough to talk, after they have had some soup, let them come +to my cabin; if not, let them turn in in the sick bay, and I will see +them in the morning. One question though, boys. Are there any others +about--any one for me to look for or pick up?" + +"No one else, sir," Tom said, and then followed the doctor aft. A +basin of soup and a glass of sherry did wonders for the boys, and in +an hour they proceeded to the captain's cabin, dressed in clothes +which the doctor had borrowed from two of the midshipmen for them, +for their own could never be worn again; indeed, they had not brought +their jackets from the raft, those garments having shrunk so from the +water, that the boys had not been able to put them on again, after +first taking them off to dry. + +The doctor accompanied them, and in the captain's cabin they found the +first lieutenant, who had been in charge of the boat which picked them +up. + +"I am glad to see you looking so much better," the captain said as +they entered. "Sit down. Do you know," he went on with a smile, "I +do not think that any of us would have slept had you not recovered +sufficiently to tell your story to-night. We have been puzzling over +it in vain. How you two boys came to be adrift alone on a raft, made +up of three water-kegs, as Mr. Armstrong tells me, and how you came to +have two bugles with you on the raft, is altogether beyond us." + +"The last matter is easily explained, sir," Tom said. "My brother and +myself are buglers in H.M.'s Regiment of Norfolk Rangers, and as we +were on duty when we went overboard, we had our bugles slung over our +shoulders." + +"Buglers!" the captain said in surprise. "Why from your appearance and +mode of expressing yourselves, I take you to be gentlemen's sons." + +"So we are, sir," Tom said quietly, "and I hope gentlemen--at any +rate we have been Etonians. But we have lost our father, and are now +buglers in the Rangers." + +"Well, lads," the captain said after a pause, "and now tell us how you +came upon this little raft?" + +Tom related modestly the story of their going overboard from the +"Nancy," of the formation of the raft, and of their after proceedings. +Their hearers were greatly astonished at the story; and the captain +said, "Young gentlemen, you have done a very gallant action, and have +behaved with a coolness and bravery which would have done credit to +old sailors. Had your father been alive he might have been proud +indeed of you. I should be proud had you been my sons. If you are +disposed to change services I will write directly we reach the Tagus +to obtain your discharge, and will give you midshipmen's berths on +board this ship. Don't answer now; you can think it over by the time +we reach Portugal. I will not detain you now; a night's rest will set +you up. Mr. Armstrong will introduce you to the midshipmen to-morrow; +you are passengers here now, and will mess with them. Good-night." + +It was not many minutes before the boys were asleep in their hammocks. +If people's ears really tingle when they are being spoken about, +Tom and Peter would have had but little sleep that night. The first +lieutenant related the circumstances to the other lieutenants; the +second lieutenant, whose watch it was, told the gunner, who related +it to the petty officers; the doctor told his mates, who retailed the +story to the midshipmen; and so gradually it went over the whole ship, +and officers and men agreed that it was one of the pluckiest and +coolest things ever done. + +The boys slept until nearly breakfast time, and were just dressed when +Mr. Armstrong came for them and took them to the midshipmen's berth, +where they were received with a warmth and heartiness which quite +surprised them. The midshipmen and mates pressed forward to shake +hands with them, and the stiflingly close little cock-pit was the +scene of an ovation. The boys were quite glad when the handshaking was +over, and they sat down to the rough meal which was then usual among +midshipmen. As the vessel had only left England four days before, +the fare was better than it would have been a week later, for there +was butter, cold ham and tongue upon the table. After breakfast they +were asked to tell the story over again, and this they did with great +modesty. Many questions were asked, and it was generally regretted +that they were not sailors. Upon going up on deck there was quite an +excitement among the sailors to get a look at them, and the gunner and +other petty officers came up and shook hands with them heartily, and +the boys wished from the depths of their hearts that people would not +make such a fuss about nothing; for, as Tom said to Peter, "Of course +we should not have jumped overboard if we had thought that we could +not have kept hold of the rope." + +That day they dined in the cabin with the captain, who, after the +officers present had withdrawn, asked them if they would tell him +about their past lives. This the boys did frankly, and took the +opportunity of explaining that they had chosen the army because the +enemies' fleet having been destroyed, there was less chance of active +service in the navy than with the army just starting for Lisbon, and +that their uncle having commanded the regiment that they were in, they +had entered it, and had received so much kindness that they had fair +reason to hope that they would eventually obtain commissions. Hence, +while thanking him most warmly for his offer, they had decided to go +on in the path that they had chosen. + +The captain remarked that, after what they had said, although he +should have been glad to have them with him, he thought that they had +decided rightly. + +The next morning, when the boys woke, they were surprised at the +absence of any motion of the vessel, and upon going on deck they found +that they were running up the Tagus, and that Lisbon was in sight. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +PORTUGAL. + + +The boys were delighted with the appearance of the Tagus, covered as +it now was with a fleet of transports and merchantmen. As they were +looking at it, the officer commanding the marines on board, who had +talked a good deal to them upon the preceding day, came up to them. "I +thought that you would be in a fix about clothes, my lads," he said. +"You could not very well join in these midshipman's uniforms, so I set +the tailor yesterday to cut down a couple of spare suits of my corps. +The buttons will not be right, but you can easily alter that when you +join. You had better go below at once and see if the things fit pretty +well. I have told the tailor to take them to the cock-pit and if they +do not fit they can alter them at once." + +Thanking the officer very much for his thoughtful kindness, and much +relieved in mind--for they had already been wondering what they should +do--the boys ran below, and found that the tailor had guessed their +sizes pretty correctly, aided as he had been by the trousers they +had worn when they came on board. A few alterations were necessary, +and these he promised to get finished in a couple of hours. They had +scarcely gone on deck again when the anchor was let fall, and a boat +was lowered, in order that the captain might proceed to shore with the +despatches of which he was the bearer. + +Just as he was upon the point of leaving the deck, his eye fell upon +the boys. "I shall be back again in an hour or two," he said; "do not +leave until I return. I will find out where your regiment is, and if +it has marched I will give you a certificate of how I picked you up, +otherwise you may be stopped on the way, and get into a scrape as two +boys who have strayed away from their regiment." + +So saying, the captain got into his boat and rowed to shore. It was +one o'clock before he returned. The boys had dinner with the gunroom +officers, then changed their dress, and had now the appearance of +buglers in the marines. + +The captain at once sent for them. "Your regiment went on yesterday +with the rest of the division. It halts to-day ten miles out of the +town. There is the certificate I spoke of. Mr. Armstrong is just going +off with two boats' crew to assist in unloading stores; I have asked +him to hand you over to the charge of some officer going up with a +convoy. And now good-bye, lads. I wish you every luck, and hope that +some day or other you may win your epaulets." + +With renewed thanks for his kindness, the boys went up on deck. There +they shook hands and said good-bye to all the officers and midshipmen. +As they were waiting while the boats were being lowered, two of the +sailors went aft to the captain, who had come up from below and was +walking alone on the quarter-deck, and, with a touch of the hat, the +spokesman said, "Your honor, we're come to ax as how, if your honor +has no objection, we might just give a parting cheer to those 'ere +youngsters." + +"Well, Jones," the captain said, smiling, "it's rather an unusual +thing for the crew of one of His Majesty's ships to cheer two young +soldiers." + +"It is unusual, your honor, mighty unusual, because soldiers ain't in +general of much account at sea; but you see, your honor, this ain't a +usual circumstance, nohow. These here boys, which ain't much more than +babbies, have done what there ain't many men, not even of those who +are born and bred to the sea, would have done; and we should just like +to give them a bit of a cheer for good luck." + +"Very well, Jones, tell the men they can do as they like." + +Accordingly, as the boys took their seats in the boat they were +surprised at seeing the crew clustering to the side of the ship, while +some of the men ran up the rigging. + +"What can the men be up to?" Tom asked Mr. Armstrong in surprise. + +The lieutenant smiled, for he knew what was coming. + +"Sheer off, men," he said, and as he did so the boatswain of the ship +gave the word, "Now, lads, three cheers for them boys; may they have +the luck they deserve." + +Three thundering cheers burst from the whole crew, the men in the +boats tossing their oars in the naval fashion of acknowledgment of +the salute. Tom and Peter, astonished and affected, stood up, took +off their caps, and waved their hands in thanks to the crowd of faces +looking down upon them, and then sat down again and wiped their eyes. + +"Row on," the lieutenant said, and the oars fell in the water with +a splash; one more cheer arose, and then the boats rowed for the +landing-place. The boys were too much affected to look up or speak, +until they reached the shore, nor did they notice a boat which rowed +past them upon its way to the vessel they had left, just after they +had started. It contained an officer in a general's uniform. The boat +steered to the ship's side, and the officer ascended the ladder. The +captain was on deck. "Ah, Craufurd," he said, "this is an unexpected +pleasure." + +"I have just come back from my division for a few hours, Merivale; +there are a lot of stores which are essential, and some of my +artillery is not landed, so I thought I could hurry things up a bit. +My spare charger, and most of the chargers of my staff, are being +landed, too; the ship they came in was a day or two late; and as I had +to confer with the Portuguese Minister of War, I am killing a good +many birds with one stone. I heard you had just come in, and as I was +on board the "Clio" about my charger, I thought it would not be much +out of my way to run round and shake hands with you." + +"I am very glad you did. Come into my cabin; you can spare time to +take some lunch, I hope." + +While they were at lunch General Craufurd remarked, "So you have just +lost one of your officers, I see; promoted to another ship, eh?" + +"Lost an officer!" Captain Merivale said in surprise. "No, not that I +have heard of. What makes you think so?" + +"I thought so by the cheering the ship's crew gave that boat that left +the ship just before I came up. There was only a naval lieutenant in +her, and I supposed that he had just got his ship, and I thought by +the heartiness of the cheering what a good fellow he must be." + +"But it was not the lieutenant the men were cheering," Captain +Merivale said with a smile. + +"No!" General Craufurd said, surprised. "Why, there was no one else +in the boat. I looked attentively as I passed. There was only a +lieutenant, a midshipman who was steering, the men rowing, and two +little marine buglers, who had their handkerchiefs up to their faces. +So you see I took a very minute survey." + +"You did indeed," Captain Merivale said, laughing. "Well, it was just +these little buglers that the crew of the ship were cheering." + +General Craufurd looked up incredulously. "You're joking, Merivale. +The crew of His Majesty's frigate 'Latona' cheer two buglers of +marines! No, no, that won't do." + +"It is a fact, though, Craufurd, unlikely as it seems, except that the +buglers belong to the Norfolk Rangers, and not to the Marines." + +"The Rangers! They are in Hill's division. What is it all about? There +must be something very strange about it." + +"There is indeed," Captain Merivale said, "very strange." And he then +related the whole story to his visitor. + +"They are trumps indeed," the general said when the narrative was +ended, "and I am very glad that I happened to hear it. I will speak to +Hill about it, and will keep my eye upon them. Be assured they shall +have their epaulets as soon as possible--that is, if their conduct is +at all equal to their pluck. It is the least we can do when, as you +say, they have refused midshipmen's berths to stick to us. And now I +must be off." + +The boat landed General Craufurd at the same landing-place at which +Tom and Peter had disembarked half an hour before. Lieutenant +Armstrong had spoken a few words to the officer who was superintending +the landing of stores and horses, and he, being far too busy to stop +to talk, briefly said that the boys could go up to join their regiment +with a convoy of stores which would start that night. + +After saying good-bye to their friend the lieutenant, the boys sat +down upon some bales, and were watching with much amusement and +interest the busy scene before them. As General Craufurd passed they +rose and saluted. + +"You are the boys from the 'Latona,' are you not?" + +"Yes, sir," the boys answered in surprise. + +"Can you ride?" + +"Yes, sir." + +"Follow me, then." + +Much surprised, the boys followed the general until he made his way +through the confusion to a group of newly landed horses. Near them +were a couple of mounted Hussars, who, at the sight of the general, +rode forward with his charger. He made a sign to them to wait a +moment, and walked up to the men who were holding the newly landed +horses. + +"Which of you have got charge of two horses?" + +Several of the men answered at once. + +"Which of you are servants of officers on my staff?" + +Three of those who had answered before replied now. + +"Very well; just put saddles on to two of them. These lads will ride +them; they are going out with me at once; they will hand them over to +your masters." + +In another five minutes Tom and Peter, to their surprise and +delight, were clattering along through the streets of Lisbon upon +two first-rate horses in company with the two Hussars, while, twenty +lengths ahead, trotted General Craufurd with two officers who had been +down to Lisbon upon duty similar to his own. Once outside the town, +the general put his horse into a gallop, and his followers of course +did the same. Once or twice General Craufurd glanced back to see how +the boys rode, for a doubt had crossed his mind as to whether he had +been wise in putting them upon such valuable horses, but when he saw +that they were evidently accustomed to the work, he paid no further +attention to them. + +The officers riding beside him, however, looked back several times. + +"What luck we have, to be sure, Tom," Peter said, "and I can't +understand this a bit. How could the general know that we came from +the 'Latona'; as he evidently did, and by the way these officers have +looked back twice, I can't help thinking that he is talking about us." + +Tom was as puzzled as Peter, but they soon forgot the subject, and +engaged in an animated conversation with the Hussars as to the +situation and position of the army, and the supposed strength and +locality of the French, concerning which they were, of course, in +complete ignorance. An hour and a half's sharp riding took them to +Torres Vedras, a small town which afterwards became celebrated for +the tremendous lines which Wellington erected there. The troops were +encamped in its vicinity, the general having his quarters at the house +of the Alcalde, or Mayor. + +"Your regiment is a mile and a half distant, lads," General Craufurd +said as they drew up at his quarters; "you will have difficulty in +finding it this evening. Sergeant, take these lads round to the house +where my orderlies are quartered, and give them some supper. They can +join their regiment in the morning. I have heard of you, lads, from +Captain Merivale, and shall mention your conduct to General Hill, and +be assured I will keep my eye upon you." + +The boys were soon asleep upon a heap of straw, and at six next +morning were upon the road, having already had some coffee and bread +for breakfast. They had no difficulty in finding their way, for +orderlies were already galloping about, and the bugle calls came sharp +upon their ears. The division was to march at seven. The Rangers +happened to be the first in advance, so that they passed through the +other regiments to arrive at theirs. + +The tents were down when they arrived, and packed in readiness for the +bullock carts which stood by. The boys paused a little distance off, +and looked on with delight at the busy scene. At a note on the bugle +the tents and other baggage were stowed in the carts, and then the men +hitched on their knapsacks, unpiled arms, and began to fall into rank. + +No one noticed the boys as they passed between the groups and +approached the band, who were mustering by the colors, which were as +usual placed in front of the guard tent. + +"There's Sambo," Tom said; "I am glad they got him safe on board." + +The negro was the first to perceive the boys as they came close up +to him. As he saw them he gave a sudden start, his eyes opened wider +and wider until the whites showed all round, his teeth chattered, the +shiny black of his face turned to a sort of dirty gray, and he threw +up his hands with a loud cry, "oh, golly, here's dose boys' spirits!" + +He stepped back, heedless that the big drum was behind him, and the +next moment went back with a crash into it, and remained there with +his knees doubled up and his face looking out between them, too +frightened and horror-struck to make the least movement to extricate +himself. + +For a moment no one noticed him, for at his cry they had all turned to +the boys, and stood as if petrified at seeing those whom they believed +had been drowned before their eyes a week before. The silence did +not last long, the boys bursting into a shout of laughter at Sam's +appearance. + +"Spirits! Sam," Tom said; "not by a long way yet, man. How are you +all? Come, get out of that, Sam and shake hands." And as the band with +a shout crowded round them, the boys helped Sam, who was trembling all +over from the shock and fright, from the drum. + +For a moment the boys were quite confused and bewildered, for as they +hauled Sam to his feet their comrades of the band pressed round them +cheering, every one trying to shake them by the hand. + +The news spread like wildfire among the troops, and there was at once +a general rush to the spot. The boys were seized in an instant, and +each raised on the shoulders of two of the grenadiers, and as they +made their appearance above the heads of the crowd a tremendous cheer +broke from the whole regiment. + +"What can be the matter?" was the general exclamation of the colonel +and officers, who were just finishing their breakfasts in a cottage +which stood close behind the spot where their tents had been pitched +in the rear of the regiment. "What can be the matter?"--and as the +cheering continued there was a general rush to the door. There they +stood astonished at seeing the whole of the men clustered in one spot, +shouting and waving their caps. + +"What can be the matter?" the colonel said again; "the whole regiment +seems to have gone mad." + +"We shall know in a minute," Captain Manley said; "they are coming in +this direction." + +"Look at that fellow Sambo," exclaimed Carruthers; "he looks madder +than all the rest." + +In spite of the intense surprise which all were feeling, there was a +general laugh, for the black was performing antics like one possessed; +his cap was gone, he jumped, he yelled, he waved his arms, with a +drumstick in each hand, wildly over his head, he twisted round and +round; he seemed really out of his mind. Suddenly he left the crowd, +and rushed on ahead at full speed towards the group of officers, still +leaping and yelling and waving his drumsticks. + +The officers instinctively drew together as he approached, for they +thought that the gigantic negro was really out of his mind. He stopped +suddenly as he came up to them, and tried to fall into his usual +attitude of attention. + +"Oh, Massa Colonel," he said in hoarse, sobbing tones, "only to +think, only to think. Scuse Sam, sar, but Sam feel he's going to bust +right up wid joy, massa. Dat no matter, but only to think. Bress de +Almighty, sar! only to think!" + +None of the officers spoke for a minute in answer to these disjointed +exclamations. They were affected at the man's great emotion. His black +skin was still strangely pale, his eyes were distended, his lips +quivered, tears were rolling down his cheeks, and his huge frame was +shaken with sobs. + +"Calm yourself, Sam--be calm, my man," the colonel said kindly. "Try +and tell us what has happened. What are the men so excited about? What +is the matter with them?" + +"Oh, Massa Colonel," Sam said, "me try tell you all 'boat it. Only to +think, sar, dose boys cum back again; dose boys, sar, bress dem, dat +jumped into de water and got drowned just to save dis poor niggar, +sar. Dey cum back again; only tink ob dat!" + +The officers looked at one another in surprise. + +"I do believe he means the Scudamores! colonel," Captain Manley +exclaimed; "but no, it is impossible, no one could have lived five +minutes in that sea, and we know that they could not have been picked +up, for we were the last ship in the fleet." + +"Yes, yes, sar, dat's dem, dey cum back sure enuff," Sam said. + +Then Carruthers exclaimed, "I do believe it is so; there are a couple +of boys on the shoulders of the men in the middle of the crowd. Yes, +and, by Jove, it is the Scudamores. Hurrah! I am glad." + +There was a general exclamation of pleasure from the whole group, for +the regret for the boys, who had, as was believed, perished in the +performance of such a gallant action, had been general and sincere, +and Captain Manley lifted his cap and said reverently, "Thank God, +these gallant lads are saved;" and those around, although some of them +were but little addicted to prayer, repeated the words and imitated +the action. + +Carruthers would have stepped forward in his eagerness to greet his +former school-fellows, but Captain Manley laid his hand quietly on his +shoulder and said in a low tone, "Wait, Carruthers, let the colonel +welcome them." + +And now the crowd came up to the cottage, those in front falling back +as they approached, so as to let the grenadiers come forward with +their burden. The boys were lowered to the ground, and stood at once +at attention; their faces were both flushed with excitement, and their +eyes swollen with tears, so much were they both moved by the welcome +which had greeted them. + +There was a dead silence for a moment, and then Colonel Tritton said +in a loud, clear voice, which was heard all over the throng of men, "I +am glad, lads, to see you back again. I never expected to have seen +you again after we caught a glimpse of you as the sea washed you away. +You have seen how the men have welcomed you, and I can assure you +that the pleasure of the officers that two such gallant young fellows +should have been saved is no less than that of your comrades. A braver +act than that which you performed was never done. I shake hands with +you, and congratulate you in the name of the whole regiment." And, +suiting the action to the words, Colonel Tritton stepped forward and +shook the boys warmly by the hand, amidst a great cheer upon the part +of the whole regiment. Then he held up his hand for silence again. +"Bugler, sound the assembly; fall in, my lads, or we shall be late. +Come in here, boys; you can get something to eat, and tell us in a few +words how you were saved, for, even now that I see you it seems almost +impossible." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +THE PASSAGE OF THE DUORO--TALAVERA. + + +Very severe was the drill and discipline, and not very abundant was +the food, and there was a general feeling of pleasure when, by the +general concentration of the army at Coimbra, it was evident that +active operations were about to commence. On the 5th of May 9000 +Portuguese, 3000 Germans, and 13,000 British troops were assembled. +Sir Arthur was already there, and upon the 6th General Beresford +marched with 10,000 men, and orders were issued for the rest of the +army to march out early the next day. + +The Norfolk Rangers were in high glee that night, and many were the +tales told by the old soldiers of former engagements in which they +had taken part. Next morning, at daybreak, the tents were struck, the +baggage packed, and the wagons loaded. The people of Coimbra came out +in crowds to see the troops march, and many were the blessings and +good wishes poured out as the long line wound through the streets of +the city. + +Hill's division was the last, and the rain was pouring down with great +force by the time they started. The march, however, was not a very +long one, for Beresford's division, which was to operate upon the +Upper Duoro, had a long distance to make, and it was necessary that +all should be ready for simultaneous action. For this purpose the army +halted the next day, and upon the 9th marched to Aveiro on the River +Vonga. Here a large flotilla of boats was found, and the Norfolk +Rangers with two other regiments were ordered to embark at once. The +Portuguese fishermen entered heart and soul into the business, and in +perfect silence the little flats were rowed up the lake of Ovar. + +The soldiers were greatly crowded in the boats, and were glad, indeed, +when just as morning dawned they landed at the town of Ovar. + +By this movement they were placed upon the right flank of Francheschi, +the general who commanded the advanced division of the French army. +Soon after they had landed the French were attacked in front, and +finding their flank turned, and the whole British force, which they +had believed to be seven days' march away, in their front, they fell +back hastily. + +To their great disappointment, the Rangers took no share in this the +first skirmish of the war. But Hill's orders were not to press on the +enemy's rear. Three days more of marching and skirmishing brought them +close to the Duoro on the evening of the 11th. The enemy crossed that +evening and destroyed the bridge, and during the night the British +troops were all brought up, and massed behind the hill called the +Serra. This hill stood upon a sharp elbow which the river makes just +above the town of Oporto, and the British were here completely hidden +from Marshal Soult, who had no idea that they were so close at hand. +Indeed, knowing that the bridge was broken and that all the boats +had been carefully taken over to that side of the river, the Marshal +dreamt not that Sir Arthur would attempt to cross, but imagined that +he would take boats lower down near the mouth of the river and there +endeavor to cross. To prevent such an attempt Soult had massed his +army below Oporto. + +The troops were ordered to pile arms, and eat their breakfast, but to +keep in position. "I wonder how we are to cross the river, Tom?" Peter +said. "It is three hundred yards across, with a rapid current, no man +in the world could swim that, and carry his musket and ammunition +across." + +"I expect Sir Arthur is reconnoitering, Peter; I saw him go up the +hill to that convent there; he must be able to see from there right +over Oporto." + +An hour passed, and then two or three officers were seen coming down +from the hill; one went up to General Hill, who happened at that +moment to be talking to Colonel Tritton. "You are to prepare to cross, +sir, Colonel Waters has discovered a small boat brought across by a +Portuguese in the night. They are going to cross to that great convent +you see upon the other side. They will bring back boats with them, and +you will cross at once, take possession of the convent, and hold it +against any force that may be brought against you until reinforcements +arrive." + +Very quickly were the orders passed, and with a smile of satisfaction +the men took their arms and fell in. They were moved near the river, +and kept under shelter of some houses. + +"Keep near me," Colonel Tritton said to Tom and Peter, "I may want you +to carry messages, there will be no sounding of bugles to-day." + +Keeping under the shade of some trees so that they could command a +view of the river without being seen from the opposite side, Colonel +Tritton with two of his officers and his two buglers, watched what +was going on. A few paces ahead of them were Generals Paget and Hill, +like themselves, watching the daring experiment. Behind, under shelter +of the houses, were the troops in dense masses. The Rangers, as the +first regiment in General Hill's division, were in front, and would +naturally be the first to cross. It was a most anxious moment, as +Colonel Waters and two Portuguese pushed the tiny boat from shore and +pulled across stream. The bulk of the Serra Hill hid the river at this +point, and even the convent opposite, from the sight of the French +army formed up below the town, but there were no doubt stragglers all +over the city, and the whole baggage of the French army was in retreat +by the road to Valarga which ran at a short distance behind the +convent. + +Most anxiously their eyes were strained upon the opposite bank, from +which they expected to see the flash of musketry, as the little boat +neared the convent. All, however, was as still as death. Behind them +they heard a rumble, and looking round saw eighteen guns on their way +up the hill. From this eminence they could command the ground around +the Seminary, as the convent across the water was called, and thus +afford some aid to the troops as they crossed. + +There was a murmur of satisfaction as the boat neared the opposite +shore, and after lying still for a moment to reconnoiter the convent, +pulled boldly up to the landing-place, where its occupants disembarked +and entered the Seminary. Their absence was not long. In a few minutes +they reappeared with eight or ten men, and then at once entered and +cast off three large boats moored along side. + +The boys could hardly repress a cheer as they saw them fairly under +weigh. An officer now left the side of the General, and came to +Colonel Tritton, "You will get your first company in readiness to +embark, sir; do not let them show themselves until the last moment." + +Colonel Tritton joined his men. "Captain Manley, take your company +forward, when the first boat touches the shore embark. Let there be no +noise or confusion." + +"God bless you, Peter," Tom said, as they separated; "your company +won't be many minutes after us;" for the bugler of the first company +was ill, and Tom was ordered to take his place. + +As the boat touched the shore Captain Manley ordered the leading files +of his company to come from under cover and take their place in the +boat. Twenty-four men entered, and when the other boats were also full +Captain Manley took his place, followed by his bugler, and the boats +pushed off again. + +There was a dead silence in the boat, broken only by the sound of +the oars as the Portuguese tugged manfully at them, each oar being +double-banked by a soldier. The rest sat with their muskets in their +hands, their pouches open ready for use, and their eyes fixed upon the +shore. All was quiet, and with a sigh of relief, and a hearty hurrah +muttered under their breath, the men leapt from the boat and ran up to +the Seminary. + +It was a large building with a flat roof, and the enclosure around it +was surrounded by a high wall which swept round to the water's edge +on either side. The only entrance was through a stout gate studded +with iron. This was already closed and barred; the captain at once +distributed his men at the upper windows of the Seminary, with orders +not to show themselves until the alarm was given. + +They had scarcely taken their places when they were joined by the +occupants of the second boat, while those of the third, in which +General Paget himself crossed, were but a minute or two later. Just as +they touched the shore, however, there was a sudden shout heard, this +was followed by others, and in five minutes a wild hubbub was heard in +the town. Drums beat to arms, and it was evident that the enemy were +at last awake to the fact that the British had effected a lodgment +upon their side of the stream. + +"We shall have it hot presently," Captain Manley said to Tom. "They +will be a quarter of an hour before they can get round here, and we +shall have the three boats back by that time. The one we came in is +half-way across already." + +Seven or eight minutes later a heavy column of men was seen pouring +out of the upper gate of the town. As they got into the open ground, +they threw out clouds of skirmishers, and pushed down towards the +convent. A heavy fire was at once opened upon them by the English guns +upon the Serra Hill. There was no longer any need for concealment. The +soldiers in the convent took their places at the windows, and as they +did so could hear the loud hurrahs of their comrades as they crowded +down to the bank upon the other side of the river to await their turn +to embark. Before the enemy were within musket-shot, three boat loads +more had been landed, and there were, therefore, 150 men now in the +convent. From the gates of the city the French artillery came pouring +out, and, taking up a position upon an eminence, opened fire upon the +convent just as the infantry had got within musket-range. + +So suddenly did the noise of the enemy's cannonade, the crashing of +the balls against the thick walls of the Seminary, the rattle of the +enemy's musketry, and the louder roar of the muskets of the defenders, +blended on both sides with shouts and cheers, break out, that for a +minute or two Tom felt almost bewildered. He had no time, however, to +think, for an officer came up to Captain Manley. "The general is up on +the roof; he wants a bugler sent up to him." + +Captain Manley nodded to Tom, who followed the aide-de-camp on to the +roof. Here he could see all that was passing, and an exciting sight +it was. Crowds of French soldiers were approaching the wall, keeping +up a tremendous musketry fire, whilst behind them three batteries of +field-guns were sending their messengers of death. From every upper +window of the convent the answering flashes came thick and fast, while +overhead hummed the shot from the British guns, on the Serra Hill. +Oporto itself was in a state of uproar. Drums were beating, trumpets +sounding, bells clanging, while from the house-tops the population, +men and women, were waving their handkerchiefs to the English, +gesticulating and making all sorts of pantomimic expression of joy. + +Looking at the river behind, Tom saw with pleasure that some more +boats had been obtained, and that strong reinforcements would soon be +across. The whistling of the bullets and the hum of the round shot +were incessant, and Tom acknowledged to himself that he felt horribly +uncomfortable--much more uncomfortable than he had any idea that he +should feel under fire. Had he been actively engaged, he would have +hardly experienced this feeling; but to stand impassive under a heavy +fire is trying to the nerves of the oldest soldier. He was angry with +himself that he was not more indifferent to the whizzing of the balls; +but the sensation of discomfort under fire is beyond the control of +the will, and it is no unusual thing to see a young soldier who, later +in the day, may display an almost reckless courage, yet at first +flinch whenever balls hiss close by him, in spite of all his efforts +to the contrary. Tom was able, however, to control any outward +manifestation of his feelings, and took his place a few paces behind +General Paget, who was standing with one of his officers by his side, +watching the force which, momentarily increasing, was, in spite of the +British fire, making its way onward towards the gate. + +It was evident that the general considered the danger to be pressing, +as he once or twice looked back to see how quickly the reinforcements +were crossing the river. The first time that he did so, his eye fell +on Tom. "Get behind those big chimneys, lad. There is no use in +exposing yourself unnecessarily." + +Tom obeyed the order with alacrity, and, once in shelter, was soon +able to bring his nerves under control, and to look round the corner +of his shelter without flinching when the bullets sang past. In five +minutes General Hill joined Paget on the roof, and just as he did so +the latter was severely wounded and fell. + +Tom ran forward to assist him, and, kneeling beside him, partially +supported him until four men came up and carried him below. The +position of the little garrison was now very precarious, the artillery +fire concentrated upon them was heavy, and the French swarmed up +to the wall, which they in vain endeavored to climb. The English +kept up a tremendous fire upon them, cheering constantly as fresh +reinforcements arrived, or as the enemy was momentarily repulsed. + +Tom had now lost all nervousness, and was standing eagerly watching +the fight, when a ball knocked his shako off. The general happened to +turn around at the moment. "That was a narrow escape," he said with a +smile. "What is your name, lad?" + +"Scudamore, sir," Tom answered. + +"Scudamore--Scudamore. Yes, I remember the name now. You are one of +the lads General Craufurd spoke to me about. I want to see you. Come +to me to-morrow with your brother. Go down now and join your company; +I do not want you here." + +Tom gladly went down, for he longed to be doing something. He soon +found his company, and, taking up a firelock of one of the men who had +fallen, was soon hard at work loading and firing into the assailants. +For an hour the strife continued. Fortunately General Murray had +found some boats three miles higher up the stream, and had crossed, +thus menacing the enemy's line of retreat. Suddenly a great pealing +of bells were heard in Oporto, with shouting and cheering, and the +house-tops were covered with people waving their handkerchiefs. The +French were evacuating the town. The inhabitants at once took across +some large barges to Villa Neva, a suburb lying across the river and +just below the Serra Hill. Here Sherbrooke began to cross. + +It was now the time for the English to take the offensive. There were +now three battalions in the seminary, and as the French drew sullenly +off to join the column now flowing steadily out from Oporto along the +Valonga road, the gates were thrown open, and the English passing out +formed outside the walls, and poured volley after volley into the +retreating foe. Had Murray fallen upon their flank, the disaster of +the French would have been complete; but this general feared that the +enemy would turn upon him, and destroy his division before assistance +could arrive, and he therefore remained inactive, and allowed the long +column of fugitives to pass unmolested. + +For the next eight days the English army followed hotly in pursuit, +and several skirmishes occurred; but Soult effected a most masterly +retreat, saving his army, when it seemed upon the brink of +destruction, by leaving his guns and baggage behind him, and leading +his men by paths over mountains supposed to be impassable for any +large body of men. He lost altogether 6000 men in this short campaign. +This included 3600 prisoners either captured in action or left behind +in the hospitals, and 1400 killed. The number of guns left behind was +fifty-eight. The English had only 300 killed and wounded. + +Sir Arthur's plans for the invasion of Spain were not yet +complete, and he accordingly halted his army to await supplies and +reinforcements. During this time the young buglers had no opportunity +of calling upon Major-General Hill. The transport supplied by the +Spanish Government had failed grossly, and the troops were badly fed +at a time when, taking long marches, they most required support. The +first day after they halted the boys determined that they would, as +soon as they were off duty, call upon General Hill. While parade was +going on, however, they saw the general ride up to Colonel Tritton, +and enter into conversation with him. The bugler, who was standing +near, was ordered to sound the call for the officers to assemble in +front; and when they did so, Colonel Tritton left the general's side +and spoke a few words with them. There was a short conversation, +and then the colonel rejoined the general's side, and the officers +returned to their places. The colonel now rode forward to the center +of the line, and said in loud tones, "Men, I have a piece of news to +tell you which I think that you will be glad to hear. Upon my arrival +at Lisbon I reported the gallant conduct of Tom and Peter Scudamore +in rescuing one of their comrades when washed overboard in the Bay +of Biscay. Captain Merivale, of the "Latona," also reported it, and +General Hill, when he heard the circumstances, was also good enough to +send home a report recommending them for promotion. He has received +an answer from the Commander-in-Chief announcing that they are both +granted commissions in this regiment as a reward for their act of +distinguished gallantry. The regiment is dismissed." + +As the men fell out they gave a loud and general cheer, and Tom and +Peter were surrounded by their comrades, who shook them by the hand, +and congratulated them upon their promotion. The boys were too much +surprised and affected to speak, and they had scarcely recovered from +their bewilderment, when Carruthers came up to them, and led them +to the colonel. Here General Hill first, and then all the officers, +warmly shook hands with them. The boys were much touched by the warmth +with which they were received, and were soon hurried off to the tents +of the officers. Several of the ensigns were slight young men, and +they insisted upon rigging the boys out in uniform, and the boys +had the less scruple in accepting the kind offer, inasmuch as they +expected every day to enter Spain, when the baggage would be cut down +to the smallest possible proportion, and the officers as well as +the men be obliged to leave almost everything behind them. Sam was +delighted at the promotion of his friends, and asked to be appointed +their servant, a request which was at once acceded to. The regiment +had now been three months in Spain, and the boys had continued to +work hard at Spanish, devoting several hours a day to its study, and +talking it whenever they could find an opportunity--no difficult +matter, as Portugal was full of Spanish who had crossed the frontier +to avoid the hated yoke of the French. + +The delay in invading Spain was caused partly from want of +transport, but more by the utter incapacity of the Spanish Junta or +government, and by the arrogance and folly of Cuesta, the Spanish +Commander-in-Chief, who was always proposing impracticable schemes to +Wellington, and, inflated with Spanish pride and obstinacy, believed +that his own worthless troops were fully a match for the French, and +was jealous in the highest degree of the British general. + +At last, on the 27th of June, the British army advanced. Scarcely had +they made a day's march, however, when the utter faithlessness of the +Spaniards became manifest. The provisions and transport promised were +not forthcoming, and from the very day of their advance the British +were badly fed, and indeed often not fed at all; and so great were +their sufferings during the campaign--sufferings caused by the +heartlessness of the people whom they had come to deliver from a +foreign yoke, that the British soldiers came to cherish a deep and +bitter hatred against the Spanish; and it was this intense feeling of +animosity which had no little to do with the cruel excesses of the +English soldiery upon the capture of Burgos and San Sebastian. + +After many delays from these causes, the British army reached Oropesa +upon the 20th July, and there formed a junction with Cuesta's army. +Upon the 22d the allied armies moved forward, and upon the same +day the Spaniards came in contact with the French, and should have +inflicted a severe blow upon them, but the ignorance and timidity of +the Spanish generals enabled the enemy to draw off and concentrate +without loss. + +The British troops had now been for many days upon half rations, and +Sir Arthur gave notice to the Junta, that unless his requisitions were +complied with, he should retire from Spain. Cuesta, however, believing +that the French were retreating in haste, pushed his army across the +river Alberche, with the vain idea of defeating them, and entering +Madrid in triumph. Sir Arthur, seeing the fatal consequences which +would ensue, were the Spaniards attacked alone, laid aside his +previously-formed resolution, and put his army in motion across +the Alberche. The position of the allied armies was now most +dangerous--far more so, indeed, than the English general supposed. +Badly informed by the Spanish, he greatly underrated the enemy's +forces. Taking advantage of the delay caused by the want of provisions +and carriage, Soult, Victor, and Ney were marching their forces from +various points, and concentrating to crush the invading army. Upon the +26th the French met the Spanish army. General Zayas, who commanded +the Spanish advance of 4000 infantry and 2000 cavalry, scarcely +offered any resistance, his men broke and fled in disorder, and the +panic would have spread to the whole Spanish army, had not General +Albuquerque brought up 3000 more cavalry and held the French at +bay, while Cuesta retreated in great disorder. The Spanish loss by +dispersion and flight was no less than 4000 men, and the whole army +would have been broken up had not General Sherbrooke advanced with his +division, and placed it between the French and the flying Spaniards. + +The allies now recrossed the Alberche and took up a position to cover +Talavera. Sir Arthur chose a strong defensive position, as it was +evident that the Spanish were worse than useless in the open field. +The Spaniards were placed with their right resting upon Talavera, +their left upon a mound whereon a large field-redoubt was constructed. +Their front was covered by a convent, by ditches, stone walls, +breastworks, and felled trees; and thus, worthless as were the troops, +they could scarcely be driven from a position almost impregnable. + +The line beyond the Spanish was continued by Campbell's division, next +to which came that of Sherbrooke, its left extending to a steep hill. +Mackenzie and Donkin had not yet fallen hack from the Alberche. Hill +was in rear. The British troops, including the German legion, were +19,000 strong, with thirty guns. The Spaniards had 33,000 men and +seventy guns. The Spanish contingent could, however, be in no way +relied upon, and were, indeed, never seriously engaged. The real +battle was between the 19,000 British troops and 50,000 French. +The French attacked the British outposts with great impetuosity, +and Mackenzie and Donkin were driven in with a loss of 4000 men. +The latter took up his position with his brigade on the hill on +Sherbrooke's left; the former took post with Campbell's division, to +which he belonged. The French cavalry now galloped up towards the +portion of the line held by the Spanish, and discharged their pistols +at them, whereupon 10,000 Spanish infantry and the whole of their +artillery broke and fled in wild confusion. For miles they continued +their flight, but in the evening the Spanish cavalry were sent round +in pursuit, and drove some 4000 of these cowards back to their lines. +Seeing the wild confusion which was raging on the allies' right, +Victor resolved, although evening was at hand, to make a sudden dash +upon the hill upon their left, which, held only by Donkin's brigade, +was the key of the position. The hill was very steep upon the front, +or French side, while towards the rear it sloped gradually. Ruffin's +division was ordered to the attack, followed by Villette in support, +while Lapisse was ordered to engage the German legion, which was on +the left of Sherbrooke's division. + +Hill's division was lying down behind the hill when Ruffin's troops +advanced to the attack. There was no expectation of an attack that +evening, and the woods and increasing darkness covered the movements +of the French troops. Weary and hungry, the English soldiers, +disgusted at the inhuman neglect of the Spaniards, and furious +at their cowardice, were chatting over the events of the day and +discussing the chances, by no means bright, of the expected battle +to-morrow. All that day they had had no food whatever save a small +portion of grain, served out raw and unground. Tom and Peter had been +chatting with the officers, who were grouped under a tree, when Sambo +came up to them and beckoned them aside. + +"Look here, Massa Tom, here six eggs; tree for you, tree for Massa +Peter." + +"Thank you, Sam, that is capital; but you know you will get into a row +if you get caught taking things." + +"Me no take 'em, massa. Old hen give them to me." + +Tom laughed. + +"How was that, Sam?" + +"Well, Massa, me saw her sitting on nest. Me went up and said to her, +'Give me some eggs, old girl.' She say 'Cluck.' I says, 'Cluck means +yes, I suppose?' She say 'Cluck' again. Clear 'nuff that, so me take +eggs, eat tree, bring six, young massa." + +"I am afraid, Sam," Tom said, laughing, "your story would hardly save +you from the triangles, if you had been caught. However, as it is rude +to return a present, of course you cannot take them back to the hen. I +suppose they are raw?" + +"Yes, massa; no good make fire; make hole bofe ends, suck 'em." + +"All right, Sam; it is not the nicest way, but, under the +circumstances, perhaps it is the best; at any rate, I am too hungry to +wait till we can get a fire lighted." + +So saying, the boys sucked the raw eggs, and then joined the men, +when, just as they did so, first a dropping rifle shot, and then a +perfect roar of musketry broke out upon the hill above them. It needed +no order to be given. The men fell into their places and prepared to +climb the hill and assist Donkin's brigade, which was evidently unable +alone to resist the attack. Knapsacks were thrown off, firelocks +tightly grasped, and the regiment impatiently awaited orders to +advance. None were more impatient than the colonel, who after a few +minutes, seeing by the fire that the English were falling back, and +that the French had gained the crest of the hill, waited no longer for +orders, but gave the word for the regiment to advance. They were but +half way up the hill when General Hill himself galloped down to meet +them, and then turning, led the way beside Colonel Tritton. + +General Hill had had a narrow escape. Donkin had repulsed the French +who attacked him in front, but his force was insufficient to guard the +whole crest of the hill. Consequently, the enemy had come up round +his flank, and were now in actual possession of the crest. General +Hill, ignorant of this, had ridden with his brigade-major right +into the midst of the French before he found out his mistake. His +brigade-major, Fordyce, was killed, his own horse wounded, and his +bridle seized by a French grenadier. He had, however, broken away, and +had ridden off under a storm of bullets. + +With a cheer the Norfolk Rangers followed their gallant leader. They +reached the crest, poured a tremendous volley into the enemy, and +charged with the bayonet. The French, of whom but a small portion +had as yet gained the crest, were unable to resist the impetuous +onslaught, and at once gave way. + +The Rangers were now joined by the 48th and the 29th, so that these, +with Donkin's brigade, formed a strong body of troops. The French, +who had fallen back, now united with their main body, and the attack +was renewed with all the force of Ruffin's division. The heavy mass +pressed upwards, in spite of the destructive fire of the British, and +were within twenty yards of the crest, when, with a hearty cheer, the +English troops burst upon them with the bayonet, and the French again +fell back, broken and disheartened. + +This ended the fighting on the 27th of July. Long lines of bivouac +fires soon blazed upon either side. The wounded were carried down the +hill to the field-hospital, which had been erected under its cover, +and the men, eating their scanty supper, wrapped themselves in their +great coats, and were soon asleep. The officers chatted for a short +time longer, but as all were tired, and the next day was sure to be a +severe one, they, too, soon lay down by their fire. + +When morning broke, it was seen that the enemy had massed a large +force of artillery upon a hill just opposite to the one held by the +English. Soon afterwards Ruffin's division, as before supported by +Villette, advanced to the attack, covered by the tremendous fire from +his artillery. The British had no adequate force of artillery to reply +to the iron storm, and the balls swept through their lines, mowing +down their ranks, and causing great loss. The regiments in reserve lay +down to avoid the iron shower, while the Rangers and 48th prepared to +resist the French when they came within fighting distance. + +As their men approached the summit of the hill, the French artillery +was obliged to cease playing in that direction, and turned its +attention to the British center, while a fierce musketry contest took +place between the French and Hill and Donkin's men. + +The ground was rough, and the troops on both sides, broken up into +small bodies, fought desperately. General Hill was wounded, and the +British troops fell fast. The French, however, suffered even more, +and, as Hill brought up his reserve, the English gained ground foot by +foot, until they drove them again down the steep side of the hill. As +the French retired, their artillery once more opened fire to cover +their retreat. + +A pause now ensued; the French in this brief contest had lost 1400 +men, and the British had suffered severely. The French then held a +council of war, and determined to attack along the whole line in +force. Hours passed away; the English munched their corn, smoked their +pipes, and watched the enemy scattered over the plain. The weather +was very hot, and the men of both sides went down to a little stream +which divided their positions, drank, and filled their water-bottles +in perfect amity. Some of the officers, who spoke French conversed +with the French officers, exchanged cigars for brandy, and joked and +laughed as if they had been the best of friends. + +At one o'clock the French drums were heard to beat, and the men were +soon formed in order. Tom and Peter stood with a group of officers on +the brow of the hill. Nothing could be finer than the sight. Far away +the view stretched over the country, thickly wooded, and with château +and farm-houses scatted here and there. Through the trees the dense +masses of the French could be seen, as they moved in columns towards +the positions from which they were to attack. Upon an eminence, +nearly opposite to their position, the boys could see a long line of +the French artillery. Far away, to the right, rose the churches of +Talavera, while behind the hill were the British and Spanish cavalry, +ready to charge should the French endeavor to turn the British left by +pushing round its foot. Fifty paces from the officers of the Norfolk +Rangers sat Sir Arthur Wellesley, on horseback, watching attentively +through a field-glass the movements of the enemy, and at a short +distance behind him were his staff. The British troops were standing +in easy order, a little behind the crest of the hill, so as to be +sheltered from the artillery fire with which the French were sure to +cover the advance of their column of attack. + +"This is a grand sight, Peter," Tom said, "but I wish they would +begin; it makes one fidgety waiting for it." + +Scarcely had Tom spoken when, as if in answer to his wish, a series +of jets of white smoke puffed out from the opposite hill, and two or +three seconds later came the thunder of eighty guns, and the whizzing +sound of as many balls. Instinctively the group drew back a pace, but +it was not upon them that this tremendous fire was opened. It was +directed against the right of the British line, and almost at the same +moment a cloud of skirmishers appeared among the trees, followed by +the dark columns of Sebastiani's division. + +Upon these the English guns at once opened fire; but rushing forward +with their usual impetuosity, they cleared away the obstacles which +had been raised across the British front, and charged with fury +against the British position. Campbell's division, however, assisted +by Mackenzie's brigade and two Spanish battalions, stood firm, and +driving back the skirmishers, advanced in line, cheering loudly. The +head of the French column withered away under their tremendous fire, +and, pushing forward, they overlapped it, and drove them back with +terrible loss, capturing ten guns. Then Campbell prudently recalled +his men to their first position, and the British artillery, which had +necessarily been silent while friend and foe were mingled together, +opened furiously upon the French as they tried to re-form upon their +supports. A Spanish cavalry regiment dashed down upon their flank, and +they retired again in great disorder. + +Every incident of the fight could be seen from the British position on +the hill, and the troops almost held their breath with excitement as +the British lines clashed against the head of the French column, and a +loud shout of triumph burst out spontaneously as the French broke and +fled. + +But it was now the turn of the left. Already Villette's division, +preceded by the Grenadiers and supported by Ruffin's division, was +advancing, and the British cavalry were ordered to charge them. The +ground was, however, quite unfit for cavalry. Colonel Arentschild, a +very experienced officer, who commanded the German Hussars, drew up +his regiment at the edge of a deep cleft which crossed their front, +and refused to take his men to certain destruction. The 23d Dragoons, +however, dashed into the ravine. Men and horses rolled over in all +directions; still, they got across, and, charging furiously between +the French infantry regiments, which poured in a terrible fire, +fell upon a brigade of Chasseurs in their rear. Victor sent up his +Polish lancers and Westphalian light horse to the assistance of the +Chasseurs, who already outnumbered the 23d, and this gallant regiment +was completely broken, the survivors escaping to the shelter of +Bassecourt's Spanish division, which lay beyond the hill, having lost +257 men and officers. + +Tom and Peter did not see this disastrous affair, for on the approach +of the enemy's column they fell into their places in the ranks. It +was, however, in vain that the French tried to gain the crest of the +hill, their efforts at this point being indeed far more feeble than +they had been either in the morning or upon the previous night. It was +in the center that their great effort was made. Here Lapisse threw his +division against that of Sherbrooke, and, covered by his own artillery +and by the guns upon the hill, charged right up to the position. The +British, however, repulsed them, and the guards, carried away by the +excitement of the moment, followed them with reckless ardor. The +French reserves of infantry and cavalry came up, the artillery plied +the British with shot and shell, the fugitives rallied and again came +to the attack, and the Guards fell back in confusion. The Germans next +to them, severely pressed, began to waver, and for a time it seemed +that the British, victorious upon both flanks, were yet to lose the +battle by being broken in the center. + +Now, however, the 48th, which Sir Arthur had ordered down from the +hill when he saw the rash advance of the Guards, was seen advancing +in line through the disordered masses. Wheeling back, it allowed the +retreating regiments to pass through it and then again formed and fell +upon the flank of the victorious French column. The French paused in +their advance, the Guards and Germans rallied and came back again to +the fight, the shots of the British guns plowed lines in the column, +the French wavered, and, as the British light cavalry trotted up with +the intention of charging them, fell back, and drew off to their +first position amidst shouts of victory along the whole length of the +British line. + +Thus the battle ceased, each party occupying the ground it had held in +the morning. The British loss in killed, wounded, and missing, in the +two days' fighting, was 6200; that of the French 7400. Had the British +been in a condition to have sallied from their position and pursued +the retiring enemy, the victory would have had far greater results; +but, exhausted and half-starved, the British were incapable of +following up their advantage. + +The next morning at daybreak, the French army quitted its position, +and, retiring across the Alberche, formed line of battle there, and +awaited the attack, should the English take the offensive. This they +were in no position to do, although in the course of the day Craufurd +had come up with the 43d, 52d, and 95th Regiments. These three +regiments had heard of the first day's fighting from the Spanish +fugitives, and had marched with all speed to the assistance of their +friends. They had, carrying their kit and ammunition, weighing from 50 +lb. to 60 lb., actually marched sixty-two miles in twenty-six hours in +the hottest season of the year, one of the greatest feats recorded in +military history. + +The Rangers had suffered heavily, and in the two days' fighting had +lost thirty-eight killed and 109 wounded. Among the former were two +officers, while several others were wounded. The Scudamores had, +fortunately, both escaped without a scratch. The inhumanity of the +Spaniards was now more markedly shown than ever. Although both in +Cuesta's army, and in the town of Talavera provisions were abundant, +yet the inhabitants carefully concealed them, while both the wounded +and fighting men of the British army were in want. So great was the +misery and indignation of the soldiers at this shameful treatment, +from those for whom they were doing so much, that they would willingly +have attacked the Spanish army and plundered the town; and from this +period to the end of the war the British hated the Spanish with a deep +and bitter hatred. + +Wellesley now received news that Soult had crossed the mountains +through the pass of Banos, which had been left undefended by the +Spanish, and was marching upon his rear. Believing that Soult had only +13,000 men with him--whereas in fact, he had 50,000--Sir Arthur left +the Spanish army at Talavera in charge of the hospitals, with 6000 +sick and wounded, and retraced his steps, with the intention of giving +battle to this new enemy. + +Upon the 3d, however, he learned the real strength of Soult's army, +and upon the same day heard that General Cuesta had basely retreated +from Talavera, without having provided any transport whatever, +according to his promise, for the British sick and wounded. All of +these who had strength to crawl rejoined the British army, but 1500, +who were unable to walk, were left behind, and fell into the hands +of the French, by whom they were treated with far greater kindness +and attention than they had been by the Spanish. Upon the 4th Cuesta +joined Sir Arthur, and at six o'clock next morning the only possible +course for safety was adopted. Victor was advancing from Talavera, +Soult was hurrying from Placentia to cut off the retreat of the +British, and accordingly Sir Arthur fell back upon Arzobispo, on the +Tagus. + +The artillery, the baggage and wounded, first crossed the bridge, and +at two o'clock the entire army was across. So great was the hunger of +the men that a herd of swine happening to be seen close to the line +of march, the soldiers ran upon them, shot and bayoneted them, and +devoured them raw. Taking up a strong position, guarding the bridges +of the Tagus, the British army remained quiet until the end of August. +During this time they became so weakened by starvation that they could +scarcely walk; a great portion of the cavalry horses, and nearly all +the baggage animals died of hunger, and at last, Sir Arthur, finding +that no remonstrances availed with the Junta, fell back again to the +Portuguese frontier by slow marches, for the army was so utterly +enfeebled that it resembled a vast body of invalids, rather than an +army of unbeaten soldiers. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +A PAUSE IN OPERATIONS. + + +Talavera was fought in July, 1809, and for four months longer Sir +Arthur Wellesley kept his troops on the Spanish frontier, where his +presence served as a check against any invasion, even by a very +formidable army, of Portugal. After the utter bad faith and cowardice +shown by the Spanish, the great commander was determined never again +to trust in their promises, or to undertake any movement dependent +for success upon their co-operation. The Junta then declared that +the Spaniards would alone and unaided sweep the French beyond the +Pyrenees, and a Spanish army of 45,000 infantry, 7000 cavalry, and 60 +guns advanced in November against Madrid. It was met by a French army +of 24,000 infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 50 guns. The battle began at +eleven in the morning, and by three the French, with a loss of only +1700 killed and wounded, had utterly routed the Spanish, with a loss +of 5000 killed and wounded, 45 guns, and 26,000 prisoners! After this +signal and disgraceful defeat, Lord Wellington--for he had now been +raised to the peerage--felt that nothing whatever could be done at +present in Spain, and so fell back into Portugal, where for many +months he occupied himself in preparing to meet the storm which would, +he knew, fall ere long upon that country. The Portuguese authorities +were as incapable, as untrustworthy, and as intractable as were those +of Spain; but here, happily, Lord Wellington had more power. England +was paying large subsidies towards keeping up the Portuguese army, +which was commanded by Lord Beresford, having under him many British +officers. The Portuguese troops were hardy, obedient, and far braver +than the Spaniards; but difficulties often arose in keeping the army +together, because the Portuguese Government, although England was +paying the principal expenses of the army, yet starved their soldiers, +and often kept them for months without pay. It was only by the +strongest remonstrances, and by the oft-repeated threat that he would +embark the British troops, and abandon Portugal altogether, unless +these and other abuses were done away with, that Lord Wellington +succeeded in reducing this incapable and insolent Government to +reason. + +Reinforcements arrived but slowly from England, for a considerable +portion of the available troops of England were frittered away in +holding Cadiz and in an expedition to Sicily. In these two places some +25,000 English troops were wasted--a force, which, had it been added +to Wellington's army, would have enabled him to take the field against +the French, instead of being forced to remain in Portugal for upwards +of a year without discharging a single shot against the enemy. Tom and +Peter Scudamore, however, were not destined to remain inactive all +these weary months. One day in November, just before the army fell +back from the Spanish frontier, General Hill was dining at mess with +the regiment; for, rough as was the accommodation, the officers had +succeeded in establishing a general mess. The conversation turned upon +the difficulty of discovering what force the various French generals +had at their disposal, the reports received by the Commander-in-Chief +being often ridiculously incorrect. There was also an immense +difficulty in communicating with the guerilla chiefs who, almost +always beaten when they came to blows with any considerable bodies +of the French, yet managed to harass them terribly by cutting off +convoys, falling upon small parties, and attacking outposts and bands +of foragers. Knowing every mountain pass and road, these men could, +if they would, keep Lord Wellington informed of every considerable +movement of the enemy, and might in return receive instruction for +acting, when required, in concert before the communication of an +advancing army, or might create a diversion by uniting their bands, +and threatening some important post. + +The next day the boys went to Colonel Tritton's quarters, and, +referring to the conversation of the day before, said that they were +willing to carry any messages that the general might require sent, and +to obtain any information wanted. + +"Nonsense, boys, you would be hung as spies before you had been gone a +week." + +"I don't think so, sir," Tom said; "we have had very little to do +during the six months we have been out here except to learn the +language of the country, and I think now we could pass very well as +Spanish boys. Besides, who would suspect boys? We are quite ready to +chance detection if we can be allowed to go." + +"I don't like it, boys; you are too young. Well, if not too young," he +said, in answer to a movement of Tom's to speak, "we all like you too +well to run the risk of hearing you have been hung like a couple of +young puppies." + +"You are very kind, colonel; but you know you promised to give us a +chance if you could, and having a chance of course means having extra +danger; but I really don't think that there would be any great danger +in it." + +"Well, boys," Colonel Tritton said, after a few moments' thought, "I +do not feel justified in refusing your application, and will mention +it to General Hill. There are very few officers in the army who +speak Spanish fluently, and you being boys would, as you say, avert +suspicion. But I tell you fairly that I hope General Hill will at once +refuse to entertain the idea." + +"Thank you, sir," the boys said. "Of course that is all we could ask +you to do." + +The next day, after parade was over, Colonel Tritton walked on +to General Hill's quarters at a sort of half farm-house, half +country-seat, a short distance from the village, round which the +Rangers were encamped. As he came up to the house, General Hill came +out from his door talking to a Spanish officer, who had the day before +brought some despatches from one of the Spanish generals to Lord +Wellington. + +Colonel Tritton joined them, and they stood talking together upon the +state of affairs in Spain, and of the advance of the Spanish army on +Madrid, which was then just taking place. As they did so two very +ragged, unkempt Spanish boys, shoeless and wretched-looking, limped +up, and began to beg. General Hill shook his head, and the Spaniard +impatiently motioned them away. + +"Por Dios," one whined; "give us something; we are starving. The +French have burnt down our houses, and killed our fathers and +mothers--we are starving. 'Por l'amor de Dios!'" + +"What's the poor little beggar say?" General Hill asked the Spaniard. + +"The usual story--house burnt, father and mother killed, starving. I +dare say it's all a lie." + +"Where did you live?" he asked in Spanish. + +"In the village of Oros, near Valencia." + +"And how did you come here?" + +"The French burnt the village because the guerillas had killed a party +of theirs in it, and they killed all the people, and then carried off +the mules and horses, and took us to drive some of them. That was four +months ago. We had to drive till the other day at Tamanes, when our +men beat the French; our mules were taken, and, as they did not want +us as drivers we had nothing to do but to come on in hopes that the +kind English would give us food." + +The Spanish officer translated what the boy said, and General Hill +remarked, "Yes, that was a brilliant affair of the Duke del Pasque's. +Here," he called to an orderly, "give these boys some bread. I will +see what can be done for them afterwards. I am afraid nothing. Poor +little wretches! their story is a very common one." + +The boys received the bread with a great show of thankfulness, and, +sitting down by the roadside, began to munch it with great appetite. +The Spanish officer now mounted his horse and rode off, while General +Hill and Colonel Tritton remained standing where he had left them. +Colonel Tritton then told General Hill of the Scudamores' request to +be allowed to penetrate into Spain as spies or with dispatches. + +"The young pickles!" General Hill laughed. "What will they be wanting +to do next? Pooh, pooh! it would be out of the question." + +"I believe they do really speak Spanish exceedingly well." Colonel +Tritton said. "They generally act as interpreters for us, and none of +the officers speak Spanish with anything like the same fluency." + +"As far as the language goes, they might get on, perhaps," General +Hill said; "but they look as thorough English boys as you could see. +They would be detected at once." + +"Yes," Colonel Tritton said, "they are both thorough English boys; I +should know them anywhere. What a contrast to the miserable, limping, +hang-dog lads there! Poor little chaps! Why, upon my word, I believe +the fellows are laughing." + +General Hill looked sharply at them, and, as he looked from one to the +other, he said sarcastically, "Poor little chaps indeed! You said that +very naturally, Tritton. It really does you credit as an actor." + +Colonel Tritton looked at the general with an expression of blank +astonishment. + +"What," said the general, "were you really taken in too" + +"Taken in?" repeated Colonel Tritton vaguely. + +"Don't you see, Tritton, those poor little chaps you are pitying so +are those two young scamps we were talking about." + +Colonel Tritton stared in astonishment at the boys, and then, as he +recognized them, he joined the general in a shout of laughter, while +the two boys stood up and saluted with an attempt at gravity which was +only partially successful, so amused were they at the astonishment of +their colonel, as well as pleased at the success of their disguise. + +Just at this moment there was a sound of tramping horses, and directly +afterwards an officer rode up, followed by four or five others, and +at a short distance in the rear by an escort of orderlies. The boys +needed not the exclamation of General Hill, "Here is Wellington." They +knew who the rider was, who checked his horse as he reached the gate, +for they had often seen him as he rode through the camp. A slight man, +very careful and neat in his dress, with an aquiline nose and piercing +eyes. Peter was rising as he drew up his horse, when Tom said, "Don't +get up, Peter; go on with your bread. It would look absurd for us +to salute now, and would draw attention to us," he went on, as Lord +Wellington dismounted, threw the bridle off his horse to an orderly, +and saying to General Hill, "I wanted to see you; come in." Colonel +Tritton went into the house, followed by the two officers. "We'll +stop here till they come out again, Peter. Perhaps General Hill may +speak to him about us. At any rate, we will keep up our disguise till +they've gone. Let us play at odd and even." It was a game of which +Spanish boys are very fond, and they may be seen in any of the Spanish +towns sitting by the houses on door-steps in the sun playing. It was +half an hour before the general came out again. He was about to mount +his horse, when he glanced at the boys, who were sitting against the +wall a few paces off, seemingly absorbed in their play, and paying no +attention whatever to him. Suddenly he changed his mind, dropped his +rein, and walked up to them. + +"What are you playing for?" he asked abruptly in Spanish. + +"Reals, señor," Tom said looking up, but not moving. + +"You are poor; how can you pay?" asked the general. + +"Oh! we don't pay," Tom laughed. "We keep count. I owe him twelve +thousand now. I will pay him when I get rich. He can wait." And he +held out his closed hand again for Peter to guess the number of stones +it contained. + +"Come inside," Lord Wellington said abruptly, and, turning led the way +into the house again, followed by General Hill, Colonel Tritton, and +the two boys. + +"It is not often I change my mind," he said to General Hill; "but for +once I do so now. When you told me about these lads, I refused to +employ them on such dangerous service, even when you told me of the +courage and coolness which they exhibited on the voyage. Now I have +tried them myself, I see that they will do. If they could keep up +their disguise when I spoke to them suddenly, and answer without +hesitation or any excitement which could have shown that they were +not what they pretended to be, they can do so with a French general. +I am no judge of the purity of their Spanish; but as you tell me they +deceived a Spanish officer just now, they will be able to pass with +Frenchmen. Now, lads," he went on turning to them, "you have thought +over, of course, the risks you are going to run, and are prepared, if +detected, to be hung like dogs." The boys bowed. + +"You will receive detailed instructions through Colonel Tritton, +together with such despatches as I may wish sent. They will be written +as small as possible. You will not go for a week; devote all your time +to studying the map. The largest size we have shall be sent to your +colonel this afternoon. Of course you will be supplied with money, and +for anything you can think of likely to assist you, speak to Colonel +Tritton. You are beginning well, young sirs. If you like, you ought to +made a noise in the world. Now, Hill, I must be off." + +And the general left the room with the officers, while the boys were +stammering out their thanks. + +"Where did you dress up, boys?" Colonel Tritton asked them after the +general had ridden off. "You did not come out from camp like this I +hope?" + +"No, colonel; we changed in that little wood there." + +"What have you colored your skins with?" + +"We got some iodine from the doctor, sir, and mixed it with water till +it was just thick enough to tinge our skin. It will wash pretty well +off with plenty of scrubbing, but we mean to use walnut juice when we +start; it lasts much longer, and is a better brown." + +"I am not sure, boys, that you had not better leave your faces alone, +they and your hands are so sunburnt that you would pass well enough, +though you must dye your arms and legs. Fortunately, your hair is +pretty dark, for you can't well carry dye. Think well over all these +things, for your lives may depend on some trifle of this kind. I shall +see you at mess." + +So saying, Colonel Tritton walked on, leaving the boys to follow at +their leisure. Just as they were about to turn off to make for the +woods they saw a soldier coming along the road. + +"That's Sam, if I am not mistaken, Peter, we will have some fun with +him. We can trust him to say nothing in the regiment about meeting us +like this." + +The two boys accordingly sat down by a low wall by the roadside, and +as Sam came up talked away to each other in Spanish. He passed without +paying any attention to them. After he had gone a few yards, Tom said +in a deep, loud voice, "Sambo." The black halted suddenly, and turned +round. First he looked angrily at the boys, then he went to the side +of the road and looked over the wall. Then with a very perplexed air +he looked up and down the road. + +"Who dat have impudence to call dis colored gentleman Sambo," he said +to himself. "Some fellow did, dat for sartin, not dose little Spanish +trash, dey not know Sam's name, some rascal in regiment; he's hid +somewhere. I pound him to squash when I find him." + +Muttering thus he turned to proceed on his way, but before he had gone +twenty yards, he again heard a deep shout. "Here, you, Sambo." + +The black jumped as if he was shot, "My golly," he exclaimed, and then +walked back to the boys, who were talking together, shook his head +and again looked over the wall. Then he stooped down to the boys, and +shook his fist in their faces, "You little debils, you call Sambo, I +pound you to squash." The boys both leapt to their feet with an air of +intense surprise and alarm, and began to cry out in Spanish. + +"No, can't be you," Sam said, "dis chile must be witched, no place for +men to hide, sartin not dem boys. Stone wall can't call Sambo all by +self, Sam's going out of mind. Oh! Lor, dis berry bad affair," and Sam +sat down by the roadside with a face of such perfect bewilderment and +dismay that the boys could stand it no longer, but went off together +into a scream of laughter, which caused Sam to jump to his feet again. +"What you larf for, what you larf for, you little rascals, you play +trick, eh? you call Sambo, who taught you dat name?" and he seized the +two boys and shook them furiously. + +"Oh! Sam, Sam, you will kill us with laughing," Tom got out at last. +"Do leave go, man, or we shall choke," and as Sam, astonished, loosed +his hold, the boys sat down and laughed till their sides ached. + +"Golly," exclaimed the negro, as he looked at them, "Dose boys again. +What on earth you do, Massa Tom, Massa Peter, in dose ragged close, +what you dress up like two beggars for? Lor! how you take in dis +chile, me tink you little Spanish trash, sure enuff." It was some time +before the boys could compose themselves, and then Tom made Sam sit +close by his side. + +"Look here, Sam, this isn't a joke, this is a serious business and +before I tell you anything about it, you must promise to keep the +secret strictly, as it would do us a great deal of harm if it was +known." Sam declared at once that if they tore him to pieces with wild +horses he would say nothing. Tom then explained the whole thing to him +and Sam at once declared that he would go too. + +"Quite impossible, Sam. You do not speak a word of Spanish and +although at any of the seaport towns you could pass as a runaway +sailor, there could be no possible reason for your wandering about the +country with two Spanish boys." + +Sam thought for some time. "Now dat berry unlucky Massa Tom, dat Sam +play big drum. Big drum fine music, but big drum not go well by self. +If Sam had played fiddle, Sam could go, but Sam couldn't go nohow with +big drum." + +"I should think not, Sam, with the name of the regiment painted on it. +No, no, you must stay behind. There won't be any fighting now till the +spring, and by that time we shall be back with the regiment." + +"But what you do without Sam? who black Massa's boots? who brush his +clothes?" + +Tom laughed. "These clothes would fall all to pieces, if they were +brushed much, Sam, and at present we have no boots to be blacked." + +"Where you get dose clothes, Massa Tom," Sam asked, examining with +great disgust the rags the boys had on. + +"We bought some peasant's clothes about our size, and the first beggar +boys we saw we offered to exchange. You should have seen their faces +of astonishment. When we got the clothes we made them into a bundle, +and took them to the bakehouse, and got the baker to put them into +the oven for a few hours to kill anything there might be in them. +Now, Sam, it is time for us to be going. It will take us an hour's +scrubbing to get the color off us. Be sure you keep our secret." + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +WITH THE GUERILLAS. + + +It was on a fine morning at the end of March that a cortége of +muleteers and mules left the little town of Alonqua. It was now four +months since the Scudamores left the army, and in the intervening time +they had tramped through a large portion of Spain. They had carried +with them only a dozen or so little despatches done up in tiny rolls +of the length and about the thickness of a bodkin, These were sewn +inside the lining of their coats, in the middle of the cloth where +it was doubled in at the seams, so that, even were the clothes to be +examined carefully and felt all over, the chances of detection were +slight indeed. They had each, on starting, half a dozen pieces of +Spanish gold coin sewn between the thicknesses of leather of the soles +of each of their shoes, for they did not start in the beggar clothes +in which they had first disguised themselves. Their clothes were, +indeed, worn and somewhat patched, but were of stout material, and +they wore shoes, but no stockings. They had, indeed, the appearance of +Spanish boys of the peasant class. The weather in the north of Spain +is often very cold in winter, and the boys felt that, with rags and +bare feet, they should suffer severely. All that they had to say and +do had been learned by heart. The names and addresses of the agents +of the British Government at every town had been laboriously learned +before starting, and, as Peter said ruefully, it was worse than a +dozen Greek impositions. + +At each place of any importance they would find the person to whom +they were instructed to apply, would accost him with some password, +and would be put up by him while they remained there. When they had +gained the intelligence they required--of the number of French troops +in the place and its neighborhood, a knowledge always obtained by +going round, counting the men on parade, or, in the case of small +villages, finding out easily enough from a peasant the number, +quartered there, they would write a report on the number the +intentions as far as they could learn them, the amount of food +in store, and the sentiments of the population, would enclose +the despatch in a goose-quill and give it to their host, who was +responsible for forwarding it. + +In a great number of cases, indeed, the man to whom they were +accredited was a muleteer. These men hated the French with a hatred +even more deep and deadly than that of other Spaniards, for, in +addition to the national causes of hatred, their mules were constantly +being requisitioned or seized by the troops and they themselves forced +to accompany the army for long distances at a nominal rate of pay for +themselves and their animals. Then, too, they were in close connection +with the guerillas, for whom they carried goods up into the mountains +from the towns, and when the chance came would leave their animals in +the mountains and join in cutting off an enemy's convoy. They acted as +messengers and spies too, and took their friends in the hills early +news of intended movements of the enemy. Many a day had the boys +traveled in the company of these muleteers, merry, careless fellows, +singing and talking to their mules, apparently the best-natured of +men, until something would be said which would recall the hated foe, +and then their black eyes would flash, their fingers clutch their +knife-handles, and they would pour out long strings of deep Spanish +oaths. Great was the surprise of these men on receiving the password +from two boys, but they never hesitated an instant in taking them in, +in giving them hospitality as long as they remained, and in either +accompanying them to the next town, or handing them over to the charge +of some comrade going in that direction. Not even to them did the +Scudamores ever betray that they were not what they were taken to be, +two Spanish boys employed by the English commander as messengers. +Often they were questioned how the English had come to entrust +important communications to two boys, and their reply always was that +their father and mother had fled to Portugal from the French, and were +living there near the English lines, and that they had offered their +lives in case of their sons' treachery. + +This system of hostages seemed probable enough to their questioners, +and if the boys' fare was rather harder, and their treatment more +unceremonious than it would have been had they said that they were +British officers in disguise, they ran far less risk of detection +from an accidental word or sign. Indeed it would have been next to +impossible for them, had they desired it, to convince any one of their +identity. There was no fear now of their accent betraying them. Since +they had left the army they had never, even when alone together, +spoken in English. They made the rule and kept to it for two reasons, +the one being that they found that if they did not get into this habit +of always speaking Spanish, they might inadvertently address each +other in English, and thus betray themselves; the second, that they +wanted to learn to speak absolutely like natives. This they had in the +four months thoroughly learned to do. At first their pronunciation +and occasional mistakes excited curiosity when asked questions as +to the part of Spain from which they had come, but their constant +communication with their muleteer friends had quite removed this, and +for the last two months not one person had doubted that they were not +only Spanish, but that they came from the northern provinces. + +Hitherto they had journeyed principally between large towns and over +country held by the French, but that part of their work was finished; +they had accurately computed the number of the army with which Massena +was to advance shortly to besiege Ciudad Rodrigo, and they had now to +carry the despatches to the guerilla leaders. Hitherto they had not in +a single instance excited suspicion. Not a Frenchman had asked them +a question, and no adventure of anything like an exciting nature had +taken place. They were now, however, entering into a country entirely +different from that which they had hitherto traversed. The northeast +of Spain is wild and mountainous, and offers immense natural +facilities for irregular warfare. Through the various passes of the +Pyrenees lead all the roads from France, whether to Vittoria on the +great road to Madrid, or through Navarre to Catalonia. Here and there +fortified towns still held out against the French, and the town of +Gerona, in Catalonia, had only fallen after a six months' regular +siege, and a desperate defense which fully rivals that of Saragossa. +Is it not a little singular that the Spaniards, who in the open field +were, with a few remarkable exceptions, absolutely contemptible, yet +frequently defended towns with wonderful fortitude, courage, and +desperation. It may, indeed, be said that in every siege where the +Spaniards were commanded by brave and resolute chiefs they behaved +admirably. This great range of hill country was the stronghold of the +guerillas, and every convoy from France had to be protected by a large +force, and even then often suffered greatly from the harassing attacks +of their active enemies. + +The bands of the guerilla chiefs differed greatly in strength, varying +from merely ten or a dozen men to three or four thousand, and indeed +each band varied continually. The men, when not required, would +scatter to their homes, cultivate their little patches of ground, and +throw down the spade and take up the rifle again when they heard of a +convoy to cut off, or an invading column to beat back. The bands, too, +would vary in proportion to the renown of their chiefs. An energetic +man, who, at the head of a handful, had performed some daring feats, +would find himself a week afterwards the leader of many hundreds, +while a chief who was slow and dilatory would find his band melt away +like snow in summer. + +The character of the warfare depended much upon the character of the +French generals. A few of these kept the troops under their command +sternly in hand, would permit no plundering, and insisted upon their +fair treatment of the Spaniards. These in turn wanted nothing better +than to remain quietly in their homes, and the guerilla bands would +melt away to nothing. Other generals, furious at the savage nature +of the warfare, and the incessant toil and loss entailed upon their +troops, allowed the latter to do as they pleased, and burning houses +and dead bodies marked their course. Then the peasantry, now turned +guerillas, retaliated as savagely, giving no quarter, sacrificing all +prisoners, and putting the wounded to death, sometimes with torture. +On both sides horrible atrocities were committed. + +The guerillas were armed partly with rifles and carbines, partly with +muskets landed on the coast by the British Government, who also, from +time to time, sent powder and money to assist them to continue their +resistance to the French. Although nowhere really formidable, yet, +being scattered over a great extent of country, these bands occupied +very large bodies of French troops, who would otherwise have +been disposable for general operations in the field. The English +commander-in-chief had, of course, no shadow of authority over the +guerillas, or, indeed, over any of the Spanish troops, and his +communication to them simply asked what arms and ammunition they +required, and begged them to send him a list of the number of men they +could each throw on the French communications and lines of retreat in +case he should find himself in a position to make a general advance +against them. He also recommended most strongly the bearers of the +despatch to their care. It was to the chief known as Nunez that they +were now bound. The mule train was nominally destined for Vittoria, to +which town the leader had got a pass, specifying the number of mules +and the nature of the goods they carried, from the French commandant +at Alonqua, for no one was allowed to take the goods about the country +without a pass, in order to prevent supplies being forwarded to the +mountains. This pass, however, only mentioned twelve mules with four +drivers, and this was the number which started from Alonqua. Another +score of mules, however, joined them at a short distance from the town +where a by-road turned off. Some of these had gone out from the town +unloaded, as if taken out to graze, others had not entered the town, +but had come direct from the sea-coast by by-paths with powder, and +had been awaiting the departure of Garcias, the name of the leader of +the party. They had eight men with them, all armed to the teeth. + +"Is it all right, Garcias?" + +"All right," the leader said; "they have sent out their squadrons on +the other road, so I think we are safe for to-day." + +"What boys have you got there with you?" + +"They have business with Nunez; letter from the coast." + +The cavalcade was now in motion again, and wound gradually up into the +hills. Presently they came to a point where four roads met. A clump of +trees grew hard by, and the boys gave a start of horror at seeing the +bodies of six French soldiers swinging from them. "Ay, that's Nunez's +work, I expect," Garcias said coolly. "There were three of his men +swinging there last week, so as a lesson he has hung up six of the +French. He is a rough boy to play with, is Nunez." + +At sunset the party slept in a small farm, and at daybreak continued +their journey. They were now in the heart of the mountains, and their +path lay sometimes up deep ravines, sometimes along rocky ledges. +At last, about midday, they entered a valley in which stood a small +village. "That's Nunez's head-quarters to-day," Garcias said; +"to-morrow he may be no one knows where." + +"But does he have to sally out by the wretched road by which we have +come?" Tom asked. + +"No, no," Garcias replied; "he would not catch much prey that way. +There are three other ways out of the valley. That winding path you +see there leads up to Santona. That road on the other side leads out +on to the plain, and thence to Vittoria; while the footpath over the +brow opposite leads right down into the wide valley through which the +main north road runs. So you see this is a handy spot. From that brow +we can see the convoys going to and from France, and can pour down +upon them if they are weak; while, if a column is sent in search of +us, we can vanish away long before they can catch us. Nunez does not +use the direct road over the brow for his attack, but follows the +Santona or Vittoria road for a while, and then makes a swoop round. He +does not want to bring the French up to this village, for his family +and the families of many of the men live here." + +As they approached the village, they found that there was a good deal +of bustle going on. Armed men were coming out of the cottages, and +gathering in a group round a rough stone cross, which stood in the +center of a sort of green. "We are just in time," Garcias said; "Nunez +is starting on some expedition or other." + +When they reached the spot there were nearly two hundred men +assembled. They greeted Garcias with shouts of welcome as he arrived. +"Ah, ah! Garcias, just in time. Our last skin of wine was emptied last +night; we will bring some more up to-morrow; but if you had not come +we should have had to start thirsty, and that's unlucky besides being +unpleasant." + +"Where is Nunez!" Garcias asked. + +"Here he comes," was the reply; and the boys turning saw a figure +approaching, which by no means answered to the expectation of the +celebrated guerilla chief. He was small and almost humpbodied, but +very broad. His head seemed too large for his body, and a pair of +fierce eyes gleamed out from beneath his shaggy eyebrows. His mustache +was thin and bristly and his month wide, but with thin lips. The boys +could understand the reputation for cruelty and mercilessness which +attached to this sinister-looking figure, but there was none of the +savage power which they had expected to see in so celebrated a leader. + +"Any news, Garcias?" he asked shortly, as he came up. + +"None, captain, except that these boys have brought some despatches +for you from the English Lord." + +Nunez looked sharply at them, and held out his hand without speaking. +Tom gave him the little quill. + +The guerilla opened it, read the contents, and, saying briefly, "An +answer to-morrow," strode on to his men, and in a few minutes they +were defiling out at the end of the valley. + +"That hardly seems a strong enough body to attack a French convoy, +Garcias," Tom remarked. + +"No, it would not be, but there is only a part of his band here; the +rest will join him at some place agreed on--perhaps ten miles from +here. I believe he has about thousand men under his orders. Now come +along; we shall be none the worse for dinner," and, leaving his men to +unload the mules, he led the way into the little posada, or inn. + +"Ah! Mother Morena," he said to an old woman who was crouching near a +blazing wood fire, "warming yourself as usual; it's well you've a good +fire, for you will be able to get us some dinner all the more quickly. +Twelve of us altogether, and all as hungry as wolves." + +"Ah!" exclaimed the old woman crossly; "it seems as if I were never to +have an hour's quiet, just as all that roaring, greedy lot, with their +Mother Morena here and Mother Morena there, and their grumbling at +the olla, and their curses and their quarrels, are off, and I think I +am going to have a quiet afternoon, then you come in with your twelve +hungry wolves." + +"Ah! mother, but wolves don't pay, and we do, you see." + +The frugal supper over, the boys laid down on the benches, and were +soon asleep. The next day passed slowly, for the band were not +expected to return until late at night--perhaps not until the next +morning, as the pass where the attack would be made was some fifteen +miles off, and the convoy might not pass there until late in the +afternoon. The boys soon made friends with some of the women and +children of the place, to whom they told stories of the great cities +of the plain, and of the great water which washed the shores of Spain. +The greater portion of the Spanish peasantry are incredibly ignorant, +and very few of the inhabitants of this village had ever gone beyond +the mountains. Walking about in the village, but apparently mixing but +very little in the games of the other children, were two little girls, +whose gay dress of rich silk seemed strangely out of place in such a +spot. + +Tom asked one of the women who they were, and she replied, with a toss +of the head, "They are the captain's children. The last time the band +went out they found among the baggage and brought up here, the dresses +of the children of some fine lady, and the captain kept them all as +part of his share, just as if there were no children in the village +whom it would become a great deal better than those stuck-up little +things. Not," she said, softening a little, "that they were not nice +enough before they got these things; but since they came their heads +have been quite turned by the finery and they are almost too grand to +speak to their old playfellows." + +"Is their mother alive?" + +"No, poor thing, she was killed by the French when the village she +lived in was burned by them, because some of them were found hung in +the neighborhood. The captain was away at the time and the children +were out in the woods. When he came back he found them crying by the +side of their mother's body, in the middle of the burning village. So +then he took to the mountains, and he never spares a Frenchman who +falls into his hands. He has suffered, of course, but he brought it +upon himself, for he had a hand in hanging the French soldiers, and +now he is a devil. It will be bad for us all; for some day, when the +French are not busy with other things, they will rout us out here, and +then who can blame them if they pay us for all the captain's deeds? +Ah! me, they are terrible times, and Father Predo says he thinks the +end of the world must be very near. I hope it will come before the +French have time to hunt us down." + +The boys had a hard struggle not to smile, but the woman spoke so +earnestly and seriously, that they could only shake their heads in +grave commiseration for her trouble; and then Tom asked, "Is the +captain very fond of the children?" + +"He worships them," the woman said; "he has no heart and no pity for +others. He thinks no more of blood than I do of water; but he is as +tender as a woman with them. One of them was ill the other day--a mere +nothing, a little fever--and he sat by her bedside for eight days +without ever lying down." + +"I suppose," Tom said, "they never bring prisoners up here?" + +"Yes, they do," the woman said; "not common soldiers; they kill them +at once; but sometimes officers, if they want to exchange them for +some of ours who may have been taken, or if they think they are likely +to get a high ransom for them. But there, it always comes to the same +thing; there, where you see that mound on the hillside, that's where +they are. They blindfold them on their way up here, lest they might +find their way back after all. Only one or two have ever gone down +again. I wish they would finish with them all down below; they are +devils and heretics these French; but I don't care about seeing them +killed. Many of us do, though, and we have not many diversions up +here, so I suppose it's all for the best." + +"I wish that fellow had given us our answer before he went away," +Tom said to Peter when they were alone. "I hope he won't bring any +prisoners up here; these massacres are frightful, and one side seems +as bad as the other. Well, in another month we shall have finished +with all this work, and be making for the frontier again. Shan't I be +glad when we catch sight of the first red-coats!" + +In the middle of the night the boys were roused by a general bustle, +and found that a messenger had just arrived, saying that the +expedition had been successful, that a portion of the enemy had been +cut off, their rear-guard destroyed, and that the whole band would be +up soon after daylight. The village was astir early, but it was not +until nine o'clock that the guerilla band arrived. The boys saw at a +glance that they were stronger in numbers than when they started, and +that with them were some twenty or thirty baggage animals. + +The women flocked out to meet them with shrill cries of welcome. The +booty taken was not of any great value in money, but was more valuable +than gold to the guerillas. + +Each one of the band carried, in addition to his own piece, a new +French musket, while in the barrels on the mules were powder and ball; +there were bales of cloth, and some cases of brandy and champagne, and +a few boxes and portmanteaus of officers' baggage. In the rear of all, +under a strong guard, were two French officers, both wounded, a lady +and a child of some seven or eight years old. + +After a boisterous greeting to their wives, the band broke up, and +scattered over the village, three or four men remaining to guard the +captives, who were told to sit down against a wall. + +The whole band were soon engaged in feasting, but no one paid the +least attention to the prisoners. The lady had sunk down exhausted, +with the little girl nestled close to her, the officers faint and pale +from loss of blood, leaned against the wall. One of them asked the +guards for some water, but the men paid no attention to the request, +answering only with a savage curse. Tom and Peter, who were standing +by, immediately went to the inn, filled a jug with water, and, taking +a drinking horn and some bread, went back. One of the guards angrily +ordered them back as they approached. + +"I am not going to free them," Tom said, soothingly; "there can be no +reason why they should die of thirst, if they are enemies." + +"I am thirsty myself," one of the guard said, "and it does us good to +see them thirst." + +"What, has no one brought you anything to drink?" Tom said, in a tone +of surprise. "Here, Peter, you give this bread and water to these +prisoners; I will run to Mother Morena's and bring some wine for the +guard." + +The guard would not allow Peter to approach the captives until Tom +arrived with a large jug of wine, and a cold fowl, which he had +obtained at the inn. These the Spaniards accepted, and allowed the +boys to give the water to the prisoners. All drank eagerly, with every +expression of thankfulness, the lady seizing Peter's hand and kissing +it as he handed the horn to the child. The lady was a very bright, +pretty woman, though now pale and worn with fatigue and emotion, and +the child was a lovely little creature. + +The boys, on leaving the prisoners, hurried to Garcias. + +"What are they going to do with the prisoners, Garcias?" + +"They have brought them up here to exchange for Nunez's lieutenant, +who was taken last week. One of the men went off last night to +Vittoria with a letter to offer to exchange. One of the officers is a +colonel, and the young one a captain. The lady is, they say, the wife +of General Reynier." + +"Then they are safe," Tom said joyfully, "for, of course the French +would exchange a guerilla against three such prisoners." + +"Yes," Garcias said, "they are safe if Vagas has not been shot before +the messenger gets to Vittoria. The messenger will hear directly he +gets there, and if they have finished Vagas, he will come straight +back, for his letter will be of no use then." + +"But the French would pay a ransom for them." + +"Yes; but the captain is never fond of ransoming, and if the news +comes that Vagas is shot it is all up with them." + +"But they will never murder a woman and child in cold blood!" Tom +said, in tones of indignant horror. + +"Women are killed on both sides," the muleteer said, placidly. "I +don't hold to it myself, but I don't know, after all, why a woman's +life is a bit more precious than a man's. Vagas's wife and children +are here, too, and if the news comes of his death, she would stir the +band up to kill the prisoners, even if the captain wanted to save +them, which he certainly will not do." + +"When is the messenger expected back?" + +"If he goes to Vittoria and finds Vagas is alive, and arranges for +the exchange, he won't be back till late to-night, perhaps not till +to-morrow; but, if he hears, either on the way or directly he gets +there, that he is dead, he may be back this afternoon." Soon after +this conversation Garcias was sent for to the chief, and returned +with a small note, which he handed to the boys as the answer to the +despatch, and urged them to go at once. The boys said that they could +not leave until they saw the end of this terrible drama which was +passing before their eyes. It was early in the afternoon when a man +was seen coming along the path from Vittoria. A hundred eager eyes +examined him, and ere long it was declared as certain that it was the +messenger. The boys' heart sank within them as they saw the fierce +look cast by the Spaniards in the direction of the prisoners, for +every one in the village was well aware of the meaning of this early +return. The boys had arranged upon the course they would pursue, and +they at once hurried to Garcias. + +"Please come with us at once to Nunez. We want to see him before the +messenger arrives." + +"I will come with you," Garcias said; "but if you think that any +talking of yours will persuade Nunez to move out of his way, you are +mistaken. It is more likely to cost you your own lives, I can tell +you; however, I gave you the promise I would do my best for you when +you started with me, and I will go with you now, though what you want +to interfere for here is more than I can make out. Pshaw! what matters +two or three of these accursed French, more or less?" + +As they neared the chief's house they saw him coming towards them. His +brow was as black as thunder; he was evidently prepared for the news +of his lieutenant's death. + +"These messengers want to speak to you for a moment," Garcias said. + +The chief stopped with an impatient gesture. + +"Señor," Tom said, with a dignity which surprised the chief; "we are +not what we seem. We are two English officers, and we have come to beg +of you, to implore you, not to tarnish the cause for which you fight +by shedding the blood of women and children." + +The boys had agreed that it would be altogether hopeless to try to +save the French officers. + +"British officers, indeed," exclaimed Nunez, "a likely story. Do you +know them as such, Garcias?" + +"No," Garcias said bluntly, "I never guessed at it; but now they say +so, I think it's likely enough, for they don't seem to see things in +the same way as other people." + +"I can give you proof of it," Tom said, calmly, pulling up the sleeve +of his coat, and showing a cicatrix in his forearm. Taking a knife +from his pocket, he cut into the skin, and drew forth a tiny silver +tube. This he opened, and handed to Nunez a paper signed by Lord +Wellington, declaring the bearers to be British officers, and +requesting all loyal Spaniards to give them every assistance. + +The captain read it through, and flung it down. "You may be officers," +he said contemptuously; "but if you were Lord Wellington himself, I +would not spare these accursed French. Listen!" and as he spoke a howl +of rage ran from the other end of the village, and told too plainly +the nature of the tidings the messenger had brought. + +"I again protest," Tom said firmly. "I protest, as a British officer, +and in the name of humanity, against this cold-blooded murder of a +woman and child. It is a disgrace to Spain, a disgrace to the cause, +it is a brutal and cowardly act." + +The guerilla furiously drew a pistol; but Garcias placed himself +between him and Tom. "I have promised him a safe conduct," he said, +"and have given my word for his safety. He is only a boy, and a young +fool; don't trouble with him." + +Fortunately at this moment, for the guerilla was still irresolutely +handling his pistol, a crowd was seen coming towards them, headed by +a woman who seemed frantic with rage and grief. All were shouting, +"Death to the assassins! death to the French!" The chief at once moved +forward to meet them. + +Tom and Peter gave a significant glance towards each other, and then +Tom turned to go back towards the house which Nunez inhabited, while +Peter hurried towards the spot where the prisoners were kept. Already +a crowd was assembling who were talking threateningly at the French +officers. Peter made his way through them until he stood by the lady, +who, with her child clinging to her neck, looked in terror at the +angry crowd, whose attention, however, was directed to the officers, +who stood looking calmly indifferent to their threats and insults. + +"Do you speak Spanish, madam?" Peter asked, leaning over her. + +She shook her head. + +"Do you speak English?" he asked, in that tongue. + +"Yes, yes, a little." the lady said, eagerly; "who are you? What is +this fierce crowd about?" + +"Hush!" Peter said. "I am a friend. Listen. In a few minutes they are +going to shoot you all." The lady gave a stifled cry, and pressed +her child close to her. "Remember, when they come to you, ask for a +priest; gain a few minutes, and I hope to save you and the child." + +So saying, he slipped away into the crowd again. He had scarcely done +so when Nunez arrived, accompanied by many of his men. The crowd fell +back, and he strode up to the French officers. "French dogs," he said, +"you are to die. I spared you to exchange, but your compatriots have +murdered my lieutenant, and so now it's your turn. You may think +yourselves lucky that I shoot you, instead of hanging you. Take them +to that wall," he said, pointing to one some twenty yards off. + +The Frenchmen understood enough Spanish to know that their fate was +sealed. Without a word they took each other's hands, and marched +proudly to the spot pointed out. Here, turning round, they looked with +calm courage at the Spaniards, who formed up with leveled muskets at +a few paces distance. "Vive la France! Tirez," said the elder, in a +firm, voice, and in a moment they fell back dead, pierced with a dozen +balls. + +Peter had turned away when Nunez appeared on the scene, to avoid +seeing the murder, and with his eyes fixed in the direction in which +Tom had gone, he listened almost breathlessly to what should come. +The French lady had sat immovable, cowering over her child, while her +countrymen were taken away and murdered. As Nunez passed where she +crouched, he said to two of his men, "Put your muskets to their heads, +and finish them!" As the men approached, she lifted up her face, pale +as death, and said,-- + +"Un prêtre, uno padre!" + +"She wants a priest," the men said, drawing back; "she has a right to +absolution." + +There was a murmur of assent from those around, and two or three +started to the priest's house, situated only a few yards away, being +one of the end houses of the village. The priest soon appeared, came +up to the spot, and received orders to shrive the Frenchwoman. He +attempted a remonstrance, but was silenced by a threat from Nunez, +and knowing from experience of such scenes that his influence went +for nothing with Nunez and his fierce band, he bent over her, and the +crowd drew back, to let them speak unheard. At this moment, to Peter's +intense relief, he saw Tom approaching with the captain's two children +walking beside him. Absorbed in what was passing before them, no one +else looked round, and Peter slipped away and joined his brother. They +came within twenty yards of the crowd, and then paused. + +"Wait a minute," Tom said to the children, "your father is busy." + +In another minute Nunez shouted roughly, "There that will do; finish +with it and have done! I want to be off to my dinner." + +Tom and Peter simultaneously drew out a large Spanish knife, and each +took one of the children firmly by the shoulder. + +"Stop! Señor Nunez!" Tom shouted in a loud, clear tone. "Stop! or by +heaven there will be four victims instead of two! Let one of you lift +a finger against these captives--let one of you come one step nearer +to us--and, by the Holy Virgin, we will drive our knives into these +children's hearts!" + +A cry of astonishment broke from the crowd, and one of agony and rage +from Nunez, who tottered against a wall in horror at the danger in +which his daughters were placed. + +"Listen! all of you," Tom said, "we are English officers, we have +shown our papers to Nunez, and he knows it is so. We will not suffer +this murder of a mother and her child. If they are to die, we will die +with them; but these two children shall die too! Now, what is it to +be?" + +A dozen of the guerillas leveled their guns at the two daring boys. + +"No! no!" Nunez shrieked; "lower your guns. Don't hurt the children, +señors. The captives shall not be hurt; I swear it! They shall go +free. Give me my children." + +"Not if I know it," Tom said; "Do you think I could trust the word of +a man who would murder women and children in cold blood? No; these +girls shall go with us as hostages, till we are safe under French +guard." + +"They will tell them the way up here," said one of the woman in the +group, "and then we shall be all killed." + +"No," Tom said; "the lady shall swear not to tell the way up here. She +shall swear on your priest's crucifix. We will give you our words as +British officers." + +"But how are the children to get back here again?" another asked, for +Nunez was so paralyzed that he could only gaze on the children, who +were crying bitterly, and implore them to stand quiet, and not try to +get away. After more parleying the arrangements were completed. The +crowd fell back on either side, so as to leave a large space round the +French lady. Tom and Peter then went up to them with the little girls. +The lady was sobbing with joy and excitement at this unexpected +relief. + +"Can you walk?" Tom asked her in English. + +"Yes," she said, getting up hastily, but almost falling again. + +"Garcias will go first, as guide. The priest will give you his arm," +Tom went on, "these two young women will go with you and carry your +child if necessary. You will walk on, twenty yards ahead of us. We +follow with these girls. No one is to follow us, or accompany us. We +are to go on like that till we come upon your outposts, and then the +priest and the two women will bring back Nunez's children." + +"You will send them safe back, you swear?" asked Nunez, in tremulous +tones. + +"Psha!" Tom said contemptuously, "you don't suppose we are +child-murderers, like yourself." + +"Remember!" the guerilla said, in a sudden burst of passion, "if you +ever cross my path again, I will--" + +"Do terrible things no doubt," Tom said scornfully; "and do you +beware, too. It is wild beasts like yourself who have brought disgrace +and ruin on Spain. No defeat could dishonor and disgrace her as much +as your fiendish cruelty. It is in revenge for the deeds that you and +those like you do, that the French carry the sword and fire to your +villages. We may drive the French out, but never will a country which +fights by murder and treachery become a great nation. Are you ready, +Garcias!" + +"I am ready," the muleteer said, stepping forward from the silent and +scowling throng. + +"We can trust you," Tom said heartily; "take us the short way straight +down into the valley; we may have the luck to come upon a passing +French troop in an hour. Think of that, madam," he said to the French +lady, "let that give you strength and courage." + +So saying, the procession set out in the order Tom had indicated, +amidst the curses of the guerillas, who were furious at seeing +themselves thus bearded. At the brow of the hill Tom looked back, and +saw that the guerillas were still standing in a group, in front of +which he could distinguish the figure of Nunez. Taking off his hat, +he waved an ironical farewell, and then followed the party down +the hillside into the broad valley below. They could see the road +stretching like a thread along it, but to their disappointment, not +a figure was visible upon it. Now that there was no longer danger of +treachery, the party closed up together. + +"How far is it to Vittoria, Garcias?" + +"Twenty good miles, señor." + +"But we shall never get there," Tom said in dismay. "I am sure the +lady could not walk another five miles; she is quite exhausted now." + +"You will not have to go five miles, señor. There is a body of four +or five hundred French in that large village you see there; it is not +more than three miles at most." + +It was a weary journey, for the French lady, exhausted by fatigue +and excitement, was often obliged to stop and sit down to rest, and, +indeed, could not have got on at all had not Garcias on one side and +the padre on the other helped her on. At last, just as the sun was +setting, they approached the village, and could see the French +sentries at its entrance. When within a hundred yards they paused. + +"We are safe now," Tom said; "it is not necessary for you to go +farther. Good-by, little ones; I am sorry we have given you such a +fright, but it was not our fault. Good-by, padre; I know that you will +not grudge your walk, for the sake of its saving the lives of these +unfortunates. Good-by, Garcias; thanks for your kindness and fidelity. +I will report them when I return, and will, if I get a chance, send +you a remembrance of our journey together." + +"Good-by, señors," Garcias said, shaking them by the hand; "you +English are different to us, and I am not surprised now at your +General holding Portugal against all the French armies." Then he +lowered his voice, so that the Spanish women standing by could not +hear him. "Be on your guard, señors; don't move on from the village +without a strong convoy is going on; change your disguise, if +possible; distrust every one you come across, and, in heaven's name, +get back to your lines as soon as possible, for you may be assured +that your steps will be dogged, and that you will be safe nowhere in +Spain from Nunez's vengeance. The guerillas communicate with each +other, and you are doomed if you fall into the hands of any, except, +perhaps, one or two of the greater chiefs. Be always on your guard; +sleep with your eyes open. Remember, except in the middle of a French +regiment, you will never be really safe." + +"Thanks, Garcias!" the boys said earnestly, "we will do our best to +keep our throats safe. At any rate, if we go down, it shall not be for +want of watchfulness!" + +Another shake of the hands, and the party separated. The Spanish woman +who was carrying the sleeping French child handed her over to Tom, who +took her without waking her while Peter lent his arm to the French +lady. + +"Madam," Tom said in English, "you will soon be among your friends. I +know that you will keep your promise not to divulge the situation of +the village you have left. I must ask you, also, to promise me not +to say that we speak English, or to say anything which may create a +suspicion that we are not what we seem. You will, of course, relate +your adventures, and speak of us merely as Spanish boys, who acted as +they did being moved by pity for you. We must accompany you for some +time, for Nunez will move heaven and earth to get us assassinated, and +all we want is that you shall obtain permission for us to sleep in the +guard-room, so as to be under shelter of French bayonets until we can +decide upon our course of action." + +The lady assented with a gesture, for she was too exhausted to speak, +and as they reached the French sentries she tottered and sank down on +the ground insensible. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +MADRID. + + +The French sentries, who had been watching with surprise the slow +approach of two peasant boys, the one carrying a child, the other +assisting a woman clad in handsome, but torn and disheveled clothes, +on seeing the latter fall, called to their comrades, and a sergeant +and some soldiers came out from a guard-room close by. + +"Hallo!" said the sergeant. "What's all this? Who is this woman? And +where do you come from?" + +The boys shook their heads. + +"Of course," the sergeant said, lifting the lady, "they don't +understand French; how should they? She looks a lady, poor thing. Who +can she be, I wonder?" + +"General Reynier," Tom said, touching her. + +"General Reynier!" exclaimed the sergeant to his comrades. "It must be +the general's wife. I heard she was among those killed or carried off +from that convoy that came through last night. Jacques, fetch out +Captain Thibault, and you, Noel, run for Dr. Pasques." + +The officer on guard came out, and, upon hearing the sergeant's +report, had Madame Reynier at once carried into a house hard by, and +sent a message to the colonel of the regiment. The little girl, still +asleep, was also carried in and laid down, and the regimental doctor +and the colonel soon arrived. The former went into the house, the +latter endeavored in vain to question the boys in French. Finding it +useless, he walked up and down impatiently until a message came down +from the doctor that the lady had recovered from her fainting fit, and +wished to see him at once. + +Tom and Peter, finding that no one paid any attention to them, sat, +quietly down by the guard-house. + +In a few minutes the French colonel came down. "Where are those boys?" +he exclaimed hastily. There was quite a crowd of soldiers round the +house, for the news of the return of General Reynier's wife and child +had circulated rapidly and created quite an excitement. "Where are +those boys?" he shouted again. + +The sergeant of the guard came forward. + +"I had no orders to keep them prisoners, sir," he said in an +apologetic tone, for he had not noticed the boys, and thought that +he was going to get into a scrape for not detaining them; but he +was interrupted by one of the soldiers who had heard the question, +bringing them forward. + +To the astonishment of the soldiers, the colonel rushed forward, and, +with a Frenchman's enthusiasm, actually kissed them. "Mes braves +garçons!" he exclaimed. "Mes braves garçons! Look you, all of you," +he exclaimed to the soldiers, "you see these boys, they are heroes, +they have saved, at the risk of their own lives, mark you, General +Reynier's wife and daughter; they have braved the fury of that +accursed Nunez and his band, and have brought them out from that den +of wolves." And then, in excited tones, he described the scene as he +had heard it from Madame Reynier. + +At this relation the enthusiasm of the French soldiers broke out in +a chorus of cheers and excited exclamations. The men crowded round +the boys, shook them by the hands, patted them on the back, and in a +hundred strange oaths vowed an eternal friendship for them. + +After a minute or two, the colonel raised his hand for silence. "Look +you," he said to the men. "You can imagine that, after what these boys +have done, their life is not safe for a moment. This accursed Nunez +will dog them and have them assassinated if he can. So I leave them to +you; you will take care of them, my children, will you not?" + +A chorus of assurances was the reply, and the boys found themselves as +it were adopted into the regiment. The soldiers could not do enough +for them, but, as neither party understood the other's language, +the intercourse did not make much progress. They had, however, real +difficulty in refusing the innumerable offers of a glass of wine or +brandy made to them by every group of soldiers as they moved about +through the village. + +The boys felt that their position was a false one; and although, in +point of fact, they had no report to make upon the regiment, still +the possibility that if discovered they might be thought to have been +acting as spies on men who treated them with so much friendliness was +repugnant to them. However, their stay was not to be prolonged, for +the regiment had already been stationed for a month at the village, +and was to be relieved by another expected hourly from France, and was +then to go on to Madrid. This they learned from one of the soldiers +who could speak a few words of Spanish. + +It was upon the third day after their arrival that the expected +regiment came in, and next morning the boys started soon after +daybreak with their friends. They had not seen Madame Reynier during +their stay in the village, for she was laid up with a sharp attack of +illness after the excitement she had gone through. She was still far +from fit to travel, but she insisted on going on, and a quantity of +straw was accordingly laid in a cart, pillows and cushions were heaped +on this, and an awning was arranged above to keep off the sun. The +regiment had taken on the transport animals which had come in with the +baggage of the troops the night before; hence the mule drivers and +other followers were all strangers. The boys were marching beside the +regiment, talking with one of the sergeants who had been previously +for two years in Spain, and spoke a little Spanish, when the colonel, +who had been riding alongside Madame Reynier, told them as he passed +on to the head of the regiment, that she wished to speak to them. + +The boys fell out, and allowed the troops and the line of baggage +animals and carts to pass them. As the latter came along, Tom observed +one of the Spanish drivers glance in their direction, and immediately +avert his head. + +"Peter, that fellow is one of Nunez's band; I will almost swear to his +face. No doubt he has joined the convoy for the purpose of stabbing us +on the first opportunity. I expected this. We must get rid of them at +once." + +The boys had both been furnished with heavy cavalry pistols by order +of the colonel, to defend themselves against any sudden attack, and, +placing his hand on the butt in readiness for instant use, Tom, +accompanied by his brother walked up to the Spaniard. + +"You and those with you are known," he said. "Unless you all fall out +at the next village we come to, I will denounce you, and you haven't +five minutes to live after I do so. Mind, if one goes on you all +suffer." + +The Spaniard uttered a deep execration, and put his hand on his knife, +but seeing that the boys were in readiness, and that the French +baggage guard marching alongside would certainly shoot him before he +could escape, he relinquished his design. + +"Mind," Tom said, "the first village; it is only a mile ahead, and +we shall probably halt there for five minutes; if one of you goes a +single foot beyond it, you will swing in a row." + +So saying, the boys dropped behind again until Madame Reynier's cart +came along. The sides were open, and the lady, who was sitting up, +supported by pillows, with her child beside her, saw them, and called +to them to climb up to her. They did so at once, and she then poured +forth her thanks in tones of the deepest gratitude. + +"My husband is not at Madrid," she said when she saw by the boys' +confusion that they would be really glad if she would say no more; +"but when he hears of it he will thank you for saving his wife and +child. Of course," she went on, "I can see that you are not what you +seem. Spanish boys would not have acted so. Spanish boys do not speak +English. That makes it impossible for me in any way to endeavor to +repay my obligation. Had you been even Spanish peasants, the matter +would have been comparatively easy; then my husband could have made +you rich and comfortable for life; as it is--" + +She paused, evidently hoping that they would indicate some way in +which she could serve them. + +"As it is, madam," Tom said, "you can, if you will, be of great +service to us by procuring for us fresh disguises in Madrid, for I +fear that after what happened with Nunez our lives will not be safe +from his vengeance anywhere in Spain. Already we have discovered that +some of his band are accompanying this convoy with the intention of +killing us at the first opportunity." + +"Why do you not denounce them instantly?" Madame Reynier said, rising +in her excitement and looking round. + +"We cannot well do that," Tom said, "at least not if it can be +avoided. They know already that we have recognized them, and will +leave at the next village; so we are safe at present, but in Madrid we +shall be no longer so. We cannot remain permanently under the guard of +the bayonets of the 63d Line; and indeed our position is as you may +guess, a false and unpleasant one, from which we would free ourselves +at the first opportunity. We shall therefore ask you, when you get to +Madrid, to provide us with fresh disguises and a pass to travel west +as far as the limits of the French lines." + +"You can consider that as done," Madame Reynier answered; "I only +regret that it is so slight a return. And now," she said lightly, to +change the conversation, "I must introduce you to this young lady. +Julie," she asked in French, "do you remember those boys?" + +"Yes," Julie said; "these are the boys who gave mamma and Julie water +when those wicked men would not give us anything to drink when we were +thirsty; and it was these boys that mamma said prevented the wicked +men from killing us. They are good boys, nice boys, but they are very +ragged and dirty." + +Madame Reynier smiled, and translated Julie's answer. + +"You know," she went on, hesitatingly, "that I know that--that you are +English officers. I heard you say so when you saved us. But how is it +that you can be officers so very young?" + +Tom explained that in England the officers entered for the most part +directly, and not, as in the French army, by promotion from the ranks, +and that, consequently, the junior officers were much younger than +those of equal rank in the French service. + +The convoy had now reached the village, and a halt was ordered, +and the boys alighting, walked forward to see that their unwelcome +attendants quitted them. As the soldiers fell out from their order of +march and sat down under the shade of the houses many of the Spaniards +with the baggage-train followed their example, and the boys saw the +man to whom they had spoken go up to four others, and in a short time +these separated themselves from the rest, went carelessly round a +corner, and when the order came to continue the march, failed to make +their appearance. Their absence passed unnoticed save by the boys, +for the natives frequently took advantage of the passage of troops +and convoys to travel from one part of the country to another, for +the guerillas were for the most part little better than brigands, +and would plunder their own countrymen without scruple whenever the +opportunity was favorable. + +The march to Madrid was accomplished without adventure, and the boys +improved the occasion by endeavoring to pick up as many French phrases +as they could, as they marched along by the side of the sergeant who +had specially taken them under his charge. He knew a little Spanish, +so they managed to keep up a conversation with him in a strange medley +of the two languages, which helped to pass the time away merrily. At +Madrid they took up their quarters in the barracks with the regiment; +they had already explained their plan of disguise to Madame Reynier, +and she had promised to provide all that was necessary and to obtain +the military pass for them. + +They had soon reason to congratulate themselves that their stay +in Madrid was under the protection of French bayonets. During the +day after their arrival they remained quietly in barracks, as the +appearance of two Spanish peasants walking about the street with +French soldiers would have excited comments. In the evening, however, +they agreed with their friend the sergeant, who was going into the +town with three or four of his comrades, that they should accompany +them, not, however, walking actually with them, but following a few +paces behind, so as to be within reach of their assistance should any +one molest them. + +They reached the Piazza del Sol, the great central square of Madrid, +without incident, and amused themselves with the sight of the constant +stream of people passing to and fro, the ladies in their graceful +black mantillas, the men in cloaks and Spanish sombreros, or round +felt hats. Presently the sergeant and his companions left the square, +and turning down one of the narrow streets which run into it, amused +themselves by looking into the shops, with their gay fans, bright +handkerchiefs, and other articles of Spanish manufacture. + +Tom and Peter followed their example, keeping some ten paces behind +them. It was now nearly dark, and the streets were but badly lighted +except by the lamps in the shop windows. + +"It may be all fancy, Tom," Peter said, "but I can't help thinking +that we are followed. There are three follows who have passed us +twice, and I am pretty sure they are particularly noticing us. Keep +your hand on your pistol." + +As the boys paused at another shop window, the three men again +approached, this time from ahead. + +"Look out, Tom," Peter said sharply. + +As the men came up to them, one of them exclaimed, + +"Now!" + +The boys faced round, pistol in hand, with a cry to their friends, +just as the three Spaniards, with drawn knives, were upon them. + +The sudden movement disconcerted them, and two sprang back from the +leveled tubes of the pistols, with fierce oaths of surprise, the +third, however, rushed in and struck at Tom; the latter instinctively +moved aside, and the knife inflicted a heavy gash on the shoulder, and +almost at the same moment Peter's bullet crashed through the fellow's +skull. + +His comrades, with a cry of rage, rushed in, but before they could +strike, the sergeant was up and ran one through the body with his +sword, whereon the other fled. The whole affair lasted only three +or four seconds. In less than a minute the street was absolutely +deserted, for rows and fights were so common between the soldiers and +the people, that all prudent people got out of the way the moment a +knife was drawn. + +"Well done, lad," the sergeant said to Peter, "I thought your brother +was done for. Luckily I had faced your way when the fellow attacked +you, and was on my way to help you before they began, but I feared I +should be too late. That was a wonderfully pretty snap shot of yours, +and you were as cool as old hands. Peste! I don't know what to make +of you boys. Now come along, we had better get away from this carrion +before any one comes up and asks questions. First, though, let me tie +up your shoulder." + +This was soon done, and while the sergeant was engaged upon it, his +comrades, old soldiers, turned over the dead Spaniards, searched their +pockets, and chuckled as they found several gold pieces. + +One or two French soldiers alone came near them before they left the +spot, attracted by the sound of the pistol. A word from the sergeant, +"These scoundrels attacked us, they have got their _coup_," satisfied +them, and the boys and their friend soon regained the crowded main +street, leaving the bodies for the watch to find and bury. + +Arrived at the barracks, Tom's arm was examined by the surgeon, and +the cut pronounced a deep flesh wound, but of no consequence; it was +soon strapped up, and with his arm in a sling Tom went down to the +sergeant's quarters, where they slept. Here they had to go through +much patting on the back, for their friend had described the readiness +and coolness with which they stood at bay, and popular as they were +before they were now more so than ever. For the rest of their stay in +Madrid the boys did not stir out of barracks. One at least of Nunez's +envoys they knew to be alive, and he could enlist any number of the +lower class against them, so they resolved not to go out until they +should finally start. + +After a fortnight's stay they were sent for to the colonel's quarters, +where they found Madame Reynier and her child. "I had a letter from my +husband this morning," she said, "from his camp near Cordova, thanking +you with all his heart for the inestimable service you rendered him, +and begging me to tell you that you can count on his gratitude to the +extent of his life at any and all times. You need no assurance of +mine. And now about your journey. All is prepared for you to leave +to-morrow morning. You are to come here to the colonel's quarters soon +after daybreak. Here are your two disguises, for the one as a young +bachelor of medicine, for the other as a young novice. Here is your +pass, signed by the minister, authorizing you both to pass on to your +relations at Ciudad Rodrigo, and to go unmolested thence where you +choose, also recommending you to the care of all French and Spanish +authorities. A regiment marches to-morrow morning for the frontier; +the colonel is a cousin of my husband. I have told him that some +friends of yours rendered me much kindness and service on my way down, +and that I particularly commend you to his care. He has promised to +allow you to follow the regiment, and to see that you get quarters at +each halting-place. He does not know you for anything but what you +appear to be. When you have put on these dresses to-morrow morning, +step out by the private door from these quarters, looking carefully +when you start to see that there is no one in the street. Then go +boldly to No. 15, Rue St. Geronimo; go into the courtyard, there you +will see two stout mules with all necessaries, under charge of a +soldier, who will have instructions to hand them over to you without +asking any questions; then go down to the Retiro and wait till the +16th come along. The Colonel will be on the look-out for you, and you +will ride up to him and hand him this note. And now farewell, dear +boys; never shall I forget you, or cease to pray for you, and may be +when this terrible war is over we may meet as friends again. Keep +these little tokens of remembrance of your grateful friends." So +saying, Madame Reynier pressed into the boys' hands two magnificent +gold watches and chains, held her child up for each of them to kiss, +threw her arms round their necks and kissed them herself, and then +drawing down her veil to conceal the tears which were standing in her +eyes, left them hastily. + +That night the boys said good-by to their friend the sergeant, and +to those soldiers with whom they had most companionship. "You have +guessed, no doubt, sergeant," Tom said, in his mixture of Spanish and +French, "that we are not exactly what we seem to be, but if we should +ever meet again, under different circumstances, I want you to remember +that our connection with the regiment has been in a way forced upon +us. I should not like you to think, that is that under the pretence +of friendship, we have been treacherously learning things. Do you +understand?" + +"I understand, mes braves," the sergeant said, "Jacques Pinteau is no +fool, and he saw from the first that you were not two ragged Spanish +peasant boys by birth. I daresay I can guess what you are, but there +need be no ill-will for that, and as you only came among us by +accident, as it were, there is no more to be said either way. There is +one thing certain, wherever or however we meet, we shall be friends." + +So well were Madame Reynier's plans arranged that the boys passed from +Madrid to the frontier without a single hitch or unpleasantness. Tom +was soberly attired as a student at the university, Peter was muffled +up to the eyes as a timid young novice, going from school to enter a +convent, of which his aunt was lady superior, at Ciudad Rodrigo. The +colonel, and, following his example, the officers of the regiment were +polite and civil. The marches were of easy length, the mules stout +and smooth-going, with well-filled traveling sacks. The weather was +delightful, and the boys enjoyed the fortnight's march exceedingly. +Upon the road they learned that Massena had laid siege to Ciudad +Rodrigo, and that the 16th was on its way to join the besieging army. + +It was the end of June, 1810, when the 16th joined Massena's force +before Ciudad Rodrigo. The siege had continued for some time, the +British light division, under General Craufurd, lay upon the other +side of the river Agueda, which separated them alike from the town and +the French army. The colonel of the 16th politely expressed to Tom his +regret that he could not, for the present, conduct them to their final +destination, but that he hoped that the gate would soon be open for +them. Tom thanked him for the civility which he had shown them upon +the road, and said that he would, with his sister, take up his abode +for the present a few miles from the beleaguered fortress. On leaving +the regiment the boys went higher up the Agueda to the little town of +Villar, where there was a bridge. This however, was watched by the +troops of both armies, and there was, at present, no chance of +affecting a passage. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +THE FIGHT ON THE COA. + + +All through the winter of 1809-1810, Wellington had remained quietly +on the frontier of Portugal, engaged in disciplining his troops, many +of whom were raw drafts from the militia, in urging upon the home +Government the necessity of fresh reinforcements, if the war was to be +carried on with the smallest hopes of success, and in controversies +and disputes with the Portuguese regency. This body of incapables +starved their own army, refused supplies and transport to the British, +and behaved with such arrogance and insolence that Wellington was +several times driven to use the threat that, unless measures were +taken to keep the Portuguese troops from starving, and to supply food +to the British, he would put his army on board the transports at +Lisbon, and give up the struggle altogether. + +Spring found the army still on the frontier, and when the French +advanced in force in May to lay siege to the Spanish frontier fortress +of Ciudad Rodrigo, Wellington to the intense disappointment of his own +troops, and the bitter anger of the Portuguese and Spaniards, refused +to fight a battle to save the fortress, which, under its gallant old +governor, Andrea Hernati, was defending itself nobly. + +Wellington's position was, however, a very difficult one, and his +responsibilities were immense. Allowing for the detachments which were +massing to check three other French columns advancing in different +directions, he had but 25,000 men with which to attempt to raise the +siege of Ciudad Rodrigo, or to draw off the besieged garrison. Massena +had under him 60,000 French veterans, and was desiring nothing more +than that Wellington should attack him. The chances of victory then +were by no means strong, and in any case victory could only have been +purchased by a loss of men which would have completely crippled the +British general, and would have rendered it absolutely necessary for +him to fall back again at once. A defeat or even a heavy loss of +men, would have so dispirited the faint-hearted Government at home +that they would undoubtedly have recalled the whole expedition, and +resigned Portugal to its fate. Thus Wellington decided not to risk the +whole fate of the British army and of Portugal for merely a temporary +advantage, and so stood firm against the murmurs of his own troops, +the furious reproaches of the Portuguese and Spaniards, and the moving +entreaties for aid of the gallant governor of the besieged town. + +At the same time that he refused to risk a general battle, he kept +Craufurd's division in advance of the Coa, and within two hours' march +of the enemy, thereby encouraging the garrison of Ciudad Rodrigo, and +preventing Massena from pushing forward a portion of his army while +the rest pursued the siege. + +Craufurd's front was guarded by the Agueda, a river only passable by +two or three bridges and fords in wet weather, but fordable in many +places in the dry season. At the commencement of June the Agueda +fell, and the French crossed in strength at various places. Craufurd, +however, still maintained his position in front of the Coa with great +skill and boldness. He had under his command only 4000 infantry, 1100 +cavalry, and six guns, and his maintenance of his position, almost +within gun-shot of an enemy's army, 60,000 strong, for three months, +is one of the finest feats of military audacity and ability ever +performed. + +Until the 11th of July the boys remained quietly at a cottage occupied +by peasants, who believed their story that they were only waiting +to proceed when the French army advanced. They were freed from +molestation or inquiry upon the part of the French by the pass with +which Madame Reynier had supplied them. + +Upon that day Ciudad Rodrigo surrendered, and Massena prepared at once +to enter Portugal. Upon the 21st the cavalry advanced in great force, +and upon the following day the boys resolved upon endeavoring to +rejoin the British army. The Agueda was now easily fordable in many +places, but the boys determined to swim across, at a distance from the +point at which the French army was now pouring forward. + +As evening came on they left the cottage, and walked two miles up +the stream, and, as soon as night fell, took off the costumes which +had proved of such service to them and left them on the bank; then +fastening their peasants' suits upon two bundles of rushes to keep +them dry, entered the little river, and were soon upon the opposite +shore. They knew, from what they had heard in the afternoon, that +Craufurd had fallen back upon Almeida, a fortified town, and that it +was probable he would at once cross the Coa, as resistance to the +force now approaching him seemed nothing short of madness. + +No good, indeed, could be gained by a fight in such a position, with a +deep river in the rear, crossed by only a narrow bridge, and commanded +by both banks, and Wellington's orders had been imperative "that, upon +no account whatever was Craufurd to fight beyond the Coa." + +Craufurd, however, a rash and obstinate, although a skilful general, +was determined upon having a brush with the enemy before he fell back. +He anticipated, no doubt, that only an advanced guard of the enemy +would come up at first, and his intention was to inflict a severe +check upon them with the magnificent little division under his +command, and then fall back triumphantly across the Coa. Massena, +however, was well aware of the fighting powers of the light division, +and was preparing to hurl suddenly upon him a force more than +sufficient to crush it. + +The Scudamores had but little fear of meeting with any large body of +the enemy, as the main French advance was direct from Ciudad Rodrigo; +their cavalry would, however, be scattered all over the country, and +were they to fall into the hands of any of these parties they would +have been shot instantly, upon suspicion of endeavoring to convey news +of the French movements to Craufurd. + +The point where they crossed the river was between Villar and Naves +Frias, and, after an hour's walking, they struck the little rivulet +called Duas Casas. This they crossed at once, as they knew that by +following its southern bank until they saw some high ground to their +left they would find themselves near Almeida, which they hoped to +reach before the English retreated. + +All night they tramped through the fields of stubble, where the corn +had been long since cut for the use of Craufurd's cavalry, but walking +at night through an unknown country is slow work, and when day began +to break they entered a small wood just beyond the point where the +Turones, as the southern arm of the Duas Casas is called, branches off +from the main stream. Several times in the course of the day bodies +of the enemy's cavalry came near their place of concealment, and the +Scudamores congratulated themselves that they had not given way to +their impatience, and tried to push on across the twenty miles that +alone separated them from their friends. + +At nightfall the wind rose, and a heavy rain began to fall. They had +no stars by which to steer their course, and were, therefore, forced +to follow the bank of the Turones, although they knew that it would +lead them some distance to the north of Almeida. It was slow work, +indeed, for they had to grope their way along in the storm, following +every turn and bend of the river, which formed their only guide. After +several hours' toil they came into a road running north and south. +This they knew was the road leading from Guarda to Almeida, and it +gave them a clue as to the distance they had come. Still following the +river, they continued their course until they approached San Pedro, +whence they knew that a road ran directly to the British position +in front of Almeida, that is if the British still maintained their +position there. + +As they approached the village, they heard a deep, hollow sound, +and stopping to listen, and laying their ears to the ground, could +distinguish the rumble of heavy carriages. + +"The French are advancing in force, Peter; we are just in time; +they are going to attack us in the morning at daybreak. We know the +direction now; let us turn to the left, and try to get on in advance +of them. They probably will not push on much farther until there +is light enough to permit them to form order of battle; they are +evidently, by the sound, going to the left, rather than straight on." + +The Scudamores now hurried on, and presently the rumbling of the +artillery died away, and they ventured to push to their left, and to +get on the road, which they found deserted. Half an hour's run, for +they knew that every minute was of importance, and they heard the +welcome challenge, "Who comes there?" "Two British officers," they +answered, and in a few minutes they were taken to the officer in +charge of the picket, and having once convinced him of their identity, +were heartily greeted and welcomed. + +"The French are advancing in great force to attack," Tom said; "please +forward us instantly to the general." + +The matter was too important for an instant's delay, and a sergeant +was at once told off to accompany them. + +The first faint blush of daylight was in the east when they arrived +at the cottage which served as General Craufurd's quarters, and, upon +their speaking to the sentinel at the door, a window was thrown open, +and a deep voice demanded "What is it?" + +"We have just arrived through the French lines," Tom said, "the enemy +are at hand in force." + +The casement closed, and an instant afterwards the general came out. +"Who are you?" + +"We belong to the Norfolk Rangers, general, and have been detached on +service in the interior; we have only just made our way back." + +"How am I to know your story is true?" the general asked sharply. + +"You may, perhaps, remember, sir, we landed from the 'Latona,' and you +kindly lent us horses to accompany you." + +"Aha! I remember," the general said. "Well, your news?" + +"The French have crossed the Turones in force, sir; at least they have +a good many guns with them." + +"Which way were they going?" + +"As far as we could judge by the sound, sir, they were taking up a +position between Villa Formosa and Fort Conception." + +"Good," the general said shortly; then turning to three or four of his +staff who had followed him from the cottage, "Get the troops under +arms at once. Come in here, gentlemen." + +The Scudamores entered, and as they came into the light of a candle +which stood on the table the general smiled grimly. + +"It is lucky you were able to recall yourselves to my memory, for +I should have needed some strong evidence to persuade me you were +British officers had I seen you before you spoke. You are wet to the +skin; there is a brandy bottle, and you will find some bread and cold +fowl in that cupboard." + +Five minutes later the boys followed General Craufurd from his hut. + +Short as was the time which had elapsed since their arrival, the +troops were already under arms, for three months of incessant alarm +and watchfulness had enabled this splendid division to act as one man, +and to fall in at any hour of the day or night in an incredibly short +time. Ten minutes later and the ramble of the baggage wagons was +heard along the road towards the bridge. The morning was clearing +fast, the clouds lifted, and the daylight seemed to break with unusual +suddenness. + +The dark masses of the French became visible forming up before the +Turones, and Craufurd hurried forward his cavalry and guns to check +their advance. + +"Hurry the infantry up, hurry them up," the general said urgently to +the officers by him. "Let them take post along the ridge, and then +fall back fighting towards the bridge. Major MacLeod," he said to an +officer of the 43d, "take these gentlemen with you; they are officers +of the Norfolk Rangers. They will join your regiment for the present. +When your regiment falls back, occupy that stone inclosure a little +way down the slope at the left of the road, and hold the enemy in +check while the troops file over the bridge." + +The officer addressed looked with surprise at the boys, and signing to +them to follow, hurried off to his regiment, which was on the left of +the British line. + +Next to them came a regiment of Portuguese riflemen, with a wing of +the 95th upon either flank, while the 52d formed the right of the +line. + +Upon reaching the regiment, Major MacLeod briefly introduced the boys +to the colonel, who said, "As you have no arms, gentlemen, I think you +had better make for the bridge at once." + +"Thank you, sir," Tom replied, "there will be some muskets disposable +before long, and directly they are so we will take our place in the +ranks." + +They had now leisure to look round and examine their position, and a +glance was sufficient to show how great was the peril in which General +Craufurd's obstinacy had placed his little force. In front of them +were 24,000 French infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 30 pieces of artillery. +An overwhelming force indeed, and one which could scarcely have been +withstood by the 4000 British infantry, even under the most favorable +conditions of position. The position, however, was here wholly against +the British. They stood at the edge of a plateau, and behind them the +ground fell away in a steep hillside to the Coa, a mile distant, and +across the Coa there was but a single bridge. + +The enemy was approaching fast. Ney's great brigade of cavalry swept +the British horse before them, and the infantry were following at a +run. + +Resistance on the edge of the plateau was hopeless, and Craufurd +ordered the infantry to fall back at once. The 43d filed into the +inclosure, rapidly cut loopholes in the wall, and as the enemy +appeared on the crest above opened a tremendous fire, under cover of +which the cavalry and artillery trotted briskly and in good order down +the road to the bridge. + +The Scudamores, having no duty, stood at the entrance to the inclosure +and watched the fight on their right. As the masses of French infantry +appeared on the edge of the plateau they made no pause, but opening +a heavy fire pressed forward on the retiring British troops, who +were falling back in open order, contesting every inch of ground. So +rapidly and hotly, however, did the French press after them that the +British were soon pushed back beyond the line of the inclosure, and as +the French followed closely, it was evident that the 43d would be cut +oft and surrounded. + +Their colonel saw their danger, and called upon them to fall in and +retreat, but the entrance was so narrow that it was clear at a glance +that ere one company could pass through it the French would be upon +them, and the regiment caught like rats in a trap. + +Officers and men alike saw the danger, and there was a pause of +consternation. + +Peter was standing next to the colonel, and said suddenly as the idea +flashed across him, "The wall is not very strong, sir, if the men mass +against it and push together I think it will go." + +The colonel caught at the idea. "Now, lads, steady, form against the +rear wall four deep, close together, shoulder to shoulder, as close +as you can pack; now get ready, one, two, three!" and at the word the +heavy mass of men swung themselves against the wall; it swayed with +the shock, and many stones were displaced; another effort and the +wall tottered and fell, and with a glad shout the 43d burst out, and +trotting on at the double soon joined the rifles and 95th. + +The ground was rough and broken with rocks, vineyards and inclosures, +and the troops, fighting with admirable coolness and judgment, took +advantage of every obstacle and fell back calmly and in good order +before the overwhelming force opposed to them. + +Fortunately the jealousies of the French generals, which throughout +the campaign contributed in no slight degree to the success of +the British, was now the cause of their safety, for Montbrun, who +commanded the French heavy cavalry, refused to obey Ney's order to +charge straight down to the bridge, in which case the whole English +infantry would have been cut off; the French hussars, however, being +on the British rear, charged among them whenever the ground permitted +them to do so. + +Upon the British right the ground was more open than upon the left, +and the 52d was therefore obliged to fall back more quickly than the +rest of the line, and were the first to arrive at the bridge head, +which was still choked with artillery and cavalry. This was the most +dangerous moment, the rest of the infantry could not retreat until the +bridge was clear, and the French with exulting shouts pressed hard +upon them to drive them back upon the river. + +Major MacLeod, seeing the urgent danger, rallied four companies of his +regiment upon the little hill on the right of the road, while Major +Rowan collected two companies on another to the left. Here they were +joined by many of the riflemen, and for a while the French advance was +checked. + +The Scudamores had remained throughout close to Major MacLeod, and had +long since armed themselves with the muskets and pouches of fallen +men, and with 43d shakoes on their heads, were fighting among the +ranks. + +The cloud of French skirmishers pressed hotly forward, and MacLeod, +seeing that the bridge was still blocked, resolved suddenly upon +a desperate measure. Taking off his cap, he pointed to the enemy, +and calling upon his men to follow him, rode boldly at them. Peter +Scudamore caught up a bugle which had fallen from a dead bugler by his +side, blew the charge, and the soldiers, cheering loudly, followed +MacLeod against the enemy. + +Astounded at this sudden and unexpected attack, the French skirmishers +paused, and then fell back before the furious charge of the 43d, who +pressed after them with loud and continuous cheering. Looking back, +MacLeod saw that the bridge was now clear, and recalled the troops, +who fell back rapidly again before the French infantry had recovered +sufficiently from their surprise to press them. + +The hussars were, however, again forward, and were galloping down the +road, which was here sunken between somewhat high banks. Tom and Peter +were with the last company, which turned and prepared to receive them, +when Tom, pointing to a coil of rope upon a cart which had broken +down, shouted, "Quick, tie it to these posts across the road." Two or +three men sprang to assist him, and in a minute the rope was stretched +across the road at a foot from the ground, and fastened round a stone +post on either side. They had scarcely seized their muskets and leapt +on the bank again, when the French cavalry came thundering down the +road. "Fire, a few of you," Tom said, "so as to call their attention +up here," and in accordance with his order a dropping fire was opened. +The French came along at a gallop; a few of the leading horses saw +the rope and leapt it, but those behind caught it and fell, the mass +behind pressed on, and in an instant the lane was choked with a +confused mass of men and horses. "Now a volley," Tom cried, "and then +to the bridge." + +Every musket was emptied in to the struggling mass, and then with a +cheer, the men ran briskly down to the bridge, and crossed--the last +of the British troops over the Coa. + +The rest of the infantry and artillery had already taken ground on the +heights behind the river, and these opened fire upon the French as +they approached the head of the bridge in pursuit. The British were +now, however, safe in the position which they ought to have taken up +before the advance of the French, and had General Craufurd obeyed his +orders not to fight beyond the Coa, the lives of 306 of his gallant +troops, including the officers, would have been saved. + +The battle, however, was not yet over. The artillery on both sides +played across the ravine, the French skirmishers swarmed down to the +river bank, and between them and the British infantry a rapid fire was +exchanged, while a heavy column marched down to the bridge. With a +deep-sounding cheer they advanced upon it, while with answering cheers +the British opened fire upon them. The depth of the ravine at first +deceived the British marksmen, and the column pressed on until its +head was three-quarters across the bridge. Then the shower smote it, +and beneath that terrible fire the head of the column melted away. +Still it pressed on until across the bridge the corpses lay piled in a +mass as high as the parapet, and beyond this heap, this terrible line, +there was no living. Then sullenly and slowly the French fell back, +while the British cheers rose exultingly along the hillside. + +Twice again did fresh columns pour on to the bridge, but only to melt +away under the British fire, neither of them reaching the dreadful +line which marked the point reached by the head of the first. The +artillery and musketry fire on both sides continued until four in the +afternoon, when a heavy rain set in, and the fire ceased altogether. + +As the Coa was fordable at several points lower down, and the French +could therefore have turned the position next day, the British troops +fell back during the night behind the Pinhel river, where Picton's +division was also encamped. + +Next morning the boys exchanged their Spanish suits for the uniform +of British officers, which they obtained from the effects of some of +those who had fallen upon the previous day, these being, as is usual +in a campaign, at once sold by auction, the amount realized being +received by the paymaster for the benefit of the dead men's relatives. +Major MacLeod had witnessed their ready presence of mind in throwing +the rope across the road, and so checking the French charge, and +giving time to the rear-guard to cross the bridge, and had made a very +favorable report upon the subject. + +Two days later and they joined the Rangers, who were stationed at +Guarda, and were received with the greatest heartiness by their +brother officers, with warm but respectful greetings by the men, and +with uproarious demonstrations of gladness on the part of Sambo. + +"The betting was two to one that you had gone down, boys," Captain +Manley said, after the first greetings; "but Carruthers and myself +have taken up all offers, and win I don't know how many dinners and +bottles of wine. I had the strongest faith you would get through +somehow. You will take up your quarters with me. I have two bedrooms +upstairs there, which Sam has taken possession of in your name. He +would have it that you were sure to be back in time for the first +fight. Dinner will be ready at six, and after that there will be a +general gathering round the fire in the open to hear your adventures. +No doubt you would be dining with the colonel, but I know he is +engaged to the general." + +"Yes, he told us so," Tom said, "and we are to dine with him +to-morrow." + +"All right, then; we'll make a night of it. Carruthers is coming to +dine, and Burke and Lethbridge; but the room won't hold more than six. +We are going to have a feast, for Sam has got hold of a sucking-pig; +where he got it from I dare not inquire, and Lethbridge said his +fellow had, somehow or other, found a turkey; as to wine, we shall +have it of the best, for Burke is quartered at the monastery, and the +monks are so delighted at finding him a good Catholic that they have +given him the run of their cellar." + +It was a jovial dinner, and no words can express the satisfaction and +delight which beamed on Sam's face as he stood behind his master, or +the grin of pride with which he placed the sucking-pig on the table. + +"Sam, Sam!" Captain Manley said reprovingly, "I fear that pig is not +honestly come by, and that one of these days we shall hear that you +have come to a bad end." + +"No, no, Massa Captain Manley, sar," Sam said, "dat pig come quite +honest, dat pig made present to Sam." + +"A likely story that, Sam. Come, out with it. I have no doubt it was +quite as honest as Lethbridge's turkey anyhow. Come, tell us how it +was." + +Thus invoked, Sam's face assumed the pompons air with which he always +related a story, and he began,-- + +"Well, sar, de affair happened in dis way. When de massas arribe, two +o'clock, and went in for long talk wid de colonel, dis chile said to +himself, 'Now what am I going to get them for dinner?' De rations +sarve out dis morning war all skin and bone, and war pretty nigh +finished at lunch. Sam say to himself, 'Captain Manley's sure to say, +'You dine wid me;' but as Captain Manley hadn't got no food himself, +de invitation was berry kind, berry kind indeed; but massa wasn't +likely to get fat on dat invitation." + +Sam's narrative was interrupted by a perfect shout of laughter upon +the part of all at table, Captain Manley joining heartily in the laugh +against himself. When they had a little recovered again, Sam went on +as gravely as ever. "Dis struck Sam berry serious, not to have nothing +for dinner after being away seben months; presently idea occur to dis +chile, and he stroll permiscuous up to big farm-house on hill. When +Sam got near house, kept out of sight of window; at last got quite +close, took off shako, and put head suddenly in at window. Sure +enough, just what Sam expected, dere sat missus of farm, fat ole +woman, wid fat ole servant opposite her. De door was open, and dis +little pig and several of his broders and sisters was a frisking in +and out. De old women look up bofe togeder, and dey give a awful +shriek when dey saw dis chile's head; dey fought it were de debil, +sure enough. Dey drop down on dere knees, and begin to pray as fast as +maybe. Den I give a loud 'Yah! yah!' and dey screams out fresh. 'Oh! +good massa debil!' says the ole woman, 'what you want? I been berry, +berry bad, but don't take me away.' You see, Massa Tom, I pick up +little Spanish, 'nuff to understand since you been gone. I not say +nuffin, and de ole woman den go on, 'If you want one soul Massa Debil, +take dis here,' pointing to her serbant;' she been much more wicked +nor me.' Den de serbant she set up awful shriek, and I says, 'Dis time +I hab pity on you, next time I come, if you not good I carry you bofe +away. But must take soul away to big debil 'else he neber forgibe me. +Dere, I will carry off soul of little pig. Gib it me.' De serbant she +gives cry ob joy, jump up, seize little pig, and berry much afraid, +bring him to window. Before I take him I say to old missus, 'Dis a +free gibt on your part?' and she say, 'Oh, yes, oh, yes, good Massa +Debil, you can take dem all if you like.' I say, 'No; only one--and +now me gib you bit advice. My Massa down below hear you very bad ole +women, never gib noting to de poor, berry hard, berry hard. Me advise +you change your conduct, or, as sure as eggs is eggs, he send me up +again for you no time.' Den I gave two great 'Yah! yah's!' again berry +loud, and showed de white ob my eyes, and dey went down on to knees +again, and I go quietly round corner ob house, and walk home wid de +pig which was giben to me. Noting like stealing about dat, Massa +Manley, sar!" + +Sam's story was received with roars of laughter, and when they had +recovered themselves a little, Captain Manley said, "It is lucky we +march to-morrow, Sam, for if the good woman were to catch a glimpse of +you in uniform, and were to find she had been tricked, she might lay +a complaint against you, and although, as you say, the pig was freely +given to you, I imagine the Provost Marshal might consider that it was +obtained under false pretences. But here are the other men outside, we +had better adjourn, for every one is longing to hear your adventures." + +It was a lovely evening, and as the officers of the Norfolk Rangers +sat or lay round the fire, which was lit for light and cheerfulness +rather than warmth, the boys, after their long wanderings among +strangers, felt how pleasant and bright life was among friends +and comrades. They had first to relate their adventures with the +guerillas, after which it was agreed that they had earned the right to +be silent for the rest of the evening, and song, and jest, and merry +story went round the ring. + +Sam was installed under the direction of the doctor, a jovial +Irishman, as concocter of punch, and his office was by no means a +sinecure. + +"Now, major, give us the song of the regiment," Captain Manley said, +and, as he spoke, there was a general cry round the circle of "The +Rangers, the Rangers." "I'm agreeable," the major said. "Give me +another tumbler of punch to get my pipes in order. Make it a little +sweeter than the last brew, Sam; yes, that's better. Well, here +goes--full chorus, and no shirking." + +THE RANGERS. + + "Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah! + Here's to the corps that we love so well; + Ever the first in the deadly fray, + Steady and firm amid shot and shell. + Scattered as skirmishers out in the front, + Contesting each foot of the ground we hold, + Nor yielding a step though we bear the brunt + Of the first attack of the foeman bold. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah! + Here's to the corps that we love so well; + Ever the first in the deadly fray, + Steady and firm amid shot and shell. + + "Steady boys, steady, the foe falls back, + Sullenly back to the beat of the drum, + Hark to the thunder that nears our flank + Rally in square, boys, their cavalry come. + Squadron on squadron, wave upon wave, + Dashing along with an ocean's force, + But they break into spray on our bayonets' points, + And we mock at the fury of rider and horse. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c. + + "The gunner may boast of the death he deals + As he shatters the foe with his iron hail, + And may laugh with pride as he checks the charge, + Or sees the dark column falter and quail. + But the gunner fights with the foe afar, + In the rear of the line is the battery's place, + The Ranger fights with a sterner joy + For he strives with his foemen face to face. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c. + + "The cavalry man is dashing and gay, + His steed is fast, and his blade is fine, + He blithely rides to the fiercest fray, + And cuts his way through the foeman's line, + But the wild, fierce joys of the deadly breach, + Or the patient pluck of the serried square + Are far away from the horseman's reach, + While the Norfolk Rangers are sure to be there. + + Hurrah for the Rangers, &c." + +Long, loud, and hearty was the cheering as the last chorus concluded. +"Very good song, very well sung, jolly companions every one," shouted +the doctor. "Now, Manley, keep the ball rolling, give us the 'The +Bivouac,'" Captain Manley emptied his glass, and, without hesitation, +began-- + +THE BIVOUAC. + + "The weary march is over, boys, the camp fire's burning bright, + So gather round the blazing logs, we'll keep high feast to-night, + For every heart is full of joy, and every cheek aglow, + That after months of waiting, at last we meet the foe. + To-morrow's sun will see the fight, and ere that sun goes down, + Our glorious flag another wreath of victory shall crown. + + Hurrah, hurrah for the bivouac, + With comrades tried and true, + With faces bright, and spirits light, + And the foemen's fires in view. + + "Then fill your cups with Spanish wine, and let the toast go round, + Here's a health to all who love us on dear old England's ground. + Be their tresses gold or auburn, or black as ebon's hue, + Be their eyes of witching hazel, loving gray, or heaven's blue, + Here's to them all, the girls we love, God bless them every one; + May we all be here to toast them when to-morrow's work is done. + + Hurrah, hurrah, &c. + + "But whate'er to-morrow bring us, it shall shed no gloom to-night, + For a British soldier does not flinch from thought of death in fight; + No better ending could we wish, no worthier do we know, + Than to fall for King and country, with our face towards the foe; + And if we go, our friends who stay will keep our memory bright, + And will drink to us in silence by many a camp-fire's light. + + Hurrah, hurrah, &c." + +When the last chorus had ceased, the boys, who had had a long march +that morning, and were thoroughly tired, stole quietly off to bed, +but it was not till long after they had gone to sleep that the jovial +party round the fire broke up, and that Sam was relieved from his +duties of concocter of punch. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +BUSACO AND TORRES VEDRAS. + + +Instead of pressing forward upon his invasion of Portugal, Massena +prepared to besiege Almeida, and for a month the British and +Portuguese army remained in their position within a few hours' march +of that town. Wellington expected that Almeida would be able to +resist for two months, and hoped to find some opportunity for falling +suddenly upon the besiegers; but even a resistance of two months would +have made it so late in the season that Massena must have postponed +his invasion until the next spring. + +Upon the morning of the 26th of August the French batteries opened +fire, and from Guarda the dull, heavy roar of artillery could be heard +all day. As darkness fell, the officers of the Rangers were, as usual, +assembling round their fire, when the earth seemed to shake beneath +their feet, and a flash like that of summer lightning lit the eastern +sky. "What can that be?" was the general exclamation. A minute later, +and a deep, heavy, prolonged roar sounded in their ears--then all was +quiet. + +"That is a big magazine," Captain Manley said, "and I'm afraid it's +the town, for it sounded too heavy for a mere field magazine. If it be +the town, you'll see it won't hold out much longer; even if the actual +damage is not very great, a great explosion always damages the morale +of a defense, and in that case we shall have Massena upon us, and +there will be wigs on the green ere many days are over." + +Captain Manley's conclusions were correct. The magazine of Almeida had +exploded with terrific effect. Only six houses were left standing in +the town, a considerable portion of the ramparts was thrown down, and +five hundred people killed on the spot. The stones were hurled in all +directions with such force that forty of the besiegers were hurt in +the trenches. + +Colonel Cox, who commanded, endeavored to rally the panic-stricken +garrison, and upon the following morning attempted to negotiate with +Massena, who sent an officer to demand instant surrender. + +Defense was, in fact, impossible, but Colonel Cox attempted to +negotiate, because he hoped that Wellington would at once advance to +his rescue. His intentions were frustrated, however, by the treachery +and mutiny of the principal Portuguese officers under him, and the +French at once took possession of the ruins. + +The British army fell back a short distance when the news of the +disaster arrived, and a fortnight of great anxiety and watchfulness +passed, as it was not certain by which road or roads Massena would +advance. + +It was not until the 18th of September that Massena fairly commenced +his march, having chosen the road from Visen through Martagoa, and the +next day the news reached the Rangers that the British army was to +concentrate on the heights of Busaco. + +"So we are going to have a fight for it," Carruthers said to the boys, +as the officers assembled in readiness to take their places when the +troops had fallen in. "What will be the end of it?" + +"We shall lick them," an old captain said, "though they are two to +one, and then they will march round us somehow, and then we shall have +to fall back in all haste on Lisbon, and embark there, and we shall +eat our Christmas dinner in England." + +There was a general murmur of assent, for at that time the belief was +almost universal in the British army that they would be forced to +abandon Portugal. + +"I do not know," Major Fanshawe said. "I heard last night, from a +man who has just returned from sick leave at Lisbon, that there are +thousands of peasants employed under our engineers in getting up some +tremendous works some fifteen miles this side of Lisbon. I should not +be surprised yet if Massena finds the chief a nut too hard to crack, +with all his force." + +"I have heard something about these works at Torres Vedras," Captain +Manley said, "a mere rumor; still I believe there must be something in +it. Wellington has only some twenty-five thousand British troops, and +as many Portuguese, while Massena has over a hundred thousand veterans +at his command. Our game would be hopeless unless we have something to +fall back on. No; I have every faith in our general. But there goes +the bugle." + +On the 24th the Rangers, with the rest of Picton's division, arrived +on the crest of Busaco, where Cole's and Craufurd's divisions arrived +on the same day. This position was one of immense strength, being a +long ridge, with a very deep valley in front. Upon the opposite side +of this ravine the slope was as steep and sharp as that of Busaco +itself, so that the opposite crest was within easy cannon shot. +The enemy, in order to attack the British position, would have to +descend into the bottom of this steep ravine, and then climb up the +precipitous ascent, to meet the British soldiers awaiting them, fresh +and unshaken, at the top. So strong, indeed, was the position that +the English generals were doubtful whether Massena would venture to +attack. + +Upon the 25th Craufurd moved his division forward, and would have +repeated his mistake of the Coa had not Wellington himself gone +forward and recalled the troops, bringing them off with difficulty +in the face of the advancing masses of the French. By three in the +afternoon, 40,000 French infantry were on the ridge opposite Busaco, +and it appeared probable that the battle would take place that +afternoon, in which case the British position would have been +precarious, for neither Spencer's, Hill's, nor Leith's divisions were +up. + +Massena, however, was miles behind, and Ney, who commanded the +advance, could not attack without orders; thus, the moment favorable +for the French passed by. When Massena arrived next day, the British +divisions were all up and in their places, and the long crest of +Busaco swarmed with troops. Hill occupied the right across the road to +Pena Cova, then came Leith's 5th division, then came Picton with the +3d division, with Spencer's division, the 1st, next to him. On a +plateau in front of a convent lay Craufurd and Pack, while Cole, with +the 4th division, was on the left. + +The 27th and 28th were passed in comparative tranquillity, the rival +armies surveying each other across the chasm. From the woods far below +came up the constant crack of the rifle, as the skirmishers on either +side pushed each other backwards; and on the evening of the 28th this +fighting increased so much in strength and intensity, that the British +troops were some time under arms in expectation of a night attack, for +the enemy's riflemen had pressed far up on the hill-side towards the +British lines. As the night went on, however, the fire ceased, and the +dark ravine between the two long lines of bright watch-fires became +hushed and still. + +The Rangers were with Picton's division, and were out as an advance +half way down the ravine, two companies being down in the bottom as +skirmishers. Morning was but just breaking when a heavy fire burst out +in front. The regiment sprang to its feet, and prepared for action. +It was not long in coming, for the fire rolled rapidly up the hill +towards them, and the skirmishing companies came running back, pressed +by a heavy column of the enemy. Reynier had formed in two divisions, +one of which was now pressing forward against Picton's right, while +the object of the other was to gain the crest still farther to the +right, and so place themselves between Picton and Leigh. The whole +regiment was at once engaged, but the French assault was too powerful +to be resisted, and the Rangers and the other regiments of the +advanced brigade gave way sullenly, while the French eagerly pressed +up the hill, although a battery opened upon them from the crest, while +they were unsupported by their own artillery. + +"Golly, Massa Peter, dese fellows fight berry hard; look as if dey +lick us dis time," the black, who was in Peter's company, said to him +as the regiment retreated. + +"The battle has only begun yet, Sam. We have plenty of fresh troops at +the top of the hill." + +"Good ting, dat, Massa Peter. Berry hard work, dis--climb hill, carry +kit, fire gun, dodge de bullets, all sam time." + +"You didn't dodge that bullet sharp enough, Sam," Peter said with a +laugh, as the negro's shako was carried off with a ball. + +"Him cum too fast. Dere, you frog-eating thief." he said angrily as he +fired his musket at an advancing foe. "Dat serve you right," he went +on to himself as the Frenchman fell. "You spoil Sam's hat. Dis colored +gentleman catch cold first time him come on to rain." + +The French continued their impetuous advance. Picton's right, as they +climbed the hill, fell back towards his center, and in half an hour +from the first shot being fired the head of the French column had won +the crest, and, being between Leigh and Picton's divisions, had cut +the British position. Then the column nearest to Picton's division +began to wheel to its right, so as to sweep the crest. + +"Lie down, the Rangers; every man down," shouted the colonel, and the +breathless men threw themselves panting on the ground. A wild Irish +shout was heard behind them as they did so, and a tremendous volley of +musketry rang over their heads, and then the 88th and a wing of the +45th dashed across them, and, with fierce cheers, charged that portion +of the column engaged in wheeling. Breathless and in disorder from +their prodigious efforts, the French were unable to resist this fresh +attack. In an instant the British were among them, and mixed up in +wild confusion, fighting hand to hand, the mass of combatants went +mingled together down the hill. Nor was the success of the French +column which had gained the crest of long duration, for Leith brought +up one of his brigades; Colonel Cameron, with the 9th Regiment, dashed +at the enemy with the bayonet, without firing a single shot, while +the 38th attacked their flank; and the French, unable to resist the +onslaught, relinquished their position and retreated down the hill. +Nor upon the French right had Ney's attack proved more successful. + +Napier thus describes the combat in this quarter of the field:--"When +the light broke, three heavy masses detached from the sixth corps were +seen to enter the woods below, and to throw forward a profusion of +skirmishers; one of them, under General Marchand, emerging from the +dark chasm and following the main road, seemed intent to turn the +right of the light division; a second, under Loison, made straight up +the mountain against the front; the third remained in reserve. Simon's +brigade, leading Loison's attack, ascended with a wonderful alacrity, +and though the light troops plied it incessantly with musketry, and +the artillery bullets swept through it from the first to the last +section, its order was never disturbed, nor its speed in the least +abated. Ross's guns were worked with incredible quickness, yet their +range was palpably contracted every round; the enemy's shots came +ringing up in a sharper key, the English skirmishers, breathless +and begrimed with powder, rushed over the edge of the ascent, the +artillery drew back, and the victorious cries of the French were heard +within a few yards of the summit. Craufurd, standing alone on one of +the rocks, had been intently watching the progress of their attack, +and now, with a shrill tone, ordered the two regiments in reserve to +charge. The next moment a horrid shout startled the French column, and +eighteen hundred British bayonets went sparkling over the hill. Yet so +brave, so hardy were the leading French, that each man of the first +section raised his musket, and two officers and ten men fell before +them. Not a Frenchman had missed his mark. They could do no more. The +head of their column was violently thrown back upon the rear, both +flanks were overlapped at the same time by the English wings, three +terrible discharges at five yards' distance shattered the wavering +mass, and a long line of broken arms and bleeding carcases marked the +line of flight." + +Ney did not renew the attack, and with some desultory skirmishing the +battle ended at two o'clock, and an hour's truce enabled both parties +to carry off their wounded. + +Small parties of the French came in contact with the English +skirmishers during the afternoon, but the battle of Busaco was over. + +"Don't call dat much of battle," Sam said discontentedly. "Just little +fierce fight, berry out of bref, and den, just as second wind came, +all ober." + +The battle of Busaco was indeed one of secondary importance. The +losses were not great on either side, although that of the French was +fully threefold greater than that of the British, as the former were +exposed during their attack to the grape and shell of the British +guns, while the French guns afforded no assistance to their infantry. +The French loss, in killed and wounded and prisoners, did not exceed +4000, of which only 800 were killed. Nor was any strategical advantage +gained by the battle, for the French, upon the following day, found +a road across the hills to the British left from Martagoa through +Bonzalva. + +Throughout the day they made feints of renewing the attack upon the +English position, and it was not until late in the afternoon that long +columns of men were seen crossing the hill to the left; and Wellington +discovered that Busaco had been won in vain, for that his flank was +turned, and there was nothing for it but to fall back upon Torres +Vedras. Before night the whole British army was in retreat. + +"What a horrible scene of confusion," Tom remarked, as they marched +into the town of Coimbra next day. + +"Confusion!" Captain Manley said; "it is enough to drive a +commander-in-chief out of his mind. Here Wellington has for weeks +been endeavoring to get the Portuguese Government to compel all the +population to retire upon Lisbon, carrying all they can, destroying +the mills, and burning all the corn they could not carry off. The +Government did issue the order, but it has taken no steps whatever to +carry it out, although they knew all along that we could never repel +the invasion in the open. As it is, the greater portion of these poor +wretches will lose all they possess, which they might have carried +off quietly enough during the last two months. Many of them will lose +their lives, and they will block the roads so that we shall have the +French down on us to a certainty." + +Nothing could be more sad than the scene. The streets of Coimbra were +crowded with fugitives from the country round, and these, as well as +the inhabitants, were all preparing to push onwards towards Lisbon. +Bullock carts and carriages, mules, donkeys, and horses were crowded +together, all laden with the aged, the children, the sick, and such +property as was most portable and valuable. Happily Massena had +a circuitous detour to make; the road in the mountain defile was +scarcely passable, and throughout the march he displayed but little +energy; consequently it was not until the morning of the first of +October that his cavalry engaged those of the light division which was +covering the retreat. The division fell back through the town, and the +inhabitants, who had lingered to the last in some vague hope that the +French would not come, now rushed out again. The bridge behind the +town was choked, and the troops had to halt for some time. In the rear +the pistol shots of the cavalry told of the approach of the French, +and the din made by the panic-stricken fugitives was increased by the +yells of the prisoners shut up and forgotten in the prison hard by. +Their cries and supplications were too painful to be resisted, and the +British forced the prison doors and let them free. Once across the +bridge, the troops found the defile of Condeixa so choked up that it +was impossible to effect a passage, and, had the French pressed them +the division must have been destroyed. + +The French infantry, however, had not arrived, and by night the road +was cleared, and the troops passed on. + +There was no pursuit, for Massena allowed his troops to halt and +plunder Coimbra, and the British by easy marches, fell back to +Torres Vedras; but though unpursued, the disorder and relaxation of +discipline which always marks a retreat, showed itself, and Wellington +was obliged to hang several plunderers, and to resort to other severe +measures to restore to discipline that army which, only a week before, +had repulsed the best troops of France. Towards the end of the march +the French pressed them again, and Craufurd, with his light division, +had a narrow escape of being cut off. + +Great was the satisfaction of the British troops when they took up the +position so carefully prepared for them; equally great the surprise of +Massena and the French army when they beheld the almost impregnable +line of redoubts and fortresses of whose very existence they had only +heard a confused rumor two or three days before. And yet formidable +as was the chain of forts occupied by the British, this was weak in +comparison to the second line, some five or six miles in the rear, +to which Wellington would have fallen back if driven from his first +position. This second position was indeed that which he had originally +intended to have taken up, the redoubts on the exterior range of hills +being intended as outposts; but, while Massena delayed his advance, +the outside line of fortifications had so grown and increased in +strength, that Wellington resolved to hold them in the first place. + +There were, therefore, as will be seen by the plan, three lines of +defense. The first from Alhandra on the Tagus to Zizandre on the +sea-coast. This, following the windings of the hills, was twenty-nine +miles long; the second and main line was from Quintella on the Tagus +to the mouth of the San Lorenza, twenty-four miles in length; the +third, intended to cover an embarkation, in case of necessity, +extended from Passo d'Arcos on the Tagus to the town of Junquera on +the coast. + +Massena spent some days in surveying the British position, and came to +the conclusion that it was too strong to be attacked. Had the order +of Wellington been carried out, and the whole country wasted of +provisions, the French army must have made a precipitate retreat to +avoid starvation, for they had no provisions or connection with Spain. +Wilson and Trant, with Portuguese levies, hung upon their rear, and +captured Coimbra, where Massena had left his sick and wounded, 5000 in +number, upon the very day after the main French army advanced from the +town. So vast were the supplies, however, left in the country that +Massena was able to take up his position, first immediately in front +of the British lines, and afterwards at Santarem, within a day's march +of them, and to maintain his army in food throughout the winter until +the beginning of March. + +"Have you seen the _Gazette_, Scudamore?" Carruthers asked, rushing +into the tent one morning about a week after the regiment had settled +down in its tents on the heights of Torres Vedras. + +"No; what's up?" Tom replied. + +"There you are; you have both got your steps. Thomas Scudamore, +ensign, Norfolk Rangers, to be lieutenant, for distinguished services +in the field. Peter Scudamore, ditto, ditto. I wondered the chief had +done nothing for you after your journey through Spain." + +"I am sure I did not expect anything," Tom answered, "and was quite +content when the colonel told us that Lord Wellington had said he was +pleased with the manner we had done our work. However, I am very glad; +but it is not pleasant going over five or six fellows' heads." + +"Fortune of war," Carruthers said laughing. "Besides, two of them are +at the depôt, Sankey is away on sick leave, and none of the three who +are senior to you here will ever set the Thames on fire. No, no, you +have fairly earned your step and no one can say a word against it." + +The news soon spread, and the boys were heartily congratulated by all +the officers of the regiment on their promotion, which placed them +next on the list to Carruthers, who had previously been the junior +lieutenant. Promotion in those days was rapid, and after a severe +engagement an ensign only joined upon the previous week might find +himself a lieutenant, from the number of death vacancies caused in +the ranks above him. The Norfolk Rangers had not suffered heavily at +Talavera, or the boys might have had their lieutenant's rank before +this, without performing any exceptional services. + +"I wish we could get two months' leave, Tom," Peter said that night. +"Of course it is impossible, but it would be jolly to drop in upon +Rhoda. By her letter she seems well and happy, and aunt is very kind +to her. It would be nice; and now we are lieutenants, aunt wouldn't +tell us to rub our shoes." + +"No," Tom laughed, "or be afraid of our pelting her pigeons and +Minnie." + +"No," Peter said. "Evidently she is coming round. Rhoda said that +since she has heard that we have got our commissions she has given +up prophesying once or twice a day that we shall come to a bad +end--probably hanging." + +"Yes, and Rhoda said in her letter yesterday that aunt was quite +touched with those lace mantillas we got at Madrid, and sent off the +day after we rejoined, and actually remarked that, although we could +no longer be looked upon as boys, and seemed really as hair-brained +and fond of getting into scrapes as ever, yet it was evident that we +were good, kindly lads, and meant well at heart." + +"I wish," Tom said, with a sudden burst of laughter, "that we could +dress in our old disguises, I as a student of theology you as a mild +young novice; what a lark we would have with her!" and the boys went +off into such shouts of laughter, that their aunt would have thought +them more scatter-brained than ever if she had heard them, while from +the tent of Captain Manley on one side, and of Carruthers and another +young officer on the other, came indignant expostulations, and +entreaties that they would keep quiet, and let other people go to +sleep. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +ALBUERA. + + +Very heavily did five months in the lines of Torres Vedras pass to the +Norfolk Rangers. When, in the beginning of November, Massena fell back +to Sautarem, the greater portion of the army followed him in readiness +for attack should any openings be found. Massena, however, entrenched +himself in a very strong position, and Wellington could no more attack +him than he could attack the lines of Torres Vedras; so that both +armies faced each other in inactivity until the beginning of March, +when Massena broke up his camp and began to retreat. + +The Norfolk Rangers had been one of the regiments which had remained +in their quarters on Torres Vedras throughout the winter, and great +was the joy with which they received orders to strike their tents +and push on in pursuit. The retreat of Massena was masterly. Ney's +division covered the rear, and several sharp fights took place which +are known in history as the combats of Pombal, Redinha, Cazal Nova, +Foz d'Aronce, and Sabugal. + +In most of these the enemy were driven from their position by the +British outflanking them and threatening their line of retreat; but in +the last, by a mistake of General Erskine, a portion of his division +attacked the enemy in rear, and, although vastly outnumbered, drove +him off from the crest he held with desperate valor. Wellington +himself said, "This was one of the most glorious actions British +troops were ever engaged in." + +The next day the French crossed the Coa and Turones, and took up their +position under the guns of Ciudad Rodrigo, which they had left six +months before with the full assurance that they were going to conquer +Portugal, and drive the British into the sea. The invasion cost +Massena thirty thousand men, killed in battle, taken prisoners, or +dead from hardships, fatigues and fevers. + +The Scudamores were not present at the battle of Sabugal, for on the +afternoon after the combat of Foz d'Aronce an orderly rode up to the +regiment and handed a note to the colonel. He read it, and at once +summoned the Scudamores at his side. + +"An order from the commander-in-chief," he said, "for you to go to him +at once." + +Following the orderly, the boys soon arrived at the cottage at which +Lord Wellington had established his headquarters. + +"His lordship is with Lord Beresford," the aide-de-camp to whom they +gave their names said, "but the orders are that you are to be shown in +at once." + +The lads were ushered into a small room, where, seated at a table, +were the commanders-in-chief of the British and the Portuguese troops. + +"Young gentlemen," the former said, looking up with his keen piercing +eyes, "I have not seen you since your return from Spain. I am content +with what you did, and with the detailed report you sent me in. I +shall keep my eye upon you. Lord Beresford has asked me for two +officers as aides-de-camp, and he specially requires them to have a +perfect knowledge of Spanish. I have mentioned your names to him. It +is not often that I confidently recommend young officers, but from +what I know of you I have felt able to do so in the present case. You +will, with him, have opportunities of distinguishing yourselves +such as you could not have with your regiment. You accept the +appointments?" + +Tom and Peter would far rather have remained with their regiment, +but they felt that, after what Lord Wellington had said, they could +not refuse; they consequently expressed at once their willingness +to serve, and their thanks to the general for his kindness in +recommending them. + +"You can ride, I hope?" Lord Beresford, a powerfully-built, +pleasant-looking man, said. + +"Yes, sir, we can both ride, but at present--" + +"You have no horses, of course?" Lord Beresford put in. "I will +provide you with horses, and will assign servants to you from one of +the cavalry regiments with me. Will you join me at daybreak to-morrow? +we shall march at once." + +There was a general expression of regret when the Scudamores informed +their comrades that they were again ordered on detached duty. As +to Sam, when Tom told him that he could not accompany them, he was +uproarious in his lamentations, and threatened to desert from his +regiment in order to follow them. At this the boys laughed, and told +Sam that he would be arrested and sent back before he had gone six +hours. + +"I tink, Massa Tom, dat you might hab told de general dat you hab got +an fust-class serbent, and dat you bring him wid you." + +"But we shall be mounted now, Sam, and must have mounted men with us. +You can't ride, you know." + +"Yes, massa, dis child ride first-rate, he can." + +"Why, Sam, I heard you say not long ago you had never ridden on a +horse all your life." + +"Never hab, massa, dat's true 'nuff; but Sam sure he can ride. Berry +easy ting dat. Sit on saddle, one leg each side--not berry difficult +dat. Sam see tousand soldiers do dat ebery day; dey sit quite easy on +saddle; much more easy dat dan beat big drum." + +The boys laughed heartily at Sam's notion of riding without practice, +and assured him that it was not so easy as he imagined. + +"Look here, Sam," Peter said at last, "you practice riding a little, +and then next time we get away we will ask for you to go with us." And +with this Sam was obliged to be content. + +Half an hour later, when the boys were chatting with Captain Manley, +Carruthers, and two or three other officers, in the tent of the +first-named officer, they heard a commotion outside, with shouts of +laughter, in which they joined as soon as they went out and saw what +was going on. + +Sam, upon leaving the Scudamores, determined at once upon trying the +experiment of riding, in order that he might--for he had no doubt all +would be easy enough--ride triumphantly up to his masters' tent and +prove his ability to accompany them at once. He was not long before +he saw a muleteer coming along sitting carelessly on his mule, with +both legs on one side of the animal, side-saddle fashion, as is the +frequent custom of muleteers. It was evident, by the slowness of his +pace, that he was not pressed for time. + +Sam thought that this was a fine opportunity. + +"Let me have a ride?" he said to the muleteer in broken Portuguese. + +The man shook his head. Sam held out a quarter of a dollar. "There," +he said, "I'll give you that for a hour's ride." + +The muleteer hesitated, and then said, "The mule is very bad tempered +with strangers." + +"Oh, dat all nonsense," Sam thought, "he only pretend dat as excuse; +any one can see de creature as quiet as lamb; don't he let his master +sit on him sideways?" + +"All right," he said aloud, "I try him." + +The muleteer dismounted, and Sam prepared to take his place on the +saddle. By this time several of the Rangers had gathered round, and +these foreseeing, from the appearance of the mule and the look of sly +amusement in the face of the muleteer, that there was likely to be +some fun, at once proposed to assist, which they did by giving advice +to Sam of the most opposite nature. Sam was first going to mount on +the off side, but this irregularity was repressed, and one wag, taking +the stirrup of the near side in his hand, said, "Now, Sam, up you go, +never mind what these fellows say, you put your right foot in the +stirrup, and lift your left over the saddle." + +Sam acted according to these instructions, and found himself, to his +intense amazement and the delight of the bystanders, sitting with his +face to the mule's tail. + +"Hullo," he exclaimed in astonishment, "dis all wrong; you know noting +about de business, you Bill Atkins." + +And Sam prepared to descend, when, at his first movement, the mule put +down his head and flung his heels high in the air. Sam instinctively +threw himself forward, but not recovering his upright position before +the mule again flung up her hind quarters, he received a violent +blow on the nose. "Golly!" exclaimed the black in a tone of extreme +anguish, as, with water streaming from his eyes, he instinctively +clutched the first thing which came to hand, the root of the mule's +tail, and held on like grim death. The astonished mule lashed out +wildly and furiously, but Sam, with his body laid close on her back, +his hands grasping her tail, and his legs and feet pressing tight to +her flanks, held on with the clutch of despair. + +"Seize de debil!--seize him!--he gone mad!"--he shouted frantically, +but the soldiers were in such fits of laughter that they could do +nothing. + +Then the mule, finding that he could not get rid of this singular +burden by kicking, started suddenly off at full gallop. + +"Stop him--stop him," yelled Sam. "Gracious me, dis am drefful." + +This was the sight which met the eyes of the Scudamores and their +brother officers as they issued from their tents. The soldiers were +all out of their tents now, and the air rang with laughter mingled +with shouts of "Go it, moke!" "Hold on, Sam!" + +"Stop that mule," Captain Manley shouted, "or the man will be killed." + +Several soldiers ran to catch at the bridle, but the mule swerved and +dashed away out of camp along the road. + +"Look, look," Tom said, "there are the staff, and Lord Wellington +among them. The mule's going to charge them." + +The road was somewhat narrow, with a wall of four feet high on either +side, and the general, who was riding at the head of the party, drew +his rein when he saw the mule coming along at a furious gallop. The +staff did the same, and a general shout was raised to check or divert +her wild career. The obstinate brute, however, maddened by the shouts +which had greeted her from all sides, and the strange manner in which +she was being ridden, never swerved from her course. When she was +within five yards of the party, the general turned his horse, touched +him with his spur, and leaped him lightly over the wall; one or two +others followed his example, but the others had not time to do so +before the mule was among them. Two horses and riders were thrown +down, one on either side, with the impetus of the shock, and then, +kicking, striking and charging, the animal made its way past the +others and dashed on in despite of the attempts to stop her, and +the cries of "Shoot the brute," "Ride him down," and the angry +ejaculations of those injured in its passage. Thirty yards behind the +group of officers were the escort, and these prepared to catch the +mule, when turning to the left she leaped the wall, eliciting a scream +of terror from Sam, who was nearly shaken from his hold by the sudden +jerk. + +The anger of the officers was changed into a burst of amusement at +seeing Sam's dark face and staring eyes over the mule's crupper, and +even Lord Wellington smiled grimly. An order was hastily given, and +four troopers detached themselves from the escort and started off in +pursuit. The mule was, however, a fast one, and maddened by fright, +and it was some time before the foremost of the troopers was up to +her. As he came alongside, the mule suddenly swerved round and lashed +out viciously, one of her heels coming against the horse's ribs, and +the other against the leg of the rider, who, in spite of his thick +jack-boot, for some time thought that his leg was broken. + +He fell behind, and the others, rendered cautious by the lesson, came +up but slowly, and prepared to close upon the animal's head, one +from each side. Just as they were going to do so, however, they were +startled by a scattered fire of musketry, and by the sound of balls +whizzing about their ears, and discovered that in the ardor of the +chase they had passed over the space which separated the French from +the English lines, and that they were close to the former. At the same +moment they saw a party of cavalry stealing round to cut off their +retreat. Turning their horses, the dragoons rode off at full speed, +but the French cavalry, on fresher horses, would have caught them +before they reached the English lines had not a troop of British horse +dashed forward to meet them upon seeing their danger. As to the mule, +she continued her wild gallop into the French lines, where she was +soon surrounded and captured. + +The boys were greatly vexed at the loss of their faithful black, but +they had little time for grieving, for an hour after they rode off +with General Beresford's division. Three days' march brought them +to Campo Mayor, a town which had, two days before, surrendered to +the French, who, surprised by the sudden appearance of the British, +evacuated the place hastily and retreated, after suffering much from +a brilliant charge of the 13th Hussars, who, although unsupported, +charged right through the French cavalry, and Beresford then prepared +to lay siege to Badajos. Had he pushed forward at once, he would have +found the place unprepared for a siege, but, delaying a few days at +Elvas to give his tired troops repose, the French repaired the walls, +and were in a position to offer a respectable defense, when he made +his appearance under its walls. The army was very badly provided with +heavy guns, but the approaches were opened and the siege commenced in +regular form, when the news arrived that Soult was marching with a +powerful army to its relief. The guns were therefore withdrawn, the +siege raised, and Beresford marched to meet Soult at Albuera. + +On the 15th of May he took up his position on rising ground looking +down on Albuera, having the river in his front. Acting with him, and +nominally under his orders, was a Spanish force under Blake. This +was intended to occupy the right of the position, but with the usual +Spanish dilatoriness, instead of being upon the ground, as he had +promised, by noon, Blake did not arrive until past midnight; the +French accordingly crossed the river unmolested, and the British +general found his right turned. + +Beresford's position was now a very faulty one, as the woods +completely hid the movements of the enemy, and a high hill, which they +had at once seized, flanked the whole allied position and threatened +its line of retreat. + +When the morning of the 16th dawned the armies were numerically very +unequal. The British had 30,000 infantry, 2,000 cavalry, and 38 guns; +the French, 19,000 infantry, 4,000 cavalry, and 40 guns; but of these +the French were all veteran troops, while Beresford had but 6,000 +British troops, the remainder being Spanish and Portuguese, upon +whom no reliance whatever was to be placed. The British officers +present were all of opinion that their chances of success, under +the circumstances, were slight indeed. + +The battle commenced at nine in the morning by an attack by the French +general Godinot upon the bridge of Albuera. Their columns were, +however, so completely plowed by the guns of the Portuguese upon +the eminence behind it, that they made no progress, and Beresford +perceived at once that the main attack would be made on his right. He +despatched Tom Scudamore with orders to Blake to throw back his troops +at right angles to the main front. The pig-headed Spaniard refused to +obey, asserting that the main attack was in front. Colonel Hardinge +was sent to insist upon the order being carried out, but Blake still +refused, and Beresford himself rode furiously across and took the +command just as the French column debouched from the wood on the +right. + +Before the Spanish movement was completed the French were among them. +Their cavalry swept round to the right rear, and menaced the line of +retreat, the infantry charged the wavering Spanish battalions, and the +latter at once fell into confusion and began to fall back. William +Stewart now arrived with a brigade of the second division to endeavor +to retrieve the day; but as they were advancing into position, four +regiments of French cavalry, whose movements were hidden in the +driving rain until they were close at hand, fell upon them and rode +down two-thirds of the brigade, the 31st regiment alone having time +to form square and repulse the horsemen. + +Beresford himself, with his staff, was in the middle of the mélée, and +the lads found themselves engaged in hand-to-hand combats with the +French troopers. All was confusion. Peter was unhorsed by the shock +of a French hussar, but Tom shot the trooper before he could cut Peter +down. Free for a moment, he looked round, and saw a French lancer +charging, lance at rest, at Lord Beresford. "Look out, sir!" he +shouted, and the general, turning round, swept aside the lance thrust +with his arm; and as the lancer, carried on by the impetus of his +charge, dashed against him, he seized him by the throat and waist, +lifted him bodily from his saddle, and hurled him insensible to +the ground. Just at this moment General Lumley arrived with some +Portuguese cavalry, and the French lancers galloped off. + +The Spanish cavalry, who had orders to charge the French cavalry in +flank, galloped up until within a few yards of them, and then turned +and fled shamefully. + +Beresford, now furious at the cowardice of the Spanish infantry, +seized one of their ensigns by the shoulder, and dragged him, with his +colors, to the front by main force, but the infantry would not even +then advance. + +The driving rain saved the allied army at this critical moment, for +Soult was unable to see the terrible confusion which reigned in their +ranks, and kept his heavy columns in hand when an attack would have +carried with it certain victory. + +In the pause which ensued, the British regiments began to make their +way to the front. Colbourn, with the 31st Regiment, was already there; +Stewart brought up Haughton's brigade; and the 29th burst its way +through the flying Spaniards and joined the 31st, these movements +being made under a storm of shot and shell from the French artillery. +Colonel Hartman brought up the British artillery, and the Spanish +generals Zayas and Ballesteros succeeded in checking and bringing +forward again some of the Spanish infantry. + +The French advanced in great force, the artillery on both sides poured +in grape at short distance, and the carnage was terrible. Still the +little band of British held their ground. Stewart was twice wounded, +Haughton and Colonels Duckworth and Inglis slain. Of the 57th Regiment +twenty-two officers and four hundred men fell out of the five hundred +that had mounted the hill, and the other regiments had suffered nearly +as severely. Not a third were standing unhurt, and fresh columns of +the French were advancing. + +The battle looked desperate, and Beresford made preparations for a +retreat. At this moment, however, Colonel Hardinge brought up General +Cole with the fourth division, and Colonel Abercrombie with the third +brigade of Colbourn's second division. Beresford recalled his order +for retreat, and the terrible fight continued. The fourth division was +composed of two brigades, the one, a Portuguese under General Harvey, +was pushed down to the right to keep off the French cavalry, while the +Fusilier brigade, composed of the 7th and 23rd fusilier regiments, +under Sir William Myers, climbed the desperately contested hill, which +Abercombie ascended also, more on the left. + +It was time, for the whole of the French reserves were now coming into +action; six guns were already in the enemy's possession, the remnant +of Haughton's brigade could no longer sustain its ground, and the +heavy French columns were advancing exultantly to assured victory. + +Suddenly, through the smoke, Cole's fusilier brigade appeared on +the right of Haughton's brigade, just as Abercrombie came up on its +left. Startled by the sight, and by the heavy fire, the French column +paused, and, to quote Napier's glowing words, "hesitated, and then, +vomiting forth a storm of fire, hastily endeavored to enlarge their +front, while a fearful discharge of grape from all their artillery +whistled through the British ranks. Myers was killed, Cole and the +three colonels, Ellis, Blakeney and Hawkshawe, fell wounded; and the +fusilier battalions, struck by the iron tempest, reeled and staggered +like sinking ships; but suddenly and sternly recovering, they closed +with their terrible enemies, and then was seen with what a strength +and majesty the British soldier fights. In vain did Soult with voice +and gesture animate his Frenchmen; in vain did the hardiest veterans +break from the crowded columns and sacrifice their lives to gain time +for the mass to open out on such a fair field; in vain did the mass +itself bear up, and, fiercely striving, fire indiscriminately upon +friends and foes, while the horsemen hovering on its flank threatened +to charge the advancing line. Nothing could stop that astonishing +infantry; no sudden burst of undisciplined valor, no nervous +enthusiasm weakened the stability of their order; their flashing eyes +were bent on the dark columns in their front, their measured tread +shook the ground, their dreadful volleys swept away the head of every +formation, their deafening shouts overpowered the dissonant cries that +broke from all parts of the tumultuous crowd, as, slowly and with +horrid carnage, it was pushed by the incessant vigor of the attack to +the farthest edge of the hill. In vain did the French reserves mix +with the struggling multitude to sustain the fight; their efforts only +increased the irremediable confusion, and the mighty mass breaking off +like a loosened cliff, went headlong down the steep; the rain flowed +after in streams discolored with blood, and eighteen hundred unwounded +men, the remnant of six thousand unconquerable British soldiers, stood +triumphant on the fatal hill." + +While this dreadful fight was going on, Hamilton's and Collier's +Portuguese divisions, ten thousand strong, marched to support the +British, but they did not reach the summit of the hill until the +battle was over; they suffered, however, a good deal of loss from the +French artillery, which, to cover the retreat, opened furiously upon +them. + +The French were in no position to renew the attack, the allies quite +incapable of pursuit, and when night fell the two armies were in the +same position they had occupied twenty-four hours before. + +Never was British valor more conspicuously displayed than at the +battle of Albuera. Out of 6,000 infantry they lost 4,200 killed and +wounded, while the Spanish and Portuguese had but 2,600 killed and +wounded out of a total of 34,000; the French loss was over 8,000. + +This desperate fight had lasted but four hours, but to all engaged +it seemed an age. The din, the whirl, the storm of shot, the fierce +charges of the cavalry, the swaying backwards and forwards of the +fight, the disastrous appearance of the battle from the first, all +combined to make up a perfectly bewildering confusion. + +The Scudamores, after its commencement, had seen but little of each +other. Whenever one or other of them found their way to the general, +who was ever in the thickest of the fray, it was but to remain there +for a moment or two before being despatched with fresh messages. + +Tom's horse was shot under him early in the day, but he obtained a +remount from an orderly and continued his duty until, just as the day +was won, he received a musket ball in the shoulder. He half fell, half +dismounted, and, giddy and faint, lay down and remained there until +the cessation of the fire told him that the battle was over. Then he +staggered to his feet and sought a surgeon. He presently found one +hard at work under a tree, but there was so large a number of wounded +men lying or sitting round, that Tom saw that it would be hours before +he could be attended to. As he turned to go he saw an officer of the +staff ride by. + +"Ah, Scudamore! Are you hit too?--not very badly, I hope? The chief +was asking after you just now." + +"My shoulder is smashed, I think," Tom said, "and the doctor has his +hands full at present; but if you will tie my arm tight across my +chest with my sash, I shall be able to get on." + +The officer at once leapt from his horse, and proceeded to bind Tom's +arm in the position he requested. + +"Have you seen my brother," Tom asked. + +"No, I have not; he was close to Beresford when the fusiliers dashed +up the hill; his horse fell dead, but he was not hit, for I saw him +jump up all right. I did not see him afterwards. As he could not have +got a fresh mount then, I expect he joined the fusiliers and went up +the hill." + +"Is the loss heavy?" Tom asked. + +"Awful--awful," the officer said. "If it had lasted another quarter of +an hour, there would have been nobody left alive; as it is, there are +not 2,000 men at the outside on their feet." + +"What, altogether?" Tom exclaimed. + +"Altogether," the officer answered sadly. "We have lose two men out of +every three who went into it." + +"Thank you," Tom said. "Now where shall I find the general?" + +"Up on the hill. I shall see you there in a few minutes. I hope you +will find your brother all right." + +Very slowly did Tom make his way up the steep slope, sitting down to +rest many times, for he was faint from loss of blood and sick with the +pain of his wound, and it was a long half hour before he joined the +group of officers clustered round the commander-in-chief. + +He was heartily greeted; but in answer to his question as to whether +any one had seen his brother, no one could give a satisfactory reply. +One, however, was able to confirm what had been before told to him, +for he had seen Peter on foot advancing with the fusilier brigade. +Tom's heart felt very heavy as he turned away towards the front, where +the fusiliers were standing on the ground they had so hardly won. +The distance he had to traverse was but short, but the journey was a +ghastly one. The ground was literally heaped with dead. Wounded men +were seen sitting up trying to stanch their wounds, others lay feebly +groaning, while soldiers were hurrying to and fro from the water +carts, with pannikins of water to relieve their agonizing thirst. + +"Do you know, sergeant, whether they have collected the wounded +officers, and, if so, where they are?" + +"Yes, sir, most of them are there at the right flank of the regiment." + +Tom made his way towards the spot indicated, where a small group of +officers were standing, while a surgeon was examining a long line of +wounded laid side by side upon the ground. Tom hardly breathed as +he ran his eye along their faces, and his heart seemed to stop as +he recognized in the very one the surgeon was then examining the +dead-white face of Peter. + +He staggered forward and said in a gasping voice, "He is my +brother--is he dead?" + +The surgeon looked up. "Sit down," he said sharply, and Tom, unable to +resist the order, sank rather than sat down, his eyes still riveted on +Peter's face. + +"No," the surgeon said, answering the question, "he has only fainted +from loss of blood, but he is hit hard, the bullet has gone in just +above the hip, and until I know its course I can't say whether he has +a chance or not." + +"Here, sergeant, give me the probe," and with this he proceeded +cautiously to examine the course of the ball. As he did so his anxious +face brightened a little. + +"He was struck slantingly," he said, "the ball has gone round by the +back; turn him over, sergeant. Ah, I thought so; it has gone out on +the other side. Well, I think it has missed any vital part, and in +that case I can give you hope. There," he said after he had finished +dressing the wound and fastening a bandage tightly round the body; +"now pour some brandy-and-water down his throat, sergeant, and +sprinkle his face with water. Now, sir, I will look at your shoulder." + +But he spoke to insensible ears, for Tom, upon hearing the more +favorable report as to Peter's state, had fainted dead off. + +The surgeon glanced at him. "He'll come round all right," he said. +"I will go on in the mean time," and set to work at the next in the +ghastly line. + +It was some time before Tom recovered his consciousness; when he did +so, it was with a feeling of intense agony in the shoulder. + +"Lie quiet," the surgeon said, "I shan't be long about it." + +It seemed to Tom, nevertheless, as if an interminable time passed +before the surgeon spoke again. + +"You'll do," he said. "It is an awkward shot, for it has broken the +shoulder bone and carried a portion away, but with quiet and care you +will get the use of your arm again. You are lucky, for if it had gone +two inches to the left it would have smashed the arm at the socket, +and two inches the other way and it would have been all up with you. +Now lie quiet for awhile; you can do nothing for your brother at +present. It may be hours before he recovers consciousness." + +Tom was too faint and weak to argue, and a minute later he dropped off +to sleep, from which he did not wake until it was dusk. Sitting up, he +saw that he had been aroused by the approach of an officer, whom he +recognized as one of General Beresford's staff. + +"How are you, Scudamore?" he asked. "The general has just sent me to +inquire." + +"He is very kind," Tom said. "I think that I am all right, only I am +horribly thirsty." + +The officer unslung a flask from his shoulder. "This is weak +brandy-and-water. I have brought it over for you. I am sorry to hear +your brother is so bad, but the doctor gives strong hopes of him in +his report." + +Tom bent down over Peter. "He is breathing quietly," he said. "I hope +it is a sort of sleep he has fallen into. What are we doing?" + +"Nothing," the officer answered; "there is nothing to do; every +unbounded man is under arms in case the French attack us in the night. +I expect, however, they will wait till morning, and if they come on +then, I fear our chance is a slight one indeed. We have only 1,800 of +our infantry; the German regiments and the Portuguese will do their +best; but the Spanish are utterly useless. Soult has lost more men +than we have, but we are like a body which has lost its back-bone; and +if the French, who are all good soldiers, renew the battle, I fear it +is all up with us." + +"Have you got all our wounded in?" Tom asked. + +"No," the officer said bitterly. "Our unwounded men must stand to +arms, and Lord Beresford sent over to Blake just now to ask for the +assistance of a battalion of Spaniards to collect our wounded, and the +brute sent back to say that it was the custom in allied armies for +each army to attend to its own wounded." + +"The brute!" Tom repeated with disgust. "How the poor fellows must be +suffering!" + +"The men who are but slightly wounded have been taking water to all +they can find, and the doctors are at work now, and will be all night +going about dressing wounds. The worst of it is, if the fight begins +again to-morrow, all the wounded who cannot crawl away must remain +under fire. However, the French wounded are all over the hill too, and +perhaps the French will avoid a cannonade as much as possible, for +their sake. It is a bad look-out altogether; and between ourselves, +Beresford has written to Lord Wellington to say that he anticipates a +crushing defeat." + +"Is there any chance of reinforcements?" Tom asked. + +"We hope that the third brigade of the fourth division will be up +to-morrow by midday; they are ordered to come on by forced marches. +If Soult does not attack till they arrive, it will make all the +difference, for 1,500 fresh men will nearly double our strength. But I +must be going now. Good-bye." + +The surgeon presently came round again to see how the wounded officers +were getting on. Tom asked him whether there was anything he could do +for Peter; but the surgeon, after feeling his pulse, said: "No, not as +long as he breathes quietly like this; but if he moves pour a little +brandy-and-water down his throat. Now gentlemen, all who can must look +after the others, for there is not an available man, and I must be at +work all night on the field." + +There were many of the officers who were not hit too severely to move +about, and these collected some wood and made a fire, so as to enable +them to see and attend to their more severely wounded comrades. +Tom took his place close to Peter, where he could watch his least +movement, and once or twice during the night poured a little +brandy-and-water between his lips. The other officers took it by turns +to attend to their comrades, to keep up the fire, and to sleep. Those +whose turn it was to be awake sat round the fire smoking, and talking +as to the chances of the morrow, getting up occasionally to give drink +to such of the badly wounded as were awake. + +Tom, faint with his wound, found it, towards morning, impossible to +keep awake, and dozed off, to wake with a start and find that it was +broad daylight. Soon afterwards, to his intense satisfaction, Peter +opened his eyes. Tom bent over him. "Don't try to move, Peter; lie +quiet, old boy." + +"What's the matter?" Peter asked with a puzzled look. + +"You have been hit in the body, Peter, but the doctor means to get you +round in no time. Yes," he continued, seeing Peter's eyes fixed on his +bandaged shoulder, "I have had a tap too, but there's no great harm +done. There, drink some brandy-and-water, and go off to sleep again, +if you can." + +The morning passed very slowly, the troops being all under arms, +expecting the renewed attack of Soult, but it came not; and when early +in the afternoon, the third brigade of the fourth division marched +into camp, they were received with general cheering. A heavy load +seemed taken off every one's heart, and they felt now that they could +fight, if fight they must, with a hope of success. + +The new-comers, wearied as they were with their long forced marches, +at once took the outpost duties, and those relieved set about the duty +of collecting and bringing in all the wounded. + +Next morning the joyful news came that Soult was retiring, and all +felt with a thrill of triumph that their sacrifices and efforts had +not been in vain, and that the hard-fought battle of Albuera was +forever to take its place among the great victories of the British +army. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +INVALIDED HOME. + + +Two days after the battle of Albuera, Lord Wellington himself arrived, +and from the officers of his staff Tom heard the details of the battle +of Fuentes d'Onoro, which had been fought a few days previously, and +which had been nearly as hardly contested as had Albuera itself, both +sides claiming the victory. + +The next day, the bulk of Beresford's army returned to the +neighborhood of Badajos, which they again invested, while a long +convoy of wounded started for Lisbon. The Scudamores accompanied it +as far as Campo Major, where a large hospital had been prepared for +those too ill to bear the journey. Peter was still unconscious. Fever +had set in upon the day after the battle, and for three weeks he lay +between life and death. Tom's arm was mending very slowly, and he +would have had hard work indeed in nursing Peter had it not been for +the arrival of unexpected assistance. A large villa had been taken +close to the main hospital for the use of officers, and one of the +rooms was allotted to the Scudamores. + +Upon the evening of the second day after their arrival, Tom was +sitting by Peter's bedside, when, after a preliminary tap, the door +opened, and to Tom's perfect amazement Sambo entered. The negro +hurried forward, threw himself on his knees, seized Tom's hand and +kissed it passionately, and then looking at the thin and fever-flushed +face of Peter, he hid his face in his hands and sobbed unrestrainedly. + +"Hush, Sam, hush," Tom said soothingly. "My poor fellow, why, where +have you come from? I thought you were a prisoner with the French." + +"I knew how it would be, Massa Tom," the black said, paying no +attention to the questions. "First thing Sam said to himself when he +got among French fellows, 'Dere, dose young gentlemen dey get into +all sorts of danger widout Sam, sartin sure dey get hurt widout Sam +to look after dem.' Dat idea troubled Sam berry much, took away Sam's +sleep altogether." + +"Well it turned out so, as you see, Sam," Tom said with a smile, "but +tell me how did you get away? But first give me some lemonade out of +that jug, then you can tell me all about it." + +"Why, Massa Tom," Sam said, when he had complied with the request, +"you didn't think dat dis chile was going to stop prisoner with dose +French chaps; Sam not such a fool as dat, nohow. When dat cussed +mule--I tell you fair, Massa Tom, dis chile conclude dat riding not +such a berry easy ting after all--when dat cussed mule ran into French +camp, de soldiers dey catch him, and dey take Sam off, and den dey +jabber and laugh for all de world like great lots of monkeys. Well, +for some time Sam he didn't say nothing, all de wind shook out of his +body. Besides which he couldn't understand what dey say. Den all of +a sudden, to Sam's surprise, up came a colored soldier, and he speak +to Sam in de English tongue. 'Holla, broder, how you come here?" I +ask. 'I been cook on board English merchant ship,' he say. 'Ship she +taken by French privateer. When dey come to port dey say to me, "You +not Englishman, you hab choice, you go to prison, or you be French +soldier." Natural, I not want go prison, so I conclude be French +soldier. I daresay dey gib you choice too.' Well, massa, a wink as +good as a nod to blind hoss. So dey take me to tent, put me under +guard, and next day a French officer come dat speak English. He ask +me all sorts ob questions, and at last he ask me why I list English +soldier. So you see I had got a little lie all ready, and me tell him, +me one poor Melican negro man, cook on board Melican ship. Ship taken +by English man-ob-war. Put Sam in prison and give him choice to go as +soldier. "Den you not care about English,' de officer say, and Sam +draw hisself up and pat his chest and say, 'Me Melican citizen, me no +Britisher's slave, some day me go back States, go on board Melican +man-ob-war, me pay out dese Britishers for make Sam slave.' Den de +officer laugh, and say dat if I like I could fight dem now; and if I +prefer French uniform to French prison, me could have him. Ob course +I accep' offer, and harp an hour after me in French uniform. French +officer try to make joke ob Sam, and ask whether I like cavalry or +foot soldier. Sam say he had enuff of quadruples at present. Me remain +French soldier three weeks, den cum great battle, dey call him Fuentes +donory. Sam's regiment fight. Sam not like fire at red coats, so break +bullet off catridge, neber put him in gun. We charge right into middle +of village full of English soldiers, de bullets fly all about. Sam not +see de point ob getting kill by mistake, so he tumble down, pretend to +be dead. Presently French beaten back; when English soldier wid doctor +cum look at wounded, dey turn Sam ober, and dey say, 'Hullo, here dead +nigger.' 'Nigger yourself, John Atkins,' I say for sure enuff it's de +ole regiment--'you say dat once again me knock your head off;' me jump +up, and all de world call out, 'Hullo, why it's Sam.' Den me splain +matter, and all berry glad, cept John Atkins, and next morning me gib +him licking he member all his life, me pound him most to a squash. +Four days ago colonel send for Sam, say, 'Sam, berry bad job, bofe +Massas wounded bad, send you to nurse dem;' so dis chile come. Dat +all, Massa Tom. Here letter for you from colonel, now you read dis +letter, den you get in bed, you sleep all night, Sam watch Massa +Peter." + +Greatly relieved to have his faithful servant again, and to know that +Peter would be well cared for, instead of being left in charge of the +Spanish hospital orderly, whenever weakness and pain obliged him to +lie down, Tom abandoned his place by the bedside, and prepared for a +tranquil night's rest, first reading the colonel's letter. + +"We are all grieved, my dear Scudamore, at hearing that you are both +wounded, and that your brother is at present in a serious state. We +trust, however, that he will pull through. I hear that Beresford has +praised you both most highly in despatches, and that your names are +sent home for companies. I heartily congratulate you. We have had some +tough work at Fuentes d'Onoro, although nothing to what yours must +have been at Albuera, still it was hot enough in all conscience, and +we had over a hundred casualties in the regiment. Carruthers and +Manley were both slightly wounded. Jones, Anstruther, Palmer, and +Chambers were killed, and several of the others hit more or less hard. +Sam has leave to remain with you until you rejoin, which will not, I +fear, be for some little time. Every one sends kind messages. Yours +truly, J. Tritton." + +Nothing could exceed the care and devotion with which Sam nursed his +two masters, and Tom had the greatest difficulty in persuading him to +lie down and get a short sleep each day while he sat by Peter's bed. +At the end of three weeks Peter took a favorable turn. His fever +abated, and he awoke to consciousness. Another fortnight and he was +sufficiently convalescent to be moved, and accordingly they started to +travel by very easy stages to Lisbon, there to take ship for England, +as the doctor ordered Tom as well as his brother to go home for a +while to recruit. Tom was the less reluctant to do so, as it was +evident that with the force at his command Wellington would not be +able to undertake any great operation, and that the siege and capture +of Badajoz was the utmost likely to be accomplished in that season's +campaign. The mails in due course had brought out the _Gazette_, +and in it Tom and Peter Scudamore were promoted to be captains, +unattached. + +Colonel Tritton, upon being applied to, readily gave leave for Sam +to accompany his masters. It was a long journey to Lisbon, but the +jolting of the country cart was made bearable by a layer of hay, +two feet deep, upon which the mattresses were laid, Sam seeing that +at each night's halt the hay was taken out, well shaken, and then +returned to the cart, so as to preserve it light and elastic. A thick +canopy of boughs kept off the heat of the sun, and under it, within +reach of the invalids hung a gourd of fresh water, and a basket of +fruit. Several other cart-loads of wounded officers accompanied them, +and at night they would draw up by a grove of trees where water was +handy, those who could walk would get out, the others would be lifted +out on their mattresses, a great fire made, and round it the beds laid +in a circle, and then the evening would be spent in pleasant chat, +with many an anecdote and an occasional song, until the fire burnt +low, the talk died away, and each, covered in his blankets to keep off +the night dew, fell asleep. Pleasant as was the journey, however, it +was with a thrill of delight that they caught their first sight of +Lisbon, with its broad river, and the blue line of the sea beyond. A +few days later, and they embarked on board a transport, which seven +days afterwards, after a calm passage, arrived at Spithead. + +Peter was by this time gaining strength fast, but his back was so +stiff and sore that he was unable to move it, and was obliged to swing +himself along on crutches. The next day the coach took them to London, +and they started the morning after for Marlborough. This time they had +to go inside the coach, two gentlemen, who had previously secured the +seats, kindly giving them up in favor of the wounded young officers, +while Sam took his place on the roof, and amused his fellow-passengers +with wonderful accounts of his adventures at the war. At the inn +at which they took dinner, they alighted, and Tom recognized in the +driver the same coachman who had driven them upon the memorable +occasion of their being stopped by highwaymen three years before. "You +don't remember us, coachman, do you?" + +"No, gentlemen, I can't say as how,--but eh! no, why you're the werry +boys as shot the highwaymen. Well, I am glad to see you again, though +you do look white and bad, both of you. I heard as how there were +two wounded officers inside, and that black soldier has been telling +all sorts of tales of the wonderful things as his masters had done, +but not knowing as how it was you, I didn't much believe all he was +telling. Now I quite see as how it was true; and how are you both?" + +"Getting on all right," Tom said, returning the warm shake of the +coachman's hand, "and do you know, those pistols have saved our lives +more than once." + +"Have they now," the coachman said, in high admiration, "but there, we +most be moving, we are three minutes after time as it is; I shall see +you again next time we stop, gentlemen." + +During the next stage the coachman and guard recounted to the outside +passengers the affair of the stopping the coach, and Sam's black face +shone with delight at the tale. Then he had his say, and related the +story of his falling overboard and being rescued, and in consequence +the lads were quite embarrassed when they next halted, by the +attention of their fellow-travelers, who could scarcely understand how +it was possible that two mere boys should have performed such feats of +bravery. + +Arrived at Marlborough they looked round in vain for the one-horsed +vehicle which had before met them. "I expect that aunt has not got +our letter, Peter," Tom said. "It would probably go up to town in the +coach with us, and is likely enough in the letter-bag in the boot. +Well, we must have a post-chaise. Won't aunt and Rhoda be surprised; +but they must be expecting us, because they will have had our letter +from Lisbon." + +The horses were soon in, Sam took his seat in the rumble, and in a few +minutes they were bounding over the road at a very different pace to +that at which they had before traversed it. "There's the house among +the trees," Peter said at last, "with aunt's pigeons on the roof as +usual, and there's Minnie asleep on the window-sill, and there! yes, +there's Rhoda." + +As he spoke a girl, who was sitting reading under a tree, leapt to her +feet, on hearing a carriage stop, and then, catching sight of Peter +waving his hat, while Tom made frantic efforts to open the door, gave +a scream of delight, and rushed towards them, threw her arms round +Tom's neck as he jumped out, and then leapt into the chaise and hugged +and cried over Peter. He was soon helped out, and as they turned to go +towards the house they saw their aunt coming out to meet them. + +Tom ran forward and throwing his arms round her neck kissed her +heartily, and before she could recover from her surprise, Peter was +alongside. "Please, aunt, you must kiss me," he said, "for I want my +arms for my crutches." His aunt leaned forward and kissed him, and +then wiped the tears from her eyes. + +"I am glad to see you back, my dear nephews," she said. "We did not +understand each other very well before, but we shan't make any more +mistakes. This is your black servant, I suppose," she said, as Sam +came along, with a trunk in each hand. "Dear! dear! what a dreadfully +ugly man." + +"How do you do, Sam?" Rhoda said, when he came up. "We have heard so +much of you, and how kindly you nursed my brothers." + +"Sam quite well, tank you, little missy," Sam said, grinning all over +his face and showing his white teeth. + +Miss Scudamore shrank towards Tom as Sam passed on, "Dear me, what +sharp-looking teeth he has, Tom. They don't eat curious things, these +black men, do they?" + +"What sort of curious things, aunt?" + +"Well, my dear, I know that these outlandish people do eat strange +things, and I have heard the Chinese eat dogs and cats. Now, if he has +a fancy for cats, I daresay I could buy him some in the village, only +he will have to cook them himself, I could never ask Hannah to cook +cats; but please ask him not to touch Minnie." + +Peter had to stop in his walk and grasp his crutches tightly, not +to burst into a scream of laughter, while Tom answered with great +gravity, "My dear aunt, do not alarm yourself, I will answer for the +safety of Minnie as far as Sam is concerned." + +When they reached the house, Miss Scudamore said-- + +"I think you young people will enjoy yourselves more if you go and sit +under the shade of the elm there, you will have a deal to say to each +other, and had better be alone." They were all glad at the suggestion, +as they were longing to be alone together. + +Sam, by Miss Scudamore's directions, carried out a great easy chair, +of which Peter took possession. Rhoda sat on the grass at his feet, +and Tom threw himself down at full length. They were all too happy +to speak much for a time, and could only look fondly at each other. +"You have grown a great deal, Rhoda, but I do not think that you are +altered a bit otherwise." + +"You are neither of you altered so much as I expected," Rhoda said. "I +had made up my mind that you would be changed a great deal. It sounds +so grand--Captains, indeed! I expected to have curtsey to you and +treat you with great respect; instead of that you look regular boys, +both of you. Of course you are big, and Peter looks very tall; how +tall are you, Peter?" + +"Just over six feet," Peter said. + +"Yes," Rhoda said, "you are tall enough, and Tom is broad enough for +men, but somehow you look regular boys still." + +"This is very disrespectful Rhoda, to two Captains in His Majesty's +service." + +"It seems ridiculous, doesn't it," Rhoda said. + +"It does," Tom said heartily, and the three went off into a shout of +laughter. + +"It isn't really ridiculous you know," Rhoda said, when they had +recovered their gravity. "To think of all the dangers you have gone +through. Aunt was as proud as could be when she saw your names over +and over again in despatches, and I have been like a little peacock. +Your doings have been the talk of every one round here, and I am sure +that if they had known you had been coming, the village would have put +up a triumphal arch, and presented you with an address." + +"Thank goodness, they did not know it then," Tom said, "for it would +have been a deal worse to stand than the fire of a French battery. +Well, Rhoda, and now as to yourself; so you have really been always +very happy with aunt?" + +"Very happy," Rhoda said; "she is most kind and indulgent, and so that +I attend to her little fancies, I can do just as I like. I have had +lessons regularly from the rector's eldest daughter, who has been +educated for a governess; and in every respect, aunt is all that is +kind. Fancy her being afraid of Sam eating Minnie." + +After chatting for upwards of an hour, they went into the house, and +the rest of the day was spent in talking over all that had happened +since they left. Sam was in the kitchen where he made himself very +much at home, and although Hannah and the cook were at first rather +awed by his size, his black face and rolling eyes, they were soon +pacified by his good humor and readiness to make himself useful, and +were wonderfully interested by his long stories about what "Massas" +had done in the war. + +Miss Scudamore, who was a little uneasy as to how things would go on +in the kitchen, made some excuse for going in once or twice in the +course of the evening. She found things going on much better that she +had expected, indeed so much better, that after Rhoda had gone up to +bed, where Peter had two hours before betaken himself, she said to Tom +as he was lighting his candle, "One minute, nephew; I could not speak +before Rhoda, but I wanted to say something to you about your negro. +I have heard that all soldiers are very much given to make love, and +we know from Shakespeare, that Othello, who was black too, you will +remember, nephew, made love to Desdemona, which shows that color does +not make so much difference as one would think. Now I do hope your +man will not make love to Hannah, I don't think she would like it, +my dear, and yet you know she might; one never knows what women will +do; they are always making fools of themselves," she added angrily, +thinking at the moment how a young girl she had trained up as a cook +had, after being with her three years, left a few weeks before to +marry the village blacksmith, "and I should be sorry to lose Hannah. +She has been with us more than twenty years. If he must fall in love +with one, my dear, let it be the cook." + +Tom had a great command of his countenance, but he had great +difficulty in steadying his muscles. After a moment or two he said, +"I will give Sam a hint, aunt, if it becomes necessary, but I do not +think you need fear. I do not fancy Sam is matrimonially inclined at +present, and he wouldn't leave us even to marry Desdemona herself. +Good night, aunt." + +So saying, Tom went upstairs, where he repeated to Peter, who was +still awake, his conversation with his aunt, and the two went into +shouts of laughter over the idea of Sam making love to the prim +Hannah. + +The next six months passed over quietly and happily. The boys +were made a great deal of by the whole county, and Miss Scudamore +was greatly gratified at the name and credit they had gained for +themselves. She no longer worried about them, but as Rhoda declared, +quite spoiled them, and as Sam made no attempt to win the love of +the faithful Hannah, there was no cloud to mar the pleasure of the +holiday. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +CIUDAD RODRIGO AND BADAJOS. + + +It was in the beginning of December, 1811, that the Scudamores again +sailed up the Tagus to Lisbon, after an absence of just six months. +When they had passed the medical board, they were transferred from the +unattached list to the 52d Regiment, which was, fortunately for them, +also in Spain. No events of great importance had taken place during +their absence. Wellington, after the battles of Fuentes d'Onoro and +Albuera, had been compelled to fall back again to the frontier in the +face of greatly superior forces, and had maintained his old position +on the Coa till the approach of winter compelled the French to retire +into the interior, where they had their magazines and depôts. + +The Scudamores found that the 52d were encamped on the Agueda, +and they at once prepared to go up country to join them. Their +chargers--presents from their aunt on leaving--were fresh and +vigorous, and they purchased a strong country horse for Sambo, who, +thanks to some practice which he had had in England, was now able to +cut a respectable figure on horseback. A few hours were sufficient to +make their preparations, and at noon on the day after landing, they +mounted, and, followed by Sam, accompanied by a muleteer and two mules +carrying their baggage, they started from the hotel at which they had +put up. + +As they rode down the main street they saw several mounted +officers approaching, and at once recognized in the leader the +commander-in-chief, who had just arrived from the front to pay one +of his flying visits, to endeavor to allay the jealousies in the +Portuguese Council, and to insist upon the food which the British +Government was actually paying for, being supplied to the starving +Portuguese soldiers. Drawing their horses aside, they saluted Lord +Wellington as he rode past. He glanced at them keenly, as was his +custom, and evidently recognized them as he returned the salute. + +When he had passed, they turned their horses and continued their way. +They had not gone fifty yards, however, when an officer came up at +a gallop. Lord Wellington wished them to call at his quarters in an +hour's time. + +There are few things more annoying than, after having got through all +the trouble of packing and getting fairly on the road, to be stopped; +but there was no help for it, and the boys rode back to their hotel +again, where, putting up their horses, they told Sam not to let the +muleteer leave, for they should probably be on the road again in an +hour. + +At the appointed time they called at the head-quarters, and giving +their cards to two officers on duty, took their seats in the anteroom. +It now became evident to them that their chance of an early interview +was not great, and that they would in all probability be obliged to +pass another night in Madrid. Portuguese grandees passed in and out, +staff officers of rank entered and left, important business was being +transacted, and the chance of two Line captains having an interview +with the commander-in-chief appeared but slight. Two hours passed +wearily, and then an orderly sergeant came into the room and read out +from a slip of paper the names "Captain Thomas Scudamore; Captain +Peter Scudamore. This way, if you please," he added, as the boys rose +in answer to their names, and he led the way into a room where a +colonel on the staff was seated before a table covered with papers. + +"Gentlemen," he said, "I have news which I think will be pleasant to +you both. Lord Wellington has not forgotten the services you rendered +in carrying his communications to the guerilla chiefs. Your reports +were clear and concise, and your knowledge of Spanish especially +valuable. Lord Beresford, too, has reported most favorably of your +conduct while with him. There happen to be two vacancies on his staff, +and he has desired me to fill them up with your names." + +Although the Scudamores would in some respects rather have remained +with their regiment, yet they could not refuse an honor which was +generally coveted as being a post in which an active officer had +plenty of opportunities of distinguishing himself, and which was +certain to lead to speedy promotion. They accordingly expressed their +warm thanks for the honor which Lord Wellington had done them. + +"Are you well mounted?" Colonel Somerset asked. + +"We have one capital charger each," Tom said. + +"You will want another," Colonel Somerset remarked. "There are a lot +of remounts landed to-day. Here is an order to Captain Halket, the +officer in charge. Choose any two you like. The amount can be stopped +from your pay. How about servants; you are entitled to two each?" + +"We have one man of the Norfolk Rangers--a very faithful fellow, who +has returned with us from leave; if he could be transferred, he would +do for us both if we had a cavalry man each for our horses." + +The colonel at once wrote an order for Sam's transfer from his +regiment on detached service, and also one to the officer commanding a +cavalry regiment stationed in Madrid, to supply them with two troopers +as orderlies. + +"May I ask, sir, if we are likely to stay in Madrid long--as, if so, +we will look out for quarters?" Tom asked. + +"No; the general returns to-morrow, or next day at latest, to Almeida, +and of course you will accompany him. Oh, by-the-by, Lord Wellington +will be glad if you will dine with him to-day--sharp six. By-the-way, +you will want to get staff uniform. There is the address of a Spanish +tailor, who has fitted out most of the men who have been appointed +here. He works fast, and will get most of the things you want ready +by to-morrow night. Don't get more things than are absolutely +necessary--merely undress suits. Excuse my asking how are you off for +money? I will give you an order on the paymaster if you like." + +Tom replied that they had plenty of money, which indeed they had, +for their aunt had given them so handsome a present upon starting, +that they had tried to persuade her to be less generous, urging that +they really had no occasion for any money beyond their pay. She had +insisted, however, upon their accepting two checks, saying that one +never knew what was wanted, and it was always useful to have a sum to +fall back on in case of need. + +Two days later the Scudamores, in their new staff uniforms, were, +with some six or eight other officers, riding in the suite of Lord +Wellington on the road to the Coa. The lads thought they had never +had a more pleasant time, the weather was fine and the temperature +delightful, their companions, all older somewhat than themselves, were +yet all young men in high health and spirits. The pace was good, for +Lord Wellington was a hard rider, and time was always precious with +him. At the halting-places the senior officers of the staff kept +together, while the aides-de-camp made up a mess of their own, always +choosing a place as far away as possible from that of the chief, so +that they could laugh, joke, and even sing, without fear of disturbing +his lordship. + +Sam soon became a high favorite with the light-hearted young fellows, +and his services as forager for the mess were in high esteem. + +Three days of hard riding took them to Almeida, where the breaches +caused by the great explosion had been repaired, and the place put +into a defensible position. Tom and Peter had been afraid that +there would be at least four months of enforced inactivity before +the spring; but they soon found that the post of aide-de-camp to +Wellington was no sinecure. For the next month they almost lived in +the saddle. The greater portion of the English army was indeed lying +on the Agueda, but there were detached bodies of British and large +numbers of Portuguese troops at various points along the whole line +of the Portuguese frontier, and with the commanders of these Lord +Wellington was in constant communication. + +Towards the end of December some large convoys of heavy artillery +arrived at Almeida, but every one supposed that they were intended to +fortify this place, and none, even of those most in the confidence of +the commander-in-chief, had any idea that a winter campaign was about +to commence. The French were equally unsuspicious of the truth. Twice +as strong as the British, they dreamt not that the latter would take +the offensive, and the French marshals had scattered their troops at +considerable distances from the frontier in winter quarters. + +Upon the last day of the year the Scudamores both happened to have +returned to the front--Tom from Lisbon, and Peter from a long ride to +a distant Portuguese division. There was a merry party gathered round +a blazing fire in the yard of the house where they, with several other +aides-de-camp, were quartered. Some fifty officers of all ranks were +present, for a general invitation had been issued to all unattached +officers in honor of the occasion. Each brought in what liquor he +could get hold of, and any provisions which he had been able to +procure, and the evening was one of boisterous fun and jollity. In +the great kitchen blazed a fire, before which chickens and ducks +were roasting, turkeys and geese cut up in pieces for greater +rapidity of cooking, were grilling over the fire, and as they came +off the gridiron they were taken round by the soldier-servants to +their masters as they sat about on logs of wood, boxes, and other +substitutes for chairs. Most of the officers present had already +supped, and the late-comers were finishing their frugal meal, after +which the soldiers would take their turn. There was a brewing of punch +and an uncorking of many a bottle of generous wine; then the song and +laugh went round, and all prepared to usher in the new year joyously, +when a colonel of the staff, who had been dining with Lord Wellington, +entered. "Here's a seat, colonel," was shouted in a dozen places, but +he shook his head and held up his hand. + +"Gentlemen, I am sorry to disturb you, but orders must be obeyed. +Villiers, Hogan, Scudamores both, Esdaile, Cooper, and Johnson, here +are despatches which have to be taken off at once. Gentlemen, I +should recommend you all to look to your horses. All attached to the +transport had better go to their head-quarters for orders." + +"What is up, colonel?" was the general question. + +"The army moves forward at daybreak. We are going to take Ciudad." + +A cheer of surprise and delight burst from all. There was an emptying +of glasses, a pouring out of one more bumper to success, and in +five minutes the court was deserted save by some orderlies hastily +devouring the interrupted supper, and ere long the tramp of horses +could be heard, as the Scudamores and their comrades dashed off in +different directions with their despatches. + +The next morning a bridge was thrown over the Agueda at Marialva, +six miles below Ciudad, but the investment was delayed, owing to the +slowness and insufficiency of the transport. Ciudad Rodrigo was but +a third-class fortress, and could have been captured by the process +of a regular siege with comparatively slight loss to the besiegers. +Wellington knew, however, that he could not afford the time for a +regular siege. Long before the approaches could have been made, and +the breaches effected according to rule, the French marshals would +have been up with overwhelming forces. + +Beginning the investment on the 7th, Wellington determined that it +must be taken at all costs in twenty-four days, the last day of +the month being the very earliest date at which, according to his +calculations, any considerable body of French could come up to its +relief. + +Ciudad lies on rising ground on the bank of the Agueda. The +fortifications were fairly strong, and being protected by a very high +glacis, it was difficult to effect a breach in them. The glacis is the +smooth ground outside the ditch. In well-constructed works the walls +of the fortification rise but very little above the ground beyond, +from which they are separated by a broad and deep ditch. Thus the +ground beyond the ditch, that is, the glacis, covers the walls from +the shot of a besieger, and renders it extremely difficult to reach +them. In the case of Ciudad, however, there were outside the place +two elevated plateaux, called the great and small Teson: Guns placed +on these could look down upon Ciudad, and could therefore easily +breach the walls. These, then, were the spots from which Wellington +determined to make the attack. The French, however, were aware of the +importance of the position, and had erected on the higher Teson an +inclosed and palisadoed redoubt, mounting two guns and a howitzer. A +great difficulty attending the operation was that there were neither +fuel nor shelter to be obtained on the right bank of the river, and +the weather set in very cold, with frost and snow, at the beginning +of the siege. Hence the troops had to be encamped on the left bank, +and each division, as its turn came, to occupy the trenches for +twenty-four hours, took cooked provisions with it, and waded across +the Agueda. + +On the 8th, Pack's division of Portuguese and the light division waded +the river three miles above the fortress, and, making a circuit took +up a place near the great Teson. There they remained quiet all day. +The French seeing that the place was not yet entirely invested paid +but little heed to them. At nightfall, however, Colonel Colborne, +with two companies from each of the regiments of the light division, +attacked the redoubt of San Francisco with such a sudden rush that it +was carried with the loss of only twenty-four men, the defenders, few +and unprepared, being all taken prisoners. Scarcely, however, was the +place captured than every gun of Ciudad which could be brought to bear +upon it opened with fury. All night, under a hail of shot and shell, +the troops labored steadily, and by daybreak the first parallel, that +is to say, a trench protected by a bank of earth six hundred yards +in length was sunk three feet deep. The next day the first division, +relieved the light division. + +Tom and Peter, now that the army was stationary, had an easier time of +it, and obtained leave to cross the river to see the operations. The +troops had again to wade through the bitter cold water, and at any +other time would have grumbled rarely at the discomfort. When they +really engage in the work of war, however, the British soldier cares +for nothing, and holding up their rifles, pouches and haversacks, to +keep dry, the men crossed the river laughing and joking. There was but +little done all day, for the fire of the enemy was too fast and deadly +for men to work under it in daylight. At night the Scudamores left +their horses with those of the divisional officers, and accompanied +the troops into the trenches, to learn the work which had there to +be done. Directly it was dusk twelve hundred men fell to work to +construct their batteries. The night was dark, and it was strange to +the Scudamores to hear the thud of so many picks and shovels going, +to hear now and then a low spoken order, but to see nothing save when +the flash of the enemy's guns momentarily lit up the scene. Every half +minute or so the shot, shell, and grape came tearing through the air, +followed occasionally by a low cry or a deep moan. Exciting as it was +for a time, the boys having no duty, found it difficult long to keep +awake, and presently dozed off--at first to wake with a start whenever +a shell fell close, but presently to sleep soundly until dawn. By that +time the batteries, eighteen feet thick, were completed. + +On the 10th the fourth division, and on the 11th the third, carried +on the works, but were nightly disturbed, not only by the heavy fire +from the bastions, but from some guns which the French had mounted on +the convent of San Francisco in the suburb on the left. Little was +effected in the next two days, for the frost hardened the ground and +impeded the work. On the night of the 13th the Santa Cruz convent was +carried and the trenches pushed forward, and on the next afternoon the +breaching batteries opened fire with twenty-five guns upon the points +of the wall at which it had been determined to make the breaches, +while two cannons kept down the fire of the French guns at the convent +of San Francisco. The French replied with more than fifty pieces, +and all night the tremendous fire was kept up on both sides without +intermission. Just at daybreak the sound of musketry mingled with the +roar of cannon, as the 40th Regiment attacked and carried the convent +of San Francisco. Through the 16th, 17th, and 18th the artillery +duel continued, some times one side, sometimes the other obtaining +the advantage; but during each night the trenches of the besiegers +were pushed forward, and each day saw the breaches in the ramparts +grow larger and larger. On the 19th the breaches were reported as +practicable--that is, that it would be possible for men to scramble up +the fallen rubbish to the top, and orders were therefore given for the +assault for that night. + +The attack was to be made at four points simultaneously; the 5th, +94th, and 77th were to attack from the convent of Santa Cruz, to make +for the ditch, enter it, and work their way along to the great breach; +Mackinnon's brigade of the third division was to attack the great +breach from the front; the light division posted behind the convent +of San Francisco were to attack from the left, and make their way to +the small breach; while a false attack, to be converted into a real +one if the resistance was slight, was to be made by Pack's Portuguese +at the St. Jago gate at the opposite side of the town. As night fell +the troops moved into their position, and Lord Wellington went to +the convent of San Francisco, from whose roof he could survey the +operations. The Scudamores, with the rest of the staff, took up +their places behind him. Suddenly there was a shout on the far right, +followed by a sound of confused cheering and firing, while flashes of +flame leapt out along the walls, and the guns of the place opened fire +with a crash. Now the 5th, 94th, and 77th rushed with great swiftness +along the ditch, when, at the foot of the great breach, they were +met by the third division. Together they poured up the breach, and +the roar of musketry was tremendous. Once at the top of the breach, +however, they made no progress. From a trench which had been cut +beyond it, a ring of fire broke out, while muskets flashed from every +window in the houses near. It was evident that some serious obstacle +had been encountered, and that the main attack was arrested. + +"This is terrible," Peter said, as almost breathless they watched the +storm of fire on and around the breach. "This is a thousand times +worse than a battle. It is awful to think how the shot must be telling +on that dense mass. Can nothing be done?" + +"Hurrah! There go the light division at the small breach," Tom +exclaimed, as the French fire broke out along the ramparts in that +quarter. A violent cheer came up even above the din from the great +breach, but no answering fire lights the scene, for Major Napier, +who commanded, had forbidden his men to load, telling them to trust +entirely to the bayonet. There was no delay here; the firing of the +French ceased almost immediately, as with a fierce rush the men of the +light division bounded up the ruins and won the top of the breach. For +a moment or two there was a pause, for the French opened so fierce a +fire from either side, that the troops wavered. The officers sprang +to the front, the soldiers followed with the bayonet, and the French, +unable to stand the fierce onslaught, broke and fled into the town. +Then the men of the light division, rushing along the walls, took +the French who were defending the great breach in rear, and as these +gave way, the attacking party swept across the obstacles which, had +hitherto kept them, and the town was won. Pack's Portuguese had +effected an entrance at the St. Jago gate, which they found almost +deserted, for the garrison was weak, and every available man had been +taken for the defence of the breaches. + +Thus was Ciudad Rodrigo taken after twelve days' siege, with a loss +of twelve hundred men and ninety officers, of which six hundred and +fifty men and sixty officers fell in that short, bloody fight at the +breaches. Among the killed was General Craufurd, who had commanded at +the fight on the Coa. + +Upon entering the town three days afterwards, at the termination of +the disgraceful scene of riot and pillage with which the British +soldier, there as at other places, tarnished the laurels won by his +bravery in battle, the boys went to the scene of the struggle, and +then understood the cause of the delay upon the part of the stormers. +From the top of the breach there was a perpendicular fall of sixteen +feet, and the bottom of this was planted with sharp spikes, and strewn +with the fragments of shells which the French had rolled down into +it. Had it not been for the light division coming up, and taking the +defenders--who occupied the loopholed and fortified houses which +commanded this breach--in rear, the attack here could never have +succeeded. + +The next few days were employed in repairing the breaches, and putting +the place again in a state of defence, as it was probable that Marmont +might come up and besiege it. The French marshal, however, when +hurrying to the relief of the town, heard the news of its fall, and +as the weather was very bad for campaigning, and provisions short, +he fall back again to his winter quarters, believing that Wellington +would, content with his success, make no fresh movement until the +spring. The English general, however, was far too able a strategist +not to profit by the supineness of his adversary, and, immediately +Ciudad Rodrigo was taken, he began to make preparations for the siege +of Badajos, a far stronger fortress than Ciudad, and defended by +strong detached forts. Three days after the fall of Rodrigo General +Hill came up with his division; to this the Norfolk Rangers now +belonged, and the Scudamores had therefore the delight of meeting all +their old friends again. They saw but little of them, however, for +they were constantly on the road to Lisbon with despatches, every +branch of the service being now strained to get the battering-train +destined for the attack on Badajos to the front, while orders were +sent to Silviera, Trant, Wilson, Lecca, and the other partisan +leaders, to hold all the fords and defiles along the frontier, so as +to prevent the French from making a counter-invasion of Portugal. + +On the 11th of March the army arrived at Elvas, and on the 15th a +pontoon bridge was thrown across the Guadiana. The following day the +British troops crossed the river, and invested Badajos, with fifteen +thousand men, while Hill and Graham, with thirty thousand more moved +forward, so as to act as a covering army, in case the French should +advance to raise the siege. Badajos was defended by five thousand men, +under General Phillipson, a most able and energetic commander, who had +in every way strengthened the defences, and put them in a position to +offer an obstinate resistance. + +Before attacking the fortress it was necessary to capture one of the +outlying forts, and that known as the Picurina was selected, because +the bastion of the Trinidad, which lay behind it, was the weakest +portion of the fortress. The trenches were commenced against this on +the night of the 17th, and, although the French made some vigorous +sorties, the works progressed so rapidly that all was ready for an +assault on the forts on the 25th, a delay of two days having been +occasioned by the French taking guns across the river, which swept +the trenches, and rendered work impossible, until a division was sent +round to drive in the French guns and invest the fortress on that +side. The Picurina was strong, and desperately defended, but it was +captured after a furious assault, which lasted one hour, and cost +nineteen officers and three hundred men. It was not, however, until +next evening that the fort could be occupied, for the guns of the town +poured such a hail of shot and shell into it, that a permanent footing +could not be obtained in it. Gradually, day by day, the trenches were +driven nearer to the doomed city, and the cannon of the batteries +worked day and night to establish a breach. Soult was known to be +approaching, but he wanted to gather up all his available forces, as +he believed the town capable of holding out for another month, at +least. Still he was approaching, and, although the three breaches +were scarcely yet practicable, and the fire of the town by no means +overpowered, Wellington determined upon an instant assault, and on the +night of the 6th of April the troops prepared for what turned out to +be the most terrible and bloody assault in the annals of the British +army. There were no less than six columns of attack, comprising in all +eighteen thousand men. Picton, on the right with the third division +was to cross the Rivillas and storm the castle. Wilson, with the +troops in the trenches, was to attack San Roque. In the center the +fourth and light division, under Colville and Barnard, were to assault +the breaches; and on the left Leith, with the fifth division, was to +make a false attack upon the fort of Pardaleras, and a real attack +upon the bastion of San Vincente by the river side. Across the river +the Portugese division, under Power, was to attack the works at the +head of the bridge. The night was dark and clouded, and all was as +still as death outside the town, when a lighted carcass, that is a +large iron canister filled with tar and combustibles, fell close to +the third division, and, exposing their ranks, forced them to commence +the attack before the hour appointed. Crossing the Rivillas by a +narrow bridge, under a tremendous fire, the third division assaulted +the castle, and, although their scaling-ladders were over and over +again hurled down, the stormers at last obtained a footing, and the +rest of the troops poured in and the castle was won. A similar and +more rapid success attended the assault on San Roque, which was +attacked so suddenly and violently, that it was taken with scarce +any resistance. In the mean time the assaults upon the breaches had +commenced, and it is best to give the account of this terrible scene +in the words of its eloquent and graphic historian, as the picture is +one of the most vivid that was ever drawn. + +"All this time the tumult at the breaches was such as if the very +earth had been rent asunder, and its central fires bursting upwards +uncontrolled. The two divisions had reached the glacis just as the +firing at the castle commenced, and the flash of a single musket, +discharged from the covered-way as a signal, showed them that the +French were ready; yet no stir was heard and darkness covered the +breaches. Some hay-packs were thrown, some ladders placed, and the +forlorn hopes and storming parties of the light division, five hundred +in all, descended into the ditch without opposition; but then a bright +flame shooting upwards displayed all the terrors of the scene. The +ramparts, crowded with dark figures and glittering arms were on one +side, on the other the red columns of the British, deep and broad, +were coming on like streams of burning lava. It was the touch of the +magician's wand, for a crash of thunder followed, and with incredible +violence the storming parties were dashed to pieces by the explosion +of hundreds of shells and powder-barrels. For an instant the light +division stood on the brink of the ditch, amazed at the terrific +sight; but then, with a shout that matched even the sound of the +explosion, the men flew down the ladders, or, disdaining their aid, +leaped, reckless of the depth, into the gulf below--and at the same +moment, amidst a blaze of musketry that dazzled the eyes, the fourth +division came running in, and descended with a like fury. There were +only five ladders for the two columns, which were close together; +and a deep cut, made in the bottom of the ditch as far as the +counter-guard of the Trinidad, was filled with water from the +inundation. Into that watery snare the head of the fourth division +fell, and it is said above a hundred of the fusiliers, the men of +Albuera, were there smothered. Those who followed checked not, but, +as if such a disaster had been expected, turned to the left, and thus +came upon the face of the unfinished ravelin, which, being rough and +broken, was mistaken for the breach, and instantly covered with men; +yet a wide and deep chasm was still between them and the ramparts, +from whence came a deadly fire, wasting their ranks. Thus baffled, +they also commenced a rapid discharge of musketry and disorder ensued; +for the men of the light division, whose conducting engineer had been +disabled early and whose flank was confined by an unfinished ditch +intended to cut off the bastion of Santa Maria, rushed towards the +breaches of the curtain and the Trinidad, which were, indeed, before +them, but which the fourth division had been destined to storm. Great +was the confusion, for the ravelin was quite crowded with men of both +divisions; and while some continued to fire, others jumped down and +ran towards the breach; many also passed between the ravelin and +the counterguard of the Trinidad, the two divisions got mixed, the +reserves, which should have remained at the quarries, also came +pouring in, until the ditch was quite filled, the rear still crowding +forward, and all cheering vehemently. The enemy's shouts also were +loud and terrible, and the bursting of shells, and of grenades, and +the roaring of guns from the flanks, answered by the iron howitzers +from the battery of the parallel, the heavy roll, and horrid explosion +of the powder-barrels, the whizzing flight of the blazing splinters, +the loud exhortations of the officers, and the continual clatter +of the muskets, made a maddening din. Now a multitude bounded up +the great breach, as if driven by a whirlwind, but across the top +glittered a range of sword-blades, sharp-pointed, keen-edged on both +sides, and firmly fixed in ponderous beams chained together, and set +deep in the ruins; and for ten feet in front the ascent was covered +with loose planks, studded with sharp iron points, on which, feet +being set, the planks moved, and the unhappy soldiers, falling forward +on the spikes, rolled down upon the ranks behind. Then the Frenchmen, +shouting at the success of their stratagem, and, leaping forward, +plied their shot with terrible rapidity, for every man had several +muskets, and each musket, in addition to its ordinary charge, +contained a small cylinder of wood, stuck full of wooden slugs, +which scattered like hail when they were discharged. Once and again +the assailants rushed up the breaches, but always the sword-blades, +immovable and impassable, stopped their charge, and the hissing shells +and thundering powder-barrels exploded unceasingly. Hundreds of men +had fallen, hundreds more were dropping, still, the heroic officers +called aloud for new trials, and sometimes followed by many, sometimes +by a few, ascended the ruins; and so furious were the men themselves, +that, in one of these charges, the rear strove to push the foremost on +to the sword-blades, willing even to make a bridge of their writhing +bodies, but the others frustrated the attempt by dropping down; and +men fell so fast from the shot, it was hard to know who went down +voluntarily, who were stricken and many stooped unhurt that never rose +again. Vain also would it have been to break through the sword-blades, +for the trench and parapet behind the breach were finished, and the +assailants, crowded into even a narrower space than the ditch was, +would still have been separated from their enemies, and the slaughter +would have continued. At the beginning of this dreadful conflict +Andrew Barnard had, with prodigious efforts, separated his division +from the other, and preserved some degree of military array; but now +the tumult was such, no command would be heard distinctly except by +those close at hand, and the mutilated carcasses heaped on each other, +and the wounded struggling to avoid being trampled upon, broke the +formations; order was impossible! Officers of all ranks, followed more +or less numerously by the men, were seen to start out as if struck +by sudden madness, and rash into the breach, which, yawning and +glittering with steel, seemed like the mouth of a huge dragon belching +forth smoke and flame. In one of these attempts, Colonel Macleod, of +the 43rd, a young man whose feeble body would have been quite unfit +for war if it had not been sustained by an unconquerable spirit, was +killed; wherever his voice was heard his soldiers had gathered, and +with such a strong resolution did he lead them up the fatal ruins +that, when one behind him, in falling, plunged a bayonet into his +back, he complained, not; but, continuing his course, was shot dead +within a yard of the sword-blades. Yet there was no want of gallant +leaders, or desperate followers, until two hours passed in these +vain efforts had convinced the troops the breach of the Trinidad was +impregnable; and, as the opening in the curtain, although less strong, +was retired, and the approach to it impeded by deep holes and cuts +made in the ditch, the soldiers did not much notice it after the +partial failure of one attack which had been made early. Gathering in +dark groups, and leaning on their muskets, they looked up with sullen +desperation at the Trinidad, while the enemy, stepping out on the +ramparts, and aiming their shots by the light of the fire-balls which +they threw over, asked, as their victims fell, 'Why they did not come +into Badajos?' In this dreadful situation, while the dead were lying +in heaps, and others continually falling, the wounded crawling about +to get some shelter from the merciless shower above, and withal a +sickening stench from the burnt flesh of the slain, Captain Nicholas, +of the engineers, was observed by Lieutenant Shaw, of the 43rd, making +incredible efforts to force his way with a few men into the Santa +Maria Bastion. Shaw immediately collected fifty soldiers, of all +regiments, and joined him, and although there was a deep cut along +the foot of that breach also, it was instantly passed, and these two +young officers led their gallant band, with a rush, up the ruins; but +when they had gained two-thirds of the ascent, a concentrated fire +of musketry and grape dashed nearly the whole dead to the earth. +Nicholas was mortally wounded, and the intrepid Shaw stood alone! With +inexpressible coolness he looked at his watch, and saying it was too +late to carry the reaches, rejoined the masses at the other attack. +After this no further effort was made at any point, and the troops +remained passive but unflinching beneath the enemy's shot, which +streamed without intermission; for, of the riflemen on the glacis many +leaped early into the ditch and joined in the assault, and the rest, +raked by a cross-fire of grape from the distant bastions, baffled in +their aim by the smoke and flames from the explosions, and too few in +number, entirely failed to quell the French musketry. About midnight, +when two thousand brave men had fallen, Wellington, who was on a +height close to the quarries, ordered the remainder to retire and +re-form for a second assault; he had heard the castle was taken, +but thinking the enemy would still resist in the town, was resolved +to assail the breaches again. This retreat from the ditch was not +effected without further carnage and confusion. The French fire never +slackened. A cry arose that the enemy was making a sally from the +distant flanks, and there was a rush towards the ladders. Then the +groans and lamentations of the wounded, who could not move and +expected to be slain, increased, and many officers who had not heard +of the order, endeavored to stop the soldiers from going back; some +would even have removed the ladders but were unable to break the +crowd." + +While this terrible scene was passing, the victory had been decided +elsewhere. The capture of the castle by Picton would, in itself, have +caused the fall of the town upon the following day, but Leith, with +the fifth division, after hard fighting, scaled the St. Vincente +bastion, and came up through the town and took the defenders of the +breaches in the rear. Then the French gave way, the British poured in, +and the dreadful scenes which had marked the fall of Ciudad Rodrigo +were repeated, and even surpassed. Up to the present day the name of +an Englishman is coupled with a curse in the town of Badajos. At this +siege, as at the last, the Scudamores acted the part of lookers on, +and although they bitterly regretted it, it was well for them that it +was so. The capture of Badajos cost the allied army five thousand men, +of whom three thousand five hundred fell on the night of the assault. +Each of the divisions which attacked the breaches lost over twelve +hundred men, and the 52nd Regiment, who formed part of the light +division, lost their full share. Among the ranks of the officers the +slaughter was particularly great, and scarce one escaped without +a wound. The Scudamores would fain have volunteered to join their +regiment in the assault, but it was well known that Lord Wellington +would not allow staff officers to go outside their own work. Therefore +they had looked on with beating hearts and pale faces, and with +tears in their eyes, at that terrible fight at the Triudad, and had +determined that when morning came they would resign their staff +appointments and ask leave to join their regiment. But when morning +came, and the list of the killed and wounded was sent in, and they +went down with a party to the breach to collect the wounded, they +could not but feel that they had in all probability escaped death, or +what a soldier fears more, mutilation. "After all, Tom," Peter said, +"we have done some active service, and our promotion shows that we +are not cowards; there can be no reason why we should not do our duty +as the chief has marked it out for us, especially when it is quite +as likely to lead to rapid promotion as is such a murderous business +as this." After this no more was said about resigning the staff +appointment, which gave them plenty of hard work, and constant change +of scene, whereas had they remained with the regiment they would often +have been stationed for months in one place without a move. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +SALAMANCA. + + +The great triumphs of Ciudad Rodrigo and Badajos did not lead to the +rapid successes which Wellington had hoped. The French generals, +on hearing of the loss of the latter fortress, again fell back, +and Wellington was so much hampered by shortness of money, by the +inefficiency, obstinacy, and intrigues of the Portuguese Government, +and by want of transport, that it was nearly three months before he +could get everything in readiness for an advance into Spain. At last +all was prepared, and on the 13th of June the army once more crossed +the Agueda and marched towards the Tamar in four columns. On the 17th +it was within six miles of Salamanca, and Marshal Marmont, unable for +the moment to stem the tide of invasion, evacuated the city, which +that evening blazed with illuminations, the people being half wild +with joy at their approaching deliverance. The French, however, had +not entirely departed, for eight hundred men still held some very +strong forts overlooking and guarding the city. + +These forts held out desperately; the British battering train +was weak, and upon the 23d Marmont, having received considerable +reinforcements, advanced to raise the siege. Wellington, however, +refused to be tempted to leave his trenches to deliver a general +battle, but faced the enemy with a portion of his army while he +continued the siege. + +Marmont, upon his part, believing that the forts could hold out for +fifteen days, put off the attack, as he knew that large reinforcements +were coming up. His calculations were frustrated by one of the forts +taking fire on the 27th, when an assault was delivered, and the whole +of the forts surrendered; Marmont at once fell back across the Douro, +there to await the arrival of his reinforcements. + +Wellington, on his part, followed slowly, and his army took up a +position between Canizal and Castrejon, thereby covering the roads +from Toro and Tordesillas, the only points at which the French could +cross the river. The reports of the spies all agreed that the former +was the place at which the crossing would be made. + +On the 16th of July an officer rode into Canizal, at headlong pace, +with the news that a reconnoitering party had crossed the Douro that +morning near Tordesillas, and had found that place deserted, except by +a garrison; and an hour later the news came in that three divisions of +the enemy were already across the river at Toro. Five minutes later +the Scudamores were on horseback, carrying orders that the whole of +the army, with the exception of the fourth and light divisions, which +were on the Trabancos, under General Cotton, were to concentrate at +Canizal that night. By the morning the movement was accomplished. + +The day wore on in somewhat anxious expectation, and towards afternoon +Wellington, accompanied by Lord Beresford, and escorted by Alten's, +Bock's and Le Marchant's brigades of cavalry, started to make a +reconnaissance of the enemy's movements. Caution was needed for the +advance, as it was quite uncertain whether the French were pushing +on through the open country towards Canizal, or whether they were +following the direct road from Toro to Salamanca. Evening closed in, +but no signs of the French army were seen, and the party halted about +six miles from Toro, and small parties of cavalry were despatched +right and left to scour the country, and find out where the enemy had +gone. + +"It's very strange where the French can have got to," was the remark +made, for the fiftieth time among the staff. + +The detached parties returned, bringing no news whatever, and Lord +Wellington again advanced slowly and cautiously towards Toro. Small +parties were pushed on ahead, and presently an officer rode back +with the news that he had been as far as the river, and that not a +Frenchman was to be seen. It was too late to do any more, and they +remained in uncertainty whether the enemy had recrossed the river +after making a demonstration, or whether they had marched to their +right, so as to make a circuit, and throw themselves between Ciudad +Rodrigo and Salamanca, upon the line of communication of the British +army. + +Lord Wellington, with his staff, took possession of a deserted +farm-house, the cavalry picketed their horses round it, and the +Scudamores, who had been more than twenty-four hours in the saddle, +wrapped themselves in their cloaks, and stretching themselves on the +floor, were soon asleep. Just at midnight the sound of a horse's +footfall approaching at a gallop was heard, and an officer, who had +ridden, without drawing rein, from Canizal, dashed up to the farm. + +Five minutes later the whole party were in the saddle again. The news +was important, indeed. Marmont had drawn his whole army back across +the Toro on the night of the 16th, had marched to Tordesillas, crossed +there, and in the afternoon, after a march of fifty miles, had fallen +upon Cotton's outposts, and driven them across the Trabancos. + +Not a moment's time was lost by Wellington after he received the news; +but, unfortunately, six precious hours had already been wasted, owing +to the despatches not having reached him at Canizal. With the three +brigades of cavalry he set off at once towards Alaejos, while an +officer was despatched to Canizal, to order the fifth division to +march with all speed to Torrecilla de la Orden, six miles in the rear +of Cotton's position at Castrejon. + +Four hours' riding brought them to Alaejos, where a halt for two or +three hours was ordered, to rest the weary horses and men. Soon after +daybreak, however, all thought of sleep was banished by the roar of +artillery, which told that Marmont was pressing hard upon Cotton's +troops. "To horse!" was the cry, and Lords Wellington and Beresford, +with their staff, rode off at full speed towards the scene of action, +with the cavalry following hard upon their heels. An hour's ride +brought them to the ground. Not much could be seen, for the country +was undulating and bare, like the Brighton Downs, and each depression +was full of the white morning mist, which wreathed and tossed +fantastically from the effects of the discharges of firearms, the +movements of masses of men, and the charges of cavalry hidden within +it. Upon a crest near at hand were a couple of British guns, with a +small escort of horse. + +Suddenly, from the mist below, a party of some fifty French horsemen +dashed out and made for the guns. The supporting squadron, surprised +by the suddenness of the attack, broke and fled; the French followed +hard upon them, and just as Lord Wellington, with his staff, gained +the crest, pursuers and pursued came upon them, and in pell-mell +confusion the whole were borne down to the bottom of the hill. For +a few minutes it was a wild mélée. Lords Wellington, Beresford, and +their staff, with their swords drawn, were in the midst of the fight, +and friends and foes were mingled together, when the leading squadrons +of the cavalry from Alaejos came thundering down, and very few of the +Frenchmen who had made that gallant charge escaped to tell the tale. + +The mists were now rapidly clearing up, and in a short time the whole +French army could be seen advancing. They moved towards the British +left, and Wellington ordered the troops at once to retire. The British +fell back in three columns, and marched for the Guarena, through +Torrecilla de la Orden. The French also marched straight for the +river, and now one of the most singular sights ever presented in +warfare was to be seen. + +The hostile armies were marching abreast, the columns being but a few +hundred yards apart, the officers on either side waving their hands to +each other. For ten miles the armies thus pressed forward the officers +urging the men, and these straining every nerve to get first to the +river. From time to time the artillery of either side, finding a +convenient elevation, would pour a few volleys of grape into the +opposing columns, but the position of the two armies, did not often +admit of this. Gradually Cotton's men, fresher than the French, who +had, in the two previous days, marched fifty miles, gained ground, +and, reaching the river, marched across by the ford, the winners of +the great race by so little that one division, which halted for a +moment to drink, was swept by forty pieces of French artillery, which +arrived on the spot almost simultaneously with it. + +On the Guarena the British found the remaining divisions of the army, +which had been brought up from Canizal. These checked Marmont in an +attempt to cross at Vallesa, while the 29th and 40th Regiments, with +a desperate bayonet charge, drove Carier's French division back as it +attempted to push forward beyond Castrillo. Thus the two armies faced +each other on the Guarena, and Marmont had gained absolutely nothing +by his false movement at Toro, and his long and skillful detour by +Tordesillas. + +Quickly the rest of the day passed, as did the one which followed, the +troops on both sides resting after their fatigues. Wellington expected +to be attacked on the next morning and his army was arranged in two +lines ready for the combat. At daybreak, however, Marmont moved his +army up the river, crossed at a ford there, and marched straight +for Salamanca, thus turning Wellington's right, and threatening his +communications. The British at once fell back, and the scene of the +previous day was repeated the armies marching along the crest of two +parallel hills within musket shot distance of each other. + +This time however, the French troops, although they had marched +considerably farther than the English proved themselves the best +marchers, and when night fell Wellington had the mortification of +seeing them in possession of the ford of Huerta on the Tormes, thus +securing for Marmont the junction with an army which was approaching +under King Joseph, and also the option of either fighting or refusing +battle. Wellington felt his position seriously threatened, and sent +off a despatch to the Spanish General Castanos, stating his inability +to hold his ground, and the probability that he should be obliged to +fall back upon Portugal. This letter proved the cause of the victory +of Salamanca for it was intercepted by the French, and Marmont, +fearing that Wellington would escape him, prepared at once to throw +himself upon the road to Ciudad Rodrigo, and thus cut the British line +of retreat, in spite of the positive order which he had received from +King Joseph not to fight until he himself arrived with his army. + +Upon the 21st both armies crossed the Tormes, the French at Alba and +Huerta, the British at Aldea Lengua, and San Marta. Upon that day the +news reached Wellington that General Chauvel, with 2000 cavalry, and +20 guns, would reach Marmont on the evening of the 22d, or the morning +of the 23d, and the English general therefore resolved to retreat, +unless Marmont should, by some mistake, give him a chance of fighting +to advantage. + +Close to the British right, and the French left, were two steep and +rugged hills, called the Hermanitos, or Brothers, and soon after +daybreak on the 22d, the French seized upon the one nearest to them, +while the British took possession of the other. Then, watching each +other, the two armies remained until noon, for Wellington could not +commence his retreat by daylight; but a long cloud of dust along the +road to Ciudad Rodrigo showed that the baggage of the army was already +_en route_ for Portugal. Marmont now determined to make a bold stroke +to cut off Wellington's retreat, and, although all his troops had not +yet arrived, he ordered Maucune, with two divisions, to march round by +the left and menace the Ciudad road. It was at three o'clock in the +afternoon, and Wellington, who had been up all night, thinking that +Marmont would make no move that day, had gone to lie down for an hour +or two, when Tom Scudamore who, from an elevated point, was watching +the movements of the enemy, hurried in with the news that the French +were pushing their left round towards the Ciudad Road. + +Wellington leaped to his feet, and hurried to the high ground, where +he beheld, with stern satisfaction, that Marmont, in his eagerness +to prevent the British escape, had committed the flagrant error of +detaching his wing from his main body. Instantly he issued orders +for an attack, and the great mass of men upon the British Hermanito +moved down upon the plain to attack Maucune in flank, while the third +division was ordered to throw itself across his line of march, and to +attack him in front. As the advance across the plain would be taken in +flank by the fire from the French Hermanito, General Pack was ordered +to assail that position directly the British line had passed it. + +Marmont, standing on the French Hermanito, was thunder-struck at +beholding the plain suddenly covered with enemies, and a tremendous +fire was at once opened upon the advancing British. Officer after +officer was despatched to hurry up the French troops still upon the +march, and when Marmont saw the third division dash across Maucune's +path, he was upon the point of hurrying himself to the spot, when a +shell burst close to him, and he was dashed to the earth with a broken +arm, and two deep wounds in his side. + +Thus, at the critical point of the battle, the French army was left +without a head. + +It was just five o'clock when Pakenham, with the third division, fell +like a thunderbolt upon the head of Maucune's troops. These, taken by +surprise by this attack, on the part of an enemy whom they had thought +to see in full flight, yet fought gallantly, and strove to gain time +to open out into order of battle. Bearing onwards, however, with +irresistible force, the third division broke the head of the column, +and drove it back upon its supports. Meanwhile, the battle raged all +along the line; in the plain the fourth division carried the village +of Arapiles, and drove back Bonnet's division with the bayonet, and +the fifth division attacked Maucune's command in flank, while Pakenham +was destroying its front. + +Marmont was succeeded in his command by Bonnet, who was also wounded, +and Clausel, an able general, took the command. He reinforced Maucune +with his own divisions, which had just arrived, and, for a while, +restored the battle. Then, past the right and left of Pakenham's +division, the British cavalry, under Le Marchant, Anson, and D'Urban, +burst through the smoke and dust, rode down twelve hundred of the +French infantry, and then dashed on at the line behind. Nobly the +charge was pressed, the third division following at a run, and the +charge ceased not until the French left was entirely broken and five +guns, and two thousand prisoners taken. + +But forty minutes had passed since the first gun was fired, and the +French defeat was already all but irretrievable, and the third, +fourth, and fifth divisions now in line, swept forward as to assured +victory. Clausel, however, proved equal to the emergency. He +reinforced Bonnet's division with that of Fereij, as yet fresh and +unbroken, and, at the same moment, Sarrut's and Brennier's divisions +issued from the forest, and formed in the line of battle. Behind them +the broken troops of Maucune's two divisions re-formed, and the battle +was renewed with terrible force. + +Pack, at the same moment, attempted unsuccessfully to carry the French +Hermanito by assault with his Portuguese division, and the fate of the +battle was again in the balance; the British divisions outnumbered, +and outflanked, began to fall back, Generals Cole, Leith, and Spry, +were all wounded, and the French cavalry threatened the flank of the +line. Wellington, however, had still plenty of reserves in hand, and +at this critical moment he launched them at the enemy. The sixth +division was brought up from the second line, and hurled at the center +of the enemy in a fierce and prolonged charge, while the light and +first divisions were directed against the French divisions which were +descending from the French Hermanito, and against that of Foy, while +the seventh division and the Spaniards were brought up behind the +first line. Against so tremendous an assault as this the French could +make no stand, and were pushed back in ever increasing disorder to the +edge of the forest, where Foy's and Maucune's divisions stood at bay, +and covered their retreat in the fast gathering darkness. + +Wellington believed that he should capture a great portion of the +beaten army, for he relied upon the Castle of Alba de Formes, +commanding the ford at that place, being held by the Spaniards, but +these had evacuated the place on the preceding day, and had not even +informed Wellington that they had done so. + +Thus, hidden by the night, the French retreated with but slight loss +from the pursuing columns. In the battle the French had forty-two +thousand men and seventy-four guns; the Allies forty-six thousand and +sixty guns, but of the infantry a division were composed of Spaniards, +and these could not be relied upon in any way. It was probably the +most rapidly fought action ever known, and a French officer described +it as the defeat of forty thousand men in forty minutes. The French +loss was over twelve thousand in killed, wounded, and prisoners, and +so completely were they dispersed that Clausel a week afterwards +could only collect twenty thousand to their standards. It was a great +victory, and celebrated as the first which Wellington had gained over +the French, for although at Talavera and Busaco he had repulsed the +French attack, he was not in either case in a position to do more than +hold his ground. + +Throughout this short and desperate fight the Scudamores had been +fully engaged in conveying orders from one part of the field to +another. Shot and shell flew around them in all directions, and yet +when they met at the end of the action they found that they had +escaped without a scratch. The day following the battle the pursuit +began. Had King Joseph's advancing army united with Clausel's broken +troops, he could have opposed Wellington's advance with a force far +superior in numbers to that defeated at Salamanca. But Joseph, after +hesitating, fell back in one direction, Clausel retreated in another, +the opportunity for concentration was lost, and Wellington found no +foe to bar his way on his triumphant march upon Madrid. + +Joseph fell back from the capital as the English approached, leaving +some thousands of men in the strong place known as the Retiro, +together with an immense amount of arms, ammunition, and military +stores of all kinds, all of which, including the troops, fell into the +hands of the English within a few days of their arrival at Madrid. + +It was a proud moment for the Scudamores, as riding behind Lord +Wellington they entered Madrid on the 14th August. + +The city was half mad with joy. Crowds lined the streets, while every +window and balcony along the route was filled with ladies, who waved +their scarves, clapped their hands, and showered flowers upon the +heads of their deliverers. Those below, haggard and half-starved, +for the distress in Madrid was intense, thronged round the general's +horse, a shouting, weeping throng, kissing his cloak, his horse, any +portion of his equipments which they could touch. Altogether it was +one of the most glorious, most moving, most enthusiastic welcomes ever +offered to a general. + +The next fortnight was spent in a round of fêtes, bull fights, and +balls, succeeding each other rapidly, but these rejoicings were but a +thin veil over the distress which was general throughout the town. The +people were starving, and many deaths occurred daily from hunger. The +British could do but little to relieve the suffering which they saw +around them, for they themselves were--owing to the utter breakdown of +all the arrangements undertaken by the Portuguese government, and to +the indecision and incapacity of the Home Government--badly fed, and +much in arrears of their pay. Nevertheless, the officers did what they +could, got up soup kitchens, and fed daily many hundreds of starving +wretches. + +The heat was excessive and a very great deal of illness took place +among the troops. The French were gathering strength in the South, +and Wellington determined upon marching north and seizing Burgos, an +important place, but poorly fortified. Leaving General Hill with two +divisions at Madrid, he marched with the rest of the army upon Burgos. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +CAUGHT IN A TRAP. + + +So much had passed between the first visit of the Scudamores to Madrid +as Spanish peasant boys, and their second entry as captains upon Lord +Wellington's staff, that they had scarcely given a thought to the +dangers they had at that time run, or to the deadly hatred with which +they had inspired the guerilla chief Nunez. When they first rode +into the town, indeed, they had spoken of it one to the other, and +had agreed that it would be pleasant to be able to walk through the +streets without fear of assassination; for even, as Tom said, if the +scoundrel had any of his band there, they would not be likely to +recognize them in their uniforms. + +One evening, however, when they had been in Madrid about a fortnight, +an incident happened which caused them to doubt whether their security +from the hatred of the guerilla was as complete as they had fancied. +They were sitting with a number of other officers in a large café in +the Puerta del Sol, the principal square in Madrid, when a girl came +round begging; instead of holding out her hand silently with a murmur +for charity in the name of the holy Virgin, she began a long story, +poured out in rapid language. + +Several of the officers present knew more or less Spanish, but they +were unable to follow her quick utterances, and one of them said +laughingly, "Scudamore, this is a case for you, she is beyond us +altogether." + +The girl followed the direction of the speaker's eye, and moved across +to the brothers, who happened to be sitting next to each other, and +began her story again. It was a complicated tale of French oppression, +and the boys, interrupting her here and there to ask for details, +talked with her for some minutes. + +"I believe she is lying," Tom said, in English, "she tells her story +as if she had learned it by heart, and gets confused whenever we +cross-question her; there, give her a few coppers, I am out of +change." + +As Peter put his hand into his pocket for the money, Tom glanced +up sharply at the girl. She was not, as might have been expected, +watching Peter's movements with interest, but was looking inquiringly +at some one in the crowd of promenaders. Tom followed her glance, and +saw a peasant, standing half-hidden behind a group of passers, nod to +her, and motion her to come to him. She waited until Peter put the +coins into her hand; then, with a brief word of thanks, she moved away +into the crowd. + +"Peter, I believe those scoundrels are up to their old game, and +that we are watched. Once or twice since we have been sitting here I +have noticed a heavy-looking fellow glance at us very closely as he +passed, and I just saw the same fellow, who was evidently hiding from +observation, nod to that girl, and beckon her away." + +"Her story was a lie from beginning to end," Peter said, "and it is +quite possible that it was a got-up thing, on purpose to see whether +we could talk Spanish well. I don't think any one could swear to us +who only saw us then; but the fact of our speaking Spanish so well +would go a long way towards settling the point in the mind of any one +who suspected us!" + +"We must be careful in future, Peter, and avoid quiet streets after +dark, and keep a sharp look-out at all times, or we shall get a knife +between our ribs, as sure as fate." + +Time, however, passed on without anything occurring to give any +support to their suspicion, they could not discover that they were +being watched, or their footsteps dogged. They, nevertheless, +continued to be, to a certain extent, upon their guard after dark; in +the daytime the number of English soldiers about the streets was so +large that there was very little danger of any attack. + +On the evening before the army marched for Burgos, Tom, whose turn it +was for duty at head-quarters, received a despatch, to carry to one of +the generals of division encamped a mile or two out of the town. He +did not need to go round to his quarters, as his horse was standing +saddled in readiness in the courtyard. He was but an hour away, and, +as he knew that he would not be farther required, he rode round to the +house where he was quartered. His orderly came forward at his shout, +and took his horse, and he mounted the broad stairs of the house, +which was a very handsome one, and rang at the door on the second +floor; for in Spain, as indeed almost all over the Continent, each +floor is a separate dwelling. + +Sam opened it. + +"Nothing new, Sam?" + +"No, sar, nothing new." + +Tom passed through the sitting-room, and entered Peter's bedroom. It +was in darkness. + +"Asleep, old man?" he asked. + +There was no answer. He came back into the sitting room, where two +lamps were burning, and looked at his watch. "Half-past eleven. He is +off to bed early. Sam, bring me some supper if you have got anything, +I am hungry." + +Sam came in, in a minute, with a small tray. + +"How long has my brother been gone to bed?" + +"Me did not know he gone to bed at all," Sam said, in surprise. "Me +thought Massa Peter been reading book." + +Tom took up a light, and went into the bedroom, it was empty. "Sam, +there's something wrong here!" Tom said sharply, for a sudden +sensation of alarm seized him. "Peter is not here." + +Sam came into the bedroom, and looked round in astonishment. "What +become of him?" he said. "Where de debil he got to?" + +"That's what I want to know, Sam. Now, then, just give all your +attention. What time did he come in?" + +"He came in at about nine o'clock, sar, with three other officers, +Captain Farquharson, Major Heriot, and Captain Brown. Dey have bottle +wine, and sit here and smoke. Well, Massa Tom, Sam sit in his room, +and smoke him pipe, and he doze off a little; after a bit, may be +ten o'clock, Sam hear dem move, and go to door; they were saying +good-night, when Massa Peter said, 'I will just go down to see that +the horses are all right.' Den dey all go down togeder." + +"Did they shut the door?" Tom asked. + +"No, Massa Tom, dey did not shut de door, because, a little while +after, Sam, he wake up wid little start; he hear de door bang, and +'spose Massa Peter come back. Sam go off to sleep again till you ring +bell." + +Tom looked very grave. "What can Peter have gone off with Farquharson +at this time of night for?" + +Then he looked round the room, and said, almost with a cry, "Sam, +look there, there are his cap and sword. He has not gone out with the +others at all. What can have happened?" + +Tom first glanced into his own room, and then ran downstairs in haste, +followed by Sam, who was now also thoroughly alarmed. The orderly had +just made the horse comfortable for the night, and was leaving the +stable. + +"Johnstone, when did you see my brother?" + +"Well, it may be an hour, or an hour and a half back, sir. He came +down with some other officers; I did not see them, but I heard them +talking for a minute or two before he came in to look at the horses, +and he asked if they were all right, and said they must be saddled by +half-past five, and then he went up again--at least, I suppose he went +up, for he had not got his cap on. Is anything wrong, sir?" + +"I don't know, I am afraid to think," Tom said, in a dazed way. "He is +not upstairs; he has not gone out; what can have become of him?" + +He stood quiet for a minute or two, and then, with a great effort, +brought his thoughts within control again. "The first thing is to +assure ourselves whether he returned upstairs. Sam, fetch a lamp, the +stairs are not lighted, and I want to examine them." + +Sam soon returned with the lamp, and Tom, beginning at the street +door, examined every step carefully all the way up, Sam and the +soldier following him. + +"There has been no scuffle on the stairs," he said; then he went +through the little hall into the sitting-room again. Nothing appeared +to have been disturbed. Then he looked at the floor, which was of +polished oak, and knelt down to examine it more closely. "There have +been men with dirty shoes standing here," he cried. "Do you see the +marks on each side of the door, and there, do you see that scratch and +that? There has been a scuffle. Good heavens! what has taken place +here?" + +Sam's face was pale with apprehension that something had happened to +Peter; but, he said, "How dat be, Massa Tom, with Sam in the next room +all the time?" + +Tom made no reply; but was closely examining the floor--back across +the hall. "There is a mark; there is another," he said, "not made by +boots, but by their native sandals." Then he went out from the door, +and up the next flight of stairs. + +"There," he said, "just as I thought." Just round the angle of the +stairs two steps were dirty and stained, as if dirty feet had been +trampling upon them for some time. "I suppose they knew I was out, and +watched here, for hours, perhaps. Then, when Peter went down, they +slipped in through the open door, and then"--without completing the +sentence, Tom went back into the room, and threw himself into a chair +in tearless despair. + +Sam sobbed loudly. For some time there was silence. "There is no +blood, sir, that I can see, not a speck," the orderly said. "They +can't have killed Captain Scudamore, and, if they had, why should they +have carried his body away?" + +This was the question Tom had been asking himself. Assassinations +were, in Madrid, every-day occurrences, and that Peter and he were +especially liable to be murdered, owing to the hatred of Nunez and his +gang, was clear; but, so far as he could see, not a drop of blood had +been shed here. Presently Sam began to sob more loudly. "Dis break +my heart, Massa Tom, to tink dat Sam be next door all de time, and, +instead of watching, he sleep so sound dat Massa Peter carried +straight away." + +"You are not to blame, Sam, there was, probably, no noise whatever. +But, what can it all mean? Johnstone, you had better go to bed, you +can do no good now. Sam, give me my pistols; take that big stick of +yours, and come round with me to head-quarters, we will call in at +Captain Farquharson's on the way." + +That officer, on being roused, and made to understand what was the +matter, confirmed the account given by the orderly; he and his +companions had parted at the street door, and Peter had gone down the +yard to the stable. + +"It is clear that Peter has been carried off," Tom said, "and I have +not the least doubt that it has been done by some of the band of +Nunez. As you have heard me say, they owe us a grudge, and have, no +doubt, been on the look-out ever since we came here. We have been +on guard, and never gave them a chance, and, I suppose, they got +desperate when they found the army was moving again, and so carried +out this audacious plan." + +"If your brother had been found murdered I should understand it," +Captain Farquharson said; "but, what on earth did they carry him off +for?" + +Tom was silent for a minute. + +"That fiend, Nunez, would have had us stabbed if he could do nothing +else; but he would, if I judge him rightly, be really contented with +nothing short of putting us to death himself in some horrible manner. +My own idea is, that Peter is hidden away somewhere near, will be kept +in concealment until the road is clear, and will then be taken to +Nunez. I must go off and try and save him at all hazards." + +Captain Farquharson was silent, while Tom walked up and down the room +thoughtfully. + +"I don't suppose the chief would refuse me leave," Tom said. "If he +does, I must throw up my commission." + +"No, no; you are sure to get leave for such a thing as this, but the +difficulty of the affair will be to know how to proceed. The country +will swarm with French, the guerillas are sure to keep a sharp +look-out, and if you find him, how are you going to rescue him?" + +"I don't know," Tom said, "but it's got to be done; that's clear. I +can't set out as a Spanish peasant," he went on after a pause. "They +know me as that now. At least, if I do I must get up as an old man +and change my appearance. I might go as a woman, but I am too tall in +the first place, and then women don't go wandering over the country +in such times as this. But there, I have time to think it over before +morning. I suppose the general will be moving about five o'clock; +I will see him the first thing, and tell him the whole story. +Good-night." + +And so Tom went back to his quarters, and sat thinking deeply until +morning, while Sam sat gloomily in his little room, sometimes with +tears rolling down his cheeks, sometimes muttering terrible threats +against the guerillas, at other times cursing himself for having been +asleep instead of watching over his young master's safety. Tom had +briefly told him that he intended to get leave in order to search +for Peter. At daybreak, when he heard Tom moving, he went into the +sitting-room. + +"Look here, Massa Tom, Sam only one word to say. He going to look for +Massa Peter. Sam know dat him color berry spicuous, dat people look +at him and tink he de debil. Sam don't spect he going wid you. Dat +wouldn't do. Dese fellows watch him, know dat black fellow here. Only +Sam go somehow. He trabel night, hide up at day time. He join you de +last ting when you go to mash up dem guerillas like squash. Anyhow, +Sam must go. If can get leave, berry well, if not he desert. Anyhow he +go, dat sartin. Sam kill himself if he stay behind." + +Tom had already thought over this. He was sure that the faithful negro +would not remain behind, but he had seen that his companionship would +be fatal. He had, therefore, formed some plan in his head similar to +that which Sam proposed, and he knew that when the moment for action +came his courage, strength, and devotion would be invaluable. + +"You shall go, Sam," he said, holding out his hand to his attached +follower. "As you say, you can't go with me, but you shall go +somehow." + +"Thank you, Massa Tom," the negro said gratefully, "You berry sure if +Massa Peter die Sam die too." + +Tom now went to head-quarters, and found that Lord Wellington was +just up. Sending in to say that he wished to speak with him for a few +minutes on a matter of urgent personal importance, he was admitted, +and related as concisely as he could Peter's disappearance, and told +the story of the affair with the guerillas, which accounted for the +intense desire for vengeance on the part of Nunez. He ended by asking +for leave of absence. + +The general heard him to the end, asking a brief question here and +there. + +"You can have the leave certainly, Captain Scudamore, I know that it +is needless for me to point out the risks that you will run, both from +the French and guerillas. I think that it might be an advantage if I +give you a note which you can, in case of absolute necessity, show to +any French officer." + +So saying, the general sat down and wrote as follows:-- + +"To the French officer commanding.--The Earl of Wellington, +commander-in-chief of His Britannic Majesty's forces in Spain, gives +his assurance that the bearer of this, Captain Scudamore, although not +in English uniform, is not engaged upon any mission connected with the +army, or to obtain information respecting the strength and position of +the French forces. His business is entirely private, and he is engaged +in an attempt to discover and rescue a brother who has been carried +off by the guerilla chief Nunez in order to gratify private vengeance. +The Earl of Wellington, confiding in the natural courtesy of the +French nation, trusts that officers of that service will, if applied +to, assist Captain Scudamore in any way in their power, and he will +feel personally obliged to them by their so doing." + +Tom expressed his deep gratitude for this, which might, he foresaw, be +of inestimable advantage to him. + +"I am taking my servant with me, sir--the negro; he will not travel +with me by day, but will join me wherever I tell him; he is very +strong and brave, and is deeply attached to us." + +"Yes, I remember," the general said; "that is the man whose life you +saved. Do you leave at once?" + +"No, sir; I am thinking of riding with you to-morrow at any rate. The +route lies on the way I have to go, and I am sure to be watched here." + +"Very well," the general said; "I wish you good fortune; but you have +a difficult, almost a desperate, service before you." + +Upon leaving head-quarters, Tom again called on Captain Farquharson. + +"Farquharson, I hear that it will be eleven before the chief leaves. I +wish you would go to that little shop opposite the opera-house; they +have got wigs and all that sort of thing there. Please get me two +old men's wigs and beards, and one set of those mutton-chop shaped +whiskers, and a woman's wig. I haven't made up my mind yet what I am +going to wear, but I want these things to choose from. I am sure to be +watched, and if I were to go there they would find out, five minutes +afterwards, what I had bought. In the meantime I am going to the head +of the police to give notice of Peter's disappearance, and to ask him +to have the carts leaving the town for the next few days searched. +I have no doubt the fellows will outwit the police, but it's no use +throwing away a chance." + +It was six days after this that an old man, with long white hair +and gray beard, and with a box containing cheap trinkets, beads, +necklaces, earrings, knives, scissors, and other like articles, was +sitting at the junction of two roads near the lower slopes of the +Pyrenees, some twenty miles north of Vittoria. He had one of his +sandals off, and appeared to have just risen from a bed of leaves in +the forest behind him. The dawn had broken, but it was still twilight. +Presently he heard a footstep coming along the road, and at once +applied himself to wrapping the bandages, which serve for stockings +to the Spanish peasant, round his leg, looking eagerly from under his +wide sombrero to see who was approaching. As the new-comer came in +sight, the pedlar at once ceased his employment and rose to meet him. +He had recognized the figure, but the face was hidden, the Spanish +cloak, worn as is usual by peasant and noble alike, with one end +thrown over the shoulder, hiding the chin and lower part of the face, +while the wide felt hat, pressed well down in front, allowed scarcely +a glimpse even of the nose. That, however, would have been sufficient +in the present case, for the man was a negro. + +Upon seeing the pedlar rise, he ran forward to meet him. + +"Ah, Massa Tom, tank de Lord me find you safe and sound. I always +keep on tinking you taken prisoner or killed eider by de French or de +robbers--one as bad as de oder." + +"I have thought the same of you, Sam, for your risk has been far +greater than mine. Well, thank God, it is all right thus far. But come +back into the wood, I have got some food there, and here any one might +come along." + +They were soon deep in the wood, where, by a pile of grass and leaves +which had evidently been used as a bed, was an open wallet, with some +bread, cheese, cold meat and a small skin of wine. + +"Are you hungry, Sam?" + +"Downright starving, sar; dis chile eat noting for two days." + +"Why, how is that, Sam; you had six days' provision with you when you +started?" + +"Dat true enough, sar, but Sam's appetite bigger than usual, noting to +do all day sitting in de woods, waiting for night to come so as to go +on again; so had to eat, and de food all went before Sam thought dat +dere was two more days before he meet you." + +"Well, sit down now, Sam, and eat away; we have plenty of time." + +They had much to tell each other. They had traveled by the same road, +one by night, the other by day--Sam passing the days sleeping in the +woods, his master traveling by day and at night sleeping in wretched +village posadas. He, too, would far rather have slept in the woods, +for the insects and filth made sleep almost impossible in these +places, besides which he ran a good deal of risk as to the discovery +of his disguise. He had, however, chosen the inns in hopes of hearing +something which might give him a clue as to the object of his search. +The only information, which he had gained was to the effect that Nunez +still had his quarters at the old place. He had been driven out of it, +and the village had been burned by the French, but the position was +a convenient one, and the houses had been cleared and roughly roofed +with boughs of trees and straw, and the band was still there. This +much was satisfactory, and he could hardly have expected to learn +more, unless he had happened to meet some of the members of the band +itself. They had not traveled by the main road, as upon that large +forces of the French were collected; and even if Tom could have +passed through, boldly, Sam could not have made his way. Even by the +road they had chosen Tom had met several bodies of French, while at +Vittoria a very large force was assembling, destined for the relief of +Burgos. + +Sam had but few incidents to relate. He had been carefully instructed +by Tom before starting as to the road he should take, and the position +and distances apart of the towns and villages upon it. He had traveled +only at night, and had but once or twice exchanged a word with passers +by. People did not travel much at night in so disturbed a country, +and when Sam heard a foot-passenger approaching, or, as was more +frequently the case, a party of French cavalry, he left the road and +lay down, until they had passed. The one or two foot-passengers he had +met suddenly he had passed with the usual Spanish muttered salutation, +and the darkness and the disguise prevented any recognition of his +color. + +"Now, sar," Sam said, when they had finished breakfast, "what am to be +done next?" + +"I do not think, Sam, that the party who have got Peter have arrived +yet. They could only have started on the day that we did; they have as +long a road to go, and most likely they have got a bullock-cart, which +won't travel more than fifteen miles a day at the outside. They have +got Peter in a cart covered up with something, we may be sure. I don't +think they will be here for another day or so at the earliest. If we +knew what sort of cart it was, we could attack them on the way if +there are not too many of them; but unfortunately we don't know that; +and as there are three or four roads up to the village, and they are +sure to make a detour, we don't know which they will come by. I hope +to learn at the village. We will stay where we are till dark, then we +will push on; it is only a couple of miles or so from here. I will +steal into the place after dark, and try and overhear what is going +on. You shall remain at a point where you can see down into the +village and can hear a shout. I will give you this letter of Lord +Wellington, and if you hear a pistol shot and hear me shout 'Sam!' you +will know I am caught, and must make off as hard as you can to that +small town in the plain, where there is a French garrison; ask for the +commanding-officer, show this letter, and offer to guide them so as +to surprise Nunez and his band. That is our sole chance. But I don't +think there is much risk of being caught. I shall be very careful, you +may rely upon it; and as I know the position of the house, I shall be +able to make my way about. Once night has fallen they go off to bed; +and even if I walked boldly about the place I should likely enough +meet no one all night." + +That evening Tom entered the village as soon as it was fairly dark. He +knew, from his former experience, that sentries were always placed at +points whence they could get a view of the roads, and he made his way +so as to avoid any risk of observation by them; but when he reached a +place whence he could in turn view the posts of the watchers, he found +that they were deserted, and concluded that the brigands had become +careless, from the belief that, now the French had once destroyed the +village, they would not be likely to come up to search for them there +a second time; besides which, they might reckon that the French had +their hands much too full with the advance of the Allied Army to spare +either men or time in raids upon the guerillas. In this particular, +indeed, they would have argued wrongly, for the French during the +whole war, however much they were pressed by Wellington, always kept +sufficient forces in hand to scatter the guerillas as fast as they +become formidable. + +Tom had now taken off his beard and wig, and had put on the small +whisker, which is the general fashion of wearing the hair throughout +Spain. Thus he trusted, if surprised in the dark, to pass as one of +the band. So quiet was the village when he entered, that he at first +thought it was deserted; at last, however, he saw a light in one of +the houses in the center of the village. Approaching carefully and +noiselessly he saw a group of five men sitting and drinking round a +fire made on the ground, in the center of one of the windowless rooms, +the smoke finding its way out through the roof. + +"I tell you," one said, "I am getting sick of this life; I am ready to +go and kill the French, but to be left up here, where there is nothing +to do, no one to talk to, not a roof to cover one; bah! I am sick of +it. But Nunez will be back in three days, and we shall be merry enough +then." + +"Not we," another said, "this was a pleasant village in the old days, +what is it now? There are no women, not even old mother Morena, who +used to cook well, if she was free of her tongue. There is not even a +priest now to shrive us if one is brought in to die." + +"Nunez will come back in a good temper if it is true what Lope said +yesterday when he came through, that the lads at Madrid had got one +of those English boys who made a fool of him two years ago. That was +a go. Demonio! but it was a fine thing. If it is true that they have +got him and are bringing him here I would not be in his skin for all +the treasures of King Joseph. Yes, Nunez was always a devil, but he is +worse now. Somehow we always have bad luck, and the band gets smaller +and smaller, I don't suppose there's above fifty with him now. I +expect we shall have them pretty well all here this week." + +"No fear of a visit from the French?" + +"None; Reynier at Vittoria is busy now in sending every man he can +spare forward to the army that's gathering near Burgos." + +This was enough for Tom, who stole silently away to the spot where Sam +was anxiously awaiting him. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +JUST IN TIME. + + +"I shall go straight back to Vittoria, Sam. By what they say, General +Reynier is in command there, and as it was through his wife that all +this terrible business has come about, we have a right to expect him +to do his best to get us out of it. I will start at once. Now look +here, Sam. You must put yourself where you can keep watch over the +village. If you see any party come in, either to-night or to-morrow, +you must try and discover if Peter is among them. If he is, light a +fire down in that hollow where it can't be seen from above, but where +we can see it on that road. It's twenty miles to Vittoria; if I can +get to see General Reynier to-morrow, I may be back here with cavalry +by night; if he is out or anything prevents it, I will be here next +night, as soon after dusk as it will be safe. I will dismount the men +and take them over the hill, so as to avoid the sentinel who is sure +to be posted on the road when Nunez arrives. If they come in the +afternoon, Sam, and you find that anything is going to be done at +once, do everything you can to delay matters." + +"All right, Massa Tom, if, when you come back you find Massa Peter +dead, you be berry sure you find dis chile gone down too." + +It was seven o'clock next morning when Tom entered Vittoria, and +a few cautious inquiries proved the fact that General Reynier was +really in command of the French division there. He at once sought his +head-quarters, and after some talk with a woman selling fruit near the +house, heard that the general and his staff had started at daybreak, +but whither of course she knew not. Tom hesitated for some time, and +then, seeing an officer standing at the door, went up to him and asked +if the general would be back soon. + +"He will be back in an hour or two," the officer replied in Spanish, +"but it is no use your waiting to see him. He has his hands full and +can't be bothered with petitions as to cattle stolen or orchards +robbed. Wait till we have driven the English back, and then we shall +have time to talk to you." + +"Your pardon," Tom said humbly. "It is not a complaint that I have to +make, it is something of real importance which I have to communicate +to him." + +"You can tell me, I am Colonel Decamps; it will be all the same thing +if your news is really important." + +"Thank you very kindly, señor, it must be the general himself; I will +wait here." Thereupon Tom sat down with his back to the wall a short +distance off, pulled out some bread and fruit he had bought in the +town, and began quietly to eat his breakfast. An hour later a pretty +carriage with two fine horses drew up to the door. It was empty, +and was evidently intended for some one in the house. Suddenly, the +thought flashed across his mind, perhaps Madame Reynier and her child +were there. It was curious that the thought had not occurred to him +before, but it had not, and he drew near, when a sentry at the door +roughly ordered him to stand further back. Presently a lady came to +the door, accompanied by a little girl. There she stood for a minute +talking with the officer with whom Tom had spoken. At the moment a +young officer passed Tom on his way to the house. + +"Monsieur," Tom said, in French, "do me the favor to place that ring +in the hands of Madame Reynier. It is a matter of life and death. +She will recognize the ring, it is her own," he added, as the young +officer in surprise hesitated. He was a bright handsome young fellow, +and after a moment's, pause, he went up to the lady. "My dear aunt," +he said, "here is a mystery. An old Spanish beggar speaks French, not +very good French, but enough to make out, and he begs me to give you +this ring, which he says is yours, and which, by the way, looks a +valuable one." Madame Reynier, in some surprise, held out her hand +for the ring. "It is not mine," she began, when a sudden thought +struck her, and turning it round she saw "a Louise Reynier, tumors +reconnaissance," which she had had engraved on it, before giving it to +Tom. "Who gave it to you, Jules?" she asked eagerly. + +"That old pedler," Jules said. + +"Bring him in," Madame Reynier said, "the carriage must wait; I must +speak to him and alone." + +"My dear aunt," began her nephew. + +"Don't be afraid, Jules, I am not going to run away with him, and if +you are a good boy you shall know all about it afterwards, wait here, +Louise, with your cousin;" and beckoning to Tom to follow her, she +went into the house, the two officers looking astounded at each other +as the supposed Spanish pedler followed her into her sitting-room. + +"What is your message?" she asked. + +Tom's answer was to remove his wide hat, wig, and beard. + +"Himself!" Madame Reynier exclaimed, "my preserver," and she held out +both her hands to him. "How glad I am, but oh! how foolish to come +here again, and--and"--she hesitated at the thought that he, an +English spy, ought not to come to her, the wife of a French general. + +Tom guessed her thought. "Even General Reynier might succor us without +betraying the interests of his country. Read that, madame; it is an +open letter," and he handed her Lord Wellington's letter. + +She glanced through it and turned pale. "Your brother! is he in the +hands of the guerillas? Where? How?" + +"He is in the hands of that scoundrel Nunez; he swore he would be +revenged for that day's work, and he has had Peter carried off. No +doubt to kill him with torture." + +"Oh! and it is through me," Madame Reynier exclaimed, greatly +distressed. "What can we do! Please let me consult with my friends, +every soldier shall be at your service," and she opened the door. +"Colonel Deschamps, Jules, come here directly, and bring Louise with +you." These officers, on entering, were struck dumb with astonishment +on finding a young peasant instead of an old pedler, and at seeing +tears standing in Madame Reynier's eyes. "Louise," she said to her +daughter, "look at this gentleman, who is he?" + +The child looked hard at Tom; he was dressed nearly as when she first +saw him--and as he smiled she recognized him. "Oh, it is the good +boy!" she cried, and leaped into Tom's arms, and kissed him heartily. + +"Do you think we have gone mad, Jules, Louise and I? This is one of +the young English officers who saved our lives, as you have often +heard me tell you." + +Jules stepped forward, and shook Tom's hand heartily, but Colonel +Deschamps looked very serious. "But, madame," he began, "you are wrong +to tell me this." + +"No, Colonel;" Madame Reynier said, "here is a letter, of which this +gentleman is the bearer, from Lord Wellington himself, vouching for +him, and asking for the help of every Frenchman." + +Colonel Deschamps read it, and his brow cleared, and he held out his +hand to Tom. "Pardon my hesitation, sir," he said in Spanish; "but I +feared that I was placed in a painful position, between what I owe +to my country, and what all French soldiers owe to you, for what you +did for Madame Reynier. I am, indeed, glad to find that this letter +absolves me from the former duty, and leaves me free to do all I can +to discharge the latter debt. Where is your brother, and why has he +been carried off? I have known hundreds of our officers assassinated +by these Spanish wolves, but never one carried away. An English +officer, too, it makes it the more strange!" + +Tom now related the story of Peter's abduction; the previous attempts +of members of Nunez's band to assassinate them, and the reasons he +had for believing that Peter was close to, if not already at, the +headquarters of that desperado. + +"Is he still there?" Jules asked. "We routed him out directly the +general came up here. My aunt declared herself bound by a promise, and +would give us no clue as to the position of the village, but he had +made himself such a scourge, that there were plenty of others ready to +tell; if we had known the roads, we would have killed the whole band, +but unfortunately they took the alarm and made off. So he has gone +back there again. Ah! there is the general." + +Madame Reynier went out to meet her husband, and drawing him aside +into another room, explained the whole circumstance to him, with +difficulty detaining him long enough to tell her story, as the moment +he found that his wife and child's deliverer was in the next room, he +desired to rush off to see him. The story over, he rushed impetuously +into the room, where Tom was explaining his plans to his French +friends, seized him in his arms, and kissed him on both cheeks, as if +he had been his son. + +"I have longed for this day!" he said, wiping his eyes. "I have prayed +that I might some day meet you, to thank you for my wife and child, +who would have been lost to me, but for you. And now I hear your +gallant brother is paying with his life for that good deed. Tell me +what to do, and if necessary I will put the whole division at your +orders." + +"I do not think that he will have above fifty men with him, general; +say eighty, at the outside. Two squadrons of cavalry will be +sufficient. They must dismount at the bottom of the hill, and I will +lead them up. We must not get within sight of the hill till it is too +dark for their look-out to see us, or the alarm would be given, and we +should catch no one. We shall know if they have arrived, by a fire my +man is to light. If they have not come, then I would put sentries on +guard upon every road leading there, and search every cart that comes +up; they are sure to have got him hid under some hay, or something of +that sort, and there are not likely to be more than two or three men +actually with it, so as not to attract attention. It will be all right +if they do not arrive there to-day." + +"It is about five hours' ride for cavalry," the general said, "that +is at an easy pace; it will not be dark enough to approach the hill +without being seen till eight o'clock. Two squadrons shall be paraded +here at three o'clock. I will go with you myself; yes, and you shall +go too, Jules," he said, in answer to an anxious look from his nephew. +"In the mean time you can lend our friend some clothes; you are about +the same size." + +"Come along," Jules said laughing; "I think we can improve your +appearance," and, indeed, he did so, for in half an hour Tom returned +looking all over a dashing young French hussar, and little Louise +clapped her hands and said-- + +"He does look nice, mamma, don't he? Why can't he stay with us always, +and dress like that? and we know he's brave, and he would help papa +and Jules to kill the wicked English." + +There was a hearty laugh, and Jules was about to tell her that Tom was +himself one of the wicked English, but Madame Reynier shook her head, +for, as she told him afterwards, it was as well not to tell her, for +little mouths would talk, and there was no occasion to set everyone +wondering and talking about the visit of an English officer to General +Reynier. "There is no treason in it, Jules, still one does not want to +be suspected of treason, even by fools." + +Sam watched all night, without hearing any sound of vehicles, but in +the morning he saw that several more guerillas had come in during the +night. In the morning parties of twos and threes began to come in +from the direction of Vittoria, and it was evident from the shouting +and noise in the village that these brought satisfactory news of +some kind. In the afternoon most of them went out again in a body +to the wood at the foot of the hill, and soon afterwards Sam saw a +cart coming along across the plain. Two men walked beside it, and +Sam could see one, if not two more perched upon the top of the load. +Three others walked along at a distance of some fifty yards ahead, and +as many more at about the same distance behind. He could see others +making their way through the fields. "Dis berry bad job," Sam said +to himself; "me berry much afraid dat Massa Tom he not get back in +time. Der's too many for Sam to fight all by himself, but he must +do someting." Whereupon Sam set to to think with all his might, and +presently burst into a broad grin. "Sure enough dat do," he said; "now +let me arrange all about what dey call de pamerphernalia." First, he +emptied out the contents of a couple of dozen pistol cartridges; he +wetted the powder and rolled it up in six cartridges, like squibs, +three short ones and three much longer. Then he opened Tom's kit, +and took out a small box of paints, which Tom had carried with him +for making dark lines on his face, and in other ways to assist his +disguise. Taking some white paint, Sam painted his eyelids up to his +eyebrows, and a circle on his cheeks, giving the eyes at a short +distance the appearance of ghastly saucers. + +"Dat will do for de present," he said; "now for business. If dey wait +till it get dark, all right; if not, Sam do for Nunez and two or three +more, and den go down with Massa Peter!" + +Then carefully examining the priming of the pair of pistols, which +he carried--the very pistols given to Peter by the passengers of the +Marlborough coach--he prepared to set out. + +It was now six o'clock, and he calculated that the waggon would by +this time have mounted the hill, and reached the village; he had +already collected a large heap of dry sticks and some logs, at the +point Tom had pointed out, these he now lit, and then started for the +top of the hill. Looking back, just as he reached the crest, he could +see, knowing where it was, a very light smoke curling up over a clump +of trees which intervened between him and the fire, but it was so +slight that he was convinced that it would not be noticed by an +ordinary observer. Sam saw at once, on reaching the top of the hill, +that the guerillas were crowded round the waggon, which stood at the +edge of a small clump of trees in the middle of the village. The +moment was favourable, and he at once started forward, sometimes +making a detour, so as to have the shelter of a tree, sometimes +stooping behind a low stone wall, until he reached the first house +in the village. It was now comparatively easy work, for there were +enclosures and walls, the patches of garden-ground were breast-high +with weeds, and, stooping and crawling, Sam soon reached a house close +to the waggon. It was a mere hut, and had not been repaired. The roof +was gone, but the charred shutters and doors still hung on their +hinges. It was the very place from which to see without being seen. +Sam entered by a door from behind, and found that, through a slight +opening in the window-shutter, he could see all that was going on. +Some fifty guerillas were standing or sitting in groups at a distance +of twenty yards. + +In the centre of the groups, lying on the ground, was a figure which +he at once recognized as Peter. It was wound round and round with +ropes; beside it stood, or rather danced, Nunez pouring forth strings +of abuse, of threats, and of curses, and enforcing them with repeated +kicks at the motionless figure. + +"De debil!" muttered Sam, "me neber able to stand dis. If you not stop +dat, Massa Nunez, me put a bullet through dat ugly head of yours, as +sure as you stand dere. But me mustn't do it till last ting; for, +whether I kill him or not, it's all up with Massa Peter and me if I +once fire." + +Fortunately Nunez was tired, and in a short time he desisted, and +threw himself down on the ground. "Take off his ropes, one of you," he +said: "there would be no fear of his running away had he three or four +days to live, instead of as many hours. Take the gag out of his mouth, +throw some water over him to bring him round, and pour some wine down +his throat. I want him to be fresh, so as to be able to enjoy the +pleasure we have in store for him. And now let's have dinner." + +Sam felt that for another hour at least Peter was safe, and +therefore, with the same precaution as before, he crept away from his +hiding-place, through the village, and over the hill-crest, to the +place where he had made his fire. The logs were burning well, but gave +out but little smoke. Sam looked at the sky. "Dusk cum on berry fast," +he said; "another hour Massa Tom come on with soldiers. If he see +fire, he hurry up sharp." So saying, Sam heaped on a pile of wood, +and then made his way back. He knew that Tom would not approach until +it was too dark for the movements of the troops to be seen by the +look-outs, and that he could not be expected to reach the village +until fully an hour after dark. "Just another hour and a half," he +said to himself; "ebery thing depend upon what happen before dat +time." It was quite dusk before he regained the shelter of the +cottage. He had gone round by the wagon, and had taken from it a large +stable-fork, muttering as he did so. "Golly! dis de berry ting." +Close by he saw the carcase of a bullock which the guerillas had just +slaughtered, and from this he cut off the horns and tail. + +When Sam peeped out through the shutter he saw that something was +going to be done. Nunez was sitting smoking a cigarette, with a look +of savage pleasure in his face, while the men heaped up a large fire +in front of the trees. + +"I don't like dat gentleman's look," Sam said to himself. "It's time +dis chile begin to dress for de pantomime, dat quite plain. Massa Tom +get here too late." Thus saying, Sam began to deliberately undress. + +Peter, his arms and feet still bound, was sitting with his back +against a tree, watching what were, he was convinced, the preparations +for his death. For the last ten days he had lived in a sort of +confused and painful dream. From the moment, when, upon entering his +room two hands suddenly gripped his throat, others thrust a gag in the +mouth, and then blindfolded him, while some one from behind lashed his +arms to his side, and then altogether, lifting him like a log, carried +him downstairs and threw him into a cart, he had not till now seen +anything. The bandage had never been removed from his eyes, or the +cords from his limbs. Sometimes he had been made to sit up, and soup +and wine had been poured down his throat, or a piece of bread thrust +into his mouth; then he had been again gagged and thrown into a cart. +Over him brushwood and fagots had been piled, and there he had lain, +until at night a stop was made, when he was taken out, fed, and then +thrust back again and covered over. + +From the first he had never doubted who were his captors, or what was +his destination, and he therefore experienced no surprise whatever, +when, on his arrival at the village, on the bandage being taken off +his eyes, he saw where he was. That it was useless to beg for mercy of +the savages into whose power he had fallen he knew well enough, and he +looked as calm and indifferent, as if he did not hear a word of the +threats and imprecations which Nunez was heaping on him. + +"You see that fire," the enraged guerilla said, "there you shall be +roasted! English pig that you are! But not yet. That were too quick +a death! Here," he said to his followers, "make a little fire by the +side of the big one--there under the arm of that tree; and put on +plenty of green leaves: we will smoke our pig a bit before we roast +him!" + +Peter still eyed him unflinchingly. He was determined that no pain +should wring a complaint or prayer for mercy. Even now he did not +quite despair, for he thought that he had just one chance of life. He +was sure that Tom would move heaven and earth to save him. He reckoned +that he would at once guess who had carried him off, and with what +object; and he felt that Tom would be certain to set off to his +rescue. All this he had reflected over in his long days of weary +suffering, and from the moment that he was unbandaged, and propped +against the tree, he had listened attentively for any unusual sound. +How Tom could rescue him he did not see. He was so utterly crippled, +from his long confinement, that he knew that it would be hours, +perhaps days, before he could walk a step; yet, still he thought it +possible that Tom might try; and he feared more than he hoped, for he +trembled lest, if Tom were really there, that he would do some rash +thing, which would involve him in his fate. "Whether Tom is here or +not," Peter thought as he looked unflinchingly at Nunez, "one thing +is certain, if I know my brother, you will not have many days to live +after me, for Tom will follow you all over Spain, but he will avenge +me at last!" Such were Peter's thoughts, and so likely did he think it +that Tom was present, that he was scarcely surprised when he heard, as +from the ground behind him, a well-known voice. + +"Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam here, Massa Tom he be here +in another half hour with French soldiers. If dey go to kill you +before dat, Sam play dem trick. Can you run, Massa Peter, if I cut de +cord?" + +"No, Sam." + +"Dat bad job. Neber mind, Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam +keep quiet as long as he can, but when de worst come Sam do de trick +all right." + +"Don't show yourself, Sam. It would only cost you your life, and +couldn't help me; besides, it would put them on their guard. They +won't kill me yet. They will smoke me, and so on, but they will make +it last as long as they can." + +Peter was able to say this, for at the moment Nunez was occupied in +rolling and lighting a second cigarette. Peter received no answer, for +Sam, seeing some guerillas bringing sticks and leaves to make a fire, +as Nunez, had ordered, crept back again into the deep shadow behind. +The fire was now giving out volumes of smoke, a guerilla climbed up +the tree and slung a rope over it, and three others approached Peter. +His heart beat rapidly; but it was with hope, not fear. He knew, from +the words of Nunez, that at present he was not going to be burned, +but, as he guessed, to be hung over the smoke until he was insensible, +and then brought to life again with buckets of water, only to have the +suffocation repeated, until it pleased Nunez to try some fresh mode of +torture. + +It was as he imagined. The rope was attached to his legs, and amid +the cheers of the guerillas, two men hauled upon the other end until +Peter swung, head downwards, over the fire. There was no flame, but +dense volumes of pungent smoke rose in his face. For a moment his eyes +smarted with agony, then a choking sensation seized him, his blood +seemed to rush into his head, and his veins to be bursting: and there +was a confused din in his ears and a last throb of pain, and then he +was insensible. + +"That's enough for the present," Nunez said; "cut him down." + +The men advanced to do so, but paused, with astonishment, for from +behind the great fire was a loud yell--"Yah, yah, yah!"--each louder +than the last, and then, leaping through the flames appeared, as they +supposed, the devil. Sam's appearance was indeed amply sufficient to +strike horror in the minds of a band of intensely superstitious men. +He had entirely stripped himself, with the exception of his sandals, +which he had retained in order to be able to run freely; on his head +were two great horns; in one hand he held a fork, and in the other +what appeared to be his tail, but which really belonged to the +slaughtered bullock. From his month, his horns, and the end of his +tail poured volumes of fire, arising, it needs not to say, from the +squibs he had prepared. The great white circles round the eyes added +to the ghastliness of his appearance, and seeing the terrible figure +leap apparently from the flames, it is no wonder that a scream of +terror rose from the guerillas. Whatever a Spanish peasant may believe +about saints and angels, he believes yet more implicitly in a devil. +Black, with horns, and a tail--and here he was--with these appendages +tipped with fire! Those who were able turned and fled in terror, those +who were too frightened to run fell on their knees and screamed for +mercy, while one or two fell insensible from fear. Taking the squibs +from his mouth, and giving one more startling yell, to quicken the +fugitives, Sam made two strides to where Peter was hanging, cut the +rope, and lowered him down. + +Nunez had at first joined in the flight, but looking over his shoulder +he saw what Sam was doing. His rage and frenzy, at the thought of +being cheated of his victim, even by the evil one himself, overcame +his fear, and he rushed back, shouting, "He is mine! He is mine! I +won't give him to you!" and fired a pistol almost in Sam's face. The +ball carried away a portion of one of Sam's ears, and with a yell, +even more thrilling than those he had given before, he plunged his +pitchfork into the body of the guerilla, then, exerting all his +immense strength, he lifted him upon it, as if he had been a truss of +straw, took three steps to the great bonfire and cast the brigand into +it. + +There was a volume of sparks, a tumbling together of big logs, and the +most cruel of the Spanish guerillas had ceased to exist. + +This awful sight completed the discomfiture of the guerillas--some +hearing their chief's shouts and the sound o his pistol had looked +round, but the sight of the gigantic fiend casting him into the fire +was too much for them. With cries of horror and fear they continued +their flight; a few of them, who had fallen on their knees, gained +strength enough, from fear, to rise and fly; the rest lay on their +faces. Sam saw that for the present all was clear, and lifting up +Peter's still insensible body, as if it had no weight whatever, he +turned and went at a brisk trot out of the village, then over the +crest and down towards the fire. + +Then he heard a ring of metal in front of him, and a voice said, "_Qui +vive_!" while another voice said, "Is that you, Sam?" + +"Bress de Lord! Massa Tom, dis is me sure enough: and what is much +better, here is Massa Peter." + +"Thank God!" Tom said fervently. "Is he hurt? Why don't you speak, +Peter?" + +"He all right, Massa Tom. He talk in a minute or two. Now smoke choke +him, he better presently. Here, massa, you take him down to fire, pour +a little brandy down his throat. Now, massa officer, I lead de way +back to village." + +As Tom took Peter in his arms a sudden fire of musketry was heard down +on the road. + +"Our fellows have got them," Jules said. "I don't know what has +alarmed them, but they are running away!" + +"Push forward," General Reynier said, "and give no quarter! Jules, +keep by the negro, and see that he comes to no harm. The men might +mistake him for a guerilla." + +The night was pitch dark, and the extraordinary appearance of Sam +could not be perceived until after scouring the village and shooting +the few wretches whom they found there, they gathered round the +fire. Before reaching it, however, Sam had slipped away for a moment +into the hut where he had stripped; here he quickly dressed himself, +removed the paint from his face, and rejoined the group, who were not +a little surprised at seeing his black face. + +In a short time the parties who had been posted on all the various +roads came in, and it was found that they had between them killed +some thirty or forty of the brigands, and had brought in two or three +prisoners. + +"Have you killed or taken Nunez?" General Reynier asked. "Our work is +only half done if that scoundrel has escaped." + +"I have asked the prisoners," one of the officers said, "and they tell +an extraordinary story, that the devil has just thrown him into the +fire!" + +"What do they mean by such folly as that," the general asked angrily. +"Were they making fun of you?" + +"No, sir, they were certainly serious enough over it, and they were +all running for their lives when they fell into our hands; they had +been horribly frightened at something." + +"Ask that fellow there," the general said, pointing to a prisoner who +had been brought in by another detachment, "he cannot have spoken to +the others." + +The man was brought forward, and then Jules asked him in Spanish: +"What were you all running away for?" + +The man gave a glance of horror at the fire. "The devil came with his +pitchfork, fire came out of his mouth, his tail and his horns were +tipped with sparks, the captain fired at him, of course the bullet did +no good, and the devil put his fork into him, carried him to the fire, +and threw him in." + +Jules and some of the other young officers burst out laughing, but the +general said:-- + +"Humph! We can easily prove a portion of the story. See if there are +any human remains in that fire." + +The wind was blowing the other way, but as a sergeant went up to the +fire in obedience to the general's order, he said:-- + +"There is a great smell of burnt flesh here, and, sapristi, yes," as +he tossed over the logs with his foot "there is a body here, sir, +pretty well burnt up." + +"It's a curious story," the general said. "Where is that negro, +perhaps he can enlighten us?" + +But Sam had already left to look after Peter. + +"Jules, put these fellows against that wall and give them a volley, +then march the men down to the wood where their horses are. We will +bivouac here for the night." + +A party now brought up Peter, who had quite come round, but was unable +to stand, or indeed to move his arms, so injured was he by the ropes, +which had completely cut their way into his flesh. However, he was +cheerful and bright, and able really to enjoy the supper which was +soon prepared. That done, General Reynier said:-- + +"Captain Scudamore, will you call your black man when he has finished +his supper, which, no doubt, he needs? I want him to tell me what took +place before we arrived. The prisoners were full of some cock-and-bull +story, that the devil had stuck his fork into their captain and +pitched him into the fire, and the story is corroborated, at least to +the extent of the fact that, on turning the fire over, we found a body +there." + +Sam, called and questioned, told the whole story, which Tom translated +as he went on to the French officers, and it was received with a +chorus of laughter at the thought of the oddity of Sam's appearance, +and of the brigands' terror, and with warm admiration for the able +stratagem and courage shown by the black. + +Tom was delighted, and Peter, who had until now been entirely ignorant +of the manner in which he had been saved, feebly pressed Sam's hand +and said a few words of gratitude and thanks, which so delighted Sam +that he retired to cry quietly. + +The next day they moved down to Vittoria, where Peter was tenderly +nursed by Madame Reynier. A week later he was fit to sit on horseback, +and the next day, after a hearty and affectionate parting, they +started to rejoin their own army. Both were now dressed as Spanish +gentlemen, and Jules, with four troopers accompanied them as an +escort. + +They made a long detour to avoid the French army in the field under +Clausel, and at last came within sight of the British outposts. Here +Jules and his escort halted, and after a warm embrace with the merry +young Frenchman, they rode forward, and, after the usual parleying +with the pickets, were passed forward to the officer commanding the +post. He happened to be well known to them, and after the first +surprise, and a few words of explanation, they rode on towards the +head-quarters of the army besieging Burgos. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +VITTORIA. + + +General Clausel fell back as Wellington advanced to Burgos, and the +British laid siege to the castle of that place. Like all Wellington's +sieges this was commenced with a wholly insufficient train of +artillery, and without the time necessary to carry out regular siege +operations. A considerable portion of the army were posted so as to +watch Clausel. The place was badly fortified, but the French under +Governor Dubreton defended themselves with immense skill and courage, +the English assaults were repulsed, successful sorties were made by +the garrison, and at last, after the failure of the fourth assault, +the siege was given up, and the allied armies turned their faces once +more towards Portugal. + +It was time; the operations in the south upon which Wellington had +relied to keep at least a portion of the French forces engaged, had +failed signally, and the French generals were bringing up their +troops from all parts of Spain, and General Souham, having under him +Generals Clausel, Maucune, and Foy, with a force far superior to +that of the British, advanced to give battle. Then Wellington, whose +Anglo-Portuguese troops were much weakened by sickness, fell back +rapidly, sending orders to General Hill, who commanded the troops left +behind in Madrid, to evacuate that city, and to fall back and unite +with him on the Tormes. + +It was only by some masterly maneuvering and some stiff fighting at +Venta de Pozo, on the Carrion, and on the Huebra, that Wellington drew +off his army to Ciudad Rodrigo. + +During the retreat the British suffered very severely, and the +discipline of the army became greatly impaired, so much so that Lord +Wellington issued a general order rebuking the army, saying that +"discipline had deteriorated during the campaign in a greater degree +than he had ever witnessed or read of in any army, and this without +any unusual privation or hardship, or any long marches." + +The number of stragglers may be imagined by the fact that the loss of +the allied army was upwards of nine thousand, of whom not more than +two thousand were killed and wounded at Burgos, and in the combats +during the retreat. This number includes the Spanish as well as the +Anglo-Portuguese loss. + +It was the beginning of December when the allied army reached their +winter quarters around Ciudad Rodrigo. It was fortunate that the +season of the year, and the necessity which the French had to refill +their magazines, and collect food, gave breathing time and rest to +the British. Although strengthened by his junction with Hill, and by +the arrival of reinforcements from the coast, Wellington was not in a +position to have made a stand against such a force as the French could +have brought against him. + +Tom and Peter Scudamore had rejoined the army at the hottest part +of the siege of Burgos, and had taken up their work at once. Lord +Wellington heard from Tom a brief account of what had taken place, +and said a few kind words expressive of his pleasure at their both +having escaped from so great a peril, and, grave and preoccupied as +he was with the position of his army, he yet laughed at the account +of the scare Sam had given the guerillas. Among their friends nothing +was talked of for a day or two but their adventure. The times were +stirring, however, and one event rapidly drove out another. Sam +became a greater favorite than ever among the officers of the staff, +while the orderlies were never tired of hearing how he pretty nearly +frightened a band of guerillas to death by pretending to be the evil +one in person. + +The next four months were passed in preparations for the grand attack +with which Wellington confidently hoped to drive the French out of +Spain. The news of the defeat of Napoleon in Russia had cheered the +hearts of the enemies of France, and excited them to make a great +effort to strike a decisive blow. The French army was weakened by the +withdrawal of several corps to strengthen the armies which Napoleon +was raising for his campaign in Germany, and British gold had been so +freely spent, that the Portuguese army was now in a really efficient +state; a portion of the Spanish army had been handed over to +Wellington, and were now in a far more trustworthy condition than +they had been heretofore, while the whole of the north of Spain was +in a state of insurrection, which the French, in spite of all their +efforts, were unable to repress. + +The invasion was delayed until the end of May, in order that the crops +might be in a fit state for the subsistence of the cavalry and baggage +animals; but in the last week in that month all was ready, and, in +several columns, the allied army poured into Spain nearly a hundred +thousand strong. The French, ignorant alike of Wellington's intentions +and preparations, were in no position to stem effectually this mighty +wave of war, and were driven headlong before it, with many fierce +skirmishes, until their scattered forces were, for the most part, +united on the Ebro. + +Here Joseph occupied a strong position, which he thought to hold until +the whole of his troops could come up; but Wellington made a detour, +swept round his right, and the French fell back in haste, and took +up their position in the basin of Vittoria, where all the stores and +baggage which had been carried off as the army retreated from Madrid, +Valladolid, Burgos, and other towns, were collected. At Vittoria were +gathered the Court, and an enormous mass of fugitives, as all the +Spaniards who had adhered to the cause of Joseph had, with their +wives and families, accompanied the French in their retreat. Hence +the accumulation of baggage animals, and carts, of stores of all +descriptions, of magazines, of food and artillery, of helpless, +frightened people, was enormous, and, for the retreat of the army in +case of defeat, there was but one good road, already encumbered with +baggage and fugitives! + +This terrible accumulation arose partly from the fault of Joseph, who +was wholly unequal to the supreme command in an emergency like the +present. Confused and bewildered by the urgency of the danger, he had +hesitated, wavered, and lost precious time. By resistance at any of +the rivers, which Wellington had passed unopposed, he might easily +have gained a few days, and thus have allowed time for the great mass +of fugitives to reach the French frontier, and for Foy and Clausel, +each of whom were within a day's march upon the day of the battle, to +have arrived with a reinforcement of 20,000 good fighting men. Instead +of this, he had suffered himself to be outflanked day after day, and +his army forced into retreat, without an effort at resistance--a +course of action irritating and disheartening to all troops, but +especially to the French, who, admirable in attack, are easily +dispirited, and are ill suited to defensive warfare. + +The position which he had now chosen for the battle, on which his +kingdom was to be staked, was badly selected for the action. The front +was, indeed, covered by the river Zadora, but this was crossed by +seven available bridges, none of which had been broken down, while +there was but the one good line of retreat, and this, besides being +already encumbered with baggage-wagons, could be easily turned by the +allies. The French army, weakened by 5000 men, who had marched upon +the preceding days, in charge of convoys for France, were still about +70,000 strong, the allies--British, Portuguese, and Spanish--about +80,000. The French were the strongest in artillery. + +Wellington, seeing that Joseph had determined to stand at bay, made +his arrangements for the battle. On the left, Graham, with 20,000 men, +was to attempt to cross the Zadora at Gamara Mayor, when he would +find himself on the main road, behind Vittoria, and so cut the French +line of retreat. Hill, with a like force, was to attack on the right, +through the defile of Puebla, and so, entering the basin of Vittoria, +to threaten the French right, and obtain possession of the bridge of +Nanclares. In the center, Wellington himself, with 30,000 troops, +would force the four bridges in front of the French center, and attack +their main position. + +At daybreak on the 21st of June, 1813, the weather being rainy with +some mist, the troops moved from their quarters on the Bayas, passed +in columns over the bridges in front, and slowly approached the +Zadora. About ten o'clock, Hill seized the village of Puebla, and +commenced the passage of the defile, while one of the Portuguese +battalions scaled the heights above. Here the French met them, and a +fierce fight ensued; the French were reinforced on their side, while +the 71st Regiment and a battalion of light infantry joined the +Portuguese. + +Villette's division was sent from the French center to join the fray, +while Hill sent up reinforcements. While the fight on the heights +still raged, the troops in the defile made their way through, and, +driving the French back, won the village of Subijano de Alava, in +front of the French main position. + +Meanwhile, far to the left, Graham came into action with Reille's +division at Gamara Mayor. The French here, knowing the vital +importance of the position, fought desperately, and the village of +Gamara was taken and retaken several times, but no effort upon the +part of the allies sufficed to carry either the bridge at this place +or that by which the main road crossed the river higher up. A force, +however, was pushed still farther to the left, and there took up a +position on the road at Durana, drove back a Franco-Spanish force +which occupied it, and thus effectively cut the main line of retreat +to France for Joseph's army. The main force under Wellington himself +was later in coming into action, the various columns being delayed by +the difficulties of making their way through the defiles. + +While waiting, however, for the third and seventh divisions, which +were the last to arrive, a peasant informed Wellington that the bridge +of Tres Puentes was unbroken and unguarded. Kempt's brigade of the +light division were immediately ordered to cross, and, being concealed +by the inequalities of the ground, they reached it and passed over +unobserved, taking their place under shelter of a crest within a few +hundred yards of the French main line of battle, and actually in rear +of his advanced posts. + +Some French cavalry now advanced, but no attack was made upon this +isolated body of British troops, for the French were virtually without +a commander. + +Joseph, finding his flank menaced by the movements of Graham and Hill, +now ordered the army to fall back to a crest two miles in the rear, +but at this moment the third and seventh divisions advanced at a run +towards the bridge of Mendoza, the French artillery opened upon them, +the British guns replied, a heavy musketry fire broke out on both +sides, and the battle commenced in earnest. Now the advantage gained +by the passage of Kempt's brigade became manifest, for the riflemen +of his division advanced and took the French advanced cavalry and +artillery in flank. These, thus unexpectedly attacked, fell back +hastily, and a brigade of the third division took advantage of the +moment and crossed the bridge of Mendoza. The other brigade forded the +river a little higher up, the seventh division and Vandeleur's brigade +of the light division followed, Hill pushed the enemy farther back, +and the fourth division crossed by the bridge of Nanclares; other +troops forded the river, and the battle became general all along the +line. + +Seeing that the hill in front of Arinez was nearly denuded of troops +by the withdrawal of Villette's division earlier in the day to oppose +Hill, Wellington launched Picton with the third division and Kempt's +brigade against it, and the French, thus attacked with great strength +and fury, and dispirited by the order to retreat, began to fall back. +Fifty pieces of artillery and a cloud of skirmishers covered the +movement, and the British guns answering, the whole basin became +filled with a heavy smoke, under cover of which the French retired +to the heights in front of Gomecha, upon which their reserves were +posted. Picton and Kempt carried the village of Arinez with the +bayonet, Vandeleur captured the village of Margarita, and the 87th +Regiment won that of Hermandad. + +This advance turned the flank of the French troops near Subijana de +Alava, and of those on the Puebla mountain, and both fell back in +disorder for two miles, until they made a junction with the main body +of their army. Still the British troops pressed forward, the French +again fell back, and for six miles a running fight of musketry and +artillery was kept up, the ground being very broken, and preventing +the concerted action of large bodies of troops. At six o'clock in the +afternoon the French stood at bay on the last heights before Vittoria, +upon which stood the villages of Ali and Armentia. Behind them was +the plain upon which the city stood, and beyond the city thousands +of carriages, animals, and non-combatants, women, and children, were +crowded together in the extremity of terror as the British shots rang +menacingly over their heads. + +The French here defended themselves desperately, and for a while the +allied advance was checked by the terrible fire of shot and shell. +Then the fourth division with a rush carried a hill on the left, and +the French again commenced their retreat. Joseph, finding the great +road absolutely blocked up, gave orders for a retreat by the road to +Salvatierra, and the army, leaving the town of Vittoria on its left, +moved off in a compact mass towards the indicated road. This, however, +like the other, was choked with carriages. It led through a swamp, +and had deep ditches on each side; the artillery, therefore, had to +cut their traces and leave their guns behind them, the infantry and +cavalry thrust aside the encumbrances and continued their march. +Reille, who had defended the upper bridges nobly until the last +moment, now came up, and his division acting as a rear guard, covered +the retreat, and the French retired with little further loss. + +They had lost the battle solely and entirely from the utter incapacity +of their general, for their loss had been but little greater than +that of the allies, and they fell back in perfect order and full of +fighting. The French loss, including prisoners, was not more than +6000, and that of the allies exceeded 5000. The French loss, however, +in material was enormous. They carried off two guns only, and 143 +fell into the hands of the British. They lost all their parks of +ammunition, all their baggage, all their stores, all their treasures, +all their booty. Last of all, they lost Spain. + +The British pursued the French army for some days, and then invested +the two fortresses of San Sebastian and Pampeluna. + +Ten days after the battle of Vittoria, Napoleon despatched Soult, one +of the best of his generals, to displace Joseph and assume the supreme +command of the French troops. Traveling with great speed, he reached +the frontier upon the 11th of July and took command. He soon collected +together the divisions which had retired beaten but not routed from +Vittoria, drew together the troops from Bayonne and the surrounding +towns, and in a few days found himself at the head of an army, +including the garrisons, of 114,000 men. Besides these there were the +armies of Aragon and Catalonia, numbering 60,000 men. + +After spending a few days in organizing the army, Soult moved forward +to relieve Pampeluna, and then in the heart of the Pyrenees were +fought those desperate combats at Maya, Roncevalles, Buenza, Sauroren, +and Dona Maria, which are known in history as the battles of the +Pyrenees. In these terrible nine days' fighting there were ten serious +combats, in which the allies lost 7300 men, the French, including +prisoners, over 15,000, and Soult fell back baffled and beaten across +the frontier. + +Throughout this account of the short and sanguinary campaign by which +in two short months Wellington shattered the power of the French and +drove them headlong from the Peninsula, but little has been said +respecting the doings of the Scudamores. Their duties had been heavy, +but devoid of any personal achievements or events. Wellington, the +incarnation of activity himself, spared no one around him, and from +early dawn until late at night they were on horseback, carrying orders +and bringing back reports. At night their quarters were sometimes +in a village hut, sometimes in a straggling château, which afforded +accommodation to the commander-in-chief and his whole staff. + +Sam, a good horseman now, was in the highest of spirits at being able +to accompany his masters, and, although the Spanish women crossed +themselves in horror when they first saw his black face, the boys +would hear shouts of laughter arising before they had been a quarter +of an hour in fresh quarters. He was a capital cook, and a wonderful +hand at hunting up provisions. + +There might not be a sign of a feathered creature in a village when +the staff came in, but in half an hour Sam would be sure to return +from foraging with a couple of fowls and his handkerchief full of +eggs. These were, of course, paid for, as the orders against pillaging +were of the strictest character, and the army paid, and paid +handsomely for everything it ate. + +It was, however, difficult to persuade the peasants that payment was +intended, and they would hide everything away with vigilant care at +the approach of the troops. When by the display of money they were +really persuaded that payment was intended, they would produce all +that they had willingly enough, but the number of officers wanting +to purchase was so great and the amount of live stock so small in +the war-ravaged country, that few indeed could obtain even for money +anything beside the tough rations of freshly-killed beef issued by the +commissariat. + +Let the supply be ever so short, however, Sam never returned +empty-handed, and the fowls were quickly plucked and on the fire +before any one else had succeeded in discovering that there was a bird +in the village. + +Sam's foraging powers passed into a joke with the staff, and the +Scudamores became so curious to discover the reason of his success, +that after repeated questioning they persuaded him to tell them. + +"Well, massa, de matter berry simple--just easy as fallin' off log. +Sam go along, look into yard ob de cottages, presently see feather +here, feather there. Dat sign ob fowl. Den knock at door. Woman open +always, gib little squeak when she see dis gentleman's colored face. +Den she say, 'What you want? Dis house full. Quarter-master take him +up for three, four officer.' Den Sam say, 'Illustrious madam, me want +to buy two fowls and eggs for master,' and Sam show money in hand. Den +she hesitate a little, and not believe Sam mean to pay. Den she say, +'No fowls here.' Den Sam point to de feathers. Den she get in rage and +tell lie and say, 'Dem birds all stole yesterday.' Den Sam see it time +to talk to de birds--he know dem shut up somewhere in de dark, and Sam +he begin to crow berry loud; Sam berry good at dat. He crow for all +de world like de cock. Dis wake dem up, and a minute one, two, three, +half a dozen cock begin to answer eider from a loft ober house, or +from shed, or from somewhere. Den de woman in terrible fright, she +say, 'Me sell you two quick, if you will go away and swear you tell no +one.' Den Sam swear. Den she run away, come back wid de fowls and some +eggs, and always berry much astonished when Sam pay for dem. After dat +she lose her fear, she see me pay, and she sells de chickens to oders +when they come till all gone. Dat how dis chile manage de affairs, +Massa Tom." + +The Scudamores had a hearty laugh, and were well pleased to find that +Sam's method was one to which not even the strictest disciplinarian +could object, a matter concerning which they had previously had grave +doubts. + +While the battles of the Pyrenees were being fought, the siege of +St. Sebastian had continued, and once again the British troops had +suffered a terrible loss, from the attempt to carry a fortress with +an insufficient siege-train, and without the time necessary to drive +the trenches forward in regular form. St. Sebastian stood upon a +peninsula. In front of the neck of this peninsula was the hill of San +Bartholomeo, on which stood the convent of that name. At the narrowest +part of the neck stood a redoubt, which was called the Cask Redoubt, +because it was constructed of casks filled with stand. Behind this +came the horn-work and other fortifications. Then came the town, while +at the end of the peninsula rose a steep rock, called Mount Orgullo, +on which stood the citadel. Upon its left side this neck of land was +separated from the mainland by the River Urumea; and upon the heights +of Mount Olia and the Chofres, across the Urumea, were placed the +British batteries, which breached the fortifications facing the river. + +General Graham commanded the allied forces, which were detached to +undertake the siege, and on the 10th of July batteries were commenced +against the convent of San Bartholomeo, which had been fortified by +the French. On the 17th the convent was in ruins, and an assault was +made upon the position. The 9th Regiment took the place in gallant +style, but an attempt being made to carry the cask redoubt, with a +rush, the assault was repulsed, the British remaining possessors of +San Bartholomeo. + +On the 24th the batteries on Mount Olia, having effected what was +believed to be a practicable breach, 2000 men of the fifth division, +consisting of the 3d battalion of the Royals, the 38th, and the 9th, +made an assault at night. To arrive at the breach they had to make +their way along the slippery rocks on the bed of the Urumea, exposed +to a flank-fire from the river-wall of the town. The breachers had +been isolated from the town, and guns placed to take the stormers in +flank. The confusion and slaughter were terrible, and at daybreak the +survivors fell back, with a loss of forty-nine officers and 520 men. + +The whole arrangement of the siege was bad. The plan of Major Smith, +of the engineers, a most excellent officer, which had been approved +by Wellington, was not followed, and the assault, contrary to +Wellington's explicit order, took place at night, instead of by day, +the consequence being confusion, delay, and defeat. The total loss to +the allies of this first siege of St. Sebastian was 1300 men. + +Neither of the Scudamores were present at the first siege, but both +witnessed the second assault, of the 31st of August, as Wellington +himself was present on the 30th, to see to the execution of the +preparation for attack, and they obtained leave to remain for the next +day to witness the assault. The siege had been resumed on the 5th of +that month, and on the 23d the batteries had opened fire in earnest, +and immense damage was done to the defenses and garrison. But upon +this occasion, as upon the former one, the proper precautions were not +taken; no lodgment had been effected in the horn-work, and, worst of +all, the blockade had been so negligently conducted by the fleet, that +large bodies of fresh troops, guns, and ammunition had been passed +in, and the defense was even stronger than it had been when the first +assault was delivered. + +General Graham took up his position on the heights of the Chofres to +view the assault, and the Scudamores stationed themselves near him. +A dense mist hid the fortress from view, and it was not until eight +o'clock that the batteries were able to open. Then for three hours +they poured a storm of shot and shell upon the defences. The +Scudamores sat down in one of the trenches, where they were a little +sheltered from the blazing heat of the sun, and Sam took his place at +a short distance from them. + +As the clock struck eleven the fire slackened, and at that moment Sam +exclaimed, "Grolly, Massa Tom, dere dey go." As he spoke Robinson's +brigade poured out from the trenches, and, passing through the +openings in the sea-wall, began to form on the beach. + +It was known that the French had mined the angle of the wall +overhanging the beach, and a sergeant, followed by twelve men, dashed +gallantly forward to try to cut the train leading to the mine. He was +unsuccessful, but the suddenness of the rush startled the French, who +at once fired the mine, which exploded, destroying the brave sergeant +and his party, and thirty of the leading men of the column, but not +doing a tithe of the damage which it would have inflicted had the +column been fairly under it. + +"Hurrah! dere dey go," Sam exclaimed as the column clambered over +the ruins and pursued its way unchecked along the beach. They had, +however, to make their way under a storm of fire. + +The French, as before, lined the wall, and poured a tremendous +musketry fire into their flank, and the batteries of Mount Orgullo and +St. Elmo plied them with shot and shell, while two pieces of cannon on +the cavalier and one on the horn-work raked them with grape. + +Still the column neither halted nor faltered, but dashed, like a wave, +up the breach. When, however, they reached the top they could go no +farther. A deep gulf separated them from the town, while from every +loop-hole and wall behind, the French musketry swept the breach. The +troops could not advance and would not retreat, but sullenly stood +their ground, heaping the breach with their dead. Fresh bodies of men +came up, and each time a crowd of brave men mounted the breach, only +to sink down beneath the storm of fire. + +"This is awful, horrible, Tom!" Peter said in a choked voice. "Come +away, I can't look at this slaughter, it is a thousand times worse +than any battle." + +Tom made no reply, his own eyes were dim with tears, and he rose to +go, taking one more look at the deadly breach, at whose foot the +survivors of the last attempt had sunk down, and whence the mass of +soldiers were keeping up a musketry fire against the guns and unseen +foes who were sweeping them away, when an officer ran up from General +Graham's side, and in a minute fifty guns from the Chofres batteries +opened a storm of fire upon the curtain and the traverses behind the +breach. + +It was a terrible trial to the nerves of the assaulting columns when +this terrific fire was poured upon a spot only twenty feet above them; +but they were not men to shrink, and the men of the light division +seized the opportunity to pull up the broken masonry and make a +breastwork, known in military terms as a lodgment. + +For half an hour the iron storm poured overhead unchecked, smashing +the traverse, knocking down the loop-holed walls, and killing numbers +of the defenders. Then it ceased, and the troops leapt to their feet, +and again rushed up the breach, while the 13th Portuguese Regiment, +followed by a detachment of the 24th, waded across the Urumea under a +heavy fire from the castle, and attacked the third breach. + +But still no entry could be effected. The French fire was as heavy as +ever, and the stormers again sank baffled to the foot of the great +breach. The assault seemed hopeless, the tide was rising, the reserves +were all engaged, and the men had done all that the most desperate +courage could do. For five hours the battle had raged, when, just as +all appeared lost, one of those circumstances occurred which upset all +calculations and decide the fate of battles. + +Behind the traverses the French had accumulated a great store of +powder barrels, shells, and other combustibles. Just at this moment +these caught fire. A bright flame wrapped the whole wall, followed by +a succession of loud explosions; hundreds of French grenadiers were +destroyed, and before the smoke had cleared away, the British burst +like a flood through the first traverse. + +Although bewildered by this sudden disaster, the French rallied, and +fought desperately; but the British, desperate with the long agony +of the last five hours, would not be denied; the light division +penetrated on the left, the Portuguese on the right. The French, still +resisting obstinately, were driven through the town to the line of +defense at the foot of Mount Orgullo, and the town of St. Sebastian +was won. + +"Will you go across, Peter, and enter the town?" + +"No, no, Tom; the sight of that horrible breach is enough for me. +Let us mount, and ride off at once. I am quite sick after this awful +suspense." + +It was as well that the Scudamores did not enter the town, as, had +they done so, they might have shared the fate of several other +officers, who were shot down while trying to stop the troops in their +wild excesses. No more disgraceful atrocities were ever committed by +the most barbarous nations of antiquity than those which disgraced the +British name at the storming of St. Sebastian. Shameful, monstrous as +had been the conduct of the troops at the storming of Ciudad Rodrigo +and at Badajos, it was infinitely worse at St. Sebastian. As Rapin +says, hell seemed to have broken loose. + +The castle held out until the 9th, when it surrendered, and the +governor and his heroic garrison marched out with the honors of war. +The British loss in the second siege exceeded 2500 men and officers. + +There was a pause of two months after the fall of St. Sebastian, +and it was not until the 10th of November that Wellington hurled +his forces against the lines which, in imitation of those of Torres +Vedras, Soult had formed and fortified on the river Nivelle to +withstand the invasion of France. After a few hours' desperate +fighting the French were turned out of their position with a loss of +killed, wounded, and prisoners, of 4265 men and officers, the loss of +the allies being 2694. + +Now the army of invasion poured into France. The French people, +disheartened by Napoleon's misfortunes in Germany, and by the long and +mighty sacrifices which they had for years been compelled to make, in +order to enable Napoleon to carry out his gigantic wars, showed but +slight hostility to the invaders. + +Wellington enforced the severest discipline, paid for everything +required for the troops, hanging marauders without mercy, and, finding +that it was impossible to keep the Spanish troops in order, he sent +the whole Spanish contingent, 20,000 strong, back across the Pyrenees. + +He then with the Anglo-Portuguese army moved on towards Bayonne, and +took up a position on both sides of the river Nive, driving the French +from their position on the right bank on December 9th. On the 13th, +however, Soult attacked that portion of the army on the right of the +river, and one of the most desperate conflicts of the war took place, +known as the battle of St. Pierre. General Hill commanded at this +battle, and with 14,000 Anglo-Portuguese, with 14 guns, repulsed the +furious and repeated attacks of 16,000 French, with 22 guns. + +In five days' fighting on the river the French lost more than as many +thousand men. + +The weather now for a time interrupted operations, but Wellington was +preparing for the passage of the Adour. Soult guarded the passages +of the river above Bayonne, and never dreamed that an attempt would +be made to bridge so wide and rough a river as is the Adour below +the town. With the assistance of the sailors of the fleet the great +enterprise was accomplished on the 13th of February, and leaving +General Hope to contain the force in the entrenched camp at Bayonne, +Wellington marched the rest of the army to the Gave. + +Behind this river Soult had massed his army. The British crossed by +pontoon bridges, and before the operation was concluded, and the +troops united, Soult fell upon them near Orthes. + +At first the French had the best of the fight, driving back both +wings of the allied forces, but Wellington threw the third and sixth +divisions upon the left flank of the attacking column and sent the +52nd Regiment to make a detour through a marsh and fall upon their +other flank. Taken suddenly between two fires the French wavered, +the British pressed forward again, and the French fell back fighting +obstinately, and in good order. The allies lost 2300 men, and the +French 4000. Soult fell back towards Toulouse, laying Bordeaux open to +the British. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +TOULOUSE. + + +Promotion for those who have the good fortune to have a post upon the +commander-in-chief's staff is rapid. They run far less risk than do +the regimental officers, and they have a tenfold better chance of +having their names mentioned in despatches. The Scudamores were so +mentioned for their conduct at Vittoria, the Pyrenees, and Orthes, +and shortly after the last-named battle the _Gazette_ from England +announced their promotion to majorities. This put an end to +their service as aides-de-camp, and they were attached to the +quarter-master's branch of the staff of Lord Beresford, who was upon +the point of starting with a small force to Bordeaux, where the +authorities, thinking more of party than of patriotism, had invited +the English to enter and take possession, intending to proclaim their +adhesion to the Bourbon dynasty. + +The boys were sorry at the exchange, as they feared that they should +lose the crowning battle of the campaign. It was evident that the +resistance of France was nearly at an end, the allies were approaching +Paris in spite of the almost superhuman efforts of Napoleon; the +people, sick of the war, refused all assistance to the military +authorities, and were longing for peace, and the end of the struggle +was rapidly approaching. + +Lord Beresford, however, divining their thoughts, assured them that +his stay at Bordeaux would be but short, and that they might rely +upon being present at the great battle which would probably be fought +somewhere near Toulouse, towards which town Soult had retreated after +the battle of Orthes. + +Upon the 8th of March, Beresford marched with 12,000 men for Bordeaux, +and meeting with no opposition by the way, entered that city on the +12th. The mayor, a royalist, came out to meet them, and by the upper +classes of the town they were received as friends rather than foes. +Handsome quarters were assigned to Lord Beresford and his staff, and +the Scudamores for a day or two enjoyed the luxury of comfortable +apartments and of good food after their hard fare for nine months. + +The day after they entered Bordeaux Tom had occasion to call at +the office of a banker in order to get a government draft cashed, +to pay for a number of wagons which had been purchased for the +quarter-master's department. The banker's name was Weale, an American, +said to be the richest man in Bordeaux. His fortune had been made, it +was said, by large government contracts. + +When Tom returned, Peter was surprised to see him looking pale and +excited. + +"What is the matter, Tom?" + +"Do you know, Peter, I am convinced that that American banker I have +been to see to-day is neither more nor less than that scoundrel, +Walsh, who bolted with all the bank funds, and was the cause of our +father's death." + +"You don't say so, Tom." + +"It is a fact, Peter, I could swear to him." + +"What shall we do, Tom?" + +"I only cashed one of the two drafts I had with me this morning; +Peter, you go this afternoon with the other, and, if you are as +certain as I feel about it, we will speak to Beresford at dinner." + +Peter returned in the afternoon satisfied that his brother's surmises +were correct, and that in the supposed American Weale they had really +discovered the English swindler Walsh. + +After dinner they asked Lord Beresford to speak to them for a few +minutes alone. + +The general was greatly surprised and interested at their +communication. + +"Of how much did this fellow rob your father's bank?" he asked. + +"The total defalcation, including money borrowed on title-deeds +deposited in the bank, which had to be made good, was, I heard, from +75,000_l._ to 80,000_l._," Tom said. + +"Very well," said Lord Beresford, "we will make the scoundrel pay up +with interest. Order out thirty men of the 13th." + +While the men were mustering, the general returned to the dining-room +and begged the officers who were dining with him to excuse him for +half an hour, as he had some unexpected business to perform. Then he +walked across with the Scudamores to the banker's house, which was +only in the next street. + +Twenty of the men were then ordered to form a cordon round the house +and to watch the various entrances. The other ten, together with the +officer in command, the general told to follow him into the house. The +arrangements completed, he rang at the bell, and the porter at once +opened the gate. + +He started and would have tried to shut it again, on seeing the armed +party. But Lord Beresford said, "I am the general commanding the +British troops here. Make no noise, but show me directly to your +master." + +The man hesitated, but seeing that the force was too great to be +resisted, led the way through the courtyard into the house itself. + +Some servants in the hall started up with amazement, and would have +run off, but Lord Beresford cried, "Stay quiet for your lives. No one +will be hurt; but if any one moves from the hall, he will be shot." +Then, followed by Tom and Peter only, he opened the door which the +porter pointed out to him as that of the room where the banker was +sitting. + +He was alone, and started to his feet upon beholding three British +officers enter unannounced. "What means this?" he demanded angrily. +"I am a citizen of the United States, and for any outrage upon me +satisfaction will be demanded by my Government." + +"I am Lord Beresford," the general said quietly, "and quite know what +I am doing. I do not quite agree with you that the Government of the +United States will make any demand for satisfaction for any outrage +upon your person, nor, if they do so, will it benefit you greatly; +for I am about, in five minutes' time, to order you to be shot, Mr. +Walsh." + +As the name was uttered the banker, who had listened with increasing +pallor to the stern words of the general, started violently, and +turned ghastly white. For a minute or so he was too surprised and +confounded to speak. Then he said, in a husky tone, "It is false; I am +an American citizen. I know nothing whatever about James Walsh." + +"James Walsh!" the general said; "I said nothing about James. It is +you who have told us his Christian name, which is, I have no doubt, +the correct one." + +He looked to Tom, who nodded assent. + +"I know nothing about any Walsh," the banker said doggedly. "Who says +I do?" + +"We do, James Walsh," Tom said, stepping forward. "Tom and Peter +Scudamore, the sons of the man you robbed and ruined." + +The banker stared at them wildly, and then, with a hoarse cry, dropped +into his chair. + +"James Walsh," the general said sternly, "your life is doubly forfeit. +As a thief and a swindler, the courts of law will punish you with +death;" for in those days death was the penalty of a crime of this +kind. "In the second place, as a traitor. As a man who has given aid +and assistance to the enemies of your country, your life is forfeit, +and I, as the general in command here, doom you to death. In five +minutes you will be shot in your courtyard as a thief and a traitor." + +"Spare me!" the wretched man said, slipping off his chair on to his +knees. "Spare my life, and take all that I have. I am rich, and can +restore much of that which I took. I will pay 50,000_l._" + +"Fifty thousand pounds!" the general said; "you stole 80,000_l._, +which, with interest, comes up to 100,000_l._, besides which you must +pay for acting as a traitor. The military chest is empty, and we want +money. I will value your wretched life at 25,000_l._ If you make that +sum a present to our military chest, and pay Major Scudamore the +100,000_l._ of which you swindled his father, I will spare you." + +"One hundred and twenty-five thousand pounds!" the banker said +fiercely. "Never, I will die first." + +"Very well," Lord Beresford said quietly. "Major Scudamore, please +call in the officer and four men." Tom did as requested, and Lord +Beresford then addressed the officer. "You will take this man, who is +an Englishman, who has been acting as a traitor, and giving assistance +to the French army, you will take a firing party, place him against +the wall of the yard, give him five minutes to make his peace with +God, and when the five minutes are up, unless he tells you before that +that he wishes to see me, shoot him." + +Pale and desperate, the banker was led out. + +"He will give way, I hope," Tom said, as the door closed behind him. + +"He will give way before the time is up," Lord Beresford said. "He is +a coward; I saw it in his face." + +Four minutes passed on, the door opened again, and the officer +returned with his prisoner. "He says he agrees to your terms, sir" + +"Very well" Lord Beresford answered; "remain outside with your men; +they may be wanted yet." + +The prisoner, without a word, led the way into an adjoining room, +which communicated with the public office. This was his private +parlor, and in a corner stood a safe. He unlocked it, and, taking out +some books and papers, sat down to the table. + +His mood had evidently changed. "I was a fool to hold out," he said, +"for I had my name for wealth against me, and might have known you +would not give way. After all, I do not know that I am altogether +sorry, for I have always had an idea that some day or other the thing +would come out, and now I can go back and be comfortable for the rest +of my life. How will you have the money, gentlemen? I have 50,000_l._ +in cash, and can give you a draft on the Bank of England for the rest. +You look surprised, but I have always been prepared to cut and run +from this country at the shortest notice, and every penny I have +beyond the cash absolutely required is in England or America." + +"I will take 25,000_l._ in cash for the use of the army," Lord +Beresford said. "I will send an officer of the commissariat to-morrow +for it. The 100,000_l._ you may pay these gentlemen in drafts on +England. Until I hear that these drafts are honored, I shall keep you +under surveillance, and you will not be suffered to leave your house." + +"It will be all right," Walsh said. "There--is my Bank of England +pass-book; you will see that I have 120,000_l._ standing to the credit +of J. Weale there. I have as much in America. I should not tell you +this did I not know that you are a gentleman, and therefore will not +raise terms now that you see I can pay higher. There, Mr. Scudamore, +is the draft, and, believe me or not, I am glad to repay it, and to +feel, for the first time for many years, a free man. Please to give +me a receipt for the 80,000_l._ due by me to the Bank, and for +20,000_l._, five years' interest on the same." + +Tom did as he was desired without speaking. There was a tone of +effrontery mingled with the half-earnestness of this successful +swindler that disgusted him. + +"There," the general said, as the receipts were handed over; "come +along, lads, the business is over, and I do not think that we have any +more to say to Mr. Weale." + +So saying, without further word, the three went out. + +Upon rejoining the officer without, Lord Beresford directed that a +sergeant and ten men were to be quartered in the house, and that a +sentry was to be placed at each entrance night and day, and that the +banker was not to be permitted to stir out under any pretence whatever +until further orders. + +"There, lads, I congratulate you heartily," he said as they issued +from the gate, in answer to the warm thanks in which the boys +expressed their gratitude to him; "it is a stroke of luck indeed that +you came with me to Bordeaux. It was rough-and-ready justice, and I +don't suppose a court of law in England would approve of it; but we +are under martial law, so even were that fellow disposed to question +the matter, which you may be very sure he will not, we are safe +enough. They say 'ill-gotten gains fly fast' but the scamp has +prospered on the money he stole. He owned to having another hundred +thousand safe in the States, and no doubt he has at least as much more +in securities of one sort or other here. I daresay he was in earnest +when he said that he did not mind paying the money to get rid of the +chance of detection and punishment, which must have been ever in his +mind. The best thing you can do, Scudamore, is to write to James +Pearson--he's my solicitor in London--and give him authority to +present this draft, and invest the sum in your joint names in good +securities. Inclose the draft. I shall be sending off an orderly with +despatches and letters at daybreak, and if you give me your letter +to-night, I will inclose it in a note of my own to Pearson." + +Five days later an order arrived for Lord Beresford to leave the +seventh division under Lord Dalhousie, in Bordeaux, and to march with +the fourth division to join the Commander-in-Chief, who was gradually +drawing near to Toulouse, beneath whose walls Soult was reorganizing +his army. The position was a very strong one, and had been rendered +almost impregnable by fortifications thrown upon the heights. +Wellington had, too, the disadvantage of having to separate his army, +as the town lay upon both sides of the Garonne. + +On the 10th of April the allied army attacked. Hill attacked the +defences of the town on the left bank, while Freyre's Spaniards, +Picton, with the third and light divisions, and Beresford with the +fourth and the sixth divisions, assaulted a French position. The +entrenchments in front of Picton were too strong to be more than +menaced. Freyre's Spaniards were repulsed with great loss, and the +brunt of the battle fell upon Beresford's division, which nobly +sustained the character of the British soldier for stubborn valor +in this the last battle of the war. The French fought stubbornly +and well, but fort by fort the British drove them from their strong +positions, and at five in the afternoon Soult withdrew the last of his +troops in good order across the canal which separated the position +they had defended from the town itself. The French lost five generals +and 3000 killed and wounded; the allies four generals and 4659 killed +and wounded, of which 2000 were Spaniards, for they upon this occasion +fought bravely, though unsuccessfully. + +On the 11th all was quiet, Wellington preparing for an attack upon the +city on the following day. Soult, however, finding that the British +cavalry had been sent off so as to menace his line of retreat, +evacuated the city in the night, drew off his army with great order +and ability, and by a march of twenty-two miles placed it in safety. +Upon the morning of the 12th Wellington entered Toulouse, and the +same afternoon two officers, one British, the other French, arrived +together from Paris, with the news of the abdication of Napoleon, and +the termination of the war. + +These officers had been detained for two days at Blois by the +officials there, and this delay had cost the blood of 8000 men, among +whom was Tom Scudamore, who had his left arm carried away by a cannon +ball. Sam, in the act of carrying his master from the field, was also +severely wounded in the head with a musket ball. + +Before the battle was fought they had received news from England that +the draft had been paid at the Bank of England, and that their future +was in consequence secure. The war being over, officers unattached to +regiments had little difficulty in getting leave of absence, as the +troops were to be embarked for England as soon as possible. Peter's +application, therefore, to accompany his brother was acceded to +without hesitation, and ten days after the battle of Toulouse he was +on board ship with Tom and Sam, both of whom were doing well. Three +days afterwards they landed in England. + +Rhoda met them, with Miss Scudamore, at Portsmith, having received a +letter telling them of Tom's wound, and of their being upon the point +of sailing. There was a great reduction of the army at the end of the +war, and the Scudamores were both placed upon half pay. This was a +matter of delight to Rhoda, and of satisfaction to themselves. They +had had enough of adventure to last for a life-time; and with the +prospect of a long peace the army no longer offered them any strong +attraction. + +When they returned to Miss Scudamore's their old friend Dr. Jarvis +came to visit them, and a happier party could not have been found in +England. The will of Mr. Scudamore, made before he was aware of his +ruin, was now acted upon. He had left 20,000_l._ to Rhoda, and the +rest of his fortune in equal parts between his boys. Both Tom and +Peter were fond of a country life, and they bought two adjoining +estates near Oxford, Rhoda agreeing to stop with them and Miss +Scudamore alternately. + +For a brief time there was a break in their happiness, Napoleon +escaped from Elba, and Europe was in a flame again. All the officers +on half pay were ordered to present themselves for duty, and the +Scudamores crossed with the army to Belgium, and fought at Waterloo. +Neither were hurt, nor was Sam, who had of course accompanied them. +Waterloo gave them another step in rank, and the Scudamores returned +as colonels to England. + +It was their last war. A few years afterwards they married sisters, +and Rhoda having the year previous married a gentleman whose estate +was in the same county, they remained as united as ever. Sambo held +for many a year the important position of butler to Tom, then he found +that one of the housemaids did not regard his color as any insuperable +obstacle, and they were accordingly married. It was difficult to say +after this exactly the position which Sam held. He lived at a cottage +on the edge of the estate, where it joined that of Peter, and his time +was spent in generally looking after things at both houses, and as +years went on his great delight was, above all things, to relate to +numerous young Scudamores the adventures of their father and uncle +when he first knew them as the Young Buglers. + +THE END. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS *** + +This file should be named 8ybug10.txt or 8ybug10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, 8ybug11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 8ybug10a.txt + +Produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis, +and PG Distributed Proofreaders + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03 + +Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/old/8ybug10.zip b/old/8ybug10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..63c3b2f --- /dev/null +++ b/old/8ybug10.zip |